A History of Muslim Philosophy
Uploaded by
PddfA History of Muslim Philosophy
Uploaded by
PddfA
HISTORY OF
MUSLIM PHILOSOPHY
With Short Accounts of other
Disciplines and the Modern
Renaissance in Muslim Lands
Edited and Introduced by
M M SHARIF
VOL. 1
A HISTORY OF MUSLIM PHILOSOPHY
I
COMMITTEE OF DIRECTORS
1. 1.1. Kazi, Vice-Chancellor, University of Sind (Chairman)
2. The Educational Adviser and Secretary to the Government of Pakistan
3. Mumtaz Hasan, Secretary Finance, Government of Pakistan
4. Khalifah Abdul Ilakim, Director, Institute of Islamic Culture, Lahore
5. Serajul Haque. Professor and Chairman. Department of Arabic and Islamic
Studies, University of Dacca
6. M. Abdul Hye, Vice-Principal, Government College, Rajshahi
7. M, Ahmed, Vice-Chancellor, Rajahahi University
8. M. M. Sharif, President, Pakistan Philosophical Congress (Secretary and
Editor)
v
PREFACE
About four years ago I received a letter from Mr. S. M. Sharif, Educational
Adviser to the Government of Pakistan and now Secretary in the Ministry of
Education, drawing my attention to the fact that there was no detailed His
tory of Muslim Philosophy in the English language and inviting me to draw
up a scheme for the preparation of such a History. The scheme prepared by
me envisaged tho collaboration of eighty scholars from all over the world. The
bhie-printa of the plan were placed by Mr. 8, M Sharif before the Government
of Pakistan for approval and provision of funds. The Cabinet by a special ordi
nance deputed me to edit the History, and appointed a Committee consisting
of the following to steer the scheme through:
Mr. 1.1. Kali, Vice-Chancellor, University of Sind (Chairman)
The Educational Adviser to the Government of Pakistan (Member)
Mr. Mumtaz Hasan, then Secretary Finance, Government of Pakistan, and
now Deputy Chairman, Planning Commission (Member)
Dr. Khalifah Abdul Hakim, Director, Institute of Islamic Culture, Lahore
(Member)
Dr. Serajul Haque, Head of the Department of Arabic and Islamic Studies.
University of Dacca (Member)
Professor M. Abdul Hye, Vice-Principal, Government College, Rajshahi
(Member)
Myself (Member-Secretary)
The Committee was later enlarged by the addition of Dr. M. Ahmed, Vice-
Chancellor, Rajshahi University.
But for the initiative taken by Mr. S. M. Sharif and the constant help and
encouragement received from him. a liberal grant from the State, and most
willing co-operation from the Chairman and members of the Committee, it
would not have been possible for me to bring this work to completion.
From the very beginning I have been aware of the sheer impossibility of
doing full justice to such a vast canvas of movements, thinkers, and thoughts.
I am most grateful to the large number of contributors who have made at
least the outlines of the entire picture possible. As this is the first major work
on the history of Muslim philosophy it is bound to have many deficiencies,
but a beginning had to be made and it has been made with the hope that it
will pave the way for future improvements.
vil
Preface
In a collaboration work like this complete uniformity of language, style, and
points of view, and evenness of quality and length, are hard to achieve. How
ever, efforts have been made to keep disparity in these matters as well as in
transliteration, capitalization and punctuation as much within bounds as pos
sible. Credit for whatever merits these volumes have must go to those who
have joined this venture: responsibility for whatever faults it may have is
mine.
I wish to express the Committee of Directors' deep gratitude to Asia Founda
tion for its gift of the paper used in this work, and my personal thanks to its
Representative in Pakistan, Mr. Curtis Farrar, for the keen interest evinced
by him throughout the course of its preparation. I have to acknowledge my
great obligation to Mr. R. K. V. Goldstein of Aitchison College. Lahore, and
Mr. Hugh Gethin of the University of the Panjab for their helpful guidance
in the matter of language. I am equally indebted to Professor M. Saeed Sheikh
of Government College. Lahore, who has not only gone over the whole typescript
and read proofs but has also suggested many improvements in thought and
expression. I must also express my thanks to Mr. Mumtaz Hasan for his
valuable suggestions towards the removal of some apologetic passages from
the original manuscript, and to him as well aa to Profeasor M. Abdul Hye,
Mr. A. H. Kardar, and Dr. Serajul Haque for reading several chapters and
drawing my attention to some omissions. My thanks are also due to Mr. Ashraf
Darr for preparing the Index and helping me in proof-reading, to Mr. Ashiq
Husain for typing the whole manuscript, Mr. Abdus Salam for putting in the
diacritical marks, and Mr. Javid Altaf, a brilliant young scholar, for check
ing capitalization.
In the end I have to note with great regret that two of the contributors to
the work. Dr. Khalifah Abdul Hakim of Pakistan who was also a member of
the Committee of Directors and Dr. Meodut Msnsuroglu ofTurkey, have passed
away. May their souls rest in peace!
Lahore: August I, 1961 M. M. Sharif
viil
CONTENTS
Chapter 1’age
Preface...................................... vii
Introduction by the Editor, M.M. Sharif, M.A.. Director. Institute
of Islamic Culture. Lahore (Pakistan) .... .. .. .. I
VOLUME I
Book One
PRE-ISLAMIC PHILOSOPHICAL THOUGHT
Part 1
I Pre-Islamic Indian Thought by C.A. Qadir. M.A., Professor of
Philosophy, Government College, Lahore ( Pakistan) ................ 15
II Pre-Ialamic Chinese Thought by Howard F. Didsbury, Jr.. M.A.,
Ph. D.. Associate Professor of History, Newark Slats College, Union,
New Jersey, and Adjunct Professor at the American University,
Washington. D.C. (U.S.A.) ..................................................... 45
III Pre-Islamic Iranian Thought by Alessandro liauaani, Ph.D.,
Professor of Persian Language and Literature. University of Naples
(Italy) ................................................................................... 66
IV Greek Thought by M.M. Sharif .............................................. 75
V Aleiandrio Syriaa Thought by C. A. Qadir............................... Ill
Part 2
VI Pre-Islamic Arabian Thought by Shaikh Inayatullah. M.A.,Ph.D.,
Formerly, Professor of Arabic, University of the Panjab. Lahore
(Pakistan) .......... .. .... .... .... 126
Book Two
ADVENT OF I8LAM
FUNDAMENTAL TEACHINOS OF THE QUR’AN
VII Philosophical Teachings of the Qur’Sn by M.M. Sharif .. .. 136
Vm Ethical Teachings of the Qur'an by B.A. Dar. M.A., Fellow,
Institute of Islamic Culture, Lahore (Pakistan) ........................ 155
IX Economic and Political Teachings of tho Qur'in by Abul Ala
Maudoodi. Editor, TarjumAn al-Qur'An. Lahore (Pakistan) 178
lx
*
Content
Chapter Psge
Book Three
EARLY CENTURIES
(From the First/Seventh Century to the Fall of Baghdad)
Part 1. THEOLOGICO-PHILOSOPHICAL MOVEMENTS
X Mu'tazilism by Mir Valiuddin. M.A.. Ph.D., Professor of Philo
sophy, Osmania University. Hyderabad Deccan (India) 199
XI Agb'ariam by M. Abdul Hye, M.A.. Professor of Philosophy,
Government College, Rajshahi (Pakistan) ........................ 220
XII Tabiwism by A.K.M. Ayyub Ali, M.A.. Ph.D.. Principal
Government Rafehahi Madrasah. Rajshahi (Pakistan) 244
XIII Miturldism by A.K.M. Ayyub Ah ........................ 25B
XIV ZAhiriam by Omar A. Farrukh. Ph.D.. Member of the Arab
Academy, Damascus (Syria) ............... 274
XV Ikhwon ai-Safa by Omar A. Farrukh ........................ 289
Part 2. THE SUFIS
XVI Early Sufis: Doctrine by M. Hamiduddin, M.A., Ph.D., Senior
Professor and Chairman. Department of Philosophy and Psychology,
Government College. Lahore (Pakistan) .. 1.................................... 310
XVII Early Sufis (Continued)
A. Sufis Before al-HallAj by B.A. Dar .. .. ........................ 335
B. Al HallAj by Louis Maaeignon. Litt. D.. Hon. Professor,
CvlU.gr de Prance and Hautre Etudes. Sorbonne (France) .. 346
XVIII 'Abd al-QAdir JtUni and Shih&b al-Dbl Suhrawardi by
B.A. Dar .. .. ................................ 349
XIX ShihAb al-Dln Suhrawardi Maqtul by Seyyod Hometn Near. M. A..
Ph. D„ Associate Professor of the History of Science and Philosophy,
Faculty of Arts and Leders, Teheran University, Teheran (Iran) 372
XX Ibn 'Arabi by A.E. Affifi, Ph.D.. Member of the Higher Council of
Arts and Social Sciences in Cairo, Professor Emeritus al the Faculty
of Arts. Alexandria University (U. A. R.) 398
Part3. THE PHILOSOPHERS"
XXI Al-Kindi by Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany, Ph.D., Professor of
Islamic Philosophy, Faculty of Arts, Cairo University (U.A.R.) 421
XXII Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-Riai by Abdurrahman Badawi,
Ph. D.. Professor of Philosophy. Faculty of Arts. Ein Shams
University, Cairo (U.A.R.)...........................................................
XXIII Al F4r4bi by Ibrahim Madkour, Ph.D.. Member of the Arabic
Academy. Cairo,- Formerly, Professors/ Philosophy.Cairo University
(U.A.R.) ....... .... 45O
XXIV Miskawaih by Abdurrahman Badawi 469
XXV Ibn SIna by Farlur Rahman, M.A., D.Phil, Associate Professor,
Institute of Islamic Studies. McGill University (Canada) .480
Contents
Chapter Page
XXVI Ibn Bkjjah by Muhammad Saghir Hasan al Ma'aumi. M.A..
D. Philo Senior Lecturer in Arabic and Islamic Studies. University
of Dacca (Pakistan) ................... 506
XXVII Ibn Tufail by Bakhtyar Husain Siddiqi. M.A.. LL.B. Lecturer
tn Philosophy, Government College, Lahore (Pakistan) 526
XXV111 Ibn Ruffed by Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany............... 640
XXIX Na$lr al-DIn Tusi by Bakhtyar Husain Siddiqi 564
Part 4. THE MIDDLE-ROADER8
XXX Al-Ghar&li: Metaphysics by M. Saeed Sheikh, M A.. Professor of
Philosophy, Government College, Lahore (Pakistan) ., .. 581
XXXI Al QfeaaAli (Continued)
A. Mysticism by M. Saeod Sheikh........................ -....................617
B. Ethics by Abdul Khaliq. M. A.. Professor of Philosophy, Ielamia
College, Lahore (Pakistan)............................................ 624
C. Influence by M. Saeed Sheikh....................................... 037
XXXII Fakir al-Dln Rixi by Seyyed Hossein Near........................ 642
Part 6. POLITICAL THINKER8
XXXIII Political Thought in Early Islam by Abul Ala Maudoodi 667
XXXIV Abu Hanlfah and Abu Yusuf by Abul Ala Maudoodi .. .. 674
XXXV Al-F&rSbi by Muhammad Saghir Hasan al-Ma'sumi ... 704
XXXVI Al-M&ward.' by Muhammad Qamaruddin Khan. M. A.. Lecturer in
Islamics, University of the Panjab, Lahore (Pakistan) 717
XXXVII Political Theory of U>6 Shi'ites by Syed Abid Ali Abid. M.A..
Formerly, Principal, Dyal Singh College, Lahore (Pakistan) 732
*Am
XXX Vin Ni al-Mulk Tusi by M. Ruknuddin Hassan. M. A., Chairman.
Department of Political Science, Urdu College, Karachi (Pakistan) 747
XXXIX Alfiiar&li by Leonard Binder. Ph.D., Institute for Administrative
Affaire, Faculty o/ Law. Teheran University, Teheran (Iran) 774
Xl
INTRODUCTION
A
Histories of philosophy have been invariably written in the light of the
philoeophies of history presupposed by their authors. The result of this has
been that errors vitiating their philosophies of history have crept into and
marred their histories of philosophy. In the present work our effort has been
to steer clear of these errors.
Instead of reading history in the mirrors of presupposed philosophies which
may give distorted images, it is the study of history itself through which the
dynamics of history can be clearly seen and its laws discovered. We hope this
study of Muslim philosophy and the empirical survey of its oourse will spot
light at least some of the misconceptions current among philosophers and
historians about the nature of history and the laws governing it.
It will perhaps be generally agreed that human nature is fundamentally
the same the world over. All human beings and the cultures they develop have
the same fundamental needs, customs, impulses, and desires which, organizes
as personalities, determine their march towards their personal and social goals.
The fundamental nature of men being the same, the basic laws of cultural
development and decay always remain the same. But owing to different
environmental conditions cultural groups evolve differently in different parts
of the world and thousands of years of indigenous experience give tnoso groups
their own social and psychological character; and their character in response
to environmental stimuli creates all the differences that appear in their re
spective life-histories. Muslim society forms a single cultural group. It has
been subject to the same laws of growth and decay as any other cultural
group, but it has also developed some peculiar features of its own.
Philosophers of social history individually differ in their views about the
universal laws of history. There is a group of fourteenth/twentieth-century
philosophers of history who believe that social history is like a wave, it has a rise
and then it falls never to riBe again, and view a society or a culture as an organ
ism which has only one cycle of life. Like the life of any individual organism,
the life of a culture has its childhood, maturity, old age, and death, its spring,
summer winter, and autumn. Just as a living organism cannot be revived
after its death, even so a culture or a society can see no revival once it is
Introduction
dead. Biological, geographical, and racial causes can to a limited extent in
fluence its life-course but cannot change ita ineyitable cycle. To this group
belong Danilevsky, Spengler, and Toynbee. Our study of Muslim culture
and thought supports their view that in certain respects the dynamism of
society is like the dynamism of a wave; but are the two other doctrines ex
pounded by these philosophers equally true! First, Is it true that a given
society is a living organism I And, second, Is it true that it has only one un
repeated life-course ' Let us first take the first. Is a society or a culture an
organism I Long ago Plato took a State to be an individual writ largo. Not
the same, but a similar mistake is being made now. AU analogies are true
only up to a point and not beyond that point. To view a society on the analogy
of an individual organism is definitely wrong. As Sorokin has brilliantly shown,
no society is so completely unified into an organic whole that it should be
viewed as an organism. An individual organism is born, it grows and dies,
and its species is perpetuated by reproduction, but a culture cannot repeat
itself in species by reproduction. Revival of individual organism is impos
sible. but the revival of a culture is possible. It is achieved by the activization
of its dormant vitality, by responses aroused by fresh challenges, and by the
infusion of new elements. The first revival of Muslim culture—ita revival after
the Mongol onslaughts which began when hardly half a century had passed
and reached its full fruition in two centuries and a half—was partly due to its
inherent vitality which could not be upped completely even by these unprece
dented events. They seemed to affect total devastation of Muslim lands, but
in fact could produoo only a depression. Soon rain-bearing clouds gathered and
these lands were again green and teeming with life. Though the challenge itself
was the strongest the world has ever seen, it was, nevertheless, not strong
enough to destroy all response. This revival of the Muslim oulture was partly
due to the infusion into it earlier of the fresh blood of the Turkish slaves and
mercenaries and later that of the Mongol conquerors, for they themselves came
into the fold of Islam bringing with them the vigour and vitality of their
nomadic ancestora. Each individual organism is a completely integrated whole
or a complete Gestall. but though such an integration is an ideal of each cul
ture it has never been fully achieved by any culture. Each culture is a super
system consisting of some large systems such as religion, language, law, philo
sophy, science, fine arts, ethics, economics, technology, politics, territorial sway,
associations, customs, and mores. Each of these consists of smaller systems
as science includes physics, chemistry, biology, zoology, otc., and each of
these smaller systems is comprised of yet smaller systems as mathematics is
comprised of geometry, algebra, arithmetic, and so on. Besides these systems
there are partly connected or wholly isolated heaps within these systems and
super-systems. Thus, "a total culture of any organized group consists not of
one cultural system but of a multitude of vast and small cultural systems that
are partly in harmony, partly out of harmony, with one anothor, and in addi
tion many oongerira of various kinds." No past empire was so well-knit as
2
Introduction
the Umayyad Caliphate of Damascus and yet groupe like the Kfaarijites and
the Shi'ites fell apart from its total structure. After the fall of the Umay
yads in the religious Bold there appeared aome isolated groups like the Qarma-
tians and the Ismi'Uitee, and in the political sphere Muslim Spain became not
only independent of but also hostile to the ‘Abbiaid Caliphate of Baghdad
under which Muslim culture and thought may be said to have reached their
So much about the organismic side of the theory of Danilevsky, Spengler,
and Toynbee when examined in the light of the history of Muslim culture and
thought. What about its cyclical side! Is the life of a people like a meteor,
beginning, rising, falling, and then disappearing for ever 1 Does the history
of a society or a culture see only one spring, one summer, and one autumn
and then, in its winter, completely close 1 The philosophers of history men
tioned above, except Spengler, concede that the longth of each period may
he different with different peoples and cultures, but, according to them, the
cycle is just one moving curve or one wave that rises and falls only once. This
position also seems to be wrong. As the researches of Kroober and Sorokin
have conclusively shown, “many great cultural or social systems or civilizations
have many cycles, many social, intellectual, and political ups and downs in
their virtually indefinitely long span of life, instead of just one life-cycle, one
period of blossoming, and one of decline.” In the dynamics of intellectual and
aesthetic creativity. Egyptian civilization rose and fell at least four times and
Graeco-Roman-Byzantine culture, several times. Similarly, China and India
had two big creative impulses and the third has now surely begun. The Muslim
civilization rose from the first/seventh to the fifth/clcventh century. Then it
gradually declined till it received a deadly blow in the form of the Mongol
onslaughts. Its chief monuments of political and cultural greatness were
almost completely destroyed. And yet it did not die. It rose again and saw
its second rise from the last decade of the eeventh/thirteenth century to the
end of the eleventh/seventeenth century during which period its domain
covered three of the biggest empires of the world—Turkish. Persian, and
Indian—only to fall again from the beginning of the twelfth,'eighteenth to
the middle of the thirteenth/nineteenth century; and as this study will
clearly indicate there are now signs of a third rise in almost all Muslim lands
(Book Eight).
This shows that there is "no universal law decreeing that every culture
having once flowered must wither without any chance of flowering again." A
culture may rise in one field at one time, in another field at another, and. thus,
as a whole see many rises and falls. In both periods of its rise Muslim culture was
marked by its religio-political and architectural ascendancy; but while in the
first period its glory lay also in its commercial, industrial, scientific, and philo
sophical fields, in the second it distinguished itself chiefly in the fields of
poetry, painting, secular history, travels, mysticism, and minor arts. If by the
birth of a civilization these writers mean a sudden appearanco of a total unit
3
Introduction
like that of an organism, and by death a total disintegration, then a total
culture is never born nor does it ever die. At ita so-called birth each culture
takes over living systems or parts of a preceding culture and integrates them
with newly-born items. As the reader of this work will find. Muslim culture
integrated within itaelf what it regarded aa the intrinsically or pragmatically
valuable parts of Arab Paganism, Hellenism, Judaism, Christianity, Hindu
mathematics and medicine, and Chinese mysticism and alchemy with its own
contributions to human life and thought. Again, to talk about the death or
disappearance of a culture or civilization is meaningless. A part of a total
culture, its art or its religion, may disappear, but a considerable part of it
is always taken over by other groups by whom it is often developed further
and expanded. The Muslims did not only annex cert u.t areas of other cultures
but they expanded their horizons much furthu • annexing them as
integral parts of their own culture. Here it is impoit.n.t io remove a miscon
ception. If some thought of earlier speculation runs tlirough the fabric of Mus
lim thought even as a golden thread, it does not mean that, like many Western
Orientalists, we should take the thread for the. fabric. No culture, as no indi
vidual thinker, makes an absolutely new start. New structures are raised with
the material already produced. The past always rolls into the present of every
culture and supplies aomo elements for its emergent edifice.
■States are born and they die, but cultures like the mingled watcra of different
waves arc never bom as organisms nor die as organisms. Ancient Greece as a
State died, but after its death a great deal of Greek culture spread far and wide
anil is still living as an important element in the cultures of Europe. Jewish
States ceased to exist, but much of Jewish culture was taken over by Chris
tianity and Islam. No culture dies in toto. though all die in parts. In respect
of those parts of culture which live, each culture is immortal. Each culture or
civilization emerges gradually from pre-existing cultures. As a whole it may
have several peaks, may see many ups and downs and thus flourish for millen
nia, decline into a latent existence, re-emerge anil again become dominant for
a certain period and then decline once more to appear again. Even when do
minated by other cultures a considerable part of it may live as an element
fully or partly integrated in those cultures.
Again, the cycle of birth, maturity, decline, and death can be determined
only by the prior determination of the life-span of a civilization, but there is
no agreement among these writers on this point. What according to Danilevsky
is one civilization, say, the ancient Semitic civilization, is treated by Toynbee
as three civilizations, the Babylonian. Hittite and Sumeric, and by Spengler
as two, the Magian and Babylonian. In the life-history of a people ond notioes
one birth-and-death sequence, the other two, and the third three. The births
and deaths of cultures observed by one writer are not noticed at all by the
others. When the beginning and end of a culture cannot be determined’ it is
extravagant to talk about its birth and death and ita unrepeatable cyclo. A
civilization can see many ups and downs and there is nothing against the
4
Introduction
possibility of its regeneration. No culture dies completely. Some elements of
each die out and others merge as living factors into other cultures.
There is a group of fourteenth/twentioth-century philosophers of history
who confine themselves to the study of art phenomena and draw conclusions
about the dynamics of culture in general. Peter Paul Ligeti. Frank Chambers,
and Charles Lalo belong to this group. We may not quarrel with them about
some of their conclusions, but should like to make an observation about one
of their hypotheses—a hypothesis on which the study of Muslim thought
throws considerable light. According to most of them, it is always the name
art and the same type or style of art which rises at one stage in the life-history
of each culture: one art or art form at its dawn, another at its maturity, and
yet another at its decline, and then gradually both art and the corresponding
culture die. We do not accept this conclusion. The life history of Greek art is
not identical with that of European art or Hindu or Muslim art. In some
cultures, like the Egyptian, Chinese, Hindu, and Muslim, literature; in some
others such as the French, German, and English, architecture; and in the
culture of the Greeks, music blossomed before any other art. The art of the
Paleolithic people reached the maturity and artistic perfection which did not
correspond to their stage of culture. In some cultures, as the Egyptian, art
shows several waves, several ups and downs, rather than one cycle of birth,
maturity, and decline. Unlike most other cultures, Muslim culture has given
no place to sculpture and its music has risen simultaneously with its architec
ture. Its painting is not an art that developed before all other arts. It was in
fact the last of all its artistic developments. Thus, it is not true that the se
quence of the rise of different arts is the same in all cultures. Nor is it true
that the same sequence appears in the style of each art in every culture. Facts
do not support this thesis, for the earliest style of art in some cultures is
symbolic, in others naturalistic, formal, impressionistic, or expressionistic.
Another group of the fourteenth/twentieth-oentury philosophers of history
avoid these pitfalls and give an integral interpretation of history. To this group
belong Northrop, Kroeber, Shubart, Berdyaev, Schweitzer, and Sorokin.
Northrop, however, weakens his position by basing cultural systems on philo
sophies a.id philosophies on science. He ignores the fact that many cultural
beliefs are based on revelations or intuitive apprehensions. Jewish. Muslim,
and Hindu cultures have philosophies based on revelation as much as on reason.
The source of some social beliefs may even be irrational and non-rational, often
contradicting scientific theories. Kroeber's weakness consists in making the
number of geniuses rather than the number of achievements the criterion of
cultural maturity. Schweitzer rightly contends that each flourishing civilization
has a minimum of ethical values vigorously functioning, and that the decay
of ethical values is the decay of civilizations. Neither the collapse of the Cali
phate of Baghdad was caused entirely by the Mongol invasions nor was the
ruin of the Umayvad Caliphate of Spain effected by the attacks of Christian
monarchs of the north; nor indeed was the second decline of the Muslim world
S
introduction
due merely to the imperialistic designs of Western powers. These wore only
contributory factors to these downfalls. The basic conditions of the rise and
fall of nations invariably arise from within. In each case the real cause was the
lowering of moral standards brought about by centuries of luxury and over-
indulgence in worldly pleasures, resulting in disunity, social injustice, jealousies,
rivalries, intrigues, indolence, and sloth—all the progeny of fabulous wealth—
and in the case of the second decline from about 1111/1700 to 1266/1800, all
round moral degeneration combined with conformism of the worst type dead
ening all original thought. Without thia moral downfall there would have been
no cultural decline in Islam.
As it has been said before a culture may rise in one field at one time, in
another field at another, but while it may be rising in one field it may yet
be declining on the whole. The politico-social rise or fall of a culture necessarily
goes with its moral rise or fall. But the case seems to bo different with intellec
tual development. A people may decline in the politico-social sphere and yet
ita decline may itself under suitable circumstances become a stimulus for ita
intellectual advance. The political and moral decline of the 'Abbisid Caliphate
of Baghdad began in about the middle of the third/ninth century, and the
collapse of the Umayyad Caliphate of Spain and decadence of the Fafimid
Caliphate of Egypt in the beginning of the fifth/cleventh century. Yet the
deep-rooted tradition of the pstronagu of learning in the Muslim world kept
its intellectual achievements rising from peak to peak right up to the time
of the Mongol devastation. Thus, despite its downfall in other fields, in the
field of learning Muslim culture saw ita ascendancy right up to the middle of the
seventh/thirteenth century. In fact this period of political and moral fall -
the period during which Muslima everywhere lost their solidarity and the three
Caliphates broke into petty States or sundry dynasties—was exactly the
period when the Muslim intellect reached ita full flowering. It was during this
period of political and moral decline that flourished such illustrious philooo-
phera as ll-Firibi, ibn Slna, Miakawaih, ibn flazm, al-Qbat&li, ibn Bijjah.
ibn Tufail, ibn Rughd, and Fakfor al-Din Rixi; the famous mystic ShihAb
al-Din Suhrawanli; great political philosophers like al-MAwardi and NilAm
al-Mulk Tfiai; renowned scientists and mathematicians like al-Majriti. ibn
Yunus, ibn Haitbam, ibn al-Nafls, al-Blriini, al-Bakri. al-Zarqili, 'Umar Kfcay-
yim, ibn Zuhr, and al-Idriai; and such celebrated literary figures aa al-Tabari,
al-Mas’lldi, al-Mutanabbi, Firdausi, Baqillkni, SanA’i, al-Ma'arri, Nisir Khusrau,
al-Zamakhfthari. K&ghkni. Nitami. 'Aft&r, and ibn al-ALhlr. Though three
celebrities, Rumi, Sa'di, and Nasir al-Din fuai, died long after the sack of
BagjjdAd. they were actually the products of this very period and much of
their work had been produoed within it. * When moral degeneration seta in,
a culture's intellectual achievements may stay but cannot avert tho evil day.
• Aa ROml’s most important work, ths Mattnowi. was written between 859/1 Ml
and 670/1272, we have included him among writers of tho centuries following tho
sack of Baghdad.
6
Introduction
Id this example there ia a lesson for those who are using their high intellectual
attainment* for the oonquest even of the moon, Venue, and Mara, for they
may yet be culturally on the decline, if superabundance of wealth lead* them
to luxury, licence, and moral degradation on the whole.
C
In the Introduction to the Hutory of Philosophy, EatUm and Wultm, it ia
oomplained that histories written since the beginning of the thirteenth/nine-
teenth century suffer from the defect that they ignore all developments in
philosophy before the time of the Greeks. Thia complaint, or rather indict
ment. ia perfectly justified, not only in the case of the historians of the thir-
teenth/ninetecnth century but also of those of the twelfth/eighteenth century.
Every thinker of those two centuries understood history as if it were identical
with Western history. They viewed history as one straight line of events
moving across the Western world; divided this line into three periods, ancient,
medieval, and modern; and lumped together the Egyptian. Indian, Chinese,
and Babylonian civilizations, each of which had passed through several stages
of development, in the briefest possible prelude (in some cases covering not
even a page) to the Graeco-Roman period designated as "ancient." Histories
of other civilizations and pooplo did not count, except for those events which
could be easily linked with the chain of events in the history of the West.
Toynbee justly describes this conception of history as an egocentric illusion,
and his view is shared by all recent philosophers of history. Whatever their
differences in other matters, in one thing the twentieth-century philosophers
of history are unanimous, and that ia their denunciation of the linear concep
tion of progress. We associate ourselves with them in this. Just as in biology
progress has been explained by a trend from lower to higher, or from less per
fect to more perfect, or from less differentiated and integrated to more differ
entiated and integrated, similarly Herder, Fichte, Kant, and Hegel and almost
all the philosophers of the twelfth/eighteenth and thirteenth/nineteenth cen
turies explained the evolution of human society by one principle, one social
trend, and their theories were thua stamped with the linear law of progress.
The present-day writers' criticism of them is perfectly justified in respect of
their view of progress as a line, ascending straight or spirally, whether it is
Fichte's line advancing as a sequence of certain values, or Herder's and Kant's
from violence and war to justice and peace, or Hegel's to ever-increasing free
dom of the fries, or Sfiencer's to greater and greater differentiation and integ
ration, or Tonnic's adva ring from Gemtituchafl to GmlMuift, or Durkheim's
from a state of society based on mechanical solidarity to organio solidarity,
or Buckle's from diminishing influence of physical laws to an increasing
influence of mental laws, or Navioow's from physiological determination to
purely intellectual competition, or any other line of a single principle explaining
the evolution of human society as a whole
7
Introduction
Every civilization has a history of its own and each has its own ancient,
medieval, and modem periods. In most cases these periods are not identical
with the ancient, medieval, and modem periods of Western culture starting
from the Greek. Several cultures preceded the Western culture and some start
ing earlier are still contemporaneous with it. They cannot be thrown into
oblivion because they cannot bo placed in the three periods of the cultures
of the West, anciont, medieval, and modem. Western culture is not the measure
of all humanity and its achievements. You cannot measure other cultures and
civilizations or the whole of human history by the three-knotted yardstick of
progress in the West. Mankind consists of a number of great and small countries
each having its own dranta, its own language, its own ideas, its own passions,
its own customs and habits, its own possibilities, its own goals, and its own
life.course. If it must be represented lineally, it would not be by one line but
several lines or rather bands of variegated and constantly changing colours,
reflecting one another and merging into one another.
While the learned editors of the History of Philosophy. Eastern and Western,
have endeavoured to removo one flaw in the treatment of ancient history, they
have failed to remove similar flaws in the treatment of what the Western
writers designate as the "medieval'’ period of history. A very large part of
tliis period is covered by the phenomenal rise and development of Muslim
thought which carried human achievement in tho intellectual field, as in many
other fields, to one of its highest peaks. For this the most glorious part of
medieval history not more than four oht of forty-eight chapters have been
■issigtreil in the History of Philosophy. Eastern and Western. Nor, indeed, has
even a word been said about the well-recognized role of Muslim philosophy in
transmitting Greek thought to the West, in advancing human knowledge, in
supplying a mould for the shaping of Western scholasticism, in developing
empirical sciwrees, in bringing about tho Italian Renaissance, and in pro-
. iding stimulus to the speculation of Western thinkers from Descartes to Kant.
Moreover, m the account given of the "modem" period of history, the philo-
.-ouhical developments of the East, except those in India, have been completely
omitted The reader of this historical work gets the impression that from the
time of Dan-artes to that of Sartre, i.e., the present day. the East, outside
India, irtMlet-tiuilly ceased to exist.
It is true that the History of Philosophy. Eastern and Western, is not alone
*.
characterized by these omission The same gaps, even more yawning, are
found in the histories of philosophy written by Western scholars; but while
Hi the wonts of the Westerners they are understandalile. in those of the
Eastern scholars they are unpardonable. Nevertheless, in thia particular case
they became unavoidable for the able editors did intend to have some more
eha|>len» on Muslim philosophy, but the writer to whom these chapters were
assigned was also a minister of the State holding an important portfolio and
his heavy ottieial duties left him no time to write them.
8
Introduction
The history of Muslim thought throws a flood of light on the logic of history.
A controversy has gone on for a long time about the laws that govern historical
sequences. Vico in the twelfth/eightoenth century contended, under the deep
impression of the lawfulness prevailing in natural sciences, that historical
events also follow one another according to the unswerving laws of nature.
Tbs law of mechanical causality is universal in its sway. The same view was
held by Saint Simon. Herbert Spencer, Karl Marx and in recent times by
Mandelbaum and Wiener. On the other hand, idealists like Max Weber, Windel-
band. and Rickert are of the view that the objects of history are not units with
universal qualities; they are unique, unrepeatable events in a particular space
and a specific time. Therefore, no physical laws can Iw formed about them.
Historical events are undoubtedly exposed to influences from biological, geo.
logical, geographical, and racial forces: yet they are always carried by human
beings who use and surmount these forces. Mechanical laws relate to facts but
historical events relate to values. Therefore the historical order of laws is dif
ferent from the physical laws of mechanical causation. To us it seems that both
the groups go to extremes. The empiricists take no account of the freedom of the
will and the resolves, choices, and goals of human beings, and the idealists
forget that even human beings are not minds, but body-minds; and though
they initiate events from their own inner resources, they place them in the
chain of mechanical causality. It is true that historical events and the lives
of civilizations and cultures follow one another according to the inner laws
of their own nature, yet history consists in the moral, intellectual, and aesthetic
achievements of individuals and groups based on resolves and choices, using
causation—a divine gift—as a tool, now obeying, now revolting against divine
will working within them and in the world around them, now co-operating
and now fighting with one another, now falling, now rising, and thus carving
their own destinies.
E
The thought of Hegel and of Marx is having a great influence on the deve
lopment of the philosophy of history. As is well known, Hegel is a dialectical
idealist. The whole world for him is the development of the Idea, a rational
entity, which advances by posing itself as a thesis; develops from itself its
own opposite, antithesis; and the two ideas, instead of constantly remaining
at war, get united in an idea which is the synthesis of both; and this synthesis
becomes the thesis for another triad and thus triad after triad takce the world to
higher and yet higher reaches of progress. Thus, the historical process is a
process of antagonisms and their reconciliations. The Idea divides itself into
the "Idea-in-itself" (the world of history) and the “Idea-in-its-otherness" (the
world as nature). Hegel’s division of the world into two watertight compart
9
Introduction
menu has vitiated the thought of several of his successors. Rickert, Windle-
band, and Spengler, and even of Bergson. If electrona, amoebae, fleas, flakes, and
apes were to apeak, they oould reasonably ask why, bom of the same cosmic
energy, determined by the same laws, having the same limited freedom, they
should be supposed to be mere nature having no history. To divide the world
stuff into nature and history is unwarranted. History consists of aequenoes
of groups of events, and we have learnt aim* Einstein that objects in nature
are also groups of events. There is no essential difference between the two. The
only difference is that up to a certain stage there is no learning by experience;
beyond that there is. According to Hegel, the linear progress of the Idea or
Intelligence, in winning rational freedom, culminates in the State, the beet
example of which is the German State. Such a line of thought justifies internal
tyranny, external aggression, and ware between States. It finds no place in
the historical process for world organizations like the United Nations or the
World Bank and is falsified by the factual existence of such institutions in the
present stage of world history. Intelligence is really only one aspect of the
human mind, and there seems to be no ground for regarding this ono aspect,
the knowing aspect, of only one kind of the world-stuff, i.e., mankind as the
essence of the world-stuff.
The mind of one who rejects Hegel's idealism at once turns to Marx. Marxian
dialectic is exactly the same as Hegel's. But, according to Marx, the world-stuff
is not the Idea, but matter. He uses this word, matter, in the sense in which
it was used by the thirteenth/nineteenth-ccntury French materialists. But the
idea of matter as inert mass has been discarded even by present-day physios.
World-stuff is now regarded as energy which can take the form of mass
Dialectical materialism, however, is not disproved by this change of meaning
of the word "matter." It can still be held in terms of a realistic dialectic—the
terms in which the present-day Marxists hold it. With the new terminology,
then, the Marxist dialectic takes this form: Something real (a thesis) creates
from within itself its opposite, another real (antithesis), which both, instead of
warring perpetually with each other, get united into a synthesis (a third real)
which becomes the thesis of another tried, and thus from triad to triad till, in
the social sphere, this dialectic of reals leads to the actualization of a classless
society. Our objection to Hegel’s position that he does not find any plaoe for
international organizations in the historical process does not apply to Marx,
but the objection that Hegel oonsiders war a necessary part of tho historical
process applies equally to him. Hegel's system encourages wars between nations;
Marx's between classes. Besides. Marxism is self-oontradictory, for while it
recognizes the inevitability or necessity of the causal law. it also recognizes
initiative and free creativity of classes in changing the world. Both Marx and
Hegel make history completely determined, and completely ignore the most
universal law of human nature, the law that people, becoming dissatisfied
with their situation at all momenta of their lives except when they are in sound
sleep, ere in the pursuit of ideals and values (which before their realization are
10
Introduction
mere ideas); end thin if efficient causes push them on (which both Hegel end
Marx recognize), final causes are constantly exercising their pull (which both
of them ignore).
Our recognition of final causes as determinants of the course of history leads
us to the formulation of a new hypothesis. According to this hypothesis, human
beings and their ideals are logical oontraries or discrepanta in so far as the
former are real and the latter ideal, and real and ideal cannot be attributed to
the same subject in the same context. Nor can a person and his ideal be
thought of in the relation of subject and predicate. For, an ideal of a person
is what the person is not. There is no ueential opposition between two ideals
or between two reals, but there is a genuine incompatibility between a real
and an ideal. What is real is not ideal and whatever is ideal is not real. Both
are opposed in their essence. Hegelian ideas snd Marxist reals are not of oppo
site nature They are in conflict in their /unction. They are mutually waning
ideas or warring reals and are separated by hostility and hatred. The inoom-
patiblea of our hypothesis are so in their nature, but not in their function, and
are bound by love and affection and, though rational diacrepanta, are volitional-
ly and emotionally in harmony. In the movement of history real selves are
attracted by ideals, and then, in realizing them, are synthesized with them.
This movement is dialectical, but it is totally different from the Hegelian or
Marxist dialectic. Their thesis and antithesis are struggling against each other.
Here, one is struggling not "against" but "for" the other. The formula of the
dynamic of history, according to this conception, will be: A real (thesis)
creates from within itself an ideal (antithesis) which both by mutual harmony
get united into another real (synthesis) that beoomee the thesis of another
triad and thus from triad to triad. The dialectic of human society, according
to this formula, is not a struggle of warring classes or warring nations, but a
struggle against limitations to realize goals and ideals, which goals and ideals
are willed and loved rather than fought against. This is a dialectic of love
rather than of hatred. It leads individuals, musses, classes, nations, and civili
zations from lower to higher and from higher to yet higher reaches of achieve
ment. It is a dialectic which recognizes an over-all necessity of a transcen
dentally determined process (a divine order), takes notioe of the partial free
dom of social entities and of the place of mechanical determination as a tool
in divine and human hands.
Thia hypothesis is not linear because it envisages society as a vast number
of interacting individuals and intermingling, interacting classes, societies, cul
tures, and humanity as a whole, moving towards infinite ideals, now rising,
now falling, but on the whole developing by their realization, like the clouds
constantly rising from the foot-hills of a mountain range, now mingling, now
separating, now flying over the peaks, now unking into the valleys, and yet
ascending from hill to hill in search of the highest peak.
This hypothesis avoids the Spencerian idea of steady progress, because it
recognizes ups and downs in human affaire and rises and falls of different
11
Introduction
civilizations and their thought at different stages of world history. It avoids
measuring the dynamics of history by the three-knotted rod of Western cul
ture and does not shelve the question of chango in human society as a whole.
It leaves the door of future achievement open to all and does not condemn
certain living cultures to death.
Briefly stated, the hypothesis to which the study of Muslim thought, as the
study of Muslim culture as a whole, lends support has a negative as well as a
positive aspect. Negatively, it is non-organismic, non-cyclic, and non-linear;
and. positively, it involves belief in social dynamics, in progress in human
society through the ages by rises and falls, in the importance of the role of
ethical values in social advance, in the possibility of cultural regeneration, in
the environmental obstacles as stimuli to human action, in freedom and
purpose as the ultimate sources of change, and in mechanical determinism as
an instrument in divine and human hands.
The chief aim of this work is to give an account not of Muslim culture as
a whole, nor of Muslim thought in general, but only of one aspect of Muslim
thought, i.e., Muslim philosophy. But. since this philosophy had its beginning
in a religion based on philosophical fundamentals and it developed in close
association with other spheres of thought, sciences, humanities, and arts, we
have thought it desirable to give brief accounts of these other disciplines as
well (Book Five). Book Five has become necessary because in many cases
the same thinkers were at once philosophers, scientists, and writers on the
Humanities and Fine Arts. Besides writing on philosophy al-Kindi wrote, to
number only the main subjects, also on astrology, chemistry, optics, and
music; al-Firibi on music, psychology, polities, economics, and mathematics;
ibn Slna on medicine, chemistry, geometry, astronomy, theology, poetry, and
music; Zakriya al-Razi on medicine and alchemy; al-GhazMi on theology,
law, physics, and music; and the Ikhw4n al-$afa on mathematics, astronomy,
geography, music, and ethics. Likewise ibn Haitham left works not only on
philosophy but also on optics, music, mathematics, astronomy, and medicine,
and Nasir al-Dln TQsi on mathematics, astronomy, physics, medicine, miner
alogy, music, history, and ethics. In Muslim Spain, ibn Bajjah wrote on philo
sophy, medicine, music, and astronomy; ibn Tufuil on philosophy ami modi-
cine; and ibn Rusfad on philosophy, theology, medicine, and astronomy. And
what is true of these thinkers is true of a hd»t of others.
In the Introduction to the History of Philosophy. Eastern and Western, to
which reference has already been made it has been rightly observed that the
histories of philosophy written before tho nineteenth century might be aptly
described as tho histories of philosophers rather than the histories of philosophy.
But it seems to us that when a history aims at. giving an account of theories and
movements, it cannot do without dealing with philosophers, for the relation
12
Introduction
between them and the movements they start or the theories they propound is
too’ intimate to allow their complete severance. Therefore, in our endeavour
to give a historical account of the movements, systems, and disciplines in
Muslim thought we have made no effort to eliminate the treatment of indivi
dual philosophers where it has been called for. In this procedure we have fol
lowed the excellent example of T. J. de Boer who can lie justly regarded as
a pioneer in this most neglected field.
We have begun our treatment of the subject by giving in Book One a brief
account of the whole field of philosophy in the pre-Islamic world in general and
Arabia in particular. We have devoted Book Two to philosophical teachings
of the Qur'an. This we have done with the express hope that these two books
together will give the reader a correct idea of the real source of Muslim philo
sophy and enable him to view thia philosophy in its true perspective.
Muslim philosophy like Muslim history in general has passed through five
different stages. The first stage covers the period from the first,'seventh cen
tury to the fall of Baghdad. We have dealt with this period under the heading
"Early Centuries." This is followed by a shock-absorbing period of about half
a century. Its third stage is that of its second dowering treated under the
heading "Later Centuries.” It covers the period from the beginning of the
eighth/fourteenth to the beginning of the twelfth/eightccnth century. The
fourth stage is that of the most deplorable decline covering a century and a
half. This is in the truest sense the Dark Age of Islam. With the middle of the
thirteenth/nineteenth century begins its fifth stage covering the period of the
modern renaissance. Thus, in the curve of its history, Muslim philosophy has
had two rises and two falls and is now showing clear signs of a third rise.
We have said very little about the periods of decline, for these have little
to do with philosophical developments. During the first jieriod of its great ness
Muslim philosophy shows four distinct lines of thought. The first is the theo-
logico-philosophical line, the second is mystical, the third philosophical and
scientific, and the fourth is that taken by those whom we have called the
"middle-roaders." These have boon treated respectively in Book Three. Parts 1,
2. 3. and 4. In Book Four we have traced the same lines of thought running
through the second rise of Islam in order to bring it in clear contrast with the
first.
During both of these periods of Islamic rise, considerable activity is notice
able in other disciplines. We have dealt with all these in Book Five.
The period of modern renaissance in Islam, a brief account of which is given
in Book Eight, is marked by political struggle for emancipation from foreign
domination and freedom from conformism in both life and thought. The philo
sophers of this period are not mere philosophers. They are more political lead
ers. social reformers, and men of action. Therefore, although chapters LXX1I,
I.XXIII, LXX1V, LXXVII, LXXX, and LXXX111 contribute little to ana
demic philosophy, yet they throw a flood of light on the philosophies of life and
history, and for that reason have been considered indispensable for our work.
13
I introduction
So much about the put. But what about the present and how about the
future ’ The position of philosophy amongst the Muslim peoples today is no
worse than it is in the rest of the world. What type of philosophical thought
the future has in store for them we shall try to forecast in our concluding re
marks.
'4
BOOK ONE
PRE-1SLAMIC PHILOSOPHICAL THOUGHT
Part 1
Chapter I
PRE-ISLAMIC INDIAN THOUGHT
Maurice Bloomfield says paradoxically iu The Religion o/ the Rig- Veda that
"Indian religion begins before its arrival in India.”* By thia he means to imply
that Indian religion is a continuation of the primitive faith of the Indo-
European race to which the Aryans that came to India belonged. "The Sanskrit
word deva (to shine) for God is similar to the Latin word detUi yaj a Sanskrit
word for worship ia common to mon- than one Indo-European language;
while the Vedic god Mitra has his counterpart in the Iranian god Mithra.”
From a comparative study of the beliefs and practices of the Teutonic, Hellenic,
Celtic, Slavonic, Italian, Armenian, and Persian peoples which all sprang from
the Indo-European race, it has been established beyond the slightest doubt
that the basis of their religion was an animistic belief in a very large number
of petty gods, each of which had a special function. They were worshipped
with sacrifice, accompanied with potent formulas and prayers. Magic was
highly regarded and much used
It is greatly regretted that there is neither any formal history nor any archaeo
logical remain to throw fight on the early home of this ancient race or on the
time when the great historical people hived off from it. Our principal source
for the history, religion, and philosophy of the Indian branch is the Vedeu
besides the Epics and the Purdruu.
The I'edos.—Among the Vedae. the oldest ia Sj- Feda v-hich consists of more
than a thousand hymns composed by successive generations of poets during a
period of many centuries. The hymns are connected in various ways with the
sacrifices, the domestic ceremonies, and the religious speculation of the time,
and are concerned chiefly with the worship of gods, who represent personifi
cation of natural forces, and the propitiation of demoniac beings.
In the Indo-Iranian period the refreshing drink prepared from the eoma-
plant was offered to gods in a special ritual and the singing of a hymn was a
* Maurice Bloomfield, The Religion of the Rig-Veda, Putnam. N.Y.. ISOS, p. 16.
15
A History of Mtulim Philosophy
necessary port of the ritual. The Aryans brought this custom with them and
continued to compose verses for the somo-ritual and for the occasions of annual
sacrifices in their new homeland. As the hymns were to be sung, a class of
priests arose whose duty it was to recite poems of praise in honour of gods.
The priests who could sing better hymns and were in possession of a secret
lore, which enabled them by conducting sacrifices in the right way to win the
favour of gods for their patrons, were in great demand. Consequently, a number
of priestly families vied with one another in composing hymns in the best
language and metre then available. The Vafo gives evidence of seven Such
families each bearing the name of a patriarch to whom the hymns are ascribed.
At first the hymn collections of six families were brought together and then
of nine. At a much later stage some scholars collected one hundred and ninety-
one poems which were taught as the last section of the oral curriculum of
hymns. Thus, there became ten books of the fig-Veda.
The mantras of the Alhana- Veda consist largely of spells for magical pur
poses and advocate pure and unalloyed polytheism. The other Vedas are
entirely sacrificial in purpose. The Sama-Veda consists of verses borrowed from
the Pg- Veda to be applied to soma-sacrifice. The Yafur- Veda consists of ritual
formulas of the magical type.
For a long time the number of the Vedas was limited to three, the Athana-
Veda being totally excluded from the group of the Vedas. In support of this
contention the following verse from Manu can be cited: "From Agni, VJyu.
ami Ravi, He drew forth for the accomplishment of sacrifice the eternal triple
Veda, distinguished as Bik. Yajush and Sdman Similarly, in Satapatha
Brdhmanas it is said, "The Rik-Yajush-Saman verses are the threefold
science."’
A probable reason for the exclusion of the Alharva- Veda from the Vedas
is that "it consists mostly of magic spell, sorcery, and incantations which
were used by the non-Aryans and the lower classes to achieve worldly goods
such as wealth,riches, children, health, freedom from disease. . . . Tho Alkarva-
Veda was recognized later on when hymns relating to sacrifices seem to have
been added to it to gain recognition from the orthodoxy."*
Vedic Conception of Cod—The religion of the Vedas is polytheism. It has
not the charm and grace of the pantheon of the Homeric poems; but it cer
tainly stands nearer the origin of the gods. All gods whether great or small
are deified natural phenomena. The interesting thing about them is that they
are identified with the glorious tilings whose deifications they are and are also
distinguished from them. They are still thought of as being sun, moon. rain,
wind. etc., yet each god is conceived as a glorious being who has his home in
lira ven. and who comes sailing in his far-shining car to the sacrifice and site
■ Menu, I. 23.
1 .^atapatha BrOhmanas, IV: 6. 7.
• Manunhiii C. I’andya, InleUigenl Mau's Guide to Indian Philosophy, Bombay,
1033, p. 21.
16
Pre'Islamic Indian Thought
down on the grass to hear his own praise recited and sung and to receive the
offerings.1 'rhe hymns sung by the priests were mainly invocations of the gods
meant to accompany the oblation of soma-juice and the fire-sacrifice of the
melted butter.
The Vedas are not consistent in their account of the gods. In one myth the
sun is a male, in another's female. The sun and the moon arc mentioned in
one place as rivals, elsewhere as husband and wife. The dog is extolled in one
place as a deity and in another mentioned as a vile creature. Again the sun,
the sky. and the earth are looked upon sometimes as natural objects governed
by particular gods and sometimes as themselves gods who geherate and control
other beings.
In the Rg- Veda, heaven and earth are ordinarily regarded as the parents
of gods, pilra
* or radlra.’ In other passages heaven (dgaus) is separately styled
as father and the earth (prilhivi) as mother.1 At other places, however, they
are spoken of as having been created. Thus it is said," that he who produced
heaven and earth must have been the most skilful artisan of all the gods.
Again, Indra is described as having formed them, to follow him as chariot
wheels do a horse. At other places the creation of the earth and the heaven is
ascribed to Soma and Pushan.
Thus, while the gods are regarded in some passages of the ft,- Veda as the
offsprings of heaven and earth, they are at other places considered indepen
dent of these deities and even their creators.
In various texts of the Rg- Veda the gods are spoken of as being thirty-three
in number. Thus it is said in the Kg-Veda . "Come hither Nasatyaa, Asvins,
together with the thrice eleven gods, to drink our ncetar.”1* Again, "Agni,
the wise gods lend an ear to their worshippers. God with the ruddy steeds,
who lovest praise, bring hither those, three and thirty.”11 In the Salapalha
IMhmauari this number of thirty three gods is explained as made up of eight
tunw. eleven rudrae, and twelve adilyeu, together with heaven and earth, or,
according to another passage, together with Indra and Prajapati instead of
heaven and earth.
The enumeration of gods as tliirty-thrcc is not adhered to throughout the
redos. In the Rg. Veda, tho gods are mentioned aa being much more numerous:
“Three thousand, three hundred, thirty and nine gods have worshipped
Agni."'1 This verse which is one of tho many shows that the Vedic Indian
1 Farquhar, An Outline nf the Religious Literature of India, Oxford Univcrsity
Pre«. 1920. p. 13.
• Rg.-Veda, i: 1.19. 2; iii: 3. II.
' Ibid.. >x: S3. 12: x: 33. 3.
■ Ibid., i: SB. 4.
• Ibid.. 1: I <91, 2.
Ibid.. 1; 34. II.
>' Ibid., 1: 43. 2
■■ Ibid., ill. 39.
17
A History of Muslim Philosophy
believed in the existence of a much larger number of supernatural beings than
thirty-three.
The gods were believed to have had a beginning; they were stated to be
mortal, but capable of overcoming death by the practice of austerity The fig-
Veda says that the gods acquired immortality by drinking soma Still the
gods are not eelf-existent or unbeginning beings. It has been seen that they are
described in various passages of the ftg-Veda as offsprings of heaven and
earth. In various texts of the fig-Veda the birth of Indra is mentioned, and
his father and mother are also alluded to.”
The Vedic gods can be classified as deities of heaven, air, and earth:
1. Celestial Gods—The oldest god is Dyaus, generally coupled with Prithivi
when the two arc regarded as universal parents. Another is Varuna, the greatest
of the Vedic gods besides Indra. It u he who sustains and upholds physical and
moral order. In the later Vedas, when Prajlpati became creator and supreme
god, the importance of Varuna waned, and in the post- Vedic period Varuna
retained only the dominion of waters as god of the sky. Various aspects of
the solar activity are represented by five gods, namely, Mitra, a personifica
tion of the sun's beneficent power; Surya, the proper name of the sun, regarded
as the husband of dawn; Sivitri, the life-giving activity of the sun; Pusan, a
pastoral deity personifying the bountiful power of the sun; and Vi^nu occupying
the central place in this pantheon.
2. Atmospheric Gods.—The moat important of three gods is Indra, a favourite
national deity of the Aryan Indians. He is not an uncreated being It is said
of him, "Thy father was the parent of a most heroic son; the maker of Indra,
he also produced tho celestial and unconquerable thunder . . was a most skil
ful workman.Again, "A vigorous (god) begot him. a vigorous (son), for the
battle; a heroic female (nori) brought him forth, a heroic soul."1* His whole
appearance is goldon; his arms are golden; he carries a golden whip in his
hands; and he is borne on a shining golden car with a thousand supports.
Ilia car is drawn by two golden steeds with Rowing golden manes. He is famous
for slaying Vfta after a terrific battle, as a result of which water is released
for man and light is restored to him. Certain immoral acta are also attributed
to him. Ho occasionally indulges in acta of violence such as slaying his father
or destroying the car of Dawn. lass inqiortaiit gods of this group are Trita,
Apamnapat and Mnlarisvan The sons of Ru'lra, the malignant deities of the
Vedas, are the Maruts (the storm-gods) who help Indra in his oonflicte. The
god of wind is Viyu while that of water is Apab-
3. Terrestrial Wodr.—Rivers are deified. Thus Sindu (Indus). Vipaa (Bias),
and Sutudri (Sutlej) are invoked in the ftg-Veda The most important god is
SaraavaU, often regarded as the wife of Brahmk. Another very important god
•• Ibid., iv: 17, 4. 12.
>• Ibid., iv: 17.4.
“ Ibid., vii: 20. S.
18
Pre-Ialamic Indian Thought
i» Agni, the god of fire. The number of hymns addressed to him far exceed
those addressed to any other divinity with the exception of Indra. In the
Sg-Fa/a he is frequently spoken of aa a goblin-slayer. Another god is Soma,
the divine drink which makes those who drink it immortal. A priest says in
the Bi-Veda : "Wo have drunk Soma, we have become immortal, we have
entered into light, we have known gods.'*
In addition to these, there is a host of abstract deities and also deities of
less importance which cannot be described here for want of space. Suffice it
to say that an attempt was made by the sages (rfis) to introduce order in
the bewildering multiplicity of gods. As several gods had similar functions,
they were in some cases bracketed together, so that it might be said that
when Indra and Agni performed identical functions, Agni was Indra or Indra
was Agni. Hence arose many dual gods. A further effort in the direction of
systematization was made through what Max Mailer has called henotheism—
a tendency to address any of the gods, say, Agni, Indra, Varuna, or any other
deity, "aa for the time being the only god in existence with an entire forget
fulness of all other gods.” Macdonell has a different theory to explain the so-
called henotheism by ascribing to it exaggeration, thus retaining the charge
of polytheism against the Vedas. Some modem Hindus under the influence
of Swami Dayananda repudiate both these theories aa inconsistent with the
true spirit of the Vedas '* "Ho is One, sagos call Him by different names, e.g.,
Agni, Yama, Maariahvan"1’ No doubt, a few verses of this nature can be
found in the Vedas; but the consensus of scholars is that monotheistic verves
are a product of the later Vedic period and that they do not express tbe do
minant strain of the Vedic thought. Shri Krishna Saksena in his chapter
"Indian Philosophy" in A History o/ Philosophical Systems edited by V. Ferm
says that the early mantras contain a religion of nature-worship in which
powers of nature like fire (agni) and wind (tdytr) are personified. In later
hymns and the Brdhmanas, monotheistic tendencies begin to crop up a little.
Swami Dayananda was a product of Hindu-Muslim culture and his insistence
on monotheism shows the extent to which Muslim thought has influenced
Indian religious beliefs.
Vedic Eschatology —The Bi- Veda makes no distinct reference to a future
life except in ita ninth and tenth books. Yama. the god of death, was the first
of the mortals to die. He discovers the way to tho other world; guides other
men there, assembles them in a home, which is Reourod for them for ever. He
grants luminous abodes to the pious and is an object of terror for the wlckod.
Yama is said to have two insatiable dogs with four eyes and wide nostrils who
act as his messengers and oonvey the spirits of men to the abode of their
forefathers. After a person's dead body has been burnt, his spirit soars to the
realm of eternal light in a car or on wings and enters upon a more perfect
Sir Gokal Chand Narang, Message 0/ the Vedas. New Book Society. Lal.ore,
1946, pp. 42-56.
■’ Ry-Veda. i: 164. 46.
19
A History of Muslim Philosophy
life which fulfill all of Ilia desires anil grants him unending happiness. Since
the Fedie gods did not have purely spiritual pleasures but were often subject
to sensual ap|>etites, it ean be said that the pleasures promised to the pious
in the world to come were not altogether spiritual. Yama is described as carous-
,ng with the gods,1’ and Gandharvas, a class of gods who are described as
hairy like dogs and monkeys, often assume handsome appearance to seduce
the eart hly females.1’ Indra is said to havo had a happy married life. _
IMhmanru.—Each of the four Vedas has three sub-divisions: the Samhitas
(sacred texts), the Bnihmana-s (commentaries), and the Aranyaka-s (forest
books). The Brdhmanas are, therefore, an integral part of the Vedas. Sayana,
a great scholar of the Vedas. says, "Veda is the denomination of the Mantra
*
and the Brahmawu."2° (Swami Dayananda differs on this point.) By the
*
Manlru are meant hymns and prayers; and the Brahmanas are intended to
elucidate objects which arc only generally adverted to in the hymns. The
Brdhmanas comprise precepts which inculcate religious duties, maxims which
explain those precepts, and arguments which relate to theology
Considering the fact that the Brdhmana
* often quote from the Vedas and
devote themselves to the clarification of the ritualistic and the philosophical
portions of the Vedas, it may be concluded that the Samhiliu must have
existed in their present form before the compilation of the Bnihmonat was
undertaken. In fact in the Brdhmanas, we find fully developed the whole
Brdhmanical system, of which we have but faint indications in the redos.
V.e have the whole body of religious and social institutions far more complicated
than the simple ritual of the Samhitds; four castes with the Brahmins at the
top and the SOdnu at the bottom have been recognized both in theory and in
practice—all this shows that the Bnihmanas must have been composed a
long time after the Vedas. It is, however, obvious that the Brdhmanas were
a kind of a scriptural authority for the Brdhmanieal form of worship and social
institutions.
Uponixads --The third integral part of the Vedas, namely, the .-Iranyalui,
intended for the study of the anchorites in the forests in the third stage of
their life, led ultimately to the Upanisad
* or VedanftM as the concluding por
tion of the Vedas. These were meant for the ascetics in the fourth stage of
their lives called the Sannydsa Asrama. Literally, the word Upanimd means
"a sitting besides,” i.e., a lesson taught by the teacher to the pupils sitting
by his side. These discourses expounded in enigmatic formulae a series of
esoteric doctrines to the selected few students, mainly Br&hmins, who were
deemed fit to receive such a course of instruction.
Considering the age which gave birth to tho 1'panimd.s for understanding
some of the major problems of life, one marvels at the depth anil insight of
the early Hindu seem. Their attitude towards the I’edos was not one of venera-
'• Ibid., x: 135, I.
” dtharm-Vedn. v: 37, Ilf
'• M. MUIIi-r. Ed., By- Veda
20
Pre-Iitlainic Indian Thought
tion; it was on the contrary an attitude of doubt and disrespect. While they
considered Vedas to bo of divine origin, they felt »t the same time that the
Fedie knowledge was inferior to the true divine insight and could not liberate
them.11 They were not concerned with the world of phenomena and denounced
with all the force at their disposal the rich and elaborate ritualism then pre
valent Sacrifice, an integral part of the Vedic faith, had no significance for
them. Their interest lay not in the outer world but in the inner and, within
that, in the mystery of the self. The introverted Brahmins were accordingly
earned far beyond the realm of the anthropomorphic deities of the oarly
l'ed/'c period and devoted attention to that all-transcending principle from
which all natural forces and events were supposed to proceed. The Upanifads.
however, fall short of offering a coherent presentation of the Brdhmanir doc
trine of the Universal Soul-in-all-things. “This is only found in them in frag
ments some small, some large. And in addition these fragments are the work
of various schools and various ages. Those who have described the Upanisado
as chaotic are not altogether wrong."” It would lie hard to say what philoso
phical opinions might not lie supported on their authority, for the most part
contradictory statements find a place in them, yet the tendency is on the whole
towards pantheism. The Upon mads teach the identity of the soul of all beings
both animate and inanimate with the Universal Soul. Since the Universal
Soul dwells in all, one finds one's own self in all things, both living anti non
living. In this light alone can the meaning of the famous tai team aei (Tliat art
thou) of the Vpanisads be understood. The human self is not a part of the
Divine Self, but is the Brahman-Atman whole and undivided The Self is
consequently a single principle, which, philosophically speaking, can offer an
explanation for the entire spectacle of nature.
It. is often said that the pillars on which the edifice of Indian philosophy
rests are Atman and Brahman, These terms have no fixed connotation in the
Upanifads. Generally speaking, .■flman is used to designate self or soul, while
Brahman is used to denote the primary cause of tilings. What is remarkable
about these terms is that though their significance is different, one denoting
an inner world of subjectivity and the other an objective principle of explana
tion. yet in course of time the two eame to be used interchangeably—both
signifying an eternal principle of the universe. The notion of the self was arrived
at through introspection and it was thought by the Vpanieadic thinkers that
the outer reality should correspond exactly with the psychical reality within.
In this way what was simply a psychical .principle came to be recognized as a
world principle. This strain of thought was supported by another which objec
tively traced the visible universe to a single source, namely, Brahman. and
Brahman was identified with the Atman. Thus, two independent currents of
” Radhakrishnan, The Philosophy of the Upanifad*. Allen * Unwin London,
1924. p. 25.
•' Albert Schweitzer, Indian Thought and lu Development, Adam * Charles
Black. London. 1951, p. 32
21
History of Muslim Philosophy
thought met together and paved the way to monism of an idealistic type
which has remained till now the hallmark of Indian philosophy. By com
bining subjective and objective principles into one, the ultimate principle
partook of the characteristics of both—it became infinite as well as spiritual.
All this is very well expressed in Chandogya-Upanifad in a dialogue between
a father and a son. The sum and substance of the story is that the primal
spiritual principle is all-comprehensive and that the principle is no other than
the self of the person then engaged in the discussion. With regard to the nature
of Brahman (the Absolute) there is a great divergence of opinion. At some
places He is conceived as cosmic, i.e., all-oomprehensive, at others acosmic,
i.e., all-exclusive. Further, at some places Brahman is imagined as the imper
sonal Absolute without attributes; at other places he is recognized as the
highest spiritual Being that unites all forms of perfection in Himself. Hence
it would be no exaggeration to say that though the Upanisads contain flashes
of insight, yet they are not a self-contained homogeneous system and that
they also lack completeness. It is for this reason that Sathkara believes that
there are two types of doctrines in the Upanisads: esoteric, understanding
God as the impersonal, unknowable Absolute without attributes, and the other
exoteric, regarding God as a Person who manifests Himself in the various
divinities.
The second interpretation of the Absolute as a Person led to the develop
ment of a theology largely theistic in spirit yet polytheistic in practice, ainoe
it sanctioned symbol-worehip which expressed itself in various forms of idol-
worahip. The Upanisads are not, however, responsible for the excesses of later
theology. In them breathes a Bpirit of monism. They preach a cult of mystical
union with the Absolute, and suggest practical methods for its realization.
In the main the stress is laid upon complete detachment from all that is mun
dane and belongs to the world of phenomena. Accordingly, one finds in the
Upanisads a whole series of sayings in which complete renunciation is recom
mended. "When al) desires which are in his heart disappear, then man be
comes immortal. Here he has already reached Brahman. As the old slough of
a snake lies on an ant-hill, so now docs the body lie there."” According to the
Upanisads, the highest merit called Sheryas, which consists in the realization
of one’s true self, can be reached through knowledge alone. The purpose of
ethics, on the other hand, is quite distinct, namely, mundane good called Breyas
which is reached by moral actions. The two ends are consequently poles apart,
one concerned with the timeless good and the other with the temporal and
evanescent good. It is said in Kalha-Upanisadu that the ethical and the
spiritual goals are opposed to each other as light and darkness and cannot
co-exist. A man has to renounce all activity for worldly goods if he wants to
achieve spiritual unity with the Supremo Being. One cannot, therefore, select
11 Brhd iiranyaha Upanisail. iv: 4.
“ Katha-Upanifad. 2: 1-5.
22
Pre-Islamic Indian Thought
both knowledge and action u two ends of life, since the highest end must bi
one and not many.
The ideal of detachment was emphasized by the Indian thinkers not only
for tho reason that it was necessitated by their theory of human deliverance,
but also because thoy regarded the whole phenomenal world of names, forma,
and plurality as nwiyd or a mere unreality, an illusion having only a temporary
reality which is transcended ultimately iti tho being of the Supremo Self.
The Upanisadu demand the votaries of BrahmA to ponder over the illusoriness
and unreality of tile world of senses ami to extricate themselves from its tempta
tions and enchantments by contemplation of a transcendental reality within
the soul of each person. Thus eon a person gel to spiritual heights and achieve
muhi or salvation, Hence along with the renunciation of thy phenomenal
world another thing required is the concentration of the spirit on tile super
sensible reality. The Upani-vuLr contain detailed instructions on tliis subject.
The aim is to reach a stage of ecstasy in which a person lias the psychical
experience of feeling one with the Ultimate Reality.
The ethics-negating tendencies, however, could not be maintained consis
tently in face of the demands and concrete realities of lifo. The ideal of human
salvation aa outlined by the Upanimds cannot be acliievcd easily and so many
are destined to fail. This is realized by the Indian sages. "What is hard for
many even to hear, what many fail to understand even though they hear:
a marvel is the one that can teach it and lucky is its obtainer, a marvel is
he that knows it when taught by the wise."
** The majority are born again after
death and can win release from the cycle of births and deaths through the
performance of good deeds. Thus ethics rejected by Brahmanic mysticism
enters through the doctrine of the Transmigration of Souls—a doctrine un
known to the I'edas.
The doctrine referred to above appears in connection with a myth. "All
who depart from thia world go to the moon. The waxing half fills itself with
their lives; in the waning half it is effecting their rebirth The moon is the
gate of the heaven. He who knows how to reply to it. him it allows to pass
by. He who cannot reply, it sends him as rain down to the earth; he is reborn
here and there according to his deeds and knowledge as worm, moth, fish, bird,
lion, wild bear, jackal, tiger, man, or whatever it- may be. For when a man
comes to the moon, the moon asks: ‘Who art thou V Then he ought to answer:
'I am thou. .. .' If he speaks thus, then the moon lets him get away, out above
**
itself." One finds no reference to the myth in the Fafas. From this it is
concluded that it is not Aryan in origin hut belonged to the religious world of
the aboriginal inhabitants of India.
The law which governs the kind of birth a soul is destined to have after
each death is the law of karma. which signifies that nothing can happen in the
« Ibid.. 11 ii. 7.
*• Kaunitaki-Vpanuad.
23
A History of Muslim Philosophy
moral world without * cause. But the recognition of the fact that moral events
are caused by antecedent factors cannot explain the palpably indemonstrable
and poetic way in which the moral causes are believed to operate. That moral
causes can work in tnuara, that is to say, in a aerie
* of births and deaths, all
of which do not necessarily pertain to human beings, is a hypothesis of a
very doubtfid nature and utility. That the doctrine of reincarnation is incon-
sistent with the Brihmanit mysticism of the identity of the individual with
the Universal Sold gore without Baying. Instead of the doctrine that every
individual soul returns to the Universal Soul after inhabiting the body onoe,
wc are required to believe in a theory which starts from new premises al
together. This theory is based on the supposition that souls are prisoners in
the world of sense and can return to their Primal Source not at once after
their first death, aa required by the theory of mystical absorption of tho
Brahmins, but after undergoing a long process of reincarnation necessitating
a scries of births in the animate and inanimate realms. Schweitzer thinks”
that t he acceptance of this doctrine created insuperable difficulties for Hindu
thought. On the older hypothesis of mystical reunion with tho Divine Source
it was easy to explain world redemption on the assumption that all souls return
ed to their Source after their death. But if the theory of reincarnation is
accepted, world redemption becomes possible only if all souls reach the level
of human existence and become capable of acquiring that knowledge and
conduct which is required for liberation and of which human beings alone are
capable.
The Epic Period.—Two great events belong to this period. Tho first is the
expedition of Rama from Oudh to Ceylon to recover his wife Slta who had
been carried off by Ravena, the king of that island, and the second is the
struggle for supremacy between two rival K^atriya groups, the Pandavas and
the Kauravas, in which Lord Kfsna played a significant part.
Rama is an avaldr, i.e„ a divine incarnation of Vi?nu, who being the pre
server of the universe had to leave his celestial abode very often and to assume
different forms in order to destroy evil and establish truth. The purpose of
this avaldr was to kill the ten-headed Ravaaa, who had pleased the mighty
gods through his austerities and as a result had received a boon from
them which was that he could not be killed by any god. Feeling secure,
he started a campaign of terror against both gods and men. The gods ap
proached Brahma who had granted immunity to Ravana. He remarked that
Havana could be killed by a god assuming the form of a man since Ravana
had not been granted immunity from mankind. Vi?nu undertook to be bom
as a man to rid the world of evil. He was accordingly bom in the house of a
king. Dasaratha by name, who ruled ovor Ayodhyi and bore the name of
Rama. Aa he came of age he married Slta, who “was an incarnation of T-aksml,
” Albert Schweitzer, op. cil„ p. 51.
24
Prc-Islamic Indian Thought
Visnu’s wife, and was born of no woman but of mother earth herself, ami was
picked up by Janaka from a paddy field.””
Rima became the victim of oourt intrigues, and for fourteen years had to
suffer exile in jungles from where Sita was carried off by Ravana. To rescue
Sita from the clutches of Ravana, Rima contracted military alliance with
Hanuman. the king of monkeys, with whose active support he reached Ceylon
and learnt the secrets of Ravana's power from a brother of RAvana Then
ensued a fierce battle in which the armies suffered losses. At last Ravana came
out and met Rama in a single combat. "Each like a flaming lion fought the
other; head after head of the ten-necked one did Rima cut away with his
deadly arrows, but new heads over rose in place of those cut off, and RAvana’s
death seemed no wise nearer than before. The arrows that had slain Mancha
and Khara and Bali could not take the king of Lanka’s life away, Then Rama
took up the Brahma weapon given to him by Agastya, the Wind lay in its
(weapon’s) wings, the Sun and Fire in its head, in its mass the weight of Meru
and Mandara. Blessing that shaft with Vedic Mantras. Rama set it with his
mighty bow and loosed it and it sped to its appointed place and cleft the
breast of Ravana and, bathed in blood, returned and entered RAma’B quiver."”
The most popular avaldr of Visnu is Lord Kpsiia, whose main object was to
kill Kansa, a demon born of a woman, and who was well known for his childish
tricks and many practical jokes on milk-maids. He was, however, a great
warrior and a strategist. He killed many demons and kingB.
Bhagavad-Gita. It was Lord Krsna who sang the Bhagavad-Gita (the song
celestial) to Arjuna, giving the most widely accepted view of life among the
Hindus. Says Mahatma Gandhi, "I find a solace in the Bhagavad-Gita that I
miss even in the Sermon on the Mount. When disappointment stares me in
the face and all alone I see not a ray of light, I go back to the Bhagavad-
Gild. I feel a verse here and there and I immediately begin to smile in the
midst of overwhelming tragedies, and if they have left no scar on me I owe
it all to the teachings of the Bhagavad-Gita."
According to Saiikaracharya, a great scholiast, the main function of the
Gita is to epitomize the essentials of the whole I'edic teachings. A knowledge
of its teachings leads to the realization of all aspirations. The real purpose of
this great song, as Zimmer thinks,10 is to harmonize the non-Brdhmanical
pre-Aryan thought of aboriginal India with the Vedic ideas of the Aryan
invaders. The Gild, therefore, "displays a kaleidoscopic interworking of
the two traditions that for some ten centuries had been contending
for the control and mastery’ of the Indian mind. Its teachings are
founded upon the Upanisadic principle of an all-unifying, transcendental
reality, but they also accommodate not only the gods of the earlier Vedic
*• P. Thomas. Epic Myths and Legends of India, Bombay, p. 14.
” /Ind.. p. 17.
'• Zimmer, Philosophies of India, Routledge A Kogan Paul. London. 1»52.
p. 378
25
A History of Muslim Phlloaophy
pantheon but also the philosophic and devotional formula# of the non-Arvan
and aboriginal tradition. It was not an eaay task. The Gild had to pick up
scattered and heterogeneous material to reconcile the irreconcilable tendencies
of that age and to present a unified view of life. Little wonder that the attempt
has appeared to the Western scholars aa no better than an 'ill-assorted cabinet
of primitive philosophical opinions.'"81 There were the Vaios with their belief
in multiple divinities; there were the Upanisads with their revolt against the
ritualism of the Vedas and their anthropomorphic conception of gods; there
was the doctrino of renunciation; and finally there were the .''dtiAAyo anti the
Yoga principles. And if we add to them the heretical tendencies, particularly
those represented by Buddhism, we realize how confusing the situation was
and what an uphill task Lord Kfsna had before him.
It would be futile to look for a consistent and neat metaphysical system
in the Gild, for the Gild is not primarily a book of recondite and abstruse think
ing, written with the object of presenting a world-view. It has a much loftier
purpose, which is to relate the broad principles of metaphysical reality to the
fundamental aspirations of mankind. This is not accomplished through ab
stract reasoning which only a few can understand but by selecting a specific
situation involving a moral dilemma and pointing out how it ia overcome.
The occasion was a battle between the Kauravaa and the Pandavas. The
latter were led by Arjuna whoso spirits were unmanned and who felt reluctant
to start the battle seeing on both sides his friends, relations, and teachers
who were likely to be killed in the event of a war. At this juncture his charioteer
who was none other than Lord Kfsna himself addressed to him the Song
Celestial, propounding to him as well as to the whole of mankind the Yoga
of selfless action (karma-yoga).
The significance of this teaching will become obvious if w refer to the two
ideals which were prevalent then: one, the negative one of renunciation and the
other, the positive one, of active life. The first recommended complete with
drawal from the work s day world and the second encouraged living in society
undertaking all the obligations implied thereby. The object of the GIU is to
discover a golden mean, to reconcile as it were the claims of renunciation and
active participation in the affairs of society. Thia is done through the doctrine
of karma-yoga which means doing one’s duty without the thought of conse
quences.
"Giving up or carrying on one’s work, both lead to salvation; but of the
two. carrying on one’s work ia the more excellent," says Lord Kfsna in the
Bhagamd-GUa. He also says, "Neither does man atUin to (the state of) being
without work by undertaking no work, nor does he reach perfection by simply
shunning the world." What is required is a spirit of detachment where the
heart of a [arson is free from the outward motives to action. "Thy interest
shall only be directed to the deed, never to the fruits thereof," says Lord Kftna
Hopkins, quoted by Ocsa. in the Gild accord,ng to (Sandhi. Ahmedabad, p. 13.
26
Pre-Ielamie Indian Thought
A natural consequence of this theory is that even what is judged as evil
from human standards can l>e approved of, if the agent feels that tho task
selected by him is one which must be fulfilled. “Even if a thorough scoundrel
loves mo and nothing else, he must be deemed good; for he has well resolved
"Even if thou wort the most sinful of all sinners, yet thou wouldst pass over
all guilt with the boat of knowledge alone.”” With these words Arjuna is
urged to fight against his relations, for his killing would not be an evil: it
would be a necessary consequence of the duty he has to discharge.
The ethics of detachment as preached by the did is landable no doubt, but.
as Schweitzer says, "It grants recognition to activity, only after activity has
renounced natural motives and its natural meaning.”” An action loses its
significance when it ceases to bo purpoeive. The Gita raises a voice of protest
against the soul-killing and life-negating cult of renunciation, but it has not
gone far enough. Renunciation remains when the end of an activity is no
concern of a person. "The Bhagavad-dld has a sphinx-like character. It con
tains such marvellous phrases about inner detachment from the world, about
the attitude of the mind which knowB no hatred and is kind, and about loving
self-devotion to God, that we are wont to overlook its non-ethical contents."”
The Heterodox Systems,—Among the systems which defied the authority
of the I'ofos may be mentioned the CSrvSka. Jainism, and Buddhism:
I. The Carvdka.—This system seems to be fairly old. It is mentioned in
the Ifg-Veda, the Epics, and tho Bhagamd-dtd. The main work on the system,
the Brharpali-Silru (600 B.C.), is lost and its teachings have to be reconstructed
from criticism of it in other works.
The C&rvAka is a non-Fedie, materialistic, and anti-supcrnaturalistic doc
trine which holds that only this world exists and there is nothing beyond.
There is no future life. Mfidhava Acharya says in SarvadarAanaeangrgha, "The
efforts of Can-aka are indeed hard to be eradicated, for the majority of living
beings hold by the refrain:
While lifo is yours, live joyously;
None can escape Death's searching eye:
When once this frame of ours they bum.
How shall it e'er again return
"The mass of men. in accordance with the fiSatras of policy and enjoyment
are found to follow only the doctrine of CArvika. Hence another name for
that school is Lokayata—a name well accordant with tho thing signified ”
Gild, xviii: 48.
Ibid., iv: 30.
” Albert Schweitzer, op. oil., p. 191.
" Ibid., p. 195.
•• 8. Radhakrishnan and Charles A. Moore, A Sourer Book <n Indian Philoeophy.
Oxford University Press, London. 1957, p. 228.
•’ Ibid.
27
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The four elements alone arc the ultimate principles and these are earth, water,
lire, and air. Only the perceived exists; the unpvreeivable does not exist, simply
for the reason of its never having been perceived. The only source of know
ledge and tho criterion of validity i* perception. Every other source including
1 hat of inference is rejected. Inferential knowledge involves inductive relations
and can never be demonstrably certain. Empirical generalizations may pos
sess a high degree of probability, but their operation in unknown cases can
never be guaranteed. To avoid this difficulty, if it is maintained that the
empirical laws connect the common features of the particular instances observ
ed by a person, the Cfi-rvAka objects to it by saying that such a course would
leave the particulars unrelated and that it is the particulars alone which matter.
As against the Upanisads which postulated five elements, the Cirvftka admits
of only four discarding the fifth one, viz., spaoe. The whole universe includ
ing souls is interpreted strictly in terms of these elements. The self is nothing
but the physical body as characterized by sentience. “The soul is but the body
characterized by the attributes signified in the expressions, I am stout, I am
youthful, I am grown up, I am old, etc. It is not something other than that
(body)."”
The Cirvaka rejects outright all types of spiritual values and has faith in
the present world only. "There is no world other than this; there is no heaven
and no hell; the realm of Siva and like regions are invented by stupid impostors
of other schools of thought.... The wise should enjoy the pleasures of this world
through the proper visible means of agriculture, keeping cattle, trade, political
administration, etc."” The authority of the Vedas is repudiated not only on
the ground that their teachings are irrational, but also because of the inconsis
tencies which render it impossible to know what they really teach.
The CarvSka is a protest against the excessive spirituality of the early
Hnlhmanic thought. It recognizes neither god nor conscience. It cares not for
a belief in the life to come. Hence the ethical ideal is pleasure in this life and
that too of the individual.
Since the main trend of Hindu thought has been idealistic, tho Carvaka
system has contributed very little to the sum of Indian thought,10 and this
is rather unfortunate. In view of the fact that the Vedas. the Upanisads. and
the Gita reject the evidence of the senses as illusory, the CArvika contention
might have served as a corrective.
2. Jainism.^Iainism. according to Tomlin,’1 is the most perplexing of all
religions, for it is not only incredible but also impracticable. It denies life to
the extent of recommending suicide as the most sacred act of which man is
capable, and yet it has survived for two thousand yearn.
•' Ibid.. p. 233.
Ibid.
•• Hiriyanna. Outlinw „/ Indo.,, Ph-boaphy. All™ * Unwin, London. 1932.p. 1»3.
m-Tp"l7o’ 0TO“ r*’ K,u,m Skcffington. London,
28
Pre-Iubunie Indian Thought
The founder of Jainism, Mahavira, was born in a Ksatriya family. His father
was a wealthy person belonging to a religious sect which was opposed to the
Vedas. Thia school of thought hail materialistic tendencies and sceptical atti
tude very much akin to that of CirvAka. But it was not a thoroughgoing
materialism- It shared with the masses the horror of rebirth and advocated
alow suicide through starvation as a remedy against transmigration. Maha
vira's father got his wife converted to his viewpoint and in due course shared
with her the martyrdom they desired.
Before following the example of hia parents, Mahavira embarked upon a
quest of wisdom and adopted an ascetic life. After two years'of abstinence and
self-denial he withdrew himself from civilized life and dispensed with all the
amenities of life including those of clothing- During tho tirst six vears of his
peregrination, he observed frequent fasts of several months' duration. He
voluntarily exposed himself to be maltreated by the Mlechcha tribes of
VajrMumi and Lal who abused and beat him, and shot arrows at him, anil
baited him with dogs, to all of which he offered no resistance. At tho end of
the ninth year, Mahavira relinquished his silence, but oontinued the practice
of self-mortification. The whole of the time, spent by him in these preparatory
exercises was twelve years and six months, and of this he fasted nearly eleven
yearn.
The Jains have a tradition that saviours are sent to the world whenever
mankind is plunged in corruption and sin. Mahavira was twenty-fourth in the
line.
Mahavira denied the divine origin and infallible authority of the I'cdas.
His religion is, therefore, reckoned as a heterodox religion. Its cosmology and
anthropology is non-Aryan. While Brahmanism is tho representative of Vcdir.-
Aryan thought and beliefs, Buddhism, Jainism, and a host of other doctrines
relate themselves to the native genius and expose the pessimistic dualism which
underlies so much of Indian philosophy. Jainism is a philosophy* of the pro-
roundest pessimism. It visualizes the world as a round of endless rebirths,
full of sufferings and entirely useless. One shall have to pass through periods
of inconsequential pleasures and unbearable pains unless one obtains a release
through austerities and self-abnegation. In the Jaina-Sulras, suicide is called
"the incomparable religious death,” requiring in some cases a whole life-time
to cultivate a proper frame of mind for its performance. It is essential that all
types of longings including those of death be completely eradicated from one's
consciousness. Hence one has to bring about one's extinction in a mood be
yond both desire and aversion.
As regards the philosophy of Jainism, it may be said that an eternal and
presiding First Cause forms no part of this system, nor do the Jains admit of
soul or spirit aa distinct from the living principle. They do believe in the inde
pendent and eternal existence of spirit and matter, but by spirit they do not
mean universal spirit as they have no faith in the Supreme Soul.
The spirits called jlms are eternal but limited and variable because of which
29
A History 01 Muslim Philosophy
they can adjust themselves to the size of the body they happen to inhabit.
Their essence is knowledge which is not empirical or sensory. As a matter of
fact, [wrccption is a check upon the absolute sight of the soul. In order that
the soul may regain ita true nature, it is necessary that limitations imposed
by the senses be done away with.
The Jains believe in both transmigration and karma The latter operates
by itself. Being a subtle particle of matter, it enters the soul and soils it.
Hence no supreme being in the form of God is required to allot rewards and
punishments. Mahavira says, “The world ia without bounds like a formidable
ocean; its cause is action (karma) which is as the seed of the tree. The being
(jira) invested with body, but devoid of judgment, goes like a well-sinker ever
downwards by the acts it performs, whilst the disembodied being which has
at ained purity goes ever upwards by ita own acta like the builder of a palace."1’
zljitu, the second predicate of existence, comprises objects or properties
devoid of consciousness and life. It is regarded as five-fold. Out of these,
matter is atomic in the final analysis. It possesses the qualities of colour, taste,
odour, and touch. All the atoms are supposed to possess souls so that the whole
universe seems to be pulsating with life. Time, another ajtta, is eternal. The
world has neither an origin nor an end.
As already observed, the karmic particles are mingled with the life-monads.
It ia held that they communicate colours to them which may be white, yellow,
flaming-red. dove-grey, dark-blue, or black. These colours are perceived by
tho Jaina Ttrthahkaras by virtue of their boundless intuition or omniscience.
Ordinarily, black is the characteristic colour of the cruel and the merciless,
dark-blue that of the greedy and the sensual, dove-grey of the reckless and the
hot-tempered, red of the prudent, yellow of the compassionate, and the white
of the dispassionate and the impartial.
In tho ethics of Mahavira, social life has no place. It is perfect non
activity in thought, speech, and deed that is recommended. One should
be dead to pain and enjoyment and also to all other interests including
the intellectual, social, and political to achieve liberation from the bondage
of physical existence. Cessation of activity is a stepping-stone to the super
human sphere—a sphere which is not only above human beings but also be
yond gods.
The doctrine of ahiriua which means renunciation of the will to kill and to
damage is an article of faith with the Jains. In the Ayaramgamilta, a Jaina
text, it is written. “All saints and Lords . . . declare thus: One may not kill,
nor ill-use, nor insult, nor torment, nor jM-reecute any kind of living beings,
any kind of creature, any kind of thing having a soul, any kind of beings,""
The Jains do not offer bloody sacrifices, do not. cat meat, never hunt, and
•' Wilson. Emays and Lectures on the Hrlujion e/ tkr Hindus. London. 1802.
Vol. J, p. 297.
•• WintemiU, A History of Indian Literature. Calcutta University. Calcutta
ii. p. 43«
30
Pro-lshmuc Indian Thought
take cure that they do not trample on creeping things and insects. The laying
down of this commandment is a great tiling in the spiritual history of man
kind ; but it has to be said that the principle is altogether impracticable. It has
been assumed that non-killing and non-harming are possible of fulfilment in
this world of ours. Even on purely biological grounds, if on no others, it be
comes necessary sometimes to kill as well as to damage both intentionally and
unintentionally. “It is more cruel to let domestic animals which one can no
longer feed die a painful death by starvation than to give them a quick and
painless end by violence. Again and again we see ourselves placed under the
necessity of saving one living creature by destroying or damaging another.”**
3. Buddhism.—As a prince, Buddha's name was Siddhartha ami his family
name Gautama; his father's name Suddhodana, and his mother’s Maya.
It is interesting to note that all these names have meanings from which it
is conjectured that Buddha might not have been a historical person. Suddho
dana means “he whose food is pure,'1 MavS means “an illusion," Siddhartha
means “he by whom the end is accomplished," while Buddha signifies “he
by whom all is known." These meanings suggest an allegorical signification,
very much in the style of the Pilgrim's Progress. The city of Buddha's birth,
Kapilavastu, which has no place in the geography of the Hindus, lends weight
to thias opposition. But, in spite of the allegorical interpretation as suggested
by the etymology of the names, the historians are pretty well agreed in regard
ing Buddha as a historical person who lived six centuries before Christ and
who was so much disturbed by the transience and miseries of the earthly
existence that he renounced his power ami wealth and devoted himself to
solitary meditation. He engaged himself in sacred study under different Brah
mins, but dissatisfied with their teaching ho retired into solitude. For six
years he practised rigorous austerities. Finding their effect upon the body-
unfavourable to intellectual energy, he desisted from it and adopted a more
genial course of life. At last knowledge dawned upon him. and he was in
possession of the object of his search, which he communicated to others.
Buddha had no doubt that the mundane existence is replete with sorrows,
afflictions, and tribulations. Not only this; he also believed that the misery
of life is unending. All fulfilment of desires is attended by pain. Tho causes
of pain, according to Buddha, are not economical, social, or political. They
are rooted in the very nature of human life because of the fact that like every
thing else it is ephemeral and transitory. Even souls are impermanent and
our ignorance on this point is tho major reason of our suffering. Everything
is in a flux. M'e deceive ourselves into thinking that there is a permanent fuse
for change. It is the Law of Causality which binds together tile continuous
vibration and infinite growth which characterize this world. Buddha did not
believe in any ontological reality which is permanent ami which endures
beneath the shifting appearances of the visible world lie also repudiated the
t
M rtchwi'it/.t-r. op. of., p. 84.
31
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Upaniradic view of a permanent Alman and held that search for a permanent
soul inside the body is in vain.
Buddha supposed that the law of Icarma worked into our very nature and
that there was no escape from it, the present and the future being the result
of the past. Karma is overcome through nirvana which puts an end to the
cycle of births and deaths. Nirvana literally means blowing out; hence it sug
gests extinction. It is sometimes contended that nirvana is not a negative
goal; it has a positive aspect as well. It is not simply extinction but also a
state of blessedness or perfection. It is a kind of existence, devoid of egoity
and full of peace, calm, and bliss.
To achieve nindita, Buddha recommended a path of self-discipline which is
eight-fold: right faith, right resolve, right speech, right action, right living,
right effort, right thought, and right concentration. The emphasis is on right
living which is different in the case of a layman and a monk. The first four
are applicable to all, while the remaining four are applicable especially to the
priestly class.
The practical part of Buddha's system lias the same duality. Five negative
injunctions, namely, not to kill, not to steal, not to commit adultery, not to
lie, and not to use strong drinks, are binding on all, while not to take repasts
at improper times, not to witness dances and plays, not to have costly raiments
and perfumes, not to have a large bod or quilt, and not to receive gold or silver,
arc meant for priests oidy. Similarly, the virtues of charity, purity, patience,
courage, contemplation, and silence have to be cultivated by all, but there are
twelve observances binding on recluses only. They have to use clothes made
of rags picked up from burning grounds, to have only three such suits all sewn
by the wearer's own hand, to have a cloak of yellow wool prepared in the same
manner, to live only on food given in charity, to take only one meal daily,
never to eat or drink after midday, to live in forests, to have no roof but
the foliage of trees, to sit with the back supported by the trunk of a tree, to
steep sitting and not lying, never to change the position of the carpet when it
has once been spread, and to go once a month to burning grounds to meditate
on the vanity of life on the earth.
Thus, there is a complete distinction between the religion for the masses
and the discipline for priesthood. The former is quite human while the latteg
is cokl-hcarted and unnatural. Ultimate release from transmigration can lie
attained, in the opinion of Buddha, only after one becomes a monk. The
religion of the masses is good for human relationsliip, but not for the liberation
of tile soul from the cycle of births and deaths. For Buddha a Brihmin is one
who cares not for others, who has no relations, who controls himself, who is
firmly fixed in the heart of truth, in whom the fundamental evils are ex
tinguished, and who has thrown hatred away from him. No doubt, one find*
here an emphasis on the cultivation of ethical virtues but renunciation and
condemnation of worldly ties are also evident. Buddha wants men to bo
occupied with their own redemption and not with that of their fellow-beings.
32
Pre-Islamic Indian Thought
Buddha attaches no importance to such knowledge as entangles a man in
the net of life. There are no doubt practical and theoretical systems of know
ledge which enablo people to acquire skills and crafts, but ultimately they
have no value. Says Buddha. "Such knowledge and opinions, if thoroughly
mastered, will lead inevitably to certain ends and produce certain results in
one’s life. The enlightened one is aware of all these consequences and also of
what lies behind them. But he does not attach much importance to this know
ledge. For within himself he fostere another knowledge—the knowledge of
cessation, of the discontinuance of worldly existence, of utter reposo by eman
cipation. He has perfect insight into the manner of the springing into existence
of our sensations and feelings and their vanishing again with all their sweet
ness and bitterness, into the way of escape from them altogether, and into the
manner in which by non-attachment to them through right knowledge of
their character he has himself won the release.
The Beligiovs Schools of Buddhism.—Religiously, Buddhism is divided into
two great schools, the orthodox, known as the HlnayAna, and the progres
sive, known as the Mahhyina. The former, representing Buddhism, faithfully
believes in the relentless working of the law of karma and refuses to assign
any place to God in tho scheme of things. The individual has to win his libera
tion through his own efforts by treading the path of rightness as delineated by
Buddha. Tho responsibility of achieving salvation falls squarely on the shoul
ders of tho individual. Before Buddha breathed his last, he advised his followers
to work out their salvation with diligenoe. Philosophically, tho HJnayana
*
Buddhism advocate pure phenomenalism, maintaining the non-existence of
substances or individuals. What exists is merely passing entities, there being
feelings but no feeler, thoughts but no thinker.
The Hlnayina school could not satisfy the masses because of its abstract,
dry, and arid approach to the problems of life and also because of its denial
of God. Its ethics smacked of egoism, since the Hlnayana Buddhist was exclu
sively concerned with his own emancipation, having nothing to do with the
moral needs of others. The MahAy&na school sought to rectify these mistakes
by taking a more realistic view of religion. Instead of the ideal of personal
liberation it recommended the "liberation of all sentient beings" as the summum
bonum of human life. It also rehabilitated God. by identifying Buddha with
a transcendental reality behind the world of phenomena. Gautama living an
incarnation of the Buddha. The Htnayina school denied reality to the Self:
but the Mahayana school resuscitated the Self too, by holding that it was
the little individual self that was false and not the Self of all beings, the one
transcendental Self (Mahdtmdn).
The Philosophical Schools of BuddAwm.—Though Buddha had an abhor
rence for metaphysical jargon, his religion being an ethical system with no
supernatural ism. yet his followers failed to keep themselves away from
33
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ontological and epistemological questions of abstruse nature. Consequently,
there emerged four schools, two under the Hlnav&na and two under the
MahayAna sect, on the basis of their metaphysical predilections.
1. The. Mddhyamika School of Sinyavada.--According to this school, every
thing is void and tho universe is totally devoid of reality. In support of their
contention they .argue that the knower, the known, and knowledge are
iuterdqiendent and if any one in the series is proved false it will entail the
falsity of the other two. It is maintained by the proponents of this theory that
cases of illusion demonstrate the falsity of knowledge; consequently, lire truth
of the other two factors in this epistemological trinity cannot be guaranteed.
2 The Yogacdra School of Subfeclioe Idealism.—This school was one with
the Miulhyanuka in dismissing all external reality as illusion, but could not sc<
eye to eye with it in respect of mind. It was urged that if mind was pronounced
unreal along with matter, then all reasoning and thinking would be false. It
would l>e as impossible to establish your own position as to demolish the
position of your adversary, once mind is dismissed as nuiyii. To thia school,
mind is the only reality; the external objects exist simply as ideas. No object
can be known without consciousness of it; hence the objects cannot be proved
to have an existence independent of consciousness.
3. The Sautranlika School of Represenlalionism.—'This school believes in
the existence of mind and also of the external world. The Sautritntikas maintain
that illusions cannot be explained in the absence of external objects. Moreover
the objects do not exist as ideas; rather our ideas are copies of objects which
exist by their own nature.
•I. The Vaibhasika School This school recognizes the reality of mind as
well as of matter and further holds like the neo-realists of the West that unless
the object is perceived, there is no means of certifying that the so-called copy
is a faithful representation of tho original. The only plausible position in
that case would be subjective idealism of the Yogitcira school; and if for some
reason the theory of subjective idealism is untenable, then it should bo conceded
that objects uro capable of lining perceived directly.
Systems of Indian Philosophy.—There are six systems which are recognized
as orthodox. Each is called a darkana or a view because it embodies a way of
looking at tho world. They urc generally treated together, in pairs. The first pair
includes the Nydya or the school of logic founded by Gautama and the Atomic
school founded by KanAda. There are, however, reasons to believe that the
two systems were organized into one in the fourth/tenth century long after the
Muslims had settled down in India and had made their mark on Indian thought
and culture. The analysis of the ideas incorporated into the systems after their
unification will amply bear this out. Accordingly, these two systems will
receive separate treatment after the other systems. The remaining four systems
were organized into two pairs before the advent of the Muslims and will be
discussed together. While discussing these systems we shall have to ignore
such thinkers os were born after the second/eighth century and whose contri-
34
Pro-Islanuc Indian Thought
bullous show unmistakable signs of Muslim influence. Their thinking is not
purely Indian, it is at least not on conservative lines. There are radical depar
tures both in the understanding of problems and their solutions, and these
departures can be accounted for on no other hypothesis than the impact of
Muslim thought on the Indian mind.
The first pair to be mentioned will include the Sankhya or Numeral system
said to be founded by Kapila and the Yoga or the Mystic system founded by
Patafijali; the second pair will include the Purva-Mimamm, the original
decider, founded by Jaimini. and the litlara-Jfimarnsd, the second decider,
said to be founded by Vyaaa.
The authors of the various schools as given above are generally accepted
by the Hindus as real, but there is a great deal of doubt about tlicir authen
ticity. Rend Guenon writing about Gautama, the author of A'ydju, says,
“This name should not be taken as referring to any single individual and it is
not accompanied in this case by any biographical details of the vaguest
kind . .. the name denotes what is really an 'intellectual aggregate' made
up of all those who over a period ,.. devoted themselves to one and the
same study.. .. The same could be said of the proper names that wo find
associated in a similar way with each of the other dariana*.'‘u
1 & 2. SMkhya and Yoga.—These two systems are the outer and the inner
aspects of a single discipline. In the Bhagavad-Gita there is written, "Puerile
and unlearned people speak of 'enumerating knowledge’ (Sartkhya) and the
‘practice of introvert concentration' ( Yoga) as distinct from each other, yet
anyone firmly established in either gains the fruit of both The state attained
by the followers of the path of enumerating knowledge is attained also through
the exercises of introvert concentration. Ho truly sees who regards as one the
intellectual attitude of enumerating knowledge and the practice of concen
tration."*7 Sahkhya is a theoretical system describing the elements of human
nature, its bondage and release, while Yoga is a practical discipline to gain tbe
Same end through the practice of yogic exercises.
According to Zimmer, "The main conceptions of this dual system are:
(i) that the universe is founded on an irresoluble. dichotomy of 'life-monads'
(purvia) and lifeless matter (prakfti), <ii) that 'matter,' though fundamentally
simple anti uncompounded, nevertheless exfoliates, or manifests itself, under
three distinctly differentiated aspects (the so-called gunas) which are compar
able to the three strands of a rope, and (iii) that each one of the ‘life-monads'
(puruta) associated with matter is involved in the bondage of an endless
'round of transmigration' (sam.tara)."l“
Prakrit is a primal entity, out of which the physical universe with all its
infinite diversity has evolved. It is all-pervasive and complex. Its complexity
“ introduction to the Study of the Hindu Doctrinu. Luxac, London, IMS
pp. 239-40.
17 GIM, S: 4 -5,
Zimmer, op. cil.. p. 231.
35
A History of Muslim PhlToeophy
i. due to the fact that it is constituted of three gunas, namely. mUya. rajas.
and tamos, which, though different, nevertheless work harmoniously to pnxlucc
an ordered world. Saliga means what is pure, rajas signifies what is active,
while taxu stands for what offers resistance. These three guniu are present
in every object since the effect cannot be other than its material cause. This
doctrine, according to which nothing new can originate and the effects should
Ik- entirely determined by their antecedent factors, goes by the name of "the
doctrine of pre-existent effect.” The gunas do not combine in the same ratio
in every object and that accounts for tho multiplicity and the infinite diventity
of things.
The first thing to evolve from the prakrli was the intellect, which in turn
produced egoism or individuality. From the sattya aspect of egoism there
proceeded five sense-organs, while from the lamas aspect there emerged five
motor organs. Thus, the first to emerge in the course of evolution were those
objects which purusa needed. Out of the simple and subtle elements arose
gross elements, c.g., space emerged from elemental sound, air from space
and elemental touch, fire from these two and elemental colour, so on and
so forth.
So far we have naturalism in its most aggressive form, but it is diluted by
its recognition of purusa alongside pnikrli as an equally important principle
in the constitution of the world. Purusa is manifold and simple in contradistinc
tion to prakrti which is single and complex. How can two principles of contra
dictory attributes come to work together, is a difficult point in this theory.
Purv.ja is often defined as a pure spirit by virtue of the fact that it is non
matter, and yet it has no spirituality about itself. It can be defined onlj
negatively: it is without attributes, without motion—"imperishable, inactive,
and impassive." After a person acquires full knowledge of the purusa, he becomes
indifferent to both the subtle and the gruss dements of his material existence
When death comes finally, the subtle and the gross elements dissolve, but the
purusa continues to exist having now been released once for all from the
clutches of the ganris. This is "final aloofness," or isolation, the summum bonum
of yogic practices.
"Fojn consists in the (intentional) stoppage of the spontaneous activities
of the Hfe-stuff.”,i As the mind ib in constant commotion, it assumes the
shapes of the objects it cognizes. In order to understand its true nature all
impulses from within ami without have to be stopped. The life-monad is so
to say in the Isindagc of life and consciousness; it has to reveal all the processes
of the subtle and gross body. In its own nature it is propertyless, without
beginning and end. infinite, and all-pervading. The only problem with man i
to realize his actual freedom by separating the life-monad from all distraotiu
and turbulent conditions. To achieve this objective the Siinkhija-Yoga phil
sophv prescribes the suppression of right notibns arising from correct j
» Pantaiijali. 1'ogn-A'Mnw. 1. I 2
3fi
Pre-Ialamic Indian Thought
ceptions, and wrong notions due to misapprehensions, fantasy, sleep, and
memory. When this is accomplished, the mind is stilled. The goal is isolation
which becomes possible when the purity of contemplation equals the purity
of the life-monad. This is explained by a commentator of Patafljali in the
words, "When the contemplative power (saltya) of the thinking substance
is freed from the defilement of the active powor (rajas) and the force of inert ia
(lamas) and has no further task than that involved in transcending the
presented idea of difference between itself (saltya) and the life-monad (purusa)
and when the interior seeds of hindrances (klsia) have all been burnt, then
the contemplative power (saltya) enters into a state of purity equal to that
of the life-monad. This purity is neither more nor less than the cessation of the
false attribution of experience to the life-monad. That is the life-monad's
isolation. Then the purusa having ita light within itself beoomes undefiled
and isolated.”**
According to tho Yoga philosophy, hindrances to the manifestation of the
true nature of tho purufa are ignorance, 1 am I, attachment or sympathy,
repugnance or hatred, and the will to live. Moreover, the interplay of the
gunan is a source of confusion. All these can be eradicated through asceticism,
learning, and devotion, or comploto surrender to the will of God. Asceticism
rids a yogi of passions and spiritual inertia; recitation of holy prayers initiates
him in the art of religious detachment ; while complete surrender to the will
of God develops him spiritually, by making him regard God as the real cause
of his achievements. Through this programme, the kleia, i.e., hindrances and
impedimenta, are reduced to nothingness, the rajas and lamas are destroyed,
and saltya alone remains to recognize the life-monad in its prist ino glory. Tho
yogic exercises of starving and torturing the body are calculated to eradicate
not only tho conscious but also the unconscious tendencies of our biological
existence and so to attune the personality to a supersensible type of experience.
Through meditation and self-torturing practices one reaches knowledge of
the Truth, "Neither I am, nor is aught mine, nor do I exist." Having gained
this knowledge the purusa in peace and inaction contemplates nature which
is of no interest to him, and at death attains its true life of isolation.
3 A 4. Mimdmsd-Purva and UUara.—The object of the PHrm-Mimdriud,
also called the Karama Mimdmsa. i.o., Action-Investigation, is to reach
certainty on the subject of dharma or the religious duty of the Hindus, chiefly
about the sacrifices anil the methods of offering them. In course of time there
came into vogue variant opinions and customs for the performance of every
kind of ceremony. The Brllhmins hail laid down very detailed instructions
with regard to sacrificial duties but alongside them there had emerged local
and family customs and conventions. These two were often hard to reconcile.
Ilence the problem was to bring the Brahmanic instructions into harmony
with one another and also with the existing family and local customs. A further
Zimmer, op. rit.. p. 293
37
A History of Muslim Philosophy
problem was to discover in these customs a meaning that should satisfy every
new generation.
The Pirva-Mtmanua consists of twelve books, all full of positive and negative
injunctions about principal and subordinate rites concerning sacrifices.
A cursory perusal of the MtmdrM clearly shows that the work is principally
concerned with the interpretation of those Vedic texts as are required for
sacrificial purposes and that it raises only incidentally, if at ail, genuine meta
physical questions. It does raise the question of the absolute authority of the
Pedas together with the doctrine of their eternity, and discusses in thia con
nection the problem of the eternity of sound and the relation between the
sound of a word and its meaning.
The PdrnaMimamsd is not a treatise on philosophy Nevertheless, certain
metaphysical ideas are implied, or find incidental expression in it. A charge of
atheism is often brought against this system. The advocates of the Purra-
Mimarhsa say. "There is no God. or Maker of the world; nor has the world
any sustainer or destroyer, for every man obtains a recompense in oonformity
with his own work. Nor indeed is there any maker of the Veda*. for their
words are eternal. Their authoritativeness is self-demonstrated; since it has
been established from all eternity, how can it be dependent upon anything
but itaelf I’’" But in Max Muller’s view this charge is based upon a misconcep
tion. The system does not attribute the fruit of sacrificial acta to any divine
agency, nor does it make God responsible for the injustice that seems to
prevail in the world. Further, it gives evidence of a firm faith in the operation
of the law of cause and effect and. consequently, ascribes the inequalities of the
world to the working of good and bad deeds. But all this would not make the
system atheistic. It simply proves that the Jfimdmsd has an unorthodox
conception of God. Max Mailer’s contention seems to conflict with the ttimddud
itaelf. for the latter says, "Wherefore God 1 The world itself suffices for itaelf.
HUara-Mimdtiud or Veddnla.—The term I'eddata literally means the end
of the Pedos or the doctrines set forth in the closing chapters of the Pafas
which are the Upaniead*. Tho Utiara-UlmdriMS or Later Investigations as
against Purua-Mlmddmd which are Prior Investigations is usually called
Vedantamutra* or Brahm/l-*iUra*. The latter name is given to indicate that
Brahman is the spirit embodied in the universe The work is attributed to
BSdarSyana, but in reality many writers of different times appear to have
made their contributions towards ita compilation. In five hundred and five
*utra* which consist mostly of two or three words each, the whole system is
developed. The ailtra* are, however, unintelligible by themselves and leave
everything to the interpreters.
The Veddnta-*iUra* discuss the whole theory of the Brahman in four chapters
The first chapter deals with the nature of the Brahman and his relation to the
' Ibid., p, 278.
Hiriyanna, op. cit.. p. 135
38
Pre-Islamic Indian Thought
world and the individual souls; the second is polemical; the third deals with the
ways and means of attaining Brahmanindya; and the fourth treats of the fruit
of Brahman-vidyd and after-life.
B&darfiyana believes both in the eternity and infallibility of the Vedan
He recognises two sources of knowledge: truli and imrti or perception and
inference, and maintains that fruii is the basis for smrti. Similarly, he draws
a hard and fast line between two realms: one amenable to reason and the other
lying beyond it. The area where reason is competent is that of prahrii together
with its manifestations, while the realm of Brahman lies beyond the reach of
discursive reasoning. Reason can flourish among properties, relations, and
characteristics, while Brahman is devoid of all these things and. therefore,
cannot be reached through inferential knowledge. The only way to reach the
Brahman is to cultivate intuition through meditation and devotion. It will
reveal that the Brahman is the basis of reality: the material as well as the
final cause of the universe. In creating the world God had no purpose to
fulfil; what seems to be His activity is nothing but sport. God is omniscient,
formless, and one, in whom the prakrli and the purupl of the Sdrikhya system
combine, both being manifestations or modes of the same Ultimate Reality.
After creating the elements. Brahman entered into them and determined
the characteristic manner of their development and production of other
things. The Brahman, as it were, transforms Himself into everything that
is caused by Him since cause and effect mnst have similar natures. Two
illustrations are given to prove the identity of cause and effect; one is drawn
from an inanimate object and the other from an animate object. It is said
that when a piece of cloth is rolled up ite real nature remains hidden, but
when it is spread out it can be known truly. lakewise a person is paralyzed
if his breath is held but becomes active the moment his breath is released,
In both these cases the qualities of the antecedent are different from those
of the consequent although the object is the same, which shows that despite
differences the cause and the effect remain identical. Brahman and the world
are not disparate in spite of differences. The wooden table is not different
from the wood in its essentia! nature; similarly. Brahman is not different from
the multiform objects of the universe.
The world is a sport, or Bid of the Brahman, which means that it is without
purpose and without significance. It is hard to assign any meaning to the
universe, since Vedintism declares, "Brahman is true, the world is false, the
i soul is Brahman and nothing else." And again, "There is nothing worth gaining
■ there is nothing worth enjoying, there is nothing worth knowing but Brahman
: alone, for he who knows Brahman is Brahman."**
In calling the world a sport there is however no implication that God created
: sufferings for mankind to take pleasure out of them. This would be a very
> uncharitable view and altogether cynical. Sufferings, woes, and ills of men as
Max Muller op. pit., p. KM).
39
A History of Muslim Philoeophy
well as of other objects. both animate and inanimate, are the result of thoir
own karma—a law of moral causation which workB inexorably and leaves no
scope for the interference of divine or non divine agencies. Likewise all evils
and sins are due to karma; they are not caused by Brahman.
The self is concealed within five sheaths, that is to say, five superimposed
psycho-sorrahc layers which should be tom away through ethical discipline
and self-denial. Avidyi (nesdenoe) is lack of insight into the nature of reality
and is a major hindrance in the path of moksa or release. It is an article of
faith with Vedantism that liberation can be obtained through knowledge.
Since the Self is with us, though concealed and hidden behind five sheaths,
when true knowledge is gained it will be seen that one realizes one’s own
true nature. This realization can be effected through yogic practices, critical
thought, or anj' other orthodox way. Ethical discipline is also directed to the
same end. Its object is to cleanse the soul through rigorous self-discipline and
impeccable conduct, in a spirit of non-attachmont.
The highest knowledge is Brahman-vidyd or vision of God which is attained
through the realization of the Self. After an individual soul has reached
Brahman there is no return for the liberated soul. This goal is expressed through
the oft-quoted verse from the Upanioads. “lie who realizes Brahman through
knowing becomes Brahman.”*1
5. The NySya System.—As already observed, because of the singular ab
sence or deficiency of historical data, little is known of Gautama, tho author
of Nyaya. He is as much a subject of fanciful legend as Kapila, the author of
the Sahkhya system.
The word nyaya means “propriety" or “fitness.” The system undertakes to
declare tho method of arriving at that knowledge of truth the fruit of which,
it promises, is the chief end of man. Tho name is also used in a more limited
application to denominate the proper method of setting forth an argument.
This has led to the practice of calling the Ayuya the Hindu logic, which by
the way does not adequately describe the scope of tho system. According to
the author of the system, “Supreme felicity is attained through knowledge
about the true nature of the sixteen categories (Paddrthas).”**
The first work of the Nyaya system consists of sixty aphorisms, and the
first sutra gives a list of the subjects to be discussed. These are sixteen in
number: (1) pramdna or the means by which right knowledge may be gained;
(2) prameya or tho object of thought; (3) doubt; (4) motive; (S) instance or
example; (6) dogma or determinate truth; (7) argument or syllogism; (8) con
futation; (9) ascertainment; (10) controversy; (11) jangling; (12) objection
or cavilling; (13) fallacy; (14) perversion; (15) futility; (16) conclusion nr the
confounding of an adversary.
Of the sixteen categories the first two are important; others are only
“ Murytaka-Uponifad. 3. 2. 9.
“ Nyaya Sutra, Book I. Chapter IV. Sutra I
40
Pro-Isbunic Indian Thought
subsidiary indicating the course which a discussion may take from the start
to the finish, i.e., from the enunciation of the doubt to the confounding of
the doubter.
The first category by the name of prdmana signifies proof or evidence, and
denotes the legitimate means of knowledge within the rational older. It
enumerates four kinds of proofs, namely, perception by the senses fpratyofao);
inference (anumdna); comparison (upamdna); and verbal authority (tabda)
including revelation and tradition. Inference, it says, is of three kinds: from
cause to effect, from effect to cause, and by analogy.
The argument which is also called nydya consists of five constituent members.
These are: (1) the proposition to be proved (pralijftd), (2) the reason justifying
this proposition (hrlu). (3) the example cited in support of the reason fuddb-
rana), (4) the application of the first proposition to the particular case in
question (upanaya), and (8) the result (nigamana), which is a statement
of tho fact that the proposition has been proved.
A typical Indian syllogism would bo as follows:
1. Yonder mountain has fire.
2. For it has smoke.
3. Whatever has smoke has fire.
4. Yonder mountain has smoke such as is invariably accompanied by fire.
5. Therefore, yonder mountain has fire.
The linguistic form is not considered necessary to syllogism. This is common
to all forms of Indian logic.
According to tho Nydya, a notion or a concept can bp either right or wrong.
In the first case it is obtained through perception or inference or comparison
or revelation. A wrong notion is one which is not derived from proof and
originates either from doubt or from false premises or from error. A wise man
avoids these as well as passions and aversions and is profoundly indifferent to
all action.
Blessedness is deliverance from pain. The primary evil is pain. There are
twenty-one varieties of evil which spring from the organs of sense, from the
objects of sense, from mental apprehensions, and even from pleasure. "The
soul attains to this deliverance by knowledge, by meditation on itself, by
not earning fresh merit or demerit through actions sprung from desire, and
by becoming free from passions through knowledge of the evil inherent in
objecta. It is knowledge . . . and not virtue which obtains final deliverance
from the body."
**
The Nydya is predominantly intellectual and analytical. Its value lies in
its methodology or the theory of knowledge on which it builds its philosophy.
This theory it applies not only to one system but to all systems with modifi
cations here and there. Chatterjee and Datta observe that "the Nyaija theory
*• John llavics. Hindu rhiloiKiphy. Kegan Paid. London. 1884. p. 124,
41
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of pluralistic realism ia not so satisfying aa ita logic. Here we have a common
sense view of the world as a system of independent realities.... It does not
give us a systematic philosophy of the world in the light of one universa
absolute principle."1’
The Indian syllogism bears a close resemblanoe to Aristotelian syllogism
especially when it is simplified or abridged, consisting either of tho last three
or the first three terms only. It is, therefore, suggested by a good many histo
rians that cither Aristotle or the builders of the Nydya system drew inspiration
from the other. It is also possible that the obligation is mutual.
6. Thr Vaiienka System. —Faitevifai is derived from videaa which means
difference, signifying thereby that multiplicity and not unity lies at the basis
of tho universe. It is expounded by Kanada in the Vaidefiba-Sulra which
contains about five hundred and fifty aphorisms. Book I discusses the five
categories—substance, quality, action, community or genus, and particularity;
Book 2 deals with the substances—earth, water, air, ether, space, and time;
Book 3 is concerned with the problems of mind and self and also touches the
theory of inference; Book 4 is about the atomic theory and discusses the nature
of body and tho visibility of quality; Book 5 deals with motion; Book 6 contains
duties of the four stages of life; Book 7 treats of quality, the atomic theory,
the self, and inherence together; Books 8 and II deal with perception and infer
ence; while Book 10 is concerned with causality and other related questions.
A fundamental assumption of this system is that objects are independent
of the perceiving mind and also of one another. Philosophically, the doctrine
may be called pluralistic realism. The entire world of experience can be
divided into nine dravya or substanoes together with their properties and
relations. These substances are earth, water, fire, air, dfaMa, time, space,
self, and mana
*. Besides substances which simply provide a framework for the
whole universe there are paddrtha, or categories, seven in number, namely,
guna, karma, viiesa. samardya, sdmanya, aAAdua, and dravya, which can be
translated as quality, action, individuality, necessary relation, universals,
negation, and substance. Qualities depend upon substances, but they can be
independently conceived and so exist by their own nature. No distinction is
recognized between mental and material qualities or between the primary and
secondary qualities. Quite consistent with ita pluralistic standpoint, tho doc
trine holds that the substanoes reveal their nature through the qualities in
which they differ and not in which they agree.
In regarding earth, air, water, and fire as substances, what is implied is
that the entire structure of the universe can be interpreted in terms of material
causes which are supersensible. The ultimate stuff of which this universe ii
made is the mass of atoms that arc round, extremely minute, invisible, incap
able of division, eternal in themselves but not in their aggrogate form. Even
*’ An Introduction Io Indian Philosophy, Calcutta University, Calcutta, 1M4,
p. 247
42
Pro-Islarnic Indian Thought
mind (mantu) ia regarded aa an atom extremely email, because of which only
ono sensation can be conveyed to the soul at one time.
Vaiieeika is basically a dualistic philosophy inasmuch as it recognizes the
etemality both of atoms anti souls. In fact every Hindu system regards matter
as eternal. The only exception is the school of the VcdAntists which takes
matter aa the illusive manifestation of the one Supreme Brahman who is
Himself the all.
According to KapAda, the irummum bonum for man is nothing but deliver-
ance from pain, which can be achieved through knowledge, resulting in the soul
getting into a state of a tranquil, unconscious passivity.
The Influence oj Islam on Hinduum.—From the account of the six systems
of Indian philosophy given above, such writers aa were born after the advent
of Islam in India have been excluded; not that they were in any way less
important than those who saw the light of the day before the first/seventh
century, but because their thinking shows unmistakable signs, implicit as well
as explicit, of Muslim impact. Details of this impact have been provided in a
Beparate chapter of this volume. Here it will suffice to Bay that the impact
was very deep, firm, and abiding, and left no aspect of Indian thought
untouched.
The contact of the Muslims with the Indians began as early as the end of
the first/seventh century, and still continues to the advantage of both. Islam
was introduced into the Indian sub-continent by Arab traders; it was propa
gated by mystics and saints; and it was established by Muslim rulers of various
dynasties who made India their home like several other Muslim immigrants.
The Muslims brought with them their ideology, their philosophy and religion,
their beliefs and practices, and, above all, an unconquerable passion to share
this wisdom wil h others. The Sufis who were thinkers of no mean order suc
ceeded by their example and precept in imparting to the natives that ideology
and philosophy which the Muslims had expounded from their understanding
of the Qur'An, the Haditjj, and the Sunnah.
Muhammad bin QAaim ia ranked aa the first Muslim who entered India aa a
conqueror in M/712. His example was followed by a long line of Muslim rulers
who wielded the sceptre of authority over the Indian sub-oontinent till 1274/
1857, when Indian "mutiny" took place and the Britishers found a splendid
oxcuso to wipe off the last vestige of the Muslim Empire. During a period
of one thousand years when the Indian sub-oontinent lay prostrate at the
feet of the Muslim emperors, many of whom enjoyed full autocratic powers.
It is very unlikely that the culture and philosophy which they cherished and
treasured should have left no imprint on the thoughts and beliefs of the native
population.
There was, however, no imposition of one culture over another. Culture can
never be introduced by the sword, no matter how long and sharp. What
happened on the Indian soil was not the replacement of one culture by another
but an amalgamation of the two. It was a case of the witling acceptance of the
43
k Hirtory of Muslim Philosophy
salient feature* of Muslim culture and making them a part and pared of the
culture of India. What Saiikara and RAmanuja did in the sphere of philosophy
was done by others in the fields of religion, ethics, and aocial polity. The result
was a great upheaval in tho world of Hindu thought. A re-evaluation and a
re-appraisal of old values and thoughts took place on a gigantic scale. Mono
theism was stressed and so was universal brotherhood of mankind and a positive
approach to life. Casteless society became the goal of social reforms and the
Sudraa, the accursed and the condemned, were accorded the right to live like
others. All this was the product of the impact of Islam on Hinduism.
There is evidence to show that the Nyaya and the Vailexka were organited
into one system after Islam had firmly entrenched itself in India. Not only
were the two systems welded into one, they also became monotheistic and
advanced for the first time in the history of Hindu thought what are known
as the Hindu proofs for the existence of God.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Albert achweiuer. Indian Thought and Ils Development, Black, London. 1936;
Arthur Borriedalu Keith. The Religion and Philosophy of the Veda and Upamgads,
Harvard University Press, 1925; Indian Logic and Atomism: An Exposition of the
Nydya and Vaidefika Systems; Anthony Macdonell, I'edic Mythology. Verlag von
Karl J. TrUbner. 8trassburg, 1897; The Sdmkhya System; Annie Beaant. An
Introduction to Yoga, Theosophical Publishing House, Madras, 1927; Bern mad hab
Barua. Prolegomena to a History of Buddhist Philosophy, University of Calcutta.
1921.; Bhikan Lal Atreya, The Elements of Indian Ix/gtc; Charles A. Moore. Essays
in East-West Philosophy: An Attempt al World Philosophical Synthesis, University
of Hawaii Frees. 1951; Dskshinaranjan Shaatri. A Short History of Indian Material
ism, Sensationalism and Hedonism: Edward Hamilton Johnston, Early SAmkhya:
An Essay on Its Historical Development according to the Texts. Royal Asiatic
Society. London. 1937; Freidench Max Muller, The Six Systems of Indian Philo
sophy, 1903; Edgerton Franklin. The Bhagavad (Ilia. Translated and Interpreted;
The. Mimimsa Nyiya PrakdSa of Apadna: A Treatise on the MimAmed System
by Apadera: Geoffrey Theodore Carrett, Ed., The I-egacy of India, Oxford Uni
versity Press, 1951; Heinrich Zimmer, PAdrwopbiu of India, ed. Joseph Campbell.
Bollingen Series, 1951; John Niool Farquhar, An Outline of the Religious Literature
of India; James Houghton Woods, Tr.. The Yoga System of Patanjali. or the
Ancient Hindu Doctrine of Concentration of Mind. Harvard University Press. 1914;
K. C. Bhattacharya. Studies in Vedantism. University of Calcutta. 1909; Kokileawar
Bhattacharya, An Introduction to Adimila Philosophy, Hiriyanna, Outlines of
Indian Philosophy, 1932: The Essentials of Indian Philosophy, Allen * Unwin.
London, 1949; Moritz Wintemitz, A History of Indian Literature, tr. from original
German by Mrs. S. Ketkar. 1927-33; Molian Lal Mehta, Owlinee of Jaina Philo
sophy; Nicol McNicol. Indian Theism from the Vedic to the Mohammaden Period.
1915; Maurice Bloomfield, The Religion of the Fede, the Ancient Religion of India
(from fig-Veda w Upanisads). Cambridge University Press, 1908; Nathnmi Tatia,
Studies in Jama Philosophy; Paul Maason-Oureel. Comparative Philosophy, 1926;
Pandit Motion Lal Sandal. The Philosophical Teachings in the Upanisads; Paul
Dahlke, Buddhism and Its Place in the. Mental Life of Mankind; Panduning Vaman
Kane, A Brief Sketch of the PHrva-Mimdriisd System. 1924; Reno Guenon, Introduc-
44
Pre-tslamic Chinese Thought
lion to lAs Study of Hindu Doctrines. Luzac, London. 1945; Richard Garbe. fidmLAyn
und Toga. Verlag von Karl J. Triibner, Strasaburg, 1896; Surendranath Duagupta.
.4 History of Indian Philosophy. 5 Vola.. Cambridge University Press. 1957;
8. Rtolhakriahnan, Indian Philosophy. 2 Vols.. Allen & Unwin. London. 1951;
The Philosophy of the Vpanifads, 1924; rt al. (Eda.) History of Philosophy. Haelen,
and Western. 2 Vols.. Allen A Unwin. London, 1952; 8. C. Chakravarti, The Philo
sophy of the Upanisads. University of Calcutta. 1935; Sir Edwin Arnold. Tr..
The Sony Celestial or Hhayaiad Oils, Trubner, London. 1885; Sailananda Bhaduri.
Studies in Nyiya Valletta Metaphysics; Satiah Chandra Vidyabhuana. .4 f/utory
of Indian Logic, 1921; Sarat Chandra Bannerji, Tr.. The SSmkhya Philosophy:
SdmkhydkanM unlh Gaudapada'e Scholia and Xarayana’s Olois; Swami Abheda-
nanda. Veda,din Philosophy; T. R. Srinivasa Aiyangar. Tr.. Sila Upanisads;
T.R.V. Murti, The Central Philosophy of Buddhism. Allen * Unwin, London.
I960; Viahuskckhara Bhattacharya, The Basie Conceptions of Buddhism. 1934;
William Montgomery McGovern. Introduction of Mahdydna Buddhism; William
Spence Urquhart, The Vedanta and Modem Thought. Oxford University Prrea. 1928.
Chapter II
a
PRE-ISLAMIC CHINESE THOUGHT
In the present chapter we shall attempt to survey some of the salient
features of Chinese philosophy avoiding any specialized or detailed discussion
of tho individual schools or of the philosophical technicalities involved. Our
purpose is to present, in brief compass, an account of Chinese philosophical
thought indicating a number of its peculiar characteristics and its apparent
major limitations. This, then, will be a summary of the outstanding peculiari
ties of Chinese philosophy prior to the arrival of any significant foreign
influence.
First, a few words with respect to the period of Chinese philosophy we are
covering, that of the Chou Dynasty (11221-256 B.C.). The last centuries
of the Chou were marked by political and social turmoil associated with the
disintegration of feudalism. The Chinese world was tom by internecine warfare,
old political powers were overturned and old values challenged nr discarded.
During this "time of troubles." to use Toynbee’s term, Chino produced a great
variety of original schools of philosophical thought, such as Confucianism.
Taoism, Mohitun. and Legalism as well as a Chinese version of Epicureanism,
tho so-col led Logicians, and the Yin Yang school. Because of the creative
freshness and richness of the later Chou, it may be regarded as the clasaiCBl
period of Chinese philosophy. Our discussion is. perforce, limited to these
claarieal philosophies and their spirit: Chinese medieval and modern philo
sophies are not delineated, nor is Buddhism in China, nor Chinese Buddhism.
Tho primary reason for thia concentration on tile Chou philosophies is that
they represent the indigenous Chinese schools of philosophy before they
45
k Hurtory of Muslim Philosophy
salient features of Muslim culture and making them a part and parcel of the
culture of India. What Sahkara and RAmanuja did in the sphere of philosophy
was done bv others in the fields of religion, ethics, and social polity. The result
was a great upheaval in the world of Hindu thought. A re-evaluation and a
re-appraisal of old values and thoughts took place on a gigantic scale. Mono
theism was stressed and so was universal brotherhood of mankind and a positive
approach to life. Casteless society became the goal of social reforms and the
Siidraa, the accursed and the condemned, were accorded the right to live [ike
others. All this was the product of the impact of Islam on Hinduism.
There is evidence to show that the Nydya and the Vaiieska were organised
into one system after Islam had firmly entrenched itself in India. Not only
were tho two systems welded into one, they also became monotheistic and
advanced for the first time in the history of Hindu thought what are known
as the Hindu proofs for the existence of God.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Albert achweiuer. Indian Thought and Ito Development, Black, London. 1936;
Arthur Borrieiiale Keith. The Religion and Philosophy of the I'oda and Cpameads.
Harvard University Press, 1923; Indian Logic and Atomism: An Exposition of the
Nydya and Vaidegika Systems; Anthony Macdonell. I'rdic Mythology. Verlag von
Karl J. Trubner. Strassburg. 1897; The Sdihkhya System; Annie Besant. An
Introduction to Yoga, Theosophical Publishing House. Madras. 1927; Benimndhab
Barua. Prolegomena to a History of Buddhist Philosophy, University of Calcutta,
1921; Bhikan I.al A treys, The Elements of Indian Logic; Charles A. Moore, Essays
in East-West Philosophy: An Attempt at World Philosophical Synthesis. University
of Hawaii Press. 1931; Dakshinoranjan Shaatri. A Short History of Indian Material
ism. Sensationalism and Hedonism: Eduard Hamilton Johnston, Early Sdmkhya:
An Essay on Its Historical Development according to ths Texts. Royal Asiatic
Society. London, 1937; Freidench Max Muller, The Six Systems of Indian Philo
sophy. 1903; Edgerton Franklin, The Bhagavad Gita. Translated and Interpreted;
Ths. MimdmsA Nydya PraJMa of Apadera: A Treatise on the MimAmsd System
by Apadera; Geoffrey Theodore Garrett. Ed., The I-egacy of India, Oxford Uni
versity Press, 1931; Heinrich Zimmer, Philosophies of India, ed. Joseph Campbell,
Beilingen Series, 1931; John Nicol Farquhar. An Outline of the Religious Literature
of India; James Houghton Woods, Tr.. The Yoga System of Patanjali, or the
Ancient Hindu Doctrine of Concentration of Mind. Harvard University Proas, 1914;
K. C. Bhattacharya. Studies in Vedanlism, University of Calcutta. 1909; Kokileawar
Hhattacharya, An Introduction Io Adwaila Philosophy; Hiriyanna, Outlines of
Indian Philosophy. 1932; The Essentials of Indian Philosophy. Allen * Unwin.
London, 1949; Morita Wintomita, A History of Indian Literature, tr. from original
German by Mrs. S. Ketkar, 1927-33; Mohan Lal Mohta, Outlines of Jaina Philo
sophy; Nicol McNicol. Indian Theism from the Vedic to the Mohammaden Period.
1913; Maurice Bloomfield, The Religion of the Veda, the Ancient Religion of India
fjrom Eg-Veda to Upanigads), Cambridge University Press. 1908; Nathnml Tatis,
Studies in Jatno Philosophy; Paul Masson-Ourael. Comparative Philosophy, 1928;
Pandit Mohan Lal Sandal, The Philosophical Teachings in the Upantguds; Paul
Dahlke, Buddhism and Ils Place in the Mental Life of Mankind; Pandiirang Vaman
Kane. A Brief Sketch of the PHrva-Mimariud System. 1924; Reno Guonon, Introduc-
44
Pre-tslamic Chinese Thought
lion to lAs Study of Hindu Doctrines. Luzac, London. 1945; Richard Garbe. fidmLAyn
und Toga. Verlag von Karl J. Triibner, Strasaburg, 1896; Surendranath Dusgupta.
.4 History of Indian Philosophy. 5 Vola.. Cambridge University Press. 1957;
8. Rtolhakriahnan, Indian Philosophy. 2 Vols.. Allen & Unwin. London. 1951;
The Philosophy of the Vpanifads. 1924; u al. (Eda.) History of Philosophy. Hasler,,
and Western. 2 Vols.. Allen A Unwin. London, 1952; 8. C. Chakravarti, The Philo
sophy of the Upanisads. University of Calcutta. 1935; Sir Edwin Arnold. Tr..
The Sony Celestial or Hhayaiad UUd, Trubner, London. 1885; Sailananda Bhaduri.
Studies in Nyiya Valletta Metaphysics; Satiah Chandra Vidyabhuana. .4 History
of Indian Logic, 1921; Sarat Chandra Bannerji, Tr.. The SSmkhya Philosophy:
Samkhyhkamk-a unlh Gaudapada'e Scholia and S'arayana's Olois; Swami Abheda-
nanda. Veda,die Philosophy; T. R. Srinivasa Aiyangar. Tr.. 6wa Upanisads;
T.R.V. Murti, The Central Philosophy of Buddhism. Allen * Unwin, London.
I960; Viahuskckhara Bhattacharya, The Basie Conceptions of Buddhism. 1934;
William Montgomery McGovern. Introduction of Mahdydna Buddhism; William
Spence Urquhart, The Vedanta and Modem Thought. Oxford University Priwa. 1928.
Chapter II
a
PRE-ISLAMIC CHINESE THOUGHT
In the present chapter we shall attempt to survey some of the salient
features of Chinese philosophy avoiding any specialized or detailed discussion
of tho individual schools or of the philosophical technicalities involved. Our
purpose is to present, in brief compass, an account of Chinese philosophical
thought indicating a number of its peculiar characteristics and its apparent
major limitations. This, then, will be a summary of the outstanding peculiari
ties of Chinese philosophy prior to the arrival of any significant foreign
influence.
First, a few words with respect to the period of Chinese philosophy we are
covering, that of the Chou Dynasty (11221-256 B.C.). The last centuries
of the Chou were marked by political and social turmoil associated with the
disintegration of feudalism. The Chinese world was tom by internecine warfare,
old political powers were overturned and old values challenged nr discarded.
During this "time of troubles." to use Toynbee’s term, Chino produced a great
variety of original schools of philosophical thought, such as Confucianism.
Taoism, Mohitun. and Legalism as well as a Chinese version of Epicureanism,
tho so-col led Logicians, and the Yin Yang school. Because of the creative
freshness and richness of the later Chou, it may be regarded as the clasaiCBl
period of Chinese philosophy. Our discussion is. perforce, limited to these
claarieal philosophies and their spirit: Chinese medieval and modern philo
sophies are not delineated, nor is Buddhism in China, nor Chinese Buddhism.
The primary reason for thia concentration on the Chou philosophies is that
they represent the indigenous Chinese schools of philosophy before they
45
A Hiatory of Muslim Philosophy
were affected by the advent of other philosophical or religious ideas, for
example, Buddhism and its attendant Indian metaphysics. Moreover, though
some of these schools did not exercise a lasting influence on subsequent Chine.*-
intellectual life, as was the case with Legalism which passed into oblivion with
the collapse of the shortlived Ch’in Dynasty (221-207 B.C.), and with
Mohism which died out a few centuries after the death of Mo Tzu, its founder
other schools, such as Confucianism. Taoism, and elements of the Yin Yang
school, persisted throughout the history of Chinese philosophy. Confucianism,
though eclipsed at times, slowly gained a predominant position and became
a powerful force in the moulding and direction of Chinese civilization.
While these latter schools survived, the others passed into insignificance.
For instance, the school of the Logicians never exercised any great influence
on the development of later Chinese philosophy. Also. Yang Chu’a thought,
somewhat similar to the philosophy of Epicurus, was never a threat to the
other schools since it consisted more of an attitude toward life than a
philosophy of existence. It was too individualistic, too self-centred for wide
acceptance by the Chinese.
To appreciate adequately the peculiar features of Chinese philosophical
thought, it is important that one be cognizant of certain facts of Chinese
geography, economics, and sociology with regard to its emergence and develop
ment. The distinguished contemporary Chinese philosopher and historian of
Chinese philosophy, Fung Yu-lan. discusses all three topics at considerable
length.1 From the earbest times the Chinese considered the world and their
land, I’ien Asia (all under heaven), to be one and the same. Because of its
unique geographical position—a vast continental land mass bounded by a
great mountain range, desert, and the ooean—the early culture of China
appears to have developed in comparative isolation from that of other great
centres of civilization. At any rate, it Beams fairly certain that the Chinese
thinkers of the later Chou were not in a position comparable to that of their
Greek philosophical contemporaries via d vis the intellectual, philosophical,
religious, and scientific thought of the Egyptian and Mesopotamian civilizations.
In developing their philosophies, the Greeks were undoubtedly stimulated by
other highly civilized peoples. An ancient Greek historian once noted that the
Greeks were children compared to tho Egyptians. In contrast, in the develop
nient of ancient Chinese philosophical thought. there doos not seem to have
been any significant cross-fertilization from other centres of civilization outside
the Chou world.
The Greeks and the Chinese differed considerably in their respective economic
conditions. The Greeks were a commercial people to a great extent and were,
therefore, brought into oontact with a wide variety of ideas, oustoms. lands
and peoples. Their conception of the world recognized the existence of other
1 Dork Bodde. Ed., A Short History of Chinese Pfiilooophy, Tho Macmillan
Com|>any. New York, 1948. Chap. 2.
46
Pre-Islamic Chinoao Thought
groat civilizations. The Chinese, however, were mainly an agricultural people.
None of the Chinese philosophers ventured beyond Chou China. There was, in
consequence, a definite insularity attached to Chinese philosophical thought.
In addition to this insularity of thought, there was close affinity between the
Chinese thinker and the Chinese peasant; both were attached to the land.
The Chinese scholar-philosopher was usually a landowner, while the peasant
cultivated the land. "Hence, throughout Chinese history, social and economic
thinking and policy have centred around the utilization and distribution of
land.”** In a sense, ancient Chinese philosophy may be said to have had an
intimate association with, if not absolutely conditioned, by, the peasant
mentality. The Chinese thinkers' "reactions to the universe and their outlook
on life were essentially those of the farmer."’ With the aid of their learning
and genius, the Chinese sages were able “to express what an actual farmer fell
but was incapable of expressing himself.”* Realization of this fact may go
long way towards explaining the predominantly practical tone of Chinese philo
sophical thought. The peculiar problems connected with Chinese economic
life tended to limit the spectrum of values in philosophy. Though Confucianism
and Taoism are "poles apart from one another, yet they are also the two
poles of ono and the same axis. They both express, in one way or another,
the aspirations and inspirations of the farmer.”* Confucianism stressed family
obligations, while Taoism emphasized the power, beauty, and mystery of
nature.
Just as geographical conditions and agricultural life have exerted an influ
ence on the formation and character of Chinese philosophy, so also has done
the Chinese social system, particularly the family. A striking feature of Chinese
philosophical thought is its preoccupation with probloms relating to the ethics
of the family and the Chinese social system. The most outstanding example
of this preoccupation is to be found in Confucianism. "A great deal of Con
fucianism," Fung Yu-lan asserts, "is tho rational justification or theoretical
expression of this social system "• The mental outlook.of the Chinese farmer
os well as his values tended to limit the range of philosophical speculation.
"The way of life of the farmers is to follow nature. They admire nature and
oondemn the artificial, and in their primitivity and innocence, they are easily
made content. They desire no change, nor can they conceive of any change."'
Hero ono may discern the source of strength of much of Chinese classical
philosophy as well aa its weakness. It reflected the attitudes, interests, pre
judices, and values of the Chinese peasant .
A study of classical Chinese philosophy discloses that it possesses at least
• /hid., p. 17.
■ Ibid., p. 18.
• Ibid.
' Ibid., p. IS.
■ Ibid., p. SI
Ibid., p. 2b
47
A History of Muslim Philosophy
four highly distinctive features which may bo a reflection of the dominance of
this peasant mentality: Jack of metaphysics. dearth of logical sophistication,
preoccupation with ethics, and a regressive theory of history.
We shall comment on the last feature first. The traditional Chinese theory
of history is regressive. According to the Chinese, the Golden Age of mankind
was in the dim remoteness of the past and all subsequent history has been a
tragic degeneration from the ancient ideal age. The Chinese sages sought to
find the proper path which would enable mankind to recapture the peace,
justice, and harmony of that Golden Age. Associated with this regressive
conception of history was the tendency of many of the classical schools to
antedate the founder of a rival school of thought. Apparently, in order to
make a school or a point of view more attractive and authoritative, it was felt
necessary to increase its antiquity. The Confucianists. for example, referred
to the mythological rulers. Yao and Shun: the Mohists, in support of their
philosophical position, went back beyond Yao and Shun tn the legendary Yu;
and the Taoists, for their part, went beyond Yu to the mythical Yellow
Emperor. The more ancient the beginning of a school, tho more was it to be
trusted.
The classical Chinese philosophers, for the most part, manifested an aversion
to metaphysical speculation. The Confueianists. Confucius (551-479 B.C.).
Mencius (371-289 B.C.), and Hsun Tzi (298-c. 238 B.C.), showed little
interest in or even awareness of metaphysical questions. Confucius was not
concerned with understanding the character of Ultimate Reality nor with
epistemological problems; his ooncem was with social and political philosophy.
Mencius lacks an interest in metaphysics as such, as does Hsun Tzu. At the
risk of over-simplification, one could say that Confucianism was primarily an
educational philosophy. Though Con(ucius was silent on whether or not human
nature was good or evil, and, though Mencius and Hsun Tzu differ greatly
pn this point—the former maintaining that human nature is good, and the
latter, that it is evil—all three agree on the need and efficacy of education for
inculcating or developing ethical conduct. Subtle metaphysical disquisitions
arc lacking in all three.
Taoism, as set forth in the Tao Tf Chin; and the works of Chuang Tzu
(399-c. 295 B.C.), frequently approaches a metaphysical analysis of reality,
but, more characteristically, ends in a hazy mysticism or appears to be
fascinated with the enunciation of paradoxes. The Taoist saying that he who
knows cannot say and that ho who sayB doos not know the Tao (the Way, or
Ultimate Reality) is not particularly conducive to metaphysical discourse.
Mo Tzu (c. 479-c. 438 B.C.), founder of Mohism, does not show any
interest in metaphysical matters as such. His philosophy stressed an “all
cm bracing love” based upon utility. He condemned aggressive war and urged
an altruism baaed upon mutual self-interest because the results were more
pleasant and usoful to society. His reasons were practical and devoid of any
metaphysical justification.
48
Pre-Islamic Chinese Thought
As for the Logicians, for example, Hui Shih (c. 380-305 B.C.) and Kung-sun
Lung (380-250 B.C.I), their interest comes nearer to being metaphysical
than any other school with the possible exception of the Yin Yang. The
Logicians, frequently referred to as the School of Names (Ming Chia), were
chiefly concerned with problems relating to the relativity and cbangeableness
of all phenomena, as was Hui Shih, or with the concept of universals—the
"names” of things—which, according to Kung-sun Lung, were absolute and
unchangeable. Hui Shih contended that concrete things were undergoing
oonstant change and were, therefore, different from one instant to the next.
Kung-sun Lung insisted that the “names" of things, similar to Platonic ideas,
were absolute and unchangeable. In order to substantiate his position, he
employed epistemological arguments. One of his most famous arguments is
oontained in his discussion concerning "a white horse is not a horse." Many
of the Logicians' arguments posed paradoxes and logical conundrums and.
for this reason, were disparaged by the Confucianists. For example, the
great Chinese historian of the Han, Ssu-ma T'an, himself a Confucianist
described the work of the Logicians as "minute examinations of trifling points
in complicated and elaborate statements, which made it impossible for others
to refute their ideas.”* Because of the lack of interest in metaphysical questions
peculiar to Chinese classical philosophers in general, the influence of the
Logicians was not especially significant in the development of later Chinese
thought.
The Legalists, whose most important representative is Han Fei Tail (died
233 B.C.), were not concerned with problems of metaphysics, logio, or episte
mology. Their fundamental concern was political: What happens when a ruler
is weak, wicked, or inoompetent! How is a State to be unified and governed I
For the Legalists, the answer was impersonal law in tho place of personal
ethics or moral principles. Tho Legalists, though at odds with the Confucianists,
show a similarly overriding interest in the practical aspects of political and
social philosophy. Metaphysical speculation is a pastime which neither of these
classical schools pursued.
Tsou Yen (305-240 B. C.) of the Yin Yang school probably represents t he
extent to which tho Chinese were willing to pursue metaphysical speculation
without the pressure of foreign ideas. Certainly the Taoist and Yin Yang
represent indigenous Chinese metaphysical thinking prior to the advent of
Buddhism. The Yin Yang school, however, lacks genuine metaphysical
profundity and, in essence, appears to be based on a dualistic theory of the
interaction of the female and male principles of the universe, the Yin and the
Yang respectively. Neither tho Yin Yang school nor Taoism possesses a meta,
physical presentation approaching the works of Plato or Aristotle. One has the
feeling that the thinkers of these two schools educed one or two ideas and then
used them uncritically and mechanically to explain various phenomena.
' Quoted in Fung Yu-lsn’s A Short Hiriory of Chinete I'hilotophy, p. 81.
49
A History of Muslim Philosophy
In general, Chinese philosophers either ignored metaphysics or showed only
a spasmodic interest in understanding, logically and systematically, the nature
and character of the Ultimate Reality. Only after the introduction of Buddhism
did the Chinese philosophcra concern themselves seriously with metaphysics
"Even the basic metaphysical problems, such as God, universals, space and
time, matter and spirit, were either not discussed, except in Buddhism, or
discussed only occasionally, and then always for the sake of ethics.”’ Chinese
thinkers confined themselves to social and political thought; they had always
in mind the capability of their respective philosophies for practical implemen
tation. As metaphysics was, in the main, slighted or ignored, so were episte
mological problems.
An examination of the history of Chinese philosophy illustrates plentifully
that Chinese philosophers occupied themselves with questions of human
adjustment to nature or the individual's adjustment to society. The Taoists
stressed the former, the Confncianista the latter. The Taoists regarded society
as unnatural and unnecessary for Good Life. In thia respect it resembles
Romanticism. Confucianism maintains that society is natural and necessary
for the life of a human being. Society permits a man to satisfy his ethical
obligations and also affords him an opportunity to enrich his life with learning,
art, music, and moral example. Society is not only a structure of ethical and
social relationships but also a product of man's cultural heritage Man as a
member of society is able to appreciate tradition, literature, ceremonies—all
those things which are not absolutely necessary for physical survival hut which
are nevertheless the very essence of civilised, cultured existence. Aa Taoism
lauds the state of nature, it is akin to Romanticism; Confucianism is allied
to Classicism,
In addition to a lack of metaphysical interest or regard for epistemological
problems. Chinese philosophical thought, both classical and medieval, is distin
guished by its patent deficiency of logical refinement . Chinese philosophical
discourses are usually unsystematic and infrequently based upon rigid logical
argumentation. Tile classical philosopher's approach was simple; his use of an
elaborate philosophical method was almost non-existent The Chinese philoso
pher was primarily engrossed in questions of ethics and with practical matters
relating to the ordering of society according to proper moral principles or.
as in the case of Taoism, with the way of nature and naturalness. The arguments
employed by the philosophers were eminently practical in the sense that they
made no appeal to complicated logical analysis, theory, or hypothesis, but
appealed to man's common sense. It would be helpful to illustrate the type
of “logical" argumentation frequently encountered in the works of Chinese
classical philosophers.
■ Wmg-tsit Chan, “Synthesis in Chinese Metaphysics," fi’ssoy. in K<ur TTesr
hilotophy, e*i. witli an Introduction by Charles A. Moore. Univeraitt of Hawaii
Press, Honolulu. 1951, p. 163
50
Pre-Islamic Chinese Thought
The ancients who wished to illustrate illustrious virtue throughout
the kingdom, first ordered well their own states. Wishing to order well
their states, they first regulated their families. Wishing to regulate their
families, they first cultivated their persons. Wishing to cultivate their
persons, they first rectified their hearts. Wishing to rectify their hearts
they first sought to be sincere in their thoughts. Wishing to be sincere
in their thoughts, they first extended to the utmost their knowledge
Such extension of knowledge lay in the investigation of things.
"Things being investigated, knowledge became complete. Their know
ledge being complete, their thoughts were sincere. Their thoughts being
sincere, their hearts were then rectified. Their hearts being rectified,
their persona were cultivated. Their persons being cultivated, their
familics were regulated. Their families being regulated, their states were
rightly governed. Their states being rightly governed, the whole kingdom
was made tranquil and happy.’’1*
That an over-emphasis upon logical analysis may inhibit novel ideas and
conceptions of reality, few will deny. Too great a reliance upon logical clarity
precision, ami consistency may lead to sterile thought. The later medieval
period in Europe, which was dominated by Scholastic logic, illustrates suffi
ciently the perils involved in an over-estimation of the power and validity of
logical analysis. The Scholastics appear to have regrettably misunderstood
the value of logic. The medieval Schoolmen erred in the direction of too much
emphasis upon logical acuteness whereas, in contradistinction, the Chinese
appear to have been blind to the importance of logics I refinement. Whether
through disinterest, or because of the intrinsic difficulties involved in their
own written language (pictographs and ideographs), Chinese philosophers do
not seem to have understood the proper role of logic in the acquisition of new
knowledge. In one of his works, Alfred North Whitehead states succinctly
the crucial part logic may play in the advancement of the frontiers of human
knowledge. "Logic, properly used," he writes, "docs not shackle thought. It
gives freedom, and above all, boldness. Illogical thought hesitates to draw
conclusions, because it never knows either what it means, or what it assumes,
or how far it trusts its own assumptions, or what will be the effect of any
modification of assumptions.” Continuing, he remarks, "Also the mind un
trained in that part of constructive logic which is relevant to the subject in
hand will be ignorant of the sort of conclusions which follow from various
sorts of assumptions, and will be correspondingly dull in divining the inductive
laws."11 One can hardly fail to agree with Whitehead's observation when
studying Chinese classical philosophy as well as much of the philosophy of the
later schools in China.
'• James Legge, Tr„ Great Learning (Ta Hrurh), farms 4 and 5.
u Alfred North Whitehead. The. Aim o( Education, The New American Library,
Now York. 1953, p. 122.
51
A History of Muslim Philosophy
By confining their attention to the world of everyday affairs and common
sense, the Chinese savants felt no need to engage in metaphysical speculation
in a systematic manner, nor did they feel any desire to indulge in the luxury of
logical subtlety. "Therefore," a well-known Japanese philosopher comments,
"when their philosophy did not vanish in the mist of vague mysticism, as in
the case of Taoism, it tenaciously clung to the agnosticism of everyday
experience... .”** As we study the Taoist classic, Tao Tt Ching, we can readily
understand what is meant by a philosophy losing itself "in the mist of vague
mysticism,” for example:
The Tao that can be told of
Is not the Absolute Tao;
The Names that can be given
Are not Absolute Names.
The Nameless is the origin of Heaven and Earth;
The Named is the Mother of All Things.
Therefore:
Oftentimes, one strips oneself of passion
In order to see the Secret of Life;
Oftentimes, one regards life with passion,
In order to see its manifest results.
These two (the Secret and its manifestations)
Are (in their nature) the same;
They are given different names
When they become manifest.
They may both be called the Cosmic Mystery:
Reaching from the Mystery into the Deeper Mystery
Is the Gate to the Secret of All Life.1*
This may be an example of "pure speculation" on tho part of a Chinese
philosopher If so. one is inclined again to agree with Whitehead who also
observed: "Pure speculation, undisciplined by the scholarship of detailed fact
or the scholarship of exact logic, is on the whole more useless than pure scholar
ship, unrelieved by speculation.”1* Tho Taoists seem to have engaged in "pure
speculation" fairly consistently. For their part, the Confucianists emphasized
learning and traditional scholarship and the "business" of social existence and
its obligations.*
14
“ Daiseta Teitaro, .4 Brie/ History 0/ Early Chineae ThUosophy. Second Edition
I’robsthain 4 Co.. London. 1014. pp. II 12.
11 hoolsr. thr Book 0/ Tao. tr. Lin Yutang in Wisdom of China and Indm
«l. idem. The Modem Library-, Now York, 195a, p. 553.
14 Alfred North Whitehead, Adventure* of Idea?, The New American Library.
New York. 1955, pp. 112 13.
52
Pre-Islmnie Chinese Thought
Unfortunately, the excessive engrossment in the realm of the common
place was as detrimental as the marked tendency to mysticism. Both of these
extremes tended to stultify the adventure of thought toward new possibilities
of achievement. When Chinese thought did not float away in the clouds, it
remained earth-bound.
Granted that the confluence of tho regressive theory of history, the lack
of metaphysical speculation, anti a pronounced deficiency of logical refinement
are distinctive features of classical Chinese philosophy, in general, probably
the most significant characteristic—the one which may help explain why
metaphysics and logic languished—is the dominant concern with ethics, for,
indeed, there is little doubt that ethics was the main oonoern of Chinese
philosophers. There were but few exceptions during the classical period and
even thereafter. Ethics played a major role in Chinese philosophy. “The moral
life,” Daisetz Teitaro Suzuki writes, "can be said to have been the only
philosophical subject which . . . has seriously interested the Chinese, and which
has been considered worthy of their earnest speculation."1* By focussing their
attention on ethical problems—man and his life in society or in harmony
with nature—the Chinese seriously restricted the content of philosophy in their
culture. The special facts of geography, economics, and sociology exercised
a strong influence on the Chinese climate of philosophical opinion and may
account, as we have noted, for their almost exclusive concentration on ethics.
In the final analysis, the classical Chinese philosopher’s ideal was the attain
ment of the Good Life here and now on earth. Most classical thinkers assented
to Confucius’ observation: “While you do not know life, how can you know
about death t” The world of the present requires man's full attention, courage,
and ingenuity. To the great majority of Chinese philosophers, righteousness,
family, economic security, and a stable social order were the main objects
of study. During the later periods of Chinese philosophy, though there were
occasional lapses from these objectives, they remained permanent features
in the Chinese philosophical tradition.
Tung Chung-shu (e. 179-104? B.C.) was the thinker who contributed most
to the ultimate triumph of Confucianism over all the other schools of the
Chou in the Han Dynasty (206 B.C.-200 A. D.). Later, It is true that
Confucianism was overshadowed by Buddhism during tho period of Division
(221-589 A.D.) following the break-up of the Han Empire, but, to survive
in China as an effective, popular force. Buddhism had to accommodate
itself to the peculiarities of the Chinese philosophical temper which wc have
endeavoured to sketch in the preceding pages. Those schools of Buddhism
which tried to preserve their original philosophical purity failed to achieve
currency in China and, hence, remained ineffectual in Chinese intellectual
life. Chinese Buddhism enjoyed immense support because it was Buddhism
d la chinoiw
“ Ibid., p. 47
53
A History of Muslim Philosophy
III short, the cardinal limitation of Chinese philosophy stems from its
inordinate attention to what Whitehead calls "practical reason.'’1* Chinese
thought was too closely associated with practical matters, with social adjust
ment. It was blinded, so to speak, by the affairs of the present. In conoentrating
on tho "practical reason," it neglected "speculative reason” which is allied
with logic and systematic discourse. Here we must stress that Bights of fancy
or sheer contemplation are not to be construed as speculative reason or specu
lative philosophy. Speculative philosophy seeks a comprehensive understand
ing of the nature of reality, of God, of man, and of the universe; it strives
for a synoptic vision; while, in contrast., practical reason of practical philosophy
is concerned with the empirical approach to concrete problems of living and
action.
The speculative philosopher, as here described, often regards his opposite
as a victim of spurious knowledge, lost in the bustle and bustle of the market
place. Though the speculative philosopher may frequently be at odds with the
practical philosopher, each needs the other. Unfortunately, the practical
thinker may be oblivious of what his counterpart is about and may regard his
pursuits as quite extraneous to the business of living. The speculative thinker
does not deny the importance of practical reason; he presupposes it and moves
along on a plane above the details of the everyday world. It should be noted
that tho practical activities of the mind produce data which the speculative
thinker may utilize in the formulation of new theoretical possibilities, and these
in turn may stimulate the activities of the practical philosopher in his desire
to implement them in new social programmes and in now technologies. This
interplay between these two types of reason or philosophical endeavour
constitutes a kind of creative cultural symbiosis. If a civilization neglects either
the practical or the speculative type of reason, it will be affected adversely.
China, until the impact of the modern world was felt, was an example of the
harmful effects of a pragmatic, utilitarian philosophical orientation. Though
authorities differ on the precise amount of weight to be given to its philosophical
orientation aa a cause of the somnolence of Chinese society, there appears to
be agreement t hat the stress on practicality and social ethics, especially of Con
fucianism, playod a most important role. Science and technolog}- were retarded;
there was no speculative thought to challenge the mind towards new heights
of achievement; the scholar class, reared on mundane philosophy, was dominant.
This is not to say that Confucian civilization was not a creative and remarkable
civilization in many areas; it is merely an endeavour to point out why a certain
type of mind did not flourish. Philosophies which concentrate loo completely
on social adjustment and utility paralyze, if they do not actually destroy,
individual creativity and spontaneity in other avenues of human development.
Just as civilizations have cramped the individual by a preponderant religious
or materialistic orientation, so the same cramping may occur when social
" Idem. The Function o) Keaton. Princeton University Press, Princeton, 1920.
54
Pre-1danuc Chinese Thought
utility is made the absolute measure of value. The ease of pre-modern Chinese
civilization may furnish an example of the great danger attached to continually
stressing the "social" or "practical" value of thought. The continued vigour
of a culture depends upon how well it is replenished with new insights and
challenged by new visions of possibility.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
General Works
Lily Abegg. The Mind of East Aria, Thames & Hudson, London, 1952; Che-yu
Clwng, Oriental and Occidental Cultures Contrasted: dn Introduction to "Culturology,"
Tho Gillack Press, Berkeley, 1943; Yu-lan Fung, A Short History of Chinese
Philosophy, cd. Berk Boddc, The Macmillan Company, New York, 1948; E.R.
Ilughos. CAineae Philosophy in Classical Times. Dent. London. 1942; The Great
Learning and the Mean-In-Action, E. P. Dutton Company, Inc., New York, 1943;
Wu-chi Liu, A Short History of Confucian Philosophy, Penguin Books Ltd., London,
1955; Harley Farnsworth MacNair. Ed.. China. University of California Prewa,
Berkeley and Loa Angeles, 1946; Charles A. Moore, Ed., Essays in East-West Philo
sophy, Univoreity of Haw aii Proas, Honolulu, 1951; Daisetz Toitaro Suzuki. A Brief
History of Early Chinese Philosophy. Seoond Edition, Prob9thain A Co.. London, 1914;
Arthur Waley, Three Ways of Thought in Ancient China, Allen A Unwin, London,
1939; Max Weber, The Religion of China, Confucianism and Taoism, tr. and ed.
Hans H. Berth. Tho Free Preen. Glencoe, Illinois, 1951; Arthur F. Wright. Ed..
Studies in Chinese Thought, Tho University of Chicago Press, Chicago, 1953.
Primary Sources
Fung Yu-lan, A History of Chinese Philosophy. Vol. I, The Period of the Philo
*
sopbers (From t he Beginnings to circa. 100 B.C.); Vol. II, The Period of Classical
Learning (From tho Second Century B.C. to tho Twentieth Century A.D.), tr.
Dark Bodde. Princeton University Frees. Princeton. 1962-53. These volumes
contain lengthy passages from all of tho philosophers discussed in this chapter.
Excellent source for materials on Hui Shih, Kung-sun Lung, and the Yin Yang
school.
Confucianism
James Lcggr, Tr., The Chinese Classics: Vol. I. The Confucian Analects, The
Great Learning, and Doctrine of the Mean; Vol. II, Mencius, Clarendon Frews,
Oxford, 1893-95; The Works of Hsunlze, tr. H. H. Dube, Probathain A Co..
London, 1928.
Taoism
The Way and Its Power, tr. Arthur Waley, Houghton Mifflin, Boston, 1935;
Chuang Tzu, Mystic, Moralist, and Social Reformer, tr. Herbert A. Giles, Second
Edition revised. Kelly A Walsh, Shanghai, 1926.
AfoAutm
The Ethical and Political Works of Moise, tr. Y. P. Mei, Probathain A Co.,
London. 1929.
Chinese Epicureanism
Yang Chu's Garden of Pleasure, tr. Anton Forke, John Murray, London, 1912.
55
A History of Muslim Phfloooph>
Leguiurm
TA« Boot o/ Lord .Shang, a Clastic of the Chinese SrAool o/ Law. tr. J. J. L.
Duyvcndak, Probethain * Co., London. 1828; The Complete World of Han Fei
Ten. a Classic of Chinese Legalism. tr. W. K. Liao, Probetham A Co.. London. 1939.
Chapter Ill
PRE-ISLAMIC IRANIAN THOUGHT
A
A summary sketch of the philosophical thought of pre-Islamic Iran is
both a difficult and an easy task—difficult in the sense that the texts on
which this study must be based are not philosophical in the proper sense
of the word, but rather theological or sometimes even mythological, and we
have to abstract from them their philosophical gist, translating their ideas
into modem philosophical terminology, through a rather personal work of
interpretation; easy in the sense that, in this work of reinterpretation, we
have to renounce completely a solution of the extremely complicated historical
problems put by Iranic philology. An attempt at a philosophical reinter
pretation of the Mazdaic outlook can be based, in our opinion, exclusively on
the only concrete and systematic form of Mazdaism we know: the late Mazdaism
of the Pahlavi books of the Sassanian period and the early times of Islam.
The almost insoluble problems raised by the pre-Islamic religion (or. accord
ing to others, religions) of Iran depend chiefly on tho extreme confusion of
different types of religiosity-local religion, religion of the /lite, etc.
Concerning the sources of Mazdaism the only comparatively sure points are:
(a) that the G&thaa of the Avesta are very old and probably date back to
Zarathustra himself (c. 700-000 B.C.); and (b) that tho most systematic
and the richest Pahlavi texts were written in the third/ninth century, i.c.,
two centuries after the Islamic conquest of Iran,
An accurate dating of the materials between three two chronological limits
(the seventh century B.C. and tho ninth century A.D.) seems still impossible
and all the learned conclusions of the scholars (who often change their minds
from year to year) appear to be no more than conjectures. Moreover, the
materials chronologically placed between these two dates are sometimes
typologically so incongruous that it is very easy to abstract from them a
certain type of religion and attribute it to the founder, making of him, c.g.,
either en idealistic philosopher or a shaman. and then explain the development
of Mazdaism that followed either as the decay or a repaganization of a highly
philosophical religion, or as a successive theologization of originally mystical
perceptions
56
Pre-Islamic Iranian Thought
It would bo no exaggeration to say that the only comprehensive approach
to the enormous and extremely varied religio-philosophical materials contained
in the corpus of Mazdaio texts is to consider them synchronistically as a whole
Though one may not agree with many details of Professor Corbin's theories,
one cannot but agree with him when he writes. "A spiritual morphology that
attempts a reconstruction and revaluation of the actually living devotion
impels us to consider the canonical Avesta, or at least what we possess of it,
its ritual, aa preserving at its centre the Psalms (GSthas) of Zarathustra and
the middle-Iranic (Pahlavi) and Farsi translations and commentaries a.t a
whole. Also in this case, it seems that when the believer recites his Bible or
when the Liturgy is celebrated, all objections taking historical stratification
as a pretext fail to reach their aim. If we always ask: ‘Whence does it oome !'
wo practically do nothing more than wander here and there, formulating
hy|»thesos vainly following one another. We should rather ask: 'At what does
it aim!’ Then the soul would answer, accounting for what has been its
purpose."1
We shall, therefore, make as the basis of the present, chapter the latest form
of pre-Islamic Iranian religiosity, the form represented by the whole eorpiu
of the Aveetio and Pahlavi Scriptures possessed and venerated by tho Parsecs
(not in the sense, of course, that we shall follow necessarily their interpretation
of them). For it is safer for a philosopher to interpret an actual and concrete
corpus of religious scriptures, than to interpret the over-changing reinter
pretation of them made by the historians.
It will be useful, however, to reproduce, as an introduction, the most widely
accepted diachronical explanation of the numerous so-called "contradictions"
of the present Mazdaic corpus, even though it does not seem to be completely
satisfactory. The difficulty is that much of the materials generally considered
to be very old are much later,.or at least they “function" in a much later
theological organism.
The branch of the AryanB who in about the eleventh century B. C. detached
themselves from their brethren, penetrating afterwards into the jungles of
India (a natural place for magic and richest mytho-poetical phantasy) and
made the yellow and dry plateau of Iran their country, had obviously brought
with them their naturalistic religion, clearly delineated in the I'edtix and rather
similar to that of old Rome and Greece. The sacrifices of animals (e.g., the ox)
and the ceremonial libation of the fermented juice of a plant, Aadma(Skr.st>ra>).
were frequent and taken as sacred rites. At a certain moment, not yet determined
with sufficient clearness, though the majority of scbolare seem now to fix it at
the sixth century B.C., the remarkable personality of a religious reformer,
Zarathustra, appeared in the oriental zone of the Iranian plateau His name
■till resists all attempts at etymological interpretation. “The man with the
1 Corbin. “Torre Celeste et Corps de Resurrection.” ffranoe JakrbueA.Vol. XXII.
p.W
57
A Hutury of Miulim Philosophy
old camels'' seems to be tho most accepted one. Zarathustra, possibly utilising
a pre-existing naturalistic sky-god (Varuna), created a new monotheism, so
strong that the name of the old gods (devas) came to signify "demons." This
was. up to some time ago. a "classical” theory of the historians of Mazdaism.
but now it seems to oede to new hypotheses maintaining that the demonization
of the devas was prior to Zarathustra. Henning even asserted that Zarathustra's
reform was a “protest against monotheism.” The seventeen hymns (Githia),
written in a rather archaic language and forming the central part of the Avesta
are generally considered to be the work of Zarathustra himself. Tho GithAs
uphold veneration for a single supreme God, Ahura Mazdah. the "Wise Lord”
(according to some like Pagliaro. "the Thinking Lord”). He is accompanied by
a cortege of abstract quasi-peraonified powers or attributes, the six Amesha
Spentia (Holy Immortals): Asha (the Cosmic I.aw or Righteousness), Vohu
Manah (Good Thought or Benevolence), Khshathra (Sovereignty). Armaiti
(Piety, Docility). Haurvat&t (Integrity). Amerct&t (Immortality). The G&thAs
reject rites and sacrifices, especially the ritual killing of cattle and the Hadma
cult, preach a very high personal ethic, and enforce wise social laws, foremost
of which is the fostering of agriculture against nomadism. In order to explain
evil in the world, the idea of the influence of the Evil Spirit (Angra Mainyu)
is introduced; in front of it stands Spenta Mainyu (the Holy Spirit), not
identical (at least in thia oldest stage) with the Wise Lord (Ahura Mazdth).
This monotheism, tendentiously dualistic but, in any case, clearly prophetic
and anti-naturalistic, "crossed the spiritual sky of Iran as a meteor” (Duchensne-
Guillcmin). The religion which will be now called Mazdaic—mazdayasna means
"one who worships the Wise (Lord)”—reabsorbed in course of time some of the
older “heathen" rites and culta.eg., Hadma’s cult, and also accepted the natu
ralistic gods of the ancient pantheon, some of them like Mithra, the god o’
sunlight and. then, of the Covenant and Oath being just adopted, while others
being inescapably transformed into detu'e. According to some scholars, how
ever. the religion of Mithra existed as a distinct creed in old Iran. At the same
time dualism, not so strong and systematized in the beginning, was becoming
deeper: it became a cosmologico-metaphysical contrast between a good God.
Ahura Mazdah. and an evil God, Angra Mainyu, both having their own
“creations,” the former being accompanied by his Ameshi SpentSs (ever more
clearly personified in course of time) and Yazatas (Venerable Beings, "gods,"
like Mithra. the goddess Anihita probably introduced from Babylon, ete.),
and the latter by the band of the devils and drajs (literally "lies"). Lying seems
to have been the worst sin for Zarathustra.
This religion was at a certain moment monopolized by the Magi. Who the
Magi were, is another crux of the historians of Mazdaism. Herodotus speaks
of the Magi as a tribe of Media and attributes to them a religion rather different
from that of the old Persians. Father G. Messina tried to demonstrate that
they formed a closed caste with such characteristic features aa those of a
"tribe." According to him their name (maqnvan) means "bearers of the gift"
M
Pre-Islamie Iranian Thought
of Zarathustra's doctrine. Their power increased rapidly and it seems that
already during the Achaemenid period (558-330 B.C.) the education of the
future kings was entrusted to them. They succeeded in spreading among the
people certain ethical principles and rites of their founder's religion. But this
success was not oomplcte, and this is one of tho many possible explanations
of the discrepancies between tho visible and popular religion of the Persians
and the quasi-eeoteric religion of the Magi. According to the same view, the
Magi became afterwards the "philosophers" of their doctrine, and tried to
develop it especially to explain its dualism. Christian sources of the fourth
century A. D. (Theodore of Mopsuestia) speak of the birth, in the.milieu of the
Magi, of the doctrine or heresy called Zurvanism that explained sway dualism
through the acceptance of a supreme god Zurv&n (time) as father of both
Ahura MazdAh and Angra Mainvu. But some scholars now speak of ZurvAnism
as an actually autonomous religion; and others, turning the preceding theory
upside down, consider the Magi to be the bearers of the leas philosophical, most
magical, and punctiliously ritualistic aspect of Zoroastrianism.
In the meanwhile ritual and cult, with complicated precepts of legal purity,
were gradually prevailing and when, after a dark period of incubation under the
Arsacid Dynasty (250 B.C.-224 A. D.) the caste of the Magi obtained unparal
leled power, with the advent of the Sassaniuns (224-651 A. D.). Mazdaism,
now a State religion, became an intolerant faith, persecutor of every form of
heresy. Heresy (as it happened first with Manichaeism supported at its begin
nings by King Shshpur, 241-272 A. D., and then with communistic Mazdakism.
favoured by King Kawat, 488-531) was sometimes a useful pretext for the
warrior caste of the kings—a caste that seemed to possess its own religious
tradition different from that of the priestly caste—to escape the excessive
power of the Mari. The discontentment hidden under the outwardly uniform
orthodoxy, ths unbearable poverty of the peasants, never totally imbued with
the religion of the UiU. and no doubt possessing their own religious customs
and traditions practioally unknown to us, and tho struggle between Throne
and Altar, were some of the causes that rendered the oonquest of Iran by the
Arabs so astonishingly easy.
B
The Mazdaic religion is commonly defined as “the religion of dualism."
A deeper analvsis shows that dualism is not the only basic feature of Mazdaism.
The account of Mazdaic philosophy that follows is divided in a rather
unorthodox way, necessitated by tho fact that Mazdaism Is not a philosophy,
into the following four sections: (1) The Concept of Myth. (2) Mazdaio
Angelism. (3) ‘he Double Dualism, (4) the Idea of Time.
59
A History of Muslim Philosophy
1. The Concept of Myth
One of the most interesting features of Mazdaic thought is its being at the
same time mythical and theologioo-philosophieal. The Mazdaic texts are very
rich in myths, but these are never narrated a pmflMO'. they are rather lunted
at in the texts the chief purpose of which is not that of telling myths Sufficient
attention has not been paid to this "style" of Mazdaic Scriptures. This is true
not only of the rater Pahlavi bookB but also of Avesta itself. In it myths are
inlaid in liturgical hymns or legal and canonical texts in the form of explana
tions and comment*. Avesta shows thus a rather “recent” type of myth
telling. The myth has never in Avesta—even in the case of myths having a
naturalistic origin—the freshness of the Fedie myth; it is always in a phase
of rational or theological explanation, and is used as a hint or example in texts
that remain fundamentally theological.
We have just mentioned "myths having an ancient naturalistic origin.”
A sufficiently clear instance of a Mazdaic myth of this type is that of the
killed dragon. In the AMn Yathfl a hymn to the angel of Waters, Ardvi
Sura AnAhita, containing a list of all those who in ancient times made sacrifices
to that angel-goddess, we read among other stories this passage, clearly explain
ing and confirming the efficacy of prayer and sacrifice to that angel: 'To her did
ThraAtaSna, the heir of the valiant Athwya clan, offer up a sacrifice in the
four-cornered Varena, with a hundred male horses, a thousand oxen, ten
thousand lambs. He begged of her a boon, saying: 'Grant me this, 0 Good,
most beneficent Ardvi SOra AnAhita! that I may overcome Azhi Dahaka,
the three-mouthed, the three-headed, the six-eyed one who has a thousand
senses, that most powerful, fiendish Druj. that demon, baleful to the world,
the strongest Druj that Angra Miiinyu created against the material world,
to destroy* the world of the good principle; and that I may* deliver his two
wives, Savanghavach and Erenavach, who are the fairest of body amongst
women, and the most wonderful creatures in the world.' Ardi Silra AnAhita
granted him that boon, as he was offering libations, giving gifts, sacrificing,
and entreating that Bhc would grant him that boon."
Comparison with other cultures allows us to reconstruct an ancient myth
originally connected with the New Year Eeast and with the rites aiming at
defeating drought. A divine. Thradtadna (the Fartdun of Firdausi’s SAdAiuImeA),
conquers the fortress of the Dragon and defeat* and kills him. The Waters
that were prisoners in his castle are now freed and so are the women held by
the monster as slaves in his harem. Now rain falls fertilizing the earth and the
young hero-liberator celebrates the hims gamat with the liberated women. But
this is simply a reconstruction and the readers or hearers of the Avesta probably
had no idea of the original, authentically mythico-ritual, meaning of this talc;
it proltably sounded to them simply as a nice example of pieta* towards tho
angel anil of national heroism by Thraetaona.
’ Ft.. 5. 33 ft.
60
Pre-Islamic Iranian Thought
But there are also other myths, utilized exactly like thia and in similar
contexts, of a purely theologioo-symbolical origin. For instance, there is the myth
of Vishtaspa who frees the enchained Daena, told always with the same
emblematical conciseness in the Farvardin Fathi.
* This Yasht is chiefly a list
of /rauuhu (see below) or holy men, to whom the believer offers sacrifices. The
enterprises of some of these holy men are narrated here in order to encourage
tho worshipper to offer sacrifice to their respective /ravashi. Concerning the
/mmshi of Vishtaspa, the ting who protected Zarathustra, acoepted his
religion (Dacca), and spread it, the hymn says:
••We worship the fraraehi of the holy king VlshUspa; the gallant one. who
was tho incarnate Word, the mighty-speared and lordly one; who. driving the
l>ruj before him, sought wide room for the holy Daena . . .; who made himself
the arm and support of this law of Ahura, the law of Zarathustra. We took
her (i.e., the Daena, or Religion) standing bound from the hands of the
Hunus, and established her to sit in the middle (of the world), high ruling,
never falling back, holy, nourished with plenty of cattle and pastures, blessed
with plenty of cattle and pastures."
Here we sec, contrary to the former instance, a myth germinating from
history. Tho process of mythicization has reached a very advanced stage, but
not so advanced as to render it impossible to recognize the historical materials
that lie at the basis of a myth. First of all, a Daena means "Religion," in a
quasi-personified sense; secondly, the fact-myth is oonnectod with tho work of
the Prophet Zarathustra and that of the holy King Vishtaspa. But it is highly
interesting to note that the attributes attached to his name are the same
as those of the angel Saraosha4 of which Vishtaspa is, in a sense, the terrestrial
emblem, in the same way aa Zarathustra is the terrestrial symbol of Ahura
Mazd&h We not ice here an important moment of the passage from history to
myth in Mazdaism and also, at the same time, an important aspect of the
Mazdaic approach to myth and reality. Mazdaic thought, while denaturalizing
and elhicizing naturalistic myths, embodies historical events, in semi-mythical
persons, and in so doing "angelizes" history. We are in the presence of a
“visionary" theology-philosophy, in which intellectual entities assume personal
forms, moving in an intermediate world of vision (probably a heritage of the
mystical experiences of the Founder) so organized aa to give a characteristic
Unitarian savour to the whole Mazdaic thought.
2. Angeliam
Once the mythical logic of Mazdaism has been understood, we can proceed
to the study of some of the most significant details of the Mazdaic Welt
anschauung. The first key to open its shrines is that, in Mazdaic thought, the
Absolute is a personal God. the Wise Lord Ahura MardAh a God that reminds
• Ibid.. 13. 99-100.
• Ibid.. 11. 23.
til
A History of Muslim Philoeophy
us of the Biblical and Qur'anic God. But Ilia attribute* are not (be they eternal
or created) intelligible concepts; rather they are themselves “persons" or
"angela.” Professor Corbin* rightly remarks that the Mazdean, instead of putting
to himself the questions: “What ia Time ? What is Earth ? What is Water I",
asks: " H'Ao is Time 1 IFAo is Earth 1 IFAo is Water!“ And so we find in Mazdaic
texts that Timo is a Youth of fifteen, Earth is the Archangel Spenta Armaiti
(the Holy Piety). Water is the beautiful goddess-angel Ardvi Sura Anihita
The problem lies in rightly interpreting the verb is: in which sense are these
images of vision what they represent ? Certainly they are not angels in the
Biblical and the Qur'anie sense of mere messengers or servants of God; Corbin
compares them rightly with the dii-angdi of Proclus.
The Zamijild Yasht, speaking of the six Amesha Spentfe, sings thus :*"... the
Amesha Spent!*, the bright ones, whose looks perform their wish, tall, quickly
coming to do, strong, and lordly, who are undecaying and holy; who are all
seven (their seventh is Ahura MazdAh himself) of one thought ; who are all
seven of one speech, who are al) seven of one deed; whose thought is the same,
whose speech is the same, whose father end commander is the same, namely
the Maker, Ahura Mazdah; who see one another's soul thinking of good thoughts,
thinking of good words, thinking of good deeds, thinking of Gardnmina (the
supreme paradise, house of the hymns'), and whose ways are shining M they
go down to the libations; who are the makers and governors, the shapers and
overseers, the keepers and preservers of these creations of Ahura Mazdih
It is they who shall restore the world, which will thenceforth never grow old
and never die, will become never decaying, never rotting, ever living, evei
increasing, and master of its wish, w-hen the dead will rise, when life and
immortality will come, and the world will be restored at its wish. . . .”
Here it teems that the Amesha SpentAs play a role not very dissimilar to
that of the “persons" of the Christian Trinity. It is remarkable that they
arc six. but are called seven. Ahura MazdAh himself being the seventh. This
concept of Ahura MazdAh adding himself as the last to every hierarchical scries
of beings is often found in Mazdaic books. In order to understand it we must
remember a sentence in the first chapter of Bundahuhn"For Ohrmazd is both
spiritual and material." or, according to other translations: "For Ohrmazd
both creations are celestial"; in other words, everything ia, for him, in trans
cendent, celestial stage. God can descend into all the stages of Being, eternally
First and Last of every embodied or disembodied hierarchy, because, tui specie
Dei, everything is transcendent and oelestial and this descent can in no way
"contaminate" Him.
But these six Amesha Spentas are also the archangelic emblem-peraonifica-
tion of the primordial elements: Earth (Spenta Armaiti), Cattle (Vohu Manah),
Fire (Asha), Metah (Khshathra), Water (Haurvatat), Plante (Ameretat).
* Corbin, op. oil.. p. 99.
• Yl.. 19. HP-20.
’ Bundahishn, I. 32.
62
Prelslamic Iranian Thought
They are the elements not as allegories of them, but as living personal symbols,
as "Lords of the Species." The conoept of Ratu, Lord of the Species, is present
everywhere in Mazdaio books. The Lord of the Species "Woman" is. for instance,
the mythico-historical Daena, “religion"; the Lord of the Species "Bird" is
the mythical bird Saena meregha, or in modem Persian simurgj. The theological
abstractions that presented themselves to the philosophico-ecstatic mind of the
Prophet Zarathustra in a period in which a transformation of the mythico-
theological ooncepts into pure philosophy was premature, assumed the plastic
life of the gods of the former naturalistic pantheon. Holy Piousness, for example,
came to be the Earth instead of remaining an abstractly pure intellectual form.
Or. better, it did not come Io be in the historical sense of the expression, but
vas probably already so double-faced in the mind of the Prophet, the historical
Zarathustra or some other prophet, whose personal mystical experience is
fundamental to the understanding of this as of all other concepts. The connec
tion of the Amesha Spenti
* with their natural kingdoms is already retraeeable
in the G&tli&a. In 1'1.31.9 Armaiti is seen as specially favouring the earth’s tiller.
A verse after, the thrifty toiler in the fields is called one “who nourisheth
Vohu Manah ("the Good Thought"—the Cattle), while in v. 21 Ahura Mazd&h
will give "the fat of Good Thought (Cattle)" to him who is His friend. But in
the same Githis we often hear that Ahura Mazd&h created the world through
Good Thought, which in these contexts seems to have nothing to do with
cattle. Whatever the historical origins of these angelico-symbolical identifica
tions may have been, the fact remains that they had the highly important
function of transfiguring the elements of nature into ethical values. Or, to put
it better, there is an exchange of functions: natural elements are coloured with
ethos, and ethical values live a cosmic life. This is one of the most typical
features of Mazdaisni
The Supreme God of Mazdaism has further interesting aspects that make him
rather different from the God of classical monotheisms. He is. for instance,
situated in a sort of transcendent Time and Space.’ Boundless Time and Space-
Light, or Uncreated Light (but the word for Space, gas. could be also mythologic
ally interpreted as "throne”). There is, in other words, a time-tension in God.
But the student of Mazdaism becomes even more astonished when he comes
to know that Ahura Mazdih has got a soul, or better a /ravashi. As the idea
of soul is a specially interesting aspect of Mazdaic thought, we shall treat it here
as a particular case of Mazdaic "8ngelism."
In Mazdaic anthropology, according to Bundahishn,’ man was "fashioned
in five parts—body (tan), soul (jan). spirit frun!n>, prototype (adhvinak)
and fravashi. Body is the material part; soul, that which is connected with tho
wind—tho inhaling and exhaling of breath; spirit, that which with consciousness
in the body hears, sees, speaks and knows; the prototype is that which is
• Cf. Bundahishn. I. 2.
• Ibid., IB. 11.
63
A History of Muslim Philosophy
situated in the station of the Sun; the /rafashi is that which is in the presence
of Ohrmazd, the Lord. He was created in this fashion because, during the
period of the assault of the Aggressor, men die, their bodies rejoin the earth,
their souls the wind, their prototypes the Sun, their spirits the frmxuki, to that
the demons could not destroy the spirit." This is what happens during the
l>eriod of the "Assault” or of the Mixture (gumeehuhn) of the good and evil
creations. At the end of this world, however, a real resurrection of the body
will take place: the dead will be "reconstructed" (rill viraat). The Saviour
(born from Zarathustra’s miraculously preserved sperm) will perform a sacrifice
(yazuhn) in which the bull Hatiyfish will be killed, and from his fat and the
white Hadma the ambrosia (anosh) will he prepared. All men will drink it and
become immortal.
A pure concept of the "immortality of the soul," in the Greek sense of the
term, seems extraneous to Mazdaic thought. Every (good) man is already an
angel, /raiazhi, eternally in the presense of Ahura Mazdah; resurrection
of the body too is not exactly identical with the same idea in Christian
and Muslim tradition, for it happens in a moment which is not. properly
speaking, a historical moment, but the epoch of jrazho-kereti (Phi. fnuhkart]
wliich is no more in Finite Time but in Boundless Time. The metaphysical
peculiarity of t his epoch is also clearly shown by the immolation of the Bull,
otherwise in "normal time, a horrible sin for Mazdaism."
While the first three parts of the human compound do not need any explana
tion, we have to consider here the two concepts of prototype (adhvinak) and
/nwuhi. The former-is the heritage of an older astro-biological idea, common
also in India, according to which the prototypical soul of the different categories
of beings is preserved in the heavenly bodies. Tho race-type of Cattle is pre
served, for instance, in the moon (gadchithra. “having the form of Kine," is an
Avestic name for the moon), and dial of Plants in the stars-10 Deeper and more
easily interpretable in an ethical and philosophical way is the concept of
/rauuAi. This term does not appear in the Githis (which also ignore adkvenak,
Mazdaicized afterwards), but in the so-called "more recent" parts of the Avesta
it has already become the aspect that will remain fixed in the Pahlavi tradition.
It is clearly kept distinct from "soul" in passages like Ti. 26. 7. and it seems
tliat, at least in the beginning, only heroes had been considered to be having
a IraraM. Bailey’s researches have demonstrated that the idea of /rateuhi is
associated with "the defensive power emanating from a hero, even after his
death." This originally aristocratic idea suffered a process of democratization
in the course of time: every (righteous) man thus got his framzhi, whose
protective and defensive force is exerted not only in his favour, but in favour
of all those who invoke her. The “Iravashis of the Righteous” are seen as
protectors of specially sacred places, of the mythical lake or sea (I’osru-lasZo,
of the white llairma, which we saw as an important ingredient of future
cr. n., 12.
64
Pre Islamic Iranian Thought
ambroeia, of Zarathustra's semen from which the future Saviours will be bom,
etc. In their function as welcomeni of the righteous souls after death they
remind us of the Germanic Valkyrs. But the framshis arc also something more.
In a passage of Avesta1' we road: "And these we present hereby to the /raraski
of Zarathustra Spitama. the saint, for sacrifice, propitiation, and praise, and
to those of the people who love Righteousness, with all the holy /ravashis
of the saints who art dead and who art living, and to those of men who an as yet
unborn. and to those of the prophets who will serve us. and will labour to
complete the progress and renovation of the world."
Fravashis are, already now, real angelic doublets of the pious and good
men, past, present, and future. Also the living seem to have already a fravashi
in a sense slightly similar to but not at all identical with the "Guardian Angel”
of the Christian tradition. But there is even more: we saw that Zarathustra,
the Prophet, the “terrestrial God” as he is called in some parts of Avesta, has
liis fravashi, and this is obvious. However, it may seem strange to a rationalistic
mind that the Archangels and even Ahum Mazdah Himself have their fravashis.
In Vendidid 19. 46-48 Zarathustra is invited to invoke the fravashi of Ahura
Mazdah. This fascinating idea seems to assume a doublet of God Himself in a
further hyper transcendent dimension of Being; but. as is often the case
with many original and highly interesting Mazdaic terms and concepts, this
ides is mentioned as if by chance and is soon dropped, without any inter
pretation or comment.
These angelic doublets of the Good are also symbols of Free Choice (see also
below). According to a typically Mazdaic myth-lheologoumenon preserved in
Bundahishn,11 at the beginning of the millennia of the period of “Mixture"
(gumiohishn), Ahura Mazdah asked the fravashis whether they preferred to
remain untouched by and protected from every danger in the invisible, trans
cendent world or whether they were ready to descend and incarnate themselves
in the visible material world in order to struggle with Evil. The fravashis
accepted the second alternative. In this way a sort of de-doubling happened:
now, in this material world the real man is his fraauhi. his angelic ego, that is
at the same time his destiny and his true transcendental self; the moral
responsibility of man is, in a sense, "transcendentalized ." Sin becomes equiva
lent to the treason of an angel. Metaphysically, every discussion on the existence
of soul, etc., is rendered useless by this acceptance of the experienced fact of
apriority of angel over man.
We said that the GathSs do not mention the term framshi. But they contain
another idea that certainly contributed to give a new and ethical meaning to
the (probably pre-Zarathustrian) heroieal myth of the Valkyr-frarashi We mean
the idea of Daena (Phi. den). This term has been etymologically analyzed in
the most discordant ways by philologists, looking for a semantic explanation
■ Ibid.. 24. S.
>• Hund. Ill 21-22
65
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
which may give reason for the double moaning of the word: “religion” and
"deep soul,’’ or better angelic personification of human deeds Here are some
interesting Gathic passages containing the term DaSna:
“lie who renders the Saint deceived, for him shall later be destruction
long life shall be his lot in the darkness; foul shall be his food; his speech
shall be of the lowest. This is the life, O ye vile! to which your deeds and your
DaDna will bring you!””
“Yea, I will declare the world's two first spirits, of whom the more bountiful
thus spake to the harmful: Neither our thoughts, nor our commands, nor our
understandings, nor our beliefs, nor our deeds, nor our Daenas, nor our souls
are at one,"14
"But their (of the Evil oues) souls and their doenos will groan when they
will approach the Chinvat Bridge...
"Declare to me, 0 Ahura, that path of the Good Thought where the Daena
of the Saviours, i. e., their good works (ya hukerela), will taste the joys of
Righteousness...
A later text of Avcsta, the Hadrkht .Vast” tells of the righteous soul
meeting, after death, Ills Dafna in the form of a beautiful girl of fifteen; here
we Bee again the mytho-poetic tendency of Mazdaic thought, making of every
intelligible entity an angel.
if we examine the above-quoted passages we shall sec that in all of them we
could freely translate Daona as “religious works," ethical acts metaphysically
considered. The fact that three acta "groan"” is not at all astonishing. If we
remember the easiness with which Mazdeans personify ideas. This explains
also how a Iratiuhi has been attributed to Ahura Mazdih himself. Ahura
Mazdah has indeed a Dacna in tho Gath&s; in Bundahithun1* “omniscience and
goodness,” i.e., supreme religious actions, are called Ahura Mazdah’s din
(Daena, “religion"). The primary sense of Owona seems to be ethico-religious.
It is "religious acting" that (as is the case in quite a different mental environ
ment with the Hindu karma) creates a body, is representable visibly, and for
Ahura Mazdah is His light” and for man his angel of light. As pointed out
by Pagliano. it was this Zarathustric Da6na that modified the warrior
fraiaahis (Dumezil) into ethical angels. And it is in our opinion especially
the myth of choice that gave also Ahura Mazdah a fmvaxhi. In which
sense is Ahura Mazdah so similar to the righteous man as to have Himself
a /raiusAi I Chiefly in the sense tha‘ Ahura Mazdih also made a choice. Ot
Yl.. 31. 20.
■' Ibul. 45. 2.
ibid.. 11.
Ibid., 34. 13
” Ibid.. 229
14 Ibid., 46. II
'• Bund I 2
“ Ibid
Pro-Islamic Iranian Thought
the two primordial Spirits—say the Gith&s—"the most holy Spirit chose the
Truth.”11
Thia sense of angelic ethos has thus produoed one of the deepest ideas of
Mazdaism, the image of the "soul-angel-rabtyr.religious work.”
3. The Double Dualism
Choice, the oentral ethical conoept of Mazdaism, is a choice between hro.
This leads w. to examine the radical dualism that, according to many, is the
basic idea of this religious philosophy. According to a GAthio passage," "the
two primordial Spirits that, in deep sleep, wore heard aa Twins, are the Excel
lent and the Evil, in thoughts, words, and deeds; and between these two the
Wise, not the foolish, have made their choice.... And when these two Spirits
met, they first established Life and Non-Life and (they decided) that, at the
end, the worst existence would be that of the followers of Lie, and the best
spiritual foroe (Alanah) would be that of the followers of Truth. Between
these two Spirits the followers of the fimj chose the acting of the Worst One.
but the Most Holy Spirit, who covers himself with the firm stones of heaven
as his robes, chose the Truth, and those who desired to satisfy Ahura MazdAh
through righteous actions did the same."
Good and evil are thus connected with an ethical choice, even if it seems
that in the most ancient parte of Avoda, the Holy Spirit is not exactly iden
tical with Ahura MazdAh but is probably Ahura Mazdah in His choosing,
"acting” aspect. Another point that shows the typical ethicism of Zarathustrian
dualism is the name, "Lie,” attributed to the evil principle. But in Gikthio
thought the evil beings and the Evil Spirit are not "fallen creatures" of God, aa
in the classical monotheism. They are beings of a purely negative and destrnc
tive nature, which it would be absurd to think of as having been created by a
good God, and the final destiny of which seems to be that of being reduced to
nothing. Ahriman, in a later Pahlavi catechism (Bandnamak-i Zartusht). is—if
the translation is correct—"a being who does not exist, who received nothing
in himself," and tho same is endowed in Bundahishn with the strange quality
piu-batishnih ("post-existence,” as opposed to the positive "pre-existence” of
Ahura MazdAh).
This ethos is, however—and here is again tho typical feature of Mazdaic
thought—strongly "oosmidzed": Goodness means, above all. promotion of
Being, Life, and agriculture. It means "growth" (a word often used in the
Mazdaic texts) of good material existence too. "Righteousness, the Bundnhishn
says openly, obeys the same rules as (cosmic) Creation.”” Ethos means also
material positivity. The evil people (we often hear, in Mazdaic texts, curses
against the nomads, the non-producere, and the killers of cattle) are, above
all. the destroyers of existence.
11 TJ-, 30. 5.
Ibid.. 30. 3 ff
Bund.. I. 22.
67
A History of Muslim Philosophy
We can now better understand the second type of dualism, a dualism now
not of choice but of transcendence between the invisible (or celestial) mendf-.
and the visible (or terrestrial) gflik; for God creates the terrestrial world to
protect, foster, or help (adhyirih) the celestial world, which is, in a way. its
prototype, its root (bun). This dualism is, however, radically different from
the Platonic dualism. A very instructive passage of one of the most philo
sophical treatises of Mazdaism, the Shikand Gumdntk Viehiir written in the
third/ninth oentury,” will show this difference in a very clear way.
"The gitik is the fruit (bar) of mtnok; mtnok is its root (bun). . . . The fact
that gelik is the fruit and mtnbk its root becomes clear when one thinks that
every visible and tangible thing passes from invisibility to visibility. It is
already well known that man and the other visible and tangible creatures come
from the invisible and intangible mknbk; in tho aamo way. the form, the species,
and the height and the breadth of a being are the same as those of the being
that generated it; tho body of man and other creatures, which is now mani
fested, was hidden and invisible in the semen that came from his parents;
the semen itself, that was in the loins of the parents, passed to the stage of
manifestation, visibility, and tangibility. We can therefore know by certainty
that this visible and tangible getik has been created from an invisible and
intangible menbk, and there is no doubt that it will come back from visibility'
and tangibility to tho invisibility and intangibility of the same menbk."
Wc see from this passage that this Mazdaie dualism differs from the Platonic
and Gnostic dualism chiefly in the sense that for it matter and the world arc
in no wav an "inferior" stage of Being. On the contrary. Matter is, in a sense,
the most mature and perfect aspect (the fruit) of Spirit. It differs, however,
also from the views implied by too simple a crestionistic monotheism inasmuch
as it seems to admit not only "one" personal God and His immediate creation,
but various stages of Being.
Regarding the first point wc refer the reader to a text8* in which it is clearly
stated that the terrestrial world (gelik) is higher in dignity than paradise
(tahuhl), because it is in this terrestrial, embodied, visible, and tangible world
only that tho battle against the powers of Evil can be fought and won—a
struggle that makes it possible for the soul "to strive with his thought
(uhang-menishn) towards Beatitude." One of the most important miraculous
deeds accomplished by tho Prophet Zarathustra was that of breaking the
bodily forms (shikastan-i kalput) of the Devils. Without their bodies the
Devils are less perfect and less dangerous in their struggle. And here wo find
again the fundamentally ethical or rather cosmo.ethical function of the grlik-
minok dualism. Matter is useful in the struggle against Evil.
Regarding the second point, let us remember that in the first chapter of
Hundahiahn, which contains one of the most detailed accounts of the double
P. J. do Menasce, Ed., p. tt-H
“ Medan. Ed.. Dtnkart. p. 271
«8
'ro-Islanuc Iranian Thought
oreation of the world, the Mazdaic vision seems to involve various stages ol
creation, the highest of which are prototypical, emblematical. Even from some
passages of the Git his it may appear that God created first the prototypes
of things, the Primordial Ox, the Protoanthropus. the Plant, etc.
Coming back to the last sentence of the above-quoted passages of Shikand-
Gumanik I'ickdr, we see how this life of positive struggle in the material world
blossomed forth from the celestial world in a cycle that is at the end destined
to be reabsorbed into the celestial and invisible stage, once its ethical task has
been fulfilled. Thus it seems that even the first dualism, that between Good
and Evil, will become a monism again at the consummation of Time. Here
we come to the idea of Time and Cycle aa the instrument of a victorious
struggle. f
4. Time and Cycle
With regard to the question of Time also the Mazdaic thought shows an
originality of conception that distinguishes it both from the Indian outlook
assuming "flight from Time" aa supreme salvation and beatitude, and from the
classical Semitic forms of monotheism by which Time seems to be conoeived as
an irreversible "line.” In order never to forget the peculiar "angelical" character
of Mazdaism, the reader ia reminded that in Bundahim
** Time is an angelic
person, a youth of fifteen, "bright, with white eyes, tall and mighty, whose
might is from valour, not from robbery and violence.” In other words, the
Mazdean, in order to understand Time, did not intellectually "discuss” it as
we do (that is whj’ European scholars rather anachronistically find so many
"contradictions" in the Mazdaic texts referring to Time) but rather experi
mented with it in vision. And this vision BhowB them what is told in the first
chapter of the same theological book.”
“Thus it is revealed in the Good Religion. Ohrmazd was on high in omni
science and goodness: for Infinite Time He was ever in the Light. Omniscienoc
and Light are the robes of Ohrmazd: some call them "religion” {din, see
above).. . . The Time of the robes is infinite like Ohrmazd. and Goodness and
Religion, during all the time of Ohrmazd. were, are and will be—Ahriman,
slow in knowledge, whose will is to smite, was deep down in the darkness:
(he was) and is, yet will not be. The will to smite is his robe, and darkness is
his place: some call it the Endless Darkness."
The oosmic drama unfokls itself in a Time and in a Space, but Ahrimanic
time is composed of only two moments, past and present, Time and Space
hare also a transcendent aspect. Transcendent Time is the so-called "Boundless
Time” (zamdni akandrak) or “Time of the Long Dominion” (lamdn > dirang-
khvatdi). Time (not of course our "serial” time) exists even in the heart of tho
Absolute. There is not, in Mazdaic thought, too simple a contrast between
Bund.. III. 3.
" Ibid.. 1.2 0
M
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Time and Eternity. But let us continue our reading and see the '"aim" of our
serial time. Ohrmazd creates first a purely transcendent prototypical creation.
Ahriman rises from the depths, sees it, and rushes forward to smite and destroy
it. When Ohrmazd sees that struggle is unavoidable, He says to Himself: "If
1 do not fix a time for battle against him, then Ahriman could do to my
creation even as he threatened, and the struggle and the mixture will be ever
lasting; and Ahriman could settle in the mixed state of creation and take it
to himself " And "Ohrmazd said to the Destructive Spirit: ‘Fix a time, so
that by this pace we may extend the battle for nine thousand years.’ For He
knows that by fixing a time in this way the Destructive Spirit would be made
powerless. Then the Destructive Spirit, not seeing the end, agreed to that
treaty, just aa two men who fight a duel fix a term Baying: ‘Let us on such
a day do battle till night falls.' This too did Ohrmazd know in His omniscience
that within these nine thousand years, three thousand would pass entirely
according to the will of Ohrmazd, three thousand years in mixture would paw
according to the will of both Ohrmazd and Ahriman, and that in the last battle
tho Destructive Spirit would be made powerlees and that He Himself would
save creation from aggression."
Limited time, i.e., serial time (during 9,000 years), is then conceived in an
ethical light, just like the material world in which it is manifested. Serial time
is something like a great detour, an ample digression from Infinite Time, but a
substantially positive detour, because its aim is to render the battle against
Evil possible and successful. Hence come some important consequences.
(a) Destiny.—If Time is a "youth" and if, as it is said in another text,” "the
creator Ohrmazd dyed Time with colour," Time cannot be an a priori form
in the Kantian sense. Time is objectively coloured; it can be practically iden
tified with "destiny" ibakhl, assigned lot). Some Mazdaic texts aa, for example,
the beautiful myth of the choice of the /ravaehie already mentioned, seem
favourable to free-will, some others1* seem in favour of predestination. Apart
from the problems connected with the historical formation of these ideas, we
must say that Mazdaic theology solves the problem in a rather consequential
way. Pahlavi FerufaMd (5. 9. 33) maintains that “in the material world every
thing happens according to destiny (pal bakht), whereas in the celestial world
everything iB according to free action (pal kuniehn). This solation of the
problem of time is indeed a consequence of the angelic, emblematical outlook
of Mazdaism Destiny is no more than the visible, terrestrial, gtHk aspect of
its truer transcendent, invisible, minok prototype, which is freedom. More
over, in all this a part is also played by the Ohrmazd.Ahriman dualism, in
the sense that Ahriman, through the creation of the seven accursed planets
(these are for Mazdaism evil entities, while the fixed stare, and especially the
Zodiacal signs are good, and callod "the generals of Ohrmazd"), inserts him-
” Dfnkarl, quoted in Zechner, ZureUn. p. 381.
“ For instance, Memk-i Khrol, Ch. VIII.
70
Pre-Ialamic Iranian Thought
self into the play, trying to change the temporal destinies of men and of the
world. In this ho succeeds, howover, only temporarily. And there is still an
other interesting concept, that of bagho bakhl or portion allotted by the gods
(divine destiny),” a "supplement," aa it were, of destiny, added to that initially
established (or, to put it better, added to the terrestrial emblem of transcendent
human freedom) in order to recompense specially meritorious actions. "But
the gods, we read in the above-mentioned texts, rarely concede that supplement
of destiny, and they manifest it only in the oelestial world," in order to avoid
a possible destruction of it by Ahrimanic forces, if it is manifested visibly in
the gilli. We must never forget that transcendent entities can struggle, and
win and lose, only through their incarnation in the visible world.
It is, however, obvious that such an approach to the problem of destiny
and free-will results in a fatalism even more radical than that reproached by
some in the classical monotheistic religions. Thia is true especially when we
think that some theological schools of Mazdaism, e. g., Zurviniam, maintain
that both gods, Ohrmazd and Ahriman, are subject to Timo's power of destiny.
Time (Zurvin) is regarded aa supreme God; and even Ohrmazd •* is taken to
have created the world "with the approval of Infinite Time” (pal d/rin-i
lamdn-i akandrk).
(b) The Apocalajdaeie.—When we consider limited Time to be a delour, a
digression from transcendent Infinite Time, we are able to understand better the
idea of the “cosmic cycle” typical of Mazdaiam. Reading theological Mazdaic
texts one is impressed by a tendency to connect the facta and happenings of
the proto-history with those of the end of the world. The Heroes who will
contribute to the creation of the "Future Body" (tan-i paetn) are the same
Heroes aa, at the dawn of existence, were the protagonists of the myth of
the Beginning. The Saviour, or, better, the three eschatological Saviours are
sons of the first Revealer of tho Faith, Zarathustra. They are practically Zara
thustra himself. To justify the enormous distance in time, there is the myth
of Zarathustra's sperm miraculously preserved in a lake, protected by the
/ravaehie. The beginning ie the end. There is, in the limited, serial time, a
circle leading it fatally towards Infinite Time. Gaybmart, the first Man, the
Protoanthropo, will also be the first Resurrected man; the ancient hero Yam-
shot (Mod. Pera. Jamshld) has already prepared, at the beginnings of history,
tho mythical Ark (var) to save men from the terrible trials of the End. Past
and Future seem united in an eternal Present, if seen sub specie nrfnok. Tho
Apocatastasis is, transcendentally (mtnokihd), happening already (and some
times we find in these theological texts future events told by verbs in the
past). Serial time is like an immense "delay” from metaphysical Time, but
there is in it a positive curving towards the Origin. All events of this period
of “delay" are eschatologically justified. The ancient victory of Sahm, the
Of. ibid.. Ch. XXIV
Ibid.. Ch. VIn
71
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Hero, on certain demonic monsters is explained as necessary, because, without
it, "it would have been impossible to fulfil Resurrection and Future Lafe.”"
It is, however, interesting to remark that the lan-i pastn, tho "Future
Body” or Future Life, is, though in a transcendent form, a real body, and—at
least judging by some texts—the renewed world will not be a mere re-identi
fication with the first stage of the prototypical mtnuik creation, when it was
"without thought, without touch, without movement in a moist stage like
semen.On the contrary, the idea of the pwitivity of time, and that of the
presence of an "Infinite Time” even in Eternity, seems to confer a colour of
novelty and true Life to the new world, prepared by the struggling experience
of the embodied creatures. It would be, however, too risky to proceed in these
considerations further; for. as mentioned before, the Mazdaic texts too often
leave the reader in the expectation of something that never oomee. A really
theological and philosophical development of their highly suggestive and inter
esting intuitions is absent.
(c) Elhia.—We have not to fix our ideas on the chivalrous ethics of the
struggle situated in Time. This struggle, like that of “two men who fight a
duel,” is a free one, one in which man can always succumb; but just because
Time is also an angel, the struggle is coloured with a metaphysical, supreme,
"engagement." It transcends everyday’s secular ethics. The metaphvsioo-
ethical responsibility of the Mazdean is such that he can pray in the words of
the GAthA: "May we be such aa those who will bring about the Transfiguration
of the World."” At the same time, however, and for the same reasons, Maz
daic ethics, rooted as it is in an objective Time, is a heavily heteronomous one.
This causes it to be different not only from our modern autonomous ethics,
but also from the purely theonomous ethics of tho classical forms of mono
theism. Mazdaic ethics is still strictly connected with semi-mythical realities
and with a moral dualism always in danger of transforming itself into a cosmo
logical dualism. In other words, Good and Evil mean to the Mazdean something
more than what they mean to us. There is an entire scries of situations and
objocts (Time is dyed with colour) intrinsically evil, Ahrimanic. We deduce from
various passages in Mazdaic Scriptures that not only the nomad is naturally evil,
but also the non-Iranian (anerdn) is something objectively evil in comparison
with the Iranian; insects and snakes are evil and so on. The idea that the
natural essence (gohr) of certain given beings is radically and metaphysically
diabolical is very clear from the texts, and even some characters of history,”
such as Alexander the Greek and Frasiyak the Turanian arc no more than
devilish creatures of Ahriman. The problem of how much did Evil permeate
« JM., Ch. XXVII.
■» Hund . 1.
“ Ft. 30. 9.
•• History, aa it is obvious from the Mazdean'a point of view, becomes the
emblematical prelude to Apocatastaeis and at the same lime the symbol of a
transcendent pugilistic prototype.
72
Pre-Ialamie Iranian Thought
the creation of Ahura Mazdih during tho period of "Mixture" has been solved
by Mazdeans in a rather heavy, objective, dasaifieatory way.
There have been, however, acute minds that started to meditate on the
origin of that Evil which the traditional Mazdaic texts gave as an unexplained
presupposition, or rather considered it a fact not needing any explanation.
So was bom Zurv&nism, a theologico-plulosophical school, that is considered
by some European Orientalists to be a real autonomous religion. To solve the
problem of the origin of Evi), Mazdaio mind again oreated a myth: that of the
primordial “doubt” of the Time-God (Zurvin), a doubt, from which Ahriman
was bora, as a wicked “twin" of Ohrmazd. This school seems also to have
shown a tendency, at least according to recent studies, to unify and sym
metrize the two dualisms already mentioned, in the sense that the material
world, tho realm of the flesh, begins to be identified with the Ahrimanio
creation. This remained only a very vague tendency in Zurvanism, but the
identification, quite in the spirit of Gnosticism, was totally accomplished by
Manichaeism, in the Iranian texts in whioh ZtirvSn is the name of the Supreme
God, while Ohrmazd passes to the stage of Protoanthropos. But such an identi-
fication completely breaks the frame and organism of Mazdaic thought, that
has always considered Manichaeism to be the most dangerous and most
Ahrimanic heresy.
5. Conclusion
We have studied in too rapid and perhaps too unphilosophical a way, the
mythical logic, the dualistic and angelical metaphysics, the chivalrous and
fatalistic ethics of Mazdaism. It is now necessary to say a word on the impor
tance of this thought for the development of the subsequent phases of the philo
sophical history of Iran and Islam. Those who know the strange and highly
interesting world of Muslim "heresies" cannot deny that some features of their
theological systems strongly remind us of tho Mazdaic Weltanschauung. We
mean, above all, their curious angelical approach to metaphysics, their tend
ency to recreate a purely "mental" mythology, identifying, e.g., the first
intellect or Logos with this or that historical poreon, or telling, as the Nusairls
do. that 'Ali is the Ma'na (Supremo Meaning) and Muhammad is the Im
(Transcendent Name), etc.
Professor Corbin demonstrated in his remarkable essays the influence of
pre-Islamic Iranian thought on Muslim thinkers like Suhrawardi MaqtQl and
on IsmA'ilism, but his oontempt of history and historical method seems rather
exaggerated. It is indeed very difficult to identify the historical channels
throngh which these influences may have penetrated Islam. Many seem, how-
ever, to forget that the most important Pahlavi theological texts were written
in Muslim Persia in the most flourishing period of Islam and that discussions
among Muslims. Christians, Maniehaeans, and Mazdeans are documented in
the third/ninth century at the Court of the Caliph al-MAmun Tho influences
A History of Muslim Philosophy
seem to have been mutual, for it has been shown that some Pahlavi texts
contain quotations from the Qur’in and mention contemporary Muslim cur
rents of thought such as that of the Mu'tazilah."
But apart from this direct influence, we could more surely admit another
kind of indirect convergence. The late systematic Mazdaic thought was no
doubt influenced by late Hellenism and Gnosticism, in the same way as the
first Islamic thought was influenced by Hellenism, Sabaeanism, and Gnosti
cism during the second and third/eighth and ninth centuries. Hence there
resulted, in both the spiritual worlds, a similar functioning that can give the
illusion of direct influence, especially when similar languages, Pahlavi and
modern Persian, are used.
If these considerations may seem to discourage the exaggerated enthusiasm
of some pan-Iranianists (it is sufficiently known that even ancient Iran had
been rather strongly “eemitized" by Babylonian and old Syrian influences),
they also point to the fact that the organic thought of Mazdaism assumed its
truer and doeper historical value just because it did not remain the heritage of
a single race or a single people, but, being in itself historically a composite
product, synthesized itself with the seeds of the extremely original and rich
philoaophioo-theological value, Islam, that was destined in its turn to spread
them in their most mature form throughout the entire civilized world.
Noto.—The quotations from A vesta and Pahlavic texts are given, modifying here
and there some rather contradictory European versions, after comparing them
with the original texts. The writer is fully aware of the fact that some of them
remain personal and rather conjectural interpretations.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
It would be useless to reproduce hero a more or loss complote bibliography of
studies and essays related to Mazdaism. A sufficiently large and recent list of
reference works is contained in J. Ducheene-Guillemin. The Western Response to
Zoroaster (Ratanb&i Katrak Lectures. 1956). Oxford. 19.18.
W. Geiger and E. Kuhn. Grmdriss der iranischen PhiMogie. 3 Vole,, Strsasburg.
1895-1904; J. Darinesteter, Zx Zend Avesta, Traduction .VoureUe ,4t« commrnlaire
historians el phdologigue. Paris, 1892-93 (Annalos du Museo Guimet. Vol *. XXI,
XXII, XXIV); L. C. Caaartelli. The Philosophy o) the Masdayasnian Religion
aider the Sasanids, Bombay, 1889; A. V. W. Jackson, Zoroaster, the Prophet of
Ancient Iran, New York. 1899; Zoroaslrian Studies. New York. 1928; V. Henn.
Le Parsisme. Paris, 1905; J. H. Moulton, Early Zoroastrianism, Izindon. 1926;
Ths Teachings of Zaralhushlra. London. 1917; M. N. Dhalla, Zoroaslrian Theologi,.
New York. 1914; History of Zoroastrianism. New York. 1938; R. Peltazzono, La
Religions d< Zaralhushlra nella sloria religiosa dell'Iran. Bologna, 1920; C. Bartbo
Ionise. Zaralhushlra. Lehen und Lehre, Hotdolberg. 1924; A. Christensen. Studer
sue le zoroasuieme de la Perse antique. Copenhagen. 1928; L'Iran sous Us Sossanides.
Copenhagen. 2nd edition, 1944; A. Meillet, Trois Conferences sur Us GtlhU de
I'Anesta. Paris. 1925; H. Lommel, Die Religion Zarathustras, Tubingen. 1930;
" Their name and their idea of the aslah are mentioned and criticized in Shihand-
GumanUt Victor. ed. Menasce, pp. 146-47.
74
Greek Thought
E. Benverustc, The Portion Religion, Paris, 1829; G. Dee Ureprung der
Magier und die larathuetrieche Religion, Rohm, 1930; O. G. von Weamdonk,
Dae Weeen der Lehrr. der Zaralhuetrae, Leipzig. 1927; Dae WelUnld der Iranter,
Milnchen, 1933; H. 8. Nyberg, Die Religion dee alien Irane, Leipzig, 1938;
F. Cumont, Lee Magee helUniete, Paris. 1938; H. W. Bailev, Zoroaetrian ProbUme
in the Ninth Century Booke, Oxford. 1943; G. Wildongren, HochgoUglaube im alien
Iran. Uppsala, 1938; The Great Vohu Manah and the A poetic of God. Uppsala, 1945;
Stand und Aufgaben der Iraniechen Religionegeechichle. Leiden, 1955; J. Duchesne-
Guillcmin. Zoraetre: Elude critique ai« une traduction commenUe dee Gdlhae. Paris,
1948, Ohrmaid el Ahriman, Paris, 1953; The Weetem Rerponoe to ZoroaeUr, Oxford.
1958; R. C. Zaehner, Zuredn, Oxford, 1955; A. Pagliaro, "L'ulcalismo gathico,"
Saip;n4vydl-ornnam; Studio Indologic Inlernationalia, Vol. I, Poona and Paris, 1954.
ChaptorIV
GREEK THOUGHT
A
THE EARLY BEGINNINGS
The thinking of the early Greeks, like that of all ancient peoples. Egyptians.
Babylonians. Hittites, Phoenicians, and Indians, was more mythological and
speculative, more poetical and theogonioal than physical or metaphysical. It
exhibited more the play of imagination than the working of reason. It is true
that the basic effort of the Greeks, as of those other peoples, was to understand
tho origin and nature of things, but, like children, what they understood was
a world of thei own make-believe rather than the real world around them.
They personified all elements of nature into powerful and immortal divinities,
having the same desires, passions, and relationships as themselves, and endowed
them with powers more or less proportionate to their magnitude. The sky. the
earth, and the indeterminate space between them, the darkness under the
earth, the ocean, river, or water supposed to encircle the earth, thunder and
lightning, day and night, air and ether, love and soul, were all divinities
respectively named as Ouranos, Gaia, Caos, Erebos, Okeanoe, Zens, Day.
Night. Air, Aether. Eros, and Psyche. Similarly, the lowest region below the
earth was named Tartaros, the god of punishment, and the region above that.
Hades, the god of the dead.
For Homer, all gods originated from Okeanos (water) and his sister and wife,
Tethys. For Ilesiod, in the beginning there was shapeless indeterminate space
(Caos) containing the seeds of all things. From him sprang Night, the mother
of sleep and subduer of all gods, and the darkness under Mother Earth (Ereboa);
and the couple produced Day and the upper reaches of space (Aether). Noxt
•■amo into living Mother Earth (Gaia) and love (Eros) the latter of which
75
A History of Muslim Philoaophy
rules the hearts of gods and men. Mother Earth then gave birth to Heaven
(Ouranos) and then by mating with this son, she produced water (Okeanoe).
For the Orphics, Night was the first and from her came Heaven and Mother
E&rth.
Though Eros was produced at a very early stage, reproduction was not
always the result of mating. For example, in Heeiodic oosmogony Caos pro
duced Night and Ercbos, and these two produced Ether and Day, and Gaia
gave birth to Portoe, either without mating or without sleeping with their
mates. Similarly, in the Orphic account Kronos, the son of Sky (Ouronoe), by
a deceit aa directed by his mother Earth (Gaia) hid himself in a place of
ambush and when his father came along with Night and in desiring love
spread himself over her. ho sheared off his genitals. The drops of blood that
fell fertilized Gaia and generated the Furies, Giants, and the Melian Nymphs,
and the blood that fell into the sea produced Aphrodite (Venus). This element
like many other contents of Greek cosmogony is of pre-Greek origin for its
variants are found in the cultures of the Hittites and tho Hindus as well.
From Kronos all other gods sprang. Zeus (Jupiter), the god of thunder and
lightning, was one of his sons from his sister and consort Rhea. Apollo the
sun-god, who with his horses and chariot sailed in the golden bowl round the
streams of Okeanoe, was the son of Zeus from Leto. Apollo's sister Artemis,
the hunting goddess, was the mistress of all wild things.
This rough account of the earliest Greek speculation from the dawn of
Greek civilization, about 1200 B.C. down to the seventh century B.C., clearly
indioates that it concerned itself with (i) tho nature of things in the universe,
(ii) the nature of gods, and (iii) the origin of the world and the gods. There
fore it can be described to be cosmological, theological, and eosmogonical.
Its language was poetry,
B
GREEK PHILOSOPHY IN THE MAINLAND AND THE
ISLANDS OF ASIA MTNOR
Ionic Philosophy
It goes to the credit of the philosophers of Miletus, the metropolis of Ionia,
a Greek colony in Asia Minor ruled by Persia, to have divested Greek thought
of theogony and cosmogony and made the phenomena of nature and their
origin their chief concern- Their thought was. however, more physical and
cosmological than metaphysical. Each of them attempted to discover a single
basic material from which everything sprang.
Thales.—The first of this group of thinkers was Thales (b. o. 640 B.C.) of
Miletus, in Ionia which was a commercially developed Greek oolOny in Asia
Minor and had close oontacta with the relatively advanced peoples of Egypt
and Babylonia. He was a man of great practical wisdom and was one of the
76
Greek Thought
seven sages of antiquity. He is said to have visited Egypt and brought geo
metry frdm there; foretold solstices and an eclipse, presumably by studying
the Babylonian records; measured the height of a pyramid by its shadow;
turned tho course of a river; and discovered the constellation Little Bear. Ac
cording to him, the earth floated on water, magnet had life because it could
move iron, water is the origin of all things, and all things are full of gods.
How he came to these last two conclusions is not known now, nor was it known
in antiquity, but the connection of his doctrine of water with Homerio Okeanos
is evident. No one knowB if he set down these ideas in writing, but if he did,
no writing of his has survived.
Anaximander.—The second of these Milesian philosophers waa Anaximander,
a younger contemporary and disciple of Thales. He and a non-Mileeian Phere-
cydea were the first two Greeks who wrote in prose. For him the first prin
ciple from which arose by eternal motion the heavens, the worlds, the divinities
that encompass the earth—a cylindrically shaped centre of all these worlds—
and all other things indeed, is an infinite, indeterminate, eternal, allenfolding,
and all-controlling stuff. From this indeterminate something are separated
off tho opposites, dry and moist, warm and cold, and these form nature with
its separate eloments (air, water, fire, and earth) and opposite qualities which
are held in just balance by time.
A sphere of flame formed round the air surrounding the earth, like a bark
round a tree, broke off into certain balls, thus forming the sun, the moon,
and the stars. All living beings arose on the earth by gradual development
out of the elementary moisture under the drying influence of heat. The first
living being that appeared thus was a fish.
Anaximenes.—The third Ionian philosopher of Miletus waa Anaximander's
disciple Anaximenes. He wrote just one book of which only one complete
sentence has survived. The originative substance, acoording to him, ia one,
infinite, and not indefinite but definite. It is air which changes by conden
sation and rarefaction. In its finest form it is fire; in being made thicker, it
becomes wind, then cloud, then water, then earth, and then stones; and the
rest, things and gods, come into being from these. Hot and oold are also due
to the same processes, the rarefied being hot and the condensed oold The
earth which is flat and round like a plate rides on air. The heaven is a vault
that moves round the earth as a cap round the head. The heavenly bodies are
fire raised on high, some fixed like nails in the crystalline vault, others moving
like "fiery leaves."
Heraeliius.—With another Ionian philosopher, Heraclitus, the problem of
philosophy shifted from the nature of substance to that of change. His home
waa at Ephesus, one of the twelve cities of Ionia famous for their temples.
He waa in his prime in about 500 B.C. He is said to have written one book
covering all knowledge, metaphysical, scientific, and political, and that in a
style unparalleled in its brevity and difficulty of interpretation. This difficulty
is embodied in a story that Euripides lent this book to Socrates who, when
77
A History of Muslim Philosophy
asked what he thought of it. replied, "Splendid what I have understood;
slso, I believe, what I have not understood—exept that it needs a Delian
diver." Of this book only 139 fragmenu have survived out of which 13 are
said to be doubtful and spurious. His influence in the history of philosophy
cannot be over-estimated.
According to him, while things remain the same, they are yet not the same;
they constantly change, in the same river we both step and do not step, for
those who step in the same river have different waters flowing ever upon them.
Thus, it is not possible to step twice in tho same river or touch the same
material substance twice. There is a perpetual change, a perpetual becoming
in whioh being and not-being are harmonized. Even God changes.
The universe of change is eternal and everlasting. It ia made by no man or
god. Its basic substance is fire, which also steers all the changes according to
law. There is an exchange—all things for fire and fire for all things, like goods
for gold and gold for goods. ,
There is a Law of the universe that is common to all. It is the Law divine
and nourishes all other laws. Though all things oome into being according to
this Law, most men are always incapable of understanding it. The soul has
iu own law which consists in growing according to the nature of its own seed.
Everything issues from and goes back to the basic substance, fire, according
to tho law of necessity.
Fire kindles in measure and is quenched in measure. The sun will not trans,
gross its measure; otherwise tho Furies, ministers of Justice, will find him out.
Everything cornea about also by way of strife, strife between opposites, be
tween cold and hot. dry and wet.. We are fundamentally the same whether
we are alive or dead, awake or asleep, for the latter of each pair of opposites,
having changod by strife, becomes the former and this again having changed
becomes the latter. To souls it is death to become water, to water it ia death
to become earth. From earth comes water and from water soul. Water lives
the death of air. air the death of fire, fire the death of earth, and earth the
death of water.
That which differs with itself is in agreement; whatever is in opposition is
in eonoert. From opposing tensions like that of the bow and the lyre arises
the most beautiful harmony. God (Zeus) is dav-night, winter-summer, war
peace, satietv-famine. He changes liko fire which when mingled with smoke
of incense is named according to each man's pleasure. Ho alone is wise.
Our knowledge is relative. Everything is known by its opposite. Disease
makes health pleasant and good, hunger satisfaction, weariness rest. People
would not know right if they did not know wrong. Moderation is the greatest
virtue and wisdom is to speak the truth and to act according to nature. A
dry soul ia the wisest and best. Character, for man. is destiny. Absolute truth
is known only to God for whom all things are beautiful, good, and just.
Heraclitus' physics follows from his metaphysics. Fire is tho basic material
substance from which all things come and into which all things go, and this
78
Greek Thought
cycle of creation and destruction goes on for ever. Earth rarefied becomes
water and water rarefied partly remains moist and partly gets akin to fire,
and by thia process the bright fiery parts become the stars, sun, and moon,
and tho darker parts, being near earth, form tho fiery bodies that shine less
brightly. The size of the sun is equal to the breadth of a man's foot.
c
GREEK PHILOSOPHY IN SOUTH ITALY AND SICILY
In about 530 B.C. another centre of Greek speculation arose, and tho prob
lem of philosophy shifted from the nature of substanoe and change to the
form and relation of things and permanence. Pythagoras of Samos, an Ionian
island in the Aegean Sea off the west coast of Asia Minor, settled down in
South Italy at Crotona, a Greek colony, where he formed a society with aims
at once political, philosophical, and religious. Xenophanes, an Ionian thinker,
who was in the prime of life in 530 B.C., migrated to Elea, a Greek settlement
in South Italy. He and his pupil, Parmenides, and grand pupil. Zeno, formed
what is generally known as the Elcatic school.
1. Pythagoras
Pythagoras was in the prime of life in 530 B.C. No written work was left
by him, but there are references to him in Xenophanes, Heraclitus, Empe
docles, Plato, and others. All teaching was done by him by word of mouth,
because one of the rules imposed upon the members of the brotherhood founded
by him—a rule equally binding on the master and the disciples—was that, of
secrecy, betrayal being punishable by excommunication.
He is said to have visited Egypt and Babylon where he learnt the mathe
matical and religio-mystieal elements of his philosophy. One of his chief doc
trines was transmigration of the soul. His system had an clement of asceticism
based on taboos prohibiting the eating of beans, killing some kinds of animals
for sacrifice and food, and wearing of woollen clothes at religious ceremonies.
The school did a mass of work in mathematics, the mechanics of sound, and
geometrical theorems, but it is difficult to say how much of this work went
to Pythagoras himself. According to him, Number was tho First Principle and
numbers and their relationships were the essence of all things. This idea made
the Pythagoreans base their philosophy on mathematics. The original number
was Monad, the Principle of Oneness, which was equated to Limit. They deve
loped a dualistic cosmology founded on the pairs of opposites. These are:
One-Two (Monad-Dyad), One being tho principle of Limit imposing itself
upon Two, the principle of the Unlimited ever-existing Void (empty spare
made of air or vapour), Odd-Even. One-Many, Right-Left, Male-Female, Rest-
Motion. Straight-Curved, Light-Darkness, Good-Bad, and Square-Oblong
Tilings came into existence by the opposition of the Limiting and th<
79
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Unlimited and their harmony. From the Monad, the One or the Limiting, and
the Dyad, the Unlimited, camo the numbers and their relations, from the num
bers remo the points, from the pointe linee, from lines planes, from planes solids,
and from solids the perceptible elements, fire, water, earth, air, each consisting
of particles or atoms of different shapes. The One by working from within
outward created all shapes and by the reverse process of drawing the Un-
limited inward created the earth, the counter-earth, a body revolving once
a day between the earth and the central fire, the planets, the sun. the moon,
the stars, and everything they contained. Everything has a number, the eentral
fire one. the earth two, the sun seven, and so on. Even immaterial substance
liko the soul and abstract qualities such as justide. courage, right, motion,
etc., were assigned numbers.
The school very early saw the relations between the notes of the Octave
and the length of the string and designated them as symphonies. The heavens
are in harmony and in their motion they make music which Pythagoras alone
was said to be able to hear.
2. The Eleatic School
Xenophanes.—The founder of the Eleatic school. Xenophanes, was a con
temporary of Pythagoras. He was in the prime of his life in about 530 B.C.
He condemned Homer and Ilesiod for attributing to the gods all things that
are shameful and a reproach to mankind: theft, adultery, and mutual decep
tion. There is. according to him, one God among gods and men, the greatest,
and He is not at all like mortals in body and mind. He remains permanently
the same, not moving and undergoing change: and without toil He seta every
thing in motion, by the power of His thought.
Complete knowledge of gods, men, and things is impossible No man has
ever Been certain truth, nor will anyone ever see it. Whatever we can know,
we know after long seeking.
Everything oomes from earth and goes back to earth at last. Water also
contributes to t he being and growth of things. The sea is the source of clouds,
winds, and rivers, and the sun moves about the earth and gives it warmth.
Parmenides.—Parmenides of Elea was a contemporary of Heraclitus and
about twenty-five years his junior in age. He was Xenophanes' disciple and
had also a Pythagorean as his teacher. His philosophy like that of his pupil
Zeno's was a reaction against the philosophy of Heraclitus. He took up Xeno
phanes' idea of permanence and developed it by the help of rigorous logic.
He gave expression to his thought in a poem addressed to his disciple. Zeno,
who was his junior by about twenty-five years. In the prologue of this poem
he allegorically relates how in the chariot of the senses, of which the wheels
were the ears and steeds the eyes, he was carried to the place of the goddess
Night and she revealed to him the way of truth and the way of opinion.
In the way of truth, he is told what reason (logos) can think, exists: what
80
Greek Thought
it cannot think, does not exist. It is not. thinkable that what-is-not w. Not-
Being. therefore, does not oxist and Being alone exists. If Being alone is, it
follows that it does not come into being, for if it did. it would have to come
from something which is Not-Being; but from Not-Being it could not come, for
Not-Being does not exist. There being nothing besides it, nothing could bring
it into being at one time rather than at another. It is therefore ever present.
For it, there ia no before and after. It is permanent and eternally continuous.
As there is nothing besides it to bring it into being, there is nothing besides it
to destroy it. It ia one indivisible whole, fur there is no Nou-Being to lie be
tween its parts. It is all alike. It is also motionless, for there is nothing besides
it to move it and there is nothing in which it can move. It is limited, but
why it is so is not explained. There being no Not-Being to stop it, it cannot
be more or less in any direction. It is therefore a well-rounded sphere, complete
on all aides.
The way of opinion is the way of untruth and false belief. The goddess
shows it to him to enable him to guard himself against it. The beliefs mentioned
in this connection aa false are: the opposites of Light and Darkness are the
First Causes; to be and not to be are the same; for everything theto is a way
of opposing stress; the moon shines with light borrowed from the sun; the
sun and tho moon were separated from the milky way; the earth is rooted in
water—beliefs which were held by some of his predecessors and contemporaries.
Parmenides' speculation involved four basic canons: (1) that Being not
having sprung from Not-Bcing was itself ultimate, (2) that Void, being non
existent. could not be, (3) that plurality could not come out of the primal
Unity, (4) nor oould motion and change. These canons were generally regarded
as the last word on philosophy till tho time of Plato who was the first to expose
their fallacies.
Zeno.—Zeno of Elea wrote a book called Atlacla in defence of Parmenides'
theory of Being as One, indivisible, and permanent. Ilia method was to take
the opposite view and reduce it to absurdity by showing that it led to con
tradictory conclusions. This method, of which he himself was the originator.
in callod reduclio ad abeurdum. He first took up the proposition: Tilings are
many, and then showed that they must be both finite and infinite. If they
are many, they must be of a number; they are neither more nor loss. If they
are neither more nor less, they are finite. Again, if they are many, they must,
on the other hand, be infinite, for there are always other things in between
them, and again others between these and so on ad infinitum.
If things are many, they must be either without magnitude or with magni
tude. If without magnitude, then if a thing is added to another tiling there
would be no addition in magnitude. The unit added is, therefore, infinitely
small, as small as nothing. If anything has magnitude, it follows that part
of it must also have magnitude and so the part preceding it, and the part that
precedes the preceding one and so on ad infinitum Therefore it must be in
81
A History of Muslim Philosophy
If a thing moves, it is neither in the place in which it is, nor in that in which
it is not, but either alternative is impossible. If a thing is in a place, it is at
rest. Nor can anything happen to a thing in a place where it is not.
If everything is in space, space is either something or nothing. If space is
something, then space is itself in something and that something in something
else and so on ad infinitum.
Zeno argued similarly against motion. In this connection he advanced
four arguments: (1) You cannot traverse a given length, for to traverse it you
must reach the half-way position and then the half-way position of the remain
ing half, and so on ad infinitum. Again, motion is impossible because it is
impossible to pass through infinite positions in finite time. (2) If the tortoise
is given a start. Achilles cannot catch up with it, for while he runs that distance,
the tortoise will have got further, and so on ad infinitum. (3) If you shoot an
arrow at a target, it cannot reach the target, because it has to pass through an
infinite number of positions and that cannot be done in finite time. (4) Sup
pose there are three sets of solids A, B, and C: A at rest. B moving in one
direction, and C moving in the opposite direction at equal speeds. Solids in B
and C would pass one another twice as quickly aa they pass those in A.
Therefore equal speeds are at unequal speeds which is absurd.
These dilemmas of Zeno have puzzled the philosophers all through the ages,
but the real solution has been found only in the physico-mathematical develop
ments of modern times.
Melueus.—Mel issue of Samos was younger than Zeno by about ten years.
Ho did not actually live in Elea or any other Greek part of South Italy, yet
ho belonged to the Eleatic school, because he accepted most of the views of
Parmenides. He wrote a poem On Being some fragments of which have survived.
According to him. Being or the One cannot come into being, and change,
move, have pain or any multiplicity or divisibility. If Being had a beginning,
it would have been from Not-Being. but nothing can come out of Not-Being.
If Being had no beginning, it cannot have an end, for if nothing can come out
of Not-Being, nothing can go into Not-Being. Therefore, Being has been from
eternity and is everlasting. There is no creation and no destruction. Being is
also infinite in magnitude, for if limited, it must be limited by Not-Being which
is impossible. In Being there is no change, for if Being altered, then what was
before must have passed away or become Not-Being and what was not before,
i.e., Not-Bcing, must have come into being which both are impossible. There
fore there is no rarefaction and no condensation. Being cannot move, for there
is no Void for it to move into. Being cannot feel pain, for pain is felt through
the addition or subtraction of something, i.e., by not remaining the same,
but Being always remains the same.
3. Empedocles
Empedocles of Acragas, a town in Sicily and capital of the south-western
province of Italy, was a contemporary of Zeno and of the same age as he. He
82
Greek Thought
wrote two poems entitled On Nature and Purifications. Like Melissus, he was
deeply influenced by Parmenides. Agreeing with Parmenides that Being could
not come out of Not-Being, that plurality, divisibility, change, and motion
oould not spring from Absolute Unity, and that there was no Void, ho explained
plurality, divisibility, change, and motion by denying the Original Absolute
Unity. The original undifferentiated whole, according to him, consisted of
four eternally existing elements—tiro, air, earth, and water—leaving no Void.
Each of the elements is underived and indestructible and of a specific nature.
From these elements come all things that were, are, and will be. Change is a
mere rearrangement and reshuffling of these elements. It arises from motion
and motion cannot arise from Absolute Being. To explain motion he postulated
two motive powers, Love and Strife, existing from eternity along with tho four
elements and having infinite power, llo held that there is no absolute genera-
tion or absolute decay. What are called creation and destruction are really
commingling and separation of the elements, the former being the work of
Love and the latter of Strife.
Existence passes through three stages. In the first stage Loro alone was
active and the elements were mingled together forming one all-inclusive
Whole—a Whole which had no feet, no knees, and no genitals, but was a
sphere equal to himself from all sides. The middle stage was the ono in which
Love and Strife were both active, but Strife gradually gained the upper hand.
In this stage the elements became separated from the Whole. The first to
separate was air that flowed around in a cirole and took up the position sur
rounding the world, and its outermost margin solidified itself to form the
firmament. It was followed by fire which ran upwards under the solidified
periphery round the air and displaced the air of the upper half. Fire was fol
lowed by earth and earth by water. By further commingling appeared soli
tary limbs, foreheads, eyes, breasts, arms, feet, etc., wandering about and
seeking for union. When Love and Strife more or less mingled together, by
their action there was a mingling of these limbs into chance combinations form
ing monsters and deformed organisms, like creatures having faces and breasts
on both side*, cattle with the fronts of men, and men with the heads of oattle.
latter, those things which were accidentally well fitted to ono another survived;
the rest disappeared. Those things are most suitable for coming together which
are made like one another. It ia these which are united by Love. Those things
which differ most from one another in their origin, mixture, and form arc
made so by Strife and are very baneful. At the next stage gradually appeared
"wholr-natured forms”—first plants, then gradually fish, birds, wild animals,
mon, and even gods who are the highest in honour—and people said things had
come into being. As the process of separation under the influence of Strife
continued, the sexes were distinguished. When Love is completely inactive
and Strife alone ia operative, the last stage of extreme separation is reached
and individual things disappear, and men not knowing the truth call this their
death.
83
A History of Muslim Philosophy
This stage of extreme separation is followed by a period when Ix>ve regains
its ascendancy and reunites the separate elements, and individual things re
appear. But when Love alone rules and Strife is inactive, three things again
disappear and the original stage of one all-inclusive Unity is re-established
This cycle of One changing into many and many changing into One is endlessly
repeated as appointed by Fate.
In Purificaliont, Empedocles deals with the relation of man to the universe.
He identifies the soul with fire. The soul first existed mingled in the original
undifferentiated Whole (God). Then Strife detached it from the Whole. It
passes through the stages of plants, wild animals, and men and then, if purified
by fasting and continent living, it is taken back by Love to the original Whole
and becomes one with God.
In man all the elements, air, fire, earth, water, and Love and Strife are
present; and since like perceive like, he can perceive all the elements in the
surrounding world through the senses, His blood also contains all the elements.
His thought-consciousness resides chiefly in the blood round the heart. All
things give off effluences and when the effluences of two bodies are of the
right size to fit into the pores of their respective organs, sensation of tho one
in the other takes place. All sense-organs are equally reliable, and it is a
mistake not to trust sense-experience.
Thus, to Empedocles goes the credit of basing knowledge on experience end
recognizing observation expressly as a method of inquiry. Some of his ooamo-
logical, botanical, and embryological findings are remarkable
The sun. according to him, is not in its nature fire, but rather a reflection
of fire like that which oomes from water. It is collected in a ball which travels
round the great sky. The moon, which is composed of air shut in by fire and
solidified like hail, gets its light from the sun. When in her movement round
the earth, the moon comes below the sun, she cuts off its rays, and shadow is
thrown as much on the earth as tho breadth of the moon. The earth makes
night by coming in the way of the sun's rays. The earth is stable in the midst
of revolving heavens, like water in a revolving bowl.
Plante are living things and they combine both sexes in One. The substance
of the child's limits is divided between the parents, and the child resembles
whichever of tho parents has contributed moat. All things inhale and exhale.
There are bloodless channels in the flesh of them all. stretched over their
bodies' surface, and at the mouths of these channels the outermost surface of
the skin is pierced right through with many a pore, so that blood is kept in,
but an easy path is cut for the air to pass through.
84
Greek Thought
GREEK PHILOSOPHY BACK TO ASIA MINOR
I, Anaxagoras and Diogenes of Apollonia
Anaxagoras.—Anaxagoras was a contemporary of Zeno and Empedocles,
about ten yean older than both. At the age of twenty he migrated to Athens
and stayed there for thirty years and, being prosecuted for impiety because
he maintained that the sun was a red-hot mass of metal, he withdrew to
lampsacus in Asia Minor where he died in about 428 B.C. He was an associate
of Anaximenes and Protagoras and teacher of Euripides and Pericles by the
latter of whom he was defended in his prosecution which resulted. according
to some, to a fine and his exile and, according to others, to condemnation to
death in his absence. He wrote only one book some fragments of wliich lire
still extant.
Anaxagoras could not see how Empedocles drew an infinite variety of things
from only four elements and two motive forces, Ixivo and Strife. Ho. there
fore, postulated that the first undifferentiated whole contained mixed together
all the opposites of Anaximander, Heraclitus, and the Pythagoreans, all the
four elements of Empedocles, and, liesidcs, seeds. infinite in number ami small
ness and in every respect different from one another, of all things that were
ultimately to emerge. For explaining the separation of things and their growth
from their seeds he substituted Empedocles
* motive forces of love and Strife
by the single intellectual motive force of Mind. Mind is infinite, all alike,
self-ruled, and all alone by itself. Though it is mixed with nothing, it is none
the less present where everything else is, whether as mixed or separated off
If it were mixed with things, they would have limited it from controlling
everything the way it does. Mind has knowledge of all things, mixed and
separated, past, present, and future; has the greatest power; controls every
thing that has life; and sets everything in order, including the rotation of
tlie air. aether, the sun, and the moon. It is the finest and the purest of all
that is.
He agreed with Parmenides and Empedocles that nothing can come out
of nothing. As the seeds of all things are present in the Original Whole, nothing
new comes into existence. Nor is anything destroyed. Change means only
mixture and separation.
He held that all things are infinitely great and infinitely small—infinitely
great because they contain an infinite number of parts, and infinitely small
because even the smallest of parts is infinitely divisible into smaller and still
smaller parts.
His eosmogonical findings were as follows. The Mind imparted at first a
rotary movement to the mixed Whole (Caos) and this movement caused the
reparation of all bodies in the Cosmos. The first things to emerge wen- air and
aether the latter of which he identified with fire. The dense was then separatist
85
A History of Muslim Philosophy
off from the rare, the hot from the cold, the bright from the dark, and the
drj- from the moist, the light, hot, and dry bodies occupying the upper position
und the dense, moist, cold, and dark taking the lower position where the earth
is. But nothing was completely separated off from the other except Mind.
Air is solidified into cloud, cloud into water, water into earth, and earth into
stones under the agency of cold. The sun, the moon, and all the stare are rod-hot
stones wliich the rotation of the aether carried round it. The heat of the stare
is not felt by us because t hey are far from us. The moon is beneath the sun and
nearer to us. She has no light of her own but derives it from the sun. The stars
in their revolution paas benoath the earth. The eclipse of the moon is due to
its being screened by the earth, and that of the sun to its being screened by
the moon when it is new. The moon is made of earth and has plains and ravines
on it.
The earth is flat and stays suspended where it is because of its site, because
there is no void, and because the air keeps it afloat. Rivers owe their origin
partly to rain and partly to the waters under the earth which is hollow and
in its hollow contains water. Tho reflection of the sun in the clouds forms the
rainbow. The moisture of the cloud either creates a wind or spills forth rain.
First after separation air contained the seeds of all things and those seeds,
when carried down by the rain, gave rise to plants. Animals first arose from
moisture and then from one another. All living things, plants at the bottom
and man at the top, have a portion of Mind. Anaxagoras formulated two
principles which enabled him to propound his theory of nourishment and
growth. These principles are: (1) that a portion of everything is in everything'
and (2) that things alike attract one another. Things that are eaten already
contain the ingredients which are produced in an organism, e.g., blood, sinews,
bones, flesh, and so on. These ingredients reason alone can know. Those seeds
in which blood predominates proceed, by the attraction of like to like, to
join the blood of the body, and those m which flesh predominates proceed
by the same principle to join the bodily flesh. The same holds true of all other
parts.
Diogenes o/ Apollonia.—Diogenes of Apollonia, a town in Asia Minor or
Crete, lived in the later half of tnu fifth century B.C. He was an eclectic
thinker chiefly influenced by Anaximenes. Anaxagoras, and Heraclitus. He
first laid down two principles, one with regard to energy, the other to the
language used. He said, one must begin one's investigation with something
incontrovertible and one's expression should be simple and dignified. Well
within the Milesian tradition he held that all tilings must be modifications
of one basic substance, for if they were different in nature and were not
fundamentally the same, they could neither mix with one another, nor in
fluence one another favourably or adversely, nor could one thing grow out
1 Rather inconsistently he also holds that natural substances consist solely of
parts which are like tho whole and like one another
86
Greek Thought
of another. This basic substance for him as for Anaximenes is air which is
infinite and eternal and generative of the worlds. From its condensation and
rarefaction—guided by ita purposive intelligence—all things come into being
and become of different kinds at different times, and to it they return Air is,
in short, God who has power over, steers, inheres in, and disposes all things.
It is the soul of all living things, for when they cease breathing, they die. It
is air that creates all sensations. When air is mixed with blood, it lightens it
and, penetrating tho body through and through, produces pleasure. When
it does not mix with blood, the blood gets thicker and coagulates, then pain
results. Diogenes also gave quite an acute account of the anatomy of veins.
2. The Atomists
Lucippus.—Lucippus who belonged to Miletus in Asia Minor was in his
prime of life in 430 B.C- He was a pupil of Zeno and is said to have associated
with Parmenides, though their philosophies were poles apart. He evolved the
theory of atoms which was accepted and further refined by Democritus, who
belonged cither to Miletus, or according to some accounts to Abdera, and was
in the prime of his life in 420 B.C. Democritus had met Lucippus and perhaps
also Anaxagoras to whom he was junior by about forty years. He visited
Egypt, Chaldaea, Persia, some say even India and Ethiopia. He was a prolific
writer, though nothing of his works has survived except about 280 fragments
mostly from his ethical writings.
Democritus.—In Democritus the scientific spirit of Ionia found its culmina
tion. His theory became tho basis of all subsequent materialism right down
to the present day. The Atomists made their theory explain our experience
of the ooming-into-being, perishing, and motion of things and their multi
plicity; and thia they did by postulating, against the Eleatics, the existenoe
of Void, a Not-Being which nevertheless exists aa much as Being. Both Being
and Void or Not-Being are tho material causes of all existing things. Being is
not one, but consists of invisible, small atoms of infinite number and shapes.
The atoms are to be regarded of infinite shapes, because there is no reason
why an atom should be of one shape rather than another. They are indivisible
because they are very small. They are compact and full, because there is no
Void within them. They move in the Void, and by coming together they
effect coming-into-being, and by their separation, perishing. They differ from
one another not in quality but in shape, arrangement, and position and,
according to Aristotle's reading, also in weight. These differences are responsible
for all the qualitative differences in objects.
The wholo of existence is infinite; a part of it is filled with atoms and a
part is Void. A large number of atoms of different shapes move in the infinite
Void. They come together there like to like and produce, in the same wav
as the Mind of Anaxagoras, a whirl in which oolliding with one another and
revolving in all manner of ways, they begin to separate, like to like. But when
87
\ lli-ti ry '»! Muslim Philosophy
their multitude prevents them from rotating any longer in equilibrium, those
that arc fine go out towards the surrounding Void, while the rest get en
tangled, abide together, unite their motions, and make the first spherical
structure. Thus the earth came into, being when the bulkier atoms stayed
together. It is flat but tilted downward towards the south. Some of these
bodies that get entangled form a structure that is first moist and muddy
but as they revol with the whirl of the whole they dry out and then ignite
to form the substance of the heavenly bodies. Thus arise innumerable worlds
which differ in size and are resolved again into atoms.
In some worlds there are no sun and moon, in some they are larger than
those in our world and in others more numerous. The intervals between the
worlds are unequal, in some parts there are more worlds, in others fewer,
some are increasing, some at their height, some decreasing, in some parts they
are arising, in others fulling. They are destroyed by collision with one another
Some worlds are devoid of living creatures or plants or any moisture.
In compound bodies the lighter is one that contains more Void, the heavier
that which contains leas. The soul consists of spherical atoms spread through
the body. We inhale and exhale soul-atoms, and life continues so long as this
process goes on.
All objects animate or inanimate flock together with their kind, dove with
dove, crane with crane, and pebbles with pebbles on the seashore.
The process by which the worlds come into existence and everything moves
is not random. Nothing occurs at random; every change in existence is for a
reason and only by necessity.
According to the Atomista, knowledge is of two forms, genuine i id obscure,
sensuous knowledge being of the latter type. They explain sens. ion by a
kind of effluence that ia said to proceed from everything. In the case of sight
it proceeds both from the object seen and the observer’s eye and produces an
impression on the air. the solid part of which remains outside but the finer
and lighter part, the image, enters the pupil of the eye if the eye aho throws
out a like image. Other sensations are explained by the size and shape of the
atoms. Sensible qualities being the result of this process show how things
affect us, not what t hey are. As later on held by Locke, shape, arrangement,
size, and weight are the qualities of things, and are therefore objective, but
colour, sound, taste, smell, eto., are subjective.
The ethical fragments of Democritus which have come down to us in the
form of aphorisms are mostly sparkling jewels of wisdom and common sense.
According to him, happiness is tho highest good. In theology he believed in
the existence of gods, but the gods, ho holds, are made of atoms and are as
material and mortal as men. Only they live longer and have greater power
and higher reason. They do not interfere in men’s affairs and, therefore, need
not be feared.
88
Greek Thought
E
PHILOSOPHY AT ATHENS
1. Early Record
So far all philosophical development took place in Greek' settlements in the
islands and the mainland of Asia Minor which were under the imperial rule
of Persia and in Magna Graecia (the Greek cities of South Italy and Sicily).
Before the beginning of the fifth century B.C. Athens had not produced a
single great man in the spheres of art, science, literature, and philosophy
except the lawgiver Solon. Archelaus (c. 450 B. C.) did belong to Athens but
he was a minor thinker who followed the principles of Anaxagoras with some
modifications based on Anaximander's primacy of hot and cold, Anaximenes'
condensation and rarefaction of air. and Empedocles' four elements. His chief
claim to a place in the history of Greek philosophy is that he was a pupil of
Anaxagoras and teacher of Socrates.
However, the victory of Athens against the Persian King Darius in 49(1 B. C.
and of the combined Greek navies under Athenian leadership against his son
Xerxoa in 480 B.C. brought Athena politically to the forefront. Political pre
dominance brought with it nourishing trade and commerce which resulted in
great prosperity. During Pericles' wise rule of thirty years from 460 to 430 B. C.
Athens was at the height of her glory. It was during this period that Aeschylus,
Sophocles, and Euripides produced their tragedies, Aristophanes his comedies,
and Pheidias hia statues—all masterpieces of unsurpassed beauty. Herodotus
by writing tho history of the Persian wars became the father of history and
Thucydides by producing his History of the Peloponnesian War secured for
himself the rank of the greatest historian of antiquity.
In philosophy, however, the record of Athens up to the end of the fifth
century was far from brilliant. She produced only one great philosopher
-Socrates, and suffered another from Asia Minor, Anaxagoras, to live and teach
there. But her people by bringing up the charge of impiety and corruption of
the Athenian youth against them condemned the former to death and the
latter, despite Pericles' defence to banishment for life. Besides, it was here
that tho sceptical movement started by the Sophists brought philosophy,
partly justly and partly unjustly, under the shadow of disrepute.
2. The Sophists
The Problem o/ Knowledge and the Study o/ Man
While great but conflicting philosophical systems were being developed
with almost equal force by the Asian Greeks in the islands and the mainland
of Asia Minor, and the Western Greeks in South Italy and Sicily, by about
450 B.C. dlssatfafsrtinn began to appear with system-building ill a attain
section of talented men. The paradoxical conclusion of these systems made t his
89
A History of Muslim Philosophy
group of thinkers sceptical about philosophy as a truth-finding discipline. The
leader of this group was Protagoras of Abdera in Thrace who was at the prime
of his life in the later half of the fifth century B. C. He was a friend of Pericles
and used to teach in Athens. He doubted the existence of gods and, therefore,
like Anaxagoras, was banished from Athens on a charge of impiety. In addition,
his books were burnt in the market-place.
According to Protagoras, we experience neither the ultimate principles
of the schools of Ionia or the First Cause of the school of Elea, nor the “'atoms"
of Democritus or the "seeds" of Anaxagoras. At best they are unverifiable
hypotheses. Therefore, all talk about them ia idle. Instead of wasting energy
on discussion regarding the nature of the objective world a man should occupy
himself with hinutll- All knowledge, for what it is worth, depends upon the
senses. But our sense-experience is deceptive. It reveals only what passes away
and yields no universal truth. Nor can we rely on reason, for reason ia also
based on sense-experience and is a mere continuation of it. As all knowledge is
based on a man’s sensations, it is true only for him, and not for all. A pro
position may at the same time be both true and false, true for one, false for
others. There being no absolute truth, each "man" as an individual "is the
measure of all things.”
Ethical truths are equally relative. What is of benefit to me may harm
another, and thus what is good for one may be bad for others. The individual's
good is only what he considers good for himself. With everyone personal
benefit alone should oount. Although one opinion cannot be truer than another,
it can yet be better than another. As sensuous knowledge, however uncertain,
is alone possible for us. it should be acquired for use in practical life. Similarly,
it is not known whether the gods exist or not; they should nevertheless be
worshipped.
Protagoras only doubtod the possibility of certain knowledge, but his
contemporary Gorgias went to the extent of maintaining that nothing what
ever exists, and if anything exists, it is not knowable and if it is knowable,
it is not communicable.
Following these leaders all Sophists became sceptical about the universality
and objectivity of truth itself and began to concern themselves mainly with
teaching the practical arts of arguing and speaking with effect for success in
public life, and receiving payment in return. The subjects they taught with
this and in view were logic, rhetorics, and grammar. As there was no regular
system of education only the sons of aristocracy could afford to take lessons
from them. They were hated by the masses because of their relations with
aristocracy and their radicalism in matters of religious beliefs, and by the
philosophers of other schools because, against the prevailing practice, they
charged fees for giving instruction. They were called by their opponents the
Sophislt. Though the word "sophist" means a wise or learned man, it was used
for them as a term of reproach to mean a quibble r who used fallacious arguments
to make truth appear falsehood and falsehood truth, and argued not to find
BO
Greek Thought
the truth but only to win a point against a disputant. Thia reproach was
definitely justified, at least in the case of the later Sophists.
From the purely philosophical point of view, the sceptical movement of
tho Sophists was not an unmixed evil. It was quite a natural movement and
of positive gain in two ways. A period of feverish intellectual activity resulting
in great systems is naturally followed by a period of criticism—a criticism
which paves the way for further developments. The critical scepticism of the
Sophists led to the philosophies of Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle which
represented the highest point that Greek speculation could reach.
There was another gain. The main problems to which the svstem-builders
paid attention were the problems of Being and Not-Boing. substance and
number, permanence and change. One and many; and man did not figure in
the picture at all. The Sophists made the study of man, as an individual and
as a member of the State, their chief concern. This turn in Greek speculation
widenod the horizon and partly determined the course of subsequent Greek
thought.
3. Soorates
Socrates was bom at Athens in 469 or 470 B. C. and was condemned to death
in 399 B.C. He spent most of his time in high philosophical discussions in
public places.
"In the case of Socrates,” says Bertrand RusbcII, “tho uncertainty is aa
to whether we know very little or a great deal.”’ The reason is that for his
teaching he used the method of conversation and wrote no book. All our
knowledge of him is based on the writings of his pupils, Xenophon, a soldier
whose philosophical equipment was not high enough to enable him fully to
appreciate his t Sacher's ideas, and Plato who idealized him and made him the
chief character of his Dialogues, but left no hint to the extent to which the
contents of the Dialogues relate to his own ideas and to what extent to those
of Socrates. Socrates was the greatest thinker of his generation. He was high-
minded, eminently pions, frank to a fault, amazingly indifferent to worldly
success and comforts of life, and remarkably high in the estimation of youth.
Physically, he was extremely ugly and went about shabbily dressed and
barefoot.
Although he never took any fees for Iris teaching and was opposed to the
Sophistic way of thinking, he was sometimes mistaken for a Sophist. This was
due to the fact that, like the Sophists, he discarded metaphysics, natural
science, and mathematics, made the study of man as a citizen his main
concern, and regarded the individual's culture as the goal of education,
irrespective of its effect on State, religion, and traditional beliefs.
Socrates believed in God, immortality of the soul. and. for the noble and
the great, a happy life after death. He was religious to the extent of being
■ Bertrand KusseH. Hiatory o/ Hrslern /‘Ma'opl.y. p. 102
91
X History of Muslim 1’hiloeophy
superstitious, for he went to the Delphic Oracle to fiiHi out who was the wisest
man in Athens. The Oracle's reply that it was he himself came to him aa a
complete surprise, for, he thought, a god could not be wrong, and yet he who
knew nothing had been declared to be the wisest man. To see that there was
no error he visited all tho men reputed for great wisdom, engaged them in
discussion only to be disappointed and to discover that the Oracle was right,
because those who claimed knowledge actually knew nothing, while he who
claimed no knowledge knew at least one truth, the truth that he knew nothing.
He also claimed that ever since his childhood he had heard a divine voice that
always told him what not to do and that he was commissioned by God to
fulfil the philosopher's mission by searching into himself and other men.
In spite of his religious-mindedncss anil his ennobling influence on the youth,
he was prosecuted for denying the gods of the State, worshipping new divinities,
and corrupting the young, and was in the end condemned to death by poison.
Socrates used and developed the Dialectical Method invented by Zeno. It is
the method of seeking knowledge through t he clarification of ideas by questions
and answers. It is a useful method for discovering logical inconsistencies in
order to reach what is logically consistent. It is suitable for the clarification
and definition of non-empirical ideas and tho right, usage of words, but. as
Bertrand Russell says, is of no uso in tho discovery of new facts.’
He was interested neither in physical nor in mathematical or metaphysical
speculation. His interest lay mainly in ethics, of which he is rightly said to bo
the founder.
Opinions greatly differ in moral matters, but for Socrates it is the philo
sopher’s duty to dig out the eternal and universal truths hidden beneath
the confused mass of opinion. Beginning with real or professed ignorance
this irony) and making self-consistency as tho criterion of truth, he brought
under discussion opinions about such matters as good, beauty, ugliness,
nobility, wisdom, justice, courage, friendship, State, and citizenship, in order
to know their real moral significance and to arrive at their precise definitions.
He was convinced that all evil-doing is due to ignorance. If people knew
what was right, they would do no wrong. As knowledge alone ia needed to make
people virtuous, he declared that knowledge is virtue, ft is tnc highest good
and the sole end of life and its pursuit ia the only source of abiding happiness.
By over-emphasizing one aspect or another of Socrates' system, his followers
developed divergent lines of thought. The school of the Cyrenaira, founded
by Aristippus of Cyrene, lay hold of his idea of happiness and joy in the
pursuit of knowledge, and made the greatest amount of pleasure tho highest
good for man. a view later on token and modified by the Epicureans. His
emphasis on knowledge as virtue, as the supreme good worthy of being sought
for its own sake. irres|>cctive of the joy that it brings, made the school of
the Cynics, established by Antisthenes. couple their doctrine of virtue and
• Ibid., p. 113.
82
Greek Thought
duty with asceticism, Le., with extreme self-restraint, self-renunciation, and
freedom from want -a doctrine later on developed hy the Stoics. Emlides and
Plato combined his idea of the highest good with the Eleatic conception of the
unity of Being and developed the doctrine that matter and change anil motion
are unreal, and tho one ultimate Being—the Good—is the essence of all
things.
4. Plato
Plato (427-347 B.C.) was a descendant of Solon from.his mother's side
and, if his father’s claim is accepted. of the last kings of Athens from the
father’s aide. He was a disciple of Socrates and teacher of Aristotle. He remained
attached to the Socratic circle from his own age of twenty to the death of
Socrates. His works were exceedingly well preserved. Out of these, twenty-six
authentic Dialogues have come down to us. At the age of forty or forty-ope
he founded an educational institution known as the Academy, where he taught
till his death at tile age of eighty. The Academy flourished till 529 A. D. when.
920 years after its inception, Justinian, Emperor of the Eastern Roman Empire,
which had been converted to Christianity nearly two centuries before, closed it
"because of his religious bigotry" and brought Greek philosophy officially to
an end "and the Dark Ages descended upon Europe."4
After more than half a century of sceptical criticism, Greek thought went
hack to system-building and produced two of the most comprehensive and
integrated systems the world has ever scon. Of these Plato's was one and the
other was that of his disciple, Aristotle. The fundamentals of Plato's system
are the same in all his Dialogues, but, owing to development of his thought,
the details differ from Dialogue to Dialogue. An exceedingly well-written
passage in Frank Thilly’a Hwtory o/ Philo-tophy brings out very clearly Plato’s
relations to his predecessors. It runs as follows:
"Within the framework of the Platonic system, we have a combination and
transformation of tho teachings of the leaders of Greek thought. With the
Sophists, Plato agrees that knowledge—if knowledge be restricted to appear
ances—ia impossible; with Socrates, that genuine knowledge ia always by
concepts; with Heraclitus, that the world is in constant change (sensuous ap
pearances are characterized by change); with the Eleaties, that the real world
for Plato tho world of ideas—is unchangeable; with the atomists, that being i-s
manifold (Plato admits a plurality of ideas); with the Eleatics, that it is one
(the form of the Good is a unity); with nearly all the Greek thinkers, that it is
basically rational; with Anaxagoras, that mind rules it and that mind is
distinct from matter. His system is the mature fruit of the history of Greek
philosophy down to his time,"
*
Knowledge, according to Plato, is grasping the true living of a thing. As
IM.. p. M<>
Frank Thlfl.v I llittory o/ PHilowphy. p. 73.
93
A History of Muslin. Philosophy
the Sophists have conclusively shown, the true nature of a thing cannot bo
known through sense-perception. The true being of a thing is its idea, its eternal,
unchangeable, and universal nature and it can be known only by a special
method of inquiry,
The method he employs for acquiring the knowledge of true beings is the
Dialectical Method of Socrates ; but not only that; he also developed the theory
of this method. Dialectic is not discussion for the sake of discussion. Its
procedure of questions and answers is aimed at examining opinions baaed upon
the apprehension of particulars in sense-perception in order to discover, by the
help of reason, their true nature, the universal idea that is true of all such
particulars. It is a gradual process by the aid of which we pass from tho sensible
to the ideal. After these tmiveraal ideas have been discovered, their sub
divisions (spocies) are ascertained. Thus, by a process of synthesis and analysis
we pass upward and downward from idea to idea and view the whole range
of ideas.
Theory of Ideal.—Ordinarily, it is thought that the idea or concept of
a horse is formed by abstracting the oommon qualities shared by all particular
horses. This idea or concept is regarded aa a piece of knowledge existing in
the mind of the knower. This is not Plato’s view. He holds that this universal
idea which is true of al) horses is not a picoe of knowledge but a piece of reality.
It transcends particular horses and lives in a separate world, the world of
ideas. It is present in its transient, changing appearances in sense-perception
only in bo far as they participate in it. What is true of the idea of a horse is
true of all other ideas. They all exist in the world of ideas and, by viewing the
world of ideas in this way, wo apprehend the whole of reality, the whole of
rational cosmos. In this rational cosmos, there are ideas of all things (even
such things as tables and chairs), qualities, relations, virtues, and values.
The highest idea is the Idea of the Good which is identical with the Beautiful
and the highest knowledge is to apprehend the Idea of the Good.
Plato illustrates the relation between the rational cosmos, the world of
ideas, and the world of sensuous experience by his famous allegory of the cave.
Imagine a cave with an opening at one end outside which there is burning
a bright fire. At the other end there is a screen and between the fire and the
screen there are men facing the screen so chained from childhood that they
can make no movement of legs and necks, but can see only what is in front
of them on the screen. As these men cannot turn their heads round, they will
see only the shadows of one another and of the things they carry, which the
fire throws on the screen, and will consider them real objects. But suppose one
of them is released and goes out of the cave; first he will be dazzled by the
glare of light, but soon his eyes will gel adjusted to light and enable him to
seo. then he will sec the shadows ofobjects on water, then the objects themselves,
then he will gaze upon the light of the moon and the stars and tho spangled
heaven by night, and last of all he will be able to see tho sun by day and will
contemplate it as it is. And when he remembers his condition when he was
94
Greek Thought
imprisoned in the cave and the condition of his follow-prisoners, he will felicitate
himself on the change and pity them.** The cave is the world of sight, the light
of fire b the ran. and the man's journey is like the upward ascent of the soul
into the intellectual world, the world of ideas. "The Idea of the Good," like
the ran, "appears last of all" and. "when seen, is inferred to be the universal
author of all- things beautiful and right, parent of light in the visible world
and the immediate source of reason and truth in the intellect; and thia is the
power upon which he who would act rationally either in public or private
life must have his eyes fixed."’
If eternal ideas are the only pure beings and the world of ideas is the only
real world, from where has appeared the changing world of sense I To explain
thia Plato postulates another principle—the principle of Not-Bcing which
means wliat is other than Being.
* Not-Being is the same thing aS matter. It is
unreal and yet exists as a formless substratum of the phenomenal world.
When this formless Not-Being receives the impression of ideas, the world of
sense-|>erception appears. It has reality only in so far as it has the impress of
ideas. In so far as it is material, it is unreal. It is, therefore, wrong to call it
the real world. It is merely a world of shadows.
Cosmology.—In the sphere of cosmology Plato does not find himself on
solid ground and, therefore, claims only probability for his cosmological
views.
God, the maker of the world, fashioned its body out of tho four elements
leaving no part of them outside, after the pattern of the world of ideas. In
order to make it as perfect as possible, He put intelligence into it and placed
in its centre the world-soul, w’hich had been created earlier to be its ruler and
mistress. Thus, the world became a veritable living creature endowed with
intelligence and soul. As there could be only one best possible copy of the
original, there is only one world and it is in the best of all forma, the spherical
form.
Then by some mathematical manipulation of the parts of the world, the
Creator mado the orbits of the seven heavens. He sought to make the world
eternal so far as it might be. Now, to bestow eternity, an attribute of the ideal
world, in its fullness upon a creature waa impossible. Therefore He created
time aa the moving image of eternity. He then made the sun to measure the
movement of the planets, and thus brought about day and night. This was
followed by the creation of the heavenly race of the gods (the stars and planets)
and the species in air and water and the wild animals on land. This liaving
been done, the Creator Himself, made the divine part of man, reason, mixed
it with the four elements, divided the mixture into souls equal in number to
the stars, and assigned each soul to a star. He then ordered the gods. His
children, to do the rest to complete the universe by interweaving the mortal
• KepuUie. VII. 514—16.
’ Ibid.. 517.
• Sophist. 256.
95
A History of Muslim Philosophy
with the immortal. These children of the Creator, obeying the Father's order,
made each separate body by welding the portions of the four elements, tem-
porarily borrowed and to be restored in due course, and fastened the immortal
souls to these mortal bodies which are perpetually in flux.
It is remarkable that this mythical account of the creation of the universe,
about which Plato himself was uncertain, exerted an extraordinary influence
on medieval thought.
PsyrWojy.—The soul is immaterial and prior to the body. The body is
intended by nature to be its servant and to listen to its commands. Once the
soul lived with God in the world of ideas. Owing to its desire for the sensuous
world, it was brought down and encaged in a material body and condemned
to pass through a stage of purification. On release from ths body it has to
give an account of itself before the judgment-seat. Those who have been
virtuous in this world are sent after death to the Isles of the Blessed, to their
respective stars, and the wicked to Tartarus to suffer punishment. A few great
sinners like potentates are, however, kept in Hades as a salutary terror to
others’ If after undergoing full punishment a soul becomes wiser, it has a
better lot; but if it still persists in folly and docs not see the truth, it goes
down lower and lower transmigrating from the body of one animal to that of
another, never passing into human form.” The middling souls may pass from
human to animal form and. vice versa, from animal to human form.
As the soul can know pure and eternal ideas and only liko can know like,
it must also be pure and eternal, at least in part. Its pre-existence in the
world of ideas is proved by the fact that it is originally endowed with certain
principles and axioms which are not given by sense-experience and therefore
can only be explained as recollections from the previous life of the soul occa
sioned by sense-experience.11 The soul is also immortal. Its immortality has to
be accepted on these grounds: (1) The soul is simple and indivisible; there
fore. it can neither be produced by composition nor destroyed by decomposi
tion.” (2) The soul is a principle of life; it, therefore, cannot become its con
tradictory, death.” (3) Everything is destroyed by its peculiar evil. Ignoranoe,
injustice, and intcm|>crance are tho peculiar evils of the soul, but they do not
destroy the vicious soul; the soul is therefore indestructible and immortal.”
(4) The soul is self-moving and ever in motion and that which is ever in motion
is immortal.” (.1) The soul is rational and moral. It must have an after-life in
which by rewards and punishments the injustices and imperfections of this
life may lie rectified. (6) In yearning for the eternal ideas of beauty and truth,
• rhaedo. 113 E; Gorgias. 625.
■ rhaedrus. 249.
•> .Wrno. 88; F*<wdo. 73
" 1‘baedo. 78.
” Ibid.. 80.
” Republic. X. 809.
“ fhaednu. 245.
96
Greek Thought
the soul is yearning for immortality, since what is passionately desired and
cannot be fully achieved in this life must be attainable in the life hereafter
The soul has three parts: reason, spirit, and appetite. The spirited part
sometimes aides with reason and obeys its commands. Spirit includes such
impulses aa ambition, anger, and righteous indignation, and appetite includes
desire for sensuous pleasure, wealth, and all forms of bodily satisfaction.
Sometimes appetite gets the better of it and the two conspire and rebel against
reason. The harmonious soul ia that in which all the three parts work harmo
niously, each discharging its own function, tho rational part commanding and
the spirited and appetitive parts obeying its commands.
Ethics.—The soul is in essence rational and immortal. The world of true
beings, the world of ideas, is the source of all its goodness. The body is material
and Not-Bcing and is the ground of all evil. It is only a temporary prison-
house. Release from the bqdy and contemplation of the beautiful realm of
ideas is the ultimate goal of life. The embodied soul is wise if reason rules all its
impulses. It is brave if its spirited part aids and obeys the rational part, tem
perate, if both spirit and appetite obey the dictates of reason, and just if al!
the three parts perform their respective functions in unison. The ideal of thit
life is achieved when a man is wise, brave, temperate, and just. The highest
good of life is the harmony of the soul which is attained by the exercise of all
the four virtues, wisdom, courage, temperance, and justice, under the guidance
of reason. The greatest happiness attends the life that achieves the highest
good and contemplates the highest ideas.
Aesthetics.—All art is functional. Its function is to imitate, but not to imitate
the objects of experience, but ideal realities. The artist, therefore, must learn
to contemplate the ideal world. Sensible objects only participate in the ideas.
They are only shadows of reality. If art were to imitate these objects, it would
produce nothing better than the shadows of shadows, and if it created illusions
and distortions it would be thrice removed from reality.
All art, intellectual or useful, must be subordinated to the good of the State
and the moral life of its citizens. Only those art-forms should be encouraged
in every art which express the simplicity of a rightly and nobly-ordered mind.
On their simplicity depend their style, harmony, grace, and rhythm, which
qualities elevate the soul and instil true and noble ideas into it. Our artists
should be only those who are gifted to discern the true nature of the beautiful
and graceful. In poetry only hymns to the gods and praise of famous men
should be permitted. Excessive devotion to art is not desirable. It creates
effeminacy. Exhibition of vice, intemperance, meanness, and indecency and
all that is base and impure should be banished from the State. Sorrowful
tunes and talcs create weakness in the soul and the comic art turns men into
buffoons. Some painting creates illusions and some sculpture and architecture
exhibit false proportion. The former creates falsehood and the latter disorder
in the soul. All art which allows these tendencies should be banned. To effect
this all art-productions should be brought under strict censorship.
97
\ History of Muslim PhihMOphj
Theory of Education.—The Platonic theory of education aim. at making
the individuals belonging to the two higher classes truly cultured and well
equipped for discharging their respective functions in tho State by drawing
out what is already dimly known to them because of their having lived before
birth in the real world, the world of ideas. It envisages a careful selection of
the moat promising children and their training under a rigorous discipline
backed by careful censorship in (1) music, covering everything within the pro
vince of the Muses including poetry and literature, and (2) gymnastics, meaning
physical culture. The teaching of music forbids stories without moral signifi
cance in Homer and Hesiod, because they depict gods as doing evil deeds,
and anything that does not inculcate sobriety, temperance, control over
laughter, willingness to die for the State, and the belief that slavery is worec
than death. Drama should depict only faultless characters of high birth, and
any play in which an actor is made to take the part- of a villain, a criminal,
a woman, or a slave should not be permitted. That music which is expressive
of courage and harmony is to be encouraged, and the songs which express
sorrow or induce relaxation are to be prohibited. Up to a certain age the young
should get no chance of seeing what is bad. ugly, or terrifying. The study of
music and gymnastics is to be followed by that of mathematics and dialectics
right up to the age of thirty-five. Then come fifteen years of practical experience
in subordinate offices leading at the age of fifty to the pure study of philo
sophy. When this study is completed, only then is a person accomplished
enough to hold the highest office of the State and become a philosopher-king.
Theory of the State.—According to Plato, there are five types of political
organisations: aristocracy, the rule of the best; timocracy, in which the rulers
are motivated by honour; oligarchy, in which the rulers seek wealth; democ
racy, the nilo of the masses; and tyranny, the rule of one man advancing
solely his own selfish interests.
In the Republic Plato gives an outline of what he regards as the Ideal State.
It is a form of intellectual aristocracy. The State is the individual writ large.
On the analogy of the tripartite division of the soul, society is stratified into
three classes, the rulers, the auxiliary, and the artisans, each class having its
own specific virtue: the rulers wisdom, the auxiliary valour, and the artisans
self-restraint and nulling oliedience. To keep people contented in their respec
tive classes the State would have to propagate "a royal lie” that God has
created human beings of tliree kinds: tho best are made of gold, the second
best made of silver, and tho common herd of brass or iron, the first fit to be
administrators, the second warriors, and the rest manual workers — a myth
which would become a common belief in about two generations. The function
of the nilera is to mould the State in the likeness of tho State "of which tho
pattern is laid up in heaven," in the realm of ideas, of the auxiliaries to help
the rulers by military service and protect, tho State in times of war or revolt,
and of t he artisans to carry on trade, manual labour, and craftsmanship. Since
it is only 'he philosopher who has knowledge of reality, he alone deserves to
98
Grwk Thought
be a king. He should lie persuaded to accept the office, though he would be
generally unwilling to do so. As selfishness is the root of all social evil, the
guardians, i.e., the rulers and warriors, are to lire a common life with a com
mon mess as one family without any private property, wives, or children. Men
between 25 and 55 and women between 20 and 40 (i.e.. when they are in
tho prime of life) are to be brought together on ceremonial occasions specially
arranged for intercourse, in numbers suitable for the required population. The
pairing on these occasions is to be determined apparently by lots, hut actually
by secret manipulation in such a way that tho braver get the fairer. As in a
society of communism of property, wives, and children, no child would know
his parents and no parents their children, all those belonging to an older
generation would be called fathers and mothers by the younger generation and
all those belonging to a younger generation would be addressed, as sons and
daughters by those of the older generation. Those children who were l>egotten
at the time when their fathers and mothers came together will be called by
one another brothers and sistcra. The children born will be brought up by
nurses in quarters specially provided for them. They should get only t he neces
sities of life, and be so brought up aa to be able to bear the roughness and
hardships of life. The State on the whole should not be allowed to become too
rich or too poor, for both riches and poverty lead to social evils. Nor is the
State to be allowed to be too large or too small. Its size “shall not lie larger
or smaller than is consistent with its unity" which indeed is its greatest good.
Women are to tako equal part in education and State services as administra
tors or warriors.
This is an outline of Plato’s Ideal State. But he himself acknowledges that
it is not fully realizable. Therefore in a later work, the Laws, he modifies it in
several important ways and gives a more practicable plan of what he regards
as the second best State. In this State he places freedom and friendship side
by side with reason. All citizens should be free and given a share in govern
ment. Of course, slaves who should be only foreigners are not counted among
the citizens. The administration he now recommends is a mixture of aristocracy
and democracy. Women are now included in the community meals of the
guardians. Marriage is also permitted and family life and private property
restored.
5. Aristotle
Aristotle (384 -322 B.C.) was bom at Stagira in Macedon, where his father
who belonged to a family of physicians was employed as Court physician to
the King. At the age of seventeen he became Plato's pupil at the Academy
at Athens which he left twenty years later at Plato’s death In 334 B.C.
King Pliilip of Macedon engaged him as his son Alexander's teacher and he
worked in that capacity for seven years. Thereafter he came back to At hens
and opened a new educational institution at the Lyceum Because of Aristotle's
habit of walking while teaching, this institution came to be known as the
99
A HiMory of I’hilonophj
Peripatetic school. Aristotle remained the head of this school for twelve years
during which lie wrote most of his works. At the close of this period he was
indicted for impiety and compelled to lice to Chaicis in the Greek island Euboea
where he died a year later.
Aristotle wrote on every subject then known in the world and most of his
writings have come down to us. The collection of his logical works ia entitled
the Orj/unon. His writings on what ho called First Principles were collected
by a compiler and named Metaphysial, for they were placed after the writings
on physics. He wrote several works on physics, including the one called Aus-
cutlaliones Physiau, and several on the natural history of animals. On psy
chology he wrote many treatises, including three on the soul. His chief ethical
writing is tho Nicomachean Ethics, and his works on literary arts arc named the
Rhetoric and the Poetics.
According to Aristotle, there are three divisions of philosophy: (1) theo
retical studies in which the attempt is made to know the existent, (2) practical,
which relate to conduct and tho rules of conduct, and (3) poetic, relating to
the creative works of art. The first is again divided into mathematics, physics,
and tho "first philosophy.” There is, however, a study which precedes all
these as a precondition. That is the study of logic
Logic.—Aristotle lias been justly said to be the founder of logic. The prin
ciples of correct reasoning were employed in practice by his predecessors in
their search for knowledge, but it was he alone who made their theoretical
study, clarified them, and organized them into a well-rounded system which
had an amazing influence on subsequent thought both in the East and tho
West. But for a few* spasmodic revolts, the Organon ruled supreme for over
two thousand vears.
In the Organon. Aristotle shows that a simple or compound word expresses
a meaning or a mental representation of a thing. This meaning or mental re
presentation ia called a term. A proposition consists of a subject word expressing
the mental representation of an existent, a predicate word expressing the
mental representation of somctliing that is asserted (or denied) of that existent,
arid the mark of assertion, is (or of denial, is not). A true proposition is the
verbal expression of a true judgment which ia a combination or separation
of two terms (expressed by the subject and the predicate) which corresponds
with the combination or separation of two real things. A false proposition is
the expression of a false judgment which is a combination or separation of
two terms which have no such correspondence.
The mental representations of subjects are combined in several ways. These
ways arc determined by the categories, the ten ultimate modes of being. These
categories are substance, quality, quantity, relation, where, when, position
|M>s»ession. action, and passion. Nothing can bo predicated of any existent
which does not fall in one of these categories. Some substances, e. g.. first essen
ces and individuals, can be cxnrcssed only as subjects of propositions, never as
predicates.
100
Greek Thought
Two propositions in one of which a predicate is affirmed of a subject (A is
B) and the other in which it is denied (A is not B) are called contradictories.
Of such propositions one must be false and the other must be true. This law
is called by Aristotle the Law of Contradiction. Again, "one can either deny
or affirm every predicate of every subject." Between ita denial and affirmation
there is no middle course. This principle is called by him tho Law of Excluded
Middle. Both of these laws are based on the metaphysical principle that "the
same thing cannot at the same time and in the same respect belong and not
belong to the same thing.” This principle ia known to us immediately and
intuitively and, therefore, requires no demonstration. All demonstration and
all certain knowledge depend on this principle.
The mental representations of the essential attributes common to all the
individuals in a class constitute a class-concept. The oontents of this concept
form the definition of the class. The essential attributes of man, rationality
and animality, form the concept and constitute the definition of man.
Logic for Aristotle is a necessary process. It is a process of reasoning which
consists in proving a proposition by showing that it is such and such and it
cannot be otherwise. This proof is provided in the following two ways.
The first way in which a proposition is proved or demonstrated is that of
deduction the unit of which ia a syllogism, a name given by Aristotle himself
to a process by which the truth of a proposition is established by showing
that it necessarily follows from its presuppositions called the major and the
minor premises, by virtue of their possessing a common term. John's mortality
is established by showing that John is a man (minor premise) and man ia
mortal (major premise), man being a common or middle term by tho help of
which a connection is established between John and mortality. Thus, by syl
logism it is shown that what is true of a whole class (i.e., the universal truth
expressed by "all") ia true of each individual or a smaller group, on the ground
that the individual or the small group belongs to that class. So the fundamental
principle of syllogism is "whatever is affirmed (or denied) of an entire class
or kind may be affirmed (or denied) of any part” thereof—the principle called
the Dictum de omni el nuUo. This principle, like the basic principles of all
sciences, ia known intuitively. Its application enables us to derive the particular
from the universal. How the conclusions of syllogisms are affected by the dif
ferences in quality (affirmation or negation) or quantity (extension to all.
some, or only one) of the premises, is worked out with remarkable precision.
All scientific conclusions are ultimately drawn by syllogistic reasoning from
premises which are themselves known immediately and intuitively to be ab
solutely certain, requiring no proof.
The second way of proving a proposition is that of induction, a process by
which universal principles are derived from particular experiences by their
complete enumeration. In experience, scomious particulars are prior and more
knowable to us. but absolutely prior ntl»more knowable arc tho concepts
which are the most general and the moywetaote from sensations Therefore.
101
\ History of Muslim Philosopln
deduction which takes us from the universal to the particular u more scicnti
6c, prior in nature, and more rigorously demonstrative. Those who cannot
follow the deductive way may, however, employ induction. Thus, syllogistic
deduction was over-emphasized by Aristotle and induction was given only a
secondary place and its details were not worked out by him.
.tfrtapAyrics.—Every object of experience consists of two factors, a sub
stratum (matter) anil a universal element common to all objects of the same
type (its form or essence), the mental representation of which is its concept.
Plato does not deny the existence of this form or essence in individual objects,
but there it is only as a copy of the form or essence existing in the world of
ideas. Aristotle argues that if. to explain the form of man, it is necessary to
postulate the ideal form in the world of ideas, it would be necessary also to
postulate a tliird form of which both of these forms are copies. Besides, these
independent essences are not of any help to things in their existence, motion,
or change. Again, if the ideas are the essences of things, how can essences
exist apart from the things of which they are the essences ! Ho concludes that
Plato's world of ideas is an unnecessary duplication of the world of sensible
things. It is a more poetic fiction. The essences or forms of things exist only
in those tilings: they are immanent in them. The world of sensible things is,
therefore, the only real world.
There are four fundamental principles which run through all spheres of the
real world. These are (1) Matter or Substratum, (2) Form or Essence, (3)
Efficient cause, and (4) the End or the Final cause. These principles are
according to Aristotle, the causes of everything that exists in the world.
Matter is the principle of imperfection and individuation of things. It is
not non-existent as Plato had thought, but exists aa a potentiality. Form
consists of essential elements common to all individual objects of the same
type arid is the actualization of material potentiality. As forms are eternal and
unchanging, they are the mast knowablo and the most worthy subjects of
knowledge. AU movement is change from potentiality to actuality, and for
everything in existence there is a moving or efficient cause. In organio things,
the essence, the efficient cause, and the end are one. Tho essence is shape; it
shapes, and its own completion is its end. The soul is the form of the body and
ia also its moving and final cause.
There are things in existence that both move and are unmoved. There are
things also which are only moved. Therefore, there is a third something (Irr-
tium quid) which moves, but is not itself moved. This something, this unmoved
mover is God Himself. He is the Pure Eternal Form without any alloy of
matter, the absolutely perfect actuality. He is the Absolute Spirit identical
with Reason, loved by everything, and sought as the perfect ideal by every
thing. He produces all motion by being loved, and so is the final cause of all
activity. In Him the distinction of the individual and the universal completely
disappears.
God is the unmoved mover, but Aristotle is not certain that there is only
102
Greek Thought
one unmoved mover. At another place astronomical considerations lead him
to conclude that every sphere has an unmoved moving spirit and there arc
forty-seven or fifty-two such spirits in all.
Physics.—The earth is the centre of the universe. Around this centre arc
the conoentric layers of water, air, fire, and ether. In the ethereal layer are
the celestial spheres, carrying planets, the sun, and the moon. Some of the
spheres are backward-moving. The outermost sphere is that of the fixed stars
which God touches without being touched, and to which He gives the best of
motions, the uniform circular rotation, and that with a purpose, for the motion
is not mechanical but teleological. The motion of the outermost sphere deter
mines the motion of all other spheres, which is imperfect in a descending
scale. Rather inconsistently Aristotle also assigns a spirit—-an unmoved
mover—to every sphere.
Motion exists in three categories, quantity (increase or decrease), quality
(transformation), and space (change of place). The motion of the universe is
not linear but circular. There are two conditions of motion—space and time.
Space is the limit by which a body is bound, tho boundary by which it is
enclosed. From thia definition it follows that there is no Void and that space
is not unlimited but limited. Beyond the sphere of the stars there is no space.
Time is the number and measure of motion according to before and after. It
is infinite. The universe which moves in time is also eternal. It has always
been and shall always be.
Biology arid Psychology —The soul is the form of the living body as well as
the principle of its motion and ita end. It determines the structure and move
ments of ita specific body and uses it as an instrument for itself. As each soul
develops ita own specific body, there is no transmigration of a soul from one
body to anot her. There are different grades of souls as there are different grades
of life. The souls of plants determine their functions, of lower animals theirs',
and of men theirs’. The functions of plants are assimilation, growth, and re
production, those of lower animals are, in addition to these, sensitivity, appetite,
and locomotion, while those of men are all these together with their specific
function, reason. As tho human soul combines within itself tho function of
all animate existence, it is a veritable microcosm. There is development within
each species, but there is no evolution from species to species. Each organ has
its own end and this end is its specific activity. Tho heart is the seat of sensa
tions; from sensations arise memory, imagination, and pleasure and pain, ami
from pleasure and pain, desire. Reason is either passive or active. In passive
reason concepts are potentially present; in active reaso nthey are actualized.
All lower functirgts and whatever arises in consequence, being connected with
the body, cease-v -’h the death of the body. Even passive reason which deals
with images that create potentiality for the arousal of concepts, perishes with
the body. Only active reason, for it is universal, not individual and personal,
remains untouched by death. It alone is imperishable and immortal. How it
is related to tho individual and to God, is not made quite clear
103
\ History ot MiixUm Philosophy
Elhict.—In the theory of morality Aristotle raises the question of the good
for man'1—the good which is the end of all human ends. His reply is as fol
lows. As in all living beings, the essenoe, the principle of activity, and end
are identical, the ultimate end or the good of an organism must consist in its
essence, in its highest actualization. The highest realization of the essence of
man consists in active exercise of tho faculty distinctive of him, the faculty of
reason. The supreme excellence of man or the good for him. therefore, consists
in the proper performance of his functions as a rational being throughout the
whole of his life.
The ultimate end of man so defined is called by Aristotle happiness. From
this definition of happiness it follows that it is not the same thing as pleasure.
Pleasure is only an accompaniment of happiness, as beauty is tho accompani
ment of the perfect physical development of youth.” The highest pleasure
attends the highest happiness. While happiness in all its degrees is good, pleasure
may be good or bad according as it accompanies good or bad activities. While
there is nothing more valuable than happiness, there are things which are more
valuable than pleasure. Virtue, for example, is one, truth another.
The ethical goal of happiness cannot be attained without some non-ethical
prerequisites, such as tho proper discharge of mental and bodily functions
and the satisfaction of economic needs. No child or slave or poverty-stricken
person can achieve this goal.
Human excellence expresses itself in virtue. By virtue is meant the habitual
direction of the will to the guarding of the golden mean, the balance between
excess and defect. For example, the virtue of courage is a mean between fool
hardiness and cowardioe and that of liberality between prodigality and
meanness.
Human happiness or excellence manifests itself in two ways: first, in the
habitual subordination of the animal side of man's nature, his appetites,
desires, and passions, to rational rule; secondly, in the exercise of reason in
the search for knowledge and contemplation of truth. In the former case,
happiness expresses itself in moral virtues (courage, temperance, liberality,
magnanimity, love of honour, mildness, truthfulness, friendship, and. the
highest of them all, justice). In the latter case, it manifests itself in intellectual
virtues which are of two types: (1) those of theoretical reason which we use
in our inquiry in the nature of what is necessary and in the intuitive appre
hension of trut h (science and reason), and (2) those of practical reason by which
wo exercise deliberation in such matters as are possible for us to change (art.
and practical wisdom). Science ia used in demonstration, and reason in the
immediate apprehension of principles. The highest virtue consists in the exor
cise of theoretical reason. For virtuous life some non-ethical goods are also
needed. Art is productive of something beyond itself and its value lies in the
Nimmachrnn Ethict. 1. 2.
” Ibid.. X. 4.
to-
Greek Thought
product. Practical wisdom relates to conduct which is an end in itoelf and the
worth of which lice in intention; it finds the right means for the end in view
and u deliberative, critical, imperative, and formative of judgment by the
use of intelligence.
Aristotle's attitude towards some human relations is rather odd. He regards
the son as the property of his father and tho slave the property of liis master."
The father may repudiate his son, but the son cannot repudiate his father.1’
The master cannot be a friend to his slave in so far as he is a slave, but he
can be so in so far as he is a man." Sympathy for the suffering of mankind,
exoept when it is the suffering of a friend, leaves Aristotle emotionally un
moved."
Politics.—The first natural community for him is the family, which, when
complete, consists of father, wife, children, and slaves. The family is based on
two relations, the relation between man and woman and that between master
and slave, both of which are considered to be natural. To all members of the
family the father is an absolute ruler, but he should rule the slaves with
mildness, the wife as a free member of the community, and children by
right of affection and seniority." The most comprehensive human society is
the State. Tho aim of the State is to produce good citizens, individuals living
a virtuous and happy life. As the highest virtues arc intellectual, it is the duty
of the State not to create warriors, but men capable of making the right use
of peace which is conducive to intellectual activity. Yet the State should be
strong enough to protect itself. Its size should neither be too large nor too
small for its existence as an articulate whole. Its whole territory should be
surveyable from a hill-top (which is, of course, possible only in a City-State).
The State should wage no wars except in self-defence or to subjugate "natural
slaves," i.e., inferior people. The Greeks oombine courage with culture and
are. therefore, superior people,- and the superior people are alone justified in
extending their rule over thoso who are inferior.1* The State should be self-
sufficient and yet have import and export trade—an apparent inconsistency.
The aim of education is virtue, not utility. It should be provided for free
children, but not in any skill that might enable them to earn money or give
them professional efficiency or deform their bodies, for citizens should neither
lead the life of mechanics or tradesmen, which is ignoble and inimical to virtue,
nor the life of professional athletes, which is detrimental to health. The slaves
may, however, be trained in useful arts such aa cooking and farming. Tho
citizens should own land, but the tilling of it should be left to the slaves for
it leaves no leisure and the citizens need leisure for their development. They
■■ Ibid.. 1134b.
” Ibid.. ll«3b.
Ibid.. IlBlb.
u Bertrand Russell, op. cil.. p. 200.
“ PMiu. I, S.
’’ Ibid., til. 7.
105
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
should be made to learn drawing so as to be able to appreciate the beauty
of form and of painting and sculpture expressive of moral truth; and to learn
music no more than just enough for critical enjoyment. The treatment given
to citizens should be determiner! by the differences of capability, property,
birth, and freedom. Equals should be treated as equate anil unequals as nn-
equals. Although the individual citizen is prior to the State in point of time,
the State is prior to the individual in significance, for the whole is prior to its
parte. As man is a social animal, the natural aim of tho individual is td live in
society. The rational aim of society is the happiness of man. So in a rational
society the interests of the individual and the State are harmonized.
The worth of the individual citizens depends on the kind of government
under which they are brought up. Governments are good or bad according as
they seek the interest of all or only their own interest. Judged by this criterion,
there are three forms of good government (monarchy, aristocracy, and polity),
and three forms of bad government (tyranny, oligarchy, and democracy),
according as the rule is of one man, of a few, or of many. The best form of
government is a monarchy in which the ruler is a man of intellectual eminence
and moral worth. Next best is aristocracy in which there are a few persons
possessed of such qualities. Aristocracy is tetter than polity in which the
citizens are politically, intellectually, and morally nearly equal. The worst
form of government is tyranny, for the corruption of the best is worst; next
is oligarchy which is the rule of the rich few. Democracy is tho least bad of
all bad governments.
Ari. Goodness and beauty are different, for the former is found only in
conduct and the latter also in things that arc not moved.** Beauty is created
by art. Art is the inqiarting of formal elements to a material. The formal
elements so imparted correspond to two primary impulses of man; (1) imita-
tion, ami (2) harmony, rhythm, and melody. Imitation is pleasing to us even
when it mirrors the most horrid of objects, for it involves learning and know
ing by recognition, and knowing is always pleasant. By harmony, rhythm, and
melodies even new-born babies are attracted, because these are natural move
ments. and natural movements like those of actions are always pleasing.
Nature has made man capable of all varieties of artistic skill.
The object of art is imitation, but not merely so. It is the imitation of tho
universal aspects of things, and an imitation in which the artist can go even
as far as to make the copy of the handsome "handsomer" by combining
scattered elements and, thus, partly imitating and partly completing what is
left by nature incomplete.24
The pleasure of art is due to relief by aMartu or release of pent-up emotions
For example. tragedy. which is the imitation of serious action, morally signi
ficant and of some magnitude, affords such relief by the ratharsu of pity and*11
M'taphyma. XII. 3.
11 1‘hnricn. 110u. 13.
106
Greek Thought
fear. Comedy which is the imitation of people inferior in some fault or defor
mity. which ia not painful or a cause of pain to others, lilwrstcs laughter. The
purgation of emotions in both tragedy and comedy leaves the spectators'
minds calm and serene.
Poetry is more important and of greater philosophical significance than
history, for it tells us something about the universals, while history speaks
of the particulars. The universal with which poetry deals is that which a person
would necessarily or probably do or say, and the particular is that which a
person actually docs or says. The poet is either a man of sensibility or of in
spiration. In the first ease he has ready sympathies, in the second he is pos
sessed.
6. The Decline
The most glorious period of Athenian cultural and political ascendancy was
the age of Pericles. In 430 B.C. Athens was ravaged by plague. In the same
year began tbe Peloponnesian war between Sparta and Athena which after
twenty-seven years' struggle ended in the complete overthrow of Athens. This
was followed by the defeat of the Athenians and their allies, the Thebans,
by Philip of Macedon in 327 B.C. and the annexation of Greece to the Roman
Empire in 146 B.C. In the wake of thia political decline came the general
demoralisation of private and public life.
Intellectual activity, howover, did not cease with social and political decline.
Thinkers of different mental make-up reacted differently to this fall. Some of
them reacted positively and sought remedy for all social evils in social change,
practice of virtue, and pursuit of truth, and built great philosophical systems.
To this group belonged the great Trio, Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle, in whom
Greek philosophy reached its highest point. Some, like Autistbensmiha Dio
genes of Sinope, became cynical about the world as a whole; some others,
Pyrrho and Timon, became sceptical about the very possibility of knowledge.
Zeno and his followers found tranquillity in the life dedicated to virtue, while
Epicurus and his followers turned their eyes from the prevailing evils and
sought relief in the pursuit of pleasure. Thus, during the period of political
decline and social and moral disintegration, besides tho great systems of Plato
and Aristotle and their trails, there arose four other modes of thought, Cyni
cism, Scepticism, Stoicism, and Epicureanism. Despite some critical revisions
and re-examination, three of them at least were tho philosophies of retreat,
and all four of them taken togethor wore symptoms of Greek intellectual
decline.
Tht Cyniu.—T\x founder of the Cynical school at Athens was Antisthenes,
about twenty years Plato's senior. He despised the pleasures of the senses,
dressed liko a labourer, and moved amongst the working classes. His motto
was "back to nature," by which he meant return to a state of life in which
there was no government, no marriage, no private property, no luxury, no
established religion. His disciple, Diogenes of Sinope, surpassed him in fame.
107
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Diogenes wm about twenty-seven years older than Aristotle and died a year
after him. While still very young, he went to Antisthenes in search of wisdom
and followed him like a dog. The old cynic did not like him and even beat
him with a stick to drive him away, but the lad would not move. His father
was a money-changer who had been sent to prison for defacing coins. Diogenes'
aim was “to deface all the coinage current in the world. Every conventional
stamp was false. The men stamped aa generals and kings, the things stamped
as honour and wisdom and happiness and riches: all were base metals with
lying superscriptions."M He discarded all conventions regarding dross and
behaviour, procured food by begging, and lived in a tub. He declared brother
hood not only with all human beings but also with animals. It is said that
“he once went through the streets holding up a lantern looking for an honest
man”; and when Alexander the Great visited him at Corinth and asked him
if ho could do anything for him he replied, "Yes, stand from between me and
the sun."
The Sceptic
*. —The sceptics were under the influence of the prc-Socratic
philosophers of nature. The founder of the school, Pyrrho, was about twenty-
three years younger than Aristotle. All our knowledge of him comes from his
pupil, Timon, for he himself never wrote any book. He maintained that from
the senses we know only what a thing appears and not what it actually iB.
Nor can wo know anything through philosophy, for no two schools agree on
any major problem and in every case an affirmation and its denial can be
proved with equal force. Philosophy is fruitless because it can create no cer
tainty, and impossible because it leads to endless contradictions. It is equally
impossible to know any ethical truth and, therefore, there is no rational
ground for the preference of one action to another. Hence in all matters, moral
or metaphysical, we should have an attitude of complete indifference.
Timon denied even the possibility of logical reasoning. In order to avoid an
endless chain of pro-syllogism to establish a conclusion, we must start from
self-evident principles, but there are no self-evident principles and all start
ing points of reasoning are merely hypothetical. All speculation should, there
fore, be suspended.
The school of Pyrrho ended with Timon, but strangely enough his doctrines
found their way to the very heart of Plato's institution, the Academy, for they
deeply influenced its head, Arceailaus (316-241 B.C.) and hie successor. Car-
neadea (214-129 B.C.). The Academy under the former came to be known
as the Middle Academy and under the latter the Now Academy. According to
Arceailaus, nothing should be assumed unconditionally. Socrates had said
before him that one thing alone he knew and that was that ho knew nothing
Arccsilaus went further and declarer! that he did not even know that with
certainty
'• A. W. Bean. /’Adomply o/ Greece. Vol. II. p. 117; Bertrand KuswU, op </
p. 254
108
Greek Thought
His successor, Carneadre, admitted that although there is no certainty in
knowledge, some judgments have a degree of probability and can be made
to guide practice. According to him. the idea of God is full of contradictions
and the argument that God exists because the world is rational, beautiful, and
good is fallacious. He fully mirrored the moral decadence of Attica in main
taining that unjust aggression against a weak neighbour was the right course
of action and that it would be foolish if in a dangerous situation the stronger
did not save themselves by sacrificing the weak.
The Stoics.—The Stoic school was founded at Athens nineteen years after
the death of Aristotle by Zeno of Citium (in Cyprus) who at the time was
twenty-eight years of age. His followers were Cleanthre (third century B.C.),
Chrysippus (c. 282-209 B.C.), and Diogenes of Babylonia (second century
B.C.). It was Chrysippus who perfected the Stoic system on all sides. After
Diogenes the Stoic doctrines moved from Athens to Rome. The school acquired
its name from Stoa Poilcile (the Painted Porch) where it used to assemble.
Zeno, like Heraclitus, was a pantheist. He maintained that the universe is
a perfect sphere floating in empty space and is animated by its own soul,
the largos or Cosmic Reason. Form or the force that moves and matter that
is moved are both corporeal; only the former has finer corporeality than the
latter. Both are combined in the individual. The soul is material—a spark of
divine fire It is a tabula rasa, a blank tablet, which receives impressions from
things. It retains these impressions as memory-images, and from these memory
images forms ideas by abstraction. Thus, while things are objective, concepts
are subjective. All our knowledge of objects depends upon percepts and the
concepts derived from these percepts. Its criterion is the compelling force of
impressions.
The range of Stoic interest was rather narrow. It lay chiefly in ethics.
Other studies were taken only as ancillary. According to Stoicism, man's
highest duty is to regulate life in accordance with the laws of nature, which
manifest the rational purpose of the uni verso, and thereby reach the highest
moasure of perfection. Neither pleasure nor self-interest should determine any
of his personal or social actions. Reason should rule him and everything in
him as the Logos rules the world and all its laws. The laws of his life are vir
tues. He should master all his passions and emotions and lead the life of per
fect virtue. Virtue is the only good and vice the only evil, and the life of
virtue alone is the life of happiness.
The Epicureans.—The term "epicureans" is nowadays used to mean those
who are seekers 6f sensuous pleasures. There is no such implication when it is
used in connection with the school opened by Epicurus at Athens seventeen
yeais after the death of Aristotle. There is no doubt that Epicurus identified
happiness with pleasure and regarded it as the natural and rational goal of
life, but he maintained that it consists in the pleasures of the mind, the pleas
ures of rational living or the pleasures which only men of culture can enjoy.
Three comprise virtuous conduct, aesthetic appreciation, and friendship of tho
109
A History of Muslim Philosophy
gifted and the noble. The pleasures consistent with reason bear the marks of
moderation, calm, and repose. An intelligent and prudent man can easily see
that pleasures of a life-time arc preferable to pleasures of the moment, and
pleasures of tho mind, which inelude, beside the present ones, those of the
past as recollections and those of the future as anticipations, are better than
those! of the body. Momentary' pleasures have to be sacrificed for tho abiding
onee. The function of society is to secure the self-interest or personal happiness
of individuals. The value of all laws and all institutions is to be judged by this
criterion.
Epicurus, like the Stoics, subordinated philosophy to ethics. The aim of
philosophy, according to him, is to enable men to lead a happy life. To lead
a happy life, free from all fear and worry, people must know the criterion of
truth (sense-perception) given by philosophy, and the causes of things dis
covered by physics. In metaphysics the Epicureans followed Democritus in
every respect except that they gave the atoms the power to deviate from their
determined path, and so introduced an element of contingency in an otherwise
mechanically-determined world. They shattered many of the religious beliefs
prevalent in their times. According to them, the gods did not create the world,
for. being supremely happy, they were not in need of it. Nor is there any
reason to believe that they trouble themselves about tho affairs of men. The
soul is not immortal; it perishes with the body.
To the Epicurean school belonged Metrodorus of Lantpsacus (d. before
Epicurus), llermarchus (fl. 270? B.C.), Apollodonts (?) and Zeno of Sidon
(about 150-78 B.C.). None of them added anything to the teachings of the
master. In the first century B.C., Epicureanism. like other philosophical
systems, passed down to Alexandria and Rome, Athens lost its position as
the intellectual centre of the world, and Greek philosophy in Greece virtually
camo to an end.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
F. Ueborweg, A History of PAifosopAjt, tr. Cl. 8. Morris and Noah Porror, 2 Vole.,
1872; T. Gornp.-r>, tirrrl- I’Aintera. 4 Vols., tr. Magnus and Berry, 1012; W. Windel-
baud. History of Ancient PAilusopAy. tr. H. E. Cushman. 1899; A. W. Benn.
Philosophy of Greece. 2 Vole.. 1898; W. T. Staco. A Critical History of Grtok Philo
sophy, 1920; E. Zeller. Outlines of History of Greek Philosophy, tr. Alleyne and
Abbot, 1931; Frank Thilly. .4 History of Philosophy, revised edition by Ledger
Wood, 1951; Allred Weber, History of Philosophy, tr. F. Thiliy. revised by K. B.
Perry. 1925; Bertrand Rusnell, History of Western Philosophy. 1948; 8. jladha-
krishnuil and othore, Eds.. History of Philosophy, Eastern and Western, 2 Vota.. 1953;
F.M. Cornford, From Religion lo Philosophy, 1912; Plato's Theory of KnouMge. 1935;
H. Dicta. Fragment der VorsolratU-er, 1934-38; K. Freoman. The Pre Socratic Phi
loeophrrs, A Companion to frith' "Fragmmte der I’ersotrariier." 1946; Ancilla to the
PetSoeralw Philosophers, I948|M.C. Nahm. Selections from Early Greek Philosophy,
3rd nd., 1947; C.M.BakowoIl,Source Book in Ancient Philosophy, rev. ed.. 1039; C.H.
Moore, The Religious Thought of the Greeks. 1916; T. V Smith. Philosophers Speak for
110
Alexamlrio-Syriac Thought
Themeeloee. 1933; A. H. Armstrong, An Introduction Io Ancient Philoeophy, 1947;
J. Burnet. Early Greek Philoeophy, 4th ed.. 19S0; Greek Philoeophy, Part I, TKalee
to Plato, 1914; F. Breuw. Dre Philoeophie dee Anacagoraa, 1840; K. 8. Guthrie.
Pythagorae, 1919; A. Brieger. Die Urbewegung der Atome, 1884; Hosting's Eney-
rlopedia of Religion and Elkice, article on "SophisU" and those on individual
thinkers; Xenophon, ■'Memorabilia" in Work, of Xenophon. Ill, tr. H. 0. Dakyns
and IV tr. J. 8. Watson; E. Zeller, Socrate, and the Socratic School,, tr. O. J.
Roichel. 1883; The Stoic,. Epicurean, and Sceptic, 1892; R. L. Nettleship, Ledurrr
on the Republic of Plato. 1914; O, Grote, Plato and Other Companion, of Socratu.
4 Vole., 1888; The Dialogue, 0/ Plato, tr. B. Jowett; Arielolle', Worke. od. J. A.
Smith and W. D. Roas. 1910-31; D. II. Dudley. Hietory o/ Cynmem; M.M. Patrick,
The Greek Sceptic; C. Bailey, Epicurue, the Ertanl Remain,, 1923; W. J. Oaten.
Ed.. The Stoic and Epicurean Philosopher,. 1940; A. E. Taylor. Epicurus, 1911
Chapter V
ALEXANDRA).SYRIAC THOUGHT
A
THE NEO-PYTHAGOREANS
The great conquering sweep of Alexander the Great eastwards not only
destroyed the old, intense and narrow life of the self contained Greek City-
States but also marked a decisive change in the intellectual and spititual life
of Greece. With the spread of Greek civilisation over the Near East, the hori
zons of the individual Greeks were greatly enlarged; but the break-up of the
old City-States engendered a sense of isolation and rootlessness which made
people look inward for stability and security, rather than outward as hitherto
done. Another and a more potent reason for this shift in Greek thinking can
be discovered in widespread scepticism after the death of Aristotle. True,
scepticism also prevailed when Socrates was born, but the metaphysical specu
lations of pre-Socratic thinkers led them into the inextricable confusion of
doubt. Socrates asked people to look at man instead of nature, for in the
domain of human problems the competence of reason could be demonstrated
more easily than in that of the physical or the metaphysical. But the protest
which scepticism made after Aristotle was more devastating. It was declared
by the sceptics that the entire philosophical venture of their predecessors was
hopelessly wrong and also that their error was without a remedy.
This was indeed very saddening. It amounted to the confession that not
only were the solutions of tho so-called perennial problems of philosophy
nonsensical but also that no satisfactory solution was possible, at least with
the techniques and methods hitherto pursued.
Reason thus assailed could find refuge only in faith. In the |>eriod that
follows we find philosophy renouncing its independence and becoming merely
111
A History of Muslim Philosophy
an instrument of theology. Ritter says, ‘The feeling of alienation and tho
yearning after a higher revelation are characteristics of the last centuries of
the ancient world; this yearning was. in the first place, but an expression of
consciousness of the decline of the classical nations and their cultures, the
presentiment of the approach of a new era, and it called into life not only
Christianity but also before it pagan and Jewish Alexandrianism and other
related developments."1
No longer finding Greece a cordial home for philosophy, the philosophers
went over to Egypt and Rome, carrying their doctrines with them. They
delivered courses of lectures which were attended with great zeal and enthu
siasm by the populace. But the venture did not succeed so well in Rome aa
it did in Alexandria. In Rome philosophy could lend its weight to poetry,
oratory, jurisprudence, and some topics of conversation, but it was in Alex
andria that it produced men who gave it originality, vigour, and drive. Alex
andria was not simply a centre of Greek culture and scholarship, but also and
more significantly a meeting-place for Greek and Eastern thought. It took a
cosmopolitan character and showed a marked leaning towards Oriental thought.
The result of this interpretation of Greek and Semitic cultures was the syn
thetic civilization known as Hellenism in contradistinction to the Hellenic or
purely Greek civilization. Hellenism rose to supremacy not only in Alexandria
anil Syria but throughout Western Asia.
It would be incorrect to identify the present geographical boundaries of
Syria with its old ones. In Roman days, at the beginning of the Christian era
Syria denoted tho country west of the Euphrates and north of the Arabian
Desert. including Palestine and Palmyra and extending north to tho Taurus.
The usual language of Syria was Aramaic, a language akin to Hebrew. The
Hebrew word "Aram" is rendered as "Syria" and originally the words Aramaean
and Syrian were synonymous. After the Hellenization of the country, the Greek
language was used by the ruling class and the officials with very little influence
on the masses who continued using their dialect. This state of affairs con-
tinned till the first,'seventh century when after the Muslim conquest Syriac
gradually gave way vernacularly and to some extent liturgically to Arabic,
though it had great influence on the vocabulary, pronunciation, and even the
grammat ical forms of Arabic which supplanted it.
For purposes of studying Alexandrian and Syriac philosophy, for the two
run together and interpenetrate, wc can divide our subject into: —
(1) Neo-Pythagoreanism.
(2) Tho Jewish-Alexandrian Philosophy,
(3) Neo-Platonism, and
(4) Early Christianity.
To all these s|>eculations what is common is "the dualistic opposition of the
divine ami the earthly; an abstract conception of God excluding all know
1 C. Ritter. Hiatury of rhiloaofiky, p. 330.
112
Ak-xandrio-Syriac Thought
ledge of the divine nature; contempt for the world of sense, on the ground
of the Platonic doctrines of matter and the descent of tile soul of man from
a superior world into the body; the theory of intermediate potencies or beings
through whom God acta upon the world of phenomena, the requirements of
an ascetic self-emancipation from the bondage of sense; and faith in a higher
revelation to man when in a state called Enthusiasm.”’
Both Noo-Pythagoreanism and the Judaic-Alexandrian philosophy are found
together in the beginning of the Christian era. The Neo-Pythagoreans who
were fundamentally religious in their outlook and practices were represented
by P. Nigidus Figulus, Sotion, and particularly Apollonius of Tyana, Modera-
tus of Gadea, and. in later times, Nicomachus of Gerasa and Numeniua of
Apamea. ,
The Neo-Pythagoreans were highly eclectic in character. They were great ly
influenced by Plato, Aristotle, and the Stoics, not to speak of ancient Pytha
goreans whose doctrines they attempted to revive.
Neo-I’ythagorean doctrines could not flourish in Rome, where, Seneea says
they could not find a professor to teaoh them, but gained a stronghold in
Alexandria. The Neo-Pythagoreans combined monotheism with the fatalistic
cult of gods and demons but transformed it at the same time with the help
of Platonic-Aristotelian teachings into a reverence for God us a pure spirit
who is to be served not by outward sacrifices but by silent prayers and with
wisdom and virtue. Like Plato and Aristotle, tho Neo-Pythagoreans distin
guished between unity and plurality and also between the divine and the earthly.
Several attempts were made to get rid of this dualism. There arose consequently
a great diversity of opinion with regard to the nature of God and the relation
He bears to the world. Some identified God with the world-soul of Plato
others thought of Him as an ineffable "Monad” from which flowed both unity
and plurality. Still others considered Him immanent but free from all contacts
with matter which might pollute Him. It w-as, therefore, imperative for the
Noo-Pythagoreans, especially tho last ones, to introduce a Demiurge as a
mediator between God and matter.
The metaphysics of the Neo-Pytliagorean school required four principles
viz., God, the world-reason, the world-soul, and matter, out of which the first
three helped in formulating the Christian conception of triune God, while the
fourth one paved the way for the doctrine of emanation.
The Neo-Pythagoreans gave a deeper metaphysical meaning to Number
The ultimate ground of all good aa well as the order of the universe was pro
vided by the Monad while the Dyad was held rv»|x>naible for all disorder and
imperfection. The Monad became the symbol for Godhead and the Dyad for
matter. Tho gulf between the two, viz., tlie Monad and the Dyad, was bridged
by the introduction of the idea of a world-soul which was built upon the Stoic.
Aristotelean, and Platonic conceptions.
Zeller. PhU. drr Gricli'H laUfrilum. Vol. III. p. 568.
113
A Hinton of Muslim Philosophy
Certain nunicrological conceptions of the Neo-Pythagoreans ap|>car gro
tesque to the modem mind. It was held by them that the movements of the
heavenly bodies were harmoniously adjusted by number—an idea of Egyptian
origin—and so certain numbers were regarded as having a sacred character,
particularly number 10 which represents the sum of a pyramid of four stages,
4—3—2-1 = 10.
In such conceptions, their imagination ran riot to such an extent that
one can gain the impression that Neo-Pythagoreanism Is nothing more than
astrology, occultism, and twaddle about the mysterious properties of numbers.
In epistemology they closely followed Plato, classifying knowledge into
spiritual perception, discursive reason, opinion, and sensuous perception.
Science, we owe to discursive reason; inference,to opinion; and beatific vision,
to spiritual perception.
Nicomachus of Gcrasa who lived about 140 A. D. was one with Plato in
holding that ideas were temporally prior to the formation of the world ami
also in holding that ideas were numbers But. whereas Plato had accorded an
independent existence to ideas, Nicomachus was content with giving them a
dependent role. He conceived of ideas as existing in the divine mind and so
acting as patterns according to which the things of this world are fashioned
Another thinker who attempted a synthesis of Plato and Pythagoras was
Maximus of Tyre who taught in the first half of the second century. He was
a Sophist and a rhetorician besides being an eclectic Like other Platonista he
opposed God to matter and made demons play an intermediary role between
God and man. A long hierarchy of demons and angels was instituted by him
which served as ministers to God and guardian-angels to man. He identified
God with pure reason and considered matter to be a source of imperfection of
tho universe. Sins were due to the misuse of free-will by man and were not
the result of any evil agency acting from without. Maximus did not believe in
any evil world-soul, to whom human lapses could be attributed.
Maximus thought, very much like Rumi and other Muslim mystics, that
the sou) is temporarily imprisoned in the human body and is ever yearning
for release and reunion with the Divine Source.
Still another eclectic thinker from Syria by the name of Numenius of
Apamea, who lived in the second half of the second century, is by many re
garded aa the real founder of Neo-Platonism. Hitti says:
“PlotinuB the Greek philosopher of Egypt, credited with that distinction,
was popularly accused of basing his teachings on those of thia Apamean
and of ‘strutting around in his feathers.' "•
In his writings, Numenius combined Pythagorean and Platonic opinions in
such a manner that while granting Pythagoras the highest authority and even
accusing Plato of borrowing from him. he yet gave a predominant place to
’ P. K. Hitti, History of Syria, Macmillan, London. 1961. p. 324.
114
Uoxandrio-Syriae Thought
Platonic ideas. He traced the philosophy of the Greeks back to the Orientals
and called Plato an "Attic-speaking Moses,"
Numerous, however, was not simply a camp-follower of Plato. He differed
from him too, sinoe he distinguished the world-builder as a seoond god from the
highest Deity. The basis of thia distinction is to be found in his metaphysios
where God who is identified sometimes with the Reason of Aristotle, some
times with the Monad of Pythagoras, and sometimes with both, stands against
the creation which because of its imperfections is far inferior to nim. The
universe is created by a second god, the Demiurge, who is good by participation
in the essence of the first. Ho acquires knowledge by gating at the super
sensible archetypes and brings the world into being. The universe which is
created by the second god is regarded as the third god by Numerous. Thus
considered. God becomes a coemic triunity comprising three divirfities
Father,
Creator, and
Creature
which Numerous termed father, son, and grandson.
The psychology of Numerous is as dualistic as his metaphysics. Man, being
both spiritual and corporeal, participates in both the world-souls. Numerous
was wise enough not to oondemn body outright. It had to be condemned only
when it stood in the way of reason and served as a cat's-paw in the hands of
the evil w-orld-soul But in spite of his better thinking Numerous could not
completely shake off the influence of tho prevailing mode of thinking. He held
that tho encasement of tho rational part of the soul in the human body did
indicate a fall for tho soul and that the liberation of tho soul could be effected
through a long series of reincarnations. Hence the present life should he one
of self-denial and renunciation, that is to say, a life of reason devoid of pas
sions. In his stress upon transmigration as a means of liberation, Nutnenins
betrays, like his teacher, Pythagoras, the influence of Hindu thought
A passing reference may be made to P. Nigidius Figulus for his interest in
the Pythagorean philosophy and also to Apollonius of Tyana who distin
guished the one God from other gods. The First being ineffable and absolutely
pure could not come in oontact with earthly things on account of their material
constitution. Apollonius did not like offerings to be made to the one God
these ho reserved for the lesser gods. We may also briefly mention Moderatws
of Gadea who incorporated Platonism and non-theological doctrines into Pytha-
goreanism. Number one he regarded as the symbol of unity and two as that
of difference and inequality,
B
The Jewish-Alexandrian Philosophy
Among the precursors of Neo-Platonism are to be counted Neo-Pythagoraan-
ism and Jewish-Alexandrian philosophy in addition to a host of other
115
A History of Muslim Philosophy
tendencies which cannot be discussed here for want of space. Even out of the
Jewish thinkers we shall pick out Philo, leaving other luminaries altogether,
again for want of space.
Philo, a Jew, was bom at Alexandria a few years before Christ. His philo
sophy is an attempt to find an adjustment between the traditions of Israel
and those of the Greeks. Philo felt that the aesthetic elements in Greek culture
were repugnant to some of the elements involved in Jewish religion. To smooth
out differences and to show the concordance between the two systems of
thought and practice, Philo adopted the allegorical method of interpreting
the Scriptures already in use among the Alexandrian Jews. On this interpre
tation, circumcision, for example, would signify and hence serve as a symbol
for the cutting off of passions and ungodly opinions. Philo often criticized the
literalists for their word-picking habits. But Philo was not a thoroughgoing
symbolist. He knew that if once you defend an external practice on the ground
that it is useful as a symbol, it is very hard to assert that it is obligatory for
all times to come. Philo, therefore, recognized that the literal sense is often
accompanied by a more profound sense and that both the senses have to be
accepted since both go together. "Although circumcision properly symbolizes
the removal of all passions and sensibility and impious thoughts, yet we may
not, therefore, set aside the practice enjoined, for in that case, we should be
obliged to give up the public worship of God in the temple and a thousand
other solemnities," says he in Ds Migration
* *
Abrahami.
Philo was primarily a religious preacher rather than a philosopher. He had
no desire to propound a theory of tho universe which could stand the scrutiny
of logical reason. He was essentially concerned with the life of soul and its
attaining tho beatific vision. Keeping this objective in view he demarcated the
mystical experience from all other psychical experiences on the ground that
while the former lifts you out of the ordinary plane of life and brings you in
direct contact with some tremendous reality, the latter keeps you earth-
bound and sense-bound. In this Philo was following in the footsteps of Plato
who exhibits a religio-mystic vein in tho Symposium and tho Phaedrus, with
the difference that Philo being a Jew first and last could not identify God
with the impersonal divine reason of Plato. However, in suggesting methods for
“soul-cultivation," he again turned his attention to the Greeks, borrowed their
psychology, and on its basis framed rules for the systematic training of the
soul to receive the vision of God.
The theology of Philo is a blending of PlatoniBm and Judaism. The Jewish
doctrine shows God as intimately concerned with the world; the Platonic,
though insisting upon the divine governance and divine formation of the
world, does not hold that the relation which God has to the world is neces
sary or automatic. The Middle Platonism recognized a hierarchy of divine
beings, insisted upon the transcendence of God. and regarded the visible
• Philo, Dt Migrations Abrahami, ed. T. Mangey, Vol. I, p. 450.
116
Alexandrio-Syriac Thought
world as being governed and made by lower intermediary divine powers.
Philo had to reconcile these two conceptions.
Philo believod in one God. eternal, unchanging, passionless, far removed
above the world of phenomena as the First Cause of all that exists. Causation,
however, implies change, and so God oould not be regarded as directly creating
the universe. Intermediary powers are, therefore, needed to explain the gover
nance and formation of the world and what it contains. These powers Philo
described very confusedly. Sometimes he talked of powers, sometimes of
two powers, sometimes of one.
The problem before Philo was that of the development of multiplicity from
absolute unity. Tho solution was sought in the inability of the contemplating
mind to reproduce the absolute unity in itself. Philo gives an account of the
"multiple" apparition of God to human intellect in the De ifigralione Abrahami.
When the soul is illumined by God. it sees Him triple, one with a double
shadow; but at the highest point, the shadow vanishes and God is seen as
One. In the Quaeehmies in Oene^im, Philo says that the mind "sees God triple”
due to the weakness of its vision. "Just as the bodily eye sees a double appear -
anoe from one light, so the eye of the soul, since it cannot apprehend the. one
as one, makes a triple perception, according to the appearance of the chief
serving powers which stand beside the One.”*
The highest of all the divine forces is the Logos (Word). Sometimes Philo,
in common with Aristobulus and other earlier oommentators, gave to it the
name of Sophia, but the more commonly used word by him is the Logos.
In some of his writings he gives to Sophia the highest of the parts into
which the Logos is divided. Logos has a dual nature. In man it is reason and
also the spoken word. In the All it divides itself into the incorporeal and arche
typal ideas of which tho intelligible world consists, and the copies of these
incorporeal ideas constitute the world of perception.
In other passages Philo has called Sophia the mother of the Logos—
ordinarily he calls it divine Logos without qualification or distinction—the
mediator between God and man. It is so to say the instrument by which God
makes the world and the intermediary by which the human intelligence after
being purified ascends to heaven. Philo is not clear on the independent
existence of the Logos. On all accounts it seems that in Philo's mind the
powers had little or no existence apart from their function. "His conception
of them is affected by contemporary Greek ideas, but perhaps they really
belong to that mysterious class of instrumental and subordinate quasi-beings
which accompany the Divinity in Semitic and Persian thought, the Angel,
the Wisdom, the Breath of God in the Jewish Scriptures, the Uncreated Law
‘ Idem, Quentionee in Heiueim quoted by A. H. Armstrong, The. Arehitecture
of the Intelligible Vnitxne in the PliiloKiphit of Plotiniu. Cambridge University Press
Cambridge. 1940, pp 70-71
117
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
of the Rabbis and the quasi-personified Divine Virtues or the attributes of
Persian (Zoroastrian) theology, the Ameshi Spentas."
*
Anyhow Philo was not clear on this subject. As Ucberweg says in his History
of Philosophy, Philo wavered between the attributive and the substantive
conception of the Logo®. He both hypostatized the Logos into a person and
reduced it to a mere attribute or function of the first person.’ What is, how
ever. important for subsequent thinking ia not the nature of tho Logos as
such but the identification of the Logos with the Platonic world of forms and
the use of this conception in explaining the creation of this world. This led
to a very great development in the thought of the medieval theologians.
Philosophically speaking, the Philonian Logos is nothing but the principle of
unity in diversity, of the separating and uniting of contraries in the material
world. But perhaps Philo would not like to be judged philosophically. The
idea of Logos was not a metaphysical necessity for him; it was psychologically
needed for coming in contact with God,
Philo's doctrines of "pneuma" and mystical union are equally important.
The former is a free creative inbreathing by God, beooming the image of God
in man and constituting thereby the highest part of man’s soul, superior to
the "psyche."
Other schools outside Jewish circles were also emphasizing one God, eternal
and invariable, as the Source and the First Cause of the universe. The Gnostic
sects which were of philosophic origin accepted God as the First Cause, above
the imperfections and variations of the mundane world and, therefore, re
quiring an intermediary or an emanation to explain the production of an
imperfect and variable world.
C
NEOPLATONISM
Plotinus.—The ancestry of Neo-Platonism can be traced to Neo-Pythago
reanism, Jewish Gnosticism, and other tendencies including Christianity,
which so to say had become the Weltanschauung of most of thorn who had
any living religion in the world of Greek culture: cruder and more superstitious
forms of it in the lower strata of society, more refined and Hellenized forms
among the educated.
Tho founder of Neo-Platonisrn was Ammonius Saccas, the teacher of Plo
tinus. Saccas means the sack-bearer and as a surname indicates the occupation
by which Ammonius earned his living. Nothing definite can be asserted with
regard to his philosophic convictions. Some have asserted that he proclaimed
the identity of Aristotelian anil Platonic doctrines and also the immortality
• A. H. Armstrong. An Introduction to Anctrnl Philosophy. Methuen, London,
liMi, p. 102.
' Uoborwog. A History of Philosophy. Vol. 1. tr. Morris and Porter. Hodder A
Stoughton, London. 1872. p. 231.
118
Aloxandrio.Syriac Thought.
of the soul. But there is no historical evidenoe to decido one way or the other.
Nor is there any justification for holding that Aimnonius was tho first to
formulate the doctrine that the One is exterior to the world of ideas—a doo-
trine of fundamental importance in tho system of Plotinus.
Plotinus was an Egyptian of Greek speech and culture, bom probably in
205 A.D. About his race and parentage nothing is certain, for he was, as Por
phyry says,
“like a man ashamed of being in the body."
At the age of twenty-eight he went to Alexandria to receive philosophical
training. He was surely disappointed till at last, ho came to Ammonius whose
teachings satisfied him completely. With Ammonius he remained for eleven
long years and left him only to accompany the Emperor Gordian in tho hope
of studying Persian and Indian philosophy. The mission proved unsuccessful
and Plotinus had to flee for his life to Antioch. At the age of forty, he
went to Romo where he succeeded in winning tho king and queen over to his
doctrines. With the approval of the king ho wanted to found a Philosopher's
City, where the inhabitants should live according to the teachings of Plato.
The timely intervention of the nobles dissuaded the king from accepting such
a silly proposal. In Rome he established his own school and taught there for
the rest of his life. A painful death, probably cancer of the throat, marked in
270 A.D. the end of his illustrious career.
It is certain that Plotinus was conversant with the principal doctrines of
all the philosophical schools of tho Greeks, particularly Aristotelian and
Platonic. Ho had road very assiduously the works of Numcnios and came under
his influence. This probably accounts for tho complexities and tensions that
one finds in his writings. It was not an easy task to synthesize the extremely
complicated traditions that Plotinus had inherited. There is a double purpose
in his philosophy, tiro cosmic and the religious. Ho purports to give a complete
account of reality which should also servo as a guide to spiritual life. These
two strains go together and can be kept apart for theoretical purposes only.
However, there is no denying tho fact that tho double task put a great strain
on Plotinus' philosophical endeavour and led him to say much that sounds
bizarre to the modern ear.
Reality, for Plotinus, is an ordered hierarchical whole comprising two move
ments, one of descent and tho other of ascent. The firat is an automatic creati
vity by which the higher generates the lower, while the sooond is a movement
of return by which the soul attains reabsorption in the Divine Source. The first
is a movement from unity to multiplicity, the second is a reverse movement,
that is to say, from multiplicity to unity. Plotinus sometimes emphasizes the
one and sometimes the other and Bays things which are hard to reconcile. It
is evident from his writings that he imposed upon himself a task which by
its very nature was impossible to accomplish.
At the head of his system stands a transcendent Firat Principle, the One
119
A History of Muslim 1’hiloaopli
which is ineffable and incomprehensible to the discursive as well as the intuitive
reason. Below the One lie the two hypostases which are the universal correla
fives of the whole range of human life, physical and intellectual. These are
Mitts, Aristotle’s active intellect, and the world-soul whose function is to
contemplate aa well as to direct the material world. The hypostases are united
with each other and with the One. first, by emanation which is the radiation
of the lower from the higher and, second, by return in contemplation by the
lower upon the higher.
Plotinus’ conception of tho One is very complicated and has been variously
interpreted. The One may bo regarded aa the Neo-Pythagorean Absolute
Unity from which all plurality proceeds. The One cannot be said to have a
being, for this way of thinking introduces a duality between subject and
object and there can be no duality in Pure Unity. In the absolute state, in
its first and highest hypostasis, the One is neither existence nor thought,
neither moved, nor movable; it is simple unity or, as Hegel would say, the
Absolute Nothing, the Immanent Negative. There is a tendency in Plotinus
derived from the Platonists and Middle Stoics to deny all predications to the
One for fear of compromising Its unity. This tendency is, however, corrected
by another much more positive approach. If the One is called God, then God
is God not because He is nothing but because He embraces everything. He is,
however, better than the reality of which He is the source. The ideas no doubt
form the content of His mind but they arc nevertheless imperfect images aa
compared to the one Good, and receive radiance, “a grace playing upon their
beauty" from the Primal Source. The positive aspect of the One is stressed so
much at places that it seems to contradict Plotinus' basic assumptions. The
One, he says, is pure will, loves Itself and is the cause of Itself. Thia characteri
zation conflicts with his earlier stand and justifies the UBe of human language
for the basic reality.
In Plotinus, the negative and positive aspects go together. The positive
aspect is, however, more pronounced The One may be transcendental, but
if It is a reality. It should not simply be a Great Denial about whioh nothing
positive can be asserted.
This point can receive further clarification from an examination of the reli
gious life of Plotinus. There is no doubt that he hail a genuine mystical ex
perience. Porphyry bears testimony to it and the whole spirit and the tenor
of the Enneafa lends weight to it. But. what is the nature of this experience
and what is its goal > Some make Plotinus a pantheist and an anti-rationalist,
for whom the goal is a dissolution of the self into nothingness. Some think
that he was trying to realize his pre-existing identity with tho One through
his own efforts, while others think that his experience was genuinely mystical,
akin to that of the great Christian and Muslim mystics. The first interpretation
is absurd, the second is partially true. It is. however, the third one which
truly explains his viewpoint
Plotinus was tom so to say by the conflicting traditions he had inherited.
120
Alexandrio-Syriac Thought
The One was both transcendental and the Unity-Absolute. Again, the One
was both inaccessible and also the goal of our own self-realization. Plotinus'
contradictions and tensions are the product of those irreconcilable strains in
Ids Weltanschauung. In both cases the positive aspect predominates. But it
should not bo ignored that the tension is real and fundamental.
How did the world originate from the One! Thinkers before Plotinus had
assumed dualism; they had distinguished the world from its creator. But
dualism was no answer to the problem. If the creator and tho created differ
in essence the question whence came the world remains as unsolved as ever
Plotinus answered the question by saying that the world is distinct from
God in act rather than in essence. The world is God but God is not the world
To explain it Plotinus had the theory of emanation.
Plotinus found it very bard to explain emanation exoept through metaphors.
Both Noun and soul are produced by a spontaneous and necessary efflux of
life from tho One. They leave their source undiniiniehed. The relation between
the One and the other hypostases is described as being like that of the sun
and its light or "in similes from the radiative effect of firo, snow or perfumes.'
Can any philosophical meaning bo given to this conception 1 It is difficult to
see what meaning can be attached to emanation or radiation when attached
to spiritual beings. Again, why, if the process is eternal, can one emanation be
inferior to another! These arc points which pass comprehension.
Plotinus has another way to explain his theory of emanation. He represents
the One as a root or seed, the potentiality from which all tilings evolve into
actuality. Thus comparison is used to describe the relation of the lower
hypostases to the higher. About the soul, he says, it has potentialities which
can only be actualized in the material world. Plotinus writes, "If then it is
necessary that not only the One should exist ... in the same way it is also
*
necessary that not only souls should exist in the ahsenoo of those things which
come into being through them’; that is supposing that every nature has this
inherent quality of making that which comes after it and of unrolling itself
us if proceeding from a sort of partless seed as a beginning to the perceptible
end. The prior being remains always in its proper place and that which comes
after is as it were generated from an ineffable power (or potency).”1 This will
show that the comparison to a seed is applied to all the hypostases including
the One Itaelf. But it will be evident to every student of Plotinus that the
comparison sets up an impossible contradiction to the rest of tile Enneads.
The One may be the beginning of everything, but it cannot be the spermatic
beginning. The system of Plotinus is teleological rather than evolutionary
the main thrust of the universal forces is upwards and not downwards.
The second hypostasis, the first emanation of the One. the Nous, is a very
complicated notion. It is an image of the former and turns towards It to grasp
• A. H. Armstrong. The Arch iteclun id the Intelligible Uniterm in the Thdoeophy
of riotintui, p. 01
121
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and comprehend It. Through turning, it becomes A'ous (reason)—sensory per
ception when the object of comprehension is sensible, and rational apprehen
sion when the object of comprehension is supersensible. The Nmu includes in
itself the world of ideas. Consequently, the ideas are immanent in the -Vows
and do not exist as external to it.
It is clear that Plotinus needed an emanation in order that the First Cause
should remain unchanged. It is the Nrnu which is the reality behind the world
of phenomena ; the t hinga perceived are only the shadows of the real ones.
From the Notu proceeds the third hypostasis, via.. Psyche, the principle
of life and motion, the world-soul, which is in the universe and is shared by
every living creature. The whole world is alive, he held, and seems to par
ticipate in a life similar to our own. Further, life requires a cause which must
be found in intelligence, for everywhere one finds intelligent activities. Plotinus
maintains that the intelligent activity is nothing but a soul.
Porphyry.—The moot important of the disciples of Plotinus was Porphyry,
born in 232 A.D., probably at Batanaea in Syria. He was altogether a lesser
man but all the same a very loyal disciple and a devout follower, who by his
pleasing diction brought within the range of understanding of all men the
doctrines of Plotinus, which in the language of its author had seemed difficult
and obscure. Porphyry was more practical and religious than his master. He
declared the end of philosophizing to be the salvation of the soul. The cause
of evil is the desire for the low and the base, and the means of deliverance are
self-purification, asceticism, and philosophic cognition of God. While in Sicily,
he wrote a book in which he criticized the doctrines of Christianity, especially
the divinity of Christ. He is the first among the successors of Plotinus to
defend Hellenic paganism against Christianity. His interest in demons as
intermediaries between God and man is very much pronounced and he has
a great deal to say about them,
lambHchtu.—lamblichus was a native of Chaicis in Coelesyria.and a pupil
of Porphyry. Like his master he taught at Rome after the death of Plotinus
but retired in later life to Syria where he died in 330 A.D.
The philosophy of Iamblichus is marked by an inrush of Syrian theology
with its grosser conceptions, its wild and nonsensical trick of playing with
numbers, and its craving for the baser forms of the supernatural. Iamblichus
put faith above history and revelation, renounced the later Greek philosophy,
and asserted that God could do everything.
After Plotinus, the Neo-Platonista were up against the mighty surge of
Christianity. To stem it. they worked to bring about a complete and thorough
theology based on the Dialogues of Plato. Chaldaean oracles, and the ancient
myths: Greek. Egyptian, or Near Eastern. They were also concerned with
elaborating the system of Plotinus and making it absolutely complete.
IsmblichuB assumes still another absolutely ineffable and indeterminate
first One above the One of Plotinus. The latter has produced the intelligible
world, out of which tho intellectual world has emanated. The objects of thought
122
Alexandrio Syriae Thought
belong to the intelligible world while thinking belongs to the intellectual
world. Then there is further splitting up, sub-division, or classification which
makes the whole system nonsensically alwtnwt and hopelessly unreal. Plotinus
had distinguished Being. Life, and Intelligence, blit had never gone so far aa
to break the complex unity into three hypostases. This was done by Iambli-
ehus and his followers. Hence complications arose not because their philo
sophical principles were fantastic—which indeed they were—but because they
tried to accommodate every god, demon, and hero of the pagan mythology
into their system. The motive behind this attempt was a genuine desire to
explain the emergence of multiplicity from unity which was accomplished by
the interpolation of the intermediate terms. It was. however, forgotten that
no such attempt was destined to succeed as there can be nothing intermediate
between the Absolute and other things. Increase in the number of deities,
demons, and spirits cannot, philosophically speaking, solve the old riddle of
the Ono and the many.
In the hands of Iamblichns and his followers philosophy became a conglo
meration of mythical beings, an amazing metaphysical museum with entities
labellod and classified, leaving no room for any free intellectual and spiritual
quest.
The philosophy of Iamblichus and his followers was the last Neo-Platonie
attempt to provide an alternative scheme of thought and life to Christianity
which was forging ahead among the masses and the intellectuals. After a
brief success Neo-Platonism failed to capture the imagination of the common
man, with the result that tho centres of its teaching in Syria, Alexandria, and
Athens were closed by a royal edict in 529 A. D.
D
EARLY CHRISTIANITY
A great part of the Christian belief was formed of notions current in the
Hellenic world. When the early preachers of Christianity explained the posi
tion of Jeeus in the totality of things, they did so in terms which bore a close
reeemblanoe to conceptions already current in the pagan and the Jewish
worlds. Christianity had to assimilate elements from it« Hellenistic environ
ment. Its theology was influenced by gnosticism, which has been aptly termed
as Hellenistic theology.
It was common to all forms of Hellenistic thoology that the material world
accessible to senses is evil and consequently very much inferior to the trans
cendental world; further, that the bou! which has divine origin could win its
way back through self-denial and purification. While talking of evil the gnos-
in the distribution of economic goods or the pains of poverty, disease, and
oppression which are ordinarily associated with evil by the modern man
123
A History of Muslim Philosophy
With regard to the person of Jesus. there is a difference of opinion in the
Hellenistic theology. It is argued that in Jesus a pre-existing heavenly being
was present upon earth, but as to the manner of his corporeal manifestation,
there ia a variety of speculations. All alike regard Jesus Christ as a compound;
they differ, however, with regard to the nature and mode of the combination
of the human and divine elements in his person.
All these beliefs and controversies were taken over to the Christian Church
and formed a basis for their understanding of the Testament. The Christians
had their own philosophers too who endeavoured to reconcile philosophy and
Christian theology. The prominent among them at Alexandria were Clement
and Origen. The former was a Platonist of the older type who shows in his
Stromaleu how the general body of the Christian doctrine is adapted to the
theories of Platonic philosophy. The latter also undertook a defence of the
Christian faith against the objections of a Platonist. He was first among the
Christian theologians to set forth the doctrinos of the Christian faith in a
systematic form.
Both Clement and Origen founded the Christian school of philosophical
theology. But the attempt did not find favour with the people. The same
Justinian who closed the school of the Neo-Platonists in 529 A.D. condemned
Origcnism in nine anathemas in about 540 A.D.
Having been made to quit Alexandria, Origen returned to Palestine and
founded a school at Caesarea, on the model of that in Alexandria. It did not
succeed like the original one hut nevertheless exercised a potent influence on
the Syrian Church. A rival school was set up at Antioch by Malchion. Fifty
years later another school was established at Niaibis, right in the heart of the
Syriac-speaking community. It was here that the text-books studied at Antioch
were rendered into Syriac.
The Church had no philosophy of its own. It had to adapt itself to the Alex
andrian philosophy, particularly to Neo-Platonism and Aristotelian meta
physics and psychology. This led to senseless controversies as the Arian doc
trine shows. Both the Alexandrian and the Syrian Churches agreed that
Christ was an emanation, eternal like God, but differed in their interpretation
of eternity. The school of Antioch thought that God being the cause, there
was a time when God existed but not tho Son. This was denied hy the Alex
andrians who maintained that eternity does not admit of before and after.
If God is Father He ia so from eternity and the Son should for ever be issuing
from the Father as the source.
The Arian controversy died by the fifth century A.D. giving place to an
other which concerned the person of the incarnate Christ. It was largely a
question of psychology. In De Aninui Aristotle had defined soul aa the first
actuality of a natural body having in it the capacity of life "and described ita
four faculties aa the nutritive, the sensible, the locomotive, and the intellectual.
'I he firet three are common to men anil animals, being concerned with the
intake of food and with knowledge through sense and desire. The fourth one
124
Alexandrio-Syriac Thought
which is the intellect. Noun, or the rational soul is peculiar to man. It is inde
pendent of the body and the presumption is that it has its source not in the
body.'
*
Man ia therefore a compound of psyche and the rational soul, the first signi
fying the first, three functions of the soul, the second, the fourth one which
later philosophy regarded as the emanation of Logos or the Agent Intellect
flifliculty arose about the eo-preeence of three elements in the personality of
Christ. What would be the relationship between the Logos and psyche, its
own emanation, when they come together in the same person 1 The question
was discussed by the gnostics too. They regarded human nature, that is, the
psyche of Jesus Christ, either as a mere illusion or no detached from the divine
that we have really two persons. On the second view the man Jesus is regarded
as having been originally distinct from the heavenly Christ. The latter des
cended into him at his baptism and the compound Jesus Christ came to lie
Some people put the coalescence of the two at an early date.
Both these positions were taken by the Church. The Alexandrians thought
that the psyche and logos fused in the person of Christ, while the school of
Antioch beaded by Ncstorius rejected the hypothesis outright. Ncstorius con
ceived of Christ aa uniting in himself two persons, the logos and a man.
although the two persons were so united that they might in a sense be deemed
one.
As the controversy became acute a council was held at Ephesus in 431 A. D.
where the Alexandrians succeeded in getting Ncstorius and his followers con
demned as heretics They were persecuted and forced to migrate from Egypt.
Accordingly, they founded a school in Edessa, a Syriac-speaking district. The
school became the resort, of the Nestorians and centre of the vernacular
speaking Syriac Church. This school was also banned and tho scholars had to
take refuge in Persia.
The Nestorians had to support their theories by the prevailing philosophy
and so every Nestorian missionary was to some extqnt a propagandist of
Greek philosophy. They translated into Syriac the works of Aristotle ind his
commentators, and also the works of the theologians.
The Nestorians had no sympathy with the government which had persecuted
them Consequently they spumed its language and celebrated the sacrament
only in Syriac. They promoted a distinctly native theology and philosophy
by means of translated material and Syriac commentaries.
The advocates of the fusion theory, the Monophysites or Jacobites as they
were called, the rivals of the Nestorians. fared no better at the hands of the
government. They were also persecuted and expelled. Consequently, they
too bycotted the Greek language and began using Coptic anil Syriac. In
philosophy they were inclined more towards Neo-Platonism and mysticism
than the Nestorians.
I has who led the Nestorian migration to Persia translated Porphyry's
laagaj'. a manual of logic, into Syriac, while Prohus produced commentaries
125
A History «f Muslim Phikiaophy
on this book aa well as on Aristotle’s Ilermeneulica, De Sophulicis Elenchu, and
Analylica Priora. Sergius, a Jacobite, wrote about the Isagoge. the "Table of
Porphyry," Aristotle’s ’ Categories" and De Mundo. He also wrote treatises on
logic in seven volumes. Ahudemmeh composed treatises on the definition of
logic, on free-will, on the soul, on man considered to be a microcosm, and on
man as a composition of soul and body. Paul the Persian produced a treatise
on logic which he dedicated to a Persian king.
The Jacobites produced works no less than the Nestorians. Their productions
arc enormous no doubt but, all the same, they lack originality. For the most
part they are only the transmission of received texts with their translations,
commentaries, and explanatory treatises. But it cannot be denied that they
fulfilled a genuine need and became a means of spreading Greek philosophy
and culture far beyond its original home.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
F. Uoborwcg, A History of Philosophy, tr. G. S. Morris and N. Porter. 2 Vola..
.odder A Stoughton, London, 1872; E. Zoller, The Philosophy of the Greeks, 2 Vola..
xongmana Green. London. 1897; A. H. Armstrong, An Introduction to Ancient
Philosophy, Methuen. London, 1947; Tho Worts of Philo, tr. F. H. Colson and C. H.
Whitaker, Loeb Classical Library, Heineman. New York, 1929; H. Lowy, Selections
from Philo, 1947; H. A. Wolfson,PMIo, 2 Vola., 1947; E. R.Goodonougb.An Introduc
tion to Philo, 1940; T. Whittaker. The Neoplatonists. 2nd cd„ 1901; P. Klibansky.
The Continuity of the Platonic Tradition, Aedibus Instituti Warburgiani, London.
1940; Plotinus, Enneads, tr. S. MacKenna, 1883 84; W. R. Inge. Tho Philosophy
of Plotinus. 2 Vol*., 3rd oil., Longmans Green, london, 1948; A. E.Taylor, Platonism
and Its Influence, liarrap, London; Paul Elomer. Platonism; E. Brdhier. La
philosophic de Plotin. Paris, 1928; E. R. Dodds, Select Passages Illustrating Neo-
platonism, S.P.C.K.. London. 1923; F. Heinemann. Plvtin. Ioipxig. 1921; C. Bigg,
The Christian Platonists of Alexandria, Oxford, 1913; Life of Porphyry, tr. T, Taylor.
3rd ed.. 1918; Iamblichus. Theurgia or the Egyptian Mysteries. Ir. A. Wilder.
Rieder, London. 1911.
Part 2
Chapter VI
PRE-ISLAMIC ARABIAN THOUGHT
In the present chapter, we are oonoerned only with the people of Arabia
who lived in the age immediately preceding the rise of Islam. The ancient
civilized inhabitants of southern Arabia, the Sabaeans and liimyarites, have
been left out. of account, not only because the relevant materials at our disposal
are scanty and fragmentary, but also because they are far removed from the
Islamic times, with which the present volume is primarily and directly con
cerned.
126
Pm-hlamic Arabian Thought
Wc cannot hope to understand properly the religious or philosophical ideas
>f a people without comprehending their economic and social background. A
few words about tho social structure of prc-Ialamic Arabs should, therefore,
form a suitable and helpful prelude to a description of their religious outlook
The land of Arabia is mainly a sandy plain, which is partly steppe-land and
partly desert Except in tho oases which are few and far between, the land is
bare and monotonous, unfit for cultivation and unable to support settled
communities. From times immemorial, its inhabitants have been of necessity
nomadic, living on the produce of their camels and sheep The majority of
the ancient Arabs wore, therefore, pastoralists who were constantly on the move
in search of grass and water for their herds and flocks. Restless and rootless,
with no permanent habitations, they stood at a low level of culture and were
innocent of those arts and sciences which are associated in our minds with
civilized life. The art of reading and writing was confined only to a few indivi
duals in certain commercial centres, while illiteracy was almost universal among
the sons of the desert. Their mental horizon was narrow, and the struggle for
existence in their inhospitable environment was so severe that their energies
were exhausted in satisfying the practical and material needs of daily life, and
they had little time or inclination for religious or philosophic speculation,
Their religion was a vague polytheism and their philosophy was summed up
in a number of pithy sayings.
Although the ancient Arabs had no written literature, they possessed a
language which waa distinguished for its extraordinary rich vocabulary. In
the absence of painting and sculpture, they had cultivated their languago as
a fine art and were justly proud of its enormous power of expression. Accord
ingly. the poets and oratora who oould make an effective and aesthetic use
of its wonderful resources were held in especially high esteem among them.
Judging by the evidence furnished by the prc-Islamie poets, polemical pas
*
sage in the Qur'an, and the later Islamic literature, idolatry based on poly
theism prevailed throughout ancient Arabia. Almost every tribe had its own
god. which was the centre of its religious life and the immediate object of
its devotion. The ancient Arabs. however, at the same time believed in the
existence of a Supreme God. whom they called Allah. But this belief was
rather vague and their faith in Him was correspondingly weak. They might
invoke Allah in time of danger, but as soon as the danger was over they forgot
all about Him. They also recognized and worshipped a large number of other
subordinate gods along with Him. or at least thought that they would inter
cede for them with Him. Three deities in [(articular, viz., al-'Vzza, al-Manat,
and al-LJt. were accorded special veneration as tho daughters of Allah. It
was this association of subordinate deities with Allah which is technically
known as fjirh [association of gods with Allah) and which was condemned by
the Prophet as an unpardonable fin. Shirk was held in special abhorrence, as
it obscured belief in the oneness of God.
The innumerable deities, which the pagan Arabs worshipped, form a long
127
A History of Muslim Philosophy
scries and arc the subject of a monograph, written by ibn alKalbi, who
flourished in the second century of the Islamic era and is counted among the
leading authorities on Arabian antiquity.1 A few of them have been incidentally
mentioned in the Qur'an also.
These Arabian deities, which were of diverse nature, fell into different cate
gories. Some of them were personifications of abstract ideas, such as jadd
(luck), m'd (fortunate, auspicious). ri(ia (good will, favour), wadd (friendship,
affection), and mandf (height, high place). Though originally abstract in cha
racter, they were conceived in a thoroughly concrete fashion. Some deities
derived their names from the places where they were venerated. Dhii al-
Khalasah and Dbu al-gfaara may be cited aa examples of thia kind.
The heavenly bodies and other powers of nature, venerated as deities, oc
cupied an important place in the Arabian pantheon. The sun (fjams, regarded
as feminine) was worshipped by several Arab tribes, and was honoured with
a sanctuary and an idol. The name 'Abd Shams, "Servant of the Sun,” was
found in many parts of the country. The sun was referred to by descriptive
titles also, such as ibdriq, “the brilliant one." The constellation of the Pleiades
lal lh ura’jya), which was believed to bestow rain, also appears as a deity
in the name ‘Abd al-Ihurayya. The planet Venus, which shines with remark
able brilliance in the clear skies of Arabia, was revered as a great goddess
under the name of al-'Uzza, which may be translated aa “the Most Mighty.”
It had a sanctuary at Nafcfalah near Mecca. The name ‘Abd al-'Uzza was
very common among the pre-Islamic Arabs. Tho Arabian cult of the planet
Venus has been mentioned by several classical and Syriac authors.
There were certain Arabian deities whose titles in themselves indicate that
they occupied a position of supremo importance in the eyes of their rotaries.
Such deities were: al-Malik, "the King" (compare the personal name, ‘Abd
al-Malik); and Ba'l or lia'al, "the Lord,,' which was very common among tho
northern Semites.
The deitiea of heathen Arabia were represented by idols, sacred stones, and
other objects of worship. Sacred stones served at the same time as altars; the
blood of the victims was poured over them or smeared over them. At the
period with which we are dealing, the Arabs sacrificed camels, sheep, goats,
and, less often, kine. The flesh of the sacrifice was usually eaten by the wor
shippers, the god contenting himself with the blood alone. Originally, every
sacrifice was regarded as food to bo consumed by the god concerned or at
least as a means of pacifying him. The sacrifice was, thus, believed to bring
the worshipper irdo close connection with the deity. Hence the Arabic terms,
qurba and qurMn (derived from the root, QRB, to be near), which are used
for a sacrifice.
The Arabs, like the Hebrews, were in the habit of sacrificing the firstlings
of their flocks and herds (/ata'). Soon after the birth of an infant, his head
' Ibn al-Kalbi, KMb al AfnOm, ed. Ahmad Zaki PlSjba, Cairo, 1914.
128
Pre-Ialamic Arabian Thought
as shaven and a sheep wan sacrificed on his behalf This practice has survived
among the Arabs and other Muslim peoples to the present day under the
name of 'atp^oA. Perhaps, this was originally a ransom, offered as a substitute
for the child himself.
The gods of heathen Arabia were represented not only by rude blocks of
stone (nuaub, pl. anfdb). but also by statues, made with more or less skill.
The usual word for a divine statue, whether of stone or wood, was sanam. The
other word used for this purpose was watban, which seems primarily to mean
nothing more than a stone.
Examples of tree-worship are also found among the ancient Arabs. The tree
known as Mat aJ anwad, “that on whioh things are hung,” received divine
honours; weapons and other objects were suspended from it. At Nakhlah. the
goddess 'Uzza is said to have been worshipped in the form of three trees.
The gods of the heathen Arabs were mostly represented by idols, which
were placed in temples. These temples served as places of worship, where
offerings and sacrifices were made by their votaries. The temples were by no
means imposing buildings like those of the Egyptians or the Greeks. They were
simple structures, sometimes mere walls or enclosures marked by stones. Not
only tho temples wore venerated as holy places, but sometimes the surrounding
areas were also treated aa sacred and inviolable //lima), and were supposed
to be under the special protection of their respective gods.
In connection with several temples, we read of priests who served as their
custodians (addin, pl. addana). They received the worshippers and gave them
admission to the shrine. The office was generally hereditary, since we read of
priestly families which were attached to particular temples. Another word
used for a priest was kdhin, a term which was employed for a soothsayer as
well. The priests were believed to be under the influence of the gods and to
possess the power of foretelling future events and of performing other super
human feats. In this way, their pronouncements resembled the ancient Greek
oracles and were likewise vague and equivocal. In course of time, the priest
who was in the beginning simply the custodian of the temple developed the
character of a soothsayer aa well, and thus the term IdAin came to acquire the
sense of a soothsayer and seer. There were female soothsayers as well.
Arabic literature has preserved many stories about kdhina and many utter
ances are attributed to them. These utterances were usually made in rhymed
prose, and are interesting not only in respect of their content but also with
regard to their style. Their pronouncements consisted of a few concise sentences,
which ended in words having the same rhyme. This mode of expression was
known aa m)'. The same style is found in the earliest revelations received by
the Prophet which now constitute the last chapters of the Qur'an. It is.
therefore, not surprising that the contemporaries of the Prophet called him
a kdhin. a position which he firmly repudiated. While in the beginning, the
Qur'in adopted the style peculiar to saj‘, it raised the conception to a level
far beyond the imagination of the soothsayers. There is another point of
129
A History of Muslim Philosophy
similarity which should be noted here. The utterances of the tahiiu were pref
aced by oaths, swearing by the earth and sky, the sun, moon, and stars, light
and darkness, and plants and animals of all kinds. These oaths offer an interest
ing point of comparison with the oaths used in the Qur'an.
The temples of the heathen Arabs were for them not only places of worship
but also places of pilgrimage. They assembled there periodically at certain
times of the year, when these assemblies assumed the character of fairs and
festivals.
An important sanctuary of this kind was located at Mecca, a town in western
Arabia, which was situate! at a distance of about fifty miles inland from the Red
Sea. The town lay on the trade-route which led along the sea from the Yemen
to Syria, and its situation may have been partly determined by the presence
of a well, called Zamzam, which has a considerable and fairly constant supply
of water. Tho sanctuary consisted of a simple stone structure of cube-like
appearance, which was called the Ka'bah by the Arabs. One of the walls
contained a black stone (al hajar al-ruwad). Inside the Ka'bah was the statue
of the god, Hubal. At its feet. there was a small pit in which offerings to the
temple were deposited. Besides Hubal, al-Lit, al-'Uzza, and al-ManAt were
also worshipped at Mecca and are mentioned in the Qur'Sn. At tho rise of
Islam, the temple is said to have contained as many as three hundred and
sixty idols. It seems that in course of time the various Arab tribes had brought
in their gods and placed them in the Ka'bah. which had consequently acquired
the character of the national pantheon for the whole of Arabia.
From times immemorial, the Ka'bah at Mecca had been the oentre of a
great pilgrimage, in which the most diverse tribes from all over Arabia took
part. But this was possible only when peace reigned in the land. For this
purpose, the month of Dhu al-Qijjah in which the rites and oeremonies con
nected with the pilgrimage were performed and the preceding and succeeding
months of Phu al-Qa'dah and Muharram—altogether three consecutive months
— were regarded as sacred months, during which tribal warfare was prohibited.
Tills period was sufficiently long to enable the tribes from the remotest corners
of Arabia to visit the Ka'bah and return to their homes in peace. The territory
around Mecca was also treated as sacred (baram) ; and the pilgrims laid aside
their weapons when they reached this holy territory. Tho pilgrimage was called
MV-
During the pilgrimage, the pilgrims had to porform a number of rites and
ceremonies, which lasted for several days and which can be described here
only with the utmost brevity.
As soon as tho pilgrims entered the sacred territory, the Aaram. they had to
practise self-denial by observing a number of prohibitions: they had to abstain
from hunting, fighting, sexual intercourse, and certain other things. They cir
cumambulated the Ka'bah, and also kissed tho Black Stone which was fixed
in one of ita walls. An essential rite of the (iaj; was a visit to the hill of 'Araf&t
on tho ninth of Phu al- Hijjah. when the pilgrims assembled in the adjoining
130
Pre Islamic Arabian Thought
plain and stayed there till sunset for the prescribed (the stays or halts).
The hill of "Araflit ia said to have borne another name, 1UI, which may have
been the name of the shrine or rather of the deity worshipped there in ancient
*
times. The pilgrims then went to Muzdalifah, which was consecrated to
Quzah, the thunder-god. Here they spent the night, when a fire was kindled
on the sacred hill. At sunrise the pilgrims left for Mina, an open plain, where
they sacrificed the animals, camels, goats, and sheep, which they had brought
with them for the purpose. The animals meant for sacrifice were distinguished
by special coverings or other marks. During their stay at Mina, the pilgrims
also used to throw stones at three prescribed sites as a part of the pilgrimage
ceremonial. After staying at Mina for three days, the pilgrims left for their
homos. Women took part in the pilgrimage along with men.
The hajj as described above was retained by the Prophet as a major religious
institution of Islam, with certain modifications of its ceremonials which were
intended to break the link with their pagan associations. While the position
of the Ka'bah was emphasized aa the house built by the Patriarch Abraham
for the service of Allah, the halts (wui/Hf) at "Arafat (along with the one at
Muzdalifah) was retained as an essential feature of the Islamic hajj.
In addition to the innumerable gods, the heathen Arabs also believed in the
existence of demons, shadowy beings, which they called the jinn (variant:
jdnn). The word probably means covered or hidden. Hence the jinn meant
beings invisible to the eye. They were regarded as crafty and mischievous,
almost malevolent, and were consequently held in fear. They were aupposod
to haunt places dreaded either for their loneliness or for their unhealthy cli
mate, The fear of the jinn, therefore, gave rise to various stories, in which they
are said to have killed or carried off human beingB. Like many other primitive
peoples, the heathen Arabs believed in demoniacal possession. The jinn were
supposed to enter human beings and even animals, rendering them '"possessed”
or mad. According to the testimony of the Qur’an, the Meccans believed that
there was a kinship between Allah and the jinn, and that they were His
partners. Accordingly they made offerings to them and sought aid from them.
In spite of the bewildering multiplicity of tho subordinate gods whom the
pre-Islamic Arabs venerated, they believed in the existence of a Supreme Ood
whom they called Allah. The word Allah is found in the inscriptions of northern
Arabia and also enters into the composition of the numerous personal names
among them. There are a large number of passages in the poetry of the heathen
Arabs in which Allah is mentioned as a great deity. Allah also occurs in many
idiomatic phrases which were in constant use among them. The Qur'&n itself
testifies that the heathens themselves regarded Allah as tho Supreme Being.
Their sin, however, consisted in the fact that they worshipped other gals
besides Him. It was against this shirk that the Prophet waged an unrelenting
war. In any case, it is important to note that the Qur’&nic monotheism did
* Wellhauson. Rate Arabirehtn Heidmhmt. 2nd ed.. Berlin. 1897, p. 83.
131
A History of Muslim Philosophy
not find it necessary to introduce an altogether new name for the Supreme
Being and, therefore, adopted Allah, the name already in use.
Even before the advent of Islam, old polytheism was losing its force in
Arabia, since the Arabs’ notion of their gods had always been vague. With
the decline of old paganism, a number of men had appeared in various parts
of the country who had become convinced of the folly of idolatry, and were
seeking another more satisfying faith. They were fairly numerous and were
called Hantfs. The Qur an uses this term in the sense of a monotheist, and
describes Abraham the Patriarch as the first Qantf. But none of these Hanifs
had the vision and force of conviction and the proselytizing zeal which distin
guishod tile mission of Muhammad.
The ancient Arabs believed that the human soul was an ethereal or air like
substance quite distinct from the human body. As such, they considered it
identical with breath. Thia identification was so complete in their view that
the woid for breath, na/s, came to moan human personality itself. They were
confirmed in this belief by their experience that death resulted when a human
being ceased to breathe. At the time of death, breath along with life itself
escaped through its natural passage, the mouth or the nostrils. When a person
passed away on his death-bed, his soul was said to escape through his nostrils
(mala halfa anfihi). and in the case of a violent death, e.g.. on a battle-field,
through the gaping wound.
When a person was murdered, he was supposed to long for vengeance and
to thirst for the blood of the murderer. If the vengeance was not taken, the
soul of the murdered man was believed to appear above his grave in the shape
of an owl continually crying out. "Give me to drink" (uqiiui), until the murder
was avenged. The restless soul in the form of a screeching owl was supposed
to escape from the skull, the skull being the most characteristic part of the
dead body. Certain rites of burial, prevalent among the pre-Islamic Arabs,
show that they lielieved in some sort of future existence of the soul. In order
to show honour to a dead chief, for instance, a camel which had been pre
viously hamstrung was tethered near the grave and was left to starve. This
UBage can be explained only on the hypothesis that the animal was to be at
the service of the dead man. The custom of slaughtering animals at the graves
of elders has been kept up in Arabia to the present day. Ancient poets often
express the wish that the graves of those whom they love may be refreshed
with abundant rain. Similarly, they sometimes address greetings to the dead.
It may be that expressions of tills kind are not merely rhetorical figures of
speech; they probably indicate their belief in tho survival of those who have
departed from this world.
Although there are indications that the ancient Arabs had somo notion,
however hazy, of the survival of the human soul after death, they had no clear
notion of life after death. As stated in the Qur'iin, they could not understand
how a human being, after his bones had been reduced to dust, could be called
to life once again. Since life after death was something beyond their compre-
132
Pre- Islamic Arabian Thought
hension, tho question of retribution for human deeds did not arise in their
minds.
The Qur’in usee the word riA (spirit) as well aa na/e for the human soul.
Accordingly, the Muslim theologians do not make any distinction between
the two terms in designating the soul.
The ancient Arabs were generally fatalists. They believed that events in the
livre of human beings were preordained by fate, and. therefore, inevitable.
However hard they might try, they could not escape the destiny that was in
store for them. The course of events was believed to be determined by dahr
or time, so that furU/ al-dahr (the changes wrought by time) was a most
frequent expression used by the Arabs and their poets for the vicissitudes of
human life. The same feeling is expressed in several of their proverbs and
maxims. This view was probably born of their practical experience of life.
In no part of the world is human life quite secure against the sudden changes
of fortune, but in the peculiar milieu of Arabia man seems to be a helpless
victim to the caprice of nature to an unusual degree. The sudden attack of a
hostile neighbouring tribe or a murrain in his herds and Bocks may reduce a
rich man to dire poverty almost overnight; or in the case of a prolonged
drought, he may be brought face to face with fearful famine and death. The
peculiar circumstances of desert life, thus, seem to have encouraged the growth
of fatalistic tendencies among the Arabs. Bearing in mind the existence of
these tendencies among the ancient Arabs, it is not surprising to find that
similar views prevailed in the first centuries of Islam and that the dogma of
predestination was almost universally accepted among the Muslim masses.
Predetermination was, however, divorced from dahr.
The feeling of utter helplessness in the face of inexorable fate has probably
given rise to another idea among the Arabs, the idea of resignation as a com
mendable virtue. Possibly, it has a survival value for those who adopt a sub
missive attitude towards the hardships and adversities of human life. Instead
of fretting and fuming and hurling oneself in violent revolt against the decree
of fate and thus running the risk of complete disintegration, there seem
comparative safety and tho possibility of ultimate survival in accepting calmly
and patiently the dictates of fate. The inculcation of resignation as a virtue,
thus, seems to be a natural corollary to the dogma of predestination.
Although religion had little influence on the lives of pre-Ialamio Arabs, we
must not suppose them to be an altogether lawless people. The pagan society
of ancient Arabia was built on certain moral ideas, which may bo briefly
described here. They had no written code, religious or legal, except the com
pelling force of traditional custom which was enforced by public opinion; but
their moral and social ideals have been faithfully preserved in their poetry,
which is the only form of literature which has come down to us from those
old days.
The virtues most highly prised by the ancient Arabs were bravery in battle,
patience in misfortune, loyalty to one's fellow-tribesmen, generosity to the
133
A History of Muslim Philosophy
needy and the poor, hospitality to the guest and the wayfarer, and persistence
in revenge. Courage in battle and fortitude in warfare wore particularly re
quired in a land where might waa generally right and tribes were constantly
engaged in attacking one another, It is, therefore, not a mere chance that in
the famous anthology of Arabian verae, called the HamdmJi, poems relating
to inter tribal warfare occupy more than half of the book. These poems ap
plaud the virtues most highly prized by the Arabs—bravery in battle, patience
in hardship, defiance of tho strong, and persistence in revenge.
The tribal organization of the Arabs waa then, aa now, based on the prin
ciple of kinship or common blood, which served as the bond of union and
social solidarity. To defend the family and the tribe, individually and collec
tively, was, therefore, regarded as a sacred duty; and honour required that a
man should stand by his people through thick and thin. If kinsmen sought
help, it was to be given promptly, without considering the merits of the case.
Chivalrous devotion and disinterested self-sacrifice on behalf of their kinsmen
and friends were, therefore, held up as a high ideal of life.
Generosity and hospitality were other virtues which were greatly extolled
by the Arab poets. They were personified in IJatim of the tribe of Tayy, of
whom many anecdotes are told to this day. Generosity was specially called
into play in the frequent famines, with which Arabia is often afflicted through
lack of rain. The Arabian sense of honour also called blood for blood. Vengeance
for the slain was an obligation which lay heavy on the conscience of tho pagan
Arabs. It was taken upon the murderer or upon one of his fellow-tribesmen.
Usually this ended the matter, but sometimes it led to a regular blood-feud,
which lasted for a long period and in whioh many persons lost their lives. The
fear of retribution had a salutary effect in restraining the lawless instincts of
the Bedouin; but tho vendetta in some cases was carried to extreme limits
and involved a great Ices of human life.
In the century before Muhammad. Arabia was not wholly abandoned to
paganism. Both Judaism and Christianity claimed a considerable following
among its inhabitants. Almost every calamity that befell the land of Palestine
sent a fresh wave of Jewish refugees into Arabia, sometimes as far as tho
Yemen. Thoy had probably taken refuge there after the conquest of Palestine
by Titus in 70 A. D. Jewish colonists flourished in Medina and several other
towns of northern Ilijiz. In the time of tho Prophot, three large Jewish tribes,
viz., Najfr, Quraijah, and Qainuqa', dwelt in the outskirts of Medina, and
the fact that the Prophet made an offensive and defensive alliance with them
for the safety of the town shows that they were an important factor in the
political life of those times. These oolonies had their own teachers and centres of
religious study. Judging by the few extant specimens of their poetry, these
refugees, through contact with a people nearly akin to themselvos, had become
fully Arabicized both in language and sentiment. They, however, remained
Jews in the most vital particular, religion, and it is probable that they exertec
a rtrong influence over the Arabs in favour of monotheism.
134
Pre-Tftlamic Arabian Thought
Another religious factor whioh was strongly opposed to Arabian paganism
was the Christian faith. How early and from what direction Christianity first
entered Arabia is a question which it is difficult to answer with certainty;
but there ia no doubt that Christianity was widely diffused in the southern
and nothorn parts of Arabia at the time of the Prophet. Christianity is said
to have been introduced in the valley of Najrin in northern Yemen from Syria,
and it remained entrenched in spite of the terrible persecution it suffered at
the hands of the Himyarite king. Dhu Nawls, who had adopted tho Jewish
faith. The Prophet received at Medina a deputation of the Christians of
Najrin and held discussions with them on religious questions. Christianity in
the south-west of Arabia received a fresh stimulus by the invasion of the Chris
tian Abyssinians, who put an end to the rule of Dhu Nawis. There were
Christians in Mecca itself; Waraqah ibn Naufal, a oousin of Khadljah, the
first wife of the Prophet, was one of them. Christianity was also found among
oertain tribes of the Euphrates and tho Qhassan who lived on the borders of
Syria. Their conversion was due to their contact with tho Christian population
of the Byzantine Empire. The Ghaesinids, who were Monophysitre. not only
defended their Church against its rivals but also fought against the Muslims
aa the allies of the Byzantine emperors. The Christians were also found at
Hlrah, a town in the north-east of Arabia, where Arab princes of the house
of Lakhm ruled under tho suzerainty of the Persian longs. These Christians,
who were called 'Ib&d or the "Servants of the Lord." belonged to the Nestorian
Church, and contributed to the diffusion of Christian ideas among the Arabs
of tho Peninsula.
By the sixth century, Judaism and Christianity had mado considerable head
way in Arabia, arid were extending their sphere of influence, leavening the
pagan masses, and thus gradually preparing the way for Islam.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Al-Qur'An; ibn al.Kalbi, Kitab al-Afnhm, od. Abmad Zaki PAsbu. Cairo, 1914;
Mabmud Shukri al-Alusi, BulugA al'Arab ft Afiwdl al-'Arab, 3 Vole., Baghdad.
1314/1898; Jawftd -Ali. TdriB ol 'Arob jnW al-IMm. Vole. V A VI. BagfadAd.
1958-86; J. Wellhaueon. Rule Arabiechen Heidmtume, 2nd od.. Berlin, 1897;
Th. Noldeke, "Ancient Arabs," in Encyclopaedia of Religion and Ethia, Vol. I,
Edinburgh, 1908; W. Robertson Smith. Religion of the Semite!, 2nd ed., London.
1894; Ign. Guidi. L'Arable Anteulamigue, Paris. 1921; De Lacy O'Leary. Arabia
Before Muhammad, London. 1927; O. Levi Della Vida. "Prelslamic Arabia," in
The Arab Heritage, ed. N. A. Faris, Princeton. 1944.
135
BOOK TWO
ADVENT OF ISLAM
FUNDAMENTAL TEACHINGS OF THE QUR'AN
Chapter VII
PHILOSOPHICAL TEACHINGS OF THE QUR'AN
The Qur'an.—Although the Scriptures revealed to the earlier prophets,
especially those of the Christians and the Jews, are regarded by tho Muslims
as holy, yet the Book (al-Qur'an) revealed to the last Prophet, Muhammad,
is their chief sacred Book. The doctrine propounded by the Qnr'in is not a
new doctrine, for it is similar to the Scriptures of the earlier apostle
*. 1 It lays
down the same way of faith as was enjoined on Noah and Abraham.* It con
firms in the Arabic tongue what went before it—the Book of Moses and the
Gospel of Jesus—in being a guide to mankind, admonishing the unjust and
giving glad tidings to the righteous.’ God never abrogates or causes to be for
gotten any of His revelations, but acoording to the needs and exigencies of
the times, Ho confirms them or substitutes for them something similar or
*
better.
The Qur'in is a book essentially religious, not philosophical, but it deals
with all those problems which religion and philosophy have in common. Both
have to say something about problems related to the significance of suob ex
pressions as God. the world, the individual soul, and the inter-relation
* of
these; good and evil, free-will, and life after death. While dealing with these
problems it also throws light on such conceptions as appearance and reality,
existence and attributes, human origin and destiny, truth and error, space
and time, permanence and change, eternity and immortality. The Qur’in
claims to give an exposition of universal truths with regard to these problems—
an exposition couched in a language (and a terminology) which the people
(Abdullah Yusuf All’s translation of tho Qur'&n has been mainly used for
tho purposes of this chapter. For references the same work may be consulted.)
1 Qur’an, xlvi, 9-10.
■ ZHd„ xlii, 13.
■ Ibid., v, 49; xlvi, 12.
• Ibid., ii. 106; xiii. 39; xvi. 101.
136
Philosophical Teachings of the Qur'6n
immediately addressed, the Arabs, with the intellectual background they had
at the time of ita revelation, could easily understand, and which the people of
other lands, and other times, speaking other languages, with their own intel
lectual background could easily interpret. It makes free use of similitude to
give a workable idea of what is incomprehensible in its essence. It is a book of
*
wisdom, ••parts of which relate to its basic principles (umm al lnldb) and
explain and illustrate them in detail, others relate to matters explained alle
gorically. It would be a folly to ignore the fundamentals and wrangle about
the allegorical, for none knows their hidden meanings, except God? In what
follows, a brief account is given of the Qur'&nic teaching with regard to the
religio-philosophical problems mentioned above.
Ultimate Reality: God and Hit Attributes.—The Ultimate Being or Reality
is God.' God, as described by the Qur'&n for the understanding of man, is
the sole self-subsisting, all-pervading, eternal, and Absolute Reality? He is
the first and tho last, the seen and the unseen? He is transcendent in the sense
that He in His full glory cannot be known or experienced by us finite beings—
beings that can know only what can bo experienced through the senses or
otherwise and what is inherent in the nature of thought or is implied by it.
No vision can grasp Him. He ia above all oomprehension.1* He ia transcendent
also because He ia beyond the limitations of time, space, and sense-content.
He was before time, space, and the world of sense came into existence. He ia
also immanent both in the souls (an/us) and the spatio-temporal order
Of the exact nature of God we can know nothing. But, in order that wo may
apprehend what we cannot oomprehend, He usee similitudes from our expe
rience.11 He “ia the light of the heavens and the earth. Tho parable of His
light ia as if there were a niche and within it a lamp, the lamp enclosed in
glass; the glass aa if it were a brilliant star lit from a blessed tree, an olive,
neither of the east nor of the west, whoso oil is well-nigh luminous, though
fire scarce touched it: light upon light I"1* Likewise for our understanding.
He describes through revelation His attributes by similitude from what is loft
iest in the heavens and the earth'
* and in our own experience1* (our highest
ideals). This He does in a language and an idiom which the people addressed
to may easily understand.1* These attributes are many and are connoted by
• Ibid., x, 1.
• Ibid., iii. 7.
’ Ibid., ii, 188; xxxl. 80.
■ Ibid., ii. 116; vi. 68; xx, 111; xxxi, 30; xxxii. 8; lv. 87; oxii, 8.
• Ibid., lvii, 3.
Ibid., vi. 103
“ Ibid., xxx, 88.
Ibid., xxiv, 36.
Ibid., xxx. 87.
•• Ibid.. xxx, 28.
'• Ibid., xiv, 4; xliii. 3.
137
A History of Muslim Philosophy
His names,1* but they can all be summarized under a few essential heads.
Life,1’ Eternity,1* Unity,1* Power,*’ Truth,’1 Beauty,” Justice,” Love,” and
Goodness.” As compared to the essence of God, these attributes are only
finite approaches, symbols or pointers to Reality and serve as the ultimate
human iderjs, but though signs and symbols, they are not arbitrary symbols.
God has Himself implanted them in our being. For that reason they must,
in some sense, be faithful representations of tho divine essence. They must at
least bo in tuno with it, so that in pursuing them we human beings are truly
in pursuit of what is at least in harmony with the essence of God, for they are
grounded in that essence.
God is, thus, a living, self-subsisting” eternal, and absolutely free creative
reality which is one, all-powerful, all-knowing, all-beauty, most just, most
loving, and all good.
As a living reality God desires intercourse with His creatures and makes
it possible for them to enter into fellowship with Him through prayer,
contemplation, and mystio gnosis, and lights with His light the houses of those
who do not divert from His remembrance, nor from prayer, nor from the prac
tice of regular charity,” His life expresses itself also through His eternal
activity and creativeneas.
God ia one and there is no god but He.” He is the only one” and there
is none like Him.** He is too high to have any partners.11 If there were other
gods besides Him, some of them would have lorded over others." He is the
” Ibid., lix, 24.
>’ Ibid., ii. 255; xl, 65.
” Ibid., lvll, 3.
>• Ibid., ii. 163; v, 75: vi, IS; xvi. 22, 51; xxiii. #1; xxxvii. 1-6; xxxviii. 65-68;
Ivii, 3;cxii, 1-4.
Ibid., ii, 29, 117. 284; iii. 29; vi, 12-13, 65, 73; vii, 54; X. 55; xi, 6-7; xiii.
16-17; xvi, 72-81; xxi. 30-33; xxv, 61-62; xxix, 60-62; xxxii, 5; xlviii, 7; li,
58; liii. 42-54; Ixvii. 2-3; lxxxv, 12-16.
•' Ibid., ii, 284; iii, 5-29; iv, 26; vi. 3. 18. 116; X. 61; xiii, 8-10; xvi. 23; XX,
114; xxi, 4; xxxi, 34; xxxiv, 2; lxiv, 4; Ixvii, 14; xcv, 8.
“ Ibid., vii, 180; xvii, 110; xx, 8.
•* Ibid., iv. 40; V, 45; vii. 29. 167; x. 109; xiii. 6; xvi. 90; xxi. 47; xxiv, 39;
Ivii, 25.
Ibid., iii. 150, 174; iv. 26-28; 45; v. 77; vi. 12. 17. 54. 65-64, 88. 133, 162;
vii. 151. 153; ix. 117-18; x, 21. 32, 67; xii. 64. 92; xiv, 32-34; xv. 49; xvi, 119;
xvii, 20-21; xix, 96; xxi. 83; xxiii, 109, 118; xxix. 60-62; xxxv, 2-3; xxxix, 53; xl.
51; lii, 28; lv, 27; lxxxv, 14; Ixxxvii, 3; xcii, 12; xciii, 6-8; xcvi, 3.
“ Ibid., xvi. 53; xxxi. 26; lix. 23.
•• Ibid., h, 255; xx. 111.
•' Ibid., xxiv. 38.
** Ibid., ii, 163; iii. 18; vi. 19; xvi, 22, 51; xxiii, 91; xxxvii, 4; xl. 2; cxii. 2.
" Ibid., Cxii. 1.
” Ibid., xvi. 51; cxii, 4.
•" Ibid: vi, 22-24, 136-37; xxiii. 92; lix, 23
■’ Ibid: xxiii. 91-92
138
Philosophical Teachings of the Qur'an
One and not one in a trinity. Those who attribute sons and daughters to Him
and those who say Christ is the son of God and is himself God only blaspheme
God.” He has begotten neither sons nor daughters
* 4 nor is He Himself be
**
gotten. And how could He be said to have eons and daughters when He has
no consort And yet the unbelievers have taken besides Him gods that
create nothing, but are themselves created, who have no power to hurt or do
good to themselves and can control neither death, nor life, nor resurrection. ”
Therefore no god should be associated with God." Setting up of gods is nothing
but anthropomorphism. The gods that people set up are nothing but names
**
of conjectures and what their own souls desire. They do blaspheme who say,
"God is Christ the eon of Mary”; for said Christ, "0 children of Israel, wor
ship God my Lord and your Lord."4* They regard the angels as females, as if
they had witnessed their creation.41
God and the World.—God is omnipotent. To Him is due tho primal origin
of everything." It is He, the Creator,4* who began the process of creation"
and adds to creation as He pleases.4* To begin with He created the heavens
and the earth, joined them together aa one unit ol smoky or nebulous sub
stance,4* and thon clove them asunder.•’ The heavens and the earth, as
*
separate existent with all their produoe, were created by Him in six days4*
(six groat epochs of evolution). Serially considered, a divine day signifies a
very long period, say, one thousand years of our reckoning" or even fifty
thousand years." Non-serially considered, His decisions are executed in the
* 1 or even quicker," for there is nothing to oppose His
twinkling of an eye
will. When he says, "Be." behold! it is." His decree is absoluteno one
•• Ibid., v, 75-78.
« Ibid., ii, 1161 vi, 100; x, 68; xix. 35; xxiii. 91: xxxvii, 151. 157.
“ Ibid., cxii, 3.
•• Ibid., vi, 100-01.
*’ Ibid., xxv, 3.
•* Ibid., xvii. 22. 3ft; xxi. 22; xxiii. 117; xxv. 88; xxvi, 213; xxxvii, 35-38;
li. 51; lii, 43.
•> Ibid., liii. 23.
•• Ibid., v, 76.
41 Ibid., xliii, 19.
•• Ibid., x, 4; xxx, 11.
•• Ibid., xovi, 1.
“ Ibid., xxx, 27.
44 Ibid'., xxxv, 1.
•• Ibid., xli, II.
•’ Ibid., xxi, 30.
44 Ibid., vii. 54; x, 3; xxxi. 10; xxxii. 4; Ivii. 4.
“ Ibid., xxii. 47.
44 Ibid., lxx, 4.
41 Ibid., liv, 50.
44 Ibid., xvi. 77.
«• Ibid., vl, 73; xix. 35.
44 Ibid., vi. 34.
139
A History of Muslim Philosophy
can change it.*** He draws the night aa a veil over the day, each seeking the
other in rapid succession. He created the sun, the moon, and the stars, all
governed by the laws ordained by Him ** and under His oommand.*’ Every
creature in the heavens and the earth willingly submits to His laws. ** The
**
sun runs its course for a determined period; so does the moon. The growth
of a seed into a plant bearing flowers and fruit, the constellations in the sky,
the succession of day and night—these and all other things show proportion,
measure, order, and law.*’ He it ia who is the creator, evolver, and restorer
of all forms.*1 Ho it is who sends down water from the sky in due measure,
causes it to soak in the soil, raises to life the land that is dead,
** and then
drains it off with ease.*8
**
God is the Lord of all the worlds, and of all mysteries.
** He has power
over all things,•• and to Him belong all forces of the heavens and the earth.*’
He is the Lord of the Throne of Honour
** and the Throne of Glory Supreme,
**
the Lord of the dawn and all the ways of ascent.’* It is He who spreads out
the earth’1 like a carpet,’1 sends down water from the aky in due measure”
to revive it’* with fruit, corn, and plants,’* and has created pairs of plants,
each separate from the others,’* and pairs of all other things.” He gives the
heavens’ canopy its order and perfection” and night its darkness and splen
dour,” the expanse of the earth its moisture, pastures, and mountains;
**
" /bid., vi. 11S.
•* Ibid., vii. 54; lxxxvii. 2-3.
•’ Ibid., vii, 54; xvi, 12.
•• Ibid., in. 83; xiii, 15.
*• Ibid., xxxvi. 38-39.
•• Ibid., X. 6; xxv, 2; xxxvi, 37-40; liv, 49; Ixvii, 3; lxxx, 19.
Ibid., lix, 24.
•• Ibid., xliii. 11.
•• Ibid., xxiii. 18.
•• Ibid., i, 2.
“ Ibid., xvi. 77.
•• Ibid.. Ivii, 2.
” Ibid., xlviii, 4. 7.
•• Ibid., xxiii, 118; xxxvii, 180; xliii, 82.
•• Ibid., cxiii. 1.
’• Ibid., Ixx, 3.
’■ Ibid., xiii. 3.
” Ibid., XX, 53.
’• Ibid., xliii. 11.
'• Ibid., xxix, S3.
” Ibid., xvi, 10-11; Iv. 10-13.
’* Ibid., XX. 53.
” Ibid., xliii. 12.
'• Ibid., lxxix, 28
” Ibid., lxxix, 29.
•• Ibid., lxxix. 30-33
140
Philosophical Teaching# of the Qur'&n
-l-ringa," streams," and seas;"* ships" and cattle," pearls and coral;"' sun
and shadow;07 wind and rain;"' night and day;" and things we humans do not
know. It is He who gives life to dead land and slakes the thirst of His creatures'*
and causes the trees to grow into orchards full of beauty and delight."
To God belong the dominions of tho heavens and the earth and everything
between them." To Him belong the east and the west. Withersoever you turn,
there is His presence, for He is all-pervading." Neither slumber can seize
Him, nor sleep. His Throne extends over the heavens and the earth, and He
feels no fatigue in guarding and preserving His creatures, for He is the most
high and supreme in glory," exalted in might, and wise."
It is He who gives life and death and has power over all things.
God is not only the creator, but also the cherisher," sustainer," protector,"
helper," guide,1" and reliever of distress and suffering101 of all His creature®,
and is most merciful, most kind, and most forgiving.
God has not created the world for idle sport.1" It is created with a purpose,
for an appointed term,1** and according to a plan, however hidden these may
be from us humans. "God is the best of planners."1" He it is who ordains
laws and grants guidance,1" creates everything and ordains for it a proportion
and measure,1*' and gives it guidance.1" There is not a thing but with Him
are tho treasures of it. but He sends them down in a known measure.100
01 UM., xxxvi. 34.
'• Ibid., lxvii, 30.
" Ibid., xvi, 14; XXV. 63; lv. 24.
•• Ibid., xvi. 14; Iv. 24.
“ Ibid., xvi. 6; xxv, 49; xliii. 12.
" Ibid., lv, 22.
" Ibid., xxv. 46—46.
" Ibid., xxv. 48-60.
■' Ibid., xxv. 47.
" Ibid., xxv, 49.
01 Ibid., xxvii, 60.
" Ibid., ii. 266; iii. 2; xl. 65; xliii. 85.
Ibid., ii, 116; Iv. 17; lxxiii, 9.
•* Ibid., ii, 256,
•• Ibid., iii, 6.
" Ibid: i, 2; vi, 164; x, 32.
01 Ibid., vii, 54; xi, 6: xxvii. 64; xxix, 60; li. 58
" Ibid., ii, 257; iii. 160; lxvi, 2; xciii. 6.
" Ibid., iii. 150; iv. 46; xl. 51.
100 Ibid., vi, 71, 88; xxvi, 63; xcii. 12; xeiii. 7.
101 Ibid., xxvii. 62
>" Ibid., xxi. 16.
Ibid., xlvi. 3.
Ibid., iii. 54.
■“ Ibid., Ixxxvii, 3.
■" Ibid., xxv. 2; liv, 49.
107 Ibid., xx. 60.
■*• Ibid., xv, 21
141
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The world is not without a purpose or a goal; it is throughout teleological
and to thia universal teleology human beings are no exception. To everyone
of them there is a goal1" and that goal is God Himself.*”
God is all knowledge. Ho is the Tnith.*" With Him are the keys of the un
seen, the treasures that none knowB but He.11’ He witnesses all things.11’ for
every single thing iB before His sight in due proportion.11’ Verily, nothing on
tho earth or in the heavens is hidden from Him, not even as much as the
weight of an atom. Neither the smallest nor the greatest of things are but
recordod in a clear record.1” On the earth and in the sea not even a leaf does
fall without His knowledge.11’ Should not He that created everything know
His own handiwork! He is full of wisdom.11’ He understands the finest of
mysteries.11’ Ho knows what enters the earth and what comes forth out ol
it; what comes down from heaven and all that ascends to it.11* He knows
every word spoken.1” No secrets of the heart are hidden from Him,111 for
Ho has full knowledge of all things, open or secret.,n He knows and would
call us to account for what is in our minds, whether wo reveal it or conceal it.1”
Two other attributes of God and onr basic values are always mentioned
together in the Qur’in. These are justice and love, the latter including among
other attributes the attributes of munificence, mercy, and forgiveness.
God is the beat to judge1” and is never unjust,1” He does not deal unjustly
with man; it is man that wrongs his own soul.1" On the Day of Judgment, He
will set up the scales of justioe and even the smallest action will be taken into
account.1” He ia swift in taking acoount,1” and punishes with exemplary punish •
ment.1” He commands people to be just1” and loves those who are just.1’1
>” fiitf.. ii. 148.
’>• Ibid., liii. 42.
111 Ibid., x, 82; xxii, 8; xxiv, 28; xliii. 84.
>“ Ibid., vi. 52.
“• Ibid., x. 61.
“• Ibid., xiii. 8.
“• Ibid., iii. 5; vi, 59; x, 61.
>>• Ibid., vi, 59.
*” Ibid., xliii. 84.
“• Ibid., lxvii, 14.
Ibid., xxxiv. 2; Ivii. 4
Ibid., xxi. 4.
Ibid., lvii. 6; lxiv, 4.
>" Ibid., lix. 22.
■” Ibid., ii. 284; iii, 29; vi. 3; xvi. 23.
Ibid., vi, 57; x. 109.
•” Ibid., iv. 40
•” Ibid., x. 44.
” Ibid., xxi, 47.
*” Ibid., vii, 167; xxiv, 39.
■” Ibid., xli. 43; lix. 4.
■” Ibid., xvi, 90; Ivii. 25.
1,1 Ibid., v, 45.
142
Philosophical Teachings of th« Qur'Sn
For those who refrain from wrong and do what is right there is great re
ward,11* and God suffers no reward to bo lost.*110 111 People's good deeds are in
scribed to their credit so that they may be requited with the best possible
award.1**
Divine punishment is equal to the evil done. It may be lees. for. besides
being moet just, God is most loving, most merciful, and forgiver of all sins,111
but it is never more.11* Such is not. however, the case with His reward. He
ia moet munificent and bountiful and, therefore, multiplies rewards for good
deeds manifold.11’ Those rewards are both of this life and the life hereafter.111
Islam, no less than Christianity, lays emphasis on the basic value of love.
Whenever the Qur'kn speaks of good Christians, it recalls their love and
mercy.1" God ia loving,110 and He exercises His love in creating, sustaining,
nourishing, sheltering, helping, and guiding Hia creatures; in attending to
their needs, in showing them grace, kindness, compassion, mercy, and forgive
ness, when having dona some wrong, they turn to Him for that; and in ex
tending the benefit* of His unlimited bounty to the sinners no less than to
the virtuous.111 It ia. therefore, befitting for man to be overflowing in his love
for Godlu and be thankful to Him for His loving care.11*
God is all good, free from all evil (quddiu).‘u He is also the source of all
good1" and worthy of all praise.111
The Qur'kn usee synonymous words for beauty and goodness (bum wa
khair). The word radiance or light (nir) is also used to signify beauty. God
is the beauty (nur) of the heavens and the earth11’ and His names (attributes)
are also moet beautiful (asma al-buma).lu He is the creator possessed of the
highest excellence.1" He creates all forms and evolves them stage by stage
111 Ibid., iii. 172.
111 Ibid., ix. 120.
111 Ibid., ix. 121.
■“ Ibid., xxxix, S3.
111 Ibid., vi, 160; xxxvii. 39.
>** Ibid., vi, 160.
111 Ibid., iv, 134.
111 Ibid., v. 83; lvii. 27.
110 Ibid., iv. 28. 45; vi. 17, 64. 77. 88, 122; x. 87; xvii. 20. 21; xix, 96; Ixxxvii, 3;
xcii. 12; xciii. 7; xovi, 3.
111 Ibid., iii, 150, 174; iv, 26-27, 45; v,-77; vi, 12. 17. 54, 63-64, 133, 163;
vii. 151; ix. 117-18; x. 21, 32, 57; xii, 64, 92; xiv, 34. 36; xv, 49; xvi, 119: xvii,
20, 21; xxi, 83; xxiii. 109, 118; lii, 28; lv, 27; xcvi. 3.
“• Ibid., ii. 165.
111 Ibid., xvi, 114.
111 Ibid., lix, 23.
Ibid., xvi, 53.
1,1 Ibid., xxxi, 26.
“’ ibid., xxiv, 35.
111 Ibid-. vii. 180; xvii, 110; xx. 8.
1,1 Ibid., xxxvii. 125.
143
A History of Muslim Philosophy
(al-bari al miLfamnr).‘M Everything created by Him is harmonious and of
great beauty.1*1 Notice the beauty of trees and fields and the starry heaven.1**
He is the beet beetower of divine oolour to man1*’ who has been made in the
best of moulds1** and has been given the most beautiful shape.1** How lovable
is the beauty of animals whom you take out for grazing at dawn and bring
home at oventime.1**
Throughout history God has sent messages of great excellence,1*1 and given
the best of explanations in His revealed books.1** Therefore, people must
follow the best revealed book (ahmn al-kMb).'u How beautiful is the story
of Joseph given in the Scripture.1**
God's judgment is of the highest excellence,1*1 and beliof in the Day of
Judgment of extreme beauty. Of great excellence is the speech of the righteous
that call to God,1** for they invite people to Him by beautiful preaching1**
and say only those things which are of supreme excellence.1**
The Qur’an lays the greatest stress on the beauty of action. It exhorts
mankind to do the deeds of high value,1** for God lovee those who do excellent
deeds. It wants men to return greetings with greetings of great excellence1**
and repel evil with what is best,1*1 for in so doing they enhance the excellence
of their own souls.1**
Patience is graceful (sabr-i jamil)1** and so is forgiveness.11® Excellence of
oonduct shall not be wasted.111 Those whose deeds are beautiful shall be given
the highest reward11* in this world and better still in the next.11* They shall
"*• Ibid., lix, 24.
Ibid., xxxii, 7.
Ibid., xxxvii. 6.
'»• Ibid: u, 138.
“• Ibid: xov, 4.
>•* Ibid: xl. 64.
Ibid: xvi. 6-6.
1,1 Ibid., xxxix. 23.
Ibid., xxv, 33.
'*• Ibid., xxxix. 55
Ibid: xii. 3.
••* Ibid: V. S3.
Ibid: xli, 33.
Ibid: xvi. 125.
Ibid: xvii. 53.
••• Ibid.,U, 105; v, 96.
••• Ibid., iv. 86.
Ibid., xxiii. 96.
'•* Ibid: xvii. 7.
Ibid: xii, 18; Ixxiii, 10
"• Ibid., xv. 85,
11 Ibid., xviii. 30.
>’• Ibid: iii. 172; ix. 121. X. 26; xvi. 96-97 xXiV. 36; xxix, 7; xxxix. 35. 70;
xlvi. 10; UH. 31.
Ibid., xvi, 30.
144
Philosophies! Teachings of the Qur'an
be given in paradise the moot beautiful abodes and places for repose,"• and
excellent provisions shall be made for them.”*
God's Relation to Man.—God created man’s spirit out of nothing1’* and
created mankind from this single spirit. He created his mate of the same kind
and from the twain produced mon and women in large numbora."’ From the
point of view of personal history and perhaps also from the point of view of
the evolutionary process, man is created for an appointed term1’* as a being
growing gradually from the earth,"* from an extract of certain elements of
the earth,1’* then by receiving nourishment from the objects of sustenance,1*1
and being endowed with life, like all other living beings,1*1 taking the form
of water1’* or watery clay or adhesive mud1*4 moulded into shape in due pro
portions1** ae a life-germ, a leech-like clot1** of congealed blood,1’’ growing
into a lump of flesh, further developing into bones clothed with flesh, and
finally emerging aa a new creation,1** a human being in two sexes,1" gifted
with hearing and sight, intelligence, and affection,1” destined to become God's
vicegerent on earth,1’1 decreed to die ono day,1" and destined to be raised
again on the Day of Resurrection.1" The form in which he will be raised again
he does not know.1" The whole of mankind is one family, because it is the
progeny of a single pair.1** In reality, man is the highest of all that is created,
for God baa created him in tho most beautiful of moulds.1** He is bom with
the divine spirit breathed into him,1" even as for the Hindu, Greek, and
Christian sages he is made in the image of God. Human perfection, therefore,
consists in being dyed in divine colour1” in the fullest achievement and
*’* IMA, xxv. 24.
"• Ibid., xvi. 96-97; xxv, 75-76.
*’* Ibid., xix. 67.
>” Ibid., iv, 1.
Ibid., vi, 2.
"• Ibid., xxxii, 7; Iv, 14.
•” Ibid., vi. 2; xxii. 5.
1,1 Ibid., xvii. 70; Ixxv. 38-39.
Ibid: xxi. 30.
Ibid: XV. 26.
■•* Ibid: xxxvii. If
>“ Ibid., xv. 26.
Ibid: xcvi, 2.
Ibid.
*•• Ibid., xxiii, 14
>" Ibid., xxxvi, 36; xliii, 12; li. 49.
“• Ibid: xvi, 78.
1,1 Ibid: ii. 30.
*" Ibid., xxiii, 15.
*•• Ibid., xxiii, 16. 115; xxxvi. 79.
*« Ibid.. Ivi, 61.
lf* Ibid., iv. 1; xxxix, 6; xlix. 13
'** Ibid: xcv, 4.
1,1 Ibid., xxxviii. 72.
Ibid., ii. 138.
145
A History of Muslim Thiloeophy
assimilation of divine attributes, for God deaim nothing but the perfection
of His light.“• the perfection of these attributes in man. The sole aim of man,
therefore, is a progressive achievement of all divine attributes—all intrinsic
values. God encompasses10* and cherishes”1 mankind. He is always near
man*"*—nearer than his jugular vein.’"* He is with him wheresoever he may
be and bocs all that he does.*** Whithersoever he turns, there ia the presence
of God, for He is all-pervading.*"" He listens to the prayer of every suppliant
when he calls on Him.’"" <
Soul.—The soul of man is of divine origin, for God has breathed a bit of
His own spirit into him.’"' It is an unfathomable mystery—a command of
God, of the knowledge of which only a little has been communicated to man.*"*
The conscious self or mind is of three degrees. In the first degree it is the
impulsive mind (nafa ammarah) which man shares with animals; in the second
degree it is the conscientious or morally conscious mind (na/s lawwimah)
struggling between good and evil and repenting for the evil done; in the third
degree it is tho mind perfectly in tune with the divine will, the mind in
peace (na/a mutma‘innah).,,,‘
Theory o/ Knowledge.—Man alone has been given the capacity to use names
for things*’’ and so has been given the knowledge which even the angels do
not possess.’10 Among men those who are granted wisdom are indeed granted
great good.’11
Understanding raises a man’s dignity.*1’ Those who do not use the intellect
are like a herd of goats, deaf, dumb, and blind”*—no better than the lowest
of beasts.”* The ideal of the intellect is to know truth from error. As an ideal
or basic value for man wisdom means the knowledge of facta, ideals, and
values.
There are three degrees of knowledge in the ascending scale of certitude:
(i) knowledge by inference (‘ilm alyagin)(ii) knowledge by perception and
■°" Ibid., ix. 32,
*"• Ibid., xli, 64.
101 Ibid., xevi, I.
101 Ibid., ii. 186.
101 Ibid., 1. 18.
Ibid., Ivii. 4.
101 Ibid., ii. US.
••• Ibid., ii, 186.
1,1 Ibid., XV, 29; xxxii, 9; xxxviii, 72.
Ibid., xvii, 85.
Ibid., xu. 63; Ixxv, 2; lxxxix. 27.
Ibid., ii, 31.
Ibid., ii, 32.
111 Ibid., ii. 269.
111 Ibid., xxxix. 9.
“• Ibid., ii. 171.
110 Ibid., viii, 22.
”• Ibid., cii. 5.
146
Philosophical Teachings of the Qur'An
reported perception or observation fain al-yaqin) ,«*• and (iii) knowledge by
personal experience or intuition (Ao?? al-yaqin)'"—tL distinction which may
be exemplified by my oertitude of (1) fire always burns, (2) it has burnt John’s
fingers, and (3) it has burnt my fingers. Likewise, there are three types of
errors: (i) the errors of reasoning, (ii) the errors of observation, and (iii) the
errors of intuition.
The first type of knowledge depends either on the truth of its presupposi
tion as in deduction, or it is only probable aa in induction. There is greater
certitude about our knowledge based on actual exp-.-ence (observation or
experiment) of phenomena
The second type of knowledge is either scientific knowledge based on ex
perience (observation and experiment) or historical knowledge based on reporta
and descriptions of actual experiences. Not all reports are trustworthy. There
fore, special attention should be paid to the character of the reporter. If he
is a man of shady character, his report should be carefully checked.*1’
Scientific knowledge comes from the study of natural phenomena. These
natural phenomena are the signs of God,11* symbols of the Ultimate Reality
or expressions of the Truth, as human behaviour is the expression of the human
mind. Natural laws are the set ways of God in which there is no change.**"
The study of nature, of the heavens and the earth, is enlightening for the
men of understanding.**1 The alternation of day and night enables them to
measure aerial time.*** They can know the ways of God, the Iswb of nature,
by observing all things of varying colours—mountains, rivers, fields of oom,
or other forms of vegetation, gardens of olives, date-palms, grapes, and fruit
of all kinds, though watered with the samo water, yet varying in quality;*11
by studying the birds poised under the sky and thinking how they are so held
up ;*** and likewise by observing the clouds and wondering how they are made.*"
Those who think can know God and can conquer all that is in tho heavens
and the earth :**• night and day, and the sun the moon, and tho stars.*”
Knowledge of the phenomenal world which the senses yield is not an illusion,
but a blessing for which we must be thankful.*”
*■• Ibid., di. 7.
Ibid., Ixix, 61.
“• Ibid., xlix, 6.
Ibid., ii, 164. 219; iii. 190; vi. 95-99; x. 3-6; xiii. 3-4; xvii. 12; xxx, 20-27;
xlv, 3-6.
"■ Ibid., xvii, 77.
1,1 Ibid., iii, 190.
■“ Ibid., iii, 190; xvii, 12.
"• Ibid., xvi, 11, 13-16.
“• Ibid., xxiv, 41; ixvii, 19.
**» Ibid., xxiv, 43
Ibid., xvi. 14; xlv. 13.
*” Il»d„ xvi. 12.
“• Ibid., xvi, 78; xxxii. 9
147
A History of Muslim Philosophy
No less important for individuals and nations is the study of history. There
is a measure and law in human society as much as in the whole cosmos.”’
The life of every nation aa a collective body moves in time and passes through
rises and falls, successes and reverses,’*0 till its appointed period comes to an
end.”1 For every living nation there are lessons in the history of the peoples
that have lived in the past. It should, therefore, study the "days of God.”
the momentous periods of history, the periods of divine favour and punish
ment, the periods of nations’ glory and decline.
*
" People should traverse
the earth to see what had been the end of those who neglected the laws of
nature, the signs of God.’** Those who do not guide others with truth and so
do not act rightly, even though their days are lengthened, are gradually
brought down by Such means as they do not know. ***
God never changes the condition of a people until they change it themselves,
but once He wills it, there can be no turning it back. *
" Therefore, it is all
the more important to take lessons from the past. In the stories about the
past there are instructions for men of understanding.
*** Even the bare outlines
of the rise and fall of nations, of great events of history, and their consequences
provide object lessons for their guidanoo and warning. Let them remember
momentous events of the lives of such peoples and societies as the Israelites,
the Magians,•*■ the Sabians,
* ” the Romans."0 the Christians,"1 the people of
***
Saba, the people of Madyan,"
* of ’Ad,"
* *
of lhamOd," *
of Lot," Companions
of the Cave, tho Seven Sleepers,"’ the Companions of al-Rasa,"’ tho Com-
*” Ibid., xxv, 2; liv, 49.
••• Ibid., iii. 137-39.
’*' Ibid., vii. 34.
Ibid., xiv, 5.
■" Ibid: ill, 137.
■“ Ibid.. vii, 182-83.
•“ Ibid., xiii. 11.
••• Ibid: xii, 111; xiv. 6, 16; xxx. 9; xxxiii. 62; xxxv, 44.
*■’ Ibid: ii. 40-88, 93. 100, 122, 240-51; v. 13-14, 73-74; vii. 138-41. 101-71;
xx, 80-82: xxix, 27; xxxii. 23-25; xi. 53-54; xiv. 16-17.
Ibid., xxii, 17.
■■■ Ibid-.u. 62; v, 72; xxii. 17
>“ Ibid: xxx, 2.
«> Ibid., ii. 138; v. 15. 85-88.
"’ Ibid., xxvii, 22; xxxiv. 15-21.
“• Ibid: vii. 85-93; Xi. 84-96; xxix. 36-37.
•*• Ibid: vii. 65-72; xi. 50-60; xxv, 38; xxvi, 123-40; xxix. 38; xli. 15-16; xlvi.
21-26; li. 41-42; liv. 18-21; lxix. 4-8; Ixxxix. 6-8.
Ibid., vii, 73-79; xi, 61-68; xxv, 38; xxvi. 141-159; xxvii. 45-53; xxix,
38; xli, 17; li, 43-46; liv. 23-31; lxix, 4-5; Ixxxv, 17-20; Ixxxix, 9-14: xci, 11-15.
Ibid: vii, 80-84; xi. 77-83; xv. 57-77: xxi. 74-75; xxvi, 160-75; xxvii.
64-58; xxix. 26. 28-35; xxxvii. 133-38; li, 31-37; liv. 33-39.
Ibid., xviii, 9-22.
Ibid., xxv. 38; 1, 12.
148
Philosophical Teeohinga of tho Qur'&n
paniona of the Rocky Tract.1" and those of the Inscription,"’ and Gog and
Magog;"1 prophets like Noah,111 Abraham,"1 IsmA'Il."1 Isaac,1" Jacob,"1
David,"’ Solomon,"1 Joseph,”1 Moses,1" Aaron,111 Elisha,1" Jonah,111
Jesus;1" and other personages great for their piety, power or wisdom, e.g..
Mary,1" the Queen of Saba,111 Dip: al-Qarnain11’ (probably Cyrus of Iran),
and the Pharaoh111 (Thothmes I of Egypt), and Aesop.1"
So much importance has been given to history that fifteen chapters of the
Qur'an have been given the titles bearing historical significance.”1 Nor in
deed has the study of contemporary history been ignored. The Qur'&n refers
to contemporaneous events such as the battle of Badr.1” the battle of Tabuk,171
the trade and commerce of the Quraijh,171 the hypocrisy of those who were
enemies pretending to have embraced Islam, and the animosity of persons
like abu Lahab and his wife.”1
111 Ibid., xv. 80-84.
"• Ibid., xviii. 9.
”> Ibid., xviii, 94.
“* Ibid., vi, 84; vii, 59-84; x. 71-73: xi, 25-49; xxi. 76-77; xxiii. 23-30; xxv.
37; xxvi, 105-22: xxix. 14-15; xxxvii, 75-82; li. 46; liv. 9-15; lxix. 11-12;
Ixxi, 1-28.
111 ibid., ii. 124-27, 130, 258, 260; iii, 67. 95-97; vi. 74-83; xi. 69-76; xiv,
36-41; xv. 61-56; xvi. 120-23; xix. 41-50; xxi. 51-71; xxvi. 70-87; xxix, 16-18,
23-25; xxxvii, 83-111; li, 24-30; liii, 37; lx. 4-6; Ixxxvii. 19.
•" Ibid., ii. 125-29; vi, 86; xix. 54-55; xxi, 85.
•“ Ibid., vi, 84; xxi, 72; xxxvii. 112-13.
111 Ibid., ii, 132-33; vi. 84; xix. 49; xxi. 72.
Ibid., vi. 84; xxi. 78-80; xxxiv. 10-11; xxxviii. 17-26
“■ Ibid., ii. 102; vi, 84; xxi. 79. 81-82: xxvii. 15-44.
“• Ibid., vi, 84; xii. 4-101.
111 Ibid., ii. 51-61; v. 22-29; vi, 84; vii. 103-62; X. 75-92; xi. 96-99, 110;
xiv, 5-8; xvii, 101-03; xviii, 60-82; xix, 51-53; xx, 9-56, 79-73, 86-98; xxiii,
45-49; xxv. 35-36; xxvi. 10-69; xxvii. 7-14; xxviii. 7-42; xxxvii. 114-22; xl,
23-46; xliii, 46-56: li. 38-40; liii. 36; Ixi, 6; lxxix. 16-26; Ixxxvii. 19.
111 Ibid., vi. 84; xx. 29-36, 90-94.
111 Ibid., vi. 86; xxxviii. 48.
111 Ibid., iv, 163; vi, 86; x. 98; xxxvii. 139-48.
Ibid., ii. 136; iii. 45-47, 49-59; iv, 157-69. 171; v, 19, 20. 49. 75-78,
113-21; vi, 85; ix. 30; xix. 22-36; xliii. 59-61. 63-64; Ivii. 27; Ixi, 6. 14.
111 Ibid., iii. 35-37. 42-51; iv. 166; xix. 16-21; 23-33; xxi. 91; lxvi. 12.
111 Ibid., xxvii. 22-44; xxxiv, 16-21.
111 Ibid., xviii. 83-98.
111 Ibid., ii, 49, 50; vii, 103-37; x. 75-92; xl, 23-37: lxvi. 11; lxix. 9; lxxiii.
15-16; lxxix, 17-26; lxxxv, 17-20; Ixxxix, 10-14.
••• Ibid., xxxi, 12-19.
”• Ibid., iii. x. xii, xiv, xvii. xviii. xix. xxi, xxx. xxxi. xxxiii, xxxiv, xlviii.
Ixxi, cvi.
”■ Ibid., iii. 13.
”• Ibid., ix. 40-42; 43-59. 81-99 120-22
”■ Ibid., lxxxiii, 1-3; cvi, 1-4
”• Ibid., exi. 1-5
A History of Muslim Philosophy
God reveals His signs not only in the experience of the outer world
and its historical vistas, but also through the inner experience of minds
(an/ue). Thus, the inner or personal experience is the third eouroe of know
ledge. Experience from this source gives the highest degree of certitude. Divine
guidance”* comes to His creatures in the first instance from this source. The
forms of knowledge that come through this source are (1) divinely-determined
movement—movement determined by natural causes, as in tho earth,”* and
the heavens,”5 (2) instinct, e.g.. in the bee to build its cell,”* (3) intuition
or knowledge by the heart,*’* (4) inspiration as in the case of Moses' mother
when she cast her tenderly suckled child into the river,and (5) revelation
os in the case of all true prophets,**' God’s messengers.
-Van's Power.—God has subjected for tho use of man, His vicegerent on
the earth,*" everything in tho heavens and the earth—the sun and the moon:
day and night; winds and rain; the rivers and the seas and the ships that sail;
pearls and corals; springs and streams, mountains, moisture, and pastures;
and animals to ride and grain and fruit to eat.*’*
Fne-wiU.—God has given man the will to choose, decide, and resolve to
do good or evil. He has endowed him with reason and various impulses so
that by his own efforts he may strive and explore possibilities. He has also given
him a just bias, a natural bias towards good.*** Besides this He has given him
guidance through revelation and inspiration, and has advised him to return
evil with good,’" to repel it with what ia best fajaan/’** Hence if a man
chooses to do good, it is because in giving him these benefits God has willed
him to do so. He never changes the gracious benefits which He has bestowed
on a people until they change themselves.’” Therefore, whatever good comet
from man or to man is ultimately from God."’ On the other hand, his nature
has a bias against evil, his reason is opposed to it, and he has been given a
warning against it through the revealed books; therefore, whatever evil comes
from him or to him is from his own soul.’" If God had willed He would have
destroyed evil or would not have allowed it to exist, and if it were His will.
”* Ibid., ii. 38.
Ibid.. 1. 7-8; li, 20
*” Ibid., xli, 12.
Ibid., xvi, 88.
Ibid., ii. 97; xxvi, 193-98; xli. 30-31; liii, 10-11.
Ibid., xxviii, 7.
•“ Ibid., iv. 183-84; xiii, 13, etc.
Ibid., xxxi, 20.
Ibid., civ. 32-33; xvi, 12-13; xxi. 81; xxv. 45-63; xxx>, 20; xxxvi, 33-35
71-73; xlv. 12-13; Iv, 22; Ixviii. 34; lxxix, 30-33
Ibid., lxxxii, 7.
■“ Ibid., xiii. 22.
Ibid., xxiii. 98; xli. 34
*•’ Ibid., viii. 53; xiii, 11.
*■• Ibid., iv. 79.
Ibid
150
Philosophical Teachings of the Qur'An
the whole of mankind would have had faith, but that ia not His plan. *** Hie
plan envisages man’s free use of the divine attribute of power or freedom to
choose-1 and take all judicious and precautionary measures to suit different
situations.
"
* In the providential scheme man’s role is not that of a blind,
deaf, dumb and driven herd of goats."
* So even his free choice of evil is a
part of tho scheme of things and no one will choose a way unto God, unless it
fits into that scheme or is willed by God.
*"
There is no compulsion in faith. God’s guidance ia open to all who have
*
the will to profit by it." Whosoever wills, let him take the straight path to
*
his Lord." Truth ia from God, then whosoever wills, let him believe it; and
whosoever wills, let him reject it."7 The prophets are sent to every nation"6
for guiding the whole of mankind. Their duty is to preach, guide, and inspire
by persuasion and not to drive or force people to anything, nor to watch over
their doings or dispose of their affairs.
*
" They cannot compel mankind against
their will to believe.’”
Death.—Death of the body has been decreed by God to be the common
*
lot of mankind.
" Wherever a man is, death will overtake him even if he
is in a tower strong and high.’" No soul can die exoept by God’s leave, the
term being fixed as if by writing,’*’ but every soul shall be given a taste of
death’" and in the end brought back to God’" and duly judged on the Day
of Judgment, and only he who is saved from fire will be admitted to paradise;
it ia then that he will have attained the goal of his life. As compared to that
life, tho life of this world is only a life of vainglory.’’6
Life after Death.—There are some who think revival after death is far from
their understanding’" and ask how they shall be raised up after they have
been reduced to bones and dust.’” Let them recall to mind that they were
••• Ibid., vi. 107.
"■ Ibid., vi. 104; xviii. 20; lxxvi. 29.
’" Ibid., iv, 71.
«’ Ibid., ii. 171; vii. 179.
■" Ibid., lxxvi. 30; Ixxxi. 29
Ibid.. Ixxxi. 29.
Ibid., lxxvi. 29.
Ibid., xviii. 29.
Ibid., x. 47; xiii. 13
•“ Ibid., vi. 107.
Ibid., x. 99.
Ibid., lvi, 60.
•" Ibid., iv, 78.
Ibid., iii. 145.
Ibid., iii, 145; XXI. 35
>“ Ibid., xxix, 57.
Ibid., iii. 185
•" Ibid.. 1. 3.
Ibid., xvi. 38; xvii, 49; xix. 66-72; xxu. >>. xlvi. 33: I. 20-22, 41-44; Ixxv,
1-15; Ixxix, 6-12; Ixxxvi. 5-8.
151
A History of Muslim Philosophy
created out of nothing, first aa duat, then a sperm, then a loech-liko clot, then
a piece of flesh, partly formed and partly unformed, kept in a womb for an
appointed term, then brought out as babea and then fostered so that they
reached an age of full strength; and further, let them ponder over the fact
that the earth is first barren and lifeless but when God pours down rain, it
is stirred to life, it swells, and puts forth every kind of beautiful growth in
pairs.”8 Let them understand that He who created the heavens and the earth
is able to give life to the dead, for He has power over all things.’10
God created man from the earth, into it shall he return and from it shall
he be brought out again.’11 For everyone after death there shall be an interval
(Barzatb) lasting till the Day of Resurrection.”* On that day all the dead
shall be raised up again.”’ Even as God produced the firat creation, so shall
He produce this now one,’1* Wo do not know in what form wo shall be
raised,’1* but as a parable”* the Qur'in describee the Day of Resurrection aa
follows:
On that day there shall l>e a dreadful commotion.’1’ The heaven shall be
rent asunder’18 and molted like molten brass.810 The sun folded up and the
moon darkened shall be joined together,”0 and tho stars shall fall, losing their
lustre.”1 In terrible repeated convulsions,’" the earth shall be shaken to its
depths and pounded into powder.’” The mountains shall crumble to atoms
flying hither and thither’” like wool,"* the oceans shall boil over, there shall
be a deafening noise, and the graves shall be turned upside down.”8
A trumpet shall be blown."7 no more than a single mighty blast,”8 and there
shall come forth every individual soul’” and rush forth to the Lord’”—the
— Ibid., xxii, 5.
”° Ibid., xlvi, 33,
•" Ibid., xx. M.
”’ Ibid., xxiii, 100.
•” Ibid., xvi, 38-39.
•*• Ibid., xxi. 104.
Ibid.. Ivi. 81.
”• Ibid., xxx, 27. 58.
Ibid., Ixxix. 6-9.
”’ Ibid., xxv, 25; Ixxiii, 18.
’>• Ibid., lax. 8.
“• Ibid., lxxv. 7-9; lxxxi. I.
”* Ibid., Ixxxi, 2.
“• Ibid., xeix. 1.
"• Ibid., Ixxxix, 21.
"• Ibid., xxvii. 88; lii. 9-10; lvi, 4-6; Ixxvii 10.
•“ Ibid., Ixx, 9.
”• Ibid., Ixxxii, 4; xeix. 2.
Ibid., xx, 102; xxvii, 87; 1. 20
■■* Ibid., xxxvi. 29
Ibid., xxxi, 28.
Ibid., xxxvi,
152
Philosophical Teachings of the Qur'&n
sinnera as blackened.1,1 blinded.”’ terror-smitten111 with eyes oast down
***
and hearts oome right up to their throats to choke,”* and the virtuous, happy
and rejoicing.”* Then all except such as it will please God to exempt shall
fall into a swoon.”’ Then a second trumpet shall bo sounded, when, behold!
they will all be standing and looking on The earth will shine with the glory
of the Lord and the record of deeds shall be opened.”*
All shall fully remember their past deeds.’” Anyone who will have done
an atom of good shall see it and anyono who will have done an atom of evil
shall see it.”* They shall also recognize one another,”1 though each will havo
too much concern of his own to be able to be of help to others.”* They will
have neither a protector, nor an intercessor except God”’ or those whom
permission ia granted by Him and whose word is acceptable to Him.”* They
shall all now meet their Lord.”* The scale of justice shall be set up. and not
a soul shall be dealt with unjustly in the least; and if there be no more than
the weight of a mustard seed, it will be brought to account,”* and all shall
be repaid for their past deeds.”’ There will be a sorting out of the sinners
and the righteous.”* The sinners will meet a grievous penalty but it shall
not be more than the retribution of the evil they will have wrought.”* All in
proportion to their respective deeds and for a period longer and shorter shall
go through a state of pain and remorse,"” designated in the Qur’&n as hell,
and the righteous saved from hell shall enter a state of perpetual peace, de
signated as paradise. Paradise has been described in the Qur'&n by similitude’*1
in terms of what averago human beings value most: dignity, honour, virtue,
beauty, luxury, sensuous pleasures, and social discourse—and hell in terms
of what they all detest.
*** Ibid.. lxxx, 40-41.
•" Ibid., xx. 102. 124.
**■ Ibid., xxi. 97; xxvii. 87.
*” Ibid., Ixxix. 9.
*•* Ibid., xl. 18.
■** Ibid.. Ixxx. 38-39.
*" Ibid., xxxix. 08.
”• Ibid., xxxix. 69.
*•• Ibid., vi. 28; lxxxix. 23.
*•• Ibid., xeix. 8-8.
“* Ibid., x. 45.
*** Ibid.. Ixxx. 37.
*•* Ibid., vi. 81.
“« Ibid., xx. 109.
”* Ibid., xix, 95.
“• Ibid., xxi, 47.
«’ Ibid., xxxvi. 54.
“• Ibid., xxxvii, 21; Ixxvii. 13-14.
”* Ibid., xxxvii. 38 39.
*•• Ibid., xix. 71-72.
“■ Ibid., xiii. 33; xlvii. 18.
153
A History of Muslim Philosophy
People shall be sorted out into three classes."• (1) Those who will be fore
most mid nearest to God, with whom God is well-pleased and who are well-
pleased with God. They shall have no fear, no grief, no toil, no fatigue, no
sense of injury,"1 no vanity, and no untruth."* They shall enjoy honour and
dignity, and, dressed in fine silks and brocade and sdomed with bracelets of
gold and pearls, •“ shall live for ever in carpeted places. They will recline on
thrones encrusted with gold and jewels facing one another for discourse. They
will be served by youths of perpetual freshness, handsome as pearls,"1 with
goblets, beakers, and cups filled out of clear fountains of crystal white and
delicious drinks free from intoxication and after-aches, which they will ex
change with one another free of frivolity and evil taint."’ They shall be given
fruit and flesh of their own choice in dishes of gold to eat. and shall get more
than all they desire."1 Their fares shall be beaming with the brightness of
bliss."1 They shall have as companions chaste women, their wives,310 beautiful
like pearls and corals.111 Those who believe and whose families follow them
in faith, to them God shall join their families, their ancestors, their spouses,
and their offsprings.111 Rest, satisfaction, and peace will reign all round. This
will be their great salvation;111 but their greatest reward, their supreme feli
city, will consist in being in the presence of God?"
(2) Companions of the right hand who shall have their abode in another
garden. They will ait on thrones on high in the midst of trees, having flowers,
pile upon pile, in cool, long-extending shades by the side of constantly flowing
water. They will recline on rich cushions and carpets of beauty,1" and so
will their pretty and chaste companions,111 belonging to a special creation,
pure and undcfilcd. They will greet one another with peace. They will also
have all kinds of fruits, the supply of which will not be limited to seasons.11’
These are parables of what the righteous shall receive.111
(3) Companions of the left hand who shall be in the midst of a fierce blast
"• 1M„ Ivi, 7-66.
Ibid., vii, 43; XXXV. 33-33; Ixv. 46-48.
“• IM., Ixxviii. 36.
"• IM., xviii, 31; xxii. 23.
1,1 IM., lit. 24.
Ibid., xix, 61-63; lii, 23.
“• IM.. xlii, 22; 1. 33.
“• Ibid., lxxxiii. 24.
111 IM., xliii. 70.
111 IM.. Iv. 36 58.
111 Ibid.. xiii, 23.
111 IM.. v. 122
■•* Ibid.. 1. 35; liv, 35.
•" Ibid.. Iv, 54.
111 Ibul.. Iv, 70-77.
111 Ibid., v. 122; lx. 20-21. 72; xv. 43-48; xxxvii. 40-49; xxxix. 20; lii, 17-24;
Iv. 46-78; Ivi, 10-39. 88-91
111 Ibid., xlvii, 15.
154
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'An
of fire with distorted faces and roasted skin, neither alive nor dead,5**8 under
the shadows of black smoke. They shall have only boiling and fetid water to
drink"* and distasteful plants (truffim) to eat."1 Nothing shall be there to
refresh or to please.
The fire of hell shall, however, touch nobody except those most unfortunate
ones who give the lie to truth.571
But for these similitudes, we cannot conceive the eternal bliss and per.
petual peace that awaits tho righteous in the life hereafter,5” nor can we
oonceive the agony which the unrighteous will go through. They will, however,
remain in their respective states only so long as it is the will of God and is
in accordance with His plans."*
Neither is the bliss of paradise tho final stage for the righteous, nor is the
agony of hell the final stage for the unrighteous. Just aa we experience the
glowing sunset, then evening, and then the full moon at night one after
another, even so shall everyone progress whether in paradise or in hell stage
by stage towards his Lord, and thus shall be redeemed in the end."1
JMd, xx, 74.
"• Ibid., xiv, IB-17.
5,1 Ibid., xliv, 43.
Ibid., xcii, 15-16.
515 Ibid., xxxii, 17.
Ibid., xix. 71.
"* Ibid., Ixxxiv, 6, 18-19.
Chapter VIII
ETHICAL TEACHINGS OF THE QUR’AN
A
VALUES
Aa it has been explained in the preceding chapter, the real goal of man,
according to the Qur'An, is the assimilation of divine attributes. These attri
butes, as also shown in the same chapter, can be summarised as life, eternity,
unity, power, truth, beauty, justice, love, and goodness.
Lift.—God is the living one Himself1 and gives life to othere.5 The moral
laws enundatod in the Qur’An are life-giving and lifo-enriching8 and. therefore,
by living in this world in accordance with these laws man is able to realize
one of God's attributes. If anyone saved a life, it would be as if he saved the
1 Qur'An. ii. 255; xl, 65.
5 Ibid., ii, 260; iii. 158; vii. 158; ix, 118; X. 56; xl, 68.
8 Ibid., viii, 24; xvi, 97.
155
A History of Muslim Philosophy
life of the whole people.4 On the social plane, the importance of life on this
earth is duly emphasized. The ideal of the Qur'in is to develop a healthy
social organization which traverses the middle path of rectitude avoiding all
forms of extreme.4 People are to partake of the good things of the world4 and
wear beautiful apparel, to eat and drink without going to excess,’ and for
this reason monasticism which implies denial of life on this earth is condemned
as being incompatible with human nature.4 Man is advised not to forget his
portion in tho life of this world,’ Wealth and property are good things to be
enjoyed and appreciated and are blessings of God14 which make life smooth
and comfortable.11
The life of the present world is no doubt significant and purposive,14 but
■V purposes are directed towards the good of future life, for the real abode of
life is in the hereafter.14 God created life and death to test which of the people
are best in point of deed.14 The present world is a place of sojourn and a plaoo
of departure;14 its enjoyments are short14 and comforts are few.” while as
compared with these the life in the hereafter is better and more enduring.14
It is best for the righteous14 and will last for ever.40 The present life and the
future life, however, are to be viewed as a unity, for man’s creation here and
his resurrection later on are events related to an individual soul." In fact,
life on this earth is a preparation for the life hereafter.” The good works
that we do here in this life will run before us to illumine our path in the here
after44 where we shall have full opportunity to develop our spiritual light to
ever greater perfection.44
Eternity.—This attribute in its fullness is exclusively God’s and man is
created within time for a stated term;** yet he has within himself a deep
• Ibid., v. 35.
4 Ibid., ii. 143.
4 Ibid., vii, 32.
I Ibid., vii. 31.
4 Ibid.. Ivii. 27.
4 Ibid., xxviii. 77.
14 ibid., xvii, e.
II Ibid., lxxiv, 14.
14 Ibid., iii. 191; x. 5; xv. 83; xxi. 16
14 Ibid., xxix. 64.
14 Ibid., lxvii. 2.
14 Ibid., vi, 98.
14 Ibid., iv. 77.
14 Ibid., ix, 38.
14 Ibid., Ixxxvii. 17.
14 Ibid., iv, 77.
44 Ibid., v. 122; xviii, 31; xix. 61-63; xxxv. 33-35; xxxviii. 49-52; xliii. 68-73.
41 Ibid., xxxi, 28.
44 Ibid., lxvii, 2.
44 Ibid., vii. 12.
14 Ibid., lxvi, 8.
44 Ibid., vi. 2.
156
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'An
craving for eternity and for a kingdom that never fails or ends 34 Though
finite and temporal, man does not and cannot rest content with that, 'file
way is open for the finite and temporal man to attain life everlasting.”
Unity.—The greatest emphasis in the Qur'An is on the unity of God which
implies belief in the divine causality and the presence of moral order in the
universe where people are judged according to the merit of their deeds” and
not arbitrarily.” Thia moral order works without any favour not only in the
case of individuals but also in the case of societies and peoples.34*God has
entered into covenant with men within the limits of this moral order—with
men as such and not with particular nations or races.”
Unity, as one of the ideals of man, implies unity in the internal life of man,
a co-ordination of reason, will, and action. It requires complete control of
one’s passions and lust. It also stands for the unity of profession and practice.
Faith in God is the necessary prerequisite of moral life, but it should not lie
mere verbal acceptance;" it must be accompanied by good deeds,” implying
an attitude of mind which is motivated by a complete submission to God’s
will.” Poets generally say what they do not practise,” and hypocrites say
with their tongues what is not in their hearts,34*but all believing men and
women are truthful in their words and deeds."
Externally, the ideal of unity demands that men should develop a healthy
social organisation which traverses the middle path of rectitude avoiding all
forms of extreme." The righteous are advised to get together and strive, so
that tumult, oppression, and mischief are removed from the face of the earth "
This ideal of unity also implies peace and harmony among members of a
family. A woman is a mate for man so that both may dwell in tranquillity with
an attitude of mutual love and kindness ;*• each is like a garment for the other41*
for mutual support, mutual oomfort, and mutual protection. It ia tho duty
of man to live with woman on a footing of kindness and equity.43 Unity also
implies that members of a national or ideological group should develop ties
34 Ibid., xx. 120.
" Ibid., xxii, 23; xxxix, 73-73; lvii, 12; xeviii, 8.
44 Ibid., xeix, 7-8.
“ Ibid., vih. 63.
44 Ibid.. V. 20.
44 Ibid., iii. 81, 187; v. 8, 13. IS; vii. 172.
44 Ibid., v. 44.
44 Ibid., vii. 42; x. 4; xiii. 29.
“ Ibid., ii. 131; ix. 112.
“ Ibid., xxvi, 224-26.
44 Ibid., iii. 167; iv. 81; xlvii. 11
44 Ibid., ix, 1 IB
44 Ibid., ii, 143.
44 Ibid., viii. 73.
44 Ibid., xxx, 21.
41 Ibid., ii. 187.
•• Ibid., iv. IB.
157
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of intimate relationship among themselves so that the ideal of an Organic
whole may be realized in a broader context. The Qur’in says that all Muslims
are brethem
* ’ and have great love and affection among themselves." No
excuse should he allowed to stand in the way of doing good or making peace
between different persons." Every effort should be made to tiring about con
ciliation between men." yet we should co-operate in righteousness and piety,
not in sin and rancour.
* ’ We should be kind to those in need, to neighbours,
and to the wayfarers.••
This attitude of kindness and fairness is to be maintained and upheld even
in the case of enemies and opponents." We should try to forgive those who
plot against us and overlook their deeds." cover evil with pardon,
* 1 and turn
*
off evil with good. 1
This attitude of toleration is to be cultivated in our relation to people of
other faiths The Our'an aims at establishing a peaceful social atmosphere
where people belonging to other faiths can enjoy freedom of conscience and
*
worship ’ for which purpose the believers are urged to rise and fight against
the oppressors so that monasteries, churches, synagogues, and mosques in which
the name of God is commemorated in abundant measure may not be pulled
down." it unreservedly praises some of the people of tho Book for their faith.”
It is as a consequence of this attitude of tolerance that according to the
Qur'an all those who believe in God and the Last Kay and practise right
eousness, whether they are Muslims, Jews, Cliristians, or Sabaeans, shall get
their reward from their Jairrl." The Qur’iin gives an open invitation to tho
people of the Book to rune together and work conjointly for the establishment
of peace and social harmony based on the idea of tho unity of God.
* ’
Above all, this ideal of unity leads to the conception of unity of the whole
of humanity. Mankind was created from a single pair of a male and a female"
and from a single breath of life.” All people are equal members of the human
" Ibid., xlix. 10.
" Ibid., xlviii, 29.
« Ibid., ii. 224.
•• Ibid., iv, 114
•’ IM, v. 3.
•• Ibid., ii, 83. 177, 215; iv, 3«; xvii. 26.
•• Ibid., v. 3. 9, 45.
•• /bid., V. 14.
’• Ibid., iv. 149.
*• /bid., xiii, 22; xxviii, 54.
” IM.. ii. 256.
" Ibid., xxii, 40.
“ Ibid., iii. HO.
" Ibid., ii. 62; V, 72.
•’ Ibid., iii. 64.
“ Ibid., ii, 213; iv, 1; vi. 98. x, 19; xxxix. 6; xlix. 13.
” Ibid., iv. 1; xxxix. 6.
158
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'An
community;" the only distinction recognised by the Qur'an is bawd on the
degree of righteousness possessed by people."
Power.—Power as a human ideal implies that man has tho potentiality ol
assuming responsibility undertaken by him of his own accord •* God breathed
llis Spirit into him" and, therefore, mado him His vicegerent on the rarth."
Even-thing in the universe was created subservient to him"—even tho angels
were ordered to bow down to him." He was given a position of great honour
in the universe and was elevated far above most of God's creation,*’ Ho h.i-
all the faculties that are necessary for his physical and spiritual development
and can pass beyond the limits of the heavens and the earth with the power
given to him by God.” He is given the power to distinguish between good
and evil" and, therefore, he alone ia responsible for what he docs.” lie is
endowed with freedom of action, but his freedom ia limited by the free
causality of God.’1 Hia responsibility is proportionate to his powers;” he has
been shown the path of righteousness and it is up to him to accept its lead
or reject it.’*
Being created after the pattern of God’s nature’* man is capable of develop
ing from one stage to the next higher stage.’* But this development involves
struggle against the immoral forces of the external world which he ib able to
meet successfully with the co-operation and help of God.’* This effort of man
is, however, viewed not in any exclusive spirit of otherworldliness ” It is the
primary duty of the believers to participate actively in the struggle for the
establishment of a social order based on peace, harmony, and justice’* in which
•• Ibid., iii. 195.
" Ibid., xvi, 132; xlix, 13. In this respect the Oration delivered by tho Holy
Prophet during hia Farewell Pilgrimage ia illuminating. Hu said: O People I your
Lord ia One and your father (i, e.. Adam) ia one; you are all aa eons of Adam brothers.
There ir no superiority for an Arab over a non-Arab and for a non-Arab over an
Arab, nor for a red-coloured over a black-coloured and for a black-skinned over a
rod-akinnod except in piety. The noblest ia he who ia the meet pious.
•• Ibid., xxxiii, 72.
•• Ibid., xv. 29; xxxviii, 72.
•• Ibid., ii. 30.
“ Ibid., xiv. 32-33; xxxi. 20.
” Ibid., ii, 34.
•' Ibid., xvii, 70.
•• Ibid., xvi. 78; xxxii, 9; Iv, 33; Ixvii, 23; Ixxvi, 2-3; xo, 8-9.
•• Ibid., xv. 10; Ixxvi, 3.
’• Ibid., vi. 164.
n Ibid., Ixxiv, 55-56; Ixxxi, 28-29.
’> ffcuf.. ii. 286.
’• Ibid., Ixxvi. 3.
’« Ibid., xxx. 30.
'• Ibid.. Ixxxiv, 19.
’• Ibid., xl, 61; xlvii. 7.
” Ibid., Ivii, 24.
'■ Ibid., ii. 193; lii, 104. 110; xiii. 21; xxii. 41.
159
A History of Muslim Philosophy
everybody is equal before file law. and people in authority work out their
policies after ascertaining the views of the people.™
In this endeavour to realize the moral law in his individual and social life,
man has often to contend against evil forces represented in the person of
Satan.” But it. is within his power to resist and overcome them?1 Though
man is always prone to weakness and susceptible to seduction by tho forces
of evil, yet his weakness is rectifiable under the guidance of revelation?’ and
such men as follow the law of righteousness shall be immuno from these
lapses?’ They shall never be afraid of anything" or bo cowardly in their
behaviour."
The ideal of power demands that in order to establish a State on the basis
of peace, freedom of thought, worship, belief, and expression, the morally-
orientated individuals will have to Btrive hard. Jihad or utmost striving’’
with might and main.” with wealth and their person,” as they ought to
strive,” becomes their foremost duty so that tumult, oppression, and mischief
should be totally eliminated from the world” and there should be left no
possibility for the aggressors to kindle the fire of war?* to hinder men from
the path of God,” and to oppress people for professing a faith different from
their own.”
This struggle against the forces of evil and oppression demands that its
participants must be characterized by perseverance, courage, fearlessness,
and trust in God—tho moral qualities which are described by the Qur’tn as
characteristic of the righteous in the social context,” Those who patiently per
severe in the path of righteousness will be in possession of a determining factor
in all the affairs of thia life” and will be above trivial weaknesaes.” Those
who arc firm and steadfast will never lose heart, nor weaken in will, nor pve
in before the enemy.” A small band of steadfastly persevering people often
T» Ibid., xiii. 38.
•• Ibid., xv. 36-40.
•1 Ibid., xvi. 90.
Ibid., ii. 38.
M Ibid., xvi, 00.
•« Ibid., iii, 1-75.
•t Ibid., iii. 122.
•• Ibid., viii. 74-75.
Ibid., v. 38.
■■ Ibid., ix. 20. 31. 88.
•» Ibid., xxii. 78.
•• Ibid., viii. 73
•1 Ibid., v. 67.
tt Ibid., xvi. 88.
■■ Ibid., ii. 190-93.
M Ibid., xi, 115; xvi. 127; xl. 55; xlvi. 35; 1. 39; Ixxiii, 10.
M Ibid., iii, 188.
Ibid., xi, 10-11.
n Ibid., iii. 146.
160
Ethical Teachings of tlm Qur'in
vanquish a big force?’ Similarly, trust in God is the moral quality of all be
lievers.” This quality does not involve any negation of planning in advance
as is evident from the attitude of Jacob while advising his sons who were
going to Egypt.10* After you have taken all possibilities into consideration and
taken a deciBion, put your trust in God.101
Truth or WMoni.—Wisdom as a human ideal stands for man’s search for
knowledge or truth. It is something which is distinguished from conjecture or
imperfect knowledge101 and moro fancy.101 Different stories are related in the
Qur'in.1” several similitudes100 and signs pointing to reality are detoiled1”
and explained,10’ so that people may reflect and ponder over things. It is the
characteristic of the righteous that they not only celebrate the praises of God,
standing, sitting, and lying down on their aides, but also contemplate and
ponder over the different phenomena of nature.10’ The people are, therefore,
advised repeatedly to look at and observe the phenomena of nature, pondering
over everything in creation to arrive at the truth.1*
None can grasp the message of revelation except men of understanding and
those firmly grounded in knowledge.110 Lack of trne knowledge loads people
to revile the true God,111 invent lies against Him, and worship other gods
besides Him,111 The only safety lies in following the revelation which is replete
with the knowledge of God.111 Whosoever has been given knowledge has indeed
been given abundant good.114 Those who dispute wrongly about God are the
ones who are without knowledge, without guidance, and without a book of
enlightenment.11’ Only those people will be promoted to suitable ranks and
degrees who have faith and are possessed of knowledge,114 and only those who
have knowledge really fear God and tread the path of righteousness.11’
When Solomon asked the people of his Court who would bo able to bring
•• Ibid., ii. 249.
“ Ibid., viii, 2; ix, 61; xiv, II
144 Ibid., xxii, 67- 68.
141 Ibid., iii. 169.
144 Ibid., iv. 167; vi. 116. 148; x. 36; liii. 28.
Ibid.. X. 36. 66.
Ibid., vii, 176
144 Ibid: hX, 21.
■” Ibid., vi, 98.
■«’ Ibid., X. 24.
144 Ibid., iii. 191
Ibid: Xii. 185.
114 Ibid: iii, 7. 18; vi. 106; xxii, 54. xxxiv. 6
111 Ibid: vi, 108.
114 Ibid., xxii, 71
114 Ibid., xi. 14
114 Ibid., ii, 269
114 Ibid., xxii, 8; xxxi. 20
114 Ibid., Iviii. 11.
Ibid., xxxv, 28
161
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the throne of the Queen of Sheba, it was only the one possessed of knowledge
who offered himself to bring it and later actually did bring it.1”
The Qur'an advises the Holy Prophet to pray for advance in knowledge.11’
The mysterious teacher of Moses who tried to help him have a glimpse of tho
working of the unseen hail knowledge proceeding from God, i.e., ‘Urn al-
ladtmni.,m Saul (Jalut) was appointed king of the Israelities because he was
gifted by God abundantly with knowledge and bodily prowess,1’1 Noah.
David, and Solomon possessed knowledge1*1 and judgment,1” Jacob had a lot
of knowledge and experience;1" Joseph possessed abundant power and know
ledge,1” and so also waa Moses given wisdom and knowledge.1” It waa through
knowledge and reflection on tho phenomena of nature, the heavon and the
earth, that Abraham was able to arrive at the ultimate truth.1” It was through
his personal experience and knowledge that Joseph refused to follow the path
of the unbelievers and adopted the path of Abraham.1”
Ju-dic*.—Justice is a divine attribute and tho Qur'&n emphasizes that we
should adopt it as a moral ideal. God commands people to bo just towards
one another1" ami. in judging between man ami man. to judge justly,1" for He
lovee those who judge equitably.1’1 All believers stand firmly for justioe even
if it goes against themselves, their parents, their kith Bnd kin, without any
distinction of rich and poor.”* God’s Revelation itself is an embodiment
of truth and justice;1” it is revealed with the Balance (of right and wrong)
ao that people may stand forth for justice.1" The value of justice is absolute
and morally binding and tho believers are. therefore, warned that they should
not let the hatred of somo people lead them to transgress the limits of justice1"
or make them depart, from the ideal of just ice, for justice is very near to piety
and righteousness. ”•
Justico demands that jssiple should lie true in word and deed,1” faithfully
•” Ibid., xxvii. 40.
••• Ibid., xx. 114.
Ibid., xviii. OS.
1,1 Ibid., ii, 247.
Ibid., xxviii. 14.
111 Ibid., xxi, 711.
'« Ibid., xii. <m.
lbid.xii.il
Ibid., xxviii. 14.
"" Ibid., vi, 75-79.
Ibid., xii. 37-39.
Ibid., vii, 29; xvi. 90; xlu. 15.
Ibid . iv. 59.
111 Ibid , v, 45.
1,1 Ibid., iv. 135.
■“ Ibid., vi. 115.
Ibid.. Ivii, 25.
■" Ibid., v, 3,
■” Ibid., v. 9.
>” Ibid., iii, 17
162
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'an
observe the contracts which they have made'** and fulfil all obligations,1"
When Muslims enter into treaties with people of other faiths, they must fulfil
their engagements to the end and be true to them, for that is the demand of
righteousness.1" They are also advised to establish the system of weights with
justice and not to skimp in the balance"1 and cause thereby a loss to others
by fraud, and unjustly withhold from others what is due to them,"1 for that
would lead to the spread of ovil and mischief on the earth."11
Lmx.—Love as a human ideal demands that man should love God as the
complete embodiment of all moral values above everything else."* It. demands
that man should be kind and loving to parents,1" especially to the mother who
bore him in pain and gave birth to him in travail."1 This obligation of loving
kindness is further broadened to include kindred, orphans, those in need,
neighbours who are near and neighbours who are strangers, and the wayfarers,"’
Righteousness is to Bpend a part of our substance out of love for God, for kin,
for orphans, for tho needy, for tho wayfarer,1" and for tho indigent,"8 The
Holy Prophet who is a mercy to believers"’ and mercy to all creatures"1
always dealt gently with people."8 Moses was advised by God to speak to
Pharaoh mildly and gently."8 ft is one of the characteristics of the believers
that they are compassionate and loving to one another;1" they walk on tho
earth in humility, and hold to forgiveness;1" they arc friendly to others,"8
and forgive and overlook their faults,18’ even though they arc in anger."8
Goodness.—Goodness is an attribute of God1" and, therefore, it becomes
the duty of every person to obey his own impulse to good.*181188 Ho should do
188 Ibid., ii. 177; xxiii. 8; ixv, 32.
188 Ibid., v, 1.
188 Ibid., ix, 4, 7.
888 Ibid., vi. 1S2; Iv. 9.
Ibid., xxvi, 181-83.
“■ Ibid., xi. 85.
188 Ibid., ii, 185,
188 Ibid., vi. 151; xxix. 8.
188 Ibwl., xxi. 14; xlvi. 15.
Ibid., ii. 83. 215; iv, 36; xvii. 26.
188 Ibid., ii. 177.
888 Ibid., XC. 16.
188 Ibid: ix. 61.
181 ibid., xxi, 107.
188 Ibid., iii, 159.
188 Ibid: xx, 44.
188 Ibid., xlviii, 29.
188 ibid., vii, 199.
888 Ibid: ii. 28; iv, 144; V. 60.
«’ Ibid., ii. 109.
188 Ibid., xlii. 37.
188 Ibid: xvi, 53; lix, 23.
188 Ibid., ii, 158.
163
A History of Muslim Philosophy
good as God has been good to all'*1 and love those who do good.1*8 Believers
hasten in every good work.1*1 As all prophets were quick in emulating good
works,1,4 so all people are advised to strive together (as in a race) towards
all that ia good1*1' and virtuous.1** Truly did Solomon love the love of good
with a view to glorifying the Lord.1*’ All good things are for the believers;1**
goodly reward in the hereafter1*’ and highest grace of God awaits those who
are foremost in good deeds.1” Believers are advised to repel evil with what is
better, for thereby enmity will change into warm friendship.1’1
Beauty,—God possesses most beautiful names1’8 and highest excellence,1”
and creates everything of great beauty.1’1 Man is created in the best of moulds1”
and is given a most beautiful shape1”
God has revealed the most beautiful message in the form of a book1” and
given the best of explanations in the revealed books.1'* We are, therefore,
advised to follow the beat of revelations from God.1” The Qur'An relates most
beautiful stories.1** The association of believers, prophets, sincere lovers of
truth, witnesses (to the truths of religion in word and deed), and the righteous
is a beautiful fellowship.1*1
Who is better in speech than those who invite people to the ways of the
good with wisdom and beautiful preaching and argue with them in ways that
arc best and most gracious188 and say only those things that are of supreme
excellence !”* The Qur'an exhorts people to adopt ways of the highest value,
for God loves those who perform deeds of excellence,,M good-will, and con
ciliation. ■** It advises people to return greetings with greetings of greater
>•> ZW.. xxviii, 77.
••• Ibid., ii. 195.
••• Ibid., iii, 114; xxiii. Bl.
Ibrd., xxi. 90.
Ibid., ii, 148.
Ibid., v. Bl.
>•’ Ibid., xxxviii. 32
Ibid., ix. 88.
Ibid., xviii. 2.
”• Ibid., xxxv. 32.
1,1 find., xli. 34.
Ibid., vii. 180; xvii. 110; XX. 8
1.8 Ibid., xxxvii. 125.
■’* Ibid., xxxii. 7.
•” Ibid., xev. 4.
Ibid.. Ixiv. 3.
>" Ibid., xxxix, 23
"’* Ibid., xxv. 33.
■” Ibid., xxxix. 55.
”* Ibid., xii, 3.
8.8 Ibid., iv, 69.
1.8 Ibid., xvi. 125,
Ibid., xii. 33; xvii. 53
Ibid., ii. 185; v, 98
■“ Ibid., iv, 62
Ethical Teachings of tho Qur'an
excellence1’* and repel evil with that which is beat,1" for thereby they will
be adding to the beauty of their own-souls.1’* Patience is graceful1" and so
are forgiveness and overlooking others' faults.1" Those who perform beautiful
deeds shall have the highest rewards in this world1*1 and their reward in the
hereafter shall be still better1" when they shall enjoy the fairest of places for
repose1** and be provided with excellent provisions,1*1
B
DISVALUES
Corresponding to these values there are some disvalues which are symbolised
in the Qur'&n as Satan or Iblls. He is described as a persistent rebel1" who
is constantly engaged in deceiving1** people and misleading them from the
path of righteousness.1" He bows the seeds of enmity and hatred,1" creates
false desires,1" commands what is shameful and wrong,’" and defaces the
fair nature created by God."1 He is in short an enemy of mankind;’" and
believers are. therefore, advised that they should beware of his machinations.
Destruction of Life.—Opposed to the value of life is weakness of man to
make mischief in the earth and shed blood"’—symbolised by the first unlawful
and unjustified murder in the history of mankind by the first issue of Adam."1
All life being sacred,"* it is forbidden to commit suicide or to kill anybody
without a just cause."* It is equally sinful to murder one's children for fear
of want or poverty."’ Killing a person without reason, in the view of the
Qur’in, is tantamount to slaying the human raoe.’" Fight for the cause of
■*• Ibid., iv. 86.
>•’ Ibid., xxiii. 86; xli, 34.
Ibid., xvii. 7.
Ibid., xii. 18. 83.
Ibid., xv, 85.
1,1 Ibid., iii. 172; ix. 121; X. 26; xvi, 96, 97; xxiv, 38; xxix, 7; xxxix. 36. 70;
xlvi, 16; liii. 31.
■" Ibid., xvi, 30.
Ibid., xxv, 24.
•" Ibid., lxv, 3.
■“ Ibid., iv, 117.
Ibid., viii, 48.
Ibid., iv, 119.
Ibid., v. 94.
•" Ibid., iv, 120.
Ibid., xxiv, 21.
Ibid., iv. 119.
Ibid., xxxv, 6; xxxvi. 6.
Ibid., ii. 30.
«* Ibid.. V, 33.
’" Ibid., vi. 151; xvii. 33.
*” Ibid: vi. 131, 140; xvii. 33.
Ibid., vi, 15; xvii. 31.
•*• Ibid., v. 35.
IBS
, A Hililory of Muslim Philosophy
righteousness is permitted only because tumult and oppression, which neces
sitate resort to armed resistance, are worse than killing.’"
All those tendencies which weaken'a man's hold on life are condemned
in the Qur'in. People are warned of falling into fear, grief, and despair’" or
of being unmindful of the ultimate mercy of God.’11 But any unjust clinging
to life which involves sacrifice of other values is to be avoided at all cost.
It does not become a man to be cowardly in the face of difficulties’1’ or to
turn back and run away for life from the battle-field.’1’ Similarly, covetous
ness,*" niggardliness,”’ and the hoarding of wealth’1’ are condemned, for they
betray man’s unjustified clinging to values as means, as if they were ends in
themselves.
There are certain disvalues which imply disrespect of life in oneself as well
as in others. Begging importunately from all and Bundry, which leads to killing
one's self-respect, is looked upon by the Qur’Sn as unbecoming a true believer.”’
It forbids slandering,”’ throwing fault or sin on somebody who is innocent
of it,’1’ and swelling one’s cheek out of pride at men.”’ Scandal-mongering
and backbiting are hateful deeds.*” The Qur'An advises men and women not
to laugh at, defame, be sarcastic to one another or call one another by of
fensive nicknames, and not to be suspicious, not to spy on others or speak ill
of them behind their backs."’ It deprecates the man who is ready with oaths,
is a slanderer going about with calumnies, is a transgressor beyond bounds,
or is deep in sin, violence, and cruelty."’
Things -Momentary —Opposed to his natural urge for eternity, man sometimes
through ignorance seems to be enamoured of the life of the moment,"’ which
tends to vanish*" and is mere play and amusement."’ It is no good to be
pleased and remain satisfied*” with the transitory things of this world"’ and
•" Ibid., ii, 191.
«• Ibid., iii. IS9; ix. 40; xli, SO.
111Ibid., xxxix. 53.
”’ Ibid., ii. 122.
”• Ibid,, iv, 89-91.
"• Ibid., iii. 180; iv. 32; Ivii, 24.
“• Ibid., xvii. 29; xlvii. 38.
“• Ibid., iv, 2-3.
”’ Ibid., ii. 273.
”• Ibid., ix. 79; xxiv. 23; K 12: Ixvi.i, II 12.
”• Ibid: iv. 112.
“• Ibid., xxxi. 18.
•” Ibid: xxiv. 18; civ, I
’" Ibid., xlix, 11-12.
Ibid., Ixviii, 10-13.
’“ Ibid.. X. 45.
■“ Ibid: xvi, 96
Ibid: Vi, 32
Ibid.. X. 7,
Ibid.. XVii. 18
166
Ethics) Teachings of the Qur'an
the fleeting and temporal life
* ” that haa a span of but an hour of a day. *
"
**
The true goal of man ia eternity which is the home of peace, 1 satisfaction,”*
security,
* ” and supreme achievement”* for which man must, according to
his nature,’** ever toil and struggle.’**
Lack of Unity.—Against the value of unity there is the diavalue of the
denial of the unity of the Ultimate Reality (hifr) and the association of
partners with God (shirk) and likewise the disvalues of disunity, discord, and
disharmony in the life of tho individual and society. Those who turn back
and disobey God and His Apostle
* ” deny God's creative power, His purpose,
and design,”* follow a part of the revealed book and disregard the rest, "
*
accept some prophets and deny others are all deniers of the true unity of
God. Hair-splitting in religious matters,”1 failure to judge by the light of
divine revelation,”* indulgence in magic in order to sow seeds of disunity
among people,”* are all acts which tantamount to disbelief in God,
God’s unity implies that He alone deserves worship,“• a worship which
demands exclusive submission to His will,”* tinged and informed with
the highest emotional attachment.”* Association of partners with God does
not mean that people deny God's power of creation and control of world's
affairs;”’ where they err is the belief that these partners may bring them
nearer to God.”* wrongly and foolishly ascribe to them a share in bestowing
gifts, as for example, the gifts of a goodly child,“• thus leading to lack of
consistency in their moral conduct and lack of exclusive loyalty towards the
highest ideal, which indeed is a form of most heinous sin*** and the highest
wrong-doing.
** 1
Ibid., lxxv. 20; lxxvi, 27.
••• Ibid., x, 45.
”• Ibid., x. 25.
Ibid., xliii. 70.
••• Ibid., xltv, 51.
•” Ibid., xliv, 57
*« Ibid., xo, 4.
Ibid., lxxxiv. 6
Ibid., iii, 32.
Ibid., ii. 28-29.
”• Ibid., ii, 85.
Ibid., iv. 150.
”• Ibid., v, 105
'*• Ibid., v, 47.
•“ Ibid., ii. 102-
•*• Ibid., xvi. 51.
■“ Ibid., vii, 29.
■“ Ibid., ii, 155.
•*’ Ibid., x. 31; xxiii. 82-89.
“* Ibid: xxxix. 3
Ibid., vii, 19.
•*• Ibid., iv. 48.
•*> Ibid xxxi. 13.
167
A History of Muslim Philosophy
A form of associating partners with God is ancestor-worship. If people arc
invited to the path of righteousness, they refuse by saying: "Nay I we shall
follow the way of our fathers," even if their fathers were devoid of knowledge
and giudanoe.
*** Sometimes people succumb to their personal ambitions and
self-importance which signifies their lack of faith in the ultimate causality of
God, implied in the belief in the unity of God. When some trouble or
affliction cornea to man he turns to God, but when it is removed he forgets
that he over turned to Him,®41 and ascribes ita removal to others besides God,®*4
seta up rivals unto Him—a great blasphemy®*®—and sometimes thinks that
it was his own skill and knowledge which helped him in removing his difficul
ties.®*’
The disvalues of discord and disunity are the result of the denial of the
unity of God.®*’ The unbelievers and those who associate partners with God
are always subject to fear and lack a sense of Unity and harmony.®®® It is
the devil that incites people to discord**® and. therefore, the Qur'an very force
fully forbids people to be divided among themselves,’*® and looks upon dis
unity as the result of lack of wisdom.**1 It denounces divisions and splits in
religion’®’ and disagreements among different sects and schisms through in
solent envy.’®’ Similarly, all those acta which tend to spread mischief and
tumult after there have been peace and order are condemned because they
tend to create disorder, disunity, and disharmony in life.’®4
Iiurtia.—Opposed to power, weakness is a disvalue. It is wrong to show
weakness in face of difficulties, to lose heart,’*® to be weak in will,’** to be
weary and faint-hearted,**’ to despair or boast,’*® to be impatient and fret
ful. ’** It is forbidden to be afraid of men®1® or of Satan and his votaries.”1
There are certain disvalues which arise out of misuse of power. Warning is
given to those people who oppress mon with wrong-doing and insolently trans-
“■ Ibid., ii, 170; v. 107.
“• Ibid., x, 13.
•*• Ibid., xxx. 33.
“• Ibid., xxxix. 8.
®»* Ibid., xxxix. 49.
•*’ Ibid., lix. 14.
®»® Ibid., ii. 151; viii, 05.
'*• Ibid., vii, 200; xli, 36.
■’» Ibid., iii. 103.
Ibid., lix. 14.
•*® Ibid., vi, 159; xxx, 32; xlii. 13.
Ibid., xlii. 65; xlv, 17.
144 Ibid., ii. 191, 192, 205; vii. 85; xi. 85.
■“ Ibid., viii. 46.
144 Ib<d„ iii. 140,
•*' Ibid., xlvii, 35.
•*• Ibid.. lvii, 23.
Ibid.. Ixx. 19, 21.
Ibid., iv, 77.
Ibid., iii, 175.
168
Ethical Teaching* of tho Qur'an
gross beyond bounds through the land, defying right and justice.*” It is for
bidden to indulge in vain talk.*’* to exhibit fierceness,*7* to be arrogant against
God,*” for arrogance blinda people to the truth,*7* to swell one's check with
pride, or walk in insolence through the earth,*7* for one cannot rend the earth
asunder or reach tho mountains in height.*7* Anogant and obstinate trans-
greasore,’7* vainglorious people,’" those fond of self-glory,**1 people rebellious
and wicked,"* and vying with one another in pomp and gross rivalry,’’* are
held out as examples of those who misuse their power. Satan is condemned to
everlasting punishment for abusing power and becoming haughty.’** Moses was
sent to Pharaoh because the latter had become proud and arrogant.’*’ The
people of 'Ad were punished because they behaved arrogantly and thought
themselves very powerful."* The Israelites slew their apostles because of
pride.**’ The hypocrites turn away from truth out of arrogance.•** The
Christians are described as nearest in love to the Muslims because they are not
Some people try to cover their misuse of power under the cloak of deter
minism,*" but the Qur'tn repudiates this stand as totally unrealistic.**1 Man
Error.—Opposed to truth or wisdom, error, conjecture, and fancy are al)
disvalues which the Qur'in at several places denounces as equivalent to un
truth or lies"’ and which do not lend support to an individual in his moral
life."* Fancy and conjecture can avail nobody against truth.”*
It is forbidden to accept a report without ascertaining ita truth,"* to utter
■” Ibid., xlii, 42.
<’• Ibid., xix, 62; xxiii, 3; xxvii. 65.
Ibid., xlviii, 26.
Ibid., xliv. 19.
Ibid., xxvii. 14; xxxv. 4.
Ibid., xxxi. 18.
Ibid., xxiii. 46.
"• Ibid., xl. 35.
••• Ibid., iv, 36; xvi. 23.
••* Ibid., xxxviii. 2.
Ibid., xlix, 7.
Ibid., lvii. 20.
••• Ibid., vii. 12; xxxvii. 74-76.
’“ Ibid., xx. 24. 43.
••• Ibid., xii. 16.
•" ibid., a, 87.
Ibid., lxiii. 6.
Ibid.. V, 85.
”• Ibid., vi. 148; xvi. 33.
Ibid., vi. 149.
Ibid., ii. 38.
"■ Ibid., vi, 148; x. 66.
«• Ibid., iv. 167; vi, 116; liii. 23
•“ Ibid.. x. 36; liii. 28.
Ibid., xlix. 6.
169
A History of Muslim Philosophy
slander, intentionally forging falsehood,”7 and to throw fault or sin on some
body who ia innocent of it,”* for these are all against the value of truth.
Indulgence in disputation,*” vain discourses,”’ and susceptibility to super-
stitions”1 are disvalues opposed to wisdom. Thoee who do not try to save
themselves from these are liable to be always afraid of others,’** to be unable
to distinguish truth from falsehood, and right from wrong;”’ their hearts
always turn away from the light of truth and wisdom”* towards depths of
darkness.”* Such are the peoplo who have hearts wherewith they understand
not, eyes wherewith they see not, and ears wherewith they hear not; in short,
like cattle they lack truth and wisdom,”*
Hypocrisy ia another diavalue. A hypocrite is one who says with his tongue
what is not in his heart,”7 who ia distracted in mind, being sincerely neither
for one group nor for another,”* Hypocrites are Hara.’” They expect people
to praise them for what they never do,*” oompeto with one another in sin
and rancour,’11 and hold secret counsels among themselves for iniquity, hosti
lity, and disobodience.’1’ Hypocrites—men and women—enjoin evil and forbid
what is just,’1’ and if by chance they come into possession of a position of
authority, they make mischief in the land, break ties of kinship,*1* and yet
claim to be peace-makers.*1*
Showing off (riyd') is also a disvalue. God does not love those who give
away even money in order to be seen doing so by others, for such men have
no faith in God and the Last Day.’1* Such showing off cancels the spirit of
their charity.’17 It 1b like sowing seeds on a hard, barren rock on which there
is little soil, and where heavy rain has left nothing but a bare stone.”•
Injustice —Opposed to the value of justice is the disvalue of injustice and
Ibid.. Is. 12.
Ibid., iv, 112.
•" Ibid., xxix, 48.
Ibid., vi. 68.
•" Ibid., v. 106; vi. 138-41, 143-44.
“* Ibid., lix. 13.
”• Ibid., ix. 81.
•” Ibid: ix. 127.
■“ Ibid.. xxiv, 40.
•” Ibid., vii. 179.
lbid-.u. 167; iv. 8l;xlvii. 11.
••• Ibid., iv. 143.
•“ Ibid., lix. 11; Ixiii. 1.
Ibid., iii, 188.
*■> Ibid.. V. 65.
’■* Ibid.. Ivii, 8.
Ibid., ix. 67.
Ibid: xlvii, 22.
•** Ibid., ii. 11.
■” Ibid: iv. 38.
•>’ Ibid., ii. 264.
Ibid: ii. 263-64
170
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'An
violation of the principle of tike mean. It is forbidden by the Qur'An to be
influenced by people's vain desires and to deviate from the truth while judging
between them.’1* It is also forbidden to distort justice or decline to do justice"’
or to withhold justice from people merely because they are your enemies.**1
It would be perfectly unjust to oneself and to others to pile up wealth.™ to
bury gold and silver, and not to Bpend them in the cause of God and righteous-
nees."’ Tho Qur'An equally forbids as violation of the principle of justice
the squandering of wealth like a spendthrift™ and recommends the middlo
way of prudenoe which is neither extravagance nor niggardliness. ™ It advises
one neither to make one's hand tied to one’s neck nor stretch it forth to its
utmost reach so that one becomes blameworthy and destitute."’ One should
eat and drink but not waste by excess™ for that would be violating tho prin
ciple of justice. Excess in any form is forbidden whether in food"’ ar in
religion.™
Usury is forbidden, for it means devouring other people’s substance wrong
fully’” and involves injustioe on both sides.*’1
Haired and Unkindne-M.—Against the value of love is the disvalue of hatred,
harshness, or unkindnees to othem. People are advised not to speak any word
of contempt to their parents,’" to orphans.”’ and to beggars.’" Believers
are not to revile even those whom the unbelievers call upon besides God.’"
The Holy Prophet is described as safe from severity and hard-heartednoss
towards others.’’*
Vice.—Against goodness the Qur'&n denounces the disvalue of vice, i.e.,
doing wrong and shameful deeds."’ It is Satan who commands people to do
what is evil and shameful.”* People are forbidden to come near adultery,
for it is a shameful deed and an evil, opening the road to other evils.’" Similarly,
Ibid., v. 51-53
Ibid., h. 135.
Ibid., v. 3, 9.
™ Ibid., civ. 2-3.
••• Ibid., ix, 34.
™ Ibid., xvii. 25-29; xxv. 67.
••• Ibid., xxx, 67.
■■■ Ibid., xvii, 29.
™ Ibid., vii, 31.
Ibid., v, 10.
™ Ibid., iv. 171, v. 84
•” Ibid., iv, 161.
•« Ibid., ii. 279.
••• Ibid., xvii, 23.
Ibid., xciii. 9.
Ibid., xciii, 10.
’" Ibid., vi. 108
Ibid., iii, 159.
Ibid., iii. 14, 110; xiii. 37; lui. 32
”• Ibid., ii. 189, 268; xxiv. 21
••• Ibid., xvii. 32.
171
A History of Muslim Philosophy
wine snd gambling involve great Bin.*•**’ for they are the work of Satan.”1 The
Qur'in forbids all shameful and evil deeds and uses a very comprehensive
*** Hypocrites and unbelievers enjoin"’ and plot
term ;ulm to cover them all.
***
evil"* and hold secret oounsela for iniquity, evil, and rebellion and wrong
fully oat up other people's property."* The believers are advised, therefore,
not to help one another in sin and rancour."’
The Qur'&n refers to several Satanic tendencies in man,
*** such as ungrate
fulness, ”• hastiness,impatience,"1 despair, and unbelief in times of adver
sity. and pride and oonoeit in times of prosperity quarrelsomeness."’
arrogance,"* greed of ever more and yet more,"* niggardliness,"* transgres
sion of tho bounds of propriety,"’ and false sense of self-sufficiency."* These
tendencies often lead to different forms of wrong-doing and, therefore, must
be counteracted by all right-thinking people.
Moral Discipline.—To produce the attitude of moral righteousness (taqwa),
the discipline of prayer, fasting, zakdi* and pilgrimage is enforced. People
arc commanded to guard strictly their habit of prayers and stand before God
in a devout frame of mind,"* pay the mM|,*“ spend in charity secretly and
■ The term soixU is used for the State lax earmarkeii for tbs poor, the Doody,
the wayfarer, the administrative staff employed for its collodion. those whose
hearts are to bo won over, for freeing slaves and the heavily indebted, and for use
in tho path of God (Qur'an, ix. 60). Even if a State does not levy thia tax or there
ia no State to levy it, its payment direct to the classes mentioned above still
remain. obligatory for every Muslim. .MoylU is a term wider than sakSi. Il covers
both zakdl and w-hatovor is voluntarily given for charitable purposes over and
above lokat. Some people translate the word zakdl as compulsory charity, and other
forms of sadaqdt as voluntary charity.
••• Ibid., ii, 219.
•u Ibid., v. 93.
*“ Ibid., vii. 28; xvi, 90.
••• Ibid., ix. 67.
••• Ibid., xxxv, 43.
■“ Ibid.. Iviii, 8.
Ibid., ii. 188.
Ibid., v, 3.
•*■ Once the Holy Prophet said that every man has his Satan with him. Some
one eskod him if there waa one with him aa well. He replied: Yes, but I have
made him a Muslim, i.e., nuuio him submit to my control.
Qur'an, vii. 10; xxxvi, 46-47; lxxiv. 15-25; o, 1-8.
“• Ibid., xvi. 37; xvii, II.
“■ Ibid.. Ixx, 19-21.
“• Ibid., xi. 9-10; xvii. 83.
“■ Ibid., xvi. 4.
“• Ibid.. Ixxv, 31-40; xo. 5-7.
“* Ibid.. Ixxiv, 15.
“• Ibid., xvii, 100.
Ibid., xcvi. 6.
"• Ibid.. xcvi. 7.
“• Ibid., ii, 238.
••• Ibid., xcviii, 3
172
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'iin
openly”1—a beautiful loan to God’’*—a bargain that will never fail,”* in
volving a glad tidings for the believers’" and a cause of prosperity’" and
spiritual joy.”’ Those people who follow these principles are on the right path
under the true guidance of the Lord.”’ They remove the stain of evil from
the people”’ and help them refrain from shameful and unjust deeds.”’ It
is the duty of all Muslims, aa witnesses for mankind in general, to hold fast
to God.”’ It is the practice of all believing people that when God grants them
power in the land, they enjoin the right and forbid the wrong.”1 All Muslims
ought to follow these disciplinary principles.’” Those who neglect them are
bound to fall into the snares of their passions.”*
Similarly, fasting is recommended as a discipline during the month of Rama-
dan in which the Qur'&n was revealed aa a guide to mankind and aa an em
bodiment of guidance and judgment between right and wrong.”’ It involves
observance of certain limits and rules by all those who may wish to become
righteous (acquire fo^wa).”’ Performance of Aajj is symptomatic of a righteous
life in which there should be no obscenity, nor wickedness, nor wrangling,
and the best provision for which is right conduct, i.e.. laqwaV*
Repentant*.—Though man is by nature after the pattern of God’s nature”’
and, therefore, capable of approximating to the ideal embodied in the most
beautiful names,”’ yet being prone to different weaknesses”* he is often led
to wrong his soul in spite of his best efforts to follow moral discipline.’” Adam
disobeyed God and thus was about to run into harm and aggression,”1 but
as soon as he realized his mistake, he repented and God accepted his repent
ance’” and promised that whoever follows His guidance shall be free from
”> Ibid.. xxv, 29.
Ibid., lxxii, 20.
■” Ibid.. xxv. 29.
•“ Ibid., xxii. 34: xxvii, 2.
Ibid., xxxi, S.
”• Ibid.. XX, 139.
’” Ibid., xxzi, 0: xcvii, 6.
”• Ibid., xi. 114.
”• Ibid., xxii. 43.
”• Ibid., xxii, 78.
*’* Ibid: xxii. 41.
”• Ibid., xxiv, 56-36.
"’ Ibid., xix. 59.
■” Ibid., ii. 185.
"• Ibid: ii, 183. 187.
•” Ibid., ii. 197.
’" Ibid., xxx. 30.
■” Ibid., vii, 180; xvii. 110; lix, 24.
•" Ibid., xiv, 34; xvii. 11. 83.
■“ Ibid., vii. 23; xi, 21, 101; xvi. 33
•“ Ibid., ii. 33; vii. 19.
Ibid., ii. 37.
173
A History of Muslim Philosophy
grief and sorrow.3’* The Lord accepts repentance from His servants and for
gives the sins’” of those who do evil in ignorance but repent soon afterwards3”
and are never obstinate in persisting in the wrong intentionally.”* Even the
thieves”’ and those who had waged ware against God’” are covered by the
universal mercy and loving kindness of God’” provided they repent and
amend their conduct,"0 earnestly bring God to mind,’’1 hold fast to God.
purify their religion solely for God.*” and openly declare the Truth.’”
There ia no scope for pessimism and despair arising from the natural weak
nesses of men in doing wrong to their souls,3” for God turns to them that
they might repent. ”* Turning to God in repentance and seeking of forgiveness
from Him lead to the grant by God to man of good and true enjoyment
and abounding grace in this life.”* He will rain bounties from the sky and
add to people's strength.To turn continually to God in repentance ia the
sign of the true believer;’” and this attitude of mind is strengthened by remem
brance of God (dhikr), for it enables a man in most difficult and odd situations
to keep firm and steadfast"* and find in it a source of doep satisfaction and
mental equipoise.*”
Taqwa.—It is tho whole pursuit of value and avoidance of disvalue in
general that is designated by the Qur’an as righteousness (taqwa). It is de
pendent on and ia the result of faith in God and adoration of Him.*’1 The
Qur’an is revealed solely to produce this attitude of taqwa among people.*03 It i»
the presence of this moral attitude which saves people from destruction*” and
it is this which helps them maintain God’s commands in their conjugal life,*”
Ibid.. ii. 38.
>*• Ibid., xiii, S3.
••• Ibid., iv. 17: vi. 54: vii. 153; ix. 104; xvi. 119.
Ibid., iii, 135.
Ibid., v. 42.
•*• Ibid., v. 36-37.
Ibid., xi, 00.
Ibid., v. 42.
”* Ibid., iii, 133.
•" Ibid., iv. 136.
"• Ibid.. ii. 160.
•” Ibid., xxxix. S3.
••* Ibid., ix, 118.
Ibid., xi. 3.
IWd.. xi, 52.
”• Ibid., ix. 112.
•" lb.d„ viii, 45.
Ibid., xiii. 28.
Ibid., ii, 21.
Ibid., xx, 113: xxxix, 28.
••• Ibid., xxvii. 53; xli, 18.
Ibwi.. is, 24; iv, 129.
174
Ethical Teachings of tho Qur'&n
ill sacrifice,40* in different aspects of social life,400 and in fulfilling faithfully
their social obligations.40’
The motive which prompts people to adopt this moral attitude of taqwa is
the desire to win the pleasure of God,400 to gain nearness to Him,400 and to
seek His faoe410 or oountenanoe411 implying that their motive ia not self
interest but the seeking of good for the sake of good,410*which benefits
their own souls410 and which they seek even at the sacrifice of life,414 The
aim of such people is mainly a desire for increase in self-purification without
any idea of winning favour from anyone or expecting any reward whatsoever.410
They will get a reward of the highest value410 and attain oomplete satis
faction41’ and prosperity410—the final attainment of the Eternal Home,410
well-pleasing unto God.400 These people resemble a garden high end fertile,
heavy rain falls on it and make* it yield a double increase of harvest, and if
it receives not heavy rain, light moisture suffices it.401 For suoh people are the
gardens in nearness to their Lord, a result of the pleasure of God.400
To be righteous (muUaqi) is to believe in God, and the Last Day. and the
angels, and the Books, and the messengers; to spend out of one’s substance,
out of love for God. for kin, for orphans, for the needy, for the wayfarer,
for those who ask, for the ransom of slaves; to be steadfast in prayers, and to
pay the zalcdt; to fulfil the contracts which have been made; and to be firm
and patient in pain (or suffering), adversity, and periods of danger. Such
people as follow these are possessed of true taqwa. i.e., righteousness.4"0 And
of the servants of God the most gracious are those who walk on the earth in
humility, and when the ignorant address them, they say, "Peace”; those who
spend the night in adoration of their Lord prostrating and standing; those
who, when they spend, are not extravagant nor niggardly, but hold a just
balance between these two extremes; those who invoke not, with God, any
•“ Ibid., v. 30; xxii. 37.
444 Ibid., ii. 177.
444 Ibid., xxv. 83-74.
444 Ibid., ii. 207; iv, 114.
404 Ibid., iii. 13.
414 Ibid., ii. 272.
411 Ibid., xiu. 22; xxx. 38; xcii, 18-21.
414 Ibid., lv. 80.
414 Ibid., ii. 272.
414 Ibid., ii, 207.
414 Ibid., xcii, 18-21.
414 Ibid., iv, 114.
Ibid: xcii. 21.
414 Ibid., xxx. 38.
414 Ibid: xiii. 22.
444 Ibid., xxxix. 28.
441 Ibid: u. 285
444 Ibid: iii. 15.
444 Ibid: H, 177.
175
A History of Muslim Philosophy
other god, nor slay such life as God has made sacred, except for just cause,
nor commit fornication: those who witness no falsehood, and, if they pass
by futility, they pass by it with honourable avoidance; those who, when they
are admonished with the signs of their Lord, do not show indifference to them
like the deaf or tho blind; and those who pray, "Our Lord I give us the grace
to lead the righteous."*” The better and more lasting reward of the Lord is
for those who believe and put their trust in Him; those who avoid the
greater crimes and shameful deeds, and. even when they are angry, they for
give; those who hearken to their Ixird, and establish regular prayer; who
conduct their affaire by mutual consultation; who spend out of what God
bestows on them for sustenance; who, when an oppressive wrong is indicted
on them, (are not cowed but) help and defend themselves; and those who
recompense injury with injury in degree equal thereto and. better still, forgive
and make reconciliation. But indeed if any do help and defend themselves
after a wrong is done to them, against such there is no cause of blame. The
blame is only against those who oppress men with wrong-doing and insolently
transgress beyond bounds through the land, defying right and justice; for
such there will be a grievous penalty. But indeed showing patience and for
giveness is an exercise of courageous will and resolution in the conduct of
affairs.*”
There is yet a higher stage of moral achievement described as which
signifies performance of moral action in conformity with the moral ideal with
the added sense of deep loyalty to the cause of God, done in the most graceful
way that is motivated by a unique love for God.*” Performance of righteous
actions accompanied by a true faith is only a stage in the moral life of man
which, after several stages, gradually matures into iksdn*” God is with those
who perform good deeds and perform them with added grace and beauty.*”
Those who sacrifice animals with a spirit of dedication have piety (taqwa)
no doubt, but those who thereby glorify God for His guidanoe, acknowledging
fully the extent of His bounties provided in abundance, are the people who
are chaiacterizod by i/isdn.*” In the life hereafter the morally upright will be
in the midst of gardens and springs*” wherein they will take spiritual enjoy-
ment in the things which their Lord gives as a reward for leading a life of
Ibid.. xxv. 83-84; 87-88. 73-74.
Ibid., xlii. 38-43.
*** In the Mitfdilt, there is a tradition which relates that a stranger one day
nwno to the Holy Prophet and asked him, among other things, what rtadn is. Tho
Holy Prophet replied, "Serve the cause of God aa if you are in His presence. If
it is not possible to achieve thia stage, then think aa if Ho is watching you do your
duty." This tradition clearly emphasizes tho attitude of deep loyalty tinged with
an emotional response of love towards God.
Qur'An. v. »6.
Ibid., xvi, 128.
■*• Ibid., xxii. 37.
••• Ibid., li. IS.
176
Ethical Teachings of the Qur'an
graceful righteousness.**1 The sincerely devoted people (muh-'inin) are those
who willingly suffer thirst, fatigue, or hunger in the cause of God,*’* or tread
paths which may raise the ire of tho unbelievers, or receive injury from an
enemy ;*** who despite all that do not oonduct themselves in life as to cause
mischief on the earth but call on Him with fear and longing;*** who spend of
their substanoe in the cause of God, refrain from evil, and are engaged in doing
truly good deeds;*3* who spend freely whether in prosperity or in adversity;
who restrain anger and pardon all men;*** who are steadfast in patience***
and exercise restraint ;*** who establish regular prayer and pay the zakat and
have in their hearts tho assurance of the hereafter.'** and who are always
ready to forgive people and overlook their misdeeds.*** Almost all the prophets
are included in this category**1 which signifies that the muAsinin are those who
are not only on the right path themselves,*** but in addition by their good ex
ample and magnetic personality load others to the way of righteousness and help
in establishing a social order baaed on peace, harmony, and security.*** Com
plete power,*** wisdom and knowledge,•** true guidance from the Lord,
prosperity,*** rise in worldly position,**' power, and knowledge**3 are the
by-products of their life of graceful righteousness (i/udn). Their reward
shall never be lost,*** for God ia always with them*** and loves them**1 and will
bestow on them tho rank of friendship us He did on Abraham.*** He who
submits his whole self to the will of God and moreover does it gracefully and
with a spirit of dedication (muffin) has grasped indeed the most trustworthy
handhold,*** and enjoys the most beautiful position in religion for he is follow
ing Abraham who waa true in faith.*** He will get his reward from his Lord
••• Ibid., ii. 16.
•*» Ibid., xxix, 69.
**• Ibid., ix. 120.
Ibid., vii. 66.
*" Ibid., ii. 195.
*•• Ibid., iii. 134.
Ibid.. Xi. 115; xii. 90.
•*• Ibid., xvi. 128.
Ibid., xxxi. 4.
••• Ibid.. V. 14.
Ibid., vi, 84; xxxvii. 75. 80, 83, 105, 110, 120-21, 130-31.
Ibid., vi. 84.
**• Ibid..U. 193; iii. 104. 110.
••• Ibid., xii. 56.
*** Ibid., xxvii. 14.
••• Ibid., xxix. 69; xxxi. 5.
■*' Ibid., ii, 68; vii. 161.
••• Ibid., xii, 22.
••• Ibid., xi. 115; xii. 56.
**• Ibid., xxix. 69.
**• /(nd., ii. 196; iii. 134. 145.
«** Ibid., iv. 115.
Ibid., xxxi. 22.
“• Ibid., iv, 123.
177
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and shall experience neither fear nor grief.God is well pleased with those
who followed in the footsteps of the vanguard of Islam—the first of those
who forsook their houses and of those who gave them aid—in a spirit of devo
tion and graceful loyalty as well as those who followed them, aa they are all
with Him For them God has prepared tho garden of paradise, as their eternal
home of supreme felicity
“• Ibid., ii, II J.
“• Ibid., ix, 100.
Chapter IX
ECONOMIC AND POLITICAL TEACHINGS
OF THE QUR'AN
A
ECONOMIC TEACHINGS
1. The first economic principle emphasized by the Qur’in with repeated
stress is that all natural means of production and resources which subscribe
to man's living, have been created by God. It is He who made them aa they
are and set them to follow the lawB of nature that mako them useful for man.
It is He who allowed man to exploit them and placed them at his disposal.*1 2
2. On the basis of tho aforesaid truth the Qur'An lays down the principle
that an individual has neither the right to be free in acquiring and exploiting
these resources according to his own sweet will, nor is he entitled to draw a
line independently to decide between the lawful and the unlawful. It is for
God to draw this line; for none else. The Qur'An oondemns the Midians, an
Arabian tribe of old, because its people claimed to possess a right to acquire
and expend wealth in any way they liked without re-iirietion of any kind.'
It calh it a ''lie” if a man describes a certain thing aa lawful and another
unlawful on his own account." The right to pronounce this rests with God
and (aa God's deputy) His Prophet."
1 Qur'tn, ii. SO; vii, 10; xiii. 3; xiv. 32-34; Ivi. 63-64; Ixvii, IS.
■ Ibid., xi. 87.
■ Ibid., xvi. 116. “This mw strictly prohibits that people should decide accord
ing to their own views or wishes what is lawful and what is unlawful" (BaidAwi.
Anwdr al.Tamil, Vol. III. p. 1 S3).
"The purport of this verse is. aa Askari explains, that you should not call a
thing lawful or unlawful unices you havo loomt of its being so from God or His
Prophet, otherwise you would be telling a lie on God; for nothing makes « thing
lawful or unlawful save a commandment of God" (Alusi, Ruh al-Ma'dni, Vol. XIV,
p. 226. IdArat al Tab&'at al Munlrlyyah. Egypt. 1345/1926).
• Qur'An, vii, 157.
178
Economic and Political Teaching
* of the Qur'Sn
3. Under the sovereign command of God and within the limits imposed by
Him, the Qur'&n recognizes the right of holding private property aa implied
in several versos
*
The economic scheme presented in the Qur'in ia baaed entirely on the idea
of individual ownership in every field. There is nothing in it to suggest that
a distinction is to be made between consumption goods and production goods
(or means of production) and that only the former may bo held in private
ownership, while the latter must be nationalized. Nor is there anything in
the Qur'&n suggesting or implying that the above-mentioned scheme is of a
temporary nature to be replaced later by a permanent arrangement in which
collectivization of all means of production may be desired to be mado the rule.
Had that been the ultimate object of the Qur'&n, it would have certainly stated
it unequivocally and given us instructions with regard to that future permanent
order. The mere fact that it mentions in one place that “the earth belongs to
God"
* is not enough to conclude that it either denies or forbids private owner
ship of land and sanctions nationalization. Elsewhere it says. "Whatever is
in the heavens and the earth belongs to God,"’ but nobody has ever concluded
from this verse that none of the things in the heavens or the earth can be
held in individual possession or that all these things should be State property.
If a thing which belongs to God ceases to belong to human beings, certainly
it ceases to belong to individuals and States alike.
It is equally erroneous to draw from verse xli, 10 the inference that the
Qur'&n desires to distribute all the means of livelihood in the earth eguoZZy
among all men, and conclude that since this can be achieved only under
nationalization, the Qur'an advocates or favours the introduction of that
system. For the purpose of this interpretation the verse is wrongly rendered
to mean that “God has put in tho earth its means of sustenance proportionately
in four days, alike for those who seek.”* But even this wrong translation does
not serve tho purpose. It would be incorrect to apply the words "alike for those
who seek” to human beings alone. All kinds of animals, too. are among "those
who seek.” and there is little doubt that their means of sustenance have also
been placed by God in the earth. If this verse, then, denotes an equal share
to all who seek, there is no justification for restricting this equality of share to
members of the human species alone.
• Ibid: ii. 275, 279. 282. 283, 281; iv, 2, 4, 7. 20, 24, 29; v, 38; vi. 141; ix. 103;
xxiv, 27; xxxvi, 71; ii. 19; lxi, 11.
• Ibid., vii, 128.
’ Ibid., ii. 284.
• The words of the text are: ft arba'ali ayydmin soud' al-lissd’illn. Zamakllabari.
Baidiwi, I<4zi, Alusi and other commentators havo taken auud* to go with ayydmin
and interpreted it to mean "in full four days." No commentator of dist inction has
taken aaud' to go with sd’dln. However, even if it is allowed to go with it, it would
mean "provided for the sake of all who sook." and not “for all who wwk in equal
measure." This latter interpretation is just untenable,
179
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Similarly, it would be wrong to stretch thoee verse* ••of the Qur'an which
emphasize providing for the weak or tho have-nots to extract from them
the theory of nationalization. It should be seen that wherever it stresses this
need of providing for the poor, it also prescribes the only way of meeting it,
namely, that the rich and the well-to-do of a society should spend their wealth
generously for the welfare of their poor kin, the orphans, and the needy for
the pleasure of God; in addition to this, the State should collect a fixed
portion of it and spend it for the same purpose. There is no hint in the Qur an
of any other scheme proposed to be put in practice to meet this end.
No doubt, there is nothing in the Qur'in to prevent a certain thing from
being taken over from individual control and placed under collective control,
if necessary; but to deny individual ownership altogether and adopt nationali
zation aa an eoonomic system does not go with the Qur’anic approach to
man’s economic problems.
4. The fact that, aa in other things, all men do not enjoy equality in suste
nance and means of earning, is described in the Qur’ln aa a feature of God's
providence. Extravagant disparities devised by various social systems aside,
natural inequality, as it goes, is described as the outcome of His wise apportion
ment, issuing from Ilis own dispensation. The idea that this inequality is to
be levelled up and substituted by dead equality is alien to the Book of God?
The Qur'an advises people not to covet that by which Allah has made some
of you excel others; men shall have the benefit of what they earn and women
shall have the benefit of what they earn, and ask Allah of His grace.”
It is sometimes tried to conclude from verses xvi, 71 and xxx. 28 that
the Qur'in desires equality of provision for everybody. But both the words
and the context of these verses tell that they do not attempt to disparage
inequality and urge equality to take its place, but press this fact (of inequality
among men) as an argument against taking some of God's creatures as His
partners. They arguo that when men are not prepared to share their wealth
(given by God) with their slaves as equal partners, what on earth leads them
to think that God will share His powers with His servants and have partners
with Him from amongst His creation I11
5. The Qur'lln also assorts with full and repeated emphasis that God has
created His bounties for men so that they use them for their benefit. Il is
not His intent that men should have nothing to do with them and live a life
of renunciation. However, He desires that they should distinguish between
things pure and impure, lawful and unlawful. They should use and exploit
only what is pure and lawful, and there too should observe moderation.11
• Qur'an, vi. 185; xvu, 21. 30; xxxiv, 30; xiii. 12; xliii, 32.
•• Ibid., iv. 32.
11 This will be absolutely clear on reading SQrah xvi, venwe 71-76, and Surah
xxx. verses 20-2S. The subject of discussion in both cases is the assertion of the
unity of God and refutation of polytheism.
Qur'an, ii. 20 168; v, 88; vii. 31. 32; Ivii, 27.
180
Economic anti Political Teachings of tho Qur’an
6. To achieve this end the Qur’&n ordains that wealth should be acquired
by lawful means only and that unlawful ways and means should be discarded
altogether: "0 you who believe, take not your wealth among yourselves in
wrongful ways, but let there be trade among you by mutual agreement. . .
These "wrongful ways'' have been detailed at length by the Holy Prophet
and the great jurists of Islam have elucidated them in books of law. Some
of them, however, have been described in the Qur'an as under:
(a) "And do not eat one another's property among youreelves in wrongful
ways, nor seek by it to gain the nearness of the judges that you may sinfully
consume a portion of other men's goods and that knowingly."'*
(b) "If one of you deposits a thing on trust with another, let him who is
trusted (faithfully) deliver his trust, and let him fear God, hiB Lord.”* 18
(c) "He who misappropriates (tho public money) will come on the Day of
Judgment with what he has misappropriated, then shall everyone be given
in full what he earned.
(d) "The thief, male or female, out off his or her hands."1’
(e) "Those who devour the property of orphans unjustly, devour fire in
their bellies, and will soon enduro a blazing tire.”18
(f) "Woe to the defrauders who, when they take tho measure from men, exact
full measure, but when they measure or weigh for them, give leu than is due."'*
(g) "Those who love that indecent things should spread among the believers,
for them is a painful chastisement, in the life of this world and the hereafter.”’8
(h) “Force not your slave-girls to prostitution that you may enjoy (some)
gain of the present life, if they desire to live in chastity."’1 "And approach
18 Ibid.. iv. 29. By trade is meant exchange of commodities and services. (Al-
JawM, AhUm aJ-Qur an. Vol. II. p. 21. Matba'at al-Bahiyyab, Egypt. 1347/1928;
ibn al-'Arabi. Ahbdm al-Qur'dn, Vol. I, p. 17, Matba'at al-Sa'Adah, Egypt. 1331/1912.)
The condition of "by mutual agreement" explains that there should be no coer
cion. fraud, or trick about it to which the other party would not agree if it camo
to ita notice.
“ Qur'an, ii, 188. Seeking to gain the nearness of the judges includes resorting
to law-courts to lay a false claim to other people's property, or offering bribes to
tho judges to obtain a favourable decree. (Altai, op. cit. Vol. II. p. 60.)
18 Qur'an, ii. 283.
■■ Ibid., iii, 161.
*’ Ibid., v. 41.
>■ Ibid., iv. 10.
'• Ibid.. Ixxxiii, 1-3.
Ibid., xxiv. 19.
81 Ibid., xxiv, 33. The purpose of this veree is to prohibit prostitution. Slave
girls are mentioned because in old Arabia prostitution was conducted with slave-
girls. People would install their young and beautiful slaves in tho brothels and eat
of their earnings. (Ibn Jarir. Jimi' al-Baydn fi Ta/rir al.Qur’dn. Vol. XVIII.
pp. 55-58, 103-04, Mafba'at al-Amtriyyah. Egypt, 1328/1910; ibn KaUjir, Ta/nr
al-Qurdn ol.'Arlm, Vol. IU, pp. 89. 288, Matba'ab Muf|afa Muhammad. Egypt.
1947; ibn ‘Abd al-Barr. al lxi'db. Vol. U, p. 762, Dairstul-Maarif. Hyderabad.
1337/1918.)
181
A Hwtory of Muslim Philosophy
not fornication, surely it is • shameful deed and an evil way."’* “The adulterer
and the adulteress, flog each of them with a hundred stripea."
**
(i) "0 ye believers, wine and gambling and idols and divining arrows are
an abomination—of Satan's handiwork; so avoid them that you may
**
prosper."
(j) "God has permitted trade and forbidden usury.”** "0 ye believers, fear
God and give up what remains (due to you) of usury if you are believers
(indeed). If you do not do so, take notice of war from God and His Messenger.
But if you repent you shall have your principal. Neither you wrong, nor shall
you be wronged. If the debtor is in straintened circumstanoes, give him time
till it is easy (for him to pay), and that you remit (the debt), by way of charity,
that is the best thing for you, if you ordy knew.”’*
Thus we see that the Qur'&n has prohibited the following ways of acquiring
wealth: (i) Taking another’s property without his oonsent or remuneration,
or with consent and with or without remuneration in such a way that the
consent is forced or obtained by guile, (ii) Bribes, (iii) Forcible acquisitions,
(iv) Fraud, whether with private or public wealth, (v) Theft, (vi) Mis
appropriation of orphans' property, (vii) Taking or giving wrong measure
(viii) Businesses which help to spread indecency, (ix) Prostitution and its
earnings, (x) Manufacture, buying and selling, and carriage of wines, (xi)
Gambling, including ail suoh ways in which the transfer of wealth from one
person to another depends on mere chance, (xii) Manufacture, buying, and
selling of idols, and service of temples where idols are kept or worshipped,
(xiii) Earnings from businesses liko astrology, foretelling of fate, divination,
etc. (xiv) Usury.
“ Qur'An. xvii, 32.
’■ Ibid., xxiv, 2. Along with making adultery a criminal offence, the earnings
of adultery are also declared forbidden. The Prophet of God (may peace bo upon
him) called it the moat abominable of earnings. (BukbAri, Book 34, Ch. 113; Book 37,
Ch. 20; Book 68. Ch. 50; Book 76. Ch. 46; Book 77. Ch. 96; Muslim. Book 22.
Tr.No. 39,41; abu D&wud, Book 22, Ch. 39. 63; Tirmidhi. Book 9. Ch. 37; Book 12.
Ch. 46; Book 26. Ch. 23; NasA'i, Book 42. Ch. 5; Book 44, Ch. 90; ibn Majah.
Book 12. Ch. 9.)
•• Qur'&n, v, 93. Tho manufacture of and trading in all things prohibited in the
Qur'an arc also prohibited. Full prohibition calls for complete ban on profiting
by anything connected with what is prohibited. (Al-Ja^A^. op. eii., Vol. II. p. 212.)
M Qur'&n, ii, 270. This makes it clear that in the case of trade the profit which
a person makes over his invested capital, or in tho event of a partnership in trade
the profit which the partners of an enterprise divide according to their shares in it,
is lawful and allowed, but whatever a creditor chargee from his debtor over his
principal is unlawful and God does not allow it as truly earned income like the
profit oarnod in trade.
•• Ibid., ii, 276-80. It is evident from the words used here that this injunction
w related to transactions of debt and in such transactions if a creditor charges
anything more than what he has advanced it would be riba (excess, usury, interest).
The rate of interest to bo chargod, high or low, makes no difference in it. It ia also
immaterial for what purpose the sum is borrowed.
182
Economic and Political Teachings of the Qur'&n
7. After prohibiting these wrong ways of acquiring wealth the Qur'An also
strongly condemns the amassing of wealth in a covetous and niggardly way.”
Along with this we are warned that love of wealth or a hankering after
riches and pride of fortune have always been among the causes that have led
men astray and ultimately Bent them to ruin.’*
8. On the other hand, tho Qur'&n condemns it in equally strong terma that
one should squander one’s properly acquired wealth in wasteful pursuits,
spend it for one's own lust or luxury, and put it to no use save raising one's
own standard of living."
9. The proper course for man, according to the Qur’in, is to spend moderately
on his own needs and those of his family. He and his dependants have rights
to his wealth which must be granted without stint, but he cannot be allowed
to squander everything on himself and his family, for there are other obliga.
tions, too. which must be recognised.”
10. After he has satisfied his own needs with moderation, a man should
spend what is left over of his well-earned wealth in the following ways:
"They ask you what they should sperd (in oharity). Say: 'Whatever
exceeds your needs."'*1
“It is not piety that you turn your faces towards east or west. Piety is
that a man should believe in God and the Last Day and the angels and
the Book and tho Prophets, and give his wealth for the love of God to his
kinsfolk and the orphans and the needy and the traveller and to those who
ask, and for setting the slaves free.’’”
"You will never attain piety until you spend what you love (of your
wealth). And whatever you spend, God knows it well."*’
“Serve God, and associate no partner with Him. and bo kind to parents
and kinsmen and orphans and tho needy, and the neighbour who is of kin,
and the neighbour who is a stranger, and the companion by your aide, and
the traveller, and the slaves that your right hands own. Surely God does
not love the proud and the boastful.”*1
"(Charity is) for those poor people who are so restrained in the way of
God that they cannot travel in the land to earn their living." The ignorant
•' Ibid., iii. 180: ix. 34; xlvii. 38; lvii, 24; Ixiv. 16; Ixix, 34; lxx, 21; lxxiv, 45;
Ixxxix, 15-20; xcii, 11; civ, 3; evil. 1, 2. 3, 7.
Ibid., xxviii, 58; xxxiv, 34, 35; cii. 1-3.
“ Ibid., vi, 141; vii, 31; xvii, 23.
10 Ibid., xvii, 29; xxv, 67; xxviii, 77.
•> Ibid., ii, 219.
« Ibid., ii. 177.
•• Ibid., iii, 92.
■* Ibid., iv. 36.
11 In tho days of the Holy Prophet those wore the four hundred volunteers who
had come from the four comers of Arabia and settled at Madinah. They had
dedicated their lives to the pursuit of tho knowledge of Islam and were prepared
to go with any expedition of propagation or war when and wherever tho Holy
183
A History of Muslim Philosophy
man regards them as wealthy because of their self-possession. You shall
know them by their mark, they do not beg of men importunately. What
ever (wealth) you spend (on them) God surely knows it."’*
"They (the righteous) feed the needy, the orphan, and the captive, for
the love of God, saying: We feed you for the sake of God alone. We desire
no reward from you nor any thanks.”'*’
"(Excepted from the fire of hell are) those in whoso wealth there is a
fixed portion for the beggar and the destitute.”’*
The Qur’an not only tells that this kind of spending is the essence of piety
but also warns that its absence in a society must mean its decay and
ruination:
"Expend in the way of God. and cast not yourself with your own hands
into ruin.””
11. Besides this general and voluntary spending in the way of God the
Qur'an enjoins expending of wealth aa expiation of omissions and sins For
instance, if a man takes an oath and then forswears it, “the expiation for it
is to feed ten poor persons with the average of food which you serve to your
own folk, or to clothe them, or to give a slave his freedom; or if anyone
does not find (the wherewithal to do so) lot him fast three daya."*’
Similarly, if anyone makes his wife unlawful for him by declaring her to be
his mother or sister by {iAdr41 and later seeks to retract and take her again,
it is ordained that "he should free a slave before the two touch each other,
and he who has not (the wherewithal for that) should fast for two months
oonsecutively ... and he who is unable to do so let him feed sixty poor per
sons."*’
Like expiations have also been ordained to make up for omissions in the
performance of pilgrimage" and proper observance of the month of fasting."
Prophet sent them. Having devoted their whole time to those sra-vicce they could
do little to ram their livelihood. (Zamakhahari, al-Kathshbf, Vol. I. p. 128, al-
Mafba'at al-Bahlyyah, Egypt. 1343/1924.} Similarly, thia venae will now apply to
those persona who devote their whole time to study, or propagation of faith or
other works of social welfare and do not find opportunity to attend to their own
business.
Qur’iln, ii, 273.
•' Ibid., lxxvi. 8-9.
Ibid., lxx, 25.
" Ibid., ii. 195.
Ibd' v. 89.
41 It was an old Arab custom to divorce a woman by uttering the formula
"Thou art to ny, aa the back of my mother." This formula was called “the riAdr."
Divorce by riAor freed tho husband from any responsibility for conjugal duties
hut did not leave the wife free to leave tho husband’s home or to contract a second
marriage. This pagan system of divorce unfair to women was abolished (Iviii. 2).
41 Qur’ftn, Iviii, 4,
44 Ibid., ii. 198: v, 95
44 Ibid., ii. 184
184
Economic and Political Teachings of the Qur'An
12. But all such expense will count as expense in God's way only if it is
really free from selfishness, guile, and display, and there is no attempt to
hurt or lay anyone under obligation. One must also make no attempt to sort
out the worse of one's goods to disburse in charity. One must give the choice
of them, and bear nothing in mind except the love and pleasure of God.41*
13. This expending of wealth which the Qur'An variously terms as "spending
in God's way" or charity or satai, is not a mere act of piety, an almsgiving;
rather it is the third among the five pillars of Islam, viz., (I) tho witness of
faith (imdn), (2) prayer (fatal), (3) charity (lahU), (4) fasting (faum) and
(5) pilgrimage (hajj). It has been mentioned constantly with prayer (fatal)
some thirty-seven times in the Qur'An and both of them have been described
with full emphasis as essentials of Islam, without which there can be no sal
vation.44 Zaitdl, it says, has been a pillar of true religion preached by all the
prophets of God.4’
And so this satai is a pillar of Islam now in the religion of the last Prophet
of God. It is aa essential for one who joins the fold of Islam aa bearing witnee-
to the truth of faith (Imdn) or prayer fjaH//44
Zmhil is not only for the good of society; it is also necessary for the moral
development and edification of the giver himself. It is for his own purification
and salvation. It is not only a tax, but also an act of worship just like prayer.
It is an essential part of that programme which the Qur’an prescribes for the
amelioration of man’s soul.44
14. But the Qur’An was not content to infuse a general spirit of voluntary
benevolence and philanthropy among people. Il instructed the Prophet aa
the Head of the Islamic State to fix an obligatory minimum for it, and
arrange for its regular receipt and disbursement.
"Take a charity from their wealth.”44
The words “a charity” pointed out that a certain fixed measure determined
by the Prophet was to be enjoined on poople, besides the usual charity they
practised of their own accord. Accordingly, the Prophet fixed a maximum
allowable limit in respect of different kinds of wealth, and the following rates
were fixed for the holdings that stood above that limit:41
44 Ibid.. ii. 262-63, 268. 271; iv. 38; xxiv, 33.
44 Ibid., ii. 3, 43. 83. 110. 177, 277; iv. 77, 162; V, 12, 55; viii, 3; ix. 5, 11. 18. 71;
xiii. 22; xiv, 31; xix, 31. 55; xxi. 73; xii. 35. 41. 78; xxiii. 2; xxiv, 37, 56; xxvii. 3;
xxxi, 4; xxxiii. 33; xxxv, 29; xiii, 38; Iviii. 13; Ixx. 23; lxxiii. 20; lxxiv, 43; xcviii. 5;
cvii.
44 Ibid., ii, 83; xix, 30, 31. 65; xxi. 73; xcviii, 5.
44 Ibid., ii. 2. 3; V. 55; viii. 2. 3. 4; ix. 11; xxii. 78.
44 Ibid., iii, 92; ix. 103; Ixiv. 16.
44 Ibid., ix, 103.
41 Al-Sbauk&ni, Nail al-Auldr. Vol. IV. pp 98. 126. Mu*|afa al-B&bi. Egypt.
1347/1928.
185
A History of Muslim Philosophy
(1) On gold, silver, and cash hoardings
** 2J4% annually
(2) On agricultural produce from unirrigated land 10 % annually
(3) On agricultural produce from artificially irrigated land 5 % annually
(4) On livestock kept for breeding and trade—the rates are
diffeient for sheep, goats, cows, camels, etc.
(5) On mines in private ownership and treasure-troves 20 % annually
The Prophet of God imposed these rates of zahU as a duty on Muslims like
the five daily prayers. As duties, and in being incumbent, there is no difference
between the two. Acoording to the Qur'an, it is one of the basic objects of an
Islamic State that it should institute prayer (aalai) and manage regular re
ceipt and distribution of zatdl.81
It should be noted that although, as seen above, the collection and disburse
ment of zaial is a duty of an Islamio State, the believers will not be absolved
from paying it (privately), just as they are not absolved from prayer, in case
the Islamic State ceases to exist or is neglectful of its duty.
15. To the funds collected under zalcal the Qur’itn adds another item—a part
of the spoils of war. The rule prescribed by the Book is that the soldiers fighting
in a battle should not loot tho spoils which fall into their hands after a victory,
but bring everything before the commander who should distribute four-fifth
of the whole booty amongst soldiers who participated in the engagement and
hand over the remaining fifth to the State for the following purposes:
"Know that whatever booty you take, the fifth of it is for God and the
Prophet and the kinsmen and the orphans and the needy and the traveller."
**
16. The income from these two sources, according to the Qur'&n, is not a
part of the general exchequer maintained to furnish comforts and provide for
essential services for all including those who contribute to the zabal fund. On
the contrary, it is reserved for use on the following items:
"Alms are meant for the poor ** **
and the needy and those who work on
•• Later it was decided by ijmS' (consensus of opinion) that zak/U on merchandise
goods would also bo chargod at tho rate of 2>4 % per annum. (Al-Shauk*ni, op. oik.
Vol. JV, p. 117.) This principle of ailxU on commerco will likewise apply to factories
which manufacture different kinds of goods for sale.
•' Qur'in. ix, 103; xxii, 41; xxiv, 65, 56.
“ Ibid., viii, 41. During his life, the Prophot took a part of this fifth of spoils
for his own and his kins' needs os neither he nor they had any right in zakiu. After
his lioath it was a disputed point as to who should take the Prophet's and kinsmen's
share. Some people opinod that the Prophet was entitled to it fur being the Head
of the State and thus after his death it should go to the Caliph and his kinsfolk.
Others thought that it should still belong to the kinsfolk of the Prophet. At last it
was agreed that it should bo set aside for the military requirements of tho Islamio
State (Al JastAs, op. cit.. Vol. Ill, pp. 75, 77.)
“ Arabic luqara', singular /ayir. Literally, faqr is want, and fuqara' are those
who earn loss than they need and thus deserve help. (Lisdn oL'Arah, Vol. V. pp.
«U. 61, Beirut, 1»56.)
•• Arabic miwMIn, singular misHn. Tho Caliph Umar says that misHn is he
who cannot ram his living nr does not find opportunity to do so. (AI JspM. op. cit..
186
Economic and Political Teachings of tho Qur'&n
them (i.e., collect, disburse, and manage them) and those whose hearts are
to be reconciled,” for the ransoming of slave®1* and those in debt, and the
cause of God
** *®
and the traveller —a duty from God.”*1
17. The Qur’inic rule with regard to the property which a person leaves
behind him after his or her death is that it should be distributed among his
parents, children, and wife (or husband, as the ease may be) according to a
specified ratio. If he leaves neither parents nor children, his brothers and
sisters (real. step, or uterine) should divide it. Detailed instructions relating
to this may be seen in chapter iv of the Qur’in.
** We omit to reproduoe them
here to avoid prolixity.
The guiding principle here is that property accumulated by a person during
his life-time should not remain accumulated there after his death but scatter
among his kinsfolk. This is opposed to tho principle underlying primogeniture,
the joint family, and other like systems which aim at keeping accumulated
wealth accumulated even after the death of its holder.
The Qur’An also rejects the system of adopting children to make them heirs,
and lays down that inheritance should go to those who are actually related,
not to those fictitiously adopted as sons and daughters to pass on property.
* ’
Vol. III. p. 151.) According to thia definition, all those helpleaa children who are
not yet able to earn, and the eripple, and the old who are no longer able to make a
living, and the unemployed, and tho invalids who are temporarily rendered unfit
to earn livelihood, aro moadhln,
•’ Three kinds of men were given money for "reconciling of hearts," during the
Prophot's life: 1. Staunch opponents of Islam who persecuted weak Muslims or
set thcmeelvee hard against the faith were given something and persuaded to
adopt a lenient attitude. 2. Those who forcibly prevented the fieopta of their tribes
or clans from embracing Islam wore persuaded to give up this obstruction. 3. Tho
new entrants in fa'th were given monetary help to get over their financial difficulties,
so that they should five in their new environments amoung Muslims with equani
mity. (AI-JaH&e, op. al.. Vol. HI; p. 162.)
•• Kofere to tho Muslims who were captured in war by the enemies aa well as the
n..n-Muslims who came as war captives to tho Muslims and wanted to bo sot free
on payment of ransom; reference is also to tho staves who lived in bondage from old.
*• Tho cause of God includes jihad (war) and hajj (pilgrimage). Ono who proceeds
on war can avail oneself of zohdr even if one ia well-to-do so far aa personal effects
go, because one's persona) offsets aro often inadequate to enable one to prepare
for war and provide for the expenses of tho way. Similarly, one who runs short of
money on pilgrimage deserves to be helped with rntdl. (al-JawM. op. at.. Vol. Ill,
pp. 156-67; al-ShaukAni, op. cd., Vol. IV, pp. 144-46.)
•• A traveller, even though he is rich at home, deserves to be helped with lakil
if ho runs short of money on the way (Al-JawM. op. oil.. Vol. Ill, p. 157).
** Qur'An, ix, 60.
•• Verses 7-12 and 176. According to the Holy Prophet's elucidation, in the
absence of the nearest relations tho inheritance will go to the nearer, and in their
absence, aa a last resort, to those who have at least some relation with the deceased
in comparison with more strangers. But if tho deceased leave no rotation of any
kind, the property will bo added to the general exchequer of tho Islamic State.
(Al-Shaukilni, op. etl.. Vol. VI, pp. 47. 56.)
•* Qur’An. xxxiii, 4, 6.
187
A History of Muslim Philosophy
However, after ensuring blood relations their rights, the Qur'in advises
them to be generous to the other relations who are not going to inherit but
are present on the occasion of the division of property. They also may be given
something out of kindness ***
18. In prescribing the law of inheritance the Qur'&n allows a person's right
to make a will before he dies in respect of the property he is leaving behind
him **
This ordinance instructs a man who is passing away to urge his offspring to
be kind to his parents—the young being often inclined to neglect the proper
care of their aged grand-parents; and to bequeath some of his property to
those of his kinsfolk who deserve help but are not entitled to inherit anything
under the law. Besides this if a person is leaving much wealth he may bequeath
a part of it for charitable purposes or works of social welfare, for the above
quoted verse does not ask him to restrict his will to his parents and relatives
alone. “
It is evident from these laws of inheritance that the rule in respect of the
heritage of private property is that two-thirds of it must be divided among
legal heirs and the remaining one-third left to the discretion of the dying
person to dispose it of as he wills, provided, however, the purpose for which
he means to bequeath it is just and lawful, and no one is robbed of his right.*’
19. As for those people who cannot husband their property well on account
of idiocy or want of intelligence and are wasting it away or, it is genuinely
feared, are likely to do so, the instruction is that they may not be allowed to
hold it in their care. Such property should lie in the care of their guardians or
responsible judicial offioera and may be restored to them only when there is
satisfaction that they are able to manage their affairs properly." An important
point described in this verse about private possessions is that although they
are the property of their owners according to law, yet they do not wholly be
long to them, because the interest of society is also involved in them. That is
why the Qur'&n calls them "your property" instead of "their property." That
“ Ibid., iv. 8. fl.
“ Ibid., ii, 180.
•• Al-Sbauk&ni. op. oil., Vol. VI. pp. 3S, 33. Seen in tho light of the Holy Prophet's
elucidation, the Qur'&n does not -seem to favour tho idea that ono should leave
one's kinsfolk deprived and spend on works of social welfare. The words of tho
Prophet quoted in Nail al-AaUtr from Bukh&ri. Muslim, and other books of Tradi
tion are: "Your leaving your heirs rich is bettor than your leaving them poor,
spreading thoir hands before people (for holpj."
•’ Elucidating the law in this matter, the Prophet of God (may peace be upon
him) has imposed three restrictions on the right of demise. First, that a person
can exercise this right to the extent of one-third of his property only. Secondly,
that no will should be made in favour of any of the legal heirs without taking the
consent of other heirs. Thirdly, a will cannot be made to deprive an heir of his
entitlement or to give him less than his duo share. (Al-SbaukAni. op. cil., Vol. VI,
pp. 31. 35.)
M Qur'&n. iv, 5. 0.
188
Economic and Political Teachings of tho Qur'An
ia also why, where unintelligent use of private property is causing, or is likely to
i-ause, harm to the collective interest of society, it allows guardians or magis
trates to take it over in their own hands, without, however, disturbing the
owner's right of owning it or benefiting by it."
20. The Qur’Anic direction in respect of properties, wealth, and incomes
that belong to the State is that they should not be used for the welfare
of rich classes only but of all alike and particularly the poor whose interest
deserves more looking after than that of any other class.
"Whatever God has bestowed on His Messenger, (taking it) from the people
of these towns, is for God and the Messenger* 70 and the kinsfolk71 and the
orphans and the needy and the traveller, in order that it may not circulate
among the rich of you (only).... (It ia also) for the poor emigrants who have
been expelled from their homes and possessions."70
21. In the matter of levying taxes the Qur'an teaches the principle that
their incidence should lie on those who possess more than they need, and on
that part of their wealth which ia surplus after all legitimate needs have been
met.
"They ask you what they should spend. Say: ‘What is spare after meeting
your needs.’”’0
The characteristic features and basic principles of the economio scheme
drawn by the Qur'An for man and described in the above twenty-one para
graphs may be summed up as follows:
i. It works a happy co-ordination between economic and moral values.
Instead of being treated aa distinctly separate things, tho two are drawn to
gether into a harmonious blend. The economic problem has bean tackled not
from the purely "economic" point of view; it has been solved after being
appropriately placed in the overall scheme of life based on ethical concepts
of Islam. (Paras 1, 2, 4, S.)
ii. AU resources and means of living are regarded aa God's magnanimous
gift to mankind; this implies that aU kinds of monopolization, individual,
coUective, or national, should be disoouraged and all men should be provided
with free opportunities of earning on God's earth to the maximum limit
possible. (Para 5.)
iii. It allows individual right of ownership but not to an unlimited extent.
Besides putting restrictions on it in the interest of other individuals and society
as a whole, it admits on a person’s property the rights of his relatives, neigh-
Ibn al-'Arabi. op. oil., Vol. I. p. 123; ibn Kathtr. Ta/tlr al-Qur'an, Vol. I. p.
482; al-JawA*, op. cit., Vol. II. pp. 72. 73.
70 By this is meant tho expenditure on the administration and defence of th*
Islamic Stat*. The Holy Prophet (on whom be peace) and his successors, tho Caliplw
drew their own subsistence and paid their officials (except those of the told
department) from this source.
71 For explanation, see note 54.
70 Qur'An, lix. 7-8.
70 Ibid., ii, 219.
189
A History of Muslim Philosophy
hours, friendB, the needy. the unfortunate, and, so to speak, of all members of
society. Some of these are made enforceable by law; aa for others, arrangement
has been made to educate people morally and intellectually enabling them to
understand these rights and prepare themselves to honour them of their own
free-will. (Paraa 3, 5. 7-14, 16, 18. 19.)
iv. The natural way- for the economic system to operate according to this
scheme is that individuals should work it and try to improve it with free
endeavour. However, they are not left to do as they may without checks and
restraints of any kind. For thoir own cultural and economic welfare and for
that of their society thia freedom has been curtailed within limits. (Paraa 6,
14. 21.)
v. Man and woman are alike declared owners of the wealth they earn, in
herit, or acquire by other lawful means, and allowed to derive benefit from
their possessions. (Paraa 3, 4, 17.)
vi. To preserve economio balance people have been urged to give up miserli
ness and renunciation, and take to putting the gifts of God to good use But
at the same time they have been strongly warned not to indulge in extrava
gance of any kind. (Paraa 5, 7, 8-)
vii. To secure economic justice it has been assured that unjust means are
not employed to force the flow of wealth in particular channels. Nor should
wealth acquired by just means remain stored at a place and fall out of circula
tion. Arrangement is also made to ensure that wealth remains in constant use
and circulation, particularly for the benefit of those classes which are deprived
of their due and reasonable share for one reason or another. (Paras 6-8. 10,
11, 14, 16-18, 20.)
viii. The scheme does not depend much upon the interference of law or the
State to ensure economic juBtioe. After declaring a few unavoidable things to
be the responsibility of the State for this purpose, it seeks to enforce the other
items in it« plan through the intellectual and moral uplift of the individuals
comprising a society and its general amelioration. Economic justice is thus
secured in perfect concoid with the principle of allowing the exercise of in
dividual freedom in the economic field. (Paras 5-21.)
ix. Instead of producing class-conflict it puts an end to the causes of such
conflicts and produces a spirit of co-operation and comradeship among the
different classes of society. (Paras 4, 6-10, 12, 14-16, 20, 21.)
When these principles were worked out and put into practice in govern
mental and social spheres during the time of tho Holy Prophet and his
"Guided Successors," many more injunctions and precedents came into exist
ence. But our present study precludes that discussion. Books of history, bio
graphy. traditions, and jurisprudence abound in such matters and may be
consulted for details.
190
Economic and Political Teachings of the Qur'an
B
POLITICAL TEACHINOS
1. The political philosophy of tho Qur'&n ia essentially based on its fun
damental concept of tho universe which should be clearly kept in mind for
its proper appreciation and right appraisal. If wo study thia concept of the
universe from the political point of view, the following four points vividly
come into prominence:
(a) That God ia the creator of tho whole of thia universe including man and
all those things which he exploits and harnesses into his service.’1
(b) That God Himself ia the sole master, ruler, director, and administrator
of His creation.’1
(c) That sovereignty in this universe does not and cannot vest tn anyone
except God. Nor has anyone else any right to share this sovereignty with
Him."
(d) That all attributes and powers of sovereignty are solely His prerogatives.
He is living, Bolf-existent, self-sufficient, eternal, omniscient, omnipotent, and
exalted above all flaw, defect, or weakness. His ia the supreme authority;
everything submits to Him willingly or unwillingly; to Him belong all powers.
He can dictate whatever He likes and none has the power to interfere in or
review His commandments. No one can intercede with Him save by His leave.
Nobody has the power to harm those whom He intends to benefit and none
can protect whom He intends to harm. He is accountable to none; everyone
else is accountable to Him. He is the guardian of one and all. He can protect
against all, but none can give quarters against Him. His are the powers of
inflicting punishment or granting forgiveness. He is the supreme Lord over
all other rulers. He grants an opportunity to rule on His earth to whomsoever
He desire* and withdraws this privilege whenever He so wills.
These essential powers and attributes of a sovereign being vest solely in
God.”
2. On the basis of this concept of the universe the Qur'Jn asserts that, the
real sovereign of mankind too ia the same as the sovereign of the wholo uni-
vereo. Hie is the only rightful authority in human affairs just as in all other
affairs of creation. No one else, be ho human or non-human, has any right to
give orders or decide matters independently.
There ia, however, one vital difference.
In the physical sphere of the universe the sovereignty of God is established
'• Ibid., ii. 29; iv, 1; vi. 73; xiii. 16; xxxv. 3; lv>, 08-72.
™ Ibid., vii, 54; xx. 8; xxx. 26; xxxii. 5.
'• Ibid., ii, 107; iii. 154; vi. 57; xiii. 16; xvi. 17; xviii. 26; XXV, 2; xxviii. 70;
xxx. 4; xxxv, 40-41; Ivii. 5.
” Ibid., ii. 256. 284; iii. 26, 83; v. 1; vi, 18; vii. 128; x. 65. 107; xiii. 8. 41; xviii.
II. 26. 27; xxi. 23; xxiii. 88; xxxvi, 83; lix. 23; Ixvii, 1; Ixxii. 22: Ixxxv. 13-16;
xcv, 8.
191
A Hmtory of Muslim Philosophy
by itself regardless of whether one willingly submits to it or not. In that sector
of his life even man has no option to do otherwise. He too finds himself totally
regulated by the inexorable laws of nature like any other object from the tiniest
speck of an atom to the magnificent galaxies in apace. But in the volitional
sphere of his life man has been allowed a certain amount of free-will and God
has not coerced him to an unwilling submission. Herein He has chosen only
to invite and persuade mankind through His revealed Books (the last of which
is the Holy Qur'&n) to surrender themselves before His Lordship and acknow
ledge His sovereignty with deliberate willingness. The Qur'&n has discussed
the different aspects of this subject at great length. For instanoe:
(a) The Lord of the universe is indeed the Lord of man, and this position
must be fully recognised by him.’"
(b) God alone has the right to decide and order. Mankind should submit
to none save Him. ThiB is the only right course.”
(c) The right to rule belongB to God alone because He is the creator. *•
(d) The right to order and decide belongs to God because He is the ruler of
the universe.* 81*
(e) His rule is right and just, because He alone comprehends reality and
none else is in a position to give unerring guidance.88
3. On these grounds the Qur'&n lays down that an unadulterated obedience
is the due of God alone; that it. is His Law that should rule supreme; and that
to obey othera or to follow one’s own wishes against the Law of God, is not
the right way.88
The Qur'lln also asserts that no one has the right to transgress the limits
that have been laid down by God for the regulation of human affaire.84*
It also points out that all orders and decisions in contravention of the
law of God are not only wrong and unlawful but also unjust and blasphemous.
It condemns all such orders as anti-Islamic and the attempt to abide by them
as negation of faith.88
4. Then the Qur'&n says that prophets are the only source of our knowing
the Law of God. They alone are the bearera of revelation and are in a position
to convey to mankind the commandments and directions of their Lord. They
again are the persons divinely authorized to explain those commandments by
their word and deed. Thus, the prophets are embodiments of the legal
sovereignty of God. That is why obedienoe to them has been considered to
'• Ibid., vi. 104; vii. 54; x. 31; cxiv. 1-3.
" Ibid., iii. 154; xii, 40; xiii. 10.
” Ibid., vii. 54.
81 Ibid., v. 38-40.
Ibid.. ii. 210. 220. 235. 232; iv. 11. 176; viii. 75; ix. 60; xxiv. 58-50; Ix, 10.
■' Ibid., vii. 3; xiii. 37; xvi. 30; xxxix, 2, 11-12; xl. 18; xcviii.
•• Ibid.ii, 229; Iviii. 4; lxv, 1.
•• Ibid., iv. 60; V. 44 . 45. 46. 50,
192
Economic and Political Teachings of the Qur'fin
be obedience to God Himself and faith in them has been made a necessary
condition for demarcating belief from disbelief. ••
5. According to tho Qnr'in. the commandments of God and the Prophet of
Islam constitute the Supreme Law and the Muslims as such cannot adopt any
attitude other than that of complete submission to it. A Muslim is not allowed
to follow his own independent decisions in matters which have been finally
and unequivocally decided by God and His Apostle. To do that ia a negation
of faith.
* ’
6. The right form of government for mankind according to the Qur'an is
one in which the State relinquishes its claim to sovereignty in favour of God
and, after recognizing the legal supremacy of God and His Apostle, accepts
the position of Caliphate (vioegerency) under the suzerainty of the Rightful
Ruler. In this capacity all tho legislative, executive, and judicial powers of
the State will necessarily be circumscribed by tho limits which have boon
described in Paras 3, 4. and 5 above.
**
7. The conception of Caliphate as it has been put forth by the Qur'&n, can
be summed up in the following terms:
(a) All tho powers that man possesses in this world are in fact not his own.
but have been endowed to him by God Almighty. The Lord Himself has assign
ed to man the position in which be may exercise these delegated powers within
the limits prescribed by Him. Man is thus not an independent master but a
**
vicegerent of the real Sovereign.
(b) Every nation that acquires tho power and authority to rule over any
part of the world is in reality a vicegerent of God in ita domain.”
(c) Thia vicegcrency, howover, cannot be right and lawful unless it is sub
servient to the commandments of the real Sovereign. Any State independent
of Him and not subservient to His commands is not a vicegerency. It is really
a revolt against the Lord.
* 1
8. The powers of a true Caliphate do not vest in any individual nor in any
clan, class or community, but in those who believe and do good. The text of
xxiv. 55 that “God has promised to those of you who believe and do good
that He will most certainly make them His vicegerents on the earth . . is
quite clear on this point. According to this verse, every good Muslim is fit to
hold the position of a Caliph. It is this aspect of Islamic Caliphate that distin
guishes it from a kingship, an oligarchy, and a theocracy. It is different even
from modern democracy. There is a basio difference between the two. The
edifice of democracy is raised on the principle of popular sovereignty; while
in Islamic Caliphate the people themselves surrender their independence to
•• find., iv. fit, 65, 80. 115; fix. 7.
” Ibid., iv. 51; xxiv. 47-48; xxxiii, 36
•• Ibid., v, 48; xxxviii. 26.
Ibid., ii. 31; vii. 10; xxii, 65.
« Ibid., vii, 69. 74, 120; x. 14.
•< Ibid., xxiv. 55; xxxv, 39; Ixxxi, 17-24; Ixxxix, 6-11.
193
A History of Muslim Plulosophy
the sovereignty of God and of their own accord limit their powers within tho
four corners of the divine Law and the promise of vioegerenev has been held
out to them only if they are morally good.
0. The government of a State established with a view to running an Islamic
Caliphate cannot claim an absolute or unlimited obedience from the people.
They are bound to obey it only so far as it exorcises its powers in accordance
with tho divine Law revealed in nature and tho Sacred Book. There can be
neither obedience nor co-operation in sin and aggression."
10. In all affairs of the State, right from ita constitution to the election of
ita Head and members of its parliament, and the matters of legislation and
administration, tho Muslims should make it a rule to take counsel among them
selves.’’
11. The following qualifications must bo kept in view in choosing tho people
responsible to run the State:
(a) They must have faith in the principles according to which they have
to manage the affairs of the Caliphate. Evidently, an ideological system can
not work in the hands of those who do not subscribe to ita principles."
(b) They should not be unjust, licentious, forgetful of God, or transgressors
of divine limits. They should be, on the other hand, honest, trustworthy, God
fearing. and virtuous."
(c) They should not l»o unwise and ignorant. They must bo rather oducated,
wise, intelligent, and both bodily and intellectually fit to pilot tho State.”
(d) They should he men of integrity so that they may be safely entrusted
with public responsibilities."
12. Tho constitution of Buch a State shall be based on the following princi
ples:
(a) “0 ye who believe! obey Allah, and obey the Apostle and those of you
vho ire in authority; and if you have a disputo concerning any matter, refer
it to Allah and the Apostle if ye are (in truth) believers in Allah and the Last
Dav That is better and more seemly in the end.""
This verse elucidates five constitutional points: —
(i) That obedienoo to God and His Apostle must bo given priority to
every other obedience.
(ii) That obedience to those who are in authority is subject to the
obedience to God and His Apostle.
lii) That the Head of the State must be from amongst the believers.
Ibid., v. 2; lx, 12; Ixxvi. 24
Ibid., xlii. 38.
•• find., iii. 118; iv, 58; IX. 1U.
" Ibui.. il. 124; xvili, 28; xxvi, 131-132; xxxviii. 28; xlix, 13.
“ Ibid., ii. 247; iv, 5, 83; xii. 55; xxxviii. 20; xxxix. 8.
" Ibid., iv. 58.
•• Ibid., iv. 58.
194
Economic and Political Teachings of the Qur'An
(iv) That it is possible for the people to differ with the government and its
nilcra.
(v) That in case of dispute the final authority to decide between them is
the Law of God and His Apostle.
(b) The Qur’An does not give us any hard and fast rules about the method of
election and consultation. It lays down only broad-based principles and leaves
the problem of their practical implementation to be decided in accordance
with tho exigencies of time and the requirements of society.
<c) In those matters about which clear injunctions have been given or
definite principles laid down or limits prescribed by God and His Apostle, the
legislature has only the right to interpret them, or to frame bye-laws and rules
of procedure to bring them into practice. As for those matters about which
the Supreme Law is silent, tho legislature is allowed to legislate for all pur
poses and needs of the society keeping in view the spirit and the general
principles of Islam. The very fact that no dear injunction exists about them
in the Qur'An and Sunnah is sufficient to show that the Lawgiver has Him
self left it to the good sense of the believers.
(d) The judiciary must be free from every pressure and influence to adjudicate
impartially without being carried away by the public or the people in authority.
Its foremost duty is to give verdict strictly in accordance with the law and
requirements of justice without being swayed either by the passions or preju
dices of its own members or those of others.”
13. This State comes into being for two main purposes. First, that justice
and equity should be established in human affairs,10* and, secondly, that the
powers and resources of the State should be harnessed for tho welfare of the
people, i. e., for promotion, for them, of all that is good and eradication of all
that is evil.101
14. All citizens of tho State, whether Muslims or non-Muslims. must be
guaranteed the following fundamental rights, and it is the bounden duty of
the State to safeguard them against all types of encroachment: —
(a) Security of person.*100
(b) Security of property.100
(c) Protection of honour.10*
(d) Right of privacy.100
(e) The right to protest against injustice.100
•• Ibid., iv. 68; vi, 48; xxxviii, 26.
100 Ibid., lvii, 25.
101 Ibid., xxii, 41.
■" Ibid., xvii, 23.
100 Ibid., ii. 188; iv, 29.
<°* Ibid., xlix. 11-12.
10* Ibid., xxiv. 27; xlix. 12.
100 Ibid., iv. 148.
195
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
(f) The right to enjoin what is good and forbid what is evil Thia includes
the right of criticism.1*’
(g) Freedom of association, provided it is used for good ends and does not
become an instrument for spreading dissensions and creating funda
mental differences in tho society.1*’
(h) Freedom of faith and conscience.
(i) Protection against wrongfully hurting one's religious susceptibilities.11*
The Qur'&n has clearly laid down in this connection that in matters
of religious differences an academic discussion can be held, but it must
be conducted in a fair and decent manner.111
(j) Limiting the responsibility of every person only to his or her own deeds.111
(k) Security from action being taken against anyone on false reports about
his or her crime.11’
(l) The right of the destitute and the needy to be provided with basic
necessities of life by the State.11’
(m) Equal treatment of all ita subjects by the State without discrimination.11’
15. An Islamic State has the following rights against ita citizens-. —
(a) That they must submit to its authority.11*
(b) That thov must be law-abiding and should not disturb the public order
and tranquillity.11’
(c) They must give unstinted support to the State in ita rightful activities.11*
(d) They must be prepared to sacrifice their lifo and property for the
defenoe of the State.11’
16. The Qur'an gives the following important directions about the foreign
policy of the Islamic State: —
(a) Sanctity of treaties and pledges.”*
(b) Honesty and integrity in all transactions.1’1
(c) International justice.1”
(d) Respect for the rights of neutrals in war.1”
Ibid., iii. 110; v, 78-70; vii. 185.
”■ Ibid., iii, 11.
■“ Ibid., ii. 101. 258; X. 90.
”• Ibid., vi. 108.
111 Ibid., xxix. 46.
"’ Ibid., vi. 184; xvii. 15; xxxv. 18; xxxix, 7; liii. 38.
111 Ibid., iv. 58; xvii, 38; xlix. 6.
“• Ibid., li. 19.
Ibid., xxviii. 4.
>>• Ibid., iv. 59.
■” Ibid., v, 33; vii. 85.
“• Ibid., v. 2.
Ibid., ix. 38-41.
>'• Ibid., viii. 42, 58; ix, 7: xvi. 01-02; xvii. 34.
”> Ibid., xvi. 04.
Ibid., v. 8.
•” Ibid., iv. 90
196
Economic and Political Teachings of tho Qur'in
(o) Love of peace.”4
(f) Non-participation in the efforts directed to self-aggrandizement and
oppression in the world.1”
(g) Friendly treatment to all non-hoetilo powers.1"
(h) Fair deal with all those who are good and honcat in their dealings.
(i) Retaliation in proportion to the high-handedness ofothers and no more.'"
Tho salient features of the State envisaged in these sixteen points laid down
by the Holy Qur’an are as follows:
(i) This State is brought into existence by a conscious resolve on the part
of a politically free nation to renounce all claims to sovereignty in favour of
God Almighty, to surrender its autonomy accepting the position of vicegerency
under Him, and to work according to precepts and directions given by the
Book of God and the Sunnah of His Apostle.
(ii) It is theocratic in bo far as it is based on the doctrine of sovereignty of
God but, in actual and practical realization of this doctrine, it is vitally different
from theocracy. Instead of delegating the vicegerency of God to a particular
order of priests and vesting them with the full powers to rule, it vests the
believers whose deeds are good with the right of Caliphate.
(iii) It is democratic in the sense that the formation of government, change in
its administrative set-up, and its working wholly depend upon the general will.
But the rights of the people in this system are not so unlimited that they may
change the law of the State, its ideology, its internal and external policy, and
its resources according to their own sweet will. On the other hand, the Supreme
Law of God and His Apostle with its legal and moral code provides a permanent
and inviolable check which always keeps the life of the community on the right
keel and on a broad pattern which can be changed neither by the executive, nor
by the legislature, nor by the judiciary, nor even by the whole nation unless
it decides to renounoe the religion of God and break its pledge with Him.
(iv) It is an ideological State which must be run only by those who accept
its basic ideology and principles wholeheartedly. As for those who do not
subscribe to its ideology but live within its territorial bounds, the State
guarantees them the same civil rights aa are enjoyed by the other inhabitants
provided they pledge to behave aa law-abiding citizens.
(v) It is a State which makes no discrimination whatsoever on grounds
of race or colour and is not bound by any linguistic or geographical barriers.
It is a purely ideological State. All peoples, no matter to whatever race,
nation, or country they belong, can accept this ideology and become equal
partners in all the affairs of the State. Such an ideological State bids fair to
become a world State. But even if more than one such States are established
"• Ibid., via. 01.
Ibid., xxviii, 83-
1,4 Ibid., lx. 8.
Ibid.. Iv. 60.
“• Ibid . ii. 194: xvi, 126: xiii, 40-42.
197
A History of Muslim Philosophy
in different parts of the world, all of them will be equally Islamic. And in
stead of there being any nationalistic oonflicta among them, they will extend
fraternal support and co-operation to one another. Not only that, there is
every possibility of their joining together in a world confederation of their own.
(vi) The real spirit of this State lies in subordinating politics to morality
and conducting affairs conscientiously and God-fearingly. Honour and eminence
must come through moral excellence alone. Paramount importance should be
given to character besides ability in selecting men of authority. Honesty,
fairness, and justice are to prevail in every sphere of domestic administration.
And the whole foreign policy is to devolve upon truth, faithfulness, love of
peace, fair dealing, and international justice.
(vii) Policing is not the only function of thia State. It does not oome into
existence merely to maintain law and order and to defend its territory against
external attacks. It is a State with a purpose and a mission. It must positively
strive for tho achievement of social justice, promotion of good, and eradication
of evil.
(viii) Equality of rights, status and opportunities, supremacy of Law, co
operation in virtue and non-co-operation in vice, sense of accountability to
God Almighty, sense of duties more than that of rights, unity of purpose be
tween the individuals, society, and the State, guarantee of the basic necessities
of life to everyone in need, are the fundamental values of this State.
(ix) The relations between State and individual are bo balanced in this
system that neither the State has been vested with absolute authority reducing
individuals to virtual slavery, nor has individual freedom been allowed to
turn itself into licence threatening the interest of society. On the one hand,
by guaranteeing fundamental rights to its citizens and by making tho State
authority subjoct to the Supreme Law of God and the democratic process of
{Aura. it provides ample opportunities for the development of individual per
sonality and protection from undue interference by othera. And, on the other
hand, it binds the individual to a definite code of morality, makes it obligatory
for him faithfully to obey the orders of the State working in accordance with
the law of God, to co-opcrate wholeheartedly with it in the cause of virtue, to
avoid disturbing its tranquillity, and to sacrifice even his life and property in
ita defence.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
rile Qur'an; Baidiwi, Anudr al-TartU, Mustafa al-BAbi llalabi. Egypt., 1330/
1912; Xlusi, KuA al-Ma'Oni, Idkrat alTaba'at alMuntrlyyali, Egypt, 1343/1926;
al-Jaw&B. AMdm oI-Qur'da, Mafra at al-Bahlyyah. Egypt. 1347/1928; ibn ol-’Arabi.
AUdmal-Qur’dn.Matba'atal-Sa'Uab. Egypt, 1331/1912; ibn Jarir. Jdm. aZ.Haydn.
Matba'at alAmlriyyah, Egypt. 1328/1910; ibn KaJhir. Ta/rir alQur'in aTAzIm.
Matha Mu«|afa Muhammad, Egypt. 1947; al Zamakhtbari. al-Ka-Aihat, Mutba'at
al-Bahtyyah, Egypt. 1343/1924; al-BuUi&ri. Sahih; abu IMwiid. Sunan ; alTirmidbi.
.Sunon; al-Nas&'i. 5uru>n; ibn M&jah. Sunon ol-Muffafa; ul-fihauk&ni. Nail al-Autar.
Muffafa al-Babi. Egypt, 1347/1928; ibn ‘Abd al-Barr, al-ItHib, Dairatul-Maanf
Hyderabad. 1337/1918; ihn ManfOr. IM> al-'Arab, Beirut. 1956.
198
BOOK THREE
EARLY CENTURIES
(From the Firet/Sevcnth Century to the Fall of Baghdad)
Part 1. Theologico-Philosophical Movements
Chapter X
MU'TAZILISM
A
THE GENERAL MU'TAZILITE POSITION
Subsequent to tho times of the Companions of the Prophet of Islam, the
Mu'tazilah creed made ita appearanoe. It had its inception nearly two centuries
after the migration (Hijrah) of tho Holy Prophet to Madlnah. The Mutazilitea
were thoroughgoing rationalists. They believed that the arbiter of whatever
is revealed has to be theoretical reason.
Let us, for a moment, consider why the Mu tazilitee were so named. The
story goes that one day Im&m al-Hasan al-Basri waa imparting instruction to
his pupils in a mosque. Before the lessons were finished someone turned up
and addressed liim thus:
"Now. in our own times a sect* of people has made its appearance, the mem
bers of which regard the perpetrator of a grave sin as an unbeliever and consider
him outside the fold of Islam. Yet another group of people1 have appeared
who give hope of salvation to the perpetrator of a gravo sin. They lay down
that such a sin can do no harm to a true believer. They do not in the least
regard action as a part of faith and hold that as worship is of no use to one
who is an unbeliever, so also sin can do no harm to one who is a believer
in God. What, in your opinion, is the truth and what creed should we adopt I"
ImAm al-Rasan al-Ba?ri waa on tho point of giving a reply to this query
when a long-necked pupil of his got up and said: "The perpetrator of grave
sins is neither a complete unbeliever nor a perfect believer; he is placed mid
way between unbelief and faith—an intermediate state fmanzilaA 4ain
1 The name of Chis sect is M al-wa'id.
’ This group is called the Murji'itea. The same waa the belief of J slim bin Safw
also.
199
A History Muslim Philosophy
almamilalam)." Having spoken he strode to another comer of the mosque and
began to explain this belief of his to others.’ Thia man was Wasil ibn 'Ata.
The Imam shot a swift glance at him and a id, “J'lazala ‘anna," i.e.," He has
withdrawn from os.” From that very day WSsil and his followers were called
al-Mu'tazilah, the Withdrawers or Secessionists.
Ibn Munabbih says that the title of al-Mu'tazilah came into vogue after the
death of al-Hasan al-Basri. According to his statement, when al-Hasan passed
away. Qatadah succeeded him and continued his work. 'Amr ibn 'Ubaid and
his followers avoided the company of Qatadah; therefore, they were given the
name of al-Mu'tazilah. In brief, the word i'tizdl means to withdraw or secede,
and the Mu'tazilites are the people who in some of their beliefs were diametri
cally opposed to the unanimous consent of the early theologians or the People
of the Approved Way fahl al-runnah). The leader of all of them was Wltail b.
'Ala who was bom in 80/699 at Madinah and died in 131/748.
Muslims generally speak of Vial's party as the Mu'tazilites, but the latter
call themselves People of Unity and Jnation (aU al-latMd wal-‘adl). By
justice they imply that it is incumbent on God to requite the obedient for
their good deeds and punish the sinners for their misdeeds. By unity they
imply the denial of the divine attributes. Undoubtedly, they admit that
God is knowing, powerful, and seeing, but their intellect does not allow
them to admit that these divine attributes are separate and different from
the divine essence. The reason for this view of theirs is that if the attributes
of God are not considered to be identical with the essence of God, "plurality
of eternals" would necessarily result and the belief in unity would have to be
given up. This, in their opinion, is clear unbelief (hifr). Unity and justice are
the basic principles of the beliefs of the Mu'tazilitee and this is the reason why
they call themselves “People of Unity and Justice."
Now, from the basic beliefs of unity and justice a few more beliefs necessarily
follow aa corollaries:
1. God Almighty’s justice necessitates that man should be the author of his
own acta; then alone can he be said to be free and responsible for his deeds.
The same was claimed by the Qadaritee. The Mu'tazilites accepted totally
the theory of indeterminism and became true successors of the Qadarites. If
man is not the author of his own acts and if these acta are the creation of
God, how can he be held responsible for his acts and desorve punishment for
his sins 1 Would it not be injustice on the part of God that, after creating a
man helpless, He should call him to account for his sins and send him to hell t
Thus, all the Mu'tazilites agree in the matter of man’s being the creator of
his volitional acts. He creates some acta by way of mubdlharah and some by
way of tauBd. By the term tauBd is implied the necessary occurrence of an
other act from an act of the doer, e.g., the movement of Zaid’s finger neoeesi-
" His companion, 'Amr ibn 'Ubaid. from tho beginning. shared this view of his
The KhawArij too come under the same category.
290
Mu'tazilmm
tates the movement of his ring. Although he does not intend to movo the
ring, yet he alone will bo regarded aa the mover. Of course, to perform this act
the medium of another act is necessary. Man creates guidance or misguidance
for himself by way of muMjAuraA and his success or failure resulting from
this is created by way of taulid. God is not in the least concerned in creating
it, nor has God's will anything to do with it. In other words, if a man ia regarded
as the author of his own acts, it would mean that it is in his power either to
accept Islam and be obedient to God, or become an unbeliever and commit
sins, and that God's will has nothing to do with these acts of his. God, on the
other hand, wills that all created beings of His should embrace Islam and be
obedient to Him. Ho orders the same to take place and prohibits people from
committing sins.
Since man is the author of his own acta, it is necessary for God to reward
him for his good deeds and this can be justly claimed by him. As al-ghahras-
ni
t* puts it: “The Mu'tazilites unanimously maintain, that man decides
upon and creates his acts, both good and evil; that he deserves reward or
punishment in the next world for what he does. In this way the Lord is safe
guarded from association with any evil or wrong or any act of unbelief or
transgression. For if He created the wrong. He would be wrong, and if He
created justice. He would be just."
*
It is the creed of most of the Mu'tazilites that one possesses "ability” before
the accomplishment of the act, but some Mu'tazilites (e. g., Muhammad b.
‘Isa and abu *Tsa WarrAq) like the Sunnites arc of the view that one has ability
to act besides the act.
2. The justice of God makes it incumbent upon Him not to do anything
contrary to justice and equity. It is the unanimous verdict of tho Mu'tazilites
that the wise can only do what is salutary and good, and that
God's wisdom always keeps in view what is salutary for His servants; there
fore. He cannot be cruel to them. He camlot bring into effect evil deeds. He
cannot renounce that which is salutary. He cannot ask His servants to do
that which is impossible. Further, reason also suggests that God does not
place a burden on any creature greater than it can bear.
According to the Mu'tazilites, things are not good or evil because God de
clares them to be so. No, God makes the distinction between good and evil
on account of their being good and evil. Goodness or evil are innate in the
essence of things themselves. This very goodness or evil of things is the cause
of the commands and prohibitions of the Law. The human intellect is capable
of perceiving the goodness and evil of a few things and no laws are required
to express their goodness and evil, e.g., it ia commendable to speak the truth
and despicable to commit oneself to untruth. This shows that the evil and
goodness of things are obvious and require no proof from the SJnrt'aA Shame
• Al-hhahrMtani. KiM* al-M dal w-alNiM, quoted by A. J. Wensinck in 7'*r
Muslim Cned, Cambridge. 1932, p. 62.
Ml
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ful and unjust deeds are evil-in-themselves, therefore, God has banned indul
gence in them. It does not imply that His putting a ban on them made them
shameful and unjust deeds. The thoroughgoing rationalism of the Mu'tazilites
is thus expressed by al-Shahraatani in these words . "The adherents of justice
sav; All objects of knowledge fall under the supervision of reason and receive
their obligatory power from rational insight. Consequently, obligatory gratitude
for divine bounty precedes the ordere given by (divine) Law; and beauty and
ugliness are qualities belonging intrinsically to what is boautiful and ugly.”*
From the second principle of the Mu'tazilitea. the unity of God, the following
beliefs necessarily result as oorollaries:
1. Denial of the beatific vision. The Mu'tazilites hold that vision is not
possible without place and direction. As God is exempt from place and
direction, therefore, a vision of Him is possible neither in this world nor in
the hereafter.
2. Belief that the Qur'an is a created speech of Allah. It was held by them
that the Qur’an is an originated work of God and it came into existence to
gether with the prophethood of the Prophet of Islam.
3. God’s pleasure and anger, not attributes, but states. According to the
Mu'tazilitea, God's pleasure and anger should not be regarded as Ilis attributes,
because anger and pleasure are states and states are mutable ' .as the
essence of God is immutable. They should be taken as heaven a -11.
The following is the summary of some more beliefs of the Mu'taziiites:
1. Denial of punishment and reward meted out to the dead in the grave and
the questioning by the angels Munbar and Nalcir,
2. Denial of the indications of the Day of Judgment, of Gog and Magog
( YSjuj and Mdjuj), and of the appearance of the Antichrist (al Dajjil).
3. Some Mu'taziiites believe in the concrete reality of the Balance (al-Mixin)
for weighing actions on the Day of Judgment. Some say that it is impossible
for it to lie a reality and think that the mention made in the Qur'&n of weight
and balance means only this much that full justice will be done on the Day
of Judgment. It ia clearly impossible to elicit the meanings of the words weight
and balance literally, for deeds, which have been said to be weighed, are
accidents and it is not possible to weigh accidenta. Theoretical reason is in
capable of comprehending this. Substances alone can possess weight. Further,
when nothing is hidden from God, what is the use of weighing the deeds 1 It
has been mentioned in the Qur'&n that the books of bad or good deeds will
be handed over to us. Thia too is merely a metaphor. It means only our being
gifted with knowledge.
4. The Mu'tazilitcs also deny the existence of the Recording Angels (Kirdnun
Kmiblnl. The reason they give for this ia that God is well aware of all the
deeds done by His servants. The presence of the Recording Angel" would
• IM., pp. 62, 63.
202
Mu'taxilism
have been indispensable if God were not acquainted directly with the doings
of His servants.
6. The Mu'tazilites also deny the physical existence of the ‘Tank" fal-Haud),
and the "Bridge" (alFurther, they do not admit that heaven and
hell exist now, but believe that they will oome into existence on the Day of
Judgment.
6. They deny the Covenant (al-Mithaq). It is their firm belief that God
neither spoke to any prophet, angel, or supporter of the Divine Throne, nOr
will He cast a glance towards them.
7. For the Mu'tazilites, deeds together with verification (Audi?J are included
in faith. They hold that a great sinner will always stay in hell.
8. They deny the miracles (al kardmal) of saints (walls), for, if admitted,
they would be mixed up with the evidentiary miracles of the prophets and
cause oonfusion. The same was the belief of the Jahmites too.
9. The Mu'tazilites also deny the Ascension (al-Mi'rdj) of the Prophet of
Islam, because its proof is based on the testimony of individual traditions,
which necessitates neither act nor belief; but they do not deny the Holy Pro
phet's journey as far aa Jerusalem.
10. According to them, tho one who prays is alone entitled to reap tho
reward of a prayer; whatever its form, ita benefit goes to no one else.
11. As the divine decree cannot be altered, prayers serve no purpose at all.
One gains nothing by them, because if the object, for which prayers are offered,
is in conformity with destiny, it is needless to ask for it. and if the object
conflicts with destiny, it is impossible to secure it.
12. They generally lay down that tho angels who are message-bearers of
God to prophets are superior in rank to the human messengers of God to
mankind, i. e„ tho prophets themselves.
13. According to them, reason demands that an Imam should neoesaarily
be appointed over the ummah (Muslim community).
14. For thorn, tho mujtahid (the authorized interpreter of the religious Law)
can never be wrong in his view, as against the opinion of the Aah’aritc scholas
tics that "the mujtdhid sometimes errs and sometimes hits the mark.”
The Mu'tazilites and the Sunnites differ mostly from one another in five
important matters: —
(1) The problem of attributes.
(2) Tho problem of the beatific vision.
(3) The problem of promise and threat.
(4) The problem of creation of the actions of man.
(5) The problem of the will of God.
Ibn Hazm says in his Milal w-al-Ni^al that whosoever believes (1) that the
Qur'an is uncreated, (2) that all the actions of man are due to divine decree,
and (3) that man will be blessed with the vision of God on the Day of Judg
ment, and (4) admits the divine attributes mentioned in the Qur'An and the
Tradition, and (0) does not regard tho perpetrator of a grave sin aa an
203
A History of Muslim Philosophy
unbeliever, will not be styled as one of the Mu'tazilites, though in all other
matters he may agree with them.
This statement of ibn Harm shows that the Mu'tazilites were a group of
rationalists who judged all Islamic beliefs by theoretical reason and renounced
those that relate to all that lies beyond the reach of reason. They hardly realized
the fact that reason, like any other faculty with which man ia gifted, has its
limitations and cannot be expected to comprehend reality in all its details.
The point does not need elaboration. As Shakespeare puts it, "There are
more things in heaven and earth, Horatio, than are dreamt of in your philo
sophy." Some modem thinkers have recognized that there is a place for
intuition in the field of oomprehension and. as a corollary to this, have admitted
tho claim of revelation or wa/ii as a source of knowledge. That is why Iqbil
exclaimed:
"At the dawn of Life the Angel said to mo:
‘Do not make thy heart a mere slave to reason.’”
And probably on a similar ground Iqbal’s guide, Rumi, offered the following
meaningful advice:
“Surrender thy intellect to the Prophet!
God sufficcth. Say, He suffioeth.
Beware of wilful reasoning.
And boldly weloome madness 1
He alone is mad who madness scoffs,
And heeds not the agont of Law 1"
B
SOME LEADING MU'TAZILITES
In presenting a bird’s-eye view of the beliefs of the Mu'tazilites in the
above paragraphs, it has not been suggested that these views were in their
totality shared by all the leading Mu'tazilites. There were differences of opinion
within themselves. For instance, abu al-Hu^bail al-'AIlaf differed from his com
panions in respect of ten problems; Ibrahim ibn Sayytr al-Naggam in thirteen;
Bitijr ibn al-Mu'tamir in six; Mu'ammar ibn Khayvtt 'Abbid alSulami in
four; and ’Amr ibn Bahr al-Jahij in five. Abu al-Husain and his followers are
called the "Mu'tazilites of Baghdad" and abu al-Jubbi'i, his son abu Haghim,
and their followers were known aa the "Mu'tazilites of Bagrah.” Below is
given a brief account of the lives and ideas of some of the leading Mu'tazilites
1. WAsil ibn 'A|a
Wfail was bom at Madlnah in 80/899 and was brought up in Basrah "SOq-i
GbazzAl,” a bazaar in Basrah, used to be his familiar haunt and on that account
people associated its name with him. He died in 131/748. W&sil had a very
204
Mu'Ukzilism
long neck. Amr ibn 'Ubaid, who was * celebrated Mu'tazilite. on looking at
him onoe remarked: "There will be no good in a man who has such a neck."'
Wiail waa ailhagk,’ i.e.. he could not pronounce the letter r correctly, but he
was a very fluent and accomplished speaker and in his talk totally avoided
this letter. He never allowed it to escape his lips, despite the great difficulty
in avoiding it in conversation. He compiled a voluminous treatise in which
not a single r is to be found. He would often maintain silence which led people
to believe that he was mute.
Wasil was a pupil of abu H&ihim 'Abd Allah ibn Muhammad ibn al-Hanafly-
yah. but in the matter of Imlmate, aa in some other matters, he opposed his
master. Before becoming a Mu'tazilite he used to live in the company of Irnirn
Hasan al-Basri.
His works are: KiM al-Manzilah bain aJ Maniilalain, Kitab al-Fuiya, and
Kitab al-Tauhld. The first books on the science of al-Kaldm were written by
him. Ibn Khallik&n has recounted a number of his works.
In his illustrious work al-Milal w al-Nihal, algljahraatlni says that the
essential teachings of Wfei! consisted of tho following: (!) Denial of the
attributes of God. (2) Man’s possession of free-will to choose good deeds.
(3) The belief that one who commits a grave sin is neither a believer nor an
unbeliever but occupies an intermediate position, and that one who oommits
a grave sin goes to hell. (4) Tho belief that out of the opposing parties that
fought in the battle of the Camel and from among the assassinators of
'Utbman and his allies one party was in error, though it cannot be established
which.
(1) Denial 0/ Attribute*.—denies that knowledge, power, will, and
life belong to the essence of God. According to him, if any attribute is admitted
as eternal, it would necessitate "plurality of eternals" and the belief in the
unity of God will thus become false. But this idea of Wasil waa not readily
accepted. Generally, the Mu'tazilitee first reduced all the divine attributes to
two—knowledge and power—and called them the “essential attributes."
Afterwards they reduced both of these to one attribute—unity.
(2) Belief in Free-will.—In this problem W4sil adopted the creed of Ma'bad
al-Juhani and Ghailtn al-Dimajhqi and said that since God is wise and just,
evil and injustice cannot be attributed to him. How is it justifiable for Him
that He should will contrary to what Ho commands His servants to do ?
Consequently, good and evil, belief and unbelief, obedience and sin are the
acts of His servant himself, i.e., the servant alone is their author or creator
and is to be rewarded or punished for his deeds. It is impassible that
the servant may be ordered to "do" a thing which he is not able to do. Man
is ordered to do an act because he has the power to do that act. Whosoever
denies this power and authority rejects a self-evident datum of consciousness.
• $i<ldiq Hasan. Kaebf al-Ohummab ‘an Iftirdq al-Vmmab, Ms(b'ah Sh&hjahfini.
Bhopal. India. 1304/1886. p. 19.
’ Ibid.
205
A History of Muslim Philosophy
As ibn Harm frankly said. the excellent work of the Mu'tazilitea can be
seen in the doctrine of free-will and that of promise and threat. If man were
to be regarded as absolutely determined in his actions, the whole edifice of
Shariah and ethics would tumble down.
(3) Intermediary Position 0/ the. Grave Sinners.—On aooount of his belief
that one who commits a grave sin is neither a believer nor an unbeliever but
occupies an intermediate position. Wasil withdrew himself from the company
of Imam Hasan al-Baari and earned the title Mu'tazilite. Waail thought that
the expression "true believer" is one which means praise. The person who
commits grave sins can never deserve praise; therefore, he cannot be called
a true believer. Such a person has. nevertheless, belief in the Islamic faith and
admits that God alone is worthy of being worshipped; therefore, he cannot
be regarded os an unbeliever either. If such a person dies without penitence,
he will ever stay in hell, but as he ia right in his belief, the punishment meted
out to him will be moderate.
As Im&m al-QhazAli has pointed out in his Ihyd' ‘Olum al-Din,‘ misinter
pretation of the following verses of the Qur'&n was the cause of the Mu'tazilites'
"By (tho token of) Time (through the ages), verily mankind ia in loss, except
such as have faith and do righteous deeds and (join together) in the mutual
teaching of truth, patience, and constancy.”’
"For any that'disobey God and His Apostle—for them is hell; they shall
dwell therein for ever."”
In the light of these and similar other verses, the Mu'tazilites argue that
all the perpetrators of grave sins will alwayB stay in hell, but they do not
think over the fact that God also says: —
"But, without doubt, I am (also) He that forgiveth again and again those
who repent, believe, and do right, who, in fine, are ready to receive true
guidance.”11
"God forgiveth not that equals should be set up with Him; but He forgiveth
anything else, to whom He pleaseth.”11
The last quoted verse shows that in the case of all sins, except polytheism,
God will act according to His pleasure. In support of this the clear saying
of the Holy Prophet of Islam can be cited, viz., "that person too will finally
come out of heli who has even an iota of faith in his heart." Further, some words
of God, e.g., "Verily We shall not suffer to perish the reward of anyone who
does a (single) righteous deed,”1’ and "Verily God will not suffer the reward
• Cf. Urdu translation: jWedMy ol-'lriffn. Newal Kishore Press. Lucknow,
p. 135.
• Qur'&n. ciii, 1-3.
” Ibid., Ixxii, 23.
>> Ibid., xx. 82.
'• Ibid., iv. 48.
'• Ibid., xviii, 30
206
Mu tazilism
of tho righteous to perish,"1* clearly show that for the oommission of one sin,
lie will not ignore a man's basic faith and deprive him of all the reward for
his good deeds. Therefore, the general belief is that as the perpetrator of gravo
sins ia by all means a true believer, even if he dies without repentance, after
being punished for his sins in hell and thereby purified of them, he will
eventually enter heaven.
(4) Une.ibMuhtd Errors.—Wasil hail firm conviction that out of those who
fought in "the battle of the Camel” and "the battle of ?iffln" »nd the killers
of Ulhrnin, the third Caliph, and his allies, one party was definitely in error,
though it cannot he established which.1*
2. Abu al-Hudhail 'Allif
'AllAf was bom in 131/748 and died in c. 226/840. Ho received instruction
from 'UlbrnSn bin Khalid Tawil, a pupil of W&sil. He was a fluent speaker
and vigorous in his arguments. He often made use of dialectical arguments
in his discussions. He had a keen insight in philosophy. He wrote about sixty
books on the science of Kaldm but all of them have long been extinct.
'AU&f was an accomplished dialectician. The story goes that by his dialectics
three thousand persons embraced Islam at his hand. We shall here speak of
two of his debates. In those days there lived a Magian Salih by name who
believed that the ultimate principles of the universe are two realities. Light
and Darkness, that both of these are opposed to each other, and that the
universe is created by the mixture of these two. This belief led to a discussion
between §alib, the Magian, and 'Allaf. Allaf inquired of him whether the mix
ture was distinct and different from light and Darkness or identical with
them. $ilib replied that it was one anil the same thing. ’Allif then said,
"How could two things mix together which are opposed to each other?
There ought to be someone who got them mixed, and tho mixer alone is the
Necessary Existent or God.” On another occasion, while' Salih was engaged in
a discussion with 'Allif, the latter said, "What do you now desire I” $alib
replied, “I asked a blessing of God and still stick to the belief that there are
two Gods." ‘All&f then asked, “Of which God did you ask a blessing ? The
God of whom you asked for it would not have suggested the name of tho
other God (who is His rival).”
W&sil was not able to clarify the problem of divine attributes. In this
respect his ideas were still crude. ‘Allif is opposed to the view that the essence
of God has no quality and is absolutely one and by no means plural. Tho divine
qualities are none other than the divine essence and cannot be separated from
it. ‘All&f accepts such attribute* as are one with the essence of God, or one
may say, accepts such an essence aa is identical with the attributes. He docs
not differentiate between the two. but regards both aa one. When one says
Ibid., xi. IIS.
“ Al-ajahrnstlin. op. al.. p. 21
20?
A History of Muslim Philosophy
that God is the knower, one cannot mean that knowledge is found in th<
essence of God, but that tnou^ed^e is Hit e»mnct. In brief, God is knowing
powerful, and living with such knowledge, power, and life aa are His very
essence (essential nature).
Al-gbahrastlni has interpreted the identity of divine essence and attributes
thus: God knows with His knowledge and knowledge is His very essence. In
the same way, He is powerful with His power and power ia His very essence;
and lives with His life and life ia His very essence. Another interpretation of
divine knowledge is that God knows with His essence and not with His tnou--
ledgt, i.e.. He knows through His essence only and not through knowledge.
The difference in these two positions is that, in the latter, the attributes
are denied altogether, while in the former, which 'AllAf accepts, they are
admitted but are identified with God’s essence. This conforms to the state
ments of the philosophers who hold that the essence of God, without quality
and quantity, is absolutely one. and by no means admits of plurality, and
that the divine attributes are none other than the essence of God. Whatever
qualities of Him may be established, they are either "negation" or "essentials."
Those things are termed "negation" which, without the relation of negation,
cannot be attributed to God, aa, for instance, body, substance, and accidents
When the relation of negation is turned towards them and its sign. i.e.. the
word of negation, is applied, these can become the attributes of God. e.g..
it would be said that God is neither a body, nor a substance, nor an accident.
What is meant by "essential” is that the existence of the Necessary Existent
is Its very essence and thus Its unity is real,
'Allaf did not admit the attributes of God as separate from His essence in
any sense. For he sensed the danger that, by doing so, attributes, too, like
essence, would have to be taken as eternal, and by their plurality the "plurality
of eternals" or "the plurality of the necessary existonts" would become inevi
table, and thus the doctrine of unity would be completely nullified. It was for
this reason that the Christians who developed the theory of the Trinity of
Godhead had to forsake the doctrine of unity.
Among the "heresies" of 'AllAf was his view that after the discontinuation
of the movement of the inmates of heaven and hell, a state of lethargy would
supervene. During this period calm pleasure for the inmates of heaven and
pain and misery for the inmates of hell will begin, and thia is what is really
meant by eternal pleasure and perpetual pain. Sinoe the same waa the religious
belief of Jahm, according to whom heaven and hell would be annihilated, the
Mu'tazilites used to call 'All&f a Jahmite in his belief in the hereafter.
'AlUf has termed justice, unity, promise, threat, and tho middle position
aa the "Five Principles" of the Mu'tazilitea.
3. Al-Najtam
Abu Ishaq Ibrahim ibn Sayylr, called al-Nauam, waa younger than ‘Allif
and it is generally known that he was 'AlIlf's pupU. He lived during tho reign
208
Mu'taziliffln
of Caliph* al-MAmOn and al-Mu'taaim and died in 231/845. He was a pcerlees
litUralnr and poet. He studied Greek philosophy well and made full use of
it in his works. His main ideas are aa follows.
(1) Denial of God's Power over Evil.—God has no power at all over sin and
evil. Other Mu'taxilites do not deny the power of God over evil, but deny the
act of His creating evil. In their opinion, God has power over evil, but He docs
not use it for tho creation of evil, Al-Najjim, in opposition to them, says
that when evil or sin is the attribute or essence of a thing, then the possibility
of the occurrence of evil or the power to create it will itself be evil. Therefore,
it cannot be attributed to God who is the doer of justice and good. Similarly,
al-NajjAm holds that in the life hereafter too, God can neither mitigate nor
add to the punishment and reward of the inmates of heaven and hell; nor
indeed can He expel them from heaven or hell. As to the accusation that the
denial of God's power over evil necessitates the affirmation that He is impotent
against evil, al-NattAm replies that this equally follows from the denial of
divine action to create evil. He says; "You, too, deny Him the wrong act, so
there is no fundamental difference between the two positions.
God, who is Absolute Good and Absolute Justice, cannot be the author
of evil. Besides, if God has power over ovil, it will necessarily follow that He
is ignorant and indigent.,But thia is impossible; therefore, ita necessary conse
quence is also impossible. The sequence of tho argument may be explained
thus:
If God has power over evil, then the occurrence of evil is possible, and as
the supposition of the occurrence of a possible thing entails no impossibility,
let us suppose that evil did occur. Now, God might or might not have had
knowledge of the evil which occurred. If wc say that He did not have the
knowledge of it, it would necessarily follow that He was ignorant; and if wc
say that He did have it, it would necessarily follow that He was in need of
thia evil; for had He not been in need of it. He would not have created it.
When a person is not in need of a thing and knows its inherent evils, he will
have nothing to do with it, if he is wise.
It is definitely true that God is all.wise; so when any evil is caused by Him.
it necessarily follows that He needed it, otherwise He would have never pro
duced it.
But since it is impossible to think that God needs evil, it is impossible to
think that He creates it.
(2) Denial of the Will of God.—Apart from the power of action and action,
al-Najtam does not admit that God has will, which has priority over
both power and action. He holds that when we attribute will to God we only
mean that God creates things according to His knowledge. His willing is
identical with His acting, and when it is said that God wills the actions of
men, what is meant is that He enjoins them to act in a certain way.
'• Ibid., p. 24.
209
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Why does ai-Nawim deny the will of God' He does so, because, according
to him, will implies want. He who wills lacks or needs the thing which he
wills, and since God is altogether independent of His creatures. He does not
lack or need anything. Consequently, will cannot be ascribed to Him. There
fore. the will of God really connotes His acts or His commands that are con-
veyed to man.1’
(3) Divisibility of Every Particle ad infinitum.—Al-Na«4m believes in the
divisibility of every particle ad infinitum. By this he means that each body
is composed of such particles as are divisible to an unlimited extent, i.e..
every half of a half goes on becoming half of the other half. During the pro
cess of divisions, we never reach a limit after which wo may be able to say
that it cannot be further divided into halves.
Now, to traverse a distance, which is composed of infinite points, an infinite
period of time would necessarily bo required. Is, then, the traversing of a
distance impossible 1 Does it not necessitate the denial of the existence of
the movement itself? Among the Greek philosophers, Parmenides and Zeno
had denied movement itself. They could not declare untrue the movement
which is observable and is a fact, so they claimed that perception cannot
reveal reality. They maintained that senses are not the instruments of
leal knowledge and are deceptive; and the phenomenal world is illusory, a
mirage. The real world is the rational world, the knowledge of which is gained
by reason alone in which there is neither plurality nor multiplicity, neither
movement nor change. It is an immutable and immovable reality. But they
could not explain how this illusory and deceptive world was bom out of the
real world. Thus, their system of philosophy, in spite of their claiming it to
be monism, ended in dualism.
Al-NatfSm did not accept the solution of these Greek philosophers, but to
tide over this difficulty he offered the theory of fafrah. The word tafrah means
to leap; it means that the moving thing traverses from one point of distanoe
to another in such a manner that between these two points a number of points
are traversed. Obviously, it happens when the moving thing does not cross all
the points of a distance, but leaps over them. This indeed is an anticipation
of the present-day doctrine of the “quantum jump.’’
(4) Latency and Manifestation (Kumun wa Buruz).-—According to al-Na?.-
liim. creation is to be regarded as a single act of God by which all things were
brought into living simultaneously and kept in a state of latency (kumun).
It was from their original Btate of latency that all existing things: minerals,
plants, animals, and men. have evolved in the process of time. This also implies
tliat the whole of mankind was potentially in Adam. Whatever priority or
posteriority there may be. it is not in birth but in appearance. All thingB came
into existence at the same time, but were kept hidden till the time of their
becoming operative arrived, and when it did arrive, they were brought from
•’ Ibid.
210
Mu'tazilism
the state of latency to the state of manifestation. This doctrine stands in
direct opposition to the Ajh'arite view that God is creating things at all
moments of time.,,
(5) Materialism 0/ al-Nazidm.—For al-Najiin), as for many bofore and after
him, the real being of man is the soul, and body is merely its instrument
But the soul is, according to him. a rarefied body permeating the physical
body, the same way as fragrance permeates flowers, butter milk, or oil sesame.1’
Abu Mansur 'Abd al-Q&hir ibn jihir, in his work al-Farq bain al-Firaq, has
discussed this theory critically and has attempted to refute it.
Besides these philosophical ideas, there are what the orthodox called tho
"hcreaiee" of al-NatUm. For example, he did not believe in miracles, was not
convinced of the inimitability of the Qur'in, considered a statute necessary
for the determination of an Lmim, and thought that the statute establishing
the Imimate of ' Ali was ooncealed by 'Umar, that the so/dt altardwih was un
authorized, that the actual vision of the jinn was a physical impossibility,
and that belated performance of missed prayers was unnecessary.
Among al-Na?tam's followers, the following are well known: Muhammad
ibn Sfcabib. sbu Shumar, Yunus ibn ‘Imrln, Abmad ibn HayUt, Bishr ibn
Mu'tamir, and Ihamamah ibn Ajforas. Afimad ibn Haytt who lived in the
company of al-NajtAm held that there are two deities: one, tho creator and
eternal deity, and the other, tho created ono which is Jesus Christ son of
Mary. He regarded Christ as tho Son of God. On account of this belief he was
considered to have renounced Islam. According to his faith, Christ in the
hereafter will ask the created beings to account for their deeds in this world,
and in support of his claim Ahmad ibn Hayit quoted the verse: “Will they
wait until God comes to them in canopies of clouds There is a tradition
that, looking towards the moon on the fourteenth day of the lunar month,
the Holy Prophet of Islam said. “Ye will behold your Lord just as yo behold
this moon."11 Ahmad ibn llayat twisted the meaning of this tradition and
said that tho word Lord referred to Jesus Christ. He also believed in incarna
tion for, according to him, tho spirit of God is incarnated into the bodies of
the Imilms.
Fadi al Hadathi. who was another pupil of al-N»i?im. had faith similar
to that of ibn Hayit. He and his followers believed in transmigration. Accord
ing to them, in another world God created animals mature and wise, bestowed
on them innumerable blessings, and conferred on them many sciences too.
God then desired to put them to a test and so commanded them to offer
thanks to Him for His gifts. Some obeyed His command and some did not.
He rewarded His thankful creatures by giving them heaven and condemned
the ungrateful ones to hell. There were some among them who had partly
>• T. J. de Boer. "Muslim Philosophy," Encyclopaedia of Rdifion and Ethics.
“ Al-ghahrastani. op. oil.. Chip Khineh-i 'Umi. Teheran. 1321/1903, p. 77.
*• Qur'An. ii. 210.
“ Tho tradition: Innakum oalarauna rabbakum kama tormina hddh al-qamar.
211
A History of Muslim Philosophy
obeyed the divine command and partly not obeyed it. They were rent to
the world, were given filthy bodies, and, according to tho magnitude of their
nine, sorrow and pain, joy and pleasure. Those who had not sinned much
and had obeyed moot of God’s commands were given lovely faces and mild
punishment. But those who did only a few good deeds and committed a large
number of sins were given ugly faoes, and were subjected to revere tribulations.
So long as an animal is not purified of all its aina, it will be always changing
its forms.
4. Bijjjr ibn al-Mu'tamir
One of the oelebrated personalities of al-Nazfkm's circle ia Bi»hr ibn al-
Mu'tamir. The exact date of his birth is not known, but his date of death
is 210/826.
Biajjr made the "Theory of Generated Acts" (lauiid) current among the
Mu’tazilitce. The Mu'tazilites believe in free-will. They admit that man is the
author of his voluntary actions. Some actions arise by way of mubdjharuh,
i.e., they are created directly by man, but some actions arise by way of
taulid, Le., they necessarily result from the acta done by way of muMdoraA
Throwing of a stone in water, for example, necessitates tho appearance of
ripples. Even if the movement of tho ripples is not intended by the stone
thrower, yet he is rightly regarded aa its agent. Similarly, man is the creator
of his deeds and misdeeds by way of mubdfbarah, and all the consequential
actions necessarily result by way of taulid. Neither type of actions is due to
divine activity.
Bishr regards the will of God as His grace and divides it into two attributes:
the attribute of essence and the attribute of action. Through the attribute of
essence He wills all His actions aa well as men's good deeds. He ia absolutely
wise, and in consequence His will is necessarily concerned with that which
is suitable and salutary. The attribute of action also is of two kinds. If
actions are concerned with God, they would imply creation, and if concerned
with men, they would mean command.
According to Bishr, God could have made a different world, better than
the present one. in which all might have attained salvation. But in opposition
to the common Mu'tazilite belief, Biahr held that God waa not bound to create
such a world. All that was necessary for God to do was that He should have
bestowed upon man free-will and choice, and after that it was sufficient to
bestow reason for his guidance to discover divine revelation and the laws of
nature, and combining reason with choice, attoin salvation.
Mu'tomir's pupil abu Musu T.,a bin Sabih, nicknamed Mizdar, was a very
pious man and was given the title of the hermit of the Mu'tazilites. He held
some very peculiar views. God, he thought, could act tyrannically and lie, and
thia would not make His lordship imperfect. The style of the Qur'An is not
inimitable; a work like it or even better than it can be produced. A person
who admits that God can be seen by tho eye, though without form, is an
212
Mu'tazllism
unbeliever, and he who is doubtful about tho unbelief of such a person u also
an unbeliever.
5. Mu'ammar
Mu'ammar's full name was Mu'ammar ibn 'Abbad al-Sulami, Neither the
date of his birth nor that of his death can bo determined precisely. According
to some, he died in 228/842.
To a great extent Mu'ammar's ideas tally with those of the other Mu'tazilites
but he resorts to great exaggeration in the denial of the divine attributes and
in the Theory of Predestination.
The following is the gist of his ideas.
(1) VeniaJ o/ Divine Knowledge.—Mu'ammar maintains that the essence of
God is free from every aspect of plurality. He is of the view that if we believe
in the attributes of God, then God's essence becomes plural; therefore, he
denies all the attributes, and in this denial he is so vehement that he says
that God knows neither Himself nor anyone else, for knowing (or knowledge)
is something either within or without God. In the first case, it necessarily
follows that the knower and the known are one and the same, which is im
possible, for it is necessary that the known should be other than and distinct
from the knower. If knowledge is not something within God. and the known
is separate from the knower, it means that God's essence is dual. Further, it
follows also that God's knowledge is dependent on and is in need of an “other."
Consequently, His absoluteness is entirely denied.
By Mu'ammar's times, more and more people were taking interest in philo
sophy and Neo-PIatonism was gaining ground. In denying the attributes
Mu'ammar was following in the footsteps of Plotinus. According to the basic
assumptions of Plotinus, the essence of God is one and absolute. God is so
transoendent that whatever we say of Him merely limits Him. Hence we
cannot attribute to Him beauty, goodness, thought, or will, for all such attri
butes are limitations and imperfections. We cannot say what He is, but only
what He is not. As a poet has said. He is
"The One whom the reason does not know.
The Eternal, the Absolute whom neither senses know nor fancy.
He is such a One, who cannot be counted
He is such a Pure Being!”
It is universally believed in Islam that human reason, understanding, senses,
or fancy cannot fathom the essence of God or the reality of His attributes or
His origin. Says 'AttAr:
"Why exert to probe the essence of God !
Why strain thyself by stretching thy limitations 1
When thou const not catch even the essence of an atom.
How canst thou claim to know the essence of God Himself?"
213
A History of Muslim Philosophy
To reflect on tho essence of God has been regarded as "illegitimate thinking."
The Prophet of Islam is reported to have said: "We are all fools in tho matter
of the gnosis of the essence of God.”” Therefore, he has warned the-thinkers
thus: “Don't indulge in speculating on the nature of God lest ye may be
destroyed."’* He has said about himself: "I have not known Thee to the
extent that Thy knowledge demands!"“ Halit has expressed the same idea in
his own words thus:
"Take off thy net; thou canst not catch 'anqau
For that is like attempting to catch the air I”
(2) Denial of Divine Will.—Mu'ammar says that, like knowledge, will too
cannot he attributed to the essence of God. Nor can His will be regarded as
eternal, because eternity expresses temporal priority and sequence and God
transcends time. When we say that the will of God is eternal, we mean only
that the aspects of the essence of God, like His essence, transoend time.
(3) God as the Creator of Substances and not of Accidents.—According to
Mu'ammar, God is the creator of the world, but He did not create anything
except bodies. Accidents are the innovations of bodies created either (i) by
nature, e.g., burning from fire, heat from the sun, or (ii) by free choice, such
as the actions of men and animals. In brief. God creates matter and then
keeps Himself aloof from it. Afterwards He is not concerned at all with the
changes that are produced through matter, whether they may be natural or
voluntary. God ia the creator of bodice, not of accidents which flow out of the
bodies as their effects.**
(4) Mu'ammar regards man aa something other than the sensible body.
Man is living, knowing, able to act, and possesses free-will. It is not man him
self who moves or keeps quiet, or ia ooloured, or sees, or touches, or changes
from place to place; nor does one place contain him to the exclusion of another,
because he has neither length nor breadth, neither weight nor depth; in
short, he is something other than the body.
6. Thamkmah
ThamAmah ibn Aajjras al-Numairi lived during the reign of Caliphs Hirun
al-Raihld and al-Mimun. He was in those days the leader of the Qadarites.
Hirun al-Rajhld imprisoned him on the charge of heresy, but he waa in the
good books of al-MAmAn and was released by him. He died in 213/828. The
following is the substance of his ideas.
“ The tradition: Kullu al-ndsi fi dhoti AUOhi humaqa'.
” Ths tradition: la tulakk.ru fi Allah. taiahlaku.
" Ma 'arafnoka haqqa man/altka.
" ‘An/O’ ia a fabulous bird said to be known aa to name but unknown as to body.
'• Al ghahrasUni haa criticued thia statement of Mu'ammar. op. cit.. p 2».
214
Mu'tazilitan
(1) As good and evil are necessarily known through the intellect and God
ia good, the gnosis of God is an intellectual necessity. Had there been no
SbarVah, that is, had we not acquired the gnosis of God through the prophets,
even then it would have been necessitated by the intellect.
(2) The world being necessitated by the nature of God, it has, like God,
existed from eternity and will last till eternity. Following in the footsteps of
Aristotle, he thinks that the world is eternal (jadim) and not originated
(ltddith) and regards God as creating things by the necessity of His nature
and not by will and choice.
(3) Bijhr ibn al-Mutamir. who had put into usage the theory of generated
acta among the Mu'tazilites, was wrong in thinking that men are not directly
but only indirectly the authors of such acta. Neither God nor man is the
author of generated acts; they just hap(>en without any author. Man is not
their author, for otherwise when a deed has been generated after a man's
death, he, as a dead man, will have to bo taken as its author. God cannot
be regarded aa the author of these acta, for some generated acts are evil and
evil cannot be attributed to God.
(4) Christians. Jews, and Magians, after they are dead, will all become dust.
They will neither go to hoaven nor to hell. Lower animals and children also
will be treated in the same manner. The unbeliever, who does not possess and
is not keen to possess the gnosis of his Creator, is not under the obligation to
know Him. He is quite helpless and resembles the lower animals.
7. Al-JIbU
'Amr ibn Bahr aljihif, a contemporary of Mu'ammar, was a pupil of al-
NatfAm and waa himself one of the Im&ms of the Mu'tazilites. Both the master
and the disciple, it waa held, were almost of one mind. Al-J&bi? had drunk
deep of Greek philosophy. He had a keen sense of humour and was a good
anecdotist. He usually lived irt the company of the Caliphs of Baghdad. His
permanent residence waa the palace of ibn Zayy&t, the Prime Minister of the
Caliph Mutawakkil. When ibn Zayy&t was put to death by the orders of the
Caliph, JAbi? too waa imprisoned. He was released after some time. He was the
ugliest of men; his eyes protruded out, and children were frightened at his
very sight. In his last years he had a stroke of paralysis. He died in his nine
tieth year at Basrah in 255/869. During his illness he would often recite the
following couplets:
"Dost thou hope in old age
To look like what you were in youth!
Thy heart belicth thee: an old garment never
turns into a new one."
He was the author of a number of books out of which tho following are
noteworthy: Kitab al-Bay&n, Kitab al-Hayawdn. and KilM al-Ghilmin. He
also wrote a book dealing with Muslim sects.
215
History of Muslim Philosophy
It was the belief of al-Jibi? that all knowledge conies by nature, and it is
an activity of man in which he has no ohoioe. He was a scientist-philosopher.
In the introduction to his Kildb al-liayaimn, he writes that he is inspired
by the philosophical spirit which consists in deriving knowledge from
scnse-cxperienoe and reason. It employs observation, comparison, and experi
ment aa methods of investigation. He experimented on different species of
animals, sometimes by cutting their organs, sometimes even by poisoning
them, in order to see what effecta were thus produced on animal organism.
In this respect he was the precursor of Bacon whom he anticipated seven and
a half centuries earlier. Al-Jabif did not, however, base knowledge on sense
experience alone. Since sense-experience is sometimes likely to give false re
ports, it needs tho help of reason. In fact, in knowledge reason has to play the
decisive role. He says, "You should not aooept whatever your eyes tell you;
follow the lead of reason. Every fact is determined by two factors: one
apparent, and that ia sensory; the other hidden, and that is reason; and in
reality reason is the final determinant."
According to al-Jabi?, the will is not an attribute of man, for attributes are
continually subject to change, but the will ia non-changing and non-temporal
He holds that the sinners will not be condemned to hell permanently but
will naturally turn into fire. God will not send anybody to hell, but the fire
of hell by its very nature will draw the sinners towards itself. Al-Jkbit denies
that God can commit a mistake or that an error can be imputed to Him.
Al-Jabi? also denies the vision of God.
8. Al-Jubbl'i
Abu 'AH al-Jubbk'i was born in 235/849 at Jubba, a town in Khuzistin. His
patronymic name ia abu ' Ali and his descent is traced to I.Iamran, a slave of
'Ulhman. Al-Jubba'i belonged to the later Mu'tazilites. He was the teacher of
abu al-Hasan al-Ash‘ari and a pupil of abu Ya'qub bin 'Abd Allah al-
Shabb&m who was tho leader of the Mu'tazilites in Basrah.
Oneo there was a discussion between him and Imam al-Agh'ari in respect of
the Theory of the Salutary to which reference has already been made in the
foregoing pages. The story goos that one day he asked Imkm al-Aajj‘ari: "What
do you mean by obedience 1" The Imam replied, "Assent to a command,"
and then asked for al-Jubba'i's own opinion in this matter. Al-Jubbi'i said.
"The essence of obedience, according to me. is agreement to the will, and
whoever fulfils the will of another obeys him." The Imam answered, "According
to this, one must conclude that God is obedient to His servant if He fulfils
his will.” Al-Juhbi'i granted this. The Imiim said, "You differ from the com
munity of Muslims and you blaspheme the Loid of the worlds. For if God is
obedient to His servant, then He must be subject to him, but God is above
this.”
Al-Jubbl'i further claimed that the names of God are subject to the regulm
218
Mu'taxihsm
rules of grammar. He, therefore, considered it possible to derive a name for
Him from every deed which He performs. On this ImAm al Ajh'ari said that,
according to this view. God should be named "tho producer of pregnancy
among women," because he creates pregnancy in them. Al-Jubba’i could not
escape this conclusion. The Imim added: "This heresy of yours is worse than
that of the Christians in calling God tho father of Jesus, although even they
do not hold that He produced pregnancy in Mary.”” The following are other
notable views of al-Jubba’i.
(1) Like other Mu'tazilites, he denies the divine attributes. He bolds that the
very essence of God is knowing; no attribute of knowledge can be attributed
to Him so as to subsist besides His essence. Nor is there any "state" which
enables Him to acquire the “state of knowing." Unlike al-JubbU'i, his son abu
Hashim did believe in "states." To say that God is all-hearing and all-seeing
really means that God is alive and there is no defect of any kind in Him. The
attributes of hearing and seeing in God originate at the time of the origination
of what is seen and what is heard.
(2) Al-Jubb&’i and tho other Mu'tazilites regard the world as originated and
the will of God as the cause of its being originated; they also think that the
will of God too is something originated, for if the temporal will is regarded as
subsisting in God, He will have to be regarded as the "locus of temporal
events.” This view he held against the Karrimites who claimed that the will
subsists in God Himself, is eternal and instrumental in creating the world
which is originated, and, therefore, not eternal.
Against al-Jubbi'i it has been held that independent subsistence of the will
is ontirely incomprehensible, for it tantamounts to saying that an attribute
exists without its subject or an accident exists without some substance. Be
sides, it means that God who has ths will is devoid of it, i.e., does not hair
it—a clear contradiction.
(3) For al-Jubbi'i the speech of God is compounded of letters and sounds
and God creates it in somebody. The speaker is He Himself and not the body
in which it subsists. Such speech will necessarily be a thing originated. There
fore, the speech of God is a thing originated and not eternal.
(4) lake other Mu'tazilities, al-Jubba'i denies the physical vision of God in
the hereafter, for that, according to him, is impossible. It is impossible because
whatever is not physical cannot fulfil the conditions of vision.
(5) He equally agrees with other Mu'tazilitea regarding the gnosis of God.
the knowledge of good and evil, and the destiny of those who oommit grave
ains. With them he holds that man is the author of his own actions and that
it lies in his power to produce good or evil or commit sins and wrongs, and
that it is compulsory for God to punish the sinner and reward the obedient
(6) In tho matter of Iminiate, al-Jubba'i supports the belief of the Sunnites,
viz., the appointment of an Im&m is to be founded on catholic consent.
” Al-Bagbdadi, op. eit., pp. 188-89.
217
A History of Muslim Philosophy
9. Abu H&ghim
Al-JubbAI's son, abu HAghim 'Abd al-3alam, waa bom in Basrah in 247/861
and died in 321/933. In literature he eclipsed al-Jubbi'i. Both of them under
took new researches in the problems of Kaldm. In general, abu HAjhim
agreed with his father, but in the matter of divine attributes ho widely differed
from him Many Muslim thinkers of the time believed that the attributes of
God are eternal and inherent in Hie essence. Contrary to this belief, the Shi'ites
and the followers of the Greek philosophers held that it is by virtue of His
essence that God has knowledge. He does not know by virtue of His knowledge.
The divine essenoe, which is without quality and quantity, is one and in no
way does it admit of plurality. According to the Mu'tazilites, attributes con
stitute the essence of God, i.e., God possesses knowledge due to the attribute
of knowledge, but this attribute is identical with His essence. God knows by
virtue of His knowledge and knowledge is His essence; similarly, He is omni
potent by virtue of His power, etc. Al-JubbSTs theory is that though God
knows according to His essence, yet knowing is neither an attribute nor a
state, owing to which God may be called a knower.
As a solution to this problem, abu HA shim presents the conception of
"state.” He says that we know essence and know it in different states. The
states go on changing, but the essence remains the same. These states are in
themselves inconceivable; they are known through their relation to essence.
They are different from the essence, but are not found apart from the essence.
To quote his own words, "A state-in-itaelf is neither existent nor non-existent,
neither unknown not known, neither eternal nor contingent; it cannot be
known separately, but only together with the essence."
Abu HAshim supports his conception of states by this argument: Reason
evidently distinguishes between knowing a thing absolutely and knowing it
together with some attribute. When we know an essence, we do not know
that it is knowing also. Similarly, when we know a substance, we do not
know whether it is bounded or whether the accidents subsist in it.
Certainly, man perceives the common qualities of things in one thing and the
differentiating qualities in another, and necessarily gains knowledge of the
fact that the quality which ia common is different from the quality which is
not common. These are rational propositions that no sane man would deny.
Their locus is essence and not an accident, for otherwise it wduld necessarily
follow that an accident subsists in another accident. In this way, states are
necessarily determined. Therefore, to be a knower of tho world refers to a
state, which is an attribute besides tho essence and has not the same sense
aa the essence. In like manner abu HAjbim provre the states for God; these
states are not found apart but with the essence.
Al-JubbA'i and the other deniers of states refute this theory of abu HAgfcim.
Al-JubbA'i says that these states are really mental aspects that are not con
tained in the divine essence but are found in the percipient, i.e., in the per-
218
Mu'tazilism
ceiver of the essence. In other words. they are such generalizations or relations
as do not-exist externally but are found only in the percipients mind. Ibn
Taimlyyah also denies states. In this respect one of his couplets has gained
much fame;
"Abu Hashim believes in State, al-Ajh'an in
Acquisition and al-NajjAm in Leap.
These three things have vorbal and no
real existence."*•
After a little hesitation. ImAin BfiqilAm supported abu Hashim's views.
ImAm al-Ash'ari and the majority of his followers disputed them and Imim
al-IJaramain first supported but later opposed them.
C
THE END
Besides the Mu'tazilites an account of whose views has been given above in
some detail, there were some others the details of whose beliefs are given in
the Milal w-al-Ni/ial of ghahrastini and al-Farq bain al-Firaq of al-Baghdadi.
They were 'Amr ibn ‘Ubaid; abu 'Ali ‘Amr bin Qi'id Aswan who had almost
the same position as al-Natt&m, but differed from him in the view that God
has no power over what He knows He does not do, or what He says He
would not do. and man has the power to do that; abu Ja'far Muhammad ibn
'Abd Allah who shared ai-Naztam's views but believed that to God can be
attributed the power to oppress children and madmen, but not those who are
in their full semes; Ja'far ibn Bighr and Ja'far ibn Harb who held that
among tho corrupt of the Muslim community there were some who were
worse than the Jews, Christians, and Magians, and that those who committed
trivial sins would also be condemned to eternal hell; HijhAin ibn 'Amr al-
Fuwnti who had very exaggerated views on the problem of predestination
and did not ascribe any act to God; and abu QAsim 'Abd Allah ibn Ahmad
ibn Mafimiid al-Balkhi, a Mu'tazilite of Baghdad known as al-Ka'bi, who used
to say that the deed of God is accomplished without His will. When it is
said that God wills deeds, it is implied that He is their creator and there is
wisdom in His doing so; and when it ia Baid that He of Himself wills the
deeds of others, all that is meant is that He commands these deeds. Al-Ka'bi
believed that God neither sees Himself nor others. His seeing and hearing
mean nothing other than His knowledge. Al-Ka'bi wrote a commentary on
the Qur’An which consisted of twelve volumes. No one till then-had written
such a voluminous commentary. He died in 309/921.
11 Muhammad Najm al-Gbani KhAn, Madfahib al-Islam. Lucknow, 1924, p. 132.
219
History of Muslim Philosophy
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Abd al-Karim al-Shahrastani. al-Milal w-al-KAal. Bombay, 1S14/18W; Theodor
HaarbrUcker, /Mijmnspartbrin und PhUoeophen-SrAulen. i Vote., Halle. 1850-31;
tho Arabic text edited by Cureton, London, 1846; al BagbdAdi. al-Farq bain al-
Firaq. tr. Kate Chambera Seelye, Part I, Columbia University Pram. New York,
1920; ibn Haan, al-MUal w-al-Nihal, partly translated by Prof. Friedlander in the
JAOS, Vote. XXVHI and XXIX; Krehl, BeitrOge rur CAonKrenriiL- der Lehre vom
Glauben in Ielam, Leipzig, 1855; H. Ritter, Uber Uneere KonnluM der Arabiechen
Philoeophie, Gottengen. 1844; D. B. Macdonald. Development al Muelim Theology.
Jurieprudmce and Constitutional Theory, London A New York, 1903; A, J.
Weneinck, The Muelim Creed, Cambridge, 1932; T. J. de Boer, The History of
Philosophy in Islam. tr. B. R. Jones, London. 1903; The Encyclopaedia of hdam,
prepared under the supervision of M, Th. Houtama and others, 4 Vote, and
Supplement, Leiden, 1913-38; Mubammad Najm alQbaru KhAn, Modbahib al-
IeUm, Lu-know. 1924; alQhazMi. Ihy/T Ulum al-Din. tr. into Urdu: MaflUq
ai-'Arifin by Mubammad Ab»»n, Lucknow, 1313/1896; Mubammad Rida Husain.
ol-Kalam 'ala FalOeifat al-lMm. Lucknow, 1903; Mubammad Imkn 'All
Faleafah-i leUm Lucknow. 1890; abu Mujaffar al-Isfra'ini, al-Tabfir fi al-Din,
Egypt, 1359/1941; Mabmud bin 'Umar al Zamakhsban. ol-KodijM/.
Chapter XI
ASH'ARISM
A
Al.-ASH'ART'S LIFE AND WORKS
Ajh'arism is the uamo of a philosophioo-religious school of thought in Islam
that developed during the fourth and fifth,'tenth and eleventh centuries. This
movement was “an attempt not only to purge Islam of all non-Ialamic elements
which had quietly crept into it but also to harmonize the religious conscious
ness with the religious thought of Islam." It laid the foundation of an orthodox
Islamic theology or orthodox KaUm, as opposed to the rationalist KaUm of
the Mu'tazilites; and in opposition to the extreme orthodox class, it made
use of the dialectical method for the defence of the authority of divine revela
tion as applied to theological subjects.
The position at the end of the third/ninth century was such that the deve
lopment of such a movement as orthodox KaUm was inevitable. The rational
ization of faith, which developed, at the beginning of the second oentury of the
Ilijrah as a systematic movement of thought, in the name of rationalism in
Islam or Mu'tazilite movement, was, in its original Btage. simply an attempt
to put Islam and its basic principles on a rational foundation, by giving a
consistent rational interpretation to the different dogmas and doctrines of
Islam But when the Mu'tazilite rationalists began to study the Arabic trans-
220
Aih'arum
lations of the works of Greek physicists and philosophers, made available to
them by tho early 'Abbasid Caliphs, particularly by al-MansOr and al-M4mun.
they began to apply the Greek philosophical methods and ideas to tho inter
pretation of the banc principles of Islam as well.
Some of the early 'Abbasid Caliphs, particularly al-M4mun, began to
patronize tho rationalism of the Mu'tazilites in publio. The Mu'tazilite specula
tion. in tho hands of tho later Mu'tazilitea, those of the second and third
generations, under the influenoe of Greek philosophy and with the active sup
port and patronage of the Caliphs, tended to bo purely speculative and “ab
solutely unfettered, and in some cases led to a merely negative attitude of
thought.”1 They made reason the sole basis of truth and reality and thus identi
fied the sphere of philosophy with that of religion. They tried to interpret faith
in terms of pure thought. They ignored the fact that the basic principles of
religion are, by their very nature, incapable of logical demonstration or rational
proof. The basic principles of Islam deal with supersensible realities and, as
such, they must first be acoepted on tho authority of revelation. The
Mu'tazilites, in their zeal to judge everything by reason alone, destroyed the
personality of God and reduced Him to a bare indefinable universality or to
an abstract unity. This idea of an abstract, impersonal, absolute God could
not appeal to the ordinary Muslims. The orthodox section of the people reacted
strongly against the Mu'tazilite rationalism and began to consider the
Mu'tazilites to be heretics.
The extreme rationalistic attitude of the later Mu’tazilites waa followed bj
powerful reaction from the orthodox section of the people. This reaction waa
greatly aggravated by the unfortunate attempt of the Caliph al-Mamun to
force Mu'tazilism (rationalist Kalam) on his subjects by introducing miAwiA
(a compulsory test of faith) in the Mu'tazilite doctrines, particularly in their
doctrine of the createdness of the Qur'an. The whole of the third/ninth century
waa a time of reaction. The orthodox Muslims (and among them were the
Traditionista [the MubaddiUfln]). the ^Ahirites (the followers of Diwild ibn
*Ali), and the Muslim jurists (fuqoM') adhered strictly to Tradition and
literal interpretation of the Qur'an and the Sunnah,* and refused to admit
any “innovation1' (bid'ah) in the Shariah (the Islamic Codo). Any theological
discussion was considered an “innovation” and waa as such a cause of dis
pleasure to them.* The reactionary influence of Imlm Ahmad bin Hanbal
and his ?ahirite followers was very strong at that period and the orthodox
Muslims kept themselves safely aloof from tho Mu'tazilites and the philoso
phers. The reaction against the rationalist Kalam went to such an extreme
that even the anthropomorphic verses of the Qur'An were interpreted by them
in a purely literal sense. Malik bin Anas said: “God's settling Himself firmly
upon His Throne is known, the how of it is unknown; belief in it is obligatory;
1 IqbM, The Development of Melaphysiee in Perna, p. S3.
’ Ahmad Amin, Doha al-IelAm, p. 36.
■ Al-Ajh'ari, letihetin atHhaud. p. 4.
221
A History of Muslim Philoeophy
and questioning about it is an innovation."
* Any speculation about sacred
things was considered an innovation. Every dogma was to be believed in with
out raising the question how or why (bila kai/a).
But such an attitude of blind faith could not be maintained for any length
of time. Islam, as a universal religion and aa a living force, had to adapt it
self to new thoughts and to new surroundings. So. as time went on, there arose
gradually a party, from amongst the orthodox section of the Muslims, who real
ized the necessity of putting Islam on a solid ground by advancing “reasons"
for the traditional beliefs, of defending three beliefs against all sorts of attacks
—internal and externa!—and thus purging their faith of all the non-Islamic
elements that had crept into it. They founded the orthodox theology of Islam
by using Kaldm or the philosophical method in order to meet the dialectical
reasoning of the Mn'tazilitea. These theologians who employed Kalim for the
defence of their faith were, therefore, known as the Mutakallimiln (orthodox
theologians).
* But. although these thinkers used philosophical method in their
discussions, they obtained the primary materials from revelation. They deve
loped a rival science of reasoning to meet the Mu'tazilites on their own ground-
in the beginning this new orthodox theological movement developed privately
and secretly. It was at first a gradual unconscious drift. It could not come to
the open for fear of public criticism. Al-Junaid, for instance, had to discuss
the unity of God behind closed doors. Al SfaAfi'i held that some trained people
might defend and purify the faith but that should not be done in public.
Al-Mubasibi and other contemporaries of Imini Ahmad ibn Hanbal incurred
his displeasure for defending the faith with arguments or reason. But gradually
the movement gathered strength and began to be openly preached almost at
the same time in different places of the Muslim world—in Mesopotamia by abu
al-Hasan 'Ali bin IsmS'll al-Ajh'ari (d. 330 or 334/941 or 945), in Egypt by
al-Tabiwi (d. 331/942), and in Samarqand by abu Mansur al-MSturidi (d. 333/
944). But of these three, al-AgJi'ari became the most popular hero, before
whom the Mu'tazilite system (the rationalist Kaldm) went down, and he
came to be known as the founder of the orthodox philosophical theology,
and the school founded by him was named after him as Afth'arism.
Al-Atb'ari was bom at Basrah. Regarding his date of birth there is difference
of opinion. Ibn Kfenllikan in his discussion of the life of al-Agh‘ari, mentions
that he was bom in 260 or 270/873 or 883 and died at Bagbdid in 330/941
or some time after that.
* According to Shibli Nu'mini and ibn 'Aaakir (the
author of Tabyin Kidhb at-Muftari, on the life and teachings of al-Aih'ari),
he was bom in 270/873 and died in 330/941? He was buried between Karkh
and Bib al-Basrah (the gate of Basrah). He was a descendant of abu Musa
* Al-Sliahrast&ni, al-Milal w-al-Nihal, p. 50.
* The subject originally was not called ‘/Im al-KaMm. Thia name was given
afterwards, during al-MamOn's time. See Sbibli. ‘Ilm al-Kaldm, p. 31.
* Ibn Khallikan, H'a/nyiU alA'yan, p. 454.
’ Sbibli, op. tit.. p. 56.
222
Agh'arum
al-Ajh'an, one of the famous Companions of the Prophet. Al-Aah'ari, in his
early youth, came under the care of the great Mu'tazilite scholar of the Basrite
school, abu 'Ali Muhammad bin ‘Abd al-WahhAb al-Jubbi’i, and. as a disciple
of his. became an adherent of the Mu'tazilite school and continued to support
its doctrines up to tho age of forty. After that there happened a sudden change
in his mind and one day he went to the Mosque of Basrah and declared: “He
who knows me, knows who I am, and he who does not know me. let him know
that I am abu al-Hasan ‘Ali al-Ash'ari. that I used to maintain that the
Qur'An u created, that eyes of men shall not see God, and that the creatures
create their actions. Lol I repent that I have been a Mu‘tazilite. I renounce
these opinions and I take the engagement to refute the Mu'tazilites and expose
their infamy and turpitude.” What brought about this sudden change in
al-Ash'ari ia not definitely known to us. Shibli in his 71m al-Kaldm says that
"the change came to him due to some directions which he had obtained in
a dream."1 Ibn Khallikan mentions in this connection the story of a public
discussion in which al-Aah'ari met his old Mu'tazilite teacher. al-Jubba'i. on
the problem of aaldh tm aslah. i.e., tho problem whether God's actions are to
be based on rational consideration and whether He is bound to do what is
beat for His creatures. Al-Ajh'ari came to al-JubbA’i and presented the case of
three brothers, one being God-fearing, another godlees, and a third having died
as a child, and asked him as to what would be their positions in tho next world
Al-JubbA'i could not give a satisfactory and consistent reply to that question
and, on his having failed to justify rationally tho Mu'tazilite doctrine of fallih
wa atlah, al.Ajh'ari abandoned tho Mu'tazilite camp.1 But whatever might
have been the cause of this change, when ho changed he was terribly in earnest.
After the change ha wrote a number of books and ibn Furak says that tho
number amounted to three hundred. Ibn ‘Asakir Dimasbqi has given the
titles of ninety-three of them, but only a few have been preserved and are
enumerated by Brockelmann. His work al-Ibanah 'an UM aLDiyUnah was
printed at Hyderabad, Deccan (India), in 1321/1803 and a small treatise RiMah
fi MMn ai-£iauii fi al-Kaldm was printed in 1323/1905 and reprinted at
Hyderabad in 1344/1925. Al-Alb'ari'a other famous works are aZ-JfaqdkW al.
IMmtyyln (published in Istanbul in 1348/1929), KMb al-Siarh v-al-Taffil.
Luma', Mu'jaz, I'idah al-Hurhan, and Tab'in. Of these books the MaqUUl al-
IMmiyyin ua IkhtM/ al-Mufalliyyin is the most authentic book on the views of
different schools about religious dogmas and doctrines. Al-Maqdldt was written
much earlier than the other books on the same subject, such as 8hahrastAni's
Kitab al-Milal w-al-Niftal. or ibn IJazm's al-Fall fi al-Milal w-al-Ahwfi' tr-al
Nihal Ibn Taimiyyah said in his Minbdj al-Sunnah that the most compre
hensive of the books he went through on the views of different people on the
basic principles of Islam was al-Ash'ari’s al-Sfaydlat al-Islamiytfin and that
' IM.
* Ibn Kbullikan, ap. cil., p. 55.
223
A History of Muslim Philosophy
he (sl-Aah'ari) discussed many of such views in details as were not even
mentioned by others. Ibn al-Qayyim also spoke very highly of thia work. In
his Hadi al-Arwdh and /jfimd' al-Juyusb al-IMmiyyah, he said, "ghahrasUni.
'Abd al-Qihir Baghdadi, and other later writers on the subject simply copied
from al-Agh arl's book and did not discuss the views in details." Al-A jb'ari’s
other famous book al-IMruih 'an Usui al-Diydnah seems to have been written
bv him just after his abandoning the Mu'tazilite viewB. In this book we find
ho is almost a ?Shirite. The reaction against the Mu'tazilite speculation might
have been very strong in his mind at that period. Al-Maqdldl seems to be a
later work. The RiMah ft Istifuan al-Hiaud deals with the objections raised
by the extremely orthodox against the use of Kaldm, and the replies given
by al.Ash‘ari, justifying ita use in matters of faith. Al-Aah'arTs theology has
been discussed mainly in these books. He had a good number of pupils who
passed aa famous theologians and who spread and developed his doctrines
and dogmas. Some of those older Aih'aritea were abu Sahl Saluqi, abu Quff&l.
abu Zaid Maruzi, Z&hir bin Ahmad. Hlfif abu Bakr Jurj&ni, Shaikh abu
Muhammad Tabari, and abu al-Hasan Bahili. Some of the pupils of these
older Aah'arites became still more famous and the best known among them
are Qadi abu Bakr BiqilUni. abu Bakr bin Furak. abu al-QAaim al-Qujhairi
and abu Isbkq Isfra'Ini and his pupil abu al-Ma'ali al-Juwaini, known aa Imim
al- Haramain.10
B
ASH'ARITE THEOLOGY
Al-Ash'ari maintaines an intermediary position between the two diametrically
opposed schools of thought prevailing at the time. He had to tight against
both the opposing parties. At the one extreme were the Mu'tazilites who made
reason in preference to revelation the sole criterion of truth and reality and.
thus, passed slowly into comparatively innocuous heretics. At the other
extreme were the orthodox groups, particularly the Zahirites, the Mujaaaimites
(Anthropomorphism), the Mubaddilhin (Traditionists), and the Jurists, all
of which were wholly opposed to the use of reason or KaUm in defending or
explaining religious dogmas and condemned any discussion about them as
innovation. Al-Ajh'ari wrote his M/udn al-Khaud mainly to meet the objec
tions raised by the orthodox school against tho use of reason in matters of
faith. In that treatise he says. "A section of the people (i.e., the Zahirites and
other orthodox people) made capital out of their own ignorance; discussions
and rational tlunking about matters of faith became a heavy burden for them,
and, therefore, they became inclined to blind faith and blind following (taqltd).
They condemned those who tried to rationalize the principles of religion as
'innovators.' They considered discussion about motion, rest. body, accident,
‘ Shibli. op. at., pp. 55. 57.
224
A|b'*rb»n
colour, space, atom, the leaping of atoms, and attributes of God. to be an
innovation and a sin. They said that had such discussions been the right thing,
the Prophet and his Companions would have definitely done so, they further
pointed out that the Prophet, before his death, discussed and fully explained
all those matters which were necessary from the religious point of view, leaving
none of them to be discussed by his followers ; and since he did not discuss
the problems mentioned above, it was evident that to discuse them must be
regarded aa an innovation.”
They further contended that these so-called theological problems were either
known to the Prophet and his Companions and yet they kept silent and did
not discuss them or they were not known to them. If they knew them and
yet did not discuss them, we are also to follow them in keeping silent, and
if they could remain unaware of them we can also do so. In both cases dis
cussion about them would be an "innovation." These were, in brief, their
objections against the use of Kaldm in matters of faith.
Al-Agh'ari, then, proceeds to justify theological discussions about matters
of faith. He tries to meet these objections in three ways. First, by turning the
objections of the orthodox against themselves by pointing out to them that
the Prophet had not said that those who would discuss these problems were
to be condemned and charged as innovators. Hence, their charging or con
demning others as innovators was itself an innovation, for it amounted to
discussion about matters which the Prophet did not discuss, and condemn
the action of those whom the Prophet did not condemn.
Secondly, “the Prophet was not unaware of all these problems of body,
accident, motion, rest, atoms, etc., though he did not discuss each of them
separately. The general principles fariil) underlying these problems are present
in general, not in details, in tho Qur’an and the Sunnah." Al Agh'ari then
proceeds to prove his contention by citing verses from the Qur'Sn and the
sayings of the Prophet, and thereby showing that the principles underlying
the problems of harlcaft, milcun, lanhid, etc., are, as a matter of fact, present in
the Qur’in and the Sunnah.11
Thirdly, "the Prophet was not unaware of these matters and knew them in
detail, but as problems about them did not arise during his life-time, there was
no question of his discussing or not discussing them.” The Companions of the
Prophet discussed and argued about many religious matters which appeared
during their life-time, although there was no direct and explicit "saying" of
tho Prophet about them, and because of the absence of any explicit injunction
from the Prophet they differed in their judgments about them. Had the ques
tion, for instance, of the creation of the Qur'&n. or of atoms or substance,
been raised in so many words in the life of the Prophet, he would have definitely
discussed and explained it as he did in the case of all those problems which
were then raised. "There is no direct verdict (naff) from the Prophet, for
11 Al-Aih'ari. op. oil.. pp. 4-9
225
A History of Muslim Philosophy
instance, as to whether the Qur'&n is created or uncreated. If to call the
Qur'&n created is an 'innovation," then, on the same ground, to call it un
created must also be an ‘innovation.’" Al-Aah'ari then concludes that Islam
is not opposed to the use of reason ; on the other hand, rationalization of faith
is a necessity in Islam
Al-Agh'ari discussed the main theological problems in his Maqaldtal-Ielanuy-
yin and al-Ibanah 'an UfiU al-Diytlnnh. In these books al-Ajh'ari selects a
few principles which distinguish the Aah'aritee from the Mu'tazilito school of
thought. Later on al-Qhazali put them in a consolidated form in his /Jyd'1*
ns the “Principles of Faith" or Qawd'id al-'Agd'id. and lm&m Fakhr
al-Din al-RAzi explained them more elaborately. The main problems
about which the Ajh'aritee differed from the Mu'tazilitea are: (1) The con-
•eption of God and the nature of His attributes. (2) Freedom of the human
will. (3) The criterion of truth and the standard of good and evil. 14) The
vision (rilyali) of God. (5) Createdness of the Qur'&n. (6) Possibility of
burdening the creatures with impossible tasks. (7) Promise of reward and
threat of punishment. (8) Tho rational or non-rational basis of God's actions.
IB) Whether God is bound to do what is best for His creatures.1*
The problems discussed by the Agh'arites in their system may be broadly
classified into two categories: (i) theological, and (ii) metaphysical.
C
FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES OF THE ASH'ARITE
THEOLOGY
I. Conception o/ God and the Nature of His Attributes.—According to the
Ash'arites. God is one, unique, eternal, existent Being; He ia not a substance,
not a body, not an accident, not limited to any direction, and not in any space.
He possesses attributes such aa knowledge, power, life, will; He is hearing
and seeing and has speech.
About the nature of divine attributes two extreme views were held before
the Ash'arites. On tho ono hand, there were the extreme Attributista (fjif&tls),
tho Anthropomorphista (Mujaasimin), and the Comparers (Muihabbihln), who
maintained that God possesses all the attributes mentioned in tho Qur'&n and
that all such attributes as God's having hands, legs, ears, eyes, and His sitting
firmly (uthca) on His Throne must be taken in their literal sense. Such a
view of the attributes of God is pure anthropomorphism, implying God's
bodily existence. On the other hand, there were the Mu'tazilites who held that
God is one, eternal, unique, absolute Being, having no touch of dualism in
Him His essence is self-contained. Ho does not possess any attributes apart
from His essence. His essence is, for instance, knowing, powerful, seeing, will-
AI-QhazAli, lh;/l' Tlam al-Din. p. 53.
' Shibji, op. al.. p. 59.
226
ing. etc. They denied the attributes of God M anything other than an-
addition to Hie essence.
The Ajh'arites maintained a view which waa, so to say, a reconciliation be
tween the two extreme views. In agreement with the §ifstla and in opposition
to the Mu'tazilites and the "philosophers" (those who were under Greek in
fluence), the Ajh'aritee held that God possesses attributes in general. They
classified the attributes of God into two main groups: (i) fi/dl-i mMyyah.
or negative attributes, and (ii) n/iU-i wujidiyyah or existential or positive
attributes. According to them, the tifil-i u-ujudlyyah, which they also called
fi/ii-i 'aqliyyak or rational attributes, were seven: knowledge, power, will,
life, hearing, seeing, and speech.
The extreme Sifatls asserted that even those attributes of God which imply
His bodily existence are also to be taken in their true literal sense'. As against
them, the Ash'arites maintained that God possesses the apparently anthropo,
morphic attributes no doubt, but these should be understood not in their
literal sense. They are to be believed in bila kaifa, without asking "how,” and
bila taghbih, without drawing any comparison.11
The Agb'arites here introduced a principle that tho attributes of God are
unique and fundamentally different from those of the created beings and as
such should not bo compared to them. This ia known as the doctrine of mufcjd-
la/ah, or absolute difference. This doctrine signifies that if any quality or term
is applied to God, it must be understood in a unique sense and never taken
in the sense in which it ia normally used when applied to created beings.
Because of the doctrine of makbila/ah, the Ash'aritea held that we are not
allowed to ascribe any attribute to God unless it ia expressly so applied in
the Qur'kn. God’s attributes differ from those of the creatures, not in degree
but in kind, i.e.. in their whole nature,
Tho Ash'aritre, as against the Mu'tazilites, held that “God has attributes
which inhere eternally in Him and are in addition to His essence.”1’ There
attributes are eternal, but they are neither identical with His essence, nor
are they quiu different from or other than His essence. God ia knowing,
for instance, means that God possesses knowledge as an attribute, which
is inherent in God, and although it ia not exactly the same as His essence,
yet it is not something quite different from and other than His essence. The
Agh'arites, here, maintained a very difficult position. They were between the
two horns of a dilemma. They could neither assert the eternal attributes of
God to be identical with nor wholly different from the essence of God.
They could not agree to the Mu'tazilite view and assert the identity of the
attributes with the essence of God. because that would be a virtual denial of
the attributes. They could not also assert that these eternal attributes are
something absolutely different, or other than and separate, from God,
11 Al Aah'ari. allbdnul'. p. 47.
him ■d-Mayalat. p. 291.
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
is that would lead to multiplicity of eternals, and go against divine unity.
They, therefore, maintained that these attributes are. in one sense, included
n and, in another sense, excluded from, the essence of God.1* It is common
knowledge that the Ash arites contended that essence (mahiyyah), and attri
butes ffifal) are two different things and they cannot be otherwise in the
case of God, the Supreme Being. The Asfa'aritea made a distinction between
the meaning or connotation (ma/hum) of a thing and its reality (fraqiqah).
So far aa their meaning is ooncemod, the attributes and the essence of God
are not the same and as such the attributes are in addition to the essence of
God, i.e.. they have different meanings. The meaning of dj-lt (essence) is
different from tho meanings of different attributes. God’s essenoe, for instance,
is not knowing or powerful or wise, but so far as their ultimate haqigah (reality
or application) is concerned, the attributes are inherent in the divine essence,
and hence are not something quite different from or other than the essence
of God."
In support of tho above view of theirs, the Ash antes advanced the following
arguments.
The analogical argument of the Ajli'arites of the older generation: God's
actions prove that He is knowing, powerful, and willing; so they also prove
that He possesses knowledge, power, will, etc., because the ground of inference
cannot differ in different things. What is true in the case of a created being
must also be true in the case of the Divine Being.18 In the case of a human
being, by "knowing” we mean one who possesses knowledge and even common
sense and draws a line of demarcation between an esaenoe and ita attributes.
On the same analogy, distinction must be drawn between the essence of God
and His attributes. The essence and tho attributes should not be supposed to
be blended in the Divine Being. Henoc the attributes of God cannot be
identical with His essence, as the Mu'tazilites held. But this analogical
reasoning is very weak, for what is true of a finite being need not necessarily
bo true of an infinite being. But, according to the doctrine of muJJdla/oA,
God's knowledge or power or will and. as a matter of fact, all His rational
attributes signify quite different meanings when applied to created beings.
Secondly, they argued that if all the attributes of God are identical with
His essence, the divine essence must be a homogeneous combination of contra
dictory qualities. For instance, God is merciful (rahim) and also revengeful
(qahhdr); both the contradictory attributes would constitute the essence ol
God, which is one, unique, and indivisible (afrad), and that is absurd.
Further, if the attributes are identical with God’s essence, and if. for instance
His being knowing, powerful, and living is Ilia essence itaelf. no useful purpose
will be served by ascribing them to Him, for that would ultimately be the
18 Abu al-'Ala, ftarA-i JUawlyi/, p. 571.
" Ibid., pp. 581 82.
11 AI-ShahrastAni, op. eil., p. 51.
228
Agh'arism
virtual application of His essence to itself, which is useless. Hence the divine
attributes cannot be identical with the divine essence.
Thirdly, if the attributes of God are not distinct from His essence, the
meanings of the different attributes will be exactly the same, for God's essence
is a simplo and indivisible unity. The meanings of knowing, willing, and living,
for instance, will be exactly the same, and thus knowledge will mean power,
or power will mean life, and so on.” This aho is an absurdity. These different
attributes imply different meanings and hence they cannot be identical with
God's essence. His essence is one and He possesses many attributes which
eternally inhere in Him and, though not identical with His essence, yet they
are not absolutely different from His essence.
2. Fret-m'U.—On the question of free-will or on the ability of man to
choose and produce actions, the Ash'aritea took up again an intermediary
position between the libertarian and fatalistic views, held by the Mutazilitcs
and the Jabrites respectively The orthodox people and the Jabrites maintained
a pure fatalistic view. They held that human actions are predetermined and
predestined by God. Man has no power to produce any action. "Everything,"
they contended, "is from God." God has absolute power over everything
including human will and human actions. The Mu'tazilites and the Qadarites,
on the other hind, held that man has full power to produce an action and has
complete freedom in his choice, though the power was created in him by God.
The Aah'aritcs struck a middle path. They made a distinction between
creation (kbiilq) and acquisition (hub) of an action. God, according to the
Ath'arites, is the creator (khdliq) of human actions and man is the acquisitor
(muktasib). “Actions of human beings are created fmakHuq) by God, the
creatures are not capable of creating any action.”” "There is no creator except
God and the actions of man are, therefore. His creation."*1 Power (qudrab).
according to them, is either (i) original (qadirnah) or (ii) derived fAddifioA ).
The original power alone is effective. Derived power can create nothing. The
power possessed by man is given by God and as such it is derived.” Al-
Agh'ari said, “The 4rue meaning of acquisition is the occurrence of a thing
or event due to derived power, and it is an acquisition for the person by
whose derived power it takes place."” God is, thus, the creator of human
actions and man is the acquisitor. Man cannot create anything; he cannot
initiate work. God alone can create, because absolute creation is His pre
rogative. God creates in man the power and the ability to perform an act. He
also creates in him the power to make a free choioe (iHltifdr) between two
alternatives—between right and wrong. This free choice of man is not effective
in producing the action. It ia the habit or nature of God to create the action
M Al-Agfa'ari. alMaqdUI, p. 484.
” Ibid., p. 291.
■' Al Ajh'an, allMnab. p. 9.
” Idem. al-MaqMt, pp. 639-54.
Ibid., p. 542.
229
A History of Muslim Philosophy
corresponding to the choice and power created by Himself in man. Thus, the
action of man is created by God, both as to initiative and as to production
or completion. Man is free only in making the choice between alternatives
and also in intending to do the particular action freely chosen. Man, in making
this choice and intending to do the act, acquires (iktisdb) either the merit
of appreciation and reward from God if he makes the right choice, or the
demerit of condemnation and punishment if he makes the wrong choice. The
Aah'arites, thus, in order to avoid the fatalistic position, introduced the doc
trine of acquisition by which, they thought, they could account for man’s
free-will and lay responsibility upon him. Man has no free-will in the Mu'tazilite
sense; he has no real and effective power, but has some derived power by
which he acquires a share in the production of the act. In the case of voluntary
actions of human beings, there are, so to say, two causes. The action is the
combined effect of the real cause, God, and tho choice and intention of man.
the acquisitor, the possessor of ineffective power because of its being derived
power. God creates in two ways; either with a locus (mahaJl) or without a
locus. Human actions are His creation with a locus.** "God creates, in man,
the power, ability, choice, and will to perform an act, and man, endowed with
this derived power, chooses freely one of the alternatives and intends or wills
to do tho action, and, corresponding to this intention, God creates and com
pletes the action."** It is this intention on the part of man which makes him
responsible for his deeds. Man cannot take the initiative in any matter, nor
can he originate any action. But the completion of the act is partially due to
his intention. He, thus, acquiree the merit or demerit of the action because
of his intending to do a good or bad action. Man's free choice is, so to say,
an occasion for God's causing the action corresponding to that choice. In this
the Ash'arites come very close to the occasionalism of Malebranche which
was expounded in Europe eight centuries and a half later. This correspondence
and harmony between the choice of man and God’s creation, according to the
Asb'aritcs, is not due to a harmony established by God previously, but because
of His habit or nature to create the harmony whenever human action is done.
This, in short, is the solution of the problem of free-will offered by the
Ash'arites. The Agh'aritc view on this problem is not free from logical and
ethioal difficulties. It was really very difficult for them to reconcile the absolute
determination of all events by God with man's accountability and responsi
bility for his deeds. Some of the later Aeh'arites, particularly Imam Falrfir
al Din al -R&zi, discarded the veil of acquisition in order to escape the charge
of fatalism, and advocated naked determinism.’*
3. Tie Problem of Reason and Revelation and the Criterion of Good and Evil.—
Tho Ash anti's differ from tho Mu'tazilites on tho question whether reason or
" Abu al-'Ala, op. eit„ p. 620.
" Al-ShahrastAni, op. e»r., p. 53.
’• Shibli, op oil., p. 72.
230
Ath'arwm
revelation should be the basis or source of truth and reality. Both the schools
admit the necessity of reason for the rational understanding of faith, but they
differ with regard to the question whether revelation or reason is more fun
damental and, in case of a conflict, whether reason or revelation is to get
preference. The Mu'tazilites held that reason is more fundamental than revela
tion and is to be preferred to revelation Revelation merely confirms what is
accepted by reason and, if there be a conflict between the two, reason is to
be preferred and revelation must be so interpreted aa to be in conformity with
the dictates of reason.
The Ajb'arites, on the other hand, held that revelation is more funda
mental as the source of ultimate truth and reality, and reason should merely
confirm what is given by revelation. The Aah'arites prefer revelation to reason in
case of a conflict between the two. As a matter of fact, this is one of the funda
mental principles in which the rational Kalam of the Mu'tazilites differs from
the orthodox Kalam of the Ash'arites If pure reason is made the sola basis or
source of truth' and reality, including the truth and reality of the most, fun
damental principles or concepts on which Islam is based, it would be a pure
speculative philosophy or at best a rational theology in general and not a
doctrinal theology of a particular historic religion, i.e., that of Islam in par
ticular. Islam is based on certain fundamental principles or concepts which,
being supraeensible in nature, are incapable of rat ional proof. These principles,
first, must be believed in on the basis of revelation. Revelation, thus, is the
real basis of the truth and reality of these basic doctrines of Islam. Thia faith,
based on revelation, must be rationalized. Islam as a religion, no doubt,
admits the necessity of rationalizing ita faith. But to admit the necessity of
rationalizing faith is not to admit pure reason or analytic thought to be the
sole source or basis of Islam aa a religion. Reason, no doubt, has the right to
judge Islam and ita baaio principles, but what is to be judged is of such a
nature that it cannot submit to the judgment of reason except on its own
terms. Reason must, therefore, be subordinated to revelation. Ita function is
to rationalize faith in the basic principles of Islam and not to question
the validity or truth of the principles established on the basis of revelation
aa embodied in the Qur’Sn and the Sunnah. Tho problem of the criterion of
good and evil follows aa a corollary to the problem of reason and revelation.
The problem of good and evil is one of the most controversial problems of
Islamic theology. The Mu'tazilites held that reason, and not revelation, is
the criterion or standard of moral judgment, i.e., of the goodness and badness
of an action. The truth and moral value of things and human actions must
bo determined by reason. They contended that moral qualities of good and
evil are objective; they are inherent in the very nature of things or actions
and as such can bo known by reason and decided to be good or bad.
The Atb'aritca, aa against the Mu'tazilitca, held that revelation and not
reason ia the real authority or criterion to determine what is good and what
is bad. Goodness and badness of actions (hum ira qubh) are not qualities
231
A History of Muslim Philosophy
inhering in them; those are mere accidente (a rid). Actions-in-themselvee are
neither good nor bad. Divine Law makes them good or bad.
In order to make the ground of controversy between the Mu'tazilites and
the Ash'aritea clearer, we may explain here the three different senses in which
these two terms, good and evil, are used.*'
(i) Good and evil are sometimes used in the sense of perfection and defect
respectively. When we say that a certain thing or action is good or bad (for
instance, knowledge is good and ignorance is bad), we mean that it is a quality
which makes its possessor perfect or implies a defect in him.
(ii) These terms are also used in a utilitarian sense meaning gain and loss
in worldly affairs. Whatever is useful or has utility in our experience ia good,
and the opposite of it is bad. So whatever is neither useful nor harmful is
neither good nor bad.
Both the Asb'aritee and the Mu'tazilites agree that in the two senses, men
tioned above, reason is the criterion or standard of good and evil. There is no
difference of opinion in the above two senses. But good and bad in the second
sense may vary from time to time, from individual to individual, and from place
to plaoe. In this sense there will be nothing permanently or universally good or
bad; what is good to one may be bad to others and vice versa. This implies
that good ami evil are subjective and not objoctive and real. Henoe actions
uro neither good nor bad. but experience or workability would make them so
and, therefore, they can be known by reason without the help of revelation.
(iii) Good and evil are also used in a third sense of oommendable and praise
worthy or condemnable in this world and rewardable or punishable, aa tho
case may be, in the other world.
The Aih'aritca maintained that good and evil in their third sense must
be known through revelation, not by reason as the Mu'tazilites had held.
According to the Aah'aritos, revelation alone decides whether an action is good
or bad. What is commanded by Star' is good, and what is prohibited is bed.
SAar' can convert previously-declared-good into bad and vice versa. As actions
by themselves are neither good nor bad, there ia nothing in them which would
make them rewardable (good) or punishable (bad). They are made rewardable
or punishable by revelation or SAar‘. As there is no quality of good or evil
seated in the very future of an act. there can be no question of knowing it
bv reason
4 The Problem o/ Ihe Eternity 0/ the Qnr'an.—There was a great controversy
ovi-r the question whether the Qur'an is created or uncreated and eternal.
This question is bound up with another question whether speech is one of
attributes or not. The orthodox section of the Muslims, including th*
Alh'ariteu. held that God has it as One of His seven rational attributes, and
as His attributes are eternal, divine speech, i.e., the Qur'&n, is also eternal.
■' Q»d> Add ami Sayysl Shsrlf. Mentp’J. Vol. IV. p. IB2; MnsaUam al-U-.bal.
|i. 114.
232
Aib'ariam
Ab regards the eternity of the Qur'An, the Ath'aritre adopted again an inter-
tr ediary position between the extreme views of the JAhiritee and the Mu'tazi-
Uses. The Hanbalites and other JUhiritcs (extreme orthodox schools) held
that the speech of God, i.e., the Qur’An, is composed of letters, words, and
sounds which inhere in the essence of God and is. therefore, eternal. Some
of tho Hanbalitee went to the extreme and asserted that even the cover and
tho binding of the Qur'An aro eternal." Tho Mu'tazilites and a section of the
Rafidites went to the other extreme and maintained that the Qur'An was
created. They denied all attributes of God, including tho attribute of speech,
on the ground that if it be an eternal attribute of God, there would be multi
plicity of eternals, to believe which is polytheism and contrary to the basic
principles of Islam. They further arguod that “the Qur'An is composed of parts,
successively an-anged parts, and whatever is composed of such parts must
be temporal."" Hence the Qur’An must be created. The Aah'aritee maintained
that the Qur'An ia composed of words and sounds, but these do not inhere in
the essence of God. They made a distinction between tho outward and con
crete expression of the Qur'An in language, and the real, self-subsiatent mean
ing of it, and held that the Qur'An, aa expressed in words and sounds, is, no
doubt, temporal (hadith), but against the Mu’tazilites they asserted that the
Qur'An in its meanings is uncreated and eternal. The "self-subsisting meaning"
eternally inheres in the essence of God. These meanings are expressed; their
expression in language is temporal and created. It is so because the same mean
ing, while remaining the same, might be expressed differently at different
times, in different places by different persons or nations, They further main
tained that this meaning is an attribute other than knowledge and will and,
as such, inheres eternally in the essence of God and ia, therefore, eternal."
In support of thia contention the Ash'arites advanced the following argu
ments
(i) The Qur’An is “knowledge from God”; it is, therefore, inseparable from
God's attribute of knowledge which is eternal and uncreated. Hence it ia also
eternal and uncreated.
(ii) God created everything by His word kun (be) and this word, which ia
in the Qur'An, could not have been a created one, otherwise a created word
would be a creator, which is absurd. Hence God's word is uncreated, i.e,.
eternal.
(iii) The Qur’An makes a distinction between creation (khalq) and command
(amr) when it Bays, "Are not the creation and command His alone 1" Hance
God's command, His word or kalam. which is definitely something other than
created thingB (makHuq). must be uncreated and eternal.
(iv) Further, God says to Moses. "I have chosen thee over mankind with
•• Baihaqi, Kitab al-Ama' w-al-Si/tU, p. 198.
" QAdi 'Add and Sayyid Sharif, op. eil.. p. 601.
•• aitarh i MawAqif, p. 602; <d-IMna*. pp. 23-42.
« Al UaqaUt. p. 292.
233
A History of Muslim Philosophy
My apostolate and My word." This verse signifies that God lias speech. Again,
Moses is addressed by God with the words: "Lo, I am thy Lord.” Now, if
the word which addresses Moses is a created thing, it would mean that a created
thing asserts that it is Moses’ Lord (God), which is absurd. God's word, there
fore, must be eternal. The Ash'arites further pointed out that all the different
arguments advanced by the Mu'tazilites (and in Sbarh-i Mawm/i/ as many
as eight such arguments have been mentioned), in support of their view that
the Qur’&n is created, would apply only to the expressed Qur'in and not to
the real Qur'An, the latter being the "meanings of the Qur'in."”
5. TAe Problem oj the Beatific Vision.—On the question of the beatific vision,
the Agh'arites, true to their attitude of reconciliation, again tried to adopt a
course lying midway betwoen the extreme anthropomorphic view of the ^Ahi
rites and other orthodox Muslims on the one hand and the view of the Mu'tazi
lites and the "philosophers” on the other. The extreme orthodox Muslims and
the ?&hirites, in particular, held that it is possible to see God and the righteous
persons would actually have His vision aa the chief reward for their good
actions. They further held that God is settled firmly on His Throne, He exists
in different directions, and is capable of being pointed out. The Mu'tazilitea
and the "philosophers" denied the possibility of seeing God with eyes, as that
would imply His bodily existence, which is absurd. The Ajh'aritea, aa against
the Mu'tazilites and the "philosophers," and in agreement with tho orthodox
class, held that it is possible to see God;” but they could not agree to their
view that God is extendod and can be shown by pointing out. They
accepted the philosophical principle that whatever is extended or spatial must
be contingent and temporal, and God is not an extended and temporal being.
This admission landed them into a difficulty, for if God is not extendod and
only extended things can be Boon, God cannot be seen;*4 but thia conclusion
conflicts with their position that beatific vision is possible. So, in order to get
out of this difficulty, they asserted the possibility of seeing an object even
if it is not present before the perceiver.wThis was a very peculiar and untenable
position, for it repudiated all the principles of optics.
It is possible to see God even though our sense of vision does not receive
the corresponding “impression" of the object on it. Besides, it is possible for
God to create in human beings the capacity to see Him without the necessary
conditions of vision, such as the presence, in concrete form, of the objoct itself
in space and time, normal condition of the appropriate sense-organ, absence
of hindrance or obstruction to perception, and so on; and though God is un
extended and does not exist in space and time, "yet He may make Himself
visible to His creature like tho full moon." They further contended that the
“ Dhalmbi. Nisan al-Ptidal (Allahabad edition), pp. 179-93; al-A|h'ari. al
NaqOlai, pp. 588-802.
Al-lMnah. p. 9.
4 Shibli, op. ci/., p. 63.
Sbarh-i NaurUpf, pp. 610-24.
234
Aih'anam
vision of God is possible without any impression on our sense-organ for another
reason. There is practically no difference between a "sensation'' and an "after
image" except that the sensation possesses an additional quality over and
above the common qualities present in both, and this additional quality, i.e.,
impression on tho sense-organ produced by the external object, does not make
any difference in the perception of an object. Hence, though this impression
is missing in the case of seeing God, it may still be called "seeing." The weak
ness of this argument is apparent to any student of psychology, because an
after-image is possible only when it is preoeded by an actual impression of
the object on the sense-organ. The actual impression of the object is, there
fore, a precondition of an after-image in the case of beatific vision too.
The Ajh'aritee were faced with another difficulty. The Mu'tazilites had
pointed out that if seeing of God is possible, it must be possible under all
circumstances and at all times, for this possibility is due either to His essence
or to an inseparable attribute in Him. In either case, it should be possible at
all times. And if it is possible at all times, it must be possible now; and if it
is possible to see Him now*, wc must sec Him now, for when all the conditions
of "vision" are present, the actual seeing must take place. The Agh'aritcs met
this objection in a very naive manner by saying, "We do not admit the necessity
of actual seeing taking place, even when all its eight conditions are present.”
The Agh'arites supported their views on tho basis of revelation. According
to tho Qur'&n, Moses asked of God, "0, my Lord, show Thyself to me so
that I can see Thee." Had seeing been impossible, Moses would not have said
so, for, otherwise, it must be assumed that either ho knew ita impossibility
or did not, and both the alternatives are absurd, because an intelligent person
like him could not have been ignorant of this impossibility and could not have
asked for what he knew was impossible.
Again, according to the Qur'&n, God said to Moses, "If the mountain remains
fixed in ita place, you can see Me," and if the antecedent is possible the con
sequent must be possible. Here, evidently, the antecedent, fixity of the moun
tain, is in itself a possible thing. Therefore, the consequent, the vision of God,
must also be possible. Some other verses also support the conclusion.”
There are a few more controversial problems of secondary importance,
in which the Ajh'arites differed from the Mu'tazilites. These are, for example,
promise of reward and threat of punishment by God; whether God can
make His creatures responsible for the actions for which they have no ability;
whether God's actions are bound to bo based on rational considerations and
on purpose; whether He is bound to do what is best for His creatures; and
whether the knowledge of God or recognition of His existence is based on
reason or revelation.
These theological problems ofsecondary importance are more or less the corol
laries of the main principles in which tho Agh'arites and Mu'tazilites differed.
•• Al-Ibttmsb. pp. 13-20.
235
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The Agfa'arites held that God is the only real cause of everything; He alone
possesses real and effective power and thia power is unlimited; His will is
absolutely free—not determined by anything. Whatever power human beings
apparently possess is given by God. Man does not possess any real and effective
power. God, being absolutely free in His action, is not bound to act on rational
purpose. He does not act teleologically for, otherwise, His actions would be
determined by something external to and other than Himself and He would
not remain absolutely free. External purpose would put a limit to God's
omnipotence. Like Spinoza, alAajfari held that there is no purpose in the
mind of God which would determine His activity. From this anti-teleological
view it follows that as God's action is not teleological. He is not bound to do
what is best for His creatures. Ho does whatever He wills. But as He is an
absolutely intelligent and just being. His actions, as a matter of fact, are all
full of wisdom.”
As against the Mu'tazilites, the Ajh'arites held that God can make us
responsible for the actions which we have no power to do. The Mu'tazilites held
that God cannot do so, because that would be an irrational and unjust act
on His part. It is admitted by all schools of thought in Islam that power or
ability of men to do a thing is given by God. But opinions differ on the question
whether this power or ability is really effective in producing any action. The
Mu'tazilites and the Qadarites held that man's power is fully effective and can
produce an action. But the Ash'arites maintained that, being derivative, it
can have no effective force. Similar are their respective positions with regard
to the ability to act. This ability is no donbt given by God as an accident, but
the Mu'tazilites, particularly abu al-Hudfcail ‘AllAf, held that this ability is
given to man aimuUaneowly with the performance of the act. But the Agh'arites
maintained that it is given before the actual performance of the act;** but
being a mere accident in man, it has only a momentary existence and is of
no practical use to man in performing the act. As a matter of fact, it ceases
to exist when the actual action takes place. Man, therefore, does the act,
practically without having the power and the ability to do so. He is held
responsible for his actions because of his choosing freely one of the two alter
native actions and intending to do the action so chosen. But neithor his choice
nor his intention can produce the action. It is God who creates the action
and is thus its effective and real cause."
There ia an almost similar controversy over the quostion of God's promise
of reward to the virtuous and His threat of punishment to the wrong-doer.
Thia was one of the five main problems with which the Mu'tazilite movement
started *• The Mu'tazilitea held that God is bound to fulfil His promises of
reward and punishment. Every action, good or bad, must take its own course
” Al-MacflUU, p. tit; Bhibli, '/Im ol-KaUm. p. 59.
*■ Al-MayOUt. p. 43.
" Al-Sbahraatflni. op. cil., p. 53.
•• Maa'fldi, MurC.j al-Qhahab.
236
Aih'&psm
and be followed by ita logical and normal oonaequence. A right action, there
fore. must be followed by its reward and a wrong one by punishment. God
has made promises in the Qur'&n and He, being a just being, cannot do other
wise, i.e.. He cannot punish the virtuous and forgive the wrong-doer.
On the other hand, the Alh'arites maintained that, being all.powerful and
absolutely free in His will, God can punish His creatures even if they have
not committed any sins or reward His creatures even though they have done
no virtuous deeds. There is nothing binding on God; His will is not subject
to teleological considerations. It is by the inner necessity of His own nature
that He fulfils His promises of reward to the virtuous and does not do
otherwise. And it is in His infinite mercy that He may forgive any wrong
doer or vicious person, in spite of the threats of punishment for his vicious
acta. This act of forgiveness will also be in accordance with His nature as the
most generous and gracious being.
D
A8H‘ARITE METAPHYSICS
Al-Agh’arl's interest was purely theological and his discussions did not con
tain much metaphysics.41 But the subsequent Ajh'arites found it impossible
to achieve their main object of defending the faith and harmonizing reason
with revelation without making reference to the ultimate nature of reality.
Al-Aah'arl’s theological system was, thus, considered to be incomplete without
a support from metaphysics. The system was fully developed by the later
Alh'arites, particularly by QSdi abu Bakr Muhammad bin fayy-ib al-B&qiilini
who was one of the greatest among them. He was a Basritc, but he made Bagh
dad his permanent residence and died there in 403/1013. He was a great original
thinker and wrote many valuable books on theology and various other subjects.
He made use of some purely metaphysical propositions in his theological
investigations, such as substance is an individual unity, accident lias only a
momentary existence and cannot exist in quality, and perfect vacuum is
possible, and thus gave the school a metaphysical foundation. About him a
Western scholar has remarked: "It is his glory to have contributed most
important elements to, and put into fixed form what is, perhaps, the most
daring metaphysical scheme, and almost certainly the most thorough theo
logical scheme, ever thought out. On the one hand, the Lucrctian atoms
raining down through the empty void, the self-developing monads and pre-
established harmony of Leibniz, and all the Kantian "things-in-themselves"
are lame and impotent in their consistency beside the parallel Atfa'aritc
doctrines; and on the other, not even the rigours of Calvin, as developed in
Dutch confessions, can compete with the unflinching exactitude of the Muslim
conclusions.'-4*
41 gfidili. op. eit , p. S7; Iqbal, op. rd., p. M.
Macdonald. Vmlopmenl of MuMm Theotoyy. Jurioprudenci and Conolihilronat
Theory, pp. 200-01.
237
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The Ash'arites, being primarily interested in theological problems, kept their
philosophical discussions mainly confined only to those questions which they
thought had a direct or indirect bearing on these problems.*** Willingly or
unwillingly, they had to philosophize “in order to meet the contemporary
philosophers on their own ground." But when they began philosophizing, they
were very earnest and became great metaphysicians.
In dealing with the moet important basic principles of Islam: (i) the existence
of God, as the creator of the universe, and Ilia unity and oneness, and (ii) the
belief in the prophethood of Muhammad, they had to use certain proofs which
necessitated some metaphysical and epistemological discussions. Hence they
had to develop a theory of knowledge and a theory of reality, which were
peculiarly their own. God, the ultimate principle, is, according to tho Ash'arites,
a necessary existent; His existence is identical with His essence. In proving
God's existence the Ash'aritee used three arguments. Their argument from the
contingent nature of motion ia not of much importance to our discussion. The
other two are:
(i) All bodies, they argued, are ultimately one in so far as their essence is
concerned. But, in spite of thiB basic unity, their characteristics are different
Hence there must be an ultimate cause for these divergent characteristic, and
that ultimate cause is God.
(ii) The world is contingent. Every contingent thing must have a cause;
therefore, the world must have a cause, and as no contingent thing can be
the cause, that cause must be God. The major premise (i.e., every event must
have a causa) does not require a proof. The minor premise—the world is con
tingent—they proved in the following manner: Everything that exists in the
world ia either a substance or a quality. The contingent character of a quality
is evident, and tho contingency of substance follows from the fact that no
substance could exist apart from qualities. The oontingenoe of quality neces
sitates the contingence of substance; otherwise, the eternity of substance would
**
necessitate the eternity of quality.
The Ash'aritee believed in miracles which were considered to be the basis
of the proof of prophethood and, in order to defend this viow, they had to
dent the laws of nature. They also denied causality in nature and made God
the only cause of everything.
Now. in order to explain the full implication of the above arguments, it was
necessary for them to develop a theory of knowledge and a metaphysics.
The world consists of things. Now, the question arises: What is meant by
a thing, what is its nature, and how far do we know it 1
AlB&qillkni defined knowledge as the cognition of a thing as it is in itself.“
A thing ia defined by the Agh'arites as “that which is existent." Everything
•• SkorA-i MawGqil. p. 15.
•• Shibli, op. oil., pp. 87. 88.
*• MawOqif, p. 15.
238
Ash'arism
is an existent and every existent is a thing.
* ’ So, according to the Ajh'arites,
existence, whether necessary or contingent, is the thing or the essence of tho
thing-in-itsclf and not a quality in addition to it, as the Mu'tazilitos held.
Al-Jabi?, al-Jubb&'i, and some other Mu'tatilitea of the Bafrite school defined
a “thing” aa that which is known." and held that existence is a quality of it,
added to its essence. The Ajh'arites, as against these Mu'tazilites, contended
that if existence ia an additional quality, the essence-in-itself would be a non
existent and honce a non-entity and the subsequent addition of the quality
of “existence” to it would involve a clear contradiction in so far as it would
make the non-existent existent.
** This is an absurdity. The thing-initsclf
which is the object of knowledge according to the Agh'aritee, is. therefore, an
existent thing or a body. Everything that exists in the world has a contingent
existence and is either substance or quality. In this sense God is not a thing.
The Aristotelian categories of thought were subjected by the Ajh'aritca to
a searching criticism. Only two of those categories, substance and quality,
were retained by them. The other categories, quality, plaoe, time, etc., are
nothing but relative characteristics (i'lihardl) that exist subjectively in the
mind of the knower, having no corresponding objective reality. Like Berkeley,
the Irish philosopher, they also did not make any distinction between the
primary and secondary qualities of objects. The world, therefore, consists of
substance, on which the mind reflects, and qualities, which are not in the
thing-in-itaolf but only in the mind of the knower. The qualities are mere
accidents which are fleeting, transitory, and subjective relations, having only
a momentary existence. A quality or accident cannot exist in another accident
but only in a substance. No substance could over exist apart from a quality.
The substance, being inseparable from its aocidents, must also be transitory,
having only a moment's duration, just aa the accidents are. Everything that
exists, therefore, consists of mere transitory units (subjective), having only a
moment's duration. The Ash'aritee, thus, rejected the Aristotelian view of
matter aa “a permanent potentiality (hayula) of suffering the impress of
form (surah),’’ because a possibility is neither an entity nor a non-entity but
purely a subjectivity. With inert matter, tho active form and all causes must
also go. They, too, are mere subjectivities. This led them straight to tho
atomists and, as a matter of fact, they did become atomists after their own
fashion.
In thia connection we may observe that the object of the Aeh'aritea waa,
like that of Kant, to fix the relation of knowledge to the thing-in-itaelf. and
they showed here a groat originality in their thought. On this question they
not only anticipated Kant but, in reaching the thing.initaelf, they were much
more thorough than Kant. "In hia examination of human knowledge regarded
aa a product and not merely a process, Kant stopped at the idea of 'Ding an
•• lM..p. 128.
■’ Al Maqdisi, p. 520.
•• 8&arh-j MatMqif, p. 109.
239
A History of Muslim Philosophy
sioh’ [thing-in-itself], but the Alh'arite endeavoured to penetrate further, and
maintained, against the contemporary Agnostic-Realism, that the so-called
underlying essence existed only so far as it was brought In relation to the
knowing subject."**
A]i‘arile Alomijm.—The substances perceived by us are atoms which come
into existence from vacuity and drop out of existence again. The world is
made up of such atoms. The Aih'srite atoms are fundamentally different
from those of Democritus and Lucretius.The Ajh'arite atoms are not material;
they arc not permanent; they have only a momentary existence; they are not
eternal but every moment brought into being, and then allowed to go out of
existence by the Supreme Being, God, the only cause of everything in the
universe. Three atoms are not only of space but of time also. They are non
material or ideal in character. They resemble the monads of Leibniz. But the
Alh'arite monads differ from those of Leibniz in having no possibility of
self-development along certain lines. Each monad has certain qualities but
has extension neither in space nor in time. They have simply position, not
bulk, and ace isolated from and independent of one another. There is absolute
void between any two monads. Space and time are subjective. All changes
in the world are produced by their entering into existence and dropping out
again, but not by any change in themselves. The Agh'arite ontology
necessitated the existence of God. Their monads must have a cause, without
which they oould not have oome into being, nor could there be any harmony
or connection between them. This cause must be a causa sui; otherwise there
would be an infinite regress of the causal nexus. The Ath'aritcs found this
cause in the free-will of God. It creates and annihilates the atoms and their
qualities and. thus, brings to pass all motion and change in the world.
The Aib'aritea were, thus, thoroughgoing metaphysicians. Being was all-
important in their ontology. The will of that Being or God must, therefore, be
the ground of all things. Hence they did not find any difficulty, as Leibniz
did, in explaining the harmony and coherence among the isolated, windowless.
and independent monads, constituting the one orderly world. I-eibniz had to
bring in, in his monadology, a Monad of monads or God, and fall back upon
the Theory of Pre-established Harmony to bring his monads into harmonious
and orderly relations with one another, and this he could do only at the cost
of his monadology, and by abandoning his pluralistic and individualistic meta
physics. But the Ash'arites, consistently with their ontology, fell straight back
upon God, and found in His will the ground of orderliness and harmony in the
universe. They were, thus, more thorough and consistent than Leibniz in their
theory of monads. The Ash'arite atomism approaches that of Lotze’s, who in
spite of liis desire to save external reality, ended in its complete reduction
to ideality. But. like Lotze, they could not believe their atoms to be the innSi*
working of the Infinite Primal Being.
Iqbal; op. cd., p. 57.
240
Aih'arum
The necessary oonsequence of their analysis is a thoroughgoing idealism like
Chat of Berkeley. Their theory of knowledge reduced the universe to a mere
show of ordered subjectivities which, aa they maintained like Berkeley, found
their ultimate explanation in the will of God. Their interest, aa we have already
pointed out, was mainly theological. Interest in pure monotheism was very
strong with them. Their metaphysical and epistemological discussions wore
actuated by a pious desire to defend the idea of divine creation, to drive
men back to God and His revelation and compol them to see in Him the one
grand fact of the universe.
The Ash'arites are hero more consistent than Berkeley. God, according to
them, is the only cause in the true sense of the term. No created thing, having
created power, oould be the cause of anything.
Tho attitude of the Ajjl'arites towards the law of causation was sceptical.
They denied objective validity of oausality in nature. No created thing or
being can be the cause of anything. Things or beings in nature do not possess
any power or quality which oould product any effect. The so-called power
which men and objects of nature seem to possess is not an effective power,
for it is a derived power, not an original power which alone can produce effect10
Whatever power the creatures might possess must have been given by God.
who alone possesses all real power. Being (God) is the only Ultimate Reality.
The things of the world are composed of indivisible units (monads) which,
every moment, are created and annihilated; and it is God who creates and
annihilates them and their qualities, thereby bringing about all the motion
and change in the world. There is, thus, no such thing as a law of nature and
the world is sustained by a constant, ever repeated activity of God. There is
no such thing aa a secondary causo; when there is tho appearance of such a
cause, it is only iUusionary. God produces the appearance of the effect aa woll
aa the effect. Things of the world do not possess any permanent nature. Fire,
for instance, does not possess tho nature or quality of burning; it does not
burn. God creates in a substance “a being burned" when fire touches it.
The Aah'arites thus denied power in the cause aa well aa the necessary
connection between the so-called cause and effect. Sfeibli mentions that
the Ajh'arites rejocted the idea of causation with a view to defending the
possibility of miracles on the manifestation of which, according to them, pre-
phethood depended. The orthodox school believed in miracles as well aa in
the universal law of causation; but they also maintained that, at the time of
manifesting a miracle, God suspends the operation of this law and thus brings
about an exception. Al-Aab'ari. however, maintained that a cause must have
always the same effect (i.e., the effeot of one and the same cause could not
be different at different times). Having accepted this principle as formulated
by their leader, the Ash'arites could not agree to the orthodox view and,
.herefore, to prove the possibility of miracles they rejected the law of causation
•“ ajar* < Maudyi/. p. 282; aJ-Moydilr. p. 53».
241
A History of Muslim Philosophy
altogether. .According to them, there is no power in the antecedent to produce
the consequent, "We know nothing but floating impressions, the phenomenal
order of which is determined by God."11
Objection might be raised against the Aah'arite metaphysics that it es
tablishes in effect a relationship between God and the atoms, but relation
ships, according to the Adj'arites, are subjective illusions. Tn reply to this
objection it may be pointed out that all relationship applies only to contingent
beings or things perceived by the senses. It would not hold in the case of the
Necessary Being, God, who is suprasensible. And according to their principle
of mukhdlafah. nothing which is applied to created things or beings can be
applied to God in the same sense. God is not a natural cause but a free cause.
This is the Ajh'arito system aa completed by Q&di abu Bakr al BaqillAni.
It faced a strong opposition from the orthodox, particularly from the followers
of Ahmad bin Qanbal.
Al-Ash'ari’s opinions did not get much recognition outside the Sh&fi’ite
group to which he belonged. The Hanafites preferred the doctrines of his con
temporary al-Miturldi who differed from al-Aib'ari in certain minor oontro
versial points. Shibli has mentioned nine such points.1’ In Spain, ibn Hazm
(d. 450/1063) opposed the Agh'aritc doctrines. The Saljfiq SultAn Tugbril Beg,
who was an adherent of the IJanbiilite school, treated the Ajh'arites very
badly, but his successor Sul tin Alp Araalin and especially his famous vizier,
Nijarn al-Mulk, supported the Ash‘aritea and put an end to the persecution
to which they* had been exposed. Nizam al-Mulk founded the Nijimitc Academy
at Baghdad in 459/1000 for the defence of Aah'arite doctrines. It is under
hiB patronage that abu al-Ma'ali 'Abd al-Malik al-Juwaini got the chance of
preaching the Aah'arite doctrine freely.
The Aah'arite system could not obtain widespread acceptance until it was
popularized by al-Juwaini and al-QbazAli in the East and by ibn Tumart in
the West. It was al-Juwaini who oould legitimately claim the credit of making
the Ajh'arites’ doctrines popular. His vast learning and erudite scholarship
brought him the title of Did' al-Din (the light of religion), Al-Juwaini received
his early education from his father, Shaikh abu Muhammad 'Abd Allah, and
after the death of his father, he got further education from his teacher, abu
IsbAq al-Isfara'ini, a great Ajh'aritc scholar. Al-Juwaini, in course of titre,
was recognized by the scholars of the time to be al-Islam (the chief
leader of Islam) and Imam al-Ilaramain (the religious leader of Makkah and
Madlnah). For thirty years, he continued teaching and preaching the Aah'arite
doctrines. Al Juwaini was the teacher of al-GhazAli He wrote many books
on various subjects. Some of these are: al-Shamil, on the principles of religion;
al-Burhan, on the principles of jurisprudence; al 'Ajidal al-.A'izdmtyyaA;
and Iriidd, on theology. He was bom in 419/1028 and died at Niab&P&r
Shibli. op. cit, p 64.
« Ibid., p. 92
242
Aab'ansm
in 478/1085.*" Being tho SJaitJ al-Islam and the Imam of Makkah and
Madlnah, al-Juwainl's Faldira (judgments on religions matters) used to be
respected by people in general throughout the Muslim world; and for this
reason, his writings got the widest circulation and. through these writings.
Aab'arite doctrines became known everywhere.
Ono great theological result of the Ajh'arite syBtem was that it checked the
growth of free thought which tended to dissolve the solidarity of the Islamic
Sftari'aA. The Ash'arite mode of thought had its intellectual results also.
It led to an independent criticism of Greek philosophy and prepared the
ground for philosophies propounded by men like al-GhazAli and Fikhr al-Dln
al-RAzi. Al-Qhazali is generally included among the Ajh'aritea and it ia he who
may bo said to have completed the Ash'arite metaphysics. It was he who, by
giving a systematic refutation of Greek philosophy in his famous work. Tahdfut
al-Faldsi/ah. completely annihilated the dread of intellectualism which had
characterized the minds of the orthodox. It was chiefly through his influence
that people began to study dogma and metaphysics together.*4 Strictly speak
ing. al-Ghazali was not sn Aflh'arite, though he admitted that tho Agh'aritc
mode of thought was excellent for tho masses. "He held that the secret of
faith could not be revealed to the masses; for this reason he encouraged exposi
tion of the Ajh’arite theology, and took care in persuading his disciples not
to publish the results of his private reflection."44
45
Al-GhazAli made the Ajh'arite theology so popular that it became practically
the theology of the Muslim community in general and has continued to remain
so up to the present time
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Abu al-Hasan bin Ism&'il al-Aib'ari. Kitab al IMnah 'an Uful olDiyanah,
Hyderabad', Deccan, 1321/1903; Risilah fl IstihsOn al-Khautf. Hyderabad. Deccan,
1323/1905, 1344/1926. MaqOlOt al-Idamlyyln wa IkMOaf al-Musalllyyln. 2 Vote..
Istanbul, 1929; -Abd al-Karim al-gh*hrastani. Kitab al-SIdal w-al-Nihal. od.
Cureton; Shibli. ‘lira al-KalOm, 4th edition. Ma'Arif Press, Azamgarh. 1341/1923;
QAdi -Add and Sayyid Sharif, SJarA ol-Afoudyi/; abu al-'Ala, flAarA-i Mawdyil.
Newel Kishore, Lucknow; al-Qhazili./Ayd’ *GMm al-Din, Newal Kishore. Lucknow,
ibn KhallikAn. Wafayat al-A'ydn. 2 Vote.; ShaikhMubammad Iqb&l, TAc Development
of Metaphysics in Persia. Bazm-i IqMl, Lahore; al-Mas'adi. Muruj al-Qhahab:
JJhahabi. .Ifizdn all'tidal; Baihaqi. Kitab al-Aimd' w-al-SifOt; D. B. Macdonald.
Development of Muslim Theology. Jurisprudence and Constitutional Theory. Charles
Scribner's Sons, New York. 1926; Ahmad Amin. ftuAo al-Islam, 4th edition.
Cairo. 1946; TaIMztni. gharh-i 'Aga'id-i Nasafi; Khayili, giarh-i ’Agd'id-i Nasafi.
44 Ibn KhallikAn. VoL I. p. 312.
54 IqblU. op, eit.. p. 59.
Shih' . - p. 66.
243
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Chapter XII
TAHAWISM
A
TA HAWI’S LIFE AND WORKS
Abu Ja'far Ahmad b. Muhammad b. Salimah al-Azdi, al-Hajri. al-TahJwi.
was bom at Tabs. a village in upper Egypt. Hit forefathers came from the
Yemen to Egypt and settled there after it had come under the Muslim rale.
There is a considerable difference of opinion as to the year of his birth. The
years 228/843, 230,844, 238/852 and 239/853 are mentioned by different bio
graphers. Al-Sam'&ni asserts that he was bom in 229/843 and this ia correct.
Ik- died in Egypt in 321/933.1
Al-TabHwi was mainly interested in liadlth and Fiqh, and waa regarded as
one of the greatest Mubadditbin and fuqaha of his time. According to abu
Ishaq al-Shirizi, he was the last leader of Hanafi Fiqh in Egypt.’ He began
to study Shsfi'i Law under his maternal uncle abu Ibrihlm Ismk'il al-Muzani
(d. 264/878). the most celebrated pupil of ImSm al-§hifi'i, and then leaving
his school he took up the study of Hanafi Law under al-Shaikh abu Ja’far
Ahmad b. abi 'Imran (d. 285/898), who became the Chief QAdi of Egypt in
270/883 Different versions are given by his biographers of his conversion to
Hanafi school, but the most probable reason seems to be that the system of
Imam abu Hanlfah appealed to his critical insight more than that of Imim
Sh&fi’i.
Al-T»biwi went to Syria in 268/882 for further studies in Hanafi Law and
became a pupil of Qadi abu Kh&zim 'Abd al-Hamkl b. Ja far, the then Chief
Justice of Syria.’ lie leamt Hadith from a large number of Shaikhs especially
from those who visited Egypt at his time, and had also many pupils of distinc
* He is a distinguished author of many important works of which the
tion.*
following may be mentioned here: 1. Shark Ma'dni al-AHdr, 2. JfujAM al-
Albdr. 3. AfrUm al-Qur'dn, 4. Ikbtildf al-'Ulama'. 5. al-Nawddir al-Fiqhiyyah,
6. KMb al-QhunU al-Kabir, 7. al-Shuruf al-Alual, 8. s/AorA al-Jami' al-^agiir,
' Al-Sam'Ani, al ,4n*M>, Leiden, 1912, fol. 368; ibn Qupubugha, Tdj ol Tora/im,
ed. G. Flugel, Leipzig, 1862, p. 6; ibn al-Nadlm. al-Fihrial, Cairo, 1348/1929, p. 292;
■Abd al-Qidir al Qaraahi. al JauMir ol-Mud'lyya*, Hyderabad, 1332/1913, Vol. 1.
pp. 102-06; JaUU al-Din al SuyOtf, {tan al-MuMdarab. Vol. I. p. 147; ibn
Khallik&n. Wafayai aJ A'yan. Vol. I, p. 19; al-Qbrtabi. TodAHrol alHuffOt.
Hyderabad, 1334/1915, Vol. Ill, p. 28; 'Abd al-Hayy Lakhnawi, al-Pawi'id oi
Bahtyyah, Cairo, 1324/1906, pp. 31-34.
• AI-Qbahabi. op. oil., Vol. Ill, p. 28; al SuyOJi, op. al.. Vol. I, p. 147.
’ Cf. authorities cited above.
• Muhammad Zthid al-KauUjari. ol HOwi. Cairo, 1368/1948, pp. 6-11; al-Qaraahi.
op. cil.; Loan uf.Wzdn.
244
Tab&wiam
9. Shark al-Jami' al-Kabir, 10. alMukhlamr, 11. Mandqib Abi llani/ah, 12.
Tariki al-Kabir. 13. al-Badd ‘ala Kitab al-MudaUMn, 14. al-Hadd ala Abi
'Ubaid. 15. al-Radd ala 'Im b. _46bdn, 16. Hnkm 'Arddi MaUah, etc.
Hu original contribution to HadILh literature, so far aa we can estimate, ia
that he introduced a new system of collecting legal traditions, developed a
new method of interpreting and harmonizing the conflicting traditions, and
adopted a new criterion for criticizing them. His predecessors and contem
poraries, tho authors of al-$ihdh al-SiUah (the Six Canonical Compilations)
collecting traditions according to their own standards and principles, left
out a large number of genuine traditions. Al-Jabawi made a strenuous effort
to collect all the genuine legal traditions of the Prophet, narrated by different
authorities on a particular subject, together with the opinions of the Com
panions of the Prophet, their Successors and the distinguished jurisprudent*.
Ho then scrutinized traditions (abddilk) and showed by evidence which of
them were authentic, strong, weak, unknown, or such aa might be supposed
to have been repealed. Thus, his collection provided for tho scholars an un
precedented opportunity to judge for themselves the merits or demerits of a
particular tradition. The criterion for judging the genuineness of a tradition,
according to the Traditionists in general, was the imdd (chain of the nar
rators), and so they paid greater attention to the scrutiny of the i-mdd than
to the scrutiny of the text (main) of a tradition. But al-Tab&wi, while scrutiniz
ing a tradition, took into consideration the main as well aa tho isndd of tho
tradition. Ho also aimed at a harmonizing interpretation in case of conflicting
traditions.
Al-Tafa&wi, like al-Miturtdi, was a follower of lm&m abu IJanifah (d. 160/
767) in jurisprudence as well as in theology. He wrote a. little treatise on
theology named Bayon al-Sunnah w-abJamd'ak, generally known as al-
Aqidal al-'I'ahdmyyahA In the introduction to this treatise he says ho will
give therein an account of the beliefs of the ahi al-tunnah w-al-jamd'ah according
to tho views of ImAm abu Hanifah, abu Yusuf, and Mubammad al-Sfcaib&ni—
the well-known jurisprudents of the community So the importance of his
creed lies in the fact that it corroborates the views of Imam abu Hanifah, the
founder of the school, that have come down to us from different sources.
Al-Tab&wi made no attempt to explain the views of the Im&m or to solve
the old theological problems by advancing any new arguments. His sole aim
was to give a summary of the views of the Imam and to show indirectly
that they were in oonformity with the traditional views of the orthodox
school.
The difference between him and al-Mituridi—the two celebrated authorities
on the views of the ImAm—is quite evident. Al-M5turidi was a thorough
‘ Tho 'Afidah was published in Halab in 1344/1825. Several commentaries were
written on thia creed (cf. Kafbf ai Zunun, Istanbul, II. 1143) one of which named
KiMi Sbarh ol-ToMwiyya* fl ol- Ajidol al Sala/iyyah was published at Makkah
in 1349/1930, and was ascribed to Sadr al-Dln ‘Ali b. Mubammad al-Adhra'yi.
245
A History °f Mudim Philoeoph.s
dialectician and his main endeavour WM to find out a philosophical basis for
the views of tho leader end to support these views by scholastic reasoning,
and thereby bring them closer to the views of the rationalists. Al-TahSwi. as
a true traditionist, did not favour, as will be seen, any rational discussion or
speculative thinking on the articles of faith, but preferred to believe and
accept them without questioning. There is no reference in his creed to the
critical examination of the method, sources, and means of knowledge, or the
foundation on which his theological system is built. So his system may be
termed aa dogmatic, while that of al-Mituridi as critical. The critical method
followed by al-Tulia wi in Hadi th is quite lacking in theology. Thus, though
Iwth of them belong to the same school and uphold faithfully the doctrines
of their master, they differ from each other in temperament, attitude, and
trends of thought.
In order to indicate the characteristics of the system of al-TabSwi and to
make an estimate of his contributions to theology, we propose to give in the
following pages an outline of the views of ImAm abu IJanifah along with the
views of both al-Tahawi and al-M&turidi on some of the most important
theological problems that arose in Muslim theology.
Imam abu Hanlfab directed his movement against the Kbarijites. Qadaritcs,
Mu'tazilites, Shi’ites, Jabrites, the extreme Murji’ites, and the Ijashwlyyah.
the last being a group of the orthodox people who under the influence of the
converted Jews, Christiana, and Magians fell into gross anthropomorphism,
and ascribed to God all the characteristics of a created being.
* He was the
first theologian among the lui/aha' who adopted the principles and method of
reasoning and applied them to a critical examination of the articles of faith
and the laws of the Shari'ak. That is why he and his followers were oalled by
the Traditionists the People of Reason and Opinion al ri'i w al-qiyfa).
This rational spirit and philosophical attitude were more consistently main
tained by al-MSturidi than by al-Tab&wi. Their views on the nature of faith,
attributes of God, beatific vision, divine decree, and human freedom may be
mentioned here to indioato the distinctive features of their methods.
NATbRE OF FAITH
Faith, according to the well-known view of Imam abu Hanlfah, consists
of three elements: knowledge, lielief, and confession; knowledge alone or con-
• It was ‘Abd Allah ibn Saba, a convert from Judaism, who introduced and
propagated anthropomorphic ideas among tlw Muslims during the caliphate of
Ah. The foreign influence is traceable at the background of all aorta of ideas of
mdtU. ia/rim, and Aulul (cf„ al fibahrastilni, al-BngbdUi). The anthropomorphic
expressions in the Qur'An were never understood by the Prophet or his Com
panions in the strict litoral sense
246
Tohawism
fession alone ia not. faith.’ Al-Maturidi holds the same view and lays emphasis
on knowledge (marifah) and belief (tualig). But. according to his explanation,
knowledge is the basis of faith and confession is not in reality an integral part
of faith but only an indication falumah) of faith, a condition fur enforcement
of Islamic laws and enjoyment of the rights and privileges of the Muslim com
munity So the belief based on the knowledge of God is the basis of faith?
Al-TabAwi excludes knowledge from his definition of faith and holds that it
consists in believing by heart and confessing by tongue?
As regards the relation between faith and action Imam abu Hanifah main
tains that Islam demands from its followers two things: belief and practice,
and both are essential for a perfect Muslim. The two are very closely related
like back and belly, but they arc not identical. Practice is distinct from faith
and faith is distinct from practice, but both are essential elements of Islam.
"Allah has ordained practice for the faithful, faith for the infidel, and sincerity
for the hypocrite." The term al-dtn (religion) includes both faith and action.10
Faith, according to him, is a bring conviction of the heart—an absolute and
indelible entity having its own existence independent of action. From this
definition of faith he arrived at the following conclusions: (a) Faith is not
liable to increase or decrease.11*(b) Faith is impaired by doubt.” (c) The faith
ful are equal in faith but different in degree of superiority regarding practice.”
(d) No Muslim should be declared devoid of faith on account of any sin, if he
does not declare it to be lawful. One may be a man of faith with bad lie-
haviour, but not an infidel.14 (e) A believer who dies unrepentant, even though
’ Abu Hanifah. al-'Alim w-al-.Vula'allim, ed. Muhammad ZAhid al-KauUiari-
pp. 13. 29: idem. al-H'aflyyab. MS. Cairo, pp. 1. 2; al-Figh al-Akbar. Hyderabad,
p. 11; al.QAri, SJurA Figh al-Akbar. pp. 70 el egg.: Sh"'!' Waylyyah. Hyderabad-
p. 73s ibn 'Abd al-Barr. al-lntvja. Cairo. 1330'1931, p. 1GB; al-Aah'ari. UagdliU.
Cairo, 1950, Vol. I, p. 202.
• MAturidi, Kildb al-TaiMd, MS. Cambridge, pp. 193 at egg.; al-Makki, Managib
Abi Hanifah. Vol. 1. p. 148; SJorA al TaMln-iyyah. Makkah, 1349/1930. p. 201;
al-TnftiUAni, fiiarA al-'Aga'id al-Xunaflyyah, Cawnpore, 1347/1928, p. 91.
■ Al-Tahiwi. Haydn dl-Sunnah w-al-Jamn'ah. Holab, 1344/1925, p. 7.
>• Al-Figh al-Akbar,pp. 10-11; al. IFariyyoA. MS.Cairo, p. 2; Sharh al-IFariyyaA
p.~b-.al-‘Alim u-al-Muta'uUim. pp.12 elegy.: Biadlul Abi Hanifah. ed. al-Kaulhan.
pp. 35 « >OT.
11 Al-Figh al-Akbar, p, 10; al IFoslyyaA. p. 2; al-'.ilim w-alMuta'aUim. pp. 14
elegq.; Sbarh a/ irariyyaA. p. 76; al QAn, Shark al-Figh al-Akbar, pp. 78 ««*».; abu
al-Muntaha. Shark al-Figh al-Akbar. Hyderabad, pp. 58 « egg.
“ Al-lFasiyyoA.p. 2; Sh-rh oIIFmrtyyaA, p. 77; ul Fi# «l..46mr ed. al Kaulhari.
pp. kb el egg. -, Mwmad al-lmdm al-A'jam. od. Muhammad Abid al-Sindhi. Lucknow.
1316/1898, p. 12.
11 Al-Figh al-Akbar. p. 10; al-'Alim w-al-M uta'aUim. pp. 14, el egg.; Shark al-
Wafiyyah. p. 76.
“ Al Figh alAkbar, p. 9; al-Figh al-Abeal, pp. 41 el HM.it Abi Hanifah.
p. 37; al-‘Alim u-al-Muta'allim. pp. 23 el egg.: al-Makki, op. eil.. Vol. I. pp. 78 '/
Muenad al-lmdm al-A zam, p. 10.
247
A History of Muslim Philosophy
guilty of mortal sins, will not remain in hell for ever. Allah may grant him for
giveness or punish him in accordance with his sins.1*
Pointing out the differences between himself and the Murji'itee, Imam abu
Hanifah says: "We do not say that sins do not harm the faithful, nor do we
sav that he will not enter hell, nor do we say that he will remain there for
ever, although he should be a man of evil practice f/diig), after having departed
from this world aa a man of faith. And we do not say that our good actions
are accepted and our sins are forgiven, aa the Murji’ites say. But we aay
that no one who performs a good action, fulfilling all ita conditions and keep
ing it free of all defects, without nullifying it by infidelity, apostasy, or bad
conduct during any part of his life, shall be neglected by God. God may punish
in holl or grant complete forgiveness to a person who commits an evil deed
(polytheism and infidelity excluded) and dies without repenting.1*
The KhArijitee and Mu'tazilites laid so much emphasis on the doctrine of
threats (wa'id) that they led the believers to despair and take a depressing
view of life: while the Murji'tes emphasized the doctrine of promise (wa‘d) so
much that they quite endangered the ethical basis of Islam. ImAm abu Hanifah
endeavoured to strike a middle course between these two extremes. Sins,
according to him. are not without consequences; a sinner is always liable to
blame or punishment, but to drive him out from the fold of Islam, to declare
him an infidel, or to condemn him to eternal punishment is quite inconsistent
with divine justice. His broad outlook and tolerant attitude were consistently
continued by al-M4turidi and al-Tabawi. The latter has summarized the views
of his master on these questions in the following words:
“We do not declare anyone of the people of giblah an infidel on acoount
of a sin, so long as he does not deem it lawful. And we do not say that sin
with faith does no harm to him who commits it. We entertain hope for the
righteous among the faithful, but we have no certainty about them, and we
do not certify that they will be in paradise. We ask forgiveness for their evil
actions and we have fear for them, but we do not drive them into despair. Sense
of security and deepair both turn a man away from religion. The true way for
the people of jiNah lies midway between these two. A faithful servant does
not go out of the field of faith exoept by renouncing what had brought him
into it.”1’
Al-Tab&wi substituted the phrase oil al-qiblah for mi’min and Muslim,
evidently to avoid the theological controversies regarding their identification,
and to make the circle of the believers wider and at the same time to give the
question a practical bias. He also avoided the theoretical definition of a Muslim
or mu’min, and instead described how one could be regarded as such. He
says: "We give those who follow our qiblah tho name Muslim or mu'min, so
“ Mumad al-Imam al-A'iam. pp. 11 er tqq.
11 Abu Hanifah, al-Fiqh al-Akbar,
” AI-TaMwi. ai-'AjUnft, p. 7.
248
TnhAwiiim
long as they acknowledge what the Prophet brought with him and believe
in what he said and what he narrated."1"
Knowledge of God and belief in Him may save those who are guilty of mortal
sins from eternal punishment, and they may entertain hope of deliverance
from hell through divine mercy and the intercession of the righteous. "Those
who are guilty of grievous sins will not remain eternally in hell, if they diod
as Unitarians, even if they were not repentant. They are left to God's will and
judgment; if He wills He will forgive them out of His kindness, as He has
said: 'Surely Allah will not forgive the setting up of other gods with Himself;
other sins He may forgive if He pleases;'19 and if He wills Ho will punish
them in hell in proportion to their sins as demanded by His justice. Then
He will bring them out of it through His mercy and the intercession of His
obedient people, and finally He will send them to paradise. This is because
Allah is the Lord of those who know Him well, and He has not destined them
in either world to be like those who denied Him, went astray from His guidance,
and did not obtain His help and favour.”* 99
It may be noticed here that, although al-fafaiwi did not include knowledge
in his definition of faith, he was fully conscious of the cognitive aspect of it.
As regards intercession. Imam abu Hanifah seems to restrict it to tho pro
phets in general and particularly to Prophot Muhammad,91 but al-fabAwi
extends this privilege to the righteous and the pious among the faithful.
Aa regards the independent character of faith and equality of tho faithful,
al-Tafaawi says: "Faith is one and the faithful are equal; their comparative
eminence lies in fear99 (of Allah), in righteousness, in disobeying lust, and in
pursuing what is best. All the believers are friends of tho Merciful. The most
honourable among them before God are those who are the most obedient and
the best followers of tho Holy Qur'an."99
On the question whether it is obligatory for a man to know God before the
advent of His messenger, and whether to follow precedence (taqlidu) is allowed
in matters of faith, al-Tabiwi does not express his opinion explicitly, though
his master was quite outspoken on these questions. These questions pertain
to the Mu'tazilitea’ doctrine of promise and threat foitra'd w-al-wa'id), which
gave rise to the discussion of the nature and value of reason and reve
lation. They held that as God has endowed men with reason and they can
easily perceive by proper use of this faculty that the world has a creator, it
ia obligatory on their part to know God oven if the call of tho Prophet does
19 Ibid., p. 7.
19 Qur'an, iv. 48.
99 Al-TafaAwi, al-AfUah. p. 8.
91 Al-Fiqh al Akbar, p. JI.
99 In tho printed text tho word is alHaqiqah which most probably is al-
KhatHwab-. cf. SAarh al-ToMuAwah. p. 281.
99 Al- Aqidab. pp. 7-8.
91 To act or believe on the authority of others.
249
A History of Muslim Philosophy
not reach them. But they were divided as to whether knowledge of God is
acquired and a posteriori (ktuabi) or necessary and a priori (rlaruri).u Im&m
abu Hanifah agreed with the Mu'tazilitea on the original question and main
tained that "no one can have any excuse for ignorance about his creator, as
he sees the creation of the heaven and the earth of his own as well aa of others.
So even if Allah should not have sent any messenger to the people, it was
obligatory on them to know Him by means of their intellect."
C
GOD’S ESSENCE AND ATTRIBUTES
As to the relation between God's essence and attributes Imim abu Hanifah
is stated to have advised his pupils not to enter into discussion on this ques
tion, but to be content with ascribing to God the qualities which He Himself
ascribed to Himself.” He even once declined to discuss this problem with
Jahm.*’ In order to avoid the difficulties involved in affirming attributes, he
simply declared that “they are neither He, nor other than He" (la huwa wa
la According to the explanation of al-Miturldi. this phrase means
that the attributes of God are neither identical with nor separate from His
essence.**
Al-T«bAwi made no reference to the philosophical problem of the relation
between God and His essence, nor did he make a clear distinction between
the attribute* of essence and those of actions But he emphatically asserts the
eternity of tho attributes and says: "Allah has eternally been with His attributes
liefore He created the world and nothing has been added to His qualities after
the creation, and as He has been from eternity with His qualities, He will
remain with these to eternity, . .
Expressing his vigorous attitude against the Anthropomorphism he declared:
'Whosoever attributes to Allah any of the human senses (ma'ini), he becomes
an infidel." The true path lies, he asserts, between laiibii and ta'fU. "He
who does not guard against denial (of attributes) and assimilation slips and
doss not attain tanetb Verily our Lord the High and Exalted has been attribut-
“ CT. the views of the Mutaailites, especially of 'Allaf and al-NajjAm. in al-
BadgbAdl's al Fan/ and Vfii al-Dtn and al SbahrasUnl’s Milal.
This question was discussed by the Mu'tar.iliwo. by QbailAn al-Dimagbqi (prose,
cuted by HilbAm b. Abd al-Malik [d. 124/743]). who taught that knowledge is of
two kinds: natural or instinctive Ifipi) and acquired fmuilnsah;. Faith, according
to him. is the rational knowledge, not tho instinctive knowledge. (Milal. Vol. I,
p. 274: al Far,. p. 124; JlfoydbU. Vol. I. p. 200.)
“ Al-Biy&di. fddrdt, p. 149.
” Al-Makki, al-ManO^ib. Vol. I. p. 145.
•* AlHoaiyya*. p. 4: al-BiyAdi, op. ctl.. p. 118.
” AllsbanU. p. 118; fiiurt al-Fiqb al-Akbar, ascribed to al-MAlurldi, Hyder-
ahad, p. 19.
•• al'Aqtdab, p. 4
250
'I'ah&wism
ed with the attribute of oneness and has been qualified with the quality of
uniqueness. No one of the creation possesses His qualities. Allah is most high
and praise be to Him. He is without limits, ends, elements, limbs, and instru
ments. The six directions do not encompass Him as they do the created things. "•*
It may be inferred from tho above statement and the similar ono in the
'Aqidah, that al-Jabtwi is against the literal interpretations of the anthropo
morphic expressions of the Qur'&n, such as the face of Allah, His eyes and
hands, etc. But he does not indicate what these terms signify. Abu Hantfah
clearly states that these terms denote His qualities. Even then he also is not
in favour of giving any rational interpretation of them, as he fears that this
may lead to the denial of His qualities. He says: "He has hand. face, and
soul as mentioned in the Qur'&n, and whatever Allah mentioned in the Qur'An
as face, hand, or soul is unquestionably His quality. It should not be said
with the Qadarites and the Mu'tazilites that by His hand is meant His power
or His bounty, because this leads to the rejection of certain attributes. Nay.
His hand is His attribute without description.",l
The lni&m had also adopted the principle of leaving tho judgment to God
(ta)fcld I11 regarding the interpretation of the ambiguous verses of the Qur'&n;
al-Tab&wi stuck to thia principle very consistently. He says: "The foot of
Islam does not stand firm but on the back of submission and surrender. Who
soever wishes to attain that knowledge which was forbidden for him and whose
intelligence does not remain content with submission, his desire certainly
hindcra him from access to pure concept of unity (lauhid). clear knowledge,
and correct faith, and he then wavers between faith and infidelity, belief and
disbelief, confession and denial as a sceptic, distracted, eccentric, and fugitive
person without being a faithful believer or a faithless disbeliever."M
The attitude of al-M&turldi on this question is more rational and liberal
than that of al Tabiwi, According to the former, leaving judgment to God
and passing an interpretative judgment for oneself are both allowed; and he is
in favour of interpreting them in the light of explicit verses of the Qur’»n.“
Throw o/ Allah.—Regarding the Throne of Allah forth) as mentioned in
the Qur'&n,1* abu Hanlfah maintains that the expression should not be taken
in the literal sense to mean a particular place. God being the creator of place
cannot be thought of to be limited by place. He is where He has been before
the creation of place. Abu Mull' al-Balkbi, one of the disciples of the ImAm.
usked him. "What will you say if anyone asks: 'Where is Allah the Exalted
He replied: "He should be told that Allah has been existing while there was
no place before He created the universe; He has been existing whilo there was
“ Ibid., p. 5.
*• Al-Fiqh al-Akbar. p. fl.
11 Leaving the true meaning to the knowledge of Allah.
•• Al- At«iah. p. 4.
“ See the chapter on al-MAluridi.
•• Qur'&n, vii. 54; xx, 5; xxx. 75; lix. 17. etc.
251
A History of Muslim Philosophy
no 'where (aina). no created being, nor anything else. He is the creator of
everything."” Refuting the idea of the Anthropomorphists that God is in a
particular place, he declared: “Wo oonfeu that Allah has seated Himself on
the Throne without any necessity on His part, and without being fixed on it.
If He had been under any necessity, He would not have been able to create
the world and would have governed it like the created beings; and if He should
feel any necessity to sit down and remain seated, where then was He before
the creation of tho Throne! God is exalted and high far above such ideas."*'
It is evident that, accoiding to abu Hanifah. God, being eternal and in
corporeal. cannot be oonceived aa being encompassed by direction and place.
Al-fabiwi, as has been quoted above, firmly holds this view. "God is without
limits, ends, elements, limbs, and instruments. The six directions do not
encompass Him as they encompass the created things."1* Referring to the
Throne and the Chair, he states: "The Throne and the Chair are realities as
Allah described them in Hie honoured Book. But He is not in need of the
Throne nor of what is besides the Throne. He encompasses everything and is
above everything.”**
Al-Mituridi went a step further to allow rational interpretation of those
verses, the apparent sense of which created an impression of His being in a
place. He refuted the view of those who thought that the Throne was a par
ticular place and God was on it. in it, or encompassed by it, aa well as the
views of those who thought that He was in every plaoe. According to him, God
being eternal, infinite, and incorporeal is free of time and space which imply
rest, change, motion, and movement. Explaining the verses** which were
interpreted to prove His being in a particular place or in every place by the
champions of these views, he asserts that those verses refer to His creative
function, controlling power, absolute authority, sovereignty, eternity, and
infinitude and indirectly prove that He is above the limitations of time and
space.1*
Beatific Vision.—This question was discussed with much fervour by the
Companions of the Prophet. Besides their intense love of God and an ardent
desire to enjoy the happiness of seeing their Lord in the next world, the
accounts of Ascension (mi'rij), and the prayer of Moses to have a vision of
his Ixird as referred to in the Qur’in,** aroused in them fervent zeal for a
discussion of this topic. It seems quite certain that as a result of this discus
sion they arrived at the following conclusions: (a) God ia invisible in this
” AlFufit al-Abtaf, p. 57.
•• Al-H'oriyya*. pp. 3-4; Shark ai-Waflyyab, p. 81; IihArOl. p, 195.
*• at-‘Aqldah, p. 5.
•• This translation u according to the text given in the Shark al-TaMwiyyah.
p. 213.
" Such verses of the Qur'An as vii. 64; xx. 5; xliii. 84; Ux. 17; 1, 18; Ivi. 58; Iviii. 7.
" KMb al-Tauhid. pp. 32-37; Ta'wUAl. Surah vii. 54; xx. 5.
11 Qur'An, vii, 143.
252
Tahiwism
world; no human being saw Him or will ever Bee Him in this world" except
tho Prophet Muhammad who, according to some of them, saw Him on the
night of mt'rd/; (b) God will be seen by the faithful in paradise.1* The eager
inquiries of the Companions of the Prophet whether he saw his Lord1* or
whether believers will nee Him in the next world1’ and the vehement opposition
of a group of leading Companions, including 'A'ifdjah, to the common belief
that tho Prophet saw his Lord," all clearly indicate that the Companions
were fully conscious of the difficulties involved in answering these questions.
Their standpoint on this question, like that on the problem of essence and
attributes was just to believe and refrain from a detailed discussion of such
mattora aa cannot be comprehended by human reason. Tho seeing of God in
paradise was regarded by them as the highest blessing and happiness for the
believers and the mmmum bonum of their life. They believed in it without
description (muf) or rational explanation (tA'udl).
The Anthropomorphists, in the subsequent period, found in this belief a
strong basis for their gross and crude anthropomorphic conception of God.
As God will be seen in paradise He must have body and form and may be seen
in this world, nay, He may even assume the form of a beautiful man ••
It was Jahm who, in order to oppose tajbblh, laid great emphasis on tanzlh
and quite consistently with his idea of abstract God denied for the first time,
according to our present information, the vision of God in paradise." The
Mu'tazilites adopted this view and interpreted tho beatific vision allegorically.
Imim abu Ijanlfsh upheld the view of the Companions and discarded both
anthropomorphic and allegorical interpretation of “seeing God." God will be
seen by tho faithful in paradise, he maintains, with their bodily eyes, but
without any idea of place, direction, distance, comparison, or modality and
without any description.*11 Al-Jabawi maintains the same position and em
phasizes that beatific vision is an articlo of faith and it must bo accepted with
out any doubt, without any rational interpretation, ai)d without any idea of
anthropomorphism. Any attempt to interpret it by reason will amount,
according to him, to the denial of this tenet." AI-Maturidi also supported
u "None among you will over see his Lord till ho dies" is a saying of the Prophet ,
liharai, p. as.
“ Traditions on this point have been narrated by more or laws thirty Companions:
8h°rb al TaMwtmah. p. 24; fjjdnlr, p. 203.
11 Ibn KatbSr, To/rir, Vol. III. p. 9; al-Nawawi. SJorA MtuUm, Cairo. 1929,
Vol. 111. p. 12.
•’ Al-Nawawi, op.cil., Vol. Ill, pp. 17 ri
11 Ibid., pp. 9, rl tqq.; I^HrSt. p, 317; ibn Kalhir. Ta/tfr. Vol, II, pp. 1 fl I el «yy.;
Vol. IV. pp. 247 r.l sjj.
11 Al-Aah'ari. MaqdlAl, Vol. I. p. 263.
« Al-atahrastani. Miial. Vol. I. p. 137
11 Al-fiqb alAtbar. p. 10; alWatlifyah. p. 7; Sbarb al ll'afiyi/nb. p. 97: l&lrat.
p. 201.
" Al 'A-tldah. p. 4.
253
A History of Muslim Philosophy
this orthodox view and opposed lasjiblh and idled and showed by elaborate
discussion that the verses of the Qur'&n and the traditions of the Prophet
on this question do not allow any allegorical interpretation. His main argument,
aa we have already seen, is that the conditions of seeing a physical object in
thia world should not be applied to seeing God who has no body and no form
and is not limited by time and space, and that too in the next world where
nature of things and state of affairs would be quite different from what pre
vails here.”
Speech o/ God and the Qur '.in —Speech (kaldm), according to abu IJanlfah,
is an attribute of God pertaining to Ilia essence and ia eternal like all other
divine attributes, and God speaks by virtue of this eternal speech.44*Aa regards
the relation between kaldm of Allah and the Qur'&n, he says: “We confess
that tho Qnr’in is the uncreated speech of Allah; inspiration or revelation
from Him is neither Ho nor other than He. but His quality in reality, written
in the copies, recited by the tongues, and preserved in the breasts. The ink,
the paper, the writing are created, for they are works of men. The speech of
Allah, on the other hand, is uncreated; the writings, the letters, the words, and
tho ventes are signs (daldkU)u of the Qur’iUi for the sake of human needs.
The speech of Allah is self-existing and its meaning is understood by means
of these symbols. Whosoever say’s that the speech of Allah is created, he is
an infidel; His speech, though recited, written, and retained in the hearts, is
yet never dissociated from Him.”44
Abu lianifah thus refutes the ideas of the Mu'tazilah who denied the attribute
of speech being identical with divine essence and declared the Qur'&n to have
been created, as well as the ideas of those Mughabbihah and Haflhwh yah
(extreme orthodox) who thought that divine speech, like human spoech, con
sists of words and sounds and that the script in which the Qur'&n was written
was as eternal as the Qur'an itself.47 Kaldm of Allah, according to him, is not
identical with His Being, for this will make His Being complex and lead to
the plurality of Godhead; nor can it be something other than Himself, for
this will mean that He acquired a new quality and became what He was not
before. Thia also implies imperfection and change in the divine nature; hence
absurd. Divine speech, therefore, must be eternal, and as the Qur'&n is uni
versally accepted to be the speech of Allah, it is necessarily uncreated.
Al Tabawi treated this subject with great caution and condemned contro
versies about the Qur'iln and practically declined to enter into a philosophical
discussion on tho nature of divine speech. He aaya: ' Verily the Qur'an the
kaldm of Allah—originated (bada‘) from Him aa words without description Ihila
kai/iyyah) and He sent it down to His Prophet as revelation; and the faithful
44 Cf. the chapter on Maturidism.
41 AlFiqh al-Akbar. p. 6.
44 In one MS. the word is Utah (instrument).
44 At-Waftyyah. p. 4; £harh al. It'afiyyah. pp. 82-83.
44 Al-Aib'ari. Al-lr^M, pp. 128-29
254
TahAvrism
believed it to be truly as such, and they knew for certain that it was in reality
the faiZdm of Allah, the Exalted, not created like the speech of the created
beings. So whoever supposes it to be human speech is an infidel.”*’
The main point of controversy, it may be mentioned here, between the
Jahmlvyah and Mu'tazilah. on the one hand, and the orthodox, on the other,
was on the nature of the divine word and its relation to the Qur'&n. after they
had all agreed that the Qur'An was the revealed book of Allah. So al-fabtwi,
in fact, bypassed the main point at issue. He also made no reference to the
relation of the speeches of created beings or that of Allah's won! addressed to
them such as to the Prophet Moses, as mentioned in the ’Qur'An, with the
eternal speech—a problem, which evidently bewildered the minds of .Ja'd,
Jahm, and their followers. Abu Hanlfah sought to remove thia doubt with
reference to tho eternal divine attributes of knowing and creating. “Allah had
indeed lieen speaking before He spoke to Moses, aa Allah had indeed heen
creating from eternity before creating any creatures. So, when He spoke to
Moaee, He spoke to him with His speech which is one of His eternal attributes.”
Similarly, “whatever Allah mentions in the Qur'&n. quoting from Moses anil
other prophets and from Pharaoh and Iblta, is the eternal speech of Allah
about them. The speech of Allah is uncreated, but the speech of Moses and other
created beings is created The Qur'&n is the speech of Allah and not their
speech; therefore, it is eternal."*’
Divine Bill and Human Freedom —The all-pervading will of God, His
eternal decree (qadar) and infinite power, on the one hand, and freedom of
the human will and action, on the other, are equally stressed in the Qur'&n.*’
According to the Qur'&n. divine will, decree, and pow-er are not inconsistent
with human freedom. These problems were discussed by the Prophet and his
Companions. Belief in qadar was declared by the Prophet as an article of
faith, but at the same time he asserted that qadar docs not deprive a man of
his freedom in his limited sphere.
Thus, according to the Qur’&n and tho Tradition, God is the creator of all
things including their nature, and nothing can go against this nature. He is
the creator of the human soul and its nature and He has created in it free,
will and bestowed upon it the faculty of knowing, thinking, and distinguishing
and the power of judging, choosing, and selecting. God, being the omniscient
creator, knows from eternity what His creatures will do in future—this is
the “writing of the destiny” and "the eternal divine decree."*'
That the Prophet laid stress both on qadar and human freedom and on the
“ Al 'AqtdaJi, p. 3; cf. p. 7.
•• Abu Hantfah. al-Fiqh al-Akbar. pp. 3-6.
•" Qur'An, vi, 39, 123. 14»: xxa. 14; Ixxxv. 16; txxxvi. 30; liv, 49 and other
verses referring to tho divine will and decree. And the verses: iv, 111; x. 44. 108;
xi. 101; xiii. II; xvii. 15-17. 84; xviii. 29; xli. 46; xlv. 13. and many others refer
to freedom.
*■ Cf. also verses of the Qur'An, 1. 4. 16.
255
A Hiatory of Muslim Philosophy
possibility of human action side by side with divine action, is also evident
from his famous saying on natural religion /din al-fifrah): “Every child at
birth is bom in the fitrah, then it is his parents who make of him a Jew, a
Christian, or a Magian." Thia is testified by the Qur'inio verse. "The filrah
of Allah in which Ho hath created mankind, there is no change."" The sayings
of the Prophet that divine decree comprises all human care and precautions
for life, that prayer can change destiny.
* ’ and that God has provided remedy
for every disease,
** and similar other traditions also dearly indicate that tho
divine decree is not despotic or tyrannical in its nature and that it does not
imply any compulsion, nor is it inconsistent with freedom and responsibility.
The Companions of the Prophet also believed both in qadar and human
freedom and emphatically denied the idea of compulsion (jabr). Some promi
nent Companions explained qadar as foreknowledge. Abu Musa al-Agfa'ari
said: "God decreed as He knew."** 'Abd Allah b. ‘Amr (d. 63/882) used to
say: "The Pen has dried up according to tho knowledge of God."’* All
(d. 40/861) gave a clear exposition of his view on the problem and said:
"Perhaps you think that the judgment (qa4A') is binding and the decree
(qadar) is final. Had it been so, then reward and punishment would be meaning
less and the promise and threat null and void, and no reproach then should
have come from Allah against a sinner and no promise for a righteous person.
This is the view of the brethren of Satan. . .. Verily Allah has enjoined discre
tion, issued prohibitions, and given warnings. He has not burdened (men) with
compulsion, nor has He sent the prophets in vain...
lm&m abu Hanlfah made a bold attempt to harmonize the contradictory
views of tbe self-determinists and the predeterminists by explaining the nature
of divine power, will, and decree and enunciating the doctrines of natural
religion (din al-filrah), divine help, and guidance (laufiq), abandoning (kba'lh-
Un) and acquisition (hub). God bad knowledge concerning things before they
existed from eternity, and His will, decree, decision, and writing on the Pre
served Tablet are in accordance with this foreknowledge. So the eternal decree
is of a descriptive nature and not of a decisive nature. God created men with
natural dispositions (fifrah), endowed them with intellect, then addressed
them and commanded them through His messenger to believe and abstain
from unbelief. Thereupon some people deviated from this natural religion,
disavowed truth, and turned to unbelief. This unbelief is their own act, their
own acquisition, preferred by their free-will, which God created in them, and
is not due to any compulsion from Him. but due to His leaving them to them-
•' Buk.'ari and Muslim. "KitAb al-Qadar also Qur'an, xxx, 30.
•’ Tirmidlti, "KitAb al-Qa-lar."
•• "Kitab al-fibb."
“ Al-Biyuji, ap. ril.. p. 33. Thia sentence has been ehcren by Bukhari aa the
boding of a wetion of "Kitab al Qadar" in his SSahlfi.
•• Wall al Din, alMafMh. Delhi. Ch. "Qarlar." p. it.
Al MuriHija id-Zaidi. al-Munyat al'Amnl. Hyderabad. 1920, p. 7.
256
TahSwiam
selva. Those who clung to their nature received divine help and guidance.
"Allah did not compel any of His creatures to bo infidel or faithful, and He
did not create them either aa faithful or infidel, but He created them aa
individuals, and faith and unbelief are acta of men. . . . All the acta of man,
his moving as well aa his rating, are truly his own acquisition, but Allah
creates them and they are caused by His will. His knowledge, His decision,
and His decree." But while good actions are according to His dairo, pleasure,
judgment, command, and guidance, evil actions are not in accordance with
these. ••
Al-MAturidi, as we have already notioed, explained this view quite elaborately
and laid emphasis on the freedom of acquisition and choice. Al-JabSwi dis
courages all speculative thought on the Bubtle and mysterious question of
predestination (laqdir), because this may lead one to despair and disobedience."
But he asserts that all human actions are creations in relation to God and
acquisition in relation to men, and God ia never unjust to them so as to burden
them beyond their power and capacity.’8
D
CONCLUSION
It will be noticed from what has been said in the foregoing pages that al-
fabiwi did not introduce any new doctrine or Bystem in theology, but sum
marised faithfully and honestly the views of his master on important theological
questions, in his own language. So "Tab&wism," in fact, does not imply a
new school of thought in Islamic theology; it is only another version of
ImAm abu Hanifah'a theological system. The importance of al-Tab&wl a creed
mainly consists in the fact that it makes the position of his master quite clear.
Imam abu Hanifah occupied so important a place in thoology and law and
his system exerted »o much influence on the educated mind that the Mu'tazil
ites. the Murji'ites, and the orthodox equally claimed him for themselves. The
Mu'tazilites for this reason even denied his authorship of any book in theology.’1
Prominent pupils of ImAm abu Hanifah and his followers mainly engaged
themselves in a close study of the problems of practical life, and generally
it was they who occupied the posts of judges and legal advisers during
tho reign of the 'AbbAsids and even afterwards. By virtue of their work
they could get little time for a detailed study of speculative theology.”
•• Al-Fiqb al-Akbar, pp. 7-8; ol-HofiyyoA, pp. 3. 5-6; 8i“rh ol.Wmriyy.iA, pp.
79-80, 84-85; cf. al-Makai, op. cil., Vol. LI. p. 104; al-Bazzizi, al-ManOgib. Vol. II.
p. 84; ibn 'Abd al-Barr. allnliqa, pp- 164-65.
" Al-'Aqidab, p. 5.
’• Ibid., p. 11.
’■ Al-BazzAzi, op. cil., Vol. I. p. 107; Taeh KubnuAdali. J/i/MA ol-Xu udu/
Hyderabad, 1328/1010. Vol. II. p. 29.
” Some books on theology were written by Muhammad sl-Sliaibani. al-Hasan
b. ZiyAd and Zufar b. Hudbail—all pupils of abu Hanifah.
257
History of Muslim Philosophy
Their trends of mind also, it appears, were not in favour of pure speculation.
Their time, onergy, and genius were devoted to legal studies, and theological
speculation was left for others. Thus, their contribution to theology is negli
gible in contrast to their contributions to law and jurisprudence. A few of
them, like IJammid and Ismi'il, the son and grandson of abu Hanifah, Bithr
al-Marisi, Hafs al-Fard, Biuhr b. Walid, Muhammad b. ShujA’. and others who
took some interest in theology, could not quite consistently explain aqd expand
the views of their leader. During the reign of al-Mamun and his immediate
successors, the ffonati judges openly supported the Mu'taziliUa" stand on some
of the controversial questions and co-operated with the rulers in suppressing
the views of tho extreme orthodox. Besides the Mu'tazilites and the Murji'ites,
the followers of Imam abu Hanifah themselves were divided in interpreting
Ills views. Al-T'ab&wi. like al-Maturldi. rendered valuable services in removing
the doubts and confusions and making tho position of tho Imam quite clear.
The influence of al-Jabiwi on theology cau easily bo estimated from the nume
rous commentaries written on his creed. In short, al-TabiwI's credit lies in the
fact that he very nicely and elegantly presented the summaries of tho views
of I mini abu IJanlfah. the first founder of the theological school of ahi al
run summaries for which he must hare relied, besides the latter’s works,
on other reliable sources which had already received recognition from a large
number of orthodox people.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Al-Sam'&ni. al .4n«5A, Leiden. 1912; ibn Quflubugha, Taj al-Tardjim, 1862;
ibn al-Nadhn. al Fihritl. Cairo, 1348/1939: 'Abd al-Qadir al-Qanuhi, aWawahir
al-.Wud'iyyo*, Hyderabad, 1332,'1913; Jalal al-IHn Suyiiti. Hum alifubadarab;
ibn Kkallikin, H’a/oytM oM'ydn; al-Qbahabi. Tadhkiral ol-ffuffaq. Hyderabad.
1334/1916; Abd al Hayy Lakhnawi, al Faurl'id al-lMAiyyah. Cairo. 1324/1906;
Muhammad Zilhid al Kaulhari. al Hawi. Cairo. 1368/1948; $adr al-Dln 'Ali b.
Muhammad al Adhra'yi. Kitab Shirb ul-TaAdudyyaA fi aTAqidal al Sala/iyyab.
Mecca. 1349/1930; abu Hanifah. al’Alim w^alMula’allim, ed. Muhammad Ztl.id
al-Kaiitbari; ol-FiyA al-Akbar. Hyderabad; al-QAri, Sharb al-Fiqb al-Akbar; Shari-
al-Waflyyah. Hyderabad; ibn 'Abd al. Barr, al I ntiqa. Cairo. 1350/1931; al-Aih'ari.
.WojdMr, Cairo, 1950; MSturidi. KMb al-Taubld, MS. Cambridge; Shark al faha
wiyyoA, Mecca. 1349/1930; al-TafUsAnl. Shark ol-’Aqa id al-Nataliyyah. Cawnpon.
1347/1928; al-fahAwi. Haydn al-Sunnab w-al-Jamdah, Halab. 1344'1925; al-
Biyftdi, ltharat; al Makki. al-ManOqib; BukhAri and Muslim, "KiUb al-Qadar";
Wali al-Dtn. al Mafablh. Delhi; ibn Hajar. LiMn al-WUdn; YAqut.
Mu’jam; Ylfl‘i. .W>r’<W; HSji tUalifah. Kashi algurun; ul Murtada alZalddi.
al-Munyal w-al-’Amal. Hyderabad; TSjb KubrMdah, Miltab al-Sa’ddah. Hvder
abad.
258
MAturfdiam
Chapter XIII
MATURTDI8M
A detailed discussion of the fundamental principle# of Islam led Muslim
scholars in the second and third/eighth and ninth centuries of Hijrah to philo
sophical reasonings on the nature and attributes of God and His relation to
man and the universe As a result, a new science of Muslim scholasticism called
‘lint al-Kalam came into being.
As a matter of fact, it was the Mu'tazilites who laid the foundation of this
new science and made lasting contributions for its development. They started
their movement by adopting a rat ional attitude in respect of some theological
questions, but when they reached the height of their power, they adopted an
aggressive attitude towards their opponents. The orthodox Muslims opposed
the Mu'tazilite movement from the very beginning and tried to refute their
doctrines by the traditional method, A section of the orthodox people took
recourse even to violent methods.
Conflicting ideas and antagonistic attitudes created chaos and confusion in
Muslim thought and shook the foundation of old ideas and traditional beliefs.
The need for reconciliation and solving the crisis by adopting a middle course
and a tolerant attitude was keenly felt. At this critical period of the history
of Muslim theology there appeared, in three parts of the Muslim world, three
eminent scholars: al-Maturidi in Central Asia. al-Ash‘ari in Iraq, and al-
Tabiwi in Egypt. They all endeavoured to reconcile conflicting ideas and
settle the theological problems of the time by adopting a system that would
satisfy reason and conform to the general tenets of the Qur'An and the Sunnah.
They exercised profound and lasting influence on the subsequent development
of Muslim philosophy and theology and w'ere considered to be the fathers of
the three schools of thoughts named after them.
Ash'arism and fabawism have been dealt with in separate chapters; here
we are concerned with Maturldism.
A
LIFE AND WORKS OF MATURlDI
Abu Mansur Muhammad b. Muhammad b. Mahmud, al-Maturidi. sl-An^tri.
al-IJanafi, was born at MAturid,1 a village or quarter in tho neighbourhood
of Samarqand, one of the great cities of Central Asia. According to some
writers, he came of the renowned family of abu Ayyub al-Ans&ri of Madlnah.*
1 The word is also pronounced as MAtdrld and MAturlt. Cf. al-SAm‘Ani. al-Ansdb,
fol. 498b; ibn al-Athlr, of-LuMb. Vol. III. p. 76; Abroad Amin, ?u*r al-IMm.
Vol. I. p. 365. It was wrongly transcribed by some writers ns MAlartd.
■ Al-Maturidi. Kitab al-TauMd. MS. Cambridge, fol. 1. footnote al Sayyid
Murtada. fijor* /Ayd' of al-QhazAli, Cairo, 1893, Vol. II, p. 5.
259
A History of Muslim Philosophy
This statement is also corroborated by the fact that some other Arab families
of Madlnah also settled in Samarqand* * and that al-MSturidl's daughter was
married to al-Hasan al-Ash'ari, the father of Imim abu al-lJaBan 'Ali al-
Ash'ari and a descendant of abu Ayyfib al-Ansiri of Madinah.
*
Almost all the biographers who giro only short sketches of al-Miturlrll's
life in their works
* agree that he died in the year 333/944, but none of them
mentions the date of his birth. One of the teachers of al-M&turldi, namely,
Muhammad b. Muqitil al-Rizi is stated to have died in 248/862, which
proves that al-MSturidi was born before that year and possibly about the year
238/853. According to this assumption. al-Mituridi was born during the reign
of the 'Abbasid Caliph al-Mutawakkil (r. 232-247/847-861) who oombated the
Mu'tazilite doctrines and supported the traditional faith.
Al-Maturldi flourished under the powerful rule of the Samanida. who ruled
practically the whole of Persia from 261/874 to 389/999 actively patronizod
science and literature, and gathered around their Court a number of renowned
scholars.
* Ho waa brought up in the peaoeful academic atmosphere and cultural
environment of his native land and received good education in different
Islamic sciences under four eminent scholars of his time: Shaikh abu Bakr
Ahmad b. Ishaq, abu Nasr Ahmad b. al-'Abbas known aa al-Faqih al-Samar-
qandi. Nusair b. Yahya al-Balkhi (d. 268/881), and Muhammad b. Muq&til
al-R&zi (d. 248/862), QAdi of Rayy. All of them were students of ImAm abu
Hanlfah (d. 150/767) ’
In recognition of his scholarship and profound knowledge in theology (and
his invaluable services to the cause of ahi al sunnah w-al-jams'ah) people
conferred on him the title of Imam al-IIuda and ImAm al-Afutakallimin.
Mahmud al-Kufawi mentioned him as "leader of guidance, tho model of the
Sunnite and tho guided, tho bearer of the standard of ahi al-sunnah w-al-
jami'ah, t he uprooter of misguidance arising from disorder and heresies, leader
of the scholastics, and rectifier of the faith of the Muslims.’’*
IForks.—Al-Miturldi wrote a number of important books on Tajrir, Kalam,
and Uftt, a list of which is given below:
■ ImAm abu Na<r al-'AyAdi, al-Samarqandi, one of al-MAturtdl’s teachers, was
a deeeendant of Su'd b. 'UbAdah. vide 'Abd al-Hayy Lakhnawi, al-FawS'id al-
HMyyah. Cairo, 1324/1906, p. 23.
* AhSam'Ani. op. cil., fol. 498.
* 'Abd al-QAdir al-Uaraibi. al-Jawahir al-Mud'lyyah. MS. Cairo, p. 251 (it has
boon printed at Hyderabad); Mahmud al-Kfifawi, Kata'ih Alam al-AOyhr.
MS. Cairo, pp. 129-30; Qisim b. Qutlilbugba, Taj al-Tarajim. Leipzig. 1862,
p. 44; T&ah KubrAzAdah, MiflOh al-Sa'Odah, Hyderabad. 1928, Vol. II. p. 22;
Sayvid Murtaila, op. cth, Vol. II. pp. 5-14; 'Abd al-Hayy Lakltnawi, op. cil.,
p. 195.
• For Samanida see al-Maqdlai. Ahm al-TaqAslm. p. 294; Ahmad Amin, op.
'it Vol. I, pp. 261 el aqq.
' KamAl al-DIn al BiyAdi. IridnU al-MarOm. Cairo. 1949. p. 23; Shark IM
Vol. TI, p. 5, and books on Hanafi TabaqOl.
• Kata ib A'lAm al-A^yOr'. p. 129.
260
MAturidiflm
1. Kitab TiwkUl al-Qur'dn or Tdwilat AM al-Sunnah.
2. Kitab Mi’kbadh al-Shari'ah.
3. Kitab al-Jadal
4. Kitab al-Dsul (UffU al-Din).
5. Kitab al-Magalat.
fl. KitOb al-Tauhid.
7. KiUb Ba'jan H'oAm al-Mu'tazilah.
8. Kitab Radd AvA'il al-Adillah li al-Kabi.
9. Kitab Radd Tahdhib al-Jadal li al-Ka'bi.
10. Kitab Radd Wa'id al-Fussaq li al-Ka'bi.
11. Radd al-Util al-Khamsah li abi Muhammad al-Bahili.
12. Radd Kitab al-Imamah li ba'd al-Rawafid-
13. Kitab al-Radd 'ala al-Qaramilah.9
Unfortunately, not a single work of al-MAturidi has so far been published.
His Tawilat al-Qur'On, Kitab al-Tauhid, and Kitab al-Maqdlat which are by
far the most important and valuable of ail his works, exist only in manu
scripts. The Tawflat ol-Qur’an is a commentary on the Qur'an in the scholastic
method in which he endeavoured to establish the liberal orthodox theology,
both traditionally and rationally, and to provide for it a sound basis.1* Com
menting on this momentous work, Shaikh ‘Abd al-Qadir al-Qarajhi says. "A
unique book with which no book of the earlier authora on this subject can
have any comparison.”**
In his Kitab al-Tauhid, al-Maturidi gave an elaborate exposition of his
system and sought to harmonize the extreme views of both the traditionists
and the rationalists. The book bears testimony to his broad outlook, deep
insight, and intimate acquaintance with the philosophical systems of his time.
The evidence at our disposal at present shows that al-Matnridi was the firat
MulakaUim to introduce the doctrine of the sources of human knowledge in a
book on theology such as Kitab al-Tauhid and thereby made a thorough
attempt to build up his system on a sound philosophical basis. This method
was followed by other theologians and tho subject was later on elaborately
treated by the AgJj'arite scholars, al-BSqillAni (d. 403/1013). and al-Baghd&di
(d. 429/1037).
Al-Mituridi is one of the pioneers amongst the Hanafite scholars who wrote
on the principles of jurisprudence and his two works Ma’khadh al-Shari'ah
and Kitab al-Jadal are considered to be authoritative on the subject.
* ’
• Threo other works, viz.. SiurA Fiqh al-Akbar of ImSm abu Hanifah, 'AjldoA
a6i Mnnsur and flJarA ol-lbanah of ImAm alAjb'ari are erroneously ascribod to him.
*• MSS. of this book are found st tbe Cairo. Istanbul, and Berlin Libraries.
ghaiUl 'A1A' al-DIn abu Bakr Muhammad b. Ahmad al-Samarqandi wrote a com
mentary on thia book in eight volumes, an incomplete copy of which can be found
at the Patna Library.
** Al-JawShir al-Mudiyyah. MS. Cairo, p. 251.
Katit al-ZunUn, Istanbul. 1943. Vol. I. pp. 110-11.
2S1
A History of Muwhin PhiloAophv
It ia evident from the list of works written bv al-Mfiturldi that he took
great care to refute the views and ideas of the Qnnnatians. tho Shi'ites, and
especially those of the Mu'tazilites His contemporary abu al-Qasim 'Abd Allah
al-Ka'bi (d. 317/929) was the leader of tho Mu'tazilite school of Baghdad.”
Al-Maturldi combated the doctrines of al-Ka'bi in his Kitab al- Tau^Uand wrote
three books on criticism of al-Ka'bl’s three books. It may be observed here
that while al-Maturidi in the East engaged himself in fighting the Mu'tazilites
in general and particularly the Baghdad group, his contemporary al-Ajh'ari
in Iraq took a prominent part in resisting tho Mu'tazilites of Basrah. But it
appears to us that al-Mituridi began his movement long before al-Ath’ari
appeared on the scene and most probably while the latter waa still in the
Mu'tazilite camp.11
B
METHOD
Al-Miturldi in his Kitab al-Tauhid gave a short critical account of the
different views regarding the matter and sources of human knowledge and the
best method to be followed in order to acquire knowledge. Means of acquiring
knowledge, according to him, are three: (1) Sense-organs (al-a'ydn); (2)
Reports (al-akbbur), (3) Reason (al-na;r).
Ho severely criticized the conflicting views of different groups who thought
that knowledge is not attainable at all, or that senses cannot supply true
knowledge, or that reason alone is sufficient to give us all knowledge. Refuting
the views of those who deny or doubt the possibility of knowledge altogether
or the possibility of acquiring knowledge through sense-organs, al-Mituridi
says that even animals perceive by their senses what may preserve or destroy
them and what may be useful or harmful to them. So theoretical arguments
with those who pretend to deny the objective reality of things is uselees. Yet
he says, they may be humorously asked: "Do you know what you deny I" If
they say "No,” their denial stands cancelled, but if they answer affirmatively,
they admit the reality of their denial and thereby become oppoeers of their
opposing. A more effective way than this is to make t! «m subject to physical
torture so that they may be compelled to admit what they deny of the reality
of sensuous knowledge.
Reports are the means of acquiring knowledge concerning genealogy, past
occurrences, remote countries, useful and harmful things, foodstuffs, medicine,11
11 For al-Ka'bi. see al-8bahrest*ni, Milal, al-Azhar nd., Vol. I, pp. 116-17-
al Baghdadi, KM al-fart. Cairo, pp. 108-08.
“ Al-Ajh'ari was bom in 260/873 or 270/883 and remained in the Mu'tazilitoe'
camp up to the fortieth year of hb age, so ho must have bogun hb movement after
the end of the third century of Hijrah. Al-Maturidi waa bom bofore 248/862, and
supposing that he spent about thirty years in acquiring knowledge, then hb move
ment seems to have begun before the end of the third century A.H.
262
MAturidism
•tc. Tlirac are of two kinds, historical reports I khabr al-mutawHir) and reports
of the prophets /khabr al-riurul), possessing sure signs to prove their honesty.
Though both kinds of reports are proved to be sources of knowledge, we should
be very critical in accepting reports of the prophets, because they are handed
down through chains of narrators who are not infallible and who may commit
mistakes in reporting. Those who reject report as a source of knowledge are,
al-Maturidi asserts. like those who reject sensuous knowledge. In order to
convince them, they should be physically tortured and if they complain of
pain, they should be told: Your words of oomplaint are nothing but reports
which cannot give us any real knowledge.16
Reason, according to al-Maturidi. is the most important of all other sources
of knowledge, because without its assistance sense and report can give no
real knowledge. Knowledge of metaphysical realities and moral principles is
derived through this source. It is reason which distinguishes men from animals.
Al-M&turidi has pointed out many cases where nothing but reason can
reveal the truth. This is why the Qur'An repeatedly enjoins man to think, to
ponder, and to judge by reason in order to find out the truth. Refuting the
ideas of those who think that reason cannot give true knowledge, he says
that they cannot prove their doctrine without employing reason.1*
Reason, no doubt, occupies a very eminent place in the system of al-
MAturldi, but it cannot givo, he holds, true knowledge concerning everything
that we require to know. Like senses, it has a limit beyond which it cannot go.
Sometimes the true nature of the human intellect is obsoured and influenced
by internal and external factors such as desire, motive, habit, environment,
and association, and, aa a result, it even fails to give us true knowledge of
things that are within its own sphere. Divergent views and conflicting ideas
of the learned concerning many a problem are mentioned by al-MAturidi as
one of the proofs in support of his statement. Hence, reason often requires, he
asserts, the service of a guide and helper who will protect it from straying,
lead it to the right path, help it understand delicate and mysterious affairs,
and know the truth. This guide, according to him, is the divine revelation
received by a prophet. If anyone will deny the necessity of this divine guidance
through revelation and claim that reason alone is capable of giving us all the
knowledge we need, then ho will certainly overburden his reason and oppress
it quite unreasonably.”
The necessity of the divine revelation is not restricted, according to al-
MAturldi, to religious affairs only, but its guidance is required in many worldly
affairs too. The disoovery of tho different kinds of foodstuffs, medicine, inven
tion of arts and crafts, etc., are the results of this divine guidance. Human
intellect cannot gi ve any knowledge in respect of many of these matters, and
“ Al-MAturidi, op, oil., pp. 3, 13.
*• Ibid., pp. 4-4. 68-69.
” Ibid., pp. 92-94; TdvHkU. 84reh vii, 54.
263
A History of Muslim Philosophy
if man had to rely solclv on individual experience for the knowledge of aU
three things, then human civilization could not have made such rapid
' AhM&turidi refute, the idea of those who think that tho individual mind
ia the basis of knowledge and criterion of truth. lie also dore not regard in
spiration (ilbdm) as a source of knowledge. Inspiration, he argues, creates
chaos and conflicts in the domain of knowledge, makes true knowledge
impossible, and is ultimately liable to lead humanity to disir -gration and
destruction for want of a common standard of judgment and universal basis
for agreement.”
It is evident from this brief aooount that reason and revelation both occupy
a prominent place in the system of al-MAturidi. Tho articles of religious belief
are derived, according to him, from revelation, and the function of reason is
to understand them oorrectly. There can be no conflict between reason and
revelation if the real purport of the latter be correctly understood. His method
of interpreting the Scriptures may bo outlined in the following words: The
pasregre of the Holy Qur’An which appear to be ambiguous or the meanings
of which are obscure or uncertain (mubham and musblabah) must be taken in
the light of tho verses that are self-explaining and precise (muhkam). Where
the apparent sense of a verse oontradicta what has been established by the
"precise" (muhkam) verses, it must then bo believed that tho apparent sense
was never intended, because there cannot be contradiction in the verses
of the Holy Qur’&n. as God has repeatedly declared. In such cases, it is per
missible to interpret the particular veree in the light of the established truth
(tdwil) or to leave ita true moaning to the knowledge of God (tafwitj).1*
The difference between the attitude of al-MAturldi and that of the Mu'tazilites
in this respect is quite fundamental. The latter formulated certain doctrines
on rational grounds and then tried to support their views by the verses of the
Holy Qur'&n, interpreting them in the light of their doctrines. Aa regards the
traditions of tho Prophet, their attitude was to accept those which supported
their views and to reject those which opposed them.’1
C
CRITICISM OF THE MU'TAZILITES
Al-Maturidi always tried to adopt a middle course between the extreme
Rationalists and the Traditionists. He would agree with the Mu'tazilites on
many points, but would never accept the Aristotelian philosophy as a basis
•• ibid., pp. bi a
” Ibid., pp. 2-4.
Ibid.. p. 116; TdwiUl. MSS. l.lanbul 4 Hyderabad. Preface; 'Ali al-Qlri
Siarb al-fiqh al-Aibar, Cairo, 1323,'19O3. p. 75.
11 Zuhdi Hasan, al-Mu'bnUah. Cairo, 1947, pp. 247-48; Ahmad Amin Duha
al-JMm, Cairo, Vol. Ill, p. 32. '™
264
MAturiduon
of religious doctrines. Similarly, ho is in accord with the Traditionists on
fundamentals, but is not ready to take the Qur'an and the Hadllh always
in their literal sense and thereby to fall into gross anthropomorphism He
agrees with the Mutazilitea that it is obligatory on the part of every rational
being to acquire knowledge of the existence of God through his reason even
if no messenger were sent by Him for this purpose; that things are intrinsically
good or bad and the SJ'iri' (God) takes into consideration these values in Hia
amr (command) and nahi (prohibition): that God haa endowed man with
reason through which he can often distinguish right from wrong. But, contrary
to the Mu'tazilites, he maintains that reason cannot be the final authority for
human obligation and religious law. The basis of religious obligation, according
to him, is revelation, not reason.** It seems that al-MAturidl's view on this
question and on the authorship of human action, as will be seen, is mainly
guided by the Qur'Attic verses such aa "To Him belong creation and command."**
Al-MAturldi bitterly oriticized the Mu'tazilite doctrine of divine justice and
unity. Their interpretation of divine justice led them to deny the all-pervading
will and power of God, His authorship of human action, and made Him quite
helpless and subject to external compulsion. Divine grace and mercy find no
place in their system as is evident from their view on grave Bins. Their doctrine
of al-aaloA (salutary) cannot explain satisfactorily the existence of evil, natural
calamities, and sufferings of innocent children and animals. According to their
doctrine, man enjoys more power and freedom than the Creator of the universe.
They did not follow, al-MAturidi tried to prove, tho explicit decisions of the
Qur'An and the Sunnah, nor the dictates of sound reason.** Their interpretation
of tauhld reduced God to an unknown and unknowable non entity fta'lU/.**
Their view that Non-Being is a thing (al-ma'dumu jhai’un) only supports
the atheists' doctrine of the eternity of the world, makes an eternal partner
with God, and thereby contradicts the Quranic doctrines of creation and
lauhid They made God quite imperfect and subject to changes by denying
His eternally creative function.**
D
MATURTDT'S system
Al-Maturidi built up his own system mainly on two principles: freedom
from similitude (tamih) and divine wisdom ((iilcmah). On the principle of
freedom from similitude he opposes similitude (tajhbUi) and anthropo-
“ KiM al-Tauhtd, pp. 48-49, 91-92; £JorA oI-'Ayd’sd oI-'XffudiyyuA with
commentaries of SiAlkOli and Shaikh Muhammad Abdub. Cairo. 1322'1904.
p. 180; Nosm al-Fart'uf, Cairo. 1317/1899. pp. 32-37; alHaudal al-Bdhiyyah.
Cairo. 1322/1904. pp. 34-39.
** Qur'An. vii. 36.
•• Kildb al-Taubld, pp. 41-42. 48. 144-69, 178; TdwibU, Surah vii, 10.
« KMb al-Taahld. pp. 13, 21. 46.
•• Ibid., p. 59; TiliriltU. Surah xxxix. 02.
265
A History Of Muslim Philosophy
morphism (tajsim) in all their forma, without denying divine attributes. The
anthropomorphic expressions used in the Qur'an like the hands, the face, the
eyes of God. and His sitting on the Throne should not be taken in their ap
parent sense, because tho literal interpretation of these expressions contradicts
the explicit verses of the Qur'An. These passages, therefore, should be inter
preted in the light of the clear passages of lanzih in a manner consistent witl
the doctrine of tauhid, and permissible according to the usage and idiom o
the Arabic language, or their true meanings should be left to the knowledge
of God.
* ’
On the principle of divine widom (hikmah) al-Maturidi tried to reconcile
the conflicting views of tho Dcterminista (Jabntes) and the Mu'tazilitea am
prove for man certain amount of freedom, without denying the all-pervading
divine will, power, and decree. Wisdom means placing a thing in its own
place; so divine wisdom comprises both justice (‘adl) and grace and kindness
f/adl). God possesses absolute power and His absoluteness is not. subject to
any external laws but His own wisdom. * ’ Al-Maturtdi applied this principle
also to combat- the Mu'tazilites' doctrine of al-aalah (beat) on the one hand,
and the orthodox view that God may overburden his servants flaklif ma la
i/utaq) on the other. It is inconsistent with divine wisdom, which includes
both justice and kindness, to demand from man performance of an act which
is beyond his power, such as to command a blind man: "See." or to command
one who has no hands: "Stretch your hands."
**
Similarly, it would be an act of injustice if God would punish the lielievers
in hell for ever or reward the infidels in paradise for ever.” He agreed with
the Mu'tazilites on these questions in opposition to the orthodox,’1 but he
strongly opposed the former's doctrine that God must do what is best for
man. This Mu'tazilite doctrine, he argues, places God under compulsion to do
a particular act st a fixed time for the benefit of an individual and denies His
freedom of action. It only proves the right of a man on Him and not the
intrinsic value and merit of an action which the divine wisdom keeps in view.
Moreover, this doctrine cannot solve the problem of evil. Al-MAturidi. there
fore, maintains that divine justice consists not in doing what is salutary to
an individual, but in doing an action on its own merit and in giving a thing
its own place. **
After this brief outline, we give below a somewhat detailed account of al-
Maturidi's view on the most important theological problems of his time, viz.,
the relation between God and human action, divino attributes, and beatific
vision.
” Tiwilar, Sflrah vii. 64; v, 64; iv, 27; xi. 37; KM al-Tauhid. pp. 12, 32.
•• KM al-Tauhid, pp. 46-47. 61-62.
’■ Ibid., pp. 134-35; TdtMU, Surah ii. 286.
aa Ibid., pp. 186 ct cqq.
•" For al-Alb'ari's views on these questions, sec his KM al-Luma', Cairo, 1955,
pp. 113 st sgy.; al Iba nah, Hyderabad, 1848. p. 59.
" KM oi TouAid. pp. 48. 61. 112.
266
MAturidum
Relation between God and Man.—AI-MAturidi in his Kitab al-TatMd and
TdwfMt al-Qur'dn has dealt at length with different aspects of this broad
problem—the will, the power, the eternal decree, and the creative function
rfGod; His wisdom and existence of evil in this world; freedom of man: and
the basis of religious obligation and responsibility, etc,
AlMSturldi combated the views of the Jabrites and the Mu'taxilitcs on
the above questions and he also disagreed with al-Ajh'ari on certain points.
Refuting the absolute determinism of the Jabrites, he says that the relation
between God and man should not be considered to bo tho same as that
between God and the physical world. God has endowed man with reason,
with the power of distinguishing between right and wrong, and with the
faculties of thinking, feeling, willing, and judging, and has sent messengers
and revealed books for his guidance. Man inclines and directs his mind
towards something which he thinks may benefit him. restrains himself from
what he thinks will harm him, chooses one of the alternative courses of
action by the exercise of his own reason, and thinks himself responsible for
the merits or demerits of Ilia actions. Now, while he thinks, desires, inclines,
chooses, and acts, he alwayB considers himself quite free, and never thinks
or feels that any outside agency compels him to do any of his actions. This
consciousness of freedom, al-Mlturldi asserts, is a reality, the denial of
which will lead to the denial of all human knowledge and sciences. Quoting
passages from the Qur'An” he also shows that the actions enjoined or
prohibited by God are ascribed to men. and that they will be accountable
for their "own" actions. All this dearly proves that God has granted men
freedom of choice and necessary power to perform an action. The denial of
this freedom will mean that God is wholly responsible for all human actions
and is Hable to blame or punishment for sins committed by men. yet on
the Day of Judgment He will punish them for His own actions. Thia is quite
absurd, aa God has described Himself in the Qur'&n aa the most wise, just,
end compassionate.*4
But how can human freedom be reconciled with the Qnr'Snie conception
of the all-embracing divine will, power, eternal decree, and God’s authorship
of all human actions I Al-M&turldl's explanations may be summed up as
follows.
Creation belongs to God alone and all human actions, good or bad, are allied,
decreed, and created by Him. Creation means bringing forth of an action
from non-existence into existence by one who possesses absolute power and
complete knowledge in respect of that action. As man does not know all the
circumstances, causes, conditions, or the results of Ilia action, and does not
possess within himself for producing an action, he cannot
be regarded as the creator Ikbaliq) of his action. Now, when it is proved that
Qur’an. ii. 77, 167: xxxiii. 17; xii. 40; xeix, 7. etc.
“ Kitab al-TaiMd. HB el eqq.. 166-
267
A History of Muslim Pllilowiphy
God is the creator of all human actions, it will necessarily follow that He
also wills these actions, because divine action must be preceded by divine
■will. So nothing can happen in the world against or without the will of God.
But, though God wills and creates human actions, He is not liable to blame or
accountable for their actions, because divine will is determined by divine
knowledge and Ho creoles the action when a man in the free exercise of his
reason chooses and intends to perform an action. Thus, God wills an action good
or evil, which He knows a man will choose, and when ultimately he chooses
and intends to acquire it God creates that act as a good or evil act for him.
From this, it will be clear that God's willing or cresting an evil action is not
inconsistent with His wisdom and goodness. Because, God wills the happening
of the evil because He desires the individual to exercise free choice, but being
wise and just He always prohibits the choice of evil. So. though sins are in
accordance with His will, they are never in acoordanoe with His command,
pleasure, desire, or guidance. Sin, then, according to al-M&turidi, consists not
in going against the divine will, but in violating the divine law. command,
guidance, pleasure, or desire.
The basis of man’s obligation and responsibility (taldll), al-MAturidi main
tains, does not consist in his possessing the power to create an action, but it
is the freedom to choose (i&iyar) and the freedom to acquire an action
tiktisab). conferred on man as a rational being, which make him responsible
and accountable."
As regards eternal divine decree Iqadd' and qadar) al-MJturidi holds that
it is not inconsistent with human freedom, nor does it imply any oompulsion
on the part of man. because it is an eternal record based on foreknowledge.
God decrees the act He knows from eternity that a man will choose and acquire
freely. Man cannot deny his own responsibilities on the ground of the divine
decree, al-Milturidi adds; he cannot do so on account of time and space
within which actions must be done. So, though man is not absolutely free.
God has granted him necessary freedom consistent with his obligation and,
t herefore, the divine decreo relating to human actions should not be regarded
the same as in relation to the physical world."
It may not be out of plaoe to note here the pointe of difference between
al-MSturldi and al-Ajh’ari on this question. In order to make a man responsible
for his action al-M&turidi laid great stress, aa we have just noticed, on the
freedom of choice (ikhliyilr) and freedom of acquisition (iktisdb). Divine will,
decree, and foreknowledge do not deprive a man of this freedom. An action
is a man’s own action, though created by God. because it is tho result of his
own choice and it has been acquired by him without any compulsion.
God provided for him all the means and facilities for acquiring an action,
endowed him with the power of judgment and self-control, and granted him
“ Ibid., pp. 117 el sqq.
” Ibid., p 161.
268
MAturidiNTTi
freedom to choose whatever means and course he prefers to adopt. Al -Aaft'an
also used the term acquisition (hub)" but interpreted it differently. It seems
that he did not favour the idea of the freedom of ehoioe. According to him.
God being omnipotent, all objects of power fall under His power, aa God
being omniscient all objects of knowledge fall under His knowledge. So a man’s
will has no effect or influence at all on his action; it is always determined
by the divine will. Even tho desire and power of acquisition fall under divine
power and are the creation of God.“ Acquisition then, according to al-Ajh'ari,
means only a general coincidence of the divine power anti human actions. It
is God who in reality creates as well as acquires the action through man
This view, as is evident, does not differ in essence from that of the Determinists
and hence he was regarded by some writers aa being one of them.*’ Even
moat of the prominent A jh'aritca like Qadi abu Bakr al-Bkqillani (d. 403/1013),
Shaikh abu Ishaq al- Isfara'lni, and Imim al-Haramain al-Juwaini (d. 478/
1085) could not agree with him on this question and gave different interprets-
Gons of the term kasb.‘*
Divine Attributes.—Human languages do not possess any term, al-M4turidi
says, to explain the nature and attributes of God in a way that will not imply
any idea of resemblance or comparison. Yet it is a necessity for human under
standing to ascribe some names and attributes to the Creator of the world.
Giving a critical account of the views of the philosophers, the pluralists, the
dualists, and the atheists, al M&turidi asserts that the belief in one Supreme
Power and Ultimate Reality is universal, but the people differ greatly from
one another in giving names and attributing qualities to this Supreme Being.
Among the people of tou/lid, it is only the Mu'tiuilitre, he says, who by denying
the divine attributes and their eternity endangered this universal belief in
the existence of ono God. Refuting tho viows of the Mu'tarilites on this question,
ho says that it is agreed that God has beautiful names and it will be quite
futile to apply these names to Him divested of the gleanings and contents
which they imply; for otherwise it will not be unreasonable to ascribe to Him
any name whatsoever. So. when, for example, it ia said that God is wise, it
must mean that He possesses the quality of wisdom. The denial of the divine
” The evidence at our disposal dore not clearly indicate when and by whom
the doctrine of kasb was first formulated. But it is quite evident that neither
al-Mituridi nor al-Agb'ari was the originator of thia doctrino. Tho term bash or
AiisAb had boon used long before them by ImSm abu Hanifah and his contem
porarire: Jahm b. Safwin (d. 128/745). Hafr. al Fard. and (iirir b. Amar Cf.
al-Aih'ari. at-MaqUliu. Cairo. Vol, I. pp. 110, 313; al Baghdadi. op. cil.. pp. 129
rt •7’7.; Muhammad b. al-MurtaiJa al-Yamani, Jfjdr ot-Hagt/. pp. 312. 316.
Al-Aab’ari, Kitdb al-Luma', Cairo, 1955. pp. 72 tt egg.
" Ibn al-Nadlm. at-Kibrui. chapter on tho Jabritre; al-Shahraatani. Mitel.
Vol. I. p. 134.
•• Al-ShahrMtini, op. eil.. Vol. I. pp. 157 rt egg.; Imam alHarsmain, ol'Agidal
al-Nittmiyyab. p. 34; Sbarh at-‘Agil'id al- Adudiyyab, p. 88; al-BiySdi. !&>’•>'
al-Marant, p. 255.
269
A History of Muslim Philosophy
attributes (ta'fU) only- creates confusions, makes the knowledge of God im
possible, and ultimately reduces Him to an unknown and unknowable Non-
Being. The denial of the eternity of the attributes makes God imperfect in t he
beginning and subject to changes, and, thus, it shakes the very basis of tauhid.
The idea of pluralism or anthropomorphism that may arise due to affirmation
of the eternal attributes can easily be eradicated by firm belief in the absolute
unity of God together with the idea of InntlA (denial of likeness and similitude)
and mukhalafah (difference from the created being). Thus when we say that
"God is knowing," we also add to this (as a safeguard against any blasphemous
idea concerning Him), "but not like the learned, and His knowledge is not
like our knowledge." The consequencee of the denial of the divine attributes
or their eternity are far more dangerous than those of their affirmation.
As regards the relation between divine essence and attributes, al-Maturldi
says that the problem is so complicated that no human reason can hope to
solve it satisfactorily. So we should believe that God is one. has attributes
which He ascribes to Himself, without similitude, comparison, and asking how.
We should not go further than asserting that "the attributes are not identical
with nor separated from His essence" fla huira wa la q^airuhu).*1
Al-Maturidi also maintains that all the attributes of God whether belonging
to His essence or action are eternal The word takwin has been used to denote
all the attributes pertaining to action such as creating, sustaining, etc. Taitwin.
according to al-MAturldi, is an eternal attribute distinct from power (qudrah).
So God is the creator before and after the creation. This does not indicate in
any way the eternity of the world, because as knowledge and power are eternal
attributes, though the objects of knowledge and power are created, tatwin is
an eternal attribute, though the object of lakudn (mulcammn) is created.
The non existence of the world at the beginning does not imply God's inability
as He created it at the appropriate time in accordance with His eternal know-
ledge and will “
Al-Agh'ari on this question is in agreement with the Mu'tarilites and holds
that the attributes of action are originated.•’ It seems to us that he agreed
with them in order to evade the Aristotelian argument which aims at proving
the eternity of the world by the eternal, creative power of God. Al-Matnridi's
main argument is that the idea of the createdness of any of the divine attributes
is fundamentally opposed to the conception of God as a perfect, self-subsistent,
eternal Ultimate Reality and is, therefore, in conflict with the doctrine of
tanhid.
As regards the Word of God (Kaiam Allah). al-Maturidi maintains that
like all other attributes His attribute of speaking as well as His speech is
" KiUlh ai-Tauhld. pp. 12. 21, 31, 44. 51; alBiviji. op. cil.. p. 118; al-Subki.
Stack 'Aqldoh. MS. Madinah.
Kitab alTanhld. pp. 22 rl ajg.; Surahs i. 3; ii, 117.
■' The three schools differ from one another in defining the attribute of an action.
Cf. abi al Qari, Stark fiqh al-Akhar, Cairo. 1323/1905. p, 19.
270
Mftturldism
eternal without similitude and comparison- The exact nature of this eternal
speech or the attribute of speaking is not known, but it is certain that the divine
speech cannot be composed of sounds and letters like human speech, because
sounds and letters are created. So, in reality, he assorts, only the "meaning” of
which the words are an expression can be termed as the feddm of Allah. This
"meaning" which existed with God from eternity can be heard and understood
only through the medium of created sound. Accordingly, Moses did not hear
tho eternal speech, but God made him hear and understand the eternal
speech through created words and sounds. Now, what is heard by or revealed
to the prophets is called the kaUm of Allah figuratively (majixan) for three
reasons: (1) They heard (understood) the purport (al-mana) of the kalam,
that is, divine command, prohibition, forbidding, sanctioning, etc., which
belong to God alone. (2) God Himself composed it (alla/a wa ndfama); hence
it was inimitable by any human being. (3) It explains the eternal speech and
proves His attribute of speech “
It is evident from the above account that al-MAturldi refutes the idea of
the orthodox section who identified the revealed Qur'An with the eternal speech,
and he agrees in principle with the Mu'tazilites who hold it to bo a creation
of God. So the subject of contention between him and the Mu'tazilites is not
whether the recited Qur’an is created, but whether God has eternal speech and
t he attribute of speaking.
Al-Ash'ari, like al-Maturldi. maintains that God has eternal speech and the
attribute of speaking.*** but it is not clear from his lengthy discourses in Kitab
al-Lum' and al-lbanab what he exactly meant bv kalam of Allah and what,
according to him, was eternal in the Qur'An—words or meanings! He main
tained that the eternal speech could be heard directly without the medium
of created sound?* This statement, together with general treruls of his ideas
and his mode of reasonings aa reflected in his printed books, corroborates a
statement according to which both w-ords and meanings were regarded by him
as eternal?’ But. al-ghahrastani asserts that, according to al-Ash'ari, the words
are created and the "mental" meaning (al-ma'na al-nafm) is eternal?* this
last is tho view of all the eminent Ajh'arites." If so, there is not much differ
ence on this question between the Mu'tazilites and the Aah'arites.
Beatific Vision.—It has been noticed that al-MAturldi, like the Mu'tazilites,
strongly opposed the anthropomorphic idea of God and interpreted meta
phorically those passages of t he Qur'An which appear to create such an impres-
*• KUub al-Taufiid, pp. 28-28: TawiMr. Surahs ix. B; xlii. SI: vii. 143; iv, 1S4.
“ Kitab al l.uma', pp. 33 el r/g: ol-Ibanah, pp. 19 el
“ Kitab al-Luma', p. 63: also ibn HumAm id MusAyarah. Cairo. 1347/1928. p. II;
Abd al-Rahlm. al-FanTh1. Cairo. 1317/1899, pp.-15-18; abu 'Udhliah. al-
Rmdal al- B&hlyjah. Hyderabad, pp. 44-48.
•’’sjnrA al-Aqaui al-‘Adudtyyal. p. 188.
•• Ndulyal al-IqdAm, p. 320.
“ Inulni al-Haramain. al-lrffiad, Cairo. 1950, pp. 102 el al-GhatAII. ul
IqllfOd, Cairo, pp. 71-72.
271
A History of Muslim Plnlooopl.y
sion. But on tho question of Bering God in paradise by the believers, he u
wholly in agreement with the orthodox, and firmly holds that the passages
of the Qur'an and the traditions of the Prophet on thia subject must be taken
in their literal sense. By scholastic reasonings he shows that the letter and
spirit of these versea and traditions do not allow us to take them allegorically
and to interpret seeing God as “seeing His signa and rewards or knowing Him
by the heart.” This latter type of seeing is common for believers and non
believers in the next world and may even happen in this world. The texts
must always be taken in their literal and real sense, he argues, except where
that is impossible. The vision of God in the next world ia not impossible and
it does not necessarily prove His corporeality, and hence if the literal sense
were rejected, its consequences would be dangerous and it might ultimately
lead to the denial of the existence of God. As God is knowing and doing, for
example, without His being a body or accident or without His being limited
by time and space, so will He be an object of vision in tho next world. Some
people were misled because, as they had no experience of seeing what is not
a body nor an accident, they compared the vision of God in paradise with the
vision of a material object in this world. Thus, tho Corporealista (Mujassimln)
erred in saying that God is a body, because He will be seen, and tho Mu'tazilites
erred in saying that He cannot be seen because He is not a body. Conditions
of vision, al-Maturidi says, differ from stage to stage, person to person, and
venue to genus. Many things exist, but we do not see them. Angela who
are not corporeal beings see us, though wo do not see them. Conditions of
seeing: rays of light, darkness, and shadow, are not the same as those of seeing
solid material objects. So it is quite unreasonable to apply the conditions of
seeing a physical object in thia world to the seeing of the Being which is not
a body in tho noxt world, where conditions will be totally different from those
in thia world. Seeing God, therefore, may be impossible in this world, but not
in the next world. He also argues that vision may not happen sometimes for
some reason or other, although the conditions of vision exist; in the same way.
vision may happen in tho absence of thoso conditions. Another argument of
his is that, according to our sense-experienoe, only the knowledge of matter
and accidents can be acquired by a man. yet we assert the possibility of
acquiring knowledge of the realities beyond experience. This principle is also
applicable to beatifio vision.
In short, al M&turldi asserts that the vision of God in paradise is the highest
spiritual and intellectual delight and the most coveted reward of the believers;
it is an article of faith based on the Qnr'itn and the Sunnah and supported by
reason. So we must accept this as such, without going into details.*4
Conclusion.—Tho theological systems of al-M&turldi and al-Ajh'ari havo long
since been accepted by the general popnlaoe of the Muslim world. Though
ascribed to them, neither al M&turidi nor al-Ajh'ari was, in fact, the authoi
'• K.fJ.ii TauAtd.pp. 37-41; TOwMI, Surahs vi. 103; vii, 143; x, 28; Ixxv. 22-23
272
MAturtdimn
of his system, nor was either of them a pioneer in this held. Imim abu Hamfah
(d. 150/767) was the first renowned scholar among the aM al-sunnah w-al-
jamd'ah, who studied theology for long before he had taken up the study of
Fiqh, oombated tho heretical sects of his time, and founded the first orthodox
school in theologyAlMAturidi followed his system, explained it in the fight
of the philosophy of his time, tried to defend it by argument and reason, and
this provided for it a firm foundation. Hence this school is ascribed to its
founder as well as to its interpreter who fixed its ultimate form and brought
victory to it.
The difference between the attitude of al-Maturldi and of al-Ajljari may
be judged from this: If al-Ajh'ari’s attempt during tho later period was to
strike a middle path between rationalism and traditionalism. si-Msturldi
certainly took a position between what may be called Ajh'arism and Mu'tazil-
ism. The important points of difference between these two leaders of orthodox
Kaldm, more strictly, between the two schools, havo been reckoned by some
writers as fifty in number." (References have already been made in the fore
going pages to some of the most important of them and we need not enter
here into a discussion of the rest.) As a result of these differences, there was
once a tendency of bitter rivalry between the followers of these two schools
but happily in course of time this tendency subsided and both the schools
were regarded as orthodox. But how profoundly the educated Muslims of
today are influenced by the system of al-M4turidi may easily be realized
from the fact that the ‘Aqd’id of al-Naaafi (d. 537/1142), which gives the sub-
stance of the former’s Kitdb al-TaMd, has been recognized as an authority
and prescribes! as a text-book on theology in many educational institutions
of the Muslim world.
A comparative study of tho arguments employed by al-Maturidi and by the
great Ash'arite scholars like 'Abd al-Qahir al-Baghdadi (d. 429/1031) and
ImSm al- Haramain al-Juwaini (d. 478/1085) to prove the non-eternity of the
world, the existence of God. His unity and attributes, the value of human
reason, the necessity of the divine revelation, and the prophethood of Muham
mad, will show how deep and enormous his infiuenoe was on the orthodox
dialecticians who came after him, and what a lasting contribution he made
towards the development of orthodox Kaldm. That Shaikh Muhammad ‘Abduh
(d. 1323/1905), one of the leaders of the modem reform movement in Islam.
in his endeavour to reconstruct Islamic theology, closely followed the system
11 Al-BagfidAdi, op. cit., p. 220; Uftd al-Dln, Vol. I. p. 308; al-Makki anti
Bazzaz, ol-.VanApi; al-BiyAdi. op. cil.. pp. 19-23. There are five books on theo
logy ascribed to ImAm abu Hanifah: al-Fiqh al-Akbar, al-Fiqh al-Abmt, alRioiUah,
al-'Alim w-al-Mula'allim and al- Waftyyah. These books, we.are convinced, re|>reoont
the correct views of tho ItnAni.
" Al-BiyAdi. op. cit., pp. 53-56; ShaikbzAdah. Naim al-Fard'u/, Cairo, 1317
1899; Savyid Murtad*, op. cil.. Vol. I. pp. 8 e« »/?; abu T'ibbah. bp. cit.;
•Abd Allah b. ‘UlbmAn. HiMah fl al-KiiUf bain al-AA'arlyyah w-al-MoturUtyyah.
MS. Cairo.
273
A Hwtorv of Muslim Philosophy
>f al-Maturidi, is evident from his fiisdkii alTauhid and his observations on
several controversial questions in his note on the Shark 'Aqd'id al-'AdudlyyaJi.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
AI-Sam'Ani. al-Aaadfc; ibn si Atfelr. al-Lubdb; Ahmad Amin. Zuhr nl-IdAni.
Vol. 1; al-M&turidi, Ki*Wi al-Tauhid, MS.. Cambridge, fol. 1; Seyyid Murtad”-
Shark Ihya'. Vol.II; ‘Abd al-Q&dir al-Qaraahi. al-Jawdhir al-M ud’tyyah, MS.. Cairo;
Mahmud al-Kdfawi, KatA'ib A'ldm aLAkAyar, MS., Cairo; Qhaim b. Qutlubugh”-
Td; al-Tardjim, Leipzig, 1862; Tash Kubrizadab, Mi/tib al-Sa'ddah. Hyderabad.
1928; 'Abd al-Hayy I-akhnawi, al-Pawd'id al-BOhlyyah, Cairo, 1324,1906; KamAl
al-Din al-BiyAdi- Ilhbrdt al-Mardm. Cairo, 1949; Hfijji Khallfah. Kaihl al-fvnOn,
Istanbul, 1943; Ah al-Qiri. Shark al-Figh al-Ald<ar. Cairo, 1323/1906; Zuhdl
Hasan, al-Mu'lazdah, Cairo, 1947; al-A|h'ari, Kmib al-Luma'; Maq&ldt, Cairo;
Imam al Haramain, alAqidal al-Nrtdmiyyah; SAarh al-'Agd'id al-‘AdHdigyah;
al-Bagbdlhii, ol-Fary; Muliammad b. al Murtads al-Yamani. Z(h.ir al-Hoyy; ibn
al-Nadim. al-Fihrul; al-ShahrastAni. .If dal; ‘Abd al-Rahlm. b'atrn alFarrTid, Cairo;
al-Makki and BazzAz. al-Manbqib-. ‘Abd Allah b. T’tbm&n. RitOlah fi alSAMI
bain ol AsJ ortytraA wal-Mdluridiggah, MS.. Cairo; Goldzihor, I'orfcsungen Uber
den Islam, Heid.-ll»rg. 1910; Irlamurhr Philosophic des MiOelallers in Kultur da
Gegenwart; T. J. de Boor. GrwAic/m- der Philosophic m Islam, Stuttgart. 1901;
Maimonidce. La Guide dee Egares, ed. and tr. S. Munk, Paris. 1856-66; S.
Harovitz. Uber den Einfluss der grieeh. Philosophy auf die Entwieklung des KalAm,
Breslau, 1909; K. Laaswite. Geschrchte dee Atomistik, Hamburg/Leipzig, 1890.
Chapter XIV
ZAHIRISM
A
BACKGROUND
Since the second/eighth century, an interminable dispute dragged on for a
long time between those who upheld the authority of Tradition (ahi alhadith/
in all matters of theology and jurisprudence, and those who advocated opinion
(ashdb al-rd’i).
It waa expected, as pointed out by ibn KhaldQn in his Muqaddimah (p. 805),
that the people of the Hijaz, particularly those of Madlnab, should be versed
in the science of Tradition (the sayings and doings of the Prophet Muhammad).
With the rise of the ‘Abbfaid Caliphate and the shifting of the political power
and the religious leadership completely to Iraq, where the people had had less
access to the sayings of the Prophet, and where the aspects of life, the agrarian
problems, for instance, were more diverse and complicated through the inter
mingling of the successive civilizations since times immemorial, a new school
274
Zalurwrn
that of opinion, made its inevitable appearance. The upholders of opinion,
however, did not neglect Tradition, but they found it necessary to supplement
Tradition with additions drawn from older codes and prevalent usages or
framed by considerations of the actual situation ih their new environment.
At the same time an esoteric movement also began among the Shi'ites
under a variety of names, the most current of which was the B4(iniyy.vh‘
(scekcre after the inner or spiritual interpretation of revelation). The forming
of this sect is attributed to a certain Maimun of whose descent we arc com
pletely in the dark.
The Batinlyyah movement took its name from the belief of its followers
that every jdhir (apparent state of things) has a batin (an inner, allegorical
hidden, or secret meaning), especially in connection with revelation? Since
thia movement adopted some aspects of Greek philosophy, such as emanation-
ism.’ its followers were considered by Sunni authors to be heretics and out
side the pale of faith? During the Caliphate of al-Mamiin (198/813-218,833)
the Bafiniyyah movement was quite strong;’ some half a century later it was
widely spread in Iraq, Persia. Sind (western India), and Oman (south-east
zkrabia). as well as in North Africa, but it did not enjoy an enduring inllueuoo?
It is to be remarked, however, that while a number of individuals in Muslim
Spain had shared ideas with the Bafiniyyah, no sectarian or heretical doctrine
ever struck roots or succeeded in winning over communities of any dimensions
there.
So, the second/eighth century had witnessed a heavy atmosphere of esoterism
weighing on some fundamentals of Islam such as the essence of God, the under
standing of the Qur'in. and the attitude towards the Caliphate. Added to this
there was a trend of upholding opinion as a valid source of jurisprudence at
the same level with the Qur'&n and the sayings of the Prophet At the isme
time there was also the Mu'tazilite school which assumed reason as a more
deciding factor than revelation in all matters of religion.
Since all these movements had chosen Iraq as thoir principal battle-field,
another school—contrary to all of them and as extremist aa any of them—
appeared in Iraq itaelf and insisted on the verbal understanding of the Qur in
and of the sayings of the Prophet Muhammad as the sole guiding line to their
real meanings clothed in the words of God and of His Apostle. This school was
founded by a jurist Diwiid ibn 'Ali, and it receivod its name the Literalists'
(<5ahiriyyah) school from the clinging of its followers to the wording of the
revelation and not to the interpretation of it.
1 SbahrastAni, Vol. II. p. 29; cf. p. 8.
1 Ibid., p. 29, cf. pp. 31 f.
• Ibid., pp. 29f.
• Farg.pp. 14, I42;ef.pp. 152,169, 177. 182. 216; cf. Sbahrastani.Vol.II.pp.31f.
’ Nubaib. Introd., p. 4.
• GAL. I. p. 194: Sappl.. I. p. 312.
275
A History of Muslim Phdoacplij
B
DAWOD IBN ‘ALI, his doctrine and his school
The family of DSwud ibn ‘AH belonged to KJahin, a town in the neighbour
hood of Isfahan His father was a secretary (IdUib) to ‘Abd Allah ibn Khalid,
judge of Isfahan, in the days of the Caliph al-M&mun.’ Daw-ad himself* was
born in Kufah in 202'817. His family moved later to Baghdad where he was
brought up. educated, and afterwards laid the foundation of his school of
jurisprudence which bore his name al-madAAub al-DHwutli* but which was
better known as the g&hiritc school fal-madktah al-^ahm).
In Baghdad. Diwad ibn "Ali attended the lectures of many eminent jurists,
the most prominent of whom was abu Ihaur (d. 248/860), a friend and follower
of gh&fi’i. The trend of education he received from them made him shift
from the Hanafite rite to that to which his father belonged,10 the Shafi'ite,
apparently because mo«t of his professors /{JuyuJAj were more inclined to
the Traditionists (ahi al/uidilh) school to which fjh&ti'is belonged than to the
school of the upholders of opinion (aj/M al-rH’i) who were the followers of
abO Hanlfah par exctllence. Diiwud perfected his education by an academic
trip to Nlgljipur to meet Ishaq ibn Rahawaih (d. 237/851 or 238/852),11 who
also waa a friend and follower of ghafi'i. Afterwards, he returned to RAghdad
where he wrote his books.
Perhaps it is not very strange that a close and profound study of the Shafi'ite
school of jurisprudence led Dawfld ibn 'Ali finally to bo dissatisfied with it.
He forsook it and founded a new school, the Z&hirite school, which recognized
the Qur'Hn and the Ifadith aa the only sources of jurisprudence. He accepted,
at any rate, consensus (ipnH') of the Companions of the Prophet, but he
rejected analogy (giyfa), opinion (rt'ij, personal approval (isti^san), and
decisions on the authority of older generations (laqtid) altogether.**
DJwud ibn 'Ali waa accomplished, trustworthy, learned, God-fearing, pious,
and ascetic; he was also versed in logic and proficient in the art of dispu
tation.” It was said that he believed that the Qur'&n was created and not
eternal, but it seems that this was only an accusation.” He died in 270/884 in
BaghdAd.
D&wud ibn 'Ali was a prolific writer. Ibn al-Nadim enumerates about one
hundred and fifty titles from him.” It seems that many of these titles were only
chapters of some of his books. But there are also titles which represent bulky
' Sarn'ini, p. 226.
• His full name waa abu Sulaimin DAwQd ibn 'Ali ibn Kbalaf.
' Sam'ani, pp. 224, 265 ff.
10 Goldziher, p. 28 n.
■■ TdriJJ BagbMd, Vol. VIII, p. 369.
11 Fihrul, p. 216; Subki, Vol. II, pp. 46; cf. p. 44.
” FihriM. p. 216; Subki. Vol. II, pp. 42; 44. 46.
” Subki. Vol. n. pp. 43 f.
“ Fihrut, pp. 38. 216f.
276
ZAhirinn
worka of two thousand, three thousand, and even four thousand folios1* each.
A few of these books touched the fundamentals of religion, e.g., "On the
Vfil." “On the Caliphate," "Consensus and the Refutation of Qiyas," and
On the Refutation of Taqlid."" Most of his other books treated of branches
(turii'/ or minor aspects of Fiqh concerning worship and legal transactions
Unfortunately, no book has reached us from him Ibn Harm nevertheless
refers to him frequently. Muhammad al-8ha(ti (d. Damascus 1307/1889) made
a collection of D&wud’s Fiqh gleaned from the various works of his followers.1 ’
It was related that Dawud ibn 'Ali admitted analogy where the cases in
question were obvious,” but it is more probable that he rejected analogy
wholly, whether tho cases were ambiguous or obvious.” As for consensus
(ijmdj. his position was totally different: he admitted the ijma‘ of the
Companions of the Prophet only,*1 on the ground that these Companions were
in constant oontact with the Prophet and fully aware of his intentions.
In his theology in particular he maintains, for example, that God is hearing,
seeing, etc. But he says: "I do not say that He is seeing with the agency of
sight. . . ."**
Diwud ibn 'Ali re-examined all aspects of Fiqh on the basis of his gihiritc
attitude. The following are three examples illustrating his trend of thought
and argumentation in this respect.
1. Prayer on q Journey.—God has said in the Qur’an: “And when you
journey in the earth, there is no blame on you if you shorten the prayer."*1
This led the Muslims to reduoe prayer on a journey from four rak’ahs to only
two.*4 Muslim jurists generally assert that this verse envisages cutting the
prayer short on a journey of some duration.*4 Dawud, on the other hand,
maintained that since there is no mention of the duration of the journey in
the Qur'&n,*• prayer should be cut short on any journey whatever, even
though it is a journey from one encampment to another.
2. Fasting on a Journey.—Muslims fast in Ramatjin, the ninth month of
14 A folio comprises about twenty lines (cf. Fihrisl. p. 159).
11 FihriM. pp. 216. 217; Subki, Vol. U, p. 46.
11 RistUah fi MasA'il al-ImAm Dawild al-Zahiri—an epistle (containing) the
questions decided by D&wOd the ZAhirite (pub). Damascus 1330/1912), erroneously
thought by Brockclmann [GAL, Suppl.. I, p. 312) to bo by D&wud ibn 'Ali
himself. He states the date of its publication ns 1930 which is also a mistake,
perhaps a misprint for 1330 A.H.
14 Subki, Vol. n, p. 46, line 1; vgl. Goldziber, p. 36.
Subki. Vol. II. p. 46, line 7.
■> Al-lhUm, Vol. IV. p. 147.
■■ Al-Milal. Vol. II. p. 140.
Qur'An, ii. 184. 185.
’• Muslims perform five prayers per day: one of two rot'a&s (units of movements),
one of three rat'uAa and three of four rak'ahs each. To cut a prayer short is to reduce
a prayer of four rak'ahe to only two.
“ Cf. Malik, pp. 146--48, otc.
*• .WafMh. Vol. Ill, p. 444, quoted by Goldziher. p. 47; cf. Ehatfl, p. 12.
277
A History of Muslim Pliiloeophy
the lunar year. In thia connection we read in the Qur'An: "But he among
you who shall be sick, or on a journey, shall (not observe the days on which
he travels but he shall) fast the same number of other days (when he returns
home).”’’ It is agreed upon by all Sunni jurists that a Muslim may not observe
Ramadin fasts on a journey which involve* certain hardship, either on account
of ita long duration or ita difficult nature, on hot days for example.’*
DawQd and his followers assert that a Muslim should not observe fasts on a
journey because the wording of the verse does not stipulate any oondition. If
a Muslim, according to D&wOd. did observe fasts for some days on a journey,
even then he should keep fast for the same number of days when he returns
home, for his fasting while journeying was not valid.”
3. The Question of Usury (Riba).—Usury is forbidden in Islam.” But a
difficulty arose from a tradition concerning it. It is related that the Prophet
Muhammad said: “(You may barter) gold for gold, silver for silver, wheat
for wheat, barley for barley, dates for dates, and salt for salt, only in equivalent
quantities and on the spot. In all other commodities you may deal as you like,
provided (the barter ia transacted) on the spot."’1 Early Muslim jurists con
cluded from thia tradition that a quantity of any commodity should not be
bartered for a larger quantity of the same commodity; otherwise, the surplus
taken would be usury (riba). But if, for instance, a quantity of wrought gold
was bartered for a larger quantity of unwrought gold, the surplus would be a
gain or, better, a wage for craftsmanship. Furthermore, they considered the
six commodities named by the Prophet to be examples only, thus bartering
copper, coffee, leather, apples, or wool for a larger quantity of these commodi
ties respectively is also regarded—by analogy—as a form of usury. Dawud ibn
'All, on tho other hand, believed that the Prophet Muhammad had named
these commodities on purpose Had he intended to prolong the list, nothing
would have prevented him from doing so. Accordingly, if a man bartered a
quantity, say of iron, maize, apples. 01 pepper for a larger quantity of the
same commodity, the surplus would not bo usury but gain.
The jurists contemporary with b&wdd ibn "All took a very critical attitude
regarding him and his school.”The ShSfi'itcs in general criticized him severely
and considered the ?4hirite school to be worthless. Al-lsfara'ini (d. 418/1027)
maintained that no account should be taken of the g&hirites. Since they
rejected analogy fqiyis), he asserted, they could not have been able to exer
cise judgment and. therefore, no one of them should be elevated to the position
of a judge. Some others presumed that D&wOd ibn 'Ali was ignorant; others
considered him to be a disbeliever Ahmad ibn Hanbal (d. 241/855), the famous
’’ Qur'an, iv, 101.
•• Cf. MAHk, p. 294 (No. 22).
” ShaKi. p. 13 bottom.
” Qur'An. ii, 275. 278, 278; iii, 130; iv, 159; xxx, 39.
■■ Sahih MuMm, Cairo. 1331/1912, Vol. V. p. 44. lines 8ff„ cf. 44ff.
” Subki, Vol. n. pp. 43. 48.
278
ZAhiriarn
founder of the Qanbalite school, did not hold him in estimation.** Abu 'Abd
Allah Muhammad ibn Zaid al-W&aifi (d. 306/818-019), an eminent Mu'tazilite
of Baghdad, looked down upon tho Zahirite school as ridiculous. •* The followers
of DiwOd ibn 'Ali, nevertheless, were not only numerous but some of them
were also prominent.**
Dawud ibn 'Ali was succeeded, as the head of tho Zahirite school, by his
son. abu Bakr Muhammad ibn Diwud (c. 255/869-297/910). But the latter
was more of a poet, litterateur, and historian than an enthusiastic scholar of
jurisprudence.•• At any rate, he propagated the tenets of his father's school
and bestowed on it so much prestige that the Zahirite rite was in his own
days the fourth of tho four rites prevailing in tho East, tho other throe being
tho Shifi'i, M&liki, and Hanafi rites. Abu Bakr Muhammad ibn Diwad owes his
real fame, however, to an anthology of love-poetry known as KMb al-Zahrah."
The first and only extant half of this anthology was edited by A. R. Nykl**
and Ibrfihlm fOkln. Abu Bakr Muhammad ibn Dawud had some inclination
towards philosophy, but philosophy did not constitute a component part of
Zihirism before ibn IJazm.
In the fonrth/tenth century the Z&hirite school had enjoyed its widest ex
pansion and the climax of its prestige. The 'AbbJaid poet ibn al-Rumi (d.
283/896) praisod abu Bakr Muhammad ibn Diwud in a poem which opens
with the words: "0 son of Dawud 1 O jurist of Iraq I”** The famous historian.
Jabari (d. 310/923), though not a Zihirite, paid close attention to Zkhiri
jurisprudence and studied it with Diwud ibn 'Ali himself.** The foremost jurist
of the Zihirite school in the fourth/tenth century was 'Abd Allah ibn Ahmad
ibn al-Mughallis (d. 324/936), through whom the Figh of Dawud ibn ‘Ali became
popular in the Muslim world.*1
In the following oentury the Z^hirite school was already losing ground in
the East; and before tho middle of the century, in the days of the IJanbalite
judge abu Ya'la (d. 459/1066), the Hanbalite rite took its place.** The Z^hiritc
Ibid., cf. p. 43. Cf. ibn Khallikin, Cairo, Buliq, 1299 A.H., Vol. I, p. 4| GAL.
Suppl.. I. 66f; Nubadb. Introd., p. 4.
Fiirisf, p. 172.
•• Sam'&ni. pp. 224-26.
*• Fd.rul, p. 216.
•’ Kitab olZahroh (Tho Book of the Flower), the first half (published by the
University of Chicago Press, Chicago. Illinois), printed at the Catholic Press.
Beirut, 1932.
•• An Arabist Orientalist, bom in Bohemia 1303/1885 whose academic activities
since 1340/1921 belong to his sojourn in the United States. Ho is versed in very
many languages, old and new, eastern and western. He ia the representative of the
Arabic theory in the rise of troubadour poetry in southern France.
n Tbn KhallikAn. Vol. II, pp. 140-41.
*• Fibrut, p. 234.
•> Sam'Ani. p. 227.
** Nubaib tec. eil
279
A History of Muslim Philosophy
school, at any rate, continued to enjoy in Syria some prestige until 788/1386 *•
In Egypt the school lived longer and had deeper roots. Al-Maqrizi (d. 845/
1442), the famous historian of the Mamluk age in Egypt, was not a follower of
the ?&hirite school, but he had a favourable attitude towards ?ahirisin.“
C
THE ZAHIRITE SCHOOL IN MUSLIM SPAIN
1, Al-BallOti
The first representative of Z&hirism in Spain was Mudhir ibn Said al-BallOti
who was born at al-Naghsbarin. a suburb of Cordova, in 273/886. After complet
ing his studies at Cordova, ho travelled to Egypt and the Hijilz for a little over
three years. On his return, he was appointed as judge iQAdi) in the city of
Merida, then transferred to the Northern Frontiers and finally made the Chief
Justice of Cordova, which poet he held until his death towards the end of
355/966. He upheld DSwud's doctrines and defended his views, though, in
practice, he administered justice according to the established law of the country
based on the Malikitc school of jurisprudence. He was also a man of letters,
poet, thoologian, physiographer, and eloquent speaker. In fact, he was the
real forerunner of ibn Hazm.
2. Ibn Hazm
Life ami IForks.—Ibn Hazm was the real founder of the gahirite school in
Muslim Spain and the most famous and prominent of the £ahir> jurists. With
him the school reached its zenith, and with his death it died away. In reality,
the Z-ihirite rite never recruited a oommunity in Muslim Spain. It came
on the stage as a philosophy supported by a single man who failed to use his
genius in the right way.
Ibn H»zm was the descendant of a non-Arab, an Iberian in all probability,
but he preferred to link his genealogy with a Persian freedman of Yazld ibn
Sufyan, a brother of Mu'iwiyah, the founder of the Umayyad Caliphate in
the East.
Tho family did not attain any fame before Ahmad ibn Said, tho father of
ibn Hazm, who became a minister to the Hfijib al-MansQr ibn abi ’Amir,“
the Prime Minister of HijhAm II, in 381/991.
Ibn Hazm, who was born in 384/994 during the long ministerial term of
his father, was brought up in luxurious environment. He was fortunate enough
FihnM, p. 217.
•• Goldziher, pp. 194-96.
o Al-Maneur ibn abi 'Amir was Prime Minister to Highim II who was a
weakling. He usurped tho power and ruled Muslim Spain virtually for fifty veer
and as Primo Minister for twenty-six years. He died in 392/1002.
280
Zfthirism
to have been given a good education. The teacher who had the greatest in
fluence on him was ibn Muflit (d. 428/1035), a ?4hirite and a follower of Dawud
ibn 'Ali; he chose to be eclectic in matters of worship and jurisprudence and
did not agree that one should confine oneself to a particular school.
Ibn IJaz.m did not continue to enjoy prosperity and peace for long. With
the outburst of the disturbances in 400/1009 and the death of his father only
two years later, misfortunes began to overcome him and his family; and when
he preferred, on this account, to withdraw from public life, his life became
very obscure. A few years later, however, he decided to enter public life again.
As a result, he experienced all ups and downs of life, from farming the cabinet
to frequent imprisonments.
Six years after the fall of tho Umayyad Caliphate in Cordova (422/1031)
and the assassination of the fugitive Hisham III, life became unbearable for
ibn Hazm in the whole peninsula, not only because he was a client and partisan
of the falling dynasty, but because he entertained also a religious doctrine
which the rulers and the ruled in the peninsula did not share.
The only respite which ibn IJaz.m had was during his stay on the island of
Majorca from 430/1039 to 440/1049. The local Governor of Majorca was abu
al-‘Abb4s Ahmad ibn Raghlq, an able statesman and u man of letters. For
reasons inexplicable, he invited ibn Hazm for a sojourn on the island. Ibn
Hazm took refug. there and began, as soon as he could breathe freely, to
propagate £ahirism. Since ho was supported by the Governor, some Majorcans
followed him—perhaps out of conviction, perhaps out of political tact—but
it seems certain that the majority of the islanders were not in favour of the
intruding doctrine. In 439/1047, the famous Maliki jurist, abu al-Walld al-
B4ji (403/1013-474/1081) returned from a journey in the East. He held
debates with ibn Hazm and caused his disgrace. In the following year, ibn
Hazm was obliged to leave the island and go back on the mainland, but he
was chased out of every town and village in which he tried to secure a footing.
Finally, after fifteen years of complete oblivion, he found asylum on the estate
of his own family in Manta LIsham where he passed away in 456/1063.
Ibn Hazm was a very prolific writer on different subjects ranging from
genealogical tables to epistemology. It is bolioved that his books were four
hundred comprising 80,000 folios of some twenty million words. The most
important of these books are Tauq al-Ham&mah (the Dove's Neck-Ring—on
confidence and confidents), al-SIHal w~al-Nihal (Religions and Sects), al-Ihkam
ft Ufnl al-Ahkam (Precision Concerning the Principles of Religious Matters)
and al-Muhalla bi al-AHar (the Gilded or Ornamented with Revelation and
Tradition). This last is a comprehensive book on the aspects of worship end
jurisprudence in Islam. Ibn llazm was also a man of letters, poet, and states
man, but he is more famous as a rationalist and theologian.
Ibn llazm'i Ralionalirm.—In his book al-Milal w-al-Nifial, ibn Hazm appears
to be a rationalist. The problems of a priori, of time and space which confronted
Kant (d. 1804) so often in his Critiqv- of Purr Rauon, had busied ibn
28!
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Harm in the Mme way It is really astonishing that the Muslim theologian
had tackled these problems in the same spirit of objectivity seven and a half
centuries before the German philosopher. Let tu take up the thoory of know
ledge as discussed by ibn IJazm. Knowledge arises, according to him, from
the following:
(a) Sensory perception (ibahidal al-haw&»), that is, observation or sensory
evidence.
(b) Primary reason (badihat al-‘aql or awwai al'aql), that ia, a priori reason
without the use of the five senses.
(c) Proof (burhan), which goes back, either cloeelv or remotely, to the
evidence of the senses or to primary reason.
Ibn Harm holds definitely that man has six senses, and that the soul grasps
perceptible objects (material objects) by the five senses; thus a pleasant odour
is accepted by reason . . . thus also the soul is aware that red is different from
green, yellow, etc., or that there is a distinction between rough and smooth,
hot and cold. etc.
The sixth sense, ibn gazm holds, is the soul's knowledge of primary
things; that ia. there are some things which man can know through his reason
as being axiomatio, without requiring any proof for them. "8uch is the soul's
knowledge that the part is less than the whole; thus the young child, who is
only just able to discriminate, cries when he is given only two dates,
but is satisfied when you give him another. This is because the whole is
greater than a part, even though tho child cannot define the limits of his
knowledge.... The same sense gives the child the knowledge that two things
cannot occupy the same Bpot; you will see him fight for a place where he
wants to sit, knowing that that place is not big enough for another person, and
that so long as another person occupies the place there is no room for him
also....
"This is a form of primary intelligence which is common to all except those
whose reason is distorted ... or whose bodies are diseased or impotent in
certain respects.... These truths of primary reason are truly axiomatic; they
are beyond doubt and stand in no need of proof except to a madman ..
or to a scornful sophist.” Ibn Harm's argument for the view that these things
require no proof is this: "To demand proof of anything requires time; primary
reason cannot possibly avoid that fact.. . . Yet between the soul’s first learning
to discriminate phenomena and ita knowing the complete truth of all that we
have mentioned, there is not a single minute, nor can there be." But ibn Harm
did not deny absolutely the necessity of proof to these things; rather, he
held that such proof is a matter for personal acquisition which one may
achieve, while another may not, and that it may carry weight only for such
as have reached a high level of intellectual training.
Other means of acquiring knowledge, according to ibn llazm, are God's
naming of things and men's convention as represented by the languages of
282
ZAhirism
tho different nations. These two means, however, belong to theology and are
discuasod under that topio.
Philowphy and Scitnce.—Like all Muslim thinkers prior to his days, ibn
Harm had no access to Greek originals. He had a predisposition towards
argumentation, and was versed in the science of dialectics (Kaldm). He claimed
to have read (evidently through translations) the works of the Milesian and
Elastic schools, of Euclid and Ptolemy, of Plato and Aristotle, and of Alexander
of Aphrodisias, and to have had a general knowledge of astronomy, astrology,
and medicine. Ho also stated that he was well versed in mathematics in general
and geometry in particular.
Ibn Qazm does not agree with Heraclitus that the world is in constant
flow nor with the Eleatics that motion ia non-existent. On Being and Non-
Being, he agrees with the Eleatica: Non-Being is not. In keeping with his
general trend of thought, he affirms that spaoe and time are limited and that
they are, like all other things, created by God. In the same way he maintains
that atoms are divisible because it ia in the power of God to do everything,
and to this power of His, infinite divisibility of an atom is no exception.
In physiography, ho holds that the world is limited and the earth is spherical
and that the sun is larger than the earth, but he agrees with Anaximenes
that the sky is like a vault over the earth. He disagrees, however, with Pytha
goras that there ia a sister earth which helps the earth keep itself in the correct
**
position. The world, at any rate, is created, but it has existed for a very
long time.
In ethics, he touches lightly on Greek philosophy and maintains with Pro.
dicus of Ceos that death has no pain and that it should not be feared. He also
holds with Epicurus and his contemporaries that the desire for pleasure and
the repulsion from care are the criteria of happiness. But building up and
improvemen of character cannot be achieved by philosophy alone: the help
of -he prophets is necessary.
In his theory of knowledge, ibn Hazm emphasizes, in addition to sensory
perception and primary reason, three means of acquiring religious knowledge
which are particularly fundamental in Islam. These are: the literal sense of
ths Qur'An, the sayings and doings of the Prophet Muhammad, and consensus
The first and foremost source of knowledge is the literal sense of the text
of the Qur'An. This must follow from the oontext of tho fifty-ninth verse of
the fourth Surah. "0 ye who believe I obey Allah and obey the Messenger
and those of you who are in authority, and if ye have a dispute concerning
any matter refer it to Allah and to the Messenger.. . ." Tho text of the Qur’An
must be understood literally unless the words in question are used metaphori
cally and in a way current among the early Arabs No divergence is allowed
from the text of the Qur’An except where one verse is modified or abrogated
•• AlMilal, Vol. V. p. 58; cf. Uoberweg. Vol. 1. p. «8 line 34
283
A History of Muslim PhUoeopny
by another.*' A total dependence on the Qur’&n is made possible by the fact
that every aspect of life and every need of men. material or spiritual, is treated
in the Qur'an or provided for in it. God says, “We have neglected nothing in
the Book." This implicit meaning was reiterated explicitly in thia verse: “This
day have I perfected for you your religion and completed My favour to you
and chosen for you Islam as a religion."
The second source of knowledge is the Tradition, the sayings and actions
of the Prophet Muhammad. Ibn Harm accepts the true Hadith or the Sunnah
when related in a sure way and by reliable men in a connected chain which
reaches the Prophet Muhammad. Tho Prophet is oertainly trustworthy, and
ibn IJaim quotes in this connection from the Qur'An: “Nor does he speak out
of desire. It is naught but revelation that is revealed."*8
Ibn IJazm accepts, as a third source of knowledge, consensus fijma'J or
general agreement of the Companions of the Prophet but on a further condi
tion that all of them should have been aware of the matter agreed upon and
that no one of them should have shown any disagreement or hesitation about it.
In contradistinction to the other schools of jurisprudence in Islam, the
Hanafite school in particular, ibn Harm rejects all other sources of juris
prudence such as intuition (ilhdm), hearsay (kbabar), interpretation (Uwil).
deduction (istinbit), personal approval (utihtin), refraining from the un
seemly fifiliya)). legitimating a matter passed over in silence (dalil al-
khiftb), looking for a reason in matters other than mentioned in the Qur'in
(ta'IU), and holding a belief on the ground that it has been held by one's
predecessors or some prominent contemporaries (taqBd). Only the Prophet
Muhammad must bo taken as a model m all matters of belief and behaviour.
He equally rejeoted, and more forcibly, analogy (qiydt) and opinion (rd'i) or
that which a man conceives as true but without a proof, or that which a man
chooses out of mere desire. Tho Muslims should not abide by the beliefs and
laws preached by prophets prior to Muhammad unless they are accepted by
Islam as well.
Ibn Harm's views about God, His essence and His attributes, are: God
is one and unique; He is incorporeal; so nothing resembles Him nor does
He take the shape of anything He has created. He is the creator of everything,
of time, of apace, and even of His own Throne. He ia eternal, all-powerful
and all-knowing. His power and knowledge as well as all His other names
are eternal.
God cannot be conceived of as ruled by space and time, since He existed
before there were space and time, for these were also created by Him.
The verses in which God says of Himself: “The God of merov sitteth on His
Throne"" and "Then He directed Himself to the heaven,"88 ibn Qazm affirms
■’ Al-Muballa. Vol. I, p. 52; IhkOm, Vol. IV, p. 107. cf. pp. 3»ff.; b’ubadb. p. 28.
Al-lUOm. Vol. IV, p. 147
Qur'&n. vii. 53; x. 3; xiii, 2; xxv, 50; xxxii, 4; Mi, 4.
•• Ibid., xli. 11.
284
Zlhirism
with tho Aih'arites that God’s sitting or settling Himself on the Throne is
known; but how it is done is unknown.
God has no attributes which modify His essence: His qualities are names
and not adjectives, nor arc they derived from adjective.
* Ho says of
Himself: "God's are the fairest names. Invoke Him by them.”*1 Thus, only
these names, ninety-nine in number, by which God has named Himself,
may bo said to be His; we are not allowed to call Him by names which He
baa not mentioned as His, for example, the happy, the healthy, the beloved
the noblo, or the brave, although these titles are, in themselves, true of Him
and cherished by us. We are also not allowed to call Him by names, derived
from the verbs with which He predicated Himself. God says: “And when they
(tho disbelievers) meet the faithful they say, ‘We believe’; but when they are
apart with their satans (oomradcs). they say, 'Verily we hold with you and at
them we only mock.’ God shall mock at them.”** God says further: "And
they (the Jews) plotted, and God plotted: but of those who plot, God is the
best."
* 1 He also says: “And the heaven—with our hands havo We built ii
up."
** In spite of all that, says ibn Hazm, we cannot call God the mock r
plotter, or builder, simply because He did not call Himself by these nam
Moreover, we do not interpret His names to know how or why Ho is called
thus: He called Himself, for instance, the hearer, the One who sees, but wp
cannot say that He has the sense of hearing or of sight.
Furthermore, God speaks in the Qur'&n of His (one) hand, of His two ham i
and of His hands; so we may ascribe to Him one hand, two hands, or many
hands. In the Qur'&n He speaks also of His eye and of His eyes, but not of
two eyes of His. Acoording to ibn Hazm, we may ascribe to God either one
eye or ascribe to Him eyes, but not two eyes. When we speak of God's eye.
hand, or face, we do not mban. st any rate, that He has members similar to
ours. On the contrary, the words: face, eye, and hand are used as free meta
phors to mean simply God.
And though God is incorporeal, ibn Hazm asserts that the Muslims would
see Him on the Day of Judgment.
** They cannot see Him, for oertain, with
the power of sight in their eyes but perhaps with the power which is called
by some thinkers "the sixth Bonse."
Regarding our knowledge of God, ibn Hazm says, we do not maintain that
we come to know Him by primary reason, for we do not want to run the risk
of being refuted by somebody asserting that his prirmu-y reason does not
lead him to the knowledge of God. Nor may we allow that the knowledge of
God can be acquired by the art of reasoning, by argumentation or proof; since
the masses are not capable of such dialecticism. Failing to attain knowledge
•’ Ibid., vii. 180.
•• Ibid., ii. 15.
•• Ibid., iii, 54.
•• Ibid., li. 47.
“ Ibid., ixxv, S3.
285
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of God through throe channels, some come to the conclusion that He does not
exist. Nor may we allow authority or hearsay to be the criteria of the knowledge
of God, because these cannot lead to real conviction. We know God only through
revelation to the Prophet who is trustworthy and whose word should be
accepted on its face value.
Ibn fiaxm does not believe in the absolute free-will of man. Predestination,
according to him. is nothing but the command of God that a thing should
follow a definite oouree. Allah has created in man aptitudes, and every man
behaveB in compliance with his aptitudes. Accordingly, we may say that all
actions of men, good and bad. are ultimately created by God.
Ibn Haz.m was a polemist by nature, and often right in his contentions.
As Hitti says, "In this work [al-tfilal w aJ-Xi/iai] he pointed out difficulties
in the biblical narratives which disturbed no other minds till the rise of
higher criticism in the sixteenth century." Yet he is to blame for the harsh
language he used in his attacks on all religions and sects indiscriminately. On
some occasions he attacked even some of those who shared with him the
same doctrine.
Faith and Islam, says ibn Harm, are one and the same thing. Islam had
abrogated all anterior religions. Therefore, no religion precedent to Islam
should be followed, because every religion except Islam ia obsolete and, conse
quently. annulled. Muhammad is the Prophet to all nations; he preached
religion according to the prescription of God to him; and when he died revela
tion ceased. Islam was made oomplete; it ia impossible either to add anything
Tho best people are the messengers of God; next are the prophets not
entrusted with any mission to any people. After them are the Companions of
the Prophet Muhammad. These last differ in their prestige in accordance with
their efforts in the service of Islam and their personal charac^r and be
haviour, determined by the truth and ideals established by the Qur'An and
tho sayings and actions of the Prophet Muhammad.
D
?AHIRISM AFTER IBN 1JAZM
For a certain period Zahirism constituted in the East a school of jurispru
dence, but in Muslim Spain it never grew beyond a persecuted philosophy.
Even aa a philosophy it began to decline there after the death of ibn Hazm.
It is true that ibn Harm built a Zahirite system of dogma and revised Muslim
law from that standpoint, but his views enjoyed only a restricted acoepUnoe
in the Muslim West. In the East they found practically no echo. This ia due
tg the uncompromising attitude he had taken in all matters of creed, worship,
and legal transactions aa well aa to the harsh language he used while speaking
of all those who did not share with him the views he entertained. The ?Ahiritee
in the East, and the IJanbslitea too, have alwayB preferred to follow DAwud
ZAhiriam
ibn ‘Ali. though very little Fiqh has reached us from him. The few attempt
*
to introduce Zahirism into North Africa were due largely to political considera
*.
tion
On the Andalusian soil ?4hirism found support or acceptance with indive
duals here and there. Ibn ‘Abd al Barr (36S-463;‘91»-l01l), the famous
traditionist and biographer, had some leaning towards it.
A young contemporary of ibn Hazm and of ibn ‘Abd al-Barr, al-Humaidi
waa a historian and biographer of established fame. He was a declared
TShirite. When the persecution of the followers of the Zkhirite school reached
a high pitch in Muslim Spain, he left hia native land, wcntr to the East, and
settled down in Baghdad where he died forty years later. Al-Htunaidi was the
first man to introduce ibn Hazm'a works into the East, but there they made
no impression.
One would expect, despite all persecution, that Jthirism should have had
numerous followers for a certain period at least, a* has been the case with
most other movements. Ibn al-Athlr says:
** "There waa in the Muslim West
a multitude of them (of the ?4hiritee) called the Hazmfyyah or followers of
ibn JJazm " Asin Palacios tried to draw a complete list of them.1’ Some of
these were, to be sure, Z
hiritee
* or with Z&hirite leanings. But a number of
those who were considered by him to be suoh were oertainly not. That al-QhazAli
was antagnostic to the Bltihites1* and waa one who advocated a strict religious
behaviour and showed a dislike for all innovations, as we see dearly in all
his works, does not make him a Zihirite, and less so a follower of ibn Hazm,
aa Asin Palacios tried to show." Nor can we agree with Asin Palacios that
ibn Ruahd (Averroee) was a ?4hinta on the mere fact that he quoted ibn
Hazm three times10 in his TaMjul al-Tahdful. Ibn Rusbd mentioned also the
Zahiritea once with disdain
'
* and twice with indifference.
* 1 Moreover, his
theme in his two small but worthy epistles, Fail al-Magul and UaiMij al-
Adillah. is that tho masses cannot rise or be raised above the literal meaning
of the Law, while the thinkers are called upon to ponder on the intentions of
religion.
With the advance of the sixth/twelfth century ZAlririam became a problem
in the Muslim West, in Spain, and in North Africa: while the masses behaved
on tho narrowest ZAhirite lines, ?4hirism itself was being fought on every
side. Philosophy was equally combated. The rationalist thinker ibn Tufail
* ’
•• Ibn al AHUr, Vol. XII. p. «l: cf. Taj. Vol. VIII. p. 243: ef. Asin. p. 280.
•’ Asin. pp. 280-329.
•• Al-Mnnqidb mm al-PaUl. Damascus. 1st «!.. 1332/1934. pp. 3, 16, 44-47
" Asin, p. 299: cf. pp. 297-300.
•• Ibid.. pp. 20R. 542. 380.
« TaMtut ai-TaMfvt, pp. Sill f.
Ibid., pp. 12. 429. , . t
*• Ibn Tufail. pp. 126f., 13Hff. (Mvond cd., pp. I78t. 188 ff.) -Translation by
Oekloy. pp. 101 (I57f.). 110-19 (171-76). See also Ibn fujaU and Hit Philo-
•opl.Kol Romance (1st. cd.), pp. 58f.. 77-83 (second ed.). pp. 37f„ 57-61.
287
A History of Muslim Philosophy
furnishes us with a eery clear picture of the situation there; a few enlightened
individuals were living in the midst of a multitude of common people unwilling
and incapable of thinking for themselves.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Ibn Hazm. al-Muhalla .... Vote. I and II. Cairo. 1348/1929; Ibfdl al-Qiyde
(extract in Goldzihcr, Die tUMu): al-IftUm al-Ahkam. 8 Parts. Cairo. 1345-
1348/1926-1929; al-Milal w-al-Nihai (ReligionB and Soots), 5 Vote., Cairo. 1317-
1327,1899-1909; al-Nubadi fi Ufil al-Figh al-fdhiri (Hints to the Fundamentate
of Zihiri Jurisprudence), with an Introduction by Muhammad ZAhid al Kauthan.
Cairo. 1380/1940; fauq al-Hamdmah, Damascus; Kitab al-Akhldq w-al-Styar
(Book of Ethics and Behaviour), Cairo, n.d, Jtoal'il Ibn Ham 1st series. Cairo
A- Baghdad, n.d.; Said al-Afghani, Ibn Haim wa Risdlat al-MuladaUMt bain
al-fahdbah (Ibn Harm and His "Epistle on the Classification of tho.Compa
nions of tho Prophet"), Damascus 1359/1940; Roger Arlandez. Grammars el
rheologic cAsz Ibn Hazm de Cordoue. Paris. 1956; Asm Palacios. Abenhdxam de
Cordoba y su hisloma ontica de las ideas religioeae, 5 Vote., Madrid. 1927; Cliarlee
M. Bakewell. Source Book in Ancient Philosophy, Now York. 1907; ibn
BaibkuwSl. Kitab al-Silah, Cairo, 1374/1955; T. J. de Boer. The History of Philo
sophy in Islam, London. 1933; Abd Allah Muhammad al-Humaidi. Jadbwal al-
Muqtabis .. „ Cairo, 1372/1952; Encyclopaedia of Islam; ibn al-FaraJi. TdriU
al-'Ulamh'. . . bi al-Andalue, 2 Vote., Cairo. 1373/1964; 'Abd al-Q&hir al-Bagfedadi.
al-Farq bain al-Firaq (on Muslim Soots), Cairo. 1328/1910; ibn al-Nadlm. KMb
al-Fihrist, Leipzig, 1871-1872: von Carl Brockelmann, Oeechichle dec arabischen
Lilteralur. 2 Vote.. Leiden. 1898, 1902; Suppkmenlbdnde, 3 Vote., Leiden, 1937,
1938, 1939-1942; I. Goldzilier, Le livre du Mohammed Ibn Toumert, Introduction
par I. Algiers, 1903; Die %Ahiriten, Leipzig, 1884; Philip K. Hitti, History
of tlu Arabe. London. 1949; ibn al-AJhir. TUH-i Kamil, Leiden, 1851-1871:
Muhammad abu Zahrah. Ibn flaim, Cairo, 1373/1953; ibn KhaUikAn, Wafaydl
ul-A'yUn.... 3 Vote., Gotha. 1835-1850; ibn Tufail. Qiffatu flayy Ibn Yaqidn,
Duans, 1354/1935; second ed.. 1359/1940; ibn Tumart, TaSliq Muhammad
Ibn Tumart, ml. I. Goldzihor, 1903; ibn TdWri. al-Magbrib fi AUhur al-Ma&ib
(History of the Muslim West), Isiden. 1948, 1951; W. Ivanow. Alleged Founder of
lemd'llism, Bombay. 1946; al FlrfizAbAdi. al-QamOs alMuhlf, 4 Vote.. Cairo. 1344;
D. B. Macdonald, Development of Muslim Theology, Jurisprudence and Constitutional
Theory, London, 1903; Sub^i MalimaffAni, Falsafol al-Taiiri' fi al-Islam (The
Philosophy of Jurisprudence in Islam), let od., Beirut, 1365/1946; translated into
Urdu FaleaIaha S^ari'al-i Islam, Lahore, 1955; Malik ibn Anas. al-Muwatta'
(A collection of tho Traditions of tho Prophet Mufernnmad), ed. Fu’ad 'Abd al-BAqi,
Cairo. 1370/1951: 'Abd al-WA|>id al Murrakujbi. al-Mu‘jib fi AkiMr al-MafAnb
(History of North Africa). Cairo, 1368/1949; al-GhazAli. ni.l/imyidA min al-Ijalal,
Damascus. 1352/1934: ibn Khaldun. Mugaddimah, Beirut. 1956; al-Maqqari,
Nafb al-flb (History of Muslim Spain), Leiden, 1885-1889; abu al-Hasan al-
XubAti. Kitab al-Marqabal al-'L'lyd'. . ., ed. Levi-Provencal under the title:
T-lrlfcA Quddt al-Andalus (History of tho Judges of Muslim Spain), Cairo,
1948; A. R. Nykl, Hispano-Arabic. Poetry, Baltimore. 1946; Simon Ockloy, The
Improvement of Human Reason Exhibited in the Life of Hai Ebn Yakdhan, London,
1708; Marmaduke Pickthall. The -Meaning of the Glonous Koran, London, 1952;
Revue de ['academic arabe de Damas (MajaUal al-Majma' al-'Ilm al-‘Arabi [in
Arabic)), Vol. XXII. No. 2 (Apr. 1948). pp. 201-18; al-Sam'Ani, Kitab al-AnsOb
(extract in Goldziher. Die Zahirilen); ghahrastAni. al-Milal w-alNihal (Religions
288
Ikhw&n al-Safa
and Seou); Shams al-Dln aH&shabi, Siyar al NubaU' (biography of ibn Haun),
an extraot, Damascus, 1360/1941; A. J, Arberry, Sufism. London, 1950; T*j
al-Dtn al-Subki. fabaqai al-Shdfi'iyyal al-Kubru. 6 Vole., Cairo. 1323-1324/1906-
1906; 'Abd al-Kahm&n alSulami, fabaqSl al-Sufiyyafi. Cairo. 1373/1933; Sayyid
al-Murtada al-Zabldi. Taj al-'Arito min JawOhir al.Qamtu. Cairo; ibn Rusfrl,
ToAd/ui al-Tobafut, Beirut, 1930; von Friedrich Ueberwog, Grundriee der (Juchichk
der Philosophic.. 11th od.. Berlin. 1928.
Chapter XV
IKHWAN AL-§AFA
A
INTRODUCTION
Tho name Ifchwan al-§afa was assumed by a group of libres penseurs who
cultivated science and philosophy not for the sake of science and philosophy,
but in the hope of forming a kind of an ethico-spiritual community in which
the titles of the heterogeneous Muslim Empire could find a refuge from the
struggle that was raging among religious congregations, national societies, and
Muslim sects themselves.
External evidence concerning the Ifchwan al-$afa is so scanty that no clear
historical picture of them is in any way possible. Were it not for abu Hayyan
al-Taubidi (d. after 400/1009), a famous author and a friend of aome members
of the group, no facts about them would have come down to us.
The group of tho Ifchwin al-?afa originated in Basrah. In about 373/983,
the group was already famous and its "Epistles,” which contain its spiritual
doctrines and philosophical system, were in wide circulation.1
The complete name of the group was Ilc^wan al-Sa/a wa f£bulldn al-Wafa
wa AU al-Hamd. m Abna' al-Afajd,' a name which was suggested to them by
the chapter of the “Ring-Necked Dove” in KaKlah wa Dimnah. a book which
they very highly esteemed.*
The Tkhwan al-$afa succeeded in keeping complete secrecy about their
names. But when abu yayyin was asked, in about 373/983, about them, he
named, perhaps at random, five of them: abu Sulaimkn Muhammad b. Ma'star
al-Busti, known as al-Muqaddisi, abu al-Hasan 'Ali b. Hariln ul-Zanjani, abu
Afimad Mubammad al-Mihraj8ni, a certain al-'Aufi. and the famous Zaid b,
RifJ'ah.*
• lmta\ ii. pp. 4ff.
1 The true frien.is, tho faithful comrades, the people deserving praise, and the
sons of glory (cf. Jdmi'ah, i. p. 141).
• Cf. Rasd'il, i, p. 310; ii, pp. 166, 193, 207, etc.; iii. pp. 173-78; iv, pp. 87. 203;
Jdmi'ah, i, pp. 128 ff.
• Zmlo', ii, pp. 4 ff
289
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The Ikfaw&n al-$afa produced numerous works the most famous and im
portant of which is the encyclopedic compilation entitled Ranail Ikkwiin
al-Sa/a (Epistles of the Ifchwan nl-Safa). which will henoeforth be referred to
as Ramil or "Epistles." These "Epistles” orc definitely the result of a collab
oration of various writers m-.,y of whom may not have been members of
the group. The compilation must hove dragged over a long period, but by
373/983 the "Epistles" must have been already complete in the first recension
at least. It is, moreover, practically certain that tho Ifchwan al-$afa embarked
upon the compilation of the "Epistles" with tho number fifty in their mind.
The current edition, however, have fifty-three epistles.
Closely connected with the "Epistles" is al-RiMU al-Jimi'ah (the Com
prehensive Epistle) which was a rummarium and lumma of the original “Epis
tles." It was also intended for private circulation among the more advanced
members of the group. TheVdmi'aA discards much of the scientific information
originally the backbone of the "Epistles," and expounds more fully and frankly
the ideas which the Ikh"4n al-§afa intended to inoculate into their followers •
The Jimi'ah was further summarized in RiMit ai-Jimi'ai al-Jdmi'ah au
al-Zubdah min Rasd'il Ikhwiin al-^afa (the Condensation of the Comprehen
sive Epistle or the Cream of the Epistles of Tkhw&n al-§afa), called also al-
* *•The scientific information as well as chapters of the
Risdldl al-Jdmi‘ah.
"Epistles" are eliminated, while the symbolic and esoteric interpretation of
the verses of the Qur'&n are brought out- vigorously.
The IkhwAn al-$afa made arrangements for holding meetings everywhere
they had followers. Ill these meetings, which were held once every twelve days
and were restricted to the members and followers of the group, subjects
of metaphysical and esoteric nature were discussed.’ There were also occasional
meetings for tho initiation of young people.
* Apparently, some of the followers
were given, during these meetings, to singing, drinking, and other indulgences
for which the Ikh»&n al-Safa rebuked them indirectly.
*
The Ikhwan al-§afs were a secret group. They were recruited through per
sonal and confidential contacts. The emissaries were advised to work among
the youth, as old people are usually rigid and unfit for any movement.” The
group had four grades in which its members were placed generally according
to their age. The first and most Inferior grade was that of those who had
attained their fifteenth year; the second of those betwoen thirty and forty
years of age; the third of those between forty and fifty. The fourth, last and
highest grade, waa that of those who were already fifty years of age.”
• iv, p. 480; also cf. p. 278; Jimfah. i. pp. I89f ; ii. pp. 38. 47.
• Jimi'al al-Jami‘ah. Sec. vii.
' Hari'il, iv. pp. 105. 237.
• Ibid., iv. pp. 338f.
• Ibid., iii. pp. 33f.: cf. iv, pp. 138f
*• Ibid., iv. p. 114
11 Ibid.. pp. H9f.
290
IUiwBn al-Safa
The lfchw&n al-§afa were Muslims. But they had a special interpretation
of religion in general, and of Islam in particular. The Shiite colouring, which
is very conspicuous in their missionary work, is only dramatio because it helped
them to play cleverly upon the emotions of the masses. In the strict historical
sense, the IkfewSn al-$afa did not belong to any sect. In fact, they sought,
with the aid of Islam and Greek philosophy, to work out a spiritual doctrine
which would take the place of the historical religions and which would, at
the samo time, suit everyone and insult nobody.
As far as we can gather from tho “Epistles," the Ikhwan al $afa had no
political programme. It seems, however, that some of their followers had
pressed for political action to take the reins of government into their hands.
The Ikhwin al-§afa themselves, the magnates among them, were not of this
opinion; they reiterated in this connection that their sole aim was to uphold
the faith and attain the bliss in the hereafter. In the meantime they tried to
acquire knowledge and bo versed in theoretical sciences.“ They declared,
further, that they intended to build up a spiritual city, a Utopia, which
was not of this world, neither on the continent, nor on the high seas, nor in
the air.”
The sections, in the “Epistles," referring to daulalu aU al-khoiri and daulalu
ahi al-gharri (literally, the State of tho people of good and the State of the
people of evil) contain only a brief and general discussion on the terms of
governments or dynasties and on their succession.'* The Ifebwin al-§afa
referred once'* to tho coining of dautaiu ahi al-kbairi; but they meant simply
“the time when the adherents to their group would form the bulk of the
nation."
SYSTEM AND THEORIES
1. Classification of the Sciences
Sciences may be classified in different ways. The IkfawSn al-§afa mentioned
a few classifications and adopted that which divided all branches of knowledge
roughly into three major classes:1’ mathematics, physics, and metaphysics,
a classification which was current since Aristotle's day's. Mathematics included,
in the "Epistle,” the theory of numbers, geometry, astronomy, geography,
music, theoretical and practical arts, ethics, and logic." Physics included
Ibid., ii, p. 19; iv, pp. 23o, 241 f
'• Ibid., li. p. 19; iv. pp. 215, 220-24; Jdmi oA. i, pp. IBOf.. 102, IBS. 168, 323f.
KatH'il. i, p. 130f.; iv, pp. 198ff.. pp. 234f.
“ Ibid., i, pp. !30f.; iv, pp. 234 f.
>• Ibid., i, pp. 23. 49, 202ff.; Jami'oh. i. pp. 219f.
•’ Rona'il. i. pp. 23-362.
291
A History of Muslim Philosophy
matter, form, motion, time, space, the sky, generation, corruption, minerals,
the essence of nature, plants, animals, the human body, the senses, life and
death, microcosm, pleasure, pain, and language.1* Metaphysics was subdivided,
aa should be expected, into psycho-rationalism and theology. The first sub
division included psychics, rationalistic^, being, macrocosm, mind, great years,
love, resurrection, and causality.1* Theology included the beliefs of the IfcfowSn
al-$afa, friendship, faith, divine Law, prophethood, call unto God, the in-
*
corporeals, polities, the structure of tho world, and magic. 0
2. Theory of Knowledge
Tho IkljwAn al-$afa were very much interested in epistemology or the theory
of knowledge. General knowledge, they said, may bo acquired in three ways :’*
(1) The way of the five. senses is the natural and the most common way of
acquiring knowledge. But through our senses we acquire only the material
changes immediately apprehended by us and occurring in apace and time. **
(2) Man acquires knowledge also by means of primary reason, by pure or
mere thinking. But reason, if unaided by sound senses, cannot acquire know-
ledge. Moreover, concepts having no connection with our senses, like those
of God and the First Matter, cannot be acquired thus. ** Akin to the two
**
previous ways is the way of proof, the way of the trained dialecticians.
(3) The way of acquiring knowledge which agrees best with the esoteric
doctrine of the Ikhwan al-$afa is the way of initiation and authority, i.e., re
ceiving knowledge personally from an authorized elder, a teacher in the broadest
and deepest sense. This teacher receives his knowledge from the Im&m (reli
gious leader) who. in turn, receives it. through other I minis, from the Prophet
whose ultimate source of knowledge is God **
Philosophy, wisdom or philosophical wisdom, according to the Ifefewin
al-Safa, ia to behave (lotUilcs as best as a human being can.’* A more detailed
definition would be "love for science added to knowledge of the essence of all
beings, gained' as best as one can. together with profession and public
behaviour in harmony with that."”
In the "Epistles" of the Ifchwin al-§afa metaphysics proper is quite meagre
•• Ibid,. ii, pp. 3-388; iii. pp. 3-181.
'• Ibid., iii, pp. 182-371.
*• Ibid., iii, pp. 373-432; iv, 3-478.
■' Ibid., iii, p. 228; cf. ii, p. 351.
■' Ibid., i. pp. 106, 211; ii. pp. 334. 335-51; iii, pp. 38, 228, 384; cf. pp. 241.
292 n.
•* Ibid., iii, pp. 41 f.
•• Ibid., i. p. 211; ef. p. 106; ii. p. 334; of. p. 228.
“ Ibid . iii. pp. 42, 322.
’• Ibid., ii;. pp. 48. 58. 152; Jdmi'oA, i. pp. 107. 123, 189, 288.
” KasO'd. i. p. 23; cf. Jdmi'ah. i. pp. 99. 107; cf. further pp. 10. 99-107; ii, pp
27Sf„ 277f'.. 280.
292
Htbwin al.Safa
3 Metaphysics
If metaphysics did not include theology, it would have interested them
very little.
(1) Form and Matter The views of the Ikhwfin al-Safa regarding form and
matter arc Aristotelian: every laxly consists of matter and form which are
insepararable, since pure forms are only concepts like the soul and the intel
lect.*’ Matter and form are both simple essences. The form is more important,
since bodies are different because of their forms, their matter being in many
cases the same; but matter is theoretically older.” In keeping with their dis
position towards compilation, they show some leaning to Plato when they
sav” that the images, figures, frames, and characteristics which we see in the
world of (sublunary) bodies and in the essences of the heavenly bodies are
examples, likenesses, and colourings of those forms which arc in the world of
spirits.
(2) Space and Time.—As regards space and time, their view was that both
are not realities; space is more objective, since it is related to bodies which
have dimensions: it is the vessel which holds the contained.”
Time has no independent existence. It cannot be conceived of except in
connection with moving bodies. Now, if space is the outer surface of the world
and time is the reckoning of the rotations of the spheres, space and time would
be untliinkable prior to the spheres themselves.” These views led some to
think that they believed in the eternity of the world. They were aware of this
accusation and tried to defend themselves against it.”
(3) Motion.—There are six general kinds of motion grouped in three pairs:
generation and corruption, increase and decrease, change and displacement.
The particular kinds are numerous. The continuous and perfect motion is
spherical; tho straight motion is also continuous but not perfect. The arrow
when passing through tho air forms, from tho bowstring to its falling place,
one continuous course.” Here they disagree, in the example of the arrow, with
Zeno of Elea (d. 430 B.C.) who argued that if a line was made up of points,
there must be always space among these points. And so, an arrow in any given
moment of its flight must be at rest in some particular point.”
(4) Causality.—In the field of causality the Ikjjwan al-$afa depended on
Aristotle, 'Hal (pl. of 'illah, fem.) or major causes are four the bayuldniyyab
” Kasa’il, i, p. 326; ii. pp. 4. 325; iii, p. 186; cf. Jami'ab. i. p. 298; ii. p. 74.
” Raed’U, i, p. 322; ii. pp. 4. Of.; iii. pp. 186, 360.
■■ Ibid., ii. p. 232.
“ Ibid., ii. pp. 9, 10. 336; iii, p. 361.
” Ibid., ii. pp. 10. 13; iii. pp. 334f„ 361.
” Ibid., iii. p. 336.
•• Ibid., ii. pp. 10. 11. 13, 238-47; iii. p. 306; Jdmi'ah. ii, p. 237.
“ Uoborwog, Vol. I. p. 87; Sarton, History, p. 276,
•• Rasa-il. i. p. 201; ii. pp. 78, I32f.; iii. p. 233; Jdmi ah, ii. p. 79; cf. Aristotle,
pp. 122ff.. I32f.. 2491T.
293
A History of Muslim Philosophy
(material, the matter or substance of which a thing is made), fOriyyah
(formal, the form which ia given to a certain substance to produce that thing),
fd'iliyyah (active, the agent which gives that substance ita form) and tamdmiy-
yah (fulfilling, the end which that produced thing serves).
The answer to a question concerning any of the causes, and especially the
fourth cause, is always difficult because it is a question about the essence of
things. These four causes should act together, otherwise the intended thing
would not come into existence; and they should hold on, so that the produoed
thing might persist. It is needless to say that God is the ultimate cause of all
beings.”
(5) Number.—Numbers are the vehicle of the doctrine of the Ikhw&n al-$afa.
The Pythagorean theory of numbers (their properties; proportion, progression,
etc.) and their Unking mystically to the life and after-life of man captured
their imagination.
The lkhwin al-$afa divided the numbers into two classes: a factor which is
the "one" and a "aeries from two ad infinitum." Tho one is an absolute unity,
indivisible, undiminishable, and unincreasable. All the numbers originate from
the one: the two by tho repetition of the "one” twice; the other numbers by
adding tho "one"; whence ita character as a factor to every subsequent
number."* This dexterous acrohatism was necessary to arrive at the following,
half-theological and half-metaphysical statement: Just as "the one is of a
different nature from the numbers which originate from it, so the One (God)
is unlike all the beings emanating from Him.””
(6) Being and Emanation.—1This leads us to Being and Emanation, the
coming of the universe into existence, or its creation.
The universe ia not eternal but created by God through emanation. Ema
nation waa a compromise between tho strict religious notion of creation and
the Aristotelian view of the eternity of the world. Theoretically, creation waa
accomplished in two steps: first, God wiUod, in one thought, that the universe
should come into existence ex nihilo; then, immediately emanation began and
proceeded gradually, until the universe took its present shape. The order and
character of emanation were as follows
(i) AIBdri (The Maker. Creator, or God).—AI Bdn is the First and only
Eternal Being, the One. Unique, and One in every respect. He has no partner
and no peer. No anthropomorphic attribute or action should be ascribed to
Him. Only the will to create pertains to Him.*1
(ii) Al-Agl (Intellect or Gr. Nous).—Al-'aql waa the first being to ema
nate from al-Bari. (ted created it directly, necessarily, without break, and
•’ /tmrf'il. i. pp. 201. 354; iii. pp. >85. 233. 325, 327; iv. pp. 8f., 178; Jdmi‘ah,
ii. pp. 79. 278,
"* Sarton. History, p. 217.
HaM'il. i. pp. 24f„ 28f.. 31f.; of. Jami'ah, i. p. 43.
•• Rood'll. i. pp. 28f.; iii. pp. 184f„ 200ff.; Jdmi'ah. i. pp. 27ff.; ii. pp. 284ff.
•' Rosa',I. i, p. 189; ii. pp 107, 108ff.; Jami'ah, i, p. 593; ii. p. 83.
294
Ikhwin al-.^afa
with no need for movement or effort. From God's eternity it acquires its own
eternity; and through His perpetuance it receives ita continuity and perfection.
It is one in number as God Himself is One. But since God does not condescend
to deal with material bodies, He created in the intellect all the forms of
subsequent beings and instituted in it the office of re-emanation: from it
emanated the world-soul and tho first matter. It is clear, then, that the office
attributed usually to God belongs, in the opinion of the Ikhw&n al-§afa. to
the intellect, a counterpart, duplicate, or image of God.*1
(iii) Al-Na/a al-Kulliyyah (Tho Absolute Soul, the World-Soul).—Tho world
soul is the soul of the whole universe, a simple essenoe which emanated from
the intellect. It receives its energy from the intellect. It manifests itself in
the sun through which it animates the whole sublunary (material) world. What
we call creation, in our world, pertains actually to the world-soul.*’
(iv) Al-Hayula (Arabiciied from Gr. hyU: subeUnoo, matter, stuff), First
Matter.—First matter is a simple and spiritual essence already substance with
out bulk, and yet without conceivable dimensions. Because the first matter
was passive, having no proper energy; it could not emanate by itself. It was
caused by the intellect to proceed from the world-soul which had to exert
effort and show great care to facilitate for it to gush forth and become
subsequently susceptible to accepting different forms,4*
(v) AtTabiab (Nature).—Nature is one of the powers of the world-soul,
the energy diffused throughout the sublunary world and effecting all bodies
therein, organic and inorganic. It is the cause of motion, life, and change. It
works wisely and uniformly. In this sense, it is the philosophical term for the
religious concepts of divine will and Providence.*4
Here, with nature, oeases the influence of the intellect, since all subsequent
emanations will tend to be more and more material, defective, and, conse
quently. unworthy of its care.*4
(vi) Al-Jism al-Mullaq (The Absolute Body).—When the world-soul began,
wit h the help of the intellect, to move the first matter in three directions, the
first matter acquired the three dimensions (length, width, and depth) and
became the absolute body or second matter. The second matter is no more a
concept, an essence, or a quality denoting pure existence, aa was the first
matter, but a quantum, spherical in shape. This absolute body, or second
matter, is the substance of which our world, as such, is made.*’
*■ Rarfil, ii. pp. 4. 9. 83. 244. 293. 392; iii. pp. 187, 189, 197. 228f„ 328. 332,
260f.; J&mi'ah, ii. pp. 33, 36.
*• Rata'il, i, p. 28: ii. pp. 56f„ 112ff.; iii. pp. 19. 191, 192. 193. 203, 214f.. 235.
361 -, Jami'ah. i. p. 529.
“ JbiadM, iii, pp. 5. 187 ft, 230: iv, pp. 4ff.; Jamiah. ii. pp. 4ff„ 37.
*• Rartil. i. p. 331; ii. pp. 55f„ 112f.: iii. pp. I24ff.; Jdmi'ah, i. pp. 331ff.; ii,
p. 36.
Ratail. ii, p. 36; iii. p. 198.
•’ Ibid., ii, pp. 4. 6; iii. pp. 8. 189, 198. 203. 204; iv, p. 4; Jami'ab. i. p. 276;
ii. pp. 6, 37.
295
A History of Muslim Philosophy
(vii) The Spheres or lhe World of the Spheres,—In tho seventh stage of
emanation appeared the spheres which are not imaginary but spiritual, spheri
cal. hollow, transparent, and concentric bodies. These spheres, which are eleven
in number, vary in the thickness of their shells, in proportion to the magnitude
of the planets with which they are inset. These spheres are: the spheres of the
fixed stars, Saturn. Jupiter, Mars, the Sun. Venus, Mercury, and the Moon.
All the heavenly bodies are made up of a fifth element, ether,1* and are not
liable to generation and corruption.”
(viii) The Four Elements.—With the emanation of the four elements: fire,
air, water, and earth, we come to tho beings immediately under the sphere
of the moon (within its orbit), to the sublunary world where the process of
generation and corruption begins to take place.
Eire, air, water, and earth—supposed to be elements by the IkhwSn al-Safa
like many Greek thinkers—exist, free in nature, in minor spheres about the
centre of the earth. Further. they espoused the view of the Ionians. and Thales
(d. c. 545 B.C.) in particular, as against the Eleatios, that the four "elements"
change into one another: water becomes air and fire; fire becomes air, water,
earth, etc.**
(ix) The Three Kingdoms.—In the closing stage of emanation appeared the
three kingdoms: mineral, plant, and animal, which originated from the absolute
interchange and proportional intermixture of the four elements.*1
(7) Macrocosm and Microcosm.—The early Greek thinkers conceived of the
universe as one living being in whioh the phenomena and powers are correlated
and governed hierarchically by a single general law. Democritus of Abdera
(d. c 370 B.C.) developed from that concept the Theory of Macrocosm and
Microcosm which treated of man as a reducer! model of the universe, and of
the universe os tho enlarged copy of man.** His theory was accepted by the
Ikhwfin al-$afa.
(8) The Individual Soul (al-Na/s al-Juz'iyyah) and Ils Fall.—As soon as
the world-soul was called upon to care for individual beings, beginning with
the spheres, its innumerable powers became distinct and independent but not
detached, since detachability is a property of matter. In this sense individual
souls, representing the infinite powers of the world-soul, began to form. During
a very long time these souls filled t he world of the spheres and constituted the
angels who animated tho heavenly bodies. At first, they were aware of the
grace which is bestowed by the intellect upon the world-soul, of which they
•• Cf. infra viii.
•• Hasid. ii. pp. 2, 3. 22. 25ff., 29ff.. 30-42, 123; iii. pp. 100, 219, 221, 391;
JOmi'ah. i, p. 309.
*• Kasi'il. ii, pp. 5. 22. 45-50, 77. 78, 200. 337, 403; iii. pp. 79. 183. 190; Jimfah,
i. pp. 306, 311; ii. 37. 382; iv. pp. 268ff.. 313.
11 Hasi d, i. pp. 311, 315, 331, 350f.; ii, pp. 45, 50ff.; Jimi'ah. ii. p. 37.
11 fio-l'd. i, p. 17; ii. pp. 20f.. 25f., 243ff.. 318. 320f.; iii. pp. 3ff„ 9f„ 12ff..
211-14; iv, p. 277; Jimiah. i. pp, 240. 563-88, 581-96. 635; ii. pp. 24-38, 123;
cf. Uuberwvg. Vol. I. pp. 51. 110; Sarton. History, pp. 177. 218, 421.
Ikhw&n al Safa
are tho powers. They contemplated the intellect and performed the wor
ship due to God. By and by. some of these individual souls began to forget
much about their origin and office. This rin caused them to get farther and
farther (though not in the sense of space and time) from God. The punishment
was the fall of the sinful souls to our earth, to be tied to individual bodies in
order to atone, by undergoing hardships, pain, and sorrow, for the sin they
had committed in their heavenly abode. This was the metaphvsical origin of
**
life on earth.*
The fall waa described and explained symbolically by the Ikhwln al-IJafa.
When God created the universe. He peopled it with spiritual incorporeal beings
whose office was to praise and glorify God. These were cognitive beings; they
could witness fully the corporeal and the absolute and could conoeive of every
form and thought anywhere in the universe. The period during which this
condition prevailed, since the creation, waa called daur al tnsbfi or the period
**
of exposition, as every being waa exposed to every other being in every respect.
Towards the end of this period, God willed that daur al-ntri, the period of
concealment, should succeed and that the Absolute be hidden in a corporeal
body which the faculties of the spiritual beings cannot penetrate. So, Ho
created Adam in His own image and breathed in him the world-sou! and settled
him in Hia paradise. Then God enjoined that all the spiritual beings, savo a
few archangels, should prostrate before him. worship him, and be at hia com
mand in the management of the world.*5
At the same time God warned Adam against eating from a certain tree.
On the other hand. Satan (Iblu), one of the lesser leaders of the jinn who
had aspired to bo in place of Adam, waa vexed by the honour bestowed on
Adam. He refused to prostrate before Adam and be subordinate to him. **
Then he accosted God with the pretension: "I am better than he. Thou
didst create me from fire and him from clay.”*’ Afterwards he turned to Adam
to avenge himself on him.
Knowing Adam's reality and frailty, IbKs could convince him that eating
from the forbidden tree would disclose to him the names and grades of the
archangels who were exempted from prostrating before him. would give him
knowledge of the hereafter, and would render him immortal.
** When Adam
realized what he had become, he was filled with boastfulness. At times he
overshot himself and disclosed a part of the secret with him to some of those
RaM'U. i, pp. 96, 98; ii, pp. 111. 288; iii. pp. 25. 28, 28. 59. 102. 279. 332,
382; iv, pp. 29. 230, 231. 238; JOmi'ah. i, pp. 383. 514, 515; ii. 2B, 247. 298.
•• RatO'il. i. pp. 155f. Tho definitions of tho periods of "Exposition and Conceal
ment" aa used in tho "EpistW are different from those accepted by tho Druzes
and th© ItmiA'Ilin.
“ rtarail. ii. p. 227; Jdmi'oA. i. pp. lllf-. 114. 145ff.. 15«f.; ii. p. 143.
Wil. i. pp. Iliff.. 145ft.. 157f.
•’ Qur'an, vii. II; xxxviii; 78 cf. JOmi'ah. i. p. 126.
• Jdm.w. i. pp. Iliff.. 124-28. 148; ii. p. 144.
297
A History of Muslim Philosophy
who were »round him but were unworthy of this secret before the time assigned
for such disclosure. Thia mi Adam's crime—curiosity and lust for power.“
Now, it was no more possible for Adam to stay witji tho angels who disavowed
him because he showed a knowledge inconsistent with his physical appoaranee
and which was even new and startling to them who, as spiritual beings, were
supposed to know more than he. Even the animals and the other inhabitants
of paradise were scared by his behaviour and abhorred him. Therefore, he
was caused to fall to earth to lead on it the life of flesh, deprived of all the
supernatural faculties acoorded to him in the heavenly abode. With him also
fell his wife and Iblia, so that the struggle may continue and be decided
openly, and in a fair manner."
The fall of Adam represents, in the metaphysical system of the Ikhw&n
al$afa, the union of the individual souls with sublunary bodies. When an
individual soul is causod to fall, it may be lucky enough to realize its mistake
und repent readily. In this case its downward journey is interrupted and it ia
caused to turn back and regain its former place.*1 The unlucky souls continue
their fall towards the centre of the earth to be tied to an inorganic body,
plant, beast, or man. We are concerned with the soul assigned to a man which
is the least unlucky of all the falling souls.
When a soul falls, it enters the ovum which happens to be impregnated at
the time of its fall. This soul in the ovum comes soon under the regimen of
the planets. AU planets, beginning with tho farthest one. Saturn, influence
the incubation of the soul turn by turn for a whole lunar month. After the
completion of the third month the foetus oomes under the influence of the
sun. the king of the planets, and life is breathed into it. The period of
pregnancy is accepted by the Ikhw&n al-§afa to be (at least) seven complete
lunar months, the number of the spheres of the then known planets.**
The soul ia prepared in this world through the modium of the body
for the hereafter. Life in this world is only a means to an end: here the soul
is enabled to attain perfection in order to be allowed to regain its former
celestial life. The body is only the workshop of the soul, a temporary house,
a shell, a mount necessary for a journey. Onoethe body is forsaken by the soul
it becomes again a heap of solid matter akin to the constituent elements of
the earth. But the body is as necessary for the soul aa is the womb for the
development of the foetus.*’
Death is welcome to the purified soul, sinoe death means to it. nothing more
than that it has stopped using the body. With the death of the body the real
" Ibid.. i, pp. 111. 112. I13f.. 155. 158. 1S3; n. p. 144.
Kaad'U. i, p. 62; ii, p. 17; iii. p. 216; iv, p. 138; Jdmiah, i. pp. llBf., 128.
184, 285, 437. 438ff.; ii, pp. 145. 247. 288.
•' Itaaa'il, Iv. p. 232; Jdmiah, i, p. 382; ii. p. 288.
•’ Rosd'il. i. pp, 168. 241; ii. pp. 250ff.. 357ff.; iv. p. 413; Jdnii'aA. i. pp. 513f.,
554, 559.
Bosa’il, i. p. 62; ii, pp. 17. 145, 247. 298. 323ff.; iii, pp. 25ft, 29. 51. 82. 73.
216; iv, p. 138; Jami'ah. i. pp. 116ff.. 129. 184. 295, 437. 439ft, 498.
298
Ikhwin al Safa
life of the soul begins. Moreover, the soul oannot benefit by the knowledge
acquired during its terrestial life except after the death of the body.
**
Lesser and Greater Resurrections. Paradise and Bea.—With the death of the
body occurs the first or lesser resurrection of the soul. AU human souls arc
immortal: those which have attained perfection during their earthly life would
be able to enjoy again the absolute being and happiness; those which have
remained imperfeot would be barred from entering heaven and remain sus
pended between heaven and earth with the devils dragging them on every
side until thoy are forced back to the hollows of gloomy bodies and the bounds
of physical nature."
In leaving the body, the soul leaves simultaneously the lesser bell which ia
the transient life on earth subject to generation and corruption, change and
putrefaction. Greater heU is the eternal condemnation of the wretched soul
to roam in the underworld, burdened with the accumulated ignorance and
fettered with depression and pain. Paradise, on the other hand, is the vast
space of heaven, where the righteous souls float in an infinite spread of light
in perpetuance and immortality, in a state of happiness and grace.
When all the individual souls have left their bodies and are reunited with
the world-soul, the world-soul would lose the reason for its independent
existence: so it would return to God. The universe would cease, and there
would remain one being: God. This is the greater resurrection: the closing of
a manifestation of God.*’
4. Nature and the Sciences
The Ikfewan al-$afa happened to compile in their "Epistles” the scientific
materials available to thorn and. at the same timo, support their eeoterio doc
trine. They trird to arrange these materials, the scientific legacy of Greece
since the earliest Ionian thinker, Thalea of Miletus, in independent chapters.
The picture which resulted was that of accumulation rather than of exposition,
and never that of exhaustiveness and systematisation. We do not know,
howover, what additions they made; but we are sure that thoy did give us a
general account of the scientific life of the Muslims in the Middle Ages, with its
bright and dark sides. Further, the "Epistles" supply us with a picture, though
imperfect, of the ancient world of science.
(1) In arithmetic the lkhw5n al-$afa depended in the main, as they say. **
on Pythagoras and Nioomaohus. "Pythagoras" must moan tho Pythagorean
school; Nioomachus was a late neo-Pythagorean of Gerasa (present Jarash in
•• Rasi'it. i. pp. 169, 226, 255. 277. 337; ii, pp. 43, 277; iii, pp. 51. Mf.. 5»f.;
iv. p. 82; Jdmi'ah, i, pp. 600, 663. 667; ii. pp. 28. 87.
•• RasOU. i, p. 260; iii. pp. 26f„ 29. 36, 93f„ IO5f.. 279. 289.
•• Ibid., ii. p. 52; iii, pp. 64. 189. 279. 282. 284. 240, 243. 344, 346; iv, p. 82.
•’ Ibid., iii. pp. 3l5f.. 320.
•• Ibid., i. p. 35.
299
t History of Muslim Philosophy
Jordan) who flourished about the middle of the second Christian century."
Ke elaborated the Pythagorean mathematics and wrote a book entitled
ArilhmatM eMopogi or “Introduction to Arithmetic," in which he maintained
that “numbers had a pre-existence in the spirit of the Creator before the forma
tion of the universe. He wrote another book which the l^hwan al-.'jafa must
have known and used: ArithmatM thtologoimrna or "Theology of Numbers.”'*
They also knew a book by Euclid on arithmetic called rd-Ufil.”
(2) Geometry has for its aim the training of the soul, by which it realizes
promotion in knowledge from perception to conception, from the physical to
the spiritual and from the concrete to the abstract. Geometry (Ar. handasah)
is of two kinds: liisslyyah, tangible, sensible, or common plane and solid
geometry which helps man to acquire skill in crafts; and 'oqfiyyaA, intellectual
or rational, namely: analytic and descriptive, which enables man to be versed
in theoretical sciences.’* The Ikhw&n al-fjafa knew Euclid and other writers
on geometry’1 from whom they drew their information on the subject.
To geometry belong tile mysterious or magical figures, the smallest of which
is composed of nine squares in three rows. In these squares are inserted the
numbers I to 9 in a manner that any row, horizontal, |>erpendicular.ordiagonal.
must give tho uniform sum of 15.’*
(3) The aim of the “Epistle" on music is to stimulate the souls, already
instructed in mathematics, physics, psychics, and theology, to join the im
mortals in the vast space of heaven. Music itself is a spiritual art founded by
wise men. It has a strong and varied effect on all souls. It ia either sootliing
or exciting, gratifying or grieving. On this account, music is played to calm
the sick and insane, to tranquillize a weeping child or to lull him to sleep.
Even animals are subject to the effect of music. Music is also played in
temples because of the touch of awe it possesses.’*
Pythagoras was said to have heard the sound of the moving spheres and
planets. Since the motions of these spheres have regularity and ratios to one
another, their sounds must have tunes which are of highest perfection and
harmony. These tunes are intended for the inhabitants of the heaven. Pytha
goras discovered the scale and essentials of music as a result of hearing the
sounds of the heavenly bodies ’*
” Ucberwcg. Vol. I. p. 513. Barton (//uiory. pp. 205. 214. n. 15) sets his flourishing
in tho second half of tho first Christian century.
’• Ucborwvg. Vol. I, pp. 314. 519; Sarton. /ntrodurtion to ths History o/ Sciem,
Vol. 111. p. 1511; History, p. 214, n. 32.
" "Principles" or “Essentials" (KastfU. i, pp 44f ). Certainly, thia ia not the
book of Euclid on geometry which was later called tho Klrmrnls (ibid.. p 280:
rf. also pp. 171. 442).
" Rasd'il. i. pp. 50ff., 63ff., 68-71; Jdmt'oA. i. pp. I75f.
'■ Itasd'il, i, p. 68; cf. pp. 103.
11 Ibid., i. pp. 7If.; cf. p. 69.
1 P«'4.,i, pp. |.12ff. 134. 136, 154. 158. 175. I7«f.; Jomt'oA, pp. 185-88. 190IT.
Itosd il, i. pp. 152f„ 158B-. 168.
300
IkfawAn al Safa
(4) The universe, say the Ikhwin al IJafa, is nude up of all the bodies in
existence. It is finite and spherical in shape. Being is one solid body; it stuffs
the whole space: it u tho universe. Outside the universe there is neither
Being nor Non-Being, neither emptiness (vacuum) nor fullness, since the uni
verse has no outside.” On this they agree with the Eloatic Parmenides ami his
disciple Zeno;” but they disagree with them fully on the question of motion.
I’urmcnides and Zeno presumed that since the universe is completely replete,
the movement of individual bodies is impossible. The view of tho IkhwAn
al-§afa was: since the mass of the universe is not of the same density, the
more dense may move through the less dense, as the fish swim in w ater and
the birds fly in air.”
The earth stands in the centre of the world; then come seven concentric
sphere in which revolve the planets: the moon. Mercury, Venus. the sun.
Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn. Finally comes the sphere of the fixed stars. The
number of the stare which were determined by astronomical observation,
including the seven planets, was one thousand and twenty-nine. All the stars
are luminous except the moon which receives its light from the sun.*"
Tho movement of the planets was explained by the rotation of the outer
sphere clockwise: from east to west above the earth, and from west to east
under the earth, once every day. Tho outer sphere carries tho other spheres
along with it. From this it follows that these spheres with their planets too
should complete a revolution around the earth in one day.11 But the ancients
noted that the planets have complicated movements: sometimes they apfiear
to overtake the sun and continue their courses ahead of it; and sometimes the
sun appears to overtake them. With the planets nearer the earth the
moon. Mercury', and Venus—this phenomenon was more conspicuous and gavo
rise to the theory of epicycles. This means that the orbits within the outer
sphere are not homoeentric with it. concentric or having one common centre,
but eccentric, i.e., having independent centres.
Aristotle was in favour of homocentricity; Claudius Ptolemy (d. IBS A. I>.|,
the Alexandrian astronomer, upheld the theory of epicycles, Unfortunately,
the IRhwan al-,Safa sided with Ptolemy and rejected, at the same time, the
view that the heavenly bodies revolve from west to east,"' a view which seems
to have had some upholders among the Pythagoreans”
Regarding the magnitudes of the stare, they showed some boldness. The
earth, they said, ia but a point in a large circle. The smallest planet has a size
eighteen times that of the earth; the largest is one hundred and seven times."
’’ Rasd'd, ii, pp. 10. 24, 2S; iii. pp. 374; Jrtmi'aA, ii, p. 24.
” Cf. Ueberweg, Vol. II. pp. tWIIT., 87, 88.
” HaM'il. ii. p. 24.
•• Ibid., i. pp. 73fT., SB. 88; ii. pp. 21. 22. 28, 2«f. 28. 37; iii. pp. 189f.; iv. p. 321.
11 Ibid., i, pp. 100, 244; ii, pp. 21, 74 f.; iii. p. 314.
*■ Ibid., ii. pp. 32 ff.
•’ Ibid., ii. p. 33, cf. pp. 29-37, 86ff.; cf. Sartori, Hittorf, p. 289, lines 30IT.
•• Rosd'U. i, p. 117; cf. pp. 27 f.
301
A History of Muslim Philosophy
They maintained, further, that the celestial bodies are neither heavy nor
light. If anv body, they argue, is in ita specially assigned place in the spheres,
it doee not exert weight. It acquires weight, on the contrary, when it comes
into the neighlwnrhood of other strange bodies, not of the same material
(water in water or air in nir. for example, has no weight). Weight, they say.
is nothing but the mutual attraction and mutual repulsion in the face of
resistance.*1* We are reminded in this case of the artificial satellites and of the
fact that they lose all weight us soon as they leave the tone of the gravity of
the earth. In the same spirit , they declared also that the sun and the stars
are neither hot nor cold.*1
Tho Ifchwin al.Safa accepted the solar year to be of 365% days. On this basis
they computed the revolutions of the planets around the earth: Saturn com
pletes a revolution of its orbits in 29 years, 5 months and 6 days; Jupiter in
II years, 10 months and 26 days; Mara in about 23 months; Venus in 584
days, and Mercury in 124 days only.*' The IkfcwSn al-Safa supplied us with
data which enable us to construct formulae for the extension of the universe
and for its volume which may be oomputed roughly at: 1,300,000.000 and
150,000.000,000,000.000,000,000,000 km., respectively or 13 X 10* and 15 X 10“
This- is nothing to be compared with the real measurements, but it serves to
give us an idea of the boldness of the Ikh“an al-$afa in their age.
(5) The earth, say the IkhwAn al-.'Jafa, is a sphere. Their proof is that any
line on the surface of the earth or on tho face of a river is an arch, and any
portion of the sea is a part of the shell of a spherical body.** George Sarton,
the historian of science, holds that the idea of tho sphericity of the earth is
as old as Pythagoras; but he wonders how Pythagoras could arrive at a proof.
He declares that Pythagoras must have postulated the sphericity of the earth
out of wild boldness 18
They believe also that tho earth stands in tho centre of tho universe, suspend
ed in the midst of the air, because it is in ita special place within a space free
from the attraction and repulsion of every other heavenly body.8* Although
the Ikhwin al-§afa wore essentially Pythagorean, they rejected the Pytha
gorean view that the earth has two motions: a revolution around a central
fire and a rotation on its axis.81 They believed, however, that it had a sway
(forwards and backwards) on its axis, and that when it was created it was in
motion; but afterwards it came to a standstill." It seems that they followed,
81 Ibid., ii, pp. 40ff.
•• Ibid., ii, p. 42.
•' Ibid., i. pp. 84. 86-88; ii, p. 31; iii. pp. 285-5?.
88 Ibid., i, p. 111; ii. pp. 22. 49. 57. 219; iii. pp. 210, 219, 310; iv. p. 312; JdmiaA.
i. p. 149.
■■ Sarton. Hitlory. p. 212, cf. p. 287.
88 Roald, i, pp. 111. 113; ii. pp. 22, 40, 49. 79. 118, 307, 310; Jamiah. i. pp. 149f.
81 Uoborwog, Vol. I. p. 68 unten.
■■ Haad'il. iii. pp. 309f.
302
I kb win al tjafa
in this view, Democritus who held that the earth had in the beginning a
motion, but afterwards it came gradually to a standstill.”
The earth is not solid or massivo, but it is full of cavities, The solid parts
of iU interior are also of different densities,“ Further, it has no bottom, in
the common meaning of the word; its bottom is its centre. So, wherever a
man stands on the earth, liis head is always towards the sky (ajiove tho earth)
and his feet are always towards the bottom or centre of the earth.” In spite
of all this genial explanation, they believed that we live on one side of the
earth only.”
(6) In the two chapters on geography and meteorology, based principally
on Jfeteorotogica” and other Greek works, the Ikfcwan al§afa speak of the
equator, of the polar tones where the winter is a night of six continuous months
and the summer is a day of six continuous months, of the four seasons of
longitude and time, of the mountains and their nature as reservoirs of water,
and oognate topics.” Their explanation of the eclipees is noteworthy,” but
their interpretation of the ebb and flow of tides is false: they believed that
the rays of the moon heat the waters of the Bea and cause their rise.1”
(7) In physics and chemistry tho Ikhwan al-§afa held, with Aristotle, the
Theory of the Four Elements and rejected the atomic theory.1’1 They main
tained also with the Ionian physicists that the so-called four elements: fire,
air, water, and earth, change into one another. Furthermore, when these
four elements undergo intense heat and strong pressure inside the earth, they
change into mercury and sulphur. If aerial moisture mixes with earth, it
becomes mercury, a masculine element; if oily moisture mixes with earth, it
changes into sulphur, a feminine clement. From the further intermixture of
sulphur and mercury, in different proportions, are formed all the mineral
bodies: day, glass, iron, copper, ruby, silver, gold, etc.
(8) Tho natural world is made up of three kingdoms: the mineral, plant, and
animal kingdoms. Evolution rests on the view that every kingdom constitutes
the primary matter and nourishing material for the next higher kingdom.
Accordingly, tho mineral kingdom must have come into existence long bu'ore
that of plants. The plants came into existence before tbc animals; sea animals
before the ahimals on land; the leas developed before the more developed; and
all animals were in existence ages before man.1” At the top of the animal
•• Uoberweg. Vol. I. p, 108.
Hosd'il. iii. pp. 309. 310
" IM., i, p. 112.
•• IM., iv. p. 436.
" Ascribed to Aristotle: cf. Sarton. History. p. SI7.
■■ Rata il. i, pp. 110-31. cf. pp. 84ff.; pp. 34-75.
" IM., i. pp. 79f.. 88f.; ii. p- 21.
■” IM . ii, p. 83.
>“ IM., ii. p. 10; iv. p. 7.
i" IM.. ii. pp. 123. Iliff.. 132. lMf„ 221 f„ 223. 318; iii. pp. 64. 138.
303
A History of Muslim Philosophy
kingdom appeared the qird (monkey, or ape) which bears so much resemblance
to man in shape and Iwhaviour,1’1
There is also a spiritual evolution by which the human soul evolves from
the soul of a child io that of an angel. At the age of fifty, the wise and cultivated
man may attain the degree which enables him to receive inspiration, to become
a messenger between the Intellect and his lellow-men, to found doctrines, and
to make laws. At this stage, he is a proxy of God on earth; he attains divinity
and so worship is due to him.101
5. Psychology
(I) The Soul The soul has three major faculties or powers, every one of
which is calks! equally a soul.
(1) The vegetative or nutritive soul common to all living beings: plants,
beast, and man alike It is subdivided into three powers: that of nutritive
proper, that of growth, and that of reproduction.106
(ii) The animal, beastly, or sensitive soul belongs to beasts and men only
It is subdivided into two powers: locomotion and sensation. Sensation falls
in turn in two categories: perception (sight, touch, etc.) and emotion. Emotion
is either primitive (laughter, anger, etc.) or evolved (good food, social and
political prestige, etc.).100
(iii) The human (rational, thinking, or talkative) soul is restricted to man.
These three faculties, together with their powers, work together and are
united in man and likened to a tree with three boughs, every bough of whi~h
has several branches, and every branch many leaves and fruit. Comparison
may also be made with a person who is a blacksmith, carpenter, and builder:
or who can read, write, and teach:100 he is one man with three faculties.
(2) The Brain and the Heart.—The prevailing belief in ancient times waa
that the heart constituted tho most important organ of the body: the centre
of sensation, the seat of intelligence, and the house of life. /Aristotle was also
of this opinion. Tho Ifehwan al-Safa decided in favour of the brain and held
that it is the brain where the proccwa of perception, emotion, and conception
develop.10"
(3) The Proeeu of Thinking.—It begins in the five senses and continues in
the brain. Fine nerves extend from the aenso-organs to different jiarts of the
mass of the brain, where they form a net similar to a spider’s web. Whenever
the senses come in touch with sensible hodics, their temperament undergoes a
change which is communicated soon, together with the abstract forma of those
Ibuu'il. iv. p. 317.
ll-id .l. pp. 224 fT.: ii, p. 287-. lii. p. 44: iv. pp. 101. 118. 143. 178. 178; -Mnu'aA.
I. p|>. 344. 701.
101 Haml'd. i. pp. 241 f.; ii. pp. 323IT.; JOmi'ah. ii. p. 184.
1,0 Hami'il. 1. pp. 241 f.: ii. pp. 32,’iff.; Jami'idi. ii. pp. 164f.; ef. pp 108-88.
lliutl’il. li. pp. 32Sf., 347.
ibid., ii. p. 162; iii, p. 23 bottom.
304
Xfchwftn al-8af»
Bcnnible bodirw, to the imaginative zone in the front part of the brain. Next,
the imaginative faculty passes the traces which the abstract forms have left
on it to the reflective faculty, in the middle part of tho brain, to ponder upon
them and verify their indications; then, the indications are transmitted in
turn to the retentive faculty (or memory) in the back part of the brain to be
stored there until a recollection of them is needed. At the right time tho rele
vant data arc referred to the expressive or talkative faculty by which they
are abstracted, generalized, and given the form expressible by the tongue to
be received intelligibly by the ear.1*
6. Politics
(1) Tho Iklpvan al-$afa had no interest in the theory of State, or in the forms
of government. Nor could they be influenced, in this respect, by Greek
writers. The two worlds were totally different: Plato and Aristotle lived in
City-States; the Ikhwan al-Safa lived in the great cities of an empire. At any
rate, the Jkhwan al-Safa believed that the State rests on two foundations:
religion and kingship. A king is indispensable, though he may be a tyrant, if
the State is to load a secure and prosperous life. A group of wise men, however,
may do without a king.110
(2) The indifferenoe of the Iklpv&n al-tjafa about the State was counter
balanced by their keen interest in al-siyasal al-madaniyyah, a blend of civics
and domestic economy, which bears more on the personal and communal
behaviour of man.
As a rule, the Ikhw&n al-§afa preferred that their followers should practise
celibacy. But sinoe that was impracticable, marriage was onjoined to serve
two pnrposcs: first, that the race may continue—a reason which was given
by Aristotle too; and second, because there are people who cannot remain
cclebate."1
A man of standing should bo a kind of a ruler in his community. He
should first oxerciso self-control in the different situations through which he
passes, because he who can control himself may be able to control others.111
Regarding his children and brothers, he should give them a fair, uniform but
firm treatment from which he should allow no deviation except in circumstances
not under his control. People are governed easier and better if they have been
accustomed to a certain way of government. As for other relatives of his
servants, and dependants, he should be bounteous in their maintenance and
meek in their treatment. But it is of no use to disclose to them any troublo or
want of his. This would impair his authority in their eyes without helping
him in the least. If he was ever short of means, and consequently obliged to
*“ Ibid., ii. pp. 324. 328. 341. 347; ii;, pp. 17 f., 29. 37«ff.. 38«. 388. 392; JdmfoA.
i. pp. 507. B02f„ 005.
“• R<u»’d. ii. p. 308: iv, pp. 32f., 189.
111 Ibid., iii. p. 424.
111 Ibid.. iv. p. 88.
305
A History- of Muslim Philosophy
lay a restriction on his favours to them, he should try to make them believe
that he has done so on purpose and not because he has yielded to a certain
pressure.11*
A man should choose his friends carefully and treat them with tact: know
them well and betray none of his secrets to them, Further, he should appear
always, before them, consistent in his opinion and behaviour, because they are
expected to share with him his doctrines and way of life (the ultimate aim of
the Ikfawan al-§afa in making friends is to propagate their doctrines among
these friends). It is very important that the relatives of a leading personality
should follow his doctrines and adopt his views, otherwise his friends would
lose their enthusiasm for him. He should disclaim publicly any relative who
proves to be at variance with him in the matter of doctrine.11*
7. Ethics
Muslims have always been more interested in morals and matters of con
duct than in ethical theories, because Islam insists on good or righteous deeds
as well as on good intentions. The IkfowAn al-Safe's interest in ethics was
confined to its bearing on their doctrine: acquiring theoretical knowledge and
doing good in this life so that their souls may enjoy eternity and happiness
in the hereafter. They start from the assertion that characters are either in
born or acquired. Inborn characters begin with the formation of tho foetus
in the womb, and they develop therein gradually under the influence of the
planets, innate characters, or virtues, are specialised aptitudes assigned to
different organs. They enable the soul to act through every organ and
produce the sensation, action, or craft particular to that organ without need
for deliberation or choice. At one place the Ikhwtn al-$afa assume that inborn
characters are uniformly good.11* At another, they maintain that they are bad.
and, consequently, all religions were revealed to resist the innate characters
of man and to reform them if possible.11*
After birth man begins to acquire virtues. He continues to do so until his
death. There is in man an aptitude to do good, and with the same aptitude
he can do evil. Character and behaviour are teachable.11’
Anything which should bo done, if done as it should, to the extent to which
it should, in the place where it should, at the time when it should, and in view
of the end for which it should, is called good. And he who does that thing
deliberately and with choice is called a wise man, a philosopher, and a perfect
man. Good, for the masses, is that which religion has enjoined, and evil, that
which religion has prohibited.11*
**• Ibid., iv. pp. 297ff.
“• Ibid., iv. pp. 299ff.
“• Ibid., iv. p. 372,
»• Ibid., i. pp. 2!>9, 260; of. iv. p. 144.
Ibid., iii. pp. 421 f.
111 Ibid,, i, p. 247, cf iv, p. 18' Jdmi'ah. i. p. 04-96. 98.
306
IkhwAn ol8*f»
Aoquirwl characters are determined and modified by the disposition of tho
body, climate of tho land, and the contact of the children with their parents,
tutors, comrades, and with the people in prominence. Tho different circum
stances through which man usually passes arc important factors in making
people change from one character into another.11’
The Ifchwan al-§afa urge their followers to be idealistic in their behaviour.
The good they seek should be final aud self-sufficient. Ono should do good not
because one expects from doing it, or for doing it, a benefit, nor because one
expects to avoid some loss.11"
8. Education
As soon aa a child is bom, he comes under the inllue'nce of social
factors for four complete years, during which he reaches a certain stage of
intelligence and comprehension. After the fourth year the child begins to
acquire his habits, knowledge, doctrines, crafts, and hobbies by imitation, as
a result of his contact with those who happen to bo around him. The masses
copy the external behaviour of tho dominant class.’11
Children arc apt to use an analogy characteristic of them. They believe that
their parents are perfect and that the conditions prevailing in their own homes
are models for all the conditions elsewhere. On the practical side, children are
more apt to master the arts, sciences, and crafts of thoir parents than those
of strangere.1"
Knowledge is the abstraction of the knowable in the soul of the knower
through the aid of a teacher. The aptitude to learn belongs to the soul alone.
The end of teaching is to purify the souls of the taught and give them correct
behaviour in order to prepare them for immortality and happiness in the
hereafter. A science which does not lead to happiness in the hereafter iB
useless.1”
Every soul is potentially learned; the parents and tutors polish its aptitude
and help it to become learned in action. A teacher is absolutely necessary,
especially to common people.1”
The brain is able to store simultaneously all kinds of information, however
diverse and contradictory they may be, sinoe it stores their abstractions only.
And in spite of the fact that the data stored in the brain fade gradually, and
that some of them are sometimes totally forgotten, they do not annul one
another.1”
“• Rtud'il, i. pp. 229-38, 248; ii, p. 372; iii. pp. 2G8f., 39S; iv, pp. 109. Ill,
141. 342; Jami ah, i, p. 237.
“• Rosa'U. iv, pp. 118, 141 f.. 297 f.
111 Ibid., i. pp. 153, 360 f.; ii. pp. 129, 379 ff.; iii. pp. 147f.
111 Ibid., i. pp. 153, 213, 225, 229. 360; iii. pp. 106, I07IT.
Ibid., i. pp. 195, 198. 211. 225, 271, 273, 317: iii. p. 33.
111 Ibid., i. pp. 198, 211, 225. 317; ii. p. 332; iii. pp. 90. 428; iv. pp. 18. 127.
•" Ibid., iii. pp. 236ff.; iv. p. 114.
307
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Essentially, knowledge is never spontaneous; it must be taught and learnt.
A teacher is simply a guide for tho soul to knowledge. Knowledge is handed
down traditionally through religious leaders, the fmdnu. whose ultimate source
of knowledge is the Prophet, who acquires his knowledge from God by in
spiration.
The IkhwSn al-$afa touch at a thorny problem in education. They believe
t hat neither the pupil may benefit from the tutor, nor the tutor may benefit
from the pupil, unless there is a kind of intimacy between them. We know
for certain that some kind of a reserved friendship is very useful in this respect
But the Ikfewan al-Safa overshoot themselves and speak frankly of 'The desire
of grown-up men for boys" as an incentive for effecting real education. Further
more. they mention explicitly that such manners belong only to nations which
esteem science, art, literature, and mathematics, like the Persians, the peoples
of Mcsojiotamia and Syria as well as the Greeks. Nomads, who as a rule have
no interest in science, art, etc., lack this desire.1*’
The idea of Platonic love contaminated the Ikhwan al-Safa as a result of
their readings in Greek history in general and in the philosophy of Plato in
particular. Plato advocated it especially in his Symposium. Sarton blames
Plato and says of him- "Platonic love for him was the sublimation of
paederasty; true love is called in the Symposium1’1 tho right method of boy
loving.”1*’The lkhwin alljafa condemn this desire, however, in all fields
other than education.111 Plato too seems to have condemned it in a later
work of his, A’omoi (The Laws), at least twice,1’1
9. Religion
On the practical side 'if Ix-licf. the Ikhwan al-Safa speak of religion and
laws The word for religion in Arabic is din, i.e , custom or obedience to one
acknowledged head.1" Religion is a necessity as a social sanction for the
government of the masses, for the purification of the soul, anil also because
all people are predisposed to religiousness and piety. In this sense, religion is
one for all people and for all nations.1”
By Law (Ar. Shariah or ndmus, from the Greek word: nonuM. law) the
IkhwAn al-Safa meant what we mean today by religion. Laws (religious) are
different to suit different communities, groups, and even individuals. These
laws are dictated by the wise men of every people for the benefit of their
respective nations.1”
111 Ibid.. i, pp. 211. 225. 317; iv. p. 18; Jdmiah. i, p. 413.
Kiuhil. iii. pp. 267 ff.
1,1 211 B, quoted bv Sarton. Huiory, p. 425.
Ibid., p. 425; cf. pp. 423 ff.
“• RaM'il, iv. pp. !70ff.
1,1 636c, 836c. cited in Sarton. Hulory, p. 425.
RaMi'il, iii, p. 424; iv. p. 24.
1,1 Ibid., iv, pp. 24. 25f.
•” Ibid., i, pp. 135.247; iii. pp. 48.49. 241.374; iv. pp. 24.25f., 100. 138, 168,186ff.
308
ItfewAn al-Safa
On this basis the I Idlwin al-IJafa declare that all metapnyslc.il themes in
the sacred books such as creation. Adam. Satan, the tree of knowledge,
resurrection. the Day of Judgment, hell, and paradise should be taken as
symbol* and understood allegorically. Only the masses, who cannot think
adequately for themselves, understand these themes in their literal and phy-
sical sense. Themes of a lesser magnitude, as “He sendeth down water from
the sky,"1’* should also be treated symbolically: water in this context being
tho Quran!1”
The Ikfaw&n al-Jjafa were not satisfied with any of the existing religions;
they, nevertheless, urged everybody to select one of them. To have a defec
tive religion is better than to be a disbeliever, since there is an element of truth
in every religion. Everybody should be left free to embrace the religion he
chooses; he may also change his religion, perhaps often too. though he is
expected to look for the best religion in his time, lie should refrain, however,
from contradictory opinions and false doctrines: a wise man does not embrace
two contradictory religions at the same time.1”
There should be no compulsion in religion;1” compulsion should be effected
only through the laws. This is so because religion is a self-conviction felt in
the heart. The laws of religions, on the contrary, are social orders, to abide
by which is necessary for the maintenance of security and welfare of the
community.1”
The Ikhwan al-§afa formulated a definite attitude towards all existing
religions, sects, and schools of theology.11* We shall content ourselves with
their attitude towards Islam.
Islam is considered by them to be the religion pur exedknet: the best and
most perfect of all religions. The Qur’an overruled all earlier revealed books,
It, being the last, confirmed in them that which resembled its contents and
abrogated that which was contrary to its precepts. Muhammad, peace be
upon him. is the head of all the prophets and the last of them. Ho is tho
governor of all governors; in him has God united the elements of kingship and
prophethood, so that his followers may enjoy the worldly aa well as the
spiritual glories.111
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Tho numbering of tho vereos of the Qur’an followed in this chapter is according
to Tajik al-JaUda>n. Cairo. 1346/1827. There is sometimes in tho long Surahs
a slight difference in tho numbering of verses (resulting from the division of a
>“ Qur’an, xiii, 10 (of.Muhammad Ali, p.487; Pickthall, p.250; Rodwell, p. 235).
i" Rosd il. iv. p. 137.
■” Ibid.,iii.pp.88-80; iv, pp. 22,37,54-85; Farrukh. IkJudn al.Jaja.pp. 108-13.
I” Rnsd il. iv. p. 476, in ref. to Qur'ln. il, 256 (Mulgunmad’All, p. 111. Piekthall.
p. 59. RodweU. p. 367).
KaM'd. iv. p. 476.
111 Farrukh, op. ail.. pp. 108-13.
111 HaM’d. ii. p. 201; Ui. pp. 92. 353; iv, pp. 33. 59. 172. 242; Jami'ah. ii. p. 365.
309
A History of Muslim Philosophy
few long verses). In Rodwoll lye) this difference, when it occurs, vanes from throe
to six; in Mubammad ’AU and Pickthall fq vj the difference ia only that of one.
Aristotle, Introduction to Arwaxle (Selections ). ed. Richard McKeon. The Modem
Library, Now York, 1947; Adel Awa, "L'Esprit critique dee Frhrro ds la PuroU,"
Encyclopedist arobes. du IVe/Xo sichle, Beirut, 1948; T. J. de Boer. The History
of Philosophy in Islam, tr. Edward R. Jones, London. 1933; Omar A. Famikh,
•Abqariyyat afArabi ft al-'Ilm w-al-Fuloafah. 2nd ed., Beirut. 1371/1952; The
Arab Genial in Science and Philosophy, tr. John B. Hardie, Washington, 1954;
lkMtrin al-Safa, 2nd ed.. Beirut, 1372/1953; abu Hayy&n al-Taufaldi. al-Imld’
w-al-Mu'dnasah, Volt, n and HI. Cairo, 1942; al-Ri *
Udr al-Jami'ah (li Rasd'il
Ikhadn al-.Safa/, Damascus, Vol. I, 1357/1948, Vol. II n.d.; Jdmiat al-Jamiah.
RieMah Jami'at al-Jdon"ah ou ol-ZuMoA mtn Rasd'il Ikhwdn al-Safa uo AAulldn
al-Wafa (an ordinary transcription from a copy in the library of al-Amir 'Arif
Tamir. Salamlyyah, Southern Province of U.A.R.); Muhammad 'Ali, The Holy
Qur'dn, Arabic Text, Englieh Translation. and Commentary, revised edition, Lahore,
1951; Marmaduke Pickthall, The Meaning of the Glorious Koran, an Explanatory
Translation. London. 1952; Rasd’il Ikhudn al-$afa wa KhuUdn al-Wafa, 4 Vole.,
Cairo, 1347/1928; J. M. Rodwoll. The Koran, English Translation. Everyman's
Library. New York. 1950; George Sarton. A History of Science, Ancient Scienoe
through tho Golden Age of Greece, Cambridge, U.S.A., 1952; Introduction to the
History of Science, Vol. III. Baltimore, 1948; Ueberweg, Grundrise der Geschichte
der Philosophic, Vol. I and Vol. II. Berlin. 1928, 1928.
Part 2. The Sufis
Chapter XVI
EARLY 8UFIS
*
DOCTRINE
A
Sufism like many other institutions became, early in its history, a fertile
ground for imitators, imposton, and charlatans. The corrupting influence of
these charlatans was regarded aa a source of great confusion to all those who
either wanted to follow the Path of Sufism, or wanted honestly to understand
it. One reason why this was ao was that Sufism by its very nature was a
discipline meant not for the average but for those who always felt ambitious
for something above the average.
• This chapter is baaed mainly on the following source books: (i) abu Na«r 'Abd
Allah b. 'Ali nl-Sarrdj al-TOal, al-Kitdb al-Luma' fl al-Tagawwuf; (ii) Khwijah
Farid al-Dtn 'AttAr, TaHkirai al AuliytT; (iii) MakhdOm 'Ali Huiwtri, KoM
al-Mahjub; (iv) abu Bakr al Knlabidhi. Kitab al-Ta'rruf li MatOhab Ahl al-Taoaw-
wuf iranalated from Arabio by A. J. Arberry: The Doctrine of the Sufis, Cambridge
310
Early Sufis
Besides these charlatans and impostors who put on the garb of Sufism and
exploited the credulous and the unwary, there was another group of men
who unwillingly became the source of corruption and confusion. Since a Sufi
more often than not was a man significantly different from the average, it
was but natural that some among the Sufis went so far away from the norms
of their societies and communities that they created doubts in the minds of
their followers regarding the legitimacy of the commonly accepted norms.
Such doubts, if not properly tackled, could lead to the corruption of vast
segments of the communities concerned, an inevitable result of which would
have boon either a widespread scepticism regarding the erstwhile universally
accepted norms, or a univoraal condemnation of that which such exceptions
among the Sufis stood for. Neither of these two courses waa considered to be
healthy, for, whereas the first would have resulted in the complete demorali
zation of all Muslim oommunities, the latter could have resulted in the con
demnation not only of the exceptional Sufis, but of all Sufis without exception,
aa deviants from the accepted norma.
Most of the early treatises on Sufism, like the one that will be referred to
in thia chapter, were written with two main aims in view: (1) to point out to
all those who oared to read these works what Sufism really meant; and (2) to
raise as strong a note of protest as possible against the current malpractices
of the charlatans and impostors so that even thoee who may not have the
time and the will to follow the path of true Sufism may at least escape the
clutches of these charlatans.
The extent to which this two-fold desire of the early writers shaped their
works ia worth noting, because it is a measure of the dependability of these
works. This is bow tho author of Kitdb al-Luma', one of the earliest, if not the
earliest, Sufi texts now available, Sarrij (d. 456/1063), felt: "It is necessary
for the intelligent among us that they understand something of the principles,
aims, and ways of those who are the people of rectitude and eminence among
this group (Sufis) so that we can distinguish them (genuine Sufis) from those
who just imitate them, put on their garb, and advertise themselves as Sufis."1
University Press, London, IMS: (v) Abu al QSsim al-Quihairi, al-HuOlat al
Quthairiyyah, Dir al-Kutub al-'Arablyyah al-Kubre, Miyr. 1330 A.H.
The Kitab al-Luma' is regarded aa one of the oldest, if not the oldest. Sufi texts
available. Its author ia 'Abd Allah ibn 'Ali ibn Muhammad ibn Yahya sbu Nayr
al-Sarrtj al Tusi who died in 378/988. He iB quoted by abu ‘Abd al-Rabm&i al-
Sulami (d. 412/1021), the author of fahaqat al-SOfiyi/ah (itself one of the oldest
texts), abu al-Qteim al-Qutbairi. Mahhdrim ‘All Hujwiri, Farid al-Dtn 'AtfAr,
al-QhazAli, and ecoree of early ae wall aa later writers on Sufism. He is considered
to have written aevoral books, but Kitab al-Luma' ia tho only one which has come
down to ua. According to Nicholson, SarrS) quotas from such woll-known Sufis and
■cholera as abu DSwud Sijist&ni. abu Sa'ld al Kbarrk. abu Sa'ld al-'Arabi. Ibrfthlm
al-KhawwM, 'Amr bin 'Ulbm*n al-Makki, Junaid, and through him abu Yaxld
al-BisfAmi.
1 Abu Na§r 'Abd Allah bin 'Ali al-Sarrij alTQai, Kitab at-Luma' fi al Tafawwu/.
od. R. A. Nicholson. Luzac A Co.. London. 1914, p. 2.
3H
A History of Muslim Philosophy
"There are to be found (in our days),” he adds, “many of those who just
parade aa Sufis, point to themselves aa genuine Sufis, and set themselves to
the job of answering all sorts of questions and queries regarding Sufism.
Everyone of these impostors claims to. have written a book or two on Sufism
which in reality he has filled with nothing but utter trash and absurdly non
sensical material in answer to equally meaningless and silly questions. Such
impostors do not realize that it is not only not good but is a positive evil to
do all this. . .. Tho early masters discussed the Sufistic problems honestly and
earnestly only to point out through their wise word the true answers to them.
They turned to handle them only when they had severed their connection
with the materialistic world had chastened themselves through long and
austere prayers, practices, and discipline, and had arrived at the clearest
knowledge of reality, which knowledge found its full and necessary expression
in their honest, sincere, and truthful actions. Such early masters used to be
models of men who having burnt their boats of worldly affairs lived in constant
oontact with the Almighty."*1 In his Kitab al-Ta'arml, another very early
work, Kalabadhi (d. 378/988) wrote: "Finally the meaning departed and the
name remained, the substance vanished and the shadow took its place:
realization became an ornament, and verification a decoration. He who knew
not (the truth) pretended to possess it, he who had never so much as described
it, adorned himself with it; he who had it much upon his tongue, denied it by
liis acts, and he who displayed it in his exposition, concealed it by his actual
conduct.”1 In his Risdlab, al-Quahairi (d. 465/1072) too talks in the same
vein: "There set in decadenoe in this Path (Sufism) to such an extent that
both reality and the path were lost to men. Neither were the old teachers to
be found who oould guide the young seekers of the true path, nor were the
young stalwarts to be seen anywhere whose life one oould take as a model.
Piety left us bag and baggage. Greed and avarice became the rule of the day.
And all hearts lost genuine respect for the SJari'aA."* Later on, the author
of Kalb/ al-MabjOb, ‘Ali Hujwiri (d. c. 450/1063), came out even in stronger
terms against what was prevalent in his days: "God has created us among
men who give the name of Shari'ab to all that their base selves crave for,
and who give the name of honour and science to all those tricks with which
they seek worldly power and glory, and who call double-dealing the fear of
God, and who label the art of concealing hatred of men in their hearts the
virtue of tolerance.”1 ‘AttAr. who came much later, is perhaps, just because
’ Ibid., pp. 3-4.
■ Abu Bakr al-Kalabadfii. Kildb al-Ta'arru/ li Ma4bM> AU al-Tafamm/,
translated under tho title The Doctrine o/ the Sufut by A. J. Arberry. Cambridge
University Press. London. 1935. p. 3.
• Abual-QUsimal-Quihairi.af-RielZaral-QujJatrivyaA. D&ral Kutub al-‘ArabIy-
yah al-Kubra, Mi«r. 1330 A.H., p. 2.
1 Makhdum ‘Ali Hujwtri. A'ajj/ al-Mabjib, Silyanov Prone, Samarqand, 133C
A.H.. p. 12.
312
Early Suite
of that, more explicit than his predecessora: "Ours is the period in which thia
mode of talking (the truth) has taken on the veil of complete concealment.
It has become fashionable with the charlatans to parado as the wise and the
virtuous, and the genuine men of love and insight have beoome rare like any
thing. Wo are living in such times that the evil-doers have pushed the good
and the virtuous into complete oblivion.”•
Tho great concern for truth that all those writers felt cornea out indirectly
also in the special mode of recording and reporting statements from great
Sufis which all of them generally (and al-Qughairi especially) adopt. Practically
every point that al-Qushairi makes, regarding every feature, major or minor,
of Sufi way of life, is supported by him with three types of evidence: (I) Some
statement from the Qur’An, better than which there is no basis for any prin
ciple governing the life of the faithful. (2) Some tuidlth or some incident in
the life of the Holy Prophet. (3) Some comment or Bome incident in the life
of a great Sufi.
So far as the first of these is concerned, we know, the matter is very simple.
Nobody can afford to misquote the Qur'An, for the danger of discovery is
always there. Aa to the Becond and third types of evidence, tho risks of mis
quoting are always there. It was to avoid these risks that scholars of Hadith
had devised the special techniques which came later on to be known aa tech
niques of isndd (the method of basing traditions on the authority of narrators),
and Afmd' al-Rijil (the chain of narrators supporting a tradition). The care
that the Had I th-writers took regarding their isndd and its various links was
so great that it became the model of authentic reporting in all historical
writings. AI-Quabsiri follows this technique of Hadfth-writing in practically
everything he reports and overy point regarding the practices of the Sufis he
makes, to such an extent that nearly half of his long treatise consists of
nothing but the unbd.
B
Although none of our sources goes beyond the fifth/eleventh century, we
havo evidence, in three very sources, that peoplo had started taking interest
in Sufism, and in using the words al-taaaiowul and fifi.
Sarr&j starts by repudiating the view that the word sufi is of reoent (relative
to Sarr&j'a days) origin and that the people of Bsghdtd were the first to use
it. He thinks, on the other hand, that tho word was current in the days of
the Tdbi'in (the Successors of the Companions of the Prophet) aa well aa the
Tab' Tdbi'in (the Successors of these Successors). By implication, ho would
ray, although he does not verbalize it, that the word was current even in the
lays of tho Prophet and his Companions, because, as he states explicitly, it
was current in pre-Islamic days.
• KhwAjah Farid al-DIn ‘Atflr. Tadbkirat al AuUyS'. Karimi Prree. Bombay.
1321 A.H.. pp. S-«.
313
A History of Muslim Philosophy
To show that the word fi/i was current in the days of Tab' Tdbi'in. Sarrij
quote* a comment from Sufvin of Ifaaur: "If it were not for abu H&ahim
the Sufi I would not have understood the true meaning of..
It is easy to identify Sufyin of Thaur n period if one were to recall the well-
known story of Qadi Shuraib’s appointment aa the Qidi of Baghdad by the
Caliph abu Ja'far Mansfir. Sufyin, according to Hujwiri, was one of the
original four great eainte and scholars of the day whom the Caliph had called
up to select from among them the one who was really fit to administer justice
to the people of his vast empire.’
To show that the word fi/i was current in the days of Tibiin, Sarrij
quotes a oomment from Hasan of Basrah: "I saw a Sufi going round the
Ka'bah; I offered him something, but he did not accept it saying... ."’
That Hasan of Basrah belonged to the period of Tdbi'in is borne out by
Hujwiri who includes him among the eminent Sufis of this period.” The exact
part of this period to which Hasan of Basrah belonged ia brought out by
AH4r who mentions that Haaan was a child when the Prophet was still alive,
and on growing he took 'Ali bin abi Jilib or his son Hasan as his preceptor
Hasan had met, according to 'Attar, a hundred and thirty Companions of the
Prophet of whom seventy had fought at Badr. Hasan died in 110/728.11
Sarrij anticipates the question why none of the Companions of the Holy
Prophet was ever called a Sufi if this word was current during his time. He
answers this question by emphasizing that since the honour of having the
Prophet aa one’s preceptor in person and having worked with the Prophet for
the glory of God was in the eyes of every true believer the highest honour,
nobody ever thought of calling tho Companions of the Prophet by any other
name. It was for this reason that he whom God gave this distinction was
considered to be the embodiment of all that was the noblest in a Sufi without
his being called so.”
To show that the word tufi was current in the pre-Islamic days Sarrij
quotes from the "History of Mecca" by Muhammad bin Ishaq bin Yasir, and
from others, that there was a period in the history of Mecca when everybody
had gone away from Mecca so that nobody was left there to pay homage to
the Ka'bah and to go round it. During these days a Sufi used to come from a
distant place in order to go round the Ka'bah in the prescribed manner. II
this story is true, Sarrij pointe out, then it is evident that the word wae
current in the pro Islamic days, and was used for men of excellence and
virtue.”
’ Al-Sarrij, ep, cit., p. 22.
• Ibid.
• Ibid.
” Hujwiri. op. til., pp. 108-10.
■■ 'Attir. op. til., p. 18.
11 Al-Sarrij. op. ril., pp. 21-22.
” Ibid., p. 22.
314
Early Suhs
Having brought out that the wool tu/i was current oven in pre-Islamic
days, SarrAj argues that it is derived from su/ which stands for coarse woollen
clothes which had come to be accepted as the conventional dress of tho pious,
even of the prophets, among the Semitic people. And to show that it waa an
established custom among the Arabs to refer to men by their specific con
ventional garb rather than by their specific attributes and traits, SarrAj quotes
from the Qur'An: wa qal al-baudrlyyun, emphasizing that the Companions of
Jesus Christ were referred to by their white garb rather than their virtuous
traits.1*
The two comments from Sufyan of Ifaaur and Hasan of Basrah quoted by
SarrAj as evidence of the fact that the word »u/i was used by Tab' TSbi'in as
well as Tibi'in. have been quoted by several later authors too. Dr. Zaki
MubArak, author of al-Tafawwut al-hldmi fl al-Adab w-al-AihUi (second
edition, 1954), quotes the oomment attributed to Hasan of Basrah from 'Aflf
al-Din ‘Abd Allah bin Asad of YAfaTs book Nasir al-Mahdtin al-Qidliyak fi.
Fadi al-Afldh al-Maqamdl al-'AKyyah, and the comment attributed to Sufyan
of Ibaur from ZoAr al-Adab of abu TiibAq al-JJufri (who must not be confused
with abu al-Hasan ‘Ali son of IbrAhim al-Husri al-Basri, a pupil of Shibli.
who died in the year 371/981 and from whom SarrAj himself qnotes quite a
few comments). Even if these later authors had ultimately taken these com
ments from SarrAj, which is not improbable, their quoting them at least points
to the fact that they did not regard SarrAj's point of view altogether un
acceptable. *•
SarTAj’s view that the word .rifi was current in pre-Islamic days is supported
similarly by abi al-FarAb ibn al-Janzi, Zamakhajjari, and FiruzAbAdi.Dr.Zaki
Mubarak quotes the following extract from ibn al-Jauzi’s book ToZMs Jiffs-
"Muhammad ibn NApir related to us from abi IsbAq IbrAhim ibn Sa'ld al-
Hibal who said ‘Abu Muhammad ‘Abd al-Ghani ibn Sa'ld al-Hafiz said: I
asked Walid ibn al-QAsim: What is it on account of which a person is called
a Sufi I And he answered: There were a people in the pre-Islamic days known
as al-.Sufiyyah; they had given up every worldly thing for the sake of God
Almighty, and had made Ka'bah their permanent abode, and place of wor
ship.' Those who lived like them came to be known as al-^uflyyah."1*
KalabAdhi mentions that there had been seventeen Sufi writers before him
who had published the sciences of allusion in books and treatises, and eleven
Sufis who had written on conduct.
Al-Qujbairi states explicitly in one plaoe that the word tasauam/ had been
used by people before the second/eighth oentury: "Those among the Sunnites
who took extreme care in keeping their contact with God alive and saving
themselves from the paths of negligence came to be known by the special
>* Ibid., p. 21.
■* Zaki MubArak. ol-Tafawwuf al-IMmi ft al-Adab w-al-AUldq. Dir al-Kutub
al-'Arabi, Cairo. 1904, Vol. I, p. AS.
>• Ibid., pp. 49-50.
31S
A History of Muslim Philosophy
name of ahi al tatau-u-vf. And this name for three leaders of the pious became
well known among people before 200/815. ”1’
Men who followed the Path of Sufism had started using the word «/£ as
part of their titles and names long before Rualal alQufhamyyah was com
posed.
Hujwiri traces back the use of the word rifi even to the Holy Prophet; for
example he remarks in one place: "And the Prophet, peace and blessings of
God be upon him, said, 'He who hears the voice of the people of ta?au-u’u/ and
yet does not take their words to heart is listed in the eyes of God as one of
the negligent once.'”18
c
Sufism went through considerable development and modification as the
Muslims came into oontact with peoples of other races and cultures in the
course of their history-. Consequently, what came to be known aa Sufism later
on must be distinguished from what Sufism was in its early days. For, in spite
of a great deal of what in later Sufism may be recognized as nothing but an
elaboration of what was there earlier, it would be instructive to find out at
least what tho earlier form was. The ideal thing from this point of view would
be to go back to the writers of the first and eeoond/seventh and eighth centuries.
But unfortunately the sources available to us do not go so far back. We will
have, therefore, to be content with whatever can be culled from the sources
available.
Quaihiri make* a large number of statements about the characteristics of
a true Sufi of his own days or of two or three generations earlier. Hujwiri holds
practically the same view; only his account is more detailed.
One of the first things that Quibairi emphasizes regarding a Sufi is that he
is absolutely convinced that of all the paths of life open to a man his path
is the best. This is how Qujjjairi expresses it: "And the grounds on which
their path was built were stronger than the grounds on which the paths of
others were established, be they men of tradition and culture, or men of
thought and intellect "*»
Having felt convinced that Sufism is the best of all tho paths, the Sufi has
to take a few decisions regarding his relation to God, man, and the world.
For it is in the light of these relations that he can be distinguished from
others. In a way these relations constitute the criteria on the basis of which
a genuine Sufi could be distinguished from thoee who just pretended to be so.
Out of these three types of relations the Sufi’s relation to God is the most
important, because the other two. strictly speaking, are derived from and
•’ Al-Quibeiri. op. ril.,,. 8.
“ Hujwiri. op. oil., p. 34.
“ ALQuifiairi, op. cH.. p. 180.
318
Early Sufis
baaed on it. Qushairi mokes tho following significant statements in connection
with the Sufi's relation to God.
1. The first and foremost thing is that one's belief in God should contain
no element of doubt. It should not be contaminated with new fangled notions
and misguiding ooncepta, and Bhould be firmly rooted in self-evident facta.”
Doubt in this context means vagueness about the attributes of God and scep
ticism regarding His existence. Obviously for the Sufi to avoid this vagueneas
and scepticism is possible only if he relies on whatever has come down to him
by way of the Qur'ln and the Sunnah. That this is so is "pointed out by the
warning against ‘'new-fangled” notions and "misguiding concepts." What these
notions and concepts were, one can easily find out from what both Qushairi
and Hujwiri bring under tho heading of Maliihidah and Qar&mitah. etc. But
what is most remarkable in this connection is the emphasis the Sufi lays on
factual evidence, for he believes that the purely conceptual is not the only
relation man can have with God; this relation can bo experiential too.
2. A person’s relation to God should be so thorough, comprehensive, and
intimate that it would lead him to feel as if he lives and does everything not
because he is doing it all, but because God is doing it all. In identifying him
self with God he would go through tho double process of losing his mortal self
in Him and experiencing Him in every act of his own self. As a consequence
of this tho Sufi, from the very beginning, endeavours to have a life about
which it may be truly said that it is a life with and in Him.’1
3. Another way of putting the point stressed above is that the Sufi not only
stops referring all his acts to his mortal self, but he builds up the positive
attidude that it is the divine will which must bo accepted by the Sufi as supremo,
not on this or that occasion, nor in such and such particular situation, but
always, and in every situation of which his life is composed.”
4. The Sufi's relation to God is a pure relation in the sense that it is a relation
just between him and his God without any material link.”
5. This relation rids man ofall occupation with affaire worldly and mundane.”
6. The Sufi must regard himself as having been created for nobody and
nothing except God."
Regarding their relations to their fellow-beings and the world at large, the
early Sufis were quite explicit in emphasizing that the Shari ah is the frame
work within which these relations have to bo built and maintained. With this
in view they enjoined on every Sufi to pursue all the sciences on which the
Shari'ah is based,” it was enjoined especially that he should seek enlighten-
- Ibid.
“ Ibid., p. 126.
” Ibid., p. 127.
Ibid.
Ibid.
“ Ibid.
•• Ibid., p. 181.
317
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ment about the way the Holy Prophet lived his life to that the Sunnah might
become the guiding light for him in everything he doee and every relationahip
he builds." While the different schools of Sufis had each its own unique pattern
of Sufi techniques, they were all agreed on one cdmmon framework of ultimate
reference, and that was the framework of the fiJari oA.”
Apart from emphasizing that for a Sufi it ia necessary at every stage to
keep the Sbari'ah in view aa the ultimate criterion, the early Sufis seldom
missed to point out that those who did not care much for the iiari'oA got
themselves involved in confusion and contradiction. The early Sufis were
always anxiouB that their fundamental position must be clearly distinguished
from that of the orthodox scholars and the theologians, as well as tho innovators
and the sophists.
The distinction between the Sufi's position and that of the orthodox theo
logian lies in the fact that the theologian regards the Law (SAari'ah) and
Reality <11aqii/ah) as one and the same, while the Sufi maintains that the two
are so different from each other that unless one explicitly recognizes the differ
ence. one is apt to commit a fundamental error." Reality from this point of
view is a special aspect of God, such that man can never completely comprehend
it. whereas the Shari'ah is a code of human conduct which man can and must
aspire to understand and act upon as completely as possible.
Tho identity of reality and tho Sbari'ah which the Sufi attributes to the
theologian does not appear to be easy to understand. Going by what one finds
in the writings of the leaders of the four schools of Fiqh, one would say that
tho theologian ia very logical and cautious in his views regarding the attributes
of God. He would be the last person to identify the Shari'ah and the /Zo^iqoA,
for whereas the understanding of Shari'ah requires no special faculty other
than tho one which an average mortal requires for solving the problems ot
his daily life, the understanding of llaqiqah requires a special capacity with
which the prophets alone are endowed.
Regarding the distinction between the Sufis and the innovators and sophists,
it is jKiinted out that while the Sufis hold that the SharVah and liaqiqah, in
spite of their theoretical distinction, always operate in intimate relation, the
innovators maintain that the Shari'ah is operative only so long as a man
has not established contact with reality; for whenever he does establish thia
contact, the Shariah stops being operative and becomes altogether UBelcae
ind futile.*"
The broad significance of this distinction is that the early Sufi never re
tarded himself as completely free from tho bonds of the SJari'aA. He never
lared claim himself, as some of Carniathians and others did, aa law unto
limself, or as a lawgiver to others
•’ Ibid.. p. 8.
'• Hujwtri, op. eir.. p 217
“ Ibid., pp. 446-47.
•• Ibid . n. 446
318
Early Sufi*
Apart from these distinctions between the position taken up by the Sufis
on the one hand ami theologians, Catmathians, etc., on the other, the
early Sufi felt the need of another distinction; and that was the distinction
Ik-tween his attitude towards the Shari'ah and that of the average Muslim
He held that, while for the average man of religion a large number of con
veniences and concessions are permissible within the framework of the SJort'o*.
there are no such concessions and conveniences for the Sufi. The latter does
not believe in sparing himself so far as the rules and regulations of the SbarVah
are concerned. For him there is no "take it easy” in the SAari aA. The early
Sufi believed in an extremely high level of conformity with the Law. As there
is no transgression for the Sufi, there is no relaxation for him. Even the relaxa
tion permissible to others is a threat to him.”
This unsparing att itude of the Sufi is not the result of his belief in asceticism
per se. It is rather tho logical result of his basic attitude towards God which
is his starting point, and by virtue of which alone he is justified in calling
himself a Sufi. The concessions given by the ghariu* to an average Muslim
are determined by his station in life in so far as he accepts the rights and
obligations conferred or enjoined on him by the various groups of which he
willingly accepts the membership For the Sufi there is no such membership
of social groups, to begin with; and, therefore, he can claim no special right -
and obligations for the fulfilment of which concessions and conveniences within
the Shari ah may lie necessary. This point becomes clear when one compare*
the attitude of the Sufi with that of the ascetic. Whereas the ascetic believes
in the strategy of now sacrificing this asset or resource, now that in his search
for goodness, the Sufi lielieves in an all-out bid to reach God There is nothing
too precious, too dear, or too delicate to be spent and expended in the Sufi’s
endeavour at reaching the fountain which alone can quench his thirst.”
it would be easier to understand this attitude still farther if we bear in
mind why the early Sufi regarded the jihad with the self as tho bigger and tin-
more difficult and worthwhile form of jihad than the jihjid against the political
enemy with the help of the sword. For the Sufi engaged in tho jihad against
himself, all actions stemming from his narrow personal considerations lead to
evil directly or indirectly.
Thia belief, that everything that is narrowly selfish and personal must
directly dr indirectly lead to evil, is closely related, in the mind of the early
Sufi, to his attitude towards God as the only reality, which in technical lan
guage is known as Me/iid
It is the Sufi's acceptance of tauhid as basic and fundamental that helps
him build the right typo of relation with God without which there ia nothing
in his life because of which he may be called a Sufi. It would lie necessary
therefore, to state clearly what taujid meant, to the early Sufis.
31 Al-Quabairi, op. cit.. p. 181.
” Ibid., pp. 182. 180.
319
A History of Muslim Philosophy
A Sufi like J unaid of Baghdad believed that lau/iid means that a man has
the knowledge, as sure as any scientific knowledge today would be, that God is
unique in His timelessness, and that there is none like Him, and, further, that
nothing and nobody can carry out the actions which He. and He alone, is
capable of carrying out.” On another occasion Junaid puts his ideas about
tauhid thus: It is the maximum of certainty with which you believe that all
motion as well aa lack of motion of things created is the act of God.**
Ja'far $Adiq explained laubid by saying: He who thinks that Allah is in some
thing. or of something, or on something, commits the sin of making things
other than God His equals, because if God be on something it would mean
He is being supported or carried by that something, and if God be in some
thing it would mean that He is encircled by that something, and if He ia of
something it means that He is in time and in space.** Abu ‘Ali Rudhb&ri
expressed what taufiid meant to him by saying: God is other than that which
man's thinking and imagining makes Him out to be, because He Himself
says in the Qur’an, "There is nothing like Him and He hears all and sees all.”**
Abu 'Ali al-Daqq&q, the teacher of Qusbairi, puts his ideas about taubid in
one pithy comment: Somebody asked a Sufi where is God, and he replied,
"Woe be to you, you wish to see with your physical eyes where God is.”*’
Husain ibn Mansur thought the first step in lauhid means donying the possi
bility of there being an equal of God as completely as possible. •• Husrl re
garded that lauhid is baaed on five principles: (1) absolute negation of God's
temporality, (2) complete assertion of tho eternity of God, (3) relinquishing
of lands and abodes, (4) separation from brethren, and (5) complete disregard
of that which one knows and that which one does not know.
Explaining tho third principle, Hujwlri says: It means the forsaking by the
disciple of the established ways of socking comfort and convenience for one’s
own self. While explaining the last one of the principles, ho says: Man's know
ledge of things is built upon the answers to his own hows and whys providod
by his own intellect, imagination, or observation; all that such man-made
knowledge asserts about lau/iid is contradicted by the true notion of taubld.
and that which man's ignorance regards as /auhid is contradicted by man
made knowledge itself. Hence tauhid is neither encompassed by that which
man knows, nor by that which man does not know.** Offering a positive com
ment of his own, this is how Hujwtri expresses what tau^id means: It is the
sifting and absolute distinguishing of tho eternal from that which is in time,
in the sense that you mutt not regard the eternal as subject to the laws which
•’ Ibid., p. 4.
•• Ibid., p. 5.
“ p. 8.
•• Ibid., p. B.
•’ Ibid., p. 8.
•• Hujwtri, op. eil., p. 333.
“ Ibid.. pp. 333 38.
320
Early 8ufi«
govern that which ia in time. You must not regard being in time aa in anv
way similar to not being in time. You must accept God to be eternal and
yourself to be in time. Nothing that is yours, or is like you, can be attributed
to Him, and nothing which is an attribute of His can qualify you, because
there ia no mixing of the eternal and that which is in time; the eternal was
there even before the birth of the possibility of the becoming of that which
is in time.4’
Keeping in mind the simple, almost naive, formulations of taujiid in the
oommenta given above, one cannot help thinking that the men responsible for
these formulations were not so much experts in philosophical polemics, as
they were practical men concerned primarily with the guidance of their dis
ciples. None of these formulations can stand the rigour of logical analysis, and
yet every one of tho formulations can provide a framework of practical con
duct. It is in view of this that, in spite of discerning traces ofsyllogistic pattern
here and there, one must regard the efforts of the early Sufis as primarily
the result of their training in the traditions of the Qur’An and the Sunnah,
rather than the influences. Greek or Manichaean, of philosophical thought, to
which men like Qugbairi and Hujwiri, and their predecessors like Junaid. must
have been exposed. It took several centuries more for these philosophical
influences to become practically the core of Sufi thinking. But during the
period with which we are concerned Sufi thinking was mostly free of such
influences.
The early Sufi believen that once he had set the pattern of his life in the
mould of the attitudes and relations, described somewhat in detail above, he
was ready to make a start in realixing his ultimate ambition, namely, the
ambition of experiencing God in such a way that he might be able to say.
like every Sufi: “What for others is just a matter of conjecture and vague
hypothesis is for him there like the most certain entity, and what for others
is a matter of conceptual understanding of God is for him something to be
experienced as an existent about the reality of which there can be no possible
doubt, so that he can sing with the poet :
"My night is aglow with the beauteous grandeur of the face,
While the darkness of night envelope everyone else,
While other-B arc enshrouded in the pitch darkness of night,
I am experiencing the brilliant light of the day.”41
But how he should make a start, and what exactly he should do after having
made a start, are matters of controversy among the Sufis. These controversies
are more keen and intense among the later Sufis than among the early ones
The intensity of these controversies among tho later Sufis can be judged from
the simple fact that, as we come out of the period of early Sufism and get
44 IM., p. 334.
41 Al-Qutbairi. op. cit.. p. 180.
321
A History of Muslim Philosophy
into the later period we find no Sufi who is not anxious to link himself to one
of the orders like Qadriyyah. Chightlyyah. Naqshbandiyyah, Qalandrlyyah.
ghatUrlyyah. Uwabiyyab, Suhrawardlyyah, Malamtiyyah, etc. Among the
early Sufis, on the other hand, we find practically no trace of such anxiety.
For example, one finds little mention of such orders in Quahairi. though
Hujwiri, who came after Qujjiairi. shows a good deal of order-consciousnesa.
This order-consciousness of Hujwiri, which most probably reflects tho order-
consciousness of his contemporary Sufis, finds expression in a discussion of
such orders as: al-Muhibiblyyah, al-Taifurlyyah, al-Junaidiyyah, al-QassArly-
yah, al-Saiy&rlyvah, al-Suhail!yyah, bI Kharrazlyyah, al-NOriyyah, etc.
Without going into a detailed discussion of what among the early as well
as the later Sufis constituted the basis of inter-order distinctions, one can
safely say that at least one basis of such distinctions was just this matter of
how one should make a start, and what one should do after having made a
start. It seems every one of these orders, more the later ones than the earlier,
had its own prescribed technique. That in Kalabadhi and Qulhairi there b
little mention of Sufi orders—and Hujwiri discusses them with a good deal
of keenness—indicates only that whereas the specific techniques of the respec
tive orders might havo boon introduced in their rudimentary form in the
days of the masters after whom the orders came to be known, it took several
generations of followers and practitioners to recognize the merits of these
techniques and give them their adequate and more or less perfected forms.
If one could, therefore, overlook the rudiments of techniques which some of
the early Sufis might have introduced for the benefit of their respective groups
of disciples, one could discover a large body of precepts which constituted the
universally accepted techniques which all early Sufis regarded as indispensable.
It b such techniques that Qujjtairi emphasises in hb chapter: "The Last
Words to the Disciples," and it b to some of these that we must now turn.
The first step which b regarded absolutely necessary by Queljairi in this
connection is that the dbciple should seek a preceptor and put himself entirely
under his guidance. For, if the dbciple does not do that and relies entirely on
hb own initiative and efforts, ho is never going to sncceed.
** The dbciple who
has no preceptor finds Satan himself acting aa one.
** Without a preceptor no
dbciple can achieve more than the mastering of industrious techniques of
piety which by themselves never lead to his seeing the light, and achieving an
experiential contact with the Creator.
**
Tho early Sufis regarded reliance on just one's own initiative aa mbleading.
perhaps because they considered the experiences of a beginner to bo mostly
theoretical, for when he thinks he b in oontact with roality, he may actually
be just imagining things; or he may be a victim of illusions and hallucinations.
If it is just the dbciple's own insight, limited as it b in the beginning, and
•• Ibid., p. 181.
*■ Ibid.
•• Ibid.
322
Early Sufis
nothing else, on which he tux. to depend, he will find it almost impossible to
distinguish between the genuine Sufi experiences and what he is at the tim.-
experiencing. If, on tho other hand, he is under the guidance of an established
master and preceptor and observes the discipline, ho is in no danger of
falling a victim to illusions end hallucinations; and in case he does fall victim
to such confusions, he has, in his preceptor, one who can bring him back to the
right path. The preceptor can do it because he is in actual living contact with
reality, and his first-hand experience of reality can help the disciple verifv
whether his own experiences are genuine or otherwise.
This prerequisite, that every disciple must take a preceptor or else he is
doomed, raises several issues which were discussed in detail by most of the
early Sufis. One of these issues was: Is not the SAari'ah enough for a Muslim ?
Must the disciple accept the position that tho framework of the Sbari'ah is of
necessity inadequate 1
The most popular answer to such a question among tho early Sufis was that
in the SJori aA there is room for tho average, below average, as well as the
above average. That whioh is for the above average in it is rooted in that
segment of the SAariaA which the Holy Prophet bequeathed only to the chosen
few of his Companions, for it was meant only for them, and not for the com
mon man. What distinguished thia segment of the ^Jari'aA from tho other
segments was that an average man's code of conduct could be oomplete with
out it, and yet it did not clash with it. To the average man it was something
within the £4ari'oA and, at the same time, over and above the Sbari ah, in so
far as he needed it. The discussion of who the chosen few were, for whom this
segment of the Siari'ah was meant, and what their distinguishing character
istics were, will be too detailed for us to enter into here. Suffice it to say that
thoy were the once who, on the one hand, had the laudable ambition of shaping
their whole lives, and not just parts of it, on tho model of tho Holy Prophot,
and who, on the other hand, were regarded by the Prophet as adequate
and competent personalities for carrying the extra load of intimate insight
into the nature of Reality, that is, God. It was from this point of view
that the early Sufis regarded the S^iri'ah of the average Muslim as just not
enough for him. And it was to make up for the deficiencies of the averago man's
Shari'ah that he sought the help, guidanoe, and discipline of a preceptor,
belonging to a line of preceptors ultimately ending up with tho Holy Prophet
from whom the first man in the line got his unique inBight.
One additional reason which is sometimes offered by some early Sufis aa an
explanation for the necessity of a preceptor is that every genuine insight into
God’s being is an experience of a magnitude altogether beyond the capacity
of an average mortal. The collapsing of the Prophet Moses at getting just a
glimpse of His being is cited by them as an extreme example of it. If a disciple
ia lucky enough, through just his own endeavours, to get such an intimate
insight into the being of God, then left just to his own personal resources
he may collapse and find further progress altogether impossible.
323
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The early Sufis’ insistence on every disciple taking a preceptor raises some
other issues altogether different from the ones we have discussed so far. The
pre-Islamic Arab tribes insisted on certain groups of their members specialising
in their genealogical trees, customs, war-records, naturally under some teachers,
likewise the early Islamic period saw schools of Ta/.rir, Fiqh, etc., coming
into existence. The pattern of pupil-teacher relationship was, therefore, not
altogether unknown to the early Sufis. But what the pupil in all these fields
learnt from the teacher fell under the heading of knowledge in the usual sense
of the term. He who had more knowledge and information oould impart it to
him who was prepared to sweat for it. Tho question arises: Was this type of
pupil-teacher relationship the model of the disciple-preceptor relationship in
the Sufis’ special field !
There is no simple answer to this question. That the Arabs were familiar
with the possibility of one's having knowledge of the phenomena other than
the natural ones goes without saying. That the Jews and the Christians among
them were familiar with the knowledge of the divine, distinct from the mun
dane, is also well known. But what is not clear is whether in the days im
mediately preceding Islam the disciple-proccptor type of relation was developed
and cultivated in an institutionalized form or not. For, on the one hand, we
have the Semitic institution of the Prophet who by virtue, not of any ascetic
practices of his own, but by virtue merely of divine blessing, is chosen to
have living contact with the Almighty and, thus, hecome His agent for leading
the Semitic people to the righteous path; and, on the other, we have the insti
tutions of the Rabbi and the Rilhib, who by virtue of the ascetic practices to
which they devote their entire lives can acquire some sort of contact with the
Almighty which puts them above the average mortal. Tho Rabbi and the
Habib in this sense are in the same category as the Kahins of tho pagan
Arabs, i.e.. men who through the practices they learnt from their masters
were thought to have achieved a contact with reality which oould not have
been achieved by those who did not have the benefit of those practices. Of
course, the reality with which the Rabbi and the Habib establish contact must
be distinguished from the reality with which the pagan Kahin established
contact.
If one looks at the disciple-preceptor relation of the early Sufi against this
cultural background of the Semitic peoples, it is easy to see how much of it
is influenced by the Jewish and Christian practices. But that is not tantamount
to calling Sufism un-Islamic. Strictly speaking, the Sufi disciple-preceptor
relationship ia as different from its Jewish and Christian models as Islam is
different from Judaism and Christianity, for the roots of such models of rela
tions go into the over-all systems from which they spring.
The Sufi disciple.preceptor relation would be un-Islamic if it could be de
monstrated that the features wliich distinguish it from its Jewish and Christian
models are not derived from Islam but arc, rather, derived from sources other
than Islamic. One could say. without going into further discussion, that these
324
Early Sufis
extra-Jewish and extra-Christian elements in the systems of tho early Sufis
were not derived from sources other than the Qur'&n and the Sunnah. And one
could cite, in support, cases like that of Shibli, the preceptor, and Hu?ri, the
disciple. Shibli told Hu?ri in the very beginning of their relationship that if
between ono Friday and the next, when he had to oome to Shibli, i.e., for one
whole week, any thought of anything, or any being other than God entered
his mind, his coming to Shibli was altogether forbidden.48
The case of Shibli and IJu?ri ia instructive from another point too. It illus
trates in a simple and concrete form what exactly the Sufi preceptor does for
his disciple.
To think of nothing and to live a life involved in nothing but God, not only
for one whole week, but week after week, is the least that is expected of a
beginner. Such a way of life is easier described than actually lived. Life as an
average mortal lives presents no parallel to this kind of involvement. For the
Sufi, especially the beginner, in spite of his having selected the Path of Sufism,
is still a member of a living society which does not stop making demands on
him; and he needs attending to so many other things just to survive and remain
strong enough to carry out the task that the Shariah prescribes for him even
in the context in which he has put himself. To carry out adequately all this
and yet let no thought other than that of God enter his mind even for the
fraction of a moment seems, at the face of it. quite an impossibility. The only
parallel one finds in ordinary life is that of a lover. The lover is seldom forgetful
of his love in spite of all his activities of daily life; rather, he does everything
ultimately for tho sake of his beloved. Even so the Sufi does everything for
the sake of his beloved, God. Onoe this becomes possible, acta not only like
those of the prescribed five prayers a day, but even those remotely connected
with praying, become acts carried out by him with God constituting tho con
stant frame of reference.
The case of an ordinary lover is easier to understand for the simple reason
that, as we al) know, there is a lot within us which can never find expression
or satisfaction without one’s being in love. The person with whom one is in
love offers a living answer to ao many of the problems of the lover'b personality
that, without being in love with just such and such a pereon, the lover might
have remained incomplete himself. In so far as there is this personal, specific,
and concrete element in every lover-beloved relation, it falls below tho Sufi-God
relation. But in so far as every genuine lover beloved relation means the
living by the lover a life which, even when it does not appear to be lived for
the sake of the beloved, is actually coloured by the tender thoughts of tho
beloved deep in tho heart of the lover, the lovcr-bcloved elation offers the
only parallel in ordinary life for the Sufi-God relation of the type Sjjpbli de
manded of Husri.
How the Sufi comes to fall in love with God, the unseen, is one of tho greatest
“ Ibid., p. 182.
325
A History of Muslim Philosophy
mysteries of Sufism One may, however, safely infer that unless there is a
preceptor this would be impossible for a beginner. The oonoeptual unseen
somehow must be made experiential, for otherwise the Sufi oan never
have a more peraonaliied and intimate understanding of Him than just an
intellectual grasp of that which His logically defined nature can provide. One
mav say that the preoeptor helps his disciple fall in love with God first by
turning the intellectual acceptance of God by him into an emotional acceptance.
Onoo the disciple has worked through this stage, and succeeded in converting
his own intellectual acceptance of his Creator into an emotional aeocptance,
he is ready for the next stage, the stage of finding this emotional aooeptanoe
of the Creator eo overwhelming that every other reality, social, biological, etc.,
is completely subordinated to ft. And if one were to go into it one may find
that these are just the first stages in the Sufi's long, life-long, career in God.
Since our purpose at present is not so much the detailed description of the
various stages in the Sufi's development as the finding out of how the preoep
tor helps his disciple in falling in love with God we will stop at thia point. But
before we pass on to the next point we must stress one thing: it is all very
well to try to explain the preoeptor-disci pie relation in terms of modern psy
chology, but we must not overlook the fact that this in itaelf is no more than
a conjecture. Instead of relying on such explanations the beat thing would be
to go back to the accounts of tho Sufis themselves with an open mind. If and
when they open their lips to doscribe how they came to fall in love with God
and what happened to them from that point on, we must lend credence to their
word, for otherwise wo shall be left with no data on which to build our own
explanations. Unfortunately, there ia very little in the literature oonoeraing
the early Sufis which could throw light on the actual experiences of the disciple
in his progress and development, and we have, consequently, to be content
with just the hints we find here and there.
Even the most intimate emotional involvement of the Sufi with the Creator
does not result in his losing the perspective of his material surroundings.
Account after account of a genuine Sufi's life will oonvince even the most
soeptical that, if at all, the over-all perspective of a Sufi is more realistio than
the perspective of even the most realistic of the ordinary mortals among whom
he has to live. Keeping this in mind it would not be very difficult for any
student of Sufism to reject the charge usually levelled against the Sufis that
they are mostly unrealistic persons wrapped up most of the time in the pseudo
universe of which God, a distorted father image is the centre. For the early
Sufi, who was lucky to have met many of those who had tho privilege of seeing
the Holy Prophet and learning tho Islamic way of life through their personal
contact with him. God was the Being not of mere conceptual nature, but rather
a Being who was responsible for the Heavenly Journey of the Prophet; the
Being to whom in their hour of distress they could turn and call aloud; "When
ia Allah going to help us!" and the Being from whom they expected to get the
response in concrete terms which their anguished hearts desired. For such
326
Early Bulla
early Sufis God waa not a pseudo-father image;. He waa rather the most real
and living Being, and the ultimate refuge of those lost in delusions and hal-
Incinations.
But when all is said and done we must admit, that, the techniques the pre
ceptor employs to emotionalize the disciple’s Intellectual grasp of Gal are
mystery to all save those who are lucky enough to enter into auch a relation
a-ith a preoeptor. All that we can do by way of making an effort at an in
tellectual and theoretical understanding of these techniques ia to describe and
discuss briefly auch of the hints as Quehairi gives in the chapter mentioned
above.
One of the first things which the disciple learns to do in order to establish
his relation on a firm and operative footing is to put himself completely into
the preceptor's hands. This attitude of complete faith in and reliance on the
preceptor may lead the disciple sometimes into actions wliioh, to all intents and
purposes, go against the most explicit injunctions of the Sbari'ah. But the
disciple, in spite of hia awareness of what the Sbariah demands of him, must
obey the preoeptor. This aspect of the preceptor-disciple relations has been
emphasized by the early Sufis as much as by the later ones. And it came in
for very strong criticism from the orthodox theologians. But, in spite of the
emphasis the early Sufis laid on the role of the SAiri’oA in their lives, they
justified this attitude, of blind obedience of the preceptor, on the ground that
it waa just a passing phase in the development of the beginner, and a necessary
phase because, without it, it was impossible for the beginner to get out of the
personal and self-centred frame of reference which throughout his life up to
the point he took a preceptor had been his only operative frame of reference.
The way Qutbairi puts the whole idea is: when the disciple has rid himself
completely of tho influence of his worldly position, status, and wealth, it be
comes incumbent on him to set right his relation with God by deciding never
to say no to his Shaikh44
Once the disciple has put himself completely in the hands of his preceptor,
the chances are that be will soon start having experiences of reality which
till then were altogether unknown to him. This first contact with reality might
not always be conducive to happy results. Sometimes the novitiate feels the
urge of communicating these novel and marvellous experiences of hia to any
body and everybody just to test whether he still is in possession of hia senses;
sometimes he oommunicateu with others to share Ids delight aa well as his
agony with them and seek strength from such a sharing of experiences; and
sometimes he communicatee with others because of some other emotional
urges. All this is forbidden. He should keep hia experiences of reality as his
most precious personal secrete to himself and divulge them to nobody except
his preceptor.4’
“ Ibid.
•’ Ibid.
327
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Although the early Sufi writers have given no explicit reason for this in
junction. their general tone suggeeU that the first experiences of reality of a
Sufi are based on such a delicate relation between him and his Creator that
unless extreme care is taken tho Sufi runs the risk of losing all capacity for
such experiences. It was felt that until the newly developed relationship be
tween tho beginner's personality and his Creator is properly stabilized he should
be as watchful and jealous of this unique achievement as possible. And there
is no way of doing that better than sharing all such experiences with the pre
ceptor, for he can, through his identification with the disciple, lend him his
own strength and stability.
Having worked with the disciple through these early experiences, the
Shaikh finds out the strength as well the weaknesses of the disciple. In the
light of this understanding tho preceptor then selects one of the various names
of the Almighty and takes him through an involvement with it in such a way
that, by the time he finishes this period of training, he is completely influenced
by it in everything he does. There are several stages in this which the disciplo
must pass through under the watchful supervision of the Shaijtij. Ho first
repeats this name of the Almighty with just his tongue. Then he puts his
heart and soul into it to such an extent that it is not just the tongue which
utters the name of the Almighty, but even his heart and soul utter nothing
but this name. Then the disciple is told to keep engaged in the uttering of the
name all the time and continue thus till he feels actually as if he is with his
heart and soul oocupied with and engaged in nothing but his Creator.4* It is
at this last stage that the disciple achieves for the first time that involvement
with the Almighty which alone makes it possible for him to go on in his en
deavour to achieve an infinitely progressive type of involvement with Him.
The beginner’s ability to achieve a view of the universe around him as
nothing but that aspect of Being which is signified by the particular name of
tho Almighty, on which the master trained him, depends a great deal on the
influence exerted on him by the master's personality. But apart from this there
is a considerable amount of hard work which has to be done by the beginner
himself by way of long prayers, series of night-long vigils, self-denial in food,
sleep, rest, etc. This hard work which is planned and prescribed by the master
has to be carried out by the disciple, however arduous and inconvenient it
may be. To this hard work the early Sufis gave the name of mujdhadah.
The true significance of mujahadah ia realized only when one finds in the
accounts of the early Sufis bow much of the first experiencing of reality depends
on it. Hujwtri holds, for example, that mujbdhadah (i.e., the first seeing of
the Almighty with the mind’s eye) can never occur without mujdhadah.w
One explanation of the significance of the beginner's hard work (mujdhadah ),
in so far as it is a necessary condition for his first contact with reality fmusjd-
•" Ibid.
•• Hujwiri. op. oil., p 250,
328
Early Sufi.
hadah), ia that it ia a process of disciplined prayers and ascetic practices which
ultimately results in such a refinement of the Sufi's personality aa to rid it of
all that is base and low in it. Thia disciplined and refined personality is more
ready to receive the first vision of reality than the original personality of the
beginner which basically is self-centred and crude.
But even the most stringent discipline of this type (mu/d/mdah) is not
considered by the early Sufis to be the sole and necessary means for the first
oontact with reality (mulbdhadah). As Hujwlri puts it, all such discipline is the
Sufi's own work, but thia work brings the propor reward in its wake only when
the Creator wills it.“ Why the early Sufis, in spite of rating the Sufi’s labour
bo high, did not recognize it aa the necessary means for the first oontact with
reality, was perhaps due to the fact that they had at the baok of their minds
the possibility that this very hard labour could produce in the Sufis a sense of
self-righteousness verging on conceit. And this conceit was the one thing
which, they thought, had been the cause of Satan’s downfall, about whom
the Qur’Sn is very explicit: he refused and felt conceited." It was with this
in mind that the early Sufis regarded the first contact with reality always a
matter of grace rather than something earned by the Sufi just because of his
having worked so hard.
The first contact with reality is regarded by the Sufis aa just the beginning
to which there is no end, because reality is infinite. But the beginning has a
unique importance. Without it there would be, as one might say, no series of
contacts to follow. Although there is not much explicit mention of it in the
accounts of early Sufis, scores of accounts of later Sufis bear out the fact that
sometimes a beginner may toii year after year in fruitless vigils and fasts and
may find his labours completely unrewarded. There ia a kind of a barrier be
tween the mortal self of the Sufi, on the one hand, and the glorious Being of
the Creator, on the other, which must be broken for tho infinite series of ever-
more-intimate contacts between the two to follow. It is the first crack in this
barrier, which, in spite of its being just a crack, gives it its unique significance.
For without it there is no possibility of the more adequate removal of tho
barrier which has yet to come.
What happens after the first oontact between the beginner and his Creator
is a secret which nobody has ever completely revealed, for the simple reason,
among others, that the experiences of tho Sufi from this point on are on a
plane altogether different from the plane of the average mortal. Communication
between the Sufi and the averago mortal is consequently extremely hazardous,
if not altogether impossible. If the Sufi uses the language of the average mortal,
he may mean one thing and actually say another; and if he uses the language
he creates in order to give expression to his unique experiences, he may not
be understood at all.
•• IM. p. 2M.
« Qur'an. H. 34.
329
A History of Muslim Philosophy
All that we are in possession of, therefore, in the writings of tho early Sufie,
regarding tho lUtffl and relations through which they pass after the first
crack in the barrier between thorn and their Creator, is a collection of care
fully coined and scrupulously selected terms which some of them employ to
oonvey something at least of what they see in the course of their journey into
the Infinite.
Two such terms are station (maqdm) and state fjalj. Each one stands for
a specific type of development the Sufi goes through. The basis of distinction
between them is the same as the one between mujdhadali and musbdhadah.
Station is the general term which covers all those stages which after the initial
contact with reality are considered achievable through the Sufi’s own toil and
labour. State, on the other hand, oovera all those states which are the result
of the ceaseless flow of grace of which the Sufi remains the recipient so long
as he does not falter and remains steadfast in his pursuit of reality. This is
expressed by Hujwiri in the following words: Jfafdm is consequent upon one's
own actions, hdl is one of the blessings; maqim is one of the rewards which
are earned by the Sufi, while juU is one of the blessings conferred on him inde
pendently of his actual actions.“
That of the almost infinite series of stations a perfect Sufi may achieve only
a few, is explicitly mentioned by the early Sufis. But we know whioh is the
first and which is the last, for Hujwiri sums up the whole thing in two sentences:
(1) TouboA (renunciation of all that bad been evil in the Sufi's life up-to-date)
is the beginning of the aeries of mo^dmal,-44 (2) rido' (absolute satisfaction with
the state in which God keeps the Sufi) is tho last of the series.14
Hujwiri indicates, what he believes to be the true relation between maq&m
and Aol, by adding: Ridd’ is the last of the series of maqamal but the first of
the series of o^wdl. This shows that in spite of the earlier impression that the
two lines whioh intersect at many pointe, tho correct theoretical position is
that ahwdl begin where mofdnuU end. This is in keeping with the basic attitude
of the Sufi that in whatever he achieves he is in the last resort indebted more
to his Creator than to his own personal endeavours. Thia point of view looks
more logical too. If maqinM are achived by the Sufi through his personal
endeavour, tne aeries cannot be infinite merely because his personal endeavour
must have a limit. Ahwdl, on the other hand, since they arc based on acts of
grace of the Infinite, must of neoeasity be infinite as a series. The two series
could not run parallel; and if one has to end before tbe other begins, it must
be the finite, for the infinite will never come to an end.
The discussion of the mo^dmdl being a finite series of states, and olnrul
being an infinite aeries of states, through whioh a Sufi may travel, raises an
interesting issue. Are we really justified in believing that the Sufi's a(u«il
41 Hujwiri, op. cil., p. 223.
•• Ibid.
4 Ibid., p. 224.
330
Early Sufis
constitute an infinite series of states of development to which there is no
end! Whatever else one might say in answer to tho question, within the frame
work of tho £Aori'aA. the answer in the affirmative is completely ruled out.
There must bo a point at whioh the development of the Sufi must stop in
order to remain short of the status of a nabi or a ranil (a prophet without a
book, or the one with a book).
Another interesting point that cornea out of the disoussion of the early
Sufi's ooncept of maqdm and /uU is related to his attitude towards the problem
of free-will. One can infer from the early Sufi’s attitudo, regarding maqdm and
Aol, that with regard to the former he believes in individual freedom and initia
tive as well aa responsibility, and regarding the latter he believes that individ
ual freedom and initiative can take him ODly up to a point and no further.
Another pair of terms that was common among the early Sufis was that of
knowledge film) and gnosis (ma'n/ah). The difference between the two is
brought out first by pointing out that, whereas the theologians fulama') make
no distinction between them, the Sufis believe that the one must never be
confused with the other. For the theologian all sure and certain knowledge is
'•7m; therefore, ma'ri/ah, in the sense in which the Sufis use it, is also ‘Um and
nothing else. They consequently think that “the possessor of knowledge"
falim) and "the possessor of gnosis” ('drif) mean one and the same thing.
But, as Hujwlri points out, the theologians contradict themselves when they
assert that whereas 'Him is a descriptive term and can be used for God, the
term ‘dri/ cannot be used thus.“
The Sufis think that between knowledge and gnosis there is a baaio distinc
tion whioh should never be lost sight of. Knowledge, in their eyes, is that which
in the last resort, when analysed, never takes us beyond empty verbal form;
gnosis, on the other hand, is that awareness whioh when analysed ends up in
direct experienor of ooncrete facte, processes, and things. Knowledge, there
fore, seldom influences one's real conduct, while gnosis can seldom remain
without influencing it. From their point of view, knowledge ia a rudimentary
form of gnosis. Consequently, the possessor of knowledge may not at the same
timo possess gnosis, whereas tho possessor of gnosis must have at one stage
peweesed knowledge.••
Apart from this way of distinguishing gnosis from knowledge, the early
Sufis tried to bring out the distinction in yet another way. This they did by
emphasising that, whereas in tho case of one's knowledge regarding something
communication is both possible and desirable, in the case of one's gnosis it
is neither possible, nor desirable. In order fully to appreciate thia distinction
between the two modes of knowledge which the early Sufis regarded basic and
fundamental ono must keep in mind the fact that in their eyes it is only the
knowledge of the ultimately Real which can develop from knowledge into
“ Ibid., p. 446.
•• Ibid., p. S20.
331
A History of Muslim Philosophy
gnosis; apprehension of other facta, things, or processes can never develop
beyond knowledge and, therefore, must remain short of gnosis. Theoretically,
this implies the impossibility of gnosis and the possibility only of knowledge
of one’s own self.*’ From this point of view, the attitude of the early Sufi so
far as knowledge of reality is concerned is as different from that of the positivist
as of any traditional metaphysician.
Another way in which Hujwiri tries to bring out the distinction between
knowledge and gnosis is that knowledge can be acquired, while gnosis is a
gift of God;*• therefore, it can never be a substitute for gnosis.
All these distinctions between knowledge and gnosis are summed up by
Qushairi in what he relates from his preceptor, abu ’Ali al-DaqqSq: Gnosis is
achieved by one who has knowledge of the Real in all the various aspects and
then carries out his dealings with everybody within tho constant framework
of reference to God. gets rid of his own base features . . . and does not permit
even a single thought to enter his mind which attracts him to anything but
God ... he who has achieved all this is known as a gnostic and his state ia
known as that of gnosis. Such a person achieves gnosis of his Creator in
proportion to his estrangement from his own self.1* Keeping thiB statement
in mind, one oould say that the involvement of the gnostic with his Creator
is an involvement as concrete and actual as one can think of; it is not mere
conceiving of this or that virtue and just imposing on oneself the intellectual
framework thus evolved.
Another pair of terms popular among the early Sufis is that of fana' and
baqa'. Aa to the definition of these terms there is considerable agreement be
tween the early Sufis. But when they come to interpret these definitions in
detail, differences crop up. This is illustrated even in the attitudes of Qushairi
and Hujwiri. Quafaairi maintains, ho whom tho glory of reality overwhelms
to such an extent that he observes neither in itself, nor in ita effects, nor in
the form of ita traces and tracks, anything other than reality, is described as
one who has achieved faxd', in respect of things created, and baqa' in respect of
the Creator.*’ Hujwiri, on the other hand, maintains: FanA' is the complete
loss by tho mortal self of the conditions of his being, and baqA' is his being
lost in the vision of tho Real. He achieves /and* through the vision of his own
actions and baqd' through the vision of the acta of God. His dealings with
others are coloured by reference to Him and not to his own mortal self. Henoe,
he who loses all that ia mortal and finite in his mortal self achieves permanence
proportionately in the vision of divineness of the Real.*1
Thia withdrawing from one’s own self, and everything else, into the Creator
is easier to understand if we take into consideration an explanatory comment
•’ Ibid., p. 329.
•• Ibid., p. 322.
“ Al Quibairi. op eit.. p. 141
•• Ibid., p. 37.
Ibid., p. 209
332
Early Sufw
of Qughairi: So far aa hia evil actions and couditiops are concerned, /and’ of the
mortal self means hia getting rid of all traces of these as completely as possible;
while in respect of his own self and other persons and things,’/and' means
just the loss by him of his consciousness of his own self and that of other
persons and things as the frame of reference for his actions ... for when ho is
said to have achieved /and’ with regard to his self and other persons and
things, it is still recognized that hir self exists and other persons and tilings
exist too; only he has lost consciousness of his seif, on the one hand, and of
other persons and things, on the other,••
Summing up all this one could say /and' means the complete disappearance
of three things: (1) the bad actions, tendencies, ami conduct, (2) the low and
base self, and (3) the world at large. So far as tho first form of /and’ is concerned,
the disappearance means their disappearing altogether from existence; so far
as the second and third forms of /and’ are conoemed it means that, in spite of
the self and others still being in existence, the Sufi has become oblivious of
their existence.
Hujwln interprets /ana' and baqd' still in another way by connecting the
two with the unity of God (tan hid). Both /and' and baqd' are rooted in one’s
being ainoore in accepting unity, for, when one accepts unity one must also
accept as being completely in the hands of God. One who is, thus, in the hands
of Another has the status of one who has achieved /and'. Such a [wrson must
accept hi* complete helplessness. For him there is no other status than that
of a person who has been made what he is by the Lord. So he must build up
the permanent attitude of total submission (ridd') towards his Creator. Any
body who interprets /and' and baqd' in any other way than this, i.e . regards
/and’ as the actual disappearing of the mortal self, and baqd' as the actual per
manence in the Real, is no other than a sophist. •’
That which distinguishes this comment of Hujwiri's from Quabairi’s com-
mente in general, and the one that follows in particular, is the consciousness
of the corrupting influences that the Carmathians, Malibad, etc., had started
exercising in his days. He wished to keep the definitions of /and' and baqd' as
precise as possible, lest they should become tools in the hands of those who
were interested in getting Sufism rid of its roots in tho Shari'ah and Tauhid.
This is how Qugbairi describee /and’ and baqd' in the comment particularly
pointed out above: "When a person has achieved /and' of his self, as described
so far, ho goes from the vision of his /and' into the higher stage of his actual
/and’.... The first stage in this ascent is the /and' of his self and all its attributes
through his permanence in the attributes of tho Real. Then comes the second
stage of his losing his status in the attributes of the Real and achieving a vision
of God Himself. And last of all he loses his status in the vision of the reality
by merging himself completely in the being of the Real,04
Ibid., p. 37.
•• Hujwiri. op. oil., p. 299
M Al-Qugbairi. op. csl- p. 37.
333
A History of Muslim Philosophy
One thing th*t, in all fairness to Qu stain, must be pointed out regarding
this last comment of his is that in spite of his mode of expression being very
much like that of the MalSbad. the Carmathians, etc., against whom Hujwlri
wishes to warn his readers, Quibairi does not mean to maintain that /and’ is
the actual fana of the mortal self and baqa is its actual baqi’ in tho Real as
the Carniathians, eto., maintained. Quehairi, on tho other hand, maintains, aa
would be clear from the comments from him quoted earlier, what in substance
is maintained by Hujwiri himself.
Although there are soores of such pairs and groups of terms aa have been
discussed above, what has been said so far should be enough to give us some
idea at least of what typo of men the early Sufis were, and what went into
making them what they were. If, on the other hand, we were to go into a
detailed study of their mode of life we will not be able to do justice to it with
out taking into consideration not only their basic attitudes, as has been done
so far, but even the specific applications of these to each and every little detail
of their daily lives. The early Sufi was involved in his Creator in a relationship,
an extremely pale example of which is the relation of the maddest love between
two human beings. Aa the lover thinks of nothing, dreams of nothing, sees
nothing, and feels nothing but his beloved and of his beloved all the time, a
Sufi thinks of nothing, dreams of nothing, sees nothing, and feels nothing but
his beloved and of his beloved, that is, his Creator. The result io that when
one studies the lives of these Sufis, one finds that they take not even a single
step in their livre without feeling sure within themselves that this and nothing
else will please Him. How they should walk when they tread the earth, how
they should talk when they mix with their fellow-men, how they should dress,
what they should eat, what they should drink, what they should do when they
get up in the morning if they go to sloop at all—each and every little detail
of even-thing relating to these matters is prescribed for them. And tho basic
principle underlying all such prescriptions is that even the maximum of
obedience, service, sacrifice, devotion, and love is not enough; so they should
always regard the maximum as the minimum, and constantly strive for a
devotion more thorough and a love more intense. It is this burning desire to
lose oneself in the Creator on an ever-increasing scale in everything, major
or minor, over tho whole period of one's life, which distinguishes the early
Sufi from everybody else.
334
Early Sufis (Continued)
Chapter XVII
EARLY SUFIS (Continued)
Although epace does not allow us to go into the detailed study of the lives
of the early Sufis we may yet give a brief biographical account of some of
them who made a definite contribution towards the general doctrine which
we have described in the preceding chapter.
A
SUFIS BEFORE AL-jlALLAJ
I. Hasan of Basrah (21/642-110/728)
Hasan of Bafrah belonged to the class of those who did not see the Prophet
but his Companions ($abibah) and the Companions of his Companions
(Tabi'in). Although he took no active part in politics, yet in his fight against
the Umayyads, he was sympathetic towards Imam Rusain.
Hasan represented a tendency towards otherworldliness, piety, and asceticism
in which the element of fear of God predominated. In a letter to 'Umar b.
'Abd al-'Aziz, the Umayyad Caliph, he said. "Beware of this world, for it is
like a snake, smooth to the touch, bnt its venom is deadly .... Beware of
this world, for its hopes are lies, its expectations false." Later on. in the same
letter, he praised hunger and poverty as symbols of the righteous and looked
upon wealth aa an evil which distracts people from their rightful goal.'
He regardod piety as the quintessence of true religion.* According to him, it
has three grades. The first ia that a man should speak the truth even though
he is excited through anger. The second grade of piety demands that he shoultl
control his bodily organs and refrain from things which God has forbidden
The third and last stage of piety is that he should dedire only those things
which lead to God's pleasure fridd'J. A little of piety is better than prayer
and fasting of a thousand years.’ It is the lust for this world and avarioe that
destroy piety.*
Hasan was so much overpowered by fear and was seldom seen laughing that
when he sat he appeared as if be were sitting before an executioner.* He was
ever conscious of his sins and the fear of hell. Ho thought he would consider
himself fortunate if he would be delivered from hell after tribulations of a thou,
sand years.* Somebody asked him how he felt himself in this world. He replied
1 A. J. Arberry, Sufism, pp. 33-34.
• 'Atfir, Tadhkira/., p. 1».
• Ibid., p. 26.
• Ibid., p. 1».
• Ibid., p. 21.
• Ibid.
335
A Huwry of Muslim Philosophy
Imagine a people in a boat which has capsized and everybody is trying .->
save himself by clinging to broken pieces of wood. Such is the real position
of man in this world.’
2. Abu Hashim of Kufsh (d. 180/776)
Abu HSahim belonged to Kiifah. There were people before abu Hishim who
were famous for their asceticism (zuhd). piety (war'), engagement in the
science of practical religion, trust in God. and love; but it was abu Hashim
who first of all came to be called by the name of Sufi. The first monastery'
where the Sufis began to gather for exchange of ideas and mutual discussion
about their mystic experiences was established by some wealthy Christian in
Ramlah in Syria where he had observed some Muslim saints eng«yed in mystic
exercises in the open.
According to Sufy&n Thauri, abu Hashim knew the subtlety of riyd' (showing
off) more than anybody else. Abu Hashim once said that it was far easier to
pull down a mountain with the help of a needle than to remove vanity and
arrogance from one’s heart. On seeing a judge coming out of the house of a
minister, he remarked: May God protect people from knowledge that dofti not
lead to the benefit of the heart.•
All these incidents point to the fact that, according to abu Hilhim, inner
transformation of the heart was the essence of Sufism.
3. Ibr&hlm b. Adham (d. 160/777)
Ibrahim b. Adham, whom Junaid of Baghdad called the key to Sufism, also
advocated asceticism which, according to him. involved otherworldliness,
celibacy, and poverty. For him a true saint is one who covets nothing of this
world, nothing of the next, and devotes himself exclusively to God.* In the
same strain he told a questioner who had asked him about his occupation that
he had left the world to the seekers of the world and the hereafter to the
seekers of the hereafter, and had chosen for himself the remembrance of God
in this world and the beatifio vision in the next.1’
He advocated celibacy and poverty as the prerequisites of true asceticism.
According to him, he who adopts poverty cannot think of marriage, for it
becomes impossible for him to fulfil the needs of his wife. When a Sufi marries,
he enters, so to say. a boat, but when he gets a child, his boat sinks and his
asceticism disappear).11 A certain man was bewailing of his poverty. Ibrahim
b. Adham remarked that he had paid nothing for this poverty of his. The man
’ Ibid., p. 28.
* JAmi. Na/abAI alL'na, pp. 31-32.
• Ali Hujwlri. Kajhf at-MahjOb. English translation by R. A. Nioholson. p. 217;
Attar. op. eil., p. 63.
>• ‘AffAr. op. ci»., p. 65
11 Ibid., p. 62
336
Early Sufis (Continued)
was surprised and asked: Is poverty a thing to be bought! Ibrihlm said:
Yea, I chose it of my own free-will and bought it at the price of worldly
sovereignty and I am ready to exchange one instant, of it with a hundred
worlds.
In I brihlm b. Adham we meet with the practioe of courting blame (maUmah )
for the purpose of self-discipline. Onoe he waa asked if he was over happy
in his life by attaining his heart’s desire. He replied: Ye«, twice. He related
two different events when people not knowing him mocked and jested at his
cost.1*
He referred to the principle of taunkhd (trust in God), but in his case it
was a moral principle as enunciated in the Qur'in, which does not exclude
earning one's livelihood by one’s own efforts.
4. Shaqlq of Balkh (d. 104/810)
Shaqiq of Balkh was a pupil of abu bin Adham. He developed and perfected
the doctrine of tawakkul.'1 The story of his conversion to Sufism ia revealing,
Onoe in the course of his trade he went to TurkestAn and visited a temple of
idol-worshippers. gbaqiq told the people there that their Creator is omnipotent
and omniscient and they should, therefore, be ashamed of worshipping idols
which are powerless in providing them anything. The idol worshippers told
him: If your Creator is omnipotent and all-knowing, why have you come into
this distant land for seeking livelihood 1 Can He not provide you in your own
town! On hearing this Shaqiq gave up the world, went to Khurfaan and be
came an asoetic.1*
Shaqiq interpreted tawakkid as negation of earning one’s living. He once
remarked that the efforts put in by man in seeking livelihood are the result
of his ignorance of God's ways of dealing with men and, therefore, to work
hard in order to win bread is unlawful /^arclm/.1*
5. HArith Muh&eibi (165/781-243/857)
Hirijh MubAsibi started his life as a theologian and belonged to the school
of ShAfi'i. He advocated the use of reason and employed the technique of the
Mu'tazilites in controversies with them and waa thus a precursor of the
Agh'arites. His career resembled that of GhazAlI’s in some respects. Both had a
complete theological education, were well versed in philosophical and religious
problems of their day, and were later on converted to the Sufistic Path, partly
under the stress of circumstances and partly as a result of their inner moral
•• M. Smith. Reading from the Mystico of Mm, pp. 19-21.
>• Hujwiri, Op. cil.. p. 68; see also After, op. cit., pp. «5-«6. The events related
in the two books are different, but they lead to the samo conclusion.
'• 'After, op- bit.. pp- 127-29
■* Ibid., p. 127.
>• Ibid., p, 129.
337
A History of Muslim Philosophy
strain. Mubaaibi's book IfaMya, which again served aa a prototype for
Ghaz&li's Muiu/idh. relates the oventa which revolutionized his life. The first
thing that struck him was the division of the Muslim community into numerous
sects and sub-sects each claiming the monopoly of salvation. He devoted a
great part of hia life to discovering the clear way and the true path amid those
divergences. He met all kinds of people who claimed to know and follow the
truth, but in almost every case he failed to be oonvinced; most of them were
busy in worldly gains. "I lookod to knowledge for guidance, thinking deeply
and considering long. Then it was made clear to me, from God's Book and the
Prophet's practice and the consensus of believers, that the pursuit of desire
blinds a man and so prevents him from seeking the right path, and leads him
astray from truth." This conviction led him to self-examination (muhdaabah.
which brought him the titlo Mublsibi),1’ self-discipline, and moral transforma
tion. He realized that the path of salvation consists in the fear of God,
compliance with His ordinances, sinoere obedience to Him, and the imitation
of His Prophet. When he tried to search for the ordinances in the life and
conduct of the saints, he was again struck by difference*. Of this much, how
ever, he was assured that only those people can be sure guides who, knowing
God, labour to win His pleasure. But at first it proved almost impossible for
him to find suoh men and yet he continued his quest, for it was a matter
ot life and death for him: Finally, through God’s grace he was successful in
his search and came across people who were models of piety: God opened
unto me s knowledge in which proof was clear and decision shone, and I had
hopes that whoever should draw near to thia knowledge and make it his own
would be saved. When this enlightenment dawned upon him, the course of
future action was clear. "I believed in it in my heart and embraced it in my
mind and made it the foundation of my faith.”l*
In spite of his conversion, his attitude towards mysticism was marked by
hia intellectual approach. Hie famous disciple Junaid of BaglylAd relates how
ho used to discourse with him on different topics of mysticism. Mub&sibi would
come to Junaid's house and ask him to oome out with him. Junaid would
protest at being dragged from solitude into the world of allurement. But
MubAaibi would press him to ask whatever question came to his mind. Thia
questioning and answering proved very stimulating to him and when ho re
turned home he would put the entire discussion in a notebook." Here we see
the picture of a great Sufi teacher who approached his subject in the intellectual
spirit of a great scholar.
An important contribution of MubAsibi to the science of mysticism is his
definitions of station fmajiml and state ((idl) and his inclusion of satisfaction
(ridd') among tho states. Station, according to him, is the particular position
■’ Ibid., p. IM.
" A. J. Arberry, op. cit.. pp. 47-50.
" Ibid., pp. 40-47.
338
Early Sufis (Continued)
whioh a teeker attains after making necessary efforts to reach it; it involves
all th® obligations pertaining to tho stage. State (M). on the other hand,
is something, that man receives through God's grace without involving any
effort on his part. In short, station belongs to the category of acts, whilo state
belongs to'the category of gifts,” as stated in the preceding chapter.
Satisfaction (rida ) is an attitudo of mind which also, according to MufaAsibi.
a man is able to attain through divine grace and not through his own efforts.
He says, "Satisfaction is tho quintessence of the heart under the events which
flow from the divine decree.”’1
With regard to the problem whether an attitudo of poverty (jaqr) or wealth
(sbina) is preferable for a mystic, Mufaasibi holds that tho’ latter attitude is
better, ne argues that wealth is an attribute of God, whereas poverty cannot
be ascribed to Him and. therefore, an attribute common to God and man ia
superior to an attribute that is not applicable to God.” Similarly, bis attitude
in the controversy as to whether presence (hudir) or absence (giaibah) is
preferable for tho mystic, is that presence is superior to absence, because
all excellences are bound up with presence. Ho says that absence from one’s
self is a preliminary stage on the myrtio Path which gradually leads to presence
before God. and the Path becomes for him an imperfection after he has arrived
at the goal.”
6. RAbi’ah al-’AdawIyyah of Bajrah (95 or 99/713 or 717-185/801)
Rabi'ah al-'Adawiyyah of Basrah was a famous woman mystic, well known
for her advocacy of disinterested love for God. She was born into a poor home,
stolen aa a child, and Bold into slavery. But her devotion to a life of piety
and prayer enabled her to win her freedom. She decided to adopt a life of
celibacy in spite of many offers of marriage by renowned mystics of her time.
Once her oompanion suggested to her in the spring season to come out of the
house to behold the works and beauties of God. She replied: Come you inside
that you may behold their Maker. Contemplation of the Maker has turned me
away from the contemplation of what He has made.”
RSbi’ah's main contribution to mysticism was her doctrine of disinterreted
love of God which served both aa a motive and a goal for her. With most of
her contemporary mystics the guiding motive for asceticism and otherworldli
ness was the fear of hell or the reward of paradise. RSbi’ah, on the other hand,
tried to emphasize that a man who claims to attain union with God should
be oblivious of both. ‘Affar relates that once some mystics came to Rabi'ah
She asked; Why do you worship God 1 One said: There are seven stages in
’• Hujwrf, op. cit.. p. 181.
TM.. pp. 179, 180; see also 'AW*r, op. cu.. p. 145.
’■ Hujwtri. op. eit.. p. 21.
■■ IM.. p. 249.
“ '-MfAr. op. cil„ p. M.
339
A History of Muslim Philosophy
hell, and everybody has to pass through them; therefore, in fear and dread of
them I wonhip. Another replied: The eight stages of paradise are places of
great delight and a worshipper is promised complete rest there. RAbi'ah
replied: He is a had servant who worships God for fear of punishment or desire
of reward. They asked her: Why do you worship if you have no desire for
paradise ? Sho replied: I prefer the Neighbour to the neighbour's house (i.e.,
paradise). Sho added that God is worthy of worship even if there is no motive
of fear or reward.** It is related that one day R&bi'ah was running with fire
in one hand and water in the other. People asked her the meaning of her action.
She replied: I am going to light fire in paradise and to pour water on hell
so that both veils may completely disappear from the pilgrims and their
purpose may be sure, and the servants of God may see Him without any object
of hope or motive of fear.** In the following versea, she distinguishes the two
kinds of love, selfish and disinterested:
In two ways have 1 lovod Theo: selfishly,
And with a love that worthy is of Thee.
In selfish love my joy in Thee I find.
While to all else, and others, I am blind.
But in that love which seeks Thee worthily,
Tho veil-is raised that I may look on Thee.
Yet is the praise in that or this not mine.
In this and that the praise is wholly Thine.*’
The object of this disinterested love, according to Ribi'ah. was union with
God. She says: My hope is for union with Thee, for that is the goal of my
desire.
7. Dhu al-Nun Miari (180/706-245/859)
Dhu al-NOn Misri is regarded by most biographers as a renowned mystic.
He was the first to give expression publicly to his mystic experiences.** T-ilrs
other early mystics, he practised asceticism of extreme type," regarded the
temptations of self as the greatest veil,*® and looked upon seclusion as indispens
able for the promotion of sincerity in a Sufi.” According to him, there are
Ibid., p. 47.
" AtUki, .Mandqib al 'An/tn. as quoted in ShorUr Encyclopaedia o) Islam.
p. 463a.
*' M. Smith, Rdbi'ah, the Mystic, pp, 102-04. Commenting on these vorew.
al-QbazUi says: "Sho meant by selfish love, the love of Cod for the bestowal of
His favours and grace and for temporary happiness, and by the love worthy ol
Him, the love of His boauty whieh was awarded to her, and thia is the higher
of the two loves and the finer of them” Uhyd'). See also Shorter Encyclopaedia
•>/ Islam, p. 463a.
’• 'AH&r, op. cit.. pp. 76. 80.
” Ibid., p, 78.
Ibid., p. 83; Hujwiri. op. cil., p. 200.
” 'AttAr, op. cil., p. 84
340
Early Sufis (Continued)
two different paths for the mystic to follow. The first path, lesser in degree,
is to avoid ain, to leave the world, and to control passion; the second path,
higher in degree, is to leave all besides God and to empty the heart of every
thing."
Ehu al-Nun interprets tawakhil (trust in God) aa opposed to reliance on
intermediate causes and the use of planning,
** It demands solitude and com
plete break with the world and its poople, and total and full reliance on God.”
Repentance, according to him, is essential for everybody; the common people
repent of their sins, while the elect repent of their heedleasness. Repentance ia
of two kinds: repentance of return (indbah) and repentance of shame (idi/iyd').
The former ia repentance through fear of divine punishment, the latter is
**
repentance through shame of divine clemoncy.
Dhu al-Nun distinguishes knowledge from certitude (yaqin). Knowledge is
the result of sensory perception, i.e., what we receive through bodily organa,
while certitude is the result of what we see through intuition.
** In another
context he says that knowledge is of three kinds: first, knowledge of the unity
of God and this is common to all believers; second, knowledge gained by
proof and demonstration and this belongs to the wise, the eloquent, and the
learned; the third, knowledge of the attributes of Unity and this belongs to
the saints, those who contemplate the face of God within their hearts, so that
God reveals Himself to them in a way in which He is not revealed to anyone
**
else in the world. It is this knowledge which is called gnosis (ma'rifah), the
idea of which, it ia claimed, waa first introduced into Sufism by Ufiu al-Nun.
Tho core of gnosis, according to him, is God's providential communication of
the spiritual fight to one's heart.
** The gnoetios see with direct knowledge,
without sight, without information received, without observation, without
description, without veiling, and without veils. They are not in themselves;
but in so far aa they exist at all. they exist in God. Their movements are caused
by God and their words are the words of God which are uttered by their tongues,
**
and their sight is the sight of God which has entered into their eyes. Thus,
with Dhu al-NQn the highest achievement of the mystic is to get super-intel
lectual knowledge known aa gnosis which involves oomplete unconsciousness
on the part of man. In one of his'statements quoted by 'AftAr, he says, that
“the more a man knows God, tho more is he lost in Him." It appears that he
had in his mind the mystic state which his contemporary, BAyazId of Bis(Am,
designated as /and'
•• Ibid., p. 7#.
*• Ibid., p. 86.
•* Ibid., p. 88.
“ Hujwiri. op. cil., pp. 298, 299.
•• ‘Af(Ar. op. cil., p. 84.
•’ Ibid., p. 81.
•• Ibid., p. 84; see also Hujwiri, op. cil., p. 276.
*• ‘AtfAr. op. cil., p. 85.
341
A History of Muslim Philosophy
8. Blyazld Bistimi (d. 260/874)
Biyazld Bisfami was a Persian Muslim whose ancestors were Zoroastrism.“
In his early life he was a jurist and was reckoned among osAdi al-rd'i, the
*
followers of abu Ifanifah. but later on ho turned to Sufism. 1 His teacher in
mysticism waa a Kurd. It ia related that he associated with a mystic abu
‘Ali of Sind, who taught him the doctrine of annihilation in unity (fans’ fi
al-taukuif and in return abu Yazid taught him the doctrine of monotheism
as embodied in the Qur'anic chapters, Falifiah and IkHds.a He waa familiar
with the Indian practice of "watching the breaths" which he described aa the
gnostic’s worship of God.
* ’
For thirty years BAyaztd wandered in the deserts of Syria, leading a life of
extreme asceticism—with scanty sleep, food, and drink. He once said that a
mystic can reaoh hia goal only through blindness, deafness, and dumbneea.
**
He seemed to be very scrupulous in tho observation of Islamlo injunctions and
would not tolerate any deviation, however small or insignificant it might be.“
In Bayazld's utterances we notice a distinct tendency towards monism. He
tries to reach the divine unity by the process of abstraction (la/rid/ till he is
devoid of all personal attributes and feels himself aa well as others submerged
in the One. In this state of unity he gave expression to hia experiences which
remind one of the an al-Haq of IJallaj. “I went from God to God, until
He cried from me in me, ‘O thou I.’ ” “Glory to me 1 How great is my majesty."
"When I came out of my 'self,' I found the lover and the beloved as one, for
in the world of thought, all is one.”** "For twelve years I treated the self
Inafi) in me as a smith does with his materia], heating and beating alternately
in the fire of penance and with the hammer of blame (maUmah) till it became
a mirror. For five years I waa busy in polishing this mirror with different kinds
of religious practices. For one year I looked within myself, and discovered a
girdle of infidelity (tunnar) round my waste. For another five years I tried to
remove that girdle till I recovered my true faith. Then I found everything
dead before my eyes and God alone living.”*’ What is ‘arjJ! It is I.
What ia Chair (turn)! It is I. What is the Tablet or'the Pen 1 It is I. What
are prophets like Abraham, Moses and Muhammad? They are I. Explaining
it further, he remarked that whoever becomes annihilated in God finds that
whatever is, ia God.
** His negativism (lajHJf is illustrated by the following
quotation: "Nothing is better for man than to be without aught: having no
•• Ibid., p. 9.
“ Jiuni, NafafdU al-Une. p. S9.
“ Ibid., p. 80.
*’ ‘ Attir, op. cil., p. 92; see Encyclopaedia o/ Religion and Elhice. Vol. XII. p. 12a.
•• 'AtfAr. op. cil.. pp. 90. 92. 110.
•• Ibid., p. 90; see Hujwtri. op. oil., p. 217.
*• AttAr. op. cir.. p. 105.
•' Ibid., p. 92.
'• Ibid., p. 112
342
Early Sufis (Continued)
asceticism, no theory, no practice. When he is without all, he ia with all.""
A mystic should be in a domain where neither good nor evil exists; both good
and evil belong to the phenomenal world; in the presence of unity there is
neither command /amr) nor prohibition (nahi).u
B&yazld is the first Sufi who gives a detailed description of his mystic
experience and calls it by the name of ascension (mi'rdj), a practice which
was later followed by ibn ‘Arabi and others. We give below a few passages
from the account as given by 'Attir in his TadJihroA:11
"When I attained the stage of indifference (intigjfna) towards the things of
this world and was lighted up by the light of God, several mysteries were
revealed to me. I lookod from God towards myself and found that my light
was utter darkness in comparison with God's light, my loftiness was utter
lowliness; it was all purity there and all darkness here. But when again 1
looked, I found my light in His light, my loftiness in His loftiness, and that
whatever I did I did through His power. His light shone in my heart and I
discovered that in truth all worship was from God and not from me, though
all the time I had thought that it waa I who worshipped. I felt perplexed and
reocivod the explanation: All that is, is I and not not-1.... I looked from
God towards God and saw Him as the only reality. I remained in this stage
for long, left all efforts and all acquired knowledge. Grace from God began
to flow and I got eternal (asli) knowledge. I saw that all things abide in God.
"Then I was given wingB and I began to fly in the air and saw strange and
wonderful things, When He notioed my weakness, He strenghtened me by
Hu strength and put the crown of honour on my head. He opened the gate
of the avenue of divine unity (laufrU) before me. Then 1 stayed in the stage
of malakul till the apparent and hidden aspects of I-ness vanished. A door
was opened into the darkness of my heart and I got an eloquent tongue to
express latifiid and 1'1/rid (abstract unity). Now, my tongue came from God,
my heart felt the effulgenoe of His light, and my eyes reflected His creativity.
1 spoke through Him and talked through His power. As I lived through Him
I became eternal and immortal. When I reached this stage, my gestures and
my worship became eternal; my tongue became the tongue of unity /tauhid/
and my soul the soul of abstraction (tajrid). It is He who moves my tongue
and my role is only that of an interpreter: talker in reality is He, and not I.
"My soul passed through all the world of the unseen. Paradise and hell were
shown to it but it paid no attention to them. It traversed the different spheres
where it met the souk of prophets. When it rcaohed the sphere of the soul of
Mubammad, it saw millions of rivers of fire without end and a thousand veils
of light. If I had put my foot into them, I would have been burnt. I lost my
Benses through awe and fear. I tried hard to see the ropes of Muhammad's
tent, but could not till I reached God. Everybody can reach God according
•• Ibid., p. 107.
•• Ibid., p. 110.
11 Ibid., pp. 112-16.
343
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to his light, for God is with all; but Muhammad occupies a prominent position,
and so unless one traverses the valley of lauhid, one cannot reach the valley
of Muhammad, though as a matter of fact both valleys are one.”
9. Jupaid of Baghd&d (d. 298/910)
Junaid of Baghdad was well versed in theology, jurisprudence, and ethics
and was acclaimed as a leader in the science of Sufism by the Sufis of all
schools.” He was perhaps the first mystic who explicitly expressed his in
debtedness to ‘Ali for his mystic knowledge, for 'Ali. according to him, pos
sessed an abundance of both oxoteric and esoteric knowledge film and (ui-
moA).*’ He studied law under abu Ujaur and associated with Harilh Mubasibi
and discussed different problems of Sufism during walks with him.”
Junaid advocated the principle of sobriety (fair) as opposed to that of
intoxication (mir).u According to him. intoxication is an evil, because it
disturbs the normal state of a mystic and leads to the loss of sanity and self-
control.” In thia connection, the conversation between Junaid and Salllj,
when the latter after leaving the society of 'Ali b. 'Vlfamln al-Makki came to
Junaid seeking his oompany, is illuminating. Junaid refused to accept him as
his disciple because, aa he said, association demands sanity which was lacking
in him. l.lallaj replied O Shaikh, sobriety and intoxication are two attributes
of man. and man is veiled from his Lord until his attributes are annihilated.
Junaid replied: You are in error. Sobriety denotes soundness of one's spiritual
state in relation to God, while intoxication denotes excess of longing and
extreme of love, and neither of them can be acquired by human effort.*’
This advocacy of the doctrine of sobriety made Junaid a model Sufi who
was acceptable both to the mystics and the theologians, and it is for this
reason that we find in him an advocate of religious Law. Nobody could raise
any objection against him with regard to his apparent behaviour (faiir)
which was in perfect oonsonance with the Shari'ah, or with regard to his inner
state (bdfin) which was in perfect harmony with the principles of mysticism.”
Aooording to him, only he can truly traverse the Path (lariqah) who walks
with the Book of God (al-Qur'4n) in his right hand and the Sunnah of the
Holy Prophet in his left hand." He preferred to wear the dress of the 'ulama'
rathor than mystics and in spite of constant requests by his disciples and others
he would not like to change it for the woollen garb (Uirqak) of the mystics."
Hujwtri, op. oil., p. 128; see ‘Att*r, op. oil., p. 212.
“ 'AH*r, op. cii, pp. 214-18; Hujwtri, op. oil., p. 74.
“ Jimi, op. oil., p. 81; Arberry. op, oil, p. 48. According to A((4r he was the
disciple of Sari Saqii (op. oil., p. 213).
“ 'AH*r. op. oil.. p. 212.
“ Hujwtri, op. oil., p. 185.
•’ Ibid., p. 189; 'AH*r, op. oil., pp. 210-17.
” Hujwiri, op. oil, p. 128.
" 'AW*r, op. oil., p. 214.
” H>i<. p. 210-
344
Early Sufis (Continued)
According to him, the only safe path open to the people is the path laid down
by Muhammad, for true and sure knowledge is the knowledge revealed by
God in the Qur'&n and enunciated by the Holy Prophet, as embodied in the
Sunnah.<l
Taufiid, according to Junaid, is the separation of the eternal from that
which waa originated in time," for, as he puts it. God cannot be comprehended
by any of the categories of our phenomenal existence." Explaining it further,
he says that true belief in unification is "that one should be a figure in the
hands of God, a figure over whioh His decrees pass according as His omni
potence determines, and that one should be sunk in tho sea of His unity, self
annihilated and dead alike to tho call of mankind to him and his response to
them, absorbed by the reality of the divine unity in true proximity, and lost
to sense and action, because God fulfils in him what He has willed of him.
namely, that his state should bo as it waa before he existed."" According to
Junaid, the efforts of man in search of truth throughout human history have
been directed towards fulfilment of the covenant entered by man in tho pre
sence of God" and to return to the state in which he was before he was born."
Most of tho pantheistic Sufis look upon Iblls as their teacher in unification
and regard his refusal to bow down before Adam as a testimony of his strict
unitarianism. In his conversation with Iblis, Junaid asked him the reason for
his refusal and received the same reply. But Junaid does not become an
"advocate of the devil" like other pantheistic mystics, and points out his
(the devil's) mistake in taking oover under God's will (majbiyyah) in order to
violate His command (amr). Junaid said, "You lie. Had you been an obedient
servant, you would not have transgressed His command," thus stressing the
strictly monotheistic position that moral behaviour is the sine qua non of a
truly religious life which consists in total obedience to God's oommand (' ubudly-
yah). He defines 'ubudiyyah as the state in which a man realizes that all things
belong to God, that Ho ia the cause of thoir being and existence, and to Him
alone they will all return.•’
Trust in God (tawakind), according to Junaid, is to maintain your relation
with God now, as you had before you came into existence; it consists neithor
in acquisition (kasb) nor in non-acquisition, but in putting your heart in tuns
with God's promise." Repentance involves three stages: first, the expression
of regret at the wrong done; secondly, the resolve to avoid doing that wrong
for ever; and, thirdly, to purify oneself of all dross, evils, and impurities."
■' Ibid., p. 224.
Ibid., p. 227; Hujwiri. op. eil.. p. 281.
•• Attar, op. cd.. p. 213.
“ Hujwiri. op. cil.. pp. 282-83.
“ Qur'&n, vii, 168-67.
•• Arberry, op. cil., p. 57.
•’ 'Att*r, op. cil., p. 230.
" Ibid., p. 228.
•• Ibid., p. 229.
345
A History of Muslim Philosophy
B
AL-H ALLAJ
Al-Ball*] (abu al-Mughlth al-FIuaain bin Mansur bin Mabamma al-Baidkwi,
in Persian and Turkish literature abridged as Mansur) was a Muslim mystic
and thinker who taught in Arabic. He was born in Persia, at al-JOr, near
Baida to the north-eaat of ghir&z in 244/857. Baida was deeply arabicized;
the great grammarian SIbawaihi was bom there, among HAriUIyyah Yamani
clients. Hallij's father, a wool-carder by profejuion, took the boy. a wool-
cardcr by name (for in Arabio word holla] means a wool-carder), with him to
W4si(, an Arab city of the Hanbalites with a minority of the SiH'ahs. W&sit
had a good school in which teaching of the Qur’An was undertaken. At this
school, al-H*llAj became a trying to “interiorize” his recitation of the
Qur’ln, so that his "biemiUah" could become his "fam”, i.e., his invocation of
the name of God might unite him with God's creative will. So did he begin the
mystic quest. He became a disciple of Sahl bin 'Abd Allah of Tustar (the
founder of the SalAmiyyah school) whom he left in order to settle down in
Basrah, where he received the Sufi gown (khirqah) from ‘Amr bin 'L'thmln
Makkl's hands. Ho was married to umm al-Husain. It was a monogamic
wedding, unshaken during his whole life. From her he had three sons. She
already had a daughter from another Sufi, abu Ya'qub Aqpt' KamAba'i. The
KarnAba’ivyah, banu al-'Amm of Nahr Turah, were clients of the banu
MujAtbi (Tamlm clan) and political supporters of the rebellion of the Zanj, which
raised the slaves of Basrah against the 'AbbAsid Caliphate under a supposed
'Alid (Zaidi) leader. Such was the beginning of al-HallAj’s contacts with the
revolutionary Shiahs. contacts perceptible in the technical terms of his apolo
getics. AI-QallAj, in fact., remained always a Sunni, with a strong leaning to
wards hard asceticism in observing the RamadAn fasts and, when in Mecca,
in performing 'umruA,” in complete silence (cf. Qur'An xii, 27) so as to listen
to God from inside.
When he came back to Tustar, he threw off the khirqah to deliver God's
message to laymen, scribes, and publicans, most of them case-hardened and
sceptical. Some of them, of vizierial families, listened to him, becoming his
friends (Sunnis: QunnA’iyah: ibn Wahab and ibn Jarr&b), or his enemies
(ImAmls: ibn al-FurAt and ibn Naubakht), denouncing him either as a miracle
worker or as a trickster. Friends from Basrah induced him to carry on his
apologetical mission among the Arabs colonizing KhurAsAn. and among the
rihaf of the mujdhidtn. After five years al-HallAj came back to Tustar and, with
the help of Hamd QunnA'i, settled among workers of the imperial Dir al- firdi
(fashion-house) of Tustar (for the kiewah [covering] of the Ka'bah) in a suburb
of Baghdad. Then took place a second hajj. and a second mission to KhnrAsAn
’• 'Umroh is the pilgrimage performed at any time other than the »th of Dhu
al-Hijjah.
346
Early Sufic (Continued)
and TurkretAn (aa far aa MAfin-Turfan), with a kind of apocalyptical goal
(seeking the hiding-plaoe of the TAlaqAnlyyln, the future AnMr al-Mahdi}.
Then he performed his last on the Yaum ‘Ara/dt, he dedicated himself,
at the Waqfah, aa a substitute for the dhabthah (just as some Shi'aha think of
the Martyr of Karbala as d^nhi/wh 'a$im). Back in BsghdAd he began an
extraordinary way of talking in the streets, about his desire of dying as sacri
ficed by the Law for the sake of the Law (Knu anlum mujMidun, wa ana
ibahid). It was in the last dayB of Mu'ta^id’s Caliphate that a decree f/atim)
waa given against alflallAj for his queer way of proving his loro for God by
offering his life, by a ZAhiri lawyer ibn Dawud (d. 297/909), the author of a
charming anthology about pure love (Kildb al-Zahrah). But another lawyer,
ibn Suraij, a ShAfi'i, saved him by pleading that mystical utterances were not
to be judged on juridical grounds. It is said that one day al-HallAj uttered the
famous words ana al-Haqq (I am the Creative Truth), a kind of eschatological
cry /named stydA bi al-Haqq) in the Holy Qur'an. "Blasphemy," said the
lawyers. Al-IJallAj himself explained it in verses: "Oh! the secret of my heart
is so fine that it is hidden from all living beings. . .Involved in the Sunni
plot of the Caliph ibn al-Mu'tazz, al-HallAj was prosecuted; he remained hidden
in Susa near the tomb of Prophet Daniel, the "announcer of the Last Day,”
but was arrested in 301/913. The first trial under ‘Ali bin ‘Tsa, the "good vizier,"
was suspended through the influence of ibn Suraij, and al-Hallaj was merely
kept as a prisoner in the royal palace for nearly eight years and eight months.
Afraid of Ballaj's influence on the Court of the Caliph Muqtadir, two gjjl'ah
leaders, the unHl ibn Rauh NaubaUiti and his rival ShalmAghani, succeeded
in persuading the vizier IjAmid bin al-'AbbAs, through his Shi ah financial
supporters, to reopen the trial on two charges. Tho first of these charges was
that he was a jArmafian' agent of the FAtimids. It is true that IJallAj on
grounds not political but spiritual did share with the FAtimids belief in the
apocalyptical significance of the year 290 of tho Hijrah, for in the esoteric
alphabet 290 means “Maryam" or "FAtir." The seoond charge waa that with
the QArma(ian rebels he advocated the destruction of the Ka'bah and Mecca.
It is also a fact that, while in Mecca, Ilallaj did write to his disciplo Shakir,
"Destroy your Ka'bah," meaning in esoteric language "Do sacrifice your life
for tho sake of Islam aa I do." The QAdi abu 'Umar IJammAdi, a MAliki, insisted
on taking this allegorical letter in an unjustifiable literal sense. And al-BallAj
was condemned to death, and "crucified" (mosluh. cf. Qur'An. vu. 124) on 24th
of Ci)u al-Qa'dah 309/2flth of March 922. Curiously enough, this year 309 is the
Qur'anio year of the "Awakening of the Seven Sleepers" (Qur'An, xviii. 25),
celebrated by tbe IslmA'Ilite FAfimid propagandists as the year of tho coming
out of the Mahdi from the cave of concealment (but al-IJallaj's disci pies explain
ed it mystically).
Al-QallAj’s crucifixion has been looked at by the Sunni Sufis as the height
(mi'rdj) of saintship; and many beautiful utteranoee are ascribed to al-HallAj
while on the stake. Near QughOri, the high chamberlain put on mourning
347
A History of Muslim Philosophy
clothes publicly with tho approval of the Queen-Mother, £h»gbab. And some
Sufi witnesses, Qannid end Sllibli. acknowledged his death as the seal of a
most saintly vocation.
Though it was proclaimed after the year 309/922 that al -If aliij had been
executed in compliance with the unanimity (i)md') of the jurists (fuqaNT).
yet a respected lawyer, his friend ibn 'Ata, had objected to this verdict and
was killed for that- Ibn 'AfA'a death nullifies this so-called The memory
of al-Hallaj slowly spread aflame with beauty. Among the Sh&ii'lyyah, ibn
al-Muslimah, the very day he was appointed aa vizier (437/1045), was seen
coming to al-Halid)'s place of crucifixion (nuulib al-IJallij) and praying—a
silent act of rehabilitation. Sufis have kept his creed /‘aqidahf aa a motto in
their exoterical books (e g., KalAb&dfci, and Qugfaairi); and they have his
name "understood" in their cooterical imdd (with his friends Shibli and Naar-
abadhi). Farkl al-Dln 'Atfir celebrated al-Hallij's martyrdom as the “apex"
of Sufism, and the great painter Behzfid painted it for Baiqara in Herat.
Independent Muslim philosophers, BalUli, Mantiqi, abu Hayyin Tauhldi,
and abu al-Hasan Dailami, set off the metaphysical originality of al-I^allAj’s
spiritual experiences. In spite of his adversaries classifying him among the
adepts of existential unity (waftdal al~wujud), al-^ail&j has been proved
to be a vindicator of cognitive unity (tmhdal td-shuhud). ‘Abd al-Qadir
Jllani, Ruzbehan B&qili. and Fakbr al-Dln FSrisi have given convincing
explanations of and commentaries on the doctrine of Unity, in spite of the
subtleties of ibn 'Arabi's school. JalAl al-Dln Rumi, and after him the great
mystics of India, SAmnAni, 1 Ali Hamsdani, Mafebdum-i JahAniyAn, Gisudarfag,
Ab mad Sirhindi, and Belli have considered al-Hallaj to be a believer in
cognitive unity (fiuMdi). In his Jdvid NdmeA, tbe great poet-philosopher of
Pakistan. IqbAl. stated that al-Hallaj was a kind of “Promethean" person
ality. L. Maasignon also heard him say this when Iqbal gave him the privilege
of a visit to him in Paris in 1351/1932.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Early Sufis
•AtfAr. Tadhkiral al-Auliya', NAmi Frees. Lucknow, 1914; 'Ali Hujwlri, Kathf
al-Mahjub, English translation by R. A. Nicholson. Liuao A Co.. London, 1911;
Qutbsiri. ol Rieilah. Egypt. 1330/1011; al-Kal*b*dili. KiM4 al-Ta'arrul li MadiKab
Ahl al-Tafawtruf, translated into English by A. J. Arherry (The Doctrine of the
SufU). Cambridge University Press. Cambridge. 1935; SarrSj. KMb oILuma'. ed.
R. A. Nicholson. London. 1914; Zak. MuMrak. al-Tafawwuf al-Iddm, H al-Adab
w-al-AUUq. 2 Vole., DAr al-Kutub al'Arabi. Cairo. 1954; A. J. Arberry, Sufism.
Cambridge, 1960; JAml, Na/ahAl al-Uru, Lucknow. 1915; Margaret Smith, Rabiah
the Myetic. Cambridge. 1925; R. A. Nicholson. The Myetieeo) Idam, London. 1914;
Slud.es in Islamic Myrticiem. Cambridge. 1921: The Idea of Pereonalily in Sufiem,
Cambridge, 1923.
Al-HalUj
AI-HallAj. Kitab ol-Toudeln (with BAqilPs commentary in Persian), ed. L.
Massignon. Paris, 1913; Akhbdr td^alldj. 3rd ed. of the Arf'dr wo Mundjdi, colleotad
348
■Abd al-QAdir Jlltai and Shihab al.Dtn Suhrawarrii
An.h^dST>,,b?' ‘bn Aq“- “d ib" alQa«»i’' P"* >®«: al-HallAj’.
Ambm Dimin (the Penuan u apunous, and must be ascribed to a Inter author,
^war,I"“ (d- 839/1435)) published twice in Paris (cf. Journal Analiauo.
l»3l. and Oeuthner, 1955), and translated into French.
On the flall&jian Turkish poetry, and on tho great HalUjian poem, asenbod
tn Persian to all HalUj, see Revuo de Etudr, Mamu/ue. Paris, 1946.
, ,A "ta'iiyah’' "" Pereian on al-HaU&j and Shams Tabris has been found in Rc«ht
(cf. Rev. Etud. 1,1.. 1955, pp. 69-91). “
‘Abd ol-Ghafilr Farh&di published an extensive notice on al-HaU&j in Kabul
in 1951.
The theological condemnations of al Hallij by fuqahd' are to be found among
ibn Taimlvyah'a decrees (laUwa). See notes in the Akhbdr above quotod. in ibn
Dibyah Nlbrfls edited in Baghdad by 'Abbas ‘AxxAwi, and in the eoriv Imdmi
writings (ibn Bibawaih. Mufid, A. J. Tiisi).
Later on. the greet Na,ir al-Dta TOsi included al-HaUAj among tho celebrities
in hia Au^f al^Ord/.
On hia metaphysical tenets, see R. A. Nicholson. "Hallij" in Eneydopucdut o/
Religion and Ethic. and L. Maaaignon. La Pacion d'al-HaUai. martyr
do I'lRam. Paris. Vol. II.
Chapter XVIII
■ABD AL-QADIR JILANI AND SHIHAB AL-DTN
SUHRAWARDI
A
•ABD AL-QADIR JlI.ANl
Shaikh 'Abd al-Qadir JIlAni (470-561/1077-1105) wag born at a period
when Malik shah tho Saljuq (-465—485/1072—1091) ruled over a vast Muslim
Empire. This period is famous for great patronage of learning. It was during
this period that the great NifAmlyyah University was founded in Baghdad
by Ni$4m al-Mu'k. But after Malikshih’s death in 485/1092. fight for succes
sion started which brought about anarchy and disorder in the country. In
513/1119 Sanjar succeeded in securing the throne and was crowned at Baghdad.
But after his death in 552/1157. there was once again the same anarchy and
disorder. Constant wars betwocn the different factions of the Saljtiqs destroyed
the peace and security of the Empire.
But there are two events which stand out prominently. They contributed
much towards the disintegration of the social and political structure of
t.hc Muslims of this period. The first waa the rise and gradual spread of the
group of people called Assassins under the leadership of Hasan bin 5“bl>ib.
Thousands of people, great and small, fell to the dagger of these fanatics.
The second was the starting of the Crusades. The first Crusade lamed from
488-489/1095 to 493/1099. The Christian hordes succeeded in occupying
349
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Jerusalem in 492/1099. and putting to death thousands of innocent Muslims and
Jews. News of the disaster and huge processions of refugees entered Baghdid
where people clamoured for revenge. But the Saljuq rulers were too busy in
their ware to take up the challenge. The Christian invaders were allowed, fol
a long time, to rob and destroy the country. Life became unsettled and then
was no peace or security.
It was amid such circumstances that Shaikh 'Abd al-Qidir lived at Baghdad
where he had come from far off Jilin. Being a man of great intelligence he
was soon able to acquire what the usual system of education had to offer. He
then became a pupil of a Sufi saint Hamm&d under whose spiritual care be
acquired great proficiency in the mystic lore. For eleven yeara he spent his
life in total seclusion from worldly affairs. After this period of retirement and
spiritual discipline he came back to Baghdad and adopted the career of a
preacher to the people in response to what he calls the “inner command." The
students and tho people in large numbers began to gather round him and within
a short time the premises where he had started lecturing had to be enlarged
and expanded. At the age of 51, he got married, and died at the ripe age of 91
He was a man of charming personality and by his eloquent speech exerted
great influence on the people. He stands in the forefront of the Muslim mystics
of all ages, and is the founder of the Qidirlvvah school of Sufism which
includes within its fold many renowned Sufis of the Muslim world.
Futiih al-Qbaib (Revelations of the Unseen), a collection of eighty sermon<
which he delivered on different occasions, reflects the unstable condition ol
the times. He emphasizes in almost every sermon that social ruin and instability
is the result of excessive materialistic outlook on life; true well-being is the
result of a harmonious development of an individual's personality whose
material as well as spiritual demands are being properly looked after. But
as a reaction against the prevalent materialism he emphasizes religious values
to an extent which seems to be exaggerated. In the fifty-fourth Discourse, for
instance, he advises people in general to adopt an attitude of total and com
plete indifference towards the world, to kill desires and ambitions of all kinds.
In order that his indifference in worldly life may become oomplete and un
alloyed, it is proper for an individual to remove all things from his heart and
cultivate pleasure in annihilation, abiding poverty, and want, so that there
may not remain in his heart even so much pleasure aa that of sucking the
stone of a date.1
With regard to the question of free-will he adopts an attitude of determinism,
though sometimes he tries to avoid the extremes of deterministic position by
resort to what has come to be known in Muslim scholastic circles aa acquisition
fkasb). He says, "Do not forget the position of human efforts so as not to
fall a victim to tho creed of the determinists (Jabriyyah), and believe that
no action attains its fulfilment but in God. Nor should yon sav that actions
1 Fufuk al-Qbaib. Discourse M. pp. 102-04.
350
•Abd al-Qadir JUAni and Shihab al-DIn Suhrawarrli
of man proceed from anything but from God, because if you aay to you will
become an unbeliever and belong to the category of people known aa the
indotcrministe (Qadariyyah). You should rather say that actions belong to
God in point of oreation and to man in point of acquisition (hub)"' But in
a later Discourse (sixteenth), he pointe out that to rely on hub is shirk, i.e.,
association of partners with God. There is a verse in the Qur'in** which refers
to a particular episode in the life of Abraham. While denouncing idol-worship,
ho says that it is God who created you as well your handiwork fta'moMnJ.
Muslim pantheists and dcterminists have always used this verse in support
of their contention, rendering ia'malun as "what you do,” instead of correct
rendering, "what you make." Shaikh Jllani here follows the same line, arguing
for total determinism, though he does not advocate cessation of all activities.
*
There is another verse of the Qur'An in which God says, "Enter the garden
of paradise because of what you have been doing." * Here, the text unequi
vocally points out that paradise is tho reward of actions. But this being
incompatible with the creed of determinism. Shaikh Jilani hastens to add,
"Glory be to Him, how generous and merciful of Him I He ascribes tho actions
to the people and says that their entry into paradise is on account of their
deeds, whereas their deeds owe their existence to His help and mercy."*
Good and evil are t he twin fruits of a tree; all is the creation of God,’ though
we should ascribe all evil to ourselves.
* There is, however, the question of
undeserved suffering which a man of conscience has to undergo. Shaikh Jilini
thinks that the spiritual peace which is indispensable for a mystic cannot be
said to be complete unless he is trainod in tho school of adversity. The degree
of the undeserved suffering, according to him, determines his spiritual rank.
He quotes a tradition of the Holy Prophet in this respect: "We prophets are
beset with the greatest number of trials and so on according to rank." *
What ia essential is to hold fast to faith for the ultimate victory of good over
evil. This victory ia possible not only in the hereafter but also in this world.
If a man has faith and is grateful, three things will put out the fire of calamity
in this life.
Men can be divided, according to the Shaikh, into four categories. The
first category includes those who havo neither tongue nor heart. They arc
the majority of the ordinary people, who do not care for truth and virtue and
lead a life of subservience to the senses. Such people should be avoided except
when they are approached and invited to the path of righteousness and
■ Ibid.. Discourse 10, pp. 23-24.
■ Qur'An. xxxvii. 98.
• Futub al-Qbaib. Discourse 27. pp. 80-88. Soo also Discourse 13. p. 29, and
Discourse 70. pp. 129-30.
• Qur'An, xvi, 32.
• FulHh al-Giaib, Discourse 27.
’ Ibid., Discourse 27. p. 88.
• Ibid.. Discourso 70, p. 130,
• Ibid., Discourse 27. p. 69.
351
A History of Muslim Philosophy
godliness In that ease you shall be following in the honourable foot
steps of the prophets.” The second category includes people who have tongue
but no heart. They are peoplo of great learning and knowledge and possess
eloquent tongue with which they exhort people to live a life of piety and
righteousness. But they themselves lead a life of sensuality and rebellion.
Their speech is charming but their hearts are black. To the third category
belong people who have a heart but no tongue. They are the faithful and true
believers. They are aware of their own shortcomings and blemishes and are
constantly engaged in purifying themselves of all dross. To them silence and soli
tude are far safer for spiritual health than talking to and mixing with people.
To the last category belong peoplo who have heart as well as tongue. They
are in possession of the true knowledge of God and His attributes and are able
to reach and understand the ultimate truth. Equipped with this wisdom and
truth they invite people to the path of virtue and righteousness and. thus,
become true representatives of the prophets. They are at the highest stage,
next only to prophethood, in the spiritual progress of mankind.10 11
With reference to mystical states, he gives us four stages of spiritual
development. The first is the state of piety when man leads a life of obodience
to the religious Law, totally reliant on God and without any reoourse to the
help of other people. The second in the state of reality which is identical with
the state of saintliness (wMyah). While in this state, man obeys God's com
mandment famr). This obedienoe is of two kinds. The first is that an individual
strives to satisfy his basic needs, but abstains totally from any luxurious
indulgence in life and protects himself against all open and bidden sins. The
second obedience is to the inner voice, to what is directly revealed to him.
All his movements and even his rest become dedicated to God. The third is
the state oi resignation when the individual submits completely to God. The
fourth and last is the state of annihilation (fanA') which is peculiar to Abddl
who are pure Unitarians and gnostics.1’
The state of annihilation ia the unitive state in which the individual attains
nearness” to God, which implies discarding one's own desires and purposes
and identifying oneself with the cosmic purpose of God. In this state man
comes to realize that there is nothing in existence except God”—a position
10 fihaikb JllAni extols in many sermons the role of a mystic saint who, after
completing his spiritual discipline and attaining proficiency in mystic loro, assumos
the onerous duty of loading the people to the way of God. The ideal type of a mystic
in his eyes is not one who becomes a recluse or anchorite but a man of the world
who by the example of his life and the words of his mouth helps tbo ignorant
and misguided to the way of laqwa. righteousness.
11 Fuluh al Otaib. Discourse 33. pp. 68-89. See also Discourse 77 where a
different division is presented.
11 Ibid.. Discourse 10, pp. 23-26. See also Discourse 18. p. 40.
11 JiUni is careful to point out that the term union (u-uful) is only
symbolical, for this union is something totally different when applied to human
individuals. See Fuluh al-Qiaib, Discourse 17, p. 36.
11 Fuluh al gtaib. Discourse 40. p. 81. and Discourse 17, p. 37.
S52
'Abd al.Qidir Jlliiii and fihihab al-Din Suhrawardi
which u> characteristic of pantheistic mysticism, though we do not find in the
Zu/ui aLQkaib this statement associated with the usual metaphysical implica
tions that we find, for instance, in ibn ‘Arabi and his followers. It is only an
expression of psychological experience of the individual traversing the mystic
Path. A man who reaches this stage acquires the creative power ftahrin) like
God's, and his ordering a thing to be (kun) becomes as effective aa God’s.'•
Shaikh JU&ni holds that mystio intuition gives the recipient knowledge of
reality that is not possible to gain through reason. Not only that; vision
(kafhl) and experience (muthskadah) overwhelm the reasoning power of man.
This manifestation reveals two aspects of God: (a) Hie majesty (jalsl) and
(b) His beauty (jamdl). both of which are revealed to one at different times.1’
But in another Discourse he approaches the problem in a truly empirical way.
He says that the only way to know Reality is to look to the self (na/i) as
well as to observe nature (d/uq) It is only through this approach that we can
arrive at a true conception of God. He quotes with approval the following
statement of ibn al-'Abbis, the famous Companion of the Holy Prophet:
"Everything reflocts one or other of the attributes of God and every naipe
signifies one of His names. So surely you are surrounded by His names, His
attributes, and His works. He is manifest in His attributes and concealed in
His person. His person is concealed in His attributes and His attributes are
concealed in His actions. He has revealed His knowledge through His will
and His will is manifest in His continuous creative activity. Ho has concealed
His skill or workmanship and has expressed it only when He has so willed.
So Ho is hidden is His aspect of jAuiA (unseen) and He ia manifest in His
wisdom and power."1’
Mysticism, according to the Shaikh, is not the result of discussion and
talk but of hunger and privation. It consists of generosity, cheerful submission,
patienoe, constant communion with God through prayer, solitude, wearing of
woollen dress, globe-trotting, and /o^r,” and also of humility, sincerity, and
truthfulness,”
B
SHIHAB AL-DlN suhrawardi
Shaikh ahihib al-Din Suhrawardi (539-632/1144-1234) was born at a time
when tho fate of the whole Muslim world was hanging in the balance.
The last king of the Saljflqs, Sultan Sanjar, died in 552/1157. Soon after the
Ghuzz* came on the scene, and carried fire and sword wherever they went;
peace was, however, restored by the Khwarizm Sh&hs. But in 615/1218 started
*■ Ibid.. Discourse 46, p. B3; Discourse 13. pp. 40-42: Discourse 18. p. BO;
Discourse 28; etc.
>• Ibid., Discourse », p. 21.
>’ Ibid., Discourse 74, pp. 135-36.
•• Ibid., Discourse 75, p. 137.
” Ibid., Discourse 76.
353
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the Mongol invasion under Chingiz Kh»n. One town after another was ravaged
and people were indiscriminately massacred. There waa nobody to check Hub
advance. The people had lost all morale.
It was during this period of insecurity and fear that Shaikh Suhrawardi
lived. He died in 624/1226 eight years after the death of Chingiz Ehan. These
events must have influenced the mind of tho Shaikh, hence the note of pes
simism often met with in hiB work 'Awdrif al-Ma'Ari/, in which ha expresses
with a sad heart the dedine in moral character of his contemporaries. He
passed the major part of his life at Baghdad where he now lies buried. He
founded the school of mysticism which is known as Sahrawardlyyah after his
name. His work ‘Amiri/ al-Ma'arij is a standard treatise on mysticism exten
sively used in all mystic circles.
Origin 0/ Sufism —According to him. the word fifi is etymologically
derived from "ft/," the coarse woollen doth which, as he sayB, was wom
by the Holy Prophet.” He enumerates several other views: (i) The Sufis
are those who stand in the first rank (faff) before God; (ii) the word was
originally fa/awi and waa later on changed into sufi; (iii) it was derived from
fuffak, the mound where a group of Muslims used to spend their time in
religious learning and ascetic ways of life. According to Suhrawardi, these
derivations aro etymologically incorrect, though with regard to the third it
may bo said that the life led by the people of the fufiak resembled the pattern
of life adopted by the Sufis. He also refers to a particular group of the people
of Khur&sAn’1 who used to live in caves far off from inhabited places. They
were called Skagu/liyyah, from Sbagu/t. the name of the cave. The people of
Syria used to call them Jau'igyak.
A detailed discussion about the origin of the word fiifi has already been
given in Chapter XVI, where, on the authority of Sarrftj, it has been main
tained that the word rufi waa in use in Arabia even in pre-Islamic days. Suhra-
wardi, however, thinks that this word was not used in the time of the Holy
Prophet. According to some people, it became current during the third genera-
tion after the Prophet (Taba‘ Tabi'in). According to others, it came into use
in the third oentury of the Hijrah. The titles of ^aAdboA (Companions of the
Prophet) and Tabi'in (their Successors) were held in great esteem and,
therefore, the word fufi—a title of honour, no doubt—did not make its ap
pearance during their times. But when these peaceful times disappeared and
gave place to turbulent periods of unrest and political intrigue, pious people
found it convenient for their peace of mind to shun society and live in
seclusion and pass their time in meditation and spiritual exercises."
•• According to the tradition transmitted by Ans b. MAlik; of. ‘Amari/ al-
Ma'ari/. Chap. «.
11 KhurAsAn had been one of tho centres of Buddhist nussionariee before Islam
where, it seems, people adopted the practice of Buddhist Vkikshus in later times.
“ ShihAb al-DIn Suhrawardi, ‘Awdri/ al-Ma'ari/, Urdu translation, Newel
Kiahore Press, Lucknow. 1B2«, Chap. 6-
354
'Abd al-Q&dir JUAni and Shih&b al-Din Suhrnwurdi
W/iat u Su/itmJ—Suhrawardi tries to.establish a very intimate relationship
between Sufism and knowledge. According to him, knowledge that is followed
by moral behaviour is the main characteristic of Sufi life. Such knowledge
ia called by him Fiyh which is not used in the usual legal sense but for spiritual
insight aa it is used in the Qur'Kn. Ho refers to several Qur'&nio verses to
prove thia point. First, he.quotes tho verse; “He (God) taught man what he
did not know,”" and ooncludea that the spiritual status of man ia baaed solely
on knowledge." Secondly, he holds that Sufis are the people who acquire
spiritual insight into religion and this helps them lead people to the right
path. Thia spiritual perception, according to him, pertains to the sphere of
the heart and not to tho sphere of the head." He argues that, according to the
Qur'&n, knowledge and moral uprightness are the characteristics of the truly
learned persons. He holds that knowledge ia tho consequence of laqwa, i.e.,
piety and moral integrity. In a verse it is said that “those of His servants
only who are possessed of knowledge have laqwa"'* This verse ia very signi
ficant in establishing the relationship between knowledge and moral behaviour,
for, as Suhrawardi puts it,” it excludes knowledge from thoee who are not
characterized by moral integrity (taqwa).
But to what kind of knowledge does Suhrawardi refer 1 In this connection
he enumerates different views. According to some, it ia the knowledge of the
psychological states of an individual, for, without thia kind of knowledge, it
ia contended, it ia not possible for a person to distinguish between different
types of revelations and experiences." According to others, it is the knowledge
concerning worldly matters, for, without proper information in thia respect, a
person is liable to be misled in his religious pursuits. According to abu falib
of Mecca, it is the knowledge of the five religious duties of a Muslim. But,
according to Suhrawardi himself, the knowledge which ia incumbent on all
Muslims ia tho knowledge of religious commandments and prohibitions. And
yet true knowledge, which manifests itaelf in practice and moulds and informs
the life of the individual possessing that knowledge, is not formal knowledge
that ia imparted in schools and colleges but a eUte of the heart that grasps
the truth of things without thereby becoming the master of deuils. Such a
person is called in the Qur'&n tho one firmly rooted in knowledge frdsii* fi
He calls it the knowledge which one receives as a legacy (‘ilm
•• Qur'&n, xov, 6.
M 'Aw&rif al-Ma'&rif, Chap. 1, p. 17.
“ In another place ho explicitly aaye that this knowledge is intuitional. Only
he who experiences it can fully realize its import. You may describe the swoetness
of sugar in any way you like, but it can be realized only by one who tastes it. Ibid..
Chap. 3, p. 43.
Qur'&n, xxxv, 28.
■’ 'Awdtif al-Ma'drif, Chap. 3, p. 46.
» Reference is to what is theologically called a* interpolations of Satan in the revs-
lations of saints. Soo the Qur'an, xxii, 61. and also ‘AwOn/al-Ma Unf. Chap. 3. p. 30.
*• Qur'&n, iii, 6.
355
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ai-tcirStAah) from the prophets and saints He distinguishes it from the know
ledge gained through formal education film al-dirasah)Their relation,
according to him, is like the relation of butter and milk. It is not milk but
butter that is the object of man. We take milk only bocauso it yields butter
and fat. This type of knowledge is usually divided into three stages: knowledge
by inference, knowledge by perception (or observation), and knowledge by
personal experience or intuition film al-yafin. ‘ain al-yaqin. and haqq alyaqin).
A person who attains to tho stage of intuition, though less careful in observing
ritualistic formalities, is far superior to a man who has many ritualistic prac
tices to his credit but whose knowledge is not of the highest type.”
Sufism, according to Suhrawardi, is characterized by two things. It consists
in following the practice of the Holy Prophet (Sunnah) and in inculcating
purity of motives and attaining the highest integrity of character. There are
two different categories of Sufis. The first includes those persons in whom mystic
illumination (kaiht) is followed by exercise of personal effort (ijtihad). He
quotes the example of Pharoah’B magicians. When they realized the spiritual
stature of Moses in comparison with their petty tricks, they were overwhelmed
by the effulgence of spiritual illumination as a result of which they decided
there and then to break with the Pharaoh in favour of Moses. This decision of
theirs for which they willingly bore all the terrible consequences with which
the Pharoah threatened them came to them with an ease that follows
spiritual illumination. To the second category belong t hose people who lead a
hard ascetic life spending, their days in prayers and nights in meditation. It
is only after a long struggle spread over days, months, and years that they
reoeive divine illumination. Here illumination is the fruit and crown of personal
efforts and hard ascetic life. He quotes a saying of Junaid: "We did not gain
access to the domain of Sufism through discursive reasoning or intellectual
discussion but through hunger, abdication of worldly lust and prestige, and
discarding of even lawful things.’’
There are two other kinds of people usually called Sufis but. according to
Suhrawardi, they cannot be included among mystics at all. The first are the
ma/dAubi, i.e., those who receive spiritual illumination through divino grace
but cannot reap the full fruit of their illumination because they are not
able to supplement it with their personal efforts. The others are the ascetics
who spend their whole life in self-mortification and meditation but whoso
efforts are not crowned with illumination."
In another place, discussing the qualities of a spiritual guide, he divides
persons into four categories: (I) Pure or absolute ascetic (Mik). (2) Pure or
•• 'AwOrif al MaArif. Chap. 9. p. 21; Chap. 6, p. 14; Chap. 28, p. 50.
" IM.. Chap. 3. p. 34.
" IM., pp. ttl-64. He adds that any revelation or ecstatic experience (tori/
or wajd) which is contrary to the Sunnah of the Holy Prophet is unacceptable to
the Sufis.
356
‘Abd al Qadrr JlUru and fifcihtb al-Dln Suhrawardi
absolute majihib. People belonging to theeo two categories do not deserve
to be adopted aa spiritual guides. Tho absolute ascetic retains the consciousness
of self to the last. Ho starts with ascetic practices but, unfortunately, he is not
able to ascend to the stage of fanj/. The absolute rAajdhub. on the other hand,
receives through divine grace a little illumination, and some veils from the
face of Reality (God) are removed for him, but ho does not put in the requisite
labour that forms an indispensable part of mystio discipline. (3) First sdlilc
and afterwards majdbub. Such a person is fit for becoming a guide. He starts
with ascetio practices and reaches the goal of his endeavour, viz., spiritual
illumination, which relieves him of the severity of his earlier discipline. He
becomes tho repository of divine wisdom. (4) Hut the moot perfect stage,
according to him, is the fourth, viz., first majdbub and afterwards sdlit. Such
a person receives divine illumination in the beginning and veils are removed
from his heart. His interest in the material world vanishes and he looks to
wards the spiritual world with eagerness and joyful expectations. This inner
transformation affects his outward life and the antagonism between love and
Law ceases for him. His outward and inward life, this world and the other
world, wisdom and power, all become one. His faith is so deep that even if
all the veils that hide the face of the Real were removed, he will gain nothing
thereby.”
Suhrawardi makes a distinction between a person of the third rank and a
person of tho fourth rank. The former who follows the path of a lover (mufribb)
is freed from the bonds of the lower self (najt) but is tied down in tho bondage
of the heart. The latter who traverses the way of the Beloved (Mabbib) is
freed both from the lower self and the heart.” Again, the former follows the
forms of action (suwar al-a'mal) and thinks that just as a man cannot do with
out a body so long aa he is alive, so action of one sort or other is indispensable
for him. But the man belonging to the fourth category passes beyond all
these. He leaves behind everything—lower self (naft). heart, states, and
actions—and achieves oomplete unity with God to the extent that God be
comes his earn and eyes so that he hears with God's ears and sees with God's
eyes.”
Sufism covers both poverty (/agr) and continence (tubd), but is identical
with neither, b'agr is a difficult term to translate. Usually it means poverty,
but in mystic morality it signifies the positive attitude of total independence
from worldly needs. Suhrawardi quotes different definitions and descriptions
of faqr in Sufism given by several eminent mystics. Ruyam says that Sufism is
based on three principles, the first of which ia attachment to poverty. Ma'rflf
of Karkh says that he who does not possess /o^r ia not a Sufi. Fagr, according
•• Ibid.. Chap. 10, pp. 103-07. But Qjjazali thinks otherwise. According to
him. the third category is tho perfect specimen of spiritual leaders. See B.A. Dar'B
article. "Intellect and Intuition." in Iqbal. Vol. IV. No. 3, pp. 97-99.
“ He defines na/l aa a dark earthly voil and qalb aa a veil of heavenly light.
“ Awdrif al-Ma'aril. Chap. 10, pp. 103-07.
3S7
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to Shibli, is indifference towards all except God.” According to usage of the
terms in Syria,” there is no different* between Sufism and faqr. They argue
on the basis of the Qur'inic verse that ‘•(alms are for) the poor (laqari’) who
have devoted themselves to the way of God,"” which, according to them, is
the description of the Sufis. But Suhrawardi disagrees with this view. He
thinks that a person’s constant attachment to poverty and fear of riches is a
sign of weakness; it amounts to reliance on external causes and conditions and
dependence on expected reward. But a true Sufi is above all these things. He
is motivated neither by fear nor by rewards; he is above all such limitations.
Again, adoption of poverty and avoidance of riches imply exercise of personal
will and freedom of choice which is contrary to the spirit of Sufism. A true
Sufi has subjected his will to the will of God and, therefore, he sees no difference
in poverty or riches.
Sufism is, thus, distinct from /aqr, though the latter forms the basis of the
former in the sense that the way to Sufism passes through Iaqr, not in tho
sense that both are identical or indispensable to each other. The same is the
case with asceticism (zuM), which may be a preparatory stage for Sufism but
cannot be identified with it at all There is a Qur'&nic verse which says to the
believers to be "upright f^atrwdmin) for Allah and bearer of witness with
justice."88 This uprightness (qawwdmtyyah), according to Suhrawardi, is the
essence of Sufism. There are three stages in the mystic process; first, faith
fimdn); secondly, knowledge film)-, and lastly, intuition (dhavq). When a
person is at the first stage, he is called “one who is like a true Sufi in appearance
and dress (mutaihabih)." When he attains to the second stage, he is called "one
who pretends to be a Sufi (mutafaurwif)." Only he who reaches the last stage
derserves to be called a true Sufi.” Suhrawardi again refers to a Qur'Anic
verse8’ where three different kinds of persons are mentioned who have been
chosen by God as tho repositories (wanth) of the knowledge of the Book:
“Of them is he who makes his soul suffer a Ices, of them is he who takes
a middle course, and of them is he who is foremost in deeds of goodness."
The Qur'in uses the word zilim for the first, muqtafid for the second, and
aabiq for the third. According to some. pUim is the ascetic (ziihid), muqbuid
“ One mystic, abu al Mutaffar Finnaisi, said dial faqir is one who ia independent
oven of God. Such a saying is, of course, a blasphemy, but almost all mystics have
tried to explain away its sting. Quthairi in his RwOlah and Suhrawardi in his book
both try to justify this saying, but ibn al-Qayyim is not satisfied with any of those
explanations and rejects this definition in lolo. See lalanri Tatawwu), al-HilSl Book
Agency, Lahore, pp. 124-28.
” Syria here does not stand for the geographical area which ia now called Syria.
Previously, nearly all tho land now including Iraq, Jordan, Lebanon, Syria, etc.,
was called Syria.
” Qur'&n, ii, 273.
•• Ibid., v. 8.
•“ 'Awdri/ al-Ma'Unf. Chap. 7, pp. 80ff.
81 Qur'&n. xxv, 32.
358
'Abd al Qidir JUm and Suhtb al-DIn Suhrawardi
ia a gnostic ('arif), and sabiq ia the lover (mubibb). According to others, the
first is one who cries when any calamity befalls him, the second is one who
patiently beam it, while tho third feels positive pleasure in it. According to
another version, tho first are those who worship God carelessly and aa a matter
of routine, the second do it with hope and fear, while the third are those
who do not forget God at any time. These three categories of people accord
ing to Suhrawardi are identical with the three types of mystics: Muta-
flhabih, Mutasawwif and the Sufi, respectively.*44
He refers to two other groups. The first are MaUmitlyyah who do not
manifest good deeds and do not hide evil. But they are inferior to a true Sufi
who is so engrossed in hie experiences and illumination that he does not know
what to hide and what to manifest.“ The second are Qalandsriyyah who are
people of integrity but who do not subject themselves to full ascetic discipline.
They have no ambition for farther spiritual progress and lead a life of happiness
and contentment.44
He mentions a group of people who claim that fiJori'aA (the religious Law)
is binding only up to a certain stage. When reality manifests itself to a gnostic,
the bonds of the Law disappear. Suhrawardi holds that these are misguided
people, for Law and reality (SAari'aA and Haqiqah/ are not antagonistic
but interdependent. He who enters the sphere of reality (Haqiqab) beoomes
bound to the rank of slavohood fubudiyyab) Those who subscribe to the
doctrine of incarnation (hulil) and employ the Christian terms lib-ill and
nona44 without understanding their real significance are all misguided people
He holds that the saying attributed to B&yazid, viz., tubbdni, ma a'zamu {jam
(all praiso to me. how exalted is my position I), if spoken by him at all must
have been said about God and not about himself as is commonly hold. Tho
ana al-Haq (I am the Truth) of ijallaj must be similarly interpreted according
to the true intention of the statement. Suhrawardi adds that if it were known
that Hall&j by this statement implied incarnation (hului), he would condemn
him outright.
There are some people who think that they receive words from God and
often converse with Him, and, as a result of this conversation, they claim to
receive messages which they attribute to God. Such people, according to Suhra
wardi, are either ignorant of the true nature of their experience or are deceived
by their intellectual oonceit. The words they hear are mere words which
appear in their mind and in no way can be attributed to God. Such things
44 'Awdri/ oLMa'art/, Chap. 7, p. 82.
44 Ibid.. Chap. 8. pp. 86-90.
44 Ibid.. Chap. 9. pp. 90-92.
*■ Labai and ndsui are terms for the divine and human aspects of Christ's
personality. This dootrine became tho basis of many controversies in the Christian
Church and many sects like the Nestorians and Monophysites (or Jaoobitol) appeared
in Syria and Egypt respectively. But in spite of Suhrawardl's protests, those terms
were used first by Hallft; and then by ibn 'Arabi and evon QhazXh, after which
they were accepted by almost all later mystics.
359
A History of Muslim Philosophy
appear when a man due to excessire ascetic practices is morally uplifted.
Their attribution to God should be like attribution of everything to the
Creator and not as a result of any kind of conversation with Him. He mentions
another group of people who claim to be submerged in the sea of Unity an
deny man’s free-will and look upon each human action as the direct conse
quence of God’s will or act. It seems that the Shaikh is referring to those
mystics who were later called pantheists, for they were the people who
claimed to be tho followers of the true doctrine of tauhid. interpreted by them
as the denial not only of any gods beeidea God but the denial of any existence
besides Hia.‘“
Suhrawurdi thinks that mystics must live in monasteries fkjdn^dhs) quite
unconcerned with tho problem of earning their bread. Without oomplete
break with tho world, it is not possible for them to turn their attention to
God and to the purification of their hearts Aa this seems to be incompatible
with the generally held view, he tries to justify his stand by reference to
certain Qur'anio verses and the Prophet’s traditions.
There is a verae which Bays: “Be patient and vie you in patience and be
steadfast (rubilu)."” Sahrawardi interprets the word rabitu in his own way
He says that ribdl was originally a place where horses were tied, then it camt
to be used for a fortress the residents of which gave protection to the people
Later on. it came to be employed for monasteries, for the people of monasteries
by their godliness are able to protect people from the influence of evil. Sc
the word rdbi/u in this verse stands, according to Suhrawardi, not for straggle
against the enemies but for struggle against the self, not for smaller jiMd
but for greater jihad, aa a tradition puts it.*1 But the Qur’inio verse" that
ho quotes in the beginning of the chapter" conclusively disproves the whole
tenor of his stand. It is clear that the Qur'&n refers to the houses, the inmates
of which have not turned their back upon the world but are engaged in full
worldly pursuits, and these pursuits never stand in the way of their remem
brance of God.
If monastic life is accepted aa an ideal for the mystic, as Suhrawardi does, it
follows naturally that begging and celibacy should be adopted as the basic
principles governing the life of the mystics. Naturally, therefore, we find him
•• ‘Awdril al-Mainl. Chap. 9, pp. 93-96.
•’ Qur’an, iii, 199.
•• He quotes the story of two brothers, ono of whom was a Sufi and the other
a soldier. The latter wrote to his brothor inviting him to join war against the enemy
lecause the tunes were critical. The Sufi brother refused to accept hia advice for
he preferred hie way of life to that of his brother's, with tho remarks: “If al) people
were to follow my path and remember Allah sitting on their prayer-carpets, they
would have conquered Constantinople.” ‘Awari/ al-Ma'dril, Chap. 13, pp. 126-26.
" Qur'An. xxiv. 36-37: "In houses which Allah has permitted to be exalted
so that His name may be remembered in them; they glorify Him therein in the
n.ortiing and evening, men whom neither merchandise nor selling diverts from
remembrance of Allah . .
360
'Abd ul-QAdir JU&ni and Qul.&b al-Din Suhrawardi
defending both these principles in spite of his view that they are not in oomplete
accord with the Islamic way of life, as enunciated by the Qur'an and sanctioned
by the Holy Prophet. While discussing begging, he refers to several traditions
which prohibit a man from begging and yet ho insists that a Sufi who is en
gaged in a life of total dedication to &ihr-AIUh (remembrance of God) is
compelled to satisfy his minimum physical needs of hunger and thirst by resort
to begging. For justifying his point of view he misinterprets the traditions.
There is a saying of the Prophet that the most lawful of foods for a Muslim is
what he earns by his own hands. Many mystics tried to explain it away by
holding that “earning by hand" means stretching hand in prayers to God for
sending them food through other persons. He refers to abu T4lib of Mecca who
rejected this misinterpretation and still dings to it.*11 There is another tradition
according to which the upper hand (of the giver) is better than the lower
hand (of the beggar). But Suhrawardi, following Hujwiri, interprets it again
in his own way. According to him, the upper hand is the hand of the beggar
who by receiving alms gives blessing to the alms-giver.11
Similarly, discussing the question of oelibacy, he wavers between the two
positions. On the one hand, he feels indined towards celibacy as a logical oon-
eequenoe of the conception of mysticism that he holds. On the other hand,
there are many traditions to the effect that he who does not marry dore not
belong to the Muslim community. Ultimately, he leaves the question to the
discretion of the individual mystic or to the advice of the spiritual guide.11
On the question of listening to music, again, his ottitude ia non-oommittal.
On the one hand, he quotes several eminent Sufis who were fond of music and
who referred to several traditions in their support. On the other, there were
several eminent persons who did not like it because, according to them, there
was no scriptural support for it. While discussing the question of musical
assemblies, he points out that some people look upon theae assemblies as
innovations. But ho adds that not all innovations are religiously blameworthy
and, therefore, the question under discussion cannot be deaided on this ground.11
Again, he quotes a tradition in support of the mystic dance (mjd) and tearing
of the mystic robe (j^irgah) in theee assemblies and yet adds that traditions
invariably reject them as unlawful,11 and, therefore, the matter stands where
it is. But on the whole he seems to be in favour of music.11
With regard to travel, Suhrawardi thinks that a Sufi cannot be expected
to conform to any particular pattern of life. He divides Sufis into four claase<
11 -Awiri/ al-Madril, Chap. 19, pp. 178-79.
11 Ibid.. Chape. 19. 20. pp. 17S, 188.
11 Ibid., Chap. 21. pp. 192-206. It appears that, in his estimation of women
ho is influenced by the Christian doctrine that woman is tho source of all evil
Soo p. 198.
11 Ibid., p. 224.
•• Ibid., p. 248.
“ Ibid., Chapo. 22, 23. 24 and 25.
361
A History of Muslim Philosophy
UI1U HKU1 VA> -------- ------
those who Htort their mystic life with a retreat to solitude and end up witn
travelling. Such persons happen to enjoy the company of a perfect saint and
under his guidance cover several stages of the mystic discipline and then
after maturity try to consolidate their position by travelling from place to
place. To the third category belong people who start their mystio life in
solitude and retirement and end with it. "Such people keep their heads on the
knees and find therein the Mount of Sinai.” In other words, they enjoy the
nearness and see the light of divine illumination. It is said that water
if stationary begins to stink. To this the mystics reply that one should
become as vast aa an ocean and thereby become protected from stagnation
and nasty smell. To the fourth category belong people who are always
on the move and with them travelling is the beginning and end of mystic
Peiichotajy Appelilivt Sell, Heart.—The Shaikh bases his account of
the soul frtiA) on two verses of the Qur'&n. In the first it is held*’ that man
was created by God from fine clay, then it successively changed into a moist
germ, a clot of blood and flesh, till all of a sudden this oompound of apparently
ohemical changes assumed a form beyond the material plane, acquired the
new spiritual dimension and became a new creation (kkalqan dkhar). Beginning
aa a piece of matter, man acquiree at a certain stage of development charac
teristics which aa if push him out of thia plane into the plane of life. This stage,
according to Suhrawardi, waa reached when soul waa breathed into him. But
what is this soul which changes a piece of clay and matter into a being of a
different dimension I He refers to the second verse: 'They ask you of the soul
(rih). Say, tho soul ia from the oommand (amr) of my Lord."”
On the baaia of thia verse, some mystics regard the soul aa eternal—as
being an emanation of God's amr, which, aa an attribute of God, is eternal.
Suhrawardi, however, thinks that the soul is not eternal but created (hddilh I,
though it is the most subtle of all things and purer and lighter than all else.
The next question ia to determine whether it is an attribute ('ard) or a
substance (jauhar). In a tradition it is mentioned that the souls have the
capacity to move here and there, fly to different places, etc. On thia basis
362
Abd al-Q&dir JtlAni and Shihah ol-Dln Suhrawardi
some mystics arc inclined to the view that soul ia a substance characterized
by some definite attributes. But Suhrawardi does not accept this interpreta
tion. He holds that the account of the soul in the traditions is only symbolical
and. therefore, cannot be *«ken in a literal sense. Soul is neither eternal nor is
it a substance but created (badi/h) and is an attribute ford)- It is a created
thing which acta according to ita nature; it keeps the body alive as long as it is
associated with it; it ia nobler than the body; it tastes death when it is separated
from the body, just as the body meets death when it is separated from the soul.
There are, according to him, two stages of tho soul. The first is that of the
animal soul fruA al-fiayawdni) which ia a subtle body. It is the source of
movement in the human body and produces in it the capacity of receiving
sensations from the outeide world. This soul is common to all animals and is
intimately connected with the digestive organism of the body. The other grade
of tho soul is what Suhrawardi calls the heavenly soul of man. It belongs to the
world of oommand ('Ham al-amr). When it descends upon the animal soul,
the animal soul is totally transformed. Now it acquires the characteristic of
rationality and becomes capable of receiving inspiration (ilhim).u
The appetitive self (na/a) ia the source of all undesirable activities. It has
two dominant impulses, rage and avarico. When in rage, it is like a circular
substance which is by its nature always on the move. When avaricious, it is
like the moth which, being not satisfied with a little light, throws itaelf
headlong into the flamo of the candle and burns itself to death. A man is
able to attain true rank of manliness when he tries to purify his self (na(a)
of these gross characteristics by bringing into play reason and paticnoe.
The self passes through three different stagos of development. Tho first stage
of the Self is evil-prompting (ammdrah), the seoond is repentant (laurwdmah),
while the third in satisfied (mutma'innah)*,‘
Heart (gall) j a spiritual principle (lati/ah) and has its locus in tho heart
of flesh. It oornea into being as a result of mutual attraction between the
human soul and the appetitive self. Aooording to a tradition of tho Holy
Prophet (narrated by Butlbaifah), there are four kinds of hearts. Tho first is
like a pure soil free from all kinds of vegetation. It is illumined aa if by a
shining lamp. It is the heart of a true believer (mu'min). The second is a
dark, inverted heart which belongs to an unbeliever. The third belongs to a
hypocrite and is enveloped in a veil. Tho last is a pure but many-faceted
heart, with an inclination towards good as well aa evil?1
Mystery (Sire).—There is difference of opinion among the mystics with
regard to the exact place whioh the secret occupies in the psychological make
up of man. According to some, it ia prior to the soul (ruh) and posterior to
the heart (galb) aa a spiritual principle. To others it is posterior to the soul,
though higher and subtler than it. According to these mystics, sire is the
‘AwOrif al-Ma aril, p. 652.
Ibid., pp. 555-58.
•> IM., p 563
363
A History of Muslim Philosophy
locus of spiritual observation (mulhahadah), soul ia the locus of love. and
heart ia the locus of gnosis (marl/ah) - Suhrawardi however think. that
secret (,irr) has no independent being like the soul and heart. It refers to a
particular stage in the spiritual development of man. When man la able to free
himself from the dark prison of the appetitive self, and looks towarris the
spiritual soul, his heart acquires a new characteristic which is called mystery
(rirr). Similarly, st this stage his soul also attains a special position which
again is called mystery. At this stage, man acquires the satisfied self and he
acts and wills what God wishes him to do or will;.he loses Mb individual
power of action and freedom of choice and becomes a perfect servant ( abd).
Rauon CAql).—It is the essence of the heavenly soul, its tongue, and its
guide. The Shaikh quotes the usual traditional account that reason was the
first creation of God. God asked it to come forward, to turn back, to sit,
to speak, to become silent in turn, and it obeyed God's orders to the very
letter. At this God said, “I swear by My majesty and power that I did
not create a being dearer and more honourable than you. I shall be known,
praised, and obeyed through you. I shall give as well as take through you.
My pleasure and wrath shall follow deeds through you. People shall be
rewarded or punished in accordance with you."
Some people tMnk that reason develops from the study of sciences ('Mm),
especially those wMch are necessary and axiomatic. But Suhrawardi does not
seem to agree to this, for, as he argues, there are many people who are not
versed in any art or science and yet possess abundance of reason and common
sense. It is the inborn capacity of man wMch helps Mm in acquiring different
kinds of arts and scienoes. There is placed in man a natural power wMch
prompts Mm to acquire different kinds of knowledge. It is thus truly established
that reason is the tongue of the soul which is the Word of God (amr Allah).
From this flows the light of reason wMch then leads to the discovery of know
ledge, science, and art. Some people tMnk that reason is of two kinds. By the
one, man looks to the affairs of this world, and its seat is brain. The other
reason has its place in the heart (qaib) with wMch a man looks to the affairs
of the other world. But, according to Suhrawardi, this division is meaningless
and unnecessary. Reason as the vehicle of the soul (rub) is one. When it is sup
ported and supplemented by the light of the Sbari'ah and spiritual perception
(bastrah), it helps a man traverse the straight path of guidance and tread the
middle course of the golden mean Such a person gets knowledge of the heavenly
spheres (malatul) wMch is the innermost secret (balin) of the universe. This
illumination is the peculiar characteristic of the elect. Such men are capable
of looking to the affairs of both tho worlds, tho world of matter and space
and the world of spirit, the present world and the next world. When reason
is not supplemented and supported by the Sfaan'ah and basirah, a man may be
•“ The Shaikh points out that the (Jur'An mentions only soul (rah), self (na(t),
reason faql). heart (lu'ad), but there ia no reference to what Sufis call tirr. See
'AviOril al-Ma'drif, p. 558.
364
'Ab.l al-QAdir JtlAni and Sfiihib ul-Dia Suhrawardi
able to do well in this world, but he shall be deprived of the blessings of the
world of spirit."
As the goal of the mystics ia thoroughly practical. their excursion as
novices into the psychological field is really for the purpose of securing a
good ground on which to build an edifice of moral and spiritual develop
ment. Their aim is to attain a vision of God and enjoy communion with
Him. This involves the necessity of the destruction of vices and elimination
of imperfections, which often raise their head imperceptibly. The main cause
is the wrong interpretation which a man puts on tho revelations (ilhamdt)
he receives after undergoing mortification. A true mystic is one who is
able to discriminate between the sources of these experiences (khawdtir).
With regard to the sources, he divides these experiences into four kinds:
(1) those that flow from the appetitive self (na/t), (2) from God (Haq), (3)
from Satan, and (4) from the angels. There must be one of the following causes
why a person cannot discriminate between the sources of experiences: (a)
weakness in faith, (b) lack of proper knowledge with regard to the appetitive
self and morals, (c) following the dictates of the appetitive self, and. lastly, (d)
love of the world and material goals. Anyone who protects himself from all
these causes will surely be able to distinguish between revolutions from God
and those from Satan. It is an established fact, according to Suhrawardi,
that he whose source of livelihood is not pure cannot ba safe from evil in
fluences. An attitude of balanced detachment from the material world, morti
fication of flesh, and constancy in ascetic practices are essential for a true
mystic, and it is only then that, a mystic can hope to achieve the beatific
vision."
Stott and Station (ljil wa Maqim).—Suhrawardi thinks that most mystics
confuse state with station because there is a great similarity lietween the two,
and yet those must be distinguished, for otherwise there is a possibility of a
misunderstanding the true nature of the mystic experience.
State (hot) aa a technical term is indicative of a psychological condition
which is implied in its etymology, viz., its liability to change and progress,
while station (maqam) implies a psychological oondition which is relatively
permanent. A psychological attitude that a mystic adopts at a particular
stage of his mystic experience may be called state because the mystic is not
yet used to it, but when later on through practice it becomes a permanent
feature of bis mystic life, it becomes a station. Take, for instance, the attitude
of critical examination (muhdMbah) of one's self from a moral point of view.
When a mystic adopts this attitude first, it is a state which reours at different
periods; it comes and goes at intervals. By constant practice, however, he is
able later on to make it a permanent feature of his normal life. Then it is u
station. Again, the mystic tries to adopt the attitude of meditation or
“ 'AwOri/ al Ma'ari/. Chap. 56, pp. 541-64.
« Ibid.. Chap. 57. pp. 565-78.
365
A History of Muslim Philosophy
contemplation (nueraqabah) which beoomes hi. .Ute. Sometimes Ihe b able to
contemplate but. due to negligence and oth« 'Wract.on.Jie.cannot find .t
possible to make it a permanent feature of his life. But steadily an gr
hTgains his desired end and a day come, when contemplation become* a
station. Then he advances to the third stage, of observation (mu^iha
where he perceives with his own eyes the secrets of the spiritual world. Thu.
again, is first a stats and only gradually by peroonal effort passes into a
station. Thus it follows that "station" is a psychological .Ute which la the
result of personal effort, while "state” ia the result of divine grace. Every moral
attitude is characterized by both. Continence (tuhd), complete reliance on
God (ta-mkkul), and submission to God's pleasure for instance, have
both these aspects—at one stage, they are acquired after a constant and toil
some effort and. at another stage, they beoome a permanent feature of the
life of a mystic due to divine grace. “
Among the states Suhrawardi discusses love, feeling of nearness to God
(qurb), bashfulness, reverence, union (ittisal), contraction (qabif) and ex
pansion (basf). annihilation (/ana') and abiding (baq&'), etc.
Love.—There is an instinctive love in man for wife, wealth, and children,
but the love at which the mystics aim is not instinctive. It flows from the
heart of an individual after he has reached a particular level of moral develop
ment where all his capacities and tendencies are directed towards the realization
of union with God. It is then that the sentiment of love appears in him and
all inclinations are subordinated to it. He begins to feel love for God with
the full force of instinctive impulse as well as conscious purpose. There are
four kinds of love, according to Suhrawardi: (1) love of appetitive soul (na/s),
(2) love of reason, (3) love of heart as a symbol of spiritual perception, and
(4) lovo of soul (nifij- The love for God which is the ideal of tho mystics
oom bines all these loves.
When love appears in a mystic on the basis of the first three sources, it ia
called general love which is the result of direct apprehension (muji-lAnduA;
of God's attributes. But when ho passes from attributes to God's essence
(dial), his love assumes a new dimension; it flows from his soul, and he ia
thus enabled to attain his goal. At this stage tho mystic acquires and appro
priates all the divine attributes. His position becomes what God says: "When
I love a person I become his eyes and ears, etc."
Nearness (Qurb).—This is not physical nearness but only a psychological
state in which the mystic feels a profound consciousness of intimacy with the
Ultimate Reality. The Qur'&n says: "And prostrate and draw near (to Him).”“
On this basis Suhrawardi thinks that attainment of ncarnos* depends upon
concentration ■>'! God which enables the individual to surpass levels of normal
consciousness I Here are two stages in this process. In the first place, the
•• Ibid.. Chan. 5o :>p. 678-82.
“ Qur'tn, xcvi.
366
'Ab<l al-QAdir JilAni and gfeih&b al-Din Suhrawardi
mystic falls m if into a trance and is overcome by intoxication («ukr); his
consciousness of self (nah) disappears in the spiritual light of his soul (rih).
The next phase begins when both na/s and ruA regain their separate identities
and the individual feels the consciousness of nearness intimately and yet. in
spito of it, the consciousness of otherness, which is involved in his relation ot
slavehood f ubidiyyah) to God, is also conspicuously present. He quotes i
mystic as saying: "By following the Sunnah one attains gnosis (ma'rifah)
by observing the obligatory duties (/amid) one reaches nearness, while by
practising daily 'extra' prayers fnawdfil), one attains love.".
Bash/alnui (Hayi'j.—There is a saying of the Holy Prophet: "Be modest
with God as it is due to Him." Suhrawardi explained it as follows: "He alone
can be called modest in relation to God who is careful of his daily behaviour
towards Him and remembers his death and the hereafter, with tho result
that his heart cools off towards this world and its entanglements."
But this modesty or baaldulncas. being acquired, is a station (maqdm),
while bashfulness of a special quality is a state. In order to define it, Suhra
wardi quotes certain sayings of some mystics. One says: "Bashfulness and
attachment (una) hover about the heart, and when they find that it is possessed
of continence (zuhd) and piety (war"), they descend into it. otherwise they
move away." This bashfulnees is the submission of one's soul to God for
maintaining the grandeur of His majesty (jakll). while attachment is the
soul's experience of pleasure in the perfection of His beauty (jamdl). When
both bashfulness and attachment combine, it is the end of a mystic's ambition.
According to abu Sulaim&n, there are four different motives of action: fear,
hope, awe, and baahfulneas, and that action is the best which is motivated
by the last.
Union (Ittifkl).—As Nori says, union is the revelation of the heart and
the observation of secrets. There is a person who attains union through his
personal efforts but loses this position as soon aa there is slackness in his
efforts. This ia all but natural, for human efforts cannot be kept up at the
same degree of intensity for a long time. Such a person ia called mu/ossal. But
the union that Suhrawardi oommends is one which is the mult not of personal
effort but of divine grace. A penion who receives it is called united (uAfil).
But there are several grades of this union.
There is a person who receives illumination from divine actions. To such
a person, actions, his own aa well as those of others, cannot be attributed, for
his role is only passive. It is God who doos all actions through him and
he loses all freedom of choice or independence of action. Secondly, there
is illumination from divine attributes. Here the recipient through revela
tion of divine attributes of majesty and beauty stays at the stations of awe
(haibak) and attachment funs/ Then there is the illumination of divine
essence (dial) which is a stage towards annihilation (/and’). A person at this
stage is illumined with the divine light of faith and in the observation of
God's face loses his individuality. Thia is a further stage in union (ilihdl) It
367
A History of Muslim Philosophy
permeation of divine light in the recipient. ho much so that hie eelf (oafs)
and heart both feel overpowered by it. And. in spite of its bemg a very rare
____ hv a few select Demons. that he is
perhaps at some preliminary stage of his journey towards union, it w a long
and toilsome journey for which perhaps a life of eternity may not suffice.
Contraction and Expansion (Qabd wa Bast).—These two emotional states
are dependent for their appearance on certain preliminary conditions. They
are usually experienced by a mystic when he is traversing tho early stages of
what Suhrawardi calls the states of special lore." They appear neither at the
stage of general love, nor at the termination of the stage of special love.
There are some emotional experiences in the state of general love which seem
to correspond to contraction and expansion, but which in reality are nothing
more than fear and hope (raja), while at other times they are what
he calls grief (hamm) and pleasure (nUiat) which the experient confuses with
contraction and expansion. Grief and pleasure emanate from the self (nafs)
which is yet at the appetitivo stage (na/s-i ammdrah), a stage susceptible to
the promptings of evil, Hamm is the feeling of dissatisfaction experienced at
the failure of attaining the object of self-love while nithaf is the crest of the
wave when the sea of self-indulgence is all astorra.
It is only when the mystic enters the next stage which is connected with
the stage of special love and when his appetitive self becomes the repentant
self (na/s-i lawwamah) that the true moods of contraction and expansion
make their appearance. The mood of contraction is the result of a psychological
state when the self (najs) is in ascendance, while the mood of expansion
follows when the heart (as an organ of spiritnal perception) is in ascendance.
When the appetitive self becomes repentant (lauardmah), there is a constant
up and down in the urges towards evil: sometimes the urge towards good has
the upper hand, while at others there is a tendency towards the other pole.
The appearance of contraction and expansion corresponds to these two poles
of the life of the self. Nafs is the veil of darkness and heart is the veil of light,
and as long aa an individual is in the sphere of those veils, he continues to
experience these two moods of oontraotion and expansion. But as soon as he
passes beyond these veils, these moods also disappear. In the experience of
annihilation (land') and abiding (baqd'), there ia neither contraction nor ex
pansion ; they are intimately connected with the consciousness of selfhood.
According to some Sufis, the mystic first experiences contraction in his
spiritual development and then it is followed by expansion. Suhrawardi also
holds the same opinion. But there are certain situations where this order is
•• its previously stated in this chapter, general love is tho result of observation
of divine attributes as distinguished from special love which appears when the
mystic paasre to tho observation of divine essence (dNlt).
368
Abd al QMir Jilin, and Sbihib al-Dln Suhrawardi
reversed. Under the mood of expansion, the experient feds overjoyed
and happy. This happiness then filters down to the self (nafa) which is bv
nature inclined to interpret it appetitively so that this mood of expansion
degenerates into an attitude of pleasure. At this stage the mood of contraction
of necessity makes its appearance to bring the self to the state of sanity and
equilibrium. If the self were to be free from a tendency towards the extremes,
the mystic would be in a perpetual state of expansion (boat) and blessedness.
When the self passes into the last stage and becomes the satisfied soul,
it attains oomplete harmony and passes beyond the bi-polar strife of good
and evil. For such a person the moods of contraction and expansion are non
existent.
Annihilation and Abiding (Fans' wa Baqi’).—According to Suhrawardi. what
most myBtics describe as the stato of annihilation (fand') is in reality not /ana
but something else. According to some, /ana is the annihilation of all attach
ment, absence of all urges towards satisfaction of worldly desires, etc. This
state, according to Suhrawardi, is what is implied in repentance of a true type
(laubat al-natty).Tonomefana is the annihilation of evil attributes and baqa.
the abiding of good attributes. This, again, according to Suhrawardi, ia not
true /and' and baqd' but the result of moral transformation and purification
(lazhiyah). There are many phases of /and', but the stato of absolute /and’ ia
one where the Being of God is so overpowering and overwhelming that the
consciousness of the finite self is totally obliterated. He quotes with approval
the following event as a true representation of the state of annihilation (/and’).
A person greeted 'Abd Allah b. 'Umar while ho was engaged in circumambula-
tion (laud/) of the Ka'bah to which he made no response. Later on he heard
that the man had complained to someone at the absence of his response. At
this 'Abd Allah b. 'Umar replied that in that state he was in communion with
God and, therefore, did not have any consciousness of himself, not to speak
of others.
There are two kinds of fand'. The first is the apparent annihilation //and
al fdhir). Here the mystic receives illumination through divine action with the
result that freedom of action and choioe disappears from him. He sees all
actions, his as well as those of others, emanating directly from God. At the
stage of the real annihilation (/and' al-bdtin), the mystic receives illumination
from God's attributes and His essence (dhtU) with the result that he is over
whelmed by the divine amr to much so that he becomes totally immune from
evil promptings of all kinds.
Some people in the state of annihilation lose all consciousness but, according
to Suhrawardi, it is not an essential phase of this state.
In the state of abiding (baqd'), the mvBtic is restored the power of action
which had been annihilated previously. God allows him full freedom to act
as he likes and as the situation demands. In this state he is conscious of the
obligations both to the world and to God and none of these becomes a hindrance
to the other. His duty to the world does not make him oblivions of his dutj
369
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to God, nor doo- his communion with God debar him Iroui turning his
attention to the worldly matters.
The apparent annihilation (/and' al-jahir) is lor those who are at the station
of heart ami arc busy with emotional states, while the real anmhllaUon (land
al-bdtin ) is for those who have passed beyond that station and attained union
with God and who are what he calls bi-Allah (with God).*’
Vnim and Separation (Jam' wa Tafriqah).—According to Junaid, near
ness to God in ecstasy (wajd) is union while tho sense of selfhood (baihriyyah)
and absence from God (yhaibah). i.e., awareness of self, ia separation (ta/m/ah).
Suhrawardi accepts this position and says that the state where the mystic
feels himself united with God flau^ld altajrid) is denoted by union (/am’).
while ordinary and normal state of consciousness, where the mystic feels th<
separate individuality of his own self as well as of other things, is called sepa
ration (tafriqah). He adds that l>oth these states are complementary; if we
ignore union, we arc landed in negation of the divine attributes (ta‘/il) and
if we ignore separation, it leads to heresy (ilhdd) and denial of God (tandaqah).
Union is annihilation in God f/and’ bi-AUah), while separation (iatruph) is
relationship of an obedient servant to God fubudiyyah). Union is the result
of man’s possession of a soul, while separation is due to his possession of a
body, and as long as the combination of the soul and the body persists, these
two states must equally be emphasized in tho life of the mystio.
There is another state which is called by mystics the union of the union
(jam' al-jam'). When a mystic looks towards God's action, he is in the state
of separation; when he looks towards God's attributes, he is in the state of
union; and when he looks towards God’s essence, he is in tho state of union
of the union.<B
Process o/ Sell-Purification.—The ideal life, according to Suhrawardi, is the
life of a perfect man who. in spite of the highest spiritual attainments, is yet
conscious of his subservience to the Law of Sfiari'ah. But this stage of purifi
cation cannot be attained without a long process of self-mortification which
demands self-examination, introversion, contemplation, patienoe, submission
to God's will, and an attitude of complete detachment. The spark of life that
is kindled within the heart of tho mystic has a charm of its own, but it
cannot be kept burning unless it is fed constantly on the oil that flow's from
continuous efforts towards asceticism. Ho receives wayward glimpses of the
Infinite Beauty and is charmed, but they prove fleeting, he wants this
experience to be broadened in extensity and deepened in intensity; he wants
this experience to be stabilized and enriched—hence the necessity of the
whole process of self-purification. The result is second birth out of the womb
of spirit into the kingdom of the re-awakened spirit.
Suhrawardi gives the details of this process of gradual enlightenment. There
” •Andri/ al-Ma'ari/, Chap. 61. pp. 613-53.
•• Ibid., pp. 655-57.
370
*Abd al-QAdir JilAni and ShihAb al-Din Suhrawardi
are four preliminary stages: Faith, repentance (taubah), continence, constancy
in unblemished virtuous actions. These four must be supplemented by four
other things which are essentials of asceticism, viz., minimum conversation,
minimum food, minimum stay-at-home, and minimum contact with people.
Repentance (taubah) over past shortcomings and determination to avoid
them in future are effective only when a person keeps a constant check over
his thoughts and actions and is fully awake to all situations." But to maintain
this psychological state of repentance there are certain essential requirements.
Tho first is self-examination (muhAmbah) and the other is introversion or
meditation (muriqabah). A person asked Wls;i, “Which is the best virtuous
action!" He said. "Outwardly self-examination and inwardly meditation; both
are perfected by each other and help to maintain tho attitude of repentance
in the mystic which leads to concentration on and communion with God
(indbah)."
The other thing that is essential for a mystic is patience (fabr) without
which it is not poesiblo for him to oontinuo his life. This moral quality enables
him to endure the vicissitudes of life. It is far more easy for an individual to
show his mettle in adversity than in prosperity and hence the mystics have
emphasized the importance of patience in a state of affluence which is regarded
superior to patience Bhown in a state of want. The next state is that of
ridd’ which is in a way the fruit of conversion (taubah) where tho mystio enters
the sphere of fear and hope. He foels shockod at the tendency towards evil
and, being morally at a higher stage of development, he fears succumbing to
three temptations. This feeling of fear, therefore, serves to keep him aware
and make him watchful of any fall towards the satisfaction of his baser self.
He is repentant and feels hopeful of ultimate victory over theso evil forces.
Thus, the life of the mystio moves between these two poles of fear and hope
and gradually attains the stage of what Suhrawardi calls continence (zuhd),
which in a way sums up all that he has achieved so far. The stage of continenoe.
in other words, is the stage where the fruits of conversion (taubah) with its
constituents of self-examination and meditation, patience and voluntary sub
mission to God. piety, hope, and fear, all converge and make the mystio into
a perfect ascetic who lives, moves, and has his being in oomplete oommunion
with God and in total reliance (tawMul) upon Him. This second stage of
continenoe is distinct from poverty (faqr). A /uqir is one who is forced by
circumstances to lead a life of poverty, while the continent person (zdhid), on
the other hand, adopts this life of detachment of his own free-will even when
the state of affluence is open to him.
The third stage is that of stability in morally virtuous actions. According
to Suhrawardi, a zdhid who does not follow the Law of the Sbari'ah is liable to
be led astray. It is only through constancy In action for God (‘ami li-Allah),
He calls them scolding of one's self (zajr), warning fintiMA), and awakening
(biddri).
371
A History of Muslun Philosophy
remembrance (dbilr). recitation from the Qurtn. Pavers. and m-xfiUtion
(tnuraqabah) that a mystic can hope to attam hrs objective which »
'uMdiJyZ perfect obedience to God. Sahl b. Abd Allah Tustan sa.d about thia
stage: "When a man after passing through repentance, continence, and con-
stancy in virtuous deeds reaches the stage of slavehood, he becomes totally
passive towards the divine will and of hia own free-will decides no longer to
exercise his freedom of choice and action. Then he is granted full pqwer of
activity and freedom of action because he has identified himself with the will
of God. His self-determination is equivalent to God-determination; the liability
of his falling a prey to evil temptations and ignorance are totally obliterated.
According to Suhrawardi. the stage of giving up freedom of choice and
action is the stage of annihilation, while the second stage where the mystio
freely acts, because Ilia will follows the will of God, is the state of abiding in
God It is the shedding of the mortal self for the eternal, material for the
spiritual, human for the divine. The mystic at this stage is the perfect servant.’"
’• •■tiniri/ al-Ma'arif, Chap. 59, pp. 585-600.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
SjiaiKb 'Abd al-QAdir JIUkni, Fuluh aLQiaib, Urdu translation, Lahore, 1344/
1925; Shaikh ShihAb al-Din Suhrawardi. Awarif al-Ma'inl, Urdu translation.
Newal Kishoro Press, Lucknow, 1926; IMmi Tasawwu/. Urdu translation of ibn
al-Qnyyim's Tariq al-Hijratain w-al-Bab al-Sa'ildatain, al-Hilal Book Agenoy.
Lahore, n.d.; Percy Sykes. A History of Persia. Vol. II. Macmillan A Co.. London,
1951; E. G. Browne, A Literary History of Persia. Vol. II, Cambridge University
Press, 1951.
Chapter XIX
aflIHAB AL-DIN SUHRAWARDI MAQTOL
The intellectual life of Islam and that of Christianity—the two sister civili
zations—in the Middle Ages can be compared with each other to a large extent
through the role that Aristotelian philosophy played in them. Peripatetic
science and philosophy entered the Western world through translations from
Arabic in the seventh/thirteenth century and eventually became dominant to
such an extent aa to replace the Augustinian and Platonic wisdom of the
earlier period only to be overthrown itself by the humanistic rationalism of
the Renaissance. In Islam the attack of Sufis and theologians upon tho ratio
nalistic aspect of Aristotelian philosophy weakened its hold at the very time
when that philosophy was gaining strength in the Christian West and was
replaced in the Muslim world by two elements, the doctrinal Sufism of Mubyi
372
Shth&b al-Din Suhrawardi Maqtul
al-Din ibn 'Arabi and the llikmal ai-librdq' or illuminative wisdom of Shaikh
al ljhriq ghihib al-Din Yabya ibn Habajh ibn Amlrak Suhrawardi,1 both
of which aimed at an effective realization of the "truth" and replaced the
rationalism of Perinatetic philosophy by intellectual intuition (dbauq).
LIFE, WORKS, AND SOURCES OF DOCTRINES
ghihab al-Dln Suhrawardi, whose ijbrliqi wisdom has played such a great
role in the intellectual and spiritual life of Islam and especially of Shl'ism
was born in Suhraward, a village near the present city of Zinjkn in northern
Persia, in 549/1153. He studied at first with Majd al-Din Jiii at Maritghali
and later with Zahir al-DIn Q&ri at Ispahan. Having finished his formal
studies, he began to travel through Persia, meeting various Sufi masters and
benefiting from their presence and teachings. During this period he spent
much time in meditation and invocation in spiritual retreats. He also journcyod
during the same period through the regions of Anatolia and Syria and acquired
great love for the cities of these countries. On one of his journeys, he went
from Damascus to Aleppo and met Malik Zihir. the son of Salab al-Din
AyyQbi, the celebrated Muslim ruler. Malik Z&hir became much devoted to
Shihab al-Dln and asked him to stay at his Court. It waa here that the master of
ilbrAq fell into disgrace with the religious authorities in the city who considered
some of his statements dangerous to Islam. They asked for his death
and when Malik ZAhir refused, they petitioned galib al-DIn himself who
threatened his son with abdication unless he followed tho ruling of the reli
gioua leaders. Shihab al-Din was thereby imprisoned and in the year 587/1191
at the age of 38, he was either suffocated to death or died of starvation.*
Many miraculous features have been connected with the life of Suhrawardi
rhe Arabic word hikmah is neither philosophy as currently understood in
modem European language, i.e., one form or another of rationalism, nor theology
It is, properly speaking, theosophy ru» understood in its original Greek sense and not
in any way connected with the pscudo-spirituatistic movements of this century.
It is also sapiential inasmuch aa tho Latin root sopr.rr, like tho Arabic word dbauq
by which this wisdom is known. means taste. Moreover, it can be designated aa
speculative wisdom because speculum means mirror and thia wisdom seeks to mako
man's soid a mirror in which divine knowledge is reflected.
1 ghihhb al-Dln Suhrawardi is often called al-Maqtfil, meaning he who was
killod, since he was put to death for certain indiscreet formulations. We. however,
refer to him as £A<i<XA al-IihrOq by which name he is universally known among
his disciples.
1 The beet souroe for tho biography of Shiliab al-Din is the NuzJeat ol-drudh
un Rauelal al-Afrdh of his disciple and commentator Shams al-Dln Sbahrazuri.
See also O. Spies and 8. K. Khattak. Three TreeUiut on Myetmm, Verlag W. Kohl
hammer. Stuttgart. 1935. pp. 90-101; H. Corbin. Suhrawardi d'Alep fondatrur de la
dextrine iUumineilm filieAe/i). C. P. Maisonneuie, Paris, 1939.
373
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and many stories told of his unusual powers. Ilin countenance was striking
to all Ilia contemporaries. His illuminated and ruddy faoe and dishevelled
hair, his handsome beard and piercing eyes reminded all who mot him of his
keen intelligence. Ho paid as little attention to his dress aa ho did to his words.
Sometimes he wore the woollen garb of the Sufis, sometimes the silk dress of
the courtiers. His short and tragic life contains many similarities to the life
of Halllj, whom he quoted so often, and to that of the Sufi poet 'Ain al
Qudkt Hamadini who was to follow a similar career a few years later.
The writings of Suhrawardi are numerous despite his short and turbulent
life. Some of them have been lost, a few published, and the rest remain it
manuscript form in the libraries of Persia, India, and Turkey** Unlike hit
predecessors, ibn Stna and al-Gbazali. he was never translated into Latin and.
therefore, never became well known in the Western world. Yet, his influence
in the East oan almost match that of ibn Sins, and any history of Islamic
philosophy written without mentioning him and tho school of Ijhrdq is, to
say the least, incomplete. Histories of Muslim philosophy written by Western
ers, like Munk and de Boer, usually end with ibn Rughd because the authors
have considered only that aspect of Muslim philosophy which influenced Latin
scholasticism. Actually, tho Bevcnth/thirteenth century, far from being the
end of speculative thought in Islam, is really the beginning of this most impor
tant school of librxlq. Suhrawardl’s writings came to the East at the same
time as Peripatetic philosophy was journeying weatward to Andalusia and
from there through the influence of ibn Rujfcd and others to Europe.
There are altogether about fifty titlee of Suhrawardl's writings which have
come down to us in the various histories and biographies
* They may be divided
into five categories as follows:
*
1. Tho four largo doctrinal treatises, the first three dealing with Aristotelian
(mafba'i) philosophy with certain modifications and the last with ijbrdqi
wisdom proper. These works, all in Arabic, include the Talwiftat, Muqaw-
uamdl, MutdratuU, and the Hikmal al-lshr&q.1
2. Shorter doctrinal treatises like Haydkil al-Nir, al-Alwaft al-'lmddiyyah,
Partau-Ndmeh, I'tiqSd al-Hukamd', alLamahdt, Yasddn Shindkbt, and Bustan
We are most grateful to Prof. M. Minovi and Mr. M. DAnethpazhuh of the
University of Teheran and to Dr. M. Baytni, the bead of the Tehoran National
Library, for making these manuscripts available to us.
1 bee the introduction in M. BayAni, Dau Bisdleh-i Portia Suhrawardi, Teheran,
1925.
• We follow in part the classification of H. Corbin, however, with some modifi
cations. Seo Suhrawardi, Opera Mctaphysiea et Mystiea, od. H. Corbin. Vol. I.
Ma'Arif Mathaasi, BMialheea Istamiea, Istanbul, 1945, “ProtegomAno." pp. xviff.
' The metaphysical sections of the first three treatises have been published in
ths first volumo of tho Opera by Corbin and tho complete Hikmal al-I^rOq in the
second volume entitled Oeuvres phUosophiques el mystiques (Opera Metaphysial et
Mystiai, II). Inatitul Franco Iranian, Teheran, and Andrian Maisonneuvo, Paris.
1952. Honcoforth wo shall refer to the two volumes aa Opera. Volumes I and IT.
374
Siiihib el-Din Suhrawardi Maqtul
al-QulHi' all of which explain further the subject-matter of the larger treatises.
These works are partly in Arabic and partly in Persian.
3. Initiatory narratives written in symbolic language to depict the journey
of the initiate towards gnosis (ma'rifah) and illumination (ijirdq). These
short treatises, all written in Persian, include Ajl-i SurkA, Awdz-i Par-i
Jibra'U. al-QAurbat al-Qharbiyyah (also in Arabic), Lugial-i Murdn, Rudlah
fi Halal al-Tu/iltiyyah. Ruzi ba Jamd'ali ?ufiydn, RMlah fi al-Mi'rdj, and
$afir-i Simurgi
4. Commentaries and transcriptions of earlier philosophic and initiatic texts
and sacred Scripture like the translation into Persian of the Risdlal al- J'd'ir of
ibn Slna, the commentary in Persian upon ibn SlnA's Iihlrdt wa Tanbthdl,
and the treatise RuuUah fi (laqiqal al-'llAq which last is based on ibn Slni's
Riaalal al-'Iibg and his commentary upon the verses of the Qur'An and on
the Hadilh?
5. Prayers, litanies, invocations, and what may be called books of the
hour, all of which ghahrazuri calls al- IFaridal w-al- Taqdisat.
These works and the large number of commentaries written upon them
during the last seven oenturies form the main corpus of the tradition of
ilirdq and are a treasure of traditional doctrines and symbols combining in
them the wisdom of Sufism with Hermeticism, and Pythagorean. Platonic,
Aristotelian, and Zoroastrian philosophies together with some other diverse
elements. There is little doubt that Suhrawardi is greatly indebted to the
Muslim philosophers, especially ibn Slna, for the formulation of many of his
ideas. Moreover, inasmuch as he is a Sufi as well as a philosopher of, more
properly speaking, a theoaophist,14 he is in debt, both for spiritual inspiration
and for his doctrines, to the great chain of Sufi masters before him. More
specifically he is indebted to Hallaj whom he quotes so often and to al-QfaazAli
whose Misbkdt al-Anudr played so important a role in his doctrine of the
relation of light to the Imim.
Sulirawardi came also under the influence of Zoroastrian teaching, particu
larly in angelology and the symbolism of light and darkness.11 He identified
■ The treatise YazdAn ShinAkbl has often been attributed to Ain ul-Quddat
Hamad&ni and its authorship remains in any case doubtful. Busldn al-Qulub has
also appeared under tho name Rmdat al-Qulib and haa been occasionally attributed
to Sayyid Sharif JurjSni.
• A commentary upon tho Fufdf of Furabi of which no trace has as yet been
found is also attributed to him.
The hakim mula'aUih which Suhrawardi considers himself and other sagos before
him to lie is exactly Ihmopbot by which the Greek sages were designated. See
the Prolegomena by H. Corbin to Suhrawardl’s Opera, Vol. II. p. xxiv.
u Suhrnwardi is oareful in distinguishing between exoteric Zoroastrians and the
sages among Zoroastriane whom he follows. As ho writes in KalimAl al-Tofawwuf-.
''1310™ were among tho ancient Persians a community of men who were guides
towards the Truth and were guided by Him in tho Hight Path, ancient sagos un
like those who aro called the Magi. It is their high and illuminated wisdom, to
which the spiritual experiences of Plato and his prodocewors are also witness, and
375
A Historv of Muslim Philosophy
the wisdom of the ancient Zoroiistrian sages with that of Hennes and, there
fore. with the pre-Aristotelian philosophers, especially Pythagoras and Plato,
whose doctrines he sought to revive. Finally, he was influenced directly by the
vast tradition of Hcrmeticism which is itself the remains of ancient Egyptian.
Chaldaean. and Sabacan doctrines metamorphosed within the matrix of
Hellenism and is based on the primordial symbolism of alchemy. Suhrawardi
considered himself to be the reviver of tho perennial wisdom, philosaphia
perennis, or what he calls llitmal aLZadunniyyaA or tfikmal al-'Atiyah' which
existed always among the Hindus. Persians, Babylonians, Egyptians, and the
ancient Greeks up to the time of Plato.”
The concept of the history of philosophy for Suhrawardi and his school is
itself of great interest. This school identifies philosophy with wisdom rather
than with rational systematization. Philosophy for it does not begin with
Plato and Aristotle; rather, it ends with them. Aristotle, by putting wisdom in
a rationalistic dress, limited its perspective and separated it from the unitive
wisdom of the earlier sages.” From the Ijforaqi point of view, Hermes or the
Prophet Idris is the father of philosophy, having received it as revelation from
heaven. He was followed by a chain of sages in Greece and in ancient Persia
and later in Islam which unified the wisdom of previous civilizations in ita
milieu. The chain of transmission of isjra^i doctrines, which must be
understood symbolically rather than only historically, may be schematized
as follows:
Hermes
KiumarUi
Faridun
Plato Kai Khuarau
Noo-Platonists
Dhu al-Nun Mi§ri Abu Yazid BiafAmi
Abu Sahl Tustari Manyur HallAj
Abu al-Hasan Khar
which we have brought to life again in our book called Hikmii al-lshr/lq." MS.,
Bagip, 1480. fol. 407b, Istanbul, cited in H. Corbin, Les motifs zoroastriens dans
la philosophy de Sohrawardi. Editions du Courrier. Teheran, 1940, p. 24. Also
Teheran University Library MS. 1079, pp. 34ff.
** .\fufdrahat. Physics, Book VI, cited by H. Corbin in Suhrawardi, Opera, Vol. I.
p. xli.
” Originally, philosophy like all forms of wisdom consisted of a doctrine, a
rite, and a "spiritual alchemy." In Greek civilization tho firet element gradually
HOparated from the other* and became reduced to a theoretical form of knowledge
which came to bo known as philosophy. In the 55th section of TnlwUdr.Sulirawnrdi
writes how he saw Aristotle, who ia most likely Plotinus, the author of the Theology of
376
fifaihAh al-Din Suhrawardi Maqt-Ql
In tho introduction to his flikmal al-Itbrdq, Suhrawardi states explicitly
the nature of ithrdqi wisdom and its relation to ancient doctrines. As he
writes: "Although before tho composition of this book I composed several
summary treatises on Aristotelian philosophy, this book differs from them
and has a method peculiar to itself. All of its material has not boon assembled
by thought and reasoning; rather, intellectual intuition, contemplation, and
ascetic practices have played an important role in it. Since our sayings have
not oome by means of rational demonstration but by innor virion and con
templation, they cannot be destroyed by the doubts and temptations of the
sceptics. Whoever is a traveller (Mik) on the way to truth is my oompanion
and a help on this Path. Tho procedure of tho master of philosophy, the
diirine Plato, was the same, and the sages who preceded Plato in time like
Hormea, the father of philosophy, followed the Bame path. Sinoe sages of the
past, because of tho ignorance of the masses, expressed their sayings in secret
symbols (rvmvz), the refutations which have been made against them have
concerned the exterior of theee sayings and not their real intentions. And
the ifhrdqi wisdom the foundation and basis of which are the two principles
of light and darkness as established by the Persian sages liko JimAsp, Far-
th&dghOr. and BOzarjumihr is among these hidden, secret symbols. One must
never think that the light and darkness which appear in our expressions are
tho same as those used by the infidel Magi or the heretical Manichaeans for
they finally involve us in idolatry (thirk) and dualism."14
ArutoUe, in a dream and asked if the Islamic Peripatetics were tho real philosophers.
Aristotle answered. "No, a degree in a thousand." Rather tho Sufis, BistAmi and
Tustari. aro tho real philosophers. Aristotle told Suhrawardi to wake into himself
and to pass beyond theoretical knowlodge film fUri) to effective realization or the
“knowledge of presence" ('tiro AurfUri or tkuhOdi). See the Prolegomena of H
Corbin in Suhrawardi, Opera. Vol. I. p. lxx.
14 Suhrawardi, Opera, Vol. II, pp. 10-11. Soma modem interpreters of Suhra
wardi have considered him to bo onti-Islamio and of Zoronstrian sympathy. A. von
Kremer in his GsscAicAtr der flrrrerhendrn ldeen dee Islam, Leipzig. 1868, pp. 89ff.,
writes that Suhrawardi was part of the current directed against Islam. On the
other hand, the scholarly and sympathetic interpreter of Suhrawardi. H. Corbin,
insists on tho role of al-in reviving the philosophy of Zoroastrian
Persia and on his sympathy for Zoroastrian and Manichaean ideas, although ho does
not consider thia revival to be a movement against Islam but rather an integ
ration of ancient Persian myths in "the prism of Islamic spirituality." In any case,
all views which consider ifkrdqi wisdom to be simply a revival of Zoroastrianism
or Manichaeism confuse the form with the spirit. Tliere is no doubt that Suhrawardi
makes use of Mazdaoan symbols especially with regard to angclology, but that is
no more reason for calling him Mazdaean than it is to call JAbir ibn HayyAn a
follower of Egyptian religion, because ho used Hermetic symbols. The only criterion
of orthodoxy in Islam is the first ihaMdah (la ilAha ill-AUah) and, according to it,
Suhrawardi cannot bo said to lie outside tho pale of Islam, no matter how strange
his formulations may be. Furthermore, the disciples of the IgbrAqi school consider
the Persian sages of whom Suhrawardi spooks to have lived before Plato and
Pythagoras and not during the SAasAnid period. The genius of Islam to integrate
diverse elements into itself is ovidont here as elsewhere and should not be intor-
377
A History of Muslim Philosophy
B
THE MEANING OF I£HRAQ
Tho Arabio words iihrdq moaning illumination and maibriq meaning the
east are both derived etymologically from the root jharq meaning the rising
of the sun. Moreover, the adjective illuminative, muibriqiyyah, and Oriental,
majknqiyyah, are written in exactly the same way in Arabic. This symbolic
identification of the Orient with light which is inherent in the Arabic language
and is employed often by the lahraqi sages, has given rise to many difficulties
in the interpretations of that wisdom which is both illuminative and Oriental.
Already in his Jfanliy al-JfajJriyiyyin most of which is lost, ibn Sins refers
to an Oriental wisdom which is superior to the oommonly accepted Peripatetic
(maibo’i) philosophy.1* Due to the fact that the word majjriyiyyun could
also be read as mujjriyiyytin in Arabic, the latter meaning illuminative, one
could interpret tho esoteric teachings which ibn Sina proposes as being illu
minative as well as Oriental. Since the famous article of Nallino,1* it has
become common opinion that the reading is Oriental and has nothing to do
with illumination. Yet, this opinion, however correct it may be linguistically,
is essentially limited in that it does not take into account the profound sym
bolism inherent in the language and does not consider the great debt which
Suhrawardi and ifjrdgi wisdom owe to ibn Sina.
Suhrawardi writes that ibn Sina wanted to recapture Oriental philosophy
but did not have access to the necessary sources.•’ Yet, if we consider how the
sacred geography of the Orient of light and the Occident of darkness in the
initiatory trilogy of ibn Sina, Hayy Ibn Yaq^an, ftuakil al-J'&'ir, and Sakimda
ua AbM, is followed by Suhrawardi, how the Shaikh al-Ishriq translated
several of the treatises of ibn Sina into Persian, and how parts of Ilikmal
al-Ithrdq resemble closely the commentary of ibn Sina upon the Theology of
Aristotle, it will beoome clear how profoundly the roots of IjhrSqi philosophy
lie in certain of the later non-Aristotelian works of ibn Sina and how illumina
tion and the Orient are united in this form oi wisdom.
The unification of the meaning of illumination and the Orient in the term
preled u a sign of departure from the straight path al-muslaytm) or the
universal orthodoxy which embraces all the perspectives within tho tradition. The
vocation of Islam is the re-establishment of Che primordial tradition so that all the
streams of tho ancient religions and cultures have llowed into it without in any way
destroying ita puritv.
“ Ibn Stna, Afonliy ol-Vadriyiyyin. Cairo. 1338/1819, pp. 2-4.
“ A. Nallino, "Filosoila 'orienlali’ od 'illuminativa' d'Avicenna." RioiMa degli
rtudi menlali. Vol. X. 1925. pp. 433-57. H. Corbin rightly emphasizes the illu-
minativo as well as ths Oriental arqiect of ibn Stall's Oriental wisdom and its pro
found connection with the Itfiriqi school of Suhrawardi. See Corbin, Aeicenne el
Lerfcw vtewnnoire. lnstitut Franco-Iranian, Teheran. 1952-54, Vol. I. Intro
duction, p. iii.
11 Suhrawardi, Opera, Vol. I. p. 195.
378
Shih&b al-Din Suhrawardi Maqtul
•ijra^ >s connected with the symbolism of the sun which rises in the Orient
and which illuminates all things so that the land of light is identified with
that of gnosis and illumination.1* Inasmuch as the Occident is where the
sun sets, where darkness reigns, it is the land of matter, ignorance, or dis
cursive thought, entangled in the mesh of its own logical constructions. The
Orient is, on the contrary, the world of light, of being, the land of knowledge,
and of illumination which transcends mere discursive thought and rational
ism- It is the land of knowledge which liberates man from himself and from
tho world, knowledge which is combined with purification and sanctity.1* It
is for thia reason that Suhrawardi connects iihnigi wisdom with the ancient
priest-kings of Persia like Kai Ounrau and with the Greek sages like Ascle
pius, Pythagoras, and Plato whoso wisdom was based on inner purification
and intellectual intuition rather than on discursive logic.**
In a historical sense, ighrdqi wisdom is connected with pre-Aristotelian
metaphysics. Jurjani in his Ta'ri/al calls the lyfrraqis “the philosophers whose
master is Plato.” ‘Abd al-Razz&q K&shani, the celebrated Sufi, in his com
mentary upon the Fufuf al-Hikam of ibn 'Arabi writes that the Iahriqls
derive their chain from Seth, often identified with Agathodemon, from whom
craft initiations and Hermetic orders also derive their origin. Ibn Wabshlyyab
in his Nabataean Agriculture mentions a class of Egyptian priests who were
the children of the sister of Hermes and who were called /«>rdgiyyu« 11 Suhra
wardi himself writes in his Mufarahai that the wisdom of Igbr&q waa possessed
by the mythological priest-kings of ancient Persia, Kiilniailh. Farid Qu, and
Kai Kbusrau and then passed on to Pythagoras and Plato, the latter being
the last among the Greeks to possess it. and was finally inherited by the Muslim
Sufis like Dhu al-Nun Misri and Biyazld Bis,*mi.n
Both metaphysically and historically, ilbragi wisdom means the ancient
pro-discursive mode of thought which is intuitive (dhauqi) rather than dis
cursive (bah , and which seeks to reach illumination by asceticism and puri
fication. In the hands of Suhrawardi it becomes a new school of wisdom integ
rating Platonic and Aristotelian philosophy with Zoroaslrian angelology and
Hermetic ideas and placing the whole structure within the context of Sufism.
“ In European languages the word "orient" means both tho east and the placing
of onaelf in the right direction, and refers to the same symbolism.
"• As Corbin states, "flAraj is a knowledge which ia Oriental because it is iteelf
the Orient of knowledge." Suhrawardi. Opera. Vol. I. p. xxix.
•• Throughout our writings we use the word "intellect" as the instrument of
gnosis, of direct intuitive knowledge where the knower and tho known become
identical, and distinguish it from reason which is its passive reflection.
“ Ibn Wahthij-yah. Ancient Alphabet and Hieroglyphic Character!. London.
1806, p. 100. These historical connections are diacusred by H. Corbin in Lee motif>
comaMriem dam la philosophic de Sohrawardi. Editions du Courricr, Teheran. 1325
Solar, p. 18, and tho Prolegomeno to Suhrawardi. Opera, Vol. I. pp. xxv ft. Wo are
indebtod to him for drawing our attention to them.
'* Suhrawardi. Opera, Vol. I. pp- 504 03,
379
A History of Muslim Philosophy
In reading tho texts of Suhrawardi one ia particularly struck by the large
number of quotations from the Qur'&n, Hadith. and the Havings of earlier
Sufis and by the profound transformation into the Islamic mould of all the
diverse ideas which Suhrawardi employs. It is by virtue of such an integration
and transformation that the ifArd^i wisdom could oome to play such a major
role in gbi'iam.
In the introduction to Hikmal al-lihrOq, Suhrawardi outlines the hierarchy
of those who know in a manner which demonstrates how he integrates ancient
wisdom into the perspective of Islam. There are, according to this Bcheme, four
major types of “knowers": —
1. The frakim ildhi, or thtosophos, who knows both discursive philosophy,
i.e., Aristotelianism, and gnosis (ta'aHuh). Suhrawardi considers Pytha
goras, Plato, and himself among this group.
2. The sage who does not involve himself with discursive philosophy but
remains content with gnosis, like IJall&j, Bist&mi, and Tustari.
3. The philosopher who is acquainted with discursive philosophy but is a
stranger to gnosis like Firtbi or ibn Stna.”
4. Ho who still seeks knowledge ffUlib) but has not yet reached a station
of knowledge.
Above all these degrees is that of the Pole (Qulb) or Leader (Imam) who
is the head of tho spiritual hierarchy and of his representatives (Hulafd').u
The stations of wisdom are also described in a purely Sufi fashion as degrees
of penetration into the divine unity expressed by the gljahddah. In his initiatory
treatise. Simurgif (Song of the Griffin), Suhrawardi enumerates five
degrees of unity:” la ildha il-AUdh, none is worthy of worship but God, which
is the common acceptance of the oneness of God and rejection of any other
divinity; la huwa ilia kuwa. there is no he but He, which is the negation of
any otherness than God. i.e.. only God can be called "He"; la anla ilia anla,
there is no thou but Thou, which is the negation of all thouness outside of
God; la ana ilia ana, there is no “I” but the divine “1", which means that
only God can say "I"; finally, the highest station of unity which is that of
those who say wa kullu ibai'in hdlikun ilia wajkahu, i.e.. all things perish
except His face (essence).” The formulations of Sufism become, therefore, the
framework of his classification of knowledge into which he tries to plsoe tho
heritage of universal gnoais and philosophy inherited by Islam.
•• Suhrawardi ia considering only the Peripatetic aepoot of ibn Sins.
“ Suhrawardi. Opera, Vol. II. pp. 10-11. Actually, the stations mentioned are
more numerous; wo have described only the major ones.
" Suhrsward!, Saflr-i Slmurgb, MS. Teheran National Library, 1758,
pp. 11-11.
•• In thia same treatise Suhrawardi writes that the moat noble knowledge is
gnosis which lies abovo human reason. As he says. "To seek tho knowledge of God
through reason is like seeking the sun with a lamp." Ibid., p. 14.
380
ShihAb al-Din Buhrawardi Maqtal
c
THE ORIENT AND OCCIDENT IN SACRED
GEOGRAPHY
As already mentioned, the term ilhniq Is closely connected with the symbol
ism of directions and sacred geography which are essential elements of the
traditional sciences. In the trilogy of ibn Slna to which we have already re
ferred, the disciple passes from the Occident which is the world of matter,
through intermediate Occidents and Orients which are the heavens and separate
substances, to the Orient proper which symbolizes the world of archangels. A
similar division of the cosmos occurs in the writings of .Suhrawardi. The
Occident is tho world of matter, the prison into which man's soul has fallen
and from which he must escape. The Orient of lights is the world of archangels
above the visible cosmos which is the origin of his soul (ruh), The middle
Occident is the heavens which also correspond to the various inner faculties
of man. It is important to note that, contrary to Peripatetic philosophy, the
Isijraqls hold that the boundary between the Occident and the Orient is set
at the primum mobile; all that is visible in the cosmos including tho celestial
sphere! is a part of the Occident, because it is still connected with matter,
however subtle it may be. The Orient, properly speaking, is above the visible
cosmos; it is the world of informal manifestation with ita boundary at the
heaven of the fixed stars.
In his treatise alQijsal al-Qjurial al- Qlyirbb/yah, "the Story of tho Occidental
Exile," in which Suhrawardi seeks to reveal the secrets of the trilogy of ibn
Slna, the universe becomes a crypt through which the seeker after truth must
journey, beginning with this world of matter and darkness into which he has
fallen and ending in the Orient of lights, the original home of the soul, which
symbolizes illumination and spiritual realization.” The journey begins at the
city of Qairawin in present-day Tunis, located west of tho main part of the
Islamic world.” Tho disciple and his brother are imprisoned in the city at the
bottom of a well which means the depth of matter. They are tha sons of
Shaikh H4di ibn al-Hjair al-Yamani, i.e.. from the Yaman. which in Arabic
means also tho right hand and. therefore, symbolically the Orient, and is
connected traditionally with the wisdom of the Prophet Solomon and the
ancient sages as the left is connected with matter and darknoss.” Above the
well is a great castle with many towers, i.e., the world of the elements and the
•’ There is a profound correspondence botwoen tho microcosm and the macro
cosm in all traditional wisdom so that the inward journey of man through tho
centre of his being conreponds to a journey through tho various stagre of tho
universe and finally beyond it. To escape from tho prison of the lower soul (naff
ammSrah) is also to pass beyond the crypt of tho cosmos.
•• Suhrawardi, Opera. Vol. II. pp. 274fT.
" It is said that when Christian Bosonkreuu. the founder of the order of the
Rosy-Cross, abandoned Europe, ho retire*! to tho Yaman.
381
A History of Muslim Philosophy
heavens or the faculties of the soul. They will be able to escape only at night
and not during the day which means that man reaches the intelligible or
spiritual world only in death, whether this be natural or initiatory, and ir
dream which is a second death. In the well there is such darkness that oue
cannot see even one’s own hands, i.e., mr.tter ia so opaque that rarely does
light shine through it. Occasionally they receive news from the Yaman which
makes them homesick, meaning that they see the intelligible world during
contemplation or in dreams. And so, they set out for their original home.
One clear night an order is brought by the hoopoe from the Governor of
tho Yaman telling them to begin their journey to their homeland, meaning
the reooption of a revelation from the intelligible world and the beginning of
asceticism. The order also asks them to let go the hem of their drees, i.e.,
become free from attachment, when they reach the valley of anta, which is
the passion of avidity. They are to kill their wives, i.e., passions, and then ait
in a ship and begin their journey in the name of God.” Having made their
preparation they set ont for their pilgrimage to Mount Sinai.
A wave comes between the disciple and the eon, meaning that the animal
soul is sacrificed. Morning is near, that ia, the union of the particular soul with
the universal soul is approaching. The hero discovers that tho world in which
evil takes place, meaning this world, will be overturned and rain and stones,
i.e., diseases and moral evils, will descend upon it. Upon reaching a stormy
sea he throws in his foster-mother and drowns her, meaning that he even
sacrifices his natural soul. As he travels on still in storm, to., in tho body, he
has to cast away his ship in fear of the king above him who collects taxes,
meaning death which all mortals must taste. Ho reaches tho Mount of Gog
and Magog, i.e., evil thoughts and love of this world enter his imagination.
The jinn, the powers of imagination and meditation, are also before him as
well as a spring of running copper which symbolizes wisdom. The hero asks
the jinn to blow upon the copper which thus becomes fiery, and from it he
builds a dam before Gog and Magog. He takes the carnal soul (nafs ammdrah )
and places it in a cave, or the brain which is the source of this soul. He then
cuts the "streams from the liver of the sky," i.e.. he stops the power of motion
from the brain which is located in the head, the sky of the body. He throws
the empyrean heaven so that it covers all the stare, the sun. and the moon,
meaning all powers of the soul become of one colour, and passes by fourteen
coffins, the fourteen powers of i/Araqi psychology,’1 and ten tombs, the five
external and the five internal senses. Having passed through these stages he
discovers the path of God and realizes that it is the right path.
•• Suhrawardi indicates here the main technique of Sufism whioh ia the invo
cation Idh'krJ of one of tho naira of God and which Sufi nutators call the sacred
barque that carries man across tho ocean of the spiritual path to the shore of the
spiritual world.
11 Those fourteen powers are: Attraction, retention, purgation, repuhion
digestion, growth, sleep, imagination, anger, lust, and tho four humours.
382
fihihab al-Dtn Suhrawardi Maqtill
The hero passes beyond the world of matter and reaches a light, the active
intellect which is the governor of this world. He places the light in the mouth
of a dragon, the world of tho dements, and passes by it to reaoh the heavens
and beyond them to the signs of the Zodiac which mark the limit of the visible
cosmos. But his journey is not yet at an end; he continues oven. boyond them
to the upper heavens. Music is heard from far away, and tho initiate emerges
from tho cavern of limitation to the spring of life” flowing from a great
mountain which is Mount Sinai. In the spring he sees fish that are his brothers:
they are those who have reached the cud of the spiritual journey.
He begins to climb the mountain and eventually reaches his father, the
archangel of humanity, who shines with a blinding light which nearly bums
him. The father congratulates him for having escaped from the prison of
QairawSn, but tells him that he must return bocause he has not yet cast away
all bonds. When he returns a seoond time, he will be able to stay. The father
tells him that above them is his father, the universal intellect, and beyond
him their relatives going back to the Great Ancestor who is pure light. "All
perishes except His essence.’’”
From this brief summary we see how ijjrdgi wisdom implies essentially a
spiritual realization above and beyond discursive thought . The cosmos be
comes transparent before the traveller and interiorized within his being. The
degrees of realization from the state of the soul of fallon man to the centre of
the soul freed from all limitation corresponds “horizontally" to the journey
from the Occident of matter to tho Orient of lights, and "vertically" to the
ascent from tho earth to the limits of the visible universe and from there,
through the world of formless manifestation, to the divino essence.
fiilcmal al- Ishriq
IlbrSqi wisdom is not a systematic philosophy so that its exposition in a
systematic fashion is hardly possible. What Suhrawardi says in one text seems
at first sight to bo contradicted in another work, and one has to discover the
point of view in each case in order to overcome tho external contradictions.
In expounding the major points of ijjrtigi wisdom we will, therefore, follow
the outlines of IJikmai al-l&riq. the most important text in which this wisdom
is expounded, drawing also from the shorter treatises which Suhrawardi wrote
aa further explanations of his major work.
Hikmal al-Iibraq is the fourth of the great doctrinal works of Suhrawardi
the first throe dealing with Aristotelian philosophy which is the neoessary
prerequisite and foundation for illuminative wisdom. It deals with the
•' The inward journey beyond the carnal soul (naft) corresponding externally to
the journey beyond the visible universe ia described by the IjhrSqts symbolically ns
reaching the fountain of lifo in which there are found the jewelB of the purely
spiritual world.
” Suhrawardi, Opera, Vol. II. p. 296.
383
A History of Muslim Philosophy
philosophy of Ishriq itself which is written for those who are not satisfied
with theoretical philosophy alone but search for the light of gnosis. The book
which in the beauty of style is a masterpiece among Arabic philosophical
texts was composed during a few months in 582/1186. and, as Suhrawardi
himself writes at the end of the book, revealed to him suddenly by the Spirit
he adds that only a person illuminated by the Spirit can hope to understand
it." The work consists of a prologue and two sections: the first concerning
logic and the criticism of certain points of Peripatetic philosophy, and the
second composed of five chapters (maqalat), dealing with light, ontology,
angelology, physics, psychology and, finally, eschatology and spiritual union.
In the section on logic ho follows mostly the teaching of Aristotle but
criticizes the Aristotelian definition. According to tho Stagirite, a logical
definition consists of genus plus differentia. Suhrawardi remarks that the
distinctive attribute of the object which is defined will give us no knowledge
of that thing if that attribute cannot be predicated of any other thing. A
definition in ijhraqi wisdom is tho summation of tho qualities in a particular
thing which when added together exist only in that thing.
Suhrawardi criticizes the ten categories of Aristotle as being limited and
confined only to this universe. Beyond this world there is an indefinite number
of other categories which the Aristotelian classification does not include. As
for the nine categories of accidents, he reduces them to four by considering
relation, time, posture, plaoe, action, and passivity aa the one single category
of relation (nisbah) to which are added the three categories of quality,
quantity, and motion,
Suhrawardi alters several points of Aristotelian philosophy in order to make
it a worthy basis for the doctrine of illumination." A major point of difference
between the IshrSqis and the Muslim followers of Aristotle (Masha’is),
also a central issue of Islamic philosophy, is that of the priority of Being
or existence (wujud) to essence (mahlyyah).” The MashATs like the Sufis
consider Being to bo principial and mahiyyah or essence to be accidental with
M Tile inspiration for tho book came to the author on an auspicious day when
all the seven planets were in conjunction in the Sign of the Balance.
“ Suhrawtudi writes that ho who wishes to understand tho eeecnoo of thia work
should spend forty days in a retreat (kkalwahf oocupying himself only with invo
cation (flhikr) under the direction of the spiritual guide whom he calls in several
places qi'im bi al Kitab.
For his criticism. Suhrawardi. Opera, Vol. II. pp. 4Bff.
•’ Tho term mdMyvaA in Arabio is composed of md meaning “what" and hiyyah
derived from the word Auwa (“it"). Il is the answer given to tlie question "What
is it J". It is used to denote the essence of anything whethor tho oxistonco of that
thing is certain or doubtful, while the word dhat ia used to denote the essence of
something which possesses some degree of being.
In Islamic philosophy reality is understood in terms of wujid and nWIAlyyaA.
the latter manning the limitation placed upon Being and identified with the Platonic
ideas. Seo 8. II. Nusr, "Tho Polarisation of Being" (/■roreedinys 0/ |A« SixiA)
Pakistan Philosophical Congrw. Lahore, 1959. pp. 50-55.
384
fifaihAb al-Din Suhrawardi Maqtul
respect to it. Suhrawardi objects to this view and writes that existence does
not have any external reality outside the intellect which abstracts it from
objecta. For example, the existence of iron is precisely its essence and not a
separate reality. The Mathl'ls consider existence to have an external reality
and believe that the intellect abstracts the limitation of a being which then
becomes ita essence.” The argument of Suhrawardi against this view is that
existence can be neither substance nor accident and, therefore, has no external
reality. For if it is an accident, it needs something to which it is an accident.
If this something is other than existence, it proves what we sought, i.e., this
something is without existence. If existence is a substance, then it cannot
be accident, although we say accidents "are." Therefore, existence is neither
substance nor accident and consequently can exist only in the intellect.
The issue involved, which is essential to the understanding of all medieval
and ancient philosophy, is the relation between Being and existence, on tho
one hand, and the archetypes and limitations on the other. The MasM’Is and
Sufis consider the universe to consist of degrees of Being and limitations which
distinguish various beings from one another. The Sufis, particularly those of
the school of ibn ‘Arabi who are concerned essentially with metaphysical
doctrines, transpose these limitations into the principial domain and consider
them the same as the archetypes or the Platonic ideas. The traditional inter
preters of Shaikhal-I shraq interpret his doctrine in a way which does not destroy
the principiality of Being," but rather subordinates the existence of a tiling
which is temporary and "accidental” to ita archetype which with respect to
the terrestrial existenoe of the thing is principial. In other words, essence
(mUhlyyah) is subordinated to Being funjud), if wc understand by this term
Being jua Being; but as archetype, it ia superior to particular existence
which ia an “exteriorization" of Being. The IjhrAqis believe in fact that it is
useless to discuss about the principiality of u-ujud and mahtyyah, of Being and
essence, because the essence or mahiyyah is itself a degree of Being The
Ijbraqta differ from the MajhA’Is in that the former considers the world to
be actual in its being and potential in ita qualities and attributes, and the
latter believes, on the contrary, that the world is potential in ita being and
actual in ita qualities and perfections.”
•• For a general discussion of this subjoct in the philosophy of tho master of
the MajhA’is. ibn Sina, see A. M. Goichon. La diatinclion d I'uf.m cl de Vexifencx
d'aprla Ibn Sina (Avicenna), de Brouwer Deeclea, Paris. 1937.
•• In fact, aa MuUa Sadrs asserts, Suhrawardi subetituUa light (nOr) for Being
attributing tho former with all the features which tho latter term possesses in other
schools. We are deeply indebted for the knowledge of this interpretation and many
other essential elements of tjJrtlji doctrines to eno of the greatest masters of
traditional wisdom in Persia, Sayyid Muhammad KApim *Aw*r.
■» Although in his Hikmal alljjrdq, Suhrawardi does not speak of tho ni-nwsary
and possible beings, in many of his other treatises like tho PartauNdmeh. 1‘tiqad
al Hukamd' and ForrMn he spooks of the moj^'t categories of Necessary
Being (wdfib al-wujad). possible being (mumkin al-wujud), and impossible bong
(mumtani' al-wujud)
385
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Another important criticism of the Aristotelians by Suhrawardi is that of
the doctrine of hylomorphism, of form and matter, which is the foundation of
Aristotle's philosophy. As we shall see later. Suhrawardi considers bodies to
be darkness and transforms the. Aristotelian forms into the guardian lights
or angels which govern each being. He defines a body aa an external, simple
substance (jauhar barit) which is capable of accepting conjunction and separa
tion." This substance in itself, in its own essence, is called body (jimp), but
from the aspect of accepting the form of species (fiirah nau'iyyah) it is called
the materia prima or hyle (hayula). Ho also differs from the Aristotelians in
defining the place (malcan) of the body not as the internal surface of the body
which contains it but as the abstract dimonBion (bu'd mujarrad) in which the
body is placed. Suhrawardi follows ibn Sina and other MashA'is in rejecting
the possibility of a void and an indivisible particle or atom, and in considering
the body to be indefinitely divisible even if this division cannot bo carried out
physically.
Other elements of Peripatetic philosophy which Suhrawardi condemns in
clude its doctrine of the soul and arguments for its subsistence which he be
lieves to be weak and insufficient ;u its rejection of tho Platonic ideas which
are the cornerstone of ijheaqi wisdom and upon the reality of which Suhra
wardi insists in nearly every doctrinal work; and its theory of vision.
This last criticism is of interest in that Suhrawardi rejects both of the
theories of vision commonly held during the Middle Ages. Regarding the
Aristotelian theory that forms of objects are imprinted upon the pupil of the
eye and then reach the sensus communis and finally the soul, Suhrawardi asks
how the imprinting of large objects like the sky upon this small pupil in the
eye is possible. Since man does not reason at the time of vision which is an
immediate act, even if largo objects were imprinted in smaller proportions,
one oould not know of the size of the object from its imago. The mathematicians
and. students of optics usually accepted another theory according to which a
conic ray of light leaves the eyo with the head of the cone in the eye and the
base at tho object to be seen. Suhrawardi attacks thia view also by saying that
this ight is either an accident or a substance. If it is an accident it cannot be
transmitted; therefore, it must be a substance. As a substance, its motion
is dependent either on our will or it is natural. If dependent on our will, we
“ Suhrawardi dofinos a substance in ma£&l'> fashion as that possible being
tmumkin) wliich has no place (mahatij, and accident aa that possible being which
does have a place. He also defines a body as that substance which has height,
width, and depth. I'ortau-Nameh, MS.. Teheran National Library. 1257. pp. I90ff.
*’ In his works Suhrawardi insists on the perishable nature of tho body ami
its being a prison into which the soul has fallen. In the Busbin at-Qutub. MS..
Tohcran Sipahsillur Library, 2911. ho gives as argument for tho permanence of the
soul and iu spiritual nature, the fact that the body of man changes its material
every fow yours while man's idonlity romaine unchanged. The moffra'i doctrine
of the soul is eesontially one of defining its faculties; tho view is to find tho
way by which tho soul can escape its bodily prison.
386
ShihAh id-Din Suhrawardi Maqtfii
should be able to gaze at an object and not Bee it, which is contrary to ex
perience; or if it has natural motion, it should move only in one direction like
vapour which moves upward, or stone which moves downward, and we should
be able to see only in one direction which is also contrary to experience. There
fore, he rejects both views.
According to Suhrawardi. vision can occur only of a lighted object. When
man sees this object, his soul surrounds it and ia illuminated by its light.
This illumination (iabrdq) of the soul (na/a) in presence of the object is vision.
Therefore, even sensible vision partakes of the illuminative character of all
knowledge.
With this criticism of the Aristotelian (maibd'i) philosophy, Suhrawardi
turns to the exposition of the essential elements of ijbraqi wisdom itself
beginning with a chapter on light, or one might say the theophany of light,
which is the most characteristic and essentia) element of the teachings of this
*
school. 1 Light (nur). the essence of which lies above oomprehension, needs
no definition because it is the most obvious of all tilings. Its nature is to
manifest itself; it is being, as its absence, darkness (zulmah), is noth'n'meaa.
All reality consists of degrees of light and darkness.
** Suhrawardi calls I..
Absolute Reality the infinite and limitless divine essence, the Light of lights
(NSr al-anwdr).“ The whole universe, the 18,000 worlds of light and darkness
which Suhrawardi mentions in his Bhutan al-Qulub, are degrees of irradiation
and effusion of this Primordial Light which shines everywhere whilo remaining
**
immutable and for ever the same.
Suhrawardi “divides" reality according to the types of light and darkness.
If light is subaistent by itself, it ia called substantial light (nur jauhari) or
incorporeal light (nur mujarrud); if it depends for its subsistence on other
than itself, it is called accidental light (nur ’ardi). Likewise, if darkness is
subsistent by itself it is called obscurity (shumq) and if it depends on other
than itself for its subsistence it is called form (bai’ab). This division is also
based on the degrees of comprehension.* ’ A being is either aware of itself
•• Suhrawardi. Opera, Vol. IL pp. 100-21.
•• Aa the quotations we have already cited demonstrate, Suhrawardi insists that
he is not dealing with the dualism of tho Zornst.rians. Rather, ho is explaining the
mysterious polarization of reality in this symbolism. The Itfinlqis usually interpret
light as Being and darkness aa determination by ideas (uMiyyab). Thoy say that
all ancient aagoa taught tins same truth but in different languages. Hermes spoke
of Osiris and Isis; Osiris or the sun symbolizes Being and Isis or the moon, mdMyyuA.
They interpret the pre-Socratic Greek philosophers in tho same fashion.
Actually thia term means both tho divine eaaanee and its first determination
which is the archangel or tho universal intellect.
*• “Tbo immense panorama of diversity which we call the Universe ia. therefore,
a vast shadow of tbo infinite variety in intensity of direct or indirect illuminations
of rays of the Primary Light." Iqbtl. The Deerlopmrnl o/ Mrtaphyeiee in I’ereia,
Luzac A Co.. London, 1008, p. 135.
*’ InhisRiaUeA Tozddn flJmdBt.Maflm'-i Tlrni, Teheran. 1316 Solar, pp,13ff„
Suhrawardi divides comprehension (idrdk) into four categories: —
387
A History of Muslim Philosophy
or ignorant of it. If it is aware of itself and subsists by itself, it is incorporeal
light, God, the angels, archetypes, and the human soul. If a thing has need
of a being other than itself to become aware of Itself, it is accidental light
like the stare and fire. If it is ignorant of itself but subsists by itself, it is
obscurity like all natural bodies, and if it is ignorant by itself and subsists
by other than itself, it is form like colours and smells.
All beings are the illumination (iftriq) of the Supreme Light which leaves
ita vicegerent in each domain, the sun in the heavens, fire among the elements,
and the lordly light (nur hpabbad) in the human soul. The soul of man is
essentially composed of light; that is why man becomes joyous at the sight
of the light of the sun or fire and fears darkness. All the causes of the universe
return ultimately to light; all motion in the world, whether it be of the heaven*
or of the elements, is caused bv various regent lights (nur mudabbir) which
are ultimately nothing but illuminations of the Light of lights.
Between the Supreme Light and the obscurity of bodies there must be
various stages in which the Supreme Light weakens gradually to reach the
darkness of this world. These stages are the orders of angels, personal and
universal at the same time, who govern all things." In enumerating these
angelic orders Suhrawardi relies largely upon Zoroastrian angelology and de
parts completely from the Aristotelian and Avicennian schemes which limit the
intelligences or angels to ten to correspond to the celestial spheres of Ptolemaic
astronomy. Moreover, in the Avicennian scheme, the angels or intellects are
limited to three intelligible “dimensions" which constitute their being, namely,
the intellection of their principle, of the necessity of their existence, and of
the contingence of their essence (mdliiyyah)." Suhrawardi begins with this
scheme as a point of departure but adds many other "dimensions" such as
domination (qahr) and love f ma/urMuA j, inde|>endence and dependence,
illumination (ijbrdq) and contemplation (shuhtd) which open a new horizon
beyond the Aristotelian universe of the medieval philosophers.
Suhrawardi calls the first effusion of the Light of lights (nur al-anwdr or
nur al a'zam) the archangel Batman or the nearest light (nur alaqrab). This
light contemplates the Light of lights and. since no veil exists in between,
receives direct illumination from it. Through this illumination, a new triumphal
(i) Sense of sight which perceives external forms like colours, etc.
(ii) Imagination ((sbarjAlf which perceives images not depending upon external
objects.
(iii) Apprehension (wahm) which is stronger than the other two and which
|»Toeivee the meaning of sensible things, but. like the other two. cannot bo separated
from the matter of bodies.
(iv) Intellectual apprehension I'aql) the seat of which ia the heart, tho instrument
which is n bridge between the human being and tho intellectual world, and
perceives intellectual realities. the world of angels, and tho spirit of prophets and
«gw*.
" Suhrawardi, Opera. Vol. II. pp. 131 32.
Ibn Rina, S'ajai, MS. al-Kurdi, Cairo, 1938, pp. 250-3*7.
ShihAh al-Dln Suhrawardi Maqtiil
light (nir al gdhir) cornea into being which receives two illuminations, one
directly from the Supreme light and tho other from tho first light. The pro-
cess of effusion continues in the same manner with the third light receiving
illumination four times, twice from the light preceding it. onoe from the first
light and once from the Supreme light; and the fourth light eight times, four
times from the light preceding it, twice from the second light, once from the
first light, and once from the Light of lights or Supreme Light.
** In this manner
the order of archangels, which Suhrawardi calls the longitudinal order (labaqdl
al luJ) or "world of mothers" (al-ummah/U) and in which the number of
archangels far exceeds the number of intelligences in Aristotelian cosmology,
comes into being.*1 Each higher light has domination (qahr) over the lower
and each lower light, love (mahabbah) for the higher. Moreover, each light is
a purgatory or veil (barzakh) between the light above and the light below.
In this manner the supreme order of angels is illuminated from the Light of
lights which has love only for Itself because the beauty and perfection of Its
essence are evident to Itself.
The supreme hierarchy of being or the “longitudinal" order gives rise to
a new polarization of Being. Ita positive or masculine aspect such as dominance,
contemplation, and independence gives rise to a new order of angels called
tne latitudinal order /Inbaqdl al-'ard) the members of which are no longer
generators of one another; rather, each is integral in itself and is, therefore,
called mutaM/tyyah. Suhrawardi identifies these angels with the Platonic
ideas and refers to them as the lords of the species (arbtb abanuA') or the
species of light (anwi' nuriyyah), Each species in the world has aa ita arche
type one of these angels, or to express it in another manner, each being in
this world is the theurgy (lilitm) of ono of these angels which are. therefore,
called the lords of theurgy (arbib abtilim). Water is the theurgy of its angel
**
khurddd, minerals of tbahrwiir, vegetables of munUd, fire of wdtbihishl. etc.
Suhrawardi usee the names of the Amibatpands (Amuha Sptrdia), the
separate powers of Ahura MazdAh in Zoroastrianism, to designate these arche.
types, and in this way unites Zoroastrian angelology with the Platonic ideas.
These longitudinal angels are not, however, in any way abstract or mental
objects, as sometimes the Platonic ideas are interpreted to be. They are, on the
contrary, concrete aa angelic hypostases and appear abstract only from man's
point of view who, because of his imprisonment in the cage of his senses.
•• Suhrawardi, Opera, Vol. II. pp. 133ff. Also ProOyom^ne, II, pp. 42ff. In itAntp
wisdom all of the cosmic hierarchies arc understood in terms of a series of illumi
nations fidrdyai; and contemplation (abubvd), tho first being a descent and the
second an ascent.
** Usually in medieval cosmology the elements, the acceptors of form, arc
called the “mothers" and tho celestial orbits, the givers of form, the "fathers."
The term "mothers" used by Suhrawardi to designate the archangelio world
should not, therefore, be oonfused with the elements.
Suhrawardi, Opera, Vol. II, pp. 157ff. Also H. Corbin. Les raori/s Zoroaairim
dans la phiiotophie da Sohrawardi, Editions du Courier. Teheran, 1325 Solar. Chap. I.
389
A History of Muslim Philosophy
considers only the object of the senses to be ooncrete. These angels are the
real governors of this world who guide all of its movements and direct all of
its changes. They are at once the intelligences and principles of the being of
things.
From the negative and feminine aspect of the longitudinal order of arch
angels, that is, love, dependence, and reception of illumination, there oomee
into being the heaven of fixed stars which these angels share in common. The
stars arc the crystallization into subtle matter of that aspect of tho archangels
which is "Non-Being" or removal from the Light of lights. This "material
ization" marks the boundary between the Orient of pure lights or the archan-
gelio world whioh lies beyond the visible heavens and the Ooddent which ia
comprised of increasing condensations of matter from the luminous heavens
to the dense earthly bodies.
The latitudinal order of angels or the archetypes gives rise to another order
of angels through which they govern the speciee. Suhrawardi calls this
intermediary order the regent lights (anwdral-mudabbirab) or tometinmanwdr
ispahbad using a term from ancient Persian chivalry. It is this intermediary
order which moves the heavenly spheres the motion of which ia by love rather
than by nature,1* and which governs the speciee as the agent of the arche
types for which the species are theurgies (lilumdlj or “icons" (amdm). The
ispahbad lights are also the oentres of men's souls, each light being the angel
of some individual person.
** As for mankind itself, its angel is Gabriel.
Humanity is an image of this archangel who ia the mediator between man
and the angelic world and the focus in which the lights of the Orient are
concentrated. It is also the instrument of all knowledge inasmuch as it is tho
**
means by which man's soul is illuminated.
This archangel aa the Holy Spirit is also the first and supreme intelligence
and the first aa well aa the last prophet. Muhammad (upon whom be peace),
The governing light of the heavens moves each heaven by moans of the planet
attached to it, which ia like tho organ of tho light. Suhrawardi calls thia mover
hurakbtb which ia the Pahlawi name for ths sun, the greatest of the heavenly lights.
Suhrawardi, Optra, Vol. II, p. 149.
Regarding the motion of each heaven, Suhrawardi writes, "Its illumination is
the cause of its motion, and its motion ia the cause of another illumination; the
persistence of the illuminations is tho cause of tho persistence of motion, and the
persistence of both the cause of die persistence of the events in this world." Haydkd
al-NOr. MS. Istanbul, Fatih, 6426, Part 5.
*• Each boing in this world, including man. is connected to the Supreme Light
not only through the intermediary angels but also directly. This light which
connects each being directly to the Divine Light and places that being in the
hierarchy of beings at a place proper to it is called tAurroA. In ancient Persia it
waa behoved that when a new king waa to be chosen, tho royal JAurroA would
descend upon him and distinguish him from the other pretenders to the throne.
•• Sulirawardi describee Gabriel as ono of the supreme archangels who ia the
archetype of the “rational specie*" (nau' n/Uiq), the giver of life, knowledge, and
virtue. He ia also called the giver of tho spirit (rowdn IoAAjJ; and the Holy Spirit
(ruA al-tjudut). Suhrawardi. Optra. Vol. II. p. 201.
390
ShihAb alllbi Suhrawanli Mnqtul
the archetype of man (rabb al-nan‘ al-iiudn) and tho supreme revealer of
divine knowledge.
The physics and psychology of IJikmal nl-llirdq treat of the world of
bodies and the world of souls which, along with the world of the intelligences
or angels, oomprise the totality of this universe.4’ As already mentioned,Suhra
wardi does not divide bodies into form and matter. Rather, his division of
bodies is based on the degree in which they accept light. All physical bodies
are either simple or compound; the simple bodies are divided into three classes:
those that prevent light from entering (hdjii), those which permit the entranoe
of light (lalll), and those which permit light to enter in various degrees
(muqtafid/ and which are themselves divided into several stages.4’The heavens
are made of the first category in the luminous state. As for the elements below
the heavens, they consist of earth belonging to the first category, water to
the second, and air to the third.44 Compound bodies belong likewise to one
of the above categories, depending on which element predominates in them.
All bodies are essentially purgatories or istlmius (barzakh) between various
degrees of light by which they are illuminated and which they in turn reflect.
Suhrawardi rejects the view that the change of bodies is due to particles
of one element entering into those of another. As a reason against thia view he
cites the example of a jug full of water that has been heated, i.e., according to
this view particles of fire have entered into it. The volume of the water, how-
ever, does not change since it does not spill over; therefore, particles of fire
cannot have entered into it. Qualitative change is due rather to the ooming into
being of a quality which is intermediate between the qualities of the original
bodies and which is shared by all the particles of the new compound. For
example, when water is hosted a now quality between the oold of the water and
the heat of tho fire is brought into being by the light governing the change.
In the explanation of meteorological phenomena, Suhrawardi follows closely
the teachings of ibn SIna and Aristotle in accepting the exhalation and vapour
theory. He differs, however, from them in the importance he attaches to light
as the canse of all these changes. For example, the heat which is responsible
for evaporation is nothing but one of the effects of reflected light. All changes
in fact which one observes in the world are caused by various hierarchies of
light.44 The elements are powerless before the heavens, the heavens are
44 In tho Plvjad al-Hukamd' and the /’artati-.VdmsA, Suhrawardi divides the
universe into the world of intelligences (‘Alam al-'uyiU or 'Mam aljabariil/, tho
world of souls ('Mam ainu/us or '<Uam al mabiUU), and the world of bodios
(‘Mam al ajtam or 'Man: al-mulOk). Also ibid., p. 270.
44 IM., p. 187.
44 Suhrawardi considers fire, the fourth of the traditional elements, to be a
form of light and tho theurgy of urdlMAtril, and not one of tho terr-retrial olomonto.
Suhrawardi gives a different moaning to causality than the Aristotelians-
whose four causes which he does not accept. For Suhrawardi all three cauaea are
really nothing but light, i.e.. everything ia made of light and by light, and is
given a form by the archangelic light whom he calls tho "giver of forma" (wOhi'-
al.tuwar) and seeks the Light of lights ua its _oal and end.
391
A History of Muslim Philosophy
dominated by the souls, the souls by the intelligences, the intelligences by the
universal intellect, and the universal intellect by the Light of lights.
The elements or simple bodies combine to form compounds which oomprise
the mineral, plant, and animal kingdoms, each of which is dominated by a
particular light or angel. All that exists in the mineral kingdom is "lighted
body” (banakh nMyyah) the permanence of which is like that ofthe heavens."
Gold and various jewels like rubies make man happy because of the light
within them which is akin to the soul of man. litis light within the minerals
is governed by isfandarmudh which is the master of theurgy for earthy sub
stances.
With greater refinement of the mixture of the elements, plants and animals
come into being having their own faculties and powers which are so many
"organs" of the light governing them. In higher animals and in man who is
the most complete terrestrial being these faculties appear in their perfection.
Man as the microcosm contains in himself the complete image of the universe,
and hia body is the gate of life of all elemental bodies. This body in turn is
the theurgy for the itpahbad light which governs each man. All the faculties
of tho soul are aspects of the light which shines upon all elements of the body
and illuminates the powers of imagination and memory for which it is the
source. This light is connected with the body by means of the animal soul (ruh
ttayawdnlyyah) the seat of which is in the liver and leaves the body for its
original home in the angelio world as soon as death destroys the equilibrium
of the bodily elements. It is the love (mafuMah) of the light which creates
the power of desire aa it is its domination (qahr) which brings about anger.*1
Suhrawardi draws heavily upon the psychology of ibn SIna for the enumera
tion ft the faculties of the various souls." It may be said in fact that with
a few changes his classification is the same aa that of his famous predecessor,
despite the different role which the intellect or light plays in governing and
illuminating the various faculties in each case. The classification of the various
faculties of the soul by Suhrawardi may be outlined as follows
attraction
(jitUibab)
feeding retention
fmdaitoA;
Vegetative soul growth digestion
(al-na/a al.nabdliyyah) fndmiyyo*/ /bodimah)
reproduction repuhion
fmuwalltdah) Wo*;
•• Suhrawardi, Optra. Vol. 11. pp. 199-200.
“ Ibid., pp. 204-09.
•' Ibn SIna, Ptycboloyie v Jrhi dilt al-Sifa. ed. J. Bukos, Editions de 1*Academic
Tchecoalovaquc des Sciences. Prague. 1950, Vol. I. pp. Mff.
•• Suhrawardi, ParUu-Namb. pp. 190ff.
392
BfiihAb tl'Din Suhrawardi Maqtiil
power of lust
{( fnutaiyyoA)
(tbahwah)
power of anger
(tlrM)
Man, besides tho above faculties and the five external senses, possesses
five internal senses which serve as a bridge between the physical and the
intelligible worlds and have their counterpart in the msrrocoemic order.
These senses consist of:
Stmut communit — The centre in which all tho data of the external sens'
* are
fhi— mutktarik) collected. It is located in the front of the frontal cavity
of the brain.
Fantasy — Tho place of storage for the sensus communit. It is located
(khaySl) in the back of the frontal cavity,
Apprehension — Governs sensible things by what does not belong to tho
(wobm) senses. It ia locatod in tho middle cavity.
g4on
tIm
* in Analyses, synthooiziw, and governs forma and ia sometimes
fmuMiiayyilaA; identified with apprehension. It is located in the middle
cavity.
Memory — Tho plane of storage for apprehension. It ia located in the
IMfifah) — back of the middle cavity.
These faculties are crowned by the intellectual soul (na/a natigah) which
belongs to the spiritual world and which, through the network of those faculties,
becomes for a period attached to the body and imprisoned in the fortress
of nature. Often it is so lost in thia new and temporary habitat that it
forgets its original home and can be re-awakened only by death or ascetic
practices.
**
The last section of the Hikmai al-Ithrdg concerning eschatology and spiritual
union outlines precisely tho way by which tho spirit returns to its original
abode, tho way by which the colAarsis of the intellect is achieved. Every soul,
in whatever degree of perfection it might be, seeks the Light of lights, and ita
joy is in being illuminated by it. Suhrawardi goes so far aa to say that he who
hsa not tasted the joy of the illumination of the victoria! lights has tasted no
joy at all.
** Every joy in the world is a reflection of the joy of gnosis, and the
ultimate felicity of the sou! ia to reach toward the angelic lights by purification
and ascetic practices. After death tho soul of those who have reached some
measure of purity departs to the world of archetypes above the visible heavens
and participates in the sounds, sights, and tastes of that world which are the
•• Suhrawardi. ZfoydHl ai-Nur, Sections fl and 7. In certain other writings
Suhrawardi avers that the light of each man is created with his body but survives
after it. By creation, however, 8uhrawardi means essentially “individualisation"
and "actualitation" rather than creation in the ordinary sense. There is no doubt
that his basic teaching is that tho spirit or soul comes from the world of light and
ultimately returns to it.
•* Suhrawardi, Optra, Vol. II. p. 225.
393
A History of Muslim Philosophy
principles of terrestrial forms. On the contrary, those whose soul has been
tarnished by the darkness of evil and ignorance (tuhab al lhaqdwah) depart
for the world of inverted forma (fuwar mu'aUaqali) which lies in the labyrinth
of fantasy, the dark world of the devils and the jinn.** As for the gnostics
or the theosephw (mata'aUihtn) who have already reached the degree of
sanctity in this life, their sou! departs to a world above the angels.
After leaving the body, the soul may be in several states which Suhrawardi
outlines as follows:44*47 Either the soul is simple and pure like that of children
and fools who are attracted neither to this world nor to the next. Or it is simple
but impure and as such is attracted more to this world, so that upon death it
suffers greatly by being separated from the object of ita desire; gradually,
however, it forgets its worldly love and becomes simple as in the first case.
Or it is not simple but perfect and pure and upon death joins the intelligible
world to which it is similar and has an undescribable joy in the contemplation
of God. Or it is complete but impure, so that upon death it suffers greatly
both for separation from the body and from the First Source; gradually, how-
ever, the pains caused by alienation from this world cease and the soul enjoys
spiritual delights. Or the soul is incomplete but pure, i.e., ft- has a love for
perfection but has not yet realized it; upon death, therefore, it suffers cease
lessly, although the love of this world gradually dies away. Finally, the soul
is incomplete and impure, so that it suffers the greatest pain. Man should,
therefore, spend the few days he has here on earth to transform the precious
jewel of his soul into the image of an angel and not into that of an anima).
The highest station to be reached by the soul is that of the prophets (na/«
qudjiyyah f who perceive the forms of the universals or archetypes naturally.
They know all things without the assistance of teachers or books. They hear
the sounds of the heavens, i.e., the archetypes of earthly sounds, and not just
vibrations of the air, and sec the intelligible forms. Their souls and those of
great saints also reach such degree of purity that they can influence the world
of the elements as the ordinary soul influences the body.44 Theyc an even
make the archetypes subsist by will, that is, give them existence.
The knowledge of the prophets is the archetype of all knowledge. In his
nocturnal Ascension (mi'rSj) the Prophet Muhammad—upon whom be peace—
44 Thia is, properly speaking, the world of the unconscious which has become the
subject of study for modom psychologists. It should he clearly distinguished from
tho world of archetypes which, rather than tho “collective unconscious," ia the
source of symbols.
47 SuhrawanU, RMleA YouUn Sbindkhl. pp. S3-S3.
44 Ibid., pp. OCff Since human souls are brought into being by the celestial
souls they are able to acquire the knowledge which these heavenly souls poem
when they are put before them aa a mirror. In the dreams of ordinary men this
effect occurs occasionally since the external and internal sonaoo which are the veils
of the soul are partially lifted. In tho case of prophets and saints such effects occur
in awakening, i.e.. they always rofloet the intelligible world in the mirror of their
souls so that they have knowledge of tho unmanifosted world even when awake.
394
Shihab al-Din Suhrawardi Maqtul
journeyed through all the states of being beyond the universe to the Divine
Presence or microooemically through his soul and intellect to the Divine Self."
This journey through the hierarchy of Being symbolizes the degrees of know
ledge which the initiate gains as he travels on the Path in imitation of the
bringer of revelation who has opened the way for him. A prophet ia absolutely
necessary aa a guide for the gnostic and as a bringer of Law for society.
Man needs a society in order to survive and society needs law and order and.
therefore, prophets to bring news of the other world and to establish harmony
among men The best man is he who knows, and the best of those who know
are the prophets, and the beet prophets are those who have brought a
revelation (murailin), and the beet of them are the prophets whose revelation
has spread over the face of the earth, and the completion and perfection of
the prophetic cycle is the Prophet Muhammad—upon whom be peace—who
is the seal of prophethood.”
The Initiatory Narratives
In a series of treatises written in beautiful Persian prose, Suhrawardi
expounds another aspect of iffirdyt wisdom which is the complement of the
metaphysical doctrine. These works which we have called initiator)' narratives
are eymbolio stories depicting the journey of the soul to God muoh like certain
medieval European romances and poems Buch as Parsifal and tho Divine
Comedy although of shorter length. Unfortunately, in this limited space we
cannot deal with all of these narratives each of which treats of a different
aspect of the spiritual journey using various traditional symbols such as the
cosmic mountain, the griffin, the fountain of life, and the lover and the be
loved. Some of the more important of these narratives are the Rivilnh fi al-
Mi'raj (The Tret .’iso on the Nocturnal Journey), RiMah fi Halal al-fuftKyyah
(Treatiue on the State of Childhood), Rdzi ba Jami'al-i $ufiyan (A Day with
the Community of Sufis), Awaz-i Par-i Jibra'il (The Chant of the Wing of
Gabriel), Aql-i Sarfifi (The Red Intellect), $afir-i Slmurgfi (The Song of the
Griffin). Lnjhat-i Murdn (The Language of Termites), Risilal al-fair (The
Treatise on the Birds), and Risalah fi IJaqiqal al-'Iihq (Treatise on the Reality
of Love). The titles alone indicate some of the rich symbolism which Suhra
wardi uses to describe the spiritual journey. Each narrativo depicts a certain
aspect of the spiritual life as lived and practised by sages and saints. Some
times theory and spiritual experience are oombined as in tho Xtodz-i Par-i
" The journey to the spring of life which lies at the boundary of tbo visible
heavens symbolises the journey through the soul fna/e), while the journey to tho
cosmic mountain Qaf from which the spring flows and the ascent of this mountain
which lies above tho visible heavens symbolise tho inner journey to the centre
of one s being. In his Miraf-Ndmeh. Suhrawardi describes tho symbolic meaning
of the nocturnal Ascension of the Prophet which is the model that all Sufis eoom to
imitate.
’• Suhrawardi, RMeh Yazddn ahindOl. PP 81-82.
A History of Muslim Philosophy
JibraH" where in the first part of the vision the disciple meets the active
intellect, the eage who eymbolizre the "prophet" within himself who comes
from the "land of nowhere" (nd-lcu/d-Md). and asks certain questions about
various aspects of the doctrine. In the second part, however, the tone changes;
the hero asks to be taught the Word of God and after being instructed in the
esoteric meaning of letters and words, i.e., jafr, he learns that God has certain
major words like the angebs, aa well aa the supreme Word which is to other
words aa the sun is to the stare. He learns furthermore that man is
himself a Word of God, and it is through His Word that man returns to the
Creator. He, like other creatures of this world, is a chant of the wing of Gabriel
which spreads from the world of light to that of darkness. This world is a
shadow of his left wing aa the world of light is a reflection of his right wing.
It is by the Word, by the sound of the wing of Gabriel, that man has come
into existence, and it ia by the Word that he can return to the prtndpial
state, the divine origin, from which he issued forth.
Tht Ighraqi Tradition
The influence of Suhrawardi has been aa great in the Islamic world, particu
larly in Shi ism, aa it has been small in the West. His works were not translated
into Latin so that his name hardly ever appears along with those of ibn Slna
and ibn Rusfail aa masters of philosophy. But in the East from the moment
if his death, his genius in establishing a new school of traditional wisdom
waa recognized and he waa to exercise the greatest influence in Shi ism. With
the weakening of Aristotelianism in the sixth/twelfth century the element
that came to replace it and to dominate Islamic intellectual life waa a com
bination of the intellectual Sufism of ibn ‘Arabi and the iihrdqi wisdom of
Suhrawardi. These two masters who lived within a generation of each other
came from the two ends of the Islamic world to Syria, one to die in Damascus
and the other in Aleppo, and it waa from this central province of Islam that
their doctrines were to spread throughout the Muslim East, particularly in
Persia. The main link between these two groat masters of gnosis was Qu(.b
al-Din Shlrizi who was. on the one hand, the disciple of §adr al-Din Qunawi,
himself a disciple and the main expositor of the teachings of ibn ‘Arabi in the
East, and. on the other, the oommentator of Hikmal al-llbruq.n
Throughout the last seven centuries the tradition of Ifhraq has continued
especially in Persia where it played a major role in the survival of gjji'ism
during the §afawid period. Among the most important commentaries written
" For the translation into French and analysis of this work, see H. Corbin and
P Kraus, "La bruiaaement de fails de Gabriel." Journal AtuUiqut. July-Sept.
1935. pp. 1-82.
” This commentary, finished in 694/1295,'appeals on tho margin of the standard
edition of ffdrnuU al-IttrOq which is studied in all the theological schools in present-
day Persia. It lias been the moans by whioh the doctrines of Suhrawardi have been
interpreted through tho centuries.
396
Sbih&b al-Din Suhrawardi Miupiil
on Suhrawardl'a work* are thoee of tihanw al-Din Shahrazun and Qu0 al-
Dln Shirazi in the Beventh/thirteenth century, WudOd Tabriz! in the tenth
sixteenth century, and Mulla §adra in the eleventh/seventcenth century on
the Hilcmat al-hhraq, tho commentaries of Shahrazuri, ibn Kammunah, and
'AllAmah Hilli in the seventh and eighth/thirteenth and fourteenth centuries
on the Talirihdl, and the commentaries of Jalil al-Dln DawwAni in the ninth'
fifteenth century and Maula Abd al-Razz&q Lahiji in the eleventh,"seven
teenth century on the Haydkil al-Nur. These commentaries and many others
which we have not been able to mention here present a veritable treasure of
ilhrdgi wisdom which has influenced so many philosophers, theologians, and
gnostics from Khwijeh Nasir al-Din 1'Qsi and Daww&ni to Mir Dimid, Mulla
§adra, Shaikh Ahmad Absi'i, and IJiji Mulla Hidi Sabziwari. Some of the
works of Suhrawardi were also to influence tho sages and philosophers in the
Mughul Court in India where parts of his writings were even translated into
Sanskrit,” as they were translated into Hebrew some time earlier. Ishrayi
wisdom has, therefore, been one of tho universal elements of Eastern intel
lectuality during the past centuries and, as it is a version of the perennial
philosophy, it is touched by the breath of eternity which, as in the case of
all expressions of truth, gives it a freshness and actuality that make this wisdom
aa essential today as it has been through the ages.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Suhrawardi, *Aql-i Surfch. Anjuman i DuatdArAn-i Kitab, Teheran, 1332 Solar;
"Le bruisaement de Tails de Gabriel (RuAlsh AwAz-i Par i JlbraTI)** translation
and introduction by H. Corbin and P. Kraus, Journal ArvUvjw., July-Sept. 1936,
pp. 1-82; A’lfctb JZoydkil al-Nur, od. Mohamed Abou Rayan. Grande Librairie
Commercials, Cairo. 1376/1937; Kitab Hikmat al-lshrOq, Teheran. lithographed
edition, 1316/1898, with the commentaries of Qufb al-Din Shirazi and Mulla Sadra;
The Lovers' Friend (RieMah Ma'nit al-'UfMaq), ed. O'. Spies. JAmi'ah Proas.
Delhi, 1934; Opera Metaphysica et Myrtica. ed. H. Corbin, Vol. I, Ma'Arif
” Corbin ar.d oertain other European scholars have also emphasized the role of
ighrdqi wisdom in the tenlh/sixUenth-century Zoroastrianism and the movement
connected with the name of Azar Kaiwiln. Thia curious eclectic movement in
which elements of Hinduism, Buddhism, Islam, and Zoroastrianism are combined
but which differs greatly from original Zoroatrian doctrines has loft behind several
works like the DobMldn al-Mafthohib and the DasOtlr some passages of which seem
to be forged. Such a leading scholar of Zoroastrianism as 1. Poure-Davoud considers
the whole work to bo purposeful falsification. See his article “DaaAtir", IrSn-i
Imrur, second year. No. II.
Whatever importance thia syncretic movement which is so similar to tho religions
movemenu at the Court of Akbar may have had, iu followers paid great attention
to the writings of Shaikh al-lshrdq. In fact, one of the disciples of Azar KaiwAn
by the name of FarzAmli BalirAm ibn FartbAd translated aovoral works of Suhra-
wardi into Persian. For a diseuwiion of the school of Ara rKaiwAn, see M. Mu'in,
"Azar KaiwAn wa PsiruwAn-i u," Revue de la Faeulte dee letters, Tohoran Uni
versity, Vol. IV. No. 3. 1336'1917, pp. 25-42.
397
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Mathaul, Istanbul. 1845, Vol. II. InatiUlt Franco-Iranien. Teheran. 1958; HialleA
Yaaddn SkinalAl. Malba'-i Tlmi. Teheran. 1315 Solar; Thru Trraliaea on Mysri
dm. eil and tr. 0. Spies and 8. K. Kliattak. Stuttgart, 1935; Jalil al-Dln
al-Dewwtni. al-Hurfl fi Bharh-i HaydlU alNOr, Madras Government
Oriental Serieo. Madras. 1953.
M. Bayani, Dau KioOlehi Fdrdi Suhrawardi. Teheran. 1325 Solar; H. Corbin.
Avicenne tile rfdl vidonnaire. 3 Vole.. Institut Franoo-Iranion. Teheran. 1952-54;
Ltt moti/a Zoroaetriene done la phdoeophie da Sohruwordi, Editions du Coumer.
Teheran. 1325 Solar; Suhrawardi d'Atep loundaluer de la doctrine illuminative
tnhrdq,/, G. P. Maiaonneuvo, Paris, 1939; A. D4n4ariiht. d/Mr-t Suhrawardi wa
MuUa Sadra. Teheran. 1315 Solar; M. Horten. Die Philosophic der Erleuehtung
nach Suhrawardi, Hallo a. 8.. 1912; Die Philoeophte dee Idam. Verlag Emat Rhein-
hardt, MUnohen, 1924 ; 8. M. Iqbil. The Development o/ Melaphydcs in Perda,
Luzon * Co.. London. 1908; H. Ritter, "Philotogika, IX. Dio vior Suhrawardi;
I. Slphftb al-Din . . . al-Suhrawardi al-Maqtul," Der Idam. 193", pp. 270-95.
Chapter XX
IBN ARABI
A
LIFE AND WORKS
A fair and critical account of the life and thought of Shaikh Muhyi al-Din
ibn al-'Arabi (or ibn 'Arabi aa ho waa known in the East) presents certain
difficulties. Biographical material ia not lacking; he is given great prominence
in many of the biographical and historical books, both in Arabic and Persian.
Some whole books and chapters of books have been written in defence of his
orthodoxy or against his alleged heterodoxy. Many of his own works, parti
cularly the Fuluhat, RidiUt al-Quds. and the "Memorandum" in which he
enumerates his works and describes the conditions under which they were
written, throw abundant light on some of the obscure aspects of his life as a
man, and above all as an eminent Sufi and Sufi author. But tho account we
derive from all these various sources is conflicting, and the real problem that
faces us lies in drawing a true picture of his personality, hia pattern of thought,
and his works, baaed on such account. Yet aa far aa his personal life and his
mental and spiritual make-up are concerned, our best source should be his
own works to which we have already referred; for in such works wo have
first-hand information about his mental and spiritual progress. There are
also abundant details concerning his early masters in the Sufi Path, hia
personal contacts with the men and women he encountered on his vast travels.
Here and there we come across a vivid description of his mystical experiences,
visions, and dreams. Without tho help of such material which has hitherto
398
Ibn ‘Arabi
been neglected, ibn 'Arabi's true personality, both as a thinker and a mystic,
would remain considerably unknown to us. The task is by no means easy.
It means bunting through his voluminous Fuluhdl and other works for the
biographical details we have just described. An outline of the main historical
facta of his life is easy enough to give, but it would be no complete or scientific
biography in the full sense of the word.
Ibn 'Arabi was bom at Murcia—South-east of Spain—on the 17th of
Ramadkn 560/'28th of July 1165. His nisbah—al-IJ&timi al-Ti'i—shows that
he was a descendant of the ancient Arab tribe of fayy—a fact which proves
that Muslim mysticism was not the exclusive heritage of the Persian mind as
some scholars maintain. He came from a family well known for their piety.
*
His father and two of his uncle wore Sufis of some renown. He received his
early education at Seville which was a great centre of learning at tne time.
There he remained for thirty years studying under some of tun great scholars
of that city such as abu Bakr b. Khalaf, ibn Zarqiin, and abi Muhammad
‘Abd al- Haqq al-Ishbili. At Seville he also met a number ot his early spiritual
masters such aa Yusuf b. Khalaf al-Quini who was a personal disciple of
Shaikh abu Madyan,1 and fjalib al-'Adawi whom he describes as a perfect
ascetic. He refers to such men iu terms of admiration and gratitude in
his FuJuhat and Risalal al-Quds and acknowledge his debt to them for the
initiation he had received from them into the Path of Sufism.
While making Seville his permanent place of residence, he travelled widely
throughout Spain and Maghrib establishing wherever he went fresh relations
with eminent Sufis and other men of learning. He visited Cordova, while still
a lad, and made acquaintance with ibn Rujhd. the philosopher, who was then
the judge of the city.’
In 590/1194 ho visited Fez and Morocco. At the age of 38. i.e., iu 589/1193,
he set out for the East during the reign of Ya'qfib b. Yflsuf b Abd al-Mu’min,
the Sulf&n of Africa and Andalusia. His apparent intention was to perform his
pilgrimage, but his real aim was perhaps to seek settlement in another country
far away from the very much troubled West. The political and religious atmos
phere there was stifling, and men like ibn ‘Arabi were looked upon with
suspicion both by the narrow-minded theologians and the ruling monarchs.
The SultAns of the Muwabbids and Murilbi(s feared them for tho influence
they had over their followers and the possible danger of using these followers
for political purposes as was the ease with abu al-Qasim b. Qasi, head ol the
Murldln, who was killed in 546,'1151. The Malikite theologians of the West
were most intolerant towards the new school of thought that was beginning to
take shape at the time. Even al Qhaz<'s teaching was rejected and his books
committed to the flames. The East, on the other hand, was more tolerant and
more ready to accept new ideas and movements. Yet not the whole of the
• FutOMi al-MaUiyyab, Vol. I. p. 327.
' Ibid., p. 199.
399
A History of Muslim Philosophy
East can bo eaid to be so, for when ibn 'Arabi visited Egypt in 698/1201, he
waa ill-reoeived by some of ita people and an attempt waa made on his life.
After leaving Egypt he travelled far and wide throughout the Middle East
visiting Jerusalem, Mecca (where he studied and taught (ladilh for a time),
the Hij&z, Baghdad. Aleppo, and Asia Minor. He finally settled down in
Damascus until he died on the 28th of Rabi' al-ThAni 038/17th of November
1240. He was buried in Mount Q&siyun in the private sepulchre of QM>
Mubyi al-Din b. al-Dhaki.*
Ibn ‘Arabi is one of tho most prolific authors in Muslim history. He is
adequately described by Brockelmann* aa a writer of colossal fecundity. There
are at least 140 extant works which bear his name, varying from short treatises
of Bome few pages to voluminous books like the Fulihil. The exact number
of his works is uncertain. Sha'rini gives the figure of 400,* and the Persian
author Jimi, the much exaggerated figure of 600? Muhammad Rajab IJilmi,
in a book entitled al-Burhdn al-Azhar fi Mandqib al Shaihh al-Akbar, enume
rates 284 books and tracts. In the "Memorandum" which ibn 'Arabi himself
drew up in the year 832/1234, six years before his death, he gave the titles
of 261 of his writings and said that that was as far as he oould remember. The
writing of the “Memorandum" has ita significance. It provides a written
evidence against anyone who might attempt to forge books in his name; and
there must have been many amongst his enemies in the East who made such
attempts.
To establish the identity and authenticity of all tho works that have been
ascribed to him is a task which has not been undertaken by any scholar yet.
But we know within limits tho genuineness of most of his major works, although
doubt might arise with regard to certain parts of their contents. If what gba'rini
sayB about the Futuhal is true, it would make us wonder how much of this
most important book is genuinely ibn 'Arabi's and how much of it is foisted
upon him.’ When he tried to summarize the Fulihit. gha'rini said, he oame
across certain passages which he thought were in oonflict with the established
opinions of the orthodox Muslims. He omitted them after some hesitation.
One day. he was discussing the matter with Shaikh Shams al-DIn al-Madani
(d. 955/1548) who produced a copy of the FuIuW which had been oollated
with ibn 'Arabi's own MS of the book at QQniyah. On reading it he discovered
that it contained none of the passages which he had omitted. This convinced
him. he goes on to say, that the copies of the FuluhAl which wore in current
use in Egypt in his time contained parts which had been foisted upon the
author as done in tho case of the EuriZs and other works?
' Qutubi, Fawill alWa/ayOl. Vol. n. p. 301.
• Brockeltnann, GAL, Vol. I, p. 44,
• rouoyu. p. io.
• NafahAl, p. 834.
' Published in tho BuUztzn of ihz Faculty o/ Arts. Alexandria, Vol. VU. December
1934, by A. E. Affifi.
■ YauAqU, p. *3.
400
Ibn 'Arabi
This may very well have been the case, but having not yet read the QOniyah
MS. of the FuluAU which is still extant, one is unable to say how it compares
with the printed texts of our time. A critical edition of the book based on the
QOniyah MS. is of utmost importance. Indeed it might considerably alter our
knowledge of ibn 'Arabi's mystical philosophy. What seems more certain ia
that many works or parts of works were written by later disciples of ibn
'Arabi's school and attributed to him; and many others were extracted from
his larger works and given independent titles. All these exhibit the same strain
of thought and technique which characterise his genuine works. Such facta
aooount, partly at least, for the enormous number of works which are usually
attributed to him.
Although hia output was mainly in the field of Sufism, his writings seem
to have oovered tho entire range of Muslim scholarship. He wrote on the
theory and practice of Sufism, ijadith Qur'anic exegesis, the biography of
the Prophet, philosophy, literature, including Sufi poetry, and natural sciences.
In dealing with these diverse subjects he never lost sight of mysticism. We
often see some aspects of his mystical system coming into prominence while
dealing with a theological, juristic, or even scientific problem. His mystical
ideas are imperceptibly woven into his writings on other sciences and make
it all the more difficult to understand him from a mixed and inconsistent
terminology.
The dates of only ten of his works are definitely known, but wo can tell,
within limits, whether a work belongs to his early life in Spain and al-Magbrib,
or to his later life in the East. With a few exceptions, most of his important
works were written after he had left his native land, principally at Mecca
and Damascus; and hia maturest works like Fuluh&t, the Fusus, and the
TanaauUU were written during the last thirty years of hia life. His earlier
works, on the other hand, are more of the nature of monographs written on
single topics and show no sign of a comprehensive philosophical system. It
seems that it is his contact with the resources and men of the East that gave
his theosophical speculations their wide range, and his mystical system of
philosophy its finality. His opus magnum, aa far as mystical philosophy is
concerned, is his celebrated Fugus al-ljikam (Gems of Philosophy or Borels of
Wisdom) which he finished at Damascus in 628(1230, ten years before his
death. The rudiments of this philosophy are to be found scattered throughout
his monumental Fuiu/kll which he started at Mecca in 598/1201 and finished
about 635/1237. The general theme of the Fu.w was foreshadowed in the
Fulihal in more places than one, and more part icularly in Vol. U, pp. 357-77.
B
PATTERN OF THOUGHT AND STYLE
The extraordinary complexity of ibn ‘Arabi's personality is a sufficient
explanation of the complexity of the manner of his thinking and his style of
401
A History of Muslim Philosophy
writing. It is true that sometimes he is clear and straightforward, but more
often—particularly when he plunges into metaphysical speculations—his style
becomes twisted and baffling, and his ideas almost intractable The difficulty
of understanding him sometime
* can even be felt by scholars who are well
acquainted with the characteristic aspect of his thought. It is not so much
what he intends to say aa the way in which he actually says it that constitutes
the real difficulty. He has an impossible problem to solve, vis., to reconcile
a pantheistic theory of the nature of reality with the monotheistic doctrine
of Islam. His loyalty to both was equal, and indeed he saw no contradiction
in holding that the God of Islam is identical with the One who is the essence
and ultimate ground of all things. He was a pious ascetic and a mystic, besides
being a scholar of Muslim Law, theology, and philosophy. His writings are a
curious blend of all these subjects. He is for ever trying either to interpret the
whole fabric of the teaohing of Islam in the light of his pantheistic theory' of
the unity of all being, or to find justification for this theory
* in some Islamic
texts. The two methods go hand in hand, with two different languages, i.e., the
esoteric language of mysticism and the exoteric language of religion, used con
currently. Logically Bpeaking, Islam is irreconcilable with any form of panthe
ism, but ibn ‘Arabi finds in the mystic experience a higher synthesis in which
Allah and the pantheistic One are reconciled. Interpretation within reasonable
limits is justifiable, but with ibn ‘Arabi it is a dangerous means oi converting
Islam into pantheism or vice versa. This is most apparent in the Fufiif, and
to a certain extent in the Futuhdt, where the Qur’Snic text and traditions of
tho Prophet are explained mystically or rather pantheistically. Furthermore,
while he is thus occupied with eliciting from the Qur’knic text his own ideas,
he gathers round the subject in hand material drawn from all sources and
brings it all into the range of his meditation. This accounts for the very
extensive and inconsistent vocabulary which makes his writings almost un
intelligible.
Whenever he is challenged or he thinks he would be challenged About the
meaning of a certain statement, he at once brings forth another meaning
which would convince the challenger. He was asked what he meant by saying:
"0 Thou who eeut me, while 1 »ee not Thee,
How olt I see Him, while He sees not me!"
He replied at once, making the following additions which completely altered
the original sense, by saying.
"0 Thou who steel me ever prone to sin,
While Thee 1 see not willing to upbraid:
How oft 1 see Him grant His grace’s aid
JFAile He sees me not seeking grace to win.”*
• f ulii/uU, Vol.’n. p. 646, and Maqqari, p. 407. Tho translation is by E. G
Browne, Literary History o/ Persia, Vol. II, p. 409.
402
Ibn 'Arabi
Similarly, when his contemporaries read hi* Tarjumdn al-Aihwiq. which is
■opposed to bo written on divine love, they oould nee in the Diwin nothing
but erotic poems describing beautiful women, lovely soenes of nature and
ordinary human passions. They accused the Shaikh of being in love with
Shaikh Makin al-Din's daughter whose physical and moral qualities he describes
in the introduction of the Diwan. On hearing this he wrote a commentary on
the work explaining it all allegorically. He did not deny that he loved al-
NijAm—the beautiful daughter of Makin al-Din. What he denied was that
he loved her in the ordinary sense of human love. For him she was only a
symbol, a form, of the all-pervading beauty which manifests itself in the
infinite variety of things.
"Every name I mention,” he says, "refers to her; and every dwelling
I weep at is her dwelling ... yet the words of my versos are nothing but
signs for the spiritual realities which descend upon my heart. May God
guard the reader of this Diwan against entertaining thoughts which do
not become men with noble souls and lofty aspirations, for the hearts of
such men are only occupied with heavenly things.”1*
It is not improbable that ibn ‘Arabi made a deliberate effort to complicate
the style, as Professor E. G. Browne remarks, in order to conceal his ideas
from the narrow-minded orthodox and the uninitiated. He certainly succeeded,
partly at least, in oovering his pantheistic ideas with an apparel of Qur'&nic
texts and Prophetio traditions—a fact which is largely responsible for the
controversy which raged throughout the Muslim world regarding his orthodoxy.
But it is also possible, as we have already remarked, that he was equally con
vinced of the truth of Islam and of his own philosophical system which was
verified by his mystical experience. In thia case there is no need to talk about
ooncealment al ideas or intentional complexity of style.
It would be a mistake to judge ibn 'Arabi by the ordinary canons of logic
He is undoubtedly a thinker and founder of a school of thought, but he is
pre-eminently a mystic. His mystical philosophy, therefore, represents the
union of thought and emotion in the highest degree. It is a curious blend of
reasoned truths and intuitive knowledge. He is also a man of oolossal imagi
nation. His dialectical reasoning is never free from forceful imagery and mystic
emotions. In fact, his thought seems to be working through his imagination
all the time. He dreams what he thinks, yet there is a deep under-current of
reasoning running through. He does not always prove his ideas with a formal
dialectic, but refers his readers to mystic intuition and imagination as the
final proof of their validity. The world of imagination for him is a real world;
perhaps even more real than the external world of concrete objects. It is a
world in which true knowledge of things can be obtained. His own imagination
waa aa active in his dreams aa in his waking life. He tells us the dates when and
Introd, to the Com. on the Tarjumin.
403
A Hanory of Muslim Philosophy
tho places where he had the visions, in which he saw prophets and saints and
discoursed with them; and others in which a whole book like the /msu* was
handed to him by the Prophet Muhammad who bade him "take it and go
forth with it to people that they may make use thereof."11 He calls this an act of
revelation or inspiration and claims that many of his books were so inspired.1’
"AU that 1 pat down in my books." he says, "is not the result of thinking or
discursive reasoning. It is communicated to me through the breathing of tho
angel of revelation in my heart."1’ “AU that I have written and what I am
writing now is dictated to me through the breathing of the divine spirit into
my spirit. This is my privilege as an heir not as an independent source; for the
breathing of the spirit is a degree lower than the verbal inspiration."1’
Such claims point to a supernatural or aupermental source by which ibn
Arabi’s writings were inspired. Yet in discussing the problem of revelation
(kaibf and wafii) in general, he emphaticaUy denies all outside supernatural
agents, and regards revelation as something which springs from the nature of
man. Here are his own words:
"So, if any man of revelation should behold an object revealing to him
gnosis which he did not have before, or giving him something of which
he had no possession, this ‘object’ is his own 'ain (essenoe) and naught
besides. Thus from the tree of his ‘self he gathers the fruit of his own
knowledge, just as the image of him who stands before a polished mirror
is no other than himself.”1’
Revelation, therefore, is an activity of man’s soul, when all its spiritual
[lowers are summoned and directed towards production. It is not due to an
external agent, neither is it the work of the mind aa wo usuaUy know it. What
is sometime seen as an "object" revealing knowledge to an inspired man is
nothing hut a projection of his own "self."
Ibn Arabi is quite consistent with himself when he denies an outside source
of divine inspiration, for man. according to him. Idle everything else, is in
one sense divine. So there ia no need to assume a duality of a divine revealer
and a human receiver of knowledge.
Another very important aspect of his thought is its digressive character.
He has offered the world a system of mystical philosophy, but nowhere in his
books can we find thia system explained as a whole or with any appreciable
degree of unity or ooheaion. He goes on from one subject to another with no
apparent logical connection, pouring out details which he draws from every
conceivable source. His philosophical ideas are widely spread among this mass
11 FufOf al-IJikam, p. 47.
" See ibn ‘Arabi’s works ul the fight of a memorandum ... by A. E. Affifi
luUttin o/ th, Faculty o/ Art,. Vol. Vin, pp. I I2f.
” Quoted by Shn'rAni. fmawt, p. 24
’• Ibid.
” FttfOf. p. M.
404
Ibn 'Arabi
of irrelevant material and one has to pick them up and piece them together.
That he has a definite system of mystical philosophy is a fact beyond doubt.
It is hinted at in every page in the Fu-«i« and in many parts of the Futufuit;
but the system aa a complete »-hole is to be found in neither. It is extraordinary
that he admits that ho has intentionally ooncealod his special theory by
scattering ita component parts throughout his books and left the task of
assembling it to the intelligent reader. Speaking of the doctrine of tho super
elect (by which ho means the doctrine of the Unity of all Being), he says:
"I have never treated it as a single subject on account of its abstruse
ness, but dispersed it throughout the chapters of my book (the Fultlhdl).
It is there complete but diffused, as I have already said. The intelligent
reader who understands it will be able to recognize it and distinguish it
from any other doctrine. It is the ultimate truth beyond which there is
nothing to obtain."1*
The third aspect of his thought is ita eclectic character. Although he may
rightly claim to have a philosophy of religion of his own. many of the com
ponent elements of this philosophy are derived from Islamic aa well as non-
Islamio sources. He had before him the enormous wealth of Muslim sciences
aa well aa the treasures of Greek thought which were transmitted through
Muslim philosophers and theologians. In addition, he was thoroughly familiar
with the literature of earlier Sufis. From all these sources he borrowed what
ever was pertinent to his system; and with hia special technique of interpre
tation he brought whatever he borrower! into line with his own ideas. He read
into the technical terms of traditional philosophy and theology—as he did
with the Qur’inic terms—totally different meanings. He borrowed from Plato,
Aristotle, the Stoics, Philo, and the Neo-PIatonista terms of which he found
equivalents in the Qur'in or in the writings of the Sufis and Scholastic Theo
logians. All were used for the construction and defence of his own philo
sophy from which he never wavered.
C
CONTROVERSY ABOUT HIS ORTHODOXY
There has never been in the whole history of Islam another man whose
faith has been bo much in question. The controversy over ibn 'Arabi's ortho
doxy spread far and wide, and occupied the minds of the Muslims for oenturiee.
We may even say that some traces of it are still to be found. Muslim scholars
in the past were not concerned with his philosophy or mysticism as such, but
with how far his philosophical and mystical ideas wore in harmony or dis
harmony with the established dogmas of Islam. Instead of studying him
objectively and impartially, and putting him in the plaoe he deserves in the
•• FulUMl, Vol. I. pp 47, 48.
405
A History of Muslim Philosophy
general frame of Muslim history, they spent so much time and energy in trying
to prove or disprove his orthodoxy. No work could have been more futile and
The difference of opinion on this subject is enormous. By some ibn 'Arabi
ia considered to be one of the greatest figures of Islam a* an author and a
Sufi, while others regard him as a heretic and impostor. His peculiar style
perhaps is largely responsible for tliis. The ambiguity of his language and
complexity of his thoughts render his ideas almost intractable, particularly
to those who are not familiar with his intricate ways of expression. He is a
writer who pays more attention to ideas and subtle shades of mystical feel
ings than to words. We must, therefore, attempt to grasp the ideas which lie
hidden beneath the surface of his conventional terminology. Again, wo must
not forget that ho is a mystic who expresses hia ineffable experience—as most
mystics do—in enigmatic language. Enigmas arc hard to fathom, but they
are the external expression of the feelings that lie deep in the heart of the
mystic.
People who read ibn 'Arabi’s books with their eyes fixed on the words mis
understand him and misjudge him. It is these who usually charge him with
infidelity (ht)r) or at least with heresy. Others who grasp his real intention
uphold him aa a great mystic and a man of God. A third class suspend their
judgment on him on the ground that he spoke in a language which is far
beyond their ken. They have nothing to say against hia moral or religious
life, for this, they hold, was beyond reproach.
It seems that the controversy about hia religious beliefs started when a
certain Jamal al-Din b. sl-Kjjayyat from tho Yemen made an appeal to the
‘uJama’ of different parts of the Muslim world asking them to give their opinion
on ibn 'Arabi to whom he attributed what EiruzAMdi describes as heretical
beliefs and doctrines which are contrary to the consensus of the Muslim
community. The reaction caused by the appeal waa extraordinarily varied.
Some writers condemned ibn 'Arabi right out; others defended him with
great, real. Of this latter claw we may mention Firuzib&di. Siraj al-Din al-
MaHpiimi. al-8irij al-Balqini. Jalil al-Din al-Suyflti, Qutb al-DIn al-Hsmawi.
al-Qutb al-Shiriizi, Fafchr al-Din al-RAzi, and many others. Both Makhzilmi
and Suyflti wrote books on the subject. They could see no fault with ibn
Arabi except that he was misunderstood by people who were not of his
spiritual rank. Suyfifi puts him in a rank higher than that of Junsid when
he says that he was the instructor of the gnostics firi/in) while J unaid was
the instructor of the initiates f muridin). All these men are unanimous in
according to ibn ‘Arabi the highest place both in learning and spiritual
leadership They recognize in his writings a perfect balance between Skori'nA
(religious Law) and WuyiyaA (tho true spirit of the Law), or between the
esoteric and exoteric aspects of Islam.
The greatest opposition appeared in the eighth and ninth/fourteenth and
fifteenth centuries when an open war was declared against speculative Sufism
406
Ibn 'Arabi
in general and that of ibn ‘Arabi and ibn al. Farid in particular. The Hanbalite
ibn Taimlyyah (d. 728/1328), with his bitter tongue and uncompromising
attitude towards the Sufis, lol the attack. He put these two great mystics in
the same category with IJallAj, Qfinawi, ibn SAb'in, TilimsAni, and KirmAni
as men who believed in incarnation and unification. In this respect, he said,
they were even worse than the Christiana and the extreme Shi'ites.” He does
not even distinguish between the mystical ravingB of HallAj, the deeply emo
tional utterances of ibn al-Farld, the cold-bloodod and almost materialistic
pantheism of Tilimsini, and the monistio theology of ibn ‘Arabi. They were
all guilty of the abominable doctrines of incarnationism and pantheism.
Curiously enough, he was lees violent in his criticism of ibn ‘Arabi's doctrine
which, he said, was nearer Islam than any of the others.
By far the worst enemy of ibn 'Arabi and ibn al-Farid and most insolent
towards them was Burhan al-Dln IbrAhim al-BiqA'i (d. 858/1454). He devoted
two complete books to the refutation of their doctrines, not sparing even their
personal characters. In one of these books entitled Tanbih al-Qhabi ‘ala Takftr
ibn 'Arabi" (Drawing the Attention of the Ignorant to the Infidelity of ibn
'Arabi) he says:
"He deceived the true believers by pretending to be one of them. He
made his stand on the ground of their beliefs ; but gradually dragged them
into narrow corners, and led them by seduction to places where perplexing
questions are lurking. He is the greatest artist in confusing people; quotes
authentic traditions of the Prophet, then twists them around in strange
and mysterious ways. Thus, ho leads his misguided followers to his
ultimate objective which is the complete overthrowing of all religion
and religious beliefs. The upholders of such doctrines hido themselves
behind an outward appearance of Muslim ritual such as prayer and
fasting. They are in fact atheists in the cloaks of monks and ascetics, and
veritable heretics under the name of Sufis.''1*
These accusations are unjust as they are unfounded. Ibn 'Arabi, it is true,
does interpret the Qur'An and Prophetic traditions in an esoterio manner, and
he is not the first or tho last Suli to do it, but his ultimate aim is never the
abandonment of religious beliefs and practices as Biq&'i maintains. On tho
contrary, he did his utmost to save Islam which he understood in his own
way. The charge of pretenoe and hypocrisy is contradicted by the bold and
fearless language in which ibn 'Arabi chooses to express himself. He does
not pretend to be a Muslim in order to please or avoid the wrath of true
believers to whom Biqa'i refers. He believes that Islam which preaches the
principle of the unity of God oould be squared with his doctrine of the unity
■’ Bin Taunlyyah, IlarA'd, Vol. I. pp. 166. 167.
•• MS. in the special collection of Ahmad Qfaaki PJjhn. Cairo.
I* Ibid.
407
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of all Being, and thia he openly declares in the strongest terms. He may have
deceived himself or expressed the mystical union with God in terms of the
metaphysical theory of the unity between God and the phenomenal world,
but he certainly tried to deceive no one.
In contrast to BiqA'I's terrible accusations, we should conclude by citing
the words of Balqlni who had the highest opinion of ibn 'Arabi. He says:
"You should take care not to deny anything that Shaikh Mubyi al-Din
has said, when he—may God have mercy upon him—plunged deep into
the sea of gnosis and the verification of truths, mentioned towards tho
end of his life in the Ftuif. the FutufuU, and the Tanazzuldt—things
which are fully understood only by people of his rank."
D
INFLUENCE ON FUTURE SUFISM
Although ibn 'Arabi waa violently attacked by his adversaries for his views
which they considered unorthodox, his teachings not only survived the
attacks, but exercised the most profound influence on the course of all future
Sufism. His admirers in the East, where he spent the greater part of his life,
called him at-Slfa'kb al-Atbar (the Greatest Doctor), a title which has never
been conferred on another Sufi since. It pointed to his exceptional qualities
both as a great spiritual master and a Sufi author—and it is held to be true
of him to this day. He marks the end of a stage where speculative Sufism
reached its culminating point. The centuries that followed witnessed the rapid
Bpread of Sufi orders all over the Muslim world; and Sufism became the popular
form of Islam with much less theory and more ritual and practioe. The
founders of the Fraternities were better known for their piety and spiritual
leadership than for their speculation. This is why ibn 'Arabi's theosophy and
mystical philosophy remained unchallenged. They were in fact the only source
of inspiration to anyone who discoursed on the subjoct of the Unity of all
Being, whether in Arabic-speaking countries or in Persia or Turkey. Some
writers of his own school, such as 'Abd al-Karim al-JIli and 'Abd al-Razziq
al-Kasbani, did little more than reproduce his ideas in a different form. Other
schools of Sufis were not entirely free of his influence, at least as far aa hie
terminology was concerned. The tremendous commentary of Aruai on Qu tbairi's
KMlaJi, which is the classical model of Sunni Sufism, abounds with ideas and
terms borrowed from ibn 'Arabi's works.
Hia influence seems to show itself most markedly in the delightful works
of the mystic poets of Persia from the seventh (thirteenth to the ninth/fiftcenth
century. 'Iriqi, Shabistari, and Jimi were all inspired by him. Their wonderful
odes are in many respects an echo of the ideas of tho author of the Fusu.1
and the Futuhdt, cast into magnificent poetry by the subtle genius of the
Persian mind. They overflow with the ideas of divine unity and universal love
408
Ibn 'Arabi
and beauty. God. is described as the source and ultimate ground of all things.
He is for ever revealing Himself in the infinite forms of the phenomenal world.
The world is created anew at every moment of time; a continual process of
change goes on. with no repetition and no becoming. The divine light illumi
nates all particles of Being, just as the divine names have from eternity illumi
nated the potential, non-existent realities of things. When these realities
become actualized in space and time, they reflect, like mirrors, the divine
names which give them their external existence. The phenomenal world is the
theatre wherein all the divine names are manifested. Man is the only creature
in whom these names are manifested collectively.
These are but a few of the many ideas which tho mystic poets of Persia
borrowed from ibn 'Arabi and to which they gave an endless variety of
poetical forms. Il is said that 'Irftqi wrote his Lama'M after hearing §adr al-IMn
QQnawl'B lectures on the FufiZf, and Jimi who commented on the same book
wrote his Lawi'i^ in the same strain. The following is an extract from ‘Iraqi's
Lama'/U which sums up ibn 'Arabi's theory of the microcosm (man):
"Though Form," he said, "proclaims me Adam's son.
My true degree a higher place hath won.
When in the glass of Beauty I behold.
The Universe my image doth unfold:
In Heaven's Sun behold me manifest—
Each tiny molecule doth me attest. ..
Ocean's a drop from my pervading Sea.
Light but a flash of my vast Brilliancy:
From Throne to Carpet, all that is doth seem
Naught but a Mote that rides the sunlit Beam.
When Being’s Veil of Attributes is shed,
My Splendour o’er a lustrous World is spread. ..
E
DOCTRINES
1. Unity o/ AU Being.—The most fundamental principle which lies at the
root of ibn 'Arabi's whole philosophy, or rather thcologico-philosophical and
mystical thought, is the principle of the “Unity of All Being" (wahdat al-
mijud). Perhaps the word “pantheism'' is not a very happy equivalent, partly
because it has particular associations in our minds, and also because it does
not express the full significance of the much wider doctrine of the Unity of
All Being as understood by our author. From this primordial conception of
the ultimate nature of reality all his theories in othor fields of philosophy
follow with an appreciable degree of consistency.
•• A. J. Arberry. Sufim. pp. 108-03.
409
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Much of the criticism levelled against ibn ‘Arabi’s position is due to
the misunderstanding of the role which he assigns to God in his system—
a fact which attracted the attention of even ibn Taimlyyah, who distinguishes
between ibn ‘Arabi's troAdnl almijud and that of other Muslim pantheists.
He says that "ibn ‘Arabi's system is nearer to Islam in so far as he discriminates
between the One who reveals Himself and the manifestations thereof, thus
establishing the truth of the religious Law and insisting on the ethical and
theological principles upon which the former Shaikhs of Islam had Insisted."”
In other words, ibn Taimlyyah does not wish to put ibn ‘Arabi in the same
category with Tilims&ni, Isri’lli. and Kirm&ni whom he condemns as atheists
and naturalists.
Ibn 'Arabi's pantheism is not a materialistic view of reality. The external
world of sensible objects ia but a fleeting shadow of the Real God.
It is a form of acosmism which denies that the phenomenal has being or mean
ing apart from and independently of God. It is not that oold-blooded pantheism
in which the name of God is mentioned for sheer courtesy, or, at the most,
for logical necessity or consistency. On the contrary, it is the sort of pantheism
in which God swallows up everything, and the so-called other-than-God is
reduced to nothing. God alone is the all-embracing and eternal reality. This
position is summed up in ibn 'Arabi's own words:
"Glory to Him who created all t hings, being Himself their very essence
fainuha)"-,
and also in the following veree:
"0 Thou Who hast created all things in Thyself,
Thou unitest that which Thou createst.
Thou createst that which existeth infinitely
In Thee, for Thou art the narrow and the all-embracing
Reality, therefore, is one and indivisible. We speak of God and the world, the
One and the many, Unity and multiplicity, and such other terms when we use
the language of the senses and the unaided intellect. The intuitive knowledge
of the mystic reveals nothing but absolute tmity which—curiously enough—
ibn Arabi identifies with the Muslim doctrine of unification (tau^id). Hence
the further and more daring identification of his pantheistic doctrine with
Islam as the religion of unification.
"Base the whole affair of your seclusion (khalwah)," he says, "upon facing
God with absolute unification which ia not marred by any (form of) polytheism,
implicit or explicit, and by denying, with absolute conviction, all causes
and intermediaries, whole and part, for indeed if you are deprived of such
tauhid you will surely fall into polytheism.’’”
” Hon'd. Vol. I, p. 167.
" f'ueus, p. 88.
" Hinlal d-malwah, MS. India Office. London.
410
Ibn 'Arabi
Thia, in other words, means that the real tauAtf of God is to face Him alone
and see nothing else, and declare Him the sole agent of all that exists. But
such a view points at once to a fact long overlooked by scholars of Muslim
mysticism, i.e., that Muslim pantheism (uiMal aiwujid) is a natural--
though certainly not a logical—development of the Muslim doctrine of tauhid
(unification). It started with the simple belief that "there is no god other than
God,” and under deeper consideration of the nature of Godhead, assumed
the form of a totally different belief, i.e., there is nothing in existence but
God. In ibn 'Arabi's case, the absolute unity of God. which is the monotheistic
doctrine of Islam, is consistently interpreted to mean the absolute unity of
all things in God. The two statements become equivalent, differing only in
their respective bases of justification. The former has its root in religious
belief or in theological or philosophical reasoning or both; the latter has ita
final justification in tho unitive state of the mystic. We have a glimpse of this
tendency in the writings of tho early mystics of Islam such as Junaid of
Baghdad and abu Yarid of Bistam, but they speak of unhdat al-ibuhtd
(unity of vision) not of tcujud (Being), and attempt to develop no philosophical
system in any way oomparable to that of ibn 'Arabi's.
It ia sufficiently clear now that according to ibn 'Arabi reality is an essentia,
unity—substanoe in Spinoza's sense; but it is also a duality in so far as it
has two differentiating attributes: llaqq (God) and kbalq (universe). It can
be regarded from two different aspects. In itself it is the undifferentiated and
Absolute Being which transcends all spatial and temporal relations. It is a
bare monad of which nothing can be predicated or known, if by knowledge
we mean the apprehension of a thing through our senses and discursive reason.
To know in this sense is to determine that which ia known; and determination
is a form of limitation which is contrary to the nature of the Absolute. The
Absolute Monad is 'he most indeterminate of all indeterminatea fanhir al-
naHrdl); the thing-in-itself (al-fhai) aa ibn 'Arabi calls it.
On the other hand, we ;an view reality as wc know it; and wc know it
invested with divine names and attributes. In other words, we know it in the
multiplicity of its manifestations which make up what we call the phenomenal
world. So, by knowing ourselves and the phenomenal world in general, we
know reality of which they are particular modes. In ibn 'Arabi's own worils
“we”—and this goes for the phenomenal world as well—"are the names by
which God describes Himself." We are His names, or His external aspects.
Our essences are Hia essence and thia constitutes His internal aspect. Hence
reality is One and many; Unity and multiplicity; eternal and temporal;
transcendent and immanent. It ia capable of receiving and uniting in itself
all conceivable opposites. Abu Sa'Id al-Kharr&z (d. 277/890) had already dis
covered this truth when he said that God is known only by uniting all the
opposites which are attributed to him. "He is called the First and the Last:
the External and the Internal. He is the Essence of what is manifested and
of that which remains latent. ... The Inward says no when the Outward says
411
A History of Muslim Philosophy
I am; and the Outward says no when the Inward aays I am, and so in the
case of every pair of contraries. The speaker ia One, and Ho ia identical with
the Hearer."*4
Thus, ibn ‘Arabi's thought goes on moving within that closed circle which
knows nc beginning and no end. His thought ia circular because reality as
he envisages it is circular. Every point on the circle is potentially tho whole
of the circle and is capable of manifesting the whole. Looking at tho points
with an eye on the centre of the circle (the divine essence), we can say that each
point is identical with the essence in one respect, different from it in another
respect. This explains the verbal contradictions with which ibn 'Arabi's books
abound.
Sometimes he comes nearer the philosophers than the mystics when he
explains the relation between God and the univereo. Here we have theories
reminiscent of the Platonic theory of ideas and the Ithr&qi's doctrine of
intelligible existence (al-wu;ud alfijihni) and the scholastic theory of the
identification of substance and accidents (the theory of the Aih'aritea). "Before
coming into existence," he says, "things of the phenomenal world were poten
tialities in the bosom of the Absolute.” They formed the contents of the
mind of God as ideas of His future beooming- These intelligible realities are
what he calls "the fixed prototypes of things" (al-a'ySn al-AabUah). God’s
knowledge of them is identical with His knowledge of Himself. It is a state
of self-revelation or Belf-oonsciousness, in which God saw (at no particular
point of time) in Himself these determinate "forms" of His own essence. But
they are also latent states of His mind. So they are both intelligible ideas in
the divine mind as well as particular modes of the divine essence. Hence the
a ydn allMZniaA are identified, on the one hand, with the quiddity (mdhiyyah)
of things, and, on the other hand, with their essence (huwiyyah). The former
explains the first aspect of the o'yon aa ideas; the latter, their second aspect
as essential modes. He calls them non-existent in the sense that they have
no external existence, on the one hand, and no existence apart from the divine
essence, on the other. They are the prototypes and causes of all external exiatenta
because they are the potential relations between the divine names aa well as
the potential modes of the divine essence. When these potentialities become
actualities we have the so-called external world. Yet. there is no real beooming,
and no beooming in spare and time. The process goes on from eternity to
everlaatingness.
This complicated relation between the One and the many is nowhere syste
matically explained in ibn 'Arabi’s works, not even in the fusus A certain
formal dialectic can be detected in the Eusus where the author attempts to
explain his metaphysical theory of reality, but the thread of the formal reason
ing is often interrupted by outbursts of mystic emotion. Ibn 'Arabi is essen
tially a mystic, and in the highest degree a dreamer and fantast as we have
“ FutOf, p. 7?.
412
Tbn ‘Arabi
already observed. ue often uses symbols and similes in expressing the relation
between the multiplicity of the phenomenal world and their essential unity.
The One reveals Himself in the many, he says, as an object is revealed in
different mirrors, each mirror reflecting an image determined by its nature
and its capacity aa a recipient. Or it is like a source of light from which an
infinite number of lights are derived. Or like a substance wffieh penetrates
and permeates the forms of existing objects: thus, giving them their meaning
and being. Or it is like a mighty sea on the surface of which we observe count
less waves for ever appearing and disappearing. The eternal drama of existence
is nothing but this ever-renewed creation (al-khalq aljadid) which is in reality
a perpetual process of self-revelation. Or again, he might say, the One is the
real Being and the phenomenal world is its shadow haring no reality in itself.
But beautiful as they are, such similes are very ambiguous and highly mis
leading. They are at least suggestive of a duality of two beings: God and the
universe, in a system which admits only an absolute unity. Duality and
multiplicity are illusory. They are due to our incapacity to perceive the
essential unity of things. But this oscillation between unity and duality ia
due to confusing the epistemic side of the issue with its ontological side.
Ontologically, there is but one reality. Epidemically. there are two aspects:
a reality which transcends the phenomenal world, and a multiplicity of sub
jectivities that find their ultimate explanation in the way we view reality as
we know it. To our limited senses and intellects the external world undergoes
a process of perpetual change and transformation. We call this creation but it
is in fact a process of self-unveiling of the One Essence which knows no change.
2. Notion of Dtity.—In spite of his metaphysical theory of the nature of
reality, ibn 'Arabi finds a place for God in his system. His pantheism, like
that of Spinoza, ia to be distinguished from the naturalistic philosophy of
the Stoics and the materialistic atheists. God that figures in his metaphysics
as an unknowable and incommunicable reality, beyond thought and descrip
tion. appears in his theology aa the object of belief, love, and worship. The
warmth of religious sentiment displayed in his writings attaches itself to his
conception of God in the latter sense which comes dose to the monotheistic
conception of Islam. Indeed he tries his utmost to reooncile the two concep
tions; but his God is not in the strict religious sense confined to Islam or any
other creed. He is not the ethical and personal God of religion, but the essence
of all that is worshipped and loved in all religions:
"God has ordained that ye shall worship naught but Him.”"
This ia interpreted by ibn 'Arabi to mean that God has decreed that nothing
is actually worshipped oxcept Him. This is an open admission of all kinds of
worship, so long aa the worshippers recognize God behind the external "forms"
of their gods. They call their gods by this or that name, but the gnostic
•• Qur'an, xvii, 24.
413
A History of Muslim Philosophy
(al-'tri/) calls his God "Allah" which 'S the most universal of all names of
God. Particular objects of worship are creations of men's minds, but God, the
Absolute, is uncreated. Wc should not, therefore, confine God to any particular
form of belief to the exclusion of other forms, but acknowledge Him in all
forms alike. To limit Him to one form—as the Christians have done—is
infidelity (ku)r); and to acknowledge Him in all forms ia tho spirit of true
religion. This universal religion which preaches that all worshipped objects
are forms of One Supremo Diety is the logical corollary of ibn 'Arabi's meta
physial theory that reality is ultimately one. But it has its deep roots in mysti
cism rather than in logic. It is nowhere better expressed than in the following
verse:
"People have different beliefs about God
But I behold all that they believe."”
And the verse:
"My heart has become the receptacle of every 'form' ;
It is a pasture for gazelles and a convent for Christian monks.
And a temple for idols, and pilgrims' Ka'bah,
And the Tablets of the Torah, and the Book of the Qur'in.
I follow the religion of love whichever way its camels take.
For thia is my religion and my faith."”
So, all paths lead to one straight path which leads to God. It would be a
gross mistake to think that ibn 'Arabi approves of the worship of stones and
stars and other idols, for these as far as his philosophy is concerned are
non-existent or mere fabrications of the human mind. The real God is not a
tangible object; but one who reveals Himself in the heart of the gnostic.
There alone He ia beheld.
This shows that ibn ‘Arabi’s theory of religion ia mystical and not strictly
philosophical. It has ita root in his much wider theory of divine love. The
ultimate goal of all mysticism is love; and in ibn 'Arabi’s mystical system in
particular, it is the full realization of the union of the lover and the Beloved.
Now, if we look deeply into the nature of worship, we find that love forms ita
very basis. To worship is to love in the extreme. No object ia worshipped
unless it is invested with some sort of love; for love is the divine principle
which binds things together and pervades all beings. This means that the
highest manifestation in which God ia worshipped is love. In other words,
universal love and universal worship are two aspects of one and the same
fact. The myBtio who see* God (the Beloved) in everything worships Him in
everything. This is summed up in the following verse:
FuIGAK, Vol. JU. p. 175.
•’ Tar,umAn alAlhwOq. pp. 30-40.
414
Ibn ‘Arabi
"I swear by the reality of Love that Love is the Cauao of all love.
Were it not for Love (residing) in the heart. Love (God) would not
be worshipped.
This is because Love is the greatest object of worship. It is the only thing
that is worshiped for its own sake. Other things are worshiped through it.
God, as an object of worship, therefore, resides in the heart aa the supreme
object of love. He ia not the efficient cauao of the philosophers or the transcen
dent God of the Mu'tazilites. He is in the heart of His servant and is nearer
to him than his jugular vein.” “My heaven and my earth contain Me not,”
says the Prophetic tradition, "but I am contained in the heart of My servant
who is a believer."
3. God and Man.—It was Husain b. Mansur al-Hallaj (d. 309/822) who
first laid down tho foundation for the theory that camo to be known in the
writings of ibn ‘Arabi and 'Abd al-Karim al-Jili as the Theory of the Perfect
Man. In the final form in which ibn ‘Arabi cast it, it played a very important
role in the history of Muslim mysticism. Hallaj'B theory was a theory of
incarnation based on the Jewish tradition which states that "God created
Adam in Hia own image"—a tradition which the Sufis attributed to the Pro
phet. He distinguished between two natures in man: the divine (al-ldhul)
and the human (al-nArut). The two natures arc not united but fused, the one
into the other, as wine ia fused into water. Thru for the first time in the history
of Islam a divine aspect of man was recognized, and man waa regarded as a
unique creature not to be compared with any other creature on account of
his divinity.
The HaUSjian idea was taken up by ibn ‘Arabi, but completely transformed
and given wider application. Firat, the duality of lahit and natal became a
duality of aspects of one reality, not of two independent natures. Secondly,
they were regarded as actually present not only in man but in everything what
ever; the narut being the external aspect of a thing, the lahiil, its internal
aspect. But God who reveals Himself in all phenomenal existence is revealed
in a most perfect and complete way in the form of the perfect man. who is
best represented by prophets and saints. This forms the main theme of the
Fuyua ad-Hikam and al-Tadbiral aZ-ZHAiyynA of ibn ‘Arabi, but many of its
aspects are dealt with in his Futuhdt and other works. Each one of the twenty
seven chapters of the Fuji) is devoted to a prophet who is both a Logos (kali-
mah) of God and a representative of one of the divine names. They are also
cited as examples of the perfect man. The Logos par exctllenu is the Prophet
Muhammad or rather tho reality of Muhammad, as we shall see later
So man in general—and the perfect man in particular—is the most perfect
manifestation of God. The univerae which, like a mirror, reflects the divine
attributes and names in a multiplicity of forms, manifests them separately
'• Fufif. p. 194.
:B Qiar’Xn. i. 15.
415
A History of Muslim Philosophy
or analytically. Man alone manifests these attributes and names collectively
or synthetically. Hence he is called the microcosm and the honoured epitome
(almukhla.sar al ghartf) and the most universal being (al-kaun aljimi'). who
oomprises all realities and grades of existence. In him alone the divine pre
sence is reflected, and through him alone God becomes conscious of Himself
and His perfection. Here are ibn 'Arabi's own words:
"God, glory to Him, in respect of His most beautiful names. Which are
beyond enumeration, willed to see their a'ydn (realities), or if you wish
you may say, His (own) 'ays, in a Universal Being which contains the
whole affair—inasmuch as it is endowed with all aspects of existence—
and through which (alone) His mystery is revealed to Himself: for a
vision which consists in a thing seeing itself by means of itself is not the
same as that of the thing seeing something else which serves as a mirror. ...
Adam was the very essence of the polishing of this mirror, and the spirit
of this form (i.e.. tho form in which God has revealed Himself: which is
man).”"
Here ibn 'Arabi almost repeats the words of Hallij who says:
"God looked into eternity, prior to all things, contemplated the
essence of His splendour, and then desired to project outside Himself
His supreme jov and love with the object of speaking to them. He also
created an image of Himself with all His attributes and names. This
image was Adam whom God glorified and exalted. "•*
Yet, the difference between the two thinkers is so fundamental. Hallij is
an incamationist; ibn 'Arabi, a pantheist. On man aa the microcosm he says:
"The spirit of the Great Existent (the Universe)
Ts this small existent (man).
Without it God would not have said:
'I am the greatest and the omnipotent.'
Let not my contingency veil thee.
Or my death or resurrection.
For if thou cxamincat me,
I am the great and the all-embracing.
The eternal through my essence.
And the temporal are manifested.""
This is why man deserves the high honour and dignity of being God's vice
gerent on earth—a rank which God has denied all other creatures including
the angels. This superior rank goes not to every individual man, for some
•• Fufuf, p. 48.
“ TawMn, p. 130.
M Fuguf, p. 162.
416
Ibn 'Arabi
men are even lower than the beasts, but to the perfect man alone, and this
for two reasons:
a) He is a perfect manifestation of God in virtue of unity »> himself, of all
God's attributes and names.
b) He knows God absolutely through realizing in some sort of experience
his essential oneness with Him.
Here ibn 'Arabi's metaphysical theory of man coincides with the theory of
mysticism.
4. Ethical and Religious Implications.—Wn have already pointed out that
ibn 'Arabi's pantheistic theory of the nature of reality ia the pivot round
which the whole of his system of thought turns Some aspects of this philo
sophy have been explained; and it remains now to show its bearing on his
attitude towards man’s ethical and religious life.
Everything in ibn 'Arabi’s world is subject to rigid determinism On the
ontological aide we have seen that phenomenal objects are regarded as the
external manifestations of their latent realities and determined by their own
laws. Everything ia what it is from eternity and nothing can change it. not
even God Himself. "What you are in your state of latency (thubut) is what
you will be in your realized existence fjuAurj,” is the fundamental law of
existence. It ia self-determinism or self-realization in which freedom plays no
part either in God'a actions or in those of His creatures. Moral and religious
phenomena are no exception. God decrees things in the sense that He knows
them as they are in their latent states, and pre judges that they should come
out in the forms in which He knows them. So He decrees nothing which lies
outside their nature. This is the mystery of predestination fsirr al-gadar).la
Belief and unbelief, sinful and lawful actions, are all determined in this
sense and it is in this sense also that men are the makers of their own destiny
for which, ibn 'Arabi says, they are responsible. "We are not unjust to them."
says God, "but it is they who are unjust to themselves." "1 am not unjust
to My servants.",‘ On this ibn 'Arabi comments as follows: "1 (God) did
not ordain infidelity /ku/r) which dooms them to misery, and then demand
of them that which lies not in their power. Nay. I deal with them only as I
know them, and I know them only aa they are in themselves Hence if there
be injustice they are the unjust Similarly, I say to them nothing except that
which My essence has decreed that I should say ; and My essence is known
to Me aa It is in respect of My Baying this or not saying that . So I say nothing
except what I know that I ahould say. It ia Mine to say, and it is for them
to obey or not to obey after hearing My command.""
There ia, therefore, a difference between obeying one's own nuture and
obeying the religious command, a distinction which waa made long before
Ibid., p. 131.
“ Qur'An. xxii. 10.
“ Fuafls. p. 131.
417
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ibn ’Arabi by Hal 14j. On the one hand, all men—indeed all creatures—obey
their own law which he calls the creative law fal-amr al-lakmni) On the
other, some obey and others diaoboy the religious Law (al-amr al-takU/i). The
first is in accordance with God's creative will (al maihiyyah) which brings
things into existence in the forms in which they are eternally predetermined.
Tho second is something imposed from without for some ulterior reason,
ethical, religious, or social. Everything obeys the creative commands in res
ponse to ita own nature, and by so doing obeys God's will, regardless of whether
thia obedience, is also obedience or disobedience to the religious or ethical
command. When Pharaoh disobeyed God and Ibtis (Satan) refused the divine
command to prostrate himself before Adam, they were in fact obeying tho
creative command and carrying out the will of God, although from the point
of view of the religious command they were disobedient. To express the same
thing in different words, an action-in-itself, i.e., irrespective of any form
whatever, is neither good nor evil, neither religious nor irreligious. It is just
an action pure and simple. It comes under one or another of these categories
when it is judged by religious or ethical standards.
The whole theory reduces obedience and disobedience in tho religious sense
to a mere formality, and denies moral and religious obligations. It tells us that
man is responsible for his actions, but affirms that he is not a free agent to
will his actions. Responsibility and complete absence of freedom do not go
together. Theoretically, there are different alternatives out of which man
may choose his actions, but according to this theory he is so created that he
chooses the only alternative which is determined by his own necessary laws.
So he actually chooses nothing and has no more freedom than a stone falling
down to the earth in obedience to its own law.
Thus, we go on moving within that closed circle of thought which is so
typical of ibn 'Arabi’s reasoning. He has one eye on his pantheistic doctrine
with all that it entails, and the other on Islamic teachings, and oscillates
between the two all the time. His pantheistic doctrine implies that God
is tile Ultimate Agent of all actions, and Islam insists on the moral and reli
gious responsibility of man for his actions. The two conflicting points of view
cannot be reconciled, and ibn 'Arabi’s way of reconciling them is full of
paradox™. He is more consistent when he says that all actions are created by
God and there is no real difference between the Commander and the command
ed.’* There is no real eervantship f'uMdij/yaAj, for the servant is one who
carries out the commands of his master. But in reality the servant of God is
a mere locus (mahaU) through which God's creative power acts. So the servant
is the Lord and the Lord is the servant.”
This seems to contradict what we have already said, i.e.. that, according
to ihn 'Arabi, actions belong to man and spring directly from his nature ill a
KuiiMl. Vol. n. p. 286,
” Zuffis. p. 02.
418
Ibn 'Arabi
determined way. Actually, there is no contradiction when we think of the
distinction he makes between the One and the many. In fact, all his paradoxes
can be solved when considered in the light of this distinction. When he says
that God is the doer of all actions, he is regarding the question from the point
ol view of the One. for God’s essence is the essence of men to whom actions
are attributed. And when he asserts that men aro the doers of their actions,
he is regarding the question from the point of view of the many.
Having reduced obligation, obedience, disobedience, and similar other con
cepts to mere formal relations, it was natural enough for him to give the
concepts of punishment and reward a positive content. Heaven and hell and
all the eschatological matters connected with them are described in the
minutest details, but no sooner does he give a constructive picture of one of
them than he uses his allegorical method of interpretation to explain it away.
His method bears some remarkable resemblance to that of the lsmi’ilians
and the Carmathians, used for the same purpose. All eschatological terms such
as punishment, reward, purgatory, the Balance, the Bridge, intercession,
heaven, hell, and so on. aro regarded as representations of states of man.
and corporealizations of ideas. What we ieam from Tradition, he says, are
words, and it. is left to us to find out what is meant by them,” i.e., to read
into them whatever meaning we please. This is precisely what ibn 'Arabi him
self has done. Heaven and hell, according to him. are subjective states, not
objective realities. Hell is the realization of the individual “self"; it is self
hood. Heaven is the realization of the essential unity of all things, There is
no real difference between the two. If any. the difference is one of degree,
not of kind. Salvation is the ultimate end of all. Speaking of the people of
hell and heaven, ibn ’Arabi says: —
“Nothing remains but the Fulfiller of Promise alone;
The threat of God has no object to be seen.
When they enter the Abode of Misery they experience
Pleasure wherein lies a bliss so different
From that of the Gardena of Everlastingness.
It is all the same: the difference is felt at the beatific vision."”
This means that when the truth is known and God reveals Himself as ne
really is, everyone, whether in heaven or in hell, will know his position, i.e.,
will know how near or how far he is from the truth. Those who fully realize
their essential oneness with God are the blessed ones who will go to paradise.
Those who are veiled from the truth are the damned ones who will go to hell.
But both parties will enjoy in their respective abodes happiness proportionate
to their degree of knowledge
FutuMl, Vol. I, p. 412, II. 4ff.
•• Fumf, p. 94.
419
A History of Muslim Philosophy
F
CONCLUSION
In the foregoing pages an attempt haa been made to give a bird's-eye view
of a tremendously vast field. We have concentrated on the most important
features of ibn 'Arabi’s life and thought; many important facta have of
necessity been omitted for lack of space. If ibn 'Arabi experienced—as we
must assume he did—some sort of strain while writing his mystical philosophy,
we are placed under greater strain while writing about him There is more
than one way of interpreting his ideas and fathoming his intricate and
obscure style. This makes it possible for scholars to give not only different
but conflicting accounts of his teachings. The present account deals with
him as a thoroughgoing pantheist who tried his best to reconcile his pantheistic
doctrine with Islam. In doing so ho had to read now meanings into tho tradi-
tional Muslim concepts, and change Islam from a positive into a mystic religion.
It is true he never lost sight of the idea of Godhead, but his God is not the
transcendent God of revealed religions, but the Absolute Being who manifests
Himself in every form of existence, and in the highest degree in the form of
man. People may agree or disagree with some of his theories, but the fact re
mains that in production and influence he is the greatest Arabio-spoaking
mystic Islam has ever produoed. Il has been said that he haa annulled religion
in the orthodox sense in which it is usually understood. Thia ia not altogether
true. He has done awav with a good many concepts which were so narrowly
understood by Muslim jurists and theologians, and offered in their place
other concepts which arc much deeper in their spirituality and more compre
hensive than those of any of his Muslim predecessors, ills ideas about the
universality of everything—being, love, religion—may be considered land
mark. in the history of human thought.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Um Ambi. FutOMt tJ-MMlyyal,. Fufiif al-Hikam. R.nllat ai-Oialwah, MS.
Indus Office. London; Tarjtman <il Ajiudy, ed. R. A. Nichohon. London. 1911;
ihn al-Jauri. .W.r'«; ibn Taimlvyah. Raaa’d; al-Sbarim. al laudgU w-ol
Cairo; Ou(ubi. FmMl at-WalayU-. Jami, Na/alial al-Cm; Hammer-
P.irit-tall. LKerurargrseAicAte d. Andxr, von Kremer, GwcA. drr htrrteh. Idem dw
R A. Nicholson, "Tl»e Lives of ‘Umar Ibn al-Farid and Tbn al-‘Arabi.”
Journal the Royal Auntie Society. 1905; A Literary Hielory of th, Arab, The
Arv.i,ri, <>/ Mani, London. 1914; M. Schreiner. Bsdr. a GrseA. d. The<A. H,uryllnyer.
“. Z',uc*r d Asm Palaces. Lapnrifopia «gua
Abenamht ,n Aetee du XVI Conyne adorn. dee Orient. Algier, 1905;
Goklaihor. I orfcronprn; Macdonald, Oswtopmento/Mual.m Theotoyu. Junoprudma
and ConMtlulionai Theory-. A. J. Arberry, Su/iam, London. 1950.
420
Part 3. THE “PHILOSOPHERS"
Those who were mainly interested in philosophy and science and
were greatly influenced by Greek thought)
Chapter XXI
AL-KINDI
A
LIFE
Al-Kindi (o. 185/801-e. 260/873) waa the first Muslim philosopher. Philo-
sophical studies in the aeoond/eighth century were in tho hands of Christian
Syrians, who were primarily physicians. They started, through encourage
ment by the Caliph, to translate Greek writings into Arabio. Being the
first Arab Muslim to study science and philosophy, al-Kindi was rightly called
"the Philosopher of the Arabs."
His full name is: abu Yusuf Ya'qub ibn Iabaq ibn al fjabbAh ibn 'Imrin ibn
IsmA'U ibn al-Ash'ath ibn Qais al-Kindi. Kindah was one of the great Arab
tribes before Islam. His grandfather al-Alh'aih ibn Qais adopted Islam and
waa considered one of tho Companions (IJababah) of the Prophet. Al-Ajh'ath
went with some of the pioneer Muslims to al-KOfah, where he and his descend
anta lived. Isb&q ibn al-^abbab, al-Kindi's father, was Governor of al-Kufah
during the reign of the 'Abbfisid Caliphs al-Mabdi and al-Rashid Most
probably al-Kindi waa bom in the year 185/801,’ a decade before the death of
al-RasMd.
Al-Kufah and al-Basrah, in the sccond/eighth and third/ninth centuries,
were the two rivalling centres of Islamic culture Al-KOfah was more inclined
to rational studies; and in this intellectual atmosphere, al-Kindi passed his
early boyhood. He learnt the Qur'an by heart, tho Arabic grammar, literature,
and elementary arithmetic, all of which formed the curriculum for all
Muslim children. He, then, studied F'ufh and the new-born discipline called
KaUm. But it seems that he was more interested in sciences and philo
sophy, to which he consecrated the rest of his life, especially after be went to
Baghdad. A complete knowledge of Greek science and philosophy required
proficienev in Greek and Syriao languages into which latter many Greek works
had already been translated. It seems that al-Kindi learnt Greek, but
1 Mustafa 'Abd al-RAziq, following do Boor, gives this date. On the biography
of al-Klndi tho best article is that of Mustafa 'Abd al-RAsiq in Failatu/ ai-‘Arab
w-al-Mu'aUim ol-Ibani, Cairo, 1945. pp. 7-50. See also Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany's
"Introduction" to the edition of al-Kindl'a treatise on "First Philosophy." Cairo,
1948, pp. 3-49. and abu Rldah's "Introduction" to Roar'd al-Kindi. Cairo, 1950,
pp. 1-80.
421
A History of Muslim Philosophy
certainly he mastered the Syriac language from which he translated several
works. He also revised some of the Arabic translations, such aa al-i^imsi's
translation of Plotinus' Enruads, which passed to the Arabs as one of the
writings of Aristotle. AJ-Qifti, the biographer, says that "al-Kindi translated
many philosophical books, clarified their difficulties, and summarised their
deep theories.”’
In Baghdad he was connected with al-Ma’mun, al-Mu'tasim, and the latter's
son Ahmad. He waa nominated tutor of Abmad ibn al-Mu'tasim, to whom he
dedicated some of his important writings. Ibn Nabatah says: "Al-Kindi and
his writings embellished the empire of al-Mu'ta»im.”’ He flourished also under
the reign of al-Mutawakkii (r. 232-247/847-861). A story related by ibn abi
Usaibi'ah indicates the great fame of al-Kindi at that time, his advanced
knowledge, and his famous private library. Thia ia the full account: "Muham
mad and Ahmad, the sons of Musa ibn gjtAkir, who lived during the reign of
al-Mutawakkil, were conspiring against everyone who was advanced in know-
ledge. They sent a certain Sanad ibn 'Ali to Baghdad so that he might get
al-Kindi away from al-Mutawakkil. Their conspiracies succeeded to the point
that al-Mutawakkil ordered al-Kindi to be beaten. His whole library was
confiscated and put in a separate place, labelled as the 'Kindian Library.’"*
Al-Kindi's notoriety for avarice was equal to his fame for knowledge. This
bad repute was duo to al-dibit's caricature of him in his KUah al-Bukhald'-
However, al-Kindi lived a luxurious life in a house, in the garden of which
he bred many curious animals. It seems that he lived aloof from society, even
from his neighbours. An interesting story related by al-Qifti shows that al-
Kindi lived in the neighbourhood of a wealthy merchant, who never knew
that al-Kindi was an excellent physician. Once the merchant’s son waa attacked
by sudden paralysis and no physician in Baghdad waa able to cure him. Some
one told the merchant that he lived in the neighbourhood of the most brilliant
philosopher, who waa very clever ii. curing that particular illness. Al-Kindi
cured the paralyzed boy by music.
B
WORKS
Most of hia numerous works (numbering about 270) are lost. Ibn al-Nadlm
and following him al-Qifti classified his writings, most of which are short
treatises, into seventeen groups: (1) philosophical, (2) logical, (3) arithmetical,
(4) globular. (5) musical, (6) astronomioal, (7) geometrical, (8) spherical. (9)
medical, (10) astrological, (II) dialectical, (12) psychological, (13) political,
(14) causal (meteorological), (15) dimensional, (16) on first things, (17) on the
species of some metals, chemicals, etc.
• AIQdti. TdriS al-HukamU'. Cairo ed., p. 241.
• Ibn Nabatah. S^irh EiMlnh Ibn ZaMn. Cairo, p. 113.
• Ibn abi Usaibi'ah. Tabagii alAtMd'. Cairo. Vol. I, p. 207,
422
Al-Kindi
This account shows to what extent al-Kindl's knowledge waa encyclopedic.
Some of hia adentifio works were translated by Gerard of Cremona into Latin
and influenced very much the thought of medieval Europe. Cardano considered
him to be one of the twelve greatest minds.
Scholars studied al-Kindi. until his Arabic treatises were discovered and
edited, merely on the basis of the extant Latin translations. His De Medici
narum Comporilarum Gradibtu was published in 938/1531. Albino Nagy’ in
1315/1897 oditod the medieval translations of these treatises: De intrJledu:
De Smno ei uitione. De quinque essrnliis; Liber introdudoriue in artrm logicae
icmonstraiionis.
Since the discovery of some of his Arabic manuscripts, a new light has been
thrown on al-Kindl’s philosophy. A compendium containing about 25 treatises
was found by Ritter in Istanbul. Now they have all been edited by different
scholars. Walzer, Rosenthal, abu Rldah. and Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany." There
are other short treatises discovered in Aleppo, but they have not yet been
edited. It has become possible, to a certain extent, to analyse al-Kindl’s philo
sophy on more or less sure grounds.
C
PHILOSOPHY
It was due to al-Kindi that philosophy came to be acknowledged as a part
of Islamic oulture. The early Arab historians called him "the Philosopher
of the Arabs" for this reason. It ia true that he borrowed his ideas from Neo
Platonic Aristotelianism, but it is also true that he put those idess in a new
context. By conciliating Hellenistic heritage with Islam he laid the foundations
of a new philosophy. Indeed, this conciliation remained for a long time the
chief feature of this philosophy. Furthermore. al-Kimli. specializing in all the
sciences known at his time—of which his writings give sufficient evidenoe—
made philosophy a comprehensive study embracing all sciences. AI-F&rabi, ibn
SIna. and ibn Ru jhd were first scientists and then philosophers. For this reason
ibn al-Nadtm placed al-Kindi in the class of natural philosophers. This is his
full account: "Al-Kindi is the beat man of his time, unique in his knowledge of
all the ancient sciences. He is called the Philosopher of the Arabs. His books
deal with different sciences, such as logic, philosophy, geometry, arithmetic,
* Albino Nagy. Die philoeophixhen AMandlungen dee al-Kindi. 1887.
• Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany edited his important and long treatise on "Firet
Philosophy" in 1848; his De InleOeclu with KMb al-Nale of ibn Rusted in 1950;
hie treatise "On the Soul" in al-KMb. 1949.
Abu Rldah edited all the treatises in two volumes in Cairo, the first in I960, the
second in 1953. M. Guidi and R. Walter oditod in 1940 his treatise “On the Num
ber of Aristotle's Books," and tran-ilaied it into the Italian, in Reale Aeeademia
Nationale det tinrei. eer. VI. Vol. VI, fuse. 5. Rosenthal in 1959 edited in the Journal
o/ lAe American Oriental Society. Vol. LXXVI, No. I, pp. 27-31, his treatise "On
Atmospheric Phenomena" ( RirtUah fi AMAfh al-Jaww).
423
\ Hi-tm. . .f Muslim Philosophy
astronomy etc A e have connected him with the natural philosophers because
of his prominence in science."’
Philosophy is the knowledge of truth Muslim philosophers, like the Greek,
believed that truth is something over and above experience; that it lies
immutable and eternal in a supernatural world. The definition of philosophy
in al-Kindi's treatise on "Firat Philosophy" runs like this: "Philosophy is
the knowledge of the reality of things within man's possibility, because the
philosopher's end in his theoretical knowledge is to gain truth and in Ins
practical knowledge to behave in accordance with truth." At the end of the
treatise. God is qualified by the term "truth," which is the objective of philo
sophy. "The True One (al-Wdfiid al-Haq) is, then, the Firat, the Creator,
the Sustainer of all that He has created , .. ." This view is borrowed from
Aristotle’s metaphysics, but the Immovable Mover of Aristotle is substituted
by the Creator. This difference constitutes the core of the Kindian system.
Philosophy is classified into two main divisions: theoretical studies, which
are physics, mathematics, and metaphysics; and practical studies which are
ethics, economics, and politics. A later writer, quoting al-Kindi, gives the
.unification aa follows: "Theory and practice are the beginning of the virtues.
>.ach one of the two is divided into the physical, mathematical, and theological
l>arts. Practice is divided into the guidance of one's self, that of one’s house,
and that of one's city.”8 Ibn Nabata, quoting also al-Kindi, mentions only
the theoretical divisions. "The philosophical sciences are of throe kinds: the
first in teaching Ita'lim) is mathematics which is intermediate in nature; the
second is physics, which is the last in nature; the third is theology which is
the highest in nature."’ The priority of mathematics goes back to Aristotle,
but the final sequence of the three sciences beginning with physics came from
the later Peripatetics. Most probably al-Kindi was following Ptolemy, who gave
a divbion of sciences in the beginning of Almagest.18 Mathematics was known
to the Arabs from that time on as the “first study,"
Tho definition of philosophy and its classification, as mentioned above,
remained traditional in Muslim philosophy. As Mustafa 'Abd al-Raziq puts it:
"This attitude in understanding the meaning of philosophy and its classification
according to subject-matter directed Muslim philosophy from its very outset."11
First philosophy or metaphysics is the knowledge of the First Cause, be
cause all the rest of philosophy is included in this knowledge.18 The method
followed in the study of first philosophy is the logic of demonstration. From
now on, logic will be the instrument of the philosophers in their quest for
' Ibn al-Nadtm, al-Fihritt. Cairo, p. 255.
9 Rosenthal, op. cii., p. 27.
• Ibn Nabatah, op. tit., p. 125.
18 A full discussion of this question is found in the article of Rosenthal referred
te above.
11 Mustafa 'Abd al-KAuq. op. cil.. p. 47.
11 El-Ehwany. Ed.. 'First Philosophy," Cairo, 1948. p. 79
424
Al-Kindi
truth. Al-Kindl's value as a philosopher waa debated in ancient times because
of the lack of logical theory in his system. §4'id al-Andaluai says: "Al-Kindi
wrote on logic many books which never became popular, and which people
never read or used in the sciences, because these books missed the art of
analysis which is the only way to distinguish between right and wrong in
every study. By the art of synthesis, which is what Ya'qub meant by his
writings, no one can profit, unless he has sure premises from which he can
make the synthesis." It is difficult for us to give an exact idea concerning
this charge until his logical treatises are discovered. But the fact that al-Farabi
was called the "Second Master" because of his introducing logic as the method
of thinking in Islamic philosophy1* seems to corroborate the judgment of
Sa'id just mentioned.
D
HARMONY BETWEEN PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION
Al-Kindi directed Muslim philosophy towards an accord between philosophy
and religion.1* Philosophy depends on reason, and religion relies on revelation.
Ixigic is the method of philosophy; faith, which is belief in the realities mention
ed in the Qur'an as revealed by God to His Prophet, is the way of religion.
From the very outset, men of religion mistrusted philosophy and the philo
sophers. Philosophers were attacked for being heretics. Al-Kindi waa obliged
to defend himself against the accusation of religious spokesmen that “the
acquisition of the knowledge of the reality of things is atheism In
his turn, al-Kindi accused those religious spokesmen for being irreligious and
traders with religion. "They disputed with good men in defence of the untrue
position which they had founded and occupied without any merit only to
gain power and to trade with religion.”>•
The accord between philosophy and religion is laid down on the basis of
three arguments: (1) that theology is part of philosophy; (2) that the pro
phet's revelation and philosophical truth are in accord with each other, and
(3) that the pursuit of theology is logically ordained.
Philosophy is the knowledge of the reality of tilings, and this knowledge
comprises theology (al-rububiyyah), the science of monotheism, ethics, and
all useful sciences.
Furthermore, the prophets have ordained the pursuit of truth and practice
of virtue. "The totality of every useful science and the way to attain it, the
getting away from anything harmful and taking care against it^the acquisition
of all this is what the true prophets have proclaimed in the name of God ....
” El-Ehwany. Islamic Philosophy. Cairo. 1057. pp. 35-36.
11 Mustafa 'Abd al-RAziq. op. cil., p. 47.
’* "First Philosophy," p. 82.
>• Ibid.
425
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The prophets have proclaimed the unique divinity of God. the practice of the
virtues accepted by Him, and the avoidanoe of the vioee which are contrary
to virtues-inthemaelves."
Again, the pursuit of philosophy is necessary for it “is either necessary
or it ia not necessary. If theologians (those who oppose ita pursuit) say that
it is necessary, they should study it; if they say that it is not necessary,
they have to give the reason for this, and present a demonstration. Giving the
reason and demonstration is part of the acquisition of the knowledge of reality.
It is necessary then that they should have this knowledge and realize that
they must obtain it."*’
In his treatise on "The Number of the Works of Aristotle,” al-Kindi makes
a sharp distinction between religion and philosophy. The fact that he discussed
this point in this particular treatise proves that he was comparing the religion
of Islam with Aristotle's philosophy. The divine science, which he distinguished
from philosophy, is Islam aa revealed to the Prophet and recorded in the Qur'An.
Contrary to his general view that theology is a part of philosophy, here we
find (1) that theology occupies a rank higher than philosophy ; (2) that religion
is a divine science and philosophy is a human one; (3) that the way of religion
ia faith and that of philosophy is reason; (4) that the knowledge of the prophet
ia immediate and through inspiration and that of the philosopher is by way of
logic and demonstration. We quote in full this interesting and very important
passage:
“If, then, a person does not obtain the knowledge of quantity and quality,
he will lack knowledge of the primary and secondary substances, so that one
cannot expect him to have any knowledge of the human sciences which arc
acquired by man through research, effort, and industry. These science* fall
short in rank of the divine science (al-'ilm al ildhi)'* which is obtained
without research, effort, and industry, and in no time. This latter knowledge
is like tho knowledge of the prophets, a knowledge bestowed by God , unlike
mathematics and logic, it is received without research, effort, study, and
industry, and requires no period of time. It is distinct in being obtained
by the will of God, through the purification and illumination of souls, so that
they turn towards truth, through God's support, assistance, inspiration, and
His messages This knowledge ia not a prerogative of all men. but only of tho
prophets. This is one of their miraculous peculiarities, the distinctive sign
which differentiates them from other human beings. Men who are not
prophets have no way of attaining knowledge of the secondary substances
or that of the primary sensible substances and their accidents without
■’ Ibid.
’• In Orient, Vol. X, No. 2, 1957, "Now Studies on al-Kindi," Wolter translates
thia term by "divine knowledge." We guess what is meant in thia context ia the
divine science as compared with human scienoe. Guidi and Walter edi red this
manuscript and translated it into Italian: Il Numero del Litri di AriMotdt. In the
Italian translation tho term is tcienza divina which corresponds to divine science.
426
Al-Kindi
research and industry through logic and mathematics, and without any period
of time.
"Hence, men of intelligence draw the evident conclusion that since thia”
(knowledge) exists, it comes from God; whereas (ordinary) men are unable by
their very nature to attain to a similar knowledge, because it is above and
beyond their nature and the devices they use. Thus, they submit themselves
in obedience and docility to it and faithfully believe in the truth of the message
of the prophets."1®
The Muslims follow the Word of God stated in tho Qur’an and are oonvincod
by its sure arguments. Philosophers refer to logical demonstration, i.e., their
reason. Philosophical arguments depend on the self-evident first principles of
demonstration. In al-Kindl's view, tho Qur’inic arguments, being divine, are
more sure, certain, and convincing than tho philosophical arguments which
are human. The Qur'in gives solutions of some very important problems,
such aa the creation of the world from nothing, and resurrection. Al-Kindi
holds that the Qur'inic arguments are “beliefs, clear and comprehensive.”
Thus, they lead to certainty and oonviotion. Hence, they are superior to the
philosopher's arguments. An example of such sure arguments is to be found
in the answer to tho infidels who asked. "Who will be able to give life to bones
when they have been reduoed to dust!" The answer is: "He who produced
them originally will give life to them."
Thus, al-Kindi opened the door for the philosophical interpretation of the
Qur'Hn, and thereby brought about an accord between religion and philosophy.
In his treatise “The Worship (tujid) of the Primum Mobile." the verse:
“Stars and trees are worshipping" is interpreted by reference to the different
meanings of tho word "tajdah." It means: (1) prostration in praying; (2)
obedience; (3) change from imperfection to perfection; (4) following by will
the order of a person. It is this last meaning that applies to the worship of
the stare. The hr avenlv sphere is animated and is the cause of life in the world
of generation and corruption. The movement of the primum mobile is called
worship (tuj-ud) in the sense that it obeys God.
To Bum up, al-Kindi was the first philosopher in Islam to effect an accord
between religion and philosophy. Ho paved tho way for al-Firibi, ibn Sina,
and ibn Rugfed. Two quite different views are given by him. The first
follows the way of the logicians and reduces religion to philosophy. The second,
considering religion a divine science, raises it above philosophy. This divine
science can be known by a prophetic faculty. However, through philosophic
interpretation religion becomes conciliated with philosophy.
11 "This" either refers to the divine science, the divine knowledge of the prophet,
or the prophetic faculty. Walxer in his translation of this passage gives the latter
interpretation. Cf. Orient. p. 20«.
•• M. Ouidi and R. Walxer. op. eil.. p. 3»S. Except at some pieces, wo follow m
tho main tho translation given by Walxer in Orient. p. 206.
427
A History of Muslim Philosophy
GOD
An adequate and sure knowledge of God is tho final objective of philosophy.
Philosophy by its very name waa a Greek study. For this reason, al-Kindi
made a great effort to transmit Greek philosophy to the Arabs. As Rosenthal
rightly pats it: "Al-Kindi himself states that he considered it his task to
serve as an Arab transmitter and interpreter of the ancient heritage.”*1 In
Theon’a commentary on the Almagest of Ptolemy, we find God described
as immutablo, simple, of invisible nature, and the true cause of motion
Al-Kindi in his treatise al-$ini'al al-‘U;man paraphrases the same idea. H<
says: "For God, great is His praise, is tho reason and agent of this motion,
being eternal (qadim), He cannot be seen and does not move, but in fact
causes motion without moving Himself. This ia His description for those
who understand Him in plain words: He is simple in that He cannot be
dissolved into something simpler; and He ia indivisible because He is not
composed and composition has no hold on Him, but in fact He is separate
from the visible bodies, since no . . . ia the reason of the motion of the "iaible
bodies."**
Simplicity, indivisibility, invisibility, and causality of motion are the divine
attributes stated by Theon. When al-Kindi mentions them he is simply a
transmitter of the Hellenistic conception of God. Tho originality of al-Kindi
lies in his conciliation of the Islamic concept of God with the philosophical
ideas which were current in the later Neo-Platonism.
The basic Islamic notions concerning God are His unicity. His act of creation
from nothing, and the dependence of all creatures on Him. These attributes
are stated in the Qur’An in a manner which is neither philosophical nor
dialectioal. Al-Kindi qualifies God in new terms. God ia the true one. He ia
transcendent and can be qualified only by negative attributes. "He has no
matter, no form, no quantity, no quality, no relation; nor is He qualified by
any of the remaining categories (al-maguldtHe has no genus, no differentia,
“ Rosenthal, “Al-Kindi and Ptolemy," Sludi OrienlaJittKi. Vol. n, Roma,
1956, p. 466. The view that sl-Kindi was not a true philosopher, but simply a
translator, was held by some ancient writers. Madkour, in his book La Place
d'Al-Firibi done rEcoU Philueophigue .Vuntmane, considers him rather a mathe
matician. Abu Rtdah, in hie "Introduction" to al-Raad'U, considers him to be a
true philosopher in the full sense of tho term. Wo rather adhere to Rosenthal's view.
Cf. Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany's "Introduction" to al-Kindl's “First Philosophy."
Thia treatise is not yet edited. Rosenthal, in tho above article on "Al-Kindi
and Ptolemy." gave some excerpts and analysed it.
■■ Rosenthal. "Al-Kindi and Ptolemy," Studi OrienlaluHa, p. 449. The author
has compared Ptolemy's text with both Theon's commentary and al Kindi's text.
'• With abu Rldah we understand thia term to be intalligibles or conoepta fol
ma'ipMl), but categories is more suitable in this context.
428
Al-Kindi
no species no proprium, no accident. He is immutable. ... He is, therefore,
absolute oneness, nothing but oneness (unhdah). Everything else is multiple.""
To understand the position of al-Kindi, we must refer to the Traditionalists
and the Mu'tazilitee. The Traditionalists—ibn ljanbal was one of their chief
representatives—refused to interpret the attributes of God. They simply called
them “the names of God." When, for example, ibn Hanbal was asked whether
the Qur'An, being the Word of God, ia eternal (qadim) or created (makhluq).
he gave no answer. Hia only answer was that the Qur'An is the Word tkaldm)
of God. The Traditionalists accepted the literal meaning of the Scripture, i.e.
without any further interpretation.
The Mu'tazilites. such as were the contemporaries of al-Kindi, rationally
interpreted the attributes of God to establish His absolute unicity. They solved
the problem on the basis of the relation between the essence (dial) of God
and Hia attributes (fi/dt). The main attributes in their view amount to three:
knowledge, power, and will. These they negate, for. if affirmed of God, they
would entail plurality in llis essence. The Mu'tazilites and the philosophers
shared this denial of the divine attributes. Al-GhazAli rightly says in the
Tahdful al-FtMri/ah that "the philosophers agree exactly as do the Mu'tazilites
that it it impossible to ascribe to the First Principle knowledge, power, and
will.''”
Al-Kindi. the first philosopher in Islam, followed the Mu'tazilites in their
denial of the attributes. But his approach to the solution of the problem is
quite different. First, it is not the essence of God and His attributes with which
he is oonoemed; it is rather the predicability of the categories—aa wo have
seen above—to the substance of God. Secondly, all things can bo defined,
hence known, by giving their genera and differentiae, except God who has
neither genus nor differentia. In other terms, al-Kindi follows in his quest
the “way of the logicians."
The Kindian arguments for the existence of God depend on the belief in
causality. Everything that comes to be must have a cause for its existence.
The series of causes are finite, and consequently there is a prime cause, or the
true cause, which is God. Causes, enumerated by Aristotle, are the material,
the formal, the efficient, and the final. In al-Kindi's philosophy, as repeated
in many of his treatises, God is the efficient csubo.
There are two kinds of efficient causes; the first is the true efficient cause
and its action is creation from nothing (ibda'). All the other efficient causes are
intermediate, i.e., they are produced by other causes, and are themselves the
causes of other effects. They are called so by analogy; in fact, they are not
true causes at all. Only God is the true efficient cause. He acts and is never
acted upon.
“ "First Philosophy," p. 141; in abu Rldah’s edition, p. 160. Tho term wahdah
TTMUM either unity or oneness, but in this context it is oneness.
•• Van den Bergh, The Incoherence of the Incoherence. London, 1954, Vol. I,p. 186.
429
A History of Muslim Philoeoph;
Given that the world is created by the action of ibda' in no time, it must
be in need of a creator, i-e., God. Nothing which is created is eternal ; God
alone is eternal. Beings come to be and pass away. This is clear in the
case of corporeal sensibles which are in perpetual flux and change. Also the
world as a whole, the celestial bodice, and tho universals, such as genera and
species, are not eternal, because they arc finite and composed Everything
which is finite in spaoe and time is not eternal. The notion of infinity occupies
an important place in the philosophy of al-Kindi, and will be discussed later
in detail.
Another proof for tho existence of God is the order observed in all natural
beings. The regularity inherent in the world, the hierarchical degrees of ita
parte, their interactions, the most perfect state in every being realising ita
highest goodness—all this is a proof that there is a Perfect Being who manages
everything according to the greatest wisdom.”
Beings are in continuous need of God. This is so because God, the Creator
ex nihilo, is tho sustainer of all that He has created, so that if anything lacks
His sustainment and power, it perishes.”
F
INFINITY
The world in Aristotle's system is finite in space but infinite in time, be
cause the movement of the world ia co-etemal with the Unmovable Mover.
Eternity of the world waa refuted in Islamic thought, since Islam holds that
the world is created. Muslim philosophers, facing this problem, tried to find
a solution in accord with religion. Ibn Sins and ibn Rushd were accused of
atheism because of their pro-Aristotelianism; they assumed that the world is
eternal. In fact, this problem remained one of the important features of
Islamic philosophy, and al-Ghazili mentioned it at the beginning of his twenty
pointe against the philosophers in the Tahiful ni-FaUsifah.
Al-Kindi, contrary to his great successors, maintained that the world is not
eternal. Of this problem he gave a radical solution by discussing the notion
of infinity on mathematical grounds.
Physical bodies are composed of matter and form, and more in space and
time. Matter, form, space, movement, and time are the five substances in
every physical body. (Res autem quae sunt in omnibus substuntiis sunt quin
que. quorum uno est hyle. rl sreuruia esl lonna, el lertia est locus, el quarta esl
molus, el quinta est tern pus.)” Being so connected with corporeal bodies, time
” Abu Rtdah. Rasa'il. “On tho Efficient Cause of Generation and Corruption."
p. 2IS.
” "First Philosophy," p. 143.
" Liber <U Quinque Essenliis. This treatise waa translated into Latin in the
Medieval Ages.
430
Al.Kindi
and space are finite, given that corporeal bodies are finite; and these latter
are finite because they cannot exist except within limits.
Time is not movement; it is the number which measures the motion
(Tmynu erpo eel numerus nsmcruar molumj for it ia nothing other than the
prior and posterior. Number is of two kinds: discrete and continuous. Time is
not of the discrete kind hut of the continuous kind. Hence, time is definable
as the supposed instants which continue from the past to tho future. In other
words, time is the sum of anterior and posterior instants. It is the continuum
of instants.
Time is part of the knowledge of quantity. Space, movement, and time are
quantities. The knowledge of these three substances and also tho other two
is subordinate to the knowledge of quantity and quality. As mentioned above,
he who lacks the knowledge of quantity and quality will lack knowledge of
the primary end secondary substances. Quality ia the capacity of being similar
and dissimilar; quantity, of being equal and unequal. Hence, the three notions
of equality, greater, and lees are basic in demonstrating the concepts of finitude
and infinity.
Tho arguments against infinity are repeated in a number of al-Kindl's
treatises. We give from his treatise "On the Finitude of the Body of the World”
the four theorems given as proofs for finitude: —
(1) Two magnitudesM of the same kind are called equal if one is not greater
than the other,*1
(2) If a magnitude of the same kind is added to one of the two magnitudes
of the kind, they will be unequal.
(3) Two magnitudes of the kind cannot be infinite, if one is less than tho
other, because the lees measures the greater or a part of it.
(4) The sum of two magnitudes of the kind, each of which is finite, is finite.
Given these axioms, every body, being composed of matter and form,
limited in space, and moving in time, is finite, even if it is the body of the
world. And. being finite it is not eternal. God alone is eternal.
•• Magnitudes apply to lines, surfaces, or bodies. A magnitude of tho same kind
moans one applying solely to one of the throe kinds mentioned. Cf. abu Rldah,
Rata'il. Vol. 1. "Treatise on the Finitude of the Body of the World," p. 187.
11 We quote the example given by al-Kindi and the proof of thia theorem m a
specimen of his mathematical method.
"Example: Given A and B are magnitudes of the same kind, and tho one ia
not greater than tho other, wo say that they are equal. Proof: If they are unoqual.
then one is greater than the other, say A is greater than B. But since A ia not
greater than B. as mentioned above, this leads to a contradiction. It follows that
they are equal." Ibid,, p. 188.
431
A History of Muslim Philosophy
G
SOUL AND INTELLECT
Al-Kindi was confused by the doctrines of Plato, Aristotle, and Plotinus
concerning the aoul, especially because he revised the parts translated from
Plotinus' Enneads, a book which was wrongly ascribed to Aristotle. He
borrowed from Plotinus the doctrine of the soul, and followed the model of
Aristotle in his theory of the intellect. In a short treatise “On the Soul."
he summarizes, as he says, the views of "Aristotle. Plato, and other philo
sophers." In fact, the idea expounded is borrowed from the Enneade
The soul is a simple entity and its substance emanates from the Creator
just as the rays emanate from the sun. It is spiritual and of divine substance
and is separate and distinct from tho body. When it is separated from the
body, it obtains the knowledge of everything in the world and has vision of
the supernatural. After its separation from the body, it goes to the world of
the intellect, returns to the light of the Creator, and sees Him.
The soul never sleeps; only while the body is asleep, it does not use the
senses. And, if purified, the soul can see wonderful dreams in sloop and can
speak to the other souls which have been separated from their bodies. The
same idea is expounded in al-Kindi's treatise; "On Sleep and Dreams." which
was translated into Latin. To sleep is to give up the use of the senses. When
the soul gives up the use of the senses and uses only reason, it dreams.
The three faculties of the soul are the rational, the irascible, and the appeti-
dve. He who gets away from the pleasures of the body and lives most of
his life in contemplation to attain to the reality of things, is the good man
who is very similar to the Creator.
Another treatise on the intellect played an important role in medieval
philosophy, both Eastern and Western. It was translated into Latin under
tho title De Intellect*. The purpose of this treatise is to clarify the different
meanings of the intellect faql) and to show how knowledge is obtained.
Aristotle in his De Anima distinguished between two kinds of intellect, the
possible and the agent. The possible intellect reoeives intellection and tho agent
intellect produces irtolligiblo objects. The latter intellect is described by
Aristotle as separate, unmixed, always in actuality, eternal, and uncorrupted.
Alexander of Aphrodisias in his De Intellect* holds that there are three
kinds of intellect: the material, the habitual, and the agent, thus adding a
new intellect which is the intellect*! habitue or adeptue. The intellect*! materially
is pure potentiality and is perishable. It is the capacity in man to receive
the forms. The intellect in habitu is a possession, which means that the intellect
has acquired knowledge and possessed it, i.e., has passed from potentiality
into actuality. To bring a thing from potentiality to actuality needs something
rise to act aa an agent This is the third intellect, the agent intellect, also called
the inleUiyeruia ayeny and considered by somo interpreters to be the divine
intelligence which flows into our individual souls.
432
Al-Kindi
When we oome to al-Kindi we find not three intellects but four. He divided
the intellect in AaMu into two intellects, one is the possession of knowledge
without practising it and the other is the practising of knowledge. The first
is similar to a writer who has leamt handwriting and is in possession of this
art; tho other is similar to the person who practises writing in actuality.
We quote the opening paragraph of his treatise:
"The opinion of Aristotle concerning the intellect is that it is of four kinds:
(1) The first is the intellect which is always in act.
(2) The second is the intellect which is potentially in the soul.
(3) The third is the intellect which has passed in the soul from potentiality
to actuality.
(4) The fourth ia the intellect which we call the second.””
What he means by the “second" is the second degree of actuality as shown
above in the distinction between mere possession of knowledge and practising it.
A oomplete theory of knowledge is expounded in the rest of the treatise.
There are two kinds of forms, the material and the immaterial. The first is
the sensuous, because the senaiblee are composed of matter and form. When
tho soul acquiree the material form, it becomes one with it. i.e.. tho material
form and the soul become one and the same. Similarly, when the soul acquiree
the rational forms which are immaterial, thoy are united with the soul. In
this way, the soul becomes actually rational. Before that it was rational in
potentiality. What we call the intellect is nothing other than the genera and
species of things.
This intellectual operation is again illustrated in al-Kindi's treatise on
"First Philosophy.” He says: "When the genera and species are united with
tho soul, they become intellectibles. The soul becomes actually rational after
its unity with the species. Before thiB unity the aoul was potentially rational.
Now, everything which exists in potentiality does not pass to actuality save
by something which brings it from potentiality to actuality. It is the genera
and species of things, i. e., the universals . . . which make the soul which is
potentially rational to be actually rational. 1 mean, which get united with
it.””
Al-Kindi abruptly passes from the above epistemological discussion to
an ontological one concerning the oneness of the universals and theii
origin. The universals are the intellect in so far as they are united with the
soul. Thus the question arises whether the intellect is one or many. It is one
in one respect and many in an ither. This is his full account: "And as universal:
are many, as shown above, so is the intellect. It seems to us that the intellect
is the first plurality. But it is also one, because it is a whole, as shown above
" El-Ehwan.v. Mamie Philosophy. Cairo, 1951, pp. 51-52.
•• "First Philosophy," p. 134.
433
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and oneness is applied to the whole. But the true oneness (uoAdaA/** is
not of the intellect.”
Following the doctrine of Plotinus, al-Kindi passed on to the metaphysical
plane of the One. Aa mentioned above, he confused Aristotle's metaphysics
of Being with that of Plotinus.' For this reason he waa unable to elaborate a
coherent system of his own. This was what al-Farabi, the Second Master, was
able to do.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Mustafa Atal alRiziq, Failaeut al'Arab w al-Muallem alUdni, Cairo. 1945;
Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwany, "al-Kindi, Treatise on First Philosophy," Cairo, 1948;
Islamic Philosophy, Cairo, 1957; abu Rldah, ffosd'd al-Kindi, Cairo. 2 Vole., 1950.
1953; sl.Qifp. TdritA al-ffukomd', Cairo; ibn Nabatah. fibarh Risdiah Ibn Xaidun,
Cairo; ibn abi Usaibi'ah. Tabaqdl al-Atibbd'. Cairo; Madkour, La Plan d'Al-FarObi
dans I'Ecole Philoeophujue Mueulmane’, G. Furlani. "Una risala di Al-Kindi
Bull'amma," Rivista trimeslrak di Sludi Fdosofici e Religiose. Vol. Ill, 1922; M. Guidi
and R. Walter, "Studi su al-Kindi. I. Uno scritto introduttivo allo studio di
Ariatotele." Memorie R. Aceademia del Lineei, aer. 2. Vol. IV, faac. 5, Roma, 1940;
"Studi on Al-Kindi, 2. Uno aoritto morale inedito di Al.Kindi," ibid., aer. 6, Vol.
VIII, fane. I, Roma, 1938; L. Gauthier, AnUcsdcnts Grim-Arobes de la Psycliophy-
sigue (Al Kmdi Dr rerum gradibusj, Beyrouth, 1939; Die philoeophuchen Abhand-
Lingen des al-Kindt, firet published by von Albino Nagy, Beitr. eur Oeseh. d. Philos,
des MiltelaUers. Vol. II. Munster, 1897. This contains the following medieval
translations (some at least by Gerard of Cremona): De inlelleelu; De somno el
uirione; De guinque essentiie; Liber introdudorius m arlen logicae demonstralionis;
and also a study of the original toils and the translations and elaborate notes;
G. Flugel, Al-Kindi genannl "der Phdosoph der Araber," Abhdl. f. die Kunde dee
Morgenlandes, Leipzig. 1857.
M The term uohdah means here oneness, not unity. At tho beginning of this
same paragraph he speaks about “the truo ono," and says it is not soul.
Chapter XXII
MUHAMMAD IBN ZAKARlYA AL-RAZI
A
LIFE
According to nl-Blruni,1 abu Bakr Mubammad ibn Zakariya ibn Yabya al-
RSzi was bom in Ravy on the first of Sfca bAn in the year 251/865. In his
early life, he was a jeweller (Baihaqi), money-changer (ibn abi Usaibi'ah), or
more likely a lute-player (ibn Juljul, Sa'fd, ibn Khallikan, Usaibi'ah,
1 Epitre dr Benmi, amlenml le repertoire dee ouvryes de Muhammad ibn Zularlyu
ar-Rdei, publiee par Paul Kraus, Paris, 1936. p. 4.
434
Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-lUsi
al-§afadi) who first left music for alchemy, and then at the age of thirty or (aa
Safadi says) after forty left alchemy because hia experiments in it gave him
some eye disease (al-Blruni), which obliged him to search for doctors and
medicine. That waa the reason, they (al-Birilni, Baihaqi and others) say, he
studied medicine. He was very studious and worked day and night. His master
was 'Ali ibn Rabban al-Tabari (al-Qifti. Usaibi ah), a doctor and philosopher,
who was bom in Merv about 192/808.and diod some years after 240/865*
With ibn RabbAn al-Tabari he studied medicine and perhaps also philosophy.
It is possible to trace back al-R&zi's interest in religious philosophy to hia
master, whose father was a rabbinist versed in the Scriptures.
Al-Razi became famous in his native city as a doctor. Therefore, he directed
the hospital of Rayy (ibn Juljul. al-Qifti, ibn abi Usaibi'ah), in the times of
MansOr ibn Isbaq ibn Abmad ibn Asad who was the Governor of Rayy from
290-290/902-908 in the name of hia cousin Abmad ibn lam&TI ibn Abmad.
second S&mAnian ruler.* It is to this Mansur ibn Isbaq ibn Abmad that Razi
dedicated hia al-Tibb al-Wonfurt, aa it ia attested by a manuscript* of this
book, as against ibn al-Nadlm's assumption,* repeated by al-Qifti' and
ibn abi Usaibi'ah.' that this Mansur was Mansur ibn IsmA'il who died in
385/975.
From Rayy al-RAzi went to Baghdad during the Caliph Muktafi’s time*
(r. 289/901-295/907) and there too directed a hospital.
It seems that after al-Muktafl’s death (295/907) al-R&zi came back to Rayy.
Here gathered round him many students. As ibn al-Nadim relates in I'ihrut'
al-Razi was then a Shaikh "with a big head similar to a sack": he used to
be surrounded by circle after circle of studanta. If someone came to ask
something in science, the question waa put to those of the first circle. if they
did not know the answer, it passed on to those of the second, and so on till
it came to al-RAzi himself if all others failed to give the answer. Of these
students we know at least the name of one, i.e., abu Bakr ibn Qarin al-Razi
who became a doctor.1* Al-RAzi was generous, humane towards his patients,
’ See on him : FiArorl, p. 296; al-Baihaqi. p- 22; Usaibi'ah. Vol. I, p. 300; Meyer
hof, ZDMG. 85, 38 'ftf; Wustenfold. p. 55; Leclerc. Vol. I. p. 202; Broekelmann,
GAL. Vol. I. p. 263, Suppl.. Vol. I. pp. 414-15; Brockelmonn (Suppl., Vol. I, p. 415)
refutes tbo contention that al-RAzi waa din Rabbin's pupil, on the ground that
the latter waa in Rayy in 224/838. But tills proof u not sufficient, because ibn
Rabbin's life ia not well known as to enable one to assort tliat he did not go to
Rayy much later, say between 285/878 and 270'883. especially when we know
nothing about hia later lifo till hie death.
• YAqut. Btdddn. Vol. II, p. 901.
• In IMr al-Kutub al-Mifriyyah in Cairo. Tuirnur 129. medicine.
• FiArist, pp. 299-300.
• Al-Qiffi. p. 272.
' Ibn abi Usaibi'ah. Vol. I. p. 310.
• Ibn Juljul. p. 78.
• P. 299. Flugel; pp. 314-416. Cairo ed.
“ Ibn abi Usaibi'ah. Vol. I. p. 312.
435
A History of Muslim Philosophy
arid charitable to the poor, so that he used to give them full treatment
without charging any fee. and even stipends."
When not occupied with pupils or patients he waa always writing and study
ing,” It seems that this was the reason for the gradual weakening of his sight
that finally brought blindness to his eyes. Some say” that the reason for his
blindness waa that he used to eat too much of broad beans (baqilah). It began
with cataract” which ended in complete blindness. They say that he refused
to be treated for cataract saying that he "had seen so much of the world that
he was fed up.”” But this seems to be more of an anecdote than a historical
fact. It was one of his pupils from Tabaristan that came to treat him, but,
as al-Btriini says, he refused to be treated saying that it was useless as his
hour of death waa approaching.” Some days after, he died in Rayy, on the
3th of gfea'bSn 3I3/27th of October 925."
Al-Razi's Masters and Opponents.—We have already mentioned that al-
Rilzi studied medicine under 'AH ibn RabbAn al-Tabari. Ibn al-Nad!m says”
that he studied philosophy under al-BalKfai. Thi; al-BalUp, according to ibn
al-Nadim, had travelled much, and knew philosophy and ancient sciences
well Some even say that al-RAzi attributed to himself some of al-Balkhl's
books on philosophy. We know nothing else about thia al-BalW. not even
his full name.
Al-Razi's opponents, on the contrary, are known better. They were the
following
1. Abu al-QAsim al-Balkhi, chief of the Mu'tazilah of Baghdad (d. 319/931),
was a contemporary of al-Rizi; he composed many refutations of al-RAzl's
books, especially his 'llm al-Ildhi.19 He hail controversies with him especially
on time.10
2. ghuhaid ibn al-Husain al-Balkbi,*1 with whom alRAzi had many contro-
>■ Fibred, p. 416. Cairo ed.
■< Ibid.
“ Ibid.
” Ibn Juljul, p. 78.
'■ Ibid.
” Kptlre dr Rerun I, p. 5.
■’ This is the date given by al Blruni (ibid., p. 6). Other dates given are: (a)
around 320.032 (SA'id. Tabaqat. p. S3, Cairo ed.. repeated by alQifti. p. 178, Cairo
od.: repeated by ibn abi Ujaibiah. Vol. I. p. 314. but on the authority of Bal
mujaffar ibn Mu'arrif); (b) 295-300/907-812 and a fraction (abu al Khair al-
Hn«n ibn SuwAr. in Uptibieh. Vol. I, p. 314); (c) 311/923 (ibn al 'Im&d, Sbadharfii
al-Olabab, Vol. II, p. 203); (dI 364/974 (Hudory o/ Ibn SJIrdr, quoted by Qifp.
p. 17H. Cairo od.). Surely the most probable dale u that given by al-Btrtni.
'• Fdiriet, p. 416. Cairo ed.
" Ibid . pp. 300, 301; U»aibi'ah. Vol. I. pp. 317, 320; al-BtrOni, No. 117.
Al Blriini, No. 62.
■' Seo on him; Qaswtni on QuAdr Maqdlah (Gibb. Mom. Series XI), pp. 127-28;
H. Etho. Itudagy'e Vorlaufer and Zeitgenoeem, Morgenlandischo Forechungen.
Leipzig. 1875. p. 43; YAqOt, Vdabtf. Vol. I. p. 143.
438
Muhainmad ibn Zakariya al-RAxi
veraira,” one of those controversies was on the theory of pleasure.” His
theory of pleasure is expounded in his Tafdil Ladbdlfit al-Na/i from which
abu Sulaimin al-Man^iqi al-SijisUni gives some extracts in $itodn al-flilmah.u
AJ Balkhi died before 329/940.
3. Abu IJJtiru al-Razi. the most important of all hi3 opponents (d. 322/933-
934) and one of the greatest Ismi'Ui missionaries." He reproduced contro
versies between him and al-Razi in his A'ldm al-Nubuwwa^.,, Thanks to this
book, al-Razi'a ideas about prophets and religion are preserved for us.
4. Ibn al-Tammar, whom Kraus believe® to be perhaps abu Bakr Husain
al-Tammir.” He was a physician and had some controversies With al-Rizi
as is reported by abu Hatim al-Rizi in A'ldm al-Hubuwwah.1* Ibn al-Tammar
refuted al-Rizi's al-I'M al-Ruhdni and al-Rizi answered this refutation." In
fact, al-Razi wrote two refutations: (a) refutation of al-TammAr's refutation
of Misma'i concerning matter; (b) refutation of al-Tammir's opinion on the
atmosphere of subterranean habitations.10
5. Those of whom we know from the titles of tho books written by al-
Razi: (a) al-Misma'i, a Mutakallim who had written against the materialists
and against whom al-RAzi wrote a treatise;’1 (b) Jarir the doctor who had a
theory about the eating of black mulberry after water-melon;” (c) al-Hasan
ibn Mubarik al-Ummi. to whom al-Rizi wrote two epistles;“ (d) al-Kayy&l,
a Mutakallim, against whose theory of the Imim, al-R&zi wrote a book;’1
(e) Mansur ibn T’lhah. who wrote a book on “Being" refuted by al-Rizi;"
(f) Muhammad ibn al-Laith alRasi'ili whose writing against alchemists was
answered by al-Rizi.”
6. Ahmad ibn al-fayyib al-Sarakbsi (d. 286/899), an elder contemporary
of al-R&zi. Al-Rizi refuted him on the question of bitter taste;” al-Razi
*■ Fibrin. p. 416, Cairo od.
Ibid., p. 416: p. 300, Flugel (Ed.): Usaibi'ah. p. 319.
M Manuscript No. 1408 in Muhammad Murid in Istanbul, p. 136.
“ Mentioned in Fibrin, pp. 188. 189; Nis&m al-Mulk’s Siy&sK..VamrZ. p. 186.
Schefer (Ed.): "Abd al-Qihir al.Baghdadi's Farq bain alFiraq. p. 267; ibn Hajar's
twin oi-Mtaln. Vol. I. p. 164.
•• Ed. by Kraus. Opera P*dosop*<«.. Vol. I, pp. 295-316 (OriwUutto. Vol. V,
1926).
” Ibid., p. 2, note 3.
•• Ibid., p. 312.
" Fiinsi. p. 301; ibn abi Ujaibi'ah. Vol. I. p. 316.
•• Al-Binmi, p. 19.
>’ Fibrin, p. 417.
•* Al-Btrtai, p. 37.
” Ibid., pp. 129-30.
“ Ibid: p. 147.
“ Ibid., p. 134.
•• Ibid., p. 172.
•' Ibid., p. 82.
437
A History of Muslim Philosophy
refuted also his master, Ya'qOb ibn Iablq alKindi. who had writton against
the alchemists."
7. We should add to all those known by names many others who were
refuted by al-RSri. especially the Mu'tazilah and different Mutakallimln."
B
WORKS
AlRizi's books are very numerous. He himself prepared a catalogue of his
books, reproduced by ibn al-Nadim." Here we find: 118 books, 19 epistles,
then 4 books, 6 epistles, and one nurgdlaA. the total being 148 works.
After ibn al-Nadlm, al-Blruni wrote an epistle on the bibliography of al-
Razi This epistle, found in a unique manuscript in Leiden,*1 was edited by
Paul Kraus," and translated into German by J. Ruska in his article: "al-
Blruni als Quelle filr das Lcben nnd die Schriften al-Rizl'a."" This catalogue
ia preceded by a short note on al-RAz!'s life. The books are classified aa follows:
(a) on medicine (1-66 books); (b) physics (57-89); (o) logic (90-96), (d)
mathematics and astronomy (97-106); (e) commentaries, abridgments, and
epitomes (107-13); (f) philosophy and hypothetical sciences (114-30); (g)
metaphysics (131-36); (h) theology (137-50); alchemy (151-72); (i) atheistic
books (173-74); (j) miscellaneous (175-84). In al-Nadlm’s and al-Biruni's
lists, there are some common and some non-common titles.
Ibr. abi Uaaibi'ah (Vol. I, pp. 315-19) mentions 236 works of which some
arc certainly apocryphal.
The different titles given by al-BIrflni. ibn al-Nadlm, al-Qifti, and ibn abi
U?aibi'ah were assembled by Dr. Mabmfid al-Najmlbidi in his book: iSAorA
Hal Muhammad ibn Zakariya published in 1318/1900. He gave 250 titles
As extant manuscripts of al-RAzI's books, Brockelmann (Vol. 1. pp. 268
71, Suppl., Vol. I. pp. 418-21) gives 59 titlss.
Of his philosophical works, we have:
1. Al-fibb al-Ru/ulni (Brit. Mus. Add. Or. 26758, vat. Ar. 182 Cairo 2241
Taa).
2. Al-Siral al-Fahaliyyah (Brit. Mus. Add. Or. 7473).
3. dmdrdt Iqbal al-Daulah (RAgfiib 1463, ff. 98a-99b, Istanbul).
These three were published by Paul Kraus: "Abi Bakr Mohammadi Filu
Zacharias Raghensis." Opera PhiloeapMca, fragmentaquo quae superaunt,
« Ibid., p. 171,
Ibid., pp. 1 IB. 120.
•• Fdlrut, pp. 416-18.
“ <708™ p. 133. II. 33-43.
Epttre de Beruni. eonlcnanl le repertoire dee ouvryeede Muhammad ibn Zakariya
ar.Rdn, publico par Paul Kraus, Peris. IBM
•• lem. Vol. V. 1922. no ’«-'0.
Muhammad ibn Zakartva al-Rizi
Collegit et edidit Paulus Kraus, Para Prior. Cahirae MCMXXXIX, In this
edition Kraus published also fragments or exposes of the following books: —
4. KMb al-LadMhah
5. Kitabal-inmal.IlAhi
6. Maqdlah fi ma ba'd al-J'abi‘ah
The last one is spurious; it is attributed falsely to al-Rtzi in a manuscript
(Istanbul. Rigbib 1463, f. 90a-98b). Kraus gives also the trpotJj of different
authors of al-IUzl's ideas on; (a) The five eternals (God, universal soul, first
matter, absolute space, and absolute time); (b) matter; (c) time and space;
(d) soul and world. At the end of the volume he gives extracts from A'lam
al-Nubnwwah of abu H*tim on prophecy, followed by extracts from al-Aqwil
of- DhaJiabimah of Ahmad ibn ‘Abd Allah al-Kirmini on the same subject.
7. Besides these books and extracts oontamcd in tho first volume (the. only
one published by Kraus). Kraus published in OrwnfoBa some other extracts
concerning al-Rizl'e ideas on prophecy (Vol. V., Faso. 3/4, Roma, 1936).
8. Al-3!>ulcuk 'ala Proclut which was prepared by Kraus to be edited
and was found among the papers ho left after his suicide.
Nothing of these philosophical books was translated into Latin. All Latin
translations of his works were confined to medicine and alchemy.
0
PHILOSOPHY
1. Method
Al-RAxi is a pure rationalist. Ho believes in reason, and in reason alone.
In medicine, his clinical studies reveal a very solid method of investigation
baaed on observation and experimentation. In KMb al-Faraj ba'd al-Shiddab
by al-Tanukhi (d. 384/994) and Cbahdr Maqalah of Ni|4mi 'Aris/i Samar-
qandi written about 560/1156, we find a lot of cases attributed to al-Riri
where he shows an excellent method of clinical investigation. E. 0. Browne,
in bis Arufcion Medicine, has translated a page supposed to be taken from
al-R&zI's f/dwiu which shows this method. It runs aa follows;
AI-Rtal’s exaltation of reason is best expressed on the first page of his
aLfiM alRiihdni. He says: “God. glorious is His name, has given us reason
in order to obtain through it from the present and future the utmost benefits
that we can obtain; it is God's best gift to us. . . . By reason we perceive all
that is useful to us and all that makes our life good—by it we know obscure
and remote things, those which are hidden from us ... by it, too, we succeed tn
the knowledge of God, which is the highest knowledge we can obtain. ... If
reason is so highly plaood and is of such an important rank, we should not
degrade it; we should not make it the judged while it is the judge, or con
trolled while it is the controller, or commanded while it is the commander ,
** Manuscript in Oxford, Bodley Marsh 156, folios 239b-245b.
439
A History of Muslim Philosophy
on the contrary, wo should refer to it in everything and judge all matters by
it; we should do according as it commands us to do."“
Even the most rationalistic mind could not exalt reason so clearly and so
highly. There is no place for revelation or mystic intuition. It is only logical
reason which is the unique criterion of knowledge and conduct. No irrational
force can be invoked. Al Razi is against prophecy, against revelation, against
all irrational trends of thought.
Men are bom with equal dispositions for knowledge. It is only through
cultivation of these dispositions that men differ, some cultivating them by
speculation and learning, others neglecting them or directing them to a practical
way of life.**
2. Metaphysics
When one begins to expound al-RKzi’s metaphysics, one at first oomea
across a small treatise attributed to him: Uaqdlah li .ddi Bakr Muhammad
Ibn Zaknriya al-Rdxi /i ma ba'd al-J'abi'ah (Ragjjib MS. No. 1463, ff. 90a-98b,
in Istanbul). There ia much doubt about the authenticity of this treatise,
because its contents do not agree entirely with al-R&zi's otherwise known
doctrines. So, either it may belong to another period of al-IUzi's intellectual
development, aa Pines supposes,*’ or it may contain only a systematic
historical ixpotl of other people's ideas without reference to his own," or
it may not be by al-Rtai at all.
Anyhow, the main points treated here are: (1) nature, (2) foetus, and (3)
eternity of movement. The author refutes the partisans of the idea of nature
as principle of movement, especially Aristotle and his commentators: John
Philoponos, Alexander of Aphrodisias, and Porphyry. At first he denies that
there is no need to prove the existence of nature, because it is not evident by
itself. If nature is one and the same, why does it produce different effect*
in stone and in man ! If nature permeates the body, does not that mean that
two things can occupy one and the same place ’ Why do those partisans aay
that nature is dead, insensible, impotent, ignorant, without liberty and choice,
and at the same time attribute to it. the same qualities as to God 1 Against
Porphyry the author says: You admit that nature acta in view of something
and not by hazard or mere chance; why then do you say that nature is dead
and not a living agent 1
It seems that the author wants to refute all doctrines which pretend that
nature is the principle of movement and creation, by showing the contra
dictions to which these doctrines necessarily lead. Hia standpoint is that there
is no place for admitting the existence of nature aa principle of action and
“ Optra Philotophica, Vol. I. 1939. pp. 17. 18.
“ Ibid.. p. 296.
•’ Pines. Beilragt tur kdamitchtn Atomtnlthrt, S. 36. No. 2, Berlin. 1936.
*■ Optra P.nlonophica, p. 114.
440
Muhammad ibn Zakariya al R4zi
movement. But he does not define his attitude; hia ezpoal is negative and
destructive.
As for the question of eternity of movement and time, the author discusses
especially the ideas of Aristotle and Proclus.*** He refers to his refutation of
Proclus. We know that al-RAzi has written a treatise entitled "Doubts
about Proclus." and Kraus*" thinks that this is an argument in favour of the
authenticity of tho attribution of the treatise to al-Razi, but we think that
this is a weak argument, because Proolus' dr atlcrmilale mundi was much
discussed by Arab thinkers after it had been translated by IshSq ibn Hunain.*'
The author’s idea is that time is finite and not eternal, that the world is also
finite, that there is only one world, and. lastly, that outside that one world
there is no element and nothing (except God). Here he reproduces the ideas
of Metrodorus and Seleucus taken from pseudo-Plutarch's Placita Philo-
sophorum.
The general trend of this treatise is polemical and dialectical. It cannot
lie reconciled with al-Kazl's ideas on time, space, and Deity. Therefore, we
think that it ia spurious and cannot even belong to another period of al-R&zt’s
spiritual development.
The real doctrine of al-Rizi should be searched for in his Kitab al-'Ilm al-
lldhi. Unfortunately, that work is lost and we have only refutations of some
passages from it collected by Kraus.
** We do not even have textual fragments
of al-RazI's book. With all the inconveniences of adversaries' exposes, we have
nothing more to do than to content ourselves with these refutations. What
we can conclude from these is that al-RAzi treated in this book: space, vacuum,
time, duration, matter, metempsychosis, prophecy, pleasure, and Manichaeism.
Al-RAzl's philosophy ia chiefly characterized by his doctrine of the Five
**
Eternals. Al-Blruni says that "Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-RAzi has re
ported from the ancient Greeks the eternity of five things: God, the universal
soul, first matter, absolute space, and absolute time, on which he founded his
doctrine. But he distinguished between time and duration by saying that
number applies to the one and not to the other, because finiteness attains
numerality; and, therefore, the philosophers have defined time as the duration
of what has a beginning and an end, whereas duration (dahr) has neither
beginning nor end. He said also that in Being these five are necessary: the
sensible in it is the matter formed by composition; it is spatial, so there must
be a space; alternation of its modes is a characteristic of time, because
Bome precede and others follow, and it is by time that oldness and new
ness, and older and newer and simultaneous are known; so time is necessary.
In Being there are living things, so there must be soul; in it there are
“ lUgbib Manuscript No. 1463 (ff. 90-98b) in Istanbul, pp. 128. 129.
•• Opera Phdotophica, p. 114.
*■ Soo Neo-Plalonici apud Arabeo. ed. A. Badawi, Cairo, 1953, Introduction.
M Opera Philotophica, pp. 170-190.
»• E. Sachau, Alberunit India. London, 1910, Vol. I, p. 319.
441
A History of Muslim Philosophy
intelligibles and their constitution is absolutely perfect; there must be then
a creator, wise, omniscient, doing things aa perfectly aa possible, and giving
reason for the sake of salvation."
Out of the Five Eternals, two are living and acting: God and soul; one »
passive and not living: matter from which all bodies are made; and two are
neither living and acting, nor passive: vacuum and duration.M Sometimes we
find vacuum (kbaW) instead of space (matin/, and duration (dahr) instead
of time (zamin) or duration in the limited sense (muddah),
Thia doctrine is attributed, in some sources (al-FakJjr al-R&zi. al-Jhahras-
tini, Nasir al-Din al-Titei), to the so-called JJarrinlyyah. Who were these
Harr&nlyyah 1 The word oomee from Harriln. the famous city of the §4bians
and a 'centre of learning immediately before Islam and in the first four centuries
of the Islamic era. Masaignon** thinks that these HarTfinlyyah are fictitious
persons, and that what we find about them in our sources is a mere "literary
romance" (roman littcrain). Kraus ia also of the same opinion, and he give
his reasons** as follows: (a) before al-Razi we find no one who attributes th.
doctrine of the five eternals to al-Harrinlvyah; (b) al-IUzi, in his 'Ilmal-lldhn
has expounded the doctrines of the IsAbian IJarrtniyyah and also his doctrim
of the five eternals. But then Kraus gives a third reason which proves exactly
the oontrary of what the first two prove: al-Blruni, al-ManQqi. al-Kitibi,
and al-fuai say that al-RAzi reported thia doctrine from the ancient Greeks,
that ia to say, the early Greek philosophers, especially Pythagoras, Democritus,
etc. How can we then say that al-R&zi attributed thia doctrine to a fictitious
school, IJarrtntyyah, when he said expressly in his ‘Ibn al- Ildhi that it waa the
doctrine of the early Greek philosophers I He waa not in need of inventing
the Harrinlyyah. when he already had declared that it was the doctrine of
the early Greek philosophers. For thia reason, we cannot admit Maasignon’s
suggestion, nor Kraus' evidence which are very weak. It ia not right to identify
what is attributed in the different sources to the Harriniyyah with al-Risd'e
ideas unless this is expressly declared in the sources themselves.
We may now describe these Five Eternals.
(i) God
God's wisdom is perfect No inadvertence can be attributed to Him. Life
flows from Him as light flows from the sun. He ia perfect and pure Intelligence.
From the eoul life flows.*’ God creates everything. He is incapable of nothing,
and nothing can bo contrary to His will. God knows things perfectly well. But
the soul knows only what it experiences. God knew that soul would tend to
matter and ask for material pleasure. After that eoul attached itaelf to matter;
“ Manuqi, 41 Xsmmoh w-al-AmhnaK. Hyderabad, 1332/1913, Vol. I, p. 144
“ Oriental Studiu Prconnud to E. a. Broom,. Cambridge, 1842, p. 333.
•• Opera Phdooophica. Vol. I. pp. 192-94.
•’ Mwrzuqi. op. cil.. Vol. I. p. 114.
442
Muliamnuui ibn Zakarlys al-Rkii
God by his wisdom arranged that this attachment should be brought about
in the most perfect way. God afterwards |>uured intelligence and perception
upon the soul. That was the reason for the soul to remember its real world
and the reason for it to know that so long as it is in the world of matter it
will never be free from pain. If soul knows that, and also that in its real world
it will have pleasure without pain, it will desire that world and, once separated
from matter, it will remain there for ever in utmost happiness.-
In that way all doubts can be removed about the eternity of tho world and
the existence of evil. Since wo have admitted the wisdom of the Creator, we
must admit that the world is created. If one asks why it was created in this
or that moment, we say that it was because soul attached itself to matter in
that moment. God knew that this attachment was a cause of evil, but after
it had boon brought about, God directed it to the best poesiblo way. But
some evils remained; being the source of all evils, this composition of soul
and matter could not bo completely purified."
(ii) Soul
God, according to al-RAzi, has not created the world through any nooessity,
but He decided to create it after having at first no will to create it. Who
determined Him to do so 1 There must be another eternal who made Him
decide this.
This other eternal is the soul which was living but ignorant. Matter, too,
was eternal. Owing to its ignorance, the soul was fond of matter and formed
figures from it in order to get material pleasures. But matter waa rebellious to
forms; so God intervened in order to aid the soul. This aid was that H" made
this world and created in it strong forms wherein the soul oould find corporeal
pleasures. God then created man and from the substance of His divinity he
created the intell genre of man to awaken the soul and to show to it that this
world is not its real world.
But man oannot attain the real world except by philosophy. He who studies
philosophy and knows his real world and acquiree knowledge is saved from
h-s bad state. Souls remain in this world till they a e awakened by philosophy
to the mystery and directed towards the real world."
(iii) Matter
The absolute or first matter is composed of atoms. Each atom has volume;
otherwise by their collection nothing could be formed. If the world is destroyed,
it too is dispersed into atoms. Matter has been there from eternity, because
it is impossible to admit that a thing comes from nothing.
What ia more oompact becomes the substance of the earth, what is more
rarefied than the substance of the earth becomes the substance of water, what
•• See especially, Fa'Jp al Dln al-Rtai. Muhuffal. Cairo 1M3/1»OS, pp. 85-86.
N*sir-i Khusrau.ZddoI .tfusd/irln. ed. Kaviani, Berlin, 1341/IMX. pp. 114-1#.
443
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ia etill more rarefied becomes the substance of air. and what is still more and
more rarefied becomes the substance of'fire.
The body of tho sphere is also composed of the particles of matter, but its
composition differs from the composition* of other bodies. The proof of this
is that the movement of the sphere is not directed to the centre of the world,
but to its periphery. Its body is not very compact, as that of the earth, nor
very rarefied as that of fire or air.
Qualities such as heaviness, levity, darkness, and luminosity are to be
explained by the more or leas vacuity which is within matter. Quality is an
accident which is attributed to substance, and substance is matter.”
Al-Rlzi gives two proofs to establish the eternity of matter. First, creation is
manifest; there must then be its Creator. What is created is nothing but formed
matter. Why then do we prove, from the created, the anteriority of the Creator,
and not the anteriority of the created being 1 If it is true that body is created
(or more exactly: made[mni']) from something by the force of an agent,
then we should say that aa this agent is eternal and immutable before His
act, what received thi* act of force must also have been eternal before it
received that act, Thi* receiver ia matter. Then matter ia eternal.
The second proof is baaed on the impossibility of creatio tx nihilo.
Creating, that is to say, making something out of nothing is easier than oom
posing it. God's creating men fully at one stroke would be easier than composing
them in forty years. This is the first premise. The wise Creator docs not
prefer to do what is farther from His purpose to what is nearer, unless He is
incapable of doing what ia easier and nearer. Thia is the second premise. The
conclusion from these premises is that the existence of all things should be
caused by the Creator of the world through creation and not by composition.
But what we see is evidently the contrary. All things in thia world are produced
by composition and not by creation. It necessarily follows that He is incapable
of creoHo a nihilo and the world came to be by the composition of things
the origin of which ia matter.
Al-R&zi adds, universal induction proves this. If nothing in the world oomea
to be except from another thing, it is necessary that nature* are made from
another thing, and this other thing is matter. Therefore, matter is eternal;
it was originally not composed, but dispersed.*1
(iv) Space
As it ia proved that matter ia eternal, and as matter should occupy space,
ao there is eternal space. This argument ia nearly the same as that given by
al-Tringhahri But al-Ir&njbahri says that space is the manifest might of God.
Al-Rizi could not follow his master's vague definition. For him. space is the
place where matter ia
« IM.. pp. 78 el
« IM.
444
Muhammad ibn Zakariya nl-RAzi
Al-RAzi distinguishes between two kinds of epace: universal or absolute,
and particular or relative The former ia infinite and does not depend on the
world and the spatial things in it.
Vacuum is inside space, and, consequently, inside matter. Aa a proof of the
infinity of space, the partisans (al-Trinthahri and al-Rlzi) say that a spatialized
thing cannot exist without space, though space may exist without epatialised
things. Space is nothing but the receptacle for the spatialized things. What con
tains the two is cither a body, or a not-body. If it is a body, it must be in apace,
and outside this body there is space or no-space; if no-space, it is a body and
finite. If it is not-body, it is space. Therefore, space is infinite. If someone
says that this absolute apace has an end, that means that its limit is a body.
As every body is finite, and every body is in space, so space is infinite in
every sense. What is infinite is eternal, so space is eternal.**
Vacuum has tho power of attracting bodies; therefore, water is conserved
(or retained) in a bottle submerged in water with the opening turned down
wards. ••
(v) Time
Time, according to al-Rizi, ia eternal. It ia a substanco that flows fjouAar
yajnj. He is against those (Aristotle and his followers) who pretend that time
is the number of the movements of the body, because if it were so, it would
not have been possible for two moving things to move in one time by two
different numbers.
Al-RAzi distinguishes between two kinds of time: absolute time and limited
fmofutr) time. The absolute time is duration (al-dahr). It is eternal and
moving. As for the limited time, it is that of the movements of the spheres
and of the sun and stars. If you imagine the movement of duration, you can
imagine absolute time, and this is eternity. If you imagine the movement of
the sphere, you imagine the limited time.**
D
THEOLOGY
Al-RAzi was a theist. but he does not believo in revelation and prophecy.
We content oureelvee with giving a summary of his main ideas.
Al-Razi contests prophecy on the following grounds:
1. Reason is sufficient to distinguish between good and evil, useful and
harmful. By reason alone we can know God. and organize our lives in
the beat way. Why then ia there need for prophets 1
2. There is no justification for privileging some men for guiding all men.
•" Ibid.
•• Fakhr al-Dtn al-RAzi, ol-MatMiA al-MaOriglyyah. Hyderabad. 1243'1024.
Vol. I, p. 248.
•* Abu HMim al-RAzi. A'lam al-.Vubummh in Optra PhUotophiea. Vol. I. p. 304.
445
A History of Muslim Philosophy
because all men are bora equal in intelligence; the differences are not be
cause of natural dispositions, but because of development and education.
3. Prophets contradict one another. If they speak in the name of one and
the same God, why this contradiction ?
After denying prophecy, al-Rizi goes on to critizise religions in general.
He expounds the contradictions of the Jews, the Christians, the Manichaeans.
and the Majuste. He gives the following reasons for the attachment of men
to religion:
(a) Imitation and tradition,
(b) Power of the clergy who are in the service of the State.
(c) External manifestations of religions, ceremonials and rituals, which
impose themselves upon the imagination of the simple and the naive.
He shows contradictions between religion and religion in detail,
Al-Rizi subjects the revealed books, the Bible and the Qur'An, to systematic
criticism. He tries to criticize the one by the aid of the other; for instance, he
criticizes Judaism by means of Manichaeism, and Christianity by means of
Islam; and then criticizes the Qur'&n by means of the Bible,
He denies especially the miraculouaness (i'jaz) of the Qur'&n, either because
of ita style or its contents and affirms that it is possible to write a better book
in a better stylo.
He prefers scientific books to all sacred books, because scientific books are
more useful to men in their lives than all sacred books. Books on medicine,
geometry, astronomy, and logic are more useful than the Bible and the Qur'&n.
The authors of these scientific books have found the facts and truths by their
own intelligence, without the help of prophets. Science is drawn from three
sources: reasoning, according to logic; tradition, from predecessors to succes
sors according to sure and accurate testimony, as in history; and instinct
which guides man without being in need of much reasoning.
After thia negative criticism, he goes on to say that it would not even be
reasonable of God to send prophets, because they do much harm. Every
nation believes only in ita own prophets and vehemently denies those of
others, with the result that there have been many religious wars and much
hatred between nations professing different religions.
These ideas of al-R&zi were most audacious. No other Muslim thinker was
so daring as he.
E
MORAL PHILOSOPHY
R&zl’s moral philosophy is to be found in the only extant philosophical
works of his. al-I'M al-Rihini and al-Siml al-Faliaflyyah. The latter work
is a justification of hia conduct of life, from tho philosophical point of view,
because he was blamed by some people for not living on the model of his
master, Socralee. It is a curious and very interesting apologia pro vila rua.
44B
Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-RAzi
He thinks that there should be moderation in a philosopher’« life—neither
much asoetism. nor too much indulgence in pleasure®. There are two limits,
higher and lower. The higher limit beyond which a philosopher should not
go is to abstain from pleasures that cannot be obtained except by com
mitting injustice and doing things contrary to reason Tho lower is to eat
what does not harm him or cause illness, and to wear what is sufficient to
protect his skin, and so on. Between the two limits, one can live without
becoming unworthy of being called a philosopher.
Al-RAzi claims that he in his practical life did not go beyond these two
limits. He did not live in the service of a monarch as a minister or a man of
arms, but as a doctor and counsellor. He waa not greedy, nor in conflict with
other peoplo but, on the contrary, he was very tolerant aa regards his own
rights. He never exceeded in drinking, eating, or enjoying life. As for his
love of science and atudy, it ia all well known to everybody. From the theoretical
point of view too. his works entitle him to be call«i a philosopher.
In al-I'M al Rufulnt he treats, in twenty chapters, the main points of
ethics. He wants to expound what the vices are and how we are to get rid
of them.
He begins with the exaltation of reason, in the manner we have seen above.
Then ho goes in medias res by treating the question of passions. He says that
man should oontrol his passions; he brings out the distinction drawn by Plato
between three aspects of the soul: reasonable, pugnacious, and appetitive; and
shows how justice should reign among them.
It is necessary that a man should know his own defects. For this, he can
appeal to a reasonable friend who will tell him about his defects. He should get
information about what other people, neighbours, and friends, think of him.
Here al-RAzi depends on two treatises of Galen: "On Knowing One's Own
Defects," and “How Good People Benefit from Their Enemies.”
These are the contents of preliminary chapters. In the fifth, he expounds
his theory of pleasure, a theory which he treats again in a special epistle. For
him, pleasure ia nothing but the return of what waa removed by something
harmful to the previous state, for example, one who leaves a shadowy place
for a sunny and hot place gets pleasure on coming back to the shadowy place.
For thia reason, says al-Rizi, natural philosophers have defined pleasure as
a return to nature.
Al-RAzi condemns love as an excess and submission to passions. He con
demns vanity, because it prevents one from learning more and working better.
Envy ia an amalgamation of misery and cupidity. An envious man is the man
who feels sad when another obtains soma good things, even when no harm
oomes to him at all. If he has been harmed, then the emotion ia not envy
but enmity. If a person contents himself with what is necessary for him. then
there would be no place for envy in his soul.
Anger is aroused in animals to make it possible for them to take revenge on
harmful things. If it is in excess, it does much harm to them.
447
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Lying is a bad habit. It ia of two aorta: for good, or for evil. If it is for
good, then it merits praise: otherwise, it is blameworthy So its value depends
on tho intention.
Misery cannot be wholly condemned. Its value depends on the reason for
it. If it ia due to the fear of poverty and fear of the future, then it is not bad.
If it ia for mere pleasure of acquisition, it is bad. There must be a justification
for one’s misery; if it ia a reasonable one. it is not a vice; otherwise it iB a
thing to be combated.
Worry, when it ia too much, ia not a good thing, for its excess, without
good reason, leads to hallucination, melancholy, and early withering
Cupidity is a very bad state which brings pain and harm. Drunkenness
leads to calamities and ills of body and mind.
Copulation, when in excess, ia bad for the body; it causes early senility,
weakness, and many other ills. One should indulge in it aa little aa one can,
because excess in it leads to more excess.
Frivolity is also pernicious in some cases.
Acquisition and economy are good for living, but only in moderation. No
more wealth should be acquired than is needed and spent, except a little
saving for sudden calamities and bad future circumstances.
Ambition may lead to adventures and perils. It is well and good if we can
get a better rank without adventure or peril; otherwise it is better to renounce it.
The last chapter treats a favourite theme in the Hellenistic and early
medieval period, that of the fear’of death. Here al-Razi oontenta himself by
dealing with it from the point of view of those who think that when the body
is destroyed, the soul is also destroyed. After death, nothing oomes to man.
because he cannot feci anything. During his life, man is submerged in pains,
whereas after death there would be no pain whatever. The best thing for a
reasonable man to do is to get rid of the fear of death, because if he believes
in another life, he must be joyful because, by death, he goes to a better world.
If he believes there is nothing after death, there is no cause for worry. In
any case, one should reject every kind of worry about death, because it is not
reasonable to worry.
F
CONCLUSION
Al-R&zi had no organized system of philosophy, but compared to his time
he must be reckoned as the meet vigorous and liberal thinker in Islam and
perhaps in the whole history of human thought.
He was a pure rationalist, extremely confident in the power of reason, free
from every kind of prejudice, and very daring in the expression of his ideas
without reserve.
He believed in man, in progress, and in God tho Wise, but in no religion
whatever.
Muhammad ibn Zakariyu al Klizi
BIBLIOGRAPHY
A. Ancient Sources
Ibn al-Nadta. FMrisi, ed. Flugel, pp. 299 el tqt/.-, SU'id al-Andaluai, "fahaq&l
alL’mam. p. 33; ibn Juljul, TabagOl al-AtibM’ waLIIukamd'. ed. Fu'Ad Sayyid,
Cairo. 1355/1936, pp. 77-78; al.Biruni, Epitre de Bcmni, eonlerionf le repertoire
dee ouenjeede Muhammad ibn Zahariya ar-ROti, publico par P. Kraus. Paris, 1936;
al-Baihaqi. Tatimmah Simin al-ftilmab. ed. M. g|)afl'. Lahore. 1351/1932; nl.Qifp,
TartJJ aLHukami', rd. Lippert, pp. 27-177; ibn abi L'jaibi'ah, ‘C'yrln al-AnU' li
Tabaqil al-Atibbd'. Vol. I. pp. 309-21; abu al-Farsj ibn al-'Ibri (Bar-Hobraeus),
Muftfuaear TiriU al-Duwal. nd. A.SalbAni.p. 291; ibn Khallikin, Walaydl ul A ydn.
ed. Mulyyi al-Dln Abd al-Hamld, Cairo. 1948. No. 878, pp. 244-47; al.Safndi. .Vail
oLHimydn. pp. 249-50; ibn al-'ImAd. SMfamt aL&altab. Vol II,'p. 283; al-
'Umari, Maeilik aL Abair. Vol. V, Part 2. ff. 301-03 (photostat copy in Mr al-
Kulub al.Mip-iyyah).
B. Modern Studies
G. S. A. Ranking, “The Life and Works of Rhazes." in Proeeedwje of the Seier.-
toenth International Congrece of Medicine, London. 1913, pp. 237-88; J. Ruska,
“Al-BirOni ala Quelle Tur du Lobon und die Schriften al-IUzl's," few. Vol. V.
1924, pp. 28-50; "Al-R&zi als Bahnbrecher eirier neuer Chemie." Deutsche Litem-
tumeitung, 1923, pp. 118-24, "Die Alchemic al-Rtel'a,” Dee Islam. Vol. XXII,
pp. 283-319; "Uber den gegenwiirtigon Stand der RAzi-Forschung." Arehinio di
Mori della scicnza. 1924, Vol. V, pp. 335-47; H. H. Shador. ZDMG. 79, pp. 228-35
(soo translation into Arabic by Abdurrahman Badawi in "al-Ins&n al-K&mil,"
Islam on. Vol. XI, Cairo, 1950. pp. 37-44); E. O. von Lippmann. Entstehung and
Auobreilung der Alchemic, Vol. II, p. 181; S. Pines. “Die Atomenlehre ar-RAzl's”
in Beitrdge zur iMamiochen Atomenlehre.. Berlin, 1936, pp. 34-93; Dr. Mahmiid
al-NajmAb&di, {Marti Hal Muhammad ilm Zakarlya. 1318/1900; Encyclopaedic dec
Islams. s. v. (by Ruska); Gamil Bek, 'Ugud al-Juuhar, Vol. I. pp. 118-27; lzmirh
Haqqi, IMAiy®. Fak. Maom . Vol. I, p. 151; Vol. II. p. 30; Vol. III. pp 177 el
stpt-'. Abdurrahman Badawi, "Min T&rlkh al-IlbAd fi al-Isl*m." Idamica, Vol. 11.
Cairo. 1945, pp. 198-228; Hirachberg, Oeochichu der Augenheilkunde. p. 101; E. G.
Browne, Arabian Medicine. Cambridge, 1921, pp. 44-53; M. Meyerhof, Legacy of
Islam, pp. 323 er egg.; F. Wustenfeld, Qeschic.hle der Arabiechen Arzle and Xulurfor.
•rAer.n.98; L. Leclerc, Hieloire de. la mMudne arabe, Paris. 1876. Vol. I. pp. 337-54,
H. P. J. Ronaud, "A propoe du millcnaire do Razee." in Bulletin de la eociele fran-
faiee d’HiMoire de la medicine. Mare-avril. 1931. pp. 203 el »77 : A. Eisen. "Klmiva
al R&zi." RAAD. DIB. 62/4; Aldo Mieli, La science arabe. Leiden. 1938. pp. 8. 10.
C. Editions of Philosophical Works
For tho manuscript of al-RAzl's extant books in general, boo Brockclmann.
GAL. I, pp. 208-71 (second edition), Suppl.. Vol. I. pp. 418-21.
The only edition of alR&zi'a philosophical books and fragments, still extant,
is the ono by Paul Kraus: “Abi Bakr Mohammadi Filil Zacharias Raghenais.”
Opera Philooophica, fmgmontaquo quae siipomsunt. Collegit et odidil Paulus Kraus.
Pare Prior. Cahirae MCMXXXIX Only the first volume was published; suicide
prevented P. Kraus from publishing the second volume for which he had collected
a good deal of material. Thio material was traiuderred. after Kraus' death, to the
Institut Francois d'Archcologio Orientals, in Cairo. It remains to be published.
449
A History of Muslim Philoeopl •
Chapter XXIII
AL-FARABI
Abu Narr al-FAribi waa born in about 258/870 and he died in 339/960.
Eminent founder of a philosophical system as he was, he devoted himself
entirely to contemplation and speculation and kept himself aloof from political
and social perturbations and turmoils. He left a considerable amount of
literature. Besides his immediate pupils, there were many who studied his
works after his death and became his followers. His philosophy set the
standard for scholarly speculation both in the East and the West long after
his death.
Since the last decades of the thirteenth/nineteenth oentury, several attempts
have been made to write his biography, to collect his still unpublished works,
and to elucidate some obscurities in his philosophy. In 1370/1960. on the
occasion of the millennium of his death, some Turkish scholars discovered
some of his works still in manuscript and removed certain difficulties con
cerning his thought. We cannot say if they have all been resolved. We do not
even know if it is easy to resolve them unless we add further to our knowledge
of his life and works. Public and private libraries still keep a considerable
number of Islamic manuscripts behind closed doors; and we think it is time
for these manuscripts to be brought to the light of the day.
In this chapter an attempt has been made to deal briefly with al-F*r*bI's
life, his works, and his philosophy, with special reference to some of tbo lost
links and misconceptions about or objections raised against his doctrine.1
A
LIFE
Contrary to the usage among some of the Muslim scholars, al-Firibi did
not write his autobiography, and no one among his disciples managed to give
an account of his life as al-Juzj&ni did for his master ibn SIna. Material for
that in the works of the biographers is quite unsatisfactory and inadequate.
Tho rather lengthy biography in ibn Kballik&n's Wafayat al-A'yin,' is open
to criticism as regards its authenticity. Thus, in the life of al-Fkr&bi, several
obscure points and some unsolved problems are still to be investigated and
settled.
His life falls into two distinct periods, the first being the time from his
birth till about the age of fifty. The only information we have about this
period is that he was bom at Waatj. a village in the vicinity of F4r*b in
Tranaoxiana, in about 258/870. In spite of the scanty information we have
1 A comprehensive trnniie entitled La place d'AlFa-Ob, done I'kole philotopLique
mandmane was published by Ibrahim Madkour in 1934.
• Ibn KhailikiUi, U’a/aydl ai A yan. Cairo. 1275/1858, Vol. II, pp. 112-1*.
*50
AlKartbi
about hia family, hia childhood, and his youth, it has been believed that he
waa Turkish by birth, that hia father was a general, and that he himself
worked aa a judge for some time ’ What is better known is the cultural and
intellectual movement which flourished and spread with the introduction of
Islam in F&rtb at the beginning of the third/ninth century, and that the
reputed philologist al-Jauhari, the compiler of al-.JMh. waa one of hia eminent
contemporaries.
Al-F&rabi waa able to draw largely on thia movement. The basis of hiB
early education was religious and linguistic: he studied jurisprudence. Hadi th,
and the exegesis of the Qur'in. He learnt Arabic as well aa Turkish and
Persian. It is doubtful whether ho knew any other language, and what haa
been stated by ibn Kfcallikan about al-Faribl’s mastery of "seventy tongues”
is more akin to the fabulous than to exact history.1 From his interpretation
of the word sa/talah (sophistry), it is obvious that al Firibi had no knowledge
of the Greek language * He did not neglect to benefit himself from the rational
studies which were current in his time, such as mathematics and philosophy,
although it appears that he did not turn to them until much later. Contrary
to what haa been held, it does not appear that he paid much attention
to medicine.
* And when he became extremely interested in these rational
studies, he did not remain content with what he had acquired in this respect
in his native town. Spurred by intellectual curiosity, he had to leave his
home and wander abroad in pursuit of more knowledge.
That marks the second period of hia life, the period of old age and full
maturity. Baghdad, as an outstanding centre of learning throughout the
fourth/tenth century, was naturally his first destination where he encountered
various scholars among whom were philosophers and translators. It was
the study of logic which attracted him to that circle of distinguished logicians
of Baghdad of whom the most renowned was abu Bishr Matta ibn Yunus
considered to be the foremost logician of his age. Al Farabi studied logic under
ibn Yunus for some time. He surpassed hiB teacher and, on account of the
eminent position he had gained in this field, he came to be called “The Second
Teacher.” Another famous logician. Yabya ibn 'Adi, was liis disciple.
Al-Firibi remained twenty years in Baghdad and then his attention was
engaged by another cultural centre in Aleppo. There, in the brilliant and
scholarly Court of Saif al-Daulah, gathered the most distinguished poets,
philologists, philosophers, and other scholars In spite of the strong Aral,
sympathies of that Court, no racial bias or prejudice could mar the scholarly
and cultural atmosphere in which Persians, Turks, and Arabs argued and
• Ibn abi Usaibi'ah, T/yun alAnM' Tabafai ol-AtilM. Kbnigsborg. 1884.
Vol. II. p. 134.
• Ibn Kfaallik&n. op. til.. p 113.
• Al-FOrilbi. ZAfd'ol-'UHm.Cairo. I»4». p. 64; Madkour. bo SophiMiqut (Logiqu.
d'Al-Skifa). Cairo. I9SR, Preface, p. v.
• Ibn abi Usaibi'ah. op. cU.( Vol. II. p. 134.
451
A History of Muslim Philosophy
disputed and agreed or differed in the name of disinterested pursuit of know
ledge. In that Court al-FAribi lived, first and foremoat, aa a scholar and
seeker after truth. The glamour and the glory of Court life never allured him.
and. in the garb of a Sufi, he addressed himself to the hard task of a scholar
and a teacher; and he wrote his books and his treatises among murmuring
rivulets and the thick foliage of shady trees.
Except for several short journeys abroad, al-F&rftbi remained in Syria till
his death in 339/980. Ibn abi Usaibi'ah maintains that al-Firibi visited Egypt
towards the end of his life.’ This is most probable, as Egypt and Syria have
been closely linked for a long time in history, and cultural life in Egypt at
the time of the fulunids and the Ikhshidida had its attractions. However,
the alleged report of the murder of alFiribi by some highwaymen while he
was travelling between Damascus and 'Asqalan quoted by al-Baihaqi is in
credible.’ Al-Firibi had reached such an exalted position in the Court of Saif
al-Daulah that the Amir in person, together with his immediate entourage,
attended the funeral service in honour of the dead scholar.
WORKS
He left a considerable amount of literature; yet, if we accept the reports
of some of the biographers, such as al-Qifti and ibn abi Usaibi'ah. the number
of his writings is seventy, small compared with that of his contemporaries,
namely, al Kindi and al-RAzi the physician. However, we must bear in mind
that in the lists of the works of these scholars, the biographers have often
mentioned the same book under two. maybe more, different titles, and that
most of the works they have listed were mere articles or short treatises.
Al Faribi's works may be divided into two equal parts, one dealing with
logic and tho other with other studies. The logical works are concerned with
the different parts of Aristotle's Organon, either in the form of commontarv
or paraphrase. Most of these writings, however, are still in manuscript ; and
n great many of these manuscripts are not yet available.* The second category
of his works deals with the other branches of philosophy, physics, mathematics,
metaphysics, ethics, and politics A good part of it is available, and it gives
a dear idea of the various aspects of al-Ftrtbt's philosophy. But some of it
is doubtful and his authorship of it is a subject of controversy, as in the case
of Fuoi-c al-Hikam (Gems of .Sageness) or aj-M u/driqdl (Separateness).1* In
this category, no really scientific study was attempted; al- FArAbi did not
' /W„ p. 138.
• Al Baihaqi. TdrifcJ HukamA' al lul/lm. Damascus, 1940. pp. 33-34.
• Mubahat TUrkor, FOrObi nin. Ankara. 1BS8.
'• Gcorr, "FArAbi ret-il I'auteur des Foyouy," REI. 1941-1946. pp. 31 -39: Aidin
Sayili, IMIfttn. 1931
Al-F&rAhi
even .mention medicine, and hia diacuaainn of chemistry waa rather in the
nature of a defence than in the form of elaboration and analysis.
Ibn Kfaallikin ia probably right when he maintains that al-FArAbi wrote
moat of his books in Baghdad and Damascus,11*There ia no evidence of hia
having written any of hia books before tho age of fifty, and even if he did
write any, it is not certain whether it was theological or philosophical. Tho
biographers have not reported anything contradictory. Some scholars have
attempted to make a chronological list of his works.11 But one wondere what
the value of such a list would be since all his works were written in the last
thirty years of his life, when he began tn write aa a fully mature philosopher;
and there was certainly no noticeable change or development in his thoughts
or doctrine during this period.
The style of al-Firibi is characteristically concise and precise. He deliberately
selects hia words aud expressions aa he profoundly thinks of his ideas and
thoughts. His aphorisms are pregnant with profound significance. That is
why Max Horten has given a large commentary to explain the small
treatise entitled Fueie al-Hikam." Al-Farabi has a particular style; anyone
accustomed to it can well recognize it. He avoids repetition and redundancy
and prefers brevity and conciseness. It seems that al-F&rSbi waa in favour
of esoteric teaching and believed that philosophy should not be made
available to the uninitiated among the masses,14 and that philosophers should
expound their ideas garbed in obscurity, mystification, and ambiguity.14 Even
today, it is not an easy task to comprehend the meaning implied in some
F&rabian aphorisms.
His method is almost identical with his style. Ho collects and generalizes;
fie arranges and harmonizes; he analyses in order to oompose; he divides and
Bub-divides in order to concentrate and classify. In some of his treatises,
division and classification seem to be his only objective His treatise entitled
"What Should Be Learnt Before Attempting Philosophy" is in the form of
an index of the Greek schools of philosophy, the meanings of their titles and
the names of their originators. He has been chiefly concerned with the study
of the aims and the style of the works of Aristotle.14 His “Classification of
Sciences” is the first attempt of its kind in the history of Islamic thought.1’
AI Fir&bi is fond of opposites; in fact, ho gives the opposite of almost every
term he usee: thus negation implies affirmation; and Being. Non-Being. He
wrote a treatise in answer to the questions he had been asked. In thia treatise
he gives tho proposition with which he is confronted and contrasts it with ita
11 Ibn KhaliikAn. op. eti., Vol. II, p. 113.
11 Aidin Sayili, op. cit.
11 M. Horton. Zkw Rurh der Ringairine Fdrdbi. Milnetar. 1905.
14 Cicero. De Univ., 2, 6.
11 AhFArAbi. al Thamnral al-Marr/lyyah. Leiden. 1893. pp. 4-5.
• Ibid., pp- 42-55.
’ SA'id al-Andalusi. Tnboqai al-Umam, Beirut, 1012. p. 53.
453
A History of Muslim Philorophy
opposite, in order to get an adequate eolution. Thia reminds us of Plato's
Parmenides.
His main concern has been to elucidate the basis of a theory and the foun
dation of a doctrine, to clear up obscurities, and to discuss controversial ques
tions in order to arrive at the right conclusions. However, he pays scant
attention to ordinary topics ; and what he supposes to be self-evident ia passed
by without the slightest attempt at an explanation. A good example of this is
his treatise, "The Aims of the Stagirite in Every Chapter of His Book Named
the Alphabet."11 Thia study is almost akin to our introduction to or criticism
of a new book. It can be favourably compared to a similar work by a con
temporary philosopher.1’ No wonder, ibn Slna found in thia treatise the key
to Aristotle's ‘Metaphysics,
The works of al-F4ribi became widespread in the East in the fourth and
fifth/tenth and eleventh centuries, and they eventually reached tho West
where some Andalusian scholars became the disciples of al-FArabi.11 Some of
his writings were also translated into Hebrew and Latin, and had their in
fluence on Jewish and Christian scholasticism.” These works were published
in the last decades of the thirteenth/ninetoenth century, and some of them
were translated into various modem European languages. Yet there is still
great need for their republication with meticulous editing, especially now that
the libraries of Istanbul aro much more available to us than before, and we
can fill some gape through them.
C
PHILOSOPHY
The philosophy of al-Firtbi has its distinct features and clear-cut aims.
He has adopted some of the doctrines of previous philosophers, reconstructed
them in a form adaptable to his own cultural environment, and made them so
closely knit that his philosophy has become mist systematic and harmonious.
Al-Fir&bi is logical both in his thinking and expression, in his argument and
discussion, and in his exposition and reasoning. His philosophy might have
depended on some false presuppositions, and might have expounded some
hypotheses which modern scienoe has refuted, yet it played a very significant
role and influenced several schools of thought in subsequent times. Beginning
with his logical studies, we will briefly explain the characteristics and the chief
elements of his philosophy
11 Al Farabi, al-Tbamoral al-lHaniiyyah, pp. 34-38.
'* Brohior, AruMle't Melapkyrtee by W. D. Roes, compte rendu bibliographique
dans, Bevus dra Sfudw Gna/uu. Paris, 1928, Vol. XXXIV. pp. 293 U ayj
Al Qifp. TdriU cd-Wutonul'. Leipzig. 1903. p. 416.
11 A. G. Palencia, Hutona de la Litentum Arabigo-Eepanola. Arabic tr. Dr
Husain Mu'nis, Cairo. 1955, p. 223.
Do Monaace, Amlneehe Pfuloeophie. Bern, 1948. pp. 27-28
Al-Firib.
I. Logic.—It has been already mentioned that a considerable part of the
works of al-Firibi ia devoted to the study of logic; but it ia almost limited
to tho delineation of the Organon in the version known to the Arabic scholars
of that timo. Ho holds that "tho art of logic gives, in general, tho rulee which,
if followed, can correct the mind and direct man to the right way to truth
away from the pitfalls of error."’* For him, logic stands in the same relation
to intelligibles aa grammar to words, and prosody to verso.** Ho emphasizes
the practical and applied aspects of logic, indicating that intelligibles are to
be tested by ita rules, aa dimensions, volumes, and masses are by measurement .*4
logic also helps us in distinguishing truth from error and attaining tho right
way of thinking or in guiding other people along this way; it also indicates
where to start our thoughts and how to conduct them necessarily to their
final conclusions.’* Practice in rhetoric and dialectical discourses, or in geometry
and arithmetic, can never be a substitute for logic, in the same way aa learning
a considerable number of poems and speeches is of no avail to a man ignorant
of grammar ” The art of logic—as is generally thought—is not an unnecessary
ornament, because it can never be replaced by natural aptitude.**
However, al-FArfibi has always had in mind the difference between grammar
and logic; for the former is concerned with words only, while the latter deala
with meanings and ia related to words in so far aa they are the embodiments
of meanings. Moreover, grammar is concerned with the laws of language, and
languages are as diverse as peoples and races; but logic deals with the human
mind which is always the same anywhere and everywhere."
The subject-matter of logic ia ita topics in which the laws of intelligibles
are studied. They are classified under eight heads: (1) Categories, (2) Inter
pretations, (3) First Analytics, (-4) Second Analytics, (6) Topics, (6) Sophistics,
(7) Rhetorics, and (8) Poetics, all of which constitute the real aim of logic.
Tho fourth part ia the most significant and noble of all the others; what ia
anterior may be considered to be an introduction and what follows an appli
cation and comparison leading to the avoidance of error and oonfuaion.**
It is obvious that al-Flr&bi fol lores in the footsteps of Aristotle, although
he considers rhetorics and poetics aa branches of logio. The same error was
committed by the Peripatetics, especially by those of the school of Alexan
dria." Some of them even claimed that Porphyry's leagoge waa a part of
the Organon of Aristotle; but this claim is not supported by al-FAribi known
as “The Second Teacher,” Aristotle having been taken to be the First.
■* Al Ftribi, IM' al'UlOm. p. 53
“ IM.. p. 54
“ IM.
*• Ibid,, pp. 54-33.
" Ibid., pp. 58-59.
•• Ibid., p. 59.
“ Ibid., pp. 60-62.
>• Ibid., pp. 54-55.
■■ Mwlkour. l.'Orgnimt d'AnloU done It monde arabe, Paris, 1934. pp. 12-14.
455
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Undoubtedly, "Demonstration" was regarded by Aristotle as important, but
ho was rather proud of his discovery of syllogism.
The contribution of al-Fir&bi to logic is two fold. First, he has succeeded in
properly and lucidly expounding the logic of Aristotle to the Arabic-speaking
world. In the introduction of one of his recently published treatises, he indicates
that he will explain the principle of syllogism after Aristotle in terms familiar
to tho Arabs; consequently, he substitutes examples from the daily life of his
own contemporaries for the otherwise vague and unfamiliar examples originally
cited by Aristotle. His process is in no way detrimental to the study of the logic
of Aristotle, nor does it alter or vitiate the significance of his philosophy.”
On the other hand, al-Firabi lays the basis for the quinary division of reason
ing, indicating that it is demonstrative if it leads to certainty; dialectical if
it leads to a semblance of certitude through good intention; sophistical if it
leads to a semblance of certitude through bad intentions and falsity; rhetorical if
it leads to a probable opinion; and poetical if it loads to imagery giving pleasure
or pain to the soul.” These different kinds are used according to the situation
and the standard of the audience. Philosophers and scholars make use of
demonstrative reasoning, theologians resort only to dialectic syllogisms, and
politicians take refuge in rhetorical syllogisms. It is obvious that the way
of addressing any group of people should be adapted to the standard of their
understanding ; and. thus, to use demonstrative syllogisms when addressing the
populace and the masses is absurd.”
2. The Unity of Philosophy.—Al F&rSbi maintains that philosophy is
essentially one unit. Thus, it is imperative for great philosophers to be in aooord,
the pursuit of truth being their one and only aim. Plato and Aristotle, “being
the originators of philosophy and the creators of its elements end principles
and the final authority aa regards its conclusions and branches,”” are closely
in accord in spite of some of their apparent and forma] differences. Thus, al-
Firtbi believes in the existence of only one school of philosophy, the school
of truth. Therefore, the terms Peripatetics, Platonista, Stoics, and Epicureans
denote only names nf groups of philosophers-, all constitute one single school
of philosophy. Parties and cliques are a nuisance in philosophy aa well
as in politics. AJ-FMbi. as a philosopher and historian, has been fully aware
of the danger of partisanship in philosophy. This partisanship was caused
more or leas by the fanatics among the disciples of the great philosophers.
Instead of attempting to harmonize the doctrines of various philosophers,
these disciples managed to widen the gap between two masters by stressing
shades of difference and sometime* even by altering ano misrepresenting
" AI-FMbi, Kitab ol Qiyds al-Sa^lr. ed. Dr. Mubahat Turkor, FarObi’nin ttati
Man/iy. Ankara, 1958. pp. 244-45.
" Ihsa' al-'Vlim, pp. 64-69.
** Al-Oamarai alMardiyyab, pp. 26-27.
“ Ibid
456
Al-FirSbi
their doctrines.•• This attitude of al-F&rilhi is identical with the attitude of the
twelfth/eighteenth-century philosophers towards the disputes and dissensions
of the Renaissance philosophers.
There is no novelty in this doctrine of al-F&rilbi; it has been previously
held by the philosophers of the later Greek schools, especially those of the
school of Alexandria. When Porphyry speaks about his master, he points out
that he has found the ideas of the Peripatetics and the Stoics fusod in Plo
tinus' works." In fact, Porphyry has devoted several treatises to the attempt
of reconciling the philosophy of Plato with that of Aristotle and a number
of scholars of the school of Alexandria followed in his footsteps;" but none
of these scholars ever thought of combining all the philosophers in a single
school. This has been an omission, and al-FirJbi has been profuse in his
writings in an attempt to point this out.
Religious truth and philosophical truth are objectively one, although for
mally different. This idea rendered possible the accord between philosophy
and the tenets of Islam. AlFArtbi undoubtedly has been the first scholar to
raise a new edifice of philosophy on the basis of this accord; later philo
sophers have followed the linos chalked out by him; ibn Sina has been to a
certain extent occupied in the exposition and delineation of its Platonic
aspects, while ibn Rugbd has been busy indicating the accord between Aristo
telian philosophy and religion.
This doctrine of reconciliation has been based on two main points: first,
revising the Peripatetic philosophy and garbing it in a Platonic form, in
order to make it more consonant with Islamio teneta; and, secondly, giving a
rational interpretation of religious truths. In fact, al FSr&bi expounds phi
losophy in a religious way and philosophizes religion, thus pushing them in two
converging directions so that thoy may come to an understanding and co-exist.
Thia revision of the Peripatetic philosophy has been concerned with two
theories, one cosmological and the other psychological, vix,, Theory of the
Ten Intelligences and that of the Intellect. His rational explanation depends on
two other theories, the first is concerned with prophecy and the second with
the interpretation of the Qur'&n. The whole philosophy of al-Fir&bi is summed
up in these four theories which are inter related and all of which aim at one
end.
3. TAcory 0/ lie Ten Inlelligenr.ee—This theory constitutes a significant
part in Islamic philosophy; it offers an explanation of the two worlds:
heaven and earth; it interprets the phenomena of movement and change.
It is the foundation of physics and astronomy. Its chief concern is the solving
of the problem of the One and the many and the comparing of the mutable
/!>».. p. 32.
" Porphyry. l ie <te 1‘lotin, tr. Brehicr (Coll. Bud«). Vol. I. p. 13.
Picavot. Kapriaar d'huenire giueralc. el comparie .. .. Faria. 1907. p. 88.
” RncXBMon. Kasai awr la itelaphnsigue d'Arielote. Paris. 1840. Vol. II. p. 540.
457
A History of Muslim Philosophy
snd the immutable. Al-F4r4bi holds that the One, i.e., God. is the Necessary
by Himself; hence, He is not in need of another for Hrs existence or His
subsistence. He is an intelligence capable of knowing Himself; He is both
intelligent and intelligible. He is quite unique by His essence. Nothing ia like
Him He has no opposite or equivalent.*4
If the above premises are admitted, what would be God’s influence on the
universe and the relationship between Him and the many! Only through
a kind of emanation has al-Flr&bi laboured to elucidate these problems. He
holds that from the Necessary One flows or emanates only one other by
virtue of Its self-knowledge and goodness. This emanent is the first intelligence
Thus, knowledge equals creation, for it is enough for a thing to be conceived
in order to exist. The first intelligence is possible by itaelf, necessary by an
other ; and it thinks the One as well as itaelf. It is one-in-itself, and many by
virtue of theeo considerations. From thia point al-F4rabi starts the first step
towards multiplicity. From thinking by first intelligence of the One flows
another intelligence. By virtue of its thinking of itself as possible in itself
flow the matter and form of the “first heaven," because every sphere has
its specific form which is its soul. In this way, the chain of emanations goes on
so as to complete the ten intelligences, and nine spheres and their nine souls.
The tenth and last intelligence, or agent intelligence, is that which governs
the sublunary world. From this intelligence flow the human souls and the
four elements.*1
These intelligences and souls are hierarchical. The first intelligence in thia
hierarchy is the moet transoendent, and then follow the souls of the spheres
and then the spheres thomselves. The last- in order is the earth and the world
of matter, which falls in the fourth rank.** The ancient Greeks held that any
thing celestial is sacred and anything terrestrial is impure. The tenets of
Islam categorically assert that heaven is the qiblah of prayer, the source of
revelation, the destination of the “ascension." Everything in heaven is pure
and purifying. Al-F&r&bi here conforms to both the religious tenets and the
philosophical teachings; but his main difficulty lies in maintaining that the
impure earthly world has evolved from tho sacred celestial one
The number of intelligences is ten consisting of the first intelligence and the
nine intelligences of the planets and spheres, because al-FarAbi adopts the
same theories as held by the Greek astronomers, especially by Ptolemy
according to whom the cosmos is constituted of nine encircling spheres all
of which move eternally and circularly around the earth. Intelligences and
souls'are tho originators of thia movement. Every sphere has its own intelligence
and soul. The tenth intelligence manages the affaire of the termtrial world
The soul is the immediate mover of sphere: However it acquires its power
from the intelligence. It moves through its desire for the intelligence; and
•• Al F&rtbi, AtaUoA ft Art- AU al-Madlnal al-FOdiM, Leiden. 1895, pp. 8-10.
*■ Ibid., pp. 68-89.
“ Ibid., pp. 20-22.
45R
Al-F*r*bi
pursuit of perfection moves its sphere. Thus, its desire is the source of its
movement. Intelligence in its turn is in a state of perpetual desire. The lower
desires the higher and all desire the One which la considered the Prime Mover
although It is immovable."
The movement of the spheres is effected by a kind of spiritual attraction:
the inferior sphere is always attracted towards the superior. This process is
a spiritual dynamism similar to that of Leibniz in spite of its dependence on
unequal spiritual powers. It seems that al-F&rtbi. the musician, ia attempting
to introduce into the world of spheres the system of musical harmony.
However, al-Farftbl’e conclusions about physics are closely connected with
his theories of astronomy. From the tenth intelligence flows the prime matter,
or Ayte, which is the origin of the four elements, and from the same intelligence
flow the different forma which unite with the hylr to produce bodies The
terrestrial world is only a series of different kinds of forma united with matter
or separated from it. Generation is the result of the unity of form and matter,
and corruption ia the result of their separation. Tho movement of the sun
produces hotness and coldness necessary for change. All the separate intelli
gences provide the movements appropriate to the terrestrial world. In this
way physics is fused with cosmology and the terrestrial world ia subjected to
the heavenly world."
Nevertheless, al-FirAbi repudiates astrology which was prevalent at his
time, and which had been cherished by the Stoics and the Alexandrian schol
ars before him,
Al-Firibi does not deny the law of causality and tho connection between
causes and effects. For causes may be cither direct or indirect; and if it is an
easy matter to disoover tho former, the latter are more difficult to detect.
Henoe happens chance or coincidence; and there ia no way of controlling
coincidents. Foi how could an astrologer associate the death of an Amir with
an eclipse f Cr now oould the discovery of a new planet have any connection
with a war! However, belief in fortuitous happenings is essential in politics
sad in religion, because it imbues men with fear and hope, and stimulates
obedience and endeavour."
It ia, thus, through the doctrine of the ten intelligences that al-FirAbi solves
the problem of movement and change. He has made use of the same theory
in his attempt at solving the problem of the One and the many, and in his
reconciliation of the traditional Aristotelian theory of matter and the Islamic
doctrine of creation. Matter is as old as the ten intelligences, but it is created
because it has emanated from the agent intelligence. To vindicate the unicity
of God, al-Farabi has resorted to the mediacy of these ten intelligences between
God and the terrestrial world.
Some of the elements of the Theory of the Ten Intelligences can be traoed to
•• Ibid., pp. 25-27.
•• Ibid . p. 59.
“ AZ JL.-uaroi al-Mardlyyah. pp. 107-10.
459
A History Muslim Philosophy
the different sources they have been derived from. Its astronomical aspect ia
closely identical with Anstotle'a interpretation of the movement of the
spheres. The Theory of Emanation has been borrowed from Plotinus and the
school of Alexandria. But. in its entirety, it is a F&rAbian theory, dictated
and formulated by his desire for showing the unity of truth and his method
of grouping and synthesis. He reconciles Plato and Aristotle and religion and
philosophy. This theory met with some success among the philosophers of
the East and those of the West in the Middle Agee. Yet reconciliation nooesai-
tatee, from one side or the other, some concessions; and if it pleases.some,
others are sure to resent it. Hence, this theory has been fervently embraced
by ibn Sina who has given it a concise and elaborate exposition, while al-
GhazAli is loud in denouncing it. Among the Jewish scholars, ibn Gabriol
does not give it even the slightest notioe, while Maimonides enthusiastically
subscribes to it. And in spite of the objections of Christian scholars to this
theory, it has always elicited their respect and esteem.
4. Theory of the Intellect.—The psychology of Aristotle has long been
reputed for its conciseness and precision; and aa an objective study it has not
been less noteworthy. Aristotle's classification of the faculties of the eoul
is the first of ita kind. He has emphasized its unity in spite of the plurality
of its faculties and explained ita relationship with the body. He has but
inadequately dealt with the Theory of the Intellect, and in consequence stirred
a problem which has puzzled th" moderns aa well aa the ancients. However,
his treatise "On the Soul" is the best of ita kind among ancient works on
psychology, and it even surpasses some of the modem works. In the Middle
Ages it waa as much in vogue as the Oryanon.
This book waa introduced to the Arabs through translations from Syriac
and Greek, together with ancient commentaries, especially those of Alexander
of Aphrodisias, Themistius. and Simplicius.
** It was the subject of extensive
study with Muslim philosophers, who in their turn commented on it and
paraphrased it. Influenced by Aristotle and drawing on his work, these philo
sophers wrote various theses and treatises on psychology. They were chiefly
concerned with the question of tho intellect which stood out among all the
problems studied by the scholastio philosophers.
Al-F&rftbi has been fully aware of the significance of this problem, and has
recognized in it an epitome of the whole Theory of Knowledge. He has closely
identified it with hia own philosophy; for it is related to the Theory of the Ten
Intelligences, and it iB also the foundation of the Theory of Prophecy. He has
dealt with the problem of the intellect in several places in his works; and he
has devoted to its elaboration a whole treatise. "On tho Different Meanings
of the Intellect," Thia treatise had a wide circulation among the scholars
of the East and the West in the Middle Ages, and it waa translated into
Latin at an early date.
•• Al-Qifti. op. oil.. p. 4|.
460
AI-F&rSbi
He classifiea the intellect into practical intellect which deduces what should
be done, and theoretical intellect which helps the soul to attain its perfection
The latter ia again classified into material, habitual, and acquired.*'
The material intellect, or the potential intellect as nl-Faribi sometimes
calls it. is the soul, or is a part of the soul, or a faculty having the power of
abstracting and apprehending the quiddity of beings. It can be almost com
pared to a material on which the forms of beings are imprinted, just like
wax which becomes one with the inscriptions carved on it. These inscriptions
are nothing but perceptions and intelligibles. Thus, the intelligible exists in
potentiality in sensible things; and when it is abstracted from the senses,
it exists in the. mind in actuality.*' That explains perception and abstraction,
the important operations of the mind which bring the intalligiblcs from poten
tiality to actuality; and when these intelligibles are oonveyed to the mind,
the intellect in its turn is transformed from an intellect in potency to an intel,
lect in action.
Therefore, the intellect in act, or the habitual intellect as it is sometimes
called, is one of the levels of the ascension of the mind in the acquisition of
a number of intelligible*. Since the mind is incapable of comprehending all
the intelligibles, it ia intellect in action with regard to what it perceives,
and intellect in potency with regard to what it has not yet perceived. The
intelligible* themselves exist in potency in the sensible#. Once they arc stripped
of them, they become intelligible* in action. And once man has attained to this
level of the intellect in action, he can comprehend himself. This kind of com
prehension has no relation with the external world; it is a mental, abstract
comprehension."
Once the intellect becomes capable of comprehending abstractions, it is
raised again to a higher level, that of the acquired intellect, or the level where
human intellect becomes disposed to conceive abstract forms which have no
connection with matter.
The difference between this rational conception and sense-perception is
that the former is a kind of intuition and inspiration; or, in other words, it is
a kind of immediate apprehension. This is the noblest level of human appre
hension, and it is reached only by the few and the select who attain to the
level of the acquired intellect, where the hidden is unveiled, and come in direct
communion with the world of the separate intelligences."
Thus, the intellect is capable of rising gradually from intellect in potency
to intellect in action, and finally to acquired intellect. The two oonsecutive
levels are different from each other, though the lower always serves as a
prelude to the higher. While the intellect in potency is just a receiver of
sensible forms, intellect in action retains the intelligibles and comprehends
•’ At Xhamanu ai-Mardlyyah. p. 54.
Ibid., pp, 42-43.
“ Ibid., p. 44.
•• Ibid., pp. 45. 46; al-Madtnal al-Faddah, p. 52.
461
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the concepts. The acquired intellect rises to the level of communion, ecstasy,
and inspiration. Conceptions are of different levels: originally, they are intelli-
gibles in potency existing in matter; once abstracted from matter they become
intelligibies in action. Still higher arc the abstract forms which can never
exist in matter.51
However, this gradual elevation is not spontaneous; for its initial stage is
the intelligibles and the intellect in potency, and its transition from poten
tiality to actuality can never be effected except through the influence of a
prior actuality whose action is appropriate to it. This actuality is the agent
intelligence, the last of the ten intelligences. Human knowledge depends on a
radiation from the separate intelligences; and agent intelligence stands in the
same relation to human intellect aa the sun to our eyes: our eyes depend on
daylight for sight, and in the same way our intellect is capable of oomprehension
only when it is unveiled by the agent intelligence which illuminates its way.11
Thus, mysticism is fused with philosophy, and ration alknowledge coincides
with ecstasy and inspiration.
The above-mentioned theory of al-FtrU>i concerning the intellect is obviously
based on Aristotle. Al-Firtbi himself declares that his theory depends upon
the third part of De Anima of Aristotle.5* but he has his own contribution to
add. His conception of the acquired intellect is alien to Aristotle; for it is
almost identified with the separate intelligences, and serves aa the link between
human knowledge and revelation. Thus, it is different from the acquired intel
lect as found m the theory held by Alexander of Aphrodisiac and al-Kindi ;
and it is the outcome of al-Firtbi's mystic tendency and his leaning towards
Plotinus’ system. This fact beoomes clearer if we consider the influence of the
agent intelligence in the acquisition of knowledge, since it is the outcome
of vision and inspiration; it offers also to the mind the abstract forms and
enlightens the way for it. This theory helps in fusing psychology with ooe-
mology, but it under-estimates the activity of the human mind, since it is
made capable of comprehension only when it is illuminated by heaven; but
would the Sufis care about this deficiency of the human mind t
The general acceptance of this theory in tho Middle Agee is clear from the
fact that ibn Slna has not only embraced it, but has also added to it vigour
and clarity; and in spite of ibn Rughd's strict adherenoe to the teachings of
Aristotle, he has also come under its influence. Among the Jews, Maimonidee
has copied it almost to the letter. With the Christians, this theory has stood
at the top of the problems of philosophy, because it is concerned with the
theory of knowledge and is closely connected with the doctrine of the immor
tality of the soul. This theory has also given rise to different schools, some
favouring and the others opposing it. To sum up. al-Ftr&bl’s Theory of the
51 Al-Afadinal ai-POdilah, p. 46
51 Ibid., pp. 44-45.
55 Al Unmoral al Mardlyyali. p. 4J.
462
Al-F&r&bi
Intellect has been the moet significant of all theories developed by Muslim
thinkers, and it has exercised a great influence on Christian philosophy.
5. Theory o/ Prophecy.—The basis of every revealed religion is revelation
and inspiration. A prophet is a man endowed with the gift of oommunion with
God and tho ability of expressing His will. Islam, as well as all the great
Semitic religions, has Heaven as its authority The Qur'an says: "It is naught
but revelation that is revealed—the Lord of mighty power has taught him"
(liii, 4—5). It is moet imperative for a Muslim philosopher to give due reverence
to prophethood, to conciliate rationality with traditionalism, and to identify
the language of the earth with the words of Heaven. This has been the endeavour
of al-F4ribi. His theory of prophethood may be considered to be one of the most
significant attempts at the reconciliation of philosophy and religion. It may
also be considered to be the noblest part of hia system; it has its foundation
both in psychology and metaphysics; and it is also closely related with politics
aiid ethics.
Influenced by his political and social environment. al-Far&bi has stressed
the theoretical study of society and its needs. He has written sevoral treatises
on politics, the most renowned of which is his "Model City." He visualizes his
city as a whole of united parts, similar to bodily organism; if any part of it is
ill, all the others react and take care of it. To each individual is allotted the
vocation and the task most appropriate for his special ability and talents.
Social activities differ according to their aims; the noblest of these activities
are those allotted to the chief, for he stands in the same relation to the city as
the heart to the body and is the source of all activities ami the origin of
harmony and order. Hence, certain qualifications are tho prerequisite of his
station. The chief must be stout, intelligent, lover of knowledge, and
supporter of justice, and he must also rise to the level of the agent intelligence
through which he gete revelation and inspiration."
These attributes remind us of the attributes of the philosopher-king in
Plato's Republic, but al-FJrihi adds to thtfn the ability of communion with
the celestial world, as if the city is inhabited by saints and governed by a
prophet. Communion with the agent intelligence is possible through two ways:
contemplation and inspiration. As already mentioned, the soul rises through
study and quest to the level of the acquired intellect when it becomes recipient
of the divine light. This level can be attained only by the sacred spirits of the
philosophers and sages, those who can penetrate through the unseen and
perceive tho "world of light." “The sacred soul, preoccupied with what is
above, gives no heed to what is below; and its external sensation never over
whelms its internal sensation; and its influence may go beyond its own body
affecting other bodies and everything in this world. It receives knowledge
direct from the High Spirit and angels without any human instruction."
•• Al-Madtnal al-FMUah. pp. 46. 55-60.
“ AlOamaral ol-Mardiyyah, p. 75.
463
A Hmlory of Muslim Philosoph
Thus, through continuous speculative studies, the sage gets into communion
with the agent intelligence.
This communion is also possible through imagination, as happens to the
prophets, for all their inspiration or revelation is caused by imagination,
imagination occupies an important place in al-F&rSbi's psychology. It is
closely connected with inclinations and sentiments, and is involved in rational
operations and volitional movements. It creates the mental images which are
*!
not imitations of sensible and are the source of dreams and visions. If we
could have a scientific interpretation of dreams, it would help to give us an
interpretation of revelation and inspiration, for prophetic inspirations take
the form either of true dreams in sleep or of revelation in waking. The
difference between these two forms is relative; they arc distinct only as
regards their degree. In fact, a true dream is but one aspect of prophecy
When imagination gets rid of conscious activities as in sleep, it is wholly
occupied with some of the psychological phenomena. Influenced by some
bodily sensations and feelings, or by some emotions and conceptions, it creates
new images or composes, from retained mental images, their new forms. Thus,
we dream of water or swimming when our temperament is humid, and dreams
often so represent the fulfilment of a desire or the avoidance of fear that
the sleeper may move in Ilia bed responding to a certain emotion, or leave
his bed and beat a person unknown to him, or run after him.** It is needless
to point out that these views in spite of their simplicity are similar to the
ideas of modern psychologists, such aa Freud, Homey, and Murray.
It ia within the power of imagination to create mental images after the
pattern of the spiritual world. The sleeper may, thus, behold the Heaven and
its inhabitants, and may feel its enjoyments and pleasures. Imagination may
also rise to the celestial world and commune with the agent intelligence from
which it can receive the heavenly judgments relating to particular cases and
individual happenings. Through this communion which may occur by day or
at night, prophecy can be explained, since it is the source of true dreams and
revelation. According to al-F&ribi: "If the faculty of imagination ia so power
ful and perfected in a certain person, and is not completely overwhelmed by
external sensations ... it gets into communion with the agent intelligence
from which images of the utmost beauty and perfection are reflected. He who
sees those images would testify to the sublime and wonderful majesty of
God. . . . Once the imaginative faculty in man ia completely perfected, he may
receive, when awake, from the agent intelligence the pre vision of the present
and future events . . . and thus he would, through what he has received,
prophesy divine matters. This is the highest level to which imagination may
be raised, and which man can attain through this faculty.”*’
*• At-Madinal alFddilah, p. 48-49.
Ibid., pp. 31-82.
464
Al-FArAbi
Thus, the chief characteristic of a prophet in to have a vivid imagination
through which ho can commune with the agent intelligence during waking
time and in sleep, and can attain to vision and inspiration. And revelation is
but an emanation from God through the agent intelligence. Some persons,
although in a lower degree than the prophets, have a powerful imagination
through which an inferior kind of vision and inspiration can be achieved.
In this way al-Firabi places the saints in a degree lower than the prophets.
The imagination of the populace and the masses is so weak that it does not
admit of rising to union with the agent intelligence, neither at night nor
by day."
Al-Firibi's attempt at reconciliation was not the only motive behind this
theory. In the third and fourth/ninth and tenth centuries a wave of scepticism
refuting prophecy and prophets was prevalent. Its spokesmen copied some
of the arguments held by the unbelievers in prophecy. At the head of these
sceptics was ibn al-RJwandi who was once one of the Mu'tazilites but later
rejected their doctrine, and Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-K&zi the physician,
a tough and powerful adversary. The latter, in particular, refuted any attempt
to reconcile philosophy and religion, assumed that philosophy is the only
way to reform both tho individual and society and that religions are the
source of conflict and strife." This attack aroused all the various Islamio
centres to defend their dogmas. Al-Farabi had to contribute to that defence.
He explained prophecy on rational grounds and gave it a scientific interpre
tation.
He borrowed Ilia explanation from Aristotle's theory of dreams, which
had already been introduced to the Arab world. Al-Kindi." the forerunner
of al-F4r4bi, adhered to that theory. It assumes that dreams are images
produced by tho imagination the capacity of which increases during sleep
after getting rid of the activities of wakefulness.*1 Aristotle, however, denies
that dreams are revealed by God, and never admits of prophetic predictions
through sleep, otherwise the populace and the masses—who have so many
dreams—would claim foretelling the future.*1 Here, al-F&rkbi diverges from
his master, and asserts that man through imagination oan commune with
the agent intelligence, but this is available only to the privileged and the
chosen. The agent intelligence is the source of divine laws and inspirations.
It is, in al-Farabi's view, almost similar to the Angel charged with revelation, as
in tho tenets of Islam. It ia within tho capacity of the prophet or the philosopher
to commune with tho agent intelligence, the former through imagination and
the latter by way of speculation and contemplation. This is understandable
for the two draw together upon the same source and get their knowledge
Ibid., p. 62.
*• Kraus et Pinees, Encyc. do I'ltUun. Vol. IV. p. 1138.
•’ Muhammad ‘Abd al Hadi abu Rldah, Kaoa'il al-Kindi, Cairo, 1950, p. 291-311
•> Ariatote. Truitt lies Hhto. Vol. I. pp. 9-10.
Idm. Im Divination. Vol. I, pp. 2-3.
465
A History of Muslim Philosophy
from high above. In fact, religious truth and philosophic truth are both the
radiation of divine illumination through imagination or contemplation.
The FAribian theory of prophecy had an obvious impact not only on the
East and the West, but on medieval and modem history, Ibn Sina adhered
faithfully to it His elaboration of that theory is closely similar to that
of al-FArAbi. Ibn Rushd. admitting its validity, was much astonished at
al-QfaazAli’a criticism of it; for it corroborates the religious tenets and affirms
that the spiritual perfection can be attained only through man’s communion
with God.” When the theory’was introduced into the Jewish philosophic
thought, Maimonidcs subscribed to it and showed much interest in it. * 4 It is
noticeable that Spinoza in hia Tractalus theolojieopolilicu-i expounds a similar
theory which he most probably borrowed from Maimonides,
** It continued
to be echoed by some of the modem philosophers in Islam, such as Jamil
al-Din al-Afghani and the Imam Muhammad 'Abduh.
6. Interpretation of the Qur'an.—Some of the teligious tenets are traditional
(eam'lyydl); they are matters indemonstrable by way of reason, such as
miracles, and the Day of Judgment comprising the Doomsday and Resurrection,
the Path and the Balance, the Judgment and the Punishment. Acceptance of
these samiyyat is one of the pillars of religion. The believers have but to
accept them and remain content with the veracity of their source. But some
thinkers in their attempt at giving a rational explanation interpret them in a
certain way or reduce them to certain natural laws The Mu'taailites made a
noticeable endeavour in this field, for they went so far in the way of inter
pretation that they refuted the Tranafigurists who qualified God with certain
attributes contradictory to His transcendence and uniqueness.
Al-F&r&bi attempts a different interpretation, He admits the validity of
miracles sinoe they are the means of proving prophecy. He holds that miracles
although supernatural do not contradict natural laws. For the source of these
laws is to be found in the world of spheres and it intelligences which manage
the terrestrial world, and once we get in communion with that world, matters
other than those of the habitual course happen to us. A prophet, as mentioned
above, has a spiritual power by means of which ho is associated with the agent
intelligence. It is through this communion that he causes rain to fall,
the moon to split asunder, the stick to be transformed into a snake, or the
blind and leprous to bo healed.•• In this way al-FArAbi triea—aa the Stoics
had done before—to reduce to causality matters beyond the habitual course
of nature and even contradictory to it.
The Qur’an points to various sam'iyydt, such as the Tablet and the Pen.
Al-FArAbi holds that these should not be understood literally, for the Pen
is not an instrument to write with, nor the Tablet a page on which sayings
•• Ibn Ruibd. Taha/ut alTahafut, Carre. 1321/1903, p. 126.
•' Maimonides, le Guute dee Egarie, Paris. 1856-66, Vol. I, pp. 259-333.
“ Spinoza, Traile thralogico politique, Pans. 1812. pp. 14-24.
•• Al ZAan’aral al-Mardlyyah. p. 72.
466
Al Flribi
are registered,1’ but they are mere symbols for precision and preservation.
The Qur'&n is also full of extensive stories about the hereafter, Day of
Judgment, and reward and punishment. No believer could deny these matters
without undermining the principle of divine sanction and individual responsi
bility. Although al-FAr&bi fully admits the eternal bliss ortho painful suffering
of the hereafter, yet he reduces them to spiritual matters having no relation
ship with the body and material properties, because the spirit, not the body,
is that which enjoys or suffers, is happy or unhappy.48
This interpretation conforms to the Firabian tendency towards spiritualism,
ibn Slna borrowed it and widely applied it. In ibn Slni's view the Throne and
the Chair are symbols of the world of spheres. Prayers aro not mere bodily
movements, but aim at imitating the celestial world." It is as if these two
philosophers wanted to lay tho foundation of a philosophical religion and a
religious philosophy. However, al-Qhaz&li was dissatisfied with this attempt
and he attacked it, taking the text of the Scripture literally. Ibn Rushd,
although advocating accord between religion and philosophy, was also
dissatisfied. because, he claimed that for tho sake of their security religion
and philosophy should be kept separate. If combined, they would not be
understood by the ordinary man and might lead astray even some of those
capable of deep thinking.’0
D
CONCLUSION
We can now oonclude that al-Faribl's doctrine is so fully harmonious end
consistent that its parts aro completely inter-related. From the One, the Firat
Cause, al-Firibi gets on to ten intelligences from which the two worlds of
heaven and earth have flowed. His spheres are moved by the managing intelli
gences, and nature with its generation and corruption ia subjected to these
intelligences. The soul is governed by one of these intelligences which is the
agent intelligence. Politics and ethics are no exceptions, for happiness pursued
by men is but the communion with the oelostial world. His "Model (Sty"
only aims at this end.
This doctrine is at the same time spiritualistic and idealistic, for al-Far4bi
reduces almost everything to spirit. His God is the Spirit of the spirits,
his astronomical spheres are governed by celestial spirits, and the prince of
his city is a man whose spirit transcends his body. This spiritualism is
rooted in ideas and conoepts, and is given wholly to speculation and contem
plation. Tho One is the Idea par excellence and is the Intellect that intellects
•’ Ibid., p. 77.
•• AlMadlnal al-FAddah. p. 67.
•• Ibn Slna. Tie- Raid'd fi al Hibnab w-al Tabl'ah. Cairo. 1908, pp. 128-29
’• Ibn Kugbd. Fad al MaqOl fi ma bain al-Hikmah wal-gjari ah min al-luifbl,
Cairo, p. 26; ManMif al AdiUah, Cairo, pp. 120-21.
467
A HiMtory of M'uilim (•hiloaophv
Itaelf. The other beings are generated by thia Intellect. Through speculation
and contemplation man can commune with the celestial work! and attain
the utmost happiness. No spiritualism is so closely related to idealism as
that of al FarAbi.
.Although al-FArAbl's doctrine is a reflection of the Middle Ages, it comprises
some modem and even contemporary notions. He favour* scienoe, advocates
experimentation, and denies augury and astrology. He so fully believes in
causality and determinism that he refers to causes even for those effects
which have no apparent causes. He elevates the intellect to a plane so sacred
that he is driven to its conciliation with tradition so that philosophy and
religion may accord.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Wo arc content to mention here only the principal old sources and the latest
writings concerning al-Ffcribi.
A. Life
AlBaihaqi, TArikb Hukamd’ al-JelAm. Damascus, 1946 (pp. 30-35); al-Nadlin,
al-Fihriet. Leipzig, 1881 (p. 263); al-Qity. Tdrij^ oLHutomd', Leipzig. 1903 (pp.
277-80); ibn abi Usaibi'ah, ‘l/yun oLAfiM* ft 'J'abaqdt al-AtihbA'. Konigsberg.
1884. 2 Vote. (Vol. II. pp. 134-40); ibn Kballik&n, WafayAt aJAyAn. Cairo.
1275/1858. 2 Vote. (Vol. II, pp. 112-14); Muftafa ‘Abd al-R&ziq, Failatflf al-'Arab
w-al-Mu‘aUtm al-ljfini, Cairo. 1945 (pp. 55-76).
B. Works
Aidin Sayili. Heme de la Socicte d'/fietoire Turque, Ankara, 1951, Vol. XV.
No. 57; M. Bouygea. Note* tur let philosophy* arabet connu* dee latin* au moyen
age dan* MUanget de VUnicer*M de St. Joseph, Beyrouth, 1924 (Vol. IX, No. 2, pp.
49-70); De Menaacr, Arabtxhe Phtloitophie. Bom. 1948 (6. pp. 27-28); K. Georr,
"Fiirubi cet-il l'autcur dee F090U9.” KEI. 1941 (pp. 31-39); L. Masaignon.
"Notos sur le text* original du Des Intellect us d’Al FArftbi,” Arch. d'Hittoirt
doci. et lilt. au moyen age. Paria. 1930 (Vol. IV, pp. 151-58); Mubahnt. Ttirkor.
FArAbi'nin Bust Mantik. Ankara. 1958; M. Stcinschnoider, "AI-FArAbi. Des Arabi-
■ehen Philosophcn, Lobcn und Schriftcn." AMmotres de I'acodtmie imperial* de*
science* de St. Petersburg, VII sdrie. Vol. XIII. No. 4. 1869.
C. Philosophy
AI FArAbi. aLZSamorul al Hardlyyah fi ba d alRieAlAt al-FArAblyyah. Leiden.
1890; RmAlah fi ArA' Ahl alMadinat al-FAdilah, Leiden. 1895; Ih*A' al 'Vlum,
Cairo, 1949; KitAb al-QiyH* al Sagjfir, Ankara. 1957; E. Gilson, "Lea sources gteco-
arabes de I'auguMinianw avrcwmisant.** Arch, hist. doct. IM., Paris. 1929; I. Mad-
kour, La place d'Al-F&rAbi dans I'icole philosophique mu*ulmane, Pano, 1934.
468
Minkswaih
Chapter XXIV
MISKAWAIH
A
LIFE
Ahmad ibn Muhammad ibn Ya'qub, sumamed Miskawaih, ia also called
abu 'Ali al-gj}Azin. It ia yet undecided whether he was himself Miakawaih or
the son of (ibn) Miskawaih. Some like Margoliouth and Bergstrkaaer accept
the first alternative; others, like Brockelmann,1 the second.
YkqQt says that he waa first a Magi (majiti) and was later converted to
Islam. But thia might be true of his father, for Miakawaih himself, as hia
name shows, was the eon of a Muslim father, Muhammad by name.
He studied history, particularly al-Tabari’s "Annals," with abu Bakr Ahmad
ibn Kamil al-Qidi (350/960). Ibn al-Khammar, the famous commentator of
Aristotle's, waa his master in philosophical disciplines. Miskawaih engaged
himself too much in the study of alchemy, together with abu al-Tayyib
al-RAzi, the alchemist. From certain statements of ibn Sins* * and al-Taubldi,
*
it seems that they had a poor opinion of hia aptitude for speculative philo
sophy. IqbAl. on the other hand, regarded him as one of the most eminent
theistic thinkers, moralists, and historians of Persia.
*
Miskawaih lived for seven years in the company of abu al-Farjl ibn al-'Amld
aa his librarian. After the death of abu al-Fadl (360/970) he served under
his son abu al Fath 'Ali ibn Muhammad ibn al-'Amld, sumamed I2hu al-
Kifiyatain. It seems that he also served Acjud al-Daulah, one of the Buwai-
hids, and later some other princes of that famous family.
Miskawaih died on the 9th of Safar 421/16th of February 1030. The date
of his birth is uncertain. Margoliouth gives it to be 330/941, but we think
it should be 320/932 if not earlier, because he used to be in ths company of
al-Muhallabi, the vizier, who rose to the office in 339/960 and died in 352/963.
by whioh time he must have been at least nineteen.
B
WORKS
*Y&qilt gives a list of thirteen books attributed to Miakawaih. These are:
1. Al-Fatu al-Akbar.
2. A I-Fam al-Atgbar
• OAL (S). I, p. 582, n.i.
■ Al-Qifti. TdriiJ od. Lippert, p. 332.
• Al-lmUT w-al-Mu'anatah, Vol. I. pp. 35-36.
• M. IqbM. TAs Dtvtlopmenl of Metaphyrict in Persia. London. 1908. p. 28.
• YiqOl, KMb IrtbAd al-AHl, <la Ma'rifal al-AM, Vol. IT, pp. 88-96.
469
A History of Muslim Philosophy
3. Tajinb al-Vmam (a history from the Deluge down to 369/979).
4. Uns al-Farid (a collection of anecdotes, vonses, maxims, and proverbs),
5. Tartib al-Sa'ddah (on ethics and politics).
6. Al-MuMaufa (selected verses).
7. Jawiddn Kfiirud (a collection of maxims of wisdom).
8. Al-Jdmi'.
9. Al-Siyar (on tho conduct of life).
Of the above works al-Qifti
* mentions only 1. 2. 3 and 4 and adds the
following:
10. "On the Simple Drugs" (on medicine).
11. "On the Composition of the BAj&ts" (on culinary art).
12. Kildb al-Alhribah (on drinks).
13. Tahdhibal-A Oldg (on ethics).
Numbers 2, 3, 13 are now extant and have been published. We also have
five others which are not mentioned by Yiqut and al-Qifti. These are:
14. Ri-vllah fi alLad!Mal u>-al-Aldm fi Jauhar al-Na/t (MS. in Istanbul,
Ragbib MajmO'ah No. 1463. f. 57a-59a).
15. AjicihaA ua As'ilah fi al-Na/s w-al-'Agl (in the above-mentioned
Majmu'ah in Ragbib. Istanbul).
16. Al-Jawab fi al-Masd'il al-Thalali (MS. in Teheran—Fihrist Maktabat
al-Majlis. II. No. 634{31]).
17. RisoloA fi Jaunb fi Su'al 'Ali Ibn M uhammad Abu Hayydn al-ifufi fi
Hagigal al-’Agl, (Meshed Library in Iran, I, No. 43(137]).
18. yaMral al-Nafl, (MS. in Koprulu, Istanbul, No. 767).
Muhammad Bkqir ibn Zain al-'Abidin al-Khawans4ri attributes to him also
some treatises written in Persian (Randal al-Jannah, Teheran, 1287/1870,
p. 70).
As to the chronological order of his works, we know only from Miskawaih
himself that al-Fauz al-Akbar was written after al-Fauz al-Afgbar, and that
TahdMb al-Akhlag waa written after Tartib al-Sa'adah.’
C
MISKAWAIH’S PERSONALITY
Miskawaih was essentially a historian and moralist. He waa also a poet.
Taubldi blames him for his miserliness and hypocrisy. He indulged in alcheoiy
not for the sake of science, but in search of gold and wealth, and was most
Bervile to his masters. But YkqQt mentions that in later years he subjected
himself to a fifteen-point oode of moral conduct.
* Temperance in appetites.
• Al-Qifti, loc. at.
’ Al-Fauz al At/iar, p. 120.
■ D. M. Donaldson. Studies in Muslim Ethics. London. 1953. p. 123.
Mukawaih
courage in subduing the ferocious self, and wisdom in regulating the irrational
impulses were the highlights of this code. He himself speaks of his moral
transformation in his TaA^iA alAkblaq
* which shows that he practised a
good deal of what he wrote on ethics.
D
PHILOSOPHY
Firxt Philo/tophy.—The most important part of Miskawaih's philosophical
activity is dedicated to ethics. He is a moralist in tho full sense of the word.
Three important books of his on ethics have come down to us: (1) Tartib
al-Sa'ddah, (2) Tahdhlb al-Akhlaq, and (3) Jawiddn Kiirad.
Miakawaih’s al-Faux al-Afgbar is a general treatise similar in conception to
the earlier part of alFlrSbl's Art' AU al iladinal al-Fiddah. It is dividod
into three parts. Tho first part deals with the proofs of the existence of God.
the second with soul and ita modes, and the third with prophethood. For his
treatment of philosophy, he owes much to al-F&ribi. particularly in his effort
to conciliate Plato, Aristotle, and Plotinus. His historical turn of mind has
been of benefit Co him, for ho generally refers precisely to his sources. For
instance, at the end of Chapter V of the first part of al-Fauz al-Axy^ar1’ he
expressly acknowledges his indebtedness to Porphyry. He also quotes the
commentators of Plato" and Aristotle.11 His ia the best rxparl (pp. 53-55) of
Plato's proof concerning the immortality of the soul. He benefits especially
from the book of Proclua entitled Kitib fiJo.-A Qaul Flatin fi al Na/t Ghair
Maitah." The first part of Faux al-Atyhar dealing with the demonstration of
the existence of God is clear, terse, and solid. His argument here is that of the
First Mover, which waa most popular at the time. In that he ia thoroughly
Aristotelian. The fundamental attributes of God are: unity, eternity, and
immateriality. Miekawaih devotes the whole of Chapter VIII to the problem of
defining God affirmatively or negatively, and concludes that the negative way
ia the only possible way. He also shows Neo-Platonic tendencies noticeably in
Chapter IX, He says that the first existent which emanates from God is the first
intelligence which (so says Miakawaih rather strangely) is the same as the active
intellect. It is eternal, perfect in existence, and immutable in state, because
"emanation ia connected with it in a continuous way eternally, the source
of emanation being eternal and wholly generous." It is perfect in comparison
with beings inferior to it, imperfect in comparison with God. Thon comes the
celestial soul, inferior to intelligence; it needs motion aa expression of desire
for perfection in imitation of intelligence. But it is perfect in relation to
• Tahdbih al-AUUy. Egypt, 1326/1911, p. 42.
Al-Fow ol-AfgAor, p. 120.
11 That is Proclua and Galen; ibid., p. 54.
'■ That is Tliemiatius: ibid., p. 42.
11 Ibn al-Nadlm, al-Fibrirt, Cairo, p. 353.
471
A History of Muslim I’liiloeophy
natural bodies. The sphere conies into being through the rck-stial soul In
comparison with the soul, it is imperfect and so needs the motion of which the
body is capable, i.e., the motion in space. The sphere has the circular motion
which assures it of the eternal existence assigned to it b.v God. Through the
sphere and its parts our bodies come into being. Our being is very weak because
of the long chain of intermediaries between God and us. For the same reason
it is changeable and not eternal. Ali classes of beings come to be through God,
and it is His emanating being and permeating might which conserve order
in the cosmos. If God abstains from this emanation, nothing will come into
existence.
As a true religious thinker. Miskawaih tries to prove that creation oomes
rz nihilo. He mentions that Galen said something against this view, but was
refuted by Alexander of Aphrodisiaa in a special treatise." The argument
given by Miskawaih is as follows: Forms succeed each other, the substratum
reiunining constant. In this change from one form to another, where do the
preceding forms go I The two forms cannot remain together because they
are contrary. Secondly, the first form cannot go elsewhere, because motion in
place applies only to bodies, and accidents cannot go from one plaoe to another.
There remains only one possibility—the possibility that the first form goes
into nothing. If it is proved that the first form goes to Non-Being, then the
second form comes and so the third, the fourth, and so on also from nothing.
Therefore, all things generated are generated from nothing.
Aristotle conceived of the universe as a process of becoming. The "nature”
of each thing is a potentiality which moves through a process of development
to an actuality which is ita final nature. The movement is towards an end
immanent from the first in the subject of movement. An altogether different
theory appears in the fiftieth "Epistle" of the Brethren of Purity (Ikfewin
alljafa). where tho process of evolution has been shown to advance from the
mineral to the human stage under the guidance of the spiritual urge for return
to God."
The Brethren of Purity used this theory to determine the status of prophet
hood. Miskawaih goes further and finds in it a stable basis for his moral
theory as well." Like Aristotle he does regard happiness (ta'Odah) as the chief
human good, but unlike him be identifies it in the end with the realization
of the vicegerency of God, the place which man occupies in the cosmic evolution
by virtue of his specific attribute of rationality.
Miskawaih’s theory of evolution is basically the same as that of the Brethren
of Purity. It consists of four evolutionary stages: the mineral, the vegetable,
the animal, and the human Coral (marjan), date-palm, and ape (qird) mark
the transition from the mineral to the vegetable, from the vegetable to the
animal, and from the animal to tbo human kingdom, respectively. The prophet.
11 See A. Badawi, AriMu 'tnd al-'Amb, Cairo, 1947. Introduction, p. 56.
'• BuzA-a IUwun al-Safa, Egypt. 1928. Vol. IV. pp. 314-19.
" Tahiiilj AkhUq, pp. 94-60; ul fauz al A>j4or. pp. 76-83.
472
Miakawaih
in the end, completes the circle of Being l,y imbibing the celestial soul within
him
PsyrAolopy.—Miakawaih's psychology is based on the traditional spiritual
istic doctrine laid down by Plato and Aristotle, with a predominant Platonic
tendency. He treats the subject in aJ t'auz al Asjjar and TaA^lb aLAUldq
In the first of these works he discusses the problems more thoroughly. But he
repeats himself on many points in both the books; in both we have the same
arguments, the same examples, and nearly the same words.
Against the materialists he proves the existence of the soul on the ground
that there is something in man which admits different and even opposed forms
at the same time. This something cannot be material, for matter accepts only
one form in a determinate moment.
The soul perceives simple and complex things, present and absent, sensible
and intelligible. But does it perceive them through one and the same faculty, or
through many faculties! Soul has no parts; divisibility applies only to matter
Does the soul, in spite of being one and indivisible, perceive different things
with different faculties and in different ways ! In answering this question,
Miakawaih gives two different solutions: that of Plato, who says that similar
perceives similar, and that of Aristotle who says that soul has one faculty
that perceives complex material things and simple non-material things, but
in different ways. In this connection Miakawaih mentions Tbemistius and his
book "On Soul.”
On the question of the immortality of the soul, Miskawaih gives at first17
Aristotle's doctrine. Then he gives (Chapter VI) three arguments of Plato;
referring first to Plato himself, then to Proclus' "Commentary on Plato's
Doctrine of the Immortality of the Soul,"1* and finally to something that Galen
said an this question. Miskawaih says that Plato's doctrine is too long and needs
a commentary; therefore, he attempts to summarize it as clearly aa possible,
with the help of Proclus' "Commentary." In this and tho following chapters
(VII, VIII) he is a thorough Platonist and makes a spocial mention of Plato's
Lam and Timaem. Plato says that the essence of the soul is motion, and
motion is the life of the soul. Miskawaih explains and says: This motion is
of two kinds: one towards intelligence, the other towards matter; by the
first it is illuminated, by the second it illuminates. But this motion is eternal
and non-spatial, and so it is immutable. By the first kind of motion, the soul
comes near to intelligence which is the first creation of God; by the second
it descends and comes out of itself. Therefore, the soul oomes nearer to God by
the first motion, and goes farther by the second. The first leads to its salvation
the second to its perdition. Quoting Plato1’ he sayB that philosophy is an
exercise of voluntary death. There are two kinds of life: life according to
intelligence, which is "natural life,” and life according to matter which is
17 Al-Faui al Afghar. Part II, Clutp. V.
>• Ibn al-Nadlm, op. cil.. p. M3.
■■ Plato, P'-acdc. pp. 61, 64, 87.
473
A History °f Muslim Philosophy
voluntary life. The same applies to death; therefore. Plato says. If you die
by will, you live by nature. Here "wiH" is taken in the sense of "passion."
But Miskawaih at onoe corrects himadlf by saying that this voluntary death
does not mean renunciation of the world; that would be the attitude of those
who know nothing about the objects of thia world and ignore that man is civil
by nature and cannot live without the help and service of others. Those who
preach renunciation are iniquitous, because they want the services of others
without rendering any service to them and this ia complete injustice. Some
pretend that they need very little, but even this very little needs the services
of a great number of people. Therefore, it is the duty of every human being
to serve others fairly: if he serves them much he can demand much, and if he
serves them little, he can ask for little.
This is an important aspect of Miakawaih’s philosophical view, and explains
his great interest in ethics.
Moral Philomphy.—Moral philosophy is so oonnocted with psychology that
Miskawaih begins his big treatise on ethics Tahdhlb al-AkbHq, by stating his
doctrine of the soul. Here his expoti is less philosophical but richer in detail.
The point of transition from psychology to ethics is given on pages 18 to 2!
where, following Plato, be draws a parallel between the faculties of the soul
and the corresponding virtues.*’ The soul has three faculties: rational, coura
geous, and appetitive, and correspondingly three virtues: wisdom, courage, and
temperance. By the harmony of these three virtues, we have a fourth one.
namely, justice. The Greek temperament being theoretical and speculative,”
Plato could go no farther than this. Equipped with a personal oode of moral
conduct, Miskawaih determined seven species of wisdom, viz., acuteness of
intelligence, quickness of intellect, clearness of understanding, facility of
acquirement, precision of discrimination, retention, and recollection; eleven
species of courage, viz., magnanimity, collectcdness. loftiness of purpose,
firmness, coolness, stateliness, boldness, endurance, condescension, zeal, and
mercy; twelve species of temperance, viz., shame, affability, righteousness,
conciliatoriness, continence, patience, oontentment, sedateness, piety, regulari
ty, integrity, and liberality (which is further divided into six sub-species);
and nineteen species of justice, viz., friendship, union, faithfulness, compassion,
brotherhood, recompense, good partnership, fair-dealing, cordiality, sub
mission. resignation, devotion to God, forgetting of enmity, abstention from
speaking ill of others, discussing the character of the just, ignoring the
account of the unjust, and abstention from trusting the ignoble, the mischief
monger. and the flatterer.*’ We, however, cannot determine exactly whether
these sub-divisions and distinctions are all Miskawaih's own. Surely he bene
fited himself much from his predecessors, and especially from the school of
’• RepMir. Book IV.
Briffault, Thr. Maltny of Humanity. p. 191,
Tabfblh 'd-Akbio'i. pp, 15-19.
474
Miakawaih
abu Sulanuan al-SijisUni al-Mantiqi, the echo of whose works we find in
Tauhldl's Mvq&b<udt.
So far Miskawaih has been Platonic, but from page 29 onward he begins
to be Aristotelian, and takes virtue aa a mean between two view. He applies
thia doctrine of the mean to the four cardinal virtues, and with thia he ends
the first. chapter.
In tho second chapter. Miakawaih goes on to discuss the question of human
nature and its original state: whether it ia bom good or bad. He states the
opinion of the early Greeks who say that nature can never be changed, but
rejects it. Then he takes up the view of tho Stoics who think that men are
created good but become bad by their inclination to bad appetites and by
keeping bad company. There is also a third opinion that men are created
bad and they become good only by education. Galen rejects the last two
views and says that men are of three kinds: some are good by nature,
others are bad by nature, and a third class is intermediate between the two.
Finally, Miskawaih states the opinion of Aristotle aa given in the Nieomarhean
Elhits, and gives his own view that "the existence of the human subslanoe
depends on God’s will, but the amelioration of it is left to man and depends
on man’s will" (p. 46).
Perfection attainable by man is of two kinds: the first ia theoretical and
the second practical. By the first he attains perfect science, by the second
perfect character. Human faculties are three: the highest is reason, the lowest
is appetite, and between the two lies courage. Man is man by the first. There
fore, perfection belongs especially to the rational soul. In each faculty there
are many degrees, which Miakawaih enumerates in detail. Here (pp. 67—78)
we find a long chapter on the education of children and youth.
The essentia! part of Miskawaih’e ethic* begins from the third chapter
(pp. 90 el tqq). In the first place he follows Aristotle as commented upon by
Porphyry. It seems that he depends entirely on the commentary of Porphyry
on Aristotle's 'A'icAonwAern Ethia, which was translated into Arabic by
Isbiq ibn ljunain, in twelve books.” Unfortunately, this commentary is lost
both in Greek and ita Arabic translation. But we can gather something of ita
form from Miakawaih's ToAd*i/i al-Akbldq.
Following Aristotle, Miakawaih says (p. 90) that the good is that at which
all things aim. This definition, which is supposed to be perhaps that of
Eudoxus (o. 25 B.C.), is given in the very beginning of the Nicowwhran
Elhicj.** Miskawaih goes on then to say that what ia useful to this end may
also be called good. i.e.. the means as well aa the end can be called good. But
happiness or well-being is a relative good—good for an individual person. It
is only a kind of good and has no distinctive and autonomous essence.
Miskawaih, like Aristotle.** gives a classification of happiness but adds more
Ibn ai-Nadtm, op. cil., p. 352.
“ NicemoeAeon Elbia. 1004 a 3.
■ Ibid., 1095 b 14-1096 a 10
475
A History of Muslim Philosophy
details, perhaps taken from Porphyry's commentary. This classification com
prises (1) health, (2) wealth, (3) fame and honour, (4) success, and (5) good
thinking.
After giving Aristotle'a doctrine of happiness, Miskawaih states the views of
Hippocrates. Pythagoras, Plato, the Stoics, and some physicians who believed
that body is a part and not an instrument of man. and so held that happiness
of the soul is incomplete if it is not accompanied by happiness of the body.
Miakawaih discusses these different doctrines and concludes by saying that
we should reject the doctrine according to which happiness can oome only
after death and affirm that it is possible also in this world. No happiness
is possible except by searching for the good in this world and the world tr
come. Here he affirms anew his two-fold AnacAauung. But aa a true religion i
man be gives preference to the next world. In support of this, he refers to the
translation by a,bu ‘Utbm&n al-Dima|hqi of a treatise called "Virtues of the
Soul" attributed to Aristotle. We find this treatise attributed to Aristotle
nowhere else There are two kinds of happiness, one according to thia world,
the other according to the next, but no one can have the second without
passing through the first (p. Ill), because, aa Aristotle said, divine happiness,
notwithstanding being higher and nobler, is yet in need of worldly happi
ness; otherwise, it would remain hidden.
The fourth chapter deals mainly with justioe and explains in detail what is
meant by it. Here again he follows the corresponding parts in Aristotle’s
Niamachmn Ethics.'*
In the fifth chapter he goes on to speak about friendship and love. A striking
passage in this part is about two kinds of love: (a) love of man for God, and (b)
love of disciple for master. The first ia too high to be attained by mortal beings,
and is reserved only for a few. As to the aeoond kind of love, Miskawaih draws
a parallel between the son’s love for his parents and the disciple's love for his
master, and says that the latter ia nobler and more generous, because masters
educate our souls and by their guidance we obtain real happiness. The master
is a "spiritual father and a human lord; his goodness for the disciple is divine
goodness, because he brings him up on virtues, feeds him with high wisdom,
and conducts him to everlasting life in eternal blessing" (p. 176).
Friendship, in general, is most sacred and useful to all human beings. He
who betrays it is more wicked than a counterfeiter of coins. A good man is a
friend to himself and other people are also friends to him; he has no enemy
except tbo bad. The happy man is he who gains friends and tries his best to
be of use to them Miskawaih quotes Aristotle saying that man is in need of
friends in good as well aa in bad circumstances. Even a king is in need of
friends because he cannot know his people’s needs except through sincere
friends, especially because they supply him information and help in execution
IM. "Courage": Book III A. Chapo. 6-8; "Temperance": Book in. Chapa.
10-12. "Justice" Book V H. I-II; "Wisdom": Book VI.
478
Miskawaih
of his orders. Man should do his best to please his friends and to be always
on good terms with them without hypocrisy and flattery.
Miskawaih’s treatment of justice (‘ail) is largely Aristotelian, although
for him this virtue is a shadow of divine unity,*’ the true equipoise. The
knowledge of the mean or the limit that moderation would set in each particular
case is a prerequisite of justioe, but, unlike Aristotle, he assigns this function
to the divine code rather than to reason or prudence.•• The king as the
deputy of God can exercise royal discretion in minor details according to the
exigencies of time and place, without violating the spirit of the divine oode.
Aristotle recognised benevolence vaguely in the imperfect form of liberality
which for him meant giving to "proper persons, in right proportion, at right
times." With ibn Miskawaih, it is such an excess over the just award as would
eliminate all possibility of under-estimation in justice, provided that its
prejudicial effects are confined to the rights of the benevolent person himself
only and the recipient himself is a worthy ohoioe for it. Charity, thus, is a form
of justice which is safe from disturbance." Similarly, love, according to him,
is not an extension of self-love, aa held by Aristotle, but a limitation of it and
love for another. He regards affection (mahabbab) as an inborn capacity for
associating with mankind in genera], but confines friendship (.nddgab) to a
few individuals, baaing it on the considerations of profit, pleasure, or good aa
oonoeived by Aristotle. Love ('iiiq) being the excessive desire for pleasure or
good—the consideration of profit is alien to love—cannot extend beyond two
individuals." The object of animal love is pleasure and that of the spiritual
love is virtue or goodness. The former ia condemnsble, the latter praiseworthy.
He makes a specific mention of the love of man for God, of disciple for teacher,
snd of son for his parents in a graded series, as pointed out earlier. Justice, he
concludes, is brought about through fear and force, but affection is a natural
source of unity, so that justioe is not required where affection reigns supreme.
Affection, thus, is the sovereign; justioe is the vicegerent.
As in al-Fauz alAigbar, so in Tahdlfib al-Akbldq (pp. 195-06) Miakawaih
ia against all forma of ascetic life, because asoetira "sever themselves from all
the moral virtues mentioned above. How can he who retires from men and
lives in isolation be temperate, just, generous, or courageous f Is he anything
other than something inorganic and dead I”" Divine happiness is the ultimate
goal and the good of man. It belongs to man’s divine part. It is pure good,
while reason is the first good.
Spiritual Mtdicine.—The last two chapters of ToAdJiZ, al-Akhblq are devoted
to what may be called spiritual medicine, a phrase which we find for the first
time aa the title of Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-MzI’s famous book: abTibb
” Tabdhlb al-AkblAq. p. 93.
« Ibid., p. 95.
Ibid., pp. 108-09.
•• Ibid., p. lit.
•i Ibid., p. 198.
A History of Muslim Philosophy
al-Ruhdm. Miskawaih uses the phrase fibb al-A'i/ii (p. 205). but the re
semblance in the general treatment of the subject is obvious. This implies
that Miskawaih ia undoubtedly acquainted with al-RAzi's treatise, although
he does not mention him by name. The two begin by saying that the master
ing of one's passion is the essential foundation of spiritual hygiene. Both
refer to Galen's book "On Knowing One's Own Defects." (Thia work was
translated into Arabic by Thuma and revised by humin.") But. whereas
al-Razi contents himself with what Galen says in thia respect. Miskawaih
contends it by saying that there does not exist a friend who can find for you
your defects, and that an enemy is more useful in this respect than a friend
(p. 200) because he is more aware of your vices and would have no hesitation
in revealing them to you. In this connection Miskawaih recommends the study
of another of Galen's treatise: "That Good People Benefit from Their Enemies,"
which deals with this topic and is also mentioned by al-Razi.*• Miskawaih
then refers to al-Kindi, who, in effect, said that the man who is in search of
virtue should realize that tho images of his acquaintances are mirrors in which
are reflected the evils arising out of pains and passions.
In the end. Miskawaih speaks of remedies for the diseases of the soul. He
enumerates tho most important diseases—anger, vanity, contentiousness,
treason, cowardice, vainglory, fear, and sadness—and deals with their treat
ment. Some of his chapters correspond with some chapters in al-Razi'a Tibb.
namely, those on vanity, sadness, and fear of death. He also reproduces some
passages from al-Kindl's treatise “On the Rejection of Sadness" (p. 2Sfl).
Why does not Miskawaih mention Muhammad ibn Zakariya al-Razi 1 It is
because al-RAzi’a conclusions and method of treatment were quite contrary
to his own. Al-Kindi. on the other hand, waa a kindred spirit. Al-RAzi was bold,
rationalistic, and abstruse, whereas al-Kindi was moderate, pious, and more
accessible.
We have all along been showing what Miskawaih owes to his Greek pre
deccusors, but we should not forget that Islamic culture also has an important
influence on him. In supporting some ideas which he expounds, he very often
quotes the Qur'an, traditions (atuuHthl of the Prophet, sayings of ibn abi
'[Alib and ai-Hasan al-Basri, besides Arabic poetry.
Philosophy of History.—Miskawaih is essentially a historian and moralist
His ethics is genetic’* (being baaed on the place and position of man in the
cosmic evolution), religious, and practical in character. He even felt it necessary
to reform himself morally before writing his Tahdbib al-Akhlaqu In history,
his point of view ia philosophical, scientific, and critical. Anticipating the
modem outlook, he determines both the function of history and the duties
of the historian as follows.
■’ Ibn alNadlm, op. cit.. p. 504.
“ Optra Philomphica. Vol. I, ed. Kraus, Cairo, 1(439, p. 3a
’* A. A. 'Izzat, Ibn Miskawaih, Egypt. 1940, p. 232.
“ It was translated into Urdu by Hakim Sayyid Zafar Mahdi tn 1815.
478
Miakawaih
History ia not an amusing tale about the royal personages, but a mirror
of the politioo-eoonomic structure of society in a particular age. It is a record
of the rise and fall of civilizations, nations, and States.**
In order to realize this end, the historian should scrupulously guard himself
against the common tendency of mixing up facts with fiction or pseudo-events.
He should not only be factual but also critical in collecting his data.*’
Above all, he should not be oontent with the mere descriptions of facte, but,
with a philosophic insight, should interpret them in terms of the underlying
"human intereete," their immediate causal determinants.** In history as in
nature, there is no room for chance or accident.
History, thus, is no longer a collection of static and isolated facte, but a
dynamic process of creative human hopes and aspirations. It is a living and
growing organism, whoso structure is determined by the basio ideals and the
ideals of nations and States. It not only binds together the facts of the past
into an organic whole, but also determines the shape of things to come.
The very title of his monumental work, Tajdrib al-Umam (The Experiences
of the Nations) is itself suggestive of its aims and method, whioh, in tho words
of Leon Cactani, are "much akin to tho principles followed by Western and
more modern historians."**
BIBLIOGRAPHY
A. Works
TahHib aLAkbtaq wa Talblr al-A'rOq. Cairo. 1347/1828 (also many previous
editions); oi-Fawr alAfOar, Beirut, 1318/1901. Cairo. 1323'1907; Jdwiddn £3irad.
edited with a long introduction (in which ono finds a comprehensive bibliography
with indication of manuscripts and sources) and the commentary by Abdur.
rahman Badawi, Cairo, 1372/1952; TajOrib al-Umam wa TaSqub alHimam,
Vole. I, V. VI. od. Leone Caotani. Gibb Memorial Senes, No. 7. The last part waa
edited by H. F. Amedroz and D. S. Margoliouth with translation and commen
taries, Oxford, 1920, 1921.
B. Studies
T. J. de Boor. GeacAicAre der Philoeopbui im Itlam. Stuttgart. 1901. pp. 118
el eqq. (very general); Enegklopddie dm Ielam, Vol. II. p. 429; Izmirli Im. Haqqi.
in Ilihty&t Fak. Mocm. No. 10, 17/33, No. 11. 59/80. Mwkawaih in Feleifi eeerkri;
R. Waller, "Some Aspects of Miakawaih’s Tahdhlb al-AUUq," in Fludi Orienuli-
etici in oners di Giorgio Levi della vida, Roma. 1956, Vol. II. pp. 603-21; A. A.
Tzzat. Ibn Miakawaib. Egypt. 1946; A. S. Nadawi. HukamS’ i IMm, Azamgarb.
1953. Vol. I; D. M Donaldson, Studu. in Muelim Ethice. London. 1953; 8. M. Iqbal.
Tbe Development of Metaphyeica in Pereia. Luzac, London. 1908. also Bazm-i
IqbAJ. Lahore, n. d.
’• A-S. Nadawi, Hukamd’-i Iridm. Azamgarh. 1953, Vol. I, p. 271.
*’ Ibid., p. 272.
*• Leone Caetani. Preface to Taidrib al-Umnm. Leyden. 1909, Vol. I, p. xii.
■ Ibid.. p. xi.
419
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Chapter XXV
IBN 8TNA
In the history of philosophical thought in the Medieval Ages, the figure of
ibn SIna (370/HS0-t28/1037)1 ia, in many respects, unique, while among the
Muslim philosophers, it is not only unique but has been paramount right up
to modem times. He is the only one among the great philosophers of Islam
to build an elaborate and complete system of philosophy—a system which
has been dominant in the philosophical tradition of Islam for oenturies, in
spite of the attacks of al-Qhazkli, Fakir al-IXn al-Rlzi, and others. This
ascendancy has been possible, however, not merely because he had a system
but because that system had features of remarkable originality displaying a
type of genius-like spirit in discovering methods and arguments whereby he
sought to reformulate the purely rational and intellectual tradition of Hellen
ism, to which he was an eminent heir, for and, to an extent, within the
religious system of Islam. The exact terms of this reformulation and their
relation to Islam we shall discuss presently in this chapter; it is only to be noted
at the outset that it was this kind of originality which rendered him unique
not only in Islam but also in the medieval West where the reformulations of
the Roman Catholic theology at the hands of Albert the Great, and, especially,
of Thomas Aquinas, were fundamentally influenced by him.
Since in this chapter we are mainly concerned with ibn Sink’s interpretation
of Greek philosophical doctrines, we need not give an account of his sources
in the Greek and Muslim philosophers. To be sure, the elements of his doctrines
are Greek, and certain reformulations of Greek doctrines in his writings are
also to bo found in al-Fkrkbi (to whom ibn Sink's debt is immense) in varying
degrees of development; but our task here is to state, analyse, and appreciate
ibn Sink’s teaching. And, indeed, ibn Sink’s system, taken as a whole, is such
that it is hu, bearing the unmistakable impress of his personality. This is
proved by the fact that he states his cardinal doctrines over and over again
in his different works and often gives cross references, which are unmistakable
signs of systematic thinking and not of random borrowing from heterogeneous
sources.
The most fundamental characteristic of ibn Sink’s thought is that of arriving
at definitions by a severely rigorous method of division and distinction of
concepts. This lends an extraordinary subtlety to his arguments. It can often
give his philosophical reasoning a strongly scholastic complexity and intricacy
of structure which can annoy the modern temperament, but it is doubtlessly
true that it Ib also this method which has resulted in almost all the original
1 Little can bo added to the biography of ibn 8taa—a quasiautobiogrsphy—
which is available in Arabic works, e g.. al-QiRl’s and modem works based upon
them. Here it is omitted because it is scarcely important for an appreciation of his
philosophical thought.
480
Ibn 8lna
doctrines of our philosopher. It has enabled him to formulate hia most general
and basic principle, viz., to every clear and distinct concept there must
correspond a dMnciio in re, a principle on which later Descartes also baaed
his thesis of the mind-body dualism. The fecundity and importance of this
principle of analysis in ibn Sing’s system are indeed striking: he announces
it recurrently and it all levels, in his proof of the mind-body dualism, his
doctrine of universals, his theory of essence and existence, etc. Examples of
this principle are: “that which is affirmed and admitted is different from that
which is not affirmed and admitted,"’ and "a Bingle conceptual (lit. specific)
entity cannot be both known and unknown at the same time except with
regard to different aspects.”’
This chapter will deal mostly with those concepts and doctrines of ibn Sins
which are not only capital and bring out tho nature of his system, but have
also both been influential and originally elaborated by him to a greater or
leaser extent.
THE DOCTRINE OF BEING
Ibn Sing's doctrine of Being, like those of earlier Muslim philosophers,
e. g., al-Firabi. ip emanationistic. From God, the Necessary Existent, flows
the first intelligence alone, since from a single, absolutely simple entity, only
one thing can emanate. But the nature of the first intelligence is no longer
absolutely simple since, not being necaaary-by-itMlt, it ia only patmble. and
iu possibility has been setualized by God. Thanks to this dual nature which
henceforth pervades the entire cresturely world, the first intelligence gives
rise to two entities: (i) the second intelligence by virtue of the higher aspect
of iu being, actuality, and (ii) the first and highest sphere by virtue of the
lower aspect of ita being, iu natural possibility. This dual emanatory process
continues until we reach the lower and tenth intelligence which governs the
sublunary world and is called by the majority of the Muslim philosophers
the Angel Gabriel. This name is applied to it because it bestows forms upon
or "informs" the matter of this world, i.e., both physical matter and the
human intellect. Hence it is also called the “Giver of Forms” (the dolor
lormarum of the subsequent medieval Western scholastics). We shaH return
later to these intelligences and these spheres to examine more closely their
nature and operations; meanwhile wo must turn to the nature of Being.
The procession of the immaterial intelligence from the Supreme Being by
way of emanation was intended to supplement, under the inspiration of the
Neo-Platonio Theory of Emanation, the meagre and untenable view of God
’ K. al-Shr/d' (Psychological part, henoeforth cited as “Psychology")
' "Psychology," V. 7.
481
A History of Muslim Philosophy
formulated by Aristotle according to whom there was no passage from God,
the One, to the world, the many. According to Muslim philoeophere, although
God remained in Himself and high above the created world, there were,
nevertheless, intermediary links between the abeolute eternity and necessity
of God and the world of downright contingency. And this theory, besides,
came very close to satisfying tho Muslim belief in angels. This is the first
occasion to remark how Muslim philosophers, by a re-elaboration of the
Greek tradition of philosophy, not only sought to build a rational system, but
a rational system which sought to integrate the tradition of Islam. But what
about the Theory of Emanation itself? Would it not destroy tho necessary
and all-important gulf between the Creator and the creation and lead to a
downright pantheistic world-view—tat tvam Ati—against which Islam, like
all higher religions, had warned so sternly ? No doubt, this type of pantheism,
being dynamic, is different from the absolutist and static forms of pantheism :
yet it could lead to anthropomorphism, or, by a reverse process of ascent,
to the re-absorption of the creature's being into the being of God. Now, the
guarantee against any such danger shall be ibn Sink's doctrine of essence and
existence. This celebrated theory again is designed to fulfil equally both
religious and rational needs and. once again, to supplement Aristotle.
Early in this section we said that God and God alone is absolutely simple
in His being; all other things have a dual nature. Being simple, what God is
and the fact that He eztrtj are not two elements in a single being but a single
atomic element in a single being. What God is, i.e., His essence, is identical
with His existence. This is not the case with any other being, for in no other
case is the existence identical with the essence, otherwise whenever, for
example, an Eskimo who has never seen an elephant, oonceives of one, he
would ipso facto know that elephants exist. It follows that God's existence is
necessary, the existence of other things is only possible and derived from
God’s, and that the supposition of God's non -oxistence involves a contradiction,
whereas it is not so with any other existent.1 A oosmological argument, based
on Aristotle's doctrine of the First Cause, would be superfluous in establishing
God’s existence. Ibn Sina, however, has not chosen to construct a full-fledged
ontological argument. His argument, which, as we shall see later, became the
• K. al-Nafat. Cairo, 1918. p. 224. U. 21ff. It will be soon that the germa pf the
ontological argument exist in a fairly developed form in this argument. It would
then follow that the cosmological argument, based on Aristotle's doctrine of tho
First Cause, would be superfluous in establishing God's existence. Ibn Stna, however,
has not chosen to construct a full fledged ontologioal argument. His argument,
whioh. aa we shall sea later, became tho cardinal doctrine of the Roman Catholic
dogmatic theology after Aquinas, ia more like the Leibnizian proof of God aa the
ground of tho world, i.o., given God, we am understand the existence of the vrorld.
Haro cause and effect oehave liko promisee and conclusion, i.e.. instead of working
back from a supposed effect to its cause, we work forward from an indubitable
premise to a conclusion. Indeed, for ibn Sina, God creates through a rational
neerweity on the basis of which he also explains the divine pre-knowladge of sll
events, as we shall see in his account of God.
Ibn Sins
cardinal doctrine of the Roman Catholic dogmatic theology after Aquinas,
ia more like the Leibnizian proof of God as the ground of the world, i.e., given
God, we can understand the existence of the world. Here cause anil effect
behave like premises and conclusion. Instead of working back from a supposed
effect to its cause, we work forward from an indubitable premise to a con
clusion. Indeed for ibn Slna, God creates through a rational necessity. On the
basis of thia rational necessity, ibn Sina also explains the divine prc-knowledge
of all events, as we shall see in his account of God. The world, as a whole, is
then contingent, but, given God. it becomes necessary, this necessity being
derived from God. This is ibn Sink'a principle of existence stated in brief; we
shall now analyse it according to the complex materials which ibn Slna has
left us. It involves more than one point of view.
From the metaphysical point of view, the theory seeks to supplement the
traditional Aristotelian analysis of an existent into two constituent elements,
aa it were, viz., form and matter. According to Aristotle, the form of a thing
is the sum total of its essential and universalizable qualities constituting its
definition; the matter in each thing is that which has the potentiality of
receiving these qualities—the form—and by which the form becomes an
individual existent. But there are two major difficulties in this conception
from ths print of view of the actual existence of a.thing. The first is that the
form is universal and. therefore, does not exist. Matter too, being pure poten
tiality, does not exist, since ft is actualized only by the form. How then shall
a thing oorne into existence by a non-existent form and an equally non
existent matter 1 The second difficulty arises from tho fact that, although
Aristotle generally holds that the definition or essence of a thing is its form, he
nevertheless says in certain important passages (e.g., De Anima. Vol. I. Chap. I,
403a, 27 ff.) that matter ia also to be included in the essence of a thing, otherwise
we shall have only a partial definition of it. If, then, we regard both form and
matter aa constitutive of definition, we can never arrive at the actual existence
of a thing. This is the rock against which tbo whole scheme of Aristotle to
explain Being threatens to break.
This ia why ibn Slna
* holds that from form and matter alone you would
never get a concrete existent, but only the essential and accidental qualities
He has analysed at some length the relation of form and matter in K al-
SJi/d’, ("Met.” II, 4 and "Met." VI. 1), where he concludes that both form
and matter depend on God (or the active intellect) and. further, that the
composite existent also cannot be caused by form and matter alone but
there must be "something else." Finally, in "Met.” VIII, 5. he tolls us, "Every
thing except the One who is by His essence One and Existent acquires
existence from something else. ... In itself it deserves absolute non-
• This section has been drawn on F. Rahman's article "Essence and Existence
in Avicenna," in Mediaewii and Benaiema Studies. Oxford, 1058. although
certain new considerations addod here have changed the presentation to a certain
extent.
483
A History of Muslim Philosophy
formulated by Aristotle according to whom there was no passage from God,
the One, to the world, the many. According to Muslim philoeophere, although
God remained in Himself and high above the created world, there were,
nevertheless, intermediary links between the abeolute eternity and necessity
of God and the world of downright contingency. And this theory, besides,
came very close to satisfying tho Muslim belief in angels. This is the first
occasion to remark how Muslim philosophers, by a re-elaboration of the
Greek tradition of philosophy, not only sought to build a rational system, but
a rational system which sought to integrate the tradition of Islam. But what
about the Theory of Emanation itself? Would it not destroy tho necessary
and all-important gulf between the Creator and the creation and lead to a
downright pantheistic world-view—tat tvam Ati—against which Islam, like
all higher religions, had warned so sternly ? No doubt, this type of pantheism,
being dynamic, is different from the absolutist and static forms of pantheism :
yet it could lead to anthropomorphism, or, by a reverse process of ascent,
to the re-absorption of the creature's being into the being of God. Now, the
guarantee against any such danger shall be ibn Sink's doctrine of essence and
existence. This celebrated theory again is designed to fulfil equally both
religious and rational needs and. once again, to supplement Aristotle.
Early in this section we said that God and God alone is absolutely simple
in His being; all other things have a dual nature. Being simple, what God is
and the fact that He eztrtj are not two elements in a single being but a single
atomic element in a single being. What God is, i.e., His essence, is identical
with His existence. This is not the case with any other being, for in no other
case is the existence identical with the essence, otherwise whenever, for
example, an Eskimo who has never seen an elephant, oonceives of one, he
would ipso facto know that elephants exist. It follows that God's existence is
necessary, the existence of other things is only possible and derived from
God’s, and that the supposition of God's non -oxistence involves a contradiction,
whereas it is not so with any other existent.1 A oosmological argument, based
on Aristotle's doctrine of the First Cause, would be superfluous in establishing
God’s existence. Ibn Sina, however, has not chosen to construct a full-fledged
ontological argument. His argument, which, as we shall see later, became the
• K. al-Nafat. Cairo, 1918. p. 224. U. 21ff. It will be soon that the germa pf the
ontological argument exist in a fairly developed form in this argument. It would
then follow that the cosmological argument, based on Aristotle's doctrine of tho
First Cause, would be superfluous in establishing God's existence. Ibn Stna, however,
has not chosen to construct a full fledged ontologioal argument. His argument,
whioh. aa we shall sea later, became tho cardinal doctrine of the Roman Catholic
dogmatic theology after Aquinas, ia more like the Leibnizian proof of God aa the
ground of tho world, i.o., given God, we am understand the existence of the vrorld.
Haro cause and effect oehave liko promisee and conclusion, i.e.. instead of working
back from a supposed effect to its cause, we work forward from an indubitable
premise to a conclusion. Indeed, for ibn Sina, God creates through a rational
neerweity on the basis of which he also explains the divine pre-knowladge of sll
events, as we shall see in his account of God.
Ibn Blns
cardinal doctrine of the Roman Catholic dogmatic theology after Aquinas,
ia more like the Icibnizian proof of God as the ground of the world, i.e., given
God, we can understand the existence of the world. Here cause anil effect
behave like premises and conclusion. Instead of working back from a supposed
effect to ita cause, we work forward from an indubitable premise to a con
clusion. Indeed for ibn Sina, God creates through a rational necessity. On the
basis of thia rational necessity, ibn Sina also explains the divine prc-knowledge
of all events, as we shall see in his account of God. The world, as a whole, is
then contingent, but, given God. it becomes necessary, this necessity being
derived from God. Thia is ibn Sink'a principle of existence stated in brief; we
shall now analyse it according to the complex materials which ibn Sina has
left us. It involves more than one point of view.
From the metaphysical point of view, the theory seeks to supplement the
traditional Aristotelian analysis of an existent into two constituent elements,
aa it were, viz., form and matter. According to Aristotle, the form of a thing
is the sum total of its essential and universalizable qualities constituting its
definition; the matter in each thing is that which has the potentiality of
receiving these qualities—the form—and by which the form becomes an
individual existent. But there are two major difficulties in this conception
from ths print of view of the actual existence of a.thing. The first is that the
form is universal and. therefore, does not exist. Matter too, being pure poten
tiality, does not exist, since ft is actualized only by the form. How then shall
a thing come into existence by a non-existent form and an equally non
existent matter 1 The second difficulty arises from tho fact that, although
Aristotle generally holds that the definition or essence of a thing is its form, he
nevertheless says in certain important passages (e.g., De Anima. Vol. I. Chap. I,
403a, 27 ff.) that matter ia also to be included in the essence of a thing, otherwise
we shall have only a partial definition of it. If, then, we regard both form and
matter aa constitutive of definition, we can never arrive at the actual existence
of a thing. This is the rock against which tbo whole scheme of Aristotle to
explain Being threatens to break.
Thia ia why ibn Sina
* holds that from form and matter alone you would
never get a concrete existent, but only the essential and accidental qualities
He has analysed at some length the relation of form and matter in K al-
SJi/d’, ("Met.” II, 4 and "Met." VI. 1), where he concludes that both form
and matter depend on God (or the active intellect) and. further, that the
composite existent also cannot be caused by form and matter alone but
there must be "something else." Finally, in "Met.” VIII, 5. he tolls us, "Every
thing except the One who is by His essence One and Existent acquires
existence from something else. ... In itself it deserves absolute non-
• This section has been drawn on F. Rahman's article "Essence and Existence
in Avicenna," in Mediaeval and Benaiema Studies. Oxford, 1058. although
certain new considerations addod here have changed the presentation to a certain
extent.
483
A History of Muslim Philowphy
existence. Now, it ia not ita matter alone without its form or its form
alone without its matter which deserves non-existence but the totality
(of matter and form)." Thia is why ibn Sina substitutes a three-term
analysis of the existent material objects instead of the traditional Greek
dyadic formula. It must be noted that it is Aristotle's doctrine which is being
developod here. Many scholars hare held that ibn Sina is here following a
Neo-Platonic line instead of the Aristotelian one. but, from this point of view,
the Neo-Platonic doctrine is the same as that of Aristotle, vix.. the dyadic
scheme of form and matter, exoept that, according to Plotinus, under the
influence of Plato, the forms have a higher ontological status and exist in
God's mind who then proceeds to make them existent in matter. It should also
be borne in mind that existence is not really a constituent element of things
besides matter and form; it ia rather a relation to God: if you view a thing
in relation to the divine existentializing agency, it exists, and it exists ne
cessarily and. further, its existence is intelligible, but when out of relation with
God, its existence loses its intelligibility and meaning. It ia this relational
aspect which ibn Sina designates by the term “accident” and says that existence
1b an accident.
Ever since the criticism of ibn Sink’s doctrine by ibn Ruifad who, among
other things, accused ibn Sina of having violated the definition of substance as
that which exists by itaelf. and of Aquinas who, although he adopts the
distinction between essence and existence under the direct influence of ibn
Sina, nevertheless follows ibn Ruibd in his criticism, the unanimous voioe
of the Western historians of medieval philosophy has been to the effect that
existence, according to ibn Sina, is just an accident among other accidents,
e g., round, black, etc. We have said that when ibn Sina talks of existence
aa an accident with rrlatum to objtel* (<u dintinyuuhed from rjuenci) he just
means by it a relation to God; it is, therefore, not an ordinary accident. Further,
if existence were an accident, one could think it away and still go on talking of
the object just aa one can do in the case of other accidents and. indeed, in that
case ibn Sina would have been forced to hold something like the Meinongian
view held by many Muslim Mutakallims that non-existenta must also “exist"
in some peculiar sense of that word. But this ia the very doctrine which ibn
Sina ridicules. The whole discussion on this point can be found in the article
referred to in note No. 5 of this chapter. Here we give only one passage where
our philosopher criticizes the view of those who hold that a non-existent
"thing" must, nevertheless, "exist" in some sense so that we can talk about
it. He says (K. ai-8/fi/A'. "Met." I, S), "Those people who entertain this opinion
hold that among those things which we can know (i. e., be acquainted with) and
talk about, are things to which, in the realm of non-being, non-existence
belongs as an attribute. He who wants to know more about this should further
consult the nonsense which they have talked and which does not merit con
sideration?’ Indeed, according to ibn Sina, the ideas of existence and unity
are the primary ideas with which we must start. These underived concepts
484
*
Ibn Sin
are the bases of our application of other categories and attribute
* to things and,
therefore, they defy definition since definition must involve other terms and
concepts which are themselves derived (ihid., I, 5).
It will be seen that this problem now is not a metaphysic
*
! one but has to
do with logic, Ibn Slna has attempted to give his own answer to the question:
How is it possible that we can talk of non-existents and what do these latter
mean 1 His answer is that we can do so because we give to these objects
"some sort of existence in the mind.” But, surely, our individual images cannot
constitute the meanings of these entities for the obvious reason that when
we talk.e.g., of a spaceship, it must have an objective meaning. It is, neverthe
less. true that ibn Slna has seen the basic difficulty of the logic of existence.
And our modem logic itoolf, despite ita superior techniques and some valuable
distinctions, seems nowhere nearer the solution. It has tried hard to oontend
that whenever I talk of a space-ship, although none exists, I am not talking
of a "thing," of an individual object, but only of a generic object or a conglome
ration of properties. But ia this really so I Is it absurd to say that the "individual
space-ship I am talking of now has thia and this property" I Besides, the crux
is tho phrase "conglomeration or set of properties"—what is it to which they
belong and of wliich I profess to be talking I
Besides this meaning of "accident" as a peculiar and uniquo relation of
an existent to God. the term "accident" in ibn Slna has another unorthodox
philosophic meaning. This ooncema the relationship of a concrete existent to
its essence or specific form, which ibn Slna also calls accidental. Thia use of
the term “aocident” ia quite pervasive in ibn Sink's philosophy and, without
knowing ita correct significance, one would be necessarily led to misinterpret
some of his basic doctrines. Now, uAeneoer two concepts are clearly dwtinguishable
from each other, they must refer to two different ontological entities, aa we said
above, and. further, whenever two each concepts come together in a thing, ibn
Sina describes their mutual relationship as being accidental, i.e., they happen
to come together, although each must be found to exist separately. Thia is
the case, for example, between essence and existence, between universality
and essence.
According to ibn Sina, essences exist in God’s mind (and in the mind of tho
active intelligences) prior to the individual oxistents exemplifying them in tho
external world and they also exist in our minds posterior to these individual
.
*
existent But these two levels of tho existence of an essence are very different.
And they differ not only in the sense that the one is creative, and the other
imitative. In its true being, the essence ia neither universal nor particular, but
it is just an essence. Hence he holds (K. al-SA>fd‘, "Isagoge to Logic,” Cairo,
1052, pp. 65-50; also ibid. "Met.” V, I) that both particularity and univer
*
sality are "accident
" which happen or occur to the essence. Universality
occurs to it in our minds only, and ibn Slna takes a strictly functional view of
the universals; our mind abstracts universals or general concepts whereby it is
enabled to treat the world of infinite diversity in a summary and scientific
*M
A History of Muslim Philosophy
manner by relating an identical mental construction to a number of object*.
In the external world the sssence doe* not exist exoept in a kind of metaphorical
sense, i.e., in the sense in which a number of object! allow themselves to be
treated aa being identical Existent* in the external world are the individual
concrete object*, no two of which are exactly the same. Ho says. "It is impos
sible that a single essence should exist identically in many” ("Met." V, 2),
and again. "It (i.e. absolute marines*) is not the manneu of 'Amr; it is different
from it, thanks to the particular circumstances. These particular circum-
stances have a role in the individual person of Zaid . . and also a role in the
'man' or 'manneee' inasmuch a» it ie related to him" (“Met.” V, 1). It ia clear
especially from this last statement that the "eeoence" virtually undergoes
a change in each individual. That is why we must say that i/ we. regard euence
ae a univereal, that oonorete determinate existence ia something over and
above the essence; it ia something added to the essence, or it is an "accident”
of the essence.
Two things must be specially noted here. First, that existence is some
thing added not to the existent objects—this would be absurd—but to the
essence. Thia is because everything whether it exists or not—indeed whether
it is existable or not—in fact every concept is "something" of which assertions
can be made, whether positive or negative. Indeed, even non-existence is
"something,” since one can talk about it. But a positive individual existent
ia more than just "something.” (This distinction between "something" and
an existent, treated by ibn Sina ["Met." 1, S] which has confusedly returned
in present-day logic, was originally made by the Stoics [see, eg., Stoicomm
Veteram Fragmenla, Vo. II, p. 117].) Henoe ibn Sina says that when existence
is attributed to esaenoee, this existence is equivalent to "ia something" and,
therefore, such statements are not "profitable." But statement* about existent*
are informative and profitable, since they sdd to the eesenoe something that
ia new. 8eoondly, we must note that although ibn Sina speaks in several place*
of matter aa the principle of multiplicity of forma or essence*, he never say*
that matter is the principle of individual existence. The sole principle of
individual existence ia God—the Giver of existence; matter ia the occasional
cause of existence, supplying external attributes of multiplicity.
We have given a considerable number of quotations from ibn 8!na in the
treatment of thia problem not only because it ia of capital importance for
ibn Sink’s philosophy, but also because there has been such a great deal of
fundamental oonfusion in the traditional treatment of tho subject that a
clarification of the terms "existence," "accident" in this relation, and "essence"
is absolutely necessary.
tea
Ibn Sin*
B
THE BODY-MIND RELATIONSHIP
With Aristotle, ibn Sta* stresses the intimate connection of mind end body;
but whereas Aristotle’s whole trend of thought reject* a two-eubetence new,
ibn Sine holds a form of radical dualism. How far these two aspects of his
doctrine are mutually compatible u a different question: ibn Slna certainly
did not cany hi* dualism through to develop a parallelistic, occasionaliatic
account of mind-body relationship. His remarks, nevertheless, on either side
are both interesting and profound. We shall first state his argument* for the
two-substance view and then discuss their close inter-connection. To prove
that the human soul is a substance capable of existing independently of the
body, our philosopher employs two different arguments. One appeals to direct
self-consciousness, the other seeks to prove the immateriality of the intellect.
We can postpone his teaching on the intellect till we discus* his theory of
knowledge; here we shall state and discus* his first argument. Indeed, according
to him, this is the more direct way of proving the incorporeal substantiality
of tho soul acting not as an argument but a* an eye-opener (K. al-Siifa',
"Psychology." V. 7).
The argument ia stated by ibn Slna in the first chapter of the psychological
book of the K. al-Sbi/d' and then re-stated and discussed in the last but one
chapter of the same look. Let us suppose, as ho says, that a person is created
in an adult state, but in such a condition that he is born in a void where his
body cannot touch anything and where he cannot perceive anything of the
external world. Let us also suppose that he cannot see his own body and
that the organa of his Isslv are prevented from touching one another, so that
he has no sense perception whatsoever Such a person will not affirm anything
of the external world or even the existence of his own body but will, neverthe
less, affirm the existence of his self as a purely spiritual entity. Now, that
which is affirmed is certainly not the same aa that which is not affirmed. The
mind is, therefore, a substance independent of the body. Our philosopher ia
hero describing an imaginary case impossible of realisation, but hia real point,
as of Descartes, is that we can think away our bodies and so doubt their
existence, but we cannot think away our minds
The affinity of ibn SIni's argument with that of Descartes' cogito ergo turn
ha* been justly pointed out by historians of philosophy. Actually, thia whole
trend of thought is inspired by the argument of Plotinus for the separateness
of the mind from the body.* But there is an important difference between ibn
SInA’s and Descartes' formulations. With regard to Descartes, the question can
be and has been raised: Is the existence of the self a matter of inference or an
immediate datum of consciousness I Whatever the answer to this question
may be, there is no doubt that consciousness or "I think" is constitutively .and
■ A similar development took place in the West, beginning with Augustine. end.
ugnin, under Noo-Platonic influences.
487
A History of Muslim Philosophy
neoesaarily involved in Descartes’ "I am." This is so much so that "I think"
and '1 am" have the same meaning in Descartes.’ Thia being the position,
it is obvious that in thia case the consciousness of the self and ita existence
Cannot be logically disengaged from each other. In ibn Sina, however, although
the element of consciousness is present since one can "affirm one's own
existence," it ia nevertheless present only an a way of locating the self: it is
a contingent fact and not a logical necessity. In fact, ibn Sina presents a
medial position between Descartes and Plotinus, for, according to the latter,
consciousness, being a relation, signifies not utter self-identity but a kind of
otherness; in complete aelf-identity, consciousness must cease altogether.
This argument, which seeks to establish dualism by doubting or denying
the existence of the body, may be called the argument from abstraction in
that it abstracts psychical functions from the total functions of the organism.
Its fundamental weakness obviously is to insit that by thinking away the
body, the body ceases to play a role in one’s total'consciousnees. If the problem
could be solved by a simple inspection of the self in this manner, nothing
would be easier. Ibn Stna seems to be aware that the position is liable to
objections. He says ("Psychology," V, 7): (If my self were identical with any
bodily members) "say, the heart or the brain or a collection of such members
and if it were their separate or total being of which I were conscious aa being
my self, then it would be necessary that my consciousness of my self should
be my very consciousness of these members, for it ia not possible that the
same thing should be both cognized and uncognized in the camo sense." He
then goes on to say that "in fact 1 do not know by self-consciousness that I
have a heart and a brain but I do so either by sense-perception (experience)
or on authority." “I mean by what I know to be my self that which 1 mean
when I say: T perceived, I intellected. I acted,' and all these attributes belong
to me." But, ibn Sina pauses to consider the possible objection: if you are
not aware of your self being a bodily member, you are neither directly aware
that it is your soul or mind.
Ibn Sink's aswer to this objection is: “Whenever I present bodily attributes
to thia something which is the source of my mental functions, 1 find that it
cannot aocept these attributes," and thus this incorporeal entity must be the
soul. Here we clearly see that the argument has taken a new turn and the
phenomenon of direct consciousness is being supplemented by a further
consideration to the effect that the disparateness between the mental and
physical qualities is such that both cannot belong to one substance. And this
is the perennial argument for the two-substance theory, viz., that the mental
and the physical attributes are of qualitatively disparate genrt.
’ Moduatume II: "What of thinking T 1 find here that thought ia an attribute
that belongs to mo; it alone cannot bo separated from me. I am, I exist, that is
certain. But how often » Just whan I think; for it might possibly be tho case, that
if 1 ceased entirely to think. I should likewise oeaae entirely to exist... to speak
accurately I am not more than a thing which thinks."
488
Ibn Sina
From the acceptance of the view, that tho mind ia a su betanee, the con
clusion that the mind is a unity follows tautologically and ibn Sina lays great
stress on it. Indeed, once again, both doctrines, viz., the reality of faculties
and the unitary nature of the soul, are stated with equal emphasis by him. The
reality of mental faculties waa established by Aristotle but waa further pursued
by hia commentators, notably Alexander of Aphrodisiac. Ibn Stna has devoted
a special chapter to the question ("Psychology," 1, 4) where he bases the
multiplicity of faculties on the qualitative differences among mental operations.
Nevertheless, he repeatedly stresses the necessity of an integrative bond
frihdlj for the diverse operations.1 Indeed, he declares that even the vegetative
and peroeptual functions in man, for example, are specifically different from
those in plants and animals, thanks to the rationality present in man which
liervadoa and changes the character of all his functions. This integrative
principle is the mind itself.
The soul in its real being is then an independent substance and is our
transcendental self. We shall return to its transcendence when we discuss
ibn Sink’s theory of knowledge in the next section. Here we shall note only
that ibn Sink's arguments for the immortality of the soul are baaed on the
view that it is a substance and that it is not a form of the body to which it
1b attached intimately by some kind of mystical relation between the two.
There ia in the soul which emerges from the separate substance of the active
intelligence simultaneously with the emergence of a body with a definite
temperament, a definite inclination to attach itself to this body, to earc for
it, and direct it to the mutual benefit. Further, the soul, aa being incorporeal,
is a simple substance and this ensures for it indestructibility and survival,
after its origination, even when its body is destroyed.
But if at the transcendental level the soul is a pure spiritual entity and
• An interesting question inav be rained here about the unity of tho mind. We
have seen that the qualitative diaparntonem between tho mental and physical
phenomena has necessitated their attribution to different substances. Thia argument
has been re-stated with groat vigour in recent times by O. F. Stout who in his
Mind and Mailer lays down the "Principle of Goneric Keeemblance" for acta and
operations if thoy aro to fall in a single substance. C. D. Broad has rejected this
dualism in his Mind and lit I'laa in Nature on tho ground that no criterion can be
laid down aa to how groat a qualitative difference there should be to warrant
us to assign phenomena to different subetanooe. However, Broad himself favours
a "Compound Theory" of mind and body, thus implicitly giving force to tlie same
principle of qualitative resemblance and difference which he seeks to refute. For,
why else should there be tho necessity for a "Compound" t
Yet, if we aooept the full consequences of the principle, what, we may ask.
constitutes the resemblance between mental acta so as to attribute them to one
substance T For, hoping, deairing, thinking are so mutually divergent phenomena.
According to the modem traditional philosophy, consciousness may be a common
quality satisfying tho principle and. indeed, it has been regarded aa the sluff of
which mental phenomena are made. If wo hold thia, it will follow that unoonacioua
doairee. fears, and hopes are non-montal.
489
A History of Muslim Philosophy
body does not enter into its definition even as ■ relational ooncept, at th<
phenomenal level the body must be included in ita definition as a building
enters into the definition of a (definite) builder. That is why ibn 8lna says
that the study of the phenomenal aspect of the soul is in the field of nature'
science, while ita transcendental being belongs to the study of metaphysics
Now. since at the phenomenal level there exists between each soul and body
a mystique which renders them exclusively appropriate for each other—
whether we understand this myeiique or notr-it follows that the transmigration
of souls is impossible. (Transmigration is rejected by Aristotle who does not
hold the two-substance view.) Indeed, this mystique is both the cause and the
effect of the individuality of the self. Ibn Sina, therefore, totally rejects the
idea of tho possible identity of two souls or of the ego becoming fused with
the Divine Ego. and he emphasizes that the survival must be individual. It
is a primary fact of experience that each individual is oonscious of his self-
identity which cannot be shaken by any kind of argument. Indeed, our philo
sopher is so keen to affirm the Individuality of personality that be says ("Psy
chology." V, 3) that even the qualitative nature of the intellectual operations
in different individuals may be different—a statement whioh would have
shocked not only the Platonista and Neo-Platonists, but even perhaps Aristotle,
since, according to the universal Greek doctrine, the intellect represents, at
least, the qualitative identity of mankind, a doctrine which was later pushed
to its logical extremes by ibn Rutbd.
The relationship, then, between soul and body is so close that it may affect
even the intellect. It goes without saying that all the other peycho-phyBioal
acts and states have both aspect*—mental and physical. This was emphasized
by Aristotle himself. But Aristotle's doctrine, even if it u not outright material
istic. ia quasi-materialistio and, whereas it either emphasizes the double aspect
of each state or operation, or tends strongly to point out the influence of the
body on the mental phenomena, exactly the reverse is the case with ibn Sins.
Indeed, hia insistent stress on the influence of the mind on the body constitutes
an outstanding and one of the most original features of hia philosophy. Whereas
in Aristotle, life and mind give a new dimension to the material organism, in
ibn Sina, undor tho inspiration of the Neo-Platonic thought and the influence
of his own metaphysically spiritual predilections, thia no longer remains a
mere dimension. The material side of nature is both pervaded and over
shadowed by ita mental and spiritual side, even though, aa a medical man,
he i» keen to preserve the importance of the physical constitution, especially
in the case of the character of the emotions and impulses. Indeed, as we shall
see, hia medical art helped him to gauge the extent of mental influence on
apparently bodily states
At the most common level, the influence of the mind on the body is visible
in voluntary movement: whenever the mind wills to move the body, the body
obeys. In his detailed account of animal motion, ibn Sina has enumerated
four stages instead of Aristotle's three The three stages according to Aristotle
Ibn Sin*
are: (1) imagination or reason, (2) desire, and (3) movement of the muscles
Ibn Kina ha* split up the second into (1) desire and (2) impulsion.fijmd'f
for. ho says, not every deeire oan move to action but only when it ia
impulsive, whether consciously or unconsciously. Tho second, and more
important difference between ibn Sina and the traditional view is that according
to the latter tho Initiation of bodily movement must always lie in a cognitive
state, whether it is imagination or reason. Ibn Sina holds that, while in most
esses the cognitive act preoedee the affective and the conative ones, this is
not true of all cases. We read ("Psychology,” IV, 4): “All (the appetitive
and oonative) faculties also follow imaginative faculties... . But sometimes
it happens, e.g., in cases of physical pain, that our natural impulse tries to
remove the cause of pain and thus initiates the process of stirring up imagina
tion. Iq this case, it Is these (appetitive) faculties which drive the imagination
to their own purpose, just aa, in most cases, it is the imaginative faculty
which drives the (appetitive and oonative) faculties towards the object of
imagination." Thus, according to ibn 8lna, the initiation of the animal motion
can lie in the affections as well as in the cognitive states. Psychologically,
this is of great significance and marks an advance over the purely and one-
sidedly intellectual accounts of traditional philosophy.
Here we reach the second level of the influence of the mind on the body,
viz., that of emotions and of the will. Ibn Sina tells us from hit medical
experience that actually physically sick men, through sheer will-power, oan
become well and, equally, healthy men can beoome really ill under the in
fluence of sloknees-obeeesion. Similarly, he says, if a plank of wood is put
across a well-trodden path, one can walk on it quite well, but if it is put as
a bridge and down below is a chasm, one can hardly creep over it without
an actual fall. "This ia because he pictures to himself a (possible) fall so
vividly that the natural power of hie limbs accords with it" ("Psychology,"
IV, 4). Indeed, strong emotions like fear can actually destroy the temperament
of the organism and result in death, through influencing the vegetative func
tions: "This happens when a judgment take* place in the soul; the judgment,
being pure belief, does not influence the body, but rather when this belief is
followed by joy or grief” (“Psychology," I, 3). Joy and grief too are mental
states, ibn Sina goes on, but they affect the vegetative functions. Again,
"We do not regard it a* impossible that something should occur to the soul,
in so far as it is embodied, and be then followed by affections peculiar to the
body itself. Imagination, inaamuoh as it is knowledge, is not in itself a physical
affection, but it may happen that, aa a result, oertain bodily organs, sexual
for example, should expand... . Indeed, when an idea becomes firmly estab
lished in the imagination, it necessitates a change in the temperament. . .
(ibid.. IV, 4). Just aa. we are told, the ideas of health present in the doctor's
mind produoe actual health in a patient, so the soul acta on the body ; only
the doctor produces cure through media and instruments, but the soul doe*
it without any instruments.
491
A History of Muslim Philosophy
If, indeed, the soul were strong enough, it could produce cure end illness
even in another body without instruments. And here ibn Slna produces
evidence from the phenomena of hypnosis and suggestion (al wahm al-‘Smil).
He uses these considerations in order to show the possibility of miracles which
are * part of the discussion of the question of prophethood. Here we will recall
what we said before that, according to ibn Slna. a soul becomes exclusively
attached to one body. Our newer consideration shows that it can transcend
ita own body to affect others. This would become possible only when the soul
beoomes akin to the universal soul, aa it were.
It ia on these grounds that ibn Slna accepts the reality of such phenomena
as the "evil eye” and magic iu general We may note that the influence of
the emotions on the body was known and discussed in later Hellenism
Especially since the Stoic conception of the principle of "Sympathy" in nature
and Plotinus' elaboiation of that principle, the mind-body interaction was
explained on these lines. What ia scientifically new in ibn Slna is that he also
explains phenomena like magic, suggestion, and hypnosis, and, in general,
the influence of one mind on other bodies and minds on these lines, i.e., by
referring them to the properties of the influencing mind. In Hellenism, these
phenomena were aooepted, but were regarded aa exceptionally occult. And
in the mystery-mongering superstition of later Hellenism. "Sympathy" was
given an occult twist. Magical properties were assigned to special objects:
metals, animals, etc., through which the magician or the hypnotizer worked
or pretended to work on the gods or spirits to intervene in the realm of nature
and to produoe occult effects. But the only principle which ibn Slna will
accept—and here he strikes a very modern note—is to refer efficacy to the
special constitution of the mind itself. This rests on tho premise that it is of
the nature of mind to influence matter and it belongs to matter to obey the
mind, and ibn Bins will have no theurgic magic: "This is because tho soul is
(derived from) certain (higher) principles which clothe matter with forms
contained in them, such that these forms actually constitute matter. ... If
these principles can bestow upon matter forms constitutive of natural species...
it is not improbable that they can also bestow qualities, without there being
any need of physical contact, action, or affection.. . . The form existing in
the soul is the cause of what occurs in matter” ("Psychology," IV, 4). The
reason for this great change ia that in later Hellenism the human soul had
lost ita dignity and people relied more and more for tho explanation of the
"para-natural" phenomena on the intervention of the gods.
C
THEORY OF KNOWLEDGE
In acoonlanoe with the universal Greek tradition, ibn Slna describes all
knowledge aa some sort of abstraction on the part of the cognizant of tho
form of the thing known. His chief emphasis, elaborated most probably by
492
Ibn Sfna
himaelf, is on the degrees of this abstracting power in different cognitive
faculties. Thue, sense-perception needs the very presence of matter for its
cognitive act; imagination is free from the presence of actual matter but
cannot cognize without material attachments and accidents which give to
the image its particularity, whereas in intellect alone the pure form is cognized
in its universality. It is very probable too that ibn Stna elaborated this theory
"of the grades of abstraction’' to avoid the objection to which Aristotle's
doctrine of cognition (according to which all cognition is the abstraction of
form "without its matter") was liable, viz., if perception is the knowledge of
form alone, how do we know that this form exists in matter? Or, indeed,
how do we know that matter exists at all ?
Ibn Sink’s position on perception is generally that of naive realism, like
that of Aristotle and his oommentators. holding a representational view of
perception. But under criticism from scepticism and relativism which point
out the relativity of perceived qualities, this representational vitw becomes
seriously modified and ibn Sina finally accepts a quasi-causal’or, rather,
relational view of perceptual qualities, i.e., objects, which have certain real
qualities in themselves, appear aa such-and-such under such-and-Ach circum
stances and from such-and-such a position. This ia responsible for several
subjectivist statements in ibn Sina. who comes to distinguish between “pri
mary" and "secondary” perceptions: the "primary” perception being subjective
or of the state of the percipient's own mind, the "secondary1' perception being
that of tho external world. He did not clearly see, as we moderns do, tho
basic difficulties in this position. But his oonoeiAion reapjiears in Western
medieval philosophy as the distinction between the psychological or "inten
tional" object and the real object, a distinction which waa much later developed
by Locke into that of primary and secondary peroeptual qualities.
But the great key-stone of ibn Sink's doctrine of perception is his distinction
between internal and external perception. Tile external perception is the
operation of the external five senses Ibn Sina also divides the internal per
ception formally into five faculties, although he shows a great deal of hesitation
on the subject (see “Psychology." IV, I). His chief aim is to separate the
different functions or operations on a qualitative basis, ami, of course, we
once again remember Ilia principle that to every clear idea there must cor
respond a distinction in reality. Indeed, his doctrine of the internal senses has
no precedent in the history of philosophy. The first internal sense is seiMu-r
rommunu which is the scat of all the. sensM It integrates sense-data into
percepts. This general sense must be internal because none of the external five
min is callable of this function. The second internal sense is the imaginative
faculty in so far aa it conserves the perceptual images. The third faculty is
again imagination in so far aa it acts upon these images, by combination and
reparation. In man this faculty ia pervaded by reason so that human imagination
can deliberate and is. therefore, the seat of the practical intellect. The fourth
and the moat important internal faculty is called wahm which passed into
493
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the West u mi eilimalim: it peroeive* immaterial motion* like usefulness
and harmfulnesa, love and hate in material objects, and ia, in fact, the basis
of our character, whether influenced or uninfluenced by reason. The fifth
internal sense conserves in memory those notion* which are called by him
'intentions" (ma dni).
The doctrine of uuAm is the most original element in ibn 8!n*'s psycho
logical teaching and come* very close to what some modern psychologists
have described as the "nervous response" of the subject to a given object. In
Aristotle, this function i* performed by imagination or perception itself, but
ibn Slna contend* that perception and imagination tell u* only about the
perceptual qualities of a thing, its site, colour, shape, etc.; they tell u» nothing
about its character or "meaning" for u*. which must be read or discerned by
an internal faculty of the organism. In the 8toics, again, we have the per
ceptual-moral theory of the oiteiosM or "appropriation." according to which
whatever i* perceived by the external senses ia interpreted internally by the
soul aa the bearer of certain values. But the Stoic*, in thi* doctrine, were
primarily oonoerneil with the development of a moral personality in man.
(bn Sink'* doctrine of wahm, on the other hand, despite ita moral significance,
is primarily a purely psychological doctrine, explaining our instinctive and
emotional response to the environment.
This "nervous response" operates at different level*. At one level it i* purely
instinctive a* when a sheep peroeivee a wolf for the first time and flee* from
it. or a* the mother instinctively feels love for her baby. Thi* occur* without
previou* experience and hence through *ome kind of "natural inspiration"
ingrained in the constitution of the organism. Secondly, it also operate* at
a "quasi-empirical" level ("Psychology," IV, 3). This occurs through associa
tion of idea* or image* of memory. A dog which ha* suffered pain in the past
from being beaten by a stick or a stone, associate* the image of the object
and the “intention" of pain and, when it sees the object again, at once runs
away. Thi* phenomenon of direct association can also become indirect and
irrational. Thi* happen* in the case of animals and also in the case of leas
reasonable human beings. 8ome people who have irrationally associated the
yellow colour of honey with both the colour and the bitter taste of gall, do
not eat honey and in fact at it* eight exhibit symptom* of gall-like taste.
Thi* principle of association appeared later in Leibniz (Monadology, translated
by R. Latta, p. 232); and the principle of irrational or automatio association
ha* appeared more thoroughly worked out in recent experimental psychology
under the name of the "conditioned reflex." Since uahm make* perceptual
predictions on the basis of association of ideas, for which, say* ibn Slna,
there are innumerable cause* (contiguity, similarity, etc.), its perceptual judg
ments may sometime* be false. Aristotle had noticed thi* failure of perception
but could not explain it since he dill not discern the influence of past experience
on present perceptual judgments.
We come next to the doctrine of the intellect which ibn Slna has elaborated
494
Ibn Sina
in great detail. He has taken over in his doctrine tile theory of the develop
ment of human intellect announced by Aristotle very briefly and rather
obscurely and then elaborated by Alexander of Aphrodisiac and later by al-
Ftr&bi But he haa added quite new and original interpretations of his own.
The doctrine, in brief, distinguishes between a potential intellect in man and
an active intellect outside man, through the influence and guidance of which
the former develops and matures. Basically, the problem is that of the origin
of human cognition and it is explained on the assumption of a supra-human
transcendent intellect which, when the human intellect is ready, bestows
knowledge upon it.
Aa against Alexander, al-F&ribi. and probably Aristotle, ibn Sina holds that
the potential intellect in man is an indivisible, immaterial, and indestructible
substance although it is generated at a definite time and as something personal
to each individual. This haa important religious consequences, for, whereas
according to al-Flribi only men of developed intellect survive and others
perish for ever at death, ibn 8ina holds the immortality of all human souls.
(According to Alexander of Aphrodisiac, even the actualized intellect is perish
able so that no soul is immortal.) The immateriality of the intellect is proved
by ibn Sina in an unprecedented, elaborate, and scholaatio manner, the basic
idea being that ideas or "forms," being indivisible, cannot be said to be
localized in any material organ.
But it is in his account of the intellectual operation and the manner of the
acquisition of knowledge that the most original aspect of his doctrine of the
intellect lies. Whereas, according to the Peripatetic doctrine, accepted by al-
Flrtbi, the universal, whiob is the object of the intellective act, ia abstracted
from the particulars of sense-experience, for ibn Sina it issues directly from
the active intellect. The Peripatetic tradition has given the following account
of the rise of the universal from perceptual experience: First, we perceive
several similar individuals, these are stored up in memory and after this
constant operation the light of the active intellect "shines" upon them so
that tho essential nature common to all the particulars emerges /row them.
Thu theory ia neither nominalistic nor realistic: it does say that the universal
is more than what the instances of experience have given to the mind, but
it holds that the universal liu somehow in these instances. For ibn Sina. the
universal cannot emerge from the images of sense because it does not lie there.
Further, aa we have seen already, the essence, according to ibn Sina. is not
really a universal: it only bthavti aa such when it ia in our minds. Besides, no
amount of particular instances would actually suffice to produce the universal
essence which is applicable to infinitr instances. He, therefore, declares that the
task of our minds is to "consider" and reflect upon the particulars of sense
experience. This activity prepares the mind for the reception of the (universal)
essence from the active intellect by an act of direct intuition The |a-reeption
of tho universal form, then, ia a unique movement of the intellective soul,
not reducible to our perceiving the particulars either singly or totally and
495
A History of Muslim Philosophy
finding the common essence among thorn, for if no. it would be only a spurious
kind of universal.
There is. besides, another vital consideration which leads to thia view. If
the perception of the individual instances and the noting of their resemblance
(which latter, indeed, itself presupposes the possession of the universal by
the mind) were sufficient to cause the universal, then acquisition of knowledge
would become mechanical and thia mechanism would operate necessarily.
It is, however, in fact not true that cognition can be so mechanically and
deterministically produced. The origin of knowledge is mysterious and involves
intuition at every stage. Of all intellectual knowledge, more or less, it is not
so much true to say "I know it” as to admit "It occurs to me " All seeking
for knowledge, according to ibn Sina (even the emergence of the conclusion
from the premises), has this prayer-like quality: the effort is necessary on the
part of man; the response is the act of God or the active intellect. We are,
indeed. often not aware as to what it is wo want to know, let alone go ahead
and "know it." A theory of knowledge which fails to notice this fundamental
truth is not only wrong but blasphemous
All ideas or forms then come from outside. The precise sense of the “outside"
we shall try to work out in the next section But in tho meantime we should
notice certain other important characteristics of our knowledge. The first is
that it ia piecemeal and discursive, not total, it is also mostly "receptive"
in the sense noted just above. In our normal consciousness we are not fully
aware of the whence and whither of our Cognition. True, there are people
who are receptive in the ordinary sense of the word in that they do not discover
cither anything, or much that is new and original; they only learn for the moat
part; while there are others who discover new things. But even theae latter
are only "receptive" in the sense that not being fully oonscious of the whence
and whither of their knowledge—not aware of the total context of reality
they do not know the full moaning of their discoveries. Thia ia because, in
the common run of thinkers ideas come and go in succession and, therefore,
their grasp of reality is not total Hence ibn Stna rejects the general and
especially later Greek doctrine of the absolute identity of subject and object
in intellectual operation, for. he argues, in the case of normal consciousness,
there being a succession of ideas, if the mind became identical with one object ,
how could it then become identical with another? In thia connection he
rebukes Porphyry for his "mystical and poetical statements." Why he should
single out the pupil of Plotinus, is not quite clear, for the doctrine is both
Peripatetic and Neo-Platonio, although there are, it must be admitted,
moderate representatives like Alexander of Aphrodisiac just as there are
extremist champions of the doctrine like moot Neo-Platoniatc.
Ideas in this detailed, discrete, and discursive form of knowledge, as we
have said, come into the mind and go out of it. Ibn Stna is insistent that when
an idea is not actually being used in intellection, it does not remain in the
mind, or, in other words, there is. properly speaking, no intellectual memory
496
Ibn Sina
aa there u a memory of sensible images. There is nothing in the mind which
can conserve intclligiblcs just as there is a conservatory in the soul for senaibles,
for the existence of an intelligible in the mind means nothing else than the
fact that it is actually being intellected. Absolutely speaking, it should be
remarked that the word memory, when applied to sensible objects and indivi
dual events of the past, is radically different from the memory of universals and
universal propositions, for in the fornjer case there is a reference to the past.
Aristotle himself had indicated this doctrine in his De Memoria tl Reminiacentia
where he says that universals are remembered only per areidens. The ordinary
human thinking mind, says ibn Sina, is like a mirror upon which there is a
succession of ideas reflected from the active intellect. This does not mean
that a truth once acquired, because it "goes out of tho mind," lias to be re-
learnl all over again when it is remembered By our initial acquisition wo
acquire a skill to contact the active intellect and in remembering we simply
use that skill or power. Resuming the analogy of the mirror, ibn Stna says
that, before acquisition of knowledge, the mirror was rusty; when we rethink,
the mirror is polished, and it only remains to direct it to the sun (i. e., the
active intellect) so that it should readily reflect light.
Even so is the ordinary philosophic (or mystic) consciousness: it is mostly
partial (in varying degrees) even when it is original and creative (again in
varying degrees) and it is, therefore, obviously not in total contact with
reality, or, as ibn Sina puts it, "is not one with the active intellect." But
even in our ordinary cognitive processes, there are serious pointers to the
existence of a type of consciousness in which this partiality and discursiveness
may be overcome and which may be wholly creative, with the pulse of the total
reality in its grasp. These pointers are illustrated by ibn Slna by the example
of a man who is confronted suddenly with a questioner who asks him a question
which he has never asked himself before and, therefore, to which he cannot
give a detailed answer on the spot. He is sure, however, that he ran answer
it because the answer has just "occurred" to him and lies within him He then
proceeds to the details and formulates the answer. "The strange thing is,"
says ibn Sina, “that when this man begins to teach tho questioner the answer
to his question, he is simultaneously teaching himself as well" tho detailed
and elaborated form of knowledge even though he previously possessed this
knowledge in a simple manner. This simple, total insight is the creator of that
detailed, discursive knowledge which ensues. Now, this simple, total insight
(the acienlia simplex of tho medieval Latin scholastics comes from ibn Sina)
is the creative reason (or the active intellect); the formulated and elaborate
form ia the "psychic" knowledge, not the absolutely intellectual cognition
A person possessed of this simple creative agency, if such a one exists, may
well be said to be one with the active intellect; and since he possesses a total
grasp of reality, he is sure, absolutely sure, of the whence and whither of
knowledge (ibn Sina puts a great emphasis on this self-confidence, certainty,
conviction, or faith); he alone is aware of the total context of truth and
497
A Hietucy Ml Muslim riulosojil
therefore, in him alone there ia the full awareness of the meaning of each
term in the process of reality ; and. therefore, finally, only such a person can
enter (and must enter) must significantly into temporal history. moulding it
and giving it a new meaning Thia is the prophet; but how to ascertain his
existence ?
D
DOCTRINE OF PROPHECY’
The necessity of the phenomenon of prophethood and of divine revelation
i» something which ibn Sina has sought to establish at four levels: the intel
lectual, the “imaginative," the miraculous, and the socio-political. The totality
of the four levels gives us a clear indication of the religious motivation, character,
and direction of his thinking. Indeed, from our description and partial inter
pretation of his central philosophical theses so far, his deeply religious spirit
has emerged very clearly. His theory of "Being" has led to the dependence of
every finite living on Oral, and his doctrines of mind-body relationship and
of the genesis and nature of knowledge have both culminated in thg religious
conception of miracles in the one case, and of a creative revelatory knowledge
in the other And there is not the slightest suggestion that religiosity is some
thing artificially grafted ui«m hie purely rational thinking; on the contrary
it has organically grown out of a rigorous process of ratiocination, and goes
down to the very kernel of his thought.
It may be said that ibn Sina is a citizen of two intellectual.spiritual worlds.
the Hellenic and the Islamic. In his own mind he has so intrinsically unified
the two worlds that they an1 identical; the question of disloyalty to either,
therefore, does not ari* for him at all. L’ndcrthis circumstance, both traditional
Islam and the heritage of Hellenism were inevitably interpreted and modified
to a greater or lesser extent This is apjiarent in the whole of his philosophy
which enters into the technically religious field, but is most palpably so in
his doctrine of prophecy. In this doctrine, ihn Slna drastically modifies the
Muslim dogmatic theology by declaring that the Qur'tnic revelation is,
by and large, if not all, symbolic of truth, not the literal truth, but that it
must remain the literal truth for the masses (this does not mean that the
Qur'An is not the Word of God ; indeed, as we shall see, it is in a sense literally
the Word of God) , further, that the Law, although it must be observed by
everyone, is also partly symbolic and partly pedagogical and. therefore, an
resentially lower discipline than philosophic pursuits. (This again does not
mean that we can dispense with the Law at any stage of our individual or
collective development, for to be social belongs to the essence of man.) The
interpretation and modification of Hellenism in this doctrine is obvious
’ This section ia baaod on "Psychology." V, 9. the corresponding parte of the
NajM and the IddMI and the RunUah fi ol .VubuuiwaA (in Tte' final'll, Cairo.
1328 1908). also on "Psychology." IV. 3. 4
although moat elements of the Muslim philosophic doctrine of prophethixxl
exist in Hellenism, they nevertheless exist in a nebulous and sometimes in a
crude form; further, they are scattered. Indeed, the Greeks had no conception
of prophethood and prophetic revelation as the Muslims knew it. In fact, the
Muslim oonoeption of prophethood is new and unique in the history of religion
For the Muslim philosophers (especially ibn Stna, for although al-Firibi had
pioneered the way, we do not rind all the elements in him, notably, the intel
lectual and the miraculous), to have evolved out of these nebulous, crude, anil
disjointed elements an elaborate, comprehensive, and refined theory of pro-
phecy to interpret the personality of Muhammad, is nothing short of tho
performance of a genius.10
At the intellectual level, the necessity of the prophetic revelation ia proved
by an argument elaborated on the basis of a remark of Aristotle (Anal. Post. I
Chap. 34) that some people can hit upon the middle terra without forming
a syllogism in their minds. Ibn Stna constructs a whole theory of total intuitive
experience on the basis of this scanty remark. Sinoo, ho tells us, people differ
vastly with regard to their intuitive powers both in quality and quantity, and
while some men are almost devoid of it, others posaeaa it in a high degree, then-
must bo a rarely and exceptionally endowed man who has a total contact
with reality. Thia man, without muoh instruction from outside, can, by his
very nature, beoome tho depository of the truth, in contrast with tho common
run of thinkers who may have an intuitive experience with regard to a definite
question or questions but whose cognitive touch with reality is always
partial, never total. Thia comprehensive insight then translates itself into
propositions about the nature of reality and about future history; it is
simultaneously intellectual and moral-spiritual, hence tho prophetic experience
must satisfy both the philosophic and the moral criteria. It is on the basis
of this creative insight that the true prophet creates new moral values and
influences future history. A psychologico-moral concomitant of this insight
is also the deep and unalterable self-assurance and faith of the prophet in his
own capacity for true knowledge and accurate moral judgment: he must
believe in himself so that he can make others believe in him and thus succeed
in his mission to the world.
This insight, creative of knowledge and values, is termed by ibn Sina the
active intellect and identified with tho angel of revelation. Now. the prophet
gua prophet is identical with the active intellect; and in so far as thia identity
ia concerned, the active intellect is called nql munta/dd (the acquired intellect).
But the prophet jua human being ia not identical with the active intellect.
The giver of revelation is thus in one sense internal to the prophet, in another
sense, i.e., in so far as the latter is a human lieing, external to him. Hence
ibn Sinn says that the prophet, in so far as he ia human, is “accidentally,’’
not ea cntudly, the active intellect (for tho meaning of the term "accidental,"
ts Sue F Rahman's Property in Zalom. G. Allen A Unwin, London, 19118.
A History of Muslim Philosophy
see the first section of this chapter). God can and, indeed, must oome to man
so that the latter may develop and evolve, but the meaning of God can at
no stage be entirely exhausted in man.
But although the intellectual-spiritual insight w the highest gift the prophet
possesses, he cannot creatively act in history merely on the strength of that
insight. Hie office requires inherently that he should go forth to humanity
with a mewage, influence them, and should actually succeed in his mission.
This criterion leads the Muslim philosophers, although they admit the divine
ness of the leading Greek thinkers and reformers, to fix their minds upon
Moses. Jesus, and, above all. Muhammad who, undoubtedly, possesses the
requisite qualities of a prophet to the highest degree. These requisite qualities
are that the prophet must possess a very strong and vivid imagination, that
his psychic power be so great that ho should influence not only other minds
but also matter in general, and that he be capable of launching a socio-political
system.
By the quality of an exceptionally strong imagination, the prophet’s mind,
by an impelling psychological necessity, transforms the purely intellectual
truths and concepts into lifelike images and symbols so potent that one who
hears or reads them not only comes to believe in them but is impelled to action.
Illis symbolizing and vivifying function of the prophetic imagination is stressed
both by al-FSribi and ibn Sina. by the latter in greater detail. It ia of the
nature of imagination to symbolize and give flesh and blood to our thoughts,
our desires, and even our physiological inclinations. When we are hungry or
thirsty, our imagination puts before us lively images of food and drink. Even
when we have no actual sexual appetite but our physical condition is ready
for this, imagination may come into play and by stirring up suitable vivid
images may actually evoke this appetite by mere suggestion. This symbolization
and suggestiveneas, when it works upon the spirit and the intellect of the
prophet, results in so strong and vivid images that what the prophet’s spirit
thinks and conceives, he actually comes to hear and see. That is why he "sees"
the Angel and "hears" hiB voice. That is why also he necessarily comes to
talk of a paradise and a hell which represent the purely spiritual states of
bliss and torment. The revelations contained in the religious Scriptures are.
for the most part, of the figurative order and must, therefore, be interpreted
in order to elicit the higher, underlying, spiritual truth.
It ia the technical revelation, then, which impels people to action and to
be good, and not the purely intellectual insight and inspiration. No religion,
therefore, can be baaed on pure intellect. However, the technical revelation,
in order to obtain the necessary quality of potency, also inevitably suffers
from tho fact that it does not present the naked truth but truth in the garb of
symbols. But to what action does it im|>el! Unless the prophet can express
his moral insight into definite enough moral purposes, principles, and indeed
into a socio-political structure, neither his insight nor the potency of his imagi
native revelation will be of much use. The prophet, therefore, needs to be a
500
Ibn Sina
Lawgiver and a statesman par excellence—indeed the real Lawgiver and
statesman is only a prophet. This practical criterion throws into still bolder
relief the personality of Muhammad in the philosopher’s mind The Law
(Sbari'ah) must be such that it should be effective in making people
socially good, should remind them of God at every step, and should also serve
for them as a pedagogic measure in order to open their eyes beyond its own
exterior, so that they may attain to a vision of the true spiritual purpose of
the Lawgiver. The Law is not abrogated at any stage for anybody, but only
the philosophic vision of the truth gives to the I-aw its real meaning; ami
when that vision is attained, the Law Booms like a ladder which one has climbed
but which it would still be unwise to discard. For those relatively unfortunate
souls which cannot Bee through the Law its philosophic truth, the technical
revelation and the letter of the Law must remain the literal truth.
E
GOD AND THE WORLD
We have learnt in the first section that God is unique in that He is the
Necessary Being; everything else is contingent in itself and depends for its
existence upon God. The Necessary Being must be numerically one, Even
within this Being there can be no multiplicity of attributes—in fact. God has
no other essence, no other attributes than the fact that He exists, and exists
necessarily. This is expressed by ibn Sina by saying that God's essence is
identical with His necessary existence. Since God has no easenoe, He is abso
lutely simple and cannot be defined. But if He is without essence and attributes,
how can He be related to the world in any way I For Aristotle, who held this
conception of the Deity, the world presented itself as a veritable other—it
was neither the object of God’s creation, nor of care, not even of knowledge.
His God led a blissful life of eternal self-contemplation and the world organized
itself into a cosmos out of love and admiration for Him, to become like Him,
The Muslim philosophical tradition finds the solution under the influence
of the Neo-PIatonic example which combines God's absolute simplicity with
the idea that, in knowing Himself, God also knows in an implicit, simple manner
the essences of things. The system is worked out and systematized by ibn
Sina, who strives to derive God’s attributes of knowledge, creation, power,
will, etc., from His simple unchanging being, or, rather, to show that these
attributes are nothing but the fact of His existence. This is done by an attempt
to show that all the attributes are either relational or negative; they are, thus,
identical with God’s being and with one another. The Deity is, therefore,
absolutely simple. That God is knowing, is shown by the fact that being pure
from matter and pure spirit. He is pure intellect in which the subject and
object are identical.
But God’s self-knowledge is ipso facto knowledge of other things as well,
since, knowing Himself, He also inevitably knows the. rest of the existenta
which proceed from Him. Here ibn Sina strikes an original note. According
501
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to the philosophical tradition of Hellenism, God, at beet, can know only the
essences (or universals) and not the particular existent*, since these latter
can be known only through sense-perception and. therefore, in time; but God,
being supra-temporal and changeless and. further, incorporeal, cannot have
perceptual knowledge. This doctrine of the philosophers was especially re
pugnant to Islam, for it not only made God's knowledge imperfect, but it
made God Himself useless for those whose God He ia to be. Ibn Sina devises
an argument to show that although God cannot have perceptual knowledge.
He nevertheless knows all particulars "in a universal way,” so that perceptual
knowledge is superfluous for Him. Since God is the emanative cause of all
existent*. He knows both these existenta and the relations subsisting between
them. God knowB, for example, that after such a scries of events a solar
eclipse would occur, and knowing all the antecedents and consequences of
this eclipse, He knows in a determinate manner its qualities and properties;
He knows, therefore, what this particular eclipse will be, and can differentiate
it completely from all other events even of the same species, viz., eclipse in
general. But when the particular eclipse actually occurs in time, God, not
being subject to temporal change, cannot know it. But He also need not
know it in thia way, for He knows it already (see K. al-Najdl, Cairo, 1938,
pp. 247-49). Very ingenious though this theory is and. we think, successful
in showing that sense-perception is not the only way to know the particulars,
it is obvious that it cannot avoid the introduction of time factor, and, there
fore, change in divine knowledge. Al-QhaziU's criticism of the theory in tho
thirteenth discussion of his Taha/ut al-FalM/ah certainly finds the target at
this point, although his view that according to ibn Stna God cannot know
individual men but only man in general, is obviously mistaken, for if God
can know a particular sun-eclipee, why can He not know, in this manner, an
individual person! Indeed ibn Stna declares in the Qur'Anic language (op. cit..
p. 247) that "not a particle remains hidden from God in tho heavens or on
the earth."
As regards God's attributes of volition and creation, ibn Slni'a emanationist
account renders them really pointless aa al-Qhaz&li has shown. In a thoroughly
intellectualist-cmanationist account of the Deity, will has no meaning. For
ibn Sina, God’s will means nothing but the necessary procession of tho world
from Him and His self-satisfaction through this. Indeed, he defines it in purely
negative terms, vix., that God is not unwilling that the world proceed from
Him; this is very different from the positive attributes of choice and the
execution of that choice.
Similarly, the creative activity of God, for ibn Sina, means the eternal
emanation or procession of the world, and since this emanation is grounded
finally in the intellectual nature of God, it has the character of unalterable
rational necessity. Even though al-Qhazall's criticism which assimilates the
divine activity of ibn Sin* to the automatic procession of light from the sun
and. thus, rejects the appellation of “act" to God’s behaviour, is not quite
502
Ibn Sinn
correct (since according to ibn Slna, God is not only conscious of tho pro
cession of the world from Him. but is also satisfied with and “willing" to it),
the term "creation" is nevertheless used only in a Pickwickian sense, and the
term "act" (in the sense of voluntary action) is also seriously modified, since,
as we have said, there is no question of real choice. Rationally determined,
activity is. of course, compatible with will and choice and can also be said to
be done with choice, but this choice has to be brought in as an additional
element both initially and finally. For, suppose, a man chooses to think about
a certain problem. Now, the initial choice is his own to think about this rather
than that problem and then at any moment he can also choose or will to
terminate this process of thinking. What goes on between the beginning and
the end will be a rationally determined process of thought, and not a series
of choices, though the process as a whole is also chosen and voluntary. But
in the. philosophical account of God there is just no room for this additional
factor either at the end or at tho beginning.
The world, then, exists eternally with God, for both matter and forms
flow eternally from Him. But although this concept was abhorrent to Islamic
orthodoxy, ibn Sink’s purpose in introducing it was to try to do justico both
to the demands of religion and of reason and to avoid atheistic materialism.
For the materialists, the world has existed eternally without God. For ibn
Slna, too, the world is an eternal existent, but since it is in itself contingent,
in its entirety it needs God and is dependent upon Him eternally. We see here
the double purpose of the doctrine of essence and existence. Unlike atheism,
it requires God who should bestow being upon existents; and in order to avoid
pantheism, it further requires that the being of God should be radically dif
ferentiated from the being of the world.
The chief crux of the eternity of tho world, which has been stressed by the
opponents of the doctrine throughout the history of thought, is that it involves
an actual infinite series in tho past. In answer, it has been said, ever since
Kant, that it is not impossible at all to imagine an infinite in the past, just as
it is not impossible to imagine it in the future, i.e., there is no absurdity
involved in starting from any given moment backwards and traversing the
past and at no point coming to the beginning of the past. The fallacy of this
answer consists in assimilating the past to the future, for the past is something
actual in the sense that it has happened and is, therefore, determinate once
and for alL But the same fallacy, we think, is implied in the objection itself,
sod it scorns that the application of the term "infinite" is inappropriately used
tor the past: the term "infinite” is used either for a series which is endless or
which it both beginningless and endless. According to the thesis, the series
ia bcguminglaia in the poet, and endless in the future, whereas the objection
seeks to put an end to the scries at a given moment of time and then argues
for an infinity in the past. Also, whereas beginning is a temporal concept,
bcginninglessncss is a negation and need not be a temporal concept, but the
objection obviously implies "infinity in the past" as a temporal concept
503
A History of Muslim l'hiknopliy
F
INFLUENCE ON THE EAST AND THE WEST
The influence of ibn Hird's thought has been enormous. In the East, indeed,
his system has dominated the Muslim philosophical tradition right down to
the modem era when his place is being given to some modem Western thinkers
by those who havo been educated in modern universities. In the madra-saha
run on traditional lines, ibn Sina is still studied as the greatest philosopher of
Islam. This is because no subsequent philosopher of equal originality and
acuteness produced a system after him Ibn Rusikl, the last great philosophical
name in the medieval tradition of Muslim philosophy, did not formulate his
thought systematically, but chose to write commentaries on Aristotle's works.
These commentaries, because of their superb scholariincss and acuteness, had
a tremendous impact on the medieval West (which received Aristotle first
through him) but were not only not influential in the Muslim East, but most
of them are even lost in the original Arabic. His comparative lack of influence,
of course, is chiefly due to the destruction of his works. For the rest, the sub
sequent philosophical activity was confined to tho writing of commentaries
on ibn Sina or polemics against him. Rare exceptions, like $adr al-Din al-
(yhlrizi, who wrote works on systematic philosophy, became less philosophical
and more mystical in their intellectual, if not spiritual, temper. Nevertheless,
these commentaries and polemics against and for ibn Sina and later systems
have never yet been studied to any appreciable extent by modern students.
Now, let us determine more exactly the influence of ibn Sina within the
Islamic tradition. To say that he has dominated tho philosophical tradition
in Islam ia certainly not to say that he has dominated the Islamic tradition
itself. On the contrary, the influence of ibn Sina—which is equivalent to the
influence of philosophy within Islam suddenly and sharply dwindled after
the polemics of al QhazAli and later on of al-Rkzi and then declined and be
came moribund. He continued to be read in the madrasaJts merely as an
intellectual training ground for theological students, not to philosophize snow
but to refute or reject philosophy. The chief contributory factors to this situa
tion were the formal rigidity of dogmatic theology and the fact that human
reason itself became suspect due to the incompatibility of certain tenets of
ibn Sina with this theology (besides, of course, social, political, educational,
and economic causes). Not only did the philosopher's oonoept of the eternity of
the world give affront to orthodoxy but also to those doctrines of his own which
were developed with an especial regard for Islam, like the doctrine of prophet
hood. But perhaps the greatest theological objection was to his rejection of
the bodily resurrection. On this point, although he maintains in the K. al
Najal (and the -SAi/d’) that the resurrection of the flesh, while not demonstrable
by reason, ought to be believed on faith; in his expressly esoteric work called
ItiMilal al-Adwiyyah he rejects it in totality and with vehemence.
I bn .Sink's works were translated into Latin in Spain in the middle of the
504
Ibn 8ina
sizth/twelfth century. The influence of his thought in the West has been pro
found and far-reaching. We have, while discussing ibn Sink's individual
theories, alluded time and again to certain definite influences of his. But as it
is impossible to do justice to this aspect fully within the Bpace at our disposal,
we shall be content with certain general remarks. Ibn Sink's influence in the
West started penetrating palpably since the time of Albert the Great, the
famous saint and teacher of St Thomas Aquinas. Aquinas' own metaphysics
land theology) will be unintelligible without an understanding of the debt he
owes to ibn Sina. No one can fail to observe ibn Sink’s influence even in
Aquinas' later and bigger works like the Summa Theologica and tho Summa
contra Gentiles. But the influence of the Muslim philosopher in the earlier
formative period of the Christian Saint is overwhelming; he is mentioned by
the latter, e.g.. on almost each page of his De Enle el Essentia which is, indeed
the foundation of Aquinas' metaphysics. No doubt, ibn Sina is also frequently
criticized by Aquinas and others, but even the amount of criticism itself
shows in what esteem he was held in the West.
But the influence of ibn Sina is not restricted to Aquinas," or, indeed, to
the Dominican Order or even to the official theologians of the West. The
translator of his De Anima, Gundisalvus, himself wrote a De Anima which is
largely a wholesale tranaporation of ibn Sink’s doctrines. Similar is the case
with tho medieval philosophers and scientista, Robert Grosseteste and Roger
Bacon. Duns Scotus and Count Zabarclla, the finest of tho late medieval
commentators of Aristotle, also bear testimony to ibn Sink's enduring influence
Dr. S. van den Bergh in his Averroes' Taha/ul at-Tahdlul. London, 1954
(Vol. II, passim) has traced the influence of certain of the ideas of the Shaikh
al-Ra'ls down to modern times.
But it would be futile to go on giving a mere catalogue of individual authors
In fact, the historic influence of this rich personality is a phenomenon which
is being realized only now in the West and Professor Eticnno Gilson has
started it off notably by his articles: (1) "Aviceone et le point de dkpart de
Duns Scot" and (2) "Les sources grfco-arabee de l'augustinisme avicenniaant”
(in Arch. Hist. Doctr. Litt., 1927 and 1929, respectively). Since then partial and
not very determined efforts have been made on the subject, but there is still
no comprehensive treatment. Still less satisfactory is the treatment of the
historic influence of ibn Sbik's scientific thought, although again beginnings
have been made, notably by Professor Sarton and Dr. Crombie's work (see
also Avicenna, Scientist dr Philosopher, edited by G. M. Wickens, London,
1952, Chape. 4, 5, 8).
But the question of his influence on the West and East apart, a very small
portion of his original works has ever been edited. In 1951, the Egyptian
" Mias A. M. Goiohon'a La Philosophic d'Avicenne et son Influence sn Europe
mtdilvale, Paris, 1944, may be consulted; in general, however, the author's know
ledge of Arabic and philosophy should be taken cautiously.
505
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Government and the Arab League set up a Committee in Cairo to edit the
encyclopaedia, Kitdb al-Sii/a. Some parts of it have already been published.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Besides tho works mentioned in the body of this chapter, and tho bibliography
given by Father Anawali, an account of tho works on ibn Sina between 1945 and
1952 will be found in the Quarterly. 1953. PWosopAiad Surveys. Vol.
VIII. Part 1, "Medieval Islamic Philosophy" by R. Walter, and in P. J. do O. P.
Menasco’s "Bibliographiaehe EinTuhrangen in das Studium der Philosophic," 6,
Arabixhr rhUotopbte. Born, 1948.
Chapter XXVI
IBN BAJJAH
Abu Bakr Muhammad ibn Yahya al-§*'igh, known aa ibn Bijjah or Avem-
pace (d. S33/1138). hailed from the family al- TujUi and is, therefore, also known
as al- TujUn. Ibn Bijjah waa born at Saragossa towards the end of the fifth/
eleventh century, and prospered there. We have no knowledge of his early
life, nor have we any idea of the teachers under whom he completed his studies.
However, this much is clear that he finished hia academic career at Saragossa,
for when he travelled to Granada he waa already an accomplished scholar of
Arabic language and literature and claimed to be well versed In twelve sciences.
Thia is evident from the incident that occurred in tho mosque of Granada aa
reoorded by al.8uyu(i: "One day ibn Bftjjah entered the mosque (jdmi'ak)
of Granada. He saw a grammarian giving lessons on grammar to the students
sitting around him. Seeing a stranger so dose to them, ths young students
addressed ibn Bajjah, rather by way of mockery; ‘What does the jurist carry!
What science has he exoelled in, and what views does he hold !' ‘Look here,’
replied ibn Bajjah. 'I am carrying twelve thousand dinar under my armpit.'
He thereupon showed them twelve valuable pearls of exquisite beauty each
of the value of one thousand dindr. ’I have.' added ibn Bajjah, 'gathered
experience in twelve sciences, and mostly in tho scienoe of 'AraMyyaA which
you are discussing. In my opinion you belong to such and such a group.' He
then mentioned their lineage. Tho young students in their utter surprise begged
his forgiveness."1
Historians are unanimous in regarding him as a man of vast knowledge and
eminence in various sciences. Fath ibn I£h&q4n. who has charged ibn Bajjah
> BugtouA. Egypt. 1325 A. H.
506
Ibn BAjjah
of heresy and has bitterly criticized his character in his Qala'id at-'lqyAn,'
also admits his vast knowledge and finds no fault with his intellectual
excellence. On account of his wealth of information in Litorature. grammar
and ancient philosophy, he has been compared by his contemporaries with
al-Shaikh al-Rah ibn Sina.1
Due to his growing fame, abu Bakr $abriwi, Governor of Saragossa, appoint
ed him as his vizier. But when Saragossa fell into the hands of Alphonso I,
King of Aragon, in 512/1118, ibn BAjjah had already left the city and reached
Seville via Valencia, settled there, and adopted the profession of a medical
practitioner. Later on. he left for Granada, where occurred the incident referred
to above. He then journeyed to north-west Africa.
On his arrival at ghitibah. ibn BAjjah waa imprisoned by Amir abu IshAq
Ibrihlm ibn Yilsuf ibn Tlshifln most probably on the charge of heresy, aa
Fatb ibn KhAqAn has it. But as Ronan opines,** he waa set free, probably on
the recommendation of his own disciple, father of the famous Spanish
philosopher ibn Rugfad.
Later on. when ibn BAjjah reached Fez, he entered the Court of the Governor,
abu Bakr Yabya ibn Yusuf ibn TAjjjifln, and rose to the rank of a vizier by
dint of his ability and rare scholarship. He held thia post for twenty years.
This was the time of great troubles and turmoils in the history of Spain
and north-west Africa. Tho governors of towns and cities proclaimed their
independence. Lawlessness and chaos prevailed all over the country. The
rival groups and personalities accused one another of heresy to gain supremacy
and to win the favour of tho people. The enemies of ibn fiajjah had already
declared him a heretic and tried several times to kill him. But all their efforts
proved a failure. Ibn Zuhr, the famous physician of the time, however, suc
ceeded in killing him by poison during RamadAn 533/1138 at Fez, where
he was buried by tho side of ibn al'Arabi the younger.
A
HI8 PREDECESSORS
There ia no doubt that philosophy ontered Spain after the third/ninth
century. Some of the ancient manuscript copies of RaMi'il IkhwSn al-Safa
available in Europe are ascribed to Maslamah ibn Ahmad al-Majrlji.
* Maslamah
was a great mathematician in Spain. He flourished during the reign of Rakam II
and died in 598/1003.
* Among his disciples, ibn al-Safa, ZahrAwi, KarmAni,
and abu Muslim 'Umar ibn Abmad ibn Khaldun al-Hadrami were famous for
mathematical sciences. Karman! and ibn Khaldftn were also known aa philo-
• Egyptian ad., p. 300.
■ Bugfew*. p. 207.
• « rawrroumt, pp. 32, 103.
• Vids the MS. Arabic Bodleian Hunt No. 296 entitled Boat'd /4*vdn al-Sa/a U
al-'Arif al-MajrUi.
• Ibn abi Usaibi'ah. Vol. IL p. 39.
507
A History of Muslim Philosophy
gophers. Ibn Khaldun al-Hadrami hailed from Seville and died in 449/1054.’
Karmini, whose full name is abu al-gakam ‘Amr ibn 'Abd al-Rabm&n ibn
Abmad ibn ‘Ali, hailed from Cordova, journeyed to the Eastern countries and
Studied medicine and arithmetic at Harran. On his return to Spain he settled
at Saragossa. According to the statement of Qiiji 9l‘id* and Maqqari,* he
was the first man who took the Kadd’il Ikkiodn al$a/a to Spain. KarmAni
died at Saragossa in 450/1063.
But philosophy had entered Spain long before the Ratd'U Ikfrwdn al-$afa
were introduced in that region. Muhammad ibn 'AbdQn al-Jabali1* travelled
to the East in 347/952, studied logic with abu Sulaim Muhammad ibn TAhir
ibn Bahram al-Sijistani, and returned to Spain in 360/965. Similarly, Ahmad
and ‘Umar, the two eons of YOnus al-BarrAni, entered Baghdad in 330/935,
studied sciences with ThAbit ibn SinAn ibn Jhabit ibn Qumh, and after a
considerable period returned to Spain in 351/956.11 This is evident that philo
sophy was imported into the West from the East and that in the fourth/
tenth century Spanish students studied mathematics, lladilk, Taftir. and Fiqh
as well as logic and other philosophical sciences at BagfodAd, Basrah, Damas
cus, and Egypt. But from the end of the fourth/tenth century, when philo
sophy and logic were condemned in Spain and the advocates of these sciences
were persecuted, the common people stopped favouring these sciences as far
down as the fifth and sixth/clcventh and twelfth centuries. This was the
reason why ibn BAjjah, ibn Tufail, and ibn Hujhd had to face persecution,
imprisonment, and condemnation. Very few people in those days dared deal
with rational soiences.
Among the predecessors of ibn BAjjah, ibn Hazm deserves special attention.
Ibn Hazm occupies a very high place in theology and other religious scienoee.
Hia Kitab al-Fatl fi al-Milal w-al-Nihal is unique in that he has reoorded the
creeds and doctrines of the Christians, Jews, and others without displaying
any prejudice. But in the domain of philosophy he has never been mentioned
by any Spanish scholar side by side with the philosophers. Maqqari records
"Ibn HabbAn and others say. ibn Hazm was a man of Hadilh. jurisprudence,
and polemics. He wrote many books on logic and philosophy in which he did
not escape errors."
B
HIS CONTEMPORARIES
For throwing light on the contemporary thinkers of ibn BAjjah we have no
earlier authority than his own disciple ibn al-ImAm, through whom we have
' Ibid., p. 41.
• Ibid., p. 40.
• Al Maqqari. An/*. Vol. II. p. 132.
•• Ibn abi Cfaibi'ah. Vol. II. p. 41.
11 Ibid., p. 42.
'• Al-Maqqari. op. oil.. Vol. I. p. 358.
508
Ibn Btjjah
received information about his writings. Al-Waxlr abu al-^aaan ’AU ibn 'Abd
al-'Aziz ibn al-Imim, a devoted disciple of ibn Bkjjah, preserved the latter’s
writings in an anthology to which he added an introduction of his own. That
ibn Bijjah waa very fond of this disciple, a vizier, is apparent from the pre
amble of his letters addressed to him which are available in the said anthology
as preserved in the Bodleian Library, Oxford.1’ In his introduction to the
anthology, ibn al-ImAm says: "... the philosophical books were current in
Spanish cities in the time of al-Hakamll (350/961-360/976), who had imported
the rare worlu composed in tho East and had got them made clear. He (ibn
Bijjah) transcribed tho books of the ancients and others and carried on his
investigation into these works. The way had not been opened to any investi
gator before him (ibn Bijjah). Nor had anything except errors and alterations
been recorded concerning these ocienoos of the ancients. A number of errors
for example, were committed by ibn Hazm, who was one of the most oxalted
investigators of his time, while most of them had not ventured even to record
their thoughts. Ibn Bijjah waa superior to ibn IJazm in investigation, and
more penetrating in making distinctions. Tho ways of investigation in these
sciences were opened only to this scholar (ibn BUjjah) and to Malik ibn Wuhaib
of Seville, both of whom were contemporaries. But except for a short account
of the principles of logic nothing was recorded by Malik. Thon he gave up
investigating these sciences and speaking about them openly, because of the
attempts made on his life due to his discussing philosophical sciences, and
due to the fact that he aimed at victory in all hia conferences on scientific
subjects. He turned to the religious sciences and became one of the leaders
in them; but the light of philosophical knowledge did not shine upon his
mind, nor did he record in philosophy anything of a private nature which
could be found after his death. As for abu Bakr (may Allah show him mercy)
his superior nature stirred him not to give up investigating into, inferring
from, and reading all that had left its real impression on his mind on various
occasions in the changing conditions of his time.”
The words of ibn al-Imim are quite clearly appreciative of the merits of
the contemporary Malik, and of predecessors like ibn IJazm. Ibn al-Imam's
praise of his teacher has been shared by a number of historians. Ibn Tufail.
the famous author of the well-known philosophical romance, fiayy Ibn Yaqftn.
and a younger contemporary of ibn B&jjah, singles out ibn Bijjah in the
introduction to his immortal romance, and describes him as follows: "But
none of them possessed a more penetrative mind, a more accurate view, or
a more truthful insight than abu Bakr ibn al-§4’igh-”
Al-Sbaqandi (d. 629/1231). in hia famous letter in which he enumerates the
achievements of the Spanish Muslima as against the Africans, challenges the
latter by saying: "Have you anybody among yourselves like ibn Bijjah in
music and philosophy I”1’ Maqqari records the following statement: "As for
E. Pococke 200. Foil. 12Sa-213a.
*• Al-Maqqari, op. cil.. Vol. II. p. 141.
509
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the works on music, the book of ibn Bijjsh of Granada is sufficient by itself.
He occupies in the West the place of abu Nasr al-Faribi in the East."1’
Another contemporary of ibn BJjjah waa al Amir al-Muqtadir ibn Hud,
who reigned over Saragossa (436/1045-474/1081). He haa been mentioned
by al-Sbaqandi. who addresses the Africans in those words: “Have you any
king expert in mathematics and philosophy like al-Muqtadir ibn Hud, the
ruler of Saragossa I”1* His son al-Mu'tamin (d. 474/1085) waa a patron of
rational sciences.1’
WORKS
We give below a list of ibn Bijjah’s works:
1. The Bodleian MS., Arabio Pooocke, No. 206, contains 222 folios.1* It was
written in Rabi' II 547/1152 at Qus. This MS. lacks the treatise on
medicine, and Riadlal alH'add'
2. The Berlin MS. No. 5060 (vide Ahlwardt: Catalogue), lost during World
War 11.
3. The Escurial MS. No. 612. It contains only those treatises which ibn
Bajjah wrote aa commentaries on the treatises of al-Flribi on logic. It
waa written at Seville in 667/1307.
4. The Khediviah MS. A kbldq No. 290. It has been published by Dr. Omar
Farrukh in his Ibn Bdjjah w.al-FalMfab al- Magbribiyyah. On oom*
parison it has been established that this is an abridgment of Tadbir
alifulawatfiid—abridgment in the sense that it omits the greater pate
of the text but retains the very words of the original writer.
5. Brockelmann states that the Berlin Library possesses a unique ode of
ibn Bijjah entitled Tardlyyab.
6 Works edited by Asin Paiacios with their Spanish translation and neces
sary notes, (i) KUab al-Nabal. al-Andaltu, Vol. V. 1940; (ii) Rudlah
Iltiedl al-'Agl bi al-Insan, al-Andahu, Vol. VII, 1942; (iii) TiimitaA al-
W’aAF, al-Andaltu, Vol. VIII, 1943; (iv) Tadbir al-ifulaun^ul entitled
El Regimen Del Bolitario. 1946.
7 Works edited by Dr. M. Saghir Hasan al-Ma'sumi: (1) KiUb al-Na/e
with notes and introduction in Arabic, Majallab al-Majma' al-'llm
Ibid., p. 1ST.
« Ibid., p. 141.
■’ Ibid.. Vol. I. p. 288.
For details see Afo'dri/. Aramgarh, 1954, Vol. LXXIH 73, No. 2.
510
Ibn BAjjah
al-'Arabi, Damascus, 1958; (ii) AmUoA al Gfuiyah al-1nMniyyoA entitled
Ibn Bdjjah on Human End, with English translation. Journal of Asiatic
Society of Pakistan, Vol. II. 1957.
PHILOSOPHY
Ibn BAjjah was skilled both in the theory and practice of the mathematical
sciences, particularly astronomy and music, adept in medicine, and devoted
to speculative studies like logic, natural philosophy, and metaphysics In de
Boer's opinion, he oonforms entirely to al-Firibi in his logical writings and
generally agrees with him even in his physical and metaphysical doctrines.1*
Let us examine how far this statement ia correct in the light of the writings
of ibn BAjjah that have come down to us.
Ibn BAjjah has undoubtedly relied in philosophy and logic on the works of
al-Farabi, but it is obvious that he has made considerable additions to them.
Again, he has adopted an entirely different method of philosophical investiga
tion. Unlike al-Firibi, he deals with the problems on the basis of reason
alone. He admires the philosophy of Aristotle on which he has founded his
own system. But, he says, for understanding the speculative method of
Aristotle it is of utmost importance to understand, first of all. his philosophy
correctly. That is why ibn BAjjah wrote his commentaries on the works of
Aristotle. These commentaries bear clear evidence that he studied the texts
of Ariatotle very carefully. Aa in Aristotle's philosophy, ibn BAjjah has baaed
his metaphysics and psychology on physics, and that is why his writings
abound in discourses on physics.
MATTER AND FORM
De Boer writes: “lbn BAjjah starts with the assumption that matter cannot
exist without some form, while form may exist by itself, without matter."
But this is erroneous. Aooording to ibn BAjjah. matter can exist without form.
He argues that if matter ia not formless then it will be divided into "matter”
and "form," and this will go on ad in/initam.*’ Ibn BAjjah claims that the
"First Form" ia an abstract form which exists in matter that is said to have no
form.
» TAe History of Philosophy in Islam, p. 117,
•• Somd'. Fol. 7a. Arial. Phys.. i. 7. I»la8.
511
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Aristotle defines matter as what receives form and is in a way universal. His
matter in this sense differs from the matter of Plato who, though agreeing
with the above definition, maintains that form in itself is real and needs
nothing to bring it into existence. The aim of Aristotle is not only to state
that matter and form are dependent upon each other but also to distinguish the
particular form of a species from that of another species. The form of a plant
is different, for example, from the form of an animal, and the form of an
inanimate object differs from the form of a plant, and so on.
In the writings of ibn Bajjah the word /orm has been used to convey Several
different meanings: soul, figure, power, meaning, concept, in his opinion the
form of a body has three stages: (1) tho general spirit or the intellectual form,
(2) the particular spiritual form, and 13) the physical form.
He has divided the spiritual form into the following types: —
1. The forms of circular bodies have only this much connection with matter
that they make the material intelligiblen perfect.
2. The material intelligible* which exist in mattor.
3. Those forma which exist in the faculties of the soul—common sense,
imaginative faculty, memory, etc., and are tho via mrdui between spi
ritual forms and material intelligible*.
Those forms which are related to the active intellect are called by ibn
lWjjah general spiritual forms, and those which are related to the com
mon sense are called particular spiritual forms. This distinction has been
maintained because the general spiritual forms have only one relation and
that with the recipient, whereas the particular • spiritual fofms have two
relations—one particular with the sensible, and the other general with the
percipient. A man, for example, recalls tho form of the Taj Mahal; this form
is not different from the form of the actual Taj Mahal when it is before the
eyes—this form has. besides the aforementioned particular relation, a relation
with the general body of percipients, since there are many individuals who
enjoy the sight of tho Taj Mahal.
F
PSYCHOLOGY
Ibn Bajjah. like Aristotle, bases his psychology on physics. He begins his
discussion of the soul with its definition by stating that bodies, natural or
artificial, are composed of matter and form, their form being the permanent
acquisition or the entelechy of the body. Entelechy is of various kinds: it
belongs either to those existents that perform their function without being
essentially moved, or to those that movo or act while they are being acted
upon. A body of thia latter type is composed of both mover and moved,
whereas the artificial body has its mover outside. Now, the form that supplies
the cntclechy of a natural body is callod the soul. The soul is, therefore, defined
512
Ibn Bajjah
“ the first entelechy in a natural, organized body which is either nutritive,
sensitive, or imaginative.
The ancient philosophers who preceded Aristotle had confined their study
to the human soul alone and regarded the study of the animal soul as a part
of natural soienee. Soul is an equivocal term, because it is not homogeneous
in nature. If it were so. its functions would have likewise been homogeneous.
It actually functions heterogeneously: nutritively, sensitively, imaginatively,
or rationally.
Sinoe every transitory being has to perform a particular function in virtue
of which it stands as a part of the universe, the nutritive faculty has two
ends, namely, growth and reproduction. This faculty does not only provide
substances which are needed for the upkeep of the bxly, but also a surplus
which is employed for the growth and development of the body. But when
tho growth is completed, the surplus is used for reproduction in those bodies
that are reproductive.
The faculty of reproduction is to be distinguished from the nutritive faculty
which acta on food and makes it a part of tho body. Thia faculty is the "Actual
Intellect" which changes a potential species into the body of an actual species.
Those bodies that are not reproductive depend for the preservation of their
species upon spontaneous generation. Tho reproductive faculty is the end of
the faculty of growth and perishes only in old age when the nutritive faculty
is left alone.
Sense-perception is either actual or potential. What is potential con become
actual only when it is changed by something else. It. therefore, requires a
mover to change it. This mover is the sensible, the moved being the sense,
organ.
The sensibles or the natural accidents are of two kinds: either they are
particular to the natural bodies or common to tbe natural and the artificial
bodies; and they arc, again, either mover or moved. They are always moved
towards the species, sines a mover causes motion in them only in so far as
they are particular species, and not because they possess matter. Every sen
tient body ia composite and is the result of a mixture of different elements.
This mixture is produced by innate heat and gives rise, for example, to con
densation and rarefaction, as of odours, flavours, and colours. But besides
these material states, there arise oertain other states such as reproduction and
spontaneous generation which are caused by the intellect or some other mover.
As soon as the process of mixture begins, the form begins to be received.
Motion and reception of form take place simultaneously; and when the soul
attains perfection, the reception of form is completed, matter and form, thus,
becoming a single whole. When form is separated from matter.it exists actually
as abstracted from matter, but is not the same as it is when it is in matter—
and thia is possible only if it now exists as an idea in the mind. Sensation is,
therefore, transitory. But how can a separate form be transitory, since tran-
aitorineas is only due to matter I The answer is this. The term ' matter” is
513
A History of Muslim Philosophy
used for ''psychical faculty" and "corporeal faculty" equivocally, and it
means only the receptivity of form through which a body that has the faculty
of sensitivity becomes sentient. The faculty of sense-perception is, therefore,
a capacity in the sense-organ that becomes a form of the thing perceived.
But a further question arises: If perception is a form in matter, how can
matter actually exist when it is not so informed 1 The answer ia given aa fol
lows: "That ‘apprehensions' are in a substratum and are identical with it,
is clear, or else 'an apprehension' would not be a particular. But it does not
follow from this that form cannot exist apart from matter since the matter
of 'apprehension' is the receptivity of the forms of the apprehensibles only,
and is called matter per prius, while the matter of the 'apprehensible' is called
per posientis.”
Psychical perception is of two kinds: sensation and imagination. As said
before, sensation is by nature prior to imagination, for which it supplies th,
matter. In short, sensation is a capacity of the body which is acted upon b_>
the sensible. Since movements are many, sensations are also many; and be
cause the sen iblcs are either general or particular, sensations are also genera
or particular.
The five senses—sight, hearing, smell, taste, and touch—are five faculties
of a single sense, viz., the common sense. Common sense plays the role of
matter through which the forms of things become perceptible. It is through
common sense that a man judges and distinguishes different states of the
perceptible and realizes that every particle of an apple, for example, possesses
taste, smell, colour, warmth, or cold. For this faculty preserves the impres
sions of the sensibles which enable the senses to apprehend the sensiblee.
The common sense is the entelechy of the whole body and is, therefore, called
the soul. This faculty also supplies matter for the faculty of imagination.
Defined aa the first entelechy of the organized imaginative body, the imagina
tive faculty is preceded by sensation which supplies material to it. Sensation
and imagination have, therefore, been described aa two kinds of the perceptior
of the soul. But the difference between the two is obvious inasmuch as sen
sation ia particular and imagination general. The imaginative faculty culminates
in the reasoning faculty through which one man expresses himself to another,
and achieves as well as imparts knowledge
The appetitive soul consists of three faculties: (I) The imaginative appetence
through which progeny are reared, individuals are moved to their dwellings,
and have affoction, love, and tho like. (2) The intermediate appetonoe through
which there is desire for food, housing, arts and crafts. (3) The appetence that
makes speech and, through that, teaching possible and, unlike the other two,
is peculiar to man.
The appetitive soul is applied to these three faculties per prius et per poste
rity Every animal possesses the intermediate appetence by which it inclines
to nutrition. Some animals do not possess the imaginative yearning. The
veaming of intermediate appetence precedes by nature the imaginative appe
514
Ibn B4jj.h
tence. The one thing that is clear ia that every man has two faculties—the
appetitive and the rational—and these precede others by nature.
The appetitive soul desires a perpetual object or an object in so far as it
is perpetual. Thia desire ia called pleasure, and the absence of desire is dull
ness, pain, and tho like. Action is caused by desire, and perpetuity is caused
by the faculties. Desire ia not distinctive of man. Anyone who does an action
induced by desire is regarded to have done an action based on animality. It is
obvious that when a man acts in this manner, he does it not because he is
possessed of ideas. He attains perpetuity only to the extent to which he is
possessed of them.
Though devoid of eternity, the appetitive soul has a strong desire for
eternity. It loves only the intermediate imaginary form and the imaginary
form. These are the only two forms which arc perpetually loved by the appeti
tive soul. But since forma are many, the appetitive soul hesitates to make an
attempt to realize them. Again, the appetitive soul seeks the service of nature,
and suffers from pain and laziness when nature does not co-operate with it.
Aa nature is not simple, it is not always in one and the same state. It is due
to nature that an animal needs rest, and it is due to the appetitive soul that
it feels dissatisfied with it when prolonged.
But these two forms (i. e., the intermediate imaginary form and the imaginary
form) are transitory, not eternal. Henoe the appetitive soul does not achieve
eternity but that which represents it, and what represents it is not difficult
to estimate, for individuals as individuals think that they achieve eternity
through perfection and perfection through the attainment of power and free
dom. Hence arises the power and freedom of those despots who hold sway
over large areas of the world. Their unlimited power, abundant wealth, and
unbridled activities, however, bring them no benefit, for most of them die of
hunger and in utter regret for losing what they possessed. They are overtaken
by fatigue and distress in dealing with the appetitive soul. In their hearts
there survives the memory of their past and they feel regret and remorse.
When this occurs to the class of despots, what will be the fate of those who are.
lower in rank ! This is as it should be, because the anxiety of their appetitive
soul ia to collect what is not to be collected and achieve what is not to be
achieved. The animals which have no reason do not suffer from this kind of
remorse, for their appetitive soul has no ambition and they have no memory
of their past whims. They suffer only from natural calamities such as old age.
which ia the lot of every natural organism.
The imaginative faculty in man is the faculty through which he receives
impressions of the sensibles and presents them before himself in imagination
after their disappearance. This function of the imaginative faculty takes place
both in our waking life and in sleep. This faculty also composes forms of the
objects of imagination never sensed before. Sometimes it imagines and com
poses something which is not an individual hut something applicable to a
whole class.
51$
A History of Muslim Philosophy
At the final stage of imagination appears the intellect, and the rational
faculty starts functioning; and we find in ourselves something which distin
guishes! us from other animals that obtain nutrition and possess sense-organs.
Man finds in himself, for example, some objects of knowledge (concepts)
containing the distinction between good and evil, useful and harmful. He also
finds in himself things which he considers to be definitely true, t hings which
are merely conjectural, and things which are false. These known objects in
the soul are called logos. Logos is in the first instance related to the potential
rational faculty, tho function of which is to receive the objects of knowledge.
This is so because in the earlier stages man ia devoid of them and receives
them only at a later stage. The term •‘logos" is applicable to the objects of
knowledge after they become potentially roceptible, and also when they
actually exist and aro expressed through words. These objects of knowledge
(concepts) which exist in potentiality and become actual in rationality, when
considered in relation to the objects which they signify, constitute their know
ledge since they are known through and recognized by them. When they ere
considered in to far as they are perceived by the imaginative faculty and are
applied to the contents derived from them, they are called intclligibles; but
when they are considered in so far aa they are peroeived by the rational
faculty which completes them and brings them from potentiality into actuality,
they are called mind or the intellect. There aro various grades of knowledge,
the first of which is the knowledge of a particularly specified object. This
primarily comes into being by achieving the apprehension of the particular
in tho imaginative faculty in a general way only, i.e., it cannot be imagined
specifically. Nor can any quality of the same be described. But it is distin
guished in a general way without attending to any one of its qualities. This is
the weakest knowledge of au object and resembles the imagination of an
animal. Again, when the state of the particular is possible in the imaginative
faculty, man advances to this particular with its derailed characteristics, which
help him to recognize it to be the same at different times. He distinguishes Zaid,
for example, aa tall, fair, delicate, and considers all these descriptions in his
imagination as though they were related numerically to one individual. Some
people, however, think that sometimes words lead to absurdity for they intro
duce multiplicity where there is only unity: for example, the particular which
is described by the words "tall," "fair." and so on, is not more than one. How
ever, this is the way in which man achieves the knowledge of individuals in
so far as they are definite anil particular. Since the qualities through which
the particular individuals are known as described above are accidents attached
to different individuals, there is no resemblance between any two individuals.
Tallness in Zaid, for example, is not exactly the same as tallness in Bakr.
When the objects of imagination are obtained in the imaginative faculty,
the ratiunal faculty looks at them through its insight, and realizes the universal
meanings. Through these universal meanings the rational faculty imagines
and distinguishes the nature of every imagined object. And when the words
516
Ibn BAjjah
indicating the universal meanings arc mentioned, the rational faculty distin
guishes them, presents them before tho mind, and apprehends them. AU this
occurs in more ways than one.
1. The rational faculty presents universal meanings before the mind, and
apprehends them as true of the imagined individuals signified by them.
Through insight the rational faculty sees the universal meanings in the indivi
duals. In thia sense this faculty distinguishes universal mcaningB from one
another in the manner described above.
2. According to another method, the rational faculty distinguishes these
universal meanings perfectly, but when it sees them through ita insight and
presents them to the soul weU arranged, it socs them through its insight in the
imaginative faculty which also acts upon them, and makes them resemble the
universal meaning and imparts to them forms which are common to more
than one. but not to aU individuals to which the meaning is applicable. The
sculptor represents the form of a home in stone, or a painter draws the form
of a home on the surface of a board, but thia representation is imperfect,
for it represents and reproduces the form of a horse that obtains nutrition,
and neigba. But all that is represented thus is not common to all homes. The
imaginative faculty represents things which are limited in respect of age, size,
eto. The image of a home is not common to the full-grown horse, the young
horse, and the colt. Its image is common only to the horses of that particular
size or age which the imaginative faculty represents.
As soon as the rational faculty makes distinctions of universal meanings,
and presents them to the mind to look more closely into them through its
insight, the latter looks into them through the image which the imaginative
faculty represents. The rational faculty distinguishes whether the image is
perfect or not perfect, common or not common. Without any difficulty it
thinks of the intelligible meanings. In this way the universal meanings are
apprehended by artists and most scientists. When the artisan, for example,
thinks how to make an article, he presents the image of the particular article
to his imaginative faculty, and prepares hia plan to make it. Similarly, when
a scientist looks into the objects of knowledge to know their nature and give
their description, he presents their images to his imaginative faculty.
These are two methods by which the imaginative faculty serves the rational
faculty by presenting to the latter the phantoms of an object, either the phan
toms of the individual object itself or those of ita image, which represents the
universal meaning, as mentioned above. The rational faculty imparts universal
descriptions to the objects of imagination. Whoever exerts the rational faculty
to act on the objects obtained in the imaginative faculty sees the confirmation
of what has been mentioned and sees through his rational faculty the divine
gift flowing over the faculty. This is just like a person who sees by the faculty
of seeing the light of the sun through the light of the sun.
The immediate cause of the apprehension of intelligibles anti the activity
of the rational faculty in actuality is a gift which is like the light of the sun
517
A History of Muslim Philosophy
through which one realizes and sees the creation of God so clearly that one
becomes a believer in Him, His angels, books, messengers, and the next world,
enjoys certain belief, and remembers God while standing, sitting, and lying.
Every thought is obtained through this gift which is no other than man's
connection with the active intellect.
Thus, it may be ooncludod that ibn B&jjah starts describing "Aristotelian
Psychology" and in the end arrives at the position of ibn Sina and also of
iil-GtazAli, whose name he mentions with respect and reverence.
G
INTELLECT AND KNOWLEDGE
According to ibn Bajjab, the intellect is the most important part of man.
In his opinion correct knowledge is obtained through the intellect which alone
enables us to attain prosperity and to build character. Something has already
been said about the source of the intellect and its working. The following
extracts will, however, throw some further light on the matter:
“It is necessary for man to see through his own insight the oontents of the
imaginative faculty, just as he sees the individual objects with his eyes and
distinguishes them fully. He is sure to find that those individual objects are
repeatedly impressed upon the imaginative faculty. Many imaginable objects
have one or more than one individual in the imaginative faculty. They also
possess the aocidents attached to these individuals, viz., measure, oolour.
knowledge, health, sickness, motion, time, space, and other categories. Having
realized all this, a man sees through his insight that the rational faculty
looks into the objects of imagination and apprehends their common charac
teristic, i. e., the differentia which distinguishes them from the objects of sense,
differentia by virtue of which they are considered to be individuals and distin
guished aa intelligible objects. One should also realize that these differentiae
are discerned by the rational faculty through the divine gift which flows over
them in the same way as the objects of sight become manifest to the perceiving
mind through the light of the sun that falls on them, without which light
they would remain completely invisible. Through the same gift the whole is
distinguished from its parts and is judged to be greater than the parts. Again,
numbers considered to be numerals are declared by this gift aa different and
many when investigation into God’s creation—the creatures of heaven and
earth, night and day, messengers, revelation, dreams, and what the soothsayer'*
tongue utters—is repeated so much that man comprehends them through the
imaginative faculty, and the rational faculty sees through its insight in a
pure, simple, and peculiar way the existence of objects which are neither
conceived by thought nor perceived by the senses. Ita outlook becomes widened,
and it desires to know the causes of those creatures which become intelligible.
The rational faoulty does not know the objects of knowledge adequately unless
it knows them through four causes—form, matter, agent, and purpose. Il ia
518
Ibn BAjjah
neoesaary to know all these causes in respect of the objects which inevitably
possess them. Man ia by nature inclined to investigate and know all these
causes. His inquiry covers in the first- instance tho four causes of the objects of
sense.perception. This is quite evident with respect to the objects of art aa well
as those of nature. Ho is all tho more interested in knowing the causes of the
intelligible objects, for this investigation is considered to be sublime, high, and
useful. Finally, it is through investigation of causes that man reaches the
belief in God, His angels, books, messengers, and the life hereafter.”
“Look," says ibn Bajjah, "into the wonders that lie between the intellect
and the faculty of imagination through your penetrative soul You can see
with certainty that tho intellect derives from the imaginative faculty the
objects of knowledge called the intelligibles, and offers to the imaginative
faculty a number of other objects of knowledge. Take, for example, the moral
and artistic ideals, or those objects of knowledge which are either the events
that might take place and are available in the imaginative faculty before
their occurrence, or the events that have not occurred but have found their
way into the imaginative faculty not through the sense-organs but rather
through the intellect aa in the case of true dreams. The most astonishing
thing concerning the imaginative faculty is that which relates to revelation
and soothsaying. It is clear in these cases that what the intellect offers to the
human imagination does not proceed from the intellect itself, nor is acted
upon by the intellect, but arises in imagination through an agent who has
known it beforehand, and is able to create it. It is God who causes by His
will the mover of the active spheres to act upon the passive spheres aa He likes.
When, for example, He intends to make manifest what will occur in the uni
verse. He first of all sends the knowledge to angels and through them to the
human intellect. This knowledge comes to man in accordance with his capacity
for receiving it. This is evident in most cases of God's virtuous servants whom
He has shown the right path and who are sincere to Him, particularly the
apostles to whom He makes manifest through His angels in waking life or
dream the wonderful events that are going to happen in the universe.
“God, the Almighty, makes manifest to His existing beings and creatures
both knowledge and deed. Every being receives these from Him according to
its rank in the perfection of existence: the intellects receive from Him know
ledge according to their positions, and spheres receive from Him figures and
physical forms according to their ranks and positions. Every oelestial body
possesses intellect and a soul through which it performs particular actions
which are perceived by way of imagination, such as the imagination of trans
ference from an imaginary place which continues to exist. Due to this indi
vidually perceptible particular transference there arise particular actions which
aro perceived by the bodies that come into being and pass away. This is most
manifest in the sun and the moon from among the celestial bodies It is through
this intellect that a man knows sciences which are revealed to him from God.
things that are intelligible the particular events which are to take place in
519
A History of Muslim l'hilooophy
the present and the future, as well as the events that happened in the past.
This ia the knowledge of the unseen of which God informs His chosen servants
through His angels.”
Ibn Bijjah further elucidates the nature of human knowledge and tho stages
thereof when he says: "Knowledge in man means hia seeing the existents to
gether with their perfect existence in his intellect through the insight of his
soul which is a gift of God. This gift of God is of different grades in different
men. the greatest insight being that of prophets who perfectly know Him and
His creatures, and enjoy that sublime knowledge in their own souls through
their excellent insights without learning and without making any effort Io learn.
The highest knowledge is that of God Himself and His angels down to tho
knowledge of what particular events have taken place and will take place in this
universe—knowledge gained through the insight of their hearts, without the
use of the eyes. In a lower rank than that of the prophets are tho friends of
God who possess excellent nature through which they derive from the prophets
that which enables them to attain to the knowledge of God and the knowledge
of His angels, books, apostle*, the Last Day, and the highest blessing, which
they continue to attest by the insight they enjoy in accordance with tho
different degrees of the divine gift they receive. These sincere men also receive
a little bit of the knowledge of the unseen in their dreams. The friends of God
include the Companions of the Prophet. After them come a number of men
whom God has favoured with insight through which they realiie with cer
tainty the reality of everything till stage by stage they attain to sure know
ledge of God, His angels, books, apostles, and the Last Day. They realize
through their insight that they have become pure and have achieved perfec
tion or the highest blessing, which is continuity without destruction, honour
without disgrace, and richness without fear of poverty. These people which
include Aristotle are very few in number.”
Ibn Bfijjah believes in the plurality of intellects and refers to the first
intellect and the secondary intellects. In his opinion, the human intellect is
the intellect remotest from the first intellect. He further explains the grades
of the intellect by saying that some intellects have been directly derived
from the first intellect, and some others are derived from other intellects, the
relation of what has been derived to that from which derivation has been made
being the same as the relation of the light of the sun which is inside the house
to that, of the sun which ia in the courtyard of the house.
Knowledge of the nature of existents which the intellect possesses is of
two kinds: (1) that which is intelligible but cannot be invented, and (2) that
which is intelligible and can be invented. The intellect itself is also of two
kinds: (i) theoretical intellect through which man understands things which
he cannot bring into being, and (ii) practical intellect through which he con
ceives artificial beings which he ran invent. Perfection of the practical intellect
lies in man's understanding artificial objects and bringing them into being in
accordance with his own intention. These are invented only through the
520
Ibn BAjjah
organs of the human body, either by the movement of the organs without
any implement from outside, or by moving the organs which in their turn
move some external instruments. This happens when the artificial objects are
accomplished by the human volition.
Human organa are moved per as, but when an artificial object is made, they
are moved by the human volition at first in the mind, and then the object is
produced outside the mind in aocordanoe with the image formed in the mind
before the organs bring it into being. This image is a phantom in the
imaginative faculty of the soul and is general. This image disappears from
the soul which obtains another image, and the process continues. Whenever
man intends to make a certain object, he forms an image in the imaginative
faculty. Then he can see by his insight that another faculty of the soul abstracts
this image in the imaginative faculty and transfers it from one state to an
other until ita existence is accomplished in the soul, and then he sets the organs
into motion to bring the object into being. This faculty which understands
and abstracts in imagination is called the practical intellect. When in the
imaginative faculty the practical intellect primarily abstracts the image of
the artificial object according to a particular form and size, the moving
faculty moves the organs to invent the object. The intellect is, therefore, the
first maker of the object, and not the organs which are moved by the soul,
nor indeed the faculty which moves the organs. It is clear that the power of
organs ia not primarily found in nature but is caused to oome into being by
the faculty of the intellect which causes it to appear in imagination, and only
then the organs cause the objects to be made through volition.
Tho imaginative faculty seeks the help of sense-perception at the time of
inventing the object to present it to the faculty which has moved the organs,
and to enable the intellect to compare and see whether the imagined object
belongs to sense-perception in the same way as it belongs to the imaginative
faculty.
The intellect has two functions to perform; (1) to present to the faculty of
imagination the image of the object to be created, and (2) to have the object
made outside the soul by moving the organs of the individual's body.
According to ibn BAjjah, the human intellect by degrees achieves nearness
to the first intellect in two ways: (1) by achieving knowledge based on proof,
in which case tho highest intellect is realized as form; and (2) by achieving
knowledge without learning or making an effort to acquire it. This second
method is that of the Sufis, notably of al-Qbaz&li; it enables one to gain the
knowledge of God.
From this it ia clear that though ibn B&jjah has emphasized the speculative
method, he does not condemn the mystic method, as some Europeans would
have us believe.*1
*■ De Boer. TAs History o/ Philosophy in Islam, p. 117
521
A History of Muslim Philosophy
H
GOD, THE FOUNTAIN-HEAD OF KNOWLEDGE
With regard to the divine gift through which the rational faculty discerns the
differentiae, one man excels another, and that in accordance with the capacity
that God has given him. But these two gifts are innate, not acquired. The
capacities and gifts which are acquired are next to the innate ones and they
are acquired by doing, under the guidance of tho prophets, what pleases God.
M»n therefore, should respond to the Holy Prophet's call and do what he urge®
him to do. He can. thus, see through the insight of his heart the nature of every
creature, its origin, and ita final destination. He can know in the same way
that God is a necessary being per re, is alone, has no associates, and is the
creator of everything; that everything besides Him is contingent and has
emanated from His perfect essence; that His self-knowledge implies His
knowledge of all objects; and that His knowledge of objects is the cause of
their coming into being.
To reduoe the number of stages to achieve nearness to God, ibn BAjjah
advises us to do three things: (1) charge our tongue® to rememebr God and
glorify Him. (2) charge our organs to act in accordance with the insight of
the heart, and (3) avoid what makes us indifferent to the remembrance of
God or turnB our hearta away from Him. These have to be followed con
tinuously for the whole of one's life.
I
POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY
Ibn BAjjah wrote a number of small treatises on the administration of the
House-State and the administration of the City-State, but the only available
book on the subject is Tadbir al-Mutawahpid (Regime of the Solitary).
As is clear from this book, ibn BAjjah agrees to a great extent with the political
theory of al-FArabi. Ho has, for example, accepted al-Farabl's division of the
State into perfect and imperfect. He also agrees with al-FArAbi in holding that
different individuals of a nation possess different dispositions—some of them
like to rule, and some others like to be ruled." But ibn BAjjah adds to the
system of al-FArAbi when he exhorts that the solitary man (mvtawahhid or the
penetrative philosopher) should keep aloof from the people in certain circum
stance®. Even though avoidance of people is in itself undesirable, it is necessary
in the endeavour to achieve perfection. He also advisee him that he should
meet the community only on a few inevitable occasions for a short time, and
that he should migrate to those countries where ho finds knowledge, migration
being perfectly permissible under the laws of the scienoe of politics."
■■ Tadbir, p. 62.
•• Ibid., p. 78.
522
Ibn tiajjan
In his ftiMlai al- Wadd' ibn BAjjah has given two alternative function* of the
State: (1) to estimate the deeds of the subjects in order to guide them tq reach
their intended goals and not any other ends. This function can be best per-
formed in the ideal State by a sovereign ruler. (2) The alternative function is
to devise means for the achievement of particular ends just as a rider as a
preliminary exercise acquires control over the bridle in order to become an
expert in riding. This ia the function of the administrators of those States
which are not ideal. In thia case the ruler is called the chief (ra’it). Tho chief
enforces in the State a traditional system for the subjects' execution of all
actions.
In the system of al-Firabi, aa well as in that of ibn B‘jjah, the constitution
is to be framed by the Head of the State, who has been equated by al-F&r&bi
with a prophet or ImAm. Ibn Bajjah does not mention this identity in so many
words but he indirectly agrees with al-Firibi when he declares that “human
perfection cannot be attained but through that which the apostles bring
from God the Exalted (i.e., the divine Law or Siari'ah). Those who follow
God’s guidance cannot be led astray."" It is, therefore, too sweeping a state-
ment to say, "He (ibn Bijjah) ignore* the political relevance of tho divine
Law (Sbari'ah) and its educative value for man as a citizen.""
J
ETHICS
Ibn Bijjah divide* actions into animal and human. The former are due to
natural needs and are human as well as animal. Eating, for example, is animal
in so far aa it is done to fulfil need and desire, and human in so far aa it is done
to preserve strength and life in order to achieve spiritual blowings.
Ibn Bijjah draws our attention to the active human faculties, as man is
too dignified to be qualified with the passive faculties which are either material
or animal. The human faculty of learning is a passive faculty, but it ia so in a
different sense. The active faculty intends to attain perfection only, and then it
stops, aa in the art through which a trade is accomplished. But the repetition
of the art ia exercised only through tho appetitive soul and opinion. What
is done due to the appetitive sou! ia the action which is done by tbe agent for
ita own sake. And, what is done by opinion ia the action which is done to gain
some other end. The appetitive soul desires a perpetual object, the desire
heing called pleasure, and ita absence dullness and pain. Anybody who per
forms an action in this way is regarded as having done an animal action.
Those who act through opinion act only in so far as they are men. Opinion
either moves one to that which is essentially porpctual, or to that which is
“ JioOlal al-Wadd', Bodleian MS. Fol. 137*.
“ E. I. J. Rosenthal, “Tho Place of Politics in the Philosophy of Ibn BAjjah,"
/domic Culture, Jubilee Number, Part 1. Hyderabad. 1951, p. 193.
323
A History of Muslim Philosophy
perpetual because it is abundant. If the action ia perpetual duo to abundance,
then the end will take the plaoe of the preliminary action. Thia end-seeking
ia either due to propensity only, in which case it is an animal action, or due to
opinion which has an intended goal in tho achievement of which lies its
completion. The end varies in accordance with the nature of the individuals;
tome people, for example, are born for shoe-making, and others for other
vocations. Ends serve one another mutually, and all of them load to one
and the same ultimate goal—-the chief end. The chief man is naturally he
who prepares himself to aim at the chief end, and those who are not prepared
for it are subservient by nature. Some people are. therefore, naturally sub
missive and are ruled by others, and some possess authority by nature and
rule others.
Opinion is sometimes right essentially. It is so when it desires the eternal.
Sometimes it is right accidentally and not in ita easenoe. The opinions of
the shrewd and crafty, for example, are right in respect of the objects they
have set up before them; but they are not right in-themselves. These opinions
are relatively right but not universally so. Colocynth is useful for a man oi
phlegmatic disposition, but not for all. On the other hand, bread and meat
are useful both naturally and universally. The opinion which is right relatively
as much as generally is right absolutely. But sometimes what ia relatively
right is not so in general, and is, therefore, right in one respect and wrong in
another.
To declare an action animal or Auman it is necessary to have speculation
in addition to volition. Keeping in view the nature of volition aa well as
speculation ibn BAjjah divides tho virtues into two types, the formal virtues
and the speculative virtues. A formal virtue is innate without any trace of
volition and speculation, such as the honesty of a dog, sinoe it is impossible
for a dog to be dishonest. This virtue has no value in man. The speculative
virtue is based on free volition and speculation. The action which is done for
the sake of righteousness and not for fulfilling any natural desire is called
divine and not human, sinoe this ia rare in man. Good, according to ibn
B&jjah, is existence, and evil is absence of existence. In other words, evil for
him ia really no evil.
MYSTICISM
Renan ia right in his view that ibn BAjjah has a leaning towards mysticism,
but is certainly wrong in thinking that he attacks al filjazAli for hia insistence
on intnition and Sufism. Aa a matter of fact, ibn BAjjah admires al-Qhaxali and
declares that the latter’s method enables one to achieve the knowledge of
God, and that it is baaed on the teachings of the Holy Prophet. The mystic
receives a light in hia heart. Thia light in the heart is’a speculation through
524
Ibn Bajj.h
which the heart sees the intelligible in the wme way as a man sees the sunlit
object* through eyesight; and through this apprehonsion of the intelligible
it sees all that which by implication precedes them or succeeds them
Ibn Bijjah holds the friends of God (avliyd' Allah) in high esteem and
places them next only to the prophets. According to him, some people are
dominated by corporeality only—they are the lowest in rank—and some are
greatly dominated by a fine spirituality -this group is very rare, and to this
group belong Uwais al-Qarani and Ibrihlm ibn Adham.”
In his attitude towards God and His decree ibn Bajjah comes dose to
declaring himself a fatalist. In one of the treatises he declares that if we
were to refer to the decree of God and His power we would verily
attain peace and comfort. All existing things are in His knowledge and He
alone bestows good upon them. Since He knows everything essentially. He
issues orders to an intermediary to invent a form like the one which is in His
knowledge and to the recipient of forms to receive that form. This is tho case
concerning all existent*, even concerning transitory matter and the human
intellect. In support of his view that God is the Ultimate Creator of all actions
ibn Bajjah refers to al Qharali's view, expressed at the end of his
al-Anwdr, that the First Principle created agents as well as the objects of
action to be acted upon; and he gets further support for this view from al-
FAriibl's observation, in 'Uyun al-Afasu'if, that all arc related to the First
Principle in so far aa the First is their creator. Ibn BSjjah also stales that
Aristotle said in his Phynci that the First Agent is the real agent and the near
agent does not act but through the First. The First makes the near act and
the object to be acted upon. The near is known to the majority of people as
agent only in affairs that concern matter. The just king, for example, deserves
the ascription of justice, although he is distant in rank from him who is below
him in the scries of agents. Whoever ascribes an action to a near agent is like
the dog that bites the stone by which it is struck. But such ascription of
action to the near agent is not possible in affaire which do not concern physical
matters. The active intellect which surrounds the heavenly bodies is the near
agent of all transitory particulars. But He who created both the active
intellect and the heavenly bodies is the real eternal agent.
God causes the existence of a thing to continue without end after its physical
non-existence. When an existent reaches its perfection, it ceases to remain in
time (zamdn) but exists eternally in the continuous flux of duration (dahr).
Ibn Bajjah here reminds one of the Holy Prophet's saying: "Do not abuse
dahr as dahr is Allah." So interpreted, the saying implies that the human
intellect enjoys eternal continuity. In support of this interpretation of the
word dahr ibn Bajjah mentions his predecessors like al Flribi and al Qhazili.
'• Tadbir, p. 45.
525
A History of Muslim Philosophy
BIBLIOGRAPHY
BugfcnA. Egypt. 1326 A.H.: Hawaii I&wSn al-Safa li al'Ari/ al Majri/i, MS.
Arabic, Bodleian Hunt No. 296; RiMUal ai-Wad-V. Bodleian MS. Fol. 137a; ibn abi
U«aibi'ali '/uhoqW of A/ibW; al Maqqari. A’o/A aLT»; >l>» Kh&-I*n. QoM’id al-
'Zopan; ibn KbalhkAn. IFn/oytU al-Aydn; al-Qif|i. TflriU al-Hutamf ■. Munk.
M&>ng«a; Leclerc, Hittoirt dr. la ‘nidtcine arabt; T. J. de Boer. Tht Hillary ol
Philarrrphy m lalam.
Chapter XXVI!
IBN TUFAIL
LIFE AND WORKS
Abu Bakr Muhammad ibn 'Abd al-Malik ibn Muhammad ibn Muhammad
ibn Tufail (LAtin. Abubacer), the first great leader of philosophical thought
in the Muwabhid Spain, was bom in the first decade of sixth,'twelfth century,
at Gtiadix, in tho province of Granada He belonged to the prominent Arab
tribe of Qais. AI-MarrAkughi traces his education to ibn Bajjah, which in view
of ibn Tufait's denial of acquaintance with him, is incorrect.1 He started his
career as a practising physician in Granada and through his fame in the
profession became secretary to the governor of the province. Later, in 5-1911154,
ho became Private Secretary to the Governor of Ceuta and Tangier, a son
of 'Abd al-Mu'min, the first Muwahhid ruler of Spain who captured Morocco in
542'1147. Finally, he rose to the eminent position of the physician and
Qidi of the Court and vizier* to the Muwabhid Caliph abu Ya'qOb Yusuf
(r 568/1163-580/1184), whose personal interest in philosophy and liberal pat
ronage turned his Court into a galaxy of leaders of philosophical thought and
scientific method and made Spain, what R. Briffault calls, "the cradle of the
rebirth of Europe."’ Ibn Tufail enjoyed enormous influence with Caliph abu
YnqOb Vdsuf, and it was he who introduced ibn Rugbd (d. 595/1198) to him.
On the express desire of the Caliph, he advised ibn B&jjah to annotate the
works of Aristotle, a task that had been taken np zealously by ibn B&jjah but
had remained unfinished to the time of his death.’ Ibn Tufail resigned his
1 Vayy Yaqpta, od. Afimad Amin, Egypt, 1062. p. 62. AU references are to
this edition unless mentioned otherwise.
■ Leoti Gauthier doubts that be really hold this office, for only one text gives
him this position and al-Bitruji. hia pupil, calls him aimplv Qfidi. Cf. Encyclopaedia
i>l Han> Vol. II. p. 424
■ The Making o/ Humanity, p. IRS.
* Na'Im al Rahm&n. AAiMlu/.i MawaAfiidln (Urdu translation of al-Marr&-
kushl's oL.Vfo'/ob), p. 240.
526
Ibn Tufail
position aa Court physician in 578/1182 due to old age and recommended ibn
Rusbd to his patron as hia successor. He. however, continued to retain abu
Ya'qub’s esteem and after his death (in 580/1184) gained the favour of his son
abu Yusuf al-Mansur (580/1184-595/1199). He died at Morocco in 581/1185-86.
Al-Mansur himself attended hia obsequies.
Ibn Tufail was an illustrious physician, philosopher, mathematician, and
poet of the Muwabbid Spain, but unfortunately very little is known alsiut
his works, Ibn Khatib attributes two treatises on medicine to him. Al-Bitruji
{his pupil) and ibn Rughd credit him with “original astronomical ideas.”
Al-Bitruji offers a refutation of Ptolemy’s theory of epicycles and eccentric
circles which in the preface to his Kitab al-Hai'ah he acknowledges to be a
contribution of his teacher ibn Tufail." Quoting ibn Ruihd. ibn abi Cpaibi'ah
attributes Ft al-Buya' al-Ma-ikunah wal-Ohair al- Mankiinah to ibn Tufail,
but in ibn Rusfad's own account no such reference is traceable? Al-Marrakusbi,
tho historian, claims to have seen the original manuscript of one of his treatises
on the science of divinity/ Miguel Casiri (1122/1710-1205/1790) names two
extant works: Rudlah Hayylbn Yayzdn anti Asriral-Ilikmah al-Mafbriyiyyah.
tho latter in manuscript form.1 The preface to the A.trur discloses that the
treatise is only a part of the Risdlah Hayylbn Yayzan, the full title of which
is Ritdlah Hayy Bin Yayzan ft Amr al-Hikmal al-Mafiriyiyyab.* *
B
CREED OE THE ML’WAIJHIDS
The foundation of the Muwabbid dynasty is associated with the name of
ibn Tumart (d.c. 524/1130), a politico-religious leader who claimed to be the
Mahdi. He introduced in the West orthodox scholasticism of al Gfcazali and
exhorted people to observe the Jfihirite Fiyh. During hia travels he met 'Alxl
al-MO’min al-Qumi (d. 558/1163), a potter’s son. and made him his disciple
and successor in his puritanical movement. He raised the banner of revolt
against the corrupt Mnrfibit rulers of Spain, but success ultimately fell to the
lot of 'Abd al-Mu'min, who took Oran, Tlemcen, Fez, Salo, Ceuta ami in
542/1147 became the first Muwabbid ruler of Morocco. Ho was succeeded by
abu Ya'qub Yusuf (d. 580/1184) and then by abu YOsuf al-Mansur (d. 595/
1199) on whose Courts the two great luminaries, ibn Tufail and ibn Rugbd,
shed imperishable lustre.'"
• Encyclopatdta of Islam. Vol, II, p. 424.
• A. 8. Nadawi. Hufaimd'-f Islam. Vol. II. p. 42,
' Khdafal.i Muwahhidin, p. 237.
• MS. No. 669. Eacorial; published Biittq, 1882. Cf. Loon Gauthier. Ibn Tho/ad.
pp. 32. 34.
• Gauthier, op. cil.. p. 33. footnote.
>■ O'Leary, Xrofcic Thmtyht and Iu Place in History, pp. 246-50.
527
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The Muwabbids professed to be fihaziliana. They were noted for their
puritanical belief in the unity of God. Anthropomorphic notions were an
anathema to them. Secondly, inspired by ibn TOmart, they stood for the
strict observance of the exoteric aspect of religion. The Zkhirite Fiy* constituted
the Muwabbid State religion. Thirdly, as a legacy of ibn Bajjah. they regarded
philosophy as a species of esoteric truth reserved for the enlightened few.
The masses, being incapable of pure knowledge, should not be taught more
than the literal sense of the colourful eschatology of the Qur'an."
Needless to say, the mental equipment of ibn Tufail is largely provided by
the official religion of the Muwabbids. and his//ayy Bin Yaqfin is but a defence
of the attitude of the Muwabbids both towards people and philosophers '"
C
HAYY BIN YAQZAN
Summary.—The treatise dramatically opens with the spontaneous birth of
Hayy in ail uniuhabitated island, followed by a popular legend about his
being thrown to this desolate place by the sister of a certain king, in order
to keep her marriage with YaqjAn a secret. Unalloyed by social conventions,
he is nourished there by a roc and taught by natural reason or common sense,
which, though really very uncommon, equips him with inductive intellect to
probe into the secret of things. Unlike the lower animals, he becomes con
scious of hia being naked and unarmed with physical weapons of defence. He
reflects over the situation and oovers the lower parts of his body with leaves
arms himself with a stick, and thus comes to realize the superiority of his
bands over the feet of animals. The death of the mother-roe leads him to the
discovery of the animal soul which uses the body as an instrument, like the stick
in Iris hands, shares light and warmth with fire, and thus bears resemblance
to the heavenly bodies. 11c then turns to the analysis of the phenomena of
nature, compares the objects around him, and discriminates between them, and
classifies them into minerals, plants, and animals. Observation shows him that
body is a common factor in all the objects, but they belong to different classes
because of the functions peculiar to them. This leads him to assume a specific
form or soul for each class of objects. But the soul being imperceptible, his
dialectical ingenuity at last brings him to the idea of an ultimate, eternal,
incorporeal, and necessary Being which is the efficient cause of the peculiar
behaviour of bodies. This makes him consoious of his own immaterial essence;
and acting upon a throe-point code of ascetic discipline which will be explained
later, he is finally absorbed in the unrestrained contemplation of the Ultimate
Being.
" D. B. Macdonald. Derelopmenl «/ MuMm Tboology. Jurirprudtnce and Con
slilutional Theory. pp. 241-54.
“ Ibid., p. 254.
528
Ibn Tufail
At this stage, Askl, a contemplative and meditative soul, from the neigh
bouring inhabited island appears on the scene in quest of attaining perfection
in solitude. He informs l.layy, the child of nature, about the Qur'knic oon-
eeptions of God, His angels, prophets, the Day of Judgment, etc., which he
by his self-developed intellect immediately recognizee as truths. He, however,
in the first instance, fails to see the wisdom implicit in the figurative languages
of tho <Juran about God and the hereafter, and in the permission that it gives
one to lead a worldly life—a permission which is likely to turn one away
from the truth. Full of ambition and hope, he sets out in the company of
Asal to the said inhabited island ruled by Salamkn and begins to reform its
convention-ridden people. He endeavours hard to enlighten the masses through
pure concepts, but, in the end. finds these conoepts far above their heads. He
t hen realizes the wisdom of the Prophet in giving them sensuous forms instead
of full light, returns to his lonely island, and is absorbed in contemplation.
Sources.—Hayy Bin Yaqfdn is a unique creation of ibn Tufail’s myatico-
philosophical thought. Nevertheless, the idea of this romance is not entirely
new. Ibn Sina (d. 428/1037), among his predecessors, had written a mystic
allegory of the same title. But tho comparison ends here. Ibn Sink's dramatized
tale narrates how one day he. with a few companions, went out for a ramble
in the vicinity of a town and chanced to meet an old man, Hayy bin
Yaqfkn, and requested him to be permitted to accompany' him i.1 his unending
journeys. But the old man replied that that was not possible for ibn Sina
because of his companions whom ho could not leave. In this allegory ibn Sina
lumself represents tho rational soul, the oompanions the various senses, and
the old man, IJayy bin YaqiAn, the active intellect,1* "With ibn Sina," thus,
the character of Hai [Hayy] represents the Superhuman Spirit, but tho hero
of ibn Tofail’s romance seems to bo the personification of the natural spirit
of Mankind illuminated from above; and that Spirit must be in accordance
with the Soul of Muhammed when rightly understood, whose utterances are
to be interpreted allegorically.''1*
Similarly, tho names of Salaman and Askl. the other two characters of ibn
Tufail’a romance, are not new in the philosophical literature. These, too, have
been borrowed from ibn Sink's tale of Saliman wa Absdl, of which we know
only through Jusl’s paraphrase in his commentary on Itharal. The story relates
how Abskl, the younger brother of Salsman, was obliged to prooeed to war in
order to avoid the immoral designs of the latter's wife, but was deserted by the
army through her machinations and his wounded body was carried away by
a gazelle to a place of safety. On returning home, ho raised a strong army and
regained the lost kingdom for Salaman. whose wife becoming desperate
poisoned him to death. The sorrow-stricken Salkmkn lost heart and became
a hermit. A mystic trance, at last, revealed to him that his own wife was the
11 S. M. Afnkn, Avicenna, p. 198.
11 De Boer, The History o/ Phitoeophy >n Islam, p. 185.
529
A History of Muslim Philosophy
cause of the catastrophe, and he killed her and all her accomplices.
** Salimin,
in this tale, represents the rational soul. A ball the theoretical reason, and
Salimin's wife, the passion-worshipping body. Notwithstanding the similarity
of names and the episode of the gazelle, the basic theme of both the treatises
is intrinsically different. With ibn Slna the main object is to show how personal
afflictions (he himself was a prisoner in the dungeon of a fortress while writing
the allegory) invoke divine grace and cause the purification of the soul but
the object or ibn fufail is nothing less than to dramatize the development of
theoretical reason from the gross sense-perception to the beatific vision of
**
God.
By far the most marked, deep, and saturating influence, which seems to have
coloured the basic structure of ibn Tufail’s romance, is that of ibn BSjjah, his
arch-rationalist predecessor. His lonely, metaphysically minded Hayy is only
an extreme form of the “solitary man” of ibn Bajjah’s Tadbir at- Mulawa^id.
Nevertheless, in spite of his recognition of the necessity of solitude for the
improvement of theoretical reason, ibn Tufail feels rather unhappy over ibn
Bajjah's onc-.- ded emphasis on the role of reason in arriving at the ultimate
truth. Somewhat sympathetically he complains of the "incompleteness" of ibn
Bljjahs Tadbir al-Mutawalfltid.'' It is to the desire of removing this incom
pleteness that, ihn fufail’s Hayy Bin Yaqpin owes ite origin. And it is the
influence of Ghnzlli (d. 505/1 III) and perhaps also of Suhrawanli MuqtQl, hia
Persian contemporary that made him supplement reason with ecstasy in its
flight to the celestial world.
Of ljayy's birth in an uninhabited island, ibn Tufail relates two versions.
The scientific version of his spontaneous birth, he owes entirely to ibn Sin*.
**
The legendary version is traced by Gracia Gomez ("Comparative Study of ibn
Tufail and Baltazar Grecian." Madrid, 1926) to Pfeu al-Qarnain wa QiMat
al-Sanam w al-Halak wa Bintuhu, a Greek tale translated into Arabic by
*• A. S. Nadawi. ap. eil„ p. 50.
11 Later on Abd al Kahmln Jimi (d. 898/14921 also adopted the names of Sali
min and Absll aa characters in one of his Lest known mystic poems (first edition
by F. Falconer, London. 1287 I860; translated into English verse by Fitzgerald.
1267,1850. 1297/1879; literal translation along with Fitzgerald’s versions by A. J.
Arberry. Cambridge, 1376 1956). SaUnukn in this poem symbolically represents the
rational soul, and Aldi, his nurse and lover, the |xssion-worshipping body. Their
close union is frowned on by Salnman's royal father and the two enter fire to put
an end to their lives. But only AbsM is consumed while Salimin remains unharmed,
whose sorrow for AlisAI, in the end. given way to celestial love for Venue. The poem,
aa it is. is nearer in ita aim and method to ibn Sink's tale of SoM.ndn wa Abut.
rattier than to ibn Tufail's llayy Bin YayUln.
" Wo know of thia book only through Mows of Narbonnc's version in his Hebrew
commentary on Hayy Bin Iw/jdn. 750/1349, the summary of which ap|K»rs in
M Lutfi Juin’ali’s Tarikb Fabalat al btom. Cf. also A. S. Nadawi, op. cit.. Vol. II,
p. JO.
Ibn Sina has advocated the mure vmw in his a*M' Cf. also Jalil al-Dln
Dswwani, AkilAg-i Jaldli, Lucknow. 1916. p. 41.
530
Ibn Tufail
Ijunain ibn IsbAq. The tele narrates how, under royal displeasure, the daughter
of a king threw away her natural daughter, from the son of her father's vizier,
in tho aea. the surging waves of which landed her in an uninhabited island
where she was nourished by a roe. She grow up into a lieautiful damsel ; later.
Alexander the Great chanced to meet her in the island of Oreon." That the
life of Hayy resembles that of the damsel in its initial stages, there can be no
doubt, but the resemblance ends there. Besides, the aforesaid Greek tale does
not seem to be tho only source of this legend. BadT al-Zaman Foruzanfar has
lately traced the threads of the fable to the Persian tele of Musa-o Ddra-o
Nimrud.™
The romantic frame of //ayy Bin Yaqzdn is by no means original. It is of
Alexanderian origin; it may have evon a Persian strain. Nevertheless, it is
ibn Tufail who changes a simple tale into a romance of a unique philosophical
signiticance. It is the philosophical acumen rather than the poetic imagination
that marks the treatise with novelty and makes it to be "one of the most
original books of tho Middle Ages."11
Ob/eet of the Treatise.—As al-MarrakusJji, the historian, has said, Hayy Bin
Yayjdn is a treatise which aims at giving a scientific explanation of the be
ginning of human life on earth." As a prelude to the story of Hayy Bin Yaqzdn.
it is related that the moderate climate of the uninhabited island, ooupled with
a fair proportion of the elements, led to the spontaneous birth of the first man,
who found the stick a successful weapon in the struggle for existence, and
thereby got the oonviction of his own superiority over other animals. But
actually this beginning is meant merely to provide a background for showing
the development of inductive intellect, independently of any social influence
whatsoever.
Contradicting al-Marrakuthi’s position, but in complete agreement with
de Boer, Dr. Muhammad Qhallab” rightly contends that the treatise essen
tially aims at showing that the Individual man left to himself is able, with the
resources of nature alone and without any help from society, to advance to
and reach the ultimate truth, provided he has the necessary aptitude for doing
so. The truth of the Qur'an and the Hadlth is open to pure intellectual
apprehension, but it has to be guarded against the illiterate masses whose
business it is not to think but to believe and obey. In fact, this view is an
echo of ibn BSjjah’s position, which later came to be regarded as the proper
official attitude under the Muwabhids.
Muhammad Yunus Farangi Mabaili" points to a still higher aim implicit in
the treatise. Religion is as much essential for a progressive society as are
•• Hayy Bin Yaqzdn, p. 13, footnote.
,a Zindah-i Beddr, p. 13.
G. Sarlon, Introduction la the History of Selena, Vol. II. p. 334.
“ Khddfal-i Muwaflhidin, p. 237.
Article "Ibn Tufail." MajaUah Azhar. 1301/1842.
'• Article "Ibn Tufail”. Ma'drif. Azamgarh. January 1822. pp. 18-2S
531
A History of Muslim Philosophy
philosophy and mysticism— a thesis which is brilliantly exemplified by the
co-operation of the three dramatic characters: Hayy. the philosopher; AsM,
the mystic; and SalUm&n. the theologian. The underlying aim is not only
to show that philosophy is at one with religion properly understood, but that
both the exoteric and the esoteric aspects of religion and philosophy are
expressions of the same eternal truth revealed to individuals according to their
intellectual capabilities.
I’hilosopliically speaking, the treatise is a brilliant exposition of ibn Tufail's
theory of knowledge, which seeks to harmonize Aristotle with the Neo-
Platonists on the one hand, and alQhazali with ibn Bajjah on the other.
Al-Gftazili was dogmatically critical of Aristotelian rationalism, but ibn
BSjjah was Aristotelian through and through. Ibn Tufail, following the middle
course, bridged the gulf between the two. As a rationalist he aides with ibn
Bajjah against al-Ghaz&li and qualifies mysticism with rationalism; as a
mystic he sides with al-Qhazali against ibn Bajjah and qualifies rationalism
with mysticism. Ecstasy is the highest form of knowledge, but the path
leading to such knowledge is paved with the improvement of reason, followed
by the purification of the soul through ascetic practices. The methods of
al-ObazAli and ibn Tufail are both partially the same, but, unlike the former,
the latter's ecstasy is marked by a Neo-Platonic strain. Al-Qhazali, true to his
theologico-mystical position, takes ecstasy as the means to see God. but to
ibn Tufail, the philosopher, the beatific vision reveals the active intellect and
the Neo-Platonic chain of causes reaching down to the elements and back to
itself.
D
DOCTRINES
World.—Is the world eternal, or created by God at will out of sheer nothing
ness ’ This iB one of the most challenging problems of Muslim philosophy. Ibn
Tufail. quite in keeping with his dialectical ingenuity, faces it squarely in the
manner of Kant. Unlike his predecessors, he docs not subscribe to any of the
rival doctrines, nor dues he make any attempt to reconcile them. On the
other hand, he subjects both the Aristotelian and tho theological positions to
scathing criticism. The eternity of the world involves the concept of infinite
existence which is no less impossible than the notion of infinite extension.
Such an existence cannot be free from created accidents and as such cannot
precede them in point of time; and that which cannot exist before the created
accidents must itself he created in time. Similarly, the concept of matio ex
nihilo does not survive his scrutiny. Like al-QhazAli. ho points out that the
notion of existence after non-existence is unintelligible without supposing the
priority of time over tho world; but time itself is an inseparable accident of
the world, and so its being prior to the world is ruled out. Again, the created
must needs have a Creator. Why then did the Creator create the world now and
532
IBh Tufail
not before I Wu it doe to something that happened to Him! Obviously not,
for nothing existed before Him to make anything happen to Him Should it be
attributed to a change in His nature ! But what was there to bring about this
change I"
Consequently, ibn Tufail accepts neither tho eternity nor temporal creation
of the world.
This antinomy clearly anticipates the Kantian position that reason has its
own limits and that ita arguments load to a maze of contradictions.
God.—Both eternity of the world and ita crcaiio er nihilo equally anil in
evitably lead to the existence of an eternal, incorporeal Necessary Being.1* The
creation of the world in time presupposes a Creator, for the world cannot exist
by itself. Again, the Creator must, of necessity, be immaterial, for matter being
an aocident of tho world is itself subject to creation by a Creator. On the other
hand, regarding God as material would lead to an infinite regress which is
absurd. The world, therefore, must necessarily have a Creator that has no
bodily substance. And since He is immaterial, it follows that we cannot
apprehend Him by any of our senses or ovon by imagination; for imagination
represents nothing except the sensuous forms of things in their physical
absence.
The eternity of the world implies the eternity of its motion as well; and
motion, as held by Aristotle, requires a mover or an efficient cause. If this
efficient cause is a body, ita power must be finite and consequently incapable
of producing an infinite effect. The efficient cause of eternal motion must,
therefore, be immaterial. It must neither be associated with matter nor
separated from it. nor within it nor without it; for union and separation,
inclusion and exclusion are the properties of matter, and the efficient cause, by
its very nature, is absolutely free from it.
However, a question is posed here. God and the world both being eternal,
how could the former be the cause of the latter! Following ibn Slna. ibn
fufail makes a distinction between eternity in essence and that in time, and
holds that God does precede the world in point of essence, and not in respect
of time. Take an example. If you have a body in your fist and move your
hand, the body, no doubt, will move with the movement of the hand, yet
its motion will bo subject to the motion of the hand. The motion of the latter
proceeds from ita essence, that of the former is borrowed from the latter,”
though in point of time neither preoodes the other.
As to the world becoming oo-etemal with God, he maintains in a mystic
strain that the world is not something other than God. Interpreting the divine
essence in terms of light, the essential nature of which is perpetual illumination
and manifestation, as held by al-GhazAli. he conceives of the world as the
“ Hayy Bin Yaqtdn. p. 95
•• Ibid., pp. 96-97
” Ibid., p. 98
533
A History of Muslim Philosophy
mamfcstalion of God's own essence and the shadow of His own light that ha.
no temporal beginning or end. It is not subject to annihilation as the belief in
the Day of Judgment tends to suggest. Ita corruption consists in ita transforma
tion into another form rather than in ita complete annihilation. The world
must oontinue in one form or another, for its annihilation is inconsistent
with the supreme mystic truth that the nature of divine essence is perpetual
illumination and manifestation,*’
Light Cosmology.—In full agreement with ibn Sina and other predecessors,
ibn Tufail accepts the principle that from one nothing can proceed except
one. The manifestation of the existing plurality from unity is explained in
the monotonous Meo-Platonic fashion, as successive stages of emanation
proceeding from the divine light. The process, in principle, resembles the
successive reflection of solar light in looking-glasses. The light of the sun
falling on a looking-glass and from there passing into another, and so on,
gives an appearance of plurality. All these are the reflections of the light of
the sun, and yet they are neither tho sun, nor the looking-glasses, nor anything
different from both. Tho plurality of reflected light is lost into the unity of
the sun when wo look to their source, but reappears when we look to the
looking-glasses in which the light is reflected. The same is true of the primal
light and its manifestation in the cosmos."
Epistemology.—The soul, in its first state, is not a tabula rasa, or a blank
slate. The image of God is implicit in it from tho very beginning, but, in order
to make it explicit, we need to start with a clean mind, with neither
bias, nor prejudice. Freedom from social prejudices and. prepossessions as a
primary condition of all knowledge is precisely the idea behind Hayy's spon
taneous birth in an uninhabited island. This being achieved, experience,
intellection, and ecstasy play their respective roles freely in giving a clear
vision of the truth inherent in the soul. Not mere discipline of spirit, but the
education of the senses and the intellect, too, is essential for such a vision.
The harmony of experience with reason (Kant), on the one hand, and that of
reason with intuition (Bergson and Iqbal), on the other, constitutes the very
essence of ibn Tufail's epistemology.
Experience is a process of knowing the environment through the senses
The sense-organs owe their respective functions to the animal aoul with its
seat in the heart; from there the oonfused manifold of sense-data reaches
the brain which spreads it all over the body through the nerve-paths. It is
transmitted through the same paths to the brain, where it is organized into
a perceptive whole.
Observation gives us knowledge about bodies which the inductive intellect,
with its instruments of comparison and discrimination, classifiee into minerals,
plants, and animals. Each of these classes of bodies exhibits certain specific
•• Had., p. 120
■■ Ibid., p. 117
534
Ibn Tufail
functions, which lead us to postulate specific forms or souls (like Aristotle)
as the cause of the functions peculiar to the bodies of different classes. Such
a hypothesis, however, is untenable on inductive grounds, for the supposed
form or soul is not open to direct observation. Actions, no doubt, appear to
be issuing from a certain body; in reality, they are caused neither by the
body, nor by the soul in a body, but by some cause external to it and that
cause is God as indicated before.90
Ibn Tufail also knows the limitations of his newly discovered method.
Following al-GhazAli" and anticipating Hume, he sees no power in the cause
which may necessarily produce the effect aa it does. Hume's empiricism ends
in scepticism, but the mystio in ibn Jufail makes him see that the bond of
causality is an act of synthesis which he ascribes to God, but which Kant
attributes to the a priori form of understanding. Ibn Tufail ia at once a fore
runner of Bacon, Hume, and Kant. He anticipated the inductive method
of modern science; perceived tho inability of theoretical reason to solve the
puzzle of the eternity and temporal creation of the world, and that of the
inductive intellect to establish a necessary connection between cause and
effect; and finally cleared the clouds of scepticism by declaring with Qhaz&h
that the bond of causality is a synthetic act of God.
After educating the senses and the intellect and noticing the limitations
of both, ibn Tufail finally turns to the discipline of the spirit, leading to
ecstasy, the highest source of knowledge. In this state, truth ia no longer
obtained through a process of deduction or induction, but is perceived directly
and intuitively by the light within. The soul becomes conscious of itself and
experiences "what the eye hath never seen, nor ear ever heard, nor the heart
(mind) of any man ever oonceived.”” The state of ecstasy is ineffable and
indescribable, for the scope of words is restricted to what can be aeon, heard,
or conceived. Divine eaaenoe, being pure light, is perceived only by the light
within, which comes into ita own through the proper education of the senses,
intellect, and spirit. The knowledge of essence, therefore, is itself essence.
Essence and ita vision are identical.’*
Elhict—Not earthly felicity, nor oven divine vioegerency, but complete
union with God ia the aummum bonum of ethics. Ita realization, after the
improvement of inductive and deductive intellect, finally depends upon a
three-point code of spiritual discipline, which, according to de Boer, has a
"Pythagorean appearance.”” Man is a curious mixture of body, animal soul,
•• Ibid., p. 92.
•' Al-GhazSli ". . . goes to the extreme of intellectual scepticism, and. seven
hundred years before Hume, he cuts the bond of causality with the edge of his
dialectic and proclaims that we oan know nothing of cause or offoct, but simply
that one thing follows another" (D. B. Macdonald, op. cit., p. 229).
fiatfy Bin Yaffdn, p. 114.
•• Ibid., p. 216.
” De Boer, op. etl., p. 186.
535
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and immaterial essence, and, thua, at once resembles animals, celestial
bodies, and God. His spiritual ascent, therefore, consists in satisfying all
the three aspects of his nature, by imitating the actions of animals, heavenly
bodies, and God. As to the fipt imitation, it is binding upon him to provide
his body with bare means of sustenance and protect it against inclement
weather and wild animals, with the sole intention of preserving the animal
soul. The second imitation demands of him cleanliness in dress and body,
kindness to animate and inanimate objects, contemplation of the divine
essence and revolving round one's own essence in ecstasy. (Ibn Tufail seems
to believe that the celestial bodies possess animal soul and are absorbed in
the unrestrained contemplation of God.) Lastly, he must equip himself with
the positive and negative attributes of God, viz., knowledge, power, wisdom,
freedom from corporeality, etc. Discharging one’s obligation to oneself, others,
and God. is. in brief, one of the essentials of spiritual discipline." The last
obligation is an end-in-itaelf, the first two lead to ita realization in the beatific
vision, where vision at once becomes identical with the divine essence.
Philosophy and Religion.—Philosophy is purely intellectual apprehension
of truth in concepts and images which, by their very nature, are beyond the
grasp of conventional modes of expression. Language is a product of the
material needs of social environment and aa such can lay its hand only on the
phenomenal world. The celestial world, being abstract and immaterial, al
together eludes ita grasp. Described in material symbols, it loses its essential
nature, and occasions men to think of it other than what it really is.**
Why then does the Qur'&n describe the divine world in parables and simili
tudes and thereby waive aside a clearer notion of it, and occasion men to fall
into tho gravo error of attributing a oorporiety to the essence of God, from
which He is absolutely free ? And why does not the Holy Book go further
than the precepts and rites of worship, and give mon leave to gather riches
and allow thorn liberty in the matter of food, by which means they employ
themselves in vain pursuits and turn away from the truth 1 la it not the
imperative need of the soul to free itaelf from earthly passions and chains
before starting ita journey towards heaven I Would not men lay aside wcridly
pursuits and follow the truth, if they were elevated to pure knowledge in
order to understand things aright 1” Hayy’s miserable failure to enlighten
the masses by means of pure oonoepta clears tho way to the answers to these
questions. The Prophet acted wisely in giving the masses sensuous forms
instead of full light, for they had no other way of salvation. Elevated to pure
knowledge, they would waver and fall headlong and make a bad end. Never
theless, though ibn Tufail voices the Muwabbid State policy of withholding the
teaching of philosophy from the multitude, he clearly recognizee a class of
“ Bin YaqtAn, pp. 107-13.
Ibid., p. 110
•’ Ibid., p. 127
536
Ibn Tufail
gifted people who deserve philosophic instruction and to whom allegory is
the best means of imparting knowledge and wisdom.
Religion is for the masses; but philosophy is a privilege of the gifted few.
Their provinces should be scrupulously kept apart. Philosophy, no doubt, is
at one with religion properly understood; both of them reach tho same truth,
but through different ways. They differ not only in their method and scope
but also in the degree of the blessedness they confer on their devotees."
Religion describes the divine world in terms of exoteric symbols. It abounds
in similitudes, metaphors, and anthropomorphic notions, so that they might
better acoord with the people's understanding, fill their souls with desire, and
attract them to virtue and morality. Philosophy, on tho other hand, ia a
species of esoteric truth. It seeks to interpret the material symbols of religion
in terms of pure concepts and images culminating in a state where the divino
essence and its knowledge become one.
Sense-perception, reason, and intuition are the bases of philosophical
knowledge. Prophets too have intuitions; their main source of knowledge is
revelation from God. The knowledge of the prophet is direct and personal,
but that of the followers is constituted of testimony.
Philosophy is an exclusive affair of the individual; it presupposes a certain
temperament and aptitude for enlightenment. Religion, on the oontrary, is
a social discipline. Its point of view is institutional, not individual. It aims,
more or less, at a uniform betterment of the masses in general, ignoring the
individual differences in ability and inner light.
Philosophy brings us face to face with reality. It demands unreetrained
contemplation of truth, uninterrupted vision of the primal light, the source
of all existence, by renouncing all worldly connections. Religion is not so
exacting in its dictates. It decries asceticism in any and every sense of the
word; for the generality of mankind, for whom it is primarily meant, are
incapable of living up to this ideal. It, therefore, fixes the absolute minimum
and then gives men leave to lead a worldly life, without, however, trans
gressing the limits thereto.
Thus, the philosopher, left to his inner light, is capable of attaining to
supreme bliss. As to the masses, they should rest content with a second-rate
salvation, beyond which, owing to their own limitations, they cannot rise.
Later on this theory, under the influence of ibn Ruthd. armed the medieval
European scholars in their struggle against the Church, with the doctrine
of "two-fold truth," John of Brescia and Sigcr of Brabant being two of its
chief representatives." The story does not seem to end here; for the redeeming
individualistic attitude of modem philosophy, an attitude that distinguishes
it from both the medieval and the ancient outlook, also appears to be a
characteristic deposit of the same theory.
•• Z. A. Hiddlqi, Falaafah-i Hayy Bin Yatfhn, p, 103.
" F Thilly, A History o/ Philosophy, p. 230.
537
A History of Muslim Philosophy
F.
INFLUENCE
Of ibn Tufail't works only Hayy Bin 1’ogpin is extant today. It u a slioit
philosophical romance, but so great has been its influence on the succeeding
generations in the West that it has come to be recognized aa “one of the moat
remarkable books of the Middle Ages "*’ In spirit, says LAon Gauthier, it
resembles Arabian Nights; in method it is both philosophical and mystical.
It combines pleasure with truth by calling imagination and intuition to the
help of reason, and it is this peculiar appeal that has made it an embodiment
of imperishable lustre and eternal freshness, and has caused its numerous
editions and translations into Hebrew, I.atin, English, Dutch, French, Spanish,
German, and Russian." Even today, the world's interest in it has not ceased.
Abmad Amin's recent critical Arabic edition (1371/1952), followed by ita
translations into Persian and Urdu within the same decade, go far enough to
prove that it has no less a hold over the modem world than it had over the
medieval world.**
The treatise caught the attention of the Quakers," and George Kieth,
finding in it a support for "enthusiastic notions"** of the Society of Friends,
translated it into English in 1085/1674. So tremendous and alarming waa ita
influence or what Simon Ockley calls "bad use," that he was obliged to devote
—•• Knrycb.pasdia o/ Islam. Vol. II. p. 425.
K«mil GilAni, Hayy Bin YaqsJn, p. 106.
•* The little masterpioce has a history of translations into European languages,
spread over six centuries: Hebrew translation with a commentary and comparison
with the Tadblr ulMulawahhid of ibn Bftjjah by the Jew Moses ibn Joshua of
Narltonne, 750/1349; Latin. E. Pococke Jr., Oxford. 1082/1671; reprinted. Oxford,
1112/1700; oriental editions, st least four from Cairo and two from Constantinople,
I299/18B1; English, G. Kirth. London, 1085/1674; G. AahweU, London. 1098/1686;
S. Ockley. London. 1120'1708. reprinted 1123/1711. 1144/1731, revised by E. A.
Dyck, Cairo. 1323/1906; P. Brfinnle. London. 1322/1904; revised with an Intro,
duction by A. S. Fulton. London. 1325/1907. reprinted. London. 1328/1910,
1348/1929; Dutch, Bouwmcsstor, Amsterdam, 1083/1672, reprinted 1113/1701;
German. .1. 0. Pritius, Francfort. 1139/1726; J. G. Eichhorn. Berlin 1197/1782;
Spanish, F. P. Bioguce. Saragossa, 1318/1900, reprinted 1353/1934; Russian,
J. Kuzmin, Leningrad. 1339/1920; French, L. Gauthier, Algor, 1318/1900, Paris,
1327/1909, ami Beirut, 1355/1936, the only authentic and exhaustive critical
estimate. (Brocknlmnnn, Vol. I, p. 460, Hupp. I. p. 831; George Sarlon, op. etf..
Vol II. Part 1. p. 355; Encyclopaedia *>/ Islam. Vol. II, p. 425).
•• Arabic edition. Egypt, 1327 1909, Damascus, 1359/1940, with a commentary
l*y I>r. J. Salibn and K. ‘Awad, Abmad Amin's critical Arabic edition along with
ibn Slna end Suhrawsrdl’a treatises of the same title, haa renewed world's interest
in it. Arabic summary, K. GlUni, Egypt; Persian (on Ahmad Amin's linos), B. Z.
FrouUnfar. Teheran. 1376,1956; Urdu, Z. A. Siddlqt, Aligarh. 1375/1955, with a
separate exhaustive critical estimate. Aligarh, 1376/1956.
■■ A religious “Society of Friends." started by George Fox (1034/1624-1103'
1691). with no formulated cried. liturgy, priesthood, and outward sacrament.
(Ency-lopasdiu Bnlannica, Vol IX. p. 849.)
“ 8. Ockley. Ths Imprmvmrnl of Human Reason, p. 194.
538
Ibn Tuf.il
a thirty-six-page appendix to his English version of the booklet (1120/1708),
in order to refute ibn Tufail'e thesis that the individual man. left to his a priori
inner light, can arrive at the ultimate truth.
**
A Spanish writer, Grecian Baltasar’s indebtedness to ibn Tufail occupied
the world’s attention during the first four decades of the present century.
Acoording to L. Gauthier, the early life of Andrenio, the hem of Grecian
Baltasar's El Criiiam (Saragossa, 1062/1651), is a "manifest” and "undeniable
imitation" of IJayy's legendary version of birth." But G. Gdmcx. the Spanish
critic, claims that the El Crilicon is nearer to the Greek tale ofCJu al-Qarnain wa
Qiffal al-Sanam w-al-Malak wa Bintvhu, referred to earlier, than to the f/ayy
Bin Yaf^6n.,, D. K. Petrof, the Russian Orientalist, too holds that Grecian
Baltasar is an exception to ibn Tufail's influence." But L. Gauthier, in his
latest version of the treatise (Beirut, 1355/1936), contradicts the position of
Gomer, and Potrof, and concludes that Grecian Baltasar is indebted to the
Greek yissof al-$anam indirectly through tho Hayy Bin Yaqian of ibn Tufail *4
The influence of the romantic frame of the treatise is also visible in Menedes
Ptlyo, Pon* Saif Bin dhi Yaian, and Tartan" Even the Bobinnon Crtuoe
(1132/1719) of Daniel Defoe is no exception to its pervading influence, as
proved by A. R. Pastor in his Idea of Bobinson Crusoe.*1
Of ibn Tufnil’s pupils abu IsbAq al-Bitriiji and abu al-Walld ibn Ruahd
stand far above the rest. He maintained his leadership in the sphere of astron
omy through al-Bitriiji
** whose theory of “spiral motion" fharkal laulabi)
marks the "culmination of tho Muslim anti-Ptolemic movement."
** In philoso
phy and medicine he dominated the scene in the person of ibn Rutfad,** whose
rationalism "ran like wild fire in the schools of Europe” and ruled their minds
for no less than three centuries.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Tbn Tufail. Hayy Bin YayfAn. translated into Urdu by Z. A. $iddlqi, Aligarh,
1955; B. Z. FrouzAnfar. Zindab-i BedAr, Teheran. 1056; KAmil GtlAni. Hayy Bin
Yaqtfn (Arable summary), Egypt; Ahmad Amin. Hayy Bin YoqfAn. Egypt, 1052;
Z. A. Siddlqi. Foba/oA-i ffoyy Bin YayzAn (Urdu). Aligarh, 1935; Simon Ockley,
•• IM., p. 168.
•’ Gauthier, op. tit.. p. 52.
*• Hayy Bin YaqzAn, p. 13.
•• G. Sarton. op. tit., p. 355.
14 Hayy Bin YaqzAn. p. 14. footnote.
ibid., pp. 12. 14.
KAmil GIlAni. op. til., p. 105.
A. R. Pastor, /<fco of Bobinoon Crum. Part I. Wartford. 1930.
•* Ha refuted Ptolemv's theory of epicycles and occentric circles and in the
preface to his K<IAb ai-HaiM confesses that he is following tho ideas of ibn Tufail
(L. Gauthier, op. at., p. 26).
“ O. Sarton. op. cit.. p. 399.
•• He was advised by ibn Tufail with regard to his commentaries on .Aristotle's
works as well as his modical work KuUtyat. Cf. G. Sarton. op. tit., p. 355.
539
A History of Muslim Philosophy
The Improvement o/ Human Reason EMbiUd in the Lift of Hat Ebn Takdhan.
London. 1708; Mon Gauthier, Ibn Thofail Sa vie see ceurres, Paris. 1909; D. B. Mac-
dpnald, Development of Muslim Theology. Jurisprudence and Constitulional Theory,
London. 1803; de Lacy O'Leary, Arabte Thought and lit Place in History. London,
1822; T. J. do Boor. The History of Philosophy in Islam, translated into English by
E. R. Jonre, London, 1803; P. K. Hitti, History of ths Arabs, London. 1837; Ency
clopaedia of Islam. Vol. II. Leiden, 1927. article; "Ibn fufail"; G. Sarton. Intro
duction to the History of Science, Vol. II. Pan 1. 1931; R Briffault, Ths Mating
of Humanity. London, 1930; A. 8. Nadawi, Hukamd'i IsUm, Vol. II. Azamgarh,
1950; M. Na'tm aJ-Rabmftn, ffhMfat-i MuwaMidln (Urdu translation of al-
MarrakuabTe al-Mu'jab). Madras. 1922; M.M. Yunus Farangi Mafealli. Ibn Rughd,
Azamgarh, 1342/1923; "Ibn Jufail," Ma'dnf, Azamgarh. January, 1922, pp.
18-28; Dr. M. QhalUb. "ibn Tufail," Mafallah Altar, Egypt. 1361/1942; 8. M.
Afniln. Avicenna. London, 1958; T. Arnold and A. Gillaume (Eds.). The Legacy
of Islam. London, 1931; C. Broekelmann, Gesehictte der arabisehen Litteratur,
Vol. I, Weimar. 1898, and SupplementMnden. I, Loiden, 1937; S. A. Bilgrtmi.
Tamaddun-i 'Arab (Urdu translation of Le Bon Gustave's French work), Agra, 1898;
F. ThiUy. A History of Philosophy. New York, 1951; A. J. Arberry, PiUgerald's
Salaman and Abadi. Cambridge, 1956.
Chapter XXVIII
IBN RUSHD*
INTRODUCTION
Abu al-Walld Muhammad ibn Abmad ibn Muhammad ibn Ruibd waa born
in Cordova in 520/1126. His family was renowned for ita deep knowledge in
Fiqh, and his father and grandfather held the office of the Chief Justice of
Andalus. This religious descent gave him the opportunity to reach a high
standard in Islamic studies. The Qur’an and its exegesis, the Tradition of the
1 On tho life and work of ibn Ruifid see: Renan. Arerroes st 1‘averroisme, Paris,
first ed.. 1852, ninth cd„ 1932; Munk. MOanges de Philosophic Juice el Arabe,
Paris. 1859. reprint 1927; Horten. Die Philosophic dee Ibn Roschd, Bonn. 1910;
Die Mrtaphysik des Averrois, Haifa. 1812; Die Hauptlehren ton Avernfs noth
seiner Schrift, Die Wuierlegung dec Gatali. Bonn, 1913; Cam de Vaux. Les Penseurs
de'Islam, Vol. IV. Paris. 1923; Gauthier, Ibn Rochd. Paris, 1948; La tMone d'Ibn
Rochd cur les rapports de la religion el de la philosophic. Parts. 1909; Quadri, La
philosophic Arabe dans I'Europs Medicvale des Origins a A •errors. Paris, 1947
(translated from the Italian); Gilson. History of Christian Philosophy in the Middle
Ages, Now York. 1954; El Ehwnny. Islamic Philosophy, Cairo, 1957; Hourani, The
Life and Thought of Ibn Huihd (a iwnoe of four lectures). American University.
Cairo, 1947; Abbis Mahmud al-'Aqq&d, Ibn RuOd (in Arabic), Cairo, 1953.
For Gw editions of hia writings, and his manuscripts see; Brockelmann. Geschichle
der arabisehen LUleralur. Vol. I. Weimar. 1888; Bouygns, Noirs rur les philosophes
arabes eornmes des Latins au Moyen-Age. Invenlaire des lertes arabes d'Avervots.
540
Ibn Ruibd
Prophet, the science of Fiqh, Arabic language and literature were all learnt
by him by oral transmission from an authorized doctor ('Him). He revised the
Milikite book al-MuwaM', which he had studied with his father abu al-Qisim,
and learnt it by heart.* He also pursued such scientific studies as mathematics,
physics, astronomy, logic, philosophy, and medicine. His teachers in these
sciences were not renowned, but on the whole Cordova was famous for being a
centre of philosophical studies, while Seville was renowned for its artistic ac
tivities. In a dialogue between him and ibn Zuhr the physioian, while they were
in the Court of al-Mansur ibn ‘Abd al-Mu'min, ibn Ru jhd, proud of the scientific
atmosphere in his native city, said: "If a learned man died in Seville his books
are sent to Cordova to be sold there; and if a singer died in Cordova his musical
instruments are sent to Seville.”* In fact. Cordova at that time rivalled Damas
cus, Baghdad, Cairo, and the other great cities in eastern Islam.
He was the pupil of neither ibn Bijjah nor ibn fufail, the two great
Maghribian philosophers. In his story Hayy Bin Taqzdn, ibn Tufail observed
that most of the learned men in Maghrib were interested in mathematics, and
that philosophy when introduced through the books of Aristotle, al-FArAbi,
and ibn Staa was found unsatisfactory. The first philosopher who could
Melanges de l'Univeraitd Saint Joseph. Beyrouth. 1922. Latin Translations-.
Opera Omnia, apud Juntas, 10 Vola, Venice, 1574. New oditions of tho Aeerroce
Lorinw have been recently published: (i) Parra Naluralia, Cambridge, Mass.. 1949;
(ii) Commenlarium magnum in Aristotelis De Anima. Cambridge, Mass., 1953.
Arabic Editions and Translations: Editions by Bouyges: Taha/ul al-TaMlul,
Beyrouth, 1930; Talkbif KMb al-MdqiMl, Beyrouth, 1932; To/air ma ba d al-
Tabi'ah, 5 Volo., 1938-1951; TaM/ul al-TaM/ut, Cairo. 1319/1901 (this edition
comprises the Tahd/ul of al-GhaxAli, the Tahaful of ibn Rujfad and tho Tahdful
of Khwljah ZAdah), complete English translation by Simon van den Bergh, London.
1954, in 2 Vota.. tho first, for the text and the second for the notes, (i) Fail al-MaqOl;
(li) Al-KafU 'an ManMij al-Adiliah; (iii) "Diseussion of the Opinions of ibn Rutbd by
ibn Taimlyyah.” The first two treatises aro edited in Arabic by Muller, Munich. 1839.
and translated by him into Gorman. 1875; reprinted in Arabic, Cairo. 1894-1895.
French translation by aauthior, Accord de la religion el de la Philosophic, Algior.
1905.
English translation by Jamllur RabmAn, The Philosophy and Theology a/
Amrrois, Baroda. 1921; a new English trans, is in preparation by George Hourani.
Kasd'il Ibn Ruybd. Hyderabad. 1947. A compendium of six treat ore Taltbis;
(i) Physics; (ii) De Carlo a Mundo; (iii) De Ocneralione el Corruptions ; (iv) Meteorolo-
ffica; (v) De Anima; (vi) Metaphysica. De Anima, TalUtf KMb al-Nafs, Arabic
edition by A. F. El-Ehwany, Cairo. 1950.
Metaphysics. TaUhlf ma ba'd al-Tabi ah: (i) Arabic edition by Musptfa Kabb&ni,
Cairo, n.d.; (ii) Compendio de mela/isKa, Arabic text with Spanish trans., intro
duction and glossary by Caribe Quirts Rodriguot, Madrid. 1919; (iii) Die Epitome
der Metaphyeik dee Amrroes, German translation by Simon van den Bergh. Leiden.
1924; (iv) new Arabic edition by Amin Osman. Cairo. 1958 (paraphrasis in Libros
Platonic de Republican. new English translation by Rosenthal. Cambridge, 1936.
■ Tho biography of ibn Rughd by at Dbahabi. reproduced in Arabic by Renan,
p. 456. (See also Tabagdt ul-Afibba' by ibn abi Upubi ah; KMb al-Mugbrib by
ibn Sa'ld. otc.)
• Al-Maqqari. Nafh al Tib. Vol. 11.
541
A History of Muslim Philosophy
have produced something valuable on this subject waa ibn Bijjah, but he
waa occupied in worldly affairs and died before completing his works Al-
gHazali criticized the doctrines of the Muslim philosophers in his book
Tahdfvl, and his way to attain to truth waa a mystic one. Ibn Sina expounded
the doctrine of Aristotle in al-8i>/a'. but he mixed his own opinions with
those of Aristotle This short account given by ibn Tufail concerning the state
of philosophical studies in eastern Islam explains why he asked ibn Rugfcd
to comment on Aristotle.
Ibn Ruih'l lived in the midst of disturbed political conditions. He waa
liom in the reign of the Almoravidre who were overthrown in Marrakuth in
642/1147 by the Almohades, who conquered Cordova in 543/1148. The Almo-
hado movement was started by ibn Tumart who called himself al-Mahdi. lie
tried to imitate the Fifimids, who had appeared a century before and founded
an empire in Egypt, in their encouragement of philosophy, their secret inter
pretations, and their excellence in astronomy and astrology ** His three Almo-
iiade successors ‘Abd al-Mu'inin, abu Ya'qffb, and abu Yffsuf, whom ibn
Rusbd served, wore known for their encouragement of science and philosophy.
When abu Ya'qOb became Amir, he ordered ibn Rujhd to write commen
taries on Aristotle. This is the account given by al-MarrAkughi. Ibn Ruahd
sai<l: “When I entered into the presence of the Prince of the Believere abu
Ya'qOb. I found him with abu Bakr ibn TufR>l alone. Abu Ya'qub began
praising me, mentioning my family and ancestors. The first thing the Prince of
the Believers Baid to me . .. was, 'What is their opinion about the heavens I'
referring to the philosophers. ‘Are they eternal or created !' Confusion and
fear took hold of me.. . . But the Prince of the Believers understood my
fear and confusion, and turned to ibn Tufail and began talking about the
question he had asked me, mentioning what Aristotle. Plato, and all the
philosophers had said... In another acoount given by the same biographer,
ibn Rushd relates that ibn Tufail summoned him one day and told him that
the Prince of the Believers complained of the difficulty of the expression of
Aristotle and his translators, and mentioned the obscurity of his aims saying:
"If someone would tackle those books, summarize them, and expound their
aims after understanding them thoroughly, it would be easier for people to
grasp them." And ihn Tufail got himself excused on the plea of old age and
his occupation in government service and asked ibn Ruthd to take up thia
work.
Thus, ibn Rushd started his commentaries on the books of Aristotle. He
*
deserved for this undertaking the title of the "Commentator" for which he
• Ibn KbnllikAn, biography number 550. On the connection between Almohadee
and the IsmAtlltM, sec al-'AqqAd. Ihn Ru«hd. Cairo 1953, pp. 9-15.
• 'Abd al H’dhid alMarralntbi, rd Posy, pp. 174-75.
■ This is also the opinion of Bouygcs. In his preface to Talkhlf K>Ub al-MAyOlM
(Beyrouth. 1932. p. v.). ho says, "C'est an quality do 'Commentateur* d'Aristoto
quo le philosophc arabe an.lalous Averroee (1125-1198) eet devenu ctMbre."
542
Ibn Kuabd
wm renowned in medieval Europe, Dante in his Divine Comedy mentions him
together with Euclid, Ptolemy, Hippocrates, Avicenna, and Galen, designating
him as the greet Commentator,
"Euclide geomctra e Tolemeo,
Ipoorate, Avicenna e Galieno,
Averois, che’l gran comento feo."
(Dante, “Inferno,” IV, 142-44)
It is related that he wrote three kinds of commentaries the great, the
middle, and tho leaser. The great commentaries are called la/sir, following the
model of the exegesis of the Qur'An. He quotes a paragraph from Aristotle
and then gives its interpretation and commentary. We have now in Arabic
his great commentary of the Metaphyeiai, edited by Bouygee (1357-1371/
1938-1951). The lessor ones are called the talkhif. In the Arabic language
talUty means summary, resume or pr(cu. One may say that these comment
aries although Aristotelian in the main, reveal also the true Ruahdian
philosophy. A compendium called the Majmi'ah or Jaudmi' comprising
six books (Physios. De Cado d Mundo, De Generations el Corruptions,
Meleoroloyica, De Anima and Metaphysical has now been published in
Arabic. In these commentaries, ibn Rughd did not follow the original text
of Aristotle and the order of his thought. An example of the middle
commentaries is to be found in the “Categories," edited by Bouyges in
1357/1932. At the beginning of the paragraph, ibn Rughd says: "gala"
("dixit") referring to Aristotle, and sometimes (not always) gives an excerpt of
the original text.’ This method was current in eastern Islam, and ibn Sina
followed it in his al-Shi/d'. reproducing in many places the very phrases of
the Arabic translation of Aristotle. In fact, ibn Sina declared that in his
al-Shi/a' he was following the "First Master.”
It is true that moet of the commentaries are found in their Latin or Hebrew
translations, or conserved in Hebrew transliteration, but the original Arabic
texts are more sure and accurate. On the whole, the value of ibn Rughd's
commentaries is historical, except for the lesser ones which reveal to a
certain extent his own thought. His own philosophical opinions are to be
found in three important books, the Fad, the Kasht and the Tohd/ul and in
a short treatise called al-Itlisdl. His Colliget (KulliySt) in medicine is as impor
tant aa the Canon of ibn Sina, and was also translated into I-atin. but it was
less famous than that of ibn SinA’s. In jurisprudence (Figh) his book Biddyal
al-Mujlahid is used aa an Arabic reference book.
' The only Arabic middle commentary we have is the "Categories.” The text
of ibn Rujbd compared with tho anoient Arabic translation shows that them is
nothing additional. It is neither a summary nor a commentary. It is simply a new
edition of the translation put in a new phraseologv. tire all tho so-called middle
commentaries of this Ivpo 1 Wo leave lla> qiuwlion open.
543
A History of Muslim Philosophy
He waa better known and appreciated in medieval Europe than in the East
for many reasons. First, hie numerous writing
* were translated into I-stin
and were circulated and conserved, while his original Arabic texts were either
burnt or proscribed due to tho antagonistic spirit against philosophy and
philosophers. Secondly, Europe during the Renaissance was willing to accept
the scientific method as viewed by ibn Rugfad, while science and philosophy
began in the East to be sacrificed for tho sake of mystical and religious
movements. In fact, he himself waa affected by this conflict between science
(and philosophy) and religion. Religion won the battle in the East, and scienoe
triumphed in the West.
His disgrace, persecution, and exile in 593/1196 were the result of that
conflict. The dispute for political power between the representatives of religion
and philosophers never ceased from the third/ninth century onward. Al-Kindi
described this dispute and defended the philosophers in his books.' The mon
of religious learning (juqahi’ and 'ulamS') were nearer to the masses who
were influenced by them. The Muslim rulers, in need of their support, left the
philosophers to the rage of the masses. Several accounts have been given
concerning the exile of ibn Rughd to Lucent, near Cordova. The charge was
that he had written in some of hia books of having seen the giraffe in the
garden of the king of the Berbers. Ibn Rughd said in his defence that be had
written “the king of the two lands." (Berber written in free hand without
diacritical marks can be read aa Barnin.) A second story holds that he had
written down that Venus is divine. A third story is that he denied the
historical truth of the People of 'Ad mentioned in the Qur’&n.
The intrigues of the religious party succeeded to the point that not only
was ibn Rughd exiled but his writings too were publicly burned. A manifesto
*
against philosophy and philosophers was issued and distributed everywhere
in Andalus and MarrAkugh, prohibiting the so-called dangerous studies and
ordering to burn all the books dealing with such sciences. However, his dis
grace did not last long and al-Mansur after his return from MarrAkugh
pardoned and recalled him. Ibn Rushd went to MarrAkugh where he died in
595/1198.
B
PHILOSOPHY AND RELIGION
The accord between philosophy and religion is rightly regarded as the most
important feature of Islamic philosophy. Ibn Rugfad's solution to this problem
was really an ingenious one. As a philosopher, ho found that it waa his duty
to defend the philosophers against the fierce attacks of the faqih» and theo-
• El-Eliwany, fslamic fhiloeophy, Cairo. 1957, pp. 40-43, in which excerpts from
al-Kindl's treatise on "First Philosophy" are translated. Compare what al-Kindi
says in favour of philosophy with what ibn Rugfad seta forth.
• Mentioned by al-AngAri in Renan's Aterroe* el I'averroume, pp. 439-43.
544
Ibn Ruffed
logians, especially after their condemnation by al Qhazili in hia "Incoherence
of the Philosophers." Ibn Rutfad'a treatiao called: Fad al-Maqal fi ma bain
alHikmah w-al-Shari'ah min al-lttudl is a defence of philosophy in so far as
it is shown to be in harmony with religion.
It may be doubted nowadays whether thia question should receive so much
attention, but in the sixth/twelfth century it was really vital. Philosophers
were accused of heresy (kufr) or irreligion. In fact al-Qhazali condemned the
philosophers as irreligious in his Taha/ui. If thia accusation were true, the
philosophers according to Islamic Law would be put to death, unless they
gave up philosophizing or proclaimed publicly that they did not believe in
their philosophical doctrines. Consequently, it was necessary for philosophers
to defend themselves and their opinions.
Ibn Ruahd begins his treatise by asking whether philosophy is permitted,
prohibited, recommended, or ordained by the Sbari'aJi (Islamic Law). His
answer is. from the very outset, that philosophy is ordained or at least recom
mended by religion (religion is used in this context as synonymous with
Siari'ab and specifically Islam). Because the function of philosophy is nothing
more than speculating on the beings and considering them in so far as they
lead to the knowledge of the Creator.10 The Qur'&n exhorts man to this kind
of rational consideration (i'tMr) in many a verse such as: "Consider, you
who have vision.” Al-i'tibAr is a Qur’&nic term which means something more
than pure speculation or reflection (naxar).
To translate this Qur'&nic consideration in logical terms is nothing more
than getting the unknown from the known by way of inference. This type of
reasoning is called deduction of which demonstration (bnrhdn) is the best
form. And since God exhorts man to know Him through demonstration, one
must begin to leam how to distinguish between the demonstrative and the
dialectical, rhetorical, and sophistical deductions. Demonstration is the instru
ment by which one can attain to the knowledge of God. It is the logical method
of thinking, which leads to certainty.
It follows that the Qur'&n exhorts man to study philosophy since he must
speculate on the universe and consider the different kinds of beings. We have
now passed from the legal plane of FiqK to the philosophical one, in spite of
their distinction. The objective of religion is defined in philosophical terms:
it is to obtain the true theory and the true practice (al-'ilm nl-haqq w-al-'amal
al baqq)." Thia reminds us of the definition of philosophy given by al-Kindi
and his followers, which remained current all through Islamic philosophy.
True knowledge is the knowledge of God, of all the other beings as such, and
of the happiness and unhappiness in the hereafter.” The way of acquiring
knowledge is of two kinds, apprehension and assent. Assent is either de
monstrative, dialectical, or rhetorical
10 Fad. Cairo ed-. p. 2.
'• Ibid.. p. 18
” Ibid.. p. 19
MS
A History of Muslim Philosophy
These three kinds of assent are all used in the Qur'in Men are of three
classes, the philosophers, the theologians, and t.he common people (al jumhur).
Tho philosophers are the people of demonstration. The theologians—the
Aah'arites whose doctrine was the official one at the time of ibn Ruahd—are
of a lower degree, since they start from dialectical reasoning and not from
scientific truth. The masses are the "people of rhetoric" who understand only-
through examples and poetic thinking.
So far, religion is compatible with philosophy. Tho act and aim of philo
sophy are the same as those of religion. Now about the compatibility of
their methods and subject-matter. If the traditional (al-mangOl) ia found to
be contrary to the rational (al-ma'gul), it is to be interpreted in such a way
as to be in harmony with the rational.11 Allegorical interpretation (ii'wU) is
based on the fact that there are certain Qur’inic verses which have an ap
parent (yihir) meaning and an inner (bdtin) meaning. Early Muslim scholars
in the face of such verses avoided interpreting them, because they were afraid
to confuse the minds of the common people. The Ath'arites interpreted some
such verses as that of "sitting on the Throne" fal-uliudj, while the
Hanbalitee believed in its apparent meaning. The position of ibn Rugfed,
as a philosopher, is different from that of the early Muslims, the Agfa'arites
and tho Hanbalites. Ta ml is to be practised only by the philosophers who
are the people of demonstration. Even then, this Id'wil should be kept back
as esoteric knowledge, far from being declared to the masses.
Ibn Rughd returns to the plane of Fiqh and compares the logical method
of philosophy with the traditional one of Fiqh. This latter, called the principles
of Fiqh, depends on four sources: the Qur'in, Tradition, ijma‘ (consensus)
and qiyas (legal syllogism). We have seen that the Qur'an has to be ration
ally interpreted. Ijma' comes from the unanimous accord of the opinions of all
the qualified scholars at a certain time. But there was no consensus at any time
about doctrinal matters, simply because some scholars believed, aa mentioned
in the Qur’tn. that there were certain matters which should be oonoealed.
Only “those who are well grounded in learning"1* (almnihun fi al-'ilm) had
the right to know. And, since the.-e is no consensus in doctrinal matters,
al-Ohazili had no right to condemn the philosophers aa irreligious on the
basis of They deserved, in al-OharAlI's opinion, the charge of heresy
flakfir) for three things: their doctrine concerning the eternity of the world,
their denial of Clod's knowledge of particulars, and their denial of bodily
resurrection
According to ibn Rughd, religion is based on three principles in whioh every
Muslim of the above-mentioned three classes should believe. These are the
existence of God, tho prophecy, and resurrection.1* These three principles
constitute the subject-matter of religion. As prophecy depends on revelation,
11 IM.p. 8.
“ IM.. p. 10.
"• IM.. p. 15.
546
Ibn Ruifad
philosophy remains distinct from religion, unless it is shown that reason and
revelation are in accord with each other. This problem ia discussed in other
books of his in detail. But he who donies any one of the above principles is
irreligious fU/ir). He can believe what he likes through any of the demon
strative, dialectical, or rhetorical ways.
Philosophers should not declare their esoteric interpretations to the masses
leat they should be led to heresy. The theologians who did so were responsible
for the origin of the various Islamic sects which accused one another of heresy.
All in all, philosophy is the twin sister of religion; they are the two friends
who. by their very nature, love each other.
C
THE WAY TO GOD
Having established that religion has apparent and inner moanings, symbolic
for the common people and hidden for tho learnod, ibn Rugbd endeavours in
his book: al-Kathf 'an Manahij al-AdiUah to find out the way to God,
i.e., the methods given in the Qur'&n to attain to the belief in the existence
of God and to the knowledge of His attributes, according to the apparent
meaning, for the first knowledge that every reasonable man is entitled to
obtain is of the way which leads to the belief in the existence of the Creator.
Since this book was written in a theological form, ibn Rughd began to
review the methods of the various Islamic sects, which he classified into five
principal kinds: the Agh'arites, the Mu'tazilites, the Bifinitea, Qaghawites, and
the Sufis.1* It was but natural that he should have reserved for Ilia contem
poraries, the Agfa'arites, the greatest part of his discussion, but strangely
enough he never referred to the Batinites mentioned in the above classifica
tion, Tho Mu'tazilitea wore briefly discussed along with the Agh'aritee, but
not separately through their original writings which had not, aa he later
stated, reached the Maghrib.
The HashawiteB maintain that the way to God is listening through oral
transmission (al-samd')" and not through reason. They mean that faith in
God is received from the Prophet and that reason has nothing to do with it.
But this contradicta what is mentioned in the Sacred Book which calls men
in general to believe through rational proofs.
The Ajh'arites hold that the way to God ia through reason, but their method
is different from the religious way which the Qur’&n haa called man to follow
They lay down certain dialectical premises from which they start, such as: the
world is temporal; bodies arc composed of atoms; atoms are created; the
agent of the world is neither temporal nor eternal. Their arguments, however,
AlKatbf 'an Mandhij al-AdMA. Cairo ed.. p. 31. Ibn Rughd mentions in the
beginning only four sects; the Sufis have boon excluded, although ho discuss™
their method later.
>’ Ibid., p. 31. Ahsam' is also called tho traditional.
A History of Muslim Philosophy
are far from being understood by the common people, and are inconsistent
and unconvincing.1* Another Ajh'arite way is that of abu al-Ma'Ui.1’ It ia
based on two premises. that the world is probable fjA’ix). and that what is
probable is temporal. But this way abolishes the wisdom of creating the
creatures as such. The way of ibn Sina” is in some respects similar to that
of abu al-Ma'&li; only he substitutes tho probable by the possible.
The Sufis” follow the mystic way. They say that the knowledge of God is
thrown into tho soul from high above, after we have got rid of our earthly
desires But. thia wav is not accessible to all mankind, and it abolishes specu
lation for which people are exhorted all through the Qur'in.
What, then, is the true way to God which is suitable for all mankind I
Two ways are mentioned in the Qur'&n, called by ibn Rujhd the proof of
providence and the proof of creation. The first is teleological and the second
cosmological, both starting from man and other beings, not from the universe
as a whole.
The proof of providence depends on two principles: the first is that all
beings are suitable for the existence of man; and the second is that this
suitability is by necessity due to an agent intending to do so by will, since
this suitability cannot be achieved by chance. All beings are created for the
service of man: stars shine at night for his guidanoe, his bodily organs aro
fit tor his life and existence. A whole theory of value can be developed from
this view.
The proof called creation takes into consideration the animals, plants, and
heavens. It is also baaed on two principles: that all beings are created, and
that everything created is in need of a Creator. The examples given refer to
animated beings. When we see that bodies devoid of life are endowed with life,
we know by necessity that there is a Creator of life. Le., God. Heavens, also,
are commanded to move and take care of the sublunary world. God says in
the Holy Book: "Verily, those on whom ye call beside God could never create
a Hy if they all united to do so.”" He who wants to know God should know
the essenoe and usee of things to attain to the knowledge of true creation.
These two ways are common both to the learned Hile and tho masses. The
difference between their knowledge lies in the degree of details.” Common
people are content with the sensuous knowledge, which is the first step to
science. The Hite are oonvinoed only by demonstration.
The significance of God's unicity is expressed in the Qur’&nic principle
"No God but He."" Negation of other deities is considered here to be an addi-
“ Ibid., p. 32. and ad paeeim.
Ibid., p. 40.
*• Ibid., p. 41.
” Ibid., p. 44.
Ibid., p. 46.
■■ Ibid., p. 48.
“ Ibid., p. 4». ILa iMAa uui Ku./
548
Ibn Ruibd
tional meaning to the affirmation of God’a unicity." What would happen if
there were more than one God ? The world would be subject to corruption:
one god would be superior to the others, or the rest of the gods would find
some device to dethrone the one in power.”
God is qualified by Beven main attributes;” knowledge, life, power, will,
audition, sight, and speech. They are human qualifications considered in their
absolute perfection. Three positions can be taken aa regards the relation
between God's essence and His attributes. The first is the negation of the
attributes. This is the position of the Mu'tazilites. The socond is to affirm them
in a state of complete perfection. The third is to conceive them as trancendent
and beyond human knowledge. They are in the sphere of the unknowable. As
a matter of fact, the Qur'&n asserts the attributes and yet states-that "Nothing
is similar to Him,"18 which means that He is unknowable. Che common
people may believe according to the apparent meaning of the text that He
sees, hears, speaks, etc. The people of demonstration should not expound their
interpretation before the masses. The doctrines of both the Mu'tazilites and the
Aah'arites are unsound. Ibn Ruabd criticizes their solutions in hia book al-
Mandluj and at length in tho Taha/ul. He holds that in the case of the attri
butes. without affirming or negating them, one must follow the apparent
meaning mentioned in the Qtir'&n. As to philosophical interpretation, this
must be kept esoteric.
The acta of God are reduced to five principal ones: creation, sending the
prophets, predestination, justice, and resurrection.” They constitute the
relationship between God and the world and man.
Creation is an act of God. He created the world providentially, not by
chance. The world ia well ordered and is in a state of tho most perfect regularity,
which proves the existence of a wise Creator. Causality is presupposed. All
the Ruihdian proofs depend on tho belief that nothing comes to be without
a cause, and that there is a definite series of causes emanating from a Prime
Cause. He says: "He who, in the artificial things, denies or cannot understand
the caused resulting from causes would have no knowledge of the art or the
■ Wahddnlyyab; sometimes translated as "unity" which gives a different
meaning, unity being wabdab.
” Ibn Rugfad refers to three verses; (i) xxi, 22—"If there wore therein Goda
besides Allah, then verily both (the heavens and the earth) had been disordered."
(ii) xxiii, Bl—"Nor is there any God along with Him; olao would each God have
assuredly championed that which he created, and some of them would assuredly
have overcome others...(iii) xvii. 42—"If there were other gods along, with
Him. as they say. then had they sought a way against the Lord of the Throne"
(PickthaU's trans.).
•’ Al Kodda/. p- S3.
” Ibid., p. 60; Surah xiii, 11—"Naught is aa His likeness; and He is the Hearer,
the Seer" (Pickthall'a trans.).
-• Ibid., p. 80.
549
A History of Muslim Philosophy
artisan; similarly, he who denies the existence in this world of the depend
ence of effects on causes would deny the wise Maker.””
The proof for sending propheta is based on two principles mentioned in
the Qur'&n. The first is that men of this type are those who prescribe the
laws through God's revelation, not through human learning. Tho act of a
prophet is to prescribe laws which if followed by men would bring them ever
lasting happiness. The second principle is that he who is found to be qualified
to perform this act of lawgiving is a prophet. Just aa the act of the physician
is to cure the body, and he who effects this cure is a physician, so the act
of the prophet is to prescribe laws and he who is found to do this act is a
prophet. Theologians assume that our belief in the truth of the prophets lies
in the belief in their miraculous acts, which are supernatural. But the Qur'&n
refuses to follow this way which was common to previous religions. When the
Arabs told Muhammad that they would not believe in him unless he made a
spring flow from dry earth, he answered through God's revelation: "I am
only a human being, a messenger."’* The only miracle of Islam is ita Holy
Book, the Qur'&n, which comprises the laws necessary for the well-being
of man. Thus, there is nothing supernatural,•* since everything goes on
according to natural laws resulting from the close association of causes and
effects.
Predestination is a very difficult problem about which the opinions of the
Muslim thinkers oscillate from absolute fatalism to absolute free-will. Fatalism
abolishes man's freedom, and, consequently, his responsibility. The Mu'tazilites
are in favour of free-will which is the ground of man's responsibility for his
good and bad doings. If this view is assumed, God has nothing to do with
man's acts, man being creator of his own acts. And, consequently, there
would be other creators besides the Creator. The Aah'arites maintain a mid
way position saying that man is predestined and yet he acquires the power
to act. ThiB is their famous doctrine concerning the acquisition (al-laub). But
this solution is. in ibn Rughd's view, self-contradictory. Their doctrine leads
to fatalism.
Man is predisposed neither to fatalism nor to free will. He is determined.
Determinism is the production of acta according to their appropriate causes
Causes are external or internal. Our acta are accomplished both through our
will and the compatibility of external happenings. Human will is determined
by outer stimuli which are subject to definite regularity and harmonic order
according to the universal will of God. Not only are our acts determined by
causes from without, they are also related to causes from within ourselves. Tho
determined regularity in external and internal causes is what we call predestina-
Ibid., p. 88.
“ Ibid., p. 97; Sfirah xvii. 9S—"Am I aught save a mortal messenger f'
•’ Supernatural in the sonso of interuppting the course of nature Ikhdriq).
550
Ibn Rugfad
tion.M God's knowledge of these causes and of what results from them is the
reason for their being.
God is just and never does injustice to man, aa declared in the Qur'an.
The nature of man is not absolutely good, although good is dominant. The
majority of mankind are good. God has created good essentially, and bad
accidentally for the good. Good and bad are similar to fire which has many
uses for the well-being of things, yet in somo cases it may be harmful. This
Rugfadian theory supports the optimism that prevails in the world.
All religions are in accord as to the reality of resurrection. They differ only
as to whether it is spiritual or bodily. Spiritual resurrection is the survival
of the soul after its separation from the body. Belief in bodily resurrection is
more suitable for the minds of the masses who are short of understanding the
spiritual immortality of the eoul.
D
THE WAY TO KNOWLEDGE
We pass now from ibn Ruafad. the Muslim philosopher garbed in a cloak
of Fiqk, to the commentator of Aristotle, who waa more faithful to the "First
Master” than Alexander of Aphrodisiac and Themistius. Medieval philosophy
in Europe was influenced by Aristotle through the commentaries of ibn Rujfad
As Gilson rightly puts it, "Strangely enough, very few men have been more
influential than Averroea in shaping the popular notion of medieval philosophy
which is now currently received aa historical truth.”14 It is true that his main
system is Aristotelian, but under the influences of ideas received from different
sources, he gave the system a new form.
The way to knowledge is one of the major problems discussed all through
Muslim philosophy because of its relationship to higher existente. namely, the
“agent intellect" with which man gets in communion. The soul and intellect
are carefully distinguished by ibn Ruftjyl in his consideration of the process
of knowledge. A full account about the hierarchical order of beings is necessary
to understand the place of these two entities. This ia why ibn Rujhd began
his treatise 7'alkbif Kihib al-Na/a by giving a short review concerning the
composition of beings and their source of behaviour and knowledge From
the very start he says: "The aim of this treatise ia to set forth in psychology
the commentators' opinions which are more related to natural science and
more appropriate to Aristotle's purpose. It would be relevant before that to
give a brief introduction about the necessary principles presupposed for
understanding the substance of tho soul.” These are: (i) All perishable beings
are composed of matter and form, each of which ia not by itaelf a body.
Al-KatkOal. P- 107.
“ Gilson. Hitiory 0/ Chrietian Philosophy in ihr Middle Agee, New York. 1954,
p. 218.
551
A History of Muslim Philosophy
although through their combination the bodyexista. (ii) Prime matter has no
existence in actuality, but is only the potency to receive forms, (iii) The
first simple bodies in which prime matter is actualized are the four elements:
fire, air, water, and earth, (iv) The elements enter in the composition of all
other bodies through mixture. The remote cause of this mixture is the heavenly
bodies, (v) Natural heat is the proximate cause of the real combination,
(vi) Organic, beings are generated from animate individuals of their kind
through natural heat. Soul is the proximate cause of their generation and
their remote cause is the intelligence that moves the spheres.
Before further discussion of psychology ibn Rujftd asks the crucial question:
"Can there be forms separate from matter!”" The answer to this question
constitutes the true way of knowledge.
Material forms can never be separate from matter, since physical forma**—
which is another expression of material forme—Subsist only in matter. Hence
they are temporal and subject to change. They are not eternal since they
have no subsistence exoept in matter. It follows that separate forms are some-
tiling other than the material forms. Consequently, the separateness of the
rational soul, namely, the intellect, can only be demonstrated if it is shown
that it ia pure form. The soul is not separate because it is "the form of an
organic natural body.”*' Ths soul is divided according to its ante into five
kinds: the nutritive, the sensitive, the imaginative, the cognitive, and the
appetitive, and this last seems to be subsequent to the imaginative and
sensitive.*11
The hierarchical order of the faculties is dependent on the order of the
material forms, mentioned above. The way of animal knowledge is by sensation
and imagination, and that of man, besides theee two, by intellect. Thus, the
way to knowledge is either through the senses or through the intellect,
leading either to the knowledge of the particular or of the universal. True
knowledge is that of the universal, otherwise animals can be said to have
knowledge. The term "knowledge" is applied equivocally to animals, man.
and God. Animal knowledge is limited by the sensuous and imaginative,
whereas human knowledge is universal. Sensation and imagination exist in
animals for their conservation. To assure their security, protect themselves,
and obtain food, animals have to move towards or away from the sensiblee.
In case the sensibles are present, they are perceived by the senses; and in
their abeenoe, representations take their plaoe. Sensations are, then, the
condition of representation, and "every being which has representations
necessarily has sensations.”" But, since man has a higher faculty, namely,
“ Ibn Ru«bd. KMb ul-NaJs, p. 8.
11 "Material forma" ia oalled in Arabic AoyOldnlyyaA or taM'iaA. The first term
comes from the Greek term Ayte. the second moans physical or natural.
•’ KMb al Na/,. p. 11.
11 Ibid., p. 13.
" Ibn Ruihd. Tabdful, tr van don Bergh, p. 301.
552
Ibn Ruifad
intellect, he gets representations through thought end reasoning. whereas
in animals representations exist by nature.” Further, forms porceived by
animals are finite, and sometimes, when perceived by man. they become
universal images. Those who assume that animals have reason confuse uni
versal images with universal conoepta. Forms perceived by man are infinite,
in the sense that the particulars they denote are infinite. Representations,
in so far aa they are the motor cause for movement, effect their action in
man through their collaboration with concepts.
Human knowledge must not be confused with divine knowledge, since "man
perceives the individual through the senses and universal existents through
his intellect. The cause of man's perception changes through the change in
the things perceived, and the plurality of perceptions implios the plurality of
objects. "* ’ It is impossible that God's knowledge should be analogous to ours,
because "our knowledge is the effect of the existenta, whereas God’s knowledge
ia their cause.”** The two kinds of knowledge, far from being similar to one
another, stand in opposition. God's knowledge is eternal, while man's know
ledge is temporal “It is God’s knowledge which produced the existenta, and
ii is not the existenta which produce His knowledge,"
* ’
So far. wo have seen that there is individual as well as universal knowledge.
The first is the outcome of sensation and imagination, and the second is the
result of the intellect. The act of the intellect is to perceive the notion, the
universal concept, and the essence. Tho intellect has three basic operations:
abstraction, combination, and judgment. When we perceive a universal notion,
we abstract it from matter. This is more evident in a thing denuded of and
far from matter, such as the point and line.** Not only does intellect abstract
simple apprehensions from matter, It combines them together and judges that
some of them when predicated of some others are true or false. The first of
these operations is called apprehension (inMligere. in the Latin terminology)
and the second is called assent (crrduliku). We have, then, three successive
operations. First, we get in the intellect single notions (intentions) totally
abstracted from matter, and this operation is what has been called abstraction.
Secondly, by way of combining two or more notions together we have the
concept, such aa the ooncept of man which is composed of animality and
rationality, the genua and differentia. And this constitutes the ease of a thing.
Hence, a complete essence constitutes also ita definition. Thirdly, since
concepts are neither true nor false, when affirmed or negated in a proposition,
we have a judgment.
**
The intellect is theoretical and practical. Practical intellect is common to
•• KM oi-Na/s. p. 69.
*■ Tahaful. p. 279.
•• Ibid., p. 285
•• Ibid.
•• KiM al Na/t, p. 67.
•• Ibid., p 68
553
A History of Muslim Philosophy
all people. This faculty ia the origin of art* of man necessary and useful for
his existence Practical intellectibles are produced through experience which
is baaed on sensation and imagination: Consequently, practical intellect is
corruptible since its intellect!bles depend for their existence on sensation and
imagination. Hence they are generated when perceptions and representations
arc generated, and corrupted when these arc corrupted.
Through practical intellect man loves end hates, lives in society, and has
friends. Virtues are the product of practical intellect. The existence of virtues
ia nothing more than the existence of representations from which we move
towards virtuous acta in the most right manner; such as to be brave in the
proper place and time and according to the right measure."
Two main questions must be settled concerning the theoretical intellect,
the first its eternity and the second, its oommunion with the agent intellect.
The first question can be put in other terms: Are the theoretical intellectibles
always in actuality, or do they first exist in potency and then in actuality,
thus being in some way material !•* This brings ibn Hu jhd once more to the
consideration of the material forms, grading from the elementary forms (i.e
forms of the four elements) to the representations produced by the imaginative
soul. They all have four things in oommon. (1) Their existence is subsequent
to change. (2) They are diverse and multiple according to the diveniity and
plurality of their objects. (It follows from these two qualities that they are
temporal.) (3) They aro composed of something material and something formal
(4) The perceived is different from the existent, since the form perceived is
one in so far as it is intelligible and multiple aa regards its individuality."
Intelligible forms in man are different from all the other material forms.
(I) Their intellectual existence is one and the same aa their objective existence
which can be pointed out. (2) Their perception ia infinite since the forms when
abstracted have no individual plurality. (3) The intellect ia the intellectible
and perception is the perceived. (4) Intellect grows with old age, whereas all
other faculties weaken, because the intellect operates without an organ."
The operation of intellection runs like this: there ia the intellect or the
person who perceives, and there are the intellectibles which are the object of
intellection and perceived by the intellect. Intcllectiblea must be existent,
otherwise the intellect would have nothing to apprehend, because it can
only be attached to what exists, not to what does not exist." And, our know-
ledge is the effect of the oxistenta. Now. these intellectibles, namely, the univer
sals, either exist in the soul aa held by Plato, or exist in the reality outside the
soul. Ibn Rujjjd, following Aristotle, rejects the doctrine of idealism. Conse
quently, universals exist in reality and their existence is attached to the
•• Ibid., p. 71.
•’ Ibid., p. 72.
“ Ibid., p. 74.
" Ibid., p. 7«.
" Tabd/ul, p. 281
554
Ibn Ruibd
particulars composed of matter and form. Through the operation of abstrac
tion, the intellect denudes the forms of matter.
It follows that intellectiblee are partly material and partly Immaterial.
* 1
They are material in so far as they depend on representations which in their
turn depend on the particulars. The material intellect must not be under
stood aa corporeal, but as mere possibility, the disposition to reoeive the
intellectibles. What brings out the possible intellect from potency to actuality
ia the agent intellect. It is higher and nobler than the possible. It is itself
existing, always in actuality, whothcr perceived by us or not. This agent intel
lect ia from all points of view one and the same with the intellectiblee.
Man can attain to the agent intellect in his life-time as he grows up. Sinoe
it has been shown that the intellect is nothing other than the intellectiblea,
the act of the intellect in acquiring the intellectiblee is called the "union"
(al-ittilkid) or the "oommunion” (al-itlifdl).
Union is not something analogous to the way of the Sufis, since the agent
intellect is not divine and does not illuminate oqr souls as some Neo-Platoniste
hold. Union is a rational operation explained on epistemological grounds, and
is baaed on the acquirement of the universal forma by the possible intellect.
These universal forma have no existence in actuality' apart from the sensible
individuals.
When ibn Ruibd was translated into Latin, some of his doctrines were
accepted and some refuted. The movement which wm influenced by him is
called Latin Averroisra. It means Aristotelian philosophy aa interpreted by
ibn Ruifad, his distinction between philosophy and theology, his empirical
rationalism, and more especially his theory concerning the intellect. On the
whole, Latin Avenoism considered ibn Ruibd a faithful exponent of Aristotle
and of truth. Meanwhile, there arose many theologians who opposed hia
doctrines. An example of this opposition is to be found in the treatise of
Albert the Great, "On the Oneness of the Intellect against Averroes." Siger of
Brabant followed ibn Ruibd in his psychology in particular; a summary of
Eiger’s treatise: "On the Intellect,”** proves that he borrowed his ideas from
a translation of the Kitab al-Nafi. The Averroist movement lasted till tbe
ninth/fifteenth century and had many reactions, which proves the great in
fluence of the philosopher of Cordova.
E
THE WAY TO SCIENCE
Scienoe, religion, and philosophy constitute three different realms. Man is
by necessity forced to find some way of harmonising these different aspects of
culture which oo-exist in the society in which he lives; otherwise his personality
•* KM al-Nalt. p. 88.
•’ For this summary, aoo Gilson, op. cU., p. 398.
555
A History at Muslim Philosophy
would disintegrate Science is necessary for the welfare of all the people living
in a civilized community. Their material existence ia dependent on and corre
lated with the degree of scientific knowledge. Religion is even more fundamental
in human societies. Ao Bergson puts it, “We find in the past, we could find to
day, human societies with neither science nor art nor philosophy But there
has never been a society without religion.”*• Philosophy is the search for
truth. It has rightly been said that man ia a metaphysical animal. The great
ness of famous philosophers—Plato, Aristotle, ibn Sina. ibn Ruab'l. Dee-
cartes, Kant. etc.—lire in placing each of these three disciplines in its proper
place, both in the sphere of knowledge and of action. The first philosopher* in
Islam gave to science its due consideration, without devaluing religion. Al-
Kindi, al-F&ribi, and ibn Sina were all scientists and philosophers. And with
that, they were all sincere Muslims, except that they interpreted religion in
the light of their scientific and philosophical knowledge.
AI.Qhar.ali was dissatisfied with the doctrines of tho philosophers. He
attacked them in his book “The Incoherence of the Philosophers'' and accused
them of ku/r on twenty pointe. The eloquence of al-QbazAli, hi* deep know
ledge of the art of controversy and argumentation, and hia vast erudition in
every study gave him a wide popularity to the point that he waa considered
an eminent authority on Islam (bwjjal ai-IMm).
Ibn Ruibd answered the accusations point by point. The discussion be
tween the two great figures is really an interesting debate, which mirrors a
genuine conflict in Muslim society, between religion, on the one hand, and
science and philosophy, on the other Ibn Ruibd. in his capacity as a philo
sopher aiming at truth, integrated the three apparently diverse realms. Through
rational interpretation of tho Qur'ln, ho effected tho harmony of religion with
philosophy. He unveiled the true way to religion a* stated in the Qur'in.
He, now, turns to pave the way to science. In his enthusiastic defenoe
of religion, al-Qbazab unintentionally shut the door to it. The mystic way
of the Sufis prescribed by him is incompatible with the rational methods
of science. The Muslims, unfortunately, followed al-Qbazili. the "Authority of
Islam," and neglected little by little the study of the scienoe*. Their once great
civilization faded. On tho other hand, ibn Ruibd defended science, and medieval
Europe followed the way prescribed by him to attain to it. Thia is the true
spirit of Latin Averroism which led to the rise of European science. Scienoe
is the body of systematized and formulated knowledge based on observation
and classification of facta. But the way toscienoe is more basic than the scientific
truths so obtained, since through the scientific method we can attain to the
scientific realities and progress more and more in our study.
The two ToM/vte, of al-Qfaazkli and that of ibn Ruibd, picture the idea*
which were in play on the stage of Islamic civilization during the fifth and
sixth/eleventh and twelfth oenturies. Some of those ideas, though now oon-
Bergson, TA* Two Sowou 0/ Morality and Roltyion, Now York, ISM. p. 10».
55R
Ibn Iluifad
siderod to be of mere historical value, were of major importance at the time.
The length at which the problem of the eternity of the world is discussed and
ita prime place at the head of the twenty discussions indicate the importance
that al-Qbaz£li gave to it. Ibn Rujhd considers that the main questions for
which al-Ghazili charged the philosophers of being irreligious amount to three:
eternity of the world, denial of God’s knowledge of particulars, and bodily
resurrection. In our view, the problem which still remains of vital importance
is that of causality. Scientific thought can only be established on the basis
of the causal principle. While Hume criticized causality, Kant tried to find out
somo rational grounds on which causality can stand Through transcendental
a priori forms of pure reason, Kant believed that science is safeguarded The
induction of Stuart Mill presupposes universal causation. Russell says:
“Whether from pure prejudice, or from the influence of tradition, or for some
other reason, it is easier to believe that there is a law of nature to the effect
that causes are always followed by their effects than to the effect that this
usually happens."" Only contemporary science has replaced the conception
of “cause” by "causal laws," causal lines, statistics, etc.
Ibn Ruthd found himself entitled to safeguard science and show the way
to attain to scientific realities, since al-Qbazali undermined the necessary
relation of cause and effect. As Quadri puts it: “La science perdait ainsi toute
raison d’etre. La subs(Stance n'avait plus de fondement. ... La pens^e scien-
tifique (Jevait etre revendiquee et sauv4e."“
Al-QhazJUi begins the dialogue about the natural sciences by enumerating
the different sciences “to make it known that the Holy Law does not ask one
to contest and refute them." In this enumeration he mentions such sciences
as the art of incantation, alchemy, astrology, etc. Ibn Rushd rejects such
pseudo-scienoee. The talismanic art ia vain. Whether alchemy really exists
ia very dubious. Astrology does not belong to the physical sciences."
The real reason why al-Gh»z41i denied the necessary causal relation is that
"on its negation depends the possibility of affirming the existence of miracles
whioh interrupt the usual course of nature, like changing of the rod into a
serpent. . . According to ibn Ruahd. miracles must not bo questioned or
exuninod by the philosophers. “He who doubts them merits punishment."
However, the miracle of Islam lies not in such miracles aa changing the rod
into a serpent, but in the Qur’an, “the existence of which is not an inter*
ruption of the course of nature assumed by tradition . .. but its miraculous
nature « established by way of perception and consideration for every
man. . .. And this miracle is far superior to all others."" In fact, ibn Ruahd
repeats here what he has stated before in his twin books tho t'afl and the
" Bertrand Riuwell, Human KnouM^e. London. 1948, p. 473.
“ Quadri. La 1-hHorophie Aral*. Paris. 1947, p. 204.
•• TaKa/ul ol-TaMful. tr. ran don Bergh. Vol. I. p. 312.
•’ Ibid., p. 313.
/hid., p. 315.
557
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Kaibl Recent Muslim theologians, Muhammad 'Abduh, Ameer Ali, and
others, have adopted this Rughdian view which is now current in all Muslim
societies. A return to ibn Rughd ia one of the incentives to recent renaissance
in the East. Muhammad 'Abduh says: "It is impossible for the people of
Islam to deny the relation existing in thia world between causes and effocU.",•
We pass from this prelude to the heart of the discussion. Al Qbazali posits
the theme like this: "According to us the connection between what is usually
believed to be a cause and what is believed to be an effect is not a necessary
connection, each of the two things has its own individuality and is, not the
other... the satisfaction of thirst does not imply drinking, nor burning contact
with fire. ... For the connection in these things is based on a prior power in
God to create them in a successive order, though not because this connection
is necessary in itself."
Ibn Rugtjd starts his answer from common sense, which in his view is the
basis of certitude. "To deny the existence of efficient causes which are observed
in sensible things is sophistry, and ho who denies them either denies with his
tongue what is present in his mind or is carried away by a sophistical
doubt.. .
But philosophy cannot be based on common sense. Empiricism is useful
for practical ends, not for exact sciences. Both practical empiricism based
on common sense and scientific knowledge believe in causality, except that
the first is less sure and the latter more precise. To be scientific is to be able
to predict what will happen in the future when a cause is given. Belief in
science and its power results from our ability to predict on the basis of causal
necessity. Modern scienoe still believes in causality, not in its older form of
cause-effect relationship, but in causal lines and structures. To Bum up, belief
in causality is a matter of faith, originating from the animal faith in expec
tation. Ibn Rughd had complete faith in nature, and maintained that every
thing in the world happens according to a perfect regularity which can be
understood in terms of cause and effect.
This brings us to the picture of the physical world aa conceived by ibn
Rugfad, and the way it can be scientifically known. The world is a continuum
of things and persons interrelated through necessary causality. Two principles
are presupposed, though not enunciated: the one 1b the permanence of things
and the other is the law of causation. These two postulates are tho result of
metaphysical assumptions derived from Aristotelianism, namely, the idea of
substance and the idea of the four causes. Al-GhaxAli denies the two principles.
As to the permanence of things, he reproduces the counter argument of some
•• Ibn RuOd Falta/atubu, by Antun Farah. Alexandria. 1903. p. 91. The
author began an Arabian Averroism analogous to the Latin Avorroism. and wrote
artifice on ibn Rugbd in his journal ai Jtoni'ah. When he published this book, he
added tho discussions of Muhammad 'Abduh and QSaim Amin, the two leaders
of recent renaisaanoe in Egypt.
« TaMful al-TaMfut. p. 318.
558
Ibn Ruabtl
philosophers in a comical manner that "if a man who had left a book at home
might find it on his return changed into a youth ... a atone changed into
gold, and gold changed into atone; and if he were naked about any of these
things he would anawer, 'I do not know what there is at present in my house.'"*1
Al-QjjazAli accepts the challenge saying: “There ia no objection to admitting
that anything may be possible for God.” An example of this possibility ia
the miracle of Ibrihim when he was thrown into fire and was not burnt. Fire
by the will of God lost ita quality of burning. Fire in itaelf is not an efficient
cause. The true cause is God who through His will and power gives the
things their qualities. There is no reason, then, why they might not be con
trary to what they are.
To meet this argument, ibn Rujjjd looks at the problem from the philosophi
cal point of view already mentioned. The permanence of things permits us
to attain to the essence of a thing, its definition, and giving it a name. "For
it is self-evident that things have essences and attributes whioh determine
the special functions of each one of them and through which the definitions
and names are differentiated. If a thing had not its specific nature, it would
not have a special name nor a definition, and all things would be one."*1
As to the second postulate concerning causality, “all events have four
causes, agent, form, matter, and end.” Human mind perceives the things
and conceives their causes. And, “intelligence is nothing but the perception
of things with their causes, and in this it distinguishes itself from all the
other faculties of apprehension; and he who denies causes denies the intellect.
Logic implies tho existence of causes and effects, and knowledge of the effects
can only be rendered perfect through knowledge of their causes. Denial of
causes implies the denial of knowledge."** If they call the relation of cause
effect a habit, habit is an ambiguous term Do they mean by habit (1) the
habit of the agent, or (2) the habit of the existing things, or (3) our habit to
form a habit about such things 1 Ibn Rujfcd rejects the first two meanings and
accepts the last whioh is in harmony with his oonceptuajism. Because it is
impossible that God should have a habit. The habit of existing things is
really their nature, since habit can only exist in the animated.
On the whole, the way to science starts with faith which ia the basis of
certitude. Sceptics and agnostics have no place in science. Armed with this
faith in the existence of the world aa such, the intellect discovers the causes
of things. Scientific knowledge is the knowledge of thing swith their causes
which produce them.
•> Ibid., p. 324.
Ibid., p. 318.
•• Ibid., p. 319.
559
A History of Muslim Philosophy
F
THE WAY TO BEING
Two distinct types of metaphysics came down to the Arabs, a metaphysics
of Being and a metaphysics of the One. The first is that of Aristotle, and the
second that of Plotinus. Sinoe the Enneadt of Plotinus was mistakenly ascribed
to Aristotle, al-Kindi was confused between the two systems and could not
bring them into accord. Al-Firibi was more inclined to the philosophy of the
One. He fused the two systems in the Necessary Being, God, the 0n» of the
Qur'&n and the One of Plotinus. The way to the One is rather a mystic way,
and that to Being is purely logical. The philosophy of al-FirSbi was mixed
with the wine of mysticism. Ibn Slna, following the way opened by al-F&rtbi,
looked at the problem from a new standpoint, i.e.. from the distinction be
tween the necessary and the contingent, yet in hia old age he dwelt upon
the fusion of the One and the Being with a kind of divergence towards a
gnostic mysticism. Ibn Rutbd returned to the original doctrine of Aristotle
and freed himself from the burden of Neo-Platonism. Being, and the way to
attain to it, is the object of his short Talkbit on Jfelapkysiw. At the beginning
of this treatise he says: "Our aim is to pick up from the Melaphytic.’ of Aristotle
hb theoretical doctrines.”*4
As a faithful follower of Aristotle he defines metaphysics as the knowledge
of Being as such. Metaphysics is part of the theoretical sciences. It studies
Being absolutely (biilldq); the immaterial principles of physical sensible*
such as unity, plurality, potency, actuality, etc., the causes of the existent*
on the side of God and divine entitle*. Physical science is concerned with the
causes of individual beings. It remains for metaphysics to Btudy the highest
causes of the particulars.
The subject-matter of metaphysics is three fold: the study of (1) sensible
things and their genera, namely, the ten categories; (2) the principles of
substance, the separate entities and how they are related to the First Principle,
which is the Supreme Perfection and the Prime Cause; and (3) the particular
sciences in view of correcting their sophistries. It is evident that the second
part of thia division is the moat fundamental, and the two other* are related
to it. Hence, ibn Rugfri gives a more elaborate definition of metaphysics.
"It is the science which studies the relationship of the different existent* as
regards their hierarchical order of cause* up to the Supreme Cause.”**
Hence, knowledge of Being consists in an exploration into Ita causes and
principles. True knowledge is oonformity with the existent Ibn Rusfcd con
fronts the mental with the external existence to the point that if what exists
in our minds is in conformity with what is outside, it ia true of Being. Two
distinct meanings are thus applied to Being, the one epistemological and the
Triiaig mu ba d al fabfah. Cairo edition by Osman Amin, 1958
Ibid., p. 34
560
Ibn Ruifad
other ontological. Which of the two is the origin of the other, essence or
existence! There is no ambiguity in the system of ibn Rugfed about this
question. The external existents are the basis of our knowledge. If an entity
exists in our minds without having any real existence outside, it would not be a
being, but simply an entity such as chimera, for example.
** Being and existence
are, then, one and the same. To exist is to be real. The criterion of Being is
its real existence, whether in potency or in act. Prime matter has being, al
though it never exists without form. When the intellect is attached to external
existenta, the being which was outside becomes inside the mind in the form
of a concept or an essence. Existence, then, is presupposed in Being.
External existents are called substances. Substance is the first of the ten
categories; the mt are the secondary substances. Prime substance has more
substantiality than the secondary. When we say, “Socrates is a man." this
denotes that Socrates is more substantial than human, humanity, or manness.
Meanwhile, manness ia as real as Socrates. Both the universal and the particular
are substances. The particular has a sensuous existence, and the universal an
intellectual one. But the individual substances are the starting point in the
entire metaphysics of ibn Rujipi
Physical bodies aro commonly said to be composed of two principles, matter
and form. This is not quite true, because a body is not only matter or only
form; it is a whole composed of the two. It is a composite. This whole is
additional to the two principles of Being.*’ Hence the principles of the
sensible substances amount to three. The body is one unity which has many
parts. By substanoe, we mean the whole composed of matter and form.
Some philosophers, for example ibn Sina, assumed that evory physical body
has two forms, a specific form and a corporeal form. The latter, forma
corporeUatia, consists in the three dimensions which give the body extension in
space. According to ibn Sina. tho form of corporeity ia substance and is the
cause of plurality in physical beings. Ibn Ruthd rejects this view and says
that ibn Sina was totally wrong.
** Individual substances are composed of
matter and only one form. They have two kinds of existence, the one sensuous
and the other intellectual. Matter is the oause of their corporeity and form
the cause of their intelligibility.
A thing is known by its definition which gives its essence; and definition ia
composed of parts, the genus and the differentia. Genera, species, and differen
•* Ibid.. p. 17.
*’ Ibid., pp. 37. as. On p. 65 ibn Ruibd says: "It is evident that the sensible
substances are three: matter, form, and the wholo composed of them." Now one
would ask, "If sensible substances aro composed of matter and form, what do
their names denote, tho matter, the form, or tho composite I” It is clear that the
name meet probably denotes the whole.
•• Ibid., pp. 40-41. Ho says: "Some assumed that corporeity means divisibility
in dimensions, they thought that dimensions are more liable to have tho namr
of substance.. .For tho doctrine of ibn Sina. see Ahmed Fouad El-Ehwan.v's
book, Ibn Sina. Cairo, 1958, pp. 49-50.
561
A History of Muslim Philosophy
tiae are univeraals. Now. are tho essenres or the universals the same aa
the individual things, or are they different 1 Univeraab are identical with
individuals, since they define their essences. Those who assume that the
universals have 1> separate existence and subsist by themselves fall in contra
dictions very difficult to resolve. In their view human knowledge can be possible
only if the. univeraals have separate real existence. But, "it is evident that
for the intellection of essenoea we have no need to assume the separateness
of the universals."" They exist only in our minds as concepts denuded of
matter. Hence, this doctrine is conceptualism, as opposed to realism and
nominalism. Human mind occupies a dignified place in nature and plays an
active role in acquiring knowledge.
Moreover, universals are not eternal and immutable as Platonic idealism
assumes. It is true that, as regards essence, universals are eternal since essence
us suoh is not corruptible. But as regards the individual which is essentially
corruptible, the universal is corruptible and changeable in so far as it is a
part of the composite of form and matter. Tho first substance is the “this”
which is pointed at.
How can the univeraals be eternal and at the same time corruptible 1 Or,
aa ibn Rushd put* it: "How can eternal entities be the principles of corruptible
tilings Thia difficulty is solved by reference to potency and actuality.
The scale of beings is graded from pure potenoy to pure actuality. Prime
mat ter is pure potency; it can only exist in a being combined with form. The
lowest cxiBtcnts are the four elements of which sensible bodies are composed.
Potency (dynamic in Greek) can be understood aa possibility or disposition.
Potency is so called aa opposed to actuality. Now, the first substance can exist
in actuality or in potency. Matter inherent in the substance is its potentiality.
This potentiality is of different degrees according to proximity and remoteness.
Man. for example, exists potentially in the sperm and in the four elements;
the first potency ia the near one, the latter is the remote one.
Four conditions are necessary for a thing to exist: (1) the proximate subject.
(2) its disposition, (3) tho motor causes, (4) the absence of preventing causes.
Take, as an example, a sick man. Not all sick men have the possibility to be
cured, and he who has the possibility should also have the disposition. In
addition to these two conditions, he must have the efficient cause which brings
him from sickness to health, provided there are no external preventions.”
The case of the natural objects is similar to that of the artificial ones.
Consequently, there is always a motor cause which brings a thing to exist
in actuality. Sometimes, there are more than one.motor causes. For example,
bread has the potency to change into flesh and blood, and has aa motor
causes the mouth, the stomach, the liver, etc. The remote cause is the potency
•• Ibid., p. 45.
’• Ibid., p. #4.
’• Ibid., p. 86
S3
Ibn Rugbd
n the elements to change into flesh. Along with these causes, bread ia in
iced of a very remote cause, namely, the heavenly bodies.
Since physical things are composed of matter and form, potency is always
subsequent to matter, and actuality subsequent to form. Form, which is the
act, is prior to matter at every point, because form is also the efficient and
final cause. The final cause is the cause of all other causes, since these are
there for tho sako of it. Furthermore, potency is not prior in time to act,
because potency can never be denuded of act. Matter and form exist simul
taneously in a being. The motor cause of a physical thing is apparently prior
to the existence of the thing. A distinction must bo made -between a motor
cause and an efficient cause. Motor cause applies only to change in place,
namely, the movement of translation. All other changes, especially generation
and corruption, are caused by efficient causes. Celestial bodies are moved by a
motor, not an efficient, cause, because their movement is translation in space
and they do not change. They are intermediate oxistents between the pure
act and the existenta which exist sometimes in potency and sometimes in act.
Their similarity to existenta in act lies in their eternity and incorruptibility.
Their similarity to the things which exist in potency and come to actuality
is in their change of place, their circular movement in space. Ibn Rushd ter
minates the discussion of this point by saying: "Consider how divine provi
dence has managed to combine the two kinds of existence. In between pure
act and pure potency, it lias posited this kind of potency, namely, the potency
in space through which the eternal and corruptible existences aro connected,"'*
Furthermore, act is prior to potency in point of dignity and perfection,
because evil is privation or one of the two opposites, such as sickness which,
although existent, is bad aa regards privation of health; and since potency
is the possibility to becomo either of the two opposites, it is not an absolute
good. Pure act is an absolute good,” Hence, tho nearer the things are to the
First Principle which is pure act, the better they are. Celestial bodies have
obtained their principles from the First Principle. God. And, likewise,
everything on this earth which is good is tho product of His will and design.
As to evil, it exists because of matter. This world, as it is, is tho best possible
one. Either the world would not have existed at all, or it would have existed
having some evil for the sake of a greater good.
We have seen that sensible substances are composed of matter and form.
Now, aro these two principles sufficient for the existence of sensible sub
stances ’ Or, is t here a separate substanoo which is the cause of their perpetual
existence V‘ It is evident that the sensible is in need of a motor cause, and
this cause needs another, up to the First Mover whose movement is eternal.
This brings us to the consideration of time.
” Ibid., p. 94
” Ibid.. f>. 95
» Ibid., p. 124
M3
A History of Muslim Pliiloooph
Time is an eternal continuum subordinate to an eternal movement, which
ia continuous and one, because the true one is continuous. It is clear that
ibn Ruthd asserts the eternity of the world, on the assumption that both
movement and time are eternal. Eternity of the world ia the first and longest
discussion in the Tahd/ul of al-Ghaz&li The whole discussion is. as mentioned
above, only of historical value, and, therefore, we need not dwell on it.
The First Mover moves the primum motile by desire, not by representation.
The world is animated, i.e., it has a soul. It also has intelligence. Celestial
bodies are moved not through sensations and representations, as is the case
with animals, but through tho conception of intelligence. (Intelligence is so
called with regard to celestial bodies; with regard to man it is called intellect.)
Heavenly bodies have no senses, because these are found in animals for their
conservation. Representations exist in animals for the same end. Celestial
bodies are in no need of conservation since they are eternal. Their movements
are the product of desire (llfauq) through intellection. The first mover of the
firmament is moved by a most dignified desire—desire for the Supreme Good.
The movers of the celestial bodice are, then, intelligences whioh are themselves
immobile. There are thirty-eight movers and nine spheres.
The tenth intelligence, or the Intelligentsia Agent. is the last of these movers.
It moves the sphere of the moon. It is the cause of the movement of the
sublunary beings. It is thia intelligence which gives forms to the elements and
other existenta.
Man is the nearest being to the celestial bodies, and this is because of hia
intellect. He is intermediate between the eternal and the corruptible.’* Through
the agent intelligence, he acquires the forma which are ita products. Thus,
communion with the agent intelligence can be realized. And in thia communion
lies man’s felicity and happiness.
" p. 109.
Chapter XXIX
NA§JR AL-DlN JOSI
A
LIFE
Kfrwijah Nasir al-Din abu Ja'far Muhammad b. Muhammad b. Hasan, an
accomplished scholar, mathematician, astronomer, and Shi'ite politician of the
period of the Mongol invasion on the Assassins and the Caliphate, waa bom
at Tu» in 597/1201. After receiving early education from his father and
Muhammad b Hasan, he studied Figh. Uni, Hilnnah and Kalam especially
564
Na^lr al-Din Tuai
the Itkdrdt of ibn Slna, from Mabdar Farid al-Din DAmAd, and mathematics
from Muhammad IJaaib, at NlibApOr. He then went to BaghdAd. where he
studied medicine and philosophy from Qufb al-Din, mathematics from Kamil
al-Din b. Yunus, and Fu]h and UfOl from SAlim b. BadrAn.1
T<Ui began hie career as an astrologer to Nasir sl-DIn 'Abd al-Rablm. the
Governor of the Ismi'Ilito mountain fortress of QuhistAn during the reign
of Ala al-Dln Muhammad (618-662/1221-1256), the seventh Grand Master
I KJfuddwand) of AlamOt, His "correspondence"1 with the worir of the last
'Abb&rid Caliph, al Munta'sim (640-666/1242-1258) of Baghdad, was, however,
intercepted by his employers, and he waa removed to AlamOt under close
supervision, although he enjoyed there every facility to oontinue hia studies.
In 654/1256, he "playod"** the last Assassin ruler Rukn al-Din KhOrghAh into
the hands of HulAgu and then accompanied the latter aa hia trusted adviser
to the oonquest of Baghdad in 667/1258.
*
B
THE MARAGHAH OBSERVATORY
Jusi'a chief claim to fame rests on his persuading Huligu to found the
celebrated observatory (nuad khanah) at MsrAghah AtfharbAijAn, in 667/1250,
which was equipped with the beet instruments, "some of them constructed for
the first time.”* Here he compiled the astronomical tables, called ZAj al
IlkhAni. which "became popular throughout Asia, even in China." * Besides
being dedicated to the advancement of astronomy and mathematics in the
late seventb/thirtoenth oentury. this observatory was important in three
other ways. It waa the first observatory the recurring and non-recurring
expenditure of which waa met out of endowments, thus opening the door for
the financing of future observatories.’ Secondly, just as ibn Tufail (d. 581/1185)
turned the Court of Caliph ‘Abd al-MQ’min into an enviable intellectual galaxy
that promoted the cause of knowledge and wisdom in the West, JOsi made
the Maraghah observatory a "splendid assembly”* of the men of knowledge
and learning by making “special arrangements”* for the teaching of philo-
1 Zand’s article on Tilai in Hilal, November 1956, Karachi,
• Ivanow. TafawwuriU. p. xxv.
■ Encyclopaedia o/ Ielam. Vol. IV, p. 880.
• After passing into tho service of Hullgu, TOai. in the preface to Zlj al-IlUdni,
referred to hia connection with the IamA'Ilitea as "casual” (Ivanow, op. cil., p. xxv)
and also "roecindod" the dedication of Akkldq-i NOfiri to Naylr al Din ’Abd al-
Rablm. his Iam&'tlite patron at QuhiatAn (Browne, Liireory History o/'Persia.
Vol. n. p. 456).
• Encyclopaedia of Idam. Vol. IV, 881.
• P. K. Hitti, Hidory of the A rate, p. 378.
’ Aidin Sayili's article in Yadndmeh-i fOei, Teheran University, Teheran. 1867.
p. 81.
■ Hukama'-i IMm. Vol. II. p. 256.
• yadndmeA-i fOoi, p. 6«.
6M
A History of Muriim Philonophy
sophica! sciences, besides mathematics and aatmnomx. and by dedicating the
income of endowments to etipends. Thirdly, annexed to the observatory, there
waa a huge library in which were stored the incorruptible treasure* of knowledge
looted by the Mongols and Tartars during their invasions on Iraq. Baghdad.
Syria, and other territories. According to ibn Shakir, the library contained
more than lour hundred thousand volumes.1’
Tusi retained his influential position under Abiqa, Huligu's successor,
uninterrupted until his death in 672/1274.
WORKS
In an age of widespread political devastation followed by intellectual
decline, HuUgu's patronage to Tusi is of singular importance in the history
of Muslim thought. Tho revival and promotion of philosophical sciences in the
late seventh/thirteenth century centred round Tfisl’s personality. To the
Persians, he was known aa "the teacher of man”11 fusidd al-baibar) Bar
Hebraeus regarded him as "a man of vast learning in all the branches of
philosophy."- To Ivanow, he appears an "encyclopedist,"1’ end AfnAn thinks
him to be "the most competent .,. oommentator of Avioenna in Persia."1’
One also cannot help being impressed by the "remarkable industry" displayed
by him in "editing and improving"1’ the translations made by Ih&bit bin
Qurrah, Oust* bin Luqa, and lsb*q bin Hunain of Greek mathematicians
and astronomers. Brockeltnann haa enumerated fifty-nine of his extant works,”
but Ivanow attributes "something like one hundred and fifty works"1’ to
him. The list given by Mudarria Kiijwi runs to one hundred and thirteen
titles, excluding twenty-one the attribution of which to Tuai ia doubtful ”
Himself an accomplished scholar rather than a creative mind, Tael's position
ia mainly that of a revivalist and hia works are largely eclectical in character
But even a* a revivalist and eclectic, he is not lacking in originality, at least
in the presentation of his material. His versatility ia indeed astonishing. His
manifold end varied interests extend to philosophy, mathematics, astronomy,
physics, medicine, mineralogy, music, history, literature, and dogmatics. His
important philosophical works are listed below
” Browne, op. cit., Vol. II. p. 485.
11 A«U al-IjuMe. p. YB.
11 Browne, op. cil.. Vol. III. p. 18.
>• Ivanow, op. cil.. p. lxv.
11 AfnAn, Avicenna, p. 244.
“ Encyclopaedia 0/ Idam, Vol. IV, p. 981.
"• Ocxhichlc der arabMun Lideralur. Suppl.. Vol. I. pp. 870-76.
11 Ivanow. op. cd., p, xxvi.
•• Aide, pp. YJ-YH
566
Nasir al-Dln TOsi
1. Aaiz al-lqtibdo (logic), 1947.
2. Manliq al-Tajrid, (logic).
3. Ta'dil al-Miydr (logic).
4. Tajrid al-'Aqd'id (dogmatic!), Teheran, 1928.
5. Qawa'id al-'Aqd'id (dogmatics), Teheran, 1928.
6. Rualeh-i I'tiqadat (dogmatics).
7. AkMdq-i N&siri (ethics).
8. Awwf al~Aghrdl (Sufi ethics)
9. RMkh dar Itibdl i Wdjib (metaphysics).
10. IHbal i Jauhar al-Mufiriq (metaphysics).
11 Rinalth dar Wujud i Jauhari Mujarrad (metaphysics)
12. Rudleh dar IHbal i 'Aql-i Fa'dl (metaphysics).
13. RiMeh Qarural-i Marg (metaphysics).
14. Rudkh 9udur Katlfral az H’a/idal (metaphysics).
16. Rztdlrh ‘Hal ua Malulal (metaphysics).
18. Fuaul (metaphysics), Teheran, 1956.
17. Tnaameurdl (metaphysics). Bombay, 1950.
18. Talkbb al-Muluufal, Cairo, 1323/1905.
19. Holla Mutihldl alJji.lrdt, Lucknow, 1293/1876.
D
AKHLAQ-I NA$1RI
Nothing can be farther from truth than the assertion that Ak/flaqi Ndziri
of Juai is a mere "translation"1* of TaAd^ifi al Akfildq of ibn Miskawaih. The
author was undoubtedly commissioned by Nasir al-Din 'Abd al.Rablm. the
Ismi'ilite Governor of Quhistiin, to translate the KMb alfahdral (Tabdhlb
al-AkJMq) from Arabic into Persian, but he did not accept tho suggestion
for fear of "distorting and disfiguring the original "•• Besides, ibn Miskawaih’s
effort is confined to the description of moral discipline; the domestic and
political disciplines are altogether missing in his work. Those, according to
JOsi. are equally important aspects of "practical philosophy" and. therefore,
are not to be ignored. With this in mind. Jusi compiled AMMg-i Ndqiri on
the following pattern.
With regard to content, the part on moral philosophy ia a "summary”” and
not a translation of KMb al-fabara!, but tho form, the arrangement of topics,
and the daasification of subjects is Tusi a own, which apparently give an air of
originality to it.
For the parts on domestic and political philosophy, JOsi is greatly indebted
to ibn ,SlnaB and Fftritbi.** and yet the mere addition of these two parts which
” Encgclapatdta o/ Vol. I, p. 933.
■■ AkM&jt NOfiri, p. 5.
■■ Ibid., p. 6.
" Ibid., p. 146
•• Ibid., p 17S
567
A History of Muslim Philoeopbs
completed practical philosophy (fritmali 'amali) in all ita details, if not any
thing else, justifies Tfisl's claim that Akhlaq-i Ndfiri waa written "not on the
Btyle of imitation «r in the spirit of translation, but as an original venture "**
E
ETHICS
Following ibn Miakawaih, JOsi regards ultimate happiness (aa'adal i qutwa)
as the chief moral end, which is determined by the place and position of man
in the cosmic evolution, and realised through his amenability to discipline
and obedience. The oonoept of ultimate happiness is intrinsically different
from the Aristotelian idea of happiness which ia devoid of the "celestial
**
element" and also has no reference to the cosmic position of man. The
Platonic virtues of wisdom, courage, temperance, and justice (derived from
the trinity of the soul—reason, ire. and desire) and their differentiation into
seven, eleven, twelve, and nineteen species respectively, given by ibn Miakawaih
figure prominently in filst's ethics, the only difference being that he reduced
the last nineteen to twelve. But following Aristotle's distinction in the soul of
theoretical reason, practical reason, ire, and deaire, and, unlike ibn Miskawaih,
he deduces justice from the culture of practical reason1* without disclaiming
the Platonic view of the proper and harmonious functioning of the triple
powers of the soul. Unlike Aristotle and like ibn Miakawaih, be ranks benevo
lence” /la/addul) higher than justioe, and love Imahabbak/ aa a natural source
of unity, higher than benevolence.
Aristotle conceived of vice aa an extreme ot virtue either on the side of
excess or defect. To Galen, vice waa a malady of the soul. The Qur'&n, after
enunciating the general ethical principles of moderation.
** defines vioe aa a
**
disease of the heart. Ibn Miskawaih. after enumerating the eight generic
vices of astuteness and stupidity (tafah and balafuU), raahneea and cowardice
(tahawvrur and jubun), indulgence and abstention (jAarruAol and tiumud).
tyranny and sufferance ()aur and mabdnat), on the Aristotelian pattern,
describes at length the causes and cures of fear and sorrow. Ibn Miakawaih
does not make it clear whether fear and sorrow constitute the excess or defi
ciency of ire and desire. Thia problem is taken up by Tusi. and he finds out
a solution for it, befitting his ingenuity. Disease ia the deviation of the soul
from equipoise (i'tMl). Aristotle and following him ibn Miakawaih had
•• Ibid., p. 6.
** Ibid., p. 44
'■ Ibid., p. «l.
■' Aristotle regards "prodigality” aa the extreme of liberality on the aide of
cxcom. and henco a positive vice, although it ia for him "no sign of moannow. but
only of folly" (Nicbomachtan Ethier, p. 105).
Qur'An. ii. 190; v. 2.
•• Ibid., i. 2
568
Na*tr al-Dln T<tai
thought of thia deviation in terms of quantity (tnmmiyyal) and, therefore,
the excess (ifrdf) and defect (ta(rU) of a state were for them the only two
cause* of moral diseases. Tflai for the first time propounded the view that the
deviation is not only quantitative but also qualitative, and to this new type
of deviation he gave the name of perversion” (radd'ai). Consequently, a
moral disease may have one of the three causes:—(I) excess, (2) defect, or
(3) perversion of reason, ire, or desire. This explains adequately that fear
constitutes the perversion of ire. and sorrow, the perversion of desire.
Equipped with the theory of triple causation of the maladies of the soul,
fusi classifies the fatal diseases of the theoretical reason into perplexity
(ftairal). simple ignorance (jaU-i ba-tif). and compound ignorance (jahl-i
mural-bib), constituting its excess, deficiency, and perversion—a classification
which cannot be traced to ibn Miskawaih.
Perplexity is caused by the inability of the soul to distinguish truth from
falsehood due to the conflicting evidence and confusing arguments for and
against a controversial issue. Aa a cure of perplexity, Tuai suggests that a
perplexed man should, in the first instance, be made to realize that composition
and division, affirmation and denial, i.e., the contraries, being mutually
exclusive, cannot exist in one and the same thing at the same time, so that he
may be convinced that if a proposition is true, it cannot be false, and if it is
false, it cannot be true. After hie assimilating this self-evident principle, be
may be taught the rules of syllogism to facilitate the detection of fallacies in
the arguments.
Simple ignorance consists in a man’s lack of knowledge on a subject without
his presuming that he knows it. Such ignorance is a precedent condition
for acquiring knowledge, but it is fatal to be contented with it. The disease
may be cured by bringing home to the patient the fact that intellection and
not physical appearance entitles a man to the designation of man, and that
an ignorant man is no better than a brute; rather he is worse than that, for
the latter can be excused for its absence of reason, he cannot.
Compound ignorance is a man's lack of knowledge on a subject coupled
with his presumption that he knows it. In spite of ignorance he does not know
that he is ignorant. According to 7““, it is almost an incurablo disease, but
devotion to mathematics may perhaps reduce it to simple ignoranoe.
Tusi regards anger (thodab). cowardice (jubun), and fear (khau/) as the
three prominent diseases of ire (quu-wal-i di(i‘) on the side of excess, deficiency,
and perversion, respectively. In hia analysis of fear, especially the fear of death,
and in his elaboration of the seven oonoomitanta and ten causes of anger, he
follows ibn Miskawaih.
Similarly, excess of appetite (i/ral-i tJfabunl) is caused by the excess of
desire, while levity (balalal) results from it* deficiency, and sorrow (titan) and
jealousy fharad) constitute the perversion of thia power. He defines jealousy
•• AkkUq i Ntfiri, p. 114.
569
A History of Muslim Philosophy
u OIH • isliin,-a reverse in the fortune of another, withoul longing to possess
a similar fortune for oneself. Following OharAli he also distinguishes between
envy11 (gb'btal) and jealousy, by defining the former as a longing to have
the fortune similar to the one possessed by another without wishing any
reverse to him. Jealousy consumes virtue as fire consumes fuel, but envy
is commendable, if directed to the acquisition of virtues, and oondemnable
if directed to lust for worldly pleasures.
Tusi regards society as the normal background of moral life, for man io by
nature a social being, and his perfection oonsiste in evincing this characteristic
of sociability towards his fellow-beings. Love and friendship, therefore, con
stitute the vital principles of his moral theory—a theory in which apparently
there is no place for the retired and secluded life of an ascetic. In a later work.
Aiud/ al Afiri/, however, he approvingly writes of asoeticism aa a stage in
mystical life. He claims no mystio experience and makes it clear in the preface
that his effort is a purely intellectual appreciation and rational formulation
of the mystic tradition.** Though not a mystic, he ia an advocate of a rational
treatment of mysticism. He classifies it into six progressive stages, each stage,
excepting the last, having six moral states of ita own.
The first stage is that of the preparation for the mystic journey (rulik), the
neoeesary requirements of which are faith in Hod (imdn). constancy in the
faith flAohdl J, firmness of intention (niyyat), truthfulness (fidq), oontempla
tion of God fandholj, and sincerity (kbuliif).
The second stage consists of the renunciation of the worldly connections
which obstruct the mystio path. There are six essentials of this stage and
these are repentance over sins (laubah). asceticism of the will (stM), indiffer
ence to wealth (faqr), rigorous practices to subdue irrational desires
calculation of virtues and vices (muhdrabal), harmony between actions and
intentions (murdqabat), and piety (layun).
The third stage of the mystic journey is marked by aloofness /AJaluul l.
contemplation (la/akkur), fear and sorrow (khauf and Autn), hope (rijS').
endurance (nbr). and gratitude to God (Avkr).
The fourth Mage covers the experiences of the traveller (Mik) before
reaching the final goal They are devotion to God (irSdal), eagerness in de
votion (liauq). love of God (mahabbah). knowledge of God (ma'ri/al), un
shakeable faith in God (ytufin). and tranquillity of the soul (tuMn).
The fifth stage consists of resignation to God (tawakhd), obedience (’■&•).
submission to the divine will (latttm). certitude about the oneness of God
(tauhid). effort for union with God Ixrahdal), and absorption in God (iuihdd).
In the sixth Mage the process of the absorption in God reaches ita culmination
and the traveller is ultimately lost ()anA‘) into the oneness of God.
•> OhazAli. lhya\ Vol. III. Chap, III.
•• Auybf al-AOM. p. 1.
570
Naytr al-Dto Tiisi
F
DOMESTIC SCIENCE
Acknowledging hie debt to ibn Sina," TOm define* home (maiuil) aa a
particular relationship existing between husband and wife, parents and
children, master and servant, and wealth and ita possessor. The aim of do
mestic science (tadbir-i mantil) ia to evolve an efficient system of discipline,
conducive to the physical, social, and mental welfare of this primary group,
with father aa ita controlling head. The father’s function is to maintain and
restore the equipoise of the family, having in view the particular dispositions
of the constituents and the dictates of expediency in general.
Wealth ia necessary for achieving the baaio ends of self-preservation and
race-preservation. For its acquisition, T0« recommends the adoption of noble
professions end the achievement of perfection in them, without ever giving
way to inequity, infamy, and meanness. Hair-dressing and filth-clearing are.
no doubt, mean and repulsive professions, but they are warranted on the
ground of social expediency.
Tftsi regards the saving of wealth aa an act of prudence, provided it ia not
prompted by greed or miserliness, and does not cause hardship to the consti
tuents of the home or involve the risk of one's integrity and prestige in society.
In matters of expenditure, he stands for moderation in general. Nothing
should be spent which may smack of extravagance, display, miscalculation
or stinginere.
Not gratification of lust, but procreation and protection of property are the
basic aims of marriage. Intelligence, integrity, chastity, modesty, shrewdness,
tenderness of the heart, and, above all, obedience to husband are the qualities
which ought to be sought in a wife. It is good if she is further graced with
the qualities of noble birth, wealth, and beauty, but these are absolutely
undesirable if not accompanied with intelligence, modesty and chastity. Ad
ministrative expediency requires that the husband should be awe-inspiring. He
nay be benevolent and magnanimous to hia wife, but in the wider interests
r-f the home, he should avoid excessive affection, keep her in seclusion, and
should not confide secrets or discuss important matters with her. Polygamy
is undesirable because it invariably upsets the whole domestic organization
Women are feeble-minded by nature and psychologically jealous of another
partner in the husband's love and fortune. The concession of polygamy is
reluctantly given by Jusi to kings because they are in a position to command
unconditional obedienoe, but even for them it is desirable to avoid it aa an
act of prudence. Man ia to the home as heart is to the body, and aa one heart
cannot give sustenance to two bodies, so one man cannot manage two homes
So great is the sanctity of home in TQal'a eyes that he even advises people to
remain unmarried if they are unfit to enforce family equilibrium.
" Ndfiri. p. 145. The treatise referred to by Tuai is KilAb alSiyAaa'
od. Ma'IOf. Beirut, 1011.
571
A History of Muslim Philosophy
On the discipline of children, fOsi. following ibn Miakawaih." begins with
the inculcation of good morale through praise, reward, and benevolent censure.
He ia not in favour of frequent reproof and open censure; the former increases
the temptation, and the latter leads to audacity. After bringing home to
them the rules regarding dining, dressing, conversation, behaviour, and the
manner of moving in society, the children should be trained for a particular
profession of their own liking. The daughters should be specifically trained
to become good wives and mothers in the domestic set-up.
Tusi doses the discussion with the greatest emphasis on the observance of
parental rights, aa enjoined by Islam. Psychologically speaking, children
realize the rights of the father only after attaining the age of discrimination,
but those of the mother are evident from the very start of life. From this
Juai concludes that paternal rights are largely mental, while maternal onee
are largely physical in character. Thus, to the father one owes unselfish devo
tion, veneration, obedience, praise, etc., and to the mother, the provision of
food, dothes, and other physical comforts.
Lastly, servants are to home aa hands and logs are to man. Tusi recommends
that they should be treated benevolently, so that they may be inspired to
identify their interests with those of their master. The underlying idea is that
they should serve out of love, regard, and hope, and not out of necessity
compulsion, and fear, which effect adversely the interests of the home.
To sum up: Home for Tusi “ the centre of domestic life. Income, saving,
expenditure, and the discipline of wife, children, and servants, all revolve
round the general welfare of the family group as a whole.
G
POLITICS
Fkrtbl's Siydmi al-Madinah and .fed’ Ahl al-Madinal al-Fddilah form the
first attempt towards the philosophical formulation of a political theory in the
Muslim world. He used 'ilm al-modani both in the sense of the civic science and
the science of government. Following him, Tdsi has also used siydaal-i rnudan in
both of these senses. In fact, hia treatment of the need for civic society (tamad-
dun) and the types of social groups and cities ia largely derived from F&ribl's
views on the subject."
Man is by nature a social being. To substantiate hia position, Tflsi refers to
insdn, the Arabic word for man, which literally means to be gregarious or
associating. Sinoe this natural sociability" (uno-i faba i) ia characteristically
TahQlb al-AHl^. pp. S6-54.
" Ard‘ Ahl al-.Vadtnal al-Fudilah, pp. SS-8S; SiydeU alMadantyyah, pp. l-7«.
Compare this theory of natural sociability with Hobbre' view of man aa
"jssT5' P°OT' "SWy- brut“h *nd *hOrt" (Roger. Students' History of Philosophy.
572
Na,lr *1-Dln TOsi
human, it follows that the perfection of men oonauts in evincing this character•
iatio fully towards his fellow-beings. Civilization is another name for thia
perfection. It is for thia reason that Islam has emphasized the superiority
of oongregational prayers over those offered in isolation.
The word tanuuidun is derived from modinoA (city) which means living
together of men belonging to different professions for the purpose of helping
one another in their needs. Since no man is self-sufficient, everyone ia in need
of help and co-operation from others. Wants differ from man to man and
the same ia true of the motives which induce one to co-operation. Some seek
oo-operation for the sake of pleasure; others are prompted by-the consideration
of profit; and still othors aim at goodness or virtue. Thia diversity in the causes
of co-operation leads to conflict of interests resulting in aggression and in
justice. Thus arises the need for government to keep everyone content with
his rightful lot without infringing the legitimate rights of others. Administra
tion of justice, therefore, is tho chief function of a government, which should
be headed by a just king, who is tho second arbitrator, the first being the
divine Lew. He can exercise royal discretion in minor details according to the
exigencies of time and occasion, but thia too should oonform to the general
principles of the divine Law. Such a king. Tusi concludes, is the vicegerent
of God upon earth, and the physician of the world temper.
As to the qualities of this monarch, he should be graced with the nobility of
birth, loftiness of purpose, sobriety of judgment, firmness of determination,
enduranoe of hardship, large-heartednesa, and righteous friends. His first and
foremost duty ia to consolidate the State by creating affection among its
friends and disaffection among its enemies, and by promoting unity among
the savants, warriors, agriculturists, and husinces men—the four constituents
of the State.
Tflsi then proceeds to lay down the principles of war ethics for the guidance
of rulers. The enemy should never be taken lightly, however lowly he might be,
but at the lame time war should be avoided at all costa, even through diplo
matic tricks, without resorting to perfidy.*’ But if the conflict becomes
inevitable, offensive should be taken only in the name of God and that too
with the unanimous approval of the army. The army should be led by a man
of dashing spirit, sound judgment, and experience in warfare, fusi particularly
the maintenance of an efficient secret scrvico to have vigilance
over the movements of the enemy. Again, diplomacy demands that the enemy
should, as far as possible, bo taken prisoner rather than killed, and there
should be no killing after the final victory, for clemency ia more befitting
a king than vengeance. In the case of a defensive stand, the enemy should be
overtaken by ambush or surprise attack, provided the position is Btrong
enough; otherwise no time should be lost in digging trenches building
•’ Compare it with Machiavellian ethics of "force and fraud.’ "A uler will
perish if he is always good. He must be as cunning as a fox und aa fierce aa a lion”
(Bertrend HusaeU. A HiMory of WuUm PKUooopKy. p. 528).
573
A History of Muslim Philosophy
fortrews, and even in negotiating for peace by offering wealth and using
diplomatic devices.
jasi. being the uxttfr of Hulagu. waa well aware of the degeneration of
monarchy into absolute despotism. and. therefore, adviced the attendanta
upon kings to avoid seeking close contact with them, for being in their company
is in no way better than associating with fire. No office is more perilous than
that of a minister to a king, and the minister has no greater safeguard against
the jealousies of the Court and the vagaries of the royal mood than his trust
worthiness. The minister should guard jealously the secrets confided to him.
and should not be inquisitive about what ia withheld from him. T'iei was held
in great esteem by the Mongol chief, yet he agrees with ibn Mfiqna', that the
closer one may be to the king, the greater should he show his respect to him,
so much so that if the king calls him "brother." he should address him as
"lord."
H
SOURCE OF PRACTICAL PHILOSOPHY
According to JOsi. the Qur'inic injunctions relate to man as an individual,
as a member of a family, and aa an inhabitant of a city or State." This three,
fold division ia evidently suggestive of the classification of practical philosophy
into ethics, domestics, and politics by Muslim thinkers. The same is true of the
content of these sciences; but it ia no less true that later on these disciplines
were considerably broadened under the influence of Plato and Aristotle.
Shushtery's remark that "ethics was the only subject in which the East did
not imitate the West." anil that "the only influence which the West could
bring to bear upon the East in connection with this subject, waa the method
of scientific treatment,"” is more true of domestics and politics, where Greek
influence is leaet traceable, than of ethics proper.
I
PSYCHOLOGY
Instead of proving the existence of the soul, Tusi starts with the assumption
that it is a self-evident reality and aa such it needs no proof. Nor is it capable
of being proved. In a case like thia, reasoning out of one's own existence is
a logical impossibility and absurdity, for an argument presupposes an argu-
mentalor and a subject for argument, but in this caae both are the same, vii.,
the soul.
Naturr ol Iht Soul.—The soul ia a simple, immaterial substance which
perceives by itself It. controls the body through the muscles and sense-organs.
•• AkUAq.< Ndriri. p. 10.
” OuiZinrs Ol Mamie Culture. Vol. II. p. 441.
574
Nasir al-Din Turn
but is itself beyond the perception of the bodily instrumente. After reproducing
ibn Miskawaih's arguments for the inoorporeality of the eoul from ite indivisi
bility, its power of aaauming fresh forma without losing the previous ones, its
oonoeiving opposite forma at one and the same time, and its correcting sense-
illuaions,*** JOsi adda two of hia own arguments. Judgments of logic, physics,
mathematics, theology, etc., all exist in one soul without intermingling, and
can be recalled with characteristic clarity, which ia not possible in a material
substance; therefore, soul is an immaterial substance. Again, physical accom
modation is limited and finite, so that a hundred persona cannot be accom
modated at a place meant for fifty people, but thia is not true of the soul
It has, so to say, sufficient capacity to accommodate all the ideas and concepts
of the objects it knows, with plenty of room for fresh acquisition/1 This loo
proves that the soul is a simple, immaterial substance.
In tho common expression "My head, my ear. my eye," the word “my"*’
indicates the individuality (huwiyyah) of the eoul. which poesesws these
organs, and not ite incorporeality. The soul does require a body as a means
to its perfection, but it ia not what it is because of its having a body,
Faculties of the Soul.—To the vegetative, animal, and human soul of his
predecessors, TQai adda an imaginative soul which occupies an intermodiata
position between the animal and the human soul. The human soul is charac
terized with intellect (nufa) which receives knowledge from the first intellect
The intellect is of two kinds, theoretical and practical, aa conceived by Aristotle.
Following Kindi, Tiiai considers the theoretical intellect to be a potentiality,
the realization of which involves four stages, viz., the material intellect faql-i
haytildni), the angelic intellect (‘aql-i malaki), the active intellect faql-i
bi al-fi'l), and the acquired intellect ('aql.i mueiafad). It is at the stage of tho
acquired intellect that every conceptual form potentially contained in the
soul becomes apparent to it, like the face of a man reflected in a mirror held
before him. The practical intellect, on tho other hand, is conoemcd with
voluntary and purposive action. Its potentialities are, therefore, realized
through moral, domestic, and political action.
The imaginative soul is concerned with sensuous perceptions, on the one
hand, and with rational abstractions, on the other, so that if it is united with
the animal eoul. it becomes dependent upon it. and decays with it. But if it
is associated with the human eoul. it becomes independent of the bodily
organs, and shares the happiness or misery of the soul with ite immortality.
After the separation of the soul from the body, a traoe of imagination remains
•• Tahdhib al AUUq. pp. 3-1.
“ Tofawwit, p, 25.
•• Every body belongs to a soul, according to this argument. In modern times.
William James too has used the same argument to prove that every thought
belongs to a mind. "It aeema aa if the elementary payrhKi facta were not thought,
this thought or that thought, but my thought, every thought being owned."
W. James, Peychotogy (Briefer Course), p. 153.
575
A History of Muslim Philosophy
in ita form, and the punishment and reward of the human soul depend upon
this trace (hai'at) of what the imaginative soul knew or did in this world.
**
The sensitive and calculative imagination of Aristotle apparently constitutes
the structure of Tusl's imaginative soul, but his bringing the imaginative soul
into relation with an elaborate theory of punishment and reward in the
hereafter is his own.
As a matter of tradition handed down from ibn Bins and GhazAli.*1 T&a>
believes in the localization of functions in the brain. He has located common
sense fjirM-i mulhlarat) in the first ventricle of the brain, perception (mwnw
wimh) in the beginning of the firat part of the second ventricle, imagination,
in the fore part of the third ventricle, and memory in the rear part of the
brain.
J
METAPHYSICS
According to Tusi, metaphysics proper consists of two parts, the science of
divinity ('ilm-i lldhi) and the firat philosophy (falta/ah-i ila) The knowledge
of God, intellects, and souls constitutes the science of divinity, and the know,
ledge of the universe, and the universals constitutes the firat philosophy. The
knowledge of the categories of unity and plurality, necessity and contingency,
essence and existence, eternity and transitorincss also forms part of the latter.
Among the accessories /furii) of metaphysics fall the knowledge of pro
phethood (nubummt), spiritual leadership (imamal). and the Day of Judgment
(qiydmnt) The range of the subject itself suggests that metaphysics is "of
the essence of Islamic philosophy and the realm of its chief contribution
to the history of ideas."
**
God.—After denying the logical possibility of atheism and of an ultimate
duality. Ttbu, unlike FS.r»bi, ibn Miskawaih. end ibn Sine, argues that logic
and metaphysics miserably fall short of proving the existence of God on
rational grounds. God being the ultimate cause of all proofs, and, therefore,
the foundation of all logic and metaphysics, is Himself independent of logical
proof. Like the fundamental laws of formal logic, He neither requires nor
lends Himself to proof. He is an a priori, fundamental, necessary, and self,
evident principle of cosmic logic, and His existence is to bo assumed and
postulated rather than proved, From the study of moral life as well, he arrives
at a similar conclusion and, like Kant in modem times, regards the existence
of God aa a fundamental postulate of ethics.
•* Tasawwurdl, p. 23.
" Ohaxali has located retention (Mfisah) in the first ventricle Ha/wi/) of the
fore part of the brain, imagination /uoAmiyyoA) in the middle ventricle of the
brain, thought t^lokkur/ in the middle of the brain, and recollection (ladhaklcurj
in tho rear vertielo of the brain, (.tfliun ul-'Amal. p. 23.)
** Afn&n. op. erf.; p. 106.
576
Na*lr al-DIn Tusi
Tu-“i further argues that proof implies perfect comprehension of the thing
to be proved, and since it ia impossible for the finite man to comprehend God
in His entirety, it is impossible for him to prove His existence.*1
Crcatio ex nihilo.—Whether the world is eternal (qadim) or was created by
God ex nihilo (hodi(hj, ia one of the most vexing problems of Muslim philosophy.
Aristotle advocated the eternity of the world, attributing its motion to the
creation of God, the Prime Mover. Ibn Miskawaih agreed with Aristotle in
regarding God as the creator of motion but. unlike him. reasoned out that the
world, both in its form and matter, was created by God ex nihilo. fusi in his
Tasawuwat (written during the period of Isma'ilite patronage) effects a
half-hearted reconciliation between Aristotle and ibn Miskawaih. He begins
by criticizing the doctrine of creatio ex nihilo. The view that there was a time
when the world did not exist and then God created it out of nothing, obviously
implies that God was not a creator before the creation of the world or His
creative power was still a potentiality which was actualized later, and this is
a downright denial of His eternal creativity. Logically, therefore. God was
always a creator which implied the existence of creation or world with Him.
The world, in other words, is co-eternal with God. Here Tusi elates the discus
sion abruptly with the remark that the world is eternal by the power of God
who perfects it, but in its own right and power, it is created (mu/idali).
In a later work, /ustil (his famous and much commented metaphysical
treatise). Tusi abandons the above position altogether and supports the
orthodox doctrine of ertaiio ex nihilo, without any reservation. Glassifying
Being into the neoessary and the possible, he argues that the possible depends
for its existence on the necessary; and since it exists by other than itself, it
cannot be assumed in a state of existence, for the creation of the existent is
impossible and absurd. And that which is not in existence is non-existent,
and so the Necessary Being creates the possible out of nothing. Such a process
is called creation and the existent, the created (muhdnth).
Similarly, in Taeaumir&l, Tusi agrees with ibn Sina that from one nothing
can proceed except one, and following this principle explains the emanation
(fudur/ of the world from the Necessary Being after the Neo-Platonic fashion.
In KirdfcA i ‘Aql, RMleh-i ‘Ilal wa Ma'luUl, and Sborh-i Is^Ardt too, he
supports, both logically and mathematically, pluralization in the creative
process taken as a whole. But in later works, Qand’id al-'Aqh'id. Tajrid
al-'Aqa'id, and Fueul, he evidently attacks and blows up the very foundation
of this principle, once held so dearly by him. The reflection of the first intellect
is said to have created the intellect, soul, and body of the first sphere. This
position, he now points out, obviously implies plurality in what is created by
the first intellect, which goes against the principle that from one nothing can
proceed except one. As to the source of plurality, he further argues that it
exists either by the authority of God or without His authority. If it exists by
•• Tafawwurti. p. 8.
577
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the authority of God, then there ia no doubt that it has oome from God. If, on
the other hand, it crista without the authority of God, that would mean the
setting up of another god besides God.*’
Again, in TaMumrOl, Tusi holds the view that God's reflection is equivalent
to creation and is the outcome of His self-conscious neceesity. But in fusiU,
he abandons this position aa well. He now regards God as a free creator and
blows up the theory of creation out of necessity. If God creates out of
necessity, he argues, His actions should spring out of His eeeenoe. Thus, if a
part of the world becomes non-existent, the essence of God should also pass
into nothingness; for the cause of ita non-existence is conditioned by the
non-existence of a part of ita cause, the non-existence of which is further deter-
mined by the non existence of the other parts of its cause and so on. And since
all existenta depend for their existence on the necessity of God, their non
existence ultimately loads to the non-existenoe of God Himself."
K
PROPHETHOOD
After establishing freedom of the will and resurrection of the body. Tfl"'
proceeds to establish the necessity of prophethood and spiritual leadership.
Conflict of interests coupled with individual liberty results in the disintegration
of social life, and thia necessitates a divine Code from God for the regulation
of human affairs. But God Himself is beyond all sensory apprehension; there
fore. He sends prophets for the guidance of peoples. This, in turn, makes
necessary the institution of spiritual leadership after the prophets to enforce
the divine Code.
L
GOOD AND EVII.
Good and evil are found mixed up in this world. The obtnwiveneaa of evil is
inconsistent with the benevolence of God. To avoid thia difficulty, Zoroastriana
attributed light ami good to Yardin and darkness and evil to Ahriman
But the existence of two equal and independent principles itself involves a
metaphysical inconsistency. Rejecting tho view on this ground, T'ud explains
away the reality and objectivity of evil with the enthusiasm of ibn Sina, his
spiritual progenitor.
According to Td»i. the good proceeds from God and the evil springs up aa
an accident ('arf) in its way. The good, for instance, ia a grain of wheat
thrown into the soil and watered, so that it grows into a plant and yields a
rich crop. Tho evil is like the foam which appears on the surface of the water.
The foam evidently comes from the water-courses and not from the water
■' Futfd. p. 18.
•• Ibid., pp. 18-18.
578
Na#lr al Dln Jimi
itself Thus, there it no evil principle in the world, but aa in accident it is a
necessary concomitant or by-product of matter.
In the human world, evil ia occasioned by an error of judgment or through
a misuse of the divine gift of free-will. God by Himself alms at universal good,
but the veila of the senses. imagination, fancy, and thought hang before our
eight and cloud the mental viaion. Thua, prudence fails to foresee the conse
quences of actions, resulting in wrong choice, which in turn begets evil.
Again, our judgment of evil is always relative and Metaphorical, that is. it
is always with referenoe to something. When, for instance, fire burns a poor
man's cottage or flood sweeps away a village, a verdict of evil is invariably
passed on fire and water. But in reality there is nothing evil in fire or water;
rather their absence would constitute an absolute evil in comparison to the
partial evil occasionally caused by their presence.
Lastly, evil ia tho outcome of ignoramx, or tho result of some physical
disability, or the lack of something which provides for the good. The absence
of day ia night, the lack of wealth ia poverty, and tho absence of good ia evil.
In essence, therefore, evil is the absence of something— a negative, not a
positive something.4’
To the question why a finite sin is dealt with infinite punishment by God.
TOai replies that it is a mistake to attribute either reward or punishment to
God. Just aa the virtuous, by nature and necessity. deserve eternal bliss
and happiness, so the vicious by nature and necessity deserve eternal punish
ment and despair.
M
LOGIC
On logic, his works inolude dads al lqlibat, Shark i Mania/ al Ishanil.
Ta'dil al-Mi'yir, and Ta/rid fi al-Mantiq. The first of these gives a comprehen
sive and lucid account of tho subject in Persian on the lines of ibn Sink's
logic in al-Sh‘/d'.
TOsi regards logic both aa a science end aa an instrument of science. Aa a
science, it sima at the cognition of meanings and that of the quality of the
meanings cognized; aa an instrument, it is the key to the understanding of
different sciences. When knowledge of meanings aa well as of the quality of
meanings becomes so ingrained in the mind that it no longer requires the
exercise of thought and reflection, the science of logic becomes a useful art
(fan'ai), freeing the mind from misunderstanding, on the one hand, and per-
alexity, on the other.”
Having defined logic. Jfiai. like ibn Sina, begins with a brief discussion of
:he theory of knowledge. All knowledge is either a concept (tafawwur) or a
udgment (latdiq)-, the former is acquired through definition and the latter
■’ TomwwMrat. pv44.
•• .4*1* ol-ZynM*. p. S
579
A History of Muslim Philosophy
through syllogism. Thus, definition and syllogism are the two instruments
with which knowledge is acquired.
Unlike Aristotle, ibn Sina had divided all syllogisms into the copulative
(ijtirini) and the exocptive (ulifhnii’i). filsi has followed this division and
elaborated it in his own way. His logical works are Aristotelian in general
outline, but he mentions four*1 instead of three syllogistic figures; and the
source of this fourth figure is found neither in the Organon of Aristotle nor in
any of the logical works of ibn 8taa.“
N
REVIEW
Tu«i, as we have already seen, owes his ethics to ibn Miskawaih and politics
to F&ribi; but neither of them reaches the depth and the extent of ibn Sink's
influence over him. Tusl's logic, metaphysics, psychology, domestics, and
dogmatics—all are substantially borrowed from him. Besides, his long though
casual connection with the NizAri IsmA'Ilites also influenced his ethical,
psychological, and metaphysical speculations. Historically speaking, his
position is mainly that of a revivalist. But from the standpoint of the history
of culture, even the revival of the philosophical and scientific tradition, specially
in an era of political and intellectual decline, though marked by tiresome
erudition and repetition, is no less important than origination, inasmuch as
it prepares the ground for the intellectual rebirth of a nation.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
MUrawaih, Tahfaib al AkhUq wa Tafhir al-A'raq, Egypt, 1329/1911; al-flhaxAh.
.Vlrdi. al-Amal. Egypt. 1329/1910; Ne?lr sl-DIn TOsi. Akbldqi Ndtiri. Lucknow.
1942; Tofawwurdt. cd. Ivanow. Bombay, 1950; Aufdf al-AOrif. od. Na»r Allah
Tsqwi, Teheran. 1941; Fufd, ed, M.T. Mnith Paihuh, Teheran. 1959; Sob Ou/IAri
TOri. Teheran, 1956; Arfa al-lqnbfa. ed. Mudarris Ri<Jwi. Teheran, 1947: Pod
MmrA-i KAwd/oA Nasir al-Din Turn, Teheran University. Teheran. 1957: AqA-i
'Ali Akbar Zand. "Khwajah Nasir al-DIn Tuai,” Quarterly Hilal, Pakistan, Nov.
1956;al-FArAbi, Jrd AUalMadtnalal-fajiM,"i.F. Dietcrici, Leiden. 1895; KiUlb
alSiydrat al Madaniyyah, Hyderabad Deccan. 1336/1917; 'Abd al-Salilm Nadawi.
Hukama'-i Iatan,. Axsmgarh. Vol. I. 1953, Vol. II. 1956; M. YOnus AnsAri. Ibn
Hutbd. Azamgarh. 1342/1923 ; 8. M. AfiiAn, Avicenna, London. 1958; C. Brocket-
mann. Oerebuhlt far arabircben Lifaratur, Leiden. 1943. Suppl.. 1937; A. M. A.
Shushtery. Oudina of Irlamic Ctdlun, Bangalore. 1938; R. Lovy. Tfa Sociology of
Idam, 2 Vole., Ismdon. 1933; R. Briffault. Tbo Mating of Humanity, London.
1919; D.M. Donaldson, Stadias >n Murlim Ethics. London. 1953; P. K. Hitti. History
of tbe Arabi. London, 1958; T. W. Arnold and A. Oillaumo (Eds.). Tht legacy of
Iolam, London. 1952; Aristotle. AicAomocAsan EtAiea, tr. D.P. Chase. Oxford. 1847;
E.G. Browne, Literary History of Portia. 4 Vols.. 1-ondon, 1906-28; Erwydopordia
of Itlam. London. 1908-38; M. M. Sharif, Murlim Thought: IU Origin and
Aehimmentr, I-ahore, 1951; T. J. de Boer, TAe History of PhUorophy in Iolam. tr
E. R. Jonee, London, 1903,
“ Ibid., p. 379.
AfnAn, op. cil., p. 101
580
Part 4. The Middle-Roaders
Chapter XXX
AL.GHAZALI
METAPHYSICS
A
INTRODUCTION
AI-QhazAli occupies a position unique in the history of Muslim religious
and philosophical thought by whatever standard we may judge him: breadth
of learning, originality, or influence. He has been acclaimed as the Proof of
Islam ((lujjat al-lsldm), the Ornament of Faith (zain al-din) and the Renewer
of Religion (mujaddid).1 Al-Subki (d. 771/1370} went so far in his estimation
of him as to claim that if there had been a prophet after Muhammad, al-
Qhaa&li would have been the man.1 To be sure he gathered in his own person
all the significant intellectual and religious movements of his time and lived
over again in the inwardness of his soul the various spiritual phases developed
by Islam. He waa in turn a oanon-lawyer and a scholastic, a philosopher and a
sceptic, a mystic and a theologian, a traditionist and a moralist. His position
as a theologian of Islam is undoubtedly the most eminent. Through a living
synthesis of hia creative and energetio personality, he revitalized Muslim
theology and reorientated its values and attitudes. His combination of spiri
tualization and fundamentalism in Islam had such a marked stamp of his
powerful personality that it has continued to be accepted by tho community
since his time. Ilis outlook on philosophy is characterized by a remarkable
originality which, however, is more critical than constructive. In his works
on philosophy one is struck by a keen philosophical acumen and penetration
with which he gives a clear and readable exposition of the views of tho
philosophers, the subtlety and analyticity with which he criticizes them, and
the candour and open-mindedneas with which he accepts them whenever he
findB them to be true. Nothing frightened him nor fascinated him, and through
an extraordinary independence of mind, he became a veritable challenge to the
1 For al-GbaziU's role iw a renewer of religion, cf. abu al-Hasan 'Ali, Tdrikti
Da*wot-u 'Apimal, Azamgarh, 1375/1955, Parti, pp. 111-81 (Urdu); Shibli Nu'mfini.
ul-floral;, Lahore, 1956. pp. 270-362 (Urdu). Cf. also A. W. Zuhilri (Tr. and Comp.).
MaiOM-i Im/lm GhazHli (Letter* of Imam UhazAli), Karachi. 1949 (Urdu). See af-
Munqitfb, English translation by W. Montgomery Watt In hia Faith and Praclia of
al-QhaMi. London. 1953. p. 75. All references to al-Mum/idb are to this translation
unless mentioned otherwise.
■ Al-Subki (Taj al-DIn). (Tobm/ar of-Md/i'iyy<rt aLKubra, Cairo, 1324/1908,
Vol. IV. p. 101. See also note No. 10, below.
581
A History of Muslim Philosophy
philosophies of Aristotle and Plotinus and to their Muslim representatives
heforo him, al-FAribi and ibn Sina. The main trends of the religious and
philosophical thought of al-QhazAli, however, come close to the temper of the
modem mind. The champions of the modem movement of religious empiricism,
on the one hand, and that of logical positivism, on the other, paradoxical
though it may seem, would equally find comfort in his works. The teachings
of this remarkable figure of Islam pertaining cither to religion or philosophy,
either constructive or critical, cannot, however, be fully understood without
knowing the story of his life with some measure of detail, for, in his case,
life and thought were one: rooted in his own personality. Whatever he
thought and wrote came with the living reality of his own experience.
B
LIFE*
Abu HAmid Muhammad ibn Muhammad ibn Mupammaii ibn fA’us Ahmad
al-fOsi al-8hafi'i, generally known simply by his nisbaA al-Qitaxali,* was bom
in 450/1068 at Tabaran, one of the two townships of Tus, now in ruins in the
neighbourhood of modem Meshed in Khurasan.
Al-GhazAli waa not the first scholar of distinction in his family: there had
been another abu IjAmid al-Qfaazali (d. 436/1043), his grand-uncle, who waa
a theologian and jurisconsult of great repute,* 1 possibly a model which he
might have set before him in his ambitious youth. But he was early exposed
to Sufiatic influences. His own father waa a pious dervish who according to
al-Subki would not eat anything but what he could cam with his own hands
1 The principal sources for the me oi al-QfaaxAli are his autobiographical al-
Munqiii. s. Murtofla, f«iM/ al-Sodah, Cairo, 1311/1893, Vol. I (Introduction)
pp. 2 53, and a!-8ubki, op. cti.. Vol. IV, pp. 101-82. For the account of al-
GbnzAli's life in English, of. D. B. Macdoland. "Life of al.fifaar.xAli with Special
Reference to His Religious Experience," Journal of the American Oriental Society,
Vol. XX. 1899. pp. 71-132 (Important); M. Smith. al-QffadUi: The Myelic, London,
1944. Part I, pp. 9-104; W. H. T. Guirdnor, An Account of QhaztAli'e Life and
Worke, Madras, 1919; S. M. Zwemer, A Modem Seeker after God. London. 1920.
An account in Urdu can bo found in Sfaibli Nu'mAni, op. di., pp. 19-73; M. Hanlf
Nadawi. Afkdr-i (ihatdli, Lahore, 1950, Introduction, pp. 3-113; ‘Abd al-SalAm
Nadawi, Hukamd'-i IeUtm. Axamgarh, 1953, pp. 386-408.
1 Known as Algazel, sometimes sa Abuliamet to Medieval Europe. Some of tho
Western scholars even now use Algnzol (o.g. Bertrand Ruaeoll. Hietory of Weetern
Philoeophy, London. 1946. p. 477) or its other variants al-Gazal, Algaaali, Gazali.
etc. Whether al-QfaazAli should bo spelt with doublo or single "Z" baa been a
mat tor of long and strong dispute. More general practice both with the contem
porary Muslim writers and the Orientalists now is to use single “Z”. Cf. Hantf
Nadawi. op. di., pp. 3-6; D. B. Macdonald, "Tho Namo Al-fifaazzAli." Journal of
the Royal Aeialic Society, 1902, pp. 18-22; S. M. Zwomer.pp. cil.. pp. 63-65. 140-43.
* Known thereafter aa al fii«r.Ali al-Kabir. Ho ia reported to have taught
canon-law fFiqh) to al-FAmutdbi. the Sufi guide of our own al-QfaazMi; cf. Mac-
donald. "Lifeof al-QfaazAli " JAOS, p. 126; also al-Subki, op. cil.. Vol. III. p. 36.
582
Al Qhasili
und spend us much time as he could in tho company of the divines. Early left
as an orphan, al-Qbazali was brought up and educated by a pious Sufi friend
of his father along with his brother who later made a mark as a great mystic.
While still a boy alQfoazAli began the study of theology and canon-law, with
the express desire for wealth and reputation as he himself has acknowledged*
first in his native town under Shaikh Ahmad ibn Muhammad al-RAdhkhAni
al-Jusi and then at JurjAn under tho ImAm abu Nasr allsmA'Ili.
After his return from JurjAn he stayed for a while in ffis and possibly
during this period studied Sufism under Yusuf al-Nass&j and perhaps even
undertook some of tho Sufistic exercises. At the age of about twenty he
proceeded to the NifAmiyyah Academy of NlthApur to study under abu
al-Ma'Ali al-Juwaini known as ImAm al-lfaramain, the most distinguished
Ajh'arite theologian of the day, only fourth from al-A&h'ari himself in an
apostolic succession of the Ajh'arite teachers. The curriculum of the Academy
included a wide range of subjects such aa theology, canon-law, philosophy,
logic, dialectics, natural sciences, Sufism, etc. ImAm al-Haraniain allowod full
freedom of thought and expression to his pupils; they were encouraged to
engage in debates and discussions of all kinds. Al-QhazAli gave early proof of
great learning and also of a tendency towards philosophizing. Imam al-
IJaramain described him aa "a plenteous ocean to be drowned” and comparing
him with two other pupils of his observod: "al-KfcawAft's strong point is veri
fication, al-GfaazAIi's is speculation, and al-KiyA's is explanation.”’ In his
debates with other students he showed great suppleness of mind and a gift
for polemics. Not long afterwards he began to lecture to his fellow-students
and to write books. But al-OhazAli was one ofthose rare minds whose originality
is not crushed by their learning. He was a bom critio and possessed groat
independence of thought. It was verily during his studentship at the Nipamiy-
yah Academy of NljbApur that he bccamo impatient of dogmatie teaching
and freed himself from the bondage of authority (taqlid) and even showed the
signs of scepticism.
During his stay at NlsMpOr. he also became a disciple to the Sufi abu 'Ali
al-Fa<Jl ibn Mubammad ibn 'Ali al-FArmadfri al-Tuai, a pupil of al-QbazAH's
own uncle and of the reputed al-Qughairi (d. 465/1074). From al-FArmadhi
al-GhazAli learnt more about the theory and practice of Sufism. He even
practised rigorous ascetic and Sufistic exercises under his guidance but not
to the desired effect. Aa he himself narrates, he could not attain to that stage
where the mystics begin to receive pure inspiration from "high above."* So he
did not feel quite settled down in his mind. On the one hand, he felt philo-
sophically dissatisfied with the speculative systems of the scholastic theologians
and could not accept anything on authority, oil the other, the Sufistio practices
■ Cf. al-Subki, op. oil.. Vol. IV. p. 102.
’ Ibid., pp. 103. 100.
■ Cf. ibn KhallikAn. Wafaydt al-A'ydn (English trans, by de Slane). Paris,
1842-1871. Vol. II. p. 122
583
A History of Muslim Phiksamliy
so failed to make any definite impression on him for he hail not received
any sure results. There is no doubt, however, that the increasing attraction
of the Sufistic teaching, with its insistence upon a direct personal experience
of God, added to alfiJjaiHirs critical dissatisfaction with dogmatic theology.
Al-FSrmadbi died in 477/1084, and Im&m al-Haramain in 478/1085. Al-
Ghaz.Ali was then in his twenty-eighth year, ambitious and energetic; the fame
of his learning had already spread in the Islamic world. He betook himself
to the Court of Nijim al-Mulk, the great vizier of the Saljuq sovereign
Malik shah (r. 465/1072-485/1092) and joined his retinue of canonists and
theologians. Nifam al-Mulk by his munifioent patronage of scholarship, science
and arts had gathered round him a brilliant galaxy of savants and learned men.
He used to hold frequent assemblies for debate and discussion and al-QhazSli
soon made his mark at these and was conspicuous for his skill in debate.
Al-Ohazali's profound knowledge of Muslim law, theology, and philosophy
so much impressed Nijam al-Mulk that he appointed him to the Chair
of Theology in the Ni0mlvyah Academy (established 458-60/1065-67) at
Bagfad&d in 484/1091. He-was then only thirty-four. This was most coveted
of all the honours in the then Muslim world and one which had not previously
been conferred on anyone at so early an age.
As a professor in the Academy, al-Qhaz5li was a complete success; tho
excellence of his lectures, the extent of his learning, and the lucidity of his
explanations attracted larger and larger classes including the chief savants
of the time. Soon all Islam acclaimed his eloquence, erudition, and dialectical
skill and he came to be looked upon as the greatest theologian in the Ash'arite
tradition. His advice began to be sought in matters religious and political, and
he came to wield influence comparable to that of the highest officials of the
State. Apparently, he attained to all the glory that a scholar could by way
of worldly success, but inwardly he began to undergo an intellectual and
spiritual crisis?
• It. may be recalled that not only theology but medicine and philosophy were
also taught at Baghdad and the school of Baghdad from tho first waa characterized
by its scientific spirit end freedom of thought. Tho city of Baghdad had more than
thirty-five hbrarite for the use of scholars and the place attracted all sorts of pooplo
belonging to different sects and schools. A few generations back there flourished
the association of the Ikbwnri al-Safa; its mootings were attended by abn al.'AU’
al-Ma'arri, said to be tho arch-heretic in Islam who died (at the ago of 84) only a
year before alQj;azAli waa bom. Al-Qugbairi the teacher of Funnadbi. yet himself
a pupil of al 'Aiii'ari in theology, died in 465/1074 when al-GhaziUi was a boy of
soventoon, but then probably this is also tbo date of the death of N4$ir-i Ejhusrau,
the IsmA'Ili propagandist and philosopher. 'Umar KhayyAm (d. c. 517/1123), the
great mathematician, astronomer, and the agnostic philosopher (the Lucretius
anil the Voltaire of Islam in one), enjoyed with al-flhazAli the patronage of Niptm
al-Mulk. Univ a year aftor al QbazAli'a appointment in the NijAmiyyah Academy.
Ni|4m al-Mulk died (485; 1092) as the first victim of tho IsmAIli assassins hoadnil
by nl-Haaan ibn al-Sabb&b (483/1090-518/1124) —the second victim waa no lees
than the king himself (MalikohAh) only after an interval of thirty-fivo days.
584
Al-QbazAli
ilia old doubts and scepticism began to assail him once again and he became
highly critical of the very subjects that he taught. He keenly felt the hollowness
of the meticulous spinning of casuistry of the canon-lawyers.1’ The systems of
the scholastic theologians (MulalcaUimfr.) had no intellectual certainty, for they
depended entirely on the acceptance of their initial dogmatic assumptions on
authority. He denounced their over-emphasis on the doctrinal, for it led to a
faulty representation of religion by reducing it to a mere mould of orthodoxy
and catechism of dogmas. The disputes of the scholastics amongst themselves
he considered as mere dialectical logomachiee which had no real relation with
religious life.11 Al-Qfcazali tamed onoe again to the study of philosophy, this
time aa diligently and aa comprehensively as he could,1* but found, like Kant,
that it waa impossible to build theology on reason alone. Reason was good
so far as it went, but it could not go very far. The Ultimate, the Supremo Truth,
could not be reached through it. Becoming keenly aware of the theological
limitations of reason, he fell into a state of scepticism and lost his peace of
mind. The hypocrisy of his orthodox teaching became unbearable and he
found himself to be in a false position.
But all waa not lost: he had some assurances that he could be delivered
from this state of despair through the Sufi way. It was hot that he now
discovered that in Sufism lay the possibility for a direct enoounter with
reality; thia fact he had been realizing over a period of years. He had made
a theoretical study of Sufism and had even ventured into Sufistic exercises
only he had not advanced far enough into them. If ho could consecrate himself
to the Sufistic way of life through spiritual renunciation, sustained asceticism,
and prolonged and deep meditation, he might have received the light he
sought. But this meant in his case giving up his brilliant academic career
and worldly position. He waa by nature ambitious and had great desire for
fame and self-glorification. On the other hand, he waa the most earnest seeker
after truth. Besides, he had the anxiety to reach a secure faith which was
accentuated by his thought of lifo after death. He remained in the throes of
a severe moral conflict and in a spiritual travail for about six months beginning
from Rajab 488/July 1095. He collapsed physically and mentally; appetite
and digestion failed and ho lost his power of speech. This made it easy for him
,B He was himself a master of the canon-law and compiled works of tho very
highest order on it, e.g., al-Woflz, al-BazU, al Watt/, al-Muttaf/a, etc., According
to Sayyid Murtada (d. 1206/1791), al-H'afix was commented on by later scholars
for about seventy times and that had alQbazAli been a prophet he could have
claimed this work as his miracle. Al QhazAli on his part considered oanon-law only
to be ‘ihn al-mu'amalah (knowledge dealing with practical affairs of lifo) and not
'•Im ol muMdo/oA (gnosis of Ultimate Reality); cf. M. Hanlf Nadawi, op. ell., pp.
92-111.
11 For al-Qhazill's criticism of KMm, cf. hia Zlfdm ol-'Awdmm 'm 71m al-
KalOm and RtaUoA fl al-Wa'z uu al-l'liqad. He. howover, approved of Kalam
to explain and defend faith; cf. his al-lytifad fl airiiqad.
11 See note No. 29 below
585
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
to renounce his poet as a professor. He left Baghdad in Ehu al-Qa'dah 488/
November 1095, ostensibly on a pilgrimage to Mecca; actually he went into
seclusion to practise the ascetic and religious discipline of the Sufis in order
to secure certainty for his mind and peace for his soul. He gave away all his
fortune except some "trust funds" to maintain his family and proceeded to
Syria.
For two years from 488/1095 to 490/1097 he remained in strict retirement in
one of the minarets of the mosque of the Umayyads in Damascus, undergoing
most rigorous ascetic discipline and performing religious exercises. He moved
to Jerusalem for another period of meditation in the masque of 'Umar and
the Dome of the Rock. After having paid his visit to the tomb of Abraham
at Hebron, he went on pilgrimage to Mecoa and Medina; then followed a long
period of retreat at different places in holy shrines and mosques and wandering
in deserts.1’ After eleven years the life of a wandering dervish and scholar
came to an end and he finally returned to his native town. Ttis, in 499/1105.“
Of his inner spiritual experience* in their experimental actuality, after ho
left Baghdad, al GhazAli tells us almost nothing except that there were revealed
to him in his periods of solitude things innumerable and unfathomable.
Apparently, these experiences culminated in his acknowledgment of the
authority of the Prophet and the complete submission to the truth revealed
in the Qur'in. The first public sign of his rooovery to orthodoxy is perhaps
al-Risdlah al-Qudsiyyah. written during his retreat in Jerusalem, where in all
probability he was before 492/1099, for in Sfea'ban of that year Jerusalem
was captured by the Crusaders. This has been inserted aa Qawd'id al'Aqd'id
in the third chapter of the second book of his massive magnum opus I/iyd'
'Ulum al-Din (The Revivification of the Sciences of Religion) in which he
began to set down what he had learnt through his long periods of self-discipline
and meditation.1’ During his wanderings ho not only kept on writing other
>• He is also reported to have gone to Egypt visiting Cairo and Alexandria.
There ia a good deal of uncertainty about tho various places that he visitod and
the lime and order of hia journoyings (oxoept the first two years of his stay in Syria).
These extensive travois must have added considerably to his experience of life in
general, to his first -hand contact with tho cultures of many lands, and to his Involve
ment with other religions—henoe his humanism. For his understanding of Christian
religion and involvomont with it.cf. J. W. Sweetman. Islam and Christian Theology,
London, 1955, Part U, Vol. I. pp. 22-23, 262-309; also L. Maaaignon in Revue des
Eludes islamiques, 1933.
“ The period of al-GhaxAll's rather unduly long retreat ooincidoe with the time
when Barkiy&ruq ruled aa the great Saljuq. In tho civil war between Barkiyiruq
and his unole Tutuih, al Qhatuli is reported to have sided with tho cause of tho
latter. To this may be wldod the fact that in Syria where al-QfiazAli spent some
years Tutuib (r. 487/1094 488/1005) and his eons were the kings (488/1095-
511/1117). AU this ia strongly suggestive of some possible political oomplioations.
Cf. Macdonald. JAOS. pp. 71-132.
“ An analytical account of the oontents of lAyd’ can be found tn D. M. Donald
son’s Studies in Muslim Ethics, London. 1953, pp. 159-65. Cf. also Encyclopaedia
**/ Religion and Ethics. London, 1953, Vol. V, pp. 508a, 509b. A large part of /Ayd’
588
Al-QhazAli
books besides I^yd’ but also resumed teaching from time to time. He keenly
felt it incumbent upon him to crush heresy and unbelief around him and to
call people back to the truth and moral power of Islam, both through writing
and teaching: he virtually assumed the role of a moral and religious reformer.
Ho began to devote himself more and more to the study of the traditions of the
Prophet and make an extensive use of them for the purposes of edification and
spiritual guidance.
On his return to Jus he once again gave himself to the life of retirement
and contemplation, but very soon FaKbr al-Mulk, the son of his old patron,
Ni$Am al-Mulk, who was the vizier to Sulfan Sanjar. urged him to accept the
chair of theology at the Maimunah Nit&mlyyah College at Nlgbapur which he
did after some hesitation in 2hu aIQa'dah 49(1,August 1106. But he did not
stay there long and retired once more to his home in fun and established a
madrasah at which he began to teach both theology and tafawumf. At the
instance of the learned and the common people of Baghdad he waa once again
summoned by the Grand Vizier al-Sa'id to take up teaching in the old Nifilmlv-
yah Academy of Baghdad but al-Qfeaz&li chose to remain at Tua. There he
lived in peace with some personal disciples having charge of his madrasah.
Every moment waa filled with study and devotion till his death on the 14th
of Jum&da II 565/the 19th of December 1111. It was a beautifully complete
and round life in which the end came to the beginning.
C
METHOD
The moat important thing about al-GhazAll's system of thought is its
method which may be described as that of the courage to know and the
courage to doubt. The best expression of it is given in his famous autobio
graphical work, al-JIungidh min al-fiaUl (The Deliverer from Error), which
he wrote some five years before hia death.*
11 In alMunqidi al.QhazAli makes
lias also been analysed by Miguel .Anin Palacios in his Algood. doymalica, moral,
ac/tiw, Zaragoza. 1001. /hya' a* divided into four parts each comprising ten books.
Part III, Book ii; Part II. Book vii; Part IV, Book vi, have been translated into
English by D. B. Macdonald, in hia Religious Attitude and Li/e in Islam, Chicago,
1909. Lectures vii-x; Journal o/ Royal Asiatic Society, 1901-1902, and Encyclo
paedia o/ Religion and Ethics, Vol. IL pp. B77-80, respectively. Translation of
some of the extracts from Parts III and IV can also be found in Syed Nawab Ali'e
Some Moral and Religious Teachings o/ ul-Qhaaali. Lahore. 1946. pp. 28-133.
Hana Bauer has made a German translation of some of the "Books" of IhyT; cf.
his Idamische Elhik (Three Parts), Halle. 1916, 1917. 1922. For a complete Urdu
translation of Ihyd', cf, M. Absan, Madhdy al-'Ari/in, 4 Vols., Lucknow, 1955
(seventh odition).
11 Al-Munqidh min ol-Ikildl as an autobiographical work ia unique in the whole
of Arabic literature for "the keenness and t ho fullness of ita self-revelation." It is
tho most often referred to book and haa been translated and oditod n number of
times; C. Hrockclmann in Ilia Arabisebe Littcratur, Weimar. 1899 Vol. I pp. 419-
587
A History of Muslim Philosophy
a critical examination of the methods of the various schools of thought current
in his time in a manner closely similar to that of Descartes’(d. 1060/1650) in
his Discours de la mUhode (1047/1637)..
All kinds of knowledge, alQhazili held, should be investigated end nothing
should be considered dangerous or hostile. For himself he said that he had
embarked on the open sea of knowledge right from his adolescence setting
aside all craven caution: "1 poked into every dark recess and made an assault
on every problem, I plunged into every abyss. I scrutinized the creed of
ovary acct and I fathomed the mysteries of each doctrine. All this I did that
I might distinguish between the true and the false. There was not a philo
sopher whose system I did not acquaint myself with, nor a theologian whose
doctrines I did not examine. If ever I met a Sufi, I coveted to probe into his
secrets; if an ascetic, I investigated into the basis of his austerities; if one of the
atheistic zindlqs, I groped into the causes of his bold atheism.”1' Such was
the courage of al-QhazAli to know. He was free from the parochialism of the
dogmatio theologians of his day who would rather consign the books of the
atheists and philosophers to flames than read them. But prepared though he
was to listen to every creed and doctrine, he would accept none and doubt all.
For one thing, he came to the conclusion that the greatest hindrance in the
search for truth was the acceptance of beliefs on the authority of others and
blind adherence to the heritage of the past. He remembered the traditional
Baying of the Prophet: "Every child is bora with a sound disposition (filrah);
it is his parents who make him a Jew or a Christian or a Magian”1* and he was
anxious to know what that sound disposition was before it suffered the impress
of the unreasoned convictions imposed by others. Indeed, he wanted to re
construct all his knowledge from its very foundation and was led to make
the following reflections: "The search after truth being the aim which I propose
to myself, I ought in the first plaoe to ascertain what are the bases of oertitude
In tho second place I ought to recognize that oertitude is the clear and complete
knowledge of things, such knowledge as leaves no room for doubt, nor any
possibility of error.”1* As one might foresee, this proposed test for certitude
only led him to a series of doubts. No part of the knowledge he had acquired
26. has given 69 items. For some of tho important translations of MunqiU, of.
Encyclopaedia o/ Idam, Leiden. 1913-34, Vol. II. p. 149. For Urdu translations
SCO HAfij M. Anwar 'Ali, Lecture Imam QJordli, Lahore. 1311/1893, 111 pp. (with
Arabio text) and M. Hanlf Nadawi. SarguHatbl(ZJazali. Lahore. 1939, 188 pp.
(with an Introduction, pp. 3-108).
■’ Cf. d-UmpA, pp. 20. 21.
•• Bukhari (23 : 80. 93); also tho Qur'in, xxx. 30; xxxv, 1. The term filrah camo
to be used by the philosophers in the sense of lumen naluraU.
" Cf. ol-Afunyi^ (English translation by Claud Field. The Confeaeione of ol-
(tAorrdli, London 1909, p. 13). Thia is exactly the first of the four rules mentioned
by Descartes in his Diocourt ds la mMode and the second rule of his Rcyulac ad
DirKtionm Jnyenii composed as early aa 1038/1628; cf. E. 8. Haldane and O. R. T.
Roes (Tra.), Tho Philosophical World ol Ducartee, Cambridge, 1911, Vol. I. pp. 3.
92. 101
588
Al-Gh*zth
.llhorto oould stand this rigorous test. He further observed. We cannot hope
to tind truth except in matters which carry their evidence in themselves, i.e.,
in sense-perception and necessary principles of thought; we must, therefore,
first of all establish these two on a firm basis." But he doubted the evidence
of sense-perception; he could see plainly as Descartes did later that they so
often deceive us. No eye can perceive the movement of a shadow, still the
siiadow moves; a small coin would cover any star yet the geometrical com
putatiom show that a star ia a world vastly larger than the earth.“•
Al-ShatAU’s confidence in sense-perception having been shaken, he turned
to the scrutiny of what he called the necessary principles, but he doubted even
these. Is ten more than three I Can a thing both be and not be at the same
time or be both necessary and impossible I How could he tell I His doubt with
regard to sense-perception made him very hesitant to acoept the infallibility
of reason. Ho believed in tho testimony of senses till it was contradicted by
the verdict of reason. Well, perhaps there is above reason another judge who
if he appeared would oonvict reason of falsity and if such a third arbiter is not
yet apparent it does not follow that he does not exist.
Al-Ghax41i then considers the possibility that life in this world is a dream
by comparison with the world tp come; and when a man dieB, things may
come to appear differently to him from what ho now beholds.*0 There may be
an order of reality different from this spatio-temporal order which may bo
revealed to a level of consciousness other than the so-called normal conscious
ness such as that of the mystics or the prophets. Such was the movement of
al-QhazalTs thought, which though formulated a little artificially in the
Afunqi^A was dramatic enough to make out a case for the possibility of a
form of apprehension higher than rational apprehension, that is. apprehension
as the mystic’s inspiration or the prophet's revelation.*'
Haldane and Rosa. op. eit.. p. 101, where Descartes makes similar observations.
■■ Cf. /hyd'. Cairo. 1340/1921, Vol. IV, p. 19. where al-ChazSIi refers to u
tradition: Peoplo aro asleep; when they dio, they awake. Cf. also Klmtya-t
Sa'fidat (Urdu tr. by M. 'Infiyat Allah), Lahore, n.d., pp. 739. 740.
•' It IB. howovor, a serious though widespread error of interpretation to consider
al-Qhazali to be an anti-intellectualist. Macdonald's statement in his article "al-
fiharxHli" in tho Encyclopaedia of Iriam that "he taught that intellect should only
be used to destroy trust in itself," is very unfortunate. So also is IqbU's allegation
that al-GhazAli denied dynamic character to thought and its eelf-tranacending
reference to the infinite (cf. S. M. Iqbkl, The ReconMruclion of Reliyiowt Thought
in Ielam, Oxford, 1934, pp. 4-8). AJ-QbasMi very definitively and explicitly brings
out both these aspects of thought in hia analysis of intelligence in the Mif^kat al-
AnwSr (of. English translation by W. H. T. Gairdnor, Lahore, 1932, pp. 83-911. This
section in the Miibkdl is quite noteworthy in view of the general opinion that the
AftsMdl waa written by al-QhazAli Bt a time very close to tho writing ofal-Munyidh
(probably after it): a period in the spiritual history of al-UhazAli during which he
rams to advocate the supremacy of intuition over reason aa against an earlier phase,
say that of IhyA'. when ho ranked them as equal and made reason go parallel with
intuition (e.g.. Part I. Book I, Chapter 7). True, in al-Munqidh al-QhazAli makes a
delimitation of tho province of tire hitman intellect by denying it a finality in the
589
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Al-GhazAlfs method of doubt or sceptical attitude did certainly have its
historical antecedents. The Agh'arites' system of atomism, by reducing all
categories except substance (jauhar) and quality farj) to mere subjectivities,
virtually amounted to a form of scepticism.“ Even earlier the Mu'tazilites
like al-Naw&m (d. 231/845) and abu al-Hudhail (d. 266/840) had formulated
the principle of doubt as the beginning of all knowledge." But with af-GhazSli
thia waa as much a matter of an inherent trait of his intellectual disposition
as a principle. One may be tempted to say that his keenly alert and sensitive
mind, though exposod from early youth to all the various intellectual
and spiritual movements of the times such as scholasticism, rationalism,
mysticism, etc., was not fully captured by any one single movement. Ambitious
and self-confident, he had been in a way playing with the various influences
rather than affected exclusively by anyone of them. His restless soul had
always been trying to reach for what it had not attained. In his sinoere and
open search for absolute truth, he possibly remained oscillating for a long time
between the moments of belief and disbelief—momenta when he might have
found comfort in his religious convictions with complete submission to the
teachings of tho Qur'kn and the momenta when his doubts and scepticism
might have overwhelmed him, olamouring for indubitable certainty. It is
certainly very difficult to map the exact chronology of the spiritual develop-
ment of such a complex mind as that of al-QbazAH's. The usual method of
working out the history of tho mental development of an author on the basis
of the chronological order of his works is not possible in tho case of al Ghazali
for our knowledge of his works is incomplete both with regard to their extent
and relativo order, not to speak of exact dating." None of hia works, not even
Held of transcendental problems, yet it would not be altogether right to say that
flhazAlian epistemology is a mere intuitive critiquo of knowlodgo. Hooping other
works of his in view, it may be said that his philosophy is mainly directed to the
vindication that intellect and intuition must at the end supplement each other.
Cf. M. Umaruddin. Tie Ethical PhUanphy a/ al.QjaaOU. Aligarh. 1949, Vol. I.
Part III. pp. 228-259.
“ Cf. M. Fakhry, Mamie Occanonalifm. London. 1958. pp. 25-48: also D. B.
Macdonald, “Continuous Re-creation and Atomism." few, Vol. IX, 1927. pp. 328-
44.
” Cf. S. M. Iqbal, TAs Development of Mctophynct in Perna, London 1908.
pp. 55, 100; also A. 8. Tritton. Muslim TAeoZogy. London. 1947, pp. 84. 90.
“ For the chronological order of al-QhazUi's works, cf. Louis Mwssignon Rscueil
de lexica, p. 93. and Introduotion to Maurioo Bouygas' edition of ToJtafut al-FalAeh-
fah, Beirut 1927. An allied and quite important, though very difficult, problem
for a student of al(ibazAli ia the authenticity of his works. Cf. M Asin Palacios.
La enpieitualdidad Alyaxal, Madrid 1934, Vol. IV, pp. 385-90. and W. M. Watt.
"The Authenticity of the Works Attributed to al-Gbackli." Journal of the Royal
Analie Society. 1052. pp. 24-45. along with his article "A Forgery in al-fihaz&H'a
•MijiWl!" in the same Journal of tho year 1949, pp. 5-22. Cf. also Shibli Nu'mtai.
op. cil.. pp. 80-84. and M. Hanlf Nadawi. op. cl.. pp. 54-58. A consolidated study
of these references shows that there are in all thirteen works the authenticity of
which is a matter of dispute besidos throe considerable sections of works otherwise
590
ai gbuiii
al-Munqidb which has often been compared with the Con/Mioiu of Augustine
allows us a peep into the inward workings of his soul.*** It is merely a schem
atized description of his spiritual development and not an existential study of
the "phenomenology" of his soul: he has simply arranged in a logical order
what must necessarily have come to him in a broken and sporadic form.
Nevertheless, al-Munqidh ia our most valuable source to determine al-
GbazAH's relative position with regard to the various schools of thought
around him. He had been moving through them all these years, studying them
very closely in his quest for certainty, and of them he now gives us a critical
evaluation in a summary fashion. He divides the various "seekers" after truth
into the four distinct groups: Theologians, Mystics, Authoritarians (Ta'ltm-
ilci). and Philosophers.
His criticism of tho theologians is very mild. He himself had been brought
up in their tradition and waa thoroughly saturated into their system. It is
doubtful if he ever parted oompany with them completely. He did not cease
to be a theologian even when he became a mystic and his criticism of the
philosophers waa essentially from tho standpoint of a theologian. Only he waa
dissatisfied with the scholastic method of the theologians, for it oould not
bring any intellectual certainty; their doctrines, he deemed, however, to be
correct. Hia belief in God, Prophecy, and Last Judgment were too doepiy
rooted in him to be shaken altogether; hia scepticism with regard to them, if at
all, waa a temporary phase; he only very much desired a confirmation of these
fundamental beliefs cither on some philosophical grounds or through some
sort of fint-hand experience.
So far as the mystics were concerned, al-QhazAli found himself hardly in a
position to level any criticism against them except for the extravagantly
pantheistic uttcranoea or antinomian tendencies of some of the intoxicated
Sufis.” They wore essentially men of feeling farMi al-ahuOl) rather than men
of words (af^db al-aquMJ and ho had himself early realized the importance of
experiences and states rather than that of definitions and dogmas. The claims of
the mystics he knew could not bo challenged by one who lacked their experiences.
Al GhazAli held a very poor opinion of the pretensions of those whom he
called the party of ta'Zim or authoritative instruction also known aa Ismi'lllyyah
ami Blttinlyyah.*' Theirs was a kind of Muslim popery or Montanist movement,
admitted to be authentic. The "problem of authenticity" requires very careful
further investigation.
“ Cf. Henrich Frick. QhazAlVr SMMiographit, FergleieA mil Auywrtin*
KonfMiontn, Leipzig, 1919, esp. p. 80.
•• Soo next chapter (pp. 817-24).
*’ lsmA'llitas or BAtinitos wore known aa Ta'llmitee in KhurAsAn. Al.QfcazAli
wrote quite a number of books against them; those mentioned in al-.Vum/tiU (p. 52)
are: (I) Al-MuMfJliri. (i) ffu))al al-f/a/g, (3) Mu/offi! (4) Durj, (5)
l/urfdt al lUurlatlm. Tho first work ia the most elaborate of them all. For tho
doctrines of tho TailmiWs. cf. Hanif Nadawi. Sarguddaehl-i QbazHh, pp. 19-54:
also tho artiole "IsmA'Ulya." Encudopatdia o/ Iriam.
S91
A History of Muslim Philosophy
They renounced reason and held that truth can be attained only by a sub-
mtssive acceptance of the pronouncements of an infallible Im&m. This doctrine
indeed waa a part of the propaganda of the F&timid Caliphate (297/909-
555/1160) with ita centre in Cairo and, thus, had ite moorings in the political
chaos of the day. AlfibaziU’s examination of the Ta'llmitea waa certainly due
to his love for thoroughness in his search for truth, but perhaps he also
wanted to make clear his position with regard to an ideology having political
strings behind it.
It was the fourth class of the seekers of truth, namely, the philosophers,
who engaged his attention most of all and troubled his mind more than
anyone else.
D
ATTACK ON THE PHILOSOPHERS
1. Introduction.—Al-Ghazali’a critical examination of the method and
doctrines of the philosophers is the most exciting and important phase of his
intellectual inquiry. Ho was not at all against philosophical investigation as
such. His early interest in philosophy is evidenced by the treatises that he
wrote on logic such as Mi'yar al-'Ilm fl Fann al-Manliq: “The Touahstone of
Science in Logic" (quite an elaborate treatise) and Mihakk al-Nafar ft al-
■Manfig: "The Touchstone of Speculation in Logic" (a smaller work). In the
history of Muslim thought his is the first instance of a theologian who was
thoroughly schooled in the ways of the philosophers; the doctors of Islam
before him either had a dread of philosophy, considering it a dangerous study,
or dabbled in it just to qualify themselves for polemics against the philosophers.
But al-Qbazah very strongly realized that to refute a system before literally
inhabiting it and getting thoroughly immersed into ita very depths was to
act blindly. "A man," he tells us, “cannot grasp what is defective in any
of tho sciences unless he has so complete a grasp of the science in question
that he equals ita most learned exponents in the appreciation of its fundamental
principles and even goes beyond and surpasses them. . . In all intellectual
honesty ho refrained from saying a word against the philosophers till he had
completely mastered their systems.
He applied himself so assiduously to the study of the entire sweep ot Greek
philosophy current in his time and attained such a firm grasp of ita problems
and methods" that he produced one of the best compendia of it in Arabic
entitled as Maq&id alFalfai/ah (The Intentions of the Philosophers). This
compendium was such a faithful exposition of Aristotelianism that when it
■■ al MunqiU. p. 29. Cf. also prefaoe to .Vajdsid al-Falton/ah.
“ Ibid. Al-QbazAH's statement that, in spite of his arduous duty of teaching
and engagement in writing he could master all the sciences of the philosophers
unaided by an instructor witl.in tho span of two yean, ia perhaps a story to be taken
with a grain of salt
592
Al-QbatJUi
came to be known to the Christian scholastics through a Latin translation
made as early aa 540/1146 by the Spanish philosopher and translator Dominicus
Gundisalvua," it was taken to be the work of a genuino Peripatetic. Albert
the Great (d. 678/1280), Thomas Aquinas (d. 673/1274), and Roger Bacon
(d. 694/1284) all repeatedly mentioned the name of the author of the "Inten
tions of the Philosophers" along with ibn Sina and ibn Rujjyi as the true
representatives of Arab Aristotelianism.*1 But never did Arab Aristotelianism
find a more vigorous foe than al-GhazAli. His compendium in philosophy was
merely propaedeutio to his TaAd/td al-Faldnfah (The Incoherence of the
Philosophers)" in which he levelled a devastating attack on the doctrine of
tho Muslim Peripatetics with a dialectic aa subtle aa any in the history of
philosophy.
AI-QhaxAli, for the purposes of his scrutiny, divided the philosophers into
three main groups: The materialists (dahriyyin),,s the naturalists or the
deists (tabi'iyyun), and the theista (MhiyyUn). The materialists completely
dispensed with the idea of God and believed that the universe has existed
eternally without a creator: a self-subsisting system that operates and develops
by itself, has ita own laws, and can be understood by itself. The naturalists
or the deists, struck by the wonders of oreation and informed of a running
purpose and wisdom in the scheme of things while engaged in their manifold
researches into the sciences of phenomena, admitted the existence of a wise
Creator or Deity, but rejected the spirituality and immortality of tho human
soul. They explained the soul away in naturalistic terms as an epiphenomenon
■■ The date 1506 C.E. for the Latin translation of Maqdfvi al-Faldirifab given
in the Encyclopaedia Britannica, 14th edition. Vol. II, p. 188b, ia incorrect. This is
tho doto when it was for the first time printed in Venico. Gundisaivus' translation
under tho title Logica el 1‘hiloeopbia Algaeelie Arabia was made in collaboration
with John of 8eville to whose name it is sometimes ascribed. It might have been
the case that John translated it from Arabic into Castilian and Gundisalvns from
Castilian into Latin; cf. G. Sarton, Introduction Io tbe Hietory of Science, Baltimore.
1931, Vol. II. pp. 169-72.
11 Thia confusion was oauaed by tile fact that the Latin translation of .Voptsid
in circulation amongst the aeventh/thirUwnth century Scholastics did not contain
tho short introduction in which al-Gbar41i speaks disparagingly of tho philosophers'
motapbyaics and makes it clear that his ultimate purpose to make an objective
and diapaaaionate study of it ia to refute it in Tohaful al-FalOeifab. It may be
added that alQhaxAli again mentions hia intention to write tho Taba/ul in the
ending paragraph of the book. How this was overlooked by tho Lutin scholastics
ia anybody's guess.
" Maurino Bougycs in Introduction to his edition or Tahaful al FaUaifah points
out that tho word "incoherence" does not give an exact meaning of Tahaful and
that al-Ghaxhli has used it sometimes with reference to philosophers anil sometimes
with reference to their doctrines. He, therefore, suggests that it would bo hotter
to retain tho original word TaMtul.
•• The Pahrlyyun are those who teach the eternity of time and matter. It is.
however, difficult to give a precise translation of tho term: in its actual usage in
Arabic philosophy, Duhriyyun are sometimes hardly distinguishable from the
Tabl'lyyiln. Cf. the article "Dahriyyah," Encyclopaedia of Iclarn
593
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of the body and believed that the death of the latter led to the complete
non-existence of the former. Belief in heaven, hell, resurrection, and judgment
they considered as old wives' tales or pious fictions.
Al-GhazAli discussed the thciste at length for they, according to him. held
a comparatively more final position and exposed the defects of the materialists
and the naturalists quite effectively, thus saving him from doing so for himself.
Socrates, Plato, and Aristotle he listed aa theists but concentrated on Aristotle
who had criticized all hia predecessors and even bad refuted his own teacher,
excusing himself of this by saying: "Plato is dear to us. And truth is dear, too.
Nay, truth is dearer than Plato."
**
As far as the transmission of Aristotle's philosophy in Arabic waa concerned,
al-GhazAli found that none of the Muslim philosophers had accomplished
anyt hing comparable to the achievements of al-F&r&bi and ibn Sina. These two
were Aristotle 'a most faithful and capable translators and oommentators; the
works of others wore marked with disorder and oonfusion. Thus al QbazAli
came finally to concentrate on that philosophical thought of his day which
had emerged from the writings of these two theistic philosophers (particularly
ibn Sina) and applied himself to its examination in a systematic manner. He
divided the philosophical scionoes into mathematics, logic, physics, politics,
ethics, and metaphysics, and went into their details in order to see if there
really was anything false or untenable. He was most scientific in his approach
ready to accept whatever he found to be based on the evidenoe of factual data
or susceptible of proof by argument in conformity with the principles of
reason. He had least hesitation in accepting as true much of what the philoso
phers taught with regard to their sciences of mathematics, logic, and physics;
he even had no serious quarrel with them in the spheres of politics and ethics.
The most grievous errors of the theistic philosophers, he found, consisted in
their metaphysical views which, unlike mathematical and natural sdenoes,
were not grounded in compelling reason or positive inquiry but on conjecture
and fanciful speculations. Had their metaphysics been so very well grounded
in sound reasoning as their mathematical sdonces were, they would have
agreed amongst themselves on metaphysical issues as they did on the
mathematical ones. But. above all. what al-GhazAli saw to Ids dismay was
that the philosophies of al-Firtbi and ibn Sina at pointe did violence with
out any philosophic warrant or justification to tho principles of religion as
enunciated in the Qur'An. His empirical and theological spirit revolted very
strongly against this. The positive facte of religion oould not be sacrificed for
sheer metaphysical speculations, nor could they be interpreted externally
from the point of view of a preconceived system of philosophy. These had to be
interpreted intrinsically and reckoned on their own grounds. The Muslim
philosophers had failed to take this empirical standpoint. They had also been
slow in realizing that notwithstanding a great breadth of outlook that the
•• Cf. Aristotle's EtAi'ro VirAomorAui. section 6, p. 1090 a 15.
594
Al-GhaxiUi
study of Greek philosophy had brought to the Muslima, there was in the
ultimate analysis quite a gulf between the inspiration of the Qur'Anic teachings
and the spirit of Hellenism." Carried away by their enthusiasm to bring a
reconciliation between philosophy and religion, al-Farabi and ibn Sina,
according to al-Qjjazali, had so oompreased tho dogmas of Islamic religion
within the moulds of Aristotelian and Plotinian systems as to fall either into
a morass of inconsistencies or get implicated into heretical positions.
All this al-Qbazili brought out with most accomplished understanding and
admirable skill, and with a "transcendental" dialectic as subtle as that of
Kant's in his Tahdfut al-FaMsifah which indeed is the moet important of all
his works from the point of view of our present study. Within less than a
hundred years it called forth the most stimulating rejoinder (entitled Tahaful
al-Tahdfut) from tho oelebrated ibn Rughd and then a rejoinder of a rejoinder
from Muslib al-DIn Musfafa ibn YQsuf al-Bursawi generally known as Kbw&jah
Zadah, a Turkish theologian who died in 893/1488.*** These works, particularly
the first two, taken together epitomize the essential problems arising from the
impact of classical philosophy on the teachings of religion.”
2. Method and Problems of TahAfut.—It is generally believed that al-Ghazali
wrote his Tahdful alFaUsifah during tho period of his doubts, but in tact the
work is essentially of a polemical nature and shows in him an odd combination
of scepticism and ecstatic assurances. The general effect of the teaching of
the philosophers. al-Qhazali felt, was so ruinous to the religious and moral
life ot the masses that his well-nigh apostolic humanism revolted against it and
he dedicated himself to an open warfare against the philosophers. There is no
doubt about the theological inspiration and the polemical Bpirit of the Tahd/ut
but then we add moet emphatically that neither of them seriously affects the
great philosophical value of this work." The modern reader cannot fail to be
struck with clear anticipations of Hume (d. 1190/1776’,, Sehleiermacher
(d. 1250/1834), Ritschl (d. 1307/1889), and others, and even of the logical
positivists of our day in somo of the arguments and the general motif of the
Tahdfut. His general position may be briefly described to be that the truths
" Cf. M. Iqbal. The Reconstruction of Religious Thought in Islam, pp. 3-4. What
really hinted at here is the Platonic and Neo-Platonio bins in tho Hollonio thought
which inculcates a dichotomy between the empirical and the transcendental—the
secular and the spiritual.
•• All the three works can be found in one volume published by Matba't al-
'Alamtyyah, Egypt, 1302-1303/1884-1885: al-GhazlUt's Tahdfut al-FalOsifah.
92 pp.; ibn Ruibd's TaMfut al-TuMfut, 141 pp., and KhwAjah Zadah's Tahdful
olfaUurifah, 137 pp.
” For an analytical account of the contents of Tahdfut al-Faldsifah and Tahaful
al-Tahdfut. cf. A. F. van Mehren. "Etudes sur la philosophic d'Averrhoea concemant
son rapport aveo cello d'Avicenne el Gazzali," Le Motion. Vol. VII, pp. 013-27;
Vol. VIU. pp. 5-20. Louvain, 1888-1889.
■■ Cf. al-GharAlI's Tahdfut al-Faldsifah. English transhition by $ablb Abroad
KamAli, The Pakistan Philosophical Congress, Lahore. 1958. pp. 1 3. All references
to tho Tahdhd aro to this translation.
595
A Hislorj of Muslim Philosophy
oi the positive lads of religion can neither be proved nor disproved, and to do
otherwise leads the philosophers to take more often than not quite nonsensical
positions.
Al-QhazSli assails the philosophers on twenty points” (beginning with
creation and ending with the last things) and endeavours to show that their
dogmas of the eternity and the everlastingness of the world are false; their
assertion that God is the creator of tho world is dishonest for it is flagrantly
inconsistent with their dogma of the eternity of the world; that they fail to
prove the existence, the unity, the simplicity and the incorporeality of God
or God’s knowledge either of the univeraals or of the particulars; that
their views with regard to the souls of the celestial spheres, and the spheres’
knowledge of the particulars and the purpose of their movement are un
founded; that their theory of causation which attributes effects to the very
nature of the causes is false; and that they cannot establish the spirituality
of the soul, nor prove its immortality; and. finally, that their denial of the
resurrection of the bodies in the life hereafter is philosophically unwarranted.
Al-Ghazali charges tho philosophers with infidelity on three counts, viz.,
(1) eternity of the world; (2) denial of God's knowledge of the particulars,
and (3) denial of bodily resurrection. For the rest their views are heretical
or bom of religious indifference. But in all they are involved in contradictions
and suffer from confusion of thought.
The problem which al.flhazili considers the most important is that of the
eternity (qidam) of the world to which he allots the greatest space, almost a
quarter of his book. This has been one of the most challenging and uncompro
mising problems in the conflict between religion and philosophy. The advocates
of orthodoxy considered the ctemalitv of the universe to be the most pernicious
thesis of the philosophers and vehemently combated against it. Al-Agh'ari
(d. 324/933) wrote a refutation of it in his KMb al-Fufil which probably if
the earliest scholastic treatise dealing with this question,10 and ibn l.laziri
(d. 457/1064) made the doctrine a dividing line between the orthodox and the
heterodox sect*. The orthodox could not possibly concede the philosophers’
claim of the etemality of the world, for with them there is nothing eternal but
God; all elso is created To make anything co.eternal with God is
to violate the strict principle of monotheism, for that infringes the abeolutenesa
and infinity of God and reduces Him to the position of an artificer: a Demiurge.
Virtually, the doctrine drives one to the materialists’ position that the world
is an independent universe, a self-subaistent system, which develops by itself,
and can be understood by itself. All this was hard to swallow for a theologian
like al-Ghazali.
The philosophers like al-FArAbi and ibn Sina as Muslims did not deny that
10 ll is noteworthy that Simon van den Bergh baa listed forty contradictions
in Aristotle's philosophy; toe his English tnuislntinn of AvorroOs' ToAd/uf al.
TaM/ut, London. 1954, Vol. H. p. 215.
“ Cf. Ibn Asakir. Tatn/in Kiihtb al-Sluftari, Damascus, 1347/1928. p. 128.
596
AIQhmJlH
God is an eternal creator of the universe, but as true Aristotelians believed
that God’s activity consists merely in bringing forth in the state of actuality
the virtual possibilities inherent in the prime matter which was alleged to be
co-eternal with Him. This was in conformity with the Aristotelian notion of
change not as a passage from non-being into being, which would make it
unintelligible, but as a process by which what is merely “potential being"
passes over, through “form,” into "actual being."*1 So God as an eternal creator
constantly combines matter with new forms; He did not create the universe
out of sheer nothingness at a definite time in the past. As a corollary they
believed in the infinity of time.
Al-QhazAli, on the other hand, in accordance with the obvious teachings of
the Qur’an, firmly holds the position that the world was created by God out
of absolute nothingness** at a certain moment in the past which is at a finite
interval from the present. He created not only forma but also matter and
time along with them which had a definite beginning and henoe is finite.
The two positions as outlined above readily remind one of Kant's thesis
and antithesis in the first antinomy43 which present an impossible problem
in the sense that conditions requisite for their verification or falsification
are de faclo impossible. One is tempted to say that al-Ghaz&li does recognise
the impossibility of the problem for he clearly proclaims that he does not
intend to defend his own position but only to refute that of the philosophers.
This is true in general of all the other disputations in Tahdfui al-Faldaifah.
The arguments of the philosophers are presented with very considerable
plausibility, but the dialectical skill and philosophical acumen which al-Qhaz&li
employs to refute them are also overwhelming. Though the whole discussion
is surcharged with a polemical spirit, yet one cannot fail to see that al-GhazAlI’s
standpoint throughout remains highly scientific and logical; he does not
succumb merely to verbal quibbles. He clearly says that he does not have
any quarrel with the philosophers on the usages of terms.**
Al-Ghazall's quarrel with the philosophers is because many of their part icular
arguments are logically false and tho various positions that they take in their
system as a whole are inconsistent with one another, but, above all, because
some of their basic assumptions are unfounded. These assumptions, al-Qhaxali
proves most powerfully, can neither bo demonstrated logically, nor are they
self-evident through “intuition.” Such; for example, is the assumption that
every event has a cause or that causes produce their effects necessarily. The
“ Aristotle's notion of potentiality fails to solvo tho riddle of becoming an
propounded by the Elastics and later by the Mcgarics. W. D. Ross says, “Tho
conrejitHm of potentiality han often Iwen used to cover mere barrenness of thought."
Cf. his Anstodc, London, 1023. pp. 176-78. Tho Acb'arites like the Megarice denied
the existence of potentiality. Cf. 6. van don Bergh, op. cil., pp. 37-40.
** For the thesis of creatio rat nihdo, cf. the Qur'an, ii. 117; xxx, 27; xxxv, 1.
** Cn'rhyur of Pure Heaoon, 2nd od., pp. 454-61.
“ TaMful, p. a. It may bo noted here that tho Muslim philosophers and theo
logians somelimM used different terminology with regard to tho same subject.
597
X History of Muslim Philosophy
Muslim philosophers hove accepted these assumptions merely in the dogmatic
tradition of Aristotelian philosophy. The faulty reasonings of the philosophers
or the inconsistencies in their positions are remediable but not so the uncritical
acceptance of their assumptions. Al-Qhaxili for himself is not prepared to
accept any part of the Aristotelian system except the first principles of logic
and rules of syllogism—nothing else until and unless it has logical coerciveness
about it. On the other hand, he is not prepared to reject any of the doctrine*
of religion until and unless it is disproved with a similar logical rigoqr and
cogency. Nothing is "possible" in philosophy till it is logically necessary, and
nothing is "impossible" in religion till it is logically aelf-oontradictory. Appa
rently, this is a double-faced criterion to judge variously the truths of philoso
phic assumptions and those of religious assumptions, but from the point
of view of philosophy of religion it is perfectly justified. Philosopher qua
philosopher has to accept the facte of religion as given by religion; this is
the sine qua non of any empirical philosophy of religion. Thus, in spite of the
fact that al-Ghaz.ali's whole, polemic against the philosophers derives its
inspiration from the Aah'arito theology, his method remains in its essen
tials purely philosophical, fulfilling in its own way some of tho most- important
requirements of the modem and even contemporary approaches to the prob
lems of the philosophy of religion.“
These few observations with regard to al-GhazAH's method in the Tahd/ul
vm necessary before we could enter into some of the detailed arguments
which he gives in the refutation of the philosophers’ various positions.
3. Eternity of Ike World—The proof of the philosophers for the eternity
of the world starts with certain assumptions with regard to the notions of
cause and will. These they take to be true axiomatically: (1) Every effect has
a cause. (2) Cause must be the action of some external force other than the
effect. (3) Cause or an act of will when executed must immediately lead to
the effect." For world's coming from non-existence to existence there certainly
should have been some cause; this cause could not be a physical cause for ex
hypothui none yet existed. If this oause arose from an act of will by God at
some specific time, then the divine will itself should have been determined
by some other cause. This cause which led God to change His mind should
certainly be outside His mind; but again this was not possible, for nothing
outside Him yet existed. Thus, one is forced to ooncludc that cither nothing
ever arose from the being of God—which is not true, for the world does exist—
or that the world must have been in existence from all eternity, aa an imme
diate effect of His eternal will.
Al-Qhazali declines to subscribe to any one of tho assumptions as stated
“ Cf. M. Saeed Sheikh, "Philosophy of Religion: Ita Meaning and Scope."
//‘rocctduiqi u/ lJu Filth] 1‘alnMan Philotophical Congnu, Lahore. IB58, pp. 37
" Cf. G. F. Hourani, "Alghaxah and the Philosophers on the Origin of the
World," Tfa UiMlrm llorid (1».>8|. Vol. XLVIII. No. 3. pp. 183-91.
598
Al-QkasAli
above and shows that belief in the origination of thi; world from the eternal
will of God at a specific moment of time as chosen by Him involves no violation
of the fundamental principles of logic. The assumptions of the philosophers,
that every effect has a cause and that a cause is a force external to its effect,
do not have a logical coerciveness about them. It is quite legitimate to believe
that God's will does not have any cause or at least that this cause does not
lie outside His will but in itself. Similarly, it is not logically necessary that the
effect should follow a cause immediately, for it is not logically contradictory
to hold tho notion of "a delayed effect ." It is possible to think that God’s will
is eternal and yet an object of that will has occurred at some period in time.
Here a distinction should be made between the eternity of God's will and the
eternity of the object of His will. God, for example, can eternally will that
Socrates and Plato should be born at such and such a time and that tho one
should be born before the other. Hence it is not logically illegitimate to
affirm the orthodox belief that God eternally willed that the world should
come into being al such and such a definite moment in time.
But the philosophers point out a real difficulty hero. According to them,
it is impossible to find out a differentiating principle for God's eternal choice
of a particular moment for the creation of the world. All momenta of time are
completely similar; how is it possible to choose between two completely similar
things I Why, in short, was the world not created earlier or later than when
it was created 1 One of the answers to this is that thero arises no question of
world's being created earlier or later, for time yet was not; time too was created
along with the creation of the world, i.e., both world and time aro finite in
duration. Al-Ghazali adds further that should one assume with the philo
sophers that time is infinite, then at any present moment that infinite time
has been brought to an end anil a time that has an end is not infinite but
finite, It is noteworthy that this is exactly the argument given by Kant in
the thesis of his first antinomy.
Al-GhazAli's real standpoint, however, is that God just arbitrarily chose
one particular moment rather than another for world's coming into being. We
need ask no more about this choice, for God's will is completely undetermined.
His will does not depend upon distinctions in the outside world, for it is itself
the producer of all the distinctions therein. This creating of the distinctions
in fact is the true significance of God’s will. God chooses a particular moment
for the creation of tho universe as Ho chooses a particular direction for the
movement of the spheres of the (Ptolemaic) heaven, in some cases from east
to west, in others from west to east (as described in the Aristotelian astronomy)
even when the reversal of directions would have made no difference. There
is no way to explain God’s choice either in one case or the other.
The difficulty posed by the philosophers arises because of their misguided
attempt to understand the nature of divine will altogether in the terms of
man's will. Certainly, God's will is not like man's, aa God's knowledge is not
like man's knowledge So far as God’s knowledge is concerned, the philoso-
599
A History of Muslim 1'lidoeoplij
phen »vow«lly admit that it differs from man’s knowledge in to many respects
that in their final position it becomes indeed an inexplicable mystery. God.
according to them, possesses the knowledge of all the universals without this
knowledge necessitating plurality, without its being additional to His essence,
and without its multiplying in proportion to tho multiplicity of tho objects
know n. Some of them assert after Aristotle that God is the knower, the know,
ledge, and the known, and that the three are one. Should we judge all thia
by wlrnt applies to man's knowledge, it will be found to be an utter impossibi
lity. While tho philosophers admit that God's knowledge cannot bo compared
with man's knowledge, they insist upon drawing a comparison between God’s
will and man's will. This is exactly what al-QhazAU calls the incoherence of the
philosophers and, according to him, their thought-system taken aa a whole
reveals quite a number of such incoherences. Indeed, the philosophers' very
notion of eternal creation is self-contradictory and meaningless. Is it sense to
speak of a creation of that which exists eternally I If God and the prime matter
are both eternal existents, does it make sense to say that one is the cause of
the other I Can the relation between two existenta qua cxistenta be regarded
as a causal one I
Further, the philosophers put different constructions upon their notions
of space and time. They assume time to be infinite and space to be finite, and
yet consider time to lie ro-implicant of movement in space. Al-Qfcaz&li insists
rightly that one who believes in the finitude of space must in consistency
assume the existence of finito time, particularly when one holds the Aristotelian
position that space, time, and movement in space are all related to one
another.4’ And if they insist that it is impossible to think of empty space,
they should equally realize that it is impossible to conceive of an empty time.
These are just a few of the inconsistencies of the philosophers pointed out
by al-Gfeazali in the course of his disputation with regard to the eternity of
the world and thoy could be mentioned here only very briefly, considering
the space at our disposal. One further point of criticism may, however, be
added for ita importance in the history of modem philosophy. Prior to its
origination, the philosophers hold, the world must have either been possible
fmumkin), or impossible fmumtani'), or necessary (wajib). It is impossible
that it should have been impossible; for that which is impossible in itself is
never brought into existence. Again, it is impossible for it to have been neces
sary in itself, for that which is necessary in itself is never deprived of existence.
It follows then that the existence of tho world must have always been possible
in itself, otherwise it would never have come to be. This possibility cannot
inhere in possibility itself, nor in the agent, nor in no-substratum, for the
possible is that which is in the process of becoming actual. Hence the subject
of possibility is some substratum which is susceptible of possibility, and this
is matter. Now, this matter cannot be considered to have been originated. If
it had been originated, the possibility of ita existence would have preceded its
•’ Cf. W. D. Rose. op. cd., pp. 89 el tqq.
SOU
Al (ihazAli
existence. In that case possibility would have existed in itself, but possibility
existing in itself is unintelligible. Hence matter is eternal and it is only the
passing over of the forms to matter which is originated,
In rebutting this highly sophisticated argument of the philosophers al-
GhazAli points out in Kantian fashion that possibility like impossibility is
a purely subjective notion to which nothing need correspond in reality. If
l>ossibility requires an existent to correspond to it, so would impossibility
require something to correspond to it, but avowedly there is no existing thing
in concrete reality to which impossibility may be referred. Hence possibility like
impossibility is merely a concept; the assumption of an existing substratum
to which this concept may bo related is to have a metaphysical jump from
mere thought to actual existence and is to commit as wc understand now an
ontological fallacy.
4. Theory of Emanation.—The entire argument of the philosophers with
regard to the eternity of the world is, thus, full of contradictions and un
proved assumptions, but the most manifest of their inconsistencies and the
sheer baselessness of their assumptions become signally conspicuous when
they come to explain the origination of the world from the being of God in
the tonus of tho Plotinian Theory of Emanation. Plotinus considers the world
to be a necessary outflow from the being of God like light from the sun18 or
better as Spinoza described it later like the properties of a triangle from a
triangle." Muslim philosophers' subscription to this view aeconling to al-
GhazAli is the dearest evidence that their verbal avowal of creation is a mere
dissimulation and duplicity. The problem of emanation with the philosophers,
however, arises because of their over-emphasis on tho abstract unity and abso
lute perfection of God, Creation through an act of volition implies both will
and knowledge, and these cannot bo predicated of God as attributes apart
from His essence without doing violence to His absolute unity. Further, both
will and knowledge are limitations: will in particular implies a deficiency in
u being who wills, for it means that he desires or wants to have that which
ho lacks. Hence the philosophers elaborated an ingenious theory of emanation
which contrives to erect a cosmological staircase between the stable stillness
of God's unity and the changing and varied multiplicity of the world. This
staircase is constituted of a finely graded series of intelligences and souls of
celestial spheres, each emanating from the other in an hierarchical fashion
The view that the celestial spheres are perfect and have souls and intelligences
superior to that of man had the overwhelming authority of Aristotle" and
further it was possible and even fascinating to conceive of them in terms of
angels as described by the theologians.
Plotinus uses the light metaphor, for ho conceived light to bo incorporeal after
Posidonius of Rhodes (c. 135-50 B. C.) who is perhaps the first to propound tho
notion of emanation.
" Cf. Spinoza, Ethiee. Part I. Section 17, note.
•• Cf. Aristotle, De Cado. 285 a29. 292 a20 bl.
601
<4 History of Muslim Philosophy
The emanationism of tho Muslim philosophers in the final analysis worked
under two governing principles: First, it is not thinkable that from God who
is a pure unity anything could proceed eacept that which is itself a unity.
This gave rise to the formula: from one only one can follow. Secondly, being
has two aspects: it is cither necessary (wijib) or possible (mumkin), it is
either essence (mahiyyah) or existence (anniyyah). In the case of God alone
are essence and existence identical; in all other beings essence is separate
from existence. From thia it follows that all things are possible by their essence,
and they beoome necessary by the existence given to them by God.
The first emanation from tho existence of the First Principle (al-mabdd'
al-awwal), the Necessary Being (al-wijib al-imjUd). i.e., God, is the first
intelligence fal-'ayl al-awwal) which ia numerically one. Its existence is
possible in itself and necessary through the First Principle; further, it knows
ite own essence as well as the essence of tho First Principle. From ite two
fold existence and two-fold knowledge springs a multiplicity of knowledge
and existence. The first intelligence, in fact, has three kinds of knowledge:
of the First Principle, of ite own essence in so far as it is necessary, and of
ite possible being. One might ask: What is the source of this three-foldness in
the first intelligence when the principle from which it emanates is one ! The
answer ia: From the First Principle only one proceeds, i.e.. the essence of the
first intelligence by which it knows itself. Now, ite knowledge of ite principle
is evidently nccesasry, although thia necessity is not derived from that prin
ciple. Again, being possible in itself the first intelligence cannot owe ite possi
bility to the First Principle but possesses it in ite own self. Though only one
should proceed from one, yet it ia possible that the first effect may oome to
possess not from the First Principle but by itself certain necessary qualities
which express some relation or negation of relation and give rise to plurality.
Thus, from the three kinds of knowledge possessed by the first intelligence
emanate three beings, but only one from each kind. Ax it knows ite principle
there proceeds from it a second intelligence; as it knows its essence there
proceeds from it the first eoul of the highest sphere (which is the ninth heaven);
and as it knows itself as possible in itself there proceeds from it the body of
that sphere. In a similar fashion from the second intelligence emanates the third
intelligence, the eoul of the stellar sphere and the body of that sphere. From
the third intelligence emanates the fourth intelligence, the soul of the sphere
of Saturn and the body of that sphere. From the fourth intelligence emanates
the fifth intelligence, the soul of the sphere of Jupiter and the body of that
sphere. Now there are, according to the then current Ptolemaic system, only
nine celestial spheres in all including the sphere of the fixed stars all in con
centric circles with earth in the centre.11 So, starting from the First Principle
the emanations proceed on till the last or the tenth intelligence appears and
" The nine spheres are as follows: the first sphere, the sphere of the fixed stars,
the sphere of Saturn, the sphere of Jupiter, the sphere of Mara, the sphere of the
Sun. tho sphere of Venus, tho sphere of Mercury, and the sphere of tho Moon.
802
Al QhazAli
with it the last sphere of the moon and its soul. The tenth intelligence, also
called the active intellect (al 'aql alfa"il),u acta in our world. It produces
the first matter (hayula) which is passive and formless but which is the basis
of the four elements from which all creatures arise. The composition and de
composition of the elements is the cause of generation and corruption of all
bodies. But all these transformations take plaoc under the influence of the
movement of the spheres. As the active intellect is the producer of matter,
so it is the dispenser of forms, riator formarum (wdhib al-fuwar). It gives to
each matter its proper form and it also gives each body a soul (which in fact
is its form) when that body is ready to receive it. Thus, active intellect is also
the source of the existence of the human sculs, But the human soul does not
feel at home in its physical abode and yearns for nothing lees than the First
Principle Himself. Hence it starts its spiritual journey back to the original
source traversing through the various stages of the intelligences of the spheres.
This is a rounded though brief description of the emanationistic world view
so enthusiastically elaborated by the Muslim philosophers, by ibn Sina, for
example, in both of his major works on philosophy, viz., A'itii al-Sbifa' and
Kitab ai-Najil and by al-FSrtbi in his al-Madtnat al-Falilah.
'
*
Determinism implicit in this emanationistic world-view is so opposed to
the theistic voluntarism of the Agb’arite world-view that al-Qhaz.Ali launches
the most vehement attack against it. His strictures against this grand cosmo
logical construction made out of so many various foreign imported ideas are
the strongest and the bitterest of all others that may be found in the entire
TaMful. All this, he inveighs, is arbitrary reasoning, idle speculation; a wild
guess work; darkness piled upon darkness. If someone says he saw things
of this kind in a dream, it would be inferred that he was suffering irom some
disease. Even an insane person could not rest satisfied with such postulates?
*
In our own timra. to say nothing of the scientists, F. R. Tennant who may
be described aa an eminent "religious positivist" holds the theory of emanation
more or lew in the same estimation.
**
AI-GhazAll's criticism of the emanationistic argument consists in showing,
on the one hand, that it fails to account for the multiplicity and oampoaition in
•’ Somo of tho Muslim thinkers have referred to the Qur'An. lxxviii. 38. in support
of the notion of the active intellect, e. g., al-BaidAwi in his Anudr al Tansit, ed.
H. O. Fleischer, Leipzig, 1846-48, Vol. Il, p. 383, also IhyA’ (Urdu Tr.). Vol. III.
p. 6, where al-Oharfli refers to the Tradition that "the first, thing that God created
waa the Intellect."
•' Cf. Kitdb al-Sbi/a', "Metaphysics," Section ix. Chapter 6; at-Najat, Cairo.
1331/1912 pp. 448 el *tq.; al-Madtnal al-Fadiloh, Cairo, 1368/1948 p. 19. For tho
Aristotelian ingredients in the theory of emanation as explained above, cf. W. D.
Roas. op. cil., pp. 181 el eqq.-. A. E. Taylor, AneMlc. London. 1943. pp. 98 et sjg-:
and A. H. Armstrong. The Architecture of the InleUtgihle Unioene in the Philosophy
of Plotinus, Cambridge, 1940, by index.
•• Cf. Tahdful, pp. 77. 87.
“ Cf, F. R. Tennant, Philosophical Theology, Cambridge. 1930, Vol. U. pp. 128
153 el 079.
B03
A History of Muslim l'liiloaopby
the universe and, or he other, that it does not at all sucoeed in safeguarding
the absolute unity of God. If the formula ever so glibly repeated that from
one only one proreeds should be observed strictly logically, then all the beings
in the world would be units, each of which would be an effect of some other
unit above it, as it would be the cause of some other unit below it in a linear
fashion. But in fact this is not the case. Every object, according to the philo
sophers themselves, is composed at least of form and matter. How does a
composite thing such aa a body then oome into existence ? Does it have only
one cause 1 If the answer is in the affirmative, then the assertion that only
one proceeds from one becomes null and void. If, on the other hand, a composite
thing has a composite cause, then the same question will be repeated in the
case of this cause so on and so forth till one arrives at a point where the oom
pound necessarily meets the simple. This contact between the oompound
effect and the unitary cause wherever it occurs would falsify the principle that
only one proceeds from one. Now, strictly speaking, all the oxistente in the
universe are characterized by composition and only the First Principle, i.e.,
God. alone can be said to possess true simplicity or unity, for in Him alone
there is the complete identity of essence and existence. This would lead us
necessarily to the conclusion that either the principle of "only one from one”
fails to account for the composition and multiplicity which is apparent in
the universe or that even God does not possess a genuine unity. But the philo
sophers cloak the issue with their artificial subtleties and the grandiose
constructions they put upon their emanationistic foundations.
What earthly and even unearthly relation is there, al-Qhazali questions
rightly, between the first intelligence's having a possible existence and the
body of the sphere of the second intelligence which is supposed to proceed
from it I Neither logic nor experience can substantiate this wild supposition
and aa such it is no more than pure nonsense. Further, how is it possible that
from two kinds of knowledge of the first intelligence, that ia, knowledge of the
First Principle and that of itaelf, should arise two kinds of existence, first,
that of tho second intelligence and, second, that of the soul of the highest
sphere I How can the knowledge of a thing lead to the existence of a thing
(as we would now put it after Kant) without committing an obvious ontological
fallacy t How can the knower emanate from tho knowing, al-GhazAli rightly
wonders, as does F. R. Tennant, and like him deplores that of all the people,
philosophers should believe in such mythical nonsense.
**
Even if the triplicity with which the philosophers characterize the first
intelligence should he taken for granted (which indeed cannot be done) it
foils to account for all that they want to deduce from it. The body of the
highest sphere, which according to them proceeds only from one aspect of the
essence of the first intelligence, is surely not unitary in nature but composite
and that in three ways.
•* Ibid., p IM.
604
Al-fihatali
First, u stated above, it is composed of form and matter, aa indeed all
bodies are according to the philosophers’ own admission. True, form and
matter always exist conjointly in all bodies, yet they are so different from
each other t hat one cannot be the cause of the other. Hence, form and matter
of the body of the highest sphere require two principles for their existence and
not one. A unitary aspect of the three-fold character of the first intelligence
fails to acoount for it.
Secondly, the body of this sphere has a definite size. Its having a definite
size is something additional to the bare fact of ita existence. Certainly, it could
have come into existence with a different size, bigger or smallor than what
it is. Henoe, over and above that which necessitated the existence of tho body
of the sphere, there should be an additional cause to account for the adoptin'
of this particular size.
Thirdly, in the highest heaven, thore are marked out two pointe as its
polee, which aro fixed. This fact was admitted by tho philosophers in accordance
with the Aristotelian astronomy. Now, either all the parte of the highest sphere
are similar in which case it is impossible to explain why two pointe should be
choeen in perference to all the others as its polee; or they are different, some
of them possessing properties which are not possessed by the others. Hence,
we require yet another aspect in the first intelligence to be the cause for
differences in the various parte of the highest sphere which difference- alone
would justify the choice of two pointe therein to be the poles.
In view of what has been stated above, it is sheer "ignorance” on the part
of the philosophers to hold that the body of tho highest sphere has emanated
only from one aspect of the essence of first intelligence. Either the principle
that only one proceeds from one is true, in which case the first intelligence
which ia not a mere triplicity but a whole multiplicity remains unexplained,
or this principle is an empty formula signifying nothing, and, thus, making it
possible that "many may proceed from one." In the latter case the infinite
variety and plurality of the world can be directly derived from the unity of
God and there is no need to erect an emanationistio staircase between Him
and the world.
The above principle certainly oollapees when we come to tho second intelli
gence, for it is supposed to be, in one of its aspects, the cause of tho sphere of
the fixed stars. These are twelve hundred or so (according to the then Greek
or Arab astronomers' reckoning)*’ and are different in magnitude, shape,
position, colour, and in respect of their special function in nature, etc.
Each one of these factors in every single star needs a separate cause as its
•’ In Ptolemy’s Almagrfi tho number of stars mentioned is l,02fi. This number
was generally accepted by the Arab astronomers. 'Abd al-KabmAn ibn 'Umar
al-§iifi (2#l/00S-376/98B), one of the greatest Muslim astronomers, in his work
Kitab al KawOHb al Zhobitab al-Mufowwar (IHustrated Book of tho Fixed Stars),
wills that there aro many more stare than 1,025. but they are so faint that it is not
possible to count them.
605
A History of Muslim Philosophy
determinant (mvrajiH). All this necessitate* a bewildering multiplicity in
the second intelligence end also indirectly presupposes the same in the first
intelligence in so far as the latter is the emanative cause of the former.
Should the above arguments fail to convince the philosophers, there is an
other way to show that the first intelligence is more than a mere triplicity.
Is the self-knowledge of the first intelligence identical with ita essence or
other than it ’ It is not possible that it should be identical, for knowledge is
not the same thing as that which is known. Hence, the first intelligence is not
a triplicity but a quadruplicity, to wit: ita essence, ita knowledge of itself,
its knowledge of the First Principle, and ita being a possible existent by itself.
To all these four aspects there can be added yet another, namely, its being a
necessary being whose necessity is derived from an external cause. All this
proves that the first intelligence has five aspects and not throe, aa arbitrarily
assumed by the philosophers. Whether the first intelligence has five aspects
or three, it certainly is not of purely unitary character according to the philo
sophers’ own admission. This shows that there is something in the effect which
is not present in the cause, i.e., the First Principle, and this is scandalous.
Not only does the formula that only one proceeds from one become shame
facedly invalid right at the outset, but further, according to al-QhazAli. the
entire emanationistic line of argument does great violence to the conoept of
God's unity and, thus, nullifies the very purpose for which it is adopted. There
ia no reason, according to him. that the very arguments which the philosophers
advance to establish the triple character of the first intelligence should not
be applied to God Himself. One of the aspects of plurality in the first intelli
gence according to the philosophers is its being a possible existent by itself.
It may be asked: Is ita being possible identical with its existence or other
than it I If it is identical, no plurality would arise from it. If it is other than
ita existence, then why should it not be possible to say that there is as much
plurality in the First Principle, i.e., God Himself, for He not only has existence
but is necessary in His existence I The necessity of existence as such is other
than existence itself. In truth, existence may be considered to be a generic
concept divided into necessary and possible. If one specific difference is an
addition to existence per n in one case, it should be considered to in the other
also. If the philosophers insist that the possibility of existence is other than
existence in the case of the first intelligence, through the same argument they
should admit that necessity of existence is different from existence in the
case of the First Principle. Similarly, al Ghaz&li asks: Is the first intelligence's
knowledge of its principle identical with its existence and with ita knowledge
of itself or other than the two 1 If it is identical, then there will be no plurality
in its nature But if it is other than tho two, then such a plurality exists also
in the First Principle, for He too knows Himself as well as what is other than
Himself Thus, al Qhazili contends that either there can be no plurality in the
first intelligence or if it is there, then it is for tho same reasons in the First
Principle too, and, therefore, the beings characterized by diversity and plurality
606
AIGbarill
would directly proceed from Him. Al-Ghazali forces this conclusion upon the
philosophers through their own logic.
For himself alQbazali believes that: “The First Principle is an omnipotent
and willing agent; Ho does what He wills, and ordains as He likes, and He
creates the similar and dissimilar things alike, whenever and in whatever
manner Ho wills I The impossibility of such a belief is neither a self-evident
truth, nor a matter of inferential knowledge."” AI-GhazAli frankly and rightly
confesses that the problem of God’s relation with the universe in the final
analysis remains ever beyond tho comprehension of human understanding.
The inquiry into the manner in which the world proceeded from God’s will,
he urges, ia “an idle and aimless venture." The modiu operands of God’s
creative activity is wholly inexplicable and this inexplicability is inevitable;
indeed, if it were explicable, it would not be "creative." Explanation in all ita
forms establishes some connection or similarity with what- is experienced,
whereas God's creativity is an activity through which the experiente and what
is experienced by them come to be. How can human oomprehension envisage
the modo of God's act of creation when it is itself the creature of that act ?
The philosophers try to avoid the charge of plurality with regard to the
First Principle so far aa His knowledge is conoemed by affirming that the
First Principle does not know anything other than Himself and that His
self-knowledge ia the same thing as His essence; so tho knowledge, tho knower,
and the object of knowledge are all one in Him. This indeed was originally
the position of Aristotle according to whom God is describable as thought
thinking itself. In Aristotle's own words, “... it must be itself that thought
thinks, and its thinking is thinking on thinking.”** This view of God as re
flective thought, reflective in the literal sense of turning back upon itself, has
been subjected to severe criticism by al-GhazAli. Acoording to him, eelf-know*
ledge of a literal and direct sort is an impossibility. He argues with Plotinus
that self-knowledge even in the case of God implies an epistemological subject
object dualism and, therefore, would impede the philosophers’ thesis of the
absolute unity of the First Principle. Not only the Aristotelian oonoeption oi
God as thought thinking thought docs not absolve the philosophers from
introducing plurality in the First Principle, but further lands them into many
more difficulties with regard to their emanationistic world-view. Consider, for
example, the relativ epositions of the First Principle and tho first intelligence
in terms of their knowledge. The First Principle which is the emanative cause
of the first intelligence does not know anything other than Himself, whereas
the latter knows not only its cause but further knows itself and the three
•* Cf. Tahd/ul, p. 88. Al-QhazAli, in support of his agnosticism with regard to the
modus optrandi of God’s creativity, alludes at the end to tho tradition: "Think
over the product of God's creative activity: do not chink over Hie essence." Cf.
Takhrij al-Hd/i: al lrdqi appended lo Myd'. Part IV. p. 410; also tho Qur'to,
xviii, l». which is referred to by al-Libnzdli earlier, i.e.. on p. 80.
“ M'laplwira. p. 1072 1:20. Cf. also lie Anima. p. 424 a 18.
607
A History of Muslim Philosophy
effects which proceed from it, viz., the second intelligence, the soul of the
highest sphere, and the body of that sphere. It is a strange theory, al-Qbaz&li
observes, which makes the effect have the knowledge of ita cause but not
the cause of its effect. The necessity of a cause possessing the knowledge of its
effect is more compelling than the necessity of an effect possessing the know
ledge of its cause. In fact, the philosophers make the first intelligence superior
to and ‘ nobler’’ than the First Principle in so far as from the First Principle
only one thing proceeds, while from the first intelligence three things proceed.
Further, the First Principle docs not know what prodeeds from Him; in fact.
He does not know anything other than Himself, while the first intelligence
knows itself, its cause, and its three effects. Al-Qhazali feels so bitter at the
Aristotelian conception of God as thought thinking itself that he goes to the
length of saying that the philosophers by limiting God’s knowledge to the
sphere of self-knowledge virtually reduce Him to tho status of the dead.*4
5. God'» Knowledge of the Particulara.“—Al-Qhazili is very emphatic and
uncompromising with regard to tho all-circumscribing knowledge of God:
"God knows tho creeping of the black ant upon the rugged rock in a dark
night, and He perceives the movement of the mote in the midst of the air?""11
Ibn Sina also subscribes to the view that God knows everything: "Nothing,
not even as much as a particle of dust in the heavens or on the earth, remains
hidden from Hia knowledge.”*44 Yet, interestingly enough. alQijazili docs not
hesitate to level a charge of infidelity against him on this score for. according
to ibn Sina, though God knows all the particulars. He knows them only in a
universal way. This means that God cannot have the perceptual knowledge
of particular things but knows them by way of a universal knowledge. Ibn
Sina realizes the difficulty of his position and so adds that the understanding
of it needs great intellectual subtlety. Tho reasons that he advances to deny
perceptual knowledge to God are fully recognized by al-Ghaz&li. Perceptual
knowledge is characterized both temporally and spatially, whereas God is
above both time and space and so it is not possible to ascribe perceptual
knowledge to Him. A particular event occurs at a particular moment of time
and suffers change with the passage of time. Change in the object of perception
implies a change in the content of perception itself which obviously leads to
change in the subject of perception, i.e., in the percipient himselt But change
in God is unthinkable; therefore, perception of a particular event is not
•’ Cf. Tah&ful. p. 80.
•' Problem thirteenth of Taha/ul, pp. 103-02; cf. also other passages pertain
ing to God's knowledge by index. For a clear and balanced exposition of the philo
sopher’s position with regard to this problem, see MaqOfid al-Faldeifah (Urdu trans,
by M Hanlf Nadawi. Qadim Yundni Falmfah), Lahore, 1959, pp. 108-78.
•• Cf Ihyd'. Vol. II. Bk. u. Section I. English trans, by D. B. Macdonald.
Development of Mtudim Theology. London, 1903, p, 302.
44 Ibn Sina says this in hia KilM al ShW'■ “Metaphysics," VIII, 6. It ia really
an allusion to a verso of the Qur'&n (x. 01): “.. . and not tho weight of an atom in
the earth or in tho heaven ia hidden from thy Lord ... also xxxiv, 3.
608
Al-GkazlUi
possible for Him. Similarly, to distinguish between one particular object and
another in apace ia possible only through the senses and implies a special
relation of a sensible thing to the percipient as being near to or far from him
or in a definite position, and thia is impossible where God is conoemed. Hence,
it is not possible for God to have perceptual knowledge of the particulars.
His knowledge can only be that which rises above the particular "nows” and
the particular “heree,” that is to say, ia of conceptual or universal nature.
Ibn Sink's position as briefly outlined above seems to be very well grounded
in sound reasoning and is quite understandable, yet, according to al-Ghazali.
it is so pernicious to religion that it altogether demolishes tho entire edifice
of religious Law (hence his oharge of infidelity). The theory implies that God
cannot know any new state that emerges in John—He cannot know that John
has becomes an infidel or a true believer, for He can know only the unbelief
or the belief of man in general in a universal manner and not in specific relation
to individuals. Yes, God cannot know Muhammad's proclaiming himself a
prophet at the time when he did. And the same will be true of every other
prophet, for God only knows that among mon there are some who claim pro
phecy. and that such and such are their attributes; but He cannot know a
particular prophet as an individual, for that is to be known only by the senses.
There certainly is a point in what al-Ghazali says here for it is really difficult
to show any relation between the temporal and the timeless, yet the above
criticism of his is a little wide of the mark for it is based on a misinterpretation
of ibn Sink's position. By the statement that God does not have perceptual
knowledge of the particulars, ibn Sina does not moan to say that God does
not have the knowledge of the particulars or that His knowledge ia restricted
only to that of the universals or general concepts. Ibn Sina insists that God
does have knowledge of the particulars; only this knowledge comes to Him
not through Bensuous perception but through intellectual perception, not from
moment to moment but eternally.
Ibn Sina starts with the Aristotelian conception that God has only self-know
ledge but adds emphatically that His self-knowledge necessarily implies know
ledge of all the existent things in the universe in so far as He is the principal
or the ultimate source of them all. There is not a single existent particular
which docs not proceed from Him directly or indirectly and the existence of
which does not become in some way necessary through Him. The coming
into existence of particular ovents and objects is due to the action and inter
action of the various causes but ultimately all these have to be traced back
to the First Cause. God, the First Cause, has the full prescience of the working
of the various causes which originate from Him. and knows the effects pro
duced by them and the time involved in their occurrence and recurrence. Thus.
God knows the particular events even when they occur to a single individual
under specific conditions and at particular times in so far as they are fully
explicable in terms of general laws and all-pervasive causal nexus. This may
be illustrated with reference to an analogous human situation. An astronomer
609
A History of Muslim Philosophy
who has full understanding of the general laws governing tho movements of
the heavenly bodies can, through his proper calculations, describe the various
phenomena such as the particular eclipses and the conjunctions of the stars.
The analogy, however, though helpful, cannot be stretched to an identity, for,
strictly speaking, there is nothing in our experience to compare with divine
knowledge. Our knowledge is liable to error and is fragmentary, whereas God's
knowledge is infallible and all-embracing, so much so that the whole universe
is known to Him in one single congruous manifestation which ia not affected
by time. God is immediately aware of the entire sweep of history regarded aa
an ordered string of specific events in an eternal now. Further, God not only
knows but iB also the very ground of the objects that He knows. The universe
proceeds from the essence of God verily because of His knowledge of the uni-
verse: the ideal representation of the universal system is the very cause of ita
emanation. Had God not known the universe with all its concrete particulari
ties. the universe would never have come into being. This indeed ia a very
original and quite ingenious theory with regard to God’s knowledge of the
particulars. Yet it is undoubtedly of highly speculative nature and so al-
Qhazsli is all out to bring quite an arsenal of criticism against it with a dialec
tical analyticity and rigour not incomparable to those of the logical positivists
of our own day. He is not at all prepared to accept any of the assumptions
of tho philosophers until and unless they should either be statable in the form
of analytical propositions or be verifiable through some kind of intuitive ex
perience. The attribution of knowledge to God aa it is, but particularly that
of "the other,” cannot go without jeopardizing to some extent at least Hia
absolute unity and simplicity which otherwise are so much emphasized, rather
over-emphasized by the philosophers. Above all. the theory, like any of ita
kind, fails to relate in any satisfactory manner tho eteraality of God's know
ledge with the tranBciency of human experience, which relation indeed is the
very crux of religious experience. And so far aa it suffers from the presupposi
tions of the inteUectualiatio-deterministic world-view of the philosophers, al-
Sjjazili simply haa no patience with it. For one, it suggests a block universe
such as makes little allowance if any at all even for the exercise of God's will
These are just a few general remarks to indicate the mode and the various
lines of al-Qhaz&li’s arguments against the philosophers; they may now be
substantiated and amplified by listing some of the actual points of his criticism
The statement that God's self-knowledge necessarily implies the knowledge
of all the existent particulars in tho universe cannot be logically validated,
nor can it be verified on the basis of any analogous human experience. God's
self-knowledge and His knowledge of others do not have tho relation of logical
entailment, for it is possible to imagine the existence of the one without
imagining the existence of the other at the samo time. Looking to our own
experience it would be wrong to claim that man's knowledge of what ia other
than himself is identical with his self-knowledge and with his essenoe
It may be said that God does not know other things in the first intention (al-
610
Al-UhazU
unjh al-aunnal) but that He knows His essence as the principle of the universe
and from tliis His knowledge of the Universe follows in the second intention
(al-wajh al-Hani), i. e., by way of a logical inference. Now. the statement of tho
philosophers that God knows Himself directly only as the principle of the
universe, according to al-Qfaazali, ia aa much an arbitrary assumption us the
earlier statement and is exposed to exactly the same kind of criticism. Aoooid-
ing to tho philosophers' own admission, it would suffice that God should
know only His essence; the knowledge of His being the principle of tho uni
verse is additional to it and is not logically implicated in it. Just as it ia pos
sible for a man to know himself without knowing that ho ia "an effect of God”
(for his being an effect is a relation to this cause), even so it is possible for
God to know Himself without knowing that ne is the principle or cause, Tbo
principle or cause is merely the relation that He bears to His effect, the uni
verse. His knowledge of His relation to the uni verse is not by any means entailed
by His knowledge of His own essence. Do not the philosophers thcmsolvcs in
their doctrine with regard to the attributes of God affirm the possibility only
of negative or relational statements about God on the plea that negations or
relations add nothing to His essence !*• The knowledge of the relation, there
fore, cannot be identical with the knowledge of the essence. Hon co tho philo
sophers' assumption that God knows His essence and thereby also knows
Himself as the principle of the universe, remains unproved logically and un
verified experientially. Al-Qhazali raises many more points of criticism of a
similar nature which fully bring out the "positivistic” and "analytic" thrusts
in his thought. This type of criticism should have been sufficient with al-
Qhazali, for it served hi» purpose of refuting the philosophers quite effectively,
but his religious calling and persuasion impel! him to launch many more
attacks on the philosophers. They do not aim so much at tho complete smashing
of the philosophers' arguments aa to bring out either inconsistencies in their
various positions or more so the difficulties of a religious nature in accepting
them.
Al QhazAli fully appreciates the motive of the philosophers in elaborating
their theory with regard to the nature of God's knowledge of the particulars,
which is no other than that of safeguarding tho immutability and the unity
of God. Eliminating the factor of time or change altogether in God's know
ledge, however, has difficulties of its own which will be noted presently, but
there is another aspect of the philosophers' treatment of the problem of
God's knowledge which lands them into a morass of contradictions and
annuls the very purpose for which it is belaboured, i.e., that of establishing
the unity of God. Granted that God's knowledge remains unaffected bv change,
for it rises above the distinction of "is," "was" and "will.” yet how can God's
knowledge remain unaffected by the multiplicity and diversity of the objects
that He knows! How can it be claimed that knowledge remains unitary even
Ibid. • cf. also al-Naj/U. pp. 40S a «9?.
KU
A History of Muslim Philosophy
when the things known are unlimited in number and are different, for
knowledge has to conform to the nature of the things known ’ If the change in
the objects of cognition necessarily presupposes change in the subject, multi
plicity and difference in the former presuppose the same in the latter.
"Would that I could understand," says al-GfeazAli. "how an intelligent
person can allow himself to disbelieve the oneness of the knowledge of a thing
whose states are divisible into the Past, the Present, and the Future; while he
would not disbelieve the oneness of knowledge which relates to all the different
Genera and Species. Verily the difference and tho disparity among the diverse
Genera and Species is more marked than the difference which may actually be
found to exist among the states of a thing divisible in accordance with the
division of time. If that difference does not necessitate multiplicity and
difference, how can this do so either
Though the philosophers ascribe omniscience and fore-knowledge to God,
they make Ilis knowledge a sort of mirror which paasively reflects in an eternal
now the details of an already finished sequence of events just as wo in a
particular present moment have the memory of a fixed and inalterable se
quence of past events. Thus, God’s knowledge of time is restricted only to
tho relational aspect of time, i.e., that of the sequence of before and after or
of earlier and later. There is, however, another aspect of time which typically
characterizes the human experience and forms its very essence, namely, that
of the over-fleeting, over-changing now. This is the time which is born afresh
at every moment, the time in which the future is perpetually flowing through
the present, into the past Now, according to the philosophers’ thesis of God's
knowledge as explained above, in God's eternal being there can be no coun
terpart of the experience of this living time in which wc humans move and act.
God may know, for example, that my acts of religious devotion are subsequent
to my religious conversion, but He cannot know now that 1 am acting or have
acted in such and such a way. So God in His supra-temporal transcendence
would remain impervious to my religious solicitations, for I am eternally
doomed to the tyranny of this ever-fleeting, ever-trembling now.” Should this
Ire true and should I come to realize it, I may cry in deepair: "Of what use is
God to me I" Such is the catastrophe to which the philosophers’ over-emphasis
upon the etemality and changelessness of God's knowledge leads through ita
very incumbent logic. The problem of the relation of the eternality of God to
“ TaM/ul, p. ISO. Even though al-Qbaznli is not justified in alleging that
philosoplters restrict God's knowledge merely to the universals. namely, the genera,
the species, and tho universal accidents, yet hia criticism of the philosophers on
this point is not vitiated by thia misunderstanding and he is quite right in pointing
out the inconsistency in their position.
•• Aristotle’s conception of time ia essentially intelloctualMCio and static, whereas
al-lihazJHs standpoint with regard to time, in keeping with his theistic occasion
alism. is intmtionialic and dynamic much like Bergson's dur/e. Cf. Louis Msjuignon.
"Timo in Islamic Thought" in Man and Time (Papera from the Kranoe Yearboakef.
London, 1938, pp. 108-14. Also M. F. Clough. Time. London. 1937.
612
Al QhttJUi
the temporality of human experience is almost an impossible problem and the
philosophers of all times have stumbled over it. It may be suggested, however,
that God is transcendental to both time and change and yet in some mysterious
way immanent in it. Viewed superficially, thia seems to be an apparent logical
contradiction, but. adds al-QhazAli, the philosophers dare not point this out
for they themselves have affirmed with regard to their doctrine of the ctcmity
of the world that the world is eternal and yet at the same time subject to
change.
The statement that God not only knows the universe but, further, that this
knowledge is the very ground and the cause of the universe, though very
significant in itself, is made by the philosophers essentially within the frame
work of their detcrministic-emanationistic world-view and aa such, according
to al-QbazSli, involves them into an embarrassing predicament. There is no
sense in talking about the knowledge of an agent when his action is a “natural
action" in tho sense that it follows from him necessarily and is not the result
of his volition. We do not Bay that knowledge of light possessed by the sun
is the requisite condition for the emanation of light from tho sun, and this in
fact is tho analogy which the philosophers have employed to explain the
procession of the world from tho being of God. Further, according to them,
the universe has not been produced by God all at once but has proceeded
from Him through “the intermediaries and the other consequences and the
consequences of those consequences all indirectly connected with these inter.
mediarire."n Even if it should bo granted that the necessary procession of
something from an agent requires the knowledge by him of that which pro
ceeds, God's knowledge at best would be only that of the first intelligence
and of nothing besides. That which proceeds from something which proceeds
from God may not be necessarily known to Him. Knowledge is not necessary
in the case of the indirect consequences of volitional actions; how can it be
so in the case of the indirect consequences of necessary actions ? Thus, the
assertion of the philosophers that God’s knowledge is the very ground and
cause of that which He knows loses its entire significance because of its moorings
in the Plotinian scheme of emanattonism.
Through a strange irony of logic the emanationistic argument of the philo
sophers. instead of building a staircase between God and the world, creates
almost an unbridgeable gulf between the two. It certainly leads to the con
clusion that God is directly related only to the first intelligence, i.e., the first
item of the series of emanations between God and the world; on tho other
hand, tho world is directly related only to the lowest end of that series. Further,
the argument makes the world an independent and autonomous system, which
can be understood by itself because of its insistence on an inexorable causal
necessity such aa pervades tho entire scheme of things. This conception of a
through and through causally determined universe rooted in the intellectual-
•' Cf. TaM/ul. p. 189.
613
A History of Muslim Philosophy
emanationistic metaphysics of the philosophers waa so radically different from
his own dynamic-oceaaionalistic world-view grounded in tho theistic-volunta
ristic metaphysics of tho Aafi'arite tradition that al-flhazali declared a com
plete parting of the way with them. Their world-view, al-Gljaz41i made it
clear, militates particularly against the fundamental Islamic doctrine of
God's providen-JS and omnipotence, and leaves no possibility for the happening
of miracles such as turning of a rod into a serpent, denaturing fire of ita capacity
to bum, revivification of the dead, splitting of the moon (all so clearly referred
to in tho Qur'An)." There certainly is no scope for the exercise of God's free
will in a universe in which there is no real becoming and in which the future
is already given in the present as its necessary effect. Nor, in view of the reign
of the inexorable law of causal necessity in such a universe, is there any
possibility for the miracles, except those which can be "naturalized" through
scientific explanation.
6. Carnality.—Al-GhazAU's desire to vindicate the truth of the religious
position mentioned above led him to make a highly critical and acute analysis
of the philosophers' concept of causality. This analysis, which bears a strikingly
close similarity to that of llume's, brings1* out clearly the most remarkable
originality and acumen of al-Ghazall's thought. The problem that engaged
him at the outset of his inquiry with regard to the seventeenth disputation in
the Tahd/ut is the problem of the alleged necessity of the causal connection
as maintained and insisted on by the philosophers. He challenges the validity
of this neoessitv right as he opens the discussion.’* "In our view," he asserts,
"the connection between what are believed to be cause and effect is not
necessary." The reason that he offers for the justification of his position is that
the relation between cause and effect is not that of logioal entailment. The
affirmation of the one does not imply the affirmation of the other, nor does
t he denial of the one imply the denial of the other. Neither the existence nor
the non-existence of the one is necessarily presupposed by the existence or
the non-existence of the other. Tho relation between quenching of thirst and
drinking, satiety and eating, burning and fire, or light and sunrise, etc., ia
not a necessary relation, for in no case does the one term logically imply the
other. There is nothing logically contradictory in assuming that fire may not
burn, and drinking may not quench thirst, and so on.
The alleged necessity of the causal connection is not logically warranted
because through no amount of logical reasoning can we deduce the effect from
•• Miracles escribed to the prophets Moses, Abraham. Jesus, and Muhammad
respectively; cf. the Qur'An. xx. 17-23, xxviii, 31; xxi. 68, 69, xx, 124, xxxvii. 97.
»8; iii. 48; v. 110; and liv. I.
•• Cf. Hume, Trralut of Human S'alun, Bk. I, Part iii. Cf. also Hanlf Nadawi.
Saryuilmljl-i QjasMi, pp. 62-76; also article "Qhazili ka Najrlj-yahi Ta'lll."
liayaial (Urdu), Institute of Islamio Culture, Lahore. July 1969. Vol. VII, No. 7.
pp. 11-19.
’• The real starting point of the discussion on causality belongs to ‘.Be later
part of the sixteenth disputation. See Tahaful, p. 181.
814
Al Qbwili
the cause. At beet it ia baaed on observation or experience. We observe that
objects sucoeed one another or that similar objects are constantly conjoined.
Now, this prove* succession, not causation, or conjunction, not connection. The
fire which is an inanimate object has no power to produce the effect of burning,
"observation shows only that one ia with the other and not that it is by it,”
e., the effect happens u>d* the cause and not through it (‘indahu la bihi).n
i.
The notion of necessity is valid only in the case of logical relations Buch as
identity, implication, disjunction, etc. In the sphere of mere natural relations
necessity has no scope. In the order of nature, unlike the order of thought, we
deal merely with the contingent and alogical entities which remain unrelated
to each other except in the minds of the perceiver. Objects as such arc not
connected with one another; only the ideas of them get connected in our mind
by association. The relation between fire and burning is not a necessary relation,
for it does not belong to the realm of necessity but to that of possibility such
aa may happen or may not happen depending on the will of God. “It is only,"
al-Ohazali enunciates clearly, "when something possible is repeated over and
over again (so as to form the Norm), that its pursuance of a uniform course in
accordance with the Norm in the past is indelibly impressed upon our minds."’*
Thus, if there is any semblance of necessity in the order of natural relations
such as that of cause and effect, it is merely because the two terms which in
nature remain extrinsic to each other, through constant repetition become
conjoined in our consciousness. Causal necessity is just the habit of our mind
it is merely a psychological necessity and not a logical necessity. The psycho
logical necessity differs from logical necessity in this that ita denial like the
latter does not involve us in a logical impossibility. Hence tho miracles, such
as the fire not burning the body of Abraham when he waa thrown into it, are
not impossible to think. Al Ghazili insists that the denial of miracles can be
justified only when it should be proved that they are logically impossible and
where such proof is not forthcoming their denial is sheer ignorance and ob
duracy.
It is interesting to note further that al-Ghazali. in the course of hia discussion
of the principle of causality and tile possibility of miracles, comes close
to propounding the notion of the composite nature of a cause and also that
of plurality of causes. Cause he understands to be the sum total of many
contributory factors, some of which are positive while others negative, and
all of which have to be considered in conjunction. Take the case of a man
seeing a coloured object: he should possess sound vision, he should open his
eye*, there should be no obstruction between the eyes and the object of vision,
the object should bo a coloured one. the atmosphere should be not dark
but have sufficient light, etc. Any one condition by itself cannot be taken
to be a cause and a single negative condition such as the blindness of tho
o Tohi/ut. p. 186.
" Ibid.. p. 189
615
A History of Muslim Philosophy
person or the darkness of atmosphere may make the cause non-operative though
logically not impossible. The relation of cause and effect is baaed on observation
and observation as such does not rule out the possibility that the same effect
might follow some cause other than the apparent one. Even where we recognize
that there are many causes for the same effect, we cannot limit the number
of causes just to those which we ourselves have observed. So there are many
eauses for the same effect” and a cause is a sum total of many conditions
In view of this it is not possible to negate an effect on the negation of one
particular cause but on the negation of all the various causes. This latter
possibility, however, is emphatically discounted by al-GhazAli so far as we
are concerned, for it presupposes a complete and exhaustive knowledge of all
the causes and their conditions, which knowledge we humans can never come
to possess. Moreover, causes by themselves are inert entities; will and action
cannot be attributed to them. They act only through the power and agency
of God.’* Tho only will is the absolutely free-will of God which works un
constrained by any extraneous law or incumbency exoept the self-impoeed
law of contradiction. Thus, the things to which God's power extends include
mysterious and wonderful facta such as "elude the discernment of human
sensibility.” Indeed, God's power extends to all kinds of logical possibilities
such as turning of a rod into a serpent, or the revivification of the dead. For
the same reason it is not impossible for Him to bring about the resurrection
of boclies in the life hereafter and all other things with regard to paradise and
hell which have boen mentioned in the Qur'An.” To deny them is both illogical
and irreligious. One may add that, according to al-Gh*zAli, not only all miracles
are natural but also all nature is miraculous.” Nature, however, seems to be
pervaded by a causal nexus only because as a rule God does not choose to
interrupt the continuity of events by a miracle; it is possible, however, that
He might intervene at any moment that He deems fit. Such a standpoint
may make one sceptical of the phenomena of nature, but it may equally lead
one to an acute mystical sense of the presence of God to all things. Scepticism
of this kind and mysticism need not always be antithetical—the former may
as well lead to the latter. This indeed is said to have had happened in the case
of al-QbazAli.
” Cf. Mill’s doctrine of the Plurality of Causes, Syetem of I-ogic, Bk. HI, Chap. X.
Section 2.
” It is intonating to note that Charlee Hartshorne and William L. Reese call
al-GfiazAll’s conception of God aa Etiolatry, i.e., cause-worshipping; cf. their
compendium: PAilosopAcrs Speak o/ God. Chicago, 1953. pp. 106-11, eep. p. IOS.
” Cf. Qur’an, xiii. 5; xvi. 38; xvii. 40-31. 98. 99.
’• In spite of Hume's notorious repudiation of the miraculous [Enquiry Con
cerning Human Underoianding, Section, 10, Parts 1 A 2>. his notion of causality
through its own logic can be finally resolved to the GbatSban or better the A(h-
‘aritc poaition expressed in this statement. Cf. A. E. Taylor. "David Hume and the
Miraculous." in his Philoeophical Studies, London. 1934. pp. 330-85; also F. R.
Tennant. Mirade and Ito PKiloeophiad Pruuppoeilione. Cambridge, 1925, p. 84
616
Al-Ufiazali (Continued)
Chapter XXXI
AL-GHAZALI (Continued)
A
MYSTICISM
1. Introduction.—It will not be quite true to say that al-Ghaz&II's final
resort to Sufi-mystiaism was merely the result of his disillusionment with
philosophy and dissatisfaction with scholastio theology. This is only a part
of the truth; his own confessional statement to this effect in al-Munqidh
seems to be rather an over statement of tho actual facts. Sufistic influences
had all along been working upon his mind right from Ilia early childhood. We
need only recall that his father was a pious dervish and his guardian a Sufi
devout, that in his youth he studied' and even practised Sufism first under
Yusuf al-NassAj in 'IQs and then under al-Farmadhi at NigbApur and that
his own brother Abmad al-Ghazali (d. 520/1126) made a name as a great
Sufi. It is not improbable that he should have also learnt of Sufism from his
teacher Imam al-IJaraniain, for it is reported that the Imim himself had boon
the pupil of tho renowned Sufi abu Nu'aim al-IsfahUni (d. 430/1038). So al-
Ghazall’s eventual adoption of the Sufi way of life waa in reality a continuation
of these early influences and not simply the consequence of his failure to find
the philosophical solution of theological problems. Further, it has to be empha
sized that, in spite of his explicit official denunciation of philosophy. al-GhazAli
could never completely part company with it. His Sufi-mysticism was as
much influenced by his thorough study of philosophy as by theology; in its
final development it was the mysticism of a philosopher and a theologian.
There is a marked note of Hellenic thought in his mystical doctrines and even
the tracings of Neo-Platonism, and yet paradoxical though it may seem they
remain circumscribed within the limits of orthodoxy. His is surely a sober
kind of mysticism carefully eschewing all kinds of pantheistic extravagances
and severely criticizing the antinomian tendencies of the intoxicated Sufis.
On the one hand, he tried to make mysticism orthodox and, on the other,
orthodoxy mystical. It is the mystical elemont in religion, he insisted, which
is most vital and makes religious life a reality. Both to the philosophers
1 In tho Munqidi al-Gbar.ali expressly mentions that he had studied the Qul
alQulut of abu Tilib al-Makki (d. 386/996), tho works of Hilrith al-Mubtsibi
(d. 243/857). and tho fragments of al-Junaid (d. 298/910), ai-fibibli (d. 334/946),
and abu Yaztd al-Bis(Ami (d. 261/875). Al the end he adds that he had read the
discourses of all tho loading Sulls. In al(ifiazAll's works, indeed, there are references
to be found to all the great mystics of Islam. For alQbazAU’s Sufistio sources, cf.
Margaret 8mith. .41-Oiacdh: The Mystic. London. 1944. pp. 123-32. For a compari
son of QUl alQulub and IhyiT cf. Shibli Nii'mini. al-QhaiiUi. Lahore. 1956. p. 107:
for tho comparison of Mubiisibl's KiM nl-Waftlya and .Miiuqidi, cf. A. J. Arborry,
Su/im. London. 1950. pp. 47-50.
617
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and the scholastic theologians he brought home the fact that the basis of
all religious certainty is the first-hand living experience of God. He indeed
did his beet to vitalize the Law and the doctrine of Islam through this
emphasis on the living religious experience, and this is evident from the very
title of his magnum opua, Ikya' ‘Ulurn al-Din (Revivification of the Sciences
of Religion). But the mystical teaching of al-Qhaz&li found in Ibyd', meant
for all to read, must bo studied in conjunction with what is given in his other
works dealing more specially with the Sufi doctrine such as Mifbkdl al-Anwdr,
al-Maarif al-'Aqliyyah, MuUgja/al al-Qulub and the like. The theory deve
loped in these works represents what may be labelled as theosophical mysticism
and this cannot be properly understood without reference to al-QhazAli's
specific views about tho nature of God and the human soul. From the point
of view of our present study his mystical views with regard to God and soul
may be profitably compared with those of the philosophers, i.e., al-Far&bi,
ibn Sina, and their followers.
2. God.—The philosophers have particularly emphasized the absolute unity
of God. No positive attributes can be ascribed to God for that leads to the
subjeet-predicate dualism. Even existence can only be refereed to Him. He is
above all distinctions and above all the categories of thought. This over*
emphasis on unity shorn of all qualities reduces God to a mere contentless
inanity. Ho becomes an ineffable, indescribable, impredicablc something. Such
is the result of the dialectic of the philosophers’ monistic reductionism. As
mentioned in the preceding chapter, some of them, following Aristotle, have
described God as thought thinking thought. That which He knows comes into
being emanating from the over-effulgence of His Being, but Ho does not
positively will anything, for willing implies a need—a deficiency. He recognizes
only Himself or at best His first emanent. the first intelligence, and, thus, is
purely transcendent to this world of change and multiplicity.
Like the philosophers. al-Qhazali lay* stress on the unity of God: God
is the eole-existent and the ultimate cause and ground of all being, the only
self.subeisting reality. Yet He possesses the fullness of being, all tho attributes
mentioned in the Qur'an inhere in Him, only the modality of this inherence is
rationally unknowable. We should, however, understand that all His attributes
are spiritual. He is perfect goodness and perfect beauty : the supreme object
of love* He is the light of lights, the eternal wisdom, tho creative truth, but
above all Ho is tho eternal will.
To the philosophers God is primarily thought or intelligence, but to al-
Ghazllli He is primarily a will which is the cause of creation. "The First
Principle," he says, "is an omnipotent and willing agent, He’does what He
wills, and ordains as ne likes, and He creates the similar and dissimilar things
alike, whenever and in whatever manner He wills."* So Ultimate Reality if
■ Cf. Ays'. Cairo, 1340/1921. Vol. IV. p. 259 er. »/•;.
1 Ta/Aful. p. 88; seo note No. 38 in the preceding chapter.
618
Al-QhazAli (Continued)
essentially will. The entire choir of the heavens and the furniture of the earth
are the direct work of God, produced out of sheer nothingness simply through
ilia terrific "Be."** God has created the universe through Ifis will, sustains it
through His will, and one day will let it pass away by His will. According to
the philosophers, God wills the world because He thinks of it Acconling to
al-Qhazali, "God has eognizanoo of the world because He wills it and in His
willing it."
*
Like the philosophers, al-Ghazali also emphasizes the transcendent aspect
of God. He is exalted beyond tho limitations of space and time, for He is the
creator of space and time. He was before time and space were. But He is also
immanent in this spatio-temporal order; Hia eternal wisdom and supreme
beauty manifest themselves through the wonders and glory of His creation. His
eternal will is in action throughout the universe; it is in the swing of the sun and
the moon and in the alternation of day and night . Everywhere around is the
touch and working of God.* Al-Gbazall's God is not the Absolute of the philo
sophers who is bleak and cold, but a personal God, a living God. He desires
intercourse with His creatures and makes it possible for them to enter into
fellowship with Himself through prayer and contemplation and, above all.
through tho gift of mystical gnosis.
3. Soul.—The difference between al.flhaz-ili and the philosophers with
regard to the nature of the soul is not so very well marked. He only insists,
like Kant,’ that the philosophers through their rational arguments cannot
give any conclusive proof for the spirituality, substantiality, unity, immor
tality, etc., of the human soul. His attack on the philosophers on this issue is
aa incisive and analytic as thx^of Kant hut probably more violent He actually
smashes one by one all the ten arguments which he himself expounds as force
fully as they could be in favour of their thesis.
* Like Kant, again, he does not
disagree with tb"ir basic position but only with their method. He even joins the
philoeophers in their refutation of the position of some of the scholastic then
I' gians, who maintained that the soul is a kind of subtle body or an accident
and not a substance • What is more and rather strange, while determining the
plane of the soul in the realm of beings, al-QhazSli talks the very language of
• Qur'An, ii, 117; xvi, 40.
• T. J. de Boor. TAe History of Philosophy in Islam. English trans, by E. II.
Joons. London. 1933. p. 163.
• Cf. Qnr’in. iii. 189. 190; vi. 100: X, 6. 6; xiii. 3. 4. etc.; ef. also ai-Cjjazili's
al Hikmah fi Ma^Uufit Allah. Cairo. 1321/1903.
’ Cf. M. Saeed Sheikh. “Kant’s Critique of Kational Psychology and Ita Para
logisms,’’ [Proceedings of the Sixth/ Pakistan Philosophical Congress. Lahore. 1939,
pp. 186-93.
• Cf. Tahtful, pp. 200-20. For a comparison of ai-Qhur.all'a and ibn Slnil'a
views with regard to soul, ef. Suleiman Dunya. al-^aylyoA ft A’asr aL-fUatlUi.
Egypt, 1367/1947, pp. 330-436.
• Cf. article "Nsfs,” Encyclopaedia of Islam, rep. sections 9 and 10; also Maqifid
ul Fatomfah (Urdu translation) by M. Ilanlf Nadawi. Lahore, 1939. pp. 323-32.
619
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the Neo-Platonic philosophers. His ooamological triad of the divine world
fdlam al-malahu), the celestial world (‘Ham al jabriit), and the material,
phenomenal world ('Slam al-mulk w-al-ihahddah ) runs closely parallel to that
of Plotinus consisting of the universal mind, the universal soul, and matter.10
Like Plotinus, he seems to vouchsafe that the human soul belongs to 'alam
al-jabarul, i.e., midway between the divine world and the material world,
and so is neither purely eternal like the former nor merely temporal like the
latter but partakes of them both.
Al-QhaziU's conception of the human soul, however, is essentially based
on the teachings of the Qur'ln and the Tradition. The interesting thing about
this conception is that it runs parallel to his conception of God. Soul like
God is a unity and like Him it is primarily and essentially a will. Further, aa
God is both transcendent to and immanent in the universe so is soul with
reference to body. ' 'Man is made in tho image of God,”11 is a saying of the Holy
Prophet and it is twice stated in the Qur’&n that "Allah breathed into man
of His own spirit."1* The soul is a mirror illumined by the divine spark re
flecting the qualities and even the essence of God. “Not only are man's attri
butes," says al-Ghaz&li, “a reflection of God's attributes but the mode of
existence of man's soul affords an insight into God's mode of existence.. ..”
Knowledge of the self is the key to tho knowledge of God, for so is the oft-
quoted tradition: "He who knows himself knows hia lord." “Both God and
soul," al-Qjjazali adds, "are invisible, indivisible, unconfined by space and
timo, and outside the categories of quantity and quality: nor can the ideas
of shape, colour, or size attach to them... ,”10
The soul of man is different from everything else in the sensuous world.
There are two worlds: the world of command' (amr) and the created world
(kAalq).“ Everything devoid of quantity and dimension belongs to the world
of amr. Soul belongs to the world of amr also because it proceeds from the
command of God: "Say, the spirit prooeedeth at the oommaud of my Lord”10
is God's instruction to the Prophet. It is the world of amr that rules the created
world; the oommand is the divine force which directs and regulates the world.
Thus soul is a spiritual principle which having life in itself vitalizes the body
and controls it and regulates it. Body is the instrument and vehicle of the
soul. God is primarily a will and man is akin to God especially in respect of
will. Volo ergo sum is the dictum on which al-GhazAli builds his mystical
10 Soo Cairo 1840/1921. p. 84. Cf. also D.B. Macdonald, Development of
MuMm Theology ..., London. 1903. pp. 234,235. and A. J. Wenainok, The Relation
hetneen al-QhauUVi Coemoloyy and Hit Mytticim, Amsterdam, 1933.
11 See Klmiya-i Sa'Adat. Urdu trans, by M. 'Inkyat Ullah, Lahore, n. d.. pp. 8,
36. Aino cf. Qur'&n. xxx, 30.
11 Qur'&n. xv, 29; xxxviii, 72.
10 Klmiya-i Sa'Odal. English trans, by Claud Field. Tho Alchemy of Happinuo.
Lahore, n.d.. pp. 19, 36.
“ See Kimiya i SaAdal. Urdu trans., p. 10.
“ Qur’an, xvii, 86.
620
Al-Qhaz41i (Continued)
psychology and epistemology. The essential element of the soul ia not thought
which in the final analysis ia baaed upon the bodily perceptions and the
categories of thought but will which created them both for its own purposes
Man in himself has the infinite spiritual possibilities and it is through his will
that he oomee to realize t hem and thus brings himself close to tho mind and
will of God till God says: "0 soul at rest! return to thy Lord, satisfied with
Him, giving satisfaction unto Him. So enter among My servants and enter My
garden.”1* This final encounter of the soul with God through the unfolding
of its own spiritual possibilities and tbo realization of its inmost aspirations
is attained by walking on a mystic Path, under the guidance of a siaii*.
and constitutes what is the very essence and some of religious experience.
4. Religious Experience and Moral and Intellectual Values.—Whatever the
essence or inner content of religious experience may bo, it certainly is not
a mere state of pure contemplation or knowledge aa the philosophers proclaim
it to be. It is a vital experience which must translate itself into good action.
Religion without good works, according to al-Qhazili, is a dead religion. The
life of the true mystics ia the beet life and their character the purest character.
“Were the intellect of the intellectuals and the learning of the learned and the
scholarship of the scholars... brought together to improve the life and charac
ter of the mystics, they would find no way of doing so.’',, Indeed, the source
from which the philosophers derive their ethical theories is the lives and teach
ings of these moral geniuses, i.e., the saints and the mystics. In the final
analysis the mystics themselves are illumined by the light of the lamp of the
prophetic revelation. But what if you were to doubt the prophethood of a
prophet I So close is the relation between the inner religious life and the outer
moral expression of it that you can move from one back to the other. The
authenticity of a prophet can be attested by applying a moral test, that ia,
by making a dose study of his oonduct, by assessing the transformations
which his creative will has wrought in human history and by evaluating the
new aocio-politico-legal system that he has introduced and established in a
society. Of the truths of religion, we acquire not a theoretical but a moral
certainty: the deed is more important than mere idea, the will is more ulti
mate than pure intellect.
Though the philosophers do not deny the importance of transforming
truth values into moral values, ideas into deeds, so far as their theory of
prophecy is concerned, yet in pursuance of the dominant Hellenic tradition
they seem to hold that knowledge without consequent action has its own
intrinsic value. Good deeds are preparatory to correct thinking. The ultimate
perfection of the soul consists in God-like contemplation, in a state of pure
knowledge which though not without joy is certainly without action. Al-
Ghazkli strongly revolted against this extreme intellectualism of the philo-
>• Ibid., lxxxix, 27-30.
>’ Munqiib. p. 60; see note No. 1 in the preceding chapter.
621
A History of Muslim Philosophy
sophera, yet he did not remain altogether unaffected by it. It ia indeed futile
to look for any lifeless consistency in his attitudes which make a happy syn
thesis of voluntarism, pragmatism, and idealism. He concedes, for example,
that a prophet is a person endowed with extraordinary intellect which enables
him to attain contact with the active intellect, the proximate source of pro-
phetio revelation.1’ Like the philosophers, he also affirms that perfection of
tho soul' consists in knowledge, albeit intuitive knowledge; like them, he alao
shows predilections for knowledge for ita own sake. “The ink of the scholar
is better than the blood of the martyr.”” It is certainly true so far as by
knowledge we here understand knowledge of tho religious sciences, but it is
also in a sense true of all other sciences. Knowledge of the sciences dealing
with things that God has made is regarded by alQhazUi as a necessary pre
lude to the knowledge of God Himself. The study of all branches of knowledge
and taking the greatest share of most of them is a necessary part of the mystic
discipline. "If the eoul has not been exercised in the sciences dealing with
fact and demonstration, it will acquire mental phantasma which will be mis
taken by it to be truths descending upon it. . . . Many Sufis remain stuck for
years in such figments of imagination, but they certainly would have been
saved from these, had they first followed the path of scientific study and
acquired by laborious learning aa much of the demonstrative sciences as
human power could encompass. . .
It has almost become a fashion to label al-Qfcaz&li as an anti-intellectualist
and to ascribe to him much of the backwardness of Muslim community ever
since the sixth/twelfth century: its conservatism and its anti-liberalism.*1 It
is alleged that alQbaz&ii through his emphasis on fundamentalism and spiri
tualism initiated a movement in Muslim thought that killed all zest for philo.
sophic inquiry and scientific reflection, if it did not out right create an antipathy
for them. The anti-intellectualism or the anti-liberalism of the Muslim com
munity is a highly complex sociological phenomenon and ita causes shall
liavo to be explored in a great many areas; it would be too much of an over
simplification of facts to ascribe it to a single name, however great, that name
may be. We have only to remember that al-Qhazili never left philoeophy
altogcthcr and that he himself waa very well acquainted with tho scientific
knowledge of his day.” most of which he accepted as true. The charge of
the kind mentioned above may bo made only with reference to some one
11 Cf. F. Rahman. Prophecy in Islam. London, 1958, p. 96.
11 IhyO', Urdu trans, by M. Ahsan Siddlqi. Lucknow, 1955. Vol. I. pp. 11 el eifj.
" Ct. JIUn al Amal. Cairo, 1342/1923, pp. 35, 36; alao lAyfl', Part 1, Book I.
Section 7 on ‘.4,1 (Intellect).
11 Cf. P. K. Ilitti, History <11 the Arabs, London, 1949, p. 432; Max Meyerhof.
The Legacy o/ Islam, od. T. Arnold and A. Guillaume, Oxford. 1931. p. 337; and
Will Durant, The Age a/ Faith. New York. 1950. pp. 256, 257. 332.
" He himself wrote a treatise on astronomy. Cf. Sarton, Inlmiuaion to the
History oj Science. Baltimore, 1927, Vol. I. p. 753.
622
Al-QbazAh (Continued)
particular work but it cannot at all be justified if the whole course of his
works is taken into consideration.
Considering, however, the number and complexity of the subjects with
which his works deal, the various levels of readers for whom they were written
and the fact of his own spiritual development, it is not always possible to
reconcile his various view's and attitudes and to defend him against all charges
of inconsistency.“ One such difficulty arises when, after having considered
his views about the nature of the soul and God, we come to formulate his
position with regard to the relation betwoen the two. Whether his conception
of this relation makes an allowance for pantheism, is a question which has
puzzled some students of al-QfaazAli M
5. Pantheism.—Al-QhazaU’s view of God as being both immanent and
transcendent, his firm belief in God being a personal God who allows His
creatures to enter into communion with Him, his emphasis on God’s being
a creator who created the universe at a specific time through an act of voli
tion, one and all, can hardly fit into any scheme of pantheism. The description
of the mystic's experience of God st the higher reaches of his ecstatic flights aa
identification (ilii/idd) or unification furusul) with God or inherence or
indwolling fliulul) in Him. al Qhazali has expressly mentioned aa false and
*
erroneous. 1 At best the mystics can claim only a nearness to or proximity
with God and no more. But it has been pointed out that in his doctrine of
the soul he makes it resemble Gori so closely both in essence and qualities
that there remains hardly any difference between the two. Al-Qfaazili is aware
of this dangerous deduction and asserts meet emphatically that there is one
special qunlity (akhas.su wajfihi) which belongs to God alone and of which
none else partakes and that is the quality of self-subsistence. God ls self
subsistent (gayyum)
** while everything else exists through Him and not
through its own essence. "Nay. things through their own essence havo nothing
•• The charge of esotericism, in the narrow sense of lire theory of two-fold truth,
against al-Qhwzwli, ia, however, unfounded. Cf. W. Montgomery Watt. "A Forgery
in al-GhazAII’s Miehhdl*", Journal of Hoyal Asiatic Society. 1949. pp. S~22;
also article "al-QbazzAli,*' (section 3). Encyclopaedia of Islam. This question
ia connected with the problem of the authenticity of al.QhazAli's works.
Cf. M. IqhJI, .. to this day it is difficult to define, with accuracy, his view
of the nature of Cod. In him, liko liorgor and Solgnr tn Gormany, Siifi Pantheism
and the Aifi'arite dogma of personality appear to harmonize together, a recon
ciliation which makes it difficult to say whether he was a Pantheist, ob a Personal
Pantheist of the type of Lotze" (The Development of Metaphysics in Persia. p. 75),
Also C. R. Upper, "AlghazAH’s Thought Concerning the Nature of Man and Union
with God," The Muslim World. 19.12, Vol. XLU. pp. 23-32. C. K. Upper onda
this article by a significant remark: "Al-QhazMI's occasional pantheism is in
dubitable, yot his orthodoxy is impeccablo. How thia can be ia the secret between
him and Allah." For the great synthetic acumen and creativity of <il.£hazuli in
having a via media between the various positions, cf. S. R. Shafiq, “Some Abiding
Teachings of ol-GbazAli," The Muslim World, Vol, XLTV, No. 1. 1954. pp. 43-48.
“ Cf. Munqtfh. p. 61.
*• Cf. Qur’an, ii. 255.
623
A History of Muslim Philosophy
but non-existence, and existence comes to them only from something else,
by way of a loan.” But surely there is the lurking danger of pantheism in
such a statement if it is stretched to ita logical limits. If the contingency of
the world should be over-emphaa'zed. it becomes nothing more than a show
of shadows having no reality or actuality of ita own whatsoever. All actuality
is devoured by the being of God. This conclusion ia confirmed by al-GhazAli’s
own approval of the pantheistic formula: la huwa ilia huwa (there is no it
but Ho) to which may be added his statement: "He is everything: He is that
He is: none but He has ipseity or heity at all."*’ To thia may bo added that
al-GhazAli has taken a very lenient view of some of the obviously pantheistic
utterances of the Sufis of extreme type such aa "I am the Creative Truth
"Glory be to Mo! How great is My glory"; "Within this robe is naught but
Allah,"** etc. Statements of this kind clearly indicate a sense of complete
self-deification. But al-GhazAli has nn word of condemnation for them exoept
the comment that "the words of passionate lovers in the state of ecstasy
should be concealed and not spoken of.” True, the statements of this kind
should not bo taken strictly philosophically but only as emotive expression.-,
indicative of a deep inner experience which has many phases and aspects and
a language and a logic of its own. But then al-Ghaz&li seems to forget some
times the advice he has so strongly given to those who have attained the
mystio state that they should not try to speak the unspeakable and follow
the poet who said:
"What I experience I shall not try to say;
Call me happy, but ask me no more.”’*
B
ETHICS
>l-GhazAli is the best known Muslim writer on moral subjects. But there
are some critics’1 who have recently made attempts to belittle the importance
of his ethical theory by trying to show that it is entirely, or at least mainly
derived from the Aristotelian and Neo-Platonic doctrines and from the writings
of the Muslim philosophers whoee systems wore Hellenic in spirit. Al-GhaxAli
was. undoubtedly, a widely read scholar and was, therefore, well versed in
tho ethical thought of the Greeks, which did influence him. But it would be
basically wrong to say that he was dependent on Greek philosophy for his
■’ Cf. Muflriir al-Anwdr, English translation by W. H. T. Gairdnor, Lahore,
p. 62.
’• Saying of al-HalUj loxocuted 309(822). Cf. R. A. Nicholson. The Idea o<
Pereonality in Sufiem, Cambridge. 1923, p. 32.
" Sayings ascribed to abu Yasld al-Bis(Ami. who is probably the first of tho
intoxicated Sufis.
'• MutufUA, p. Bl.
“ Margaret Smith, Dr. Zaki MubArak, and others.
624
Al-QhasAli (Continued)
inspiration. He was. in fact, against the philosophers and their heretical
doctrines. Throughout his writings, al-GfeazAli takes his stand upon Islamic
teachings and invariably quotes from the Qur'&n and the traditions in support
of his views. Following the Qur'&n, for example, ho lays emphasis on spiritual
values like gratitudo flAukrJ, repentance (laubah), reliance (lawakhd), fear
< kbaul) of God, etc., which were completely unknown to the Greeks. Similarly,
al-Gbaz&li is thoroughly Islamic in taking the perfect human representation of
the moral ideal in the Prophet of Islam (peace bo on him), whom God Him
self testifies to have the highest character.11 Further, we can legitimately
say that the notion of the love of God as the summum bonim, leading directly
to the beatific vision in the next world, has nothing like it in Greek philo
sophy. This is undeniably based upon the Qur'&nic teachings. All these asser
tions will become clearer as we proceed with the detailed discussion.
Asceticism is the spirit that runs throughout al-Qbaz&H's ethics. He does
not deal with the heroio virtues like courage, etc., in detail, and lays greater
emphasis on the purification of the heart after one has severed all tics with
thia world, at least in spirit. He says: "The experienced guide and teacher
should bring homo to the disciple that he should root out anger and keep no
wealth .. . otherwise if he gets the slightest hint that both wealth and self-
assertion are good and necessary in a certain measure, he will get an excuse
for avarice and self-assertion, and to whatever limits he goes he will imagine
that he is permitted as far aa that. So he ought to be told to eradicate these
tendencies. ”*• Again, in Minhaj al-'AbuRn. al-Qhazili differentiates between
two kinds of virtues: positive, i.e.. good actions, and negative, i.e., the
abandonment of bad ones. The negative side is better and more excellent. To
elucidate this point further, he discusses the question in Ihya whether marriage
or celibacy is better. After counting the advantages and the disadvantages
of both, he ultimately tends to the conclusion that celibacy is better. One
may marry, ho grants, provided one is at the same time like the unmarried,
e., lives always in the presence of God. All this has a colouring of otherworld
i.
liness.
Avoidance of the world is, however, not put forward aa an endin-itself.
It has boen over-emphasized by al-GhazAli simply to counteract, the tendencies
to vice, luxury, and pride, which were so common in his days. The curbing
or controlling of passions has boen stressed merely to achieve moderation;
otherwise he fully knows the psychology of human nature. He is quite aware
of the social spirit of the Qur'&n and of the Prophet's teaching that there is
no asceticism in Islam.“ Accordingly, al-Ghaz&li does sometimes lay emphasis
on our duties and obligations to other individuals and to society as a whole
J-had has been mentioned aa n necessary obligatory duty; even prayers
have to be sacrificed, if need be, during a war. In the chapter on "Renunciation
11 Qur'an. Ixviii. 4.
11 Al-Ohaa&li. ‘Vlim al Din. Part III. p. 30.
11 Hadilb Ahmad b. Hanbal, Vol. IV. p. 220.
625
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of the World." in the Ijlyrj’ he warns against ita evils and holds that renun
ciation is a grievous sin if a man has dependants who need his support. He
defends music by saying that “gaiety and sport refresh and cheer the heart
and bring relief to the tired mind . .., rest prepares a man for work, and
sport and gaiety for grave and serious pursuits."® Further, among virtues,
he includes good appearance (fiu.m al-hai'ah) with adornment which is
sensible and has no tinge of ostentation in it. Similarly, there are the virtues
of self-respect, dignity, etc., which point to a man's relation with other indi
viduals and presuppose a social set-up.
Before discussing al-Ghazall’s theory of ethics we may oonsider the problem
which forms the basis of all ethical systems, vis., the problem of the freedom
of the will. The fact that man can change from the state of the insinuating self
(alnafs al ammirah) to the state of the self at peace faf-na/s al-mulma'innah)
through a good deal of conscious struggle and deliberate effort necessarily sug
gests that he is free in his will. The Mu'tazilites had taught that the freedom
of the will is an a priori certainty, that man possesses power (qudrah) over
his actions and is their real author. The Agh'arites, who represented the ortho
dox reaction, however, held that “Man cannot create anything. God is the
only creator. Nor does man’s power produce any effect on his action at all.
God creates in His creature power (qudrah) and choice (ikhtiydr). He then
creates in him action corresponding to the power and choice thus created.
So the action of the creature is created by God as to initiative and aa to pro
duction, but it iB acquired by the creature. By acquisition (hub) is meant
that it corresponds to the creature's power and choice previously created in
him, without hia having had the slightest effect on the action."’* This position
comes very close to the “pre-established harmony" of Leibniz. It, thus, gives
us at the most only a consciousness of freedom, and not freedom in the real
sense of the term.
Over this question al-Qhaz£li finds himself on the horns of a dilemma. On
the one hand, God is represented aa the disposer of everything. He is the
unmoved mover of the material world and the only efficient cause of all
creation Whatever happens in the heavens or on the earth happens accord
ing to a necessary system and a predetermined plan. Not even a leaf can
move without His decree; Hia law is supreme everywhere. "Whomsoever
God wishes to guide, He expands his breast to Islam; but whomsoever He
wishes to lead astray He makes his breast tight and strait."" And. on the
other hand, man is shown to be responsible for his actions and for deserving
place either in hell or in heaven. This implies complete moral freedom.
Al-QhazAli seeks to reconcile both these tendencies on the basis of an
analysis of the human mind. The heart or the eoul of man, according to
him, is furnished with two kinds of impressions. Either there are sensations
“ Al-ObasUi, I*ya', Part II. Chap, on Music.
" D. B. Macdonald. Development of Mudim Theology, p. 1B2.
’’ Qur'Sn. vi, 123
626
AIQbasili (Continued)
through which one gets the sensible qualities of the outside world, or there is
reflection or internal sense which supplies the mind with ita own operations.
These impressions, which al-Qhaz&li calls khioilir (Locke would call them
"simple ideas" and James Ward would term them "presentations”), arc.
according to him, the spring and fountain-head of all activity. Whatever the
heart intends, resolves, etc., must oome to it as knowledge in the form of such
impressions. These impressions or ideas have an inherent tendency to express
themselves in overt movements. They have a motive part of their own and are
capable of exciting a strong impulse or inclination (rogjlxi/i) in the first instance.
This inclination must, if the action is to take place, be followed by decision
or conviction (i'tvfid). (These three stages correspond pretty closely to what
psychologists call respectively appetite, desire, and wish.) Conviction, in turn,
is followed by resolution or the will to act (irddalt). Will excites power and
then the action comes.
The first two stages of thia process, viz., impression and inclination, arc
recognized to be beyond man's complete control; if an individual merely
thinks intently of falling forward, swaying forward begins. So "the conclusion
would be that, while the occurrence of a strong desire or inclination may
come without man's responsibility, his reason is free to make a decision
and his will is free to accept the decision of reason as good and to implement
the corresponding action. In such a case, man would be free to do what he
desires, but the complete control of his desire would be beyond his power."*’
ThuB, al-Qhaz&li tries to reconcile the positions of the determinate and the
mdeterminista.
In fact. al-Ghazkli recognizes three stages of being. The lowest is the material
world where the absolute necessity of God's will is all in all, Second is the
stage of the sensuous and the psychical world where a relative sort of freedom
is recognized. Lastly comes God who is absolutely free. But His freedom is not
like that of a man who arrives at decisions after hesitation and deliberation
over different alternatives. This is impossible in tho case of God. "To speak
of choioe between alternatives is to suggest that other than the bast might be
chosen and this would be inconsistent with the idea of perfection."”
Thus, having established human freedom and responsibility and having
justified his discussion of ethical questions, al-Qjjazili goes on to present before
ns his notion of the moral ideal and the means that are to be adopted for its
realization. The path is long and difficult and needs a great deal of patience
and perseverance on the part of the seeker. Slowly and steadily, by leading a
virtuous life, he has to take his soul towards perfection so that it might be
able to attain the knowledge of God and consequently divine love, which
is the summum bonum or the Highest Good in thiB world. This will lead to
the beatific vision in the world to come. It should, however, be remembered
•• Donaldson. Studiu in .VoXim Elbico. p. 136.
“ WK. Sortey. Moral I ninas o"d ldm of God. p. 446
627
A History of Muslim Philosophy
that man cannot move a single -step forward without the help of God- He ia
guided throughout by the gift of God (taufiq). Tauftq manifests itself in
various forms:
1. Guidance from God (hiddyah) is the very condition of all virtues. It
stands for the telling of the moral from the immoral, the good from tho
bad and the right from the wrong. Unices these distinctions are clearly
seen, we cannot be supposed to do any good action or avoid evil.
2. Direction (ruibd). Mere knowledge of good actions might be necessary
but is not sufficient for their performance. We should alao have the will
to do them. This is "direction."
3. Setting aright (laadid). It is the power from God which makes the body
obey the will in order to realize the end.
4. Confirmation (t&’id). It makes circumstances congenial for the actualiza
tion of tho will.
Helped by God in this way the individual proceeds to exercise virtues
which gradually raise the heart higher and higher up towards the ideal.
Before taking up this enterprise, however, the eoul or the heart is to be
subjected to a thorough surgical operation and cleansed of all impurities.
"He will indeed be successful who purifies it and he will fail who corrupts
it.”“ It is only when the heart has thus been freed of ite fetters and the veils
of darkness and ignoranoe have been rent asunder that anything positive can
be attempted. Al-Ghazali explains it by an allegory. Once the Chinese and
the Greeks held a contest on the art of drawing and painting. One part of a
big room was given to the Chinese and the other to the Greeks. In between
was hung a curtain so that they might not see the work of each other. The
Greeks decorated the wall with many rare colours, but the Chinese proceeded
to brighten their side and polish it. When the curtain was raised, tho beautiful
art of the former was reflected on the latter’s wall in ite original beauty and
charm. Such is the way of the saints who strive for the purification of their
heart to make it worthy of the knowledge of God Most High. But what are
these impurities and what are they due to 1 What is that which darkens and
casts gloom upon the soul of man ’ Al GhazAlI's answer is: love of the world—
the root from which all tho multifarious sins and vices spring. The pious people
avoid it and seek loneliness. "Be in the world aa if you are a stranger or journey
ing upon the road."*1 On seeing a dead goat, the Prophet of Islam (peace bo
on him) is reported to have said, "The world has leaser value in the eyes of
God than this goat has for its owner."
Let us now discuss briefly al-Ghazalf's enumeration of the main kinds of
vices that result from the love of tho world, the removal of which from the
heart is incumbent upon us
Qur'An, xo, 0-10.
<* Ibn Haji, Bulugh al-Mordm, "BAb al Zuhd w-al-War ."
’ 628
*zili
Al-Gh (Continued)
First, there are those vice
* which arc connected with a particular part of
lite body. Hunger is one of them. It is, no doubt, a very important biological
function and, thus, indispensable for the preservation of life. But when
it transgresses ita limits and becomes gluttony, it is the cause of immense
evil and disturbance. "Eat and drink." says God, "but be not prodigal.
Verily He loves not the prodigal."" Over-eating dulls the intellect and weakens
the memory. It also causes too much sleep which, besides being a wastage of
time, slackens the mind; the light of wisdom is dimmed and one becomes
unable to differentiate good from evil.
** Further, the glutton forgets what
need and hunger are. Gradually, he becomes oblivious of, and unsympathetic
to, the poor and those who have really nothing to eat. So one should eat only
aa much aa is barely sufficient to sustain oneself, out of what one has earned
**
honestly.
The second group of vices belonging to this category arc those arising out
of the sex instinct. This instinct is supposed to be the most powerful in man.”
and so are its distractions from the right path. The sex appetite must always
be directed, controlled, and managed by reason and should not be allowed
to run wild: adultery is a moral and social as well as religious evil. Further,
says al-Ghaxali, the seeker after the ideal should not marry in the earlier
stages of his search, for the wife and children may prove a hindrance. But
if, in spite of wilful determination, he ia not able to control himself, he may
marry and then perform all his duties as a husband.
Lastly, we come to the vices of speech, which are many. Talkativeness,
using indecent words, ridiculing, abusing, cursing, etc., belong to this kind.
Similarly, lying is also a heinous sin: "A painful doom is theirs because they
lie.”** Lying, however, loses its immoral sting in special circumstances when
the end in view is good. Wo can, for instance, legitimately make use of it aa a
war tactic. "War is deception itself,"
* ’ goes the tradition. Slandering and tale
bearing are also very prominent vioea of speech. "Don’t backbite one another,"
**
says God. Similarly, we have been prohibit'd from making false promises
because it is the characteristic of hypocrites (mvndfigun).u
Next, there are vices arising out of self-assertion. When working in its
proper limits, this instinct is, no doubt, natural. But the lack or excess of
it makes it an evil. A person who has no self-assertion has no self-respect.
He is disgracefully meek and silent and dare not make his personality felt.
Excessive self-assertion, on the other hand, degenerates into vices like anger
(gbadab). malice pride (l-ibr). and vanity Cujb). Man is roused to
“ Qur’an, vii. 31.
•• Al-fihax*li, Part III. p. 72.
•• Ibid., p. B«.
“ Ibid., p. 85.
•• Qur’an, ii, 10.
•’ JdmC Tirmidbi. Matba’sh MujtabA'i. p. 201.
Qur'an. xlix. 12.
•• Al-MijbhiU at-MofMh, “BAb al-KabA'ir wa AUmM al-Niftq.”
629
A History of Muslim Philosophy
anger when some desire of his is not fulfilled, when another person possesses
the thing which, he thinks, should rightfully belong to him. When not gratified,
anger often turns into malice, which consists in the desire that the desired
thing should bo lost to tho possessor also. It is a feeling of pain at another's
good. Sometimes, however, there is no feeling of pain but simply a strong
desire that one should also possess a thing like the one the other has. This is
known as emulation (ghibtah) and is not undesirable. We can overcome the
vices of excessive self-assertion by forbearance, mildness, forgiveness, humility,
etc.
Anger, malice, and emulation are aroused when man is not in possession of
the objects of his desire. Pride and vanity, on the contrary, occur when he
has secured such objects. Vanity is a sense of self-admiration. The individual
regards his possessions as great, has no fear of losing them, and forgets that
they are merely gifts of God. If he is vain about his intellect, wisdom, and
opinion, all development in knowledge ceases and all progress is congealed.
A proud man. on the other hand, actively oompares himself with others, is
rightly or wrongly aware of some religious or worldly perfection in himself,
and feels elated and raised above them. He looks down upon them and expects
respect from them aa a superior. Learned men, worshippers, and devotees
are very much prone to this evil. The cure of pride lies in recognizing God
and one's own self. By this he would come to know that pride becomes God
and greatness belongs to Him alone. Further, he should remember his humble
beginnings and recognize the filthy stuff he is made of. Let him consider the
origin and end of his forefathers and of the proud persons like Pharaoh and
Nimrud who tried to equal God Almighty. Let him consider also that beauty,
wealth, and friendship are all transitory and unreliable.
To the third category of vices belong tho love of wealth fhubb al-null) and
of position ((lubb al-jih), hypocrisy (riya'), and wilful self-deception (jhurur).
Wealth in itself, however, is not bad. It is the use of it that makes it so.
Wealth can be spent on the poor and the needy to alleviate their sufferings,
but can also lead directly to sins or can supply means for them. Those who
love money often forget God and He, in turn, prepares and reserves for them
a painful doom.M Love of wealth may lead to avarice: tho more one has, the
more one desires. It can also lead to miserliness, which means not spending
even where one is duty-bound to spend. The cure of all these evils is to give
away all that is superfluous and keep only as much as is essential for supporting
life and getting peace of mind. We must further bo convinced in our hearts
that wealth, like shadows, is a transitory affair and that God is sufficient for
us and our children. We should hasten to spend when occasion demands,
setting aside the checks and hesitations arising within.
Love of position means the desire to win and dominate the hearts of others
It is generally gained by creating in others a conviction that one possesses
“ Qur’iin. ix. 34.
630
AI-QhazJUi (Continued)
tho 10-called qualities of perfection such as beauty, strength, anoestory. Real
perfection, however, lies in knowledge and freedom: knowledge of God and
spiritual values, and freedom from the vices and the rebellious nature of
passions. Just as wealth is allowed if used as a means for some good, so may
we win the admiration of those whose help is necessary to realise the ideai
But if position is sought for its own sake, it is a vice and should be eradicated
Ono must impress upon oneself that position is not everlasting and that death
is a leveller. One should also know that a prominent person creates enemies
very easily.
The lover of position generally falls into hypocrisy and tries to deceive
people that he possesses something which actually ho does not. An individual,
for example, may pretend to be a pious man by a thin, lean, neglected body,
long prayers, virtuous and humble talk, and so on. In religious matters, hypoc
risy has been condemned very much by both the Qur'An and the Sunnah.
This deadly disease must be cured, otherwise all the so-called virtuous actions,
the inner spiritual basis being absent, will be entirely useless and unacceptable
to God. One must perform all good actions, including the religious observances
and acts of worship, in secret . We may perform them in t he open if our sincere
intention ia that others may also be persuaded thereby to do the same. Love
of position also gives rise to self-deception. The individual is convinced that
he has something which he really does not have. Four classes of people among
the believers are, according to al-GhazAli. very likely to involve themselves
in thia evil. They are, for example, such religious devotees as do not have
the real sense of values. They do not realize what is more important and
what is leas important and. by performing the latter, they assume them-
selves to be exempt from the former. For instance, they take greater care in
the correct pronunciation of the words of the Qur'An than in understanding
their true meanings. Instead of helping a hungry neighbour, they would go
on pilgrimage to Mecca. Some dress thcmsclvc poorly and meekly and think
they have become saints thereby. All these persons are deceiving themselves
as to the true nature of things. Similar is the case with the Sufis. Some of
them learn only the terminology of the real Sufis and think they are likewise
able to see God. Some are always wondering about the power and majesty
of God and do nothing more. Some do actually try to cleanse the heart and
perform good actions but wrongly think that they have passed most of the
stages and are the true lovers of God. Again, there are some who make a
distinction between Sbari'ah and tariqah and regard themselves above -Shariah.
They give up the performance of obligatory duties and religious observances.
The same is the ease with the learned and the rich, who are generally involved
in one kind of self-delusion or another.
Thus, we end the brief and synoptic survey of al QJpzali's account of the
main vices of character. Now we turn to virtues, which are the redeeming
qualities (almunjiyal) and represent the positive efforts of the seeker
towards God. Al-Ghazali has given us a detailed, interesting, and illuminating
63!
A History of Muslim Philosophy
discussion on this topic in the fourth quarter of his "Revivification of
Religious Sciences." The virtues that, speaking chronologically, come first
are repentance, abstinence, poverty, and patience. Repentance belongs to
the purgative period of b'fe which is an indispensable prerequisite for the
higher stages. It means abandoning the sins of which man is conscious and
resolving never to return to them. It is a sort of spiritual conversion. "Those
who repent and believe and do righteous work, for such Allah will change
their evil deeds to good deeds."*1 The penitent knows that his heart has been
shrouded in the mist and darkness of sins, feels contrition and shame, and
abandons them for ever. Love of the world, which is the root of all vices,
has, however, to be removed first; the passions have to be subjected to a
strict control and the devil within has to be turned out. But, certainly, we
do not give up the world for nothing. We do get something in return: “... the
ascetic who renounces what is sensual and material knows that what is abandon
ed is of small value in relation to what is gained, just as the merchant knows
that what he receives in exchange is better than what is sold, otherwise he
would not sell."*’ Al-Ghazali compares the ascetic with a person who is pre
vented from entering into the palace by a dog at the gate. He throws a morsel
towards it and thus, by distracting its attention, enters and gets his desires
from the king. The dog is like Satan, who prevents him from going towards
God, and the morsel of bread is like the world by the sacrifice of which we
can get something better.
This brings us to the virtue of abstinence (zuAdj. Repentance is simply
turning away from something, whereas abstinence includes turning away from
as well as towards something better and more excellent. As a term in Sufistio
literature, it signifies severing the heart's attachment from all worldly things,
purging it of the rubbish, and then adorning it with the love of God. Abstinence
can, in fact, have three grades. We might be inspired and motivated by the
love of God itself, by the hope of reward, or by the fear of punishment. The
highest grade is the love of God which makes us sacrifice all considerations
of heaven and hell for the sake of God. This is alnolute abstinence (zuhd al-
muflag). We are reminded here of the fable of a saint who waa oarrying in
one hand a flame and in the other a glass of water with the alleged purpose
of burning heaven with the ono and quenching the fire of hell with the other,
so that everyone acts sincerely to attain nearness to God.
The individual who renounces the world is a poor man <faqir) in the ter
minology of al-Ghazali and, in fact, of all mystics. So poverty is to be wil
fully cultivated. The /aqir.i are of various kinds: the abstinent (mhid), who
is pained when wealth comes to him; the satisfied (nu/i), who is neither
pleased at the possession of wealth nor pained at its loss, and when it comes
to him he does not positively hate it; the contented (qani1), who wants to
” Ibul.. xxv. 70,
•> Margaret Smith, Al-Q^izuli: The .VyMrr, pp. 1117 <>8.
632
Al-QhazAli (Continued)
get wealth but does not actively pursue this desire; the greedy (harif). who
has a very strong desire to get property but is somehow or other unable to
do so; the constrained (mudlar), who, being in a state of want, such aa star
vation or nakedness, is ill at ease and in consternation. Tho first of thes’.
i.e., one in the state of being a Mid, is the best. The Mid is the ono who,
being busy in enjoying the love of God, is indifferent to all worldly losses and
gains.
All the virtues considered above—repentance, abstinence, poverty—demand
an immense amount of courage and steadfastness. They are not possible to
attain without unswerving passion, which ia doubly more difficult to cultivate,
impatience being in the very nature of man?’ It, however, does not mean
toleration of things that are illegal and against religion. If a man wrongs
us, we may pay him back in the same coin; if he strikes us, we can strike him
too (though forgiveness is also commendable). Patienoe in the real sense of
the term has three grades: patience in performing a religious duty, patience
in avoiding actions prohibited by God. and patience over sufferings and diffi
culties in the arduous path towards Him. The last grade is the noblest.
Gratitude (shukr) too is a necessary virtue and also so difficult that
** It is. according to al-Gh«'Ali, complementary to
only a few can exercise it.
patience: he who eats until he is satisfied and is thankful is in the same station
as he who fasts and ia patient. Further, gratitude is based upon man's know
ledge that all that comes to him comes from God and upon the feeling of
joy over it. If one is pleased with tho gift only, without any reference to the
Giver, it is no gratitude: "Gratitude is the vision of the Giver, not the gift.”
Secondly, we may be pleased with the Giver over a gift because it is a sign
of His pleasure. This is gratitude, no doubt, but of a low variety. The highest
stage is reached when we are pleased with the Giver and determine to use
His gift in order to attain greater and greater nearness to Him. "If ye give
thanks," sa ve God, "I shall give you more, but if ye are thankless. My punish
**
ment is dire."
After repentance from sin and successful renunciation of the world, the
individual directs his attention towards his own self with a view to making it
submissive and obediont to the will of God. The process has various steps and
stages: assigning the task to the self (mushdralah), watching over the self
(murdqabah), taking critical account of the self (muhduabah), punishing the
self (mu'aqabah), exerting the self (mujahadah), and upbraiding the self
(mu alahah). The whole affair which results in self-mastery is so difficult that
it has been called tho bigger jihad (al-jihad al-akhar). while the physical
fighting against the enemies of Islam is tho smaller jihad (al jihad al-asjhar).
We have constantly to keep a vigilant eye on our thoughts and actions and
check ourselves at every step. We have to convince our hearts of the omni-
*• Qur'&n, lxx. IB.
•• Ibid., xxxiv. 13
“ Ibid., xiv. 7
fi.33
A History of Muslim Philoeoph*
presence of God and Hit omniscience: that God knows even what lies hidden
in the innermost depths of our being. Such a conviction creates in the soul an
ill-pervading reverence for God. Single-mindedness (ikhty) is the fruit of the
self thoroughly mastered and trained. A fashioned soul has only one motive
force, and that ia the desire for nearness to God; the lesser purposes are weeded
out.
Single-mindedness leads to the virtue of truthfulness (fidq). Truthfulness
is there in words, intentions, and actions. Truthfulness in words consists in
making a statement which is unequivocal and clear and is not aimed at deceiv
ing others. We can. however, in some cases make ambiguous and false state
ments if thereby we are aiming at the betterment of society. Such special
cases may be war tactics, restoration of happy relations between husband and
wife, amity among Muslims, and so on. Further, our intention must be rightful
and true. The ri’ht direction of intention is very important because actions
are judged only by intentions”: if our intention is good and the result inci
dentally turns out to be bad. we are not to blame; conversely, if our intention
is evil, we are culpable whatever its outcome. Lastly, truthfulness in actions
lies in the fact that tho inward state of a person is literally translated into
outward behaviour without any tinge of hypocrisy. The highest truthfulness
which iB at the same time most difficult to attain is the complete realization
of the various attitudes of the soul towards God, e.g.. trust, hope, love, etc.®’
Fear /khau/) and hope (raja') also mark stages in moral progress. Fear may
be of the wrath and the awe-inspiring attributes of God, or it may be
prmluced in man by the consciousness of his guilt and the apprehension of
divine displeasure. A nobler kind of fear is aroused by the feeling of separation
from God who is the ultimate goal of all our aspirations. Hope, on the other
hand, is a pleasant tendency. It oonsists in the expectation, after the individual
has tried his best, of the divine love in the world and of the beatific vision
in the hereafter, Fear is the result of knowledge—the knowledge of our
infirmity as compared with the supremacy of our ideal: hope is the result of
assured faith in the loving kindness of our Lord in acceding to our requests
and prayers. It lies at a higher plane because it strengthens love and enables
man to realize the goal
The highest virtue, according to al-Qhazili. is reliance (tawaktul), which is
baud on the knowledge of God’s oneness or unification (tauhtd). Those who
profess belief in unification may be classified into three groups: those, including
hypocrites, who confess the unity with the tongue only; those who believe on
tho basis of some so-called reliable authority; and those who, on the evidenoe
of their direct, intuitive perception, believe that God is the unmoved mover
oi tho material world and tho ultimate cause of all creation and that lie alone
has real or absolute existence. The last stage is the highest. It signifies "that
the servant can abandon himself to God in complete trust and merge his will
*• Tho opening WHJ in al-SMh al-ButbAri
•' Al Ghasilli, IW. Part IV. pp. 334-35.
634
Al Qhaxilh (Continued)
tn the divine will. The servant no longer finds his own powers and personality
to be self-sufficient and has allowed God to dominate his life ... ho considers
himself as a dead body moved by tho divine decree and is content that the
divine strength should replace his own human weakness.Reliance, therefore,
is the casting of the soul into self-surrender and the withdrawal of it from
self-assertion.
The moral soldier who is sinoerely set upon his task must also form the habit
of meditation and reflection He has to reflect, on the works of God, on the
alternation of day and night, on tho waxing and waning of the moon, on
tho rise and fall of nations, and on the general management of this ooemological
scheme. For that purpose seclusion away from the active hustle and bustle
of society is very necessary. A heart preoccupied with worldly thingB has no
plaoe for tho knowledge of God. Tho true significance of meditation is a firm
conviction in the omnipresence of God, which results from the realization
that Ho is aware of what we do under cover of darkness and of what lies
buried in tho innermost depths of our hoart. Further, from meditation and
reflection the soul is led on to contemplation, which is of three kinds: (i)
contemplation hi al-hagq, i.e., the seeing of things pointing towards divine
unity; (ii) contemplation li al-haqq; i.e., seeing signs of the Creator in created
things; and, finally, (iii) the contemplation of God Himself. This form of
contemplation surely and undeniably leads to His love, the final aim of all
moral endeavour. The last stage of contemplation and the love of God are
not, however, the results of, but are simply occasioned by. our concentration
and thinking. There is nothing like a causal necessity here. The sacred know,
ledge is direct and immediate and is due to God only. Tho Sufi has the im
pression that something has dropped upon him "os gentle rain from heaven.''
a gift of God due to His grace and mercy.
The highest mntemplation is the valence of love, absorption of all human
attributes :r. lae vision of God, and then anni'dlation in the everlastingness
of God. But why in the first instance should mere contemplation lead to His
love t In answer, al-Ghazkli explains at length how God is tho ultimate and
absolute source of all the causes because of which objects arc loved. The
sentiment of love is, broadly speaking, of four kinds:
(i) Self-love. An egoistic tendency is ingrained in the very nature of man.
Instincts and the so-called organio needs point towards that fact. Our soul,
life, or the pure ego is, certainly, the dearest to us, but beyond that wo also
love what William James would call our material and social selves
(ii) Love of a benefactor for the benefits received from him. This is also
a sort of self-love, though an indirect one. We love others because they promote
our own cause in one way or another. We love the physician because he looks
after our health and the engineer because he beautifies our material environ
ments and. thus, makes our lives comfortable and happy.
*• Margaret Smith, op. oil., pp. 167-68.
635
A History of Muslim Plnlosophy
(iii) Love of beauty. Beauty has almost universally been recognized as a
'hing of intrinsic value. It means the orderly and systematic arrangement
of parts, and this is not the quality of material things only; it lies in the
activities and the behaviour of man and in his ideas and concepts. Whatever
is beautiful is loved by us for ita own sake.
(iv) Love due to the harmonious interaction and secret affinity between two
souls. A thief loves a thief and a noble person loves a noble friend.
Now, if love exists for all these separate causes, will not that individual
be loved who holds all these in their supreme and perfect form 1 Such an
individual is God HimBclf. the possessor of the most lovable qualities. It is to
Him that we owe our very existence. He is the only real benefactor and from
Him all benefits are received. If we get something from a human being, it
really conies from God. Had He willed otherwise, wo would not have been
able to get it. Thirdly, God also possesses tho attributes of beauty. There is
beauty in His design and in His creative behaviour. “God is beautiful and
loves beauty,”" said the Holy Prophet. Lastly, the human soul has affinity
with ita divine source: God has created man after His own image. So onoe
we know God with all these attributes and also know where we stand in
relation to Him, our love for Him beoomes a necessity. And then He loves us
too. "Verily Allah loves the repentant and those who purify themselves.”*’
But the lover who claims to love the Most Lovable must show some signs.
The first sign, according to al-GhazAli. is that the lover has no fear of death,
for it means meeting the Beloved face to face and having a direct vision of
Him. This world is a hindrance and a barrier which obstructs the lover's path.
The sooner it is done away with, the better. Another mark of the true lover
is that the remembrance of God ever remains fresh in his heart. Onoe the fire
of love is kindled, it cannot be extinguished. It remains ever ablaze and the
flames go on rising higher and higher. The lover, in fact, feels happy in this
condition. That is why he often seeks undisturbed loneliness to brighten
these flames by contemplation and onesided thought. Further, the lover
sacrifices his will for that of the Beloved. His likes and dislikes, his behaviour
and his ways of life are entirely directed and controlled by God. Lastly, the
intensity of love for God demands that we should love all His activities. So
also we should love our fellow-men for they are all His servants and creatures.
Love includes longing (ibauq). for every lover pines to see the beloved
when absent. The lover of God craves for the vision of God which would be
the noblest grace and the highest delight held out to him. Again, love results
in affability (uns), which, according to al-Qhazali, is one of the most glorious
fruits of love and signifies the feeling of pleasure and delight consequent upon
God’s nearness and the perception of His beauty and perfection. Thirdly,
successful love means satisfaction (ridu ). This includes the satisfaction of
“ aL-WoMbi* "Bib al-Qhadab w al-Kibr."
•• Qur’in, ii. 222.
636
Al-Qhor.ftli (Continued)
God with men and the satisfaction of men with Him. "God is satisfied with
them and they with God.-'*1 This ia tho stage of the tranquil soul (al-nafs
al-mutma'innah). “0 tranquil soul!” God will say, "return to thy Lord well-
pleased (with Him) and well-pleasing (Him), so enter among My servants and
enter into My garden."”
Now, because love ia consequent upon the knowledge and contemplation of
God, the lover ia the gnostio ('dri/). Gnosis '(ma'rilah), however, ia a gem, a
precious thing which is not to be wasted: the sun which enlightens the heart
of the gnostic, says al Qhszali, is more radiant than our physical sun; for
that sun sets and may be eclipsed, but the sun of gnosis knows no eclipse nor
does it set. It is an invaluable gift to be given only to those who deserve it
and to be given more or less according to tho degree of self-mortification to
which they attain. The limited human mind ia not capablo of grasping the
entire expanse of divine majesty. The more one knows of God, the more one
loves Him. The height of contemplation is reached when plurality passes away
entirely, whon there ia complete cessation of conscious perception of things
other than the Beloved, and the individual sees God everywhere. It was in
this state that ono said, "I am the Truth"; and another, "Glory be to Me!
How great is My majesty”; and another, "Under this robe is naught but
God.” Thia is the state of absolute unicity and identity.
The gnostic and the lover of God in this world will see God in the next world.
The Mu'tazilites had denied tho beatific vision because it involved a directing of
the eyes on tho part of the seer and the position on the part of the seen. They
said that because God is beyond space, the question of limiting Him to a
particular place and direction does not arise. But ai-Qhazali meets their
objection by saying that this vision, like meditation, will not have any re
ferences to the eye or any other sense-organ. It will be without their mediation.
Similarly, just as the conception of God is free from the implication of spatial
and temporal characteristics, so will the vision of Him be beyond all such
limitations and boundaries.
C
INFLUENCE
Al-GhazAH's influence within Islam has been both profound and most
widespread: his works have been and still are being read and studied from
West Africa to Oceania more than those of any other Muslim writer, and his
teaching has been accepted and made a rule of life more than that of any
other theologian. It has been claimed and rightly so that "al-Ghazali's influence,
taken singly, on the Muslim community has been perhaps greater than that
of all the scholastic theologians."
•> Ibid., xoviii, 8.
■■ Ibid., Ixxxix, 27-30.
637
A History of Muslim Philosophy
But we hasten to add that, like any other original thinker in the world,
al-Ghazali did not go without his share of criticism. The unprecedented
attempt on his part to make orthodoxy mystical and mysticism orthodox, and
both philosophical, naturally incurred suspicion and criticism from all schools
of thought and all shades of opinion both before and after his death. Liberals
have criticized him for his conservatism, and conservatives for his liberalism;
philosophers for his orthodoxy, and the orthodox for his philosophy.
AlGhaztll’s constant use of philosophical language and his mode of argu
ment and preoccupation with Sufism led Tartilghi (d. 520/1126), al-Maz&ri
(d. 536/1141), ibn Jauzi (d. 597/1200), ibnal-Salib (d. 643/1245), ibn Taimlyyah
(d. 728/1328), ibn Qayyim (d. 751/1350) and other famous theologians of the
orthodox school to denounce him publicly as “one of the misguided." Ibn
Jauzi is reported to have once exclaimed: "How cheaply has al-Qfeazili
traded theology for Sufisml"*’ Ibn Taimlyyah, on the other hand, has accused
him of having traded “theology” for philosophy. Qad‘ “*IU Abd Allah Muham
mad ibn Hamdin of Cordova went so far as to issue a decree (fatim) against
al-Ghazidl’s works, with the result that all his liooks including the lhyi'u were
burnt and destroyed throughout Spain and the possession of them waa for
bidden on the threat of confiscation of property or even on that of death. The
destruction of his philosophical and even theological writings waa also ordered
in North Africa during the reign of the Marrtkugh SulUn 'Ali ibn Yusuf ibn
TUgfaifln (477/1084—537/1142). who was fanatically orthodox in his religious
views. Both of these incidents, however, boar ample testimony to the fact that
al-Obaz&U's writings had gained a very wide circulation in the Muslim West
even as early as that.
Amongst the philosophers, al-Qhazali'e most renowned and bitterest critio
was ibn Rughd (520/1126-595/1198). He took up a point-by-point refutation of
al-Ghazali's arguments against the philosophers as given in the TahSfui and
named his own work Taha/ul al- Taha/ul (576/1180). Ibn Rngfad's defence of the
philosophers is aa subtle and vigorous as is al-Qhazali's attack against them.
Ibn Rughd indeed handles his arguments with accomplished understanding
and ingenious skill, yet, in the considered opinion of those who are competent
to judge, al.Qhaz&ll's arguments are in the final analysis more telling than
those of his adversary.“ Ibn Rughd in the course of his discussion accuses
al-Gjjazali of hypocrisy and insincerity by saying that his polemics against
the philosophers was merely to win the favour of the orthodox-,” there is
nothing to substantiate this charge, ne also accused al-QfaazMi of inoormisten-
Cf. JamlU nl-Dln ibn al-Jauzi, alN/lmUs fi Taibis IblU. Cairo, 1340/1921,
p. 377.
“ For the theologians’ various objections to l^ya' and an answer to them, see
M. Hanlf Nadawi, Alkir-i QbasAli, Lahore. 1956. pp. 61-73.
“ Cf., e.g., Majid Fakhry, Islamic Occasionalism, London, 1959. pp. 103 el sqq.
“ Cf. also ibn Itujhd. al Kalb! an ManUij al-AMlah. Cairo, 1319/1901, pp. 57
el eg.
638
AlQbazftli (Continued)
ciea in his thought. He alleges, for example, that in the thshhil al-Anwar
al-QflazAli lends wholehearted support to tho theory of emanation which he
had so vehemently criticised in the TaUfut." Al-Ghazall's teaching, according
to him, » sometimes detrimental to religion and sometirdes to philosophy and
sometimes to both. It is said, on the report of ibn Taimlyyah. that ibn Rudyl
was so struck by the duplicity of al-Ghazill's thought that he would often
quote the following verse with reference to him. "One day you are a Yemenite
when you meet a man from Yemen. But when you see someone from Ma'adtl
you assert you are from ■AdnSn!”***
The charge of inconsistency against al-GhazAli has also been made by
another Muslim philosopher, namely ibn Tufail (d. 901/1185). who says that
in his works meant for general readers alQbazali is "bound in one place and
loose in another and has denied certain things and then declared them to be
true." In spite of his pointing out certain contradictions in al-Ghazr>ll's works
ibn Tufail had on the whole great admiration*® for his teaching, and the
influence of it can be seen in his own greatly admired philosophical romance.
Hayy Bin Yaq^ln.
Indeed, the amount of criticism levelled against al-Qiiazali70 is itaelf the
proof of his widespread influence. The number of al-Gfoazali’s followers and
admirers who accepted his teaching and spread it is immensely greater than
that of his critics; it is neither possible nor useful here to give a long catalogue
of names. One fact, however, becomes conspicuous that it inoludea mostly
people of two types, namely, the orthodox theologians and the Sufis, or those
who were equally qualified aa both. This makes it clear that the influence of
al-Ghaz&li within Islam expressed itaelf simultaneously in two different
traditions, i.e.. those of mysticism and orthodoxy, and, thus, along with the
other forces of history went a long way in determining tho permanent attitude,-
in the religious consciousness of the Islamic community, namely, the attitude-
of spiritualization and fundamentalism.
Of all the works of al-Ghaz&li it is in his Ihya that he tries to maintain an
equidistant poise between these two aspects of the religious consciousness
Ifiy/l' indeed is still the most widely read of all the works of al-Qfaaz&li in all
■' Cf. AfidHr aLAmntr. English translation by W. H. T. Gaininer. Lahore,
pp. 17-21.
•• Quoted by F. Rahman, op. at., London. 1958, p. 112. It is significant to note
that 8. van den Bergh concludes in hia introduction to Awrmr»‘ Tahdfut al.
TaMful that rowmbknem between Qhazilli and Averroee seem sometimes greater
than their differences, pp. xxxv. xxxvi.
Cf. ibn Tufail. Hayy Bin YoytAn (Urdu trans, by Zafar Abmad Siddlqi).
Aligarh, 1955. pp. 20 30.
’• For a modem criticism of al-Ghantli cf. M Zaki Abd al Salim MubJrak.
al-AkilOq 'ind alQhazM. Cairo. 1924 (Urdu trans, by Nur al-Hasan RbOn.
Lahore, 1950). Very recently F. Rahman in his short treatment of al-QliazAli's
views on prophecy in the above-cited work has made a very strong charge of
inconMiKt^ncy against him.
639
A HiKtory of Muslim Philosophy
sections of the community, if not in its entirety st least in the form of fragments
and summaries which arc available in large numbers.’1 It has been so eulogized
by some that they have not hesitated to call it the second Qur'in, and the
theologians and traditionalism have not tired of writing voluminous commen
taries on it.
But it is not within Islam only that al-Qjiaz&li's influence exerted itself so
strongly; it also had its impact on Western, particularly Jewish and Christian,
thought, and indeed has flowed right into the most modern of our philosophical
traditions. The influence of al-GhazAli on modern European philosophy is a
fascinating subject. It will be dealt with in the next volume in the chapter on
"The Influence of Muslim Philosophy on the West."
BIBLIOGRAPHY
So far the beet sources for a bibliography on al-Ghaxili are Sayyid Murtaja.
Iuihdf al-Sddah. Cairo, 1311/1893, Vol. I, pp. 41-44; Carl Brockelmann, GeacAicA/e
dor arabuehen Litteratur, Weimar. 1898, Vol. I. pp. 419-28, Supplementbande. Leiden.
1937, Vol. I. pp. 744 a ogg.; and ZweiU den SuppUmenlbanden angepaeete Aufiage.
Vol. I, Leiden, 1943, pp. 535 a egg. A list of articles on al-Ghax4U in English and some
of the European languages published in the various periodicals, etc., from 1906-1956
is to be found in Index Idamicue. Cambridge, 1968, pp. 150-52. A fairly compre-
htmrivs subject-wise classification of al-QbaxAIfs works and a topic-wise, though
brief, bibliography can bo found in tho article "Al-GbazrAli" in the Encyclopaedia
of Ieiam. In the three sections below an attempt has been made to list: (i) those
of al-Qbazkli's works which can be arranged in a chronological order with some
measure of certainty, (ii) works tho authenticity of which has boon doubted by
the professional students of al-Ghazftli (for both these sections, of. note No. 24 in
the preceding chapter), and (iii) books (or sections thereof) and articles most of
which have boon referred to in tho notes but which aro not included in any of tho
sources mentioned above.
I. Maqdfid al-Faidoifah, 2nd edition, Egypt, 1355/1936 (statomont of tho teach
ings of the Muslim Peripatetics); Mi'ydr al-'Ilm, Cairo, 1329/1911 (an elaborate
treatise on logic); Tahdfui al FaUeifah, nd. M. Bouyges, S. J., Beyrouth. 1927
(against tho philosophers); Mihalek al-Nazar. Cairo (a smaller work on logic);
al Muelaehiri, Leiden. 1916 (against the Bafinitw); al-IgtifOd fi alFtigdd. Cairo,
1327/1909 (on speculative theology); IhyA' 'Ulim al-Din, 15 Vole, Cairo. 1356/
>937-1357/1938 (magnum opus. a compendium of al-Ghaz&li's wholo system);
SidAyal oI-HiddyaA,Cairo. 1353/1934, 47 pp. (on religious oonduct; the authenticity
of tho closing section, pp. 40-47, doubtful); al H.kmah fi MaUflaqdl Allah. Cairo,
1321/1903 (on evidence of God's wisdom in His creation); al-Maqfad al-Ama fi
Arm/1' AUah al-Huena. Cairo. 1322/1904 (an exhortation to imitation of the divino
qualities); al-Imld' 'an IifikOldl ol-lhya' (reply to attacks on Ihyd’. can be found on
the margin of 8ayyid Murta<J4’B Ittihaf al Sddah, Vol. I. pp. 41-252; the definitions
of the Sufi terms in the introduction ore perhaps not authentic); al-MadnOn bihi
ala-Qiairi AMihi, Cairo. 1309/1891 (an esoteric work to be kept from those unfit
n With tho exception of sl-QharAli's own Kimiya-i Sa'Mol (in Persian), the
first of such summaries was written by al Ghazftll'a own brother, A bmad al-GharAH
(d. 520/1126), under the title loibab al-lhyd’. A list of these may be found in
Sayyid Murtadi's IttiMf al SOdah, Cairo. 1311/1893, p. 41.
640
Al-QhazAli (Continued)
for it); JawOMr al-Qur'An. Egypt (on eipoeition of the feith of the orthodox on tho
ixuto of tho Qur'An); KMb al-Arba'ln. Cairo. 1328/1910 (a oooond part of tho pro
coding work); Almiya.Sa'Adal (in Persian), lithograph edition, Bombay (a summary
of /Aya’; to be distinguished from a spurious work of the same title in Arabic);
ol Qustdr <J.Mustakim. Cairo, 1318,'1900 (a smaller work against the BAtinites);
/!)*» ol-’Awdmm ’on ’/Im alKaUm, Egypt. 1309/1891 (a work on tho science of
dogmatics): AyywAa al-Walad. Egypt, 1343/1924 (advice in tho sphere of ascetic
theology): ol-.Vungittt min nl-(>aAU. Damascus. 1358/1939 (autobiographical);
Mifhkat al-Anwar, Egypt. 1343/1924 (on mysticism : an exposition of the light versa
in the Qur'An; the authenticity of the veil-section at the end ia questionable;
cf. note No. 24 above).
Il, Al-Durral al-Fakbiroh Kafhf 'VUm al-Aibirab, ed. Gauthier, Leipzig. 1877;
KuOlab Ladunniyah, Cairo. 1343/1924 (English translation by Margaret Smith);
Journal o/ lAc Royal .ljutrw. ft'oetaly, 1938. pp. 177-200, 363-74; Hawial
al-falMn wa 'Vmdal al-SolMn in Fard’id al-la’ali, Cairo, 1343/1924, pp. 121-261;
Sirr al-'Alamain ira Kaiif ”»> fi al-Ddrain. Cairo. 1328/1910; Kt/ntyd’ al-Sa'adah
(Arabic) in al-JauMir al.QiauAli, Cairo, 1343/1924; al-Na/th al-Tatwtyyah
(referred to by Sayyid Murtads in /HiAd/); al iladnOn alSag^r, also known aa
al-Ajunbah al-Qba:<lliyyab fi al-MaM’il al-L'tbrawiyyah, Cairo, 1309/1891; al
MaAnun bihi 'ala (Ibairi AMifii. Cairo. 1309/1891; Manful (refutation of tho
Fiqh of abu Hanifah; referred to in Ka^j al-^unun)-, Mi'rdj al-Sdlikin in Fard'itf
al-La'dli. Cairo. 1343/1924, pp. 1-99; MukAebafat al-Quito. Cairo. 1300/1882;
MinMj al 'Abidin, Cairo, 1313/1895; fifuAn al-'Amal, Cairo, 1328/1910.
in. (A) Books.—S. A. KamAli, ai-QAauUi'. TaM/ul al-Falamlah (English trans-
lation). The Pakistan Philosophical Congress, Lahore. 1958; W. M. Watt. The
Faith and Practice of al-QhazAli (English translation of at-Munqiih min ol-Qalal
and Biddyat al-Hiddyah), George Allen & Unwin. London. 1953; Muhammad
Hanlf Nadawi. Qadlm Tfindni Falnafah (Urdu translation of Magdeid al-Faideijah),
MajliB-i Taraqql-i Adah, Labor*.. 1959; Sarguilfa^t-i Q^azdli (Urdu translation
of al-Munqidh *"»** ai-QalAl with an Introduction), Institute of Islamic Culture,
Lahore, 1959; Ajkdr-i Q^azdli (al-GhazAli's teachings with regard to knowlodge
and faith b*u»nd on lhyd' with an Introduction). Institute of Islamic Culture, Lahore,
I960 (Urdu); M. Absan. Madhdq ai-'lrifin (Urdu translation of Ihyd'). 4 Vote..
Ma(ba'ah Tejkumar, Lucknow. 1956 (seventh edition); M. ‘In&yat Allah. Klmtya-i
Sa’ddat (Urdu translation). Din Muhammadi Press. Lahore, n.d. (revised edition);
Sayyid ‘Abd al-Quddus HAifaimi Nadawi, al-Murehid al-Amin (summary of
Ihyd" in Urdu), Urdu Manxil, Karachi. 1955; Syed Nawab Ali, Same Moral anti
Religioue Teaching! of al-QJjazzali (English translation of extract* from Parts
III and IV of lhyd' with Introduction by Alban G. Widgcry), Shaikh Muhammad
Ashraf, Lahore. 1946; Claud Field. The Alchemy of liappincM (English translation
of some parts of Kimiyad Sa'ddat}, Sh. Muhammad Ashraf. Lahore, n.d. (reprint
from tho Wisdom of the East. Seriea); W. H. T. Gairdner. Mi&hkdt al-Anwdr,
Sh. Muhammad Ashraf. Lahore, 1952 (new edition); SulaimAn Dunya. Tahdfut
al-Faldsifah li al-Ohazdli. Cairo, 1947; al-Haqiqah fi Nazar al QhazAii, D&r Ibyft’
al-Kutub al-'Arablyyah. Cairo, n.d.; A. W. Zuhuri, Mak&tibd Imam Q^aziili (Letters
of al Gfaaxali in Urdu), Karachi. 1949; M. Umaruddin, The Ethical Philosophy of
al-QhazzAli, 4 Part*, published by the author. Muslim University, Aligarh, 1949-
1951; Some Fundamental Aspects of Imdm Qhazzdli'e Thought. Irihad Book Depot,
Aligarh, 1946; Nur al-Hasan KhAn, Qhazdh ka Taeawuw-i Akhldq (Urdu trans
lation of Dr. Zaki MubArak's al-Akhldg dnd al-Qhazzdli). nl-Maktabat al- Ilmlyyah.
Lahore. 1956; Shibli Nu'mAni. alQjjazdli. M. Thana Allah KhAn. Lahore, 1956
(Urdu); Simon van den Bergh. A verruca Tahdfut al-Tahdfut (English translation
with extensivo notes), 2 Vole., Oxford University Press. Oxford. 1954. An Urdu
641
A History of Muslim Philosophy
translation of ibn Rujfcd's TaMful al- TaMful is under preparation, to be published
by tho Board for Advancement of Literature. Lahore.
(Bisections of Books.—*Abd id-SalAm Nadawi. Hukamd'-i Islam, Azamgarh, 1953,
Vol. I. pp. 386-408 (Urdu); abu al-Haeim 'Alt. Tiiriki -i Ds'rals 'Azimal, Azam-
garb, 1375/1953, Part I, pp. 111-81 (Urdu); Majid Fakhry. Islamic Occasionalism,
George Allen A Unwin, London, 1958, chapter 2 and by index; M. M. Sharif,
Muslim Thought: Ils Origin and Ar-hievemsnU, Sh. Muhammad Ashraf. Lahore,
1931, pp. 75-80; F. Rahman, Prophecy in Islam, George Allen A Unwin, London,
1958. P|>. 94-99; M. Saeed Sheikh, Studies in Muslim Philosophy (in press). Pakistan
Philosophical Congress, laihoro, chapter on al Qhazili; D. M. Donaldson, Studies in
Muslim Ethics, S. P. C. K.. London 1953, chapter 6 and by index; A. J. Arberry.
Sufism, George Allen & Unwin. London. 1936 (second impression), pp. 74-73,
79-83 and by index: S. M. Afnin, Ar-irenna: His Life and Works, George Allen
A Unwin, London, 1958. pp. 235-41; E. I. J. Kownthai, Political Thought in
Medieval Islam. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge. 1958, pp. 38-43 and
by index; J. W. Sweetman, Islam -and Christian Theology, Lutterworth Press,
l-ondon, 1955, Part If, Vol. I, pp. 90-93, 262-309 and by index of authors;
C. Hartshorne and W. L. Roeee. Philosophers Speak of Ood, Chicago. 1933. pp.
106-11.
(C) Articles.—G. F. Hourani, "Al QharAli and tho Philosophers on the Origin of the
World," The Muslim World, 1958, Vol. XLVIII, Noe. 3 4 4, pp. 183-91, 308-14;
Michael E. Marmura, "Al GhazSli and the Argument of Timo," The Muslim World.
1939, Vol. XUX, No. 4; M. M. Sharif. "Mualim Philosophy and Western
Thought.” Iyhal. July 1959, Vol. VIH. No. 1. pp. 7-14; M. Hanlf Nadawi. “Qhnrab
ka Napiyyah-i Ta'lll," Tkagdfal (Urdu). Institute of Islamic Culture, Lahore, July
1959, Vol. VH. No. 7, pp. 11-19,
Chapter XXXII
FAKHR AI.-DlN RAZI
LIFE, SIGNIFICANCE OF THOUGHT. AND WORKS
The intellectual life of Islam after the attacks of Ajh'ari and Ghazali upon
rationalistic philosophy can be largely described aa the gradual transition
from the rationalism of Aristotelian philosophy toward the intuitive and
illuminative wisdom of the 1 jhriqin' and Sufis. Although Islam began to weaken
politically and culturally during the later part of the 'Abbdsid Caliphate,
Muslim thought especially in the Shl'ah world continued the process of divorc
ing itself from the categories of Peripatetic philosophy. One of the most
influential and Oolourful figures in this movement, who played a major role
in the attack against the rationalists, was Fakbr al-Din R&zi, who ia considered
1 For the definition and description of this term refer tn chapter on "ShihAh
al-Din Suhrnwardi Maqtill."
642
Fakhr al Din RAzi
to be the reviver of Islam in tho sixth/twelfili century as GhazAli was in the
fifth/eleventh.1 RAzi is in many ways a second GhazAli; in fact, he may without
exaggeration be considered to be one of the greatest Muslim theologians.
Abu al-Fadl Muhammad ibn 'Umar, known as Fakhr al-Din RAzi and also
as ImAm Fakhr, ibn al-Khattb, and Zmdm al-Jfutbakkikin (the ImAm of the
Doubters),’ was bom in Rayy in northern Persia in 543/1149 in a family of
scholars who came originally from TabaristAn. His father, pia’ al-Din, was
a well-known scholar in Rayy and was ImAm Fakhra first teacher. Later,
Fakhr al-Din studied philosophy with Muhammad al-Baghawi and Majd
al-Dln al-Jlli (the latter being also the teacher of -Shaikh al-Ishraq ShihAb
al-Din Suhrawardi) and theology with KamAl al-Din Simnani in Rayy and
MarAgfaah, and soon became a master of all the sciences of his time including
even the mathematical, medical, and natural sciences-4
Having completed his formal studies, Im Am Fakhr set out for KhwArnm to
combat the Mu'tazilites, and from there journeyed to Transoxiana and was
warmly accepted at the Courts of the Ghur rulers, GhivAth al-Dln and his
brother Shihab al-Din. But this stay terminated soon due to the op(x>sition
and jealousy of certain scholars and courtiers. Consequently, Imam Fakhr
left the Ghfir Court for Ghaznah. where he taught for a slide, and finally
settled in HerAt where, under the patronage of KhwArizm SfaAh Ala al-Din.
a special school was built for him. There he spent the rest of his life as a teacher
and preacher in oomfort and honour among a large number of disciples and
students who came from all over the Muslim world to study undor him. He
passed away at tho height of fame and glory in 606/1209 *
The career of ImAm Fakhr is in many ways a repetition of that of Qhazali’s
Like his great predecessor, he was of the ShAfi'i school, well versed in all the
sciences and philosophy and yet opjioscd to many aspects of the Greek heritage,
a critic of tho Muslim philosophers, and drawn towards Sufism.1 In theology.
• According to a AodilA. in each century God sends a greet sage and scholar
into the world to strengthen Islam. Muslim historians, following thia badili. have
searched during each century for the fittest person to receive this honour.
• He was given this title because bo doubted so many of the views of the previous
philoaophfrs and evon of the theologians.
• In the H'a/ayOt td-zTytln, ibn KhallikAn writes that ImAm RAzi was the
greatest authority on the Greek sciences f'ulum al-awbil) in lus time. Tho best
sources for the biography of RAzi are ihn abi U$aibi‘ah, •C/yfln al-Anha’. ibn al-
Qiffi. Tirikk alHukarM', ibn KJjallikAn. KMb W'a/oydt al-A'ytn, Shams al-Din
Shehrazuri, Nuihal al-Arw6h wa Raudat al-A/rAh, and ibn Taqi al-Dln al-Subki,
Tabaqtu al-Skafi’tyyal al-Kubra.
• Al-Subki, 1'al’aMl nl-SW'yyal al-Kubra. Matba'at al-Husainlyyah, Cairo.
1324/1906, Vol. V. pp. 33-40.
• Although not a great Sufi figure liko GbazAli. ImAm RAzi was nevertheless
sympathetic towards Sufism, especially in the later period of his life. Subki, op. cd..
p. 35. writes that RAzi waa himself a Sufi, and some of his poems and frequent
quotations from the Sufi master" like HallAj and abti Sa'rd certainly point in this
direction.
643
A History of Muslim Philosophy
ill which he followed the Agb'arite school, he was certainly influenced by
Gbazali and Imam al-flaramain. In philosophy he came under the influence
of his compatriot. Mubammad Zakariya Razi, aa well as ibn Sina, and in
physics his master was without doubt abu al-Barakit al-BagbdAdi. Like a
series of anti-Aristotelian philosophers before him, ImAm Fakbr tried to
reconcile religion and rational philosophy by relianoe upon ideas derived
more from tho Timaeus of Plato than the Physics of Aristotle,’
ImAm Fakbr's main role in the intellectual life of Islam was to support the
orthodox policy of the Caliphate of his time to suppress rationalistic philosophy
in favour of theology. In tho unifled view of Islam, politics, religion, and
intellectual life have never been divorced, so much so that the political struggle
of minorities in the Caliphate, whether they were opposed to Arab domination
or. like the Sbi'ahs. to the 'Abbasid Caliphate as such, was reflected clearly
in the intellectual and religious activities of the period. As the Caliphate
supported the orthodox Sunni theologians against the rationalists, the philoso
phers sought refuge in the Courts of those minor dynasties that were opposed
to tho central authority of the Caliphs. So we sec such figures aa ibn Sina and
KhwAjah Xaslr al-DIn Tflsi seeking favour of rulers opposed to tho authority
of Baghdad, and especially of Shiah princes.’ And, on the other hand, there
appeared a scries of great scholars and sages, mostly theologians and Sufis,
of whom the most important were GhazAli. Imam Fakfar, and the Sufi masters
like ghihAb al-I)In ‘Umar Suhrawardi, who lifted their pen in support of the
Caliphate and used both theology and Sufism in order to combat rationalistic
philosophy.* The works of ImAm Fakbr were above all else dedicated to this
cause. Sunni theology reached its height in his works and weakened considerably
with the fall of the 'AbbSsid Caliphate, which came to an end about fifty
years after his death.
The writings of Fakfar al-Din Razi, of which nearly a hundred are known,
deal almost with every aspect of Muslim intellectual life and include all the
sciences of his time.1’ Some of these, like the commentary upon the al
lsh.lr.il w-al-Tanbihdl of ibn Sina and upon his 'Uyun allhl-mah and the
Mabaki(l) al-Mafiriqiyyah, are written as criticisms of Muslim philosophers,
’ For an outline of the iilism of tho group of Muslim thinkers who were influenced
by Platonic physics. see 8. Pines. BeitrOgr m isiamuehm AtomenMre. Berlin.
A. Heino GmbH.. Grafonbeinichen. 1936.
• it is far from accidental that the philosophy and the sciences which wore
connected with the Greek heritage flourished especially in the fourth, tenth century
when most of the Muslim world was governed by tho Shi’ah Buwaihids and F&timiili
• The opposition of this group to Greek philosophy was primarily against its
rationalistic and syllogistic ss|>octs. The cosmological and certain metaphysical
doctrines of the Greeks wore not only not criticized but wore also openly accepted
by them. So wo see a Ghazalt using Hermetic symbolism or a Fakir KAzi writing
numerous treatises on the cosmological sciences.
>• For a bibliography of his works, see Subki. op. cil.. pp. 33-40 anil TmAm
Razl’s thyUal Farg al-Muslmin ic-al-Mu/Jy-U-tn. Maktabat al-Nahdat al-
Misriyyah, Cairo. 1356/1937. Introduction by Shaikh 'Abd al-RazzAq. pp. 27ff.
644
Fakhr al-Dln RAzi
especially ibn Sina, and on general problems of philosophy.11 Others deal with
the many branches of the intellectual sciences including logic, mathematics
metaphysics, and the natural and the esoteric sciences.
Still another set of books deals with theology, of which the most famous are
the Kitab alArbain fi Ufil al-Din, Lawami' al- Bayyinal, and the Muhasml,
a classic among writings on the Kaldm. Fakfar al-Din also wrote a large number
of works on particular sciences, like the commentary upon the syntax of
Zamakhlhari, Kilah al-Sirr al-MaHum on astrology and astronomy, Managib
al-Shafi'i on history, tho commentary upon the Qdnun or Canon of ibn Sina,
and many other treatises dealing with medicine, geometry, physiognomy,
agriculture, theurgy, etc. Besides these writings. ImAm Fakhr composed a
large number of works on the purely Ialamio sciences of exegeBia and juris
prudence, of which the most famous are tho Ma/alih al-Qhaib. tho voluminous
commentary upon the Qur'An, and al-Ma'Olim fi Ufil al-Fiqk on the principles
of jurisprudence. Throughout these writings the character of ImAm Fakhr
as a critic and “doubter" is evident. He criticizes not only tho philosophers,
but also theologians like Ash'ari and historians like ShahrastAui. whom he
accuses of plagiarizing BagfadAdl'a al-Farg bain al-Firaq in his al-ifilal wo ol-
Nifral.1’ ImAm Fakbr's particular genius for analysis and criticism is evident
in whatever field he turns his attention to. so that in the annals of Muslim
thought he has quite justly beoome famous aa one who ia a master in posing a
problem but not in solving it, in entering into a debate but not in concluding it.
B
THEOLOGY (KALAM)
Muslim theology known as Kaldm began as a reaction against the rationalistic
school of the Mu'tazilitea, and only gradually developed into a complete
science. In the earlier centuries the theologians, following the lead of abu
al-Qasan al-Agh'ari, tried to use logic, the instrument of their enemies, in
order to defend the truths of revelation. From the fourth/tenth century
onward, this defenoe itself became more subtle and systematic, reaching its
height in the works of ImAm al-Haramain abu al-Ma‘Ali ‘Abd al-Malik al-
Juwaini, such as the Irfhad and the Shamil.'* With QhazAli Kaldm took a new
“ ImAm RAzI's pupil. KhwA.ah Nasir al-Dln fusi. wrote many works answering
his teacher's criticism of ibn Sins and other philosophers.
“ See Fakhr al-Din RAzi. Mundforat, Dairatul Maarif.il Oemania, Hyderabad,
1366/1936. where he also criticizes certain parts of ChazAli's Toba/ul al-FaUti/ah
on the motion of the planets. See also P. Kraus. “Los 'controverse' de Fakhr al
Otn RAzi," Bulletin d« rfnrt.ru/ d'fiyyp/. t. XIX. 1936-37, pp. 187-314.
•• For a history of Muslim theology, especially of die Sunni school, sec Sh.bli
■Ju'mAui, Tdrififi 'Ilm-i Kalam. tr. M. Fakhr DAi GilAni. Rangln Press. Teheran,
1338/1910, and L, Gardet and M. M. Anawati, Introduction d la Ibiologie mumlmanr.
Librarie Philoaophique J. Vein, Paris, 1948.
A History of Muslim Philosophy
turn; opposed as it waa from the beginning to the school of the philosophers,
it now began to employ the syllogistic method, intellectual f'agli) evidence,
and certain theses of the philosophers, thus laying the foundations of the
school of philosophical Kaldm of the later theologians.
Im Am Fakhr is the greatest master of this later school of theology, sur
passing in many ways even the more illustrious Qhazali. With Imam Fakbr
philosophical Kaldm reaches its zenith of power and perfection; his works
heoame consequently a continuous source of influence over the later theologians,
whether they were Sunnis like al- Tji and al-Taftazani or Shi ahs like Khw&jah
Nasir.11 Properly speaking, Razi must be credited with the foundation of a
new school of Kaldm, and certain writers have even considered him to be the
Third Teacher after Aristotle and F&r4bi.“ Actually, he oompoeed works
characteristic of both the first period of Muslim theology—marked by a revolt
against the philosophers and yet by a dependence upon their methods and
even some of their ideas—and the second period, after QhazAli. in which
theology became a more independent science and lost much of its defensive
and apologetic quality. Among the first type of writings one may name
Muhastal and al-Arabi'n fi, Util al-Din and among the second Atdt al-Taqdlz
and Lawdmi' al-Bayyindl.
The theology of Im&m R&zi is marked by the integration of theological
themes with other sciences. For example, in his Persian treatise, Amr al-
Tanzil. he combines theology with ethics; and in the Lawdmi' al-Bayyinal,
theology with Sufism, giving theology a fragrance of spirituality and a beauty
not found in most writings. In the sixth chapter of the Lawdmi' he gives a
detailed and profound discussion concerning rf/liiv. the invocation of one of
the divine names, which is the basic technique of Sufism. Concerning one of
the interior forms of dhikr he writes: "The third kind of rj&ikr is that man
should contemplate the creatures of God until each particle of the essence
of creation becomes a polished mirror before the unmanifestod world so that
when be looks into this mirror with the eye of wisdom the ray of the eye of
his soul will fall upon the world of Majesty. This is a station without end and
a sea without limit."11 In this way Im&m Razi raises theology to a height
approached only by Qhazali. far surpassing the usual level of this study.1’
To understand Rizi's approach to theology, it is enough to analyse the
structure of one of hia treatises. We take as an example perhaps tho most
11 The theological masterpiece, the Tajrid, of ghwtjah Nasir al-Dln Tusi. who
is tho greatest of tho fiht'ah theologians, is to a large extent influenced by ImAm
RAxt's .Wsriil ol-Khamtan.
11 Thia titlo, however, is more oommonly given to Mir DAmAd, tho master of
theology and philosophy during tho $afawid period.
11 Fakhr al-Din R4xi, Lawdmi' al-Bayyindl, Library of Im»m Rida, Meshed,
MS. Cat. No. 233.
" Imam IUzi. liko tho Christian theologians, considered Kaldm to bo the queen
of the sciences and subordinated all tho other rational sciences like philosophy and
the mathematical and natural sciences to it.
646
Fakir al-Dtn Rin
famous of his t heological works, the .WuAasja/, which became a classic source
book on the Kaldm almost from the moment of its composition." Ilere.
ImAm RAzi divides theology into four parts (arkdn): Preliminaries, Being
and its divisions, rational theology (ilahiyyal), and traditional questions
(mm'lyy&l). The preliminaries include tho principles of logic, the sufliciency
of demonstration (dalil) to prove the existence of God. and the obligation
upon each believer to prove God's existence." The section on Being and ita
divisions considers the questions of Being and Non-Being, attributes of Being,
tho negation of modes between Being and Non-Being, the relation of the One
to the many, cause and effect, etc. Rational theology which ia interlaced
with passages from the Qur’An concerns the Necessary Being, His attributes
and acta and the divine names. Finally, the traditional questions, which are
exclusively scriptural, concern prophethood, eschatology, the ImAmate, tho
faith, and other related subjects. As a whole, therefore, ImAm RAzl's theology
combines the transmitted or traditional elements of revelation (naqli) and
the intellectual and rational evidence concerning religious and metaphysical
questions fagli) into a science which takes into acoount the probloms of
religion while participating in many of the discussions of philosophy.
In the method and problems of theology, Imim Razi followed the Agfa'aritea.
As he writes in his Kitab al-Arba'in: "We (the Ajfa'aritcs) believe that God is
neither body nor substanco, and that Ho is not in space; yet, we believe that
we can see God.” But to show his independence of judgment he goes on to
assert: "Our companions (the Agh'arites) have given an intellectual reason
for the possibility of seeing God, but we have brought twelve objections
against it which cannot be answered. Therefore, we only say that we can see
God by appealing to transmitted reasoning, i.e., the Qur'Anic text."10
ImAm Razi also criticized Agjfari on the question of atomism which is such
an essential aspect of the Ajh'arito thoology. Razi rejected atomism in his
earlier works like the J/uidAilA aZ-AfajJriyiyyoA and wrote his Kitab al-
Jaubar al-Fanf to refute it, but in later works like the great Qur'Anic commen
tary, tho Ma/alib al-Qhaib, he accepted it onoe again. (Atomism does not play
a major role in his theology aa it does in the system of other Ajh'arites like
BAqillAni.) This change of position occurs also in the rejection of infinity, the
void, and the plurality of worlds in the earlier writings and their acceptance
in later works like the ifa/alib.
There are several points in Imam Razl's theology which are of special
interest in so far as his particular point of view is concerned. One relates to the
" For a more detailed discussion of this work, see L. Gardet and M. M. Anawati.
op. oil., pp. 182-04.
" In all Muslim thoology it is considered obligatory upon each Muslim to prove
the existence of God according to his intellectual ability. See F. Salmon. "Nature
ot arguments do la foi," Etudta TradilionaUta. Vol. 54. Deo. 1953. pp. 344-63.
■■ Fakbr al-DIn RAzi. KiUb al-A'ba in fi UfOi al Din, Dairatul-Maarif-il.
Osmania, Hyderabad. 1353(1934. p. 190.
647
History of Muslim Philosophy
question of faith in which he joins most theologians in regarding faith as tho
necessary and sufficient requirement for being saved. Hell is not for those
who have committed evil acts accidentally but for the infidels who have no
faith. Mon is of course responsible for his work but ultimately all is determined
bv the divine will. ImAm Rizi is very emphatic in his determinism and over
throws even the theory of acquisition (kaab) of the Agh'arites. His Qur’Anic
commentary is full of arguments for determinism, which he defends more
openly and ably than any other theologian. God is the creator of both good
and evil, faith and impiety, benefit and injury; all these qualities are decreed
by the determination of the divine will (qada wo qadar). Yet, none of tho
divine acts can be considered to be inappropriate or blameable since God is
the creator and ruler of the world, and whatever He does in His kingdom is
His own affair and is aa such appropriate.
According to Imam RAzi, God's attributes and names must be interpreted
symbolically fld’wil) in order to be understood. Ho follows the method of
Im&m al-Haramain in applying Id'wU to the Qur'An, especially to those verses
in which God is attributed with such anthropomorphic qualities as sight,
hearing, etc. This does not mean that Razi tries to overcome the rational
difficulties of certain of tho principles of faith by ta'wil, as did many of tho
philosophers. For example, on the question of resurrection, unlike the philoso
phers who believed only in the resurrection of the soul, ImAm RAzi asserts
that st resurrection God will create for each soul the same body, made of the
same elements as those it possessed in this life.
On the question of knowledge and the process of reasoning. ImAm Razi is of
tho view that reason is neither the cause of which knowledge is the effect nor
the source which produces knowledge. There is an intelligible succession be
tween the two; God creates a reasoning which knowledge follows necessarily.’1
He accords a definite value to the rational faculty; his aim in theology is in
fact to create a science which combines and harmonizes reason and revelation,
'aql and naql. In his Qur'Anic commentary he calls those who have succeeded
in integrating these two elements the Muslim sages (bukama’ islamiyyah),
and praises them greatly. His own importance in Muslim theology lies in his
success in establishing the school of philosophical Kdldm, already begun by
QhazAli, in which both intellectual and revelational evidence played important
roles.
C
PHILOSOPHY
The importance of ImAm Razi in philosophy lies more in his criticism of
the philosophers than in the establishment of a new school. Influenced by the
writings of QbazAli. he studied philosophy to such an extent that he became
11 Many theologians before RAzi considered this relation between reason and
knowledge to bo custom f iMaAJ. but he explicitly reject* this notion.
648
F»khr al-Dtn R4zi
• definite master of it. Unlike the theologians who rejected Greek philosophy
totally or the Peripatetics who followed it strictly, Im&m Razi criticized many
points of Greek philosophy while accepting certain others. In the introduction
to the MabalnH al-Sfajiriqiyyah, the most important of his philosophical
works, he writes: "Our associates belong to two groups: one consisting of
those who imitate the Greek philosophers, permit no one to discuss their
thought, and take pride in being able to understand their sayings, and the
other comprising those who reject all of their ideas without oxcoption. Both
of these groups are wrong. We have delved deep into the writings of the pre
vious philosophers and have affirmed the true and rejected the false. We have
added certain principles to this philosophy and have put forth some new
ideas.”’1
The new ideas of which Im&m Razi speaks are mostly those pertaining
to the rejection of certain basic elements of Aristotelianism and in somo cases
of Platonism. In the Stabahili he rejects the Platonic ideas, since in the
Aah'arite perspective all infinite modes of Being are absorbed in the Absolute.
He also criticizes the Platonic notion of knowledge as reminiscence and the
idea hold by certain Muslim philosophers that light is a body. Ono of his
most important and penetrating discussions involves criticism of the principle
that from Unity only unity can issue forth, ex uno non fix nisi union, a
principle held by nearly all medieval philosophers. Imam Razi puts thia view
to the test of his severe judgment and criticizes it with hia usual genius for
analysis. He asserts, on the contrary, that from Unity multiplicity can issue
forth, but does not pursue the proof of this assertion very far.
The Mabdhith deals with many other subjects treated in the well-known
texts of Muslim philosophy like those of ibn Slna. In each case it is the acute
criticism of commonly held Peripatetic notions that is of interest. In his
commentary upon the al-lihdrut w-al-Tanbihbl of ibn Slna, which after the
JIabahilh is his most important philosophical work, this type of criticism and
doubts about Peripatetic philosophy oontinue—doubts which his pupil,
Nasir al-Din Tusi, tried to answer in his own commentary upon the /jJdnU.
Ever since these works were written, nearly every student of Peripatetic philo-
sophy in the Muslim world, especially in Persia, has reached this philosophy
through the criticism of Im&m R&zi, so that the thought of ImAm Razi has
become a permanent heritage of Muslim philosophers. His other philosophical
works, like the commentary upon the 'Uyun al-HiL-mah. Lubdh al-Ifhurdt
and many treatises on logic and metaphysics, are also significant, but his
greatest philosophical importance lies in the criticisms and doubts cast upon
the principles of Peripatetic philosophy, which hot only left an indelible mark
upon that school but opened the horizon for the other modes of knowledge
like iibr&fi philosophy and gnosis, which were more intimately bound with
the spirit of Islam.
” Fakbr al.Din R&zi. al-Mabahitb al.Mafbriqlyyah. Dairatul Maarif il Oemama.
Hyderabad. 1M1/1SM. Vol. 1,'p. 4.
649
A History of Muslim Philosophy
THE SCIENCES
There have been very few Muslim theologians who have had aa much
knowledge of the mathematical and natural sciences as ImAm RAzi Hia pre
occupation with the sciences is itself of great interest, because usually the
Sunni theologians and doctors of Law shunned any discipline outside the
sphere of the strictly religious sciences. ImAm RAzi, on the contrary, studied
all the oud’tt sciences, that is. the sciences inherited from the Greeks, and
was considered by many of his contemporaries to be the greatest authority
of his time on them. There is hardly a science in which he did not compose
a treatise—although he never occupied himself with the study of nature in
the manner of ibn al-Hailfaam or Biruni. His main importance in the sciences
waa in considering their principles and their relation to theology and to the
spirit of Islamio revelation.
A field in which Imam Razi excelled is medicine, a discipline the masters’
of which one hardly expects from a theologian. He wrote several treatises on
health, pulse, and anatomy, and a medical encyclopaedia entitled al-Jdmi'
alKablr or al-'I'M al-KMr which he never completed. His most important
medical work waa his commentary upon the QMnun of ibn Sina, which he often
criticized, basing himself on the opinions of Galen and the Muslim physicians,
especially Muhammad Zakariya RAzi The commentary is sufficient evidence
that ImAm RAzi did not learn medicine by reading one or two manuals but
studied it thoroughly and was well versed in it. He was in fact famous in
Heriit for his ability and exactitude in diagnosis.
ImAm RAzi also wrote several treatises on geometry, astronomy, agriculture,
politics, history, and comparative religion.*** Also of interest arc his works on
the esoteric sciences ( ulum gbaribah), to which he devoted much attention
There remain among his writings treatises on theurgy (talimdt), geoman.y
/rami), physiognomy (firdsah),- astrology, and other similar subjects. It
ia curious that ImAm RAzi wrote all these treatises, although he was opposed
to certain of these subjects like astrology which he attacked throughout hi-
writings." He was. however, more sympathetic to the study of esoteric sciences
than either the theologians or the philosophers, aa is illustrated by his defence
of alchemy against the charges of ibn Slna.”
Of particular interest to the history of Muslim sciences is the scientific
” His historical work6 include KiUb Foda'il alSahabab and A’lMf. ManAgi!
al-Imdm Sbdfii. and hia work on comparative religion, tho Ftiqad/U Fan} ut
Mrultmln ic-ai MufkriHn
Seo Y. Mourad, Ix> pbygu^namonu oroAs tl U KitM al FirStab dr Fatb,
al-IMn al-Fati. Librarw Orientaliste, Paul Geuthner. Paris, HI3S.
“ See MundfarM, pp. 20-24.
•• So.. AfoMMI* . . .. p. 214.
650
Fakir al-Din R*xi
encyclopedia of Im&m R4xi, the Jimi' al-'Ulim.r' Thia work offers a good
source for the names, definitions, scope, and major principles of tho various
Muslim sciences. Im&m Fakir begins with a discussion of traditional religious
sciences such aa theology, jurisprudence, dialectics, comparative religion,
inheritance, will and testament, Qur’&nic commentary, and reading of the
Qur’&n and Hadith; and then passes on to the linguistic sciences dealing with
grammar, syntax, etymology of words, prosody and poetic metre, and, after
that to history. Having considered the transmitted (naqli) sciences, he devotes
the reel of the book to the intellectual faqli) sciences which include natural
philosophy, interpretation of dreams, physiognomy, medicine, anatomy
pharmacology, the science of the occult properties of things, alchemy, theurgy,
agriculture, geometry, science of weights, arithmetic, algebra, optics, music,
astronomy, astrology, metaphysics, ethics and ita various branches, and even
chess and other games. Im&m R&zi describes the principles, scope, and major
problems of each science. Despite the fact that his discussion is always general
and charateristic of an encyclopedist and never penetrates too deeply into
any single science, the work is perfect evidenoe of his vast erudition and
encyclopedic knowledge. In this respect Imam Razi is similar to tho Ismi'Ili
and the later Twelvo-Imim Shi'ail theologians of the §afawid period many
of whom, like Shaikh Baha al-DIn Amili, took great interest not only in
philosophy but also in all the cosmological and mathematical sciences. Im&m
Fakhr's importance in the Muslim sciences is, therefore, mostly in bringing
doser together the theological and ooemological traditions which until hia
time had been far apart, and in studying nature with a view to discovering
Cod's wisdom in creation, as was done by many other Muslim scientists.”
In this case, as in so many others, he advanoed upon a path already trodden
by Ghaz&li.
COMMENTARIES UPON THE QUR'AN
Imam R&zi’s fame in the Muslim world lies as much in his commentaries
on the Holy Qur'&n aa in his theological works. He was greatly devoted to
the Qur'&n from childhood and studied Qur'inic commentary with his father.
Hia study of all the other sciences by no means reduced his love for the
Qur'&n. As he wrote in old age: “I have experienced all the methods of theo
logy and all tho ways of philosophy, but I did not find in them the benefit
■’ This work Im&m Fafchr wrote for fi^w&rirm Sh&h abu al-Miifaffar ibn Malik
al Mu'asnun. It ha. always been a popular scientific encyclopedia and was
printed in a lithographed edition in Bombay in 1323/1905.
■■ Im*m Fakfar's writings are full of passage. in which he appeals to various
natural phenomena as "signs " of the different divine qualities and nan,.-.. See his
Atrir al Tan:ll. Tolirran. lithographod edition, 1301'1893. pp. 08 ff
651
A History of Muslim Pliiloeophy
which could equal the benefit I derived from tho reading of the exalted
Qur’An.”**
ImAm Rizi's Qur’Anic commentaries include the Tafiir al-Fabhah. Ta/air
Sural alBaqarah, Arma' AUah al-Hama, and RMlah A al-Tanbih ala ba'f
al-Airar al-Mau'ifah fi al-Qur'dn, which last is a theological commentary
combined with Sufi ideas in which metaphysics (ildhiyyal) is baaed on the
chapter (rurah) al-lfifildr. prophecy on the chapter al-A'Ia. resurrection on
the chapter al-Ttu. and the recording of human actions on the chapter al-
'Air. The most important of Imim Bizi's commentaries is the voluminous
Ma/dlih al-Qfiaib, known as the "Great Commentary” (Tajtlr al-Ka/Ar),
which was collected and organized by ibn al-Khu'i and Suyuji after his death.
This work is the most important theological commentary ever written on the
Qur’fin. Imam RAzi makes this also an occasion to expose his encyclopedic
knowledge in that he intermingles history, geography, and other branches of
knowledge with the commentary of the Qur'Amc text wherever possible. He
mentions and praises often in this work the Muslim sages who combine intel
lectual principles with the principles of Islamic revelation. He also analyses
the stories of the Qur'An and interprets their theological and metaphysical
meanings. Despite its volume and the number of topics which do not seem
very relevant to the immediate subject-matter, the Ma/dlifi is an impres
sive theological Qur’Anic commentary. In its intellectual interpretation and
the combining of 'aql and naql, of reason and authority, and in the under
standing of the sacred Scripture it remains one of the major commentaries
upon the Qur'An.
JURISPRUDENCE (FIQH)
Although primarily occupied with theology, ImAm RAzi occasionally devoted
himself to jurisprudence as well. The few works like oZ-MoAsuJ fi al-Vfil
al-Fiqh, al-Ma'dlim, and Ifikam al-Ahiaim bear evidenoe to his mastery of
jurisprudence which he interpreted according to the school of the exegetes.
As already mentioned, he belonged to the ShAfi'i school of which he was con
sidered to be one of the 'ulama and authentic interpreters. ImAm RAzi was
particularly well versed in the principles of jurisprudence (Util), which he
treated in a manner similar to theology. This subject has, in fact, never been
able to divorce itaelf from Kaldm, and is still studied almost as if it were one
of its branches. The importance of ImAm RAzi in gjjati'i jurisprudence lies
more in his contribution to the theoretical principles of Fiqh than in their
actual application embodied in the taiw&t of the various Shafi'i 'ulama .
” Ibn abi Ufaibi'ah, 't/yun oI AnM' fi TabaqAt al-AbbM', Matba'at al-
WahAblyyah, Cairo, Vol. n, p. 27.
652
Fakir al-DIn RAri
G
DIALECTIC, RHETORIC, AND POETRY
Following the example of QhazAli, ImAm Razi became a dialectical theologian
and, as hia works testify, excelled in dialectics. He was famous for his eloquence
in persuasion and argumentation, for the quickness of his intelligence and
keenness of wit. These gifts were combined with a rhetorical power which
made him the most famous preacher in HerAt. Hardly would a scholar dare
enter into debate with him; those who took sides against him would soon
feel the thrust of his dialectical and rhetorical weapons. The Munifarut bears
ample evidenoe of these traits, In its pages one sees ImAm RAzi as a tiger
who pounces mercilessly upon his helpless adversary and has little regard for
softness in discourse. Much of his energy throughout life was spent in attacking
bitterly the small sects which arose against the main orthodoxy, such as the
KarrAmlyyah, who probably finally poisonod him.*0 As the Shaikh al-hldm
of HerAt, his main duty was to preach and defend Islam; and he took the
opportunity of using his remarkable gifts of rhetoric and dialectic in a manner
which made him one of the most famous of Muslim preachers.
ImAm RAzi had also the gift of poetry, and many verses both in Arabic
and Persian are attributed to him. As in the case of so many other sages like
KhayyAm. poetry became for ImAm RAzi the vehicle for the expression of
gnosis and the form of "ignoranoe” which lies above all formal knowledge. In
a quatrain in Persian he writes:
"My heart was never deprived of science;
There is little of the mysteries that 1 did not understand
For seventy-two years I thought night and day,
Yet I came to know that nothing is to be known.”
H
SUFISM
There is little doubt that ImAm RAzi was sympathetic to Sufism, especially
in later life, when he wrote most of his poems like the one mentioned above.
Moreover, many of his works are. like hia Qur'Anic commentary, full of Sufistie
ideas, and in his LawSmi' al-Bayyin/U he outlines the degrees of knowledge
*• There Is a story told of ImAm RAzt's opposition to the IsmA'Ilta. He used to
attack them bitterly in public, accusing them of having no proofs for their doctrines.
One day one of their agents, posing aa a stuilont. found ImAm RAzi alone in his
library, pulled out a knife and pointed it to his chest saying, “Thia ia our proof."
Honceforth. ImAm Fakir never attacked the IamA'Ilia in public. One day the dis
ciples aakod him why he no longer spoke against thia group—the group which he
had opposed so bitterly bofore. Ho replied. "Because I have seen their proof.” Thu
story appears in nearly all the biographios of ImAm Fakir which we have already
mentioned and is characteristic of hia wisdom in public life.
653
A History of Muslim Philosophy
in a manner very similar to the Sufi treatise of Suhrawardi, Sa/ir-i StmurgJ.’1
He is altogether a theologian with sympathies towards Sufism.
What is difficult for us to discover ia whether ImAm RAzi was a practising
Sufi or not . Certainly Sufism is not so evident in his writings as in QbazAlI’s.
and his life, rich in worldly fame and wealth, had none of the ascetic elements
of tho life of his great predecessor. There is even an extant letter from the
master of gnosis, the Anadalusian Sufi, Shaikh al-Akbar Mubyi al-Din ibn
‘Arabi, advising ImAm RAzi to leave dialectic and discursive thought and try
to reach the stage of gnosis and contemplation, telling him that in heaven
medicine and geometry will do him little good." Moreover, in hia writings as
in his life, ImAm R4zi displayed an aggressiveness and fighting quality hardly
characteristic of the lives and writings of the Sufis.
Yet, despite all this negative evidence, some of his later writings do show
the clear influence of Sufism upon him, and it may be that, because of his
social position even after joining the circle of the Sufis, he to a large extent
hid his sympathies and affiliations in order to avoid any external opposition.
His own poems and his great love for the blind Arab poet abu 'Ala' al-Ma'arri
the gnostic who often appears like a sceptic to the uncritical eye, on whose
IXwan he is said to have commented, point to the fact that ImAm Rizi was
not an ordinary theologian but knew that there is another form of knowledge,
gnosis, which lies above all rational sciences like thoology. Whether ho actually
participated in this knowledge in an effective way, is a question too difficult
to answer from either historical evidence or internal evidence from his own
writings.’*
There is a poem of Imam Razi which is in itself almost sufficient evidence
for his Sufism. In the original Arabic it is so beautiful and effective that
hardly any of hia biographers has failed to mention it. Written in old age by
a man who was the leading scholar and theologian of his day and who enjoyed
all the comfort and glory of the life of this world, it is a vivid reminder that
beyond the sphere of all human life and knowledge there is another reality
which man must seek in order to remain faithful to his own intimate nature.
The poem begins with these versea:
“Our souls fear our bodies as if they want to separate from them.
The result of our life in thia world has been nothing but pain to others and sin,
" Soo tho chapter on "ShihAb al Din Suhrawardi MaqtOl."
•• See Fakhr al-Dln R4zi, oIRiaUol al-KamMyah fl al HaqAiq al-Ilahluyah
leheran Univorsity Press, 1335 Solar, Introduction by Sayyid Muhammad Bftqir
SabziwAri, p. (kt).
■■ There is a story told that ImAm Razi mot. the Sufi Najm al-Dta Kubrw in a
CTtboring and boasted of his religious knowledge and said tlust ho knew a hundred
proofs for the existence of God. Najm al-Din answered, "Is not each proof due to
some doubt I God has plticod in the heart of the Sufi a light of certainty which
.lispcis all doubt, so that he no longer has need of proofs." ImAm Rizi hearing this
answer surrendered himself to the Shaikh and was initiated into Sufism
654
Fakhr al-Dln ltAxi
For all the discussions and debates of our life
We have derived no benefit but senseless noise.
How often have we seen men and kingdoms
All perish quickly and cease to exist 1
How was their glory onoe more exalted than a mountain,
Yet, men perish and the mountain remains the same!"
I
THE SIGNIFICANCE AND INFLUENCE OF IMAM RAZI
The many-sided genius of Im&m Razi, to which the previous pages bear
partial witness, makes him one of the most colourful figures in Islam. Following
the example of QhazAli, by whom he was profoundly influenced and whose
retreat in Tua he visited, Razi spent a life-time in combating the rationalistic
aspect of Greek philosophy. Although not of equal stature to GhazAli in Sufism
and ethics, he, nevertheless, exercised aa much influence, especially in theology,
as did his more famous predecessor. Possessed of a special gift for posing
problems and for analysing philosophical questions, he left an indelible mark
upon all later Muslim philosophers, especially upon KhwSjah Nasir al-Din
Tusi, his pupil, who was the reviver of Muslim philosophy after Im&m R&zi.
and was also the most famous of Shi'ah theologians.
ImAm Razi's role in Muslim intellectual life, besides establishing the school
of philosophical KaUm begun by QhazAli. was to intensify the attack against
Peripatetic philosophy, thereby preparing the way for the-propagation of the
metaphysical doctrines of tho Igbr&qis and Sufis who, like Im&m R&zi, opposed
the rationalism inherent in Aristotelianism. With the method of doubt in
which he was the greatest master in Islam, he analysed and criticized Peripate
tic philosophy in a way hardly ever equalled by anyone except Qhazali Yet,
he was a theologian also interested in the cosmological, natural, and esoteric
**
sciences. Im&m R&zi played an important role in bringing theology closer to
the sciences and even to Sufism, with which he flavoured his theological works.
In the centuries when the Muslim world was turning away from Peripatetic
rationalism toward modes of thought more akin to its own spirit. ImAm RAzi
played a major role in this transformation. He remains as one of the most
arresting figures among Muslim theologians, a figure the power of whose
thought spread over the whole Muslim world at tho very moment when the
Mongol onslaught was putting an end to the Caliphate, to the survival of
which his work was to a large extent dedicated.
•• It is of great intercut that not only in the Muslim world but also in medieval
Christianity and in China many of those who preoccupied themselves with the
science of nature, like the Taoists. IM)W&n al-fiafa. and the Franciscans, wen-
opposed to philosophical rationalism and accepted some form of esoteric and
metaphysical doctrine baaed on intellectual intuition and revelation.
655
A History of Muslim Philosophy
BIBLIOGRAPHY
G. Gabrieli, “Fafcbr al-Dln al-RAzi." /«>«. 7, 1925. pp, 9-13: L. Ganlol and
M. M. Anawati. Introduction d la IhMogir. mumlmane, Librarie Philosophiquo
J. Vein, Paris, 1948; I. Goldziher, “Aua dor Theologie doa Fakhr al-Dln nl-RAzi."
Zier leiam, Ill, 1912. pp. 213-47; M. Horton, Die PAJoaopAiacAen AnncKten eon
RAzi and Tuei, Bonn. 1910; Die tpekulalive und pontine Thoologir da Ielam nach
Rdzi und ihre Kritik durch Tun. Leipzig. 1912; P. Kraus. ‘‘Loe ‘controveree’ do
Fakhral Din Rfai." BulUlin de Vlruiilut d'Bnpt.l. XIX. 1938-37. pp. 187-214;
Y. Moursd, La phyoiognomonie arabe ct la Kitdb al-Firdeah de Fakir al-Din al-RAei,
Librarie Orientalists, Paul Geuthner, Pana, 1939; S. Pines. BeitrOge tur ielamiMhen
Alomenlchre, A. Heine GmbH-, Grafanluuniehon, Berlin, 1936.
Fakhr al-DIn al-RAzi. Aenlr al-Tanzil, lithographed edition. Teheran. 1301/1883;
FawA'id-i (UiyAHiyyab. Ma^ba' i Q&aimi. Hyderabad, 1323/1905; llu/dddt Farq
al-Mtudimin w-al-Muiirikin, Maktabat al-Nahd*1 al-Misriyyah, Cairo, 1356/1937:
JAmi' al-'lllum, Mirza Muhammad KhAn, Bombay. 1323/1903; Kitdb al-Arba'ln fi
L'f0l al-LHn, Dairatul-Maarif-il-Oainania. Hyderabad. 1353/1934; Lubdb al-ItiArAt.
Cairo. 1343/1924; MafAtih al-Qiazb. 8 Vols.. Cairo. Matba at al-Amlrat al-Shara-
fiyyah, 1308/1890; .TZuAoeral. Ma(ba‘at al-Huaainlyyab. Cairo, 1323/1905; MunA-
farAl. Dairatul-Maarif.il.damania. Hyderabad, 1355/1936; al-RieAlal al-KamAliyyaA
fi al-HagA'iq al-IlAhiyyah, Teheran University Proas, 1335 Solar.
Part 5. Political Thinkers
Chapter XXXIII
POLITICAL THOUGHT IN EARLY ISLAM
In this chapter we try to elucidate the political thought which laid the
foundations of society and State in the early days of Islam, and the changes
t hat crept into it during the firat century and a quarter of the Hijrah.
A
PRINCIPLES OF ISLAMIC POLITY
Muslim society that camo into existence with the advent of Islam and the
State that it formed on assumption of political power were founded on certain
clear-cut principles. Prominent among them and relevant to our present
discussion were the following; —
1. Sovereignty belongs to God, and the Islamic State ia in fact a vicegoroncy,
with no right to exercise authority except in subordination to and in
accordance with the Law revealed by God to His Prophet.1
1 Qur'An. iv, 59. 105; v, 44. 45. 47; vii, 3; xii, 40; xxiv. 55: xxxiii. 36.
658
Political Thought in Early Islam
2 All Muslims have equal rights in the State regardless of race, colour, or
speech. No individual, group, class, clan, or poople is entitled to any
special privileges, nor can any such distinction dotermine anyone's
position as inferior.*
3. The SAarioA (i.e., the Law of God enunciated in the Qur'an and the
Sunnah, the authentic practice of the Prophet) ia tho supreme Law and
everyone from the lowest situated person to the Head of the State is to
be governed by it?
4. The government, its authority, and possessions are a trust of God and
the Muslims, and ought to be entrusted to the God-fearing, the honest,
and the just; and no one has a right to exploit them in ways not sanctioned
by or abhorrent to the fiAori'oA?
5. The Head of the State (call him Caliph, Imam or Amir) should be appoint
ed with the mutual consultation of tho Muslims and their concurrence.
He should run the administration and undertake legislative work within
the limits prescribed by the Sbari'ah in consultation with them?
1 Tradition: "Muslims are brothers to one another. None of them has any pro-
forence over another, except on grounds of piety" (Ibn Kathlr, Ta/air al-Qur'dn
al'Aflm. Matba’ah Mustafa Mubammad. Egypt. 1937, iv, p. 217).
"O men. beware, your God is one. An Arab has no preference over a non-Arab,
nor a non.Arab over an Arab, nor a white over a black nor a black over a white,
save on grounds of piety" (Aliim, Ruh ol-Mn dni, Idiral al-TaM'at al-Muniriyyah.
Egypt, 1346/1926, xxvi.p. 148; ibn al-Qayyim.Zdd al Ma'&d. Matba'ah Mubammad
'All Sablb, Egypt. 1935, iv. p. 31).
" Whosoever declares that there is no god but God. and faces our qiblah (direction
of prayer), and offers prayer aa we offer, and eats of the animal we slaughter, is a
Muslim. Ho has tho rights of a Muslim, and the duties of a Muslim" (Bukblri,
Kitab al-Salah, Ch. xxviii).
"A Muslim's blood is like another Muslim's blood. They are one as distinguished
from others; and an ordinary man of them can offer dAimmuA (i.e.. stand surety)
on their behalf' (Abu Diwfld, KMb al-DiyOl. Ch. xi; NaaS’i. KMb alQaMmah.
Chs. x-xiv).
"A Muslim is exempt from poll-tax" (Abu Dtwud. Kitab al lnuirah. Ch. xxxiv).
• Tradition! "Nations before you were destroyed because thoy punished those
among thorn of low status according to law. and spared tho high-ranking. By God,
who holds my lifo in His hand, if Fnpmah, daughter of Mubammad. had committed
this thoft I would have chopped off her hand" I Bukhari, Kitab oL/fud&d.Chs. xi, xii).
Says 'Umar, "I myself havo seen the Prophet of God allowing people to avenge
themselves on him" (Abu Yusuf, KMb alKharSj, al-Matha'at al-Salaflvyah,
Egypt, 2nd ed. 1362/1933. p. 116; Musnad, abu Dbwfid al-Tayftlisi, Tr. No. 56.
Dairatul Maarif, Hyderabad, 1321/1903).
• Qur'Sn, iv. 38.
Tradition: "Mind, each one of you is a shopherd, and each one ia answerable in
respect of his flock. And the ohief leader (i.e.. the Caliph) is answorablo in respect
of his subjects" (Bukhari. KMb al-Ahtam. Ch. i; KMb al-Imarah. Ch. v).
• Qur’an, xiii. 38.
Tradition: “'All reports that he asked the Prophet of God (on him be peace).
'What shall wo do if we are faced with a problem after you dio about which them
is no mention in the Qur'la nor have we heard anything concerning it from your
lips’’ Ho answered. 'Collect thoeo of my people fummah) that serve God
A History of Muslim Philosophy
6. The Caliph or the Amlq is to be obeyed ungrudgingly in whatever is
right and just (ma'r&f), but no one haa the right to command obedience
in the service of sin (ma'fiah).*
7. The least fitted for responsible positions in general and for the Caliph's
position in particular are those that covet and seek them.’
8. The foremost duty of the Caliph and his government is to institute the
Islamic order of life, to encourage all that is good, and to suppress all
that is evil.*
9. It is the right, and also the duty, of every member of the Muslim com
munity to check the occurrence of things that are wrong and abhorrent
to the Islamic State?
truthfully and place the matter before them for mutual consultation. Let it not be
decided by an individual’s opinion*" (XlOai. op. eit.. xxv, p. 42).
• Tradition: "It is incumbent on a Muslim to listen to his Amir and obey,
whether ha likes it or not. unless he is asked to do wrong; when ho w asked to do
wrong, ha should neither listen nor obey” (BugbAri, A’udA alAKkAm. Ch. iv; Muslim,
KMb allrMraK, Ch. viii; abu DAwud. KUb ad-JihM. Ch. xcv; NaaAi. Kitab al-
Bai'alt, Ch. xxxiii; ibn MAjah. AbwOb al-JMd. Ch. xl).
“There is no obedience in sin against God. Obedienoe is only in the right"
(Muslim, KMb al-ImOrah. Ch. viii; abu DAwfld, KiMA ol-JiAdd. Ch. xcv; NaaA'i.
Kitab al-Bai'ah, Ch. xxxiii).
"Do not obey those of your rulers that command you to disregard the order of
Got!" (Ibn MAjah. AAlrdh ad-JihOd, Ch. xl).
’ Tradition: “Verily, we do not entrust a post in this government of oure to
anyone who seeks or covets it" (BukbAri. KMb alAhkam, Ch. vii).
"The most untrustworthy of you with ns is be who comes forward to seek
position in the government" (Abu DAwhd. KMb al-ImArM, Ch. ii).
The Prophet of God said to abu Bakr, “O abu Bakr, the beet fitted person for
the government is he who does not oovet it, not ho who jumps at it. He who knows
its responsibility and tries to shun it deserves it most, not he who proudly advanoes
to collect it for himself. It is for him to whom you oould say, 'You most deserve it,’
not for him who says of himself, T am most doeorving"’ (Al-Qalqaebandi. SuhA
ol A-tha. DAr al-Kutub al-Mip-iyyah, Cairo. 1910. i, p. 240).
• Qur'An, xxii, 41.
’ Tradition; "Whoever of you Bees an evil thing, lot him undo it with his hand.
If he cannot, let him check it with his tongue. If he cannot do oven this, lol him
despise it with his heart and wish it otherwise, and this is tho lowest degree of
faith" (Muslim, KiklA oilman. Ch. xx; Tirmidhi. Abwdb al-Filan, Ch. xii; abu
DAwOd, KMb ad-MalAbim. Ch. xvii; ibn MAjah, AbwOb ad-FMn, Ch. xx).
"Thon the undeserving will take thoir place who will say what they will not do,
and will do what they are not asked to do. Therefore, ha who strives against them
with hia hand ia a believer, and ho who strives against them with bis tongue is a
believer, and ho who strives against them with hia heart ia a believer, and there is
no degree of faith below this" (Muslim, KMb al-TmAn, Ch. xx).
"Tho best of jiAdd (endeavour towards God) is to say the right thing in tho face
of a tyrant" (Abu DAwUd, KMb al-MMim, Ch. xvii; Tirmidfci, AbwOb al-Fitan.
Ch. xii; NaaA'i. KMb al-Bai‘ab, Ch. xxxvi; ibn MAjah, Xhwdh od-FMn, Ch. xx).
"When people see a tyrant and do not seize hia hand, it is not far that God
should afflict them with a general rum" (Abu DAwud, Kitab al-StalAbim, Ch. xvii;
Tirmidhi. AAwdh al-Zilon. Ch. xii).
"Some pooplo are going to be rulers not long after roe. He who supports them in
658
Political Thought in Early Islam
B
EARLY CALIPHATE AND ITS CHARACTERISTIC FEATURES
The rule of the early Caliphs that followed the Prophet waa founded on
tho foregoing principles. Each member of the community, brought up under
tho guidance and care of the Prophet of God, know what kind of government
answered tho demands and reflected the true spirit of Islam. Although tho
Prophet had bequeathed no decision regarding the question of his successor,
the members of the community were in no doubt that Islam demanded a
democratic solution of the issue. Honce no one laid the foundations of a heredi
tary government, used force to assume power, or tried to have himself installed
aa Caliph. On the contrary, the people, of their own free-will, elected four per
sons one after another to this august office.
Elective Caliphate.—Abu Bakr was proposed Caliph by Umar, and accepted
by the inhabitants of Madinah (who for all practical purposes represented
the country) of their free-will and accord, and they swore him allegiance. Abu
Bakr, nearing his end, wrote a will in favour of 'Umar: then, collecting the
people in the mosque of Madinah, he addressed them thus: "Do you agree on
him whom 1 am making ray successor among you I God knows 1 have racked my
brains as much as I could, and 1 have not proposed a relation of mine to succeed
me, but ‘Umar, the son of Kfeattab. Hence listen to him and obey." Upon this
the people responded, “Yes, wo shall listen to him and obey."111
In the last year of ‘Umar's reign a man declared during the pilgrimage
that when 'Umar died ho would swear allegiance to so and so. Abu Bakr's
installation, he said, had also been so sudden, and succeeded woll enough."
When ‘Umar came to learn of it. he resolved to address the people about it
and "warn them against those who designed to impose themselves upon them.”
Alluding to it in the first speech he made on reaching Madinah, he gave a
lengthy account of what had transpired at Banu $a'idah's Meeting House and
explained how in the exceptional circumstances which then prevailed he had
suddenly risen to propose abu Bakr's name and offered allegiance to him.
“If I had not done so,” he said, “and we had dispersed that night without
settling the issue, there was a great danger that people might take a wrong
decision overnight; then it would bo difficult for us to accept it, and equally
difficult to reject it.” “If that waa successful," he continued, "let it not be
made a precedent. Who among you is there to match with abu Bakr in stature
and popularity? Now, therefore, whoever will swear allegiance to another*
their wrong and assists in their tyranny has nothing to do with me, nor have I
anything to do with him" (Naei'i. KMb al-Bai'ah, Cha. xxxiv, xxxv>.
Al-Tabari, TdriB ol-Umom walMuluh, al-Ma(ba'at al Istiqamah, Cairo.
1939, Vol. II, p. 818.
“ The reference was to the abrupt rising of ‘Umar from his place during the
mooting at Banu SS'idah's Mooting House whon ho proposed abu Bakr's name
aa ths Prophot'a successor and extending his hand to him offered him allegiance
There had been no long deliberation before elocting abu Bakr to be Caliph.
659
A History of Muslim Philosophy
without consultation with other Muslims, he and the one whose allegiance is
sworn, shall both stand to die."1’
When 'Umar approached his end, he appointed an Elective Council to decide
tne issue of succession. Elucidating his principle enunciated above, he asserted
that whoever attempted to impose himself as Amir (ruler) without the con
sultation of the Muslims deserved to die. He also barred his son from election1’
lest the Caliph's offioe should become a hereditary right, and constituted
the Elective Council to comprise those six persons who in his opinion were
the most influential and enjoyed the widest popularity. This Council in the
end delegated its power of proposing a person for the Caliph's office to one of
its members, 'Abd al-Rabmin bin Auf. ‘Abd al-Rabmln moved among the
people to find out as to who commanded their oonfidenoe most and left no
atone unturned to ascertain the people's verdict. Even the pilgrim parties
returning home after the pilgrimage were consulted. It was after this
"plebiscite" that he concluded that the majority favoured 'Uthmin.1*
When 'Ulhmin was killed, a few people tried to install 'Ali aa Caliph. But
he said. "You have no authority to do so. This is a matter for the Consultative
Council (ahi al fhura) and those that fought at Badr (ahi al-Badr). Whomso
ever the Consultative Council and the people of Badr will choose Caliph will
be Caliph. Therefore we shall gather and deliberate."1* In al-Tabari's version,
'All’s words were: "I cannot be elected secretly; it must be with the consulta
tion of the Muslims."1*
When ‘Ali lay dying it was asked of him, "Shall we offer allegiance to al-
Hasan (your eon) I" Ho replied. “I do not ask or forbid you to do so. You can
aee for yourself."1’ When he was addressing his last words to his sons, a person
interposed saying, “O Commander of the Faithful, why do you not nominate
your successor 1" His reply was. "I will leave the faithful in the condition
in which the Prophet of God left them."1*
It is evident from these facta that the early Caliphs and the Companions
“ Bukhari. KMb oI-MuMrdHn.Ch.xvi; Abroad. Mumad. 3rd ed.. D*r al-Me'lrif,
Egypt, 1948. I. Tr. 391. According to thia version, tho words are as follows:
"Whoever swoura allegiance to an Amir without tho consultation of Muslims
oners no allegiance, and he who receivrw allegiance from him receives no allegiance."
In anothor vorvion the following words arc reported: "He who ia offered allegiance
without consultation, it ia not lawful for him to accept it" (Ibn Hajar. Fath al-
Bari, al Matba'at al-Khairiyyah, Cairo, 1325/l»07, Vol. II. p. 125).
'* Al-Tabari, op. cd.. Vol. Ill, p. 292; ibn al-AUpr, Idkral al-Tabl'at al
Munlriyyah, Egypt. 1356/1937. Vol. m. pp. 34. 35.
11 Al-Tabari, op. cd. Vol. III. pp. 296-96; ;bn al-Aibtr, Vol. III. pp. 36-37.
Also ibn Qutaibah, al-lrndmah w-al-SiyOtah. Majba'at al-Futub. Egypt. 1331/1912,
Vol- I. p. 23.
11 Ibn Qutaibah, op. ed.. p. 41.
Al-Tabari, op. cd.. Vol. III. p. 450.
" Ibid.. Vol. IV. p. 112; al-Mae'udi, MurHj al-Dhahab, al Matba'at al-Bahlyyah,
Egypt, 1346/1927, Vol. II. p. 42.
” AI-Maa'Odi, op. ed., p. 42.
Political Thought in Early Islam
of the Prophet regarded the Caliph's offioe aa an elective one, to be filled
with mutual consultation and consent of the Muslim community. They did not
regard hereditary succession or one acquired by force of arms as anyt hing valid.
Government Coneullation.—The first four Caliphs did not perform their
administrative or legislative functions without consulting "the wise" foM at-
ri'y, lit., those that are able to give advice) of the community. They also
realized that those consulted had the right to give their candid opinion with
out fear. 'Umar expressed the official policy in thia regard in his inaugural
speech before a Consultative Council in thia way: “I have called you for
nothing but that you may share with me the burden of the trust that
has been reposed in me of managing your affairs. I am but one of you, and
today you are the people that bear witness to truth. Whoever of you wishes
to differ with me is free to do so. and whoever wishes to agree is free to do
that. I will not oompel you to follow my ^661™^."**
The Exchequer—a Truet.—The treasury (Bait at-Mil) was to them a trust
from God and the public. They did not consider it permissible to receive into
it or expend from it a sum which the I-aw did not authorize. To use it for the
personal ends of the rulers was, according to them, simply unlawful. ‘Umar
in a speech remarked: "Nothing la lawful for me in this trust of God save a
pair of clothes for tho summer and a pair of clothes for tho winter, and sub
sistence enough for an average man of tho Quraigh for my family. And after
that I am just one of the Muslims."**
In another speech he said: *'I do not regard anything correct in respect of
this trust of yours but three things: that it should be taken by right, that it
should be expended by right, and that it should be withheld from wrong. My
position regarding this property of yours is the same aa that of an orphan's
guardian with the orphan's property. So long aa I am not needy I will take
nothing from it. When I am needy I shall take aa it befits one to take from
an orphan's property under his caro."•,
When 'Ali was at war with Mu'iwlyah he waa exhorted by some to use the
treasury to win adherents against him who waa drawing large numbers
to his side by giving sumptuous rewards and gifts. But ‘All declined to take
that oounael saying, "Do you want me to win sucoess by unfair means
His brother ‘Aqll wished to be helped from the Bait al-MlU, but ho refused
him. saying, “Do you wish your brother to give you the money of the people
and take hia way to hell
Ideal of Government —What their ideal of government was, what they
thought of themselves, of their status and duties aa rulers, and what policy
” Abu Yusuf. op. oil.. p. 25.
•• Ibn KaShlr. at-BiMyah wal-NiMyah. Majba'at al-Sa'&dah, Egypt. Vol. VII.
p. 134.
n Abu Yusuf, op. eit., p. 117.
11 Ibn abi al-Badld, fijarh Nahj al-Baldthah, Dir al-Kulub al-'Arablyyah,
Egypt. 1329'1911. Vol. I, p. i82.
'* Ibn Qutaibah. op. cil.. p. 71.
661
A History of Muslim Philosophy
they followed—questions like these and others were answered in the various
speeches addressed by them from the Caliph's pulpit. Abu Bakr, in the first
speech he made following the oath of allegiance to him in the Mosque of
Madlnah, said. "I have been made a ruler over you though I am not the best
of you. Help me if 1 go right, correct me if I go wrong. Truth is faithfulness
and falsehood is treachery. Tho weak ono among you will be strong with me
till I have got him his duo, if God so wills; and the strong ono among you
will be weak with mo till 1 have made him pay what he owes, if God so wills.
Beware, when a nation gives up its endeavours in the way of God. He makes
no exception but brings it low, and when it allows evil to prevail in it, un
doubtedly He makes it miserable. Obey me as long as I obey God and tho
Prophet; if I do not obey them, you owe me no obedience.""
And 'Umar in a speech said. “No ruler holds so high a position as to have
the right to command obedience in defiance of God. 0 people, you have rights
on me which I shall relate before you, and you may take me to task over
them. 1 owe you this that I do not receive anything from your revenues or
the lai' (lands or possessions that accrue to Muslims in consequence of their
collective dominance, not aa booty in war) given to us by God except in
accordance with the Law, and that nothing that accrues to us in these ways
should go from the treasury but rightfully.""
Al-Tabari quotes 'Umar giving instructions to all persons whom ho sent
out as governors in this wise "I have appointed you governor over the followers
of Muhammad (on whom be peaoe) not to make you masters of their persons
and properties but to enable you to lead them to establish prayor, dispose of
their affairs with justice, and dispense their rights among them with equity."’*
'Umar onoe declared in public. “I have not sent my governors that thoy may
whip you and snatch your property, but that they may instruct you in your
faith and tho way of your Prophet. If there be any who haa been treated
otherwise, let him bring mo his oomplaint. By God. I will see that his wrong is
avenged." Upon this 'Amr bin 'A?, Governor of Egypt, stood up and asked,
"What, when a man is appointed ruler and he chastises someone, will you take
revenge on him!" 'Umar replied, "Yes, by God. I will take revenge on him. I
have seen the Prophet of God himself allowing people to take revenge on him."*'
On another oooaaion 'Umar collected all his governors at the annual pil-
grimage and announced in a general congregation of poople that if there waa
a person who had a charge of injustice against anyone of thorn, he should oome
forward to make his oomplaint. One person rose from the multitude and com
plained that he had been undeservedly given a hundred stripes by 'Amr bin 'As.
" Al-Tabari. op. eft.. Vol. U. p. 450; ibn Hilhllm, ol-Sirol ai-NabaicImaJi,
Mafba'ah Mustafa al-Btbi. Egypt. 1938. Vol. IV. p. 311
“ Abu Yusuf, op. di., p. 117.
Al-Tabari, op. di., p. S73.
” Abu YOsuf. op. eft., p. 115; Miunad. abu D4wud al-Tayiliai, Tr. No. 55; ibn
al-Athlr. Vol. III. p 30; al-Tabari. op. oft.. Vol. Ill, p 273.'
662
Political Thought in Early Inl.m
Umar asked him to come forward and square the account with him. ‘Amr
bin 'As protested, beseeching 'Umar not to expose his governors to this humilia
tion, but 'Umar reiterated that he had seen the Prophet of Qod himself allowing
men to avenge themselves upon him, and asked the aggrieved man to step
forward and take his revenge. 'Amr bin ‘As saved his skin only by appeasing
the man with a pair of crowns for each stripe that was to fall on his back."
Rule of /jaw.—The "Right-going" Caliphs did not regard themselves above
law. On the other hand, they declared that they stood at par with any other
citizen (Muslim or non Muslim) in this respect. They appointed judges, but
once a person was appointed a judge he was free to pronounce judgment
againBt them as against anybody else Once 'Umar and Ubayy bin Ka'b
differed in a matter, and the dispute waa referred to Zaid bin Ihabit for
decision. The parties appeared before Zaid. Zaid rose and offered 'Umar his
own seat, but 'Umar sat by Ubayy Then Ubayy preferred his claim which
'Umar denied. According to the procedure, Zaid should have asked 'Umar to
swear an oath but Zaid hesitated in asking for it. 'l.'mar himself swore an
oath, and at the conclusion of the sresion remarked that Zaid was unfit to be a
judge so long as 'Umar and an ordinary man did not stand equal in his eyes."
The same happened between 'Ali and a Christian whom he saw selling his
('All's) lost coat-of-mail in the market of Kufah. He did not seize it from tho
fellow with a ruler's might, but brought the case before the magistrate con
cerned; and aa he oould not produce adequate evidence to support his claim,
the decision of the court went against him." Ibn Khallikin reports that once
‘Ali and a non-Muslim citizen frfbimmi) apjwared as parties in a ease before
the Judge Shuraib The judge rose to greet 'Ali who was Head of the State
at that time. Seeing this ‘Ali said to Shuraib. "This is your first injustice.",l
AAwnce of Bias.—Another distinctive feature of the early days of Islam
was that everybody received an equal and fair treatment exactly in accordance
with the principles and the spirit of Islam, the society of those days being
free from all kinds of tribal, racial, or parochial prejudices As the Prophet
of God passed away, the tribal jealousies of the Arabs rose again like a held-
up storm. Tribal prejudice formed the main impulse behind the claims to
prophethood and large-scale apostasy that immediately followed the Prophet's
demise. One of Mnsailimah's 'followers said, "I know Musailimah is a false
prophet. But a false one of the (tribe of) Rabl'ah is better than the true one of
the (tribe of) Mudar."* ** An elder ofthe Banu Ghatafan. similarly taking aides
with another false prophet, Tulaibah. said, "By God, it is easier for me to follow
a prophet of one of our allied tribe* than one from the tribe of Quraiish.""
’• Abu Yusuf, op. cit.. p- 116.
*• Bnihaqi. oI-A.mon .J Kttbra. Dairatul-Maarif. Hyderabad. 1st ad.. 1SS6/I9M,
Vol I. |>. 136.
Ibid.
•' WalajiJUal Nnhdnt al Misrlyjuh.t airu. 1948. Vol. 11.p. I6H.
•• Al-Tabari, op. cd.. Vol. II. p ■'•os
>• Ibid p. 487
663
A History of Muslim Philosophy
But when the people saw that abu Bakr (r. 11-13/632-634), and in hia
wake 'Umar (r. 13-23/634-644). dispensed exemplary, even-handed justice
not only among the various Arab tribes but even among the non-Arabs and
nonMuslims, and that they did not show any favour or even preference to
their own nearest kith and kin, the old biaaea were instantly repressed and
Muslims were onoe more inspired with that cosmopolitan outlook which Islam
sought to inculcate in them. Abu Bakr and ‘Umar's attitude in this respect
was moet exemplary.
Towards the end of his reign 'Umar became apprehensive lest these tribal
currents which, despite the revolutionizing influence of Islam, had not suc
cumbed altogether, should shoot up again and cause disruption after him. So,
on one occasion talking to ‘Abd Allah bin ‘AbbAs regarding his possible suc
cessors, he said about ‘UtfamAn, "If I propose him my successor I fear he
would suffer the sons of abu Mu'ait (the Umayyads) to ride on the necks of
poople, and they will practise sin among them. God knows, if I do so, 'UUpnAn
will do this ; and if 'UthmAn does this, they will surely commit sins, and people
will rise against 'Uthman and mako short work of him."M
This apprehension clung to him even in the hour of his death. Summoning
‘Ali. 'UtbmAn. and Sa'd bin abi WaqqAs to his bedside, he said to each one,
"If you succeed me as Caliph, do not allow the members of your clans to ride
the necks of people."" Besides that, among the instructions which he left for
the Elective Council of Six, on which devolved the task of electing the new
Caliph, was this that the new incumbont was to be asked to give a pledge
that he would not show discrimination in favour of his own clan.” Unluckily,
however, the third Caliph, 'Uthman (r. 23-35/644-666) failed to keep up the
standard set by his predecessors and inclined towards favouring the Umayyads.
Thia was regarded by him aa "good office to the kindrod." Thus, he used to
say, “'Umar deprived his kin for the sake of God, but I provide for my kin
for Ilia sake."” The result was what 'Umar had apprehended. There was a
rising against him, which led to his murder and rekindled the sleeping embers
of tribal bias into a fire that consumed the whole edifice of the "Right-going”
Caliphate.
After the death of 'UthmAn, ‘Ali (r. 35-41/656-661) tried to recapture the
standard set by abu Bakr and ‘Umar. He had no bias in him and showed
himself remarkably free from it. Mu'Awlyah’s father, abu SufyAn, had taken
note of it when he had tried to excite this passion in him on abu Bakr's acces
sion. He had asked him, "How oould a man of the humblest family in Quraigh
become Caliph 1 If you prepare to rise, I will undertake to fill this valley with
horsemen and soldiers." But 'Ali had ooldly retorted that this spoke for his
enmity to Islam and the Muslims, and so far as he was concerned, he regarded
M Ibn ‘Abdal-Barr, ol Iell'iM, Dsiratul Maanf. Hyderabad, 2nd ed..Vol. II. p. 467.
•• Al fabari, op. oil.. Vol. III. p. 264.
•• Ibn Qutaibah, op. nt.. Vol. I. p. 25.
” Al-Tabari. op. oil.. Vol. HI. p. 2»1
664
Political Thought in Early Islam
abu Bakr truly fit for that office, Therefore when ho came to be Caliph he
treated the Arabs and non-Arabe, gentlemen and poor-born, Hithimitee and
others, all alike. No distinction waa made between them, and none received
preference over the others undeservedly.”
C
THEOLOGICAL DIFFERENCES AND SCHISMS
The period of the "Right-going” Caliphate, described above, waa a luminous
tower towards which the learned and the pious of all succeeding ages have
been looking back aa symbolic of the religious, moral, political, and social
orders of Islam par tmUencr. Abu IJanlfah, employed at elucidating the
Islamic ideals in the fields of politics and law, as we shall presently see, also
reverted to it aa the ideal epoch to take instance from. We have, therefore,
devoted a good deal of space to it, that tho reader may be able to comprehend
his work in the true background.
But before attending to his work we have also to take a brief view of the
reactionary movement that had set in towards the end of the "Right-going”
Caliphate and reached ita height by the time abu Hanlfah appeared on the
scene. As his efforts were mainly devoted to countering this reaction, it is
necessary to take stock of it and the problems that sprang from it, to be able
to grasp the true significance of his work.
Differences among Muslims had sprung up during the last years of 'UUtmin’s
reign, leading to his murder, but they had not yet assumed theological or
philosophical shape. When after his death in the reign of -Ali these differences
raged more furiously than ever and led to a civil war resulting in bloodshed,
as in tho battle of the Camel (36/656), the battle of Siffin (37/657), the "arbitra.
tion" (38,659), and the battle of Nahrawin (38/659), questions like "Who is
in the right in these battles, and how I", "Who is in the wrong and why 1”,
"If some regard both sides as wrong, what is their ground for holding
this I", naturally cropped up and demanded to be answered. These questions
led to the framing of certain opinions and justifications that were essentially
political in the beginning, but as each group sought to strengthen its
position by calling theological support in aid of ita particular stand, these
political factions gradually changed into religious groups. Then, tho bloodshed
which accompanied these factional feuds in tho beginning and continued
during the rules of the Umayyads and the 'Abbfaids, did not allow these differ
ences to remain only theological; they went on growing ever more acute and
menacing till they threatened the national unity of the Muslims. Every house
was a place of controversy, every controversy suggesting ever-new political,
theological, and philosophical offshoots. Every new question that cropped up
Ibid., Vol. II, p. 449; ibn Abd al Barr. op. cil.. p. 680.
” Ibn abi alfladtd, op. cil.. pp. ISO. 181
665
A History of Muslim Philosophy
gave birth to a number of new sects which subdivided themselves into further
sects over minute internal differenced. These sects were not content to fill
thenmclvee with bias against one another; their polemics often ended up in
quarrels and riots. KOfah, the capital of 'IrSq, where abu ganlfah was born,
was the chief centre of these quarrels. The battles of the Camel, f?iffln, and
Nahraw&n had all been fought in ’Iriq. The heart-rending murder of fluaain
(61/680), the Prophet's grandson, had also taken place here. It was the birth
place of most of these sects and the field where both the Umayyads and the
'Abbaalds used the maximum of coercion to repress their opponents. The time
of abu Hanlfah’s birth (80/699) and growth coincided with these factional
hostilities at their height.
The large number of sub-accts that grew out of these factions had their
roots in four main sects: the Shl'ah, the Khaw&rij, the Murji'ah, and the
Mu'tazilah. We shall give here a brief account of the doctrines of each of them
before proceeding further.
The tjil'ah.—They were the supporters of 'Ali and called themselves the
Shl'ahs (party) of 'Ali. Later (tho word 'Ali was dropped and) they began to
be called only ghl'ahs.
Although a section of the people of Banu Hishim and a few others regarded
'Ali as the best suited person to have succeeded the Prophet, and some
regarded him superior to the other Companions, particularly to 'Uthm&n,
and others considered him to be more entitled for the Caliphate because of his
relationship with the Prophet, yet up to the time of 'Ulbm&n these opinions
had not assumed the form of a creed or religious belief. Nor were the people
who held these opinions hostile to the first three Caliphs. On the other hand,
they acknowledged and supported their succession. As a separate party with
clear-cut views on these matters, they emerged in 'All's reign during the
battles of the Camel, fjiffin, and Nahraw&n. Later, the cold-blooded slaughter
of Husain rallied them, fired them with a new wrath, and shaped their views
into a separate creed. The indignation provoked among the general Muslim
populace by the vile deeds of the Umayyads and the sympathy excited in
their breasts for the descendants of 'Ali on account of their constant per
secution in both the Umayyad and the 'Abb&sid regimes, lent extraordinary
support to Shi'ite propaganda. They had their stronghold at Kfifah. Their
beliefs were as follows: —
1. The Imim'a office (particular Shi'ite term for Caliph's office) is not a
public office the institution of which may have been left to the choioe
of the public (ummah). The Im&m is a pillar of the faith and tho founda
tionstone of Islam Therefore, it is one of the main duties of the
Prophet to institute somebody as Im&m instead of leaving the matter to
the discretion of the community."
*• Ibn Khaldun, Muqaddimah. Mafba'ah Mu,tafa Muhammad. Egypt, p. 196;
al-ShahrasUm. al-MUol w-al Nihal. London. Vol I. pp. 108, 109
666
Political Thought in Early Islam
2. Tho ImAm is impeccable, i.e., free from all sins, great or small. He ia
immune from error Everything that he says or does ia inviolate."
3. The Prophet had oonforred the ImAmate on ‘Ali and nominated him aa
his successor Thus 'Ali waa the first ImAm by ordinance *'
4. Aa tho appointment of the ImAm ia not left to be made by public choice,
every new ImAm will be appointed by an ordinance from hia predecessor.*'
5 All the ghi'ah sects are also agreed that the Im&m's office is the exclusive
right of the descendants of ‘Ali “
Beyond this general agreement, however, the various gjjt'ah sects differed
among themselves. The moderate among them held that 'Ali waa the beet
created man. He who fought or bore malice against him was an enemy of God
to be raised among infidels and hypocrites, and destined to live in hell. "If
‘All had refused to recognize their Caliphate aa legitimate and expressed
displeasure with them, abu Bakr, Umar, and Uthm&n who preceded him
aa Caliphs would also have deserved that doom; but as ‘Ali recognized them
and swore them allegiance and offered prayers behind them, wo cannot take
exception to what he took aa right. We do not differentiate between ‘Ali and
the Prophet exoept that the latter was endowed with prophet hood; for the
rest ‘Ali was worthy of the same esteem as the Prophet."*4
The fanatical among them held that the Caliphs before 'Ali were usurpers
and those who elected them were ill-guided and unjust, aa they belied the
Prophet's will and deprived the rightful Caliph of his due. Some went further
and pronounced anathema against the first three Caliphs and declared them
and their electors excommunicated.
The softest of them were the Zaidlyyah, followers of Zaid (d. 122/740)
son of ‘Ali, son of Husain. They regarded ‘Ali aa superior to others, but allowed
the choice of those who were inferior to him. Moreover, they held that the
Prophet’s decision in favour of ‘Ali was not unequivocal; hence they accepted
the Caliphate of abu Bakr and Umar. All the same, they preferred the
choice of an able person from among the descendants of FAtimah (the
Prophet's daughter) aa ImAm, provided he claimed that position and challenged
the title of “the kingB" to it.*4 Abu Hanlfah waa closely connected with Zaid,
as we shall see in the course of this chapter, although he did not contribute
to the Zaidlte doctrine.
The Biawirij.—In direct opposition to the SiU'ahs the KhawArij stood at
the other extreme. They suddenly grouped together during the battle of $iffln
*> Ibn Khaldlln. op. eil.. p. 190; al SbahraaUni. op. eil., p. 109.
*’ Al-SbahrastAni. op. eil.. p. 108; ibn Khaldfln. op, eil.. pp. 190-97.
*• Ibn Khaldun, op. eit.. p. 197; al-Aih'ari. MaqUUU al/Mmtyyin, Maktabat
al-Nahdat al-Mifriyyah, Cairo, let ed„ p. 87; al-SbahraMAni, op. eit., p. 109.
*• Al gbahrastAni, op. eit.. p. 108.
“ Ibn abi al-Badld, op. eil.. Vol. IV. p. 620.
*• Al-Aih'ari. op. eit.. Vol. I. p. 129: ibn KhaldOn. op. eil.. pp. 197-98; al.
ghahrastAni, op. eil., pp. 116-17.
667
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Till then they were among the staunch eupportcre of 'Ah. but when,
during that engagement, he consented to submit hia quarrel with Mu'kwlyah
to the decision of two arbiters, they abandoned him asserting that he had
turned infidel by accepting to submit to the verdict of human arbiters instead
of God. After that they drifted farther and farther away and being fanatical
hot heads, who believed in waging war against those who differed from them
and against "unjust government" wherever one wsa found, they indulged in
war and bloodshed for a long time till their power was finally crushed under
the 'Abbiaid rule. They, too, were most influential in 'Irtq, their camps being
mainly centred in al-Bat4'ih between Kiifah and Basrah. Their beliefs briefly
were aa follows:
1. They acknowledged abu Bakr and 'Umar aa Rightful Caliphs but ‘UU)-
min, in their opinion, had, towards the end of his reign, erred from the path
of justice and right conduct and hence deserved to be deposed or killed. 'Ali
also committed, according to them, a major Bin when he accepted tho "arbitra
tion” of "one besides God." The two arbiters ('Amr bin 'A$ and abu MGsa al-
Aih'ari), their choosers ('All and Mu'Awlyah), and all those who agreed to
arbitration were sinners. All those who participated in the battle of the Camel
including Talhah. Zubeir, and 'A'ijjjah, the Prophet's wife, had been guilty
of grievous sin.
2. Sin. with the Khawinj. waa synonymous with infidelity. Anyone who
committed a major sin (and did not repent and revert) waa placed outside
the pale of Islam. All the personages mentioned above were declared infidels.
Anathema waa pronounoed against them, and they were considered fit to be
censured. The Muslims in general were pronounced infidels, first, because they
were not free from sins, and, secondly, because they not only regarded these
persons as Muslims but also acknowledged them aa reliable guides, and
deduced and verified the law from traditions reported by them.
3. The Caliph, according to them, should be elected by the free vote of the
Muslims.
4. The Caliph need not be a member of the tribe of Quraigh. Whomsoever
they elected from amongst the honest Muslims would bo a rightful Caliph.
6. A Caliph waa to be obeyed faithfully aa long as he acted rightly and
justly; but if he forsook the path of right and justioe, he waa to be fought
against and deposed or assasBinated.
8. The Qur'An waa recognized aa the authoritative source of Law but their
views on Hadllh (the Prophet's Tradition) and ijmi' (the agreement of Mus-
lims in respect of a rule of Law) were different from those of the majority.
A large group of them, which called itaelf al-Najdiyyah, did not believe in
the very need of a State. The Muslima, they said, should of themselves abide
by the right. However, if they needed a Caliph to direct their affaire, there
waa no harm in choosing one.
Their major section, the AzAriqah, dubbed all Muslims, excepting them-
selves, polytheists. The Khawlrij, according to them, oould not go for prayer
668
Political Thought in Early Islam
in response to my but a Kb&rijite'a call. They oould neither take tho meat of
an animal slaughtered by nnn.Khlrijitja nor marry among them, nor could a
Kharijite and a non-Kh&rijite inherit each other's possessions. They considered
war on all other Muslims to be a religious duty and sanctioned the killing of
their women and children and the looting of their property. They declared
those of their own sect as infidels if they shirked this duty. They allowed
treachery with their opponents and were so malicious that a non-Muslim
would find himself safer in their midst than an average Muslim
The most tolerant of them were the Ibadlyyah who refrained from declaring
the other Muslims as polytheists although they put them outside the pale of
Islam and described them aa unbelievers. Their ovidence, the IbJdlyyah said,
was to be accepted. marriages with them and inheritance to and from them
allowed. Their territory too waa not to be oalled ddr al-ku/r (the land of the
infidels) or ddr al-harb (the land of tho people at war) but ddr al-lauhld (the
land of the people of one God) although they excepted the centres of their
government from it. They disallowed secret assaults on other Muslims, although
open warfare with them waa not repugnant.47
TAe Murji'ah.—The conflicting principles of the ghl'ahs and the KhawArij
were responsible far the birth of another sect, called the Murji'ah.
Apart from the people who had flung themselves violently in support of
'Ali or against him during his wars, there waa a section which had remained
neutral either wisely avoiding to indulge in civil war which they deemed a curse
br being unable to decide which side fought for the truth. These people quite
realized that it was a veritable curse for Muslims to indulge in bloodshed and
mutual slaughter, but they wore not prepared to blaspheme any of the belli
gerents. and left it to God to decide the affair between them. Ho alone would
tell, on the Day of Judgment, which of them struggled for the right cause and
which for the wrong. So far their ideas agreed with those of the Muslims
in general, but when the Shi'ahs and the iihawarij raised questions as to what
waa faith and what constituted infidelity ushering in an era of doctrinal
wrangling and polemical contorts, this neutral group evolved some theological
doctrines in support of its position. Briefly stated they were as follows:
1. Faith comprises belief in God and the Prophet. One's action does not
form an integral part of one's faith. Hence a believer will remain a believer
though he should eschew his duties or oommit grave sins.
2. Salvation depends on faith alone. No sin will hurt one who has faith.
It is enough for a man’s redemption that he should abstain from polytheism
and die as a monotheist.*44
Some of the Murji’ah, taking a step further, affirmed that short of
*' 'Abd al-Qahir Baghdadi. al-Farg bain al-Firaq, Ma«ba'at al-Ma'irif. Egypt,
pp. 66. Bl. 63, 64. 67. 66. 82. 83, 99, 313, 315; al-5bahra«Uni. op. di.. pp. 87. 90 92,
100; al Ask ari, op. cil.. pp. 156-57. 159. 189. 190; al-Mas udi, op. dl.. p. 191.
44 Al-SbahrastAni. op. di.. pp. 103. 104; al Asb'ari. op. cil.. pp. 198. 201
669
A History of Muslim Philosophy
polytheism all sins, even the worst, would be forgiven." A few, taking •
further leap in that direction, asserted that if a man cherished faith in hie
heart but worshipped idol* or adopted Jewish or Christian doctrines and
spoke heresy in the Islamic State where he lived under no fear, he would yet
be quite fast grounded in faith, remain a friend of God, and deserve to go to
**
paradise.
Another view closely comparable with the one mentioned above waa
that if one's duty to uphold the right and stem the wrong (amr bi al-ma'rul
and 'an al muntar) required one to bear arms, it waa a •'trial" to be
avoided. It was quite right to check others on wrong oonduct. but to speak
loud against the tyranny of government waa not allowed.
* 1 Al-JaaaAs was
very bitter on these things and asserted that they strengthen the hands of
tyrants and greatly demoralized the Muslims’ power of resistance against the
forces of evil and wickedness.
The Mu'taiilah.—This tumultuous period was responsible for the birth of
yet another sect known to Islamic history aa “the Seoeders.” Although it did
not owe its origin, like the former three, to purely political factors, like them
it contributed ita share of opinions to the political issues of the day and
entered the arena of theological disputes that raged in the Islamic world at
that time, particularly in Iraq. The leaders of thia group. Wiai! bin ‘A|a
(80-131/699-748) and 'Amr bin 'Ubaid (d. 145/763) were both contemporaries
of abu Panlfch, and Basrah was the oentre of their religious contests in the
beginning.
Their political views wore briefly these:
1. The appointment of an ImAm (or, in other words, the institution of the
State) was a religious urgency. Some Mu'tazilitea. however, opined that the
ImAm'a was a superfluous office. No ImAm was needed if the community
followed the right path."
2. The choice of the ImAm, according to them, rested with the community,
and only the community's choice validated his appointment.
** Some of them
held that the choice should be unanimous, and in the event of differences
and dissensions the appointment should be suspended and held in abeyanoe."
3. The community could choose any morally qualified and efficient person
as ImAm. The condition of his being a Quraighite, an Arab, or a non-Arab was
irrelevant ." Some of them actually preferred the appointment of a non-Arab;
" Al-ShahrastAni. op. cil.. p. 104.
•• Ibn Haim. al Fafi fi al-Uilal w-al-Nihal, al-Matba'at al-Adablyyah, Egyp>.
1317/1899, Vol. IV. p. 204.
“ Al-JawA?. AW* al-Qur'in, al-Ma(ba‘at al-Bshlyyah, Egypt, 1347/1928,
Vol. II. p. 40.
" Al-Maa'iidi. op. eil„ p. 191.
Ibid.
M AI-ShahrastAni. op. eil„ p. 61.
“ Al-Mas'Odi. op. eit.. p. 191.
670
Political Thought in Early Islam
it waa better still if he could be a freed slave, for he would have fewer devotees,
and it would be easy to depose him if he turned out to be a tyrant.” They
would rather have a government which was weak and easy to depose than
one that waa bad but strong and firmly established.
4. According to them, tho Friday or other congregational prayers could not
be held behind an unrighteous ImAm.*’
5. Amr bi al-ma'ru/ w-al nahi 'an al-munkar (enjoining what is right and
forbidding what is wrong) waa among their fundamental principles. It waa
a duty with them to rise in arms against an unjust government provided they
had the power to do so and hoped to raise a successful coup.” Thus it was
that they rose in arms against the Umayyad Caliph Walid bin Yaz.Id (r. 125-
120/743-744) and tried to replace him by Yazld bin Walid who espoused their
doctrine of secession ”
6. On the question of the inter-relation of sin and infidelity, over which the
Khawirij and Murji'ah were at loggerheads, their verdict waa compromising.
A sinful Muslim waa neither a believer nor an unbeliever, but one in the
middling state.”
In addition to these principles, the Mu‘tazilah pronounced bold verdicts upon
the differences among the Prophet's Companions and upon the issue of Cali
phate. WAsil bin 'A(a declared that one of the two opponents in the battles
of Camel and fjtffln was surely a "transgressor" although it was hard to say
who. It waa for this reason that he said that if 'Ali, Jalbah, and Zubair came
before him to give evidence on a vegetable knot, he would not accept it of
them Bincc there waa a possibility that they had boon guilty of transgression.
'Amr bin ‘Ubaid pronounced both sides as "transgressors.
They also attacked 'UlhmAn vigorously and some of them did not spare
even 'Umar.” Besides thia, many of them practically rejected Hadilh (the
Prophet's Tradition) and ijrruT (the consensus of opinion) as authoritative
sources of Islamic Law.”
The Major Section.—In the midst of these violent, wrangling groups the
large majority of Muslims went along subscribing to the orthodox principles
and doctrines, accredited aa authoritative since the days of the "Right-guided”
Caliphs, principles and precepts which the Prophet's Companions and their
successors and Muslims in general had commonly regarded aa Islamic. How
ever, nobody, from the time of the inception of the schism down to the days
of abu Hanifah, had vindicated the stand of the majority in these matters of
” Al-ghahnwltoi. op. ed.. p. 63.
w Al-Asb'ari, op. cil.. p. 124.
.” Ibid., p 126.
“ Al-Mao'Odi. op. cit.. pp. 190, 193; al-SuyOU. Tdrlhh al-Khulafd', Government
Press. Lahore, 1870, p, 265.
” Al-Baghdadi, op. cd.. pp. 94-93.
Ibid., pp. 100, 101; al-fibabnudAni, op. cil.. p. 34.
•• Al Baghdadi, op, cd.. pp. 133-34; al-Sbahnwiani. op. oil., p. 40.
” AI-BaghdUdi, op. ed.. 138-39.
671
A History of Muslim Philosophy
violent divergences, and presented it methodically in a compact, doctrinal
form, although learned men, traditionists, and scholars of repute and integrity
had from time to time been bringing one or another aspect of it to light by
word of mouth or action, or embodying it in their behaviour or sacred pro
nouncements as opportunity afforded itself.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Qur'An and Commantaries.—Qur'An; ibn K&fbtr, Ta/str al-Qur*4n al-'Afim
Mafbe'ah Mustafa Muhammad. Egypt. 1937; XIuk, HuA sI WAii, IdArat al
TabA'at al Mvnlrlyyah. Egypt, 1345 H.; al-JaggA' al-JIanafi, AAtam al-Qur'dn
al-Matba’at sl-Bshiyyah, Egypt, 1347 H.
2. ffadlth and Commentaries.—Al-BukhAri; abu DAwOd; abu IMwiid al-TsyAlid
al-Mumad, Dairatul Maarif. Hyderabad, 1321 H-s Muslim: al-NasA'i; ibn MAjah
al-Tinnidhi; Ahmad bin Banbal. al-Miunad, DAr al-Ma'Arif. Egypt, 3rd ed., 1947
ibid.. Matba'at al-Maimaniyyah, Egypt, 1306 H.; ibn Hajar, foM al-Bdri. al
Matba'at al-Khairlyyah, Cairo, 1325 H.; al-Baihaqi, al-Sunan al-Kubra. Dairatul-
Maarif, Hyderabad, let ed.. 1365 H.
3. Al-Fu/b.—Abu Yttauf. KMb olUharili, al-Mstba'at al-Salaflyyah. Egypt,
2nd ed., 1352 H.
4. Al-Kaldm.—Al Shahmet Ani. Kildb al Mdal wal-Nibal, London; al Ash'ari.
MaqdltU al-ItlAmiyyin, Maktabat al-Nalidat al-Mi^lyyah. Cairo, 1st ed.; Abd
al-QAhir al-BagbdAdi, al-Fary bain al-Firaq, Matba'at al-Ma'Arif. Egypt; ibn
Harm, ol-Fafi fi al-Mdal w-al-Nihol. al-Matba'at al-Adablyyah, Egypt, 1317 H.
5. Biographies.—^Ibn al Qayyim, Zdd alSla'Od, Matba'ah Muhammad 'Ali
Sahib, Egypt, 1935; ibn Hi|h&m, al-Siral al.Kabawiyyah, Matba'ah Muffafa al-
BAbi. Egypt, 1936; ibn KhallikAn, Wafaydl alA'ydn, Maktabal al-Nahdat al-
Mipiyyah, Cairo, 1948; ibn 'Abd al-Barr. ol-fwi'dA. Dairatul-Msarif, Hyderabad
2nd ed.
6. History.—Al-Tabari. Tarin al-Unum ualMulul, al Matba'at al latiqAmah
Cairo, 1939; ibn al-Athlr. al-Kimil fi al-Tarin. IdArat al-TabA'at al-Muntriyyah
Egypt. 1356 H.; ibn Qutaibah, td-Imdmab w-al-Sii/faab, Matba'at id-FutOh, Egypt
1331 H.; ' Ugun. al■ A ifibdr, Matba'ah DAr al-Kutub. Egypt, 1928, 1st nd.; sl-Maa'udi
Muruj al-I^ahab wa Ma'Odin al-Jaudhir. al-Matba'at al-Bahlyyah. Egypt. 1346 H-;
ibn Kalhlr. al-Biddyah wal-Nibagab. Matba'at al-Sa'Adah, Egypt; ibn Khaldun.
al-.Vugmidimab, Matba'ah Mustafa Muhammad. Egypt; al-8uy0|i, Tarin al-
Khulafa’, Government Proas. Lahore, 1870; Hum al-MubAdarah fi Atfibir Mip
w-ol-Qabirah, al-Matba'at. al-ghartflyyah, Egypt; Ahmad Amin, fhiba al-JMm,
Matbs ah Lajnah al TAllf w-al-Tarjamah. Egypt. Sth ed., 1946; al-Khatlb,
Tarin Bagdad. Matba'al al-Sa'Adah. Egypt. 1931.
7. Literature.—AlQalqsibandi. ,Su6A al-d'ifta fi Qand'ai al- In&T, DAr al-Kutub
al-Mijrlyyah, Cairo. 1910; ibn ahi al-Uadld. Sbarh Nabj al nrMthab. DAr al-Kutub
al'Arabiyysh, Egypt, 1329 H.; ibn 'Abd Rabbihi, al'Iqd alFarid, Lajnah al-
TAllf w-al-Tarjamah. Cairo, 1940; abu al-Faraj al-AabahAni, Kitab ol-JoMm.
al Matba st al-Misrlyyah, BulAq. Egypt, 1285 H-; al-RAghib al-AfbahAni. AfuMdanU
al Udaba', Matba'at al-HilAl, Egypt., 1902; al Murtads, al-AmOli, Matba'at al-
Sa'Adah, Egypt. 1st od„ 1907.
8. MiscellansouB.TAgh KubrAiAdah. M./idA alSa’adah. Dairatul Maarif,
Hyderabad, 1st ed.. 1329 H.
672
Abu Hanlfah and Abu Yusuf
Chapter XXXIV
ABU yANlFAH AND ABU Y08UF
A
ABU BANIFAH
Li/t.—It was under the circumstances explained at the close of the pre
ceding chapter that abu Hanlfah appeared on the acene and began his work.
His original name was Nu'm&n bin Ihabit. Bom at Kufah, capital of Iraq, in
80/699 according to authentic reports, in the reign of 'Abd al-Mal^c bin Mar-
win. when I.lajjaj bin Yusuf ruled over Iraq, he lived the first fifty-two yeare
>f his lifo in the Umayyad regime, the later eighteen in the 'Abbisid. He was
fifteen years old when Hajj&j left the stage; in the time of 'Umar bin 'Abd
d-'AzIz he was a youth. The stormy days of the rule of Yazld bin Muhallab,
Khalid bin 'Abd Allah al-Qasri, and Nasr bin Sayyir,over Iraq, passed before
his eyes. He himself was a victim of the persecution of ibn Hubairah, tho
last Umayyad governor. He saw the rise of the 'Abbisid movement with ita
centre at Kufah, his home town, which remained virtually the main strong
hold of the new-born 'Abb&aid State before the founding of Baghdad. Hia
death occurred in 150/767 during the reign of Mansur, the second 'Abb&sid
Caliph.
Abu Hanifah's ancestors belonged to Kabul. His grandfather ZOta (according
to some the pronunciation is Zaufa) came to Kufah as a prisoner of war,
accepted Islam, and settled there under the friendly protection of Banu Taim
Allah. Zuta waa a trader by profession and waa known to 'Ali, the “Right
going" Caliph; in fact, he was dose enough to him and sometimes entertained
him with gifts.1*Abu Hanlfah'a father, Th&bit. also owned some business at
Kufah. According to a report coming from abu Hanlfah, he owned a bakery
there.’
Abu yanlfah'a own account of his education describes him aa applying him
self first to recitation (reading the Qur'&n properly), IJadllh (Tradition),
grammar, poetry, literature, philosophy, and other subjects in vogue in those
days.’ Then he turned to specialize in dialectical theology, and mastered it to
such a degree that people looked to him as an authority in that science. His
pupil Zufar (bin al-Hudhail) reports that his master himself told him that at
first he took such interest in theology that people lifted their fingers towards
him.4 In another report abu yanifah says that at one time he was a past
1 Al-Kardari, Afandqib al lrndm al-A'ram. Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad. 1321/
1903, Vol. I, pp. B5. 6e.
1 Al-Muwaifaq bin Ahmad al-Makki. .tfondfih a/./mdm al-A'zam Abi Hanlfah.
Dairatul-Maarif. Hyderabad, 1321/1903, Vol. I. p. 102.
■ Ibid., pp. 57-58.
4 Ibid., pp. 55, 59.
673
A History of Muslim Philosophy
master in the art of controversy and spent most of his time in dubatni. As
Basrah waa tha main venue of these contests, he had been there about twenty
times, occasionally staying there for six months or so st a stretch, and re
maining engaged in controversies with the different sects of the Kbarijite
.
*
the Ibadlyyah, the fjufrlyyah, and the Hajhwlyyah • It may be easily con
cluded from this that he waa well versed in philosophy, logic, and theological
divergences of the numerous sects without which a man cannot enter the
field of controversy at all The beautiful use that he later made of reason and
common sense in the interpretation of Law and the resolving of abstruse legal
problems which won him immortal fame owed a great deal to the intellectual
training which he had received earlier from those exercises of logical argumen
tation.
After keeping himself busy in polemical controversies for a long time and
growing sick of them, he turned to fiqh. i.e., Islamic Law. Here, with the
bent of mind that he possessed, he could not interest himself in the Traditionist
school (ahi alhudith) He, therefore, joined the Iraqian school of reason with
its centre at K-ifah. This school of law' traced its origin to ‘Ali and ibn Mas'ud
(d. 32/662). after whom their disciples Shuraib (d. 78/697), 'Alqamah (d. 62/
681). and MasrQq (d. 63/682) became its accredited leaders, followed in their
turn by IbrShlm Nafcb'i (d. 95/714) and JJammad (d. 120/737). Abu Flanlfah
took Hamm&d for his master and kept him company for eighteen years till
the latter's death. Frequently he also consulted the other learned masters of
law and Tradition in the HijAz on the occasions of pilgrimage, and acquainted
himself also with the Traditionist school.of thought. On HammAds death he
waa chosen to succeed him. He occupied that place for thirty years, delivering
lectures and discourses, issuing legal verdicts, and doing the work which
formed the foundation of tho Hanafi school of law named after him. In these
thirty years he answered some sixty thousand (according to other estimates,
eighty-throe thousand) legal queries, all of which were later compiled under
different heads in his own life-time.
* Some seven to eight hundred of his
pupils spread to different parts of the Islamic world and filled important seats
of learning. They were entrusted with issuing legal opinions and guiding the
education of the masses, and became objects of heartfelt veneration for the
multitudes. About fifty of them were appointed judges after his death during
the 'Abhlaid reign. The law as codified by him waa adopted as the law of the
great part of tho Muslim world. The 'Abb&sida, the Saljnqs, the Ottomans,
and the Mughuls espoused it. and millions of people follow it today.
Abu Hanifah, like his forefathers, earned his living by trade. He dealt in
a kind of cloth, called hhaa. in Kufah. Gradually, his business flourished till
he had a factory where this cloth was manufactured.’ The business was not
• Ibid., p. 59.
■ Ib,d„ p. 9«, Vol. II. pp. I3J, |3fl.
’ AI-YAR'i, Mir'dl al.JinUn vi ‘IInal alYaqtdn, DairatuLMaarif. Hyilerahail
1337 1918. VoL I. p. 310
674
Abu Hanlfah and Abu Yusuf
restricted to Kufah; hia goods had a good market in far-off plaoos. The growing
recognition of his integrity oonverted his firm into a bank where people de
posited huge sums of money on truat. These deposits ran to fifty million
dirhanu at the time of his death * Extensive experience of financial and oom-
mercial matters gave him a deep insight into various aspects of law such as
seldom falls to the lot of a theoretical lawyer. Later on. when he set himself
to the task of codifying the Law of Islam this personal experience proved of
immense help to him. A further testimony to his deep understanding and
proficient handling of practical affairs is provided by tho fact that when in
145/768 Mansur undertook the task of constructing the new. city of Baghdad,
he appointed abu Hantfah to supervise tho work, and for four years it re
mained under his supervision.*
In private life he waa most pious, a man of known integrity. Once he sent
out hia partner in business to sell some merchandise. A part of the goods
to be sold wsb defective. He instructed his partner to let the buyer know tho
defect. The partner, howover, forgot to do so, and returned after selling the
whole lot without apprising the buyer of the defect. Abu Hanlfah did not
keep that money. He gave away the whole of it (and it amounted to 35,000
dirhams) in charity.*®
Hia chroniclers have recorded occasions when ignorant persons would come
to his firm selling goods at lower rates than what they were worth. Abu Hanlfah
would tell them that their wares were worth more than what they put them at,
and bought them at their actual rates." All his contemporaries speak highly
of his honesty. The famous learned divine. 'Abd Allah bin Mubirak, said,
"I have yet to see a more pious man than abu Hanlfah. What will you say
about the man to whom they offered the world and ita wealth and he kicked
it away, who was Hogged and remained steadfast, and who never accepted
those posts and honours which people hanker after."1’
Justice ibn gfcubrumah said, "The world followed him but he would have
none of it. As for us, the world would have none of us and we run after it."1’
According to Hasan bin Ziykd, abu Hanlfah never accepted a gift or favour
from the rich.**
He was also very generous, never sparing in spending, particularly on the
learned and tho scholarly. A part of his profits was earmarked for them and
expended throughout the year; and whatever of it waa left over waa distributed
among them. Extending them suoh help he would Bay: "Bo pleased to spend
• Al-Makki. op. cil.. p. 220.
■ Al-Tabari. Vol. VI. p. 238; ibn Kaffair, al-HtdAyah w-al-Nihayuh. Vol. X.p. 97.
>• Al Khajlb. Vol. XIII. p. 358; Mulla 'All Q4ri. £Anl alJawdh>r ul-Mu^l'ah,
Dairatul-Maarif. Hyderabad. 1332/1813. p. 468.
11 Koran instance of this see al-Makki, up. cil.. pp. 218-20.
“ Al Ehahabi. Manaqih <d Mm Abu Hani/ah an SMibaihi. DAr al-Kutub
al 'Arabi. Egypt. 1308/1946, p. 115,
■■ AI-RAgfaib al A»baliAni. p. 206.
14 Al-Dbahabi. op. cit.. p. 26.
675
A History of Muslim Philosophy
it on your needs, and thank none but God for it. I don't give you anything
of mine. It is God'e bounty, He has given it to mo for your sake."1* A number
of hie pupils entirely depended on him, particularly abu Yhsuf He met all
the expenses of the latter's house since hia parents were poor and wanted
their son to give up studies and take to some work to earn a living.1*
That waa the man. who tackled in the firat half of the second/eighth century
the knotty problems arising from the awkward circumstances that followed
the ''Right-guided" Caliphate.
Abu Hantfah'e Pronouncements and Opinions.—First of all we shall take
those problems about which his opinions aa recorded by himself are available
to us. He was no prolific writer. Therefore, in order to know his views we have
generally to resort to other reliable sources. But on certain issues, mainly
raised by the above-mentioned sects (the Shi'ites, the KWrijites, the Morji'itee.
and the Mu'tazilites) he has written, against his wont, with his own pen.
drawing up in brief but eloquent words the creed and doctrine of the ahi al-
sunnah v-al-jamd'ah (lit., the followers of the Prophet and his Companions'
tradition) who formed (aa they still do) by far tho largest section of the Muslim
community. Naturally, in an estimate of hia work the first plaoe must be
given to what flows from his own pen,
Al-Fiqh al-Akbar.—We have already stated in the preceding chapter how
the differences that cropped up among the Muslims during 'All's reign and the
first years of the Umayyad regime led to the birth of four big sects in the
community, which not only expressed but also adopted aa tenets of faith
contradictory opinions on certain vital issues affecting the constitution of
Muslim society, the Islamic State, the sources of Islamic Law, and the decisions
adopted by common consent in the earlier period. The creed of the majority
in regard to those matters was clear; it was embodied in the practice of the
common man and not infrequently in the spoken word or behaviour of the
great divines and men of learning. But nobody had drawn it up in clear-cut
words and put it into the form ofa treatise. Abu Hanifah waa the first person to
put down perspicuously in his famous work, al-Fiqh al-AUar,'’ the Sunni point
of view regarding matters of divergence against the doctrines of other sects.
Al Kba»lb, VoL XIII. p. 360; al-Makki, VoL I, p. 262.
“ Ibn KballiUn. Vol. V. pp. 422-23; al-Makkl. Vol. II. p. 212.
" Before gaining currency as a term of the scholaatica. the term Fiqh covered
beliefs, general principles, law—in fact, everything under it. The differentiation waa
made by callingbeliefs and general principles Fu/h al-Akbar, the fundamental or the
main Fiqh, and abu Hanifah gave that name to his compendium. Raoently, some
scholars have doubted the authenticity of somo parts of thia book; thoy believe
them to liave been included later. However, the authenticity of those parts which
wo discuss here is undoubted, aa whatever other sources we tap to collect abu
Hanlfab's opinions on these matters, we find these tallying with them. For instance,
abu llanlfah's al Waetyyah. ol-F^A ol-Atsd/reported by abu Mufl* al-Balhhi, and
•A'/idah TaMwiyyab in which Tahiwi (c. 229-321/843-933) has described the
doctrines reported from abu Uan'tfah and his pupils, abu Yusuf and Muhammad bin
l.laean al-Sbaibilni
676
Abu Hanlfah and Abu YOsuf
The find question relevant to our discussion answered by him in the book
is regarding the position of the "Right-guided" Caliphs. The dissenting sects
had poeed tho question about some of them whether they were rightly raised
to the office of the Caliphate. Some wanted to know who were superior to
whom, and whether there was any among them who could not be called a
Muslim at all. These questions were not merely queries regarding some per
sonages of old history; in fact, they mooted another fundamental question,
vii., whether tho way these Caliphs were elected to their office was to be
recognized as the constitutional way of electing the Head of the Islamic State
or not. Moreoever, if the title of anyone of them proved doubtful, the question
would be raised whether the decisions taken by “consensus of opinion" in
his regime would form part of the Islamic Law or not; whether his own deci
sions would continue to form precedents in law or cease to operate as such.
Beside* that, the questions whether they were entitled to the Caliphate,
whether they were endowed with faith at all. and whether some of them
were superior to others, naturally gave rise to another queetion of a very vital
import, and that was, whether the Muslims of later times could repose any
trust in cither the members or the collective decisions of the early Islamic
community brought up under the direct care and supervision of the Prophet
of God, the people through whom the teachings of the Qur'&n. the Prophet's
Tradition, and the Islamio Law came to be transmitted to later generations.
The second queetion related to the position of the Prophet’s Companions.
One of the sects, the Shi ah, called the vast majority of these Companions
sinners, gone astray, and even infidels, because they had selected the first
three Caliphs to rule them; and a fair number was put outside the pale of faith
or declared "transgressors" by the Kh&rijitee and the Mu'tazilitee for reasons
of their own. Thia, too, waa not a purely historical question, for it naturally
led one to ask whether the Iswb and traditions transmitted by persons of
doubtful bona fidet to posterity would remain authentic sources of Islamic
Law or not.
The third basic question dealt with in the book relates to "faith," its defini
tion and distinction from unbelief, and the oonaequences of sin—issues of grave
controversy and debate in those days among the Kbarijitcs, the Murji'ites,
and the Mutazilites. This again was not merely a theological question but one
that was closely related to the constitution of Muslim society and its answer
affected the civic rights and social relations of Muslims. A question that
closely followed from.it was whether in a Muslim State governed by the sinful
and the wrong-doer it was possible to perform correctly such religious duties
as the Friday and other prayers, or political functions Hko dispensing justice
or participating in war.
Abu Qanlfah's answers to these questions embodying the Sunni creed are
as follows:
I. “The best of men after the Prophet of God (on whom be peace, was abu
Bakr. After him was 'Umar, after him 'Ujjjman, and after him ‘Ali. They were
677
A History of Muslim Philosophy
all just men anil abided by the right.”" ‘Aqidah Tahuu-iyyah further explains
it like this: "We believe abu Bakr (with whom God be pleased) to be the
best of men after the Prophet of God (on whom be everlasting peace). We
recognize his title of the Caliphate as prior to that of others, then ‘Umar's,
then ‘UlbmAn's. then 'All's—and they are the Right-guided Caliphs and the
■Right-going leaders.'""
It is a matter of interest to note that personally abu Hanifah loved ‘Ali
more than 'Ulhman,” and believed that neither of them should be ranked
above the other.
* 1 Formulating the creed, however, he accepted whole
heartedly the decision of the majority of his day in choosing 'Ulfaman as Caliph
after 'Umar, and agreed that in the ranking of the "Rightguided" Caliphs the
order of their Caliphate was also the order of their superiority to one another.
2. “The Companions of the Prophet are not to be spoken of but respect
fully.”” Aqidah Tahdwiyyah elucidates it further: "We treat all the Com
panions of tho Prophet respectfully We do not love anyone of them beyond
measure, nor censure anyone of them. We do not like one who bears them
malice or mentions them with disrespect. We mention them in none but a
good way."
**
Abu Hanifah did not hesitate to express his opinion on the mutual war of
the Companions, and said unambiguously that in the war between ‘Ali and his
adversaries (and evidently the participants of the battles of the Camel and
Siffln are included among them) ‘All stood by right more than they,” yet
he altogether refrained from inflicting reproach on the other side.
3. "Faith is synonymous with owning and believing. To have faith ia to
own and believe (in God and His Prophet).”" In aj-H'osiyyaA it is explained
in these words: "To have faith in something is to own it with the tongue and
believe in it from the heart," and further: “Faith is not owning alono, nor
believing alone." In another place we find: "Action is something different
from faith, and faith different from action. Often a man is exempt from a
certain action but he is not exempt from faith. For instance, it may be said
'• Mulls 'Ali QAri. Shark alFiyh al-AUw. Delhi. 1348/1828. pp. 74-87; al
MagbnisAwi. Shark al-Fiyk al-Akbar, Dairatul-Mearif, Hyderabad, 1321/1803, pp.
25, 26.
'• Ibn abi al Tzz al-ffanafi, Shark al-ToMwtyyak, Dir nl-Ma'&rif, Egypt, 1373/
1953, pp. 403-16.
Al-Kardari. Vol. II. p. 72
“ Ibn Abd al-Barr. ol-fniujd', al-Maktabat al-Qudai, Cairo. 1370/1860. p. 163;
al-Sarnlstsi, Shark al-Siyar al-Kabir, Vol. I. Sllirkah MuaAhmah Migriyyah, Egypt,
1957. The same was Malik's and Yahya bin Sa'Id al QaftAn'a opinion. Ibn 'Abd
al-Han, al-lrtiAb, Vol. II. p. 467.
11 Mulls 'Ali Q&ri. p. 87; al Maghnlaiwi. p. 26.
•• Ibn abi al Tzz. p. 398.
" Al Makki, Vol. II. pp. 83, 84; al-Kardari. Vol. II, pp. 71, 72. This too was not
the opinion of abu Honlfah alone. All tho ahi ai-runnah had agreed upon thia. Ibn
Hajar, al Ifilial,, Mafbo'ah Mu.uifa Mubammad. Egypt. 1939. Vol. II. p. 602.
Mulla 'Ali Q&ri. p. 103; al MnghntaSwi. p. 33.
678
Abu Hanlfah and Abu Yusuf
that a poor man ia exempt from the payment of mhU (prescribed charity),
but it cannot- be said that he is exempt from bearing faith also.”1* Thus abu
Hanlfah refuted the Khanjite theory that action formod part of faith and
hence sin was synonymous with disbelief, or, in other words, that a crime
necessarily meant treason.
4 "We do not excommunicate a Muslim for any sin, however grave it may
be, unless he affirms that it is 'allowed.' We do not divest him of belief. We
call him a believer. A believer may be a transgressor, without being an infidel."*7
In al-Waqiyyah he writes: "The sinners among the followers of Muhammad
(on whom be peace) are all believers, not infidels."*" Aqidah fahduiiyyah
elucidates it further: “A man doos not go out of the pale of faith except by
denying the creed that had put him inside it."" A discussion of the Kh&rijites
with abu Hanlfah over this issue throws further light on this doctrine and ita
social consequences. A largo party of them once came to him and said. "There
are two biers at the gate of the Mosque. One ia of a drunkard who died drink
ing. the other of a woman who got illicitly pregnant and took her own life
in shame.”
"To which community did they belong! Jews, were they 1" he asked.
"No." they said,
"Christians, then, or Majusls!"
"No," they answered again.
"Then, to which community did they belong 1” naked he.
“To the community which bears witness to the creed of Islam,” they replied.
"Is that one-third of the faith, or one-fourth, or what I” asked he.
They said, "There is no one-third or one-fourth of faith."
"After all, what part of faith is this bearing witness to the creed of Islam I”
said he.
"The whole faith," said they.
"When you yourself call them faithful, what is it you want of me I" asked he.
"We ask whether they would go to heaven or hell."
He replied. "If you ask me that, 1 will say about them what the Prophet
of God, Abraham, said about sinners worse than they. '0 God, he who follows
me is mine, and he who disobeys—Thou art the Forgiving, the Compassionate';
or what the Prophet of God, Jesus, said about sinners worse than they. 'If
You punish them they are Your creatures, and if You forgive them, Thou art
All-Powerful and Wise’; or what the Prophet of God, Noah, said, Their
reckoning rests with God, would that, you understood; and 1 do not wish to
turn my back upon the believers.' "*"
Mulla Husain,al-Jauharalal Munitat fi Sbarh Wafiyyat al-Imdm Abu Hantfah.
DairatulMaarif. Hyderabad, 1321/1803. pp. 3. 6. 7.
17 Mulla 'Ali QAn. pp. 80-88; al-MaghnlsAwi. pp. 27-28.
Mulla Husain, p. 8.
“ Ibn obi al-*Izz, p. 205.
AlQur'ta. xiv. 27; v. 118; xxvi, 113-14.
679
A Mister; of Muslim Philosophy
Hearing this the Khtriiitm felt outwitted and avowed their mistake.11
6. "Prayera can be offered behind any of the faithful, good or bad.””
Agidah Tahdwiyyah elucidates it further like this: “The pilgrimage and jihdd
(war) will continue to be performed to the Day of Judgment under the rulers
of the faithful, whether they be good or bad. Nothing will make them unlawful
or discontinue them.”**
Al-Jasaaa has more clearly explained abu Hanlfah's point of view in this
matter. "Some people," writes he, “suppose that abu Hanifah approve* the
Imtmate or Caliphate of the corrupt. If it has not been deliberately invented,
the misunderstanding probably springs from this that abu Hanlfah (and not
he alone, all the learned scholars of Iraq whoae opinions are widely known are
one with him in this) says that if a judge is himself just, his decisions will be
accepted, no matter how corrupt a master has appointed him; and prayer may
be lawfully offered behind corrupt masters despite their corruption. Thia
attitude is absolutely correct in ita own place, but it does not mean that abu
Hanifah finds no fault with the Caliphate of the oorrupt.""
These elucidations make it clear that abu Hanifah. unlike the Kh&rijites and
Mu'taxilitos, differentiated between Caliphs de jure and Caliphs de /ado. A
necessary oorollary to the position taken by the above-mentioned sects was
that in the absence of a just and pious ruler, i.e., a Caliph de jure, all functions
of Muslim society and State would remain suspended. There would be no
pilgrimage, and no Friday or other congregational prayer; the courts would
stop, and there would be no other religious, social, or political work. Abu
Hanifah, on the other hand, contended that if at a time the Muslims were
deprived of a Caliph de jure, the functions of their society would continue to
be exercised lawfully under a Caliph de facto, though his right to Caliphate may
be disputable. In the pages to come we shall point out what, according to him,
were the essential prerequisites of a lawful Caliphate and what he thought
of oorrupt and unjust Caliphs.
6. "We do not say that sin does not do a believer any harm. We neither say
that a believer will never go to hell, nor that he will live eternally in hell
if he is a transgressor."" “We also do not say, like the Murji’ites, that our
good deeds will be certainly rewarded and our bad deeds undoubtedly for
given,""
Aq'uiah Tahdtriyyah haa a further addition to it: "We decide in respect of
no believer that he is destined to go to heaven or to hell. We do not accuse
any Muslim of infidelity, polytheism, or hypocrisy, unices we see him actually
•' Al-Makki. Vol. I, pp. 124-25,
■■ Mulls 'Ali QSri. p. 91; sl-Maghntaiwi. p. 28.
Ibn abi al Tax. p. 322.
•• AMdm al-Qur'Hn, Vol. I, pp. 80-81; al-Saraluai has also explained this in hia
al Mabri), Mafba'at ul-Sa'idah. Egypt. 1324/1908, p. 130.
■■ Mulls ■ Ali Q8ri. p. 92; alMagbni»*wi, pp. 28-29.
Mulls 'Ali Q&ri. p. 93; si-Maglinta&wi. p. 29.
680
Abu Hanlfah and Abu Yusuf
engaged in them. Aa for intentions and motives we leave them to God to
judge.''"
Thus abu Hanlfah steered a middle course through the opinions held
by the Murji'itee, the KhArijitee, and the Mu'tazilitea, and formulated a doc
trine of balance which, on the one hand, preserves the Muslim society from
disintegration through mutual hatred and violence, and. on the other, insures
against its falling into moral indiscipline and getting emboldened to commit
sins with impunity.
A6u /fani/aA on Stale and Caliphale.—Tho opinions mentioned above related
to issues which had cropped up in consequence of the political turmoil of the
day and vitally affected tho legal system and the political and social orders of
Muslim society. Now, let us eiamine abu Hanlfah's views concerning the State
and Caliphate. Since there is no work of his own touching these matters, we
have to resort to the following two kinds of sources for information: first, his
opinions quoted in the traditions and books of the Hanafi school; and, seoondly,
tho attitude he adopted towards his contemporary governments of the Umay
yads and the ‘Abb&sids. The latter also includes a number of spoken words
coming from his mouth during the course of his struggle with these govern
ments, and these throw further light on his points of view under discussion.
The Problem of Sovereignly and Legislation.—Abu Hanlfah'a views on
sovereignty wore identical with the generally known basic view of Islam on
this issue, namely, (1) that the true sovereign is God. (2) that the Prophot is
to be obeyed as God's accredited vicegerent, and (3) that the Shart'ah, i.e.,
the Law of God and His Prophet, ia the supreme Law to which all must submit
without demur or reservation. Abu Hanlfah, pre-eminently a jurist, has stated
this doctrine rather in terms of law than of politics. He says: "When I find
an order in the Book of God, I take it from there. When I do not find it there
I take it from the accredited practice, word, or tradition of the Prophet,
ooming down to us through reliable sources. When I do not find it either in
the Book of God or in the Prophet’s Sunnah. I follow the (agreed) opinion
of the Prophet’s Companions. In case of difference of opinion among them I
adopt the opinion I like and reject the one I do not like; but I do not reject
them all to follow an opinion from outside. ... As for others, I have aa much
right to sift and draw conclusions aa they have.”1'
Ibn Hszm states: “All his pupils are agreed that abu Hanlfah's practice
waa that even a weak tradition was to be preferred to (one’s own opinion
formed by) analogical reasoning (qiyds) or private judgment frd’f/”“
This leaves absolutely no doubt that abu Hanlfah regarded the Qur'&n and
the Sunnah as the final authority. Legal sovereignty, according to him, rested
with God and the Prophet; and reason and judgment (jiyds and M’yJ were
" Ibn abi al-Tsz, pp. 312-13.
Al Khatib. Vol. xm, p. 368; al-MMtki. VoL I. p. 82: al-Ebahabi. p. 20.
" Al-Dhahabi. p. 21
631
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to be employed in the service of legislation only tn matters where they had
given no instruction. The precedence given by him even to an "isolated" opinion
of the Companions waa also based on the possibility of their being aware of
some instruction from the Prophet (about the matter under reference) which
may have been the basis of that opinion. That waa also why, when he saw a
difference among the Companions, he accepted the opinion of someone of
them rather than differ with all of them—he would avoid the danger of going
against the Sunnah even inadvertently. In any case, he employed to the
utmost his power of reasoning and judgment to find out whose opinion seemed
beet to approximate to the Sunnah.
The charge that he preferred his own discretion to a clear ordinance fnossj
waa laid at his door oven in his life-time but he refuted it saying, "God knows
that he who stated that I preferred my own discretion to ‘ordinance’ told a
lie and accused me unjustly. How can we dare use our discretion when we
have an 'ordinance' 1 The Caliph Mansur onoe wrote to him saying that
he had heard that he (abu Hanifah) gave precedence to deductions from
analogy over the Prophet’s tradition. In reply, he wrote: "0 Commander of
Believers, what you have heard is incorrect. I go first by the Book of God.
then by the Sunnah of the Prophet, then the decisions of abu Bakr. 'Umar,
’Uihmin. and 'Ali. and then the decisions of other Companions; but when I
find disagreement among them, I resort to discretion.""
Establishment of the Caliphate.—Regarding the Caliphate his views wore
most clear-cut and unambiguous. According to him, to seize power by force
and later regularize it by exacting allegiance under duress waa no lawful way
of being chosen for it. A Caliph should be chosen after consultation and in
conference with the wise who are entitled to give opinion (ahi al-ra'y). Abu
Ranlfah expressed this opinion in faoe of the peril of losing his life. Msnsflr's
Chamberlain, Rabi' bin YOnus, relates that the Caliph summoned Malik ibn
abi Dhi'b and abu Hanlfah before himself and asked, "What do you say
about this power that God haa given me over the peoplo—am I deserving of
it!" Malik answered, "Had you not been deserving, God would not have
conferred it on you." Said ibn abi Uhi'b, “God grants the kingdom of the
world to whom He pleases, but the kingdom of the hereafter is given to him
who strives for it and is helped by God to make way to it. The help of God
will attend you if you obey Him; in case you disobey, it will keep away from
you. As for the Caliphate, the truth is that only a conference of the God-fearing
can institute it, and one who seizes it by force haa no righteousness in him
You and your associates are deprived of the help of God, and have turned aside
from truth. Now. if you ask the Almighty to grant you peace and try to gain
nearness to Him with deeds of piety, you may win His grace; otherwise you
are only a self-seeker.”
•• Al-fiha'rtni. KuAb ol AIluln. Malba'at alAzhariyyah. Egypt. 3rd od„ 1925,
vol. i. p. ei.
•' Ibid., p M.
682
Abu Hanifah and Abu Yusuf
Abu Hanifah tells us that when ibn abi Ehi'b spoke those words, Malik and
he folded their clothes about them oxpecting his head to go off his shoulders
that very moment and his blood to fall on these clothes. But Mansur turned
to abu Hanifah and inquired, “What say you!" He replied, "The man who
sincerely seeks the right path to guide himself eschews wrath. If you oonsult
your conscience you will see that you have not invited us for the sake of God
but to make us say, out of dread, something that suits you and that should
reach the people. The truth iB, you have become a Caliph without even a
couple of men from amongst the ahi al /atwa (those whose opinion is respected
aa authoritative) agreeing to it. whereas a Caliph should be chosen with the
conference and concurrence of Muslims. You know, abu Bakr refrained from
making decisions for six months until the (news of the) Yemenites' allegiance
arrived." Then all the three rose and took their way. MansOr despatched Rabi'
after them with a bag full of coins for each with the instruction that if Malik
accepted it, it should bo made over to him, but if abu Hanifah or ibn abi
Efai'b accepted it. he should bring their heads to him. When the gift was
offered to Malik he took it, but when Rabi' offered it to ibn abi Dhi'b he said
that he did not consider it lawful for Manser himself, how it could be lawful
for him. And abu Hanifah said, "I won't touch it, not even if you cut off my
head." When Mansur heard of it, he said, "Their contentment has saved their
livee.”u
A Caliph'* Qualification*.—Till abu Hanifah's time the qualifications which
entitled a man to Caliphate were not described at length aa they were
compiled later by scholars like Mawardi and ibn Khalddn. Bley were for
the most part self-evident, for instance, ho should be a Muslim, a male,
free, and well versed in religion, and sound in body and mind. Two things,
however, were doubtful and needed clarification: first, whether a ruth
less or corrupt person could bocomo a Caliph or not; secondly, whether it
was necessary for a Caliph to belong to the tribe of Quraish Abu Hanlfah’s
opinion with regard to the first was that a Caliph must be a just person.
One who ia cruel and corrupt caunot be a Caliph, a judge, a governor, a pro-
nouncer of legal verdict (Mufti), or an arbiter. If such a person comes to office,
his Caliphate is null aqd void and the public owe him no obedience. However,
notwithstanding his usurpation of power, all tho social dealings and obliga
tions executed by Muslims under him in accordance with tho SfiarVah will
have legal sanction and the just decisions of the judges appointed by him
will take effect. Abu Bakr al-.Iassis, a well-known Hanafi jurist, has explained
thia point in greater detail. Ho observes: "It is not lawful that a cruel or
corrupt person should be a prophet or his successor (tA-dl/nA) or a judge
or hold any office by virtue of which he should be in a position to imposo his
will on the people in matters relating to religion: he cannot , for example, be
a Mufti or a witness or a reporter of the Prophet's traditions. The Qur'iuic
" Al-Kanlari. Vol. 11. pp. Ifr-IO.
683
A History of Muslim Philosophy
verse: “My oovenant does not extend to the wrong-doers"41 shows that all
those people who come to the helm of affairs in matters connected with religion
must be just and virtuous. This verse categorically proves that the Caliphate
of the corrupt is unlawful. No person of wicked reputation can be a Caliph.
If any of that character should install himself in that office, the people are
under no obligation to follow or obey him. The same was meant by the Pro
phet of God (on whom be peace) when ho said that none among the created
was entitled to command obedience in defiance of the Creator. The veree ia
also conclusive that no corrupt peraon can become a judge, a governor, or
a magistrate; and if he becomes one. his orders will not be valid. Nor can hia
evidence be acceptable, nor his transmission of a report from the Prophet of
God, nor the verdict (fatwa) of which he is the pronouncer.”44
Al-Jasste further affirms that this was abu Hanlfah’s opinion. He regrets
how unjust it is to accuse him of allowing the Caliphate of the corrupt. We
have already alluded to that controversy and need not repeat it here.
AlDhahabi also affirms this to be abu IJanlfah's view. According to him,
abu Hanlfah held that the Caliph who misused public money (fay') or gave
unjust orders waa not entitled to remain Caliph and his orders were not valid.44
About the seoond question abu Hanlfah'a opinion waa that tho Caliph should
belong to the tribe of Quraigh.44 Not thia alone; it waa the agreed view of all
the Sunnites.47 However, they held this view not because the Caliphate waa
constitutionally the exclusive right of one tribe, but because in the particular
circumstances of those days only a Quraighite Caliph could hold all Muslims
together. In other words, this opinion was based on political expediency of the
time and not on any legal or constitutional right of the Quraigjj Ibn KhaldOn
explains in detail that in those days the Arabs were the mainstay of the State
and there were far more chances of the Arabe agreeing on a Quraighite Caliph
than on anyone from some other tribe. The ohancee of strife and rift that
lay in the choice of a non-Quraighite Caliph were so many that none could
afford to put the Caliphate in that peril.44 That incidentally unfolds the wisdom
and implications of the Prophet’s timely instruction that the Imims should
be chosen from the Quraigh.*• Had the Caliph’s office been for ever forbidden
to the non-Quraigbitea, ‘Umar would not have said at the hdur of his death,
"If Hudfaaifsh's freed slave Salim, were alive. I would have proposed him my
•• Al-Qur'&n, ii, 124.
44 Al Ja«44, VoL I, p. 80.
44 Al-Ebahabi, p. 17; al-Makki has also quoted this opinion of abu Hanlfah, Vol.
n, p. too.
44 Al-Mas'Odi. Vol. II. p. 192.
47 Al-ShahrastAni, Vol. I, p. 108; ’Abd al-Q&hir Baghdadi, p. 340.
44 MayaddimaK. pp. 195-96.
44 Ibn Hajar. Fath at-BOri. Vol. XIII. pp. 93. 96, 97; Ahmad, Mumad, al-
Matba’at al-Maimanlyyah, Egypt, 1306/1888, Vol. III. pp. 129, 183; Vol. TV, p.
421; abu DAwfld al TayUiai. Musnod, Dairatul-Maarif. Hyderabad, 1321'1903.
Tr. No. 926, 2133.
684
Abu Hanifah and Abu Yusuf
*"successor." Tbe Prophet, while instructing that the Caliphate should go to
the Quraigh, had made it clear that this office would be held by the Quraigh as
long as they retained certain merits.
* 1 Thia clearly implied that when the
Quraigfc became bereft of those merits, the Caliphate should devolve on the
non-Quraiih. This waa the essential difference between the view of the Sunnites
including abu Hanifah on one aide and that of the Kharijitee and Mu'tazilites
on the other. The latter allowed Caliphate for the non-Quraithites irrespective
of all conditions. Not only that; they went a step further and said that the
non-Quraighitee had a better title to it. Their main anxiety seemed to be
democracy, even though it might lead to confusion and disintegration. With
the Sunnites, democracy and the stability of the State were equally important
considerations.
The Exchequer and the Public’s Right of Ownership.—The most reprehensible
of all indulgences of the Caliphs of his day in the eyes of ahu Hanifah were
their reckless waste of public exchequer and their illegal seizure of people's
properties. As we have already quoted al-Dhahabi, according to abu Hanifah.
oppression and illegitimate use of public money in a ruler rendered his title
to Caliphate void. Not only that; he even did not allow the tokens of good,
will and presents received from foreign States to bo made the personal pro
perty of the Caliph. These things also were to be deposited in the treasury,
not with the Caliph or his family, for the obvious reason that had he not been
the Head of the State and thereby become oonspicuous in the international
world, none would have sent him those presents.
** He also objected to the
Caliph's squandering of public money and his giving gifts out of it. This was
one of the main reasons why he himself accepted no gifts from the Caliphs.
Separation of the Judiciary from the Executive.—His views on the position
of the judiciary itir-d-cis the executive were unequivocal. If justice waa to be
ensured, he said, the judiciary must be independent of the executive. Not
only that; the judge must also be able to enforce his decree against the Caliph
if the latter encroached upon the rights of people. Towards tho close of his
life when he waa sure that the Government would not let him live any more, he
gathered his disciples and addressed himself to them. Among other important
things, he gave them this instruction: "If the Caliph is guilty of encroachment
upon the rights of the people, the judge next to him in rank (i.e., the Chief
Justice) should make him submit to the rule of Law.”*’
The main thing which prevented him from accepting an official position,
particularly that of a judge during the Umayyad and 'Abbisid rule was that
he did not see the judiciary as independent. There was no chanoe of making
the Caliph submit to the rule of Law; on tho other hand, he feared that he
would be made an instrument of injustice and asked to give wrong decisions,
*• Al-Tabari, Vol. ni. p. 1(12.
»• Ibn Hajar, Vol. XIII. p. 95.
** Al-Sarekbsi. Sharif ol.Rifjar al-Kabir. Vol. 1. p. 98.
•* Al-Makki. Vol. II. p. 100.
685
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and that not only the Caopn himself but alao those attached to the palace
would interfere with his work.
Yazid bin 'Umar bin Hubairah was tho first of the Umayyad governors of
Iraq who pressed abu Hanlfah to accept office. Thia waa in 130/747 when the
upsurges in Iraq against the Umayyad regime were rising with a speed that
completely overthrew that Government within a couple of years. Ibn Hubairah
wanted to enlist the support of influential men of learning and use them to the
advantage of the Umayyad cause. He invited ibn abi Laila, lbiwud bin abi al*
Hind, ibn Shubrumah. and others and gave them lucrative appointments. Then
summoning abu Hanlfah. he said, "Here I give you my seal. No order will be
enforced here till you put the seal on it, and no money will be drawn from the
treasury without your sanction." But abu Hanlfah declined to accept the
responsibility. Yazid put him in prison and threatened him with whipping
Then the other learned men came round abu IJantfah and requested him to
take compassion on himself. "This service is as repugnant to us," said they,
"aa it is to you. But wo have accepted it under duress: so should you." Abu
Hanifah replied, "Ah! had he asked me to count the gates of the mosque of
Wasit, I would not have done it for his sake. Then how can I agree that he
should write the death warrant of an innocent person and I should put the
seal on that order ’ By God, I will accept no share of his responsibility.” Ibn
Hubairah then made him other offers but found him oold. At last he decided
to appoint him the Chief Judge of Kufah and swore that if abu Hanlfah
declined the appointment he would have him flogged. Abu Hanifah swore in
return saying that the flogging of this world was easier for him to endure than
the flogging of the hereafter, reiterating that he would never accept it, even
though that cost him hia life. At last the tyrant gave him twenty, or (according
to another report) thirty, blows of the stripe on the head. According to some
accounts, he kept it up with ton stripes daily for about eleven days, but found
Ilia victim firm like a rock. Then someone informed him that he was likely
to die. Ibn Hubairah replied, "Is there none to counsel this man to ask me
for a reprieve!” When abu Hanifah heard of this he asked to be set free to
.■onsult his friends. Ibn Hubairah set him free, at which he left Kufah for
Makkah, not to return to it before the final wiping out of the Umayyad
dynasty.14
In the 'Abbasid period again Mansur insisted on his accepting the office of
a judge. As wu shall presently see, abu Hanifah having openly participated in
a revolt launched against Mansur by al-Nafs al-Zaklyyah and his brother
Ibrihlm, Mansur cherished such malice against him, that in al-Dhahabi'a
words, he waa all but consumed in the fire of wrath.“ However, it was not
easy to lay hands upon a person of abu IJantfah s eminence Mansur knew
how the murder of Husain had provoked feelings of wrath against the
’• /hut, pp. 21-24; ibn KballikAn, Vol. V. p. 41; ibn -AM al-Burr. al-tnliff.
p. 171
44 ulJmAm, p, so.
686
Abu Hanifah and Abu Yusuf
Umayyads and how easily had they been uprooted on that account. Therefore,
instead of killing him, he would rather lure him into a cage of gold and use
him to advanoe his ends. With this in view he offered him the poet of a judge
again and again, in the end asking him to become the Chief Justice of the
whole of the 'Abbisid Empire, but abu Hanifah always put him off under
one pretext or another.***
Ultimately, seeing him persist too much he told him frankly the reason why
he was unable to accept these offers. On one such occasion he excused himsell
politely saying, ''None can be fit to become a judge unless ho haa strength
enough to impose law on you. your prinoea, and your oommandeni. I have
not that strength in me. 1 am so built that whenever you call me, I cannot
breathe easily till I go out of your presence.On another occasion the talk
took a harsh turn. Addressing tho Caliph he said, “Even if 1 accepted this
office willingly and not reluctantly, sure enough I would not prove worthy
of your trust. For if I decided a case against your desire and you wanted me
to alter the decision on pain of being pushed into the Euphrates to drown. I
would rather be drowned than alter my decision. Then there are your courtiers,
not a few of whom desire a judge to defer to their wishes to remain in your
good books.*'
** When talks like these led Mansur to conclude that this man
oould not be caught in the cage of golden bars, he resorted to open persecution
He had him whipped and flogged, put him in jail where they subjected him to
tortures of hunger and thirst. Later he was confined in a cell wherein he died,
**
according to some, a natural death, according to others, of poisoning.
Frtedom ot Expression: A Right and a fluty.—According to abu Hanifah. free
dom of expression in a Muslim society and in an Islamic State is of as much
importance aa the independence of the judiciary. The Qur’an terms this freedom
as amr bi al-ma'ru/ and noAi 'on al-munkar (enjoining the right and forbidding
the wrong). No doubt, an unqualified right of freedom of expression may
sometimes assume an unbecoming, mischievous, immoral, or oven offensive
form which no law can tolerate. But the Qur'&n, by using the above-mentioned
term for this freedom, clearly distinguishes it from all other kinds of freedom
and, thus, circumscribing it within well-defined limits, doclarea it to be not
only an inalienable right but also a duty of the public. Abu Hanifah was
particularly conscious of this right and duty, because the political order of
his day had rid the people of this right to such an extent that they actually-
doubted if it had anything of the nature of a duty about it. Wc have pointed
out elsewhere that the Murji'itee by preaching ultra-liberal doctrines were
emboldening people towards sin. The Hajhwlyyah professed that "enjoining
the right and forbidding the wrong" where the government was involved was
*• Al-Makki. Vol. IT, pp. 72. 173, 178.
•' Ibid.. Vol. I. p. 2IS.
•• Ibid.. Vol. II. p. 170; al-Kbatil.. Vol. XIII. p. 328.
•• Al Makki, Vol. II. pp. 173, 174, 182; ibn Kballik&n. Vol. V. p. 4«; »1-Y4fi'i.
Vol. I. p. 310.
687
A History of Muslim Philosophy
mischievous and the Umayyad and 'Abbfeud governments crushed the spirit
of the people to raise a foice against the corruption and high-handednw
of the ruling cliques. Abu Hanlfah, with both speech and action, attempted
to resurrect this spirit amongst the people and elucidated the extent to which
it could be exploited. Thia is clear from abu Hanlfah'a answer to a question
from Ibrahim al-S&’igh related by al-Jassis
Abu Hantfah asserted the right of freedom of expression against law-courts
also in the same manner. If any court of law gave a wrong decision he would
not hesitate to point out whatever flaws of law or procedure he found in it.
With him the respect of the courts did not moan letting the courts give
wrong decisions. He waa forbidden to pronounce verdicts on this account for
a long time.0 He waa so zealous in the matter of freedom of expression that
he did not consider it lawful to imprison or otherwise punish a person who
spoke ill even of a legitimate ruler or hia just government, not even if he went
to the extent of abusing the Caliph and expressing an intention to kill him,
until there was a resolve on his part of an armed revolt or breach of peace.
Ho argued this from an incident during the Caliphate of 'Ali. Five persons were
arrested and brought before him on the charge of abusing him openly in the
streets of Kufah. One of them was also accused of saying that he would
assassinate him. 'Ali ordered their release. It waa said. "But they intended to
kill you.” He asked in reply: "But should I kill them only for expressing
the intention to kill me 1" It was added. "But they also abused you." He
said, "If you like you may also abuse them.”
The Question of Rebellion against Tyrannical Rule.— Another important
question that baffled the people of those days was whether or not it waa
lawful for the Muslims to rise in revolt against a ruler who perpetrated tyranny
or transgressed the limits of fiJori'uA. The Sunnis themselves were divided on
this. A large section of the Traditionists (oAl of-fkidiU) allowed that they could
raise voice against his tyranny and speak their mind before him but they could
not rise in rebellion, even though he should seize upon their lawful rights and
indulge in unjust bloodshed and open transgression.*’- But abu IJanlfah’s
creed in this matter was that the Caliphate of an unjust incumbent was
basically wrong and insupportable, and deserved to be overthrown; that
people not only had the right, but it was their duty to rise in rebellion against
it; that such a rebellion was not only allowed but obligatory, provided, how
ever, that it promised to succeed in replacing tho tyrant or transgressor by
a just and virtuous ruler, and not fizzle out in mere loss of lives and power.
Private Council and Codification of Islamic Law.—Abu Hanlfah's greatest
work which won him lasting eminence in the history of Islam waa that
he filled, on his own initiative, the vast gap caused in the Islamic legal system
“• Ahkam ol-Qur'dn. Vol, I, p. 81.
•• Al-Kardari, Vol. I. pp. 160. 165. 166; ibn 'Abd al-Barr, al-Intiqa', pp. 162.
158; al-KhaUb, VoL XIII, p. 361.
Al Aih'sri. Vol. II. p. 125.
688
Abu Hanifah and Abu Yusuf
by the discontinuance of the jbura (the Consultative Council) after the "Right-
guided" Caliphate. We have already alluded to the consequences that followed
thia ill-happening. The loss resulting from this state of affairs lasting over a
century was a matter of grave ooncem to every thinking person. The State
had extended ita boundaries from Spain to Sind, taking in its fold soores of
peoples with various cultures, customs, rites, and habits of their own. Facing
it at home were problems relating to finance, commerce, agriculture, industry,
marital relatione, and the rest. There were civil and criminal cases to decide
and over-new constitutional, legal, and procedural problems to solve. Abroad,
the relations of this large State with the other States of the world, and issues
like war, peace, diplomatic relations, foreign trade, communications (by land
and sea), customs, etc., demanded urgent attention. As the Muslims were
a people with a distinct ideology, and claimed to guide themselves by principles
and law of their own. it was necessary for them to solve their problems in the
light of that ideology and those laws and principles. But the institution of
ibira having been discontinued there waa no other properly established body or
institution in which the trusted scholars, jurists, and lawyers of the community
should meet to deliberate and devise such an authentic solution of every out
standing legal issue, as should be recognized as the accredited and uniform
law of the land throughout the State. Thus, Islam was faced with a mighty
challenge and there waa no machinery to meet it.
The loss waa being felt all round, from the Cahph to the governors and
judges. It was not easy for every judge, lawyer, or head of a department to
decide the innumerable problems that rose every day, there and then, on the
strength of hia own knowledge or by dint of his own understanding. Not only
that; such individual decisions also conflicted with one another and created
confusion. But a body whose verdict carried authority could be established only
by the Government which, unluckily, lay in the hands of such people as knew
for certain that they enjoyed no esteem or confidence with the public, nor
were they prepared to face, nay even endure, the learned, who, they feared,
would confront them with things they would not like. They also knew that
laws enacted under their patronage could never be acoepted as parts of the Law
of Ialam. Ibn al-Muqaffa* proposed to Mansur that in order to stop this gap
he should oonveno a council of the learned lawyers of all schools of thought
who should sit together and express their opinions on the various problems
in hand. After hearing these opinions the Caliph himself should pronounce
his decision in every case and that decision should bo adopted as law. But
Mansur knew his own position too well to make this mistake. His decisions
could not equal decisions of abu Bakr and 'Umar. They could at beat have
lasted with his life. Even then he doubted whether he would find anyone in
the whole realm who would respect and willingly follow a law enacted by him
He could make a secular law all right, but he could not make a law which
would become incorporated in the Islamic juridical code.
In these circumstances it struck abu Hanifah to try an entirely new path to
689
A History of Muslim Philosophy
redeem the loss. and this was to institute a private legislative body, on his
own initiative, independent of the Government. Only a far-sighted person
like him could think of such a plan And only he could dare the adventure who
trusted his own resources, character, and moral prestige well enough to be
sure that the laws passed by a body raised under hia auspice* would enforce
themselves by dint of their excellence in sufficiency, precision, adaptability,
and the moral influence of their devisers, even without any political sanction
behind them, and that they would be adopted by tho people of their own ac
cord. and recognized by the different governments of their own free-will. Abu
Hanifah waa no seer of the bidden future to perceive the results whioh his
effort produced within half a century of hia departure, but he knew himself
and his colleagues well enough. He knew the collective temperament of bis
community and had an eye on the circumstances of the day. With the perfect
eye of a man of sharp intelligence and foresight he gauged that he oould fill
the yawning gap with his private endeavour if he would, and that surely it
would be filled satisfactorily.
Abu Hanlfah’s own pupils, trained under his care and guidanoe in his college
of law for years in deliberating over legal questions, looking into them in the
proper scientific spirit, and arriving at conclusions with arguments, formed
the members of this council. Almost all of them had learnt the Qur'&n.
literature, history, and Sirah (biography of the Prophet) not only from abu
Hanlfah but also from many other learned scholars of the day. Many of them
had specialized in certain branches. Some had made a name in the field of
"arguing conclusions by analogy." others for incomparable knowledge of the
Prophet’s traditions and precedents set by the Companions, judges, and
Caliphs of old. Others yet had a reputation for interpreting the Qur'An or for
being skilled in a particular branch of law or in grammar or SIraA. Abu Hanlfah
himself one® described them saying: "These are thirty-six men of whom
twenty-eight are fit to be judges, six to pronounce legal verdicta, and two
good enough to teach judges and jurists.”"
The procedure of work adopted in this council as reported by the authentic
chroniclers of abu Hanlfah should be described in their own words. Al-Muwaffaq
bin Ahmad al-Makki (d. 668/1172) writes: "Abu Hanlfah framed his legal
system with the consultations of his learned pupils. Hia paaaion to do all that
he could for the sake of his religion, and his love of God, the Prophet, and
the believers did not allow him to undertake thia work by himself to tho
disregard of his pupil colleagues. He put every problem before them, threw
light on its various aspects, carefully heard all that each one of them had to
say on it, and put forth his own point of view for their consideration Those
deliberations and discussions were so exhaustive that some questions took a
month or even more to decide. At last when unanimity was achieved abu
Yusuf recorded it in the fundamental compilations of Hanafi Law."**
""Al-Makki, Vol. II, p. 246.
•’ Ibid., p. 133
690
Abu Hanifah and Abu Yusuf
Ibn al-Bazzaz al-Kardari (d. 827/1424). author of i'aldwa Baztdzii/yah, says
in his -VandjiA al-1 mam al-A'fam. "His pupils debated each question to their
heart's content and discussed it from every point of view. Abu Hanifah the
while, sat quietly listening to the discussion. When it waa his turn to speak,
there was such a hush in the house aa if there was none other present.'1*’
‘Abd Allah bin Mub&rak tells that onoe the discussion on an issue lasted
three days. On the evening of the third day he heard cries of Allah-u alcbar
(God is most great) from within and understood that a solution had been
achieved.•• It ia rocordod by another pupil, abu 'Abd Allah, that when abu
Hanifah got his views recorded on an issue, he had them afterwards read out
to him to ensure their correctness. His own words arc: "I read out the Imam’s
words to him. Abu Yusuf (in recording the proceedings) used to record his
own views, too, therein. Hence, I tried to read out the ImAm’s words only,
leaving out those of abu Yusuf. Once I made a slip and read the other new
also. The Imam at once cut in, ‘Whose view is this second
Another thing that wc gather from al-Makki is that the Work of classification
of this council's decisions under different heads and chapters also was com
pleted in- the life-time of abu Hanifah. He says: "Abu Hanl^*h >• th* hreI
man to gather the knowledge of the SJari'aA (Islamic Law). None before
him had done this work—abu Hanifah oompiled it in books, under different
heads and chapters.
This council recorded docisions on about 83.000 legal imucs. These embraced
not only those questions with which the publio or the State was currently
or had formerly been confronted but also others that might arise in future.
Possibilities were conceived and discussed freely to ensure that if ever they
turned into actualities there should be laws ready to meet them. They related
to almost all branches of law, internal (oovered under the term ol-siyor).*’
constitutional, dvil criminal, of evidence, of procedure, laws governing different
aspects of economic life, marriage, divorce, and inheritance, personal, and
those dealing with worship. We can find ell these subject-heads among the
"ontenta of books compiled by abu Yusuf and later by Mubammad bin Hasan
J.gjjaib&ni from the material provided by the deliberations of this "legislative
ouncil."
•• Al-Kardari. Vol. II. p. 108.
“ Al-Makki. Vol. II. p. 54.
“ Al-Kardari, Vol. II. p. 100.
•• Al-Makki. Vol. II. p. 138.
" Pooplo of tho present day labour under the wrong impression that International
Law is a thing of the modem times and its founder is Grotius of Holland (891 10551
1583-1045). But whoever has seen ol-Sigor of sbu Banlfahs pupil Mubam
mad bin Hasan al-Shaib&ni (132- 189/749-805) knows that the codification of
this law was accomplished by abu Hanifah 900 leers before Grotius. and that if.
on the one hand, hia discussions hardly leave any aspect of it untouched. on the
other, they encompass the finest and tho most vital issues. This has reoently been
acknowledged by a group of scholars and a SbaiMni Society of International Law
has been founded in Germany.
691
A Hixton- of Muslim Philosophy
Thio regular codification of law soon deprived individuals of the confidence
which they enjoyed in ita absence in their efforts at law-making. The opinions
and verdicts of scattered individuals, be they doctors or judges of repute,
could not carry weight before the wholesomely judicious and precise derisions
arrived at in a council of legists presided over and guided by a man of abu
Hanifah's foresight and calibre, after thorough sifting of the Qur’tnio injunc
tions and the Prophet’s Tradition and keeping in view the precedents and the
verdicts of the scholars of old. drawn aa they were with thoughtful and steady
labour, bearing in tnind the principles of i/fiAdd (deducing conclusions with
thorough discretion) in the light of the SAori aA, embracing all aspects of life,
and able to meet all exigencies. Therefore, aa soon aa it came to light, the
common people, the rulers, the judges, all felt forced to turn to it. It answered
the demand of the day. As a matter of fact, it was the long-awaited help which
everybody had been seeking. The famous legist Yabya bin Adam (d. 203/
818) tells us that the opinions of other jurists paled into insignificance before
those of abu Hanifah; his ideas spread everywhere; the judges, rulers, and
officers of every place decided their cases in aocordanoe with his law; in ehort,
everything went according to it." By the time of al-Mamun (198-218/813-833)
it had acquired such popularity that one day the Premier Fadi bin Sahl waa
advised by a jurist who was hostile to abu Qanlfah, to issue orders to stop
the use of abu tfanlfah’s code. Fadi invited the wise and prudent men t<
advise him on thia. They told him not to take this step for it would not succeed.
On the other hand, the whole country, they said, would turn against the
Government, adding that the man who had given him that counsel waa surely
a fool. The Premier agreed with them, saying that he himself did not see any
wisdom in that course, nor was tho Caliph likely to agree to it."
Thus came about this historical reality that a system of law devised by a
private legislative council became the law of countries and empires on the
strength of its merits and the moral prestige of those who framed it. It had
also another important consequence in that it openod up for Muslim thinkers
new lines for the codification of Islamic Law. The chief legal systems devised
later may have differed from it in their methods of deduction and in their
•esults. but they were all inspired by and baaed on this model.
B
AB" YOSUF
In abu Hanifah’a life-time the relations between the Hanafi school of law
and the ’Abbksid rulers were very much strained owing to his political creed
and non-co-operation with the Government. The effect of this lasted for a
iong while even after his death The leaders of this school stuck to their policy
•• Al-Makki, Vol. II. p. 41.
•• Ibid., pp. 157 58; al-Kardari. Vol. II. pp. 1UA-07.
692
Abu Hanlfah and Abu YAsuf
of indifference towards authority. Thus, whon after the death of abu Hanlfah
his great pupil Zufar bin Hudhail (d. 168/775) was asked to accept the post
of a judge, he flatly refused it and fled to find safety in concealment?* On
the Government's side also tho tendency from the days of Mansttr to the
early yean of Hirun's reign was to resist the influence of this school of thought.
Mansur and his successors earnestly desired that tho gap in the legal system
of the State, detailed in our previous discussion, should be filled by some
other system of codification. Both Mansur and Mahdi in their respective
reigns endeavoured to bring Malik to tho fore.’1 Harun also in 174/791, on
the ocoasion of the pilgrimage, expressed his desire to mako his book al-
MuiaUti' the law of the land.7* But at long last a man of great strength and
character belonging to the Hanafi school of thought rose to. bring this state
of affaire to an end. With his great ability and personal influence he delivered
the Empire from a continued state of legal chaos The Qanafi code waa made
the law of the land whioh gave the whole Empire a uniform system of law.
This man waa abu Yusuf, the ablest of tho disciples of abu Hanlfah.
Brief Life-Sketch.—Abu Yiisuf's (b.113/731) personal namo was Ya'qflb.
His father came of the Arab tribe of Bajtlah, his mother of the Ansirs of
Madlnah with whom his father was sIbo connected by ties of alliance; hence
his family waa known as Ansar. He chose to specialize in law after completing
his elementary education and took his lessons from 'Abd al-Rabmin bin abi
Leila. Then he joined the school of abu Hanlfah and became permanently
attaohed to him. His parents were extremely poor and did not like their son to
continue his education. When abu Hanlfah came to know of it, he undertook
to defray all the expenses not of the boy alone but of the whole family. He
himself said that abu Qantfah never gave him occasion to express hia want
before him. On and off he would send so much money to his family as would
relieve him of worry on that account.”
From tho very beginning abu Hanifah waa very optimistic about his ward.
When hia father wanted to withdraw him from the school, the ImAm told
him not to do so, for, if it pleased God. the lad promised to turn out to be a
great man.’*
Apart from abu Hanlfah. abu Yusuf learnt a good deal from other fa
mous scholars of the day, and made himself well acquainted with Tradition.
Qur’Anic commentary, biography of the Prophet, history, language, literature,
and scholastic theology. Particularly well versed in traditions, he knew them
by heart, and men like Yahya bin Mu'tn, Ahmad bin IJanbal, and 'Ali bin
’• Al Kardan, Vol. II. p. 183; TAjh Kubratadah, MifUh al-Sa'adah, Vol. II.
p. 114.
” Ibn 'Abd al-Barr. al-IntiqA'. pp. 40-41.
" Abu Nu aim al A»bahani. Ildyal al Auliya-. al-Msfbaat al-Sa'Adah, Egypt.
1353/1938, Vol. VI, p. 332; Tish KubrazAdah, op. cil.. Vol. II, p. 87.
’• Al-Makki, Vol. H, p. 212.
’• Ibid. p 214
693
A History of Muslim Philosophy
al-Madlni declared him lbujahn (dependable—a particular term used for a
person of known veracity on whom reliance ia placed in the transmission of
traditiona). Hia contemporaries were agreed that he waa outstanding among
the disciples of abu Hanifah. Jalbah bin Muhammad says, he waa the greatest
jurist of hia age, none excelled him.” IMwfld bin Rajjjld thinks that it would
have been enough source of pride for abu Hanifah if he had produced only this
one disciple.” Abu Hanlfah himself had great respect for him. He used to say
that of all his pupils the most acquisitive and adorned with learning was abn
Yusuf.” Once he waa very ill, so that little hope was left of his life. Abu
Hanifah, when coming out of the house after inquiring after his health,
deplored that if the youth died he (abu Hantfah) would not leave behind him a
scholar more learned than himself.”
For sixteen years after the death of abu Hanifah, he, too, in keeping with
the traditions of his school, remained indifferent to the Government. Neverthe
less. he continued the intellectual and educative work of hie master, adding
to it the compilation of several books on almost all branches of law. and
recording the derisions of abu Hanifah’s times supplemented with his own
opinions.*’ When these books spread in the country, they not only influenced
the intellectual circles, but also impressed the courts and high officials connect
ed with various government departments in favour of the Hanafi school of
thought, since there existed no other classified code of law to satisfy their
wants as these books did Malik’s al-Muwatfa' had come into the field long be
fore. but it waa not sufficiently comprehensive and elaborately classified to meet
the needs of a government.*1 Thus, abu Yusuf's intellectual and literary work
took hold of the minds of people before he came to power. It lacked only
formal political sanction to enforce it aa the law of the land.
Had abu Yusuf’s position been economically sound, he might have followed
in the footstep® of his master and lived in continued indifference towards the
Government. But he was a poor man and abn Hanifsh's death had robbed
him of his generous supporter. Reduced by poverty to live a miserable existence,
he was obliged one day to sell off a girder of his wife’s house, for which he waa
reproached by his mother-in-law in a manner he could not endure, and this
” Ibn KballikAn, Vol. V. p. 422; ibn ‘Abd al-Barr. al-/nW, p. 172.
” Ibn Khallik&n. Vol. V. p. 423.
" Al-Makki. Vol. II. p. 232.
’■ Al Kardari. Vol. II, p. I2«.
” Ibn KhaUik&n, Vol. V. p. 424; al-Kardari. Vol. II. p. 126.
•• Ibn al-Nadlin. ol-FiAns*. al-Matba'at al-RabmAniyyah. Egypt, 1348'1929. Ibn
Khallik&n (Vol. V, p. 424) writes on the authority of Talhah bin Muhammad that
abu Y usuf was tho first man to compile books on all fundamental branehoe of Law
in accordance with the IJanafi creed, and thus spread abu Hanifah's knowledge to
all comore of the world,
" It must bo understood that tho codification of Islamic Law according to the
Miliki principle* enabling it to serve the needs of a government took place later
on the model of Muhammad bin IJaaan al-ShaibAnl’a books.
694
Abu Hanlfah and Abu YOauf
forced him to look for employment. He made for Baghdad and reached there
in 166/782. saw the Caliph al-Mahdi who appointed him judge of eastern
Baghdad, which office he continued to hold till the end of al-Hidl'a reign.
When HArun al-Rag])Id became Caliph, abu Ydsuf steadily gained such in
fluence on him that he at last appointed him Chief Justioe of tho whole ‘Ab-
bfed<l Empire. This was the first occasion that such a post was created in the
Muslim State. None before abu Yusuf had held the post of Chief Justice of
the State in either the "Right-guided" Caliphate or the Umayyad and ‘Ab-
l>A«id rule." His position was not only that of the Head of the Supreme Court
of the realm, aa we may conoeive from the practioe of our modem institutions,
it also invested him with the authority of the Minister of Law; that, is to say,
he did not merely have to judge cases and appoint judges for the lower
courts, he had also to advise the Government on all legal matters, internal
as well as external.
Abu Yusuf's appointment to this offioe bore three far-reaching results. In
the first place, instead of a college where he discoursed to students, or a study
from which he issued books, a vast field of work now engaged his attention—
a field in which he dealt practically with the affairs of the biggest empire of tho
day. This provided him with opportunities of applying tho Hanafi law to the
actual affairs of life, thus making it in fact a practical system of law. Secondly,
as the appointment and removal of judges was now entrusted to his charge,
scholars connected with the Hanafi school were appointed judges in most of
the places, and through them the Hanafi law automatically became the law
of the realm. Thirdly, with the help of his great moral and intellectual in
fluence he converted the Muslim State, which had assumed an autocratic
character since the time of the Umayyads and was going, in a way, without
a constitution, into a State guided to a large extent by a constitution; nay, he
actually wrote a book on constitution for it, which haa luckily oome down to
us intact in the shape of KMb al-Kiardj.
But before wo speak of this work on constitution it ia necessary to remove
a widespread misunderstanding. Abu Yusufs biographers have described such
stories about him as often present him to tho reader as one given to flattery
and skilled in wresting the law to suit the desires of kings. But if we mark the
events recorded in history relating to abu Yfisufs attitude to the Caliphs and
their- ministers and generals, it becomes impossible for us to believe that a
mere flatterer could dare have it. In Hadi's time when he was the judge of
eastern Baghdad ho decided a case against the Caliph himself.” In HArun’s
time an old Christian filed a suit for a garden against the Caliph. Abu Yusuf
not only heard the case, both confronting each other, but also asked the
Caliph to deny on oath that he refused to accept the claimant's title to it.
Even after this he waa sorry all his life why he did not make the Caliph
•• AI Makki. Vol. U, pp. 211-39; ibn KhallikAn. Vol. V. p- 421.
•• Al-Kardari. Vol. II. p. 128.
695
A Hmtory of Mimlim Philosophy
stand side by side with the suitor." He declared 'Ali bin 'La. Prime Minuter
of Harun al-Rajhld. an unreliable witness because, he said, he had heard
him call himself the Caliph's slave. "If he is a slave in fact." contended he.
"his witness cannot be accepted. If he is not and calls himself so for flattery,
he ia a liar and cannot be trusted."" The same punishment he gave to a
general of H&rOn's forces."* 'Abd Allah bin MubArak states that he used to
go to Hirun's palace riding right up to the private enclosures (where even the
Premier must go on foot) and the Caliph was always the first to greet him."
Harun was once asked why ho had raised abu Yusuf so high. He replied, "In
whatever branch of knowledge I tried him I found him perfect. Besides, be
is upright and a man of solid character. If there is another like him I’d be
pleased to see him."’* When ho died (182/798) Hkriln himself accompanied
the funeral procession on foot, led the funeral prayer, buried him in his own
family graveyard and Baid it waa a bereavement on which all the believers
should condole with one another." But nothing bears out all that has been
said above bo well as his work Kitab ai-KKarin. A perusal of its introduction
alone will tell that it is just beyond an adulator to say such things as be did
while addressing a king.
Kitab al-Kharai.—In HJrun al-Ratfild, abu Yusuf found a king of the most
conflicting disposition and humours, at once a fierce soldier, a luxurious
monarch, and a God.fearing man. Abu al-Faraj AsbahAni describee him in
a sentence: "He would most easily melt into tears in response to an exhortation
or admonition, but would be most unrelentingly cruel in response to something
that kindled his wrath."*’
Abu Yusuf, prudently avoiding to touch upon the Caliph's failings, skil
fully set to work on his religious sentiment bringing to bear his great moral
and intellectual influence to the task, and pursued this steadily till the Caliph's
heart waa won and he proposed for him the assignment of preparing a con
stitution for him according to which he should guide the affairs of the State.
This was bow the Kitab al-KharM came to be written.
The name of this book misleads one into thinking that its scope is limited
to matters of revenue only. As a matter of fact, it deals with almost. all the
affaire of the State. Leaving aside all other details, we shall here examine its
contents only with a view to seeing its basic conception of the Islamic State
and its constitutional character.
Reversion to the. " Kifhi guided" Caliphate —The first thing that strikes the
reader who follows Kitab al-Kiaraj closely is that abu Yusuf desires the Caliph
« Al-Sarekh«i. KMb.al Mabril. Vol. XVI. p. 81; al Makki. Vol. II. pp. 243-44.
“ Al-Makki. Vol. II. p. 226 27.
Ibid.. p. 240.
" Ibid.. Mulls ‘Ali Q4ri. alJawAh.r rd- MudiyyaA. p. 520
Al-Makki. Vol. II. p. 232.
Al-Kardan, Vol. II. p. 120.
•* KiMb alVol. III. p. 178.
696
Abu Hanlfah and Abu YOsuf
to give up the Byzantine and Iranian traditions followed by the Umayyad
and Abb&zid kings and revert faithfully to the traditions of the "Right-
guided” Caliphs. Although he has not directly asked him to give up following
his forefathers, yet he has never lapsed even into quoting the conduct or the
decisions of the Caliph's forefathers as precedents worth following, much less
those of his Umayyad predecessors. In every matter he bases his argument
either directly on the Qur'An or the Sunnah or else quotes precedents from
abu Bakr. ‘Umar, 'UthmAn, and 'Ali. If he has ever quoted a precedent
from a later period it is not from Mansur's or Mahdi’s but from that of tho
Umayyad Caliph ‘Umar bin ‘Abd al-‘Aziz. In preparing this book, he com
pletely ignored the conventions and precedents of the whole one hundred and
thirty-two years of Umayyad and ‘AbbAaid reigns, ezoept thoee of the two
and a half years of ‘Umar Il's reign. Abu Yisuf's work may not have meant
much, had it been done by some ingenious lawyer in his private capacity aa a
holy sermon for those who might like to follow it. But done as it waa by the
Chief Justioe-oum-Iaw Minister of the State in his official capacity, at the
express instance and request of the Caliph, it becomes something extra
ordinarily significant.
In tho beginning of the book abu Yusul lays down the basic oonoeption
of tho State before the Caliph in those wards: “0. Commander of Believers,
God, the solo deserver of praise, has placed on you a heavy responsibility which
carries with it a great reward and a great punishment. He has committed to
your charge the affairs of this community, so that yours ia the duty to work
for a large number of people day and night. He has appointed you a guard
over them, given you their trust, and tried you by them, for you are to con
duct their affairs for them. An edifice founded on anything exoept fear of
God does not take long to crumble. God shakes it to the foundation and makes
it fall on ita builders, and on them that helped in ita construction. . . . Kings
will be called to account by God aa a shepherd is called to account by the
owner of the flock. . . . Take not the crooked path, lest your flock should
follow in your footsteps.. .. Treat everybody alike in the Law of God, whether
one is akin to you or not. ... Go not into the presence of God as one who
has been committing excesses, for tho Ruler of the Day of Retribution will
judge men by their actions, and not by ranks. Guard against wasting the flock
entrusted to your care, lest the owner of the flock take you to task for every
little sheep of it.”’1
After this he continues to press it on the Caliph everywhere in the book
that he ia not the owner of his kingdom but the Owner’s Caliph (lit. deputy)."
and that if he proved a just ruler he would see the beet imaginable end; but
if he proved unjust he would meet with the worst punishment *** At one place
he puts before him the words of ‘Umar wherein he says, “None who enjoys
KMb PP- S. *. »
•• /Md, p. S
Ibid., p. 8
897
A History of Muslim Philosoph
the right of commanding obedience has risen so high as to aak anyone to obey
him in disobedience of God."**
Spirit of Democracy.—Abu Yusuf conceives the Caliph to be answerable
not only to God but also to the public, and haa quoted at several places from
the sayings of the Prophet and the Companions to prove that the Muslims
have an unquestionable right to criticise their rulers, and that such criticism
contributes to the good of the people and the State." "Enjoining the right
and forbidding the wrong is an inalienable right and a duty and ita negligence
in a community is equivalent to inviting the wrath of God upon its head."**
It is the duty of rulers to have forbearance for truth being spoken before
them, aa nothing is more hurtful in a ruler than his being short-tempered and
intolerant of criticism,” and the Muslims havo a right to call him to account
in respect of their lawful rights on him and of their properties that have been
entrusted to his care.**
Duties of the Caliph.—The following duties of the Caliph have been
specifically mentioned: to establish the rights of God and enforce the limits
prescribed by Him; to determine correctly the rights of other right-holders
and ensure their enjoyment of these rights; to revive the conventions of
virtuous rulers (that have been discarded by the wicked rulers of late) ;* •*
• to
•••
check injustice and redrew the grievances of people after proper scrutiny;”*
in pursuance of the orders of God, to command people to obey Him and stay
away from the commission of sins; to apply the Law of God on himself and
others alike, without regard to who suffers by it;1*1 and to make only lawful
exactions from people and expend them in lawful ways.1**
Duties of Muslim Citizens.—Aa opposed to these, the duties of the Muslims
toward their rulers, aa described in this book, are the following. They have to
obey them, not to commit acts of disobedience, nor lift arms against them,
nor reproach them (unnecessarily), nor deceive them. They have to put up
with their excesses, to be sincerely helpful to them, to try to check them
from wrong things and to co-operate with them in all that is good.1**
The Exchequer.—He calls the exchequer a trust of God and the people in
stead of ita being the Caliph's property. Off and on he reminds the Caliph of
the words of 'Umar wherein he compares the Caliph’s position in relation to the
exchequer to that of an orphan's guardian in relation to the orphan's pro
perty, and states that if he ia well-to-do, he should not take anything from
“ Ibid., p. 117 .
" Ibid., p. 11.
•• ibid . pp. 10-11
•’ Ibid., p. 11.
•* Ibid.p. 117.
“ Ibid., p. 8.
••• Ibid., p. «.
Ibid., p. IS.
"** Ibid- p. 108.
••• Ibid., pp. 8. 11.
698
Abu Hanifah and Abu Yusuf
it, in deference to the advice of God, and manage it for Him without any
consideration; and if he is needy, he may take from it an amount whioh every
body will recognize aa just and proper.1" He also draws his attention to
'Umar’s example in spending from the exchequer more sparingly than one
would from one’s private purse. He illustrates his point by reference to an
other instance where 'Umar, appointing a judge, a governor, and a revenue
officer for Kufah, allowed them to take a goat every day for tho expenses of
their board, adding at the same time that a land from which the offioers will
pick up a goat every day would soon be impoverished.1" The Caliph is also
asked to forbid his officials to spend public money for their private needs.* 111
Principles of Taxation.—Abu Yusuf prescribes the following principles of
taxation: Only the surplus wealth of people should be taxed and tho burden
of taxes should fall upon the people with their consent. The tax should vary
according to the capacity of the tax-payer. Nobody should be taxed more
than he can pay. The tax should be oollocted from the wealthy and spent on
tho poor.1" Rates of tex should not be fixed so aa to suck the blood of the
people, nor should tho tex be realized by coercive methods.1"1 Government
should refrain from extorting taxes which are not warranted and also forbid
ita officers and landlords to make such exactions.1" NonMuslims who accept
Islam should not be charged the poll-tax.111 The practice of the "Right-guided”
Caliphs is quoted as authority in this connection. He refers, for example, to
the incident related to Ali that while in public he advised his officials to realize
every* penny of revenue from the payers and not to be at all lenient to them
in this matter, but calling them apart he instructed them to be careful not to
beat anybody or make them stand in the sun or press them so hard that they
should be obliged to sell their cattle or clothee or utensils to pay the tax.111 Or
the fact that ’Umar used to examine thoroughly his revenue officers to satisfy
himself that the farmers were not dealt with too harshly in the exaction of
revenue, and «hen the collections actually came in. the representatives of
the ootnmon people were summoned to bear witness that no Muslim or non
Muslim peasant was unjustly made to pay the tax.111
Rights of non-Muslim Suhjecte—With regard to the rights ol non-Muslim
subjects in the Islamic State, three principles are quoted again and again on
tho authority of ‘Umar:
1. Whatever agreement is made with them has to be faithfully observed.
>" /Wd.pp. 38. 117.
■" Ibid., p. 36.
111 Ibid., p. 186.
•" Ibid., p. 14.
111 Ibid., pp. 16.37. 109. 114.
■“ Ibid., pp. 109, 132.
111 Ibid., pp. 122, 131
111 Ibid., pp. 16. 16.
Ibid., pp. 37 114
699
A History of Muslim Philosophy
2. The responsibility for tho defence of the State doee not lie on them, but
on the Muslims alone.
3. They should not be burdened with exoeesive poll-tax and land revenue.11*
Then it is said that the poor, the blind, the old, the recluse, workers
at the houses of worship, women, and children are exempt from polltax;
that there ia no zakdt (prescribed charity) chargeable on the wealth and
cattle of the non-Muslims, that none is allowed to resort to beating or in
flicting other physical tortures on them for exacting the capitation, as the
maximum punishment for its non-payment ia only simple imprisonment. To
realize more than the fixed amount from them is unlawful, and the poor and
the cripple among them are to be supported from the State exchequer.11*
Historical incidents are related to make the Caliph see that it is for the good
of the State to be kind and generouB to the pon-Mualim subjects. It waa,
according to him. magnanimity of the Muslims that in the days of Umar
won for them the hearts of the Syrian Christians to such a degree that they
loved them more than their oo-religionists, the Romans.11*
Land Settlement.—Abu YOsuf disallows the feudal system of settlement in
which tho government, in order to realize the revenue from the farmers
appoints a person to overlord them, allowing him to exact from them what
ever he likes and aa he likes so long as he guarantees the payment of govern
ment dues. He condemns it as a most tyrannous system that is bound to lead
to the ruin of the country and vehemently advocates that it must be shunned
at all costa.11* He also calls it unlawful for the government to appropriate
somebody's land and bestow it upon another. He says: "The Caliph is not
authorized to dispossess any person, Muslim or non.Muslim, of anything that
belongs to him unless a proved or valid right stands against him in law. To
snatch from one to make over to another is like committing robbery for the
sake of distributing alms.*” Gifts of land are allowed only if uncultivated,
unowned, or uninherited pieces of land are distributed within reasonable
measure for purposes of cultivation or as rewards for some real, useful social
service. Such donations too are to be withdrawn if the donees fail to cultivate
such land within three yeara.11*
RedreM o/ Wrong—After this he tells HArfln al-R&ahld that it is not lawful
for him to appoint tyrants and corrupt people to offioea of State or to
employ them as officers of departments or governors of districts. If he did
so, he would surely share the retribution for the wrongs that they do.11* He
asks him again and again to employ honest, righteous, and God-fearing people
“• Ibid., pp. 14. 37, 128.
*•• Ibid., pp. 122-26.
■“ Ibid., p. 138.
>'• Ibid., p, 108.
Ibid., pp. 88. 80. 86
Ibid., pp. 89-88.
Ibid., p. Ill
100
Abu Hanlfah sn<l Abu YOsuf
to State services. Re emphssizee that in addition to their efficiency the govern
ment should also satisfy itself with regard to the moral character of ita servants,
and constantly keep a watch on them through ita intelligence department,
and if they tend to be corrupt or fall into cruel or cunning ways the Caliph
should know of their conduct and call them to account.1” He also tells H&riln
that the Caliph should listen regularly to the grievances of the people himself,
and that the occurrence of injustice could be made to stop if he has open
court even once a month, where every grieved person ia allowed to put his
grief before the Caliph and the officers are made to realize that what they
do may one day reach the Caliph's ear.1*1
The Judiciary.—The judiciary, according to him. is meant to dispense justioo.
pure and undiluted. To punish one who is not guilty or to let one who ia
guilty go unpunished are alike unpardonable. But none should be punished
on doubt. To go wrong in forgiveness is better than going wrong in awarding
punishment. There should be no interference in the course of justice, nor
should anybody's recommendation, position, or status count.1” *
Personal Liberty.—Abu Yusuf also maintains that nobody can be incarcerated
on a mere accusation. The accused person must be given a regular trial, and
witnesses examined. If ho proves guilty, he may be imprisoned; otherwise he
should be set free. He advises the Caliph that the cases of those who lie in
prisons should be examined and those that are found to have been put there
without sufficient proof or witness should be released. For the future all the
governors should be instructed not to imprison anybody on the basis of
mere allegation or suspicion without giving him a fair trial.1** He also holds
that it is illegal to beat or flog an accused person. Every person's back
is immune from punishment unless a court declares him worthy of the
lash.1”
Jail Reforms.—In the reforms that he has suggested for the improvement
of prisons, he affirms that every prisoner has a right to receive his board and
clothing from the Government Exchequer. He severely condemns the Umayyad
and 'Abblaid practice of daily taking out the prisoners handcuffed and in
chains to beg for their food and clothes. He requests the Caliph to put a
stop to it and proposes that clothes suited to the season and sufficient food
should be given to every prisoner by the Governments The practice of
burying the deceased hcirless prisoners without wash and coffin, or without
the funeral prayer, is also condemned in vigorous terms. “It is a matter of
great shame for the Muslims," says he. The proper wrapping and burial of
these prisoners should be a Government charge. He has also recommended
Ibid., pp. 100, 107. 111. 132. 186.
“■ Ibid., pp. 111. 112.
•” Ibid., pp. 162-53.
Ibid., pp. 175-76.
■« Ibid., p. 151.
701
A History of Muslim Philosophy
that no prisoner exoept those guilty of murder should be kept in fetters inside
the prison.1**
These are, in brief, the constitutional proposals which abu Yusuf, as Law
Minister and Chief Justice of the realm, placed before an autocrat twelve oen-
turiea ago. Placed beside the basic principles of an Islamic State and the tra
ditions of the "Right-guided" Caliphate, or compared with the teachings of
his own master abu llanifah, they look far short oi them indeed. There is no
trace in them of the ideal way of choosing a Caliph. There is no mention of the
advisory body, called the ihura. guiding the administration of State affaire,
nor of the idea that the wicked and the corrupt have no right to rule and if
they come in, the public have a right to rise in revolt against them. Not
only that; many other important things also are missing and, judged from
these and other such considerations, these proposals fall short of the true
conception of an Islamic order. But thia should not lead us td infer that sbu
Yusuf's conception of the Islamic State was restricted to tho limits of these
proposals of Kitab al-Khara) and that ho did not want anything more than
what he put down there. On the contrary, what we find here describes what
he, as a practical thinker, conceived aa the maximum that waa possible and
worthy of achievement in the particular circumstances of that period of the
'AbbAsid regime. In fact, the idea was not to present a theoretically perfect
plan without regard to whether it was capable of being translated into practice
or not. His intention was to draw up a constitutional plan which, in addition
to satisfying the minimum conditions required for the making of an Islamic
State, should promise to be workable in the circumstances.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
1. Qur'an and Commentaries.—ALQur'An; ibn Kalhir, Ta/rir al-Qur'dn al
‘Aflm, Mafba'ah Mustafa Muhammad. Egypt. 1837; Huai, BOh al-Ma’ani. IdArah
al-TabA'at al-Munlrlyyah, Egypt. 1345/1926: al JawA, al-ijanafl, AAidm al-
Qur’an, al Mafba'at al-Bahlyyah, Egypt, 1347/1928.
2. Hadlfband Commmlario.—M^uVair,-. abu DAwud; al NaaS’i; abu DAwOd
al-TayAlisi, cd-Mutnad. Dairatul-Maarif. Hyderabad, 1321/1903; Muslim; ibn
MSjah; al Tinmdhi; Ahmad bin Hanbal, alMumad. Dir al Ma'Arif, Egypt. 3rd
ed.. 1949; tho same also published by al-Mafba'at al-Maimanlvyah, Egypt, 1306/
1888: ibn Hajar. EoPi ol-Bdri. al-Ma(ba'al al Kbatrtyyah. Cairo, 1325/1907; al
Baihaqi. alSunan al-Kubra, Dairatul Maarif, Hyderabad, 1356/1936.
3. M-Piqb.—Abu Yusuf, Kiub al-Kbaraj. al-Matba'at al-Salaflyyah, Egypt,
2nd od.. 1352/1933; al-8arakl>ai. Sbarh al-Siqar al Kabir. Mofba'sh Mi»r, fikirkah
MusAhamah al-Mifriyyah, 1957; Kiiot olMoAefl/, Matba'at al-Sa'Adah. Egypt,
J824/19O6; *l-fib*'rAni, XildA al.Afiatn, al-Matbw'at al-Axhartyyah, Egypt, 3rd od..
4. Dialxtir Thtolon.-M abahrastAni, Kitab al Milal w-al-Nihal. London;
al-Aih'ari. Maqabu al-IMmlyyin. Maktabat al-Nahdat al-Migriyyah, Cairo; 'Abd
Ibid., pp. 149, 151.
702
Abu Hanlfah ami Abu Yusuf
al-QAhir al-Bagbdidi. al-Farg bain al-Firaq. Matba'at al-Adablyyah, Egypt, 1317/
18119; Mulla 'Ali Qin. Shark al-Figh al-Akbar, Delhi. 1348/1929; al-MaghnisAwi.
SAorb al-Fiqh al-AMar, Dairatul-Moarif. Hyderabad. 1321/1B03; ibn abi al-'Itt
al-Qanafl. fiJorA al-J'aMu-iyyah, DA'irat al-Ma'Arif. Egypt, 1373/1953; Mulla
Husain. al-Jauharal al-Munlfal fi Bkarh Wariyyal al-IMlm Abi Hani/ok, Dairatul-
Maarif. Hyderabad. 1321/1903.
5. Biographic*.—Ibn al-Qayyim, ZOd al-Ma'ad. Matba'ah Muhammad 'Ali
Habib. Egypt. 1935; ibn HisbAni. alSlral al-Nabawiyyah, Matba'ah Mustafa al
Bibi. Egypt. 1930; ibn Khallikiln. Wafaydt al-A'gOn, Maktabat al-Nahijat al.
Mip-Iyyah. Cairo. 1948; ibn 'Abd al-Barr. al-I*A'ab, Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad.
2nd od.; al-lnliqd' fi FaMil al-Ihaidlhat al-Aimmal al-Fugahd'. Cairo, 1370/1950;
ibn al-Bazziz al-Kardari. Mandy,b al-lmdm al-A 'fam. Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad,
1st ed.. 1321/1903; al-MuwalTnq bin Ahmad al-Makki, ManOqib al-lrndm al-A'fam
Abi Hanifah. Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad. 1st ed., 1321/1903; Mulla 'Ali QAri.
[&ail al-Jawdhir al-Mudiyyah. Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad. 1st ed., 1332/1913;
al-Dbahabi. Mandqib al-ImOm Abi Hani/ah wa Sdhibaiht, Dar al-Kutub al-Mlsri,
Egypt, 1366/1946; Ibn Hajar, at-lfObah, Matbaah Mustafa Muhammad, Egypt,
1939; abu Nu'aim al-Aebah&ni, llilyal al-Auliyd', al-Maf-ba'at al-Sa'Adah. Egypt,
1355/1936.
6. History—Al-Tabari, TSrith al-Umam w-ol-Mulal. al-MatbA'at al-IstiqAmah.
Cairo. 1939; ibn al-A|t0r, al-Kamil fi al-TdrtU. IdArat al-TabA'al al-Muniriyyah.
Egypt, 1356/1937; ibn Qutaibah, al-Imdmah w-al-Siyioali, Matboat al-Futub.
Egypt, 1331/1912; *Uyun al-Ahhbdr, Matba'ah DAr al-Kutub, 1928, 1st od.; ibn
Kathtr, ul-BiddyaA w-al-Nihdyah. Matba'at al-Sa'Adali. Egypt; al-Mas‘0di, Murfij
al Dhahab im Ma'Odin al-JavAhir. al Matba'at al-Bahlyyah, Egypt. 1346/1927; ibn
Khaldun, al-Muqaddimah, Matba'ah Mustafa Muhammad. Egypt; al-SuyOtt
Tdrihh al-Khulafd', Government Prose, Lahore, 1870; Hum al-Muhadarah fi
Akhbdr Af ifr w-al-Qahirah, al Matba'at al-Sharflyyah. Egypt; al-Khalib, Tariki al-
Baghdad. Matba'at al-Sa'Adali, Egypt, 1931; Ahmad Amin, puAo al-lMm. Matba'
ah Lajnah al-TAlif w-al-Tarjamah, Egypt. 4th od., 1946; al-Maqrizi. Kildb al-
SulSk li Ma'rifal Duwal al-Mulilt. DAr al-Kutub al-Misrtyyah. 1934; al-JahtbivAri,
Kitab al- Wueard' w-al-KuUdb, ed. Vienna, 1926; al-YAfi‘i, Mir'dl al-Jindn wo ‘Ibral
al-yagfOn, Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad, lated., 1937.
7. Literature.-Al-QalquAbandi, SuMi al-A'tha fi Sand'al al-Infha'. D&r al-
Kutub al-Mipiyyah, Cairo. 1910; ibn abi al Hadid, Bort No*/ al BalaOah, DAr
al Kutub al-'Arablyyah, Egypt. 1329/1911; ibn 'Abd Rabbihi. ai-'Iqd al-Farid.
Lajnah al-TAltf w-al-Tarjamah. Cairo. 1940; abu al-Farnj al-A,bahAni. KiUb
al-Aghdni, al Matba'at al-Mifriyyah, BulAq. Egypt. 1285/1868; al-RAgbib al
A9bahAni, -tfubddordt al-Udaba'. Matba'at al-HilAl. Egypt, 1902; al-JAbi I. al-
Bagdn w-al-Tabyin. Matba'at al-Futub al-Adbiyyah, Egypt. 1336/1917; KMb al-
Hagawan. al Matba'at al-Taqaddum. Egypt, 1906; Tbdaih Roca'il. al-Matba'at
al-Saiaflyyah. Cairo, 1344/1925; al-Murtada. ol-Amdli. Matba'at al-Sa'Adah. Egypt.
1st ed.. 1907; abu al-'AlA' al-Ma'arri, Ri*alal id tBu/rdn. DAr al-Ma'Arif. Egypt.
1950.
8. Mi*ccllancou*.—TMh KubraiAdah. Afi/idA ol-Saadoh, Dairatul-Maarif,
Hyderabad. 1st ed.. 1329/1911; ibn al-Nadlm. al-Fihrict. al Matba'at al-RabmAnly-
yah. Egypt. 1348/1929.
703
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Chapter XXXV
AL-FARABI
SOCIETY AND ITS GOAL
An account of the life and philosophical thought of abu Na»r Muhammad
ibn JarUlkn al-Firibi (d. 339/9S0) has been already given in a previous
chapter. The reader must have noted that, while recasting the philosophical
views of Plato, Aristotle, and other Greek thinkers, al-Firabi always keeps
in view the Islamic tenets which have formed the inner links of hia writings.
In his political philosophy, he has followed the same line. Under the influence
of Plato and Aristotle he evolves his own system which markedly differs from
the system of the Greeks, the Iranians aa well as the Indians. This will bo
shown in these pages which have been prepared in tho light of his (1) KMb
Ard' AU al-Madlnat al-Fadilah (Book on the Views of the People of the
Excellent State), (2) Kitab al-Siyamt al-bfadantyyah (Book on the Civic
Administration), (3) Kitab Tafuil al-Sa'ctdah (Book on the Achievement of
Happiness), (4) Kitab al-Tanbih ‘ala Sabil al-Sa'ddah (Book on Caution on
the Path of Happiness), and (6) the Bodleian manuscript of his FusiU al-
Madini (Chapters on the Civilian).
The City-State.—According to al-Flribi. the Qty-State (madinah) and the
family State (manzil) are places that contain inhabitanta, no matter whether
their dwellings are constructed of wood. mud. wool or hair.1
The house or family is limited to only four relationships: husband and wife,
master and slave, father and son, and property and proprietor. He who makes
them unite in co-operation and aims at providing for them an abode with
best facilities and maintenance, is called the master of the family. He is in
the house what the administrator of the city is in the city.*
Necessity of Society.—Men are naturally so constituted that they need
many things for their best achievements. Hence, they need mutual help
and co-operation—everyone doing his best for obtaining a particular kind
of object. Thus, by uniting their individual efforts for different objects they
organise different societies.’
The greater the society, the better are the facilities it achieves for its indivi
duals. The grouping of men is not confined to a house. It extends to lanes,
localities, villages, towns, and cities. Men work for the welfare of society and
in the long run serve the State. The people living in a State aroe ailed a
' Al-FVtbi. Fusul al-Madim, Bodleian MS.. Fol. 97 a.
■ Ibid., Fol. 97b.
■ Kitab Ara' AU al-Madlnat U-FOdilah. p,.6O
704
AlFiribi
nation (ummah). One nation can be distinguished from another by natural
character, temperament, habits, and language.* *
Human societies are either perfect or imperfect. The perfect society may
be great, middling, or small. The great human society ia the one consisting of
several nations uniting themselves in one unit and helping one another. The
middling one ia the society of one nation in a part of the world, and tho small
is the society of the people of a city.
*
The imperfect society is that of the people of a village, a locality, a lane,
or a house, the last being the smallest.
Now. the highest good and perfection are primarily achieved through volition
and will. Similarly, evil finds its scope by volition and will. The City-State
can. therefore, develop by mutual help and efforts to attain some evil purpose
or to attain happiness. The city in which tho members of the society co
operate to attain happiness ia in reality the ideal City-State (al-madinat al-
liidilah), the society, the ideal society, and the nation, the ideal nation.
*
In this State the citizens help one another to achieve qualities of the greatest
excellence through which they live in the beet manner, and enjoy the best
life perpetually.’ But if they help one another to obtain the bare necessities
of life and its prreervati on, this City-State ia evidently tho necessary
*
State.
How la Achieve Happineu.—Al-F4r4bi speaks of happiness both of this
world and the hereafter. He explains that when human factors or the four
excellences—speculative virtues (al-lajd'U al-najoriyya
*
/ theoretical virtues
Ifat/d'il al-fikriyyah), the moral virtues (lajd'il al-kbulufiyyah), and the
practical arts (al-sana'ai al-'amaliyyah)—form the qualities of a nation or
of the people of a city, their worldly happiness in this life and the lasting
happiness in the next are insured.
Speculative virtues (al/ajd'H alnajariyyah) represent those sciences which
aim at the highest object, knowledge of existing things including all their
requirements. These sciences are either innate in man, or they are achieved
by effort and learning.
*
Now, the principal factors of existing bodies and accidents, as explained
by al-F&rSbi, are of six kinds with six grades—the first cause in the first
grade, the secondary causes in the second grade, active intellect in the third
grade, soul in the fourth grade, form in the fifth grade, and matter in the sixth
grade. The first grade is confined to one individual only; it cannot have more
than one. But other grades can have more than one occupant. Out of these
six, three, via., the first cause, the secondary cause, and the active intellect.
• Knob al-s.yaeal al Madaniyyah, p. 39.
• Ibid., p. 39.
• KMb Arif Ahl al-Madlnal alFOdilah. p. 81
’ Fuafil uljWodin., Bodleian MS.. Fol. 98b.
• Ibid.
• KM TahfU al Sa Odah. p. 2.
705
A History of Muslim Philosophy
are neither bodies, nor are they contained in bodice. Tho other three: soul,
form, and matter are not bodies, but exist in bodies. As for bodies, they are of
six types: the heavenly bodies, rational animals, irrational animals, plants,
minerals, and the four elements. All these six bodies aa a whole form the
universe. Tho first to be believed in is God. the Almighty, who is the
immediate cause of the existence of the secondary causes and the active
intellect. The secondary causes aro the causes of the existence of heavenly
bodies and their substance. The secondary causes should be called the
spirits, the angels, and so on.
The function of the active intellect is to attend to the rational animal,
man, and to enable him to attain to the highest perfection he oan reach. Tho
highest perfection of man consists in his highest happiness which he achieves
when he raises himself to the stage of the active intellect by abstracting him
self from bodies, matter, and accidents, and continues to enjoy thia perfection
perpetually. In essence, the active intellect ia one but in gradation it includes
all that is purified from the rational animal and attains to happiness. The
active intellect should be called the Holy Spirit (al-Rufi al-Amln or al-Ruh
al-Qudtu) or the like, and its grades be called the spiritual realm (almala&UJ
or tho like.
Souls have three grades: souls of celestial bodies, souls of the rational
animals, and souls of the irrational animals. The souls of the rational ani
mals are the rational faculty, the appetitive faculty, the imaginative faculty,
and the perceiving faculty. The rational faculty equips man with sciences
and arts, and enables him to distinguish good from evil manners and actions.
Through this faculty man inclines to do good and avoid evil and realizes the
useful, the harmful, the pleasant, and the unpleasant.1*
(i) The rational faculty is either speculative or practical; the first is that
through which man obtains the knowledge of all that he is not at all supposed
to know by his own effort, and the second is that through which he knowB
all that he can know if he wills it so. Tho second is again divided into that
through which arts and crafts are obtained (mafianiyyahj, and that through
which imagination and insight concerning doing or not doing a thing are
achieved (marwiyyah).
(ii) The appetitive faculty manifests the human inclination of wanting
something or running away from something, of desiring or not desiring some
thing. of giving preference to something or avoiding something. All psycho
logical feelings—hatred, affection, love, friendship, enmity, fear, anger, passion,
mercy, etc.—are expressed by this faculty.
(iii) The faculty of imagination retains the impression of the sensible objects
after they have disappeared from sense-perception, unites some of them with
some others, or separates some of them from some others both in wakefulness
'• KMb al-Siyatah, pp. 3. 4.
706
Al-Flribi
and sleep producing true or false propositions. This faculty alao perceives the
useful, harmful, pleasant, and unpleasant manners and actions.
(iv) The faculty of sense-perception obviously perceives the sensible*
through the five sense-organs—the pleasant and the unpleasant, without dis
criminating between the harmful and the useful, and without distinguishing
good from evil.
The three faculties other than the rational faculty are available to animals,
imaginative faculty serving them as tho rational faculty serves man. Some
animals, however, possess only the sensible and the appetitive faculties.
The celestial souls are different from the animal souls in so far as the former
are actual souls that understand the intclligiblcs, whereas the latter are at
first potential and then become actual.11
Having explained the gradation of coemos and the relation that the different
grades have with the First, al-F&r&bi emphasizes the point that the whole
cosmos depends for ite existence on God, the First Necessary Being.
Man. however, understands and realizes happiness only through the specu
lative rational faculty. The imaginative and the sensitive faculties help the
rational faculty in moving man towards those actions which lead to happiness.
The good is characterized as “voluntary." But if the rational faculty feels
happiness only by making an effort to perceive it, while other faculties do
not perceive it, then sometimes man oonsidere the pleasant and the useful
to be tho ultimate ends of life. Again, when one becomes indifferent or slow in
accomplishing the sensitive rational part and does not feel happiness in doing
so, one hastens to attain to it by exercising one's appetitive faculty in aiming
at and making all effort to achieve things other than happiness; and in this
effort one is assisted also by the faculties of imagination and sense-perception,
and produces what may be rightly called voluntary evil.
Similarly, he produces only evil who attains to happiness which ho does
not recognize as his aim, does not desire it. or desires it with a faint desire,
and adopts something other than happiness as his end, and exerts all his
faculties to achieve that end.1*
Since man has been created to achieve happiness which is the highest
perfection that remains perpetually, it ia possible to obtain it through the
active intellect which gives primarily the first intelligible* or the firet objects
of knowledge. But men differ in their capacity to receive the primary intcl-
ligibles.
B
HUMAN NATURE
Human nature is not the same in all individuals; it varies in accordance
with the physical qualities of individuals. Some can easily grasp the first
11 /bid., p. 5.
« Ibid., pp. 43 44
101
A History of Muslim Philosophy
intelligible* or the first known things, some do not receive them directly.
Again, some of them do not receive anything from the first intelligible^ in a
natural way at all, and some others receive them in a way different from
theirs. There are still others who receive them in respect of their own selves.
Human beings in this third group are free from defect, their nature being
homogeneous, prepared to receive intelligible* which are common to them
and through which they advance to the affairs and actions that are common
to them. After this stage, they differ from one another, as some receive those
intelligible^ which are peculiar to them, and are not common to others. Those
belonging to this group endeavour towards a particular genus without allowing
anything else to share it. Similarly, human beings exoel one another in the
faculties through which they derive the objects of one genus, some having
the ability of deriving all the individuals of a genus and others perceiving
only a few individuals thereof. Again, sometimes it so happens that two indi
viduals do not prove to be equal in their capacity of deriving the external ob
ject*, one being swift and the other slow, or one being swift in deriving all the
individuals of a genua, and the other perceiving only a few individuals thereof.
Again, sometimes it so happens that two individuals do not prove to be equal
in their capacity of deriving the external objects, one being swift and the
other alow, or one being swift in deriving the genus of the greatest excellence
and the other in deriring the basest of the genus. It is also possible that both
are equal in power, but one is able enough to teach what one haa derived, and
can offer guidance to others; but the other has no such power of teaching and
guiding others. They also differ in performing corporeal deeds.
Natural dispositions do not oppose one another, nor do they insist on action;
but they facilitate performance, and arc not moved by anything external
towards opposite actions. Even if they are moved in opposite directions they
resist and offer hindrance.
All these natural dispositions require a suitable teacher. Hence, they are
trained in matters that preparr them to be in their highest or nearly highest
perfection. Some are trained in mean things which produce excellent actions
from a mean genus.1*
People have different calibres by nature, and they vary in ranks in accordance
with the ranks in genus, arts, and sciences for which they have naturally been
prepared. They also differ in the capacity of training and giving guidance.
Some are stronger than others, and, hence, they differ in receiving training.
For. some can be trained for the whole of the genua of the work, and some
can be trained for a part of the genus only Now, he who is an expert in im
parting training and guidance is called the chief."
•• Ibid., p. 46.
« Ibid., p. 47
708
Al-FMbl
c
EDUCATION
Man has been created to attain to the highest happiness (ta'&dah). He
should, therefore, know what happiness is and should make it the aim of
hia life. He, then, needs to know those factors and arts through which he can
achieve happiness. He will have to exercise all those arts which will enable
him to attain to it. But since it has been explained that human individuals
differ in nature, it is not in the nature of every man to know happiness or
those factors whioh enable him to reach it by himself. Ho, therefore, needs
a teacher, a guide. Some people require less guidance and teaching, and some
need more. It is also not necessary that one should leam all that one is
taught, or receive all the guidance one is given. Hence, some people require
constant teaching and guidance to urge them to do what they have been
taught to do.1*
Teaching fta'ltm) means creating speculative excellences in nations and
cities, while upbringing (tddib) is the method of creating and developing
moral virtues and scientific arts in nations. Teaching is possible only by ex
pression-. fcidih or discipline is to make nations and citizens habituated to
the deeds done through scientific habits. That ia. their resolutions will move
them to perform those actions, so much so that these resolutions will dominate
their souls, and they will beoome devoted to those actions. To exert one’s
resolution to do something is possible either by expression or by performance.
While al -Partbi agrees with Plato in the system of education and in learning
from childhood, he emphasizes that speculative sciences are learnt cither by
kings and leaders (iminu) or by those who preserve these sciences and
teach kings and leaders in several ways. First of all, they should know the
primary axioms, and the first known object in every genus of speculative
sciences, then they should know the various forma of premises and their
arrangement through which they can lead to conclusions. After they have
oompleted their education, and have accustomed themselves to logical
methods, they will be made kings in each of the partial States, and will be
promoted little by little till the stage of the great State is achieved.
Speculative sciences must be taught through convincing methods. Men very
often understand these sciences by a process of thinking, because they under
stand them after realizing many known principles which are not corporeal
The common people can understand their images by the method of convincing
only. The teacher should also distinguish wnat should bo imparted to a parti
cular nation and how to make it common to all nations or to all the people
of every city. He should also know what should be taught to the entire
nation, or city, and what only to a particular group in the city. All these
distinctions can be made by the imaginative virtue which enables one to
achieve the speculative virtues.
“ Ibid., p. 48.
709
A History of Muslim Philosophy
As for practical virtues and practical arts, people must habituate them
selves to practising them by two methods. First, the teacher should train
them by convincing and effective expressions to engender the values of these
actions and habits perfectly in their hearts so that their convictions may
move them to perform them submissively. Secondly, he should use the method
of force which is employod for the disobedient and revolutionary citizens,
and those who do not move to righteousness meekly on their own accord or
by persuasion.”
The virtuous teachers and artists can be divided into two groups in respect
of the above-mentioned two methods—one group teaching and training those
who aro obedient, the other group teaching the disobedient. In both respects
the king is the teacher of nations whom he trains to achieve virtues, and the
master of the house ia the teacher of the people of the house. Similar is the
case with one who is in charge of children or the youth.1’
The Imaginative Virtue.—The imaginative virtue enables a man to think of
an exceedingly useful purpose which is common to the oomity of nations, to a
nation, or to a city. This virtue is called the civil imaginative virtue. But if
this virtue ia common to a group of citizens or to the members of a house
only, then it is ascribed to that particular group and ia called family imaginative
virtue, or State imaginative virtue. Sometimes this virtue is further divided.
.Sinoe it is derived from what is most useful and beautiful in respect of a
particular art or profession for a limited time, it is divided into the various
kinds of arts and professions. The moet accomplished one in this virtue is the
strongest one who succeeds in creating a great State.
The imaginative virtue confined to different aspects of the State—de
fence, finance, and so on—is followed by moral virtue which is related to
the imaginative virtue aa the imaginative virtue is related to different arts,
professions, or families. This virtue ia first of all needed for organizing and
maintaining the army. The moral virtue alone impels the warriors to display
their bravery, and the best kind of valour. It also urges citizens to earn the
wealth of the State with honesty and legal moans. In fact, it plays a major
role in all departments of the State.”
D
THE CHIEF
It ia evident that every man cannot be the chief. People differ in their
intellectual capacity, in physical strength, in the exercise of virtuous deeds,
and in the acquisition of excellent habits ofthinking, feeling, willing, and doing.
In every department of life and arts the strongest person, of excellent manners,
who also knows, acts, and directs, is the chief of that department, the rest
” Kirdd ToAfU al-Sa'adah. pp. 2»-31
" Ibid., p, SI.
” Ibid., pp. 24-26
710
AlFlrtbi
being the subjects. The chief ia either one of the firat rank who is not sub
servient to anyone, or he is of the second rank, dominating some, and being
dominated by aome others. Such ranks develop in relation to the forma of
art. e.g.. cultivation, trade, medical profession, or in respect of all kinds of
human beings.1’
The firat chief in general is he who needs no help from anyone. Sciences
and arts are his property in actuality, and he needs no guidance from any
person in any respect.”
The first chief of the excellent (ideal) dty ia one who is chief in all respects.
His profession must excel all the rest in attaining to perfection, and in intending
by all actions of the ideal State to achieve the highest happiness. This man
is not subservient to any other. He is a man accomplished in'all virtues, and,
therefore, he is intellect and intelligible in actuality, having his imaginative
faculty naturally so perfected aa to be able to receive particulars from the
active intellect either in themselves, or as images in sleep, or in wakeful state.
His passive intellect receives the intelligiblos in complete perfection, so
that nothing which has become an intellect in actuality is denied to him.
Whosoever invests his passive intellect with intelligible^ becomes intellect
and intelligible in actuality. His understanding of himself is more perfect,
more separable from matter, nearer to the active intellect, and is called the
derived intellect. Thia derived intellect has a rank between the passive and the
active intellect. The passive intellect is, therefore, like matter and substratum
for the derived intellect which is like matter and substratum for the active
intellect.’1
The rational faculty” which ia the natural form, auppliee material sub-
stratum for tho passive intellect and makes it the actual intellect. The actual
intellect is the first stage at which man ia called man and being human be
comes common to all human beings. When the passive intellect and the natural
form become one in the same way aa the composite of matter and form be
comes one and the same thing, and man receives the human form, the aotual
intellect ia achieved; and when the natural form becomes the matter of the
passive intellect which has thus become the actual intellect, it becomes the
matter of the derived intellect, which in its turn becomes the matter of the
active intellect, and all of these become like one thing, then man enjoys the
presenoe of the active intellect in himself If the active intellect is present
in both parts of the rational faculty—the speculative and the practical—
then man receives revelation in his imaginative faculty. Allah tho exalted
and sublime sends revelation to him through the active intellect. If the active
intellect extends what it receives from Allah to his passive intellect through
his derived intellect and then to his imaginative faculty, then man, through
" Kiiab ol-SiyOM, p. 48.
” Ibid., p. ««.
KMb Ara' Abl al-Madtnol alFadilab. pp. 84-05
“ Ibid., pp. 05. 80
711
\ Hutory of Muslim Philoeophi
escends upon his passive intellect, becomes a wise philosopher and
possessor of perfect understanding, and through what descends upon his
imaginative faculty, a prophet, a warnef against what is going to take place,
and an informer of what particulars exist, as he understands them from God.
ThiB man is in the most perfect stage of humanity and in the highest place
of blessing, his soul being perfect, united with the active intellect in tho manner
described. This is the manrwho is aware of every action that would enable one
to achieve grace and is the chief, the leader, who cannot be led by anybody
else.
E
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CHIEF OF THE
IDEAL STATE
The Imam or the chief of the ideal State is the chief of the ideal nation,
and for the matter of that, of tho whole inhabited part of the earth. This
position is only attainod by a man who naturally possesses the following
twelve characteristics as his second nature:
(1) Sound health, and perfect organs, performing their functions with ease
and facility and in harmony with all faculties.
(2) Intelligence and sagacity, so as to be able to grasp the intention of
a speaker in his particular situations and circumstance*.
(3) Good memory, so as to retain in his mind all that he understands
sees, hears, and perceives.
(4) Prudence and talent, to understand a problem from the perspective
in which it has been presented to him.
(5) Eloquence, so that his tongue may assist him in expressing in a per
fect manner all that is in his mind.
(6) Devotion to education and learning, and submission to receive know
ledge with ease without feeling any annoyance.
(7) No greed for food, drink, and sex; avoidanoe of play; and dislike of
pleasures caused by these.
8) Friendliness towards truth and truthful persons and condemnation of
falsehood and those who are inclined to falsehood.
(9) Bigness of heart, loving nobility, and natural magnanimity without
any trace of meanness.
(10) Indifference to dirham and dindr and other forms of wealth.
(11) Devotion by nature to justice and just people, abhorrenoe of injustice
and oppression and unjust and oppressive people ; offering half of one’s
possessions and those of one’s family to help the oppressed, and urging
others to do tho same; helping everything good and beautiful; and
being easy to bend to justice but difficult to oppression and evil.
<12) Strong resolution, courage, and promptitude without any sign of fear
or psychological weakness.
712
AI-FArAbi
If a |M-raon possessed of there qualities happens to live in an idea! State he
ia the chief.
It is, however, impossible to have all there qualities in one man. People
are scarcely equipped with all of them. If no one having there qualities is
found in the State, the laws promulgated by a former chief or his successors
should be kept in force.
The second chief who sucoeeds the first should fulfil at least the following six
requirements. (I) He should be wise and philosophical; and (2) learned and
abreast with the laws, customs, rites, and rituals adopted by his predecessor to
discharge the function of the ideal State with all perfection. (3) He should be
an expert in deriving principles in case he does not find any law, and (4) far-
sighted, possessing an insight to frame rulee and regulations in accordance with
the conditions and circumstances he finds himrelf in, and capable of keeping up
the reforms he introduces. (5) Ho should also be well experienced and eloquent
in giving directions to urge the people to follow him in accordance with the
SJsari'ah. (6) In addition he should be skilful in physical display of exercises
needed in warfare, and in the use of arms, ammunition, and other equipments.
In other words, this ruler must have insight to derive inferences from the
possessed records of tho customs, rites, and rituals, and accurate opinion in
understanding the events that take place and may increase the prosperity
of the State. He must have the power to convince others and struggle hard.
This sovereign is called the king of the tradition, and the State is called
al-mulk al-mnnah, the country of traditions and customs.
If all the conditions described for the ohief are not found in one man. and
are available in two persons—one wire, and the other possessing other qualities
—then both will be the chiefs of the State. If, however, there conditions aro
scattered in a group of people agreeable to work together, then these members
will be tho ideal chiefs. But if wisdom does not form a part of the State
while other conditions are fulfilled entirely, the city will be best without a
sovereign, but it will be exposed to destruction. The State without a philoso
pher to whom it may bo entrusted will perish in no time.”
F
THE IDEAL STATE
The sovereigns of an ideal State who succeed one another aro all like one
soul, aa if there were one king who continued all the time. Similar is the care
with a group of people who administer the State together at a time in one
or more than ono city. The whole group ia just like one sovereign, their souls
being like one soul. Uniformity is found in every stage and in every part of
the State, and people flourishing at different times look as if they were one
Ibid., p 67
713
A History of Muslim Philosophy
oul working all the time in the same way. If there ia continuity and harmony
at a particular stage, even different groups of people, whether of one or more
than one State, would appear as one soul.*4
The people of the ideal State have something common to all of them in
their learning and acting. But different groups of people belonging to different
ranks anil stages have some sciences and deeds peculiar to them. Through
both of these, people achieve happiness, and by displaying these they obtain
an ideal psychical form. Thia form grows stronger and stronger and better and
better by constant performance of those deeds. For example, the art of writing
has some prerequisite performances. The more they are executed by the expert,
the greater is the excellence of his art. Not only that. The scribe enjoys he
art by repeating his exercises, and grows in love for it. Tho same is the case
with happiness which increases with the oonstant practioe of deeds that lead
to it. The soul grows in happiness to such a degree that it becomes free from
matter. It does not perish with matter, for it is no longer required for ita
existence. At this stage, being separated from matter, the soul frees itself from
all corporeal qualities so much so that even movement and rest cannot be
ascribed to it- As this state is very unusual, it ia very difficult to form an
idea of it.
G
ARTS AND BLE8SING8
Aa arts have three grades, happiness or bliss is also divided into three
grades in respect of species, quality, and quantity. There are suoh species of
art as weaving, oloth-trading, perfumery, and sweeping; or aa dancing,
jurisprudence, philosophy, and rhetoric. Thus, arts exoel one another in differ
ent species. He artists of the same art exoel one another in skill and efficiency.
Two scribes, for example, differ in their skill. because besides a good hand, their
art requires some knowledge of lexioon, rhetoric, and arithmetic. Now, one may
be an expert in good hand and rhetoric, another in good hand, lexioon, and
rhetoric, and yet another in all the four arts Again, two scribes may differ in
the quality of their art, for one of them may bo better than the other.
Similarly, happiness excells in species, quantity, and quality.
The people of an imperfect State have but little virtue. They have evil
psychical forms and their actions are not good. The greater their activity,
the more does their profession display defect and imperfection. In conse
quence they become ill inasmuch aa they do not enjoy edibles, and become
annoyed with beautiful and excellent things. Some of them even regard them
selves as healthy and perfect, though they are actually not so, and do not pay
any heed to the advioe of the physician or the well-wisher.
“ Ibid., p. 70
714
AlFlrtbi
H
INHABITANTS OF THE IDEAL STATE
The excellent or the ideal State consists of five kinds of people: the excellent,
the linguists, the secluded, the struggling, and the steady. The excellent people
are the philosophers, the intellectuals, and “the People of Opinion" in great
affairs. As for linguists, they are the orators, apoakera, poets, musicians,
writers, and the like. The secluded people are the mathematicians, statisticians,
physicians, astronomers, and the like. The struggling people are the fighters,
the defenders, and all those who take their place. The steady are those who
cam money in the city, for example cultivators, traders, and those engaged
in other pursuits.11
I
IMPERFECT STATES
The excellent State aa explained above is the State administered by the
best and most talented who aim at prosperity and happiness for all and
sundry. If ita constitution fails to provide the people with prosperity, and
the rulers do not possess the qualities of ideal rulers, then the State ceases
to be excellent and is called the evil-doing State (ai-madinat alffaiqah), the
ignorant State (aimadinai al-idhilah) or the astray-going State (al-madtnal
al-jdUah). People in the evil-doing State are like weeds in a field. They are
no better than savages and can have no organization worthy of a State.**
Aa for the people of the ignorant State, they possess their own constitution
and culture. But their oivio organizations vary. They look after the necessities
of life in a necetsary State, organize the society of the contemptible in the
contemptible State, the society of the vile in the vile State, the society of the
extravagant in the extravagant State, the society of the dominant in the
dominant State, or the society of the free in the social State.
The necessary organization is the State which endeavours to earn what is
evidently necessary for tho constitution and the upkeep of the body.” The
State of the oontemptible is the one which tries to achieve wealth in abundance -
and the money which they hoard due to the love of wealth and niggardliness
is spent only for the needs of the body. The vile State broods over sensuous
pleasures and achieves the best means for the sake of pleasure only. This State
is the most coveted one. The extravagant State is the organization of the
profusely generous in which the individuals help one another to reach nobility
in expression and action. The people of thia State are called generous either
“ Fulfil al-Madini, Bodleian MS., pp. 40-41: fProeeedinp. 0/ Ms Fourth)
Pakistan Philosophical Congress, p. 336.
•• KMb al-Siydsal. p. 57
” Ibid,, p, 58
715
A History of Muslim Philosophy
by themselves or by the people of other States.11 This is the best State among
all the States of the ignorant.
The State of the dominant people tries to overpower others in power and
wealth; they shed blood, subjugate others, and indulge in all sorts of pleasures.
The State of the dominant exoels the State of the generous in showing power."
Aa for the social State, everybody is free in it to do whatever he likes, and
believes that no man haa any superiority over the others by any means. But
independence often leads to extremes, and, therefore, there arise in this State
different, rites and rituals, customs and manners; and people are misled by
evil propensities. Thus, this State splits into different groups and parties.
In all these States there is always unrest prevailing among the people, as
everybody tries to become the chief and, by virtue of hia wits, to lead the
State to prosperity and happiness.
The evil-doing States differ from the States mentioned above in so far as
the people of these States believe in the principles held and the forms of
happiness conceived by the people of the excellent State, and also invite others
to do the same, but they themselves do nothing to achieve their object, nor do
they try by action to attain the happiness they believe in. On the contrary,
they incline to their own whims and propensities, that is to say, they like to
enjoy power, nobility, and domination, and direct their actions towards their
achievement. In activities these States are like the States of the ignorant.
In manners their peoples resemble the peoples of the said States. The peoples
of these two sets of States differ only in belief. None of these States ever
achieve happiness and prosperity.
The astray-going States are those whose people suffer from some delusion.
They adopt such principles, actions, and deeds aa appear to them to be those
of the excellent State, but in fact are not. The same is true of their goal of
happiness and prosperity which they conoeive to bo so but which actually is
not so.
The offsprings of the societies which develop in these States are of various
types and all of them aim at personal gain end victory and not at real happiness
and true prosperity .10
J
CONCLUSION
According to al-FirAbi, the chief of the State should be physically free
from all defects, and should have a sharp intellect, memory, and wit. He
should be devoted to sdenoes, truth-loving, and not easily upset by diffi
culties, contented, without greed for things to eat. and disinclined towards
sensuous pleasures. He should abhor falsehood and liars, be ambitious with
11 /Md., pp. 59-60.
“ IM.. p. 64.
" Ibid, p 74
AI-MAwardi
lofty ideals, a lover of justice, without thought of wealth or worldly position,
and should have strong resolution, boldness, and courage. Plato's philosopher-
king has also been described as truth-loving, fond of the knowledge of existenta,
one who keeps away from vioe, is free-thinking, intelligent, sagacious, witty
and ambitious. But the State of al-Firibi is international in character. While
the State of Plato is only a City-State, that of al-FAribi can be aa vast aa a
World-State. Plato wants to entrust the affairs of the State to a group of
philosophers and names the organization "aristocracy.” Al-Faribi not only
calls the Head of the State Imim but identifies him with a prophet. It is in
the absence of the Im&m or the second chief who baa the heoessary qualities
to follow the tradition of the Im&m that he entrusts the affairs of the State
to a group of individuals who between themselves possess moet of the qualities
of the chief. It is, therefore, not true to say that al-F&ribi has based his theory
entirely on the Republic of Plato, or that he is simply Aristotelian in his
thought.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
AlF*r*bi. FtqnW oL.Wodin., Bodleian MS.; KMb Ara' AU al-Madinat al
FOdilah; KMb alSiyaaal alMadanlynah: KMb Tabfil alTSs'adoA; M. Horten.
"Das Buch dec Ringsleine Farabis mit dem Kommcntar dos Emir Ism&'il al Horeini
al-FMni iibcraetat und erliutert," Beitnlge rur Geach. der Philosophic des Miuel-
altere. Vol. V. Munster, 1900, with a bibliography; M. Steinschnoidor, "Al-FMbi dos
arabiachen Philoaophen Leben und Schriflen” in the Memoires d'Acod. imperials
doo Sciences de St. Pelerrimirg. Vol. XIII, No. 4, St. Petersbourg, 1809; Dietcrici,
Al/aribu Philosophise)* Abhandlungen, Leiden. 1890 (Arabic text of nine smaller
works); AlfOrabi, Abhandlung der Idusterslaal. Leiden, 1895 (Arabic text); Bronnle.
AlfOrdbi, Die Staatshilung. Leiden, 1904; T. J. de Boer. The History of Philosophy in
Islam. English tr.. London. 1903; Carre de Vaux. Avianne, Paris, 1900; M. Worms,
"Dio Lehre von dar Anfangaloeigkeit der Wolt," Beitrdge tur Geseh. der Philosophic
dee Mitlelaltere, Vol. III. MUnstar, 1900; Brockelmann, Gesek, der arab. Liu.;
R. P. Janssen. Youssef Karam. J. Chlala. Al-Fariibi. Ideds des habMnU delaeitd
vertueuse, Cairo, 1949.
Chapter XXXVI
AL-MAWARDI
A
LIFE AND WORKS
Abu al-Hasan al-Miwardi was bom in Basrah (c. 304/974) which was then
one of the principal seats of learning and education in the Muslim world. He,
therefore, got all hia education there and rose in literary renown at an early
age. He specially prepared himself for the judicial profession and obtained an
717
t nmtory 01 Muslim Hhiioeopny
appointment in tho State service. Aa a judge he acrvod at various places and
was finally posted in Baghdad. In the year 429/1037 the Caliph. al-Q&dir,
summoned four jurists representing the four schools of Islamic Law to write
a legal epitome Al-Mawardi was chosen to reproeent the gbifiite school and
he wrote Kitdb ul-lgna1; al-Qudnri produced hia famous al-Mukilafar for the
Hanafites. The othor two books were of no importance. The Caliph, however
recognited al-M&wardl's work as the best and in appreciation of his merit
appointed him as the Agda al-Quddl. This designation waa objected to by
many leading jurists like abu al-fayyib, al-Tabari, and al-Simyari, who said
that it did not become anyone except God. But al-MAwardi took no notice
of these objections and retained the designation till hia death in 450/1058
because the same jurists had previously approved the title of MUik al-Muluk
al-A‘;am for Jalil al-Daulah, the Buwaihid chief.
Although al-MAwardi waa a staunch Sunnite and ghifi'ite jurist, he had
the good fortune of being equally favoured by both the Buwaihids and Abbi-
sids. But the Shi’ite Buwaihids favoured him out of diplomacy, because he
waa often helpful in settling their everyday quarrels with the palace, for. writes
Yiqht, "He was held in great esteem by the Buwaihid Sultans who deputed
him to negotiate between them and their opponents, and were pleased with
his mediation, and affirmed his settlements.”
Al-MAwardi waa acclaimed aa one of the ablest men of his age. He was not
only a distinguished judge but also a distinguished author. He wrote mostly
on law and politics. His well-known extant works are: Kitdb alfldun. al-Igud'
SiyaMl al-Mulk, Qaudnin al-Wiidrak, Adab al-I>unya w-al-Din, and al-Ahlcdm
al-SuUdniyyah. But it is this last work on which his fame ohiefly rests. In
Muslim history it is one of the firat scientific treatises on political science and
State administration. A detailed discussion of this will be taken up in the
following pages.
Here a note of explanation seems to be necessary. Ibn KballikAn quotes
a report that none of al-MAwardl's writings were published in his life-time
because the author had grave doubts as to whether he waa really honest and
correct in his speculations. This report cannot be accepted aa true, particularly
with reference to al-Ahkdm al-SuUdntygak, because there exists another book
with the same title by abu Ya'Ia al-Farra’, who was a contemporary of al-
Mawardi and who died in 458/1066. Abu Ya'la's book ia almost an exact
replica of al MAwardl's work so far as ita pattern and subjects of discussion
are concerned. Even the language and arguments are almost the same as in
al-MAwardi in most places. It is. therefore, oertain that abu Ya'Ia had seen
the published work of al-MAwardi while the latter was still alive, because the
dates of their deaths are so approximate to each other, and because it is not
proved that abu Ya'Ia had personal relations with al-MAwardi. This conclusion
is further strengthened by the fact that YAqflt, who died in 626/1229, does
not mention thia story, and the authority of ibn KhallikAn, who died in 681/
1282, cannot be accepted in this matter.
718
Al Miwardi
B
POLITICAL THEORY
AlMiwardl's main political thought it embodied in hie alAhkdm al-Sulli-
niyyah. Only a small portion of tho work ia, however, devoted to political
theory, the rest of it discusses the details of public administration and rules
of government. But this small portion is extremely Important because it ia
the first attempt in Muslim history to evolve a comprehensive theory of the
State, and because it has left an enduring influence on the course of Muslim
political thought up to our own day.
Further, although we know that al-Miwardi profited a good deal from pre
vious sources in the elaboration of his theory, for he says that it is the epitome
of the views of various schools of jurisprudence, we do not possess in our
hands today any source discussing comprehensively the problem of the Cali
phate dating back beyond the fifth/eleventh century. The Ufil al-Din of
'Abd al-Q4hir al-BagfedAdi gives theologically a more oopious discussion of
the Im&mate than al-MSwardl's book, but sj-Bagbd&li (d. 429/1037) was a
contemporary of al-MAwardi. Hence the conclusion is that most of al-MAwardl’s
ideas are partly a heritage of the past and partly a clever manipulation of
the opinions current in his own time.
A closer examination of his work, however, discloses that he is not a mere
recorder of facts handed down to him but a shrewd statesman and diplomat
There ia enough historical data to sanction the view that on many fundamental
questions al-Mtwardi's opinions were dictated by the exigencies of his time
and the special circumstances of his life. In the preface to his al-Ahtam al
SuUdntyyah he writes, "Sinoe these principles of royalty are mainly concerned
with the oonduct of rulers, and since the direct application of these principles
to the entire business of government prevents the rulers from an inquiry into
their true nature, and because these rulers are too much engrossed in State
affairs and diplomacy, I have brought out a separate book discussing all of
them, in obedience to the behest of one whose allegiance is essential in
order that he may be informed of the different schools of law and may know
what the people owe to him so that he may demand its fulfilment, and what
he owes to them so that he may try to fulfil it. [And he has asked to be informed
about these things] out of love for justice in his enactments and decisions,
and for the sake of equity in his imposts and rewards."1 The mention of
authority in this passage refers to the Caliph, especially because al-MSwardi
had been raised to the high office of Aqda al-Quddl,' and represented the
Caliph in his negotiations with the Buwaihids.
Further, it is necessary to point out that the declining power of the Buwai-
1 Al-MAwardi. al-Ahtam al-SullAniyyah, p. 1.
■ Literally "tho greatest Judge." but paradoxically enough the office was sub
ordinate to that of tho Qa-ii al-QtifUt. the Chief Justice (Yaqftt. Vol. V, p. 407).
719
A History of Muslim Philoeophy
hids in the beginning of the fifth/elcventh century, became of internal con
flict
* and insurrections in the army and because of Mabmud of Qbaznah's
solicitation
* for the 'Abbaaids. made the Caliph al-QAdir and his son al-Qi'im
aspire to regain the lost glory of their forefathers. The first step in thia direc
tion was the legal definition and exposition of the powers and prerogatives
of the Caliph which had well-nigh been forgotten and had fallen into oblivion
The historical situation explains al-MAwardl'a efforts to propound a theory
of the Caliphate in which everything depends on the authority of the Caliph,
in an age in which the prestige of the Caliphate had fallen to ita lowest ebb.
AI-Miwardi'a endeavours have been supposed to be directed to tho theoretical
discussion of an ideal State. This view ia, however, untenable on account of
the fact that al-Mawardi is, truly speaking, not a philosopher, and is least
interested in abstract thinking. He ia a jurist and builds on the opinions of his
forbears, gives a wider scope to these opinions, and usee his own wisdom to
apply them intelligently to the special conditions of his own times. His greatest
merit, therefore, lies in the fact that he abstains from abstract speculation,
and correlates the opinions of tho jurists to the historical perspective of his
ago. Similarly, aa already remarked, he is not a mere oompiler or interpreter
of the opinions of his predecessors, but often shows independence of opinion
and expresses riewi opposed to the views of earlier authorities, or gives but
opinions altogether original.
Now, it will be useful to pick up the main points in al-Miwardl'a theory and
compare them with the contentions of the ancient jurists, on the one hand
and with tho contemporary political conditions, on the other. Thia will givi
us a true estimate of al-MHwardl'a achievements.
1. The institution of the Imimate is a necessary requirement of the SJori'aA
and not of reason. The appointment of an Imarn by the consensus of the
Muslim community ia obligatory.
* *
There is a similar passage in al-Bagh<Udi,
who remarks that thia is .al-Agh'ari's opinion and is opposed to the Mu'tazi-
lite view.
2. The ImAmate is instituted by means of election. The electoral college
*
shall consist of persona with special qualifications. Also the candidates for
the I miniate must fulfil certain conditions.
* This elective principle of the
Imamate is obviously opposed to the Shi'ite claim of bequeathal or divine
nomination. Al-Miwardi, however, does not discuss the election of a licentious
person as Im&m. Al-Baghdadi says that his election will be void, even if it
haa taken place through a properly constituted electoral oollege. Al-MAwardl's
• Al-MAwardi, op. cil., p. 3.
• Al-BaghdAdi, Uf<U ai-Din, p. 272.
• These qualifications ere three: justice with all the conditions pertaining to it:
knowledge of religion and of the interests and policy of tho nation; and wisdom
(al-MAwardi, op. cil.. p. 4).
• These conditions are: justice, learning, integrity of physical senses, wisdom,
bravery, and Quruiihite descent (ibid., p. S).
720
Al-MAwanU
omission u deliberate, being a concession to the Bnwaihida, who appointed
the Caliphs to suit their selfish ends.
3. The right of franchise is enjoyed not only by tho people living in the
capital. The Caliph is, however, traditionally elected in tho capital because
tho death of the previous Caliph ia first known there, and political considera
tions require the immediate appointment of a new Caliph, and also because
most of tho people possessing tho necessary qualifications for the ImAmate
generally reside there.' This principle waa hotly contended by the KjjawArij
who believed in complete democracy and universal franchise.
4. Among the seven conditions which according to al-M&wardi must be
fulfilled by a candidate, the seventh one, that is, the Quraiahite descent, is
very important. Al-MAwardi lays great stress on it and says that if anyone
objocta to it on the ground that it excludes non-Quraighites from the Caliphate,
such an objection would not bo considered, because it waa this Quraighite
descent that waa presented by abu Bakr aa an argument for preference in the
election of Saqlfah Bani SA'idah.*
5. The ImAm is appointed in one of the two wayB :• (a) He may be elected
by the electoral college; (b) he may be nominated by the ruling ImAm.
In the first case some scholars say the ImAm must be elected by all the
members of the electoral college in all tho cities. Others oppose this view and
say that abu Bakr waa elected only by tho citizens of Madlnah. Still others
assert that only five poraons are sufficient to elect the ImAm. as happened in
the case of abu Bakr and UthmAn In al-MAwardl'a opinion, even one person
ia enough to elect the Caliph.” He cites the tradition of 'AbbAs as evidence.
'AbbAa said to 'Ali, “Stretch your hand, I will swear my allegiance to you,
and when people come to know that the Prophet's uncle has sworn his allegi
ance to his nephew, nobody would object to your Imamate.*' This opinion haa
also been corroborated by al-Agh'ari.11
fl. The above extrema opinion haa been advocated by al-MAwardi to advance
another important opinion given in the next section, where he discusses the
case of two candidates equally qualified lor the ImAmate. He says that the
electoral college may nominate anyone of the two as ImAm without assigning
any reason.”
7. The election of a less qualified person in the presence of a more qualified
peraon ia perfectly legal, provided the former fulfils all the conditions of the
ImAmate.” It was this principle under which most of the worthless Caliphs
took refuge. It was also directed against the Shi'ahs, who believe that an
’ IM.
• IM.
• IM.
>• IM., p. 7
«> Al Baghdadi, op. Hl.. pp. 275-77
” Al-MAwardi, op. eit., p. 9
'• IM., p. 10.
721
A History of Muslim Philosophy
inferior person cannot have precedence over a superior one. They coined this
theory to assert that since 'Ali and his descendants in the FAtimid line
were superior to the rest of mankind, anyone who assumed the Caliphal
power was a mere usurper. The refutation of thia dogma was essential to
establish the above doctrine. But al-MAwardi is not alone in thia respect,
for this is the agreed opinion of Sunnite jurists and theologians.
8. If there is only one suitable candidate for the ImAmate, he automatically
becomes the ImAm, and no election is required.1* Al-MAwardi seems to be
inclined to this view; the jurists and scholars, however, assert that election
must be held even if there is only one candidate for it, for otherwise the ImAm
cannot acquire legal status. This insistence on election is obviously directed
against the Shi'ite theory of divine appointment.
9. The existence of two ImAms contemporaneously is illegal." Al Ajh ari
opposes this view and says that two ImAms at a time are possible if their
territories are far-flung and widely separated by an ocean, which hinders
easy communication between the two. But al-MAwardi insists in his view to
rule out the F&timids and the Umayyads of Spain.
C
SUCCESSION
1. The ruling ImAm can nominate his successor There is complete con
sensus on this point in the Muslim community." The Muslims accepted
'Umar as Caliph not on the suggestion of abu Bakr but in obedience to his
order aa Caliph.1’ Similarly, when 'Umar appointed a limited oouncil to elect
his successor, it was an order from the ImAm and there was no choice for the
Muslims to do otherwise."
2. The ImAm can nominate any suitable person as his auooeesor, provided
he does not happen to be his father or son. The concurrence of the aW ol-Aah
ic-al-'agd is not neoeesary;" but if he nominates his son, the concurrence
must be obtained.111 Also, he can nominate any other relation without requiring
the concurrence.”
It waa this theory of nomination that cut at tho very root of democratic
ideals in Islamic polity. It has been persistently resorted to by every Muslim
ruler after the days of the pious Caliphate, to perpetuate dynastic and despotio
rule among the Muslim people*. Thus, apparently the structure of the
“ Ibid., pp. 10-11.
“ Ibid., p. 11.
" Ibid., p. 13.
•’Ibid., p. 14.
" Ibid.
“ Ibid.
Ibid., p. 14.
“ Ibid
722
ALMAward]
Caliphate waa maintained by the Umayyads, the 'AbbAaids, the F&tiinids,
and the Turks, but the spirit of Islamic democracy waa cast away with the
shedding of the blood of T'tbmAn, the third successor of tho Prophet.
Al-Miwardl's contention that abu Bakr's nomination of 'Umar could not
be challenged by the Companions, for it was the valid enactment of a valid
ImAm, ia nothing but historical fiction having no basis in historical fact. One
of the earliest and most reliable authorities on that period, ibn Qutaibah.
reports in his al- /mamah w-al-Siyasah that when symptoms of death approach
ed abu Bakr he became very anxious as to who should succeed him to tho
Caliphal authority, After much deliberation he decided to nominate 'Umar
to succeed him. He called 'UtfcmAn to his bedside and dictated to him the
deed of succession- When the news spread, people flocked to him from every
quarter and began to question his choice. Thereupon he said. "If God asked
mo about this matter. I would tell Him that I appointed over them one
whom I considered to be the best of them." After this he ordered a general
assembly of the people; and when they gathered together, he addressed them
and Baid that he had choeen for them a person with such and such qualities and
then said, "If you so desire, you may sit together and elect a person whom
you like; but if you wish that I should use my discretion in the matter on
your behalf, then I assure you by One other than whom there is no God. I
will spare no pains in doing you tho best service." He then stopped and wept
and the people wept with him and said, “You are the best and most informed
amongst us, so you choose for us." And when the crowd dispersed he called
for 'Umar and gave him the deed of succession and said, “Go to the people
and inform them that this is my suggestion, and ask them If they hear it and
obey it." ‘Umar took that document and went to the people and addressed
them. They al! said, “We are all ears and obedience to it.”” This testimony
of ibn Qutaibah is most unequivocal and decisive. It completely abrogates
al-MAwardl's theory of nomination. It is quite obvious that abu Bakr did
not deprive the people of their democratic right to elect the Head of the State
freely. He simply gave his personal opinion. The people could accept his
opinion as well aa reject it. There was no political bar in their way, no Caliphal
decree to prevent the exercise of their right of franchise.”
■' Al-fmOmah w-ol-Siydeah, pp. 19-23.
11 In one of his pilgrimages to Makkah 'Umar heard a report that a person wai
saying, "By God. if ‘Umar died I would declare my allegiance to so and so, and
by God. abu Bakr's election was certainly defective, but it was made effective
later on.” ‘Umar became enraged at this report, and wanted to take immediate
action, but at tho advice of ‘Abd al-RafrmAn bin ‘Auf, returned to Madinah and
ordered all the judges, governors, and chiefs of tho army to proceed to tho capital.
When all had come. a public assembly waa held where the Caliph delivered one of
the moot important addressre of his life. After saying many important things on
this ocoaaion. he said: "Lot not anyone be docoivod to say that tho election of
abu Bakr waa defective and that it became effective later. And among you there
ia none like abu Bakr towards whom the people may look with love and reverence;
723
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Al-MAwardl’s second argument in support of hia thesis that the limited
college of electors prescribed by 'Umar had the sole right of nominating the
new Caliph,*** ia nothing but a deliberate effort to interpret ancient practice
to justify later historical phenomena. In fact, ‘Umar did nominate the limited
council at the suggestion of 'A'ijbah to prevent civil strife after his death.
**
He knew fully well that the probable candidates for the Caliphate were the
very persons whom he had nominated for it. Not only that; he was perfectly
sure that cither ‘Utfam&n or 'Ali would be elected.’* Therefore, to facilitate
the new election he fixed a procedure that waa least pregnant with evil and
the best guarantee against civil diaoord. The stem warnings which he gave
to the dissentient members of the electoral college and the strict directions
which he issued about tho conduct of the election, were but the last symbols
of his great overriding authority over the hearts and minds of people, by
means of which he so wonderfully ruled half the world for twelve years. But
he did not lay down a permanent principle of Islamic polity, for this he could
not do, since there waa no warrant for it in the Qur’in or the Sunnah. Even
abu Bakr could not devise the theoretical foundations of the Caliphate, for
during the last momenta of his life he said that the one great regret he had
was that he could not ask the Prophet to enlighten him on three problems.
Regarding two of these, he said. “I should have asked: who would succeed
him in political power after him I If he nominated anyone, nobody could
challenge his nominee on this issue. And I should have asked him whether
the Ansars were entitled to any Bhare in political power.”*’
‘Umar's arrangement was, therefore, dictated by purely prudential con
siderations. A proof of this assertion is that he categorically declared that
the Anfirs were not entitled to any share in the sovereign power,
** although
abu Bakr waa doubtful on this issue, and although many of the later jurists
did not accept ‘Umar's ruling on this point. The truth is that 'Umar took this
extraordinary Btep for the defence of the State and not for the defence of a
principle, for there waa no clear principle before him. Henoe the construction
of a political theory out of his ruling can be neither justified nor appreciated
as an achievement in political thought.
But al-Miwardi was not very much concerned about theory. He was a
leading Sunnite legal doctor of the Shafi'ite school, and waa intimately associat
ed with the ‘AbbAsids, hence his chief interest lay in emancipating the Sunnite
Iherefore. if anyone of you swears allegiance to a person without consulting the
general body of Muslims, such person shall not be deemed as elected: and tho
likelihood is that both these persons may be beheaded" (Ibn Hilfilm, ol SIrar
al-h'ahawfyyaA, Vol. IV, pp. 308-09).
■* Al-MAwardi, op. cil., pp. 13-14.
*• Ibn Qutaibah, KMb al.Ma'Arif, p. 23.
Ibid., p. 25.
■’ Ibid., p. 19.
Ibid., p. 24.
724
Al-Mawardi
Caliphate from the Shi ite tyranny of the Buwaihids. This explains why he
gave the stamp of validity to the monarchical system of the 'AbbAaids. Ho
bad already before him the precedent of the Umayyads. Moreover, the jurists
had. by the force of circumstances, reconciled themselves to the imperialistic
order of tho day, and given it the form and sanction of religious authority.
Al-MAwardi. therefore, found no difficulty in taking his cue from the prevailing
ideas of his time. His main contribution to Muslim political thought lies in
the transformation of these ideas into a system, directly related to historical
practice. He was not a visionary and idealist like the jurists or the scholastics,
and like them did not sit to speculate in vacuum. He was a man of the world;
he tried to solve its problems as best as he could.
3. The nomination of a person as heir apparent becomes effective only
when he declares his consent to it. The Imam cannot withdraw the nomination
until thore occurs in this heir apparent somo important change which invalidates
him legally. So also an ImAm cannot be deposed until a similar change occurs
in him.” Now, these are only logical deductions from the fundamentals of
the Shari'ah for there are no historical precedents to vouchsafe them.
4. The Imam can appoint the electoral college as well as the persons who
may contest for the Imamate.” This opinion is based on the election of
'UlhmAn by means of a limited sAuro appointed by ‘Umar. Whatever might
have been the political consideration before ‘Umar, the derivation of a general
principle out of it is certainly most dangerous to sound polity and to the
stability of a State. The piety, honesty, intelligence, and statesmanship of
'Umar could very well be relied upon. The same cannot be said of another
personality after him in Muslim history. Notwithstanding this, historians have
held that ‘Umar was mistaken in taking this step.’1 It is a well-known
fact that most of the members of the «A«ru, w ho came out unsuccessful in the
contest, at once started plotting against ‘Uthmiin and began to aspire for the
Caliphate.” Apart from this historical fact, if the right of nominating the
electorate as well as the candidates is conceded to tho Imam, it is bound to
make him absolute and despotic. In truth, it was this theory that developed
. into divine right with the 'Alids and the ‘AbhAsids. And it was this theory
that throttled the growth of democracy in Islamic polity
5. The ImAm can nominate two or more heirs apparent to succeed him one
after the other. The argument has lieen derived from the battle of Mutah,
in which the Prophet appointed Zaid bin Harith-di as the Commander of the
Muslim forces and Baid that if he fell in fighting he was to be succeeded in
command by Ja'far bin abi Talib who was to be succeeded by* ‘Abd Allah bin
RawAbah If ibn RawAbah also fell, then the Muslims conld choose anyone
from among themselves aa their Commander. Apparently, the citation of this
" Al-MAwardi. op. cil,, p. 18.
Ibid., p. 21.
■■ lUfiq Bek. Atil-ar MaOHMr al-Itldm. Vol. I.
” Ibn Qutaibah. op. eit., p. 48.
725
\ History of Muslim Philosophy
incident in support of • fundamental issue like that of the Caliphate is but
fako reasoning,11
This practice of appointing two or more heirs apparent proved to be the
greatest political evil in Muslim polity. It often engendered palaoe intrigue#
and gave rise to internecine wars, and dynastio feuds.
D
DESIGNATION AND PRIVILEGES
1. When a person is duly elected as ImSm the people should entrust all
their affairs to him and must give him their unquestioning obedience. The
I mini may not consult them in the affairs of the State, yet they must obey
him.*4
2. The Im&m may be addressed aa the Khalifat Allah, but the majority of
jurists say that this title is forbidden, for no human being can represent God
on earth, sinoe man is mortal and imperfect. Hence the Imam may either be
called a mere Khali/ah or Khali lai al-Ra.nl AUah." Onoe when abu Bakr was
addressed as Khalilot AUah he exclaimed. “Do not address me as Khali/at
AUah but as the Khali/al al-Rasul Allah "
E
DUTIES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE IMAM
The Imam has the following ten principal duties to perform:
1. The safeguard and defenoe of tho established principles of religion aa
understood and propounded by the consensus of ancient authorities. If anyone
innovates an opinion or becomes a sceptio, the Inilm should oonvince him of
the real truth, correct him with proper arguments, and make him obey
the injunctions and prohibitions of the Shariah, so that the people at large
may be saved from the evil effects of heresies.
This is undoubtedly the foremost duty of the ImAtn under the SJari'oA.
But unfortunately it is under the oover of this pretext that throughout the
last thirteen centuries, adventurers and self-seekers have striven to carve out
political fortunes for themselves. The second civil war of Muslims was fought
by the Umayyads, the HAgbimitee, and the Zubairitre under this same pretext.
When the 'Abbisids. the FA|imids, and tho Ijafawids came to power they
called themselves the Defenders of Faith, and crushed every political dissentient
in the name of religion. Even today them can be evinced a great effervescence
for religions revival in all the Muslim lands, but everywhere the undertone
is political, not religious.
’* AI-MAwardi, op. cil.. p. 22.
•• Ibid., p. 27.
“ Ibid., pp. 27-28.
726
Al-MAwardi
Al-M&wardl's enumeration of these duties. however, waa very effective and
timely, since it came out as a stem warning to the Buwaihids. who had over
powered the Caliph in Baghdad, and who professed a heretical faith.
2. The dispensation of justice and disposal of all litigations in accordance
with the SJan'oA. The ImAm should curb the strong from riding over the
weak, and encourage the weak to take their due in face of the strong.
3. The maintenance of law and order in the country to make it possible
for the people to load a peaceful life, proceed in their economic activities
freely, and travel in the land without fear.
4. The enforcement of the criminal oode of the Qur'&n to ensure that tho
people do not outrage the prohibitions of God, and that the fundamental
rights of men are not violated.
5. The defence of the frontiers against foreign invasions to guarantee the
security of life and property of Muslims and non-Muslims alike in the Islamic
State.
6. The organization and prosocution of religious war against those who
oppose Islam or refuse to enter the protection of the Islamic State as non
Muslim subjects. The ImAm is bound by the covonant of God to establish the
supremacy of Islam over all other religions and faiths.
7. The collection of kbaraj and zatdi taxes in accordance with the laws of
the Sbari'ah and the interpretation of the jurists, without resorting to extor
tion by pressure.
8. The apportionment of allowances and stipends from the State treasury
(Bait al-Mai) to those who are entitled to them. This money Bhould not be
expended with extravagance or stinginess, and must not be either prepaid
or delayed.
9. The appointment of honest and sincere men to the principal offices of
State and to tho treasury to secure sound and effective administration and to
safeguard the finanoea of the State.
10. The Imim should personally look into and apprise himself of the affairs
of his dominions so that ho may himself direct the national policy and protect
the interests of the people. He should not entrust his responsibility to others
and engross himself in luxury or religious devotion.
And when the Im&m has carried out all these duties efficiently, tho people
must offer him two things, obedience and help.
This enumeration of the ten-fold functions of the Im&m is arbitrary.
Number ten has been choeen particularly because it is an auspicious and
mystical number. The notable fact here is that, while his predecessors and
successors lay great emphasis on the first two pointe, viz., the safeguard of
religious principles and the dispensation of justice, as the principal duties of
the Im&m, al-M&wardi lays the main stress on the administrative responsibility
of the Caliph. In his opinion the Caliphate is not merely a religious institution
for the carrying out of justice but also the greatest social organization to
help promote the corporate life of men. In other words, the management
727
A History of Muslim Philoeophy
of the State machinery is of basic iin|H>rtanrc to liini. This explains why
he devotes only one-tenth of hia book to the exposition of the theory of the
Caliphate, and uses the rest of his work to elaborate the detailed apparatus
of government which hinges on the central authority of the Caliph. The nebu
lous nature of the dispersion of State [lower had led to the dreadful tussle
between the Buwailiids and the 'AbbAsids. The Buwaihids. who had no legal
claim to sovereignty, and who had not clarified their position, had long been
intriguing to overthrow the Caliphate outright. Al-Mawardl's attempt, there
fore. at defining in detail the responsibility and scope of Caliphal powers in
relation to normal administration, was most plausible and a direct hit at the
Buwaihids. Further, he made his treatise an inviolable document by re
inforcing it with the argument of earlier historical practice, dating back to the
time of the Prophet, and by basing it on the opinions of the leading jurists
of Islam. It is significant to note that al-MAwardi hardly quotes anywhere
any of these jurists, but since he was the greatest judge of Baghdad, his
declaration in the prefaoe was taken as sufficient guarantee of his veracity.
There is no ground to question his bona fide’, yet it would have been more
commendable if he had given the actual authorities.
F
DEPOSITION OF THE IMAM
Al-MAwardi has given a detailed consideration to the subject of an ImAm's
deposition. In the first place, arguing on the basis of legal deduction from the
fundamentals of the ginri'aA he says that once a person is elected ss ImAm.
he cannot be removed from that office until there has occurred some definite
change in him.3* Then, after discussing the duties of the ImAm. he reverts
to tho subject and dilates on it at length. He says that the ImAm loses his
title and authority on account of one of the following reasons:
1. If there occurs a change in his moral status, technically known as ‘adalah
(sense of justice). The moral change is of two kinds:
(a) The one connected with his body, that is, if he becomes a slave to his
inordinate desires and Houts openly the prohibitions of the SAnri'oA. In such
an event, a person can neither be elected as ImAm nor continue as such.37
Abu Ya'la rejects this opinion and holds the opposite view.33
(b) The one connected with his faith, that is, if a person holds opinions
contrary to the established principles of religion, or holds such twisted opinions
as amount to an abrogation of the accepted principles, he can neither be
initiated as ImAm nor continue to hold that office.3* In this there is a clear
•• Ibid. p 16.
17 Ibid., p. 31
•• Abu Ya'la. p. 4.
" Al-MAwardi. op. ed., p. 32.
728
AI-MAwardi
denunciation of the stand of the Buwaihids and of the Shi ite and F&timid
claims to the Caliphate.
2. If there occurs a change in the person of the ImAm. It ia of three kinds
loss of physical senses, loss of bodily organs, and loss of ability to supervise
and direct the affairs of the State.
(a) Among the defects which occur in tho physical senses, the two most
important ones which preclude a person from election to the Imamate or
make him unfit to continue in office are the loss of mental faculty and the
loss of eyesight. The first case is obvious and needs no comment. But the
second has had a profound bearing on the course of Muslim history. The
practioo of putting out the eyes with hot iron to prevent a person from wearing
the imperial purple was undoubtedly borrowed from the Byzantine Empire;
the opinion of the Muslim jurists on the issue, however, gave it an added
importance as an instrument of tyranny in Oriental lands. Tho dreadful
effect of this foul practioe can be gauged from the fact that about two dozen
'Abbiaid Caliphs were thus blinded to be dethroned from the Caliphal seat
The juridical opinion referred to above is that a blind person is unqualified
to give witness or sit aa a judge in a court of law; he is, therefore, much more
unqualified to serve as the Head of the State .*0
(b) Loss of bodily organs. It is of various kinds. If it does not hinder the
performance of normal duties, and does not disfigure the features or the external
beauty of the body, it will be of no account.*'
In certain cases when the loss of organs renders a person helpless and makes
him incapable of doing anything, he can neither be elected as Im&m nor can
he continue in that office. Such is the loss of the two hands or of tho two feet.
Al-MAwardi discusses the details of other losses too, but they are not per
tinent to our purpose here.
(c) The loss of personal ability to supervise and direct is of two kinds:
(1) If the Imim is over powered by one of his counsellors and assistants,
who appropriates all authority to himself, but does not openly defy the Im&m,
the Im&m will continue in his office, provided the usurper rules in accordance
with the injunctions of the Sbari'ah. and in deference to the accepted norms
of justice. This is to ensure that the functions of the ImAmato should continue
to be performed, and that the peoplo do not fall a prey to the ways of ovil
on account of the non-enforcement of the laws of the Sfriri aA," But if his
conduct is opposed to the principles of religion and justice, he will not be
tolerated In that status, and the ImAm shall have to seek the help of a person
who can oust the usurper and restore supreme authority to the Caliph.*’
This principle has been elaborated by al-Mawardi with great care and legal
acumen. In the next chapter he takes it up again and discusses it in full
•• Ibid., p. S3.
“ Ibid., p. 35.
Ibid., p. 37.
•• Ibid., p. 38
729
A History of Muslim Philosophy
detail.** This principle whioh had no sanction in ancient authority or in the
opinions of the jurists, was dictated by the foroe of orcumstanoee in which
the 'AbbAsid Caliphate had boen placed during tho two oenturies preceding
the death of al-MAwardi. Tho Buwaihid usurpation in Baghdad and the falling
of the Caliphal power into insignificance necessitated the evolution of a formula
which suited the exigencies of the times and covered tho de facto relation
that existed between the Buwaihids and the ‘AbbAaids. This was a clear
departure from the principle of the Caliphate enunciated by al-MAwardi in
the earlier part of his book. But he devised a era media to remove this glaring
contradiction. If the absolute governor or the usurper (Amir bi alltlM'I
declares hia allegiance to the Caliph and promisee to maintain tho unity of
the Caliphate, enforces the laws of the fiAori'a*. and co-operates with the
ImAm against the foes of Islam, the Caliph shall recognize his absolutism by
conferring on him the deed of investiture formally and publicly. Though this
arrangement is opposed to the established tradition, it shall be deemed per
fectly legal, because it envisages the safeguard of the injunctions of the
SltarVah which cannot be let go by default, and because of the unavoidable
condition created by the act of usurpation.** In this theory there is, on the
one hand, an overt recognition of the situation prevailing in Bagjjd&d and, on
the other, an unooncealed warning to the Buwaihids that if they transgressed
their limits they could be brought to book with the help of the Qfaaznawid
power which waa an open ally of the 'AbbAaid Caliphate. In a passage
al-MAwsrdi says that in caae the usurper shows an uncompromising and
rebellious attitude, the Caliph can call in the help of one who can relieve him
of the straits. The person referred to is none but Mabmfid of Qbaznah.
There is little doubt that al-MAwardi waa influenced by the drcumstanoes
of his environment in the enunciation of this theory, but the deviation from
the original principle completely nullified the true conception of the Im&matc
aa demonstrated in the days of the Caliph 'Umar. Nay, it contributed directly
to a political theory which encouraged adventurous and ambitious men to
impose themselves on the will of the people with brute force and sheer might.
Further, if it served as one of tho main incentives for the dismemberment of
the 'AbbAsid Empire, it also very greatly influenced the suppression of demo
cratic thought and practice in the Muslim world. Al-MAwardi may have been
well-intentioned but the legacy he left completely changed the ooncept of
Muslim polity in the centuries that followed. And the change that occurred
was simply un-Islamic, undemocratic, and vicious.
(ii) If the ImAm falls a prisoner into the hands of an enemy, it will be the
duty of the entire Muslim people to endeavour to emancipate him,** and as
long as there is any hope of his deliverance he will continue as ImAm, and
another person may be elected to officiate in his absence. But if all hope is
“ Ibid., pp. 87-70
“ Ibid., p. 88.
«• Ibid., p. 38
730
Al MAwardi
l<xrt, he will be deemed to have relinquished his office, and a new election
shall take place.
If the ImAm is captured by a Muslim rebel army, and the rebels have not
appointed an Im&m of their own, the captured ImAm shall continue to com
mand the loyalty of the people, and an acting ImAm shall be appointed by
him, if possible, or by tho electrol college. But if the rebels have appointed
an ImAm of their own. the existing ImAm shall forfeit his claim to the ImAmste,
and the responsible men (ahi al-fiaU w-al-'aqd I shall elect a new Imam according
to their discretion.•’ Al-MAwardl's wording in this passage ia full of meaning.
He means to say that a victorious rebel leader does not automatically beoome
the TrnS-m
G
CONCLUSION
Al-Mawardl's great contribution to political thought was that he gave a
detailed aooount of tho administrative machinery of the Government of his
time and in formulating his political theory he took full cognizance of historical
facts and, unlike the jurists and the scholastics, did not indulge in empty
speculation. But with all the good things that can be said about al-MAwardi,
he had one shortcoming—he could not evolve a philosophic conception of the
State He did not dismiss the meaning, soope. jurisdiction, and obligations
of the State, gave no conception of sovereignty, and was completely ignorant
of the idea of a constitutional democracy. Lack of constitutional theory not
only reduoed the value of his work, but also adversely affected the later devel
opment of Muslim political thought.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Al-MAwardi, alAhltdm ai-StdMnlyyaA; al-BaghdAdi. Util al-Din; ibn Qutaibah,
al-Imbmah w-al-SiyOeah; KMb al-Ma'drif; ibn HiahAm. al-Siral al-Nabaudyyah;
ibn KhallikAn, Wa/ayAl al-A'ydn, Cairo. 1299; YXqut. Irtblki al-Arib; al-Subki,
Tototf.ir al- jHafi’Iyyab; Raflq Bek, Alihar Mafhdhlr al-Ieldm; Wustenfeld. Sehafi-
den, No. S85; R. Enger. De Vila el emplie Mawcrdii, Bonn, 1851; Broclcelmann.
GAL; KM Muhammad b. TOmarl Mahdi al-Muwahhidin, od. Lueiani. Algor.
1903; E. Tyan, Le Califal lneHHUiane du Droil Publie Mueulman, Vol. I. Paris,
1954; E. I, J. Rosenthal. Politieal Thought in Medieval Idam, Cambridge, 1958.
•’ Ibid., p. 40.
731
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Chapter XXXVII
POLITICAL THEORY OF THE SHI'ITES
The death of the Prophet of Islam ushered in an era which is known aa the
period of the Orthodox Caliphate (11-41/632-661),
The Bupportens of 'Ali, the fourth Caliph in the chronological order (35-11/
656-661). were known aa the Shl'ah which literally means a faction, a sup
porting group in the sense that they supported 'All's claim to succession after
the death of the Prophet, both as a temporal ruler and a religious leader
It may be stated authoritatively that 'All's claim to the Caliphate was not
regarded by his supporters and adherents as a political ambition: on the
contrary, it was considered that he had been ordained by Providence to succeed
the Prophet and that the Prophet himself had placed the question of succession
beyond any doubt by his testament, aa it were, at Qhadlr al-Khumm.1
During the Caliphate of 'Uthman, ibn Sabi’ of Yemen, who had Bottled
ultimately in Egypt, openly preached that the first three Caliphs were usurpers
as distinguished from 'Ali who was divinely ordained to succeed the Prophet
as his executor or plenipotentiary (wan). The extreme Shi'ites (Ghul&ll)
believed that the Prophet himself was reincarnated in the form of 'Ali and
"that the divine spirit which dwells in every prophet waa transferred at
Muhammad's death to 'Ali and from 'All to hia descendants who succeeded
him in tho ImAmate."
It would bo pointless, so far as we are concerned, to assess and evaluate
the truth of the claim made by the Shi'ites that 'Ali had been designated aa
the Prophet's successor by the Prophet himself in accordance with the com
mand of God, but it is necessary to point out that the Shi'ites, whether holding
moderate or extreme views, refused, as it were, from the very beginning to
concede that the ijma' has any authority to confer on any person the right
to govern a Muslim State. They maintained that at all times a living descendant
of ‘Ali, whether concealed (mastir) or unooncealed, demands and receives
allegiance from the Muslims and is in point of fact the only rightful Caliph
(temporal ruler) and Imam (religious leader) of the Islamic peoples.
It may perhaps be added that the term Sbl'ah was invested with all its
dogmatic connotations after the coming into power of the ‘Abbasids. In the
lieginning the word only meant a group which was in favour of the succession
of ‘Ali to the Caliphate.
With the rise of the Umayyads the pure Arabs found greater favour with the
rulers than the clients of the subject races. This policy which, most probably,
1 '"A spring between Makkah and al-Madlnab where tho Shi'ite tradition assorts
tho Prophet declared, 'Whomsoever I am lord of. his lord ia ‘Ali also.'” Ibn ISa'd,
Vol. V.. p. 23.1; Mas'Odi Tanbih. pp. 255-5S; Philip K. Hitti. Hmtory of Ibr Arrtbo,
p. 471. note 1
732
Political Theory of the Shi'ites
had been initiated by the third Caliph, no doubt, for justifiable reasons,
would not have proved disastrous in itaelf. if Yazld had not perpetrated the
horrible deeds which are known as the Tragedy of Karbala. The old rivalry
of the Umayyads and the HAshimites, which had remained subdued during
the life-time of the Prophet, now manifested itself in many ways.
All these factors led to what is known aa the ‘Abbiaid propaganda carried
on in collaboration with the gfal'ites in the name of Hashim who was accept
able both to tho supporters of 'AU and the descendanta of 'Abbie as against
the Umayyads who had taken possession of the State and were Uving in luxury,
while their more celebrated Quraijh brethren were forced to act merely as
spectators of the splendour of the rival branch.
The relationship of the Hijhimitei and the 'Alicia with the Umayyads would
appear from the foUowing genealogical tables:
QURAISH
I ~"
'Abd Manif
U mayyah
UTHMXN and
UMAYYADS
UMAR ABU BAKR 'Abd Allah sbu T&lib 'Abba.
I I I ■abb'asids
Haf?ah = A'ithah - MUHAMMAD THE
MUHAMMD PROPHET
I
|
I Ruqayyab F4(imah = 'ALI =• al-tyanaflyyah
UTHMAN ! and
I Umm KalthOm Muhammad ibn al-Hanafiyyah
Hasan Husain
SHI'ItL imams
FATIMID CALIPHS
733
A History of Muslim Philosophy
UMAYYAH
abu Sufy&n
1. llu'lwfyah I
I
4. Marwin I
2. Yaxld I
3. Mu'iwtvah H
Muhammad al-'AxIi
14. MarwAn II
9. Yazld II
Muawiyah
I
Abd al-RabmAn
UMAYYADS
OF SPAIN
The 'AbbAmd propaganda ultimately bore fruit and the House of 'AbbAa,
mainly with the help of the Iranians who had flocked to abu Muslim, an Iranian
leader of great courage and patriotic fervour, succeeded in their machinations.
The Umayyads were overthrown: Mar-win the last Caliph waa slain on the
15th of Eh. II. 132/5th of August 760, followed by a general massacre of
the members of the Royal House of the Umayyads, and Saffab ascended the
throne in 132/750.
After the revolution had become an accomplished fact, the Shi'ites who
had supported the ‘Abbfaid cause with such sincerity were bitterly dis
illusioned and sadly disappointed: they were under the impression that a
member of tho House of 'Ali would he enthroned. The treacherous murder
of abu Muslim (138/755) further convinced the Shi'ites, if such conviction
waa needed, that their 'Abbisid cousins were no lees hostile to them and
their claim than the Umayyads, and it was during this period of bitter frustra
tion, disappointment, and stark disillusionment that the term "Shi ah” waa
invested with its basic political and religious connotations.
The Shi'ites claimed that the House of 'Abbie had usurped the Caliphate
as the Umayyads and the three Orthodox Caliphs had done. They contended
that, although de lacto sovereignty veered in the ‘Abbisids, legal sovereignty
remained with the descendants of ‘Ali who were divinely ordained to be the
temporal and religious leadcra of the Islamic peoples
Political Theory of the Shi'ites
The Orthodox Shi'ites (IDfna ’Athariyyah), as contradistinguished from
other sects who were cither extremists in their beliefs or had made a drastic
departure from the tenets of their orthodox brethren, believed that the
Imamate had descended from Muhammad, the Prophet to 'Ali and hia
descendants according to tho tablo given below:
1. 'Ali (d. 41/661)
3. Husain td. 61/&80)
(d. 50/670)
4. Zain al-'Abidin (d. o. 94/712)
6. Mubammad BAqir (d. 113/731)
6. Ja far Sadiq (d. 148/765)
7. Mum KApm (d. 183/799)
8. 'Ali Rida (d. 202/818)
9. Mubammad'Taqi (d. 220/835)
10. 'AU Naqi (d. 254/868)
11 Hasan 'Askari (d. 260/874)
12. Mahdi (disappeared in 260/874)
According to the Shi'ite traditions, the twelfth ImAm, namely, Mahdi (the
expected one), was bora in Satnarra in 256 or 256/868 or 869. At the time of
the death of his father he would have been only four or five years of age He
waa designated aa ImAm a few days before the death of his father and very
soon after his death he disappeared or went into concealment which consists
of two periods, short (myhra) and long (kubra). For a period of seventy years
he was represented by four unHls (agents or advocates), namely, 'Ulhnian ibn
Sa‘Id, abu Ja'far, abu al-QAaim, and abu al-Hasan The last named refused
to nominate an agent on hia behalf and died saying: "Now tho matter ia with
God.” Accordingly, tho period when the hidden ImAm was represented by the
waHU is known as the lesser concealment and this period extended to 329/
940. Sinoe that time the Shi'ite Mahdi or the hidden Imam has been in "the
great concealment" and he ia expected to return near the end of time.
The political theories of the Orthodox Shi'ites depend on three fundamental
precepts, namely, (1) the divine right of the descendants of 'Ali to sucoeed
to the ImAmate, (2) the ainlessneea of all the ImAma, and (3) the return of
Mahdi, the twelfth ImAm.
The first precept means that democratic election, i.e., consent of the people,
or any other method of choosing successor to the Prophet Mubammad is mani
735
A History of Muslim Philosophy
festly and palpably wrong and. aa a matter of fact, sinful. Sovereignty, with
all responsibilities that it entails for its holder as a temporal ruler and duties
that it entails for him as a religious chief, is a gift from God which is con
ferred only on those who have descended from Muhammad through 'Ali ano
Fifimah. (The descendants of 'Ali not bom of F4(imah have no right to the
Caliphate or tho Imamate.) The Shi'ite theologians obviously contend that
the divine right of the Imam to become the Commander of the Faithful
depends on the word of God as conveyed by the Prophet to ‘Ali and by 'Ali
to his descendants.
It haa been conjectured, however, that the theory of the divine right of
the Imams, which was analogous to the theory of the divine right of kings,
was evolved and developed by the Persian supporters of the House of 'Ali
who had witnessed the rise and fall of great empires wherein the emperors
more often than not laid claims to Godhead.
In ell great Eastern empires of the remote past the kings at some time or
another claimed to be gods or semi-gods at least, perhaps in order to stabilize
the State and to keep the subject races unified through the worship of the
sovereign. When we consider that the Shi'ite theologians and historians have
accepted it as a fact that a daughter of the last S&ssanian King of Penis was
married to Husain (all ImSms being descendants from her), it becomes easy
enough to appreciate the position of the Persian adherents of 'Ali in relation
to the Caliphate and the Im&mate. The fact that many of the Shl'ah sects
believed in the Godhead of 'Ali further lends support to the theory that the
concept of the divine right of the Iminis to succeed the Prophet had infiltrated
into Arabia through Persian channels.
Once we accept that the Im&ms are divinely ordained to rule the Faithful,
we must accept the fact that the State as envisaged by the Shi'ite theologians
is a theocracy in the must rigid sense of the word, in which the ruler—a
temporal head as well as religious chief—cannot be deposed even if he palpably
commits sins and crimes of a most serious nature. This is the logical conclusion
of the acceptance of the theory of divine right because the supporters of this
theory would contend that "what our limited knowledge visualizes aa a crime
or as a sin is really virtue." We, with our limited knowledge and understanding,
cannot appreciate or assess the significance of an act of the ImAm. This logical
conclusion was accepted by the IsmA'Ilitee specifically and categorically,
although the Orthodox Shi’ites contented themselves with saying that it is
not po«sible for the Im&m to commit a sin or a crime.
The concept of sinlessness is a logical corollary of the acceptance of the
first precept.
It would follow, therefore, that in theocracy aa envisaged by the Shi'ites,
the Caliph who is also the Im&m can neither be deposed nor interfered with
in any matter of administrative or religious nature. From the purely political
point of view, this theocratic State haa elements of stability and strength
which are peculiarly its own, hut it may not appeal to those who believe that
736
Political Theory of tho Shi'ites
sovereignty vests really in the people ultimately and that the negation of the
right to depose, irrespective of the fact whether the ruler is just or unjust and
cruel, is contrary to all principles of equity and justice inherent in all con
stitution-making.
The Shi'ite theologians may reply that the Im&m, being divinely ordained,
is incapable of committing a sin or crime and will exercise his authority in a
benevolent manner, and although he will be sovereign in every sense of tile
word, ho will bo bound by the restrictions imposed upon him by the Qur'in,
the traditions of the Prophet as narrated by the Im&ms. and the examples
of the Imams' lives.
Tho belief that the twelfth Im&m, Mahdi, is bound to return ia most signifi
cant in tho sense that the ghl'ite theologians are in a position to encourage
their adherents whenever they are passing through dangerous or chaotic
periods and ask them to stand fast since the advent of the Mahdi will be the
end of all tyranny, despotism, suffering, misery, wretchedness, and sinfulness
and the beginning of a new era of prosperity, bliss, happiness, ana ecstasy
never experienced before by humanity.
It is obvious that temporal and religious problems are to he solved during
the concealment of the twelfth Im&m. The ideal theocratic Shi'ite State
envisages the existence of righteous, erudite, competent, learned, and virtuous
persons who administer the Law and solve all theological problems and juristic
questions by ijlihad (effort). These competent persons are known as mujtaiuds
and are supposed to derive their wisdom and acumen from the representatives
of the hidden Imam who is in contact with them.
The mujtahute have always exercised very great influence in the Shi'ite
States and have been considered to be the Caliphs of the Im&m. It is of course
possible to visualize periods when wide powers are misused and unlimited
authority is converted into tyranny. Human nature is frail and whenever
human beings are vested with unlimited powers, they are apt to misuse them
at some time or other.
It may be statod, therefore, that the Shi'ites envisaged their ideal State
as a rigidly theocratic one, with the concealed Imam as the arbiter of the
destinies of the Faithful working out a pattern of society through the mujlahidi,
who derived their power to adjudicate from the Imam himself or his represen
tatives with whom they are in contact. All persons, sovereigns, rulers and
pontiffs, wherever they may be, are usurpers if they do not derive their right
to rule from the commands of the Im&m or from his representatives.
The chaotic conditions which prevail will bo set right by the advent or
emergence of the Mahdi who will establish this ideal theocratic State, holding
sway over the whole world and laying the law for all creatures who inhabit it.
737
A History of Muslim Philosophy
POLITICAL THEORY OF THE ISMA'TLITES
The sixth Im&m of the ghl'itce, namely, Imim Ja'far Sidiq (the Truthful)
is justly considered to be one of the greatest authorities on Law and Tradition.
He is regarded aa one of the most celebrated of the jurists. He instructed some
of the greatest Traditionists known to the Muslim peoples and is also known
aa tho originator or at least the greatest exponent of the occult science known
aa ja/ar.
Curiously enough, it waa 'luring his life-time that tho Shi'ite world waa tom
asunder and there emerged upon the scene a new group or sect of the Shi'ites,
known by many names, for example, the Ismi'Ilitea, the Sevenere, the Carma-
thians, Haft Im&mlyyah, and the Mal&bidah
The Carmathian sect is not to be confused with the Lami'Uitce, aa the latest
research haa established beyond any doubt: it is the term "Ismi'tlite" which
is indicative of the true origin of the sect, other appellations being either
misleading or based on hostility to this sect in general and to Orthodox
Shi'ites in particular.
From the tangle of conflicting evidence, contradictory claims, and incon
sistent theories, the basic facta relating to the origin of this sect appear as
follows:
It is admitted by all concerned that Imim Ja'far died in 148 765 Before
his death he had designated his son Ismi'tl to be his successor and the
rightful Imim. Now this lsmi'tl died some time between the year 136/753
and 1461763: it is clear that he could not have died before 136/754—the year
that the 'Abb&sid Caliph, Mansflr, ascended the throne—because we find it
stated on unimpeachable authority that the fact of his death was reported to
the Caliph, who, obviously, watched the movements of the Shi'ite Imams
carefully and sometimes with great anxiety, because almost all the movements
which aimed at the overthrow of the 'Abbisid Caliphate used the name of
the reigning Shi'ite Imim as a cloak. The 'Abbisid Caliphs, therefore, even
when convinced that Imims themselves were not in any way associated with
the movement in question, very carefully kept them under State observation,
According to the Shi ites, they were, for all practical purposes, prisoners of
State, and their movements were restricted by "political expediency," the
seriousness or the significance of which waa determined by the corresponding
seriousness of the revolt or the movement which gave birth to it.
Again, this is admitted by all concerned that before the death of Ism&'U,
Imim Ja'far had revoked the authority of succession in the case of Isml'tl
and had in his place designated Imini Musa Kitim as his rightful successor
and Im&m of the Shi'ites.
The reasons, which led the Im&m to take this step which caused the Shi'ite
community to be tom asunder and divided into hostile groups, cannot be
determined at this stage. The Orthodox Shi'ites—and Sunni authorities are
not lacking in support, thereof—assert that Imam Iam&'tl waa, one unfortunate
738
Political Theory of the ghritee
day, found drinking wine and thus commiting an action which is admittedly
a sin. Im&m Ja'far—so the story goes—thereupon repudiated lama'll and
designated his brother as his successor.
This repudiation of sanction or authority, technically known as nzws, was
not and oould not be accepted by some of the Shi'ites because it negatived
and falsified the fundamental postulates of the Shi'ites in general.
Those who would not accept this repudiation and revocation argue as
follows:
The sinlessness of the Im&m is an established fact IsmS'II was declared to
be the Imim-Designate by Ja'far. He. therefore, was incapable of committing
any sin or perpetrating any mint. The allegation that he was found drinking
wine waa either inoorrect or related to one of those mysterious acts of tho
Im&m-Designate the significance of which is known to him only Since he
was incapable of committing a sin, his drinking must nave been a cloak for
some other activity: in other words, drinking was an appearance (fa/ur), the
reality (Iriliii) of which was known only to the Im&m or to those in whom
he confided
The supporters of Ismill also contend that he was appointed Imam-
Designate by Imam Ja'far in accordance with divine command. God is in
fallible. It is impossible to conoeive that God was not aware that Ismi'Il one
day would be found drinking. If. therefore, he allowed Isma'll to be declared
aa the successor of Imam Ja'far, the story that Ism&'Il was found drinking
wine must either be untrue or must be considered and treated as an act
innocent in itself, the significance of which is known only to God. the Im&m.
and his successor. They contend that it waa quite possible that the wine-drink
ing of Ism&'ll may have been considered expedient by God and since all actions
of the Im&m flow from God, no action of Ism&'Il. however sinful it may have
appeared, can be considered to be unjustified and condemned, sinoe it is in
fact an act performed aa ordained by Providence- During the life-time of
Im&m Ja'far the controversy and the ferment consequent upon the revoca
tion of authority remained subdued, but aa soon as he died the supporters
of Isma'll came forward and contested the succession of ImSm Musa Kijim.
Since lama'll had died during the life-timo of his father, it was contended
that the noy? (sanction, authority) had been transferred from Ismi'U to his
eon Mubammad who had from then on become the rightful Im&m, the spiritual
and temporal leader of the Shi'ites and the rightful ruler of all territorial
possessions.
There were some who believed that Ism&'ll had not really died and was
the last, rightful Im&m, but they were in a minority. Slowly but steadily the
supporters of Mubammad the son of Ism&'Il gained ascendancy and laid the
foundation of the Ism&'ili sect which culminated in the establishment of one
of the greatest Muslim empires of the East—the Empire of the Fatimids of
Egypt.
De Goeje and Dozy have it "that a certain Abd Allah b. Mainiun an
739
A History of Muslim Phikwophy
occulist IqaMih) by profession and a Persian by race." was inspired by
religious fervour, political ambition, and inveterate hatred against the "Arabs
and Islam.” to “bind together in one association the oonquered and the con
querors; to combine in one secret society, wherein there should be several
grades of indication, the free-thinkers who saw in religion only a curb for the
common people and the bigots of all sects; to make use of the believers to
bring about the reign of the unbelievers and of the conquerors to overthrow
the empire, which they had themselves founded; to form for himself, in short,
a. party, numerous, compact, and schooled to obedience, which, when the
moment was come, would give the throne, if not to himself, at least to his
descendants: such was the dominant idea of ‘Abd Allah b. Maimun, an idea
which, grotesque and audacious though it was, he realized with astonishing
tact, incomparable skill, and a profound knowledge of the human heart.”
There is a very significant old adage that if you fling sufficient mud some
is bound to stick. This is exactly what happened in the case of Maimun and
his son 'Abd Allah. The Orientalists—nay even such an erudite Iranian
scholar as Mubammad Qazwlni, the editor of TariU-i JaAun Gujka by ‘Ata
Malik Juwaini—were misled by the voluminous ‘AbbAsid propaganda, hostile
commentary of the Orthodox Shi'ites, and the specious argument of those
opposed to the Isma'tlites, into thinking that MaimOn and his son ‘Abd Allah
were opposed to the tenets of Islam or were inspired by the hatred for the
Arabs. As a matter of fact, aa the latest research has established beyond any
doubt, Maimun waa the name adopted by Imam Mubammad when he went
into concealment (gbaibah). In other words, during the period of concealment
those who were in his confidence knew ImAm Mubammad to be MaimAn
No doubt, this is a daring postulate but. onoe we accept it, all conflicts
are resolved, all inconsistencies removed, and all confusions laid to rest.
It is quite evident that when the Orthodox Shi'ites assert that Maimun was
a narrator of traditions under ImAm BAqir and ImAm Ja'far, they are speak
ing the literal truth. So are the IsmA'Ilites when they say that MaimOn and
his son 'Abd Allah were the staunchest supporters of the IsmA'Uite cause
It is clear that the Orthodox Shi'ites were not taken into confidence hy the
supporters of ImAni Mubammad when he was in concealment and were, there
fore, unable to appreciate that MaimAn and Muhammad are one and the
same person. By accepting this postulate we are also in a position to ap
preciate and understand the attitude adopted by the 'AbbAsid Caliphs in
relation to both Maimun and his son 'Abd Allah. It is quire likely that some
of the spies of the 'AbbAsids might have brought to the notice of the Caliph
that Maimun was the concealed Imam; and political expediency might have
forbidden the broadcasting of this highly significant and equally dangerous
information.
The stream of invectives poured upon the head of Maimun and his son
‘Abd Allah by the 'AbbAsid Caliphs, the Orthodox Shi'ites, and the Sunni
historians in general, is in itself significant and tends to support the theory
740
Political Theory of the Shi'ite*
that both these persons were not only supporters of the lami'Ilitee' cause
but were the pivots and props thereof.
After the death of Ja'far, Mubammad went into concealment adopting the
name of Maimun. He spent some time at Kfifah and Rayy. The 'Abbisid
Caliph living informed that Mubammad waa laying the foundation of a power
ful organization even in concealment and sending out preachers to different
parte of Persia made some efforts to seize him, but it would appear that
either three efforts were half-hearted or they failed.
Ultimately, ‘Abd Allah al-Mahdi in direct line of descent from Mubammad
the son of IsmA'Il succeeded in laying the foundation of an enviable empire
in Egypt, the rulers of which are known to history as the FStimids or the
descendants of Fltimah through 'Ali.
At this juncture it is perhaps expedient to state in the mtfet explicit terms
that the Carmathians were not associated with the iBmi'Uites, nor were they
identical with them aa it is sometimes wrongly supposed.
Hollister has ascertained their position as follows. "We find the word
Carmathian used: (1) as an equivalent for Isma'ilis in general; (2) for the dis
sident groups of Isma'ilites who joined in the invasion of Syria and came very
close to capturing Damascus and establishing there a Fitimid Kingdom some
what earlier than that established in North Africa; (3) for the followers of
Hamdan Qarmat and ‘Abdan, his brother-in-law, who seceded from the
IsmA'Uls; and (4) for the Qarmatians of Bahrain. The more recent studies,
supported by Isma'Ilite authorities, have made it clear that only this last
group is really entitled to the name Qarmatian (Carmathian)."
The Fatimid Caliphs (297-567/909-1171), broadly speaking, tried to
establish a theocratic State and were on the whole just rulers and efficient
administrators. One of them, al-Hikim, however, claimed divinity for himself.
In other words, he not only claimed to bo the Im&m, but further contended
that the divine light had entered his body so that he had become identical
with the Creator. His claim was laughed out of Egypt, but the Druzea of
Lebanon up to thia day believe in his divinity and look forward to the return
of Lord Hakim. They do not believe that he was actually murdered and are
confident that he merely disappeared as an Imam often does, and would
reappear in due course aa the herald of a new era of prosperity, righteousness,
and godliness on the earth.
Amazingly enough the Ismi'Uites were destined to be split again into two
powerful groups. Al-Mustansir died in 428/1036 and the Imimate should
have been transferred to hia eldest son Nizar who, his supporters claimed, hud
been properly designated as Imam. However, he was not in Cairo when his
father died, und before he could take effective steps his brother al-Musta'Ii
ascended the throne and NizAr was faced with a /ait accompli.
Niz4r never succeeded to the throne, but he found a very staunch supporter
in Hasan Sabbib who hail come to Persia during the reign of al-Mustansir.
Thia Hasan fjabbab was really an amazing person, learned, erudite, ambitious.
741
A History of Muslim Philosophy
outwardly pious, wily, and blessed with administrative ability and infinite
capacity to work.
In order to further his own ends, he supported the cause of NizAr aa the right
ful Imam and the ruler of the Islamic world, and in his name took possession
of many fortresses in Peraia including the famous Alamut (the Eagle's Nest)
which in due course of time became the centre of Hasan's activities.
The movement initiated by Hasan is known as Da'wat-i Jadid or New
Propaganda. The NizAri ImArno of Alamut, beginning with Hasan $abbAb.
held sway in certain parts of Persia until the last Imam Khursbah was killed
by the Mongols in the seventh/thirtcenth century. The NizAri branch of the
IsmA'Uites recognizes the Agha Khan as its head and their members are
known in the Indo-Pakistan sub-oontinent as Khojahs. The adherents of
Musta'li are known as Bohras.
According to the IsmA'ilites as to the Orthodox Shi'ites, the only rightful
State is a theocratic one which has as its Head the ImAm who, as we have
already emphasized, is divinely ordained to hold his office.
The ImAm or the Head of the State never becomes fundin officii in the
sense that when he is concealed his representatives become operative and
spread the light. As a matter of fact, both the sects, the Twelvers and the
IsmA'llites. believe in the continuity of the office of the ImAm. There can be
no vacuum so far as the performance of the functions pertaining to the ImAmate
is concerned. There may be and sometimes is a long period between the death
jf one prophet and the birth of another, but during this period the ImAm
•tontinues to perform his functions in the light of revelation.
It is believed that overy Prophet had an ImAm to whom he revealed the
■.ruth. Technically, the Prophet is called rmfig and the ImAm as admit.
It is admitted that, although revelation is only vouchsafed to the prophet,
it is interpreted and enforced by the ImAm, since the esoterio meanings of the
revelation are known to him alone. During the FAtimid period. 'Ali, the fourth
Caliph, was given the place of amis or the foundation of the ImAmate and
was, thus, raised to a position above all other Imams.
In the theocratic State envisaged by the IsmA'ilites every ImAm has a
chief minister who is termed Bab (the door, the gate). He is the intermediary
between the ImAm and the inner circle of preachers. All information sought,
to be conveyed to the ImAm is conveyed through the Bab and all orders
passed by the ImAm are communicated to the persons concerned by the same
Bab. It is on reoord that Hasan fynbbah claimed that he had been refused
permission to see the ImAm on account of the fact that Badr. the Bab. and
the minister of Mustansir would not allow him to do so.
The Isma'ilite creed emphasizes the importance of cycles. Obviously, otx
source of revelation is not sufficient to lead humanity to the true path. There
fore, there have been cycles of revelation, each introduced by a prophet or
ndtig succeeded by six Imams. The seventh initiates a new cycle and really
ranks as a prophet
742
Political Theory of the Shi'ite**
This is the reason why IsmA'II is held in such reverence by the IsmAilitci,.
ho completes the cycle which began with the Prophet Muhammad and intro
duces a new one.
Salvation of mankind depends upon recognizing the basic principle that
one must identify the ImAm and take the oath of allegiance (bai'ah) to him.
Those who do not recognize the ImAm remain in a state of sin.
It has been mentioned that the Shi'ites believe in the doctrine of the sinless
ness of the ImAm. It has also been stated that IsmA'llites, more than any other
gfal'ite sect, accept unflinchingly the conclusions which are attendant upon
this belief. In other words, if it be proved beyond any shadow of doubt by un
impeachable evidence that IsmA'II was observed drinking wine, the Isma'ilitea
would argue that since the Imam is incapable of committing a sin his wine
drinking must be considered to be an act which is capable of an esoteric
interpretation (td’wilj.
As a matter of fact, the basis of the IsmA'Uite creed, aa it crystallized under
FAtimids of Egypt, is the belief that there are two aspects of knowledge,
namely, the apparent or manifest (tahir) and the esoteric or inner (bafin).
The rfhir of the Qur’An is lanzil while the balm is Id'uni. The esoteric meaning
is known to the Prophet who imparts knowledge to his Imam. The ImAm
then spreads the light through hia representatives: "every person who wishes
to belong to the Daunt enters into covenant with him (the ImAm), on behalf
of God. This is called bai'ah Man and woman must both take a like oath in
a ceremony known as milhiiq. They must quite justly oppose everything
that is unlawful . . . and keep secret those things and tho religious knowledge
which are entrusted to them. Obedience to all tho dictates of religion is the
most important duty of the Faithful. Salvation can be attained only through
obedience completed in word, action, desire, and thought."
Whereas the Sunnis and the Twelvers (Iflfna ‘Ailfariyyah) have comment
aries relating to the meaning of the Qur'an, the Isma'ilites do not and cannot
possess any such works.
Ivanow has it that in IsmA'ilism there ia no such thing as a work of Tafsir
(commentary on the Qur'An). It would appear that the passages which seem
obscure or ambiguous can only be referred to the ImAm and whoever has the
good fortune to learn the esoteric meaning from the ImAm or his representa
tives is bound to keep such information confidential and secret on account of
the oath of allegiance taken by him.
All subjects of a theocratic State, as envisaged by the Isma'ilites, therefore,
are initiated into the mysteries of religion in accordance with their intelligence,
capacity, integrity, and loyalty. It is needless to add that if a subject of this
theocratic Stato breaks the oath of allegiance and becomes a convert to any
other religion, ho is severely punished (provided he is captured).
Until tho FAtimid regime came into power the Isma'ilites, like the other
Shi'ite sects, were anxiously waiting for the advent of the Mahdi who would
bring peace and prosperit y to the world. After the establishment of the FAtimids.
743
A History of Muslim Philosophy
the conception of a personal Mahdi as al-jd'im waa changed. Every Caliph of
the F&timid dynasty was named aJ-qd'im and thus “the idea of Mahdi became
merged, so to speak, in the Imtmate, in the dynasty whose mission comes to
include the objects which the Mahdi waa to effect, if not under an Im&m, then
under one of his successors."
The theocratic State of the Ism&'Ilitce enjoins upon all the subjects to
wage a holy war (jihad) against the people "who turn away from religion."
The duty to wage war is obligatory, but it is restricted by an important con
dition: it can be justified only under the guidance either of the Im&m or of
his accredited representative.
All subjects of this theocratio State believed in the expediency of dissimula
tion (taqiyyah) although ita necessity was reduced almost to nothingness
during the regime of the F&timids. Still taqiyyah is an accepted fact and when
ever the ImAm ia in concealment his disciples are obliged to practise it so
that they may oome to no harm. Before the F&fimid regime even the Im&ms
themselves practised taqiyyah, according to authentic evidence endorsed by
the Ismi'Uites.
It has been mentioned that the sect of the Twelve aa well as the Ism&'tlilea
believe that the only rightful ruler of all territorial possessions of the world
is the ImAm. Since at a given moment a theocratic IamA'Ilite State may or
may not exist, it is the duty of all Ism&'llitea to encourage the preaching of
their creed. The Fit imide paid great attention to the intellectual equipment
of a preacher (da'i). The dd'i was supposed to answer any question that a
pupil or an opponent might ask. He waa, therefore, made tostudv jurisprudence,
all branches of Tradition, the philosophical interpretation of the Qur'An. M'ici/
or allegorical meanings, and the art of controversy and dialectics.
The theocratic State of the IsmA'Ilites established under the FAtimids
encouraged the acquisition of knowledge. In a way it aimed at rationalization
of the precepts of religion. If was by arousing the curiosity of the people that
the IsmA'ili preachers ultimately succeeded in winning them over. It is para
doxical, indeed, that the IsmA'Ilitea, who believed that mere knowledge is not
sufficient for the achievement of salvation and that one has to recognize an
imAm and follow him unstintedly in all matters, established seats of learning,
schools and universities where tho students were encouraged to think for
themselves The Azhar University of Cairo was built by the Fatimids and
has continued since then to be regarded as the outstanding educational
institution in the entire Muslim world.
The Fitimids also established observatories and libraries and these institu
tions were accessible to all peoples and classes irrespective of religion or creed.
Public gatherings were addressed by learned men in robes which may be
regarded as forerunners of the academic gowns worn by professors today. All
costs pertaining to these institutions were borne by the Government and
for the teaching of different sciences learned professors were imported from
Spain and from farthest parts of Asia.
7-14
Political Theory of tho Shi'ites
It may be eaid. therefore, that a theocratic State, rigid in ita framework
and immutable in ita convictions, gave birth to rational movements aimed
at the correlation of religious precepts with scientific and philosophic truths
aa known at the time. It became the harbinger of rational thinking, and by
encouraging the pursuit of knowledge it gave to learning and letters a new
impetus. If we believe N&sir Kfcusrau, and we have no reason to disbelieve
him, the State which was established by the Fitimids had become the centre
of all learning and knowledge and from it radiated waves and movements
towards different parte of the Muslim world enoouraging others to pursue
knowledge, to think for themselves, and to pondor over religious matters in
the light of reason.
It is an amazing coincidence of history that a theocratic State should give
birth to rational thought and should encourage the study of philosophy even
when it must have been aware that learning and education tend to produce a
collective mental state which is opposed to the rigidity of a truly theocratic
State, The FAfimids deserve all honour, therefore, for advancing the cause of
knowledge even with the lurking suspicion that it may end in the destruction
of their own State and sealing their own doom.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Maulavi Sayyid Abmad 'Ab MuhAni, $atdfah-i Kdmdah. or Its Propers of ImOm
Zain at-'Abidin. 2 Parts. Madrasat al W&'uln. Lucknow, 1931; Syed Amoor Ali.
Muhammaden Law, Thacker Spink A Co., Calcutta and Simla, 1929, 2 Vols., 6th
ed.; Tbs Spirit of Ielam, Christophers. London. 1935; Sir Thomas W. Arnold,
The Caliphate, Clarendon Prose, Oxford. 1913; abu Mangur 'Abd al-Q&hir ibn
Tihir al-Baghdadi. al-Farq bain al-Firaq, tr. Kate Chambers Seelye, Columbia
University Proas, New York, 1920; al-Forg bain al-Firag fCharacteriolicc of Muclim
Soar), abr. ed. Phdip K. Hitti, al-llil&l Printing Press. Cairo. 1924; Nail Baillie,
A Digeet of Mohammedan Law, Vol. H. London. 1876; C. H. Beekor, Tho
Cambridge Medieval factory, Vol. II, The Rite of tho Saracene; Abmad bin Yabye
bin JAbir al-BalAdhuri. Futuh al-BMdn. pp. 113-30; Lt. CoL M. H. Court.
Malcolm's Hictory of Portia, Civil A Military Gazette. Lahore. 1888; Dwight
M. Donaldson. Tho &i‘ite Religion, Luzac A Co., Ltd., London. 1933; Israel
Friodlander, Tho Heterodoxiee of tho Wilec; William Loftus Hare, Ed., Reli-
gione of tho Empire, Duckworth, London, 1923; Sir Mu bammed Iqbal, Tho Recon-
etruetion of Religiouo Thought in Ielam, Oxford University Press. London, 1934;
Wildimir Ivanow, Iemailitica—Memoirs of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, Tho
Baptist Minion Praia. the Asiatic Society, Calcutta. 1932; A Guido io ImtU,
Literature, Royal Asiatio Society. London. 1933; Two Early lemd'lli Treatieec:
Haft-BObi Baba Sayyidna and MaflUb al-Mu'minin by Tusi, Islamic Research
Association, Bombay. 1933; Kaldm-i Plr: A Treatite on ItmdUi Doctrine, Islamic
Research Association, Bombay, 1935; Tho Rite of the Fatimide, Oxford University
Proas, 1942; Major H. S. Jarrett, factory of tho Calipho; Stanley Lane-Poole,
A factory of Egypt in the Middle A get, Methuen A Co.. Ltd., London. 4th ed.. 1923;
Bernard Lewis, The Origin of Icmd'Utcm, W. Hoffer A Sons, Ltd- Cambridge. 1940;
Duncan B. Macdonald. Development of Muelim Theology, Janeprudence and
749
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Constitutional Theory, Charlos Scribners' Sons. New York. 1926; Mulls Muhammad
BAqir al-Majllai. Hoytit ol-DuIub. tr. J. L. Merrick, Phillipa Lampoon * Co.,
Boston, 1850; Sir John Malcolm. The llietory o/ Pareto, 2 Volo, John Murray.
London, 1929; Prine® P. H. Mamour, Polemics on t*r Origin of the FAftmtd
Caliphe, I.uzac 4 Co.. London, 1934; Sayyid Maqbdl Ahmad. Qur’dn with Shi'ah
Tafeir, 3 Vole.. Munifci Sayyid ZafaryAb Ali, Delhi; D. S. Margollouth. Tht Early
Development of Mohammedanitm. Williams 4 Norgate, London. 1914; Umayyad*
and AbbOeide, being a trans, of Pan IV of ZaydAn’s History of Islamic Civili
zation. Gibb Memorial Series. Vol. IV; Jarnos L. Merrick, Tht Lift and Beligion of
Muhammad; William McElwee Miller. A Treatise on the Pnnoplee o/ Shiite The
ology; Mirai Muhammad ibn 'Abdul WalihAb Qazwlni, Tht Tdriii-i JaMn-Guyba
of ‘Ala al-Din 'Apt Malik Juwaini, Part. ITI, Luzac A Co.. London. 193"; Muhsin
Fam, Dabietdn al-MotHahib, translau-d from tho original Persian hv David Shea
and Anthony Troyer, M. Walter Dunn. Washington and London. 1901; Sir William
Muir, Tht Caliphate, lit Hitt, Dedine and Fall, Religious Tract Society. London,
1891; abi Muhammad el-Hasan ibn Miisa al-Naubehfeti, Kitab Firaq al-Sbi'ah.
tr. Helmut Ritter, Vol. IV of tho Bibliotheca /tlamtca, Istanbul, 1931; Simon
Ockley. History of the Saracens, George Bell 4 Sons. London, 1875, 6th ed.; de
Lacy O'Leary, History of the Fdfimid Caliphale. Kogan Paul. Trench Trubner 4 Co.,
London. 1923; Canon Edward Sell, The Cult of ‘Ali. Christian Literature Society
for India. Madras. 1910; Hina Aibariyyah. or Tht Twin fUi ah lmdms, Madras,
1923; Studies in Idam. C. M. S.. London. 1928; Bernhard H. Springett, Secret Stele
of Syria and the Lebanon, George Allen 4 Unwin, London, 1922; Sir Percy Syke®,
History of Persia, 2 Vola.. Macmillan 4 Co., London. 1930; — and Ahmad Din
KAAn, Tht Glory of the SbVah World, tr. and ed. from a Persian MS., Macmil
lan 4 Co., London. 1910; W. Cooke Taylor. The Hulory of Mohammadanism and
JU Seels, John W. Parker. London, 1851, 3rd ed.; A. J. Wonsinck. A Handbook
of Early Muhammadan Traditions, Leyden, 1927 ; Muhammad ibn Ya'qub Kulaini,
KAfi fi ‘Ilm al-Din (A Compendium of the Science of Religion), lithographed, 2
Vole., Teheran. 1889; abu al Hasan Muhammad b. Milaa Sayyid Radi, Nahj al-
Baldgbah: The Open Road of Eloquenoe (containing diecours™ attributed to 'Ali),
lithographed in Meshed, 1892; Koello, Muhammad and Muhammadanism, 1889;
tLhuda Bulthlh. Contributions to the Hutory of Islamic Civilisations, tr. from A. von
Kremer's Culture Geschichlliche Streiftuge aue dem GtbieU dee Islam. Calcutta, 1905
and 1929; The Encyelopaedia Britannica, Cambridge, 11th edition with Supple
mentary Vols. XXX-XXXH, 1922; The Encyelopaedia of Islam. Leiden. 4 Vole,
with Supplement, 1908-38; Carl Brockelmann, History of Islamic Peoples. London;
Arnold J. Toynbee, Study of History.
746
Political Theory of tho Shi'ite*
Chapter XXXVIII
NI?AM AL-MULK T^SI
Nijim al-Mulk Jani was born in 408/1018' and died in 485/1092. He was
not only a minister of the SaljQqs for the last thirty years of hia life, a scholar,’
and a patron of arts and sciences, but also the founder’ of the famous Univer
sity styled after his name the Niidmiyi/ah.
He lived in an age which wit nessed the lowest degradation of the Caliphate,
following ita transformation during a period of three centuries,1 from a democ
racy into an autocracy and from autocracy into a mere puppetry in the
hands of powerful mastera. That period also saw the fall of the Ghaznawid
Empire and the Buwaihid Kingdom, and the rise of the Saljuqs after their
victory over the Qhaznawids in 431/1040, when their nomadic life ohanged
into the life of a gigantic empire, extending from the Oxus and the Jaxartcs
to the Bosphorus. It was an age of change and fusion of social and
political ideas and institutions, specially in that part of tho Muslim world
in which Nijani al-Mulk lived and worked. The rise of the Persian element
in political power in the early period of the 'Abbksida was followed by a
gradual revival of the Persian political institutions under the patronage of the
S&mAnids, the Ghaznawids. and then of the Saljfiqs, These institutions in their
turn, together with their theoretical foundations, came to be assimilated
by Muslim thought. For this assimilation no battle of ideas was ever fought;
it came as a process of cultural development in which NijAm al-Mulk stood
as one of the representatives of Persian culture, with a bias towards Islamic
thought.
Nijam al-Mulk waa not really his name. It waa a title of honour conferred
upon him by his Saljuq master, Alp Arslan, after his appointment as a
minister His name was abu 'Ali Hasan, and hia father's name was abu al-
Hasan 'All. who belonged to a family of landowners (dihqdtw)‘ of RadhkAn.1
a small town in the suburb of Jus where Ni?am al-Mulk was born. In the days
' According to ibn Funduq ‘Ali b. Zaid al-Baihaqi, bo waa bom in 470/1019-20;
see TdriiA-* Baihaqi. ed. Abroad Bahman-YAr, CMp KbAnah-i QAniin, Teheran.
1317/1938, p. 70.
■ Ibn al-AIhlr. alKimil fi al-TariU, BulAq. 1290/1874, Vol. X. p. 77.
' BundAri. Zubdal al-Nufrah w-ai-Nujtbbal al'Ufrah. ed. M. Th. Houtama,
Leiden. 1889. p. 33.
• For a detailed description, see T. W. Arnold. The Caliphate, 0. U. P-, Oxford.
1924. Chapters IV. VI; A. H. Riddlqi. Caliphale and Kinfehip in Medieval Perna,
Sb. Muhammad Ashraf. Lahore, 1942. Chaps. I 4 II.
‘ Shams al-Din abu al-'AbbAs ibn KhallikAn, li'a/uydl al-A ydn, BulAq, 1299
1882. Vol. I. p. 179.
■ Abd al-Karim b. Muhammad al-Sam'Ani. KMb al-AnM. Cibb Memorial
Series. Leidon/Londou. 1912. fol. 242a.
747
A History of Muslim Philosophy
of the Gharriawids his father was appointed a tax-collector of TOs by abu
al-Fiujl Suri, who waa tho Governor of KhurAsAn.’
His early education started with the study of Tradition (Hadili) and
jurisprudence and as hia father wanted him to take up the legal
profession for his future career, he was put under the care of ‘Abd al-$amad
Fundilraji," who was a profound scholar of Law,*
In the famous "Tale of the Three School-Fellows," it ia related of him that
in his school days in NijbApur. where he was sent to attend the lectures of
ImAm MuwafTaq, he made friends with two boys, who later became eminent
personalities. One was 'Umar KhavyAm. the great poet and astronomer, and
the other Hasan b. §abbAb, the founder of the BAtinlyyah sect of the Assassins.
Research by the late Sayyid SulaimAn Nadawi makes it unnecessary to
discuss this controversial point1* of N'itAm al-Mulk's life. This tale, he proves,
ia a fabrication. From what the author of TdriU-i Baihaqi relates about
NijAm’s family on the reliable authority of his grandfather Shaikh al-IslAm
Amirak. who had seen Nijam al-Mulk in his boyhood, it may be concludod
that it was after he had reached tho ago of maturity and not in his early
years, and after his father had been relieved of financial worries*11 that he
was able to attend ImAm Muwaffaq's lectures in order to complete his higher
studin.
His studin over, he travelled to BukbAra and Mere, and to a number of
towns1* in Transoxiana, most probably in search of a post, and after 441/IMS11
he went to Qhaznah, where he sought service with the QJjarnawida, thus
getting an opportunity to acquaint himself with their administration. When
Sultin 'Abd al-Raghld waa murdered in 444/1052 and the political affaire
were upset, he escaped to Balkh and entered the servioe of 'Ali b. SbAdhAn."
who was then the guvemor of that provinoe on behalf of the SaljQq ruler
' Ibn Funduq, op. oil., pp, 78-79.
• Not Fondartbi aa in the -VofU'di-i AJudjoA Niutm al MM (MS. British
Museum, Or. 258, fol. 7a), or Qanduzi aa in the DostUr al-Wueara’ (MS. B. M.
Add. 26. 267. fol. 5a). but Fundflraji as in 8am‘Ani. op. cit., fol. 432a. and in
abu al Hasan 'Ali b. Hasan al-BAUMtrzi. Dumyot al-Qaor, ed. Mubammad RAghib
TabbAkh. Aleppo, 1349/1930, p. 213.
• IVasOyai Khwaiab Nifdm al MM. Bombay. 1305/1887, p. 6.
'• Sayyid SulaimAn Nadawi. Khayyam. Ma'Arif Press. Azamgarh, 1933, pp.
1-50. For further study, see E. D. Ros- A Htoyraphical Introduction to the Ruba iyat
o/ Omar KhayyAm. tr. Fitzgerald. Methuen. London. 1900, Part II. pp. 38. 76;
E. G. Browne. A Literary llutory of Persia. London, 1915, 2nd nd.. Vol. II. pp.
190-93; Arnold and Nicholson. Eda.. A Volume o/ Oriental Studies Presented to
K. G. Browne. Cambridge University Proas. 1922, pp. 409-12; H. Bowen. The
Sargudbaiht i Sayyidna," JRAS, London. Oct. 1931, Part V. pp. 773-76.
11 Ibn Funduq. op. eil.. pp. 79-82.
11 Ibn al-AUIr. op. ret, Vol. X, p. 77.
“ 'Abd al-RaszAq KAnpuri, NiiAm al-MM Turn, Agra. 1912, p. 59.
“ TAj al Dtn abu Ns«r 'Abd al-WahhAb al-Subki, Tabaqat aLShafi'iyyah. ed.
Abroad b. 'Abd a) Karim. Husainlyyah Press. Cairo. 1324/1906. Vol. Ill, p. 136.
748
Ni*Am al-Mulk Turn
Qj)agjjari Beg Diwad. Annoyed with the habits of thia man, who extorted
heavy sums from him every year,** he fled to Mere; there Chayhari Beg
appointed him the mufhir (counsellor) and the kalib (secretary)1* of hia son,
AJp Arslan. It was on the advioe of 'Ali b. ghiihan1’ that Alp Arslan,
after his accession to the throne in 455/1062. raised him to the position of a
Joint Minister with 'Amid al-Mulk Kunduri. But Kunduri was soon deposed
and then put to death, it is said,1* on the advice of A’ijAm al-Mulk, who had
then become the full-fledged Prime Minister of the Saljuq Empire.
He became the real master of the whole realm with the succession of Malik-
afaah to his father’s throne in 465/1072, which he owed entirely to Nijim
al-Mulk’s efforts.1’ From the capital of the Saljuqs, his influence spread to
the capital of the 'Abbisid Caliph, who is said to havo dignified him with
the title of Ratfi-u Amir al-Mu'minin, never before conferred on a vizier.” He
had done much to stabilize the power of the .Saljuqs, and to improve their
administration, and. therefore, when Malikshah once threatened him with
dismissal he dared to reply that the kingship was linked with his vizierate.’1
In his last days, he came into collision with the Isma'lliyyah movement
of Hasan b. gabbab. in whose activities he saw danger to the Saljuq Empire.
He had actually once deputed abu Muslim Radi to arrest Hasan,” but abu
Muslim waa himself assassinated by one of the fiddls (the Assassins) in 485/
1092.
It will be in place here to refer to the two Persian works of Ni?am al-Mulk,
which are the chief sources for the study of his political ideas, the Siy&tal
Ninth (The Book on Statecraft) and the Datlur al-Wmari' (The Conduct
of Ministers) or. aa it is more generally known, the Wamyai KbuHjah A'inim
alMulk (The Precepts of Khw&jah NijAm al-Mulk). He is said to have written
yet another work entitled aa ^afar Nameh (The Book of Travels) which is
now extinct.” Certain changes and additions may have been made to the
original text in a later period, but the Siyatal Ninth has generally been
recognized aa the genuine composition of Nifim al-Mulk himself. There has
been some controversy among scholars about the authenticity of the ll'asdya
on account of the doubtful “Talc of the Three School-Fellows." which has
>* Ibn Kballikan. op. cil.. Vol. I. p. 179.
« Taqi Kh.ln, Ganji Mnilh. Teheran. 1305,1887, p. 350.
•' Al-Subki. op. cit., p. 130: Sadr nl-DIn abu al-Hasan 'Ali b. N*»ir. AkhMr
al-Daulal al-Saljuqlyyah. ed. Muhammad Iqb*l. Lahore. 1933.
•• Sadr al-Dln. op. cil.. p. 25.
Hamd Allah Mustauti. Tilriti-i Gmidah. Gibb Memorial Serios. London. 1910.
Vol. I. p. 443; Hindu Stith b. Sanjar b. Abd Allah. Tajdrib al-Salo/. ed. 'Abbas
Iqbal. Teheran, 1313/1934. p. 280.
•" IVoadya. p. 37.
■" Sadr al-Dtn. op. cit.. p. 69; Hindu Shah. op. cit.. p. 280.
" 'Ala al-Din 'Afa Malik al-Juwaini. Tinkh-i Jahdii-Guiha, Gibb Memorial
Serini. London. 1937. Vol. 11. p. 103.
'• ‘Abd al Razziq. op. cil.. pp. 72 73.
749
A History ol Muslim Philosophy
been set out in detail in the preface of the treatise. There i» no need to revive
this half a century old controversy** aa it has nothing to do with the study
of his political thought. The H'asdya is not claimed to be the composition of
NijAm al-Mulk himself in the sense in which the Siydeat N&mth is considered
to be his work. It was compiled in the ninth/fifteenth** century by an anony
mous person whose family, aa he claims in the preface, descended from NitAm
al-Mulk. Ho compiled it partly from the books and partly from the oral tradi
tions handed down in hia own family." Therefore, the aneodotes cited in it
begin invariably with the phrase. "So says Kfawijah NijAm al-Mulk." The
preface, which is one of the reliable sources of Nitarn al-Mulks life, is evidently
from the pen of the compiler. But the other two chapter*, which form the
main part of the work, and contain much valuable material on the political
ideas of this famous vizier, are composed from his own authentic writings
and utterances. It has been justly remarked1' that there is no internal evi
dence in tho main part of the work to show that it does not owe its contents
to his pen. A large part of the B'osdya may be regarded as the actual utter
ances of NifAm al-Mulk."
We are fortunate in having there two important works of Nizam al-Mulk
representing his thoughts about kingship and vizierate, which were the two
political institutions of primary importance in his days. The Siydeat Nameh,
which is the exposition of his theory of kingship, was originally written to
serve as a "monarch’s primer It is said that in 484/109110 SultAn Malik shAh
(r. 485/1072-185/1092) instructed some of his dignitaries to think over the
state of affair* in his realm and write down the principles of conduct that
were followed by monarchs in the past, and were required to be observed by
himself.11 The treatise of Nizam al-Mnlk among the works presented to the Sul
tAn was the only one which he approved of and adopted as a guide a
But it must not be treated as a mere handbook of dav-to day administration.
Nor must it be regarded as containing simply practical suggestions for the
improvement of an administrative system. It is more than that. It is, in fact.
'• E. G. Browne, op. cil., London. 1915, Vol. II. p. 212; Muhammad Iqbal.
"Wa*Aya-i NijAm al-Mulk," Oriental College Magazine, Lahore, Nov. 1927, Vol. IV,
No. 1. pp 1-8; SulaimSn Nadawi. op. eil.. pp. 12 14; H. Bowen, op. oil.. Part IV,
pp. 778-78.
“ Charles Rieu, Notes on tho H'optya. MSS. British Museum. Or. 256. A Add.
28-267; Catalogue of the Persian ManuoeripU in the British Museum. 1879. Vol. I.
p. 446.
Naod’iA. MS.. British Museum, Or. 256 fol. 5b.
" Sulaimhn Nadawi. op. eil., p. 12.
•• H. Bowen, op. cil.. p. 778.
" Idem, "Niplm al-Mulk," Encyclopaedia of Ielam, London. 1936, Vol. III.
p. 934.
Siyltaal Ndmeh, ed. Ch, Scheier. L’^coie dee Languoe Onentalee I’ivanleo,
Pana. 1891. p. I.
11 Ibid., pp. 8, 210.
•• Ibid., p. 2.
750
Nif&m al-Mulk Turn
the expression of • realistic political theory which emerges out of an actual
political situation, and, therefore, helps ns to understand the stage in the
development of Muslim polity reached in tho fifth/eleventh oentury.
The U'atdya is the exposition ot his theory of vizierate. It consists of the
counsels which he is said to have addressed in the "last days of his life,"”
to his eldest son, Fakfcr al-Mulk, who also held the office of vizier under the
Saljuq Sullins Barkiy&ruq and Sanjar, and was assassinated, like his father
by a BafiniM in 600/1106.
It is fairly easy to present Nijim al-Mulk as one who largely differs from
the past writers of political treatises and from his contemporaries, both in
his selection of the political institutions which form the subject-matter of his
writings, and in his approach to those institutions. The method adopted by
him in explaining the principles of State administration throws light on his
outlook about the political situation in his days. His approach and outlook
regarding the political problems are. indeed, interrelated. A modern scholar,
author of a pioneer work on Muslim political thought, regards his method as
"historical." "If it ia possible," he writes, "to label tho Khwaiah's method
with any particular epithet, it is that his method is, to a large extent, histo
rical.”" He considers it historical because "in nearly every case he proves the
truth of a principle which he chooses to propound, on the touchstone of tra
dition or historical facts, though some of the facts he relates are not chrono
logically correct.But it is in a limited sense that his approach can be regarded
as historical. It is true that he makes reiterated references to history. But
this is not all that makes the historical method what it really is. This method
does not consist exclusively in citing historical instances. That is only a pre
liminary. The historical method consists basically in drawing conclusions
objectively from the study of historical facts. The political maxims which
Nijim al-Mulk lays down as the guiding principles for the successful adminis
tration of the Stato, are, in fact, the inductive generalizations from the study
of history. They are, indeed, empirical conclusions drawn from his personal
experience of practical politics and from his observation of existing conditions.
"No event." he believee, "ever happens to take place in the world which
might not have occurred already several times. As one might have read, or
known, or heard about the circumstances a particular event had brought in,
one can surmise the consequences that would follow it in caae it happens to
occur again.""
In effect, he is arguing that history repeats itself, but instead of proceeding
•• Nayyiri Rathfidn. NawwAb Pia al-Din Abmad Kh4n of Delhi. Notice
prefixed to the NaM'ih, or Wagdya, MS. British Museum Or. 256, fol. 2a.
M 'Apt Malik Juwaini, op. oil.. p. 186.
“ H. K- Sberwtoi, Stadia in Mudim /•olitioal Thought and Adminutraiion,
Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, Lahore, 1945, 2nd ed.. p. 131.
•* /bid.
" H’aMya. p. 82.
751
A History of Muslim Philosophy
from the past to the present he follows a reverse course when he first draws
conclusions from the observation of the conditions around him and then turns
them back upon the past. History, for him, is not the solution of problems,
but the endorser of preconceived solutions. The essence of his approach to the
political issue lies in the blend of the historical method and the method of
observation. Though not very successful in following the historical method,
he may bo regarded as the most historically-minded writer on political topics
both among his predecessors and his contemporaries.
This treatment of history squares well with the object with which he pro
ceeds to formulate a particular political theory. He is concerned with theorizing
those institutions and their principles and problems which had developed into
an actual political constitution, resting mainly on the Sultanate (kingship)
and the vizierate. and to bring them to their possible perfection by suggesting
practical reforms. He makes ample use of the past and contemporary history
to give his personal ideas the appearance of historical facts.
The political institutions of which he speaks had real roots in the political
life of the peoples who inhabited a large part of the eastern lands of the
'AbbAsid Caliphate, mostly non-Arab races. Most of those institutions had
existed there long before the Great Saljdqs came to adopt them, and still
much earlier than they could find their theoretical exposition in the writings
of NijAm al-Mulk. The absolute monarchy, for instance, the office of vizierate.
the monarchical form of administration of justice, the feudal system, the order
of courtiers, the system of espionage, etc., were the institutions handed down
by ancient Persia to the successive generations. Though modified in some
respects under the influence of tho new Muslim political theory, those political
institutions had, nevertheless, succeeded in preserving much of their original
Persian character, and exerting, in their turn, a good deal of influence both
on the political thought of the indigenous people even after their conversion
to Islam as well as on the political system, largely of Persian origin, that
NijAm al-Mulk seeks to set out. Thia makes us look upon hia writings aa the
earliest exposition of what may be called the Persian political theory.
Side by side with this political theory, but with different notions and with
a different approach to political problems, there existed the constitutional
theory of the Arab jurists of whom MAwardi" (e. 364/974-400/1058), the
author of the Ah Um al-Stdldniyyah, was the most eminent. Among thia email
group of jurists mention must be made of abu Ya'la (380/990-458/1066), a
contemporary of MAwardi, and author of another rlAlnm oI-SaildniyyaA," and
of ImAm al-Haramain al-Juwaini (419/1028-478/1085), an intimate friend" of
" Abu al-Hasan 'Ali b. Mubammad al-MAwardi, af.4AAdm ol-SulMnlyyoA, ed.
R. Enger, Bonn, 1835.
" Mubammad b. Husain abu Ya'li al-FarrA'. al-AhUm al SulMnlyytih. ed.
Mubammad HAmid al-Faqqi. Cairo, 1337/1938.
•• WofUya. p. 13
752
NijAm al-Mulk Tuai
Nij&m al-Mulk. whose treatise Gh‘y&th al-Vmam“ has not yet Been the light
of the day, (Ab political thinkers, the two have not yet been properly studied
by students of the history of Muslim constitutional theory.“) While the Persian
political theory attempts to throw light on the sovereign powers of the king,
by analysing the institutions characteristic of this royal office, the consti
tutional theory puts forward the doctrine of Caliphate. It will be in place
here to look into the general nature of the juristic approach to the political
problems, and more especially to tho institution of kingship, which Nijim
al-Mulk also treats, with even greater interest. This will help us to appreciate
the realistic element in his thought and approach.
In the first instance, these two seta of contemporary theories, one of the
jurists and the other of an administrator, differ in their subject-matter. A
comparison of the contents of the two treatises of Nit&m al-hfulk with those,
for example, of the Ahkam al-Sulidniyyah of MAwartli, would hardly' make
one regard the two writers as dealing with the problem and institutions of
the same political community living in the same age. Of the office of the
£Ao/i/aA, his powers and qualifications, the method of his election, tho division
of vizicrate between the unlimited vizierate (wirdrat tafuAtf) and the limited
vizieratc (wizaral tan/idh), the legal difference between their powers, the
economic institutions of jizyah (poll-tax), zakat (tax on the accumulated pro
perty), fai' (goods taken from the unbelievers), kharaj (land-tax), and of to
many other institutions of religio-political character, which form the chapter
beads of the Afikdm al-Sulfdniyyah, the author of the Siydsal Ndmch and the
Ifasdya makes no mention at all. And, likewise, most of the topics discussed
by NifAm al-Mulk have been avoided by' MAwardi and other jurists, except
the offices of the SultAn and vizier, which they treat on a different plane
of thought. In their constitutional theory, the SullAn occupies a position
which is quite different from what he actually enjoyed in the political set-up
of those dayB.
To treat the SultAn as a governor by usurpation (amir bi al-istild') is to
bring him down to the position of the other provincial governors appointed by
the Caliph. This amounts to arguing, as they seem to do, that the SulfAn did
actually- derive his powers from the "Imperial" authority of the Caliph. They
leave actual facte out of account by putting the main emphasis on the formal
legitimization of the Sullin's authority by tho Hhalt/ab, which was but
an insignificant aspect of their mutual relations. In doing bo, they arc apt
41 ImAm al-Haramain Abu al-Ma'Ali 'Abd al-Malik b. ‘Abd Allah, (ZAiyU* al-
Vmam. MS. Bankipur Library. There ia a copy of this manuscript in the Seminar
Library of the law Department, Oamania University, Hyderabad Deccan.
India.
“ For a study of their constitutional theories, see M. Ruknuddin Hassan's
thesis: “‘AM-i SaUjigah-i 'Cfma he Ba'd Mumtaz Styim Mu/akkir," Seminar
Library of Political Science Department. Osrnania University. Hyderabad Deccan.
India.
753
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to lose sight of his sovereign powers, which he enjoyed independently of the
Caliph's assent.
This limitation of the juristic approach to contemporary politics was bound
to arise from the fact that ita exponents were building their argument on the
foundations of the political order of the Caliphate, which had ceased to exist
as a real force for about two hundred years. Deprived of any real power to
shape the political life of the Muslims, the Caliphate, as a political system,
continued, however, to exist in a theory which found its elaborate exposition
in the writings of the juristic school of the fifth/eleventh century. But by
interpreting the political fiction of the Caliphate in terms of political realities
of their times, these jurists, regardless of the actual facts, were indoctrinating
the people with the belief that the Caliph was still the real source of all author
ity. They were, thus, unable to appreciate the fact that it was the autocratic
rule of the independent prince, and not that of the ‘AbbSsid Caliph, under
which the people had actually been living, and they failed to see that by legiti
mizing the authority of the Sulj&n. the Caliph only recognized hia de facto
sovereignty; and that this in practice did not render him subordinate to the
Caliph. Their juristic theory could not take into full account the growth of
absolute monarchy in the Muslim polity upon which a formidable political
structure had come to rest.
It is this monarchical system of government developing under the aristo
cratic rule of the prince, aa against the constitutional structure of the Cali-
phatc, that Nizam al-Mulk attempts to study. His political theory represents
a particular phase of the development of the Muslim polity which waa cha
racterized by kingship. As such, it is an essential part of his contribution to
Muslim political thought.
The first thing remarkable about his exposition of the institution of kingship
is that ho is careful to make no reference to the Khotitah as the head of the
Muslim political community, and to say nothing about the constitutional
relations of the Saljflq ruler with the 'Abbisid Caliph. He rarely uses the title
of Sulfln for the Saljfiq King,4’ and as for the term amir mtulauli (governor
by usurpation), it does not occur at all throughout his writings, both being
the terms of the constitutional law employed by the jurists to denote the legal
superiority of the Caliph over the prince. Instead, he generally calls his ruler
pudjJdA—a Persian term for the king. All this may reasonably be taken as
a conscious effort on the part of Nitfm al-Mulk to avoid any discussion or
even a phrase which might involve any reference to the legal relations of the
Caliph and the prince, for hia object in studying the monarchical constitution
of the SaljOq Empire ia to represent his royal master in his full independent
position. To this political objective his Siyaml Nameh was expressly dedi
cated, for it waa composed at the instance of the great Saljuq ruler. Malik-
tbih. as the Ahtam al-SulMniyyah, the earliest treatise on the constitutional
A'itfdM/ .VameA. pp. 7. OS. 88; W’aMtya. pp. 43, 44. 48.
754
NifAm al-Mulk Tuai
theory of the Caliphate had been written by Mawardi only forty years before
at the instance of an AbbAsid Caliph** to vindicate his claim to sovereign
authority. This indicates the existence of a theoretical oonflict between tho
powers of the Caliph and the king, whiah of course had been prompted by the
historical events which preceded it. Conscious of the growing weakness of
the Buwaihid dynasty in the beginning of the fifth/cleventh century, the
‘AbbAsid Caliph QAdir' (381/991-422/1031) and his successor Qaim (422/1031-
467/1075), during whose rules the juristic theory of the Caliphate was formulat
ed, attempted to achieve independence from the tutelage of the Buwaihids."
On the other hand, the Saljuqs. too. who had succeeded both the Buwaihids
and the Qhaznawids after overthrowing their power, were no less keen to
assert the authority they had established st the point of the sword. In spite of
acknowledging the nominal authority of the who, in turn, had
legitimized their rule and conferred upon them titles of honour,*’ the Saljuqs
did not hesitate to inflict humiliation upon him whenever it was demanded
by the political situation. Kunduri, the vizier of Tugbril Beg (d. 455/1062),
is said to have withheld the pension of the Caliph on his refusal to marry his
**
daughter to the Saljuq prince. On another occasion, Malik-jhih is said to
have intended to banish the Caliph al-Muqtadi from Baghdad."
Under this situation it was not possible for Nijam al-Mulk to make any
mention of the Khalifah without recognizing him as the supreme authority
over his Saljuq prince This would have been inconsistent with the objective
he had in mind in writing his treatise.
His effort to avoid any discussion of the legal or political relations of the
Caliph and the king is significant. He is seeking to defend his prince against
the theoretical encroachment on his independent position by the advocates
of the Caliph's authority.
From the outset NijAm al-Mulk seems to have taken it for granted that the
real source from which the king derives his authority, in theory or in practice,
is not the institution of the Caliphate. That point has been removed from the
plan of discussion. The reason is not far to soek. As it was inconsistent with
his political ends to recognize the Caliph as the supreme authority, so an
explicit refutation of his claims in this respect would have made Ni?am al-Mulk
** QAtji Ahmad Mian Akhtar JOnAgarhi, "Ai-M&wsrdi: A Sketch of His Life
and Works," Islamic Culture. Hyderabad Deccan. India. July 1944, p- 298;
H. A. R. Oibb. "MAwardl’s Theory of Khil&fat'" Islamic Culture. July 1937. p. 292.
•* Gibb, op. eit.
•• Hiund Allah Mustaufi. op. eit.. Vol. I, p. 437; Bundari, op.cit.. p. 8.
*’ Hamd Allah Mustaufl, op. oil., pp. 439. 449; Muhammad b. ‘Al> b. SulaimAn
RAwandi. Rabat al-SudOr, Gibb Memorial Series. Leiden. 1921, p. 105
*■ RAwandi. op. eil.. p. 111.
*• ‘Abd al-RahmAn b. ‘Ali b. Muhammad ibn al-Jauzi, al-Muntapim ft al TArikh
al-MulUk w-al-tlmam. Dairatul-Maarif, Hyderabad Deccan. India, 1339/1939,
pp. 81-62; QAJi Ahmad b. Muhammad al-GhatfAri, T<lritJ-> NigariMn, Bombay,
1245/1829, Vol. IX. p. 122.
755
A History of Muslim Philosophy
unnecessarily provoke a controversy about the powers of the two offices. To
litis dilemma he finds a solution in what may be called in modern language
the theory of divine right—the theory that tie king enjoys the right to rule
over his subjects by virtue of divine appointment. This becomes obvious from
the study of the first chapters in the SiyUaal Ndmck, which mainly explain
the divine nature of this institution, and ite functions ordained by God. Ho
puts it in very dear words when he says: “In every age God selocta one from
amongst mankind and adorns him with prinoely skills, and entrusts him
with the affairs of the world and the comfort of the subjects."*" This is the
remarkably simplified hypothesis of his theory of kingship ; he does not argue
to prove it, but simply states it as a self-evident truth. This proposition,
as advanced by Nijam al-Mulk. suffers the logical weakness common to all
the expositions of the divine right theory which set out this hypothesis as a
fait accompli, to be simply accepted rather than to be argued. It is indeed a
dogmatic belief rather than a rational proposition. It is, however, important
for our purpose, because it serves to explain how Nijam al-Mulk comes to
expound a political theory which is out and out a vindica’ n of autocracy,
and how he is led from the outset to reject the democratic principles
enunciated by the advocates of the Caliphate.
After explaining the nature of the king's appointment, NijAm al-Mulk
discusses the purposes of kingship in a political community. He argues the
raison d’ilrt of this institution, and throws more light on its divine nature.
The essential function which the king has to fulfil in human society is to
bring order out of chaos, and to maintain peace and justice. This is what be
means when he says, "If the people show any sign of disobedience or
contempt towards the SJorioA (the Canon-Law), or if thoy fail to obey God
and to comply with His comrpands, then he intends to infiict punishment on
them for their conduct. . . . Due to their sin they bring this wrath upon
themselves. Benevolent kings disappear from amongst them. Swords are drawn
and bloodshed follows; and whosoever is powerful does as he pleases, till the
sinners are perished in those calamities and bloodshed. . . . Ultimately, power
goes to one of the people whom God by His grace blesses with success
according to his worth, and endows with wisdom and knowledge."*1
Then NifAm al-Mulk goes on to say that the ultimate object to which the
king should direct his efforts is to create and maintain wholesome conditions
so "that the people may live with comfort under the shadow of his justice."*’
It amounts to a sort of "mystical" interpretation of historical changes,
bringing about tho rise and fall of rulers. The king has been represented here
aa an instrument of God's will, fulfilling a divine function in political upheavals.
It ia as a punishment for their disobedience that people are first deprived
by the Almighty of the benevolent king. Then His wrath takes the shape of
•“ S>ya»U. p. S.
»> {hid., pp. 6-4.
•• Ibid.
756
Ni»4m al-Mulk TOk
calamities and upheavals. And it is again by His mercy that a man rises to
the position of a sovereign and brings about peace and order. Thus, in this
divine order of political society all things proceed from God's will, and it is from
His supreme authority that the king derives hia powers. While speaking of the
monarch who succeeds in establishing his rule by subduing the warring elements
and in executing God's will by bringing peace and tranquillity to the people,
N’ilAm al-Mulk ia not unmindful of the victorious career of the Saljuq dynasty,
which had risen to sovereign position by ita own strength and successfully
established an orderly government. Thia becomes clear when he says that it
is by divine providence that bis Saljbq master has been destined to rule his
**
subjects.
This implies that the king's authority rests, in the first place, on
direct authorization from God and, in the second place, on his own ability
to gain political power in which he ia helped by God the Almighty. He
is equally emphatic on the principle of hereditary kingship, which is always
an essential part of the divine right doctrine. According to him. the kingly
office is essentially of divine origin as well as hereditary, and should pass,
like the kingship in ancient Persia, from father to son.** And it is according
to this principle that his Saljuq prince, he claims, has inherited this dignified
office from his great ancestors.
** Nitini al-Mulk’s vindication of the claims
of the king to sovereign powers is Itased on a three-fold justification, namely,
the divine sanction, the conquest of power, and tho hereditary succession.
Ho later states this more clearly in an anecdote in which Nuahtrwin, the
PeSsian King, has been shown aa asserting his eligibility to the throne in a
royal speech addressed to his feudatories: "First, this kingship has been
bestowed upon me by God the Almighty; secondly, I have inherited it from
my father; thirdly,... I have recaptured the kingdom by the sword."
**
It is obvious now that in explaining the nature of the supreme authority
in the political community, he takes the position of a "legitimist" who believes
not in human choice, but in divine appointment and hereditary succession.
Thia exposition of kingship is significant from yet another point of view.
There is more in it than the mere explanation of the divine origin of the king's
powers. It may be regarded as an effort of Nifim al-Mulk to seek moral justi
fication for tho passive obedience which the monarch has the right to demand
from his subjects, and also for his unlimited authority to oontrol the adminis
tration and political life of the people. The two are oorrelative to each other
and follow as oorollarire from this legitimist doctrine. This helps ns to under
stand tho relation between ruler and subjects as envisaged in hia political
theory.
He lays great emphasis on obedience as the most essential duty of tho people
•• Ibid., pp. A-7.
“ Ibid., p. 181.
“ Ibid., p. 7.
•• Ibid., p. 29
757
A History of Muslim Plnloeophy
towards the ruler, since he brings to them peace ami prosperity after they
have been deprived of it as a punishment for their diaobodienoo to God.
This has been stated more explicitly in another work, tho H'osdya. in which
he discusses the question of obedienoq to royal authority. “No doubt," he
says, "it is but obligatory to worship the Almighty, and to obey the icing.
The common poople generally, and the royal favourites and courtiers
particularly, are under the obligation of such obedience, and more especially
one who has been entrusted with authority in the matters of administration
and finance."1’ The king ia entitled to receive obedience from his subjects
as a divinely appointed authority. Nijim al-MuDt asserts that the very fact
that the king succeeds in establishing hia rule ia sufficient to make us regard
his authority as resting on the divine sanction. "Without the aid of God
Almighty,” he argues, "an individual can never become a ruler, nor can he
bring the world into the bondage of subjugation. Though there might be
several causes of his rise to political power, they all refer undoubtedly to the
same divine help.”18
The gist of this retaarkably simplified contention ia that it is the duty of
the poople to obey the prinoe without questioning the validity of hia authority:
it is valid because it is de facto. A de facto ruler may be unjust and may put
the country into disorder, but Nipim al-Mulk, like a true legitimist, is careful
to avoid this question as it ultimately involves the right of the people to
racist a ruler who is doing wrong to them. If confusion and disorder ever take
place in a political society, he attempts to interpret it as resulting not from
the misrule of the monarch but from the sinful acts of the people themselves.
It is, therefore, by remaining obedient to the king that they can enjoy peace
and prosperity which is restored to them under his rule. The king can rightly
inflict punishment upon those who. “not realizing the value of security and
comfort," might revolt against his authority.** There is no doubt that Nij&ru
al-Mulk believes in the principle of passive and unconditional obedienoe on
the part of the people, and leaves them without any moral right to resist
the royal authority.
A political theory like thia, with the belief in the divine appointment of
the king, coupled with the principle of passive obedience by the people, can
result only in the advocacy of absolute monarchy. The prinoe of whom Ni?Am
al-Mulk is speaking here is surely an absolute monarch in that his powers arc
unrestricted by any human power. The only authority whioh oould claim, at
least in theory, a certain amount of legal right to impose any obligations on
a Muslim prince was tho ‘Abbtaid Caliph, to whom, we have seen, Nigim
al-Mulk avoids making any reference in this respect.
It is obvious from his attempt to explain the administrative system with
constant reference to the royal office that the monarch Is the sovereign
•’ H’a^yu. p. «*.
*• Ibid., p. 43.
“ Siydtal. p. «
758
Ni0m al-Mulk Tftm
authority in his realm and, as «uch, in the source of all political power; all are
subordinate to him, and are endowed by him with powers and privilege* ac
cording to their capability. In spite of representing the king as directly respon
sible for the welfare of the whole country, Ni^am al-Mulk does not regard him
as accountable to tho people for his political conduct. On the question of the
kings' responsibility in public affaire he seems to take again the position of
a supporter of the divine right of kings, and holds them responsible, not before
the people, but before God. That, however, has not been laid down expressly,
and has to be concluded only indirectly from the statements in which, for
example, he says that on the Day of Judgment the king will be summoned
before God to answer for hia conduct towards his subjects," and that tho
government officials are accountable to the king, and the king in his turn is
responsible to the Almighty. “
What NijAm al-Mulk is attempting to set out here is indeed tho ooncept of
an absolute monarch. At this point he cornea much nearer to the Persian idea
of kingship and to the Shi'ite doctrine of imdmah (the leadership of political
community), both founded on the divine right of the Head of the State, than
to the constitutional theory of the Sunni Arab jurists, which was based on
democratic principles. An absolute monarch claiming direct authorisation
from God to manage the affaire of a political society was an ide* quite foreign
to Arab thinkers. The Khaii/ah had always been regarded by them, at least
in theory, as an elected functionary" to whom powers were delegated, not
directly by God, but by the electors. They, therefore, held that the K/tali/ah
was subject to certain legal restrictions. This democratic idea of Caliphate is in
striking contrast with the Persian notion of absolute monarchy revived in NijAm
al-Muik's political theory. It would not be wrong to suppose that this concept
of a divinely appointed ruler came to him mainly from the political system
of ancient Persia, and not from the contemporary Shi'ite doctrine," whioh,
as systematically evolved under the FAtimid rule in Egypt, was definitely a
much later development in comparison with the Persian ooncept. Thia is
obvious from his repeated references to the political principle on which the
monarchical constitution i>i ancient Persia was based, but he makes no such
references to the political ideas of the Shi'ites, of whose political activities
in the form of BAfini movement he is, on the contrary, vehemently critical.••
But it must be admitted at the same time that his exposition of divine
right is lacking both in philosophical depth and systematic treatment with
which this doctrine waa set out in the FAtimid dogmatics. The reason for
•• Ibid., p. 9.
Ibid . pp. 39, 43.
•' Al-MAwardi. op. cil., p. 5; abu Ya'lA, op. dl.. pp. 3-4. 9; ImAm al-Haramam.
QU'/Oli al-Vmam, fols. 29-31.
•• For the FAfimid doctrine, see "'Alani al talAm Thiqat al-ImAm, al-Majalis
al-Mustansirlyyah," in Mati'MAl al-Fdtimlyyln. ed. KAmil Husain. Cairo, n.d.,
pp. 113-1S.
“ Siydmt. Chapters 43, 48. 47
758
A History of Muslim Philosophy
imitating the Persian model of kingship is to be sought in his contemporary
historical conditions. On the one hand, he is expressing, as pointed out before,
the popular idea of kingship prorailing in the territories oonquered by the
Saljuqa, and. on the other hand, ho is seeking to replace the Turkish oonoept
of tribal leadership by the Persian ideal of abaolute monarchy.
The peculiar conditions under which he had to work out his political theory-
made the adoption of autocratic rule inevitable. The institution of Khanate,
that is, the tribal leadership among the SaljOqs, had largely become incon
sistent with the stage of political development which they had reached by
this time. Though inrested with political power under tribal customs, their
Kban was far from having any territorial basis for his authority, with the
result that their tribal system of government was found inadequate to cope
with the problems of the large territorial empire which they had some to
rule. The empire they had inherited from the Qhaznawids and the Buwaihids
was far vaster than the territory hitherto known to them, and more advanced
in political principles aa compared with their own tribal customs. Despite the
large powers that were conferred upon tho j£h»n by the tribal system, he waa
regarded much more m the leader of-a large tribe, than as a sovereign in the
proper sense. There were other "minor leaders" of small groups of families
who, at least in the early stage of their political career, oould lay claim to
political power derived not from the "major” tribal leader but from the tribal
customary law. It waa not until the reign of Malikthah, the third ruler of the
great Saljuq dynasty, that the SaljOq prinoe oould become a real autocratic
sovereign. And it was Nif&m al-Mulk. the all-powerful vizier and the directing
mind” in all State affairs throughout the reign of Alp Arsl&n and Malikab&h.
who waa mainly responsible for altering their nomadic tribal political
organization to harmonize with the requirements of a territorial empire. He
converted their power into a centralized autocratic authority essential for
successful government in his time.
What he is attempting now in his writings by theorizing about kingship
and its institutional organization is to provide the SaljGq monarchy with a
theoretical oasis. He is seeking, moreover, to shape it on the model of Persian
kingBhip about which he had read in tho “works of the ancients" (Indub-i
pifjfinagdn),** and had seen revived in tho monarchichal constitution of the
Qhaznawids. To him this Persian monarchy, with its autocratic principles,
was more adaptable to the new circumstances than any other typo of institu
tion which waa founded on democratic principles. Only an absolute monarch,
he thinks, can vigorously deal with the nomad Turkumlna and the prill leaders
of the Qhuzz tribes in subduing ‘heir power to a centralized authority. There
fore. he advisee his prinoe that God Almighty has created the king most
powerful of all people, and all are subordinate to him. It ia from Him that they
“ Ibn KbaUik&n, op, eiL, Vol. I. Pp. 179-80,
•• SlgUaU. p. 10.
760
Nitim al-Mulk TCuu
take their subsistence money and their position. He should treat them in
such a way that they always realize their position, end may not throw off
the bondage of allegiance; and, moreover, they should not be allowed to do
whatever they like; they should do only what they have been ordered to
*
do." ’ His aim in stressing the absolute superiority of the king is to introduce
a central authority with autocratio powers in the political system of the
Saljuqs, the majority of whom had not yet got fully accustomed to this
principle of government and administration.
To imitate the Persian absolute monarchy was also useful in tackling the
problems of tho growing "feudal system" in the SaljOq Empire. The Persian
institution of kingship had a record of feudal traditions, and oould furnish
the Saljuqs with tho laws applicable in many respects to their relation with
the feudatories and the subjects.
The system of land assignment -what Nit&m al-Mulk calls the **
ddri —
may be regarded undoubtedly as the Eastern form of feudalism as against th>
feudalism of medieval Europe. To a great extent, NijAm al-Mulk may b
considered responsible for developing, if not for introducing, it on systematic
lines within the political structure of the Saljuq Empire. It was due to tho
military organization of the Saljflqs, on which their political structure ulti
mately came to rest, together with the problems of revenue administration, that
the practice of assigning fiefs (iqta't) to the military chiefs, soldiers, and to
other private persons was adopted. There were also the diAqdns, tho old Per
sian land owners, who continued to exorcise proprietory rights as before. This
system, in brief, was designed aa a means of paying the soldiers and of oollecl •
ing the revenues.
The principles on which NifAm al-Mulk suggests that the iyld * ddri should
be based develop it into a feudal system very different from the Western
feudalism, both in character and in social and political consequences. It is
basically different in the tenure of the feudatories, in their legal rights over
the land and the ru'lyyuA (vassals) aa well as in the relation of the king aa the
overlord with the mtqW'i (feudatories), on the one hand, and with tho subjocta.
on the other. The iqfd' system, aa envisaged by Nijam al-Mulk, ia by no means
strictly hereditary aa a general rule. There is nothing in his writing to suggest
that he is in favour of assigning lands to an individual with a specified legal
right to transmit it by inheritance. On the other hand, in his system the feu
datoriee come to oocupy a position more akin to that of the tax-collectors with
large administrative powers than that of the "feudal lords," in the muiieval
sense. In their relations with the vassals they are like the fahra/w (guards), and
in case a feudatory fails to treat them well, "the fief, it is suggested, must be
•' Ibid., p. 183.
•• For the igfd' system under the Saljdqe, see W. Barthold. Turkoman down to
the Monjol Intarion. tr. H. A. R. Gibb. Oxford University Press, 2nd nd., 1928.
pp. 305-09; A- K. 8. Lambton, Landlord and Pmanl in Portia. Royal Institute
of International Affairs, Oxford University Press, London. 1953. Chap. Ill
781
A History of Muslim Philosophy
withdrawn from him "" Besides, "the officials and the feudatories must be
changed every two or three years eo that they may not get strong in their
fortifications. "T#
It appears that side by side with developing the iqtd' system, NijAm al-Mulk
attempts to enlarge the powers of the king as a means of checking the centri
fugal tendencies which tend to appear in feudalism. This leads him to put
forward a theory of land-ownership which goes well with his idea of absolute
monarchy. Ho holds that "the feudatories who hold the fiefs must know that
they have no other right over the subjects than to extract from them with
civility and oourtesy the lawful amount which has been assigned to them, i.e..
to the feudatories, and when that has been taken, the subjects shall be secure
in their persons, property, wives, and children, and in their goods and estates.
... They must know that the land and the subjects ell belong to the king,
and the feudatories and the governors (uAlin), set over their head, are like
the guards to the subjects, as the king ia to others."”
In entertaining such a view regarding land-ownership, Nijim al-Mulk departs
from what may be regarded as the Islamic theory, which attributes the absolute
ownership of land, not to the Head of the 8tate, but to the State itself, as
entrusted to it by God. It is also a clear departure from the traditional oon-
cept of the Qfauzz tribes, who looked upon the land that they would oome to
occupy aa the common property of their families. It was this tribal oonoept
of land-ownership that Ni?Am al-Mulk was seeking to modify basically, aa it
waa out of tune with the administrative principle of a centralised empire
which had now passed into their hands. To him it waa essential to bring both
the land and the subjects under the central authority of the king.
A good deal of his theory, it appears, has oome to him from the old feu
dal Persia. Thia is evident from his attempt to explain this principle by an
anecdote from Persian history in which the famous vizier Buzurjmihr has
been represented aa advising NuthlrwAn. that "the kingdom (wMyaJi) be
longs to the king (malik), and the king has entrusted the dominion, and not
the subjects, to the military. When the military is not well wishing unto the
kingdom, and kind to the people . .. and takes the power to arrest and im
prison .. . and to appoint and dismiss, what difference then remains between
the king and the military, for that power really belongs to the king, and not
to the military."” On another occasion Nuifilrwin exhorts his feudatories to
treat the people well, and only to take from them what ia due and just; and
he stresses the fact that the dominion belongs to him, and it is by him that
the estates have been assigned to them.’*
NijAm al-Mulk'a feudal theory takes away much of the powers from the
- S.ya-rr, p. is.
'• Ibid., p. 87.
” Ibid., p. Mi.
" Ibid., p. 1S3
’• Ibid., p.»
782
NifAm al-Mulk fun
hands of feudal lords whioh they enjoyod, for instance, in Western feudalism.
It leaves them with limited power to oollect the revenues, and to have only
“a fixed amount in their hands."’4 Moreover, it removes them from the position
of being the sole intermediaries between the king and tho subjects, preventing
the latter from getting into direct contact with him.’4 In his system, the
direct reeponaibility for the well-being of the subjects rests, not with the
feudatories, but with the king, and, therefore, he suggests that the king should
send spies (jdsiMn) and special confidants ('iAudej'4 to inquire secretly about
administration in the fiefs in order to get reliable information about the
condition of tho subjects, and urges him to dismiss a feudatory who forbids
subjects to represent their cases to the king in order to seek redress for
grievances.”
All thia results in the concentration of all the political and administrative
powers, as sought by Nijam al-Mulk, in the central authority of the king
which was once enjoyed by tho Persian autocrat.
Though his idea of kingship is in essence of Persian origin, it differs in
certain respects from the old Persian prototype, and has been refashioned in
other respects under the influence of Muslim political theory and practice.
It is, on the whole, an attempt to readjust the Persian model with the con
temporary social and political structure.
The moet important point of difference is that NijAm al-Mulk is not an
incamationist. Unlike the ancients who could look upon their Persian monarch
aa tho incarnation of Divinity,’• he treats his ruler aa a simple human being.
In spite of onoe calling the prince the "shadow of God on earth” (fill Allah fi
al-ard) in the Wafaya”—a phrase which does not occur at all in the SiyaMl
A'amefc—he does not go to the extent of clothing him with divine attributes
so as to make him appear an embodiment of Divinity. The phrase is devoid
here of any mystical meanings, and has been used in the ordinary sense of a
metaphor, to mean that the exalted office of the king is like a shadow provided
by God on earth under which mankind may find peace and security. No doubt,
he speaks of this monarch aa "adorned with the virtues and excellences which
were lacked by kings all over the world,"44 yet there is in him no tendency
to regard the king aa a superhuman being in any metaphysical sense. Among
those excellent virtues with which his prince is adorned, he counts, for example,
good appearanoe, justice, courage, generosity, eto." But they are all divinely-
« Ibid., p. 91.
’• Ibid., p. «8.
'• Ibid., p. 119.
” Ibid., p. 28.
’• Do Lacy O'Leary. A Short Hilary of th* Fdfimid CaliphaU. Kogan Paul.
London, 1923. pp. 3-4; J. Wollhausen, Arab Kingdom and Iu Fall. tr. Khu.la
Bukhih. Calcutta. 1927. p. 67.
" Wuplya, p. 43
Siydoal. p. 7
• Ibid
7«3
A History of Muslim Philosophy
gifted qualities, not divine attributes. Therefore, his prinoe is by no meant
an incarnation of God.
Far from attaching any "mystical" or metaphysical sense to the concept
of kingship, he believes that "the king is endowed by God with wisdom and
knowledge so that he can treat each of his subjects according to his worth
and can give each a position according to his value,and, again, "His (i.e.
the king's) wisdom is just like a lamp that gives off abundant light. People
can find their way in ite light and can come out of darkness;” and he does
not need himself to be guided by others.” We can see his prinoe bearing a
small rescmblanoe both to the Platonic philosopher-king” and to tho Shi'ite
teaeher-lmim,” but suffering from an innate inability to become the true
image of either. This seems mainly due to the fact that Nifim al-Mulk is by
temperament much more a matter-of-fact exponent of popular ideas than a
real philosopher, unable to develop his thoughts into philosophical oonoepts.
He may be taken as possibly expressing a general belief about kingship pre
vailing in hia days, in which the old Persian idea of the divinely-appointed
monarch in ite moderate form—and not the oonoept of divine monarch—was
superficially intermingled with the Neo-Platonic interpretation of the philo
sopher-king aa an embodiment of perfect wisdom. His concept of tho king is
that of a statesman who is primarily concerned with general beliefs rather
than with philosophical generalizations.
His Persian ideal is modified also in another respect, obviously under the
direct influence of Muslim thought. Though he treats his prince as a divinely-
appointed ruler, inverted with unlimited powers, he does not regard him by
any means as a law-giver. A human authority with absolute legislative powers
has never existed in Muslim polity, because legislation in the proper sense of the
term has never been recognized aa a human function in the Muslim legal
theory. According to this theory, there is already existing a divine Law
ffiJori'aA) supreme, eternal, and perfect , which ia theoretically as binding
on the ruler himself, however autocratic he may be in practice, as on his
subjects. This is what seems to have prevented Ni»am al-Mulk from attributing
any legislative power to his prinoe. His king, on the other hand, ia subject to
the supreme Law of God, and, is moreover, an instrument for enforcing that
Law, and for making peoplo abide by it. He emphasizes that “it is obligatory
for the king to seek knowledge of religious matters, and to oomply with, and
make arrangements to carry out, the commands of God and the traditions of
the Prophet, and to pay respect to religious scholars.”” Therefore, it is the
•• Ibid., p. 6.
Ibid., p. 7.
M Plato. Republic. Bk. V.
“ For the exposition of teacher Imtm. soo Abroad Hamid al-Dta Kirmkni.
Rahal al-'Agl, ed. KSmil Husain and Muffafa Hilmi. .VoMlutrU rt-ZrUimlyytn.
Cairo. 1062. pp. 60 00
" Siydeat, p. 54.
764
Nij&m al-Mulk TOai
duty of the ruler to appoint judges (qafia) to execute the flAari'cA aa his
deputies (nd'Mn).
This discussion of the ruler’s responsibility in enforcing the (SJnri'uA, apart
from explaining a principle of Muslim policy, is also interesting for ita historical
significance in respect of the Saljuqs. This shows Nigim al-Mulk's attempt
to teach the SaljQqs the principles of the Muslim legal system and to famil
iarize them with the law of the more civilized people of whom they had be-
oome the rulers. But his royal masters wore altogether strangers to all culture,*1
and there is no reliable information to prove that they could even read and
write. Therefore, books, as the direct source of knowledge of religious Law,
were out of their reach. This seems to be the reason why Nij&m al-Mulk
advisee his prince to got himsolf acquainted with the teachings of religion
through the debates of the scholars ('ulama) which ho should cause to bo
held occasionally in his presence, once or twioe a week. "Thus, one dvy he will
become conversant with most of the laws of the SJari'aA, the commentary
of the Qur'&n. and the traditions of the Prophet; and, thus, the methods of
dealing with temporal and religious affairs would become easy for him."00
This discussion leads us at this point to another important question, namely,
the place that religion must have, according to NijAm al-Mulk. both in the
conduct of a ruler and in the political life of a people. It ia of course a question
of the relation between religion and politics, where we can sco again that his
ooncept of kingship is modified by the influence of Muslim thought. In spite of
his love for the political principles of pre-Islamic Persia, he is essentially a
religious-minded man who can believe only in the religious values of social
life as enunciated by Islam, and can look upon a political community as
dedicated out and out to religious ends. His political theory is mado up of
a reconciliation between the old Persian ideals and the Muslim political ideology.
To him. in the first place, religion and politics are inseparably joined together,
and. as such, are complementary to each other. "The State (and kingship)
and religion," he believes, “are like two brothers.And throughout hia
writings, the two have been treated in the same spirit. In dealing with them,
he closely follows the spirit of Muslim polity which is largely based on the
ooncept of the indivisible unity of religion and politics.
The principles of oonduct which he lays down for his king under the influence
of thia religious trend are in striking oontrast with those prescribed by
Machiavelli for his prince. Unlike the Machiavellian prince who is advised to
handle religion merely as a useful instrument for achieving political ends,
and who is taught to appear rather than become religious,10 Nif&m al-Mulk's
" W. Barthold, op. eit.. p. 308.
•• Sipttoot. pp. 54-33.
“ Ibid., p. 55.
•• "It is not, therefore, nooeasary for a prince to have all the above mentionci
qualities (i.e., the conventional virtues), but it is very necevary for him to seem
to have them. I would even bo bold to say tliat to poaeeae them and always to
785
A History of Muslim Philosophy
prinoe ia taught to believe sincerely in religious truths, and to exercise political
power ae an emential means of attaining them. Acoording to him, both the
State and religion are dependent upon each other for their existence; there
fore, the king must treat them both alike. ‘'Whenever there is any diaordei
in the State," save NijAm al-Mulk. “there is confusion in the religion of ita
people also, and the heretics and mischief-makers make their appearance.
And whenever religious affaire are disturbed, the State is thrown into disorder,
the mischief-makers grow strong, and heresy makes itaelf manifest.”’1 He
believes that "the most virtuous thing for die king ia to uphold the right
faith."** To him a wise and just ruler is one who follows the tenets of religion
faithfully, and eradicates heresy from his realm.**
It is obvious that the concern of his prince with religion is not mere politics;
it is rather a matter of genuine faith in the religious values of social life. It
is an instrument to preserve the State aa well aa a means of salvation in the
life to come*4 "The ruler who strives to uphold the faith successfully is entrust
ed by (lod with temporal and religious affairs, and his wishes are granted in
both the worlds.
This shows how Nip&m al-Mulk is at pains to make his prinoe a religious
as well as a mundane authority It ia, however, no artificiality with him to
blend the religious and temporal powers in one and the same office. With a
religious man like him. looking to faith for guidance in the spiritual as well
as in the worldly affairs, it is more natural to combine them than to treat
them as separate. Besides his own Outlook about the relation of religion and
politics, which led him to attribute religious function to kingship, there arose
a historical situation in which the king came to be regarded not only as a
temporal authority but also as a religious functionary. The age of the Caliph,
when he was the undisputed leader of the Muelim community, had practically
come to a close by this time, giving rise to the power of the independent
autocratic monarch to whom the people now looked for leadership in all tem
poral and religious affaire. It will not help much towards appreciating the role
this autocrat came to play in the social life of the Muslim people, to suppose
about this historical change that, "politically, the Khattfah gave place to the
Sul (An, that is, a religious executive waa replaced by an explicitly independent
mundane power."** It must be admitted that the Muslim world, far from
thinking in terms of the separation of State and religion, waa definitely at a
observe them ia dangerous, but to appear to possess them ia useful" (Niooolo
Machiavelli, TAs Prtnre, tr. L. Ricci. 1903, New American Library, New York,
5th ed., 1935. Chap. XVni. p. 103).
A'iydaal, p. 55.
•• IM.
•• Ibid., p. 118.
” Ibid.. pp. 8. 18, 37.
** Ibid.. P. 110.
•’ W. C. Smith, Idam in Modem History, Princeton University Prose. Prinoeton/
Oxford University Press, London, 1957, p. 36.
766
NifAm al-Mulk fOm
stage of politic*! development in which, aa we have neon, it oould still easily
believe in their ultimate oneness. The Caliph, therefore, was not held to be
simply a religious executive; he waa a temporal authority as well, and both
functions were intricately interwoven in his offioe. The autocratic prinoe. who
came to fill the void left by the Caliph in the Muslim life with the latter's
downfall, was his heir in both capacities. He waa a replica of the Caliph, in
almost every respect, save that, like the Caliph, he waa not an elected
functionary, and. therefore, unlike him, he waa in practioe an absolute sovereign
with no constitutional limitations on his authority, and under no constitutional
obligation even in fulfilling his religious functions. Had ho boon regarded aa
simply a mundane power, the Muslims living under his rule would have been
left without a leader to organize their religious life, especially after the Caliph
had practically boon removed as a real foroe from the scene of their spiritual
and political life.
It is this practical necessity that has led Nijim al-Mulk to insist on the
essentially religious character of the king's authority. This special emphasis
on the religious character is also important on account of the fact that it
tones down the autocratic temper of his monarch. The moral obligations ho
sets on the absolute authority of the king prevent it from growing into an
oppressive despotism. His ia basically the idea of a paternalistic State in
which the king ia held responsible for the security and well-being of all sub
jects. The first and foremost moral obligation of the king towards his subjects
is to do justice. He believes it to be a religious duty, for it has been ordained
by God. Justice, aa a principle of good government, occupies a predominant
place in hia oonoept of kingship, and time and again he lays emphasis on its
importance for State and society. But, in spite of all ita significance, ho doos
not attempt to formulate any systematic theory of justioe; nor does he make
any effort to define it exactly. This muoh, however, can be ooncluded from
his statement that, like almost all hia ideas, justice, too, ia a practical maxim
or a social rule rather than a social philosophy. Everyone should be given
what is due to him. or what has been legally recognized aa his right in a
given social order. To him justioe is a moral principle which is also usable
ae an effective means to preserve a political society and to promote peace
and prosperity among tho people. "The kings should strive," he says, "to
seek the favour of God, which can be attained through the kindness with
which they treat the peoplo and through justice which they administer
to them. When the peoplo pray for the welfare of the king, his State grows
stable and prospers every day."" To stress ita significance for the prosperity
of the State be quotes the saying that “a State can continuo to exist notwith
standing impiety, but it cannot exist with tyranny.”** Therefore, he believes
that an auspicious age ia one in which a just prinoe comes to rule." He quotes
” SiydM. p. (.
•• Ibid.
" Ibid., p. M.
78?
A History of Muslim Philosophy
several anecdotes from history to demonstrate the material advantages of
justioe, and to show that justice is the outstanding moral virtue of a king,
lie lays equal emphasis on ita moral and material aspocta aa inseparably joined
together, and stresses the point that as justice brings prosperity and good
reputation in this world, it helps a ruler "to attain salvation in the next
world.”10
In his notion of justice he is influenced again both by Islam and by Persia.
It is under the Islamic influence that be comes to realize the religious and
moral significance of justice, and goes to the extent of linking ita worldly
aspect with the deliverance of the soul in eternity. To illustrate this point he
quotes from the Holy Qur'an,1,1 the Tradition1” of the Prophet, and state
ments about the practioe of the pious Muslim rulers, and says that the worthiest
prince is one “whose heart is tho seat of justice.”10
From ancient Persia he learns tho methods of the administration of justioe
and the principle of direct responsibility of the king in matters relating to It.
Ho is so much impressed by the Persian standard of justioe that he believes
that “the SiasAnian Kings, especially Nugblrw&n the Just, have surpassed all
other monarchs in justioe, generosity, and courage."1M He says that the Persian
kings used to strive so honestly to live up to the principle of impartiality
in justice that they could even allow themselves to appear aa respondents
before the Chief Justice who hoard complaints against their royal person.1”
They held it aa their personal duty to see that the others also treated the
people with the same impartiality and justice; and, in order to hear the
complaints personally, they used to hold publio audience twioe a year, to
which everyone waa allowed free access, and whoever prevented anyone
from going to the king to obtain redress for grievances was sentenced to
death.10
Besides justice, which ia essential for good government, there are some
other moral duties, which, aa Nijlm al-Mulk says, a ruler has to perform
for the well-being of his subjects. His idea of benevolent despotism involves
the notion that a good monarch must rule, not for his own good, but for the
good of the whole country. He is responsible for the welfare of his subjects,
and is personally accountable to God, not only for hia own conduct, but also
for the conduct of his officials towards the people.10 It ia, therefore, an essential
part of his duty that he should appoint aa government officers only those
who are God-fearing, learned, pious, and righteous,10 and should instruct
>” IM., p. 8.
Ibid., pp. 44-45.
Ibid.
IM., p. 45.
■« Ibid., p, 118.
IM., p. 39.
IM. pp. 38-39.
Ibid., pp. 9. 43.
IM., pp. 38-41.
788
Nizim al-Mulk JGsi
them to treat the people well.1" Iwcause aa justice brings prosperity, oppres
sion leads to the devastation of a country.
Thia autocratic but benevolent sovereign, depicted for the firet time in the
writings of NitAm al-Mulk, ia a typical Muslim prince who came into existence
with the downfall of the Caliphate and continued to live for centuries in the
Muslim polity. Equally typical is his vizier, who stands next to him in rank
and power in the political hierarchy of the kingdom.11" Like tho king, he is
also of Persian origin ; ho is. in fact, the Muslim heir of the pre-Islamic Persian
grand vizier, called the wazurg farmdbir, who made his way into the constitu
tional system of the Caliphate111 “when the 1 AbbAsids - camo to oopy the
administration of Sasaanian Empire.’’11* This grand vizier was next to the
king; and what he waa in his relation to the Persian king, the Muslim vizier
was to the Caliph.11*
For NijAm al-Mulk, himself a Persian and Grand Vizier, it is quite natural
to aspire to model this institution aa closely as possible on the traditional
line of the Persian vizierate, which had once worked so successfully under the
SAselnian rule. But he is not the first writer to speak of this institution, for
Mawardi and others had already discussed it in some detail. There is, how
ever. a sharp distinction between the theory, for example, of MAwardi and
that of Nijam al-Mulk. What Mkwardi speaks of ia, in fact, the constitutional
nosition of the vizier in his relation to the Caliph, and, therefore, it ia what
may be called the constitutional theory of vizierate. With this aspect of the
vizierate, NizAm al-Mulk is leas concerned, and he seldom refers to it. What
really interests him more, or rather exclusively, is the political and moral
aspect of this institution. There is yet another difference: unlike Mawardi,
who is primarily conoemed with discussing the question what the vizier’s
functions are in a constitutional set-up, Nizim al-Mulk attempts to show
what he ought to be in order to attain perfection in ministerial ethics. He deals
with the vizierate on a plane of thought whioh is nearer to that of the Qabus
Namrh of Amir KaikA’us (412/1021-476/1082).11* Indeed, his field of study is
the art of ministership, but, compared with Amir KaikA'fis, he treats it on
a wider scale and with a touch of personal experience which obviously could
not be claimed by the Amir.
To Ni?Am al-Mulk the vizierate is the most important and the most exalted
■" Ibid., p. 18.
Abmad b. abi Ya'qub, ibn WAdib al-Ya'qubi, TdriJA al-Ya'gObi, ed. M. Th.
Houtsma, Brill. Leiden. 1883, p. 202-
1,1 Hasan IbrAhim Hasan. TdritA al-Iddm. Maktabat al-Nahdat al-Miarlyyah
Cairo. 1B46, Vol. II. p. l»6.
111 Sa’id Naficy, TArikb-i Tamaddun-i Irdni SlWbd. CUp KhAnah-i DAnijb-GAh.
Teheran. 1331/1912, pp. 231-32.
1,1 A. Christensen. L’lran Smui la Saaanida. Urdu tr., Muhammad IqbAI,
Iran ba Abd-i Sdtanidn. Anjuman-i Taraqqi-i Urdu. India, Delhi, 1941. p. 148.
111 KaikA us b. Iskander h. QAbOs b. WAafcimglr. Nafihat Must known as
QdbOa Nimrb. od. Reuben Levy, G.M.8. London. 1951. Chap. II.
769
A History of Muslim Philosophy
office, next only to that of the Sultanate.11* Though this glorification of the
ministerial offioe is not without a tinge of exaggeration, it serves to give an
idea of the importance the vizier onoe had in the Eastern monarchical States,
including the Saljflq Empire, in which he played a significant part in politics,
and actually shared a good deal of power with the king. In moet of the
achievements whioh were attributed to the royal person he had a real hand.
Therefore, there ia a certain basis of truth in regarding tho rizierate aa
"an institution on which depend the State and the people, the religion and
the kingdom."11* This indicates NijAm al-Mulk’s belief about the vizierate aa
an indispensable part in the machinery of a monarchical government. He is
also conscious of the historical role it played in bringing so much credit to
kingship in the long course of ita career. "All tho kings." he says, "who
have left their good names in the pages of time, owe it to the felioity of the
righteous vizier."11’ and again. "... a good minister brings to the king a good
name and leads him to adopt a good conduot. All the princes who had been
great, and whose name shall be held in honour till the Day of Judgment,
were those who had good ministers.”n* Throughout his arguments about
the importance of ministership, he is insistent on the point that the welfare of
both the king and the kingdom depends upon the sagacity of the vizier, and
that a bad vizier always leads them to destruction.11*
What Nif&m al-Mulk is attempting here by stressing the importance of
the vizierate is not to represent the vizier aa a mere intermediary between the
king and hia subjects, but to show him aa the representative of the king and
actually responsible to him for the whole administration. That is to say, the
vizier, as conceived by him, ia in a sense a sharer in the king's real powers.
This was actually the position which NifAm al-Mulk had himself enjoyed in
hia own lifo-time as the vizier of the SaljOqs That in elevating thia offioe to
such an exalted position he is mainly encouraged by the Persian tradition,
is evident from his statement in which he asserts that since the origin of the
State up to the days ofYazdigird all administrative affairs had been exclusively
in the hands of the viziers The vizier was the counterpart and deputy of the
king.1’* He is influenced again by the Persian tradition in advocating the
hereditary principle of the vizierate, of which his Persian forerunners, the
Barmakids, were the first exponents in Islam. To him it seems most desirable
that both the kingship and the vizierate should be hereditary, as was the
regular practice in ancient Persia from the days of Ardaghlr, the son of
BibekAn, to the reign of Yazdigird.1*1 He regrets that "when tho kingship
111 H’oyaya, p. 11.
“• Ibid., p. 11.
Ibid., p. 48.
“• Siydsoi. p. 180.
>'• Ibid., pp. 18-19.
>>• WaMya. p. 83.
>•’ SiyOM. p. 181.
770
Ni|Sm al-Mulk TOai
came to an end in Persia the vizierate also departed from the house of the
viziera.”*"
Ni?im al-Mulk presents a picture of the typical minister serving at the
Court of an Oriental monarch, when he oomre to enumerate the dangers with
which thia important office waa fraught, and the noble qualities which were
supposed to be the prerequisites of the vizierate. He gives a detailed acoount
of them, supported by his personal experiences, or by illustrations taken from
contemporary history It gives an idea of the state of politics and administra
tion in the medieval Orient in which a vizier had to discharge his duties with
so many powers to conduct the government, and. at the same time, with so
many risks of being suddenly overthrown from offioo for any mistake.
The dangers in accepting thia office, aa he enumerates, are five: —
(a) The minister may do injustice to the people as he has to issue numerous
orders every day;1*1
(b) may please one man and displease thousands of others, high and low,
rich and poor;1**
(c) ho may displease tho princes of the royal household by his acta and
may consequently incur tho displeasure of the king;"4
(d) he has always to deal with the nobles and grandees of the empire whose
hostility and hate might turn the king against him ;*** and
(e) there is a large number of officials of high and low ranks upon whom
he has to depend in discharging his duties, and their displeasure and
conspiracy may undermine his reputation and career.1*'
All this renders the office of the vizier a difficult one, requiring a man of
sharp intellect and outstanding abilities. NijAm al-Mulk attempts to lay down
at length the essential conditions of this office which were regarded in hia days
aa the qualities of an ideal vizier. The duties of a vizier, he says,1*1 are deter
mined by his four-fold relations: First, he ia under tho obligation of obedience
to God; secondly, he owes allegiance to bis royal master; thirdly, he has to
care for the favourites of the king; and, fourthly, he is concerned with the
common people.
One cannot fail to note that his whole discussion of the institution of
vizierate, like that of the office of kingship, is pervaded again by a religious
and moral outlook, arising out of his sincere regard for religion. In the offioe
of vizierate, as he treats it, diplomacy and morality have been blended together,
but emphasis is altogether on its moral ends. To acquire merely worldly pomp
and power, he says, should not be the ultimate end of the vizier; what
■» Ibid.
111 B'ofdyo, p. 11.
111 Ibid., p. 18.
'*• Ibid., pp. 18-1?.
“• Ibid., pp. 21-23.
'*’ Ibid., pp. 27-28.
111 Ibid., p. 3S.
771
A History of Muslim Philosophy
really befits this exalted offioe is to seek real prestige and a good name
in religious and worldly matters.This can be achieved through upholding
the right faitn and following tho dictates of God faithfully.1” It is the duty
of the minister that he should strive hard to revive and propagate the faith
of Islam and try to attain the excellent moral virtues without which divine
favour is impossible. He comes to preach to the vixier a sort of Sufi-like
attitude towards political life when ho says that he should believe in the
divine providence, and should regard his success not as the fruit of his own
efforts but as the result of tho divine will.”'
Then comes the king who is, according to Nizam al-Mulk. a divinely-appoint
ed authority. He is at pains to make him a point of focus for the loyal senti
ments of the whole political society and especially of the official community
among whom the vizier has a greater obligation to pay homage to the king
than anyone else.1” In order to prove himself a truly obedient servant of his
master, ho says, the vizier must refrain from seeking any sort of worldly
pleasure, because the greatest pleasure for a minister really consists, not in
satisfying his own desires, but in pleasing his royal master.1” Therefore, he
should direct all his efforts towards reforming the affaire of tho kingdom1”
and increasing the wealth of the State,1” which is the only way to please the
king.
Finally, he advises the minister to have special regard for the oompanions,
courtiers, and other favourites of the king and the nobles and high officials
of the kingdom.1” They are always influential figures in a feudal society
headed by an absolute monarch, and have an important role in its politics.
As their friendliness has great advantages for the vizier, their antagonism
may turn all against him ;>•’ therefore, he advises the vizier to be careful in
handling them. It is, however, remarkable about Nizam al-Mulk that, in spite
of dealing with the problems of an office of a diplomatic nature within the
framework of feudalism, which is always tainted with conspiracies, he does
not induce the vizier to follow cunning methods. Instead, he believes in the
moral standards of political conduct and insists that the vizier "should steadily
follow tho path of truth and righteousness in State affaire;" and this would
serve to protect him from the enmity of his foes and would ultimately convinoe
them of his integrity.1”
Nizam al-Mulk's importance aa a political thinker must rest, not on the
■" Ibid., p. 36.
■” Ibid.
>■’ Ibid., p. 39.
Ibid., p. 42.
■“ Ibid., p. 44.
■” Ibid., pp. 45-46.
•" Ibid., p. 47.
•” Ibid., pp. 55. 56. 63. 68.
Ibid., p. 63.
Ibid., p. 55.
772
NijAm al-Mulk Tusi
practical suggestions he oflerred to improve the conditions of a particulai
State, but on his theories of monarchy and ministership. He was the first to
discover the moral and political principles of kingship and vizierate and wher
ever the two institutions oame into existence in the Muslim world, his ideas
served aa their theoretical foundations. It is evident from the references to
his works in the writings of the succeeding generations, that he was generally
studied. Even the oontenta of his Wosdya' "were known far and wide,”'" long
before they came to be compiled in the form of a treatise in the ninth/fifteenth
century. The vast literature on political ethics produced in later days,
especially the treatises written for the guidanoe of Muslim princes, contain a
good deal of the political principles which were enunciated for the first time
by Nijim al-Mulk. This may be considered to be his direct influence on the
later development of Muslim political thought.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
■Abd al-Razz-Aq KAnpuri. _V.nl m al-Mulk Turn, Agn.. 1912; Abu Ya'la. Mu
hammad b. Husain ibn al-FarrA*. ol-Ahkam al-Sulfanlyyah. ed. Muhammad Hamid
al-Faqqi, Cairo, 1357/1939; QAdi Ahmad MiAn Akhtar JunAgarhi, “Al-MAwardi:
A Skotch of Hia Life and Works," Islamic Culture. Hyderabad Deccan, India,
July 1944; Mubammad K&mil Husain. "'Alam al-IslAm Thiqat al-ImAm. al-
MajAlin al- MtMlanpriyyah." in Mafthtauu al-Fatimtyyin. Cairo, n.d.; T. W. Ar
nold. The Caliphate. O. U. P.. 1924; abu al-Haaan 'Ali b. Hasan BAfcharzi,
Dumyat ul-Qaer. ed. Mubammad RAghib TabbA th. Aleppo, 1349/1930; W.
Barthold, Turkestan down ta die Afonptd Invasion. tr. H. A. R. Gibb, Oxford
University Press, 2nd od., 1928; H. Bowen, “The Sargudfeaaht-i Sayyidna,"
Journal o/ ike Royal Asiatic Society. London, Part IV. Oct. 1931; Article “Ni(Am
al-Mulk," Encyclopaedia of Islam, Vol. III. London/Leiden. 1936; E. G. Browne,
A Literary History of Persia. Vol. II. T. Fisher Unwin Ltd-, London, second im
pression. 1915; "Yet More Light on *Umar-i KhayyAm," JRAS; A Volume of
Oriental Studies Presented to E.O. Brownr. Cambridge University Prone. 1922; 'ImAd
al-Din Mubammad al-AqbahAni Bundnri, Eubdat al-Nuyrab wed.A'ukfibat rd-‘Ufrah,
od. M. Th. Houtsma. Leiden. 1889; A. Christensen, L'Iran Sous les Sasanian, tr
Muhammad IqbAI, Iran ba ‘Ahd-i Sasanian. Anjuman-i Taraqqi-i Urdu. Delhi, 1941;
‘Ala al Din 'Aja Malik Juwaini, Tdrijk-i JahAn-Gusha. Vol. II, Gibb Memorial
Sorias, Loidon/London, 1937; QAdi Abmad b. Mubammad QhaffAri, Tariff.i
NigOristan. Bombay. 1245/1829; H. A. R. Gibb. "MAwardl's Theory of KhilAfal,"
Islamic Culture, Hyderabad Deccan. India, July 1937; Hamd Allah Mustaufi,
TarikA-i Guzidah. Vol. II, G.M.S., Leiden/London, 1910; Hasan IbrAhlm Hasan,
TdriJA al-Islam, Vol. II, Maktabst al-Nahdat al-Misriyyah, Cairo. 1945; M.
Ruknuddin Hassan, ‘Ahd-i Salajiqah-i ‘Upna ke lin'd MumtOs SiyOsi Mufakkir,
Thesis, 1946, Political Science Deptt,, Osmania University, Hyderabad Deccan.
India; Hindu gbuh b- Sanjar b. 'Abd Allah, Tajdrib al-Salaf, od. 'AbbAa IqbAI,
Teheran. 1313/1934; ibn al-Atbir, al KAmil fi al-TarlU. Vote. IX, X. BulAq.
1290/1874; ‘Abd al-RabmAn b. ‘AH b. Muhammad ibn al-Jauxi, al-Munlaram fi
aLTanki al-Muluk w-ol-Umam, Vol. IX. Dairatul Maarif. Hyderabad Deccan,
India, 1369/1939; 'Ali b. Zaid al-Baihaqi ibn Funduq, Tarlftfi i Baibaqi, ed. Ahmad
■" Ibid., p. 5.
773
A History of Muslim Philosophy
BelimanYAr. £jtfp.KhAnahi Qtaiiin. Teheran. 1317/1938; ibn JibalhkAn. BofaycU
al-A’yiin. Vol. I, BulAq, 1299/1882; Mnbammad Iqbal. "Wa*Aya-i NijAm al-
Mulk." Oriental College Magazine. Lahore. Vol. IV. No. 1. Nov. 1927; ImAm
al Haramain abu al Ma'Ali 'Abd al Malik b. ‘Abd Allah. Ghiydlh al-Umam. MS.
Bankipur Library, and tho Law Department of the Oamania University. Hyderabad
Deccan, India; KaikA'tia b. Iskander b QAbiie b. WAgbmgir, .VoriAol NdmsA.
known aa Qdbus NdmeA. ed. Reuben Levy, Q.M.8., London, 1951; Abroad Hamid
al-Din KirmAni, Rdhal al-'Aql, ed. KAmil Husain and Mustafa Hilmi. Maihfilrdt
al-Fdfimlyyln, Cairo. 1952; A. K. S. Lambton, Landlord and Peasant in Persia,
Royal Institute of International Affairs, Oxford University Press, London. 1953;
Nicoolo Machiavelli, The Prince. tr. L. Ricci, 1903, New American Library, New
York, 5th od. 1955; abu al-Haaan 'Ah b. Mubammad al-MAwardi, ul-AKkdm al-
SuUdnlyyah, ed. R. Enger, Bonn, 1853; Ni|Am al-Mulk. Siydaai NdmeA, od. C.
Schafer, De I’fcofc des longues orientates vivanlee. Paris, 1891; DosWr ol-H'urard'
known aa Woadya. MS. British Museum, London. Add. 28-267; Nasd'tA-i Khwdiah
A'ifdm al-Mult, Bombay, 1305/1887; De Lacy O’Leary, A Short History of the
Fdfimid Caliphate. Kogan Paul, London. 1923; Plato, The Republie. tr. Benjamin
Jowett, Clarendon Frees, Oxford, 3rd ed., 1908; Muhammad b. ’Ali b. SulaimAn
RAwandi. Rdhal al-SudCr. G.M.S., Leiden, 1921; C. Rieu, Catalogue of Persian
Manuscripts in the British Museum. London, 1879. Vol. I; E. D. Roes. A Biogra
phical Introduction to the Ruba'it/dt of Omar Khayyam, tr. Fitzgerald. Methuen,
London. 1900; $adr al-Din abu al-Haaan All b. NA*ir, Atibdr al-Daulal alSalju-
qiyyah, ed. Mubammad IqbAl. Lahore. 1933; Sa’id Naficy, Tdri^-i Tammaddun-i
Irani SOedni, QhAp-OAnah-i DAnijh-GAh. Teheran. 1331/1934; 'Abd al-Karim
b. Mubammad Sam'Ani, Kitdb al-Anadb, G.M.S., Leidan/London, 1912; H. K.
SherwAni, Studies in Muslim Political Thought and Administration, Sh. Muhammad
Ashraf, Lahore, 2nd ed„ 1945; A. H. $iddlqi, Caliphate and Kingship in Medieval
Persia, Sh. Muhammad Ashraf, Lahore, 1942; W. C. Smith, Islam in Modem
History. Princeton University Preen, Princeton/Oxford University Press, London,
1957; TAj al-Dln abu Near ’Abd al WahhAb al-8ubki. TobogM al-Shafi’iyyah. Vol.
III. ed. Ahmed b. ‘Abd al-Karhn, Huaainlyyah Press. Cairo, 1524/1906; Sayyid
SulaimAn Nadawi, XA'ivydm, Ma'Arif Press, Azamgarh, India. 1933; Mubanunad
Taqi KhAn, Oanf-i DdniA Teheran. 1305/1887; J.'Wallhausen. Arab Kingdom
and lie Fall, tr. Khuda BaUuh. Calcutta, 1927; Abmad b. abi Ya'qub ibn WAd'b
Ya’qObi. Taohh al-Ya’qUbi. ed. M. Th. Houtsma. Brill. Leiden. 1883.
Chapter XXXIX
AL-OHAZALI
The structure of political authority in Islam ia by no means as simple aa
it seems at first glanoe. In the legalistic theory of the Caliphate expounded
by the Sunni jurists the Shariah is quite obviously the source of all authority,
including political authority as well. As a body of more or less concrete law,
the Shari'ah itself must be authorized from some source, which is presumably
qualified to judge right from wrong. Theoretically, the Shori’ah is changeable
from time to time, i.e., from prophet to prophet, but the fjhari’ah of a prophet
774
Al-QhaziU
i» the beet law for the time for which it is laid down. It is claimed that the
Ialamia Law is laid down for all times to come. It is elastic only in the sense that
some ports of one of ita sources (the Qur'&n) are given in such general terms
M are capable of different interpretations at different times, and the validity
of some parts of another source (fJadiUj) depends upon historical authenticity.
Human beings may not change the laws laid down by the jSJori'o* but they
may know them or not know them, interpret them or not interpret them,
obey them or disobey them. The prerequisite for the knowledge of the SAtri'ah
is acknowledgment of the established sources of the SAari'oA, i.e., unU al-din.
The prerequisite for obedienoe is belief.
The ultimate source of authority is God. It is only the good that God com
mands and only the evil that Ho forbids. The principal difference between
the Sunni and later Shi'ite persuasions is tho Sunni doctrine that the last and
definitive revelation is the Qur'&n, and Muhammad is the last human being
to be endowed with revealed knowledge of right and wrong. The successors
of Muhammad may only know the SAan'aJi by reference to the Qur'&n, to
the behaviour of Muhammad, and, wherever these sources are not explicit, to
the consensus of Muslims—or indeed by reference to analogical judgment
Thus, the proximate sources of authority are the Qur'in, the Sunnah, ijmd'
and qiyda.
The immediate source of authority is somewhat more difficult to ascertain.
Learning, or 'Um. is necessary for the discovery of what the Siarl'aA is, and
this qualification ia the source of the title 'ulamd'. The Sunni 'ulamd' are
distinguished from others by their acknowledgment of the "canonical" sources
of the jjlfariah. However, since there is no priesthood in Islam, the 'idamd'
form an undefined and unwieldy body. The business of discovering the law
is at times very muah like legislation, but the non-officialized body of the
ulamd' tend to oonvert their function to that of a huge, unwieldy board of
judicial review. Obviously such action as might be undertaken by such a
group must come after the political fact, and beoause of the nature of the
institution the time-lapse between deed and docision might be generations.
It would be wrong to deny the ulamd' any authority at all. for the ‘Abb&sid
dynasty went to great lengths to secure the support of the 'ulamd' and to
display respect for their judgments. The pattern of political behaviour thus
established was carried on by subsequent Islamic rulers. Nevertheless, it was
characteristic of the Caliphs to claim the more remote authority for their
government.
In a sense the Muslim community, because of ita intimate connection with
the principle of ijma', may be reckoned a souroe of authority. However, since
ijmd' is a source of the Shari'ah, and since it is a process rather than an in
stitution, it cannot satisfy the requirement of an immediate souroe of authority.
Aa a source of the Sbari'ah it is theoretically anterior to it, and, thus, a more
remote source of authority. In any case it is still subject to "discovery" and
interpretation by the 'ulamd' As a process its legislative efficacity ia imilar
775
A History of Muslim Philosophy
to that of custom in Roman and Canon Law, so the time-lapse is necessarily
great. The Muslim community is not only the Islamic Church, but it is also
the personal sphere of validity of Islamic government. Membership in the
community is the result of belief, and'belief is the basis of obedience to the
Shari'ah. The purpose of Islamic government is to see to it that the Short‘oA
is obeyed. In other words, the part the community plays in political affaire
is primarily passive, although Islamic government is clearly established foi
the benefit of the Muslims.
Regardless of the degree and kind of authority attributed to the 'utamd
and the community, neither group ever wielded real political power to trans
form their political function to that of an institution authorizing the day-to-
day acts of government. Theoretically, the Muslim system all but disregards
the queetion of power; practically, it ia another question. Ibn Khaldun is tho
most outstanding Islamic theorist of those few who dealt with the problem
of power. He asserts that power and authority were joined in tho Orthodox
Caliphate.1 Ideally, of course, power should reside with the immediate source
of authority in the community.
Tho relation of the Caliphate to the Shariah is more difficult to define thar
that of the ulama or the community. During the whole of the Umayyat
and the early part of the ‘Abbasid Caliphate, the Caliph is much more th<
exponent of power than of authority. In the last centuries of the 'Abb£aic
Caliphate the Caliph could hardly be considered the exponent of power either.
Was he then the most immediate representative of authority t
With the exception of the Qur’Anic Ij>w, the Caliphate and the SJari'aA
developed pari patsu. The Sunnah of the Prophet did not become constitutive
until treated as such by the successors of the prophet. Ijmd' and yiyiis are
certainly later accretions. Thia historical fact has tended to complicate the
relationship of the Caliph and the Shartah. In the main the Caliph is the
executive of the SAari'aA, the commander-in-ehief of the Muslim army, Bnd
the leader in formal religious observances prescribed by the fliari aA Above all,
the Caliph is the head of the’ religious institution in Islam, only of the for
malized part of it. Since religion waa an all-inchisive concept, he was also the
political institution. The subordination of the Caliph to the SJari'aA was most
clearly expressed as a by-product of early political controversy in the attacks
on the piety and personal behaviour of the Umayyad Caliphs.* That the political
behaviour of the Caliph must be in accordance with t he Shari'ah. was implicit
in 'AbbJsid religious policy. The theoretical implications of this policy were
limited only to the function of the Caliph once appointed and as a conse
quence fail to define the authority for the appointment of a particular Caliph,
or the authority for the institution itself.
‘ Ibn Khaldun, Muquddmah, Beirut, 1900. pp. 2O3ff.
' Goldziher has set forth the uruuincnts of the early political factions in Volume
II of his Mahanmrdanuchi Studio.
776
*xAli
AI-Qh
The circumstantial authority arising out of the contention that the Caliphs
were properly executing the function of the Caliphate did not exhaust the
AbbSsid theory. Their personal claim to the offioe itself Was based both on
agnate descent from the Prophet and tho action of divine Providence. This
theory of constitutive authority waa never denied by Sunni theorists, but it
waa certainly omitted in the heavy oaauiatical overlay which attempted to
camouflage the fact of dynastic succession. In time the Sunni theory of tho
constitutional process camo to be a composite of tho actual circumstances of t he
historical appointment of various Caliphs. These various circumstances were
codified in detail, and with some juridical expansion by al-MAwardi,* but the
Shar'i nature of the constitutional process had already been established. Thus,
the SAarf'oA waa recognized as authority for the acta of the Caliph and for
the manner of appointment of a particular Caliph, but there remains the
problem of the authority for the institution itself. Al-Baghdadi's answer that
the Caliphato is required because there are certain explicit Sbar'i duties in
cumbent upon the Caliph merely begs the question.4 We must be satisfied
then with the conclusion that the authority of the Caliph is primarily circum
stantial. i.e., he has authority for what be dore rather than for what he is.
What the Caliph is depends rather upon historical events, and this is not
surprising since the institution developed along with tho SAari'oA. History
has a legislative character in Sunni Islam, and tho Caliphate is the prime
example of the legislative efficacity of history. On the other hand, the effect
of historical legislation is primarily retrospective. As a result we are told
what the Caliph was and what he ahould now be. Clearly, Sunni theories of
the Caliphato arc not slavish descriptions of the obtaining conditions; but in so
far as they deviate from the merely descriptive, they also concentrate on the
function rather than the institution of the Caliphate.
So long as sufficient measure of power waa attached to the Caliphato, this
question did not agitato Muslim theorists. We might say the institution of
the Caliphate was almost taken for granted. However, when the Caliphs lost
■xintrol of affairs, circumstantial authority no longer applied to the Caliphato.
Al-MSwardi is very much aware of this problem, but his treatment of it is
entirely inadequate. He insists on the legitimacy of the Caliph who is con
strained by one of his military aides, even though ho expressly states that the
"obligatory" character of the Caliphato is derived from the Caliph's duties
as executor of the SJori'oA.
* Nevertheless, al-MAwardi has not necessarily
contradicted himself—he has simply failed to state explicitly the source of
Caliphal authority. It was this omission which permitted theorists of the
post-'AbbSaid period to apply the criteria of circumstantial authority to the
actual but "unconstitutional" holders of power. The inevitable corollary waa
the establishment of power aa tbs constitutive authority of the Caliph.
* Al-MAwardi. al-Ahkam al SulfOniyyah. Cairo. l»09. Chapter I.
* 'Abd al-QAhir ibn Tahir al Baghdadi, UfU al-Din, Istanbul. 1928. p. 272.
* AlMAwnrdi, op. oil.. p. !6.
777
A History of Muslim Philosophy
Regarding the theory of al-MAwardi, our inference ia that he considered the
constrained Caliph legitimate because of the validity of the constitutional
process by which he was appointed. The resulting situation is pure anomaly;
the authority of the Caliph is his "constitutionality," while the authority of his
constrainer is circumstantial (derived from his ruling in accordance with the
SAori'oA); and the sum total is legitimate government,
AI-GhazAII’s attempt to solve this problem is much more serious than that
of the preceding theorists. In many important respects his theory departs
from the well-ntablished pattern of Sunni theory. On the other hand, these
divergences are carefully couched in terms calculated to maintain the essentials
of traditional Sunni theory. While remembering that the classification of
authority aa functional, constitutional, and institutional is only an analytical
construction, which finds no place in Islamic theory, we may find this classi
fication helpful in analysing al-QhazAU's theory.
*
In referring to Islamic government al-fihaz&li uses the same term as his
predecessors. However, it is almost immediately clear that he haa something
else in mind, and not the traditional Caliphate of even al-MAwardi. He follows
the prejudice in favour of one-man government, but hia implication ia dearly
that of a multilateral rather than a unitary government. Most important of
all ia his association of the Caliph with the SuItAn. We shall return to this
problem, but it is necessary to realize that he assumes the co-operation of the
Caliph and the actual holder of power in his discussion of the obligatory
character of tho Caliphate.
In keeping with the then traditional treatment of the question of the obliga
tory character of the Caliphate. al-QfaazAli first directs hia argument against
those who deny the fijar'i character of the Caliphate, and then against those
who deny ita obligatoriness altogether.’ The first argument is a positive one,
and concerns the institutional authority for the Caliphate. The aeoond is a
negative argument, and sheds light on the nature of the Caliphate and the
duties attached thereto. After dealing with these two arguments we shall
discuss his treatment of the constitutive process with special reference to the
qualifications of the Caliph and the constituent power.
The Mu'tazilah asserted that the obligatory character of tho Caliphate waa
based on "reason" and not upon the SJnrl'oA. The Sunni jurists insisted upon
the SJari'aA as the basis of the Caliphate. Al-QbAzAli follows the accepted
Sunni line, but he develops his argument in a more logical fashion, adding
• Functional authority is that which authorizes each separate act of the Caliph,
without regard to the manner of hia appointment. Institutional authority is that
which provides that there shall bo such an institution aa the Caliphate. Logically,
institutional authority must precede functional authority, though the office and
iU duties are conceptually joined. Constitutional authority provides for the manner
in which a Caliph should be appointed. It will usually be found that the question
of legitimacy in Islamic political theory rotates to the constitutive process, whilo
functional lapses are regardod aa disqualifying and not illogitimtzing
’ AI-GhazAli. al lqlifid fl al l'ltqad. Cairo. n.d„ pp. 104-09
778
AlfibazAli
new elements. First, he states that the Caliphate does indeed have utility, but
he traces the proof of the fijar'i obligation of appointing an ImAm first to
ijmd' and. second and more importantly, to the deduced will of the Prophet.
He contends that the will of the Prophet waa the source of the consensus of
the community. Hie argument is that the Prophet's purpose waa the formal
establishment of the religion of Islam. To secure thia end both life and liveli
hood must be protected. The appointment of an Imim ia therefore obligatory.
He also indicates that only through the performance of formal religious
observances may the bliss of the hereafter be achieved.
We have found the usual Sunni insistence upon the fljar'i character of the
Caliphate inadequate for the definition of the institutional authority of that
office. In supporting this view the Sunni theorists point to no specific provisions
of the flJori'aA. Instead they reason from the prescribed duties, deducing the
*
executive institution. The weakness of their argument ia manifest, for aa we
iiavo seen, the Caliphate existed in fact before any of its duties were defined.
By tho addition of new elements to this argument, al-QbazAli goes much further
towards a definition of the institutional authority of the Caliphate. The most
important innovation is his reference to tho consensus of the community,
which ia no leas than the historical practice of the community. Evidently, this
is historical legislation.
Technically, the consensus by which the community has authorized the
institution of tho Caliphate has reference to the oonsent of the Companions
of the Prophet to the establishment of the Orthodox Caliphate. The phrase
"consensus of the community" is sufficiently vague to include the consensus
of other generations as well. However, the consensus of the community is
not actually a legislative process, but merely evidence of the fact that what has
been approved by the community ia actually provided for in tho SJari aA.
Despite this let al detail, we must conclude that the authority for the institu
tion of tho Caliphate is derived from the community of the Muslims. By the
time sl-Ghaz&li wrote, the consensus of the community had become a source of
the QJpiri'ak in its own right. The community at large has been endowed by the
grace of God with a special character, summed up in the word* of the Prophet.
“My community will never agree in error." The important thing to note is
that consensus implies unanimity, or very nearly that. The community as a
source of authority is then considered collectively. IjnuV is. aa has been said,
primarily a conservative principle, tending to approve and perpetuate existing
phenomena. But it is correlativcly a dynamic principle, expressing in a way
the historical continuity of the Islamic community. The institution of the
Caliphate is intimately bound up with the collective unity of the community,
as well as with its historical continuity.
• Al-BaghdArti.loc.cir.i al-MAwardi. op. cit.. p. 3; see also al-Biqillani. at-TanMd.
Cairo, 1947. pp. 185-8(1 "Concerning the Purpose for which the ImAmate is
Established "
779
A History of Muslim Pliilosophy
AI-QhaxAlis logical bent of mind will not allow him to lie satisfied with the
mere evidential fact of i)ma. Clearly, i;m4‘ itaelf contains no logic, while
al-OhazAH’s intention is to frame the requirements of the Shariah in a manner
brat calculated to convince the protagonists of reason. Therefore, he goes back
to the source of the ijmd' which ia, he says, the intention of the Prophet to
organize the establishment of Islam * Primarily, he is referring to the establish
ment of external observances of the religion such as prayer, fasting, and
pilgrimage; tho execution of the hudud punishments for such transgressions
as drinking and adultery; the maintenance of the SJuri'aA Law in such matters
aa marriage and inheritance; and the administration of Islamic justice by
means of the Q&dis. Under these headings come tho collection of texes and
the government administration, for those are included either directly or in
directly in the SJar'i requirements concerning them. The Prophet may have
desired to accomplish other, less concrete things as well, but here the main
point is his purpose of organizing the administration of the (Sunni) religion.
Although it is here presented in slightly different torms, this is tho same old
argument leading to the functional or circumstantial authority of the Cali
phate. Al-QhazAlI's argument goes on to show that the requirements of the
SharVah imply the requirement of an institution of some sort to execute
them. That institution, the form of which has been authorized by the con
sensus of the community, is the Caliphate.
Though al-GhazAli rejected the argument of the Mu'tazilah that the obliga
tory character of the Caliphate is based upon reason, ho agrees with them that
it does have utility. Utility is a concept with a minimum of religious connota
tion. We have seen that the fiJarfaA contains very many material provisions,
but none of those oould bo classified by a Muslim aa merely utilitarian. Ob
viously, al-QjjazAIi is referring to governmental functions common to all
centralized coercive orders, such aa the maintenance of order and the security
of life and property. This utility can only exist where power ia present.
The subject of utilitarian power comes into al-QbazAll's argument again
when he attempts to prove that the ImAmate is necessary for the realization
of the Prophet's goal. It enters when he says that material security is a pre
requisite for the carrying out of the fliari'aA.1* The concrete character of so
many of the flJari'oA provisions necessitates, in the establishment of the
Shari'ah. the sotting up of a civic religious institution. Obviously, this implies
the existence of a favourably disposed political power. This is provided by
the Sulfinate. Hia conclusion is that the Caliphate (execution of the SJori'oA)
because of its relationship with the Sultanate (coercive power) ia required a
a result of the objective of the Prophet (the establishment and institutionaliza
tion of the SJarl oA). In the progress of thia argument the bulfAnate is brought
in without any explanation of the relationship of the bearer of power to the
• AI-QbazSli, op. cil., p. 103.
Ibid.
780
AJQhMlh
Caliph; we only know that the function of the Sulfinate is an eaeential element
of the authorized Caliphate.
In a later argument al-QhazAli opposes those who deny the obligatory
character of the Caliphate altogether. Here we get into some confusion of
terms. The contention of al-Qjjazali'a opponents ia that the Caliphate has
lapsed because there ia no qualified person to serve in that oapacity.11 The
implication of their statement ia that the Caliphate is not, therefore, a rigid
requirement of the Shan'ah. At least thia is in some measure the way in which
al-Qhaz&li chooses to understand their argument. In his ewn approach al-
GfaazAli definitely confuses the terms obligatory (moral) and necessary (natural).
The argument is simply: there ought to be a Caliph; therefore there must be a
Caliph; therefore there is a Caliph. From this we are probably justified in
deducing that the opposing argument runs: there is no Caliph, therefore there
need not be a Caliph, therefore there is no obligation to appoint a Caliph.
Al-GfeazAH'a final argument on this question is his asking what would be
come of all those religious, social, economic, and political phenomena which
are regulated by the SJari'oh if there were no Caliph.” He contends that
without the existence of the Caliphate no judgment of a Qadi, no contract,
no testament would bo valid. In other words, the power of all Q&jls and
government officials is derived from the Caliph. In theory, Islamic government
is perfectly centralized. The authority which any individual Qadi has is com
pletely derived from the Caliph, and not from the task he performs, as is the
case of the Caliph's own authority. It is inconsistent, but there is no circum
stantial authority for subordinate officials; their authority is only constitutive
(derived from the manner in which they were appointed). Thus, the absenoe
of the Caliphate would turn every normal human relationship into sin, and
lead to disorder and strife. He does not say what effect such social disintegra
tion might have on the chanoes of the individual Muslim for salvation; but
from other indications we may conclude that they would be considerably
reduced.
We are now much clearer on the nature of the Caliphate in al Qhazlili's
theory; (a) The Caliphate comprehends the necessary power to accomplish
the maintenance of order, (b) It represents or symbolizes the collective unity
of the Muslim community and ite historical continuity, (c) Deriving ite func
tional and institutional authority from the SJari'aA, it is the only legitimate
form of government in Islam. The legitimacy of the Caliphal form of govern
ment validates all acts of a legal and political nature, and it establishes the
Caliphate aa the focal point of the SJori'aA in the community as well as the
symbol of the divine guidance of the Sunni community by virtue of ita obe-
dienoe to the Ubari ah. It is not coincidental that these three aspects of the
Caliphate correspond to al-Ghazali's three sources for the obligatory character
of the Caliphate: (a) utility, (b) i;W, (c) and the objective of the Prophet.
“ Ibid., p. 107.
“ Ibid.
781
A History of Muslim Philoeophy
So much for the Caliphato, but what about the Caliph himself I AlQfcazAli
joins tho earlier theorists in giving a long list of qualifications required for
the office. Ideally, al-GhazAli's qualifications are the same as those of al-
MAwardi's. The Caliph must be without physical aa well os mental defects. He
must be honourable, courageous, wise, and so on. It must not be thought that
these qualifications are mere words. They do not represent abstract qualities,
but rather their concrete equivalents. Thus, he must be able to defend the
Muslims against their enemies and maintain internal order. He must be able
to make judgments in accordance with the SAarl’aA. He must be able to
administer the affairs of the State. Finally, he must be of Quraigfcite descent.
Al-GhazAli adds that he must be an 'AbbAaid.11
These requirements are very great, and it is not surprising that they were
in reality never completely fulfilled. The only stipulation which had been
fulfilled was that of Quraishite lineage, and for three hundred and more
years before al-QhazAli the Quraigjpte Caliph had been an 'AbbAaid. This
fact more than anything else represented the unity and historical continuity
of the Sunni community.
The inconsistency in al-M5ward!'s theory stems from the fact that he in
sisted upon these qualifications in the Caliph, while permitting the Caliph to
be inactive. On the Caliph's inactivity he dearly contradicts his own words.
At one point al-MAwardi insists on the personal activity of the Caliph, while
at anothor he validates his being constrained by one of his military aides.
The reasons which might have justified al-Mawardi's equivocation were no
longer effective in al-QjuzAlTs time. We find al-Qhazali facing the problem
of the inactivity of the Caliph, and the related problem of his qualifications.1*
To understand al-GhazAlfs treatment of this problem we must- bear in
mind his insistence upon the obligatory, even necessary, character of the
ImAmate. We are not concerned with "an irresistible force" and an "immovable
object." Al Ghazali tells us frankly that the necessity of having an ImAm
is so great that it compels the alteration of the qualifications when there is
no other way out.’* The licenoe of duress had, indeed, been applied previously
by al-MAwardi to validate tho rule of "Amirs by Conquest,"1* but he does not
seem to have been able to bring himself to do the same for the constrainer of
the Caliph. At any rate, al-MAwardi did not permit, even in a case of duress,
the lowering of the qualifications of the ImAmate. Perhaps al-Mustajhir waa
obviously unqualified, or it might be that al-QfaazAli was more honest than
al-MAwardi; anyway al-QhazAli is willing to concede many of the qualifications
in order to maintain the Caliphate. About the only concrete thing that he
‘* Al-fihazAli. ZAyd' O'lOm ol Din. Vol. U| alHarOm w-al-flaAS!, p. 124.
“ See Goldzihor, Streiuchrift <Im Gaiali gsgen die BaHnijja-Stkic. Leiden, 1918,
pp. 80ff„ for analysis and pp. 58 ff. text for al-QhazUT's early.' detailed views,
referred to in both IqlicOd and the much later ZAyd’
■* IqtifU. p. 107; ZAyd', lac. cil.
AI-MAwardi, op. cil.. Chapter III, pp. 27-28.
782
Al-QbttUi
insists upon is that the Caliph be of Quraighite lineage. As a result, the personal
qualifications of the Caliph are hardly applicable to the nature of the Cali
phate. On the other hand, the symbolic character of the Caliph could not be
more sharply drawn. In other words, the Caliph himself represents only one
of the three major aspects of the Caliphate.
The qualifications of the Caliph are probably the most well-developed part
of the constitutive process in the hands of Islamic theorists. But they are
very vague in their description of the constituent power. Al-Ghazltli sayr
there are three ways in which one of those who is qualified for the Caliphate
may be chosen: by designation of the Prophet, by designation of the ruling
Caliph, or by designation of the holder of actual power. AI-GhazAli tells us
that only the last alternative applies to his time.*’ Designation alone is not
sufficient for appointment, for there must be the bai'ah as well. The bai'ah must
be performed by tho great men and the people of "loosening and binding”
(ahi al-hali w-al 'aqd)." It is not easy to ascertain who these people are, but
we take the great men to be those with some measure of power; and the people
of loosening and binding to be the 'ulamd'; in concrete terms this means
that the most powerful Saljuq leader appoints the Caliph, then the appointee
is recognized by the leaser Saljfiqs, local princes, and the chiefs of the bureau
cracy; and finally the appointment receives the consent of the 'ulami'. There
ia probably a fourth stage in which the appointment is announced in the
mosques, and the people accept the decision handed down from above. In
view of al-Ghaz&li's statement to the effect we must look upon the holder of
power, or the Sultan, as the constituent power. The whole of the constitutive
process beyond the bare fact of appointment by the Sulttn is a formality.
Al-GhazAlI'a treatment of the constitutive process by no means contravenes
the acoepted requirements of tho Shari'ah in thia matter. It is true that al-
MAwardi sets up special qualifications for those who choose the Caliph, as
well as for the Caliph himself. But, generally speaking, the Sunni theorists are
sufficiently vague about the question of selectors to allow al-QbazAH'a theory
to meet their standards, particularly since aome of them at least insist that
there need not be more than one selector. On the other hand, it is quite possible
that he belittles the importance of the bai'ah of the 'ulami' too much. His
reason for this is probably that the important question for him waa whether
or not the SulfAn would choose anyone at all. But, of course, the SultAn's
primary concern waa that his choice should be acceptable to the 'ulama’ and
tho people. Were he not concerned with the attitude of these groups, and
perhaps his own salvation, tho SultAn might dispense with choosing a Caliph
>’ IW.kx.eii.
IqtuOd, p. 107. The fcas'u* ia important, oven essential, but not constitutive.
Thue, according to al Ghaz&li. if a qualified Quraiihite is an actual holder of power,
he may appoint himself aa ImAm. (This ia denied by al-BAqilMni, alTamhtd. p. 180.
and so ruay not be taken as a generally accepted Sunni theory.) Nevertheless. the
bai'ah remains necessary. having only a declarative effect.
783
A History of Muslim Philosophy
altogether. Having chosen a Caliph, he has gone eo far towards preserving
law and order and the "establishment of Islam" that al-Qhazali cannot con
ceive of the repudiation of his choice by the 'ulamd' or the people.
The constitutive process is, then, loosely speaking, a jUfar i process, but the
constituent power is the Sulfin. The limitations upon the SulfAn's choice are
real, as is the importance of the general bai'ah, but since these have much
greater reference to the functional and institutional authority of the Caliphate,
we shall do no more than make a mental note of them here. Our conclusion is
that the constituent authority for the appointment of the Caliph is the Sul tin.
There is no contradiction between thia conclusion.and our previous state
ment that the source of all authority in Islam is the fiiari'aA, for the Sbari'ah
has a tendency to recognize existing power in the constitutive process. Besides,
eo long as the Caliph had no power to do anything, the most important aspect
of £jari‘aA authority, i.e., functional authority, does not become operative.
As a result the constituent authority of the SultAn is the critical political
factor. One might argue that the SulfAn derives this authority from the
■SAari'ah, but that would not be what al QfaazAli himself has argued.
From the foregoing we see that the Caliph is different from the Caliphate,
and that the authority for one differs from the authority for the other. We
must now examine the relationship of the Caliph to the Caliphate, and of
the SulfAn to them both.
If tho Caliph does not satisfy all the requirements of the Caliphate in him
self, it is at least clear that he Is its principal personal representative. We have
already established that the Caliph himself has a special connection with the
authoritative source of ijmd'. On the other hand, we know that he cannot
possibly be the personal subject of functional authority, since he has no
power. Contrarily, no governmental act, unless performed directly or indirectly
by the Caliph, has any validity.
We have already seen that the SultAn ia in some measure the authority for
the Caliphate. However, the actual government in the world of Islam is carried
out by the Sultan. Circumstantial authority is not oonaidered sufficient to
legitimize the government of the SulfAn even if it is not in conformity with
the Shari'ah." The only way in which the government of the SultAn is valid
and authorized is through its recognition of the Caliph. As wo have already
stated, no government other than that of the Caliph is valid under the SJuri'aA,
and subordinate officials have only delegated authority, not functional. Thus
the validity of the government of the SulfAn is. established only upon th<
SulfAn’s oath of allegiance to the Caliph, and the Caliph’s appointment o'
tho SulfAn. By his exercise of the constitutive authority, the SulfAn recognizer
in fact the institutional authority of the Caliphate, which rests primarily in
the Islamic Sunni community, and in theory the functional authority which
rests with the Shari'ah proper.
/Ays'. foe. cil.
784
AIQhazAli
The fact that al-QjlazAli accepts thia compromise sheds some light on the
political objective* of Sunni theorists. The total achievement of this arrange,
ment ia the recognition by the holder of power that the Sbari'ah is the organizing
principle of tho Sunni community, and. in more concrete fashion, the establish
ment of Sunni Islam. The element of compromise enters when al-GhazAli
argue* for the legitimacy of this arrangement, even though the Sul^An actually
ignores many provisions of the SJari’oA. Recognition of the SJari aA by the
Sulfin without obedience to its provisions is form without content. This leads
us to the second objective of the Sunni theorists, that is, the establishment of
order and the maintenance of discipline. The governmental scope of the Sul.
tAnate included very few of the interests which oonoem modern governments.
By the establishment of order and the maintenance of discipline the Sulfinate
merely provided a favourable field for the activity of the established Islamic
institution. Al-Qbazili. therefore, felt justified in validating the government
of such a Sulfin. He waa willing to make concessions regarding a limited
number of SJari'ai regulations in order to preserve the religious life of the
community.
Just as the Caliphate comprehends the function of the SultAn, so does it
also oomprehend the religious and legal duties imposed by the SJari'oA. As
we have said, the Caliphate is a religious as well as a political institution of
Islam. We have also seen that al-Qhuzali does not insist upon the qualifications
which the Caliph must have in order to carry out his religious duties. If
necessary, the Caliph may enlist the aid of the most outstanding learned people
of the day.*’ The principal political function of the ‘ulamd’ is the interpre
tation of the Shari'ad in terms of the problems facing the community. In
short, by their approval of the SultAn’e choice of the Caliph (bai'ah) and by
their /uluns, the 'ulamd’ express the functional authority of the Shari ah.
The term Caliphate stands for the whole of Islamic government. Although
al-GhazAli seems to follow the traditional prejudices in favour of autocracy,
it is obvious that his is a multilateral conception of the Caliphate. In it there
are three main elements: the Caliph, the Sultan, and the 'ulamd'. each cor
responding to some aspect of the authority behind Islamic government, and
each performing a function required by that authority. The greatest virtue
of al-GhazAli's theory is ita political realism, and yet he haa maintained the
essentials of the traditional theory. Each of the parts of the Caliphate repre
sents not only an aspect of authority and a function of Islamic government,
but also one of the major elements of political power in the Sunni community
Was al-GhazAH's theory an accurate description of the government of his
time 1 Such a development of the Caliphate waa the result of many diverse
and fortuitous events Xeverthelcas, the roots of this development may be
traced hack to the calculated policy of the early ' AbhAsids. The early ‘AbbAsids
based their government upon the power of troops imported from Khurasan.
Tf/lifOd, p. 107.
785
A History of Muslim Philosophy
and not upon local Iraqi levies. They asserted their own legitimacy upon the
circumstantial fact that they were ruling in accordance with the Sjari'ah.
They went out of their way to honour the 'uianui' and give them a place at
Court.
Ultimately, the success of the system depended upon the maintenance of
a delicate balance of power, and upon the continued co-operation of those
forces. The fact of the matter waa that when the relative power of each element
of the government changed it was not supported by the others. Al-Qbaz&li
argued for the independence of the ‘ulama’ and he urged thorn to resist the
blandishments of the SulfAn. When the Sultan was powerful he interfered
with tho succession to the Caliphate in a manner calculated to lower the
influence and prestige of that office. When the Sultin grew somewhat weaker,
the Caliph was eager to exercise local power himself. Al-Qbat&U's theory
notwithstanding, the existence of the Caliph alongside the Caliphate was an
ever-present temptation to re-establish the old order.
The multilateral conception of the Caliphate waa not opposed to al-Miwardi's
ideal construction. Al-QJjarAli did not reject the traditional Sunni theory'. In
fact, al-Ghaz&li sought only to explain tho political conditions of his own time
in terms acceptable to traditional Sunni thought. If he ground any axe at all,
it was for the Sunni 'ulamd', who were certainly a moat conservative body.
Nevertheless, once the Caliphate could be resolved into its component parts,
it became possible for the rest of the parts to hobble along without the Caliph
himself. In this sense alQhazAli paved the way for the post-'Abbisid develop
ment of the Sunni political theory.
The original inspiration for al-Ghazali's theory of the Caliphate seems to
have come from his early interest in Hellenistic thought. We find an interesting
statement of the same principle in no less an exponent of the opposing "philo
sopher-king" theory than Nasir al-DIn al-Tilsi. Al-fusi says that the second
possible variation of the supreme government of the Virtuous City arises when
ell the qualities required of a philosopher-king do not exist in one man. but
are produced in several men collectively.11
More significant than the parallel passage in A khldq-t Niuiri ia the reflection
of al-ShaxHH's theory in the writings of ibn Taimlyyah. If anything, ibu
Taimiyyah was more enamoured of the past than al-M&wardi, but by the
time ho wrote the ‘Abb&aid Caliphate waa no more. Ibn Taimlyyah argued
that legitimate Islamic government in his days was composed of the Amirs
and the ' alamo- acting in co-operation with one another. Ibn Taimiyyah's
principle of “oo-operation'' leads him to repeat al-fihazall's theory of divided
authority in accordance with the qualifications of various persons in opposi
tion to tho theory which accorded complete authority to the ruling war-lord.”
The origin and development of this principle present many difficulties, but
’■ Nasir al Din al-Tfisi. AHldq-i NAfiri. Treatise III, Chapter III. p. 309.
" Henri Laousl. £m< aur la dixlrina ncialu U poliliqua d'lbn Taimlya,
Cairo. 1939. pp. 282, 294, 307, 315, 317.
786
Al Qhazili
Laoust tells us that ibn Taimiyyah was influenced rather by the Arab Neo-
Platonista, such as tho IJJjw&n al-$afa. than by al-GbazAli.1* It is unlikely
that the idea itaolf originated with al-QbazAli who waa himself deeply influenced
in his vouth by the Hellenistic movement in Islam. Nevertheless, his applica
tion of it to the Sunni Caliphate waa certainly an innovation, and all the more
noteworthy for its reappearance two centuries later in the works of ibn Taimly
yah. It need hardly be added that the 'ulami' did in fact assume a special
position of political authority aa well aa a part of tho ' original'’ Caliphal
function in the Ottoman State, and to a lessor oxtent, perhaps, in the Mughul
Empire in India.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
Al-QbazAli, al-Iqtifid fl al-l'liqdd, Cairo, n.d.; 1/iya' ’CTflm ai-IUn; al-M*wardi.
ai-AAkdm alSuMnlyyah-, ’Abd al-Qihir ibn Tahir al-BaghdAli. Ufiil al-Dln. Iatan
bul,\1928; al-BftqillAni, al-TamhU. Cairo. 1947; ibn Khaldun. Moqaddimafl. Beirut,
1900; Nasir al-Din Thai, Ntyw; Goldzihor, Muhammedanieche Studun,
Vol. II; StrtilKflrill dw Qiaedli yspen die Balinijja-Seku, Leiden. 1916; Henry
Laouat, Eeem aur lee doctnnee eociaUe el politique* d’lbn Taimlya. Cairo, 1939.
•• Ibid. f. 100. nolo 1.
.WESSOY OF WINCHES'!
Muslim philosophy like Muslim history in general has passed through
five different stage*. The first stage cover* the period from the first
seventh century to the fall of Baghdad — under the heading “Early
Centuries" This is followed by a shock-absorbing period of about half a
century. Its third’ stage is that of its second (lowering treated under the
heading "Later Centuries”. It covers the period from the beginning of
the eighth/fourteenth to the beginning of the twelth/eightcenth century.
The four stage is that of the most deplorable decline covering a century
and half. This is in the trust sense the Dark Age of Islam. With the
middle of the thirteenth/nineteenth century begins its fifth stage cover
ing the period of the modern Renaissance. Thus, in the course of its
history. Muslim philosophy has had two rises and two falls and is now
showing clear signs of a third. So much about the past But what about
the present and how about the future? These volumes are result of the
collaboration of eighty scholars from all over the world and duly edited
and introduced by M.M. Sharif, President. Pakistan philosophical
congress.(Secretary and Editor).
LOW PRICE PUBLICATIONS
DELHI-110052
You might also like
- A History of Muslim Philosophy, Vol.1 by Mian Mohammad Sharif PDFNo ratings yetA History of Muslim Philosophy, Vol.1 by Mian Mohammad Sharif PDF795 pages
- A History of Islamic Philosophy Third Edition Majid Fakhry Digital Download100% (15)A History of Islamic Philosophy Third Edition Majid Fakhry Digital Download128 pages
- A History of Muslim Philosophy, Vol. I., Edited by M.M. Sharif100% (1)A History of Muslim Philosophy, Vol. I., Edited by M.M. Sharif401 pages
- Abdelwahab Elmessiri - Secularism, Immanence, and DeconstructionNo ratings yetAbdelwahab Elmessiri - Secularism, Immanence, and Deconstruction15 pages
- Economic Thought of Islam - Ibn KhaldunNo ratings yetEconomic Thought of Islam - Ibn Khaldun40 pages
- TASAWWUF Kaisay Mutawazi Deen Hai - Javed Ahmed Ghamidi - enNo ratings yetTASAWWUF Kaisay Mutawazi Deen Hai - Javed Ahmed Ghamidi - en22 pages
- Islam Basic Principles and CharacteristicsNo ratings yetIslam Basic Principles and Characteristics17 pages
- Watt's View On Muslim Heritage in The Study of Other Religions A Critical AnalysisNo ratings yetWatt's View On Muslim Heritage in The Study of Other Religions A Critical Analysis22 pages
- Abdelkader-Modernity, Maslaha and Maqasid in Muslim Legal Thought-Icmr-2003-14-2 PDFNo ratings yetAbdelkader-Modernity, Maslaha and Maqasid in Muslim Legal Thought-Icmr-2003-14-2 PDF13 pages
- The Contribution of Dīn-I-Ilāhī Towards The Life and CultureNo ratings yetThe Contribution of Dīn-I-Ilāhī Towards The Life and Culture15 pages
- Analytical Study On Concept of Malik Bennabi On Renaissance of Muslim CivilizationNo ratings yetAnalytical Study On Concept of Malik Bennabi On Renaissance of Muslim Civilization5 pages
- Bunga Rampai Aspects of Malay Culture PDFNo ratings yetBunga Rampai Aspects of Malay Culture PDF294 pages
- SherAli Tareen - Perilous Intimacies - Debating Hindu-Muslim Friendship After Empire (Religion, Culture, and Public Life) - Columbia University Press (2023)No ratings yetSherAli Tareen - Perilous Intimacies - Debating Hindu-Muslim Friendship After Empire (Religion, Culture, and Public Life) - Columbia University Press (2023)357 pages
- Debating The Origins of Sociology Ibn Khaldun As A Founding Father of Sociology PDFNo ratings yetDebating The Origins of Sociology Ibn Khaldun As A Founding Father of Sociology PDF19 pages
- Ikhwanus Safa: A Rational and Liberal Approach To Islam by Asghar Ali Engineer - The Ismaili WebNo ratings yetIkhwanus Safa: A Rational and Liberal Approach To Islam by Asghar Ali Engineer - The Ismaili Web1 page
- NEGIN NABAVI - Intellectual Trends in Twentieth-Century Iran - A Critical Survey (2003) PDFNo ratings yetNEGIN NABAVI - Intellectual Trends in Twentieth-Century Iran - A Critical Survey (2003) PDF241 pages
- The Status of Hadeeth in Islam Tolue Islam TrustNo ratings yetThe Status of Hadeeth in Islam Tolue Islam Trust211 pages
- Role of Sufism in Bringing Communal Harmony : A Case Study of Dargah Sharif Ajmer, Rajsthan IndiaNo ratings yetRole of Sufism in Bringing Communal Harmony : A Case Study of Dargah Sharif Ajmer, Rajsthan India13 pages
- A History of Muslim Philosophy - Volume 1No ratings yetA History of Muslim Philosophy - Volume 1799 pages
- Islamic Perspectives Studies in Honour of Mawlana Sayyid Abul A La Mawdudi100% (1)Islamic Perspectives Studies in Honour of Mawlana Sayyid Abul A La Mawdudi371 pages
- Islamization of Knowledge, A MethodologyNo ratings yetIslamization of Knowledge, A Methodology29 pages
- Islam An Introduction by Ruqaiyyah Waris MaqsoodNo ratings yetIslam An Introduction by Ruqaiyyah Waris Maqsood413 pages
- Image of The Prophet Muhammad in The WEST PDFNo ratings yetImage of The Prophet Muhammad in The WEST PDF407 pages
- Forensic Psychiatry in Islamic JurisprudenceNo ratings yetForensic Psychiatry in Islamic Jurisprudence216 pages
- Human Rights AND THE World's Major Religions, The Islamic Tradition PDFNo ratings yetHuman Rights AND THE World's Major Religions, The Islamic Tradition PDF153 pages
- John of Dara On The Resurrection of Human Bodies 1st Edition Aho Shemunkasho PDF DownloadNo ratings yetJohn of Dara On The Resurrection of Human Bodies 1st Edition Aho Shemunkasho PDF Download86 pages
- ENFJ Personality Type - ENFJ Profile - Personality at WorkNo ratings yetENFJ Personality Type - ENFJ Profile - Personality at Work4 pages
- Table of English Tenses: Tense Affirmative/Negative/Question Use Signal WordsNo ratings yetTable of English Tenses: Tense Affirmative/Negative/Question Use Signal Words3 pages
- IntroductiontothePhilosophyoftheHumanPerson Villaroya Enaya FernandezNo ratings yetIntroductiontothePhilosophyoftheHumanPerson Villaroya Enaya Fernandez113 pages
- Dasar Logika Matematika: Nama Dosen Alamat EmailNo ratings yetDasar Logika Matematika: Nama Dosen Alamat Email24 pages
- Rubric On Week Nine (9) - Intercultural Communication (Performance Task)No ratings yetRubric On Week Nine (9) - Intercultural Communication (Performance Task)1 page
- Unpayable Debt 1st Edition Denise Ferreira Da Silva Full100% (5)Unpayable Debt 1st Edition Denise Ferreira Da Silva Full96 pages
- I. Religious Differences: Factors Creating The Idea of A Separate HomelandNo ratings yetI. Religious Differences: Factors Creating The Idea of A Separate Homeland4 pages
- (Ebook) Restoring The Soul of The World: Our Living Bond With Nature's Intelligence by Fideler, David R ISBN 9781620553596, 1620553597 Download100% (7)(Ebook) Restoring The Soul of The World: Our Living Bond With Nature's Intelligence by Fideler, David R ISBN 9781620553596, 1620553597 Download51 pages
